IBM_Sales_Manual_Machines_Section_Jul79 IBM Sales Manual Machines Section Jul79
IBM_Sales_Manual_Machines_Section_Jul79 manual pdf -FilePursuit
IBM_Sales_Manual_Machines_Section_Jul79 IBM_Sales_Manual_Machines_Section_Jul79
User Manual: IBM_Sales_Manual_Machines_Section_Jul79
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 576
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
-------- --- ----------------,-
M 1.10
Jul79
DP Machines
PRODUCT CLASSIFICATION LIST
All products are normally classified based on standard Sales Manual description of purpose. I/O or terminal products excluSive to one
division which attach tn ""'Iected products of the other division through RPQ's are considered Common (for those uses only)
MACHINES CURRENTLY IN THE PRODUCT LINE
29
59
83
88
129
403
419
519
534
557
803
1001
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1230
1231
1232
1255
1260
1282
1287
1288
1402
1403
1404
1416
1419
1442
1443
1445
2152
2222
2250
2305
2401
2415
2420
2501
2502
2520
2540
2560
2671
2701
2711
2740
2741
2791
2792
2793
2796
2797
2798
2803
2804
2816
2821
2822
2835
2840
2860
2870
2880
3017
3027
3031
3032
3033
3036
3037
3038
3041
3042
3046
3047
3052
3056
3058
3062
3066
3067
3068
3115
3125
3135
3138
(0)
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
COM
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
OPO(')
OPO
OPO
COM
OPO
COM
COM
COM
COM(')
OPO
COM
GSO
COM
OPO
COM
COM
OPO
COM
COM
COM
OPO
COM
OPO
OPO
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO(')
OPD(')
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
3145
OPO
3148
OPO
3158
OPO
3168
OPO
3203
OPO
3210
OPO
3211
OPO
3213
OPO
3215
OPO
3216
OPO
3251
OPO
3255
OPO
3258
OPO
3262 1
OPO
Al,Bl GSO
3271
COM
3272
COM
3274
COM
3275
COM
3276
COM
3277
COM
3278 1,2,3,4 COM
2A
OPO
3284
COM
3286
COM
3287
COM
3288
COM
3289 1,2,3
COM
4
OPO
3310
OPO
3330
OPO
3333
OPO
3340
COM
3344
COM
3345
OPO
3350
OPO
3370 Al,Bl OPO
All,BllGSO
3410
COM
3411
COM
3420
OPO
3501
OPO
3504
OPO
3505
OPO
3521
OPO
3525
OPO
3540
OPO
3601
COM
3602
COM
3603
COM
3604
COM
3606
COM
3608
COM
3610
COM
3611
COM
3612
COM
3614
COM
3615
COM
3616
COM
3618
COM
3624
COM
3631
OPO
3632
OPO
3641
OPO
3642
OPO
3643
OPO
3644
OPO
3645
OPO
3646
DPO
3647
OPO
3651
OPO
3653
OPO
3657
OPO
3659
OPO
3661
OPO
3663
OPO
3666
OPO
3667
OPO
OPO,
3669
3683
OPO
3684
OPO
3704
OPO
3705
OPO
3713
COM
3715
GSO
(')
3717
3732
3735
3736
3741
3742
3747
3760
3762
3767
3771
3774
3775
3776
3777
3780
3781
3782
3784
3791
3792
3793
3800
3803
3811
3830
3838
3842
3845
3846
3851
3863
3864
3865
3872
3874
3875
3880
3881
3886
3890
3895
3896
4331
4341
4953
4955
4959
4962
4964
4973
4974
4978
4979
4982
4987
4990
4997
4999
5010
5012
5013
5014
5022
5024
5026
5028
5029
5100
5103
5106
5110
5114
5203
5211
5213
5231
5234
5235
5251
5256
5320
5340
5404
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
GSO
OPO
COM
OPO
GSO
GSO
GSO
OPO
OPO
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
(')
(')
COM
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
5421
5422
5424
5425
5444
5447
5448
5471
5486
5496
7770
8101
8130
8140
8775
8809
GSO
GSO
COM
OPO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
(')
COM
COM
OPO
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
OPO
COM
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSD
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
COM
GSO
COM
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
Certain models of these machine types have not been withdrawn from marketing
Not to be reproduced w!thout written permission.
,-------- - - ----------.--------
M 1.11
Jul79
DP Machines
PRODUCT CLASSIFICATION LIST
All products are normally classified based on standard Sales Manual description of purpose. I/O or terminal products exclusive to one
division which attach to selected products of the other division through RPQ's are considered Common (for those uses only}
Withdrawn 7XXX machines are not shown. Machine types indicated by
an (') have certain models which have not been withdrawn from marketing. Refer to applicable machine page
for models that have been withdrawn from marketing.
01
10
11
12
13
15
16
24
26
27
28
31
36
37
41
43
44
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
58
60
63
64
65
66
67
68
71
72
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
84
85
86
87
89
90
91
92
93
94
101
106
108
188
285
298
305
323
340
350
355
357
358
360
361
370
372
373
374
376
380
381
382
402
404
405
407
408
409
412
416
418
501
512
('j
MACHINES WHICH ARE WITHDRAWN
513 GSD
514 GSD
516 GSD
517 GSD
518 GSD
COM
520
GSD
GSD
521 GSD
GSD
522 GSD
GSD
523 GSD
GSD
524 GSD
GSD
526 GSD
GSD
527 GSD
GSD
528 GSD
GSD
529 GSD
COM
533 GSD
COM
534 GSD
GSD
535 GSD
GSD
536 GSD
GSD
537 GSD
GSD
541 GSD
GSD
542 GSD
GSD
543 DPD
GSD
544 GSD
COM
545 GSD
COM
548 GSD
GSD
549 GSD
GSD
550 GSD
GSD
551 GSD
COM
552 GSD
GSD
556 GSD
COM
557 GSD
COM
601 GSD
COM
602 GSD
COM
603 GSD
COM
604 GSD
COM
605 GSD
GSD
607 GSO
GSD
608 GSD
COM
609 GSD
GSD
610 GSD
COM
614 GSD
COM
630 GSD
GSD
631 GSD
COM
634 GSD
GSD
635 GSD
GSD
636 GSD
GSD
637 GSD
GSD
638 GSD
GSD
641 GSD
GSD
645 GSD
GSD
648 GSO
GSO
649 GSO
GSD
650 OPO
COM
652 DPD
COM
653 OPO
GSD
654 DPD
COM
655 OPO
GSO
701 OPO
GSO
702 OPO
GSO
704 OPO
COM
705 DPO
OPD
706 OPO
OPO
709 OPO
OPO
711 OPO
OPO
712 OPO
OPO
714 OPO
COM
716 OPO
COM
717 OPO
COM
719 OPO
COM
720 OPO
OPD
721 OPO
COM
722 OPO
COM
726 OPO
COM
727 OPO
COM
729 OPO
OPO
730 OPO
OPO
731 OPO
OPO
732 OPO
GSO
733 OPO
GSO
734 OPO
GSO
735 OPO
GSO
736 OPO
GSD
737 DPO
GSO
738 OPO
GSO
739 OPO
GSO
740 DPO
GSO
741 OPO
COM
742 OPO
COM
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
FROM MARKETING
743 DPD
744 OPO
745 DPD
746 DPD
747 DPD
748 DPD
752 DPD
753 DPD
754 DPD
755 DPD
756 DPD
757 DPD
758 DPD
759 DPD
760 DPD
766 DPD
767 DPD
771 COM
772 COM
774 COM
775 COM
780 DPD
781 DPD
782 DPD
801 COM
802 COM
805 COM
808 COM
812 COM
813 COM
814 COM
815 COM
816 COM
817 COM
818 COM
819 COM
820 COM
824 GSD
826 GSD
834 GSD
836 GSD
838 DPD
850 COM
854 COM
856 'GSD
857 COM
858 GSD
863 GSD
865 GSD
866 GSD
867 GSO
868 GSO
869 GSO
884 COM
939 GSO
941 GSO
942 GSO
953 COM
954 GSO
955 COM
957 COM
961 GSO
962 GSO
963 COM
964 OPO
966 COM
972 GSO
973 GSO
1009 COM
1011 COM
1012 OPO
1013 OPO
1014 COM
1015 COM
1016 COM
1017 COM
1018 COM
1026' OPO
1051 COM
1052 COM
1053 COM
1054 COM
1055 COM
1056 COM
1057 COM
1058 COM
1061 OPO
1062 OPO
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1081
1082
1083
1084
1092
1093
1094
1131
1132
1133
1134
1201
1202
1203
1210
1219
1220
1221
1241
1259
1285
1287
1301
1311
1351
1352
1355
1361
1364
1365
1367
1401
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1411
1412
1414
1415
1418
1421
1428
1441
1443
1444
1446
1447
1448
1461
1462
1501
1502
1505
1510
1512
1518
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1801
1802
1803
1810
1816
1826
1827
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
DPD
COM
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
DPD
COM
DPO
DPD(')
DPD
COM
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
OPO
OPO
OPD
COM(')
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
GSO
GSO
COM
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
GSO
1828
1851
1854
1856
2020
2022
2025
2030
2040
2044
2050
2060
2065
2067
2070
2075
2085
2091
2095
2150
2167
2203
2213
2260
2265
2280
2282
2285
2301
2302
2303
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2318
2319
2321
2360
2361
2362
2365
2385
2395
2402
2403
2404
2495
2596
2680
2702
2703
2712
2715
2721
2730
2760
2772
2780
2795
2820
2802
2814
2826
2841
2844
2845
2846
2848
3060
3066
3067
3080
3085
3086
3155
3165
3195
3275
3346
3360
3611
3671
3672
3673
3674
3707
GSD
GSO
GSD
GSD
GSD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
3773
3774
3775
3791
4872
5275
5445
5475
6405
6420
6422
6425
6426
6428
6454
6455
COM
COM
COM
COM
DPD
OPD
DPO
DPD
DPD
DPO
GSD
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
COM
DPD
DPD
DPD
DPD
OPO
OPO
DPD
OPD
DPD
OPO
OPO
OPO
COM
COM
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
COM
OPO
OPD(')
OPD(')
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
OPO
COM
(')
OPO
OPO
COM
OPO
OPO
OPO
DPO
GSO
Certain models of these machine types have not been withdrawn from marketing.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
(')
DPD
OPD
DPD
DPD
COM
DPD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
GSD
(')
(')
(')
-------- ---==.=.:
-----== ==
~
M 1.20
M.y 79
DP Machines
MACHINE TYPES/MODELS WHICH HAVE BEEN DISCONTINUED FROM LEASE AND RENTAL AGREEMENTS AND WITHDRAWN FROM IBM
MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS
1
12
15
16
27
28
31
36
44
51
52
55
58
70
71
72
75
76
78
79
81
86
89
90
91
92
93
94
106
210
211
212
285
298
305
323
340
350
355
370
380
381
404
405
409
412
416
417
418
501
512
515
516
518
520
522
527
528
529
533
535
537
542
543
544
550
551
554
556
601
603
605
607
608
610
623
625
626
644
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
701
702
Mechanical Punch
Duplicating Punch
Motor Drive Punch
Motor Drive Duplicating Punch
Card Proof Punch
Printing Card Proof Punch
Alpha Duplicating Punch
Alpha Printing Punch
Tape Control Punch
Mechanical Verifier
Verifier
Verifier
Card Typewriter
Vertical Sorter
Vertical Sorter
Collator
Sorter
Searching Sorter
Stencil Collator
Stencil Printing Collator
Stencil Sorter
Coupon Sorter
Collator
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Automatic Checking Machine
Coupon Statistical Machine
Electric Verifier
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Numerical Accounting Machine
Numerical Accounting Machine
RAMAC
RAMAC Card Punch
RAMAC Power Unit
RAMAC Disk
Disk Storage
RAMAC Printer
RAMAC Console
RAMAC Printer
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Alphabetic Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Numerical Accounting Machine
Numerical Accounting Machine
Numbering Gangpunch
Reproducer
Interpreting Reproducing Punch
Duplicating Summary Punch
Reproducer
Computing Punch
Duplicating Summary Punch
Electronic Calculator Punch
Accumulating Reproducer
Electronic Calculating Punch
Card/Read Punch
Card Read Punch
Card/Read Punch
Reader Punch
Card Reader
Card Punch
Interpreter
Interpreter
Interpreter
Interpreter
Multiplier
Electronic Multiplier
Electronic Calculator
Calculator
T ransitor Calculator
Calculator
Calculating Punch
Calculating Punch
Calculating Punch
Calculating Punch
Paper Tape Punch for 632 System
Paper Tape Reader for 632 System
Console (650 System)
RPO Machine
Control Unit
Storage Unit
Auxiliary Alphabetic Unit
Power Unit
Central Processing Unit (701 System)
Central Processing Unit (702)
704
705
709
712
714
717
719
720
722
726
727
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
766
767
771
774
775
776
777
781
782
786
801
805
838
850
856
857
858
861
863
865
868
869
884
919
920
921
933
942
953
964
966
973
1301-1
1405-1
1405-2
1411
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1608
1780
1783
1789
1902-3
1903-13
1905-22
1912-17
Central Processing Unit (704)
Central Processing Unit (705)
Central Processing Unit (709)
Card Reader
Card Reader
Printer
Printer
Printer
Card Punch
Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit
Printer
Magnetic Drum Storage
Magnetic Drum
Magnetic Drum
Magnetic Drum
Print Control
Power Supply
Magnetic Core Storage
Magnetic Core Storage
Additional Core Storage
CRT Recorder
Power Supply
Power Unit
Power Supply
Power Unit
Power Unit
Power Distribution Unit
Tape Data Selector PS
Data Synchronizer
Tape Control
Tape Control
Tape Control
Tape Control
Control Unit
Printer Control
Card Punch Control
Card Reader Control
Control & Storage
Data Synchronizer
Data Synchronizer
Card/Tape Converter
Tape Data Selector
Record Storage Unit
Sp EDPM
Tape Record Coordinator
Console
Console Control Unit
Stretch
Proof Machine
Test Scoring Machine
Inquiry Station
Stencil Cutter
Card-A-Type
Document Writer
Control Unit
Stencil Charger
Arithmetic Unit
Output Typewriter
Transmitting Typewriter
Typewriter
Typewriter Tape Punch
Comparing Bill Feed
Bill Feed
Carriage
Carbon Ribbon Feed
Electronic Storage Unit
Multiline Posting Machine
Auxiliary Printing Tape Punch
Code Comparing Unit
Keyboard
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage
Disk Storage
Central Processing Unit (1410)
Central Processing Unit
Auxiliary Processing Unit
Input Output Processing Unit
Output Control Unit
Terminal and Multiplex Unit
Process Operators Console
Remote Printing Station
Space Plotter
Uptime 1500 Reader
Rixon Modem
Paper Tape Output (RPO)
Paper Tape Reader (RPO)
Self Check Numbering Unit
Teletype to Card
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--
--- --- --- ---
==
=':' =
M 1.21
May 79
DP Machines
MACHINE TYPES/MODELS WHICH HAVE BEEN DISCONTINUED FROM LEASE AND RENTAL AGREEMENTS AND WITHDRAWN FROM IBM
MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS
1912-22
1912-46
1922-1
1922-2
1922-4
1922-19
1924-12
1924-38
1924-44
1924-63
1924-66
1924-67
1927-1
1933-2
1939-1
1940-7
1944-5
1944-6
1944-9
1945-3
1946-4
1973-1
1974-2
1991-1
1998-9
1998-13
1998-14
1998-15
1998-16
1998-17
1998-18
1998-19
1998-24
1998-28
1998-33
1998-34
1998-43
2911-6
2976-3
2976-4
2976-5
2983-1
2989-11
7100
7101
7105
7152
7230-1
7256-1
7262
7266-1
7275-2
7286-3
7286-5
7293
7294-1
7300
7404
7503
7553
7605
7612
7613
7614
7615
7616
7619
7620
7622
7623
7634
7701
7710
7711
7803
7900
7951
7952
7956
7957
7958
7959
9809
9827
9828
9907
Teletype to Card
Buffer (RPO)
Tape Adapter (RPO)
Tape Adapter (RPO)
Tape Adapter (RPO)
Tape Adapter (RPO)
Control Unit (RPO)
Punch Control
Buffer Punch
Printer Control Unit
Control Unit (RPO)
Control Unit (RPO)
Inquiry Station (RPO)
Reader Punch
Serial Card Reader
Serial Printer (RPO)
Card Transceiver - 5 Channel
Terminal Control Unit
Reader Mark Sense (RPO)
Magnetic Tape Transfer Unit
Card Terminal (RPO)
Card Read Punch (RPO)
Data Transmission Processor
Sequence Keyboard (RPO)
SMS Cube
Storage Power Control Unit
Drum Power Converter
Drum Control Unit
D.C. C.E. Console
Drum
Drum Air Compressor
Drum Air Receiver
Impulse Readout Master Clock (RPO)
Clock
Card Proof Punch
Card Proof Punch
Data Channel Repeater
Switch
Transmission Control Unit
Printer Keyboard
Signal Converter
Supervisor Data Capture Unit
Basic Counter Unit
Central Processing Unit
Central Processing Unit (7030)
Central Processing Unit (7072 System)
Stretch Console
Input Output Multiplexer
Photo Store Unit
Console
Lexical Processor
Toll Rating Interface
Channel Direct Data
Channel Direct Data & LCM
Power Supply & Power Control
Tape Independent Power
Disk Storage
Graphic OutPut Unit
Card Reader
Card Punch
Disk Storage Control
Disk Synchronizer & Storage
Tape Control
Card Reader Control
Card Punch Control
Printer Control
Exchange
Channel
Signal Control
Console Central
Graphic Control Unit
Tape Transmission Terminal
Data Communication Unit
Data Communication Unit
Power Distribution
Inquiry Station
Stretch
Stretch
Stretch
Stretch
Stretch
'Stretch
Disk Channel
Drum Channel
Drum Channel CE Console
Disk Channel CE Console
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -------= = =':' =
-- ---
M 1.30
May 79
DP Machines
PLANNED DATES FOR DISCONTINUANCE OF LEASE AND RENTAL MACHINE TYPES/MODELS AND WITHDRAWAL OF IBM
MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT SERVICE
December 31, 1979
April 30, 1981
63
711
716
721
780
1014
1414
1415
2280
7102
7104
7106
7107
7108
7109
7110
7111
711 4
7150
7151
7153
7301
7302
7305
7320
7400
7500
7501
7502
7550
7600
7601
7602
7603
7604
7606
7607
7608
7617
7618
7621
7631
7640
7741
7750
7802
7804
7904
7907
7908
7909
353
521
541
604
609
728
729
1011
1026
1241
1301-2
1301-11
1301-12
1301-21
1301-22
1 302
1311
1 401
1402
1403-1
1403-4
1 406
1407
1409
1421
1441
1442-1
1442-2
1442-3
1442-4
1443-3
1443-4
1444
1445-1
1446
1447
1448
1461
1462
1620
1621
1622
1 623
1624
1625
1626
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1791
1792
1 793
1794
1795
1 796
1797
1 798
1979-1
7155
7330
7335
7340
7641
Card to Tape Punch
Card Reader
Printer
Card Punch
CRT Display
Remote Inquiry Unit
Input/Output Synchronizer
Console
Film Recorder
Arithmetic & Logical Unit (7080 System)
High Speed Processor (7074 System)
Processing Unit (7040 System)
Processing Unit (7044 System)
Instruction Processing Unit (7090 System)
Arithmetic Sequence Unit
Instruction Processing Unit (7094 System)
Instruction Processing Unit (7094-11 System)
Processing Unit (701 0 System)
Console Control Unit
Console Control Unit
Console Control Unit
Core Storage
Core Storage
Central Storage & Input/Output Control
Drum Storage
Printer
Card Reader
Console Card Reader
Console Card Reader
Card Punch
Input/Output Control
Arithmetic & Program Control (7070 System)
Core Storage Control
Input/Output Synchronizer
Tape Control
Multiplexor
Data Channel
Power Converter
Data Channel Console
Power Control
Tape Control
File Control
Hypertape Control
Programmable Transmission Control Unit
Programmed Transmission Control
Power Converter
Power Unit
Data Channel
Data Channel
Data Channel
Data Channel
April 30, 1980
67
80
101
116
131
143
155
156
163
408
426
450
513
517
549
628
1202
1502
1506
1510
1512
1518
1903-2
1924-77
1925-22
1925-25
1935-1
7702
7765
Telegraph Signal Unit
Sorter
Statistical Sorter
Numeric Duplicating Punch
Alpha Duplicating Punch
Tape Controlled Card Punch
Numeric Verifier
Alpha Verifier
Card Controlled Tape Punch
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Accounting Machine
Reproducing Punch
Gang Summary Punch
Ticket Converter
Calculating Punch
Utility Inscriber
Station Control
Audio Unit
Instruction Display
Image Projector
Typewriter
Paper Tape Reader
Control Unit
Switch
Switch
Ticket Reader
Magnetic Tape Transmission Terminal
Paper Tape to Magnetic Tape Converter
December 31, 1980
2712
Remote Multiplexer
Disk Storage Unit
Electronic Calculating Punch
Card Read Punch
Electronic Calculator
Calculator
Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit
Paper Tape Reader
Transmission Control Unit
Bank Processing Unit
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage Unit
Disk Storage Drive
Processing Unit
Card Reader Punch
Printer
Printer
Storage Unit
Console
Console Auxiliary Unit
Bank Transit Machine
Processing Unit
Card Reader Punch
Card Reader Punch
Card Reader
Card Reader
Printer
Printer
Card Punch
Printer
Printer
Console
Transmission Control Unit
Input Output Control
Printer
Central Processing Unit
Paper Tape Reader
Card Read Punch
Core Storage
Magnetic Tape Punch
Core Storage
Plotter Control
Data Converter
Multiplexer and Terminal
Manual Entry Unit
Sense Switch Unit
Digital Display Unit
Output Printer Control
Output Printer
Digital Input Control
Terminal Box for Control System
File Storage Unit
Additional Process Input Output
RPQ
Adapter Unit
Terminal Box for Control System
Data Control Unit
Reader Control Unit (RPQ)
Console
Magnetic Tape Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit
Hypertape
Hypertape Control
February 28, 1982
151
1003
1004
1009
1013
1924-35
1924-43
1976-4
1998-29
2596
2902-1
2947-4
2962-1
2973-7
2989-10
3671-1
Verifier
SABRE Terminal
SABRE Controller
Data Transmission Unit
Communicating Reader Punch
RPQ SWl-1403
RPQ Controller for 2d 1403
RPQ Data Communication Terminal
RPQ Clock Input
Card Read Punch
RPQ Communication Controller
RPQ Check Collection Controller
RPQ Display Controller
RPQ Two Channel Switch
RPQ Real Time Recorder
Shared Terminal Controller
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- --- ----= - ---
- =- =':' =
M 1.31
May 79
DP Machines
PLANNED DATES FOR DISCONTINUANCE OF LEASE AND RENTAL MACHINE TYPES/MODELS AND WITHDRAWAL OF IBM
MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT SERVICE
7473-2
7772
RPQ Display Terminal
Audio Response Unit
April 30, 1982
812
81 3
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
1081
1 082
1083
1084
121 0
1259
141 2
Automatic Production Recorder
Portable Keyboard
Remote Control Unit
Automatic Typewriter
Remote Automatic Typewriter
Card Reader
Remote Shaft Position Converter
Printing Card Punch
Time Punch
Data Aquisition Control
Card Reader
Remote Control
Sampler Reader
Reader Sorter
Reader Sorter
Magnetic Character Reader
June 30, 1982
2321
Data Cell Drive
February 28, 1983
50
Magnetic Data Inscriber
108
Card Proving Machine
602
Calculating Punch
614
Typewriter for 632 and 634 Systems
630
Calculating Unit for 632 System
631
Calculating Unit for 632 System
634
Calculating Unit for 632 System
635
Calculating Unit for 632 System
636
Calculating Unit for 632 and 633 Systems
637
Calculating Unit for 632 and 633 Systems
638
Calculating Unit for 632 System
641
Card Reader for 632 System
645
Card Reader for 632 System
824
Typewriter Card Punch
826
Typewriter Punch Printer
867
Output Typewriter for 108
1980-14,15RPQ Selective Tape Listing Printer
2495
Tape to Card Reader
2911-14 RPQ Communication Switching Unit
4872
Modem
6405
Accounting Machine for 6400 System
6410
Accounting Machine for 6400 System
6420
Accounting Machine for 6400 System
6422
Automatic Ledger Feed for 6400 System
6424
Card Punch for 6400 System
6425
Magnetic Ledger Unit for 6400 System
6426
Card Punch for 6400 System
6428
Card Reader for 6400 System
6454
Paper Tape Reader for 6400 System
6455
Paper Tape Punch for 6400 System
February 29, 1984
834
836
866
961
962
972
1960-10
1 960-20
2946-1
Control Unit (Non Printing)
Control Unit (Printing)
Non Transmitting Typewriter
Tape Punch (8 track)
Tape Punch (5 track)
Auxiliary Keyboard
RPQ Special Reader
RPQ Special Processing Unit
RPQ Terminal Control Unit
Not to be
reproduc.e~withQut
written permission.
---- ------- ---
------------_.-
M2
May 79
DP Machines
TYPICAL MACHINE DESCRIPTION
The format used throughout the "Machines" section of the sales manual has been designed to give the reader, in "Highlights" form, as
much information as possible in as few words as possible. A bracket to the right of any entry indicates a chanp,p or addition. A study of the
points covered in this typical machine description will show where and how various types of information are covered in each description.
(1) Purpose -- a capsule description of the machine's major funcMetering -- indicates the type of meter on a Systems Plan "A"
tions.
machine.
(2) Models -- capsule description of major differences in available
models.
Useful Life Category --
(3) Model Changes -- there are three categories: Field Installable,
Not Recommended for Field Installation, or Available at Time of
Manufacture Only. For a rental machine, the new monthly availability charge (see "Prices" below) is effective the day following
installation of the model change.
.
(10) Special Features -- listed here are descriptions of the special
features which can be added to the base machine ... each description covers in capsule form the additional function(s) supplied by the feature.
(4) Highlights -- capsule comments on sales advantages and func-
Prerequisite(s) -- other machines, special features,
"Specify" items required for installation of the feature.
Installation -- there are three categories for installation of
special features. Field Installable, Not Recommended for Field
Installation, or Available at Time of Manufacture Only.
tional operations.
or
(5) Limitation(s) (not shown in this examplel -- only those which
apply to the machine itself ... limitations for Special Features
appear in "Special Features" descriptions.
(6) Prerequisite(s) -- other machines, special features, or "Specify"
items required for installation of the machine ... usually related
to system components.
(11) Special Feature Prices
(7) Bibliography -- base number only. Consult the current appropriate system bibliography for listing of all available manuals pertaining to the machine on that system.
MAC -- the monthly availability charge, exclusive of applicable
taxes, for the special feature. (SUC - Single Use Charge ...
item remains property of IBM)
(8) Specify -- this section lists items which will be furnished at no
Purchase -- the purchase price, exclusive of applicable taxes,
for the special feature. Also see FIC, below.
additional charge when specified on initial machine order for
plant installation at time of manufacture. Each item is identified
by a name and a four-digit (9XXX) number preceded by a number sign (#). 9XXX numbers are also used as detailed specifications for certain special features listed in "Special Features"
descriptions.
.
.
MMMC -- the Minimum Monthly Maintenance Charge for the
special feature on a purchased machine on a Maintenance
Agreement. (T&M = Time and Material)
FIC -- the service charge for field installation of the special
feature on a purchased machine. PO under this heading means
plant installation only (cannot be field installed). Note: FIC does
not apply to new machine types announced after June 1, 1970.
(9) Prices (for base machine)
Note: Under any of the above headings, NC
= No Charge.
3782 CAR.D ATTACHMENT UNIT
Purpose: Used to attach the 2502 Card Reader mdl A1 or A2 toa 3774.
3775 or 3776 Communication Terminal. or to attach a 3521 Card :Punch
to a 3771. 3774. 3775 or 3776 Communication Terminal.
(2)
Model 1 Attaches a 3521 Card Punch.
Model2 Attaches a 2502 Card Reader mdl A1 or A2.
(3) Model Changes: Not recommended for field installation.
(4)'Highlights: The unit provides power and attachment circuits and serves
as a stand for mounting the card machine.
(6) PREREQUISITES:
Model 1 - requires 3782/3521 Card Punch Attachment (#8150) on
the 3771. 3774. 3775 or 3776 and a 3521 Card Punch.
Model 2 -- requires a 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8149)
on the 3774. 3775 or 3776 e~d a 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1 or A2.
The following specify features are required on the 2502: #9901 for
115 VAC. and #9046 for white color.
(7) Bibliography: GC20-000 1
(8) Specify: [1 J Voltage (115 V AC. 1-phase. 3-wire. 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug. or #9881 for n('n-Iock plug.
[2J Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue. or #9045 for
gray.
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer to Installation Man~al - Physical Planning. GA27-3006.
(9) Prices:
Mdl
MAC ETP
j' Purchase MMMC
3782
1
$ 41 $ .35
$ 1.400
$1.50
2
59
50
2,000
1.00
Rental Plan: B
Purchase Option:60%
Maintenance: 0
Warranty: B
Per Call: 1
Useful Life CategOlY: 2
(10)
SPECIAL FEATURES
OPTICAL MARK READ 1#54551. [Model 2 onlyJ Required when the
attached 2502 is equipped with Optical Mark Read (#5450). Maximum:
One. Limitation: Refer to 2502 writeup for feature descriptio!! and card
limitations. Field Installation: Yes.
01) Special Feature Prices:
MAC iT,.
ureha.. MMMe
Optical Mark Read
#6455 $ 25 $ 21 . $ :8411$ 1
(1)
Rental (MAC) -- the monthly rental (monthly availability
charge), exclusive of applicable taxes, for the base machine.
ETP, FTP --
PIan (FTP).
Extended Term Plan (ETP) and Fixed Term
Purchase -- the purchase price, exclusive of applicable taxes,
for the base machine.
MMMC -- Minimum Monthly Maintenance Charge for maintenance service on a purchased machine on a Maintenance
Agreement ... charge provides for maintenance service availability during certain fixed weekdav hours.
.
(T&M '" Time and Material)
Rental Plan -- the rental plan under which the machine is
offered.
For machines under
Systems Plan "A", the entry 10% here indicates that hours of
additional billable time are charged at an hourly rate of 1/176th
of 10% of the monthly availability charge. 30% indicates that
the hourly rate is charged at 1/176th of 30 % of the monthly
availability charge.
Purchase Option -- the percentage of the first year's rental
which is credited against the purchase price when a rental
customer purchases an installed machine.
Warranty -- applies to machines ordered on an Agreement for
Purchase of IBM Machines
Maintenance -- indicates the machine group to be used when
calculating the additional charge for maintenance for optional
periods of Maintenance Agreement service availability.
Per Call -- the class of rates applicable to a purchased machine
if it ts subject to hourly service charges (e.g., where no maintenanceagreement applies, service is requested cQutside the hours
covered in the Maintenance Agreement, etc.).
Not to be ;l'eproduced without
I.
1".
On same pages in the "Machine>s" section, there is.a "Codes"
beadiflg under which will be shown SIU and 10. StU ...5y>stem
Identification Unit; >ID = Identity Code.
written permission.
{reverse side is blank)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M3
May 79
DP Machines
INDEX OF MACHINES
ACCESSORIES
See M 10000 pages
FINANCE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (3600 RETAIL STORE SYSTEM (3650)
AUXILIARY PROCESSOR
3838 Array Processor
BANKING EQUIPMENT
803 Proof Machine
1255 Magnetic Character Reader
141 9 Magnetic Character Reader
3890 Document Processor
3895 Document Reader/Inscriber
3896 Tape-Document Converter
(also see 1060)
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (3790)
2741
3277
3284
3288
3287
3288
3411
3760
3760
3762
3791
3792
3793
Communication Terminal
Display Station
Printer
Printer
Printer
Line Printer
Mag Tape Unit & Control - mdl 1
Dual Key Entry Station - mdl I, 2
Key Entry Station - mdl 3
Key Entry Station
Controller
Auxiliary Control Unit
Keyboard-Printer
DATA COLLECTION SYSTEM (1030)
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
Input Station
Digital Time Unit
Printer
Card Punch
Badge Reader
DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (2790)
1035
2715
2740
2791
2792
2793
2796
2797
2798
Badge Reader
Transmission Control Unit
Communication Terminal - mdl 1
Area Station
Remote Communications Controller
Area Station
Data Entry Unit
Data Entry Unit
Guidance Display Unit
DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (3770)
2502
3203
3501
3521
3771
3774
3775
3776
3777
3782
3784
Card Reader
Printer
Card Reader
Card Punch
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal
Card Attachment Unit
Line Printer
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS
See next page
3601
3602
3603
3604
3606
3608
3610
3611
361 2
3614
3615
361 6
361 8
3624
Finance Communication Controller
Finance Communication Controller
Terminal Attachment Unit
Keyboard Display
Financial Services Terminal
Printing Financial Services Terminal
Document Printer
Passbook Printer
Passbook and Document Printer
Consumer Transaction Facility
Administrative Terminal Printer
Passbook and Document Printer
Administrative Line Printer
Consumer Transacllon Facility
INFORMATION SYSTEM (8100)
2741
3276
3277
3278
3284
3286
3287
3288
3289
3601
3602
3631
3632
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3767
3842
8101
81 30
81 40
8775
8809
Communications Terminal
Control Unit Display Station Mdl 11-14
Display Station
Display Station
Printer Modell, 2
Printer Modell, 2
Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
Finance Communication Controller
Finance Communication Controller
Plant Communications Controller
Plant Communications Controller
Reporting Terminal
Encoder Printer
Keyboard Display
Automatic Data Unit
Printer
Scanner Control
Communication Terminal
Loop Control Unit
Storage and I/O Unit
Processor
Processor
Display Terminal
Magnetic Tape Unit
INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEM (3270)
3271
3272
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3284
3286
3287
3288
3289
Control Unit
Control Unit
Control Unit
Display Station
Control Unit Display Station
Display Station
Display Station
Printer
Printer
Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer
MODEMS
3872 Modem
3874 Modem
3875 Modem
OPTICAL MARK READERS
1230 Optical Mark Scoring Reader
1232 Optical Mark Page Reader
DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM (1001)
1001 Data Transmission Unit
7770 Audio Response Unit
DATA TRANSMISSION UNITS
2740 Communication Terminal
3767 Communication Terminal
DISTRIBUTED OFFICE COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM (3730)
3277
3284
3286
3287
3288
3411
3732
3738
3791
3793
Display Station
Printer
Printer
Printer
Line Printer
Magnetic Tape and Control
Text Display Station
Printer
Controller
Keyboard-Printer
PLANT COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (3630)
3631
3632
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3842
Plant Communication Controller
Plant Communication Controller
Reporting Terminal
Encoder Printer
Keyboard Display
Automatic Data Unit
Printer
Scanner Control
Time and Atlendance Terminal
Loop Control Unit
PROGRAMMABLE STORE SYSTEM (3650)
3275
3284
3851
3653
3657
3659
3663
3666
3667
3669
3784
Display Station Model 3
Printer Model 3
Store Controller Model 25/75
Point of Sale Terminal
Ticket Unit
Store Communications Unit
Supermarket Terminal Mdl 1P, 2, 3P
Checkout Scanner
Checkout Scanner
Store Communications Unit
Printer
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
3275
3284
3651
3653
3657
3659
3784
Display Station Model 3
Printer Model 3
Store Controller Model 50
Point of Sale Terminal
Ticket Unit
Remote Communications Unit
Line Printer
SUPERMARKET SYSTEM (3660)
3651
3661
3663
3666
3669
Store Controller Model 60
Store Controller
Supermarket Terminal Mdl 1, 2. 3
Checkout Scanner
Store Communications Unit
PROGRAMMABLE STORE SYSTEM (3680)
3683 Point of Sale Terminal
3684 Point of Sale - Control Unit
PUNCHED CARD EQUIPMENT
KEYPUNCHES
5496 Data Recorder
OPTICAL READER CARD PUNCH
1282 Optical Reader Card Punch
---- - ---
---- ----------_.-
M4
lIt1av 79
DP Machines
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS
PROCESSORS
3031
3032
3033
3115
3125
3135
3138
3145
3148
3158
3168
4331
Processor
Processor
Processor
Processl"g Unit
D.
Unit
Processlna Unit
Processlna Unit
Processlna Unit
Processing Unit
Processing Unit
Processlna Unit
Processor
S/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
3032
3033
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8130/8140 Processor
5010 Processor Module
3052
3058
3062
3068
3838
8101
Attached Processing Unit
Multisystem Unit
Attached Processlna Unit
MultisYstem Communication Unit
Array Processor
Storage and Inout QutDut Unit
S/7
X
4341 Processor
PROCESSOR EXTENSION
8100
X
X
S/370
115· 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032
3033
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
8100
S/7
X
X
PROCESSOR STORAGE
3345 Main Stora e Frame
CONSOLE UNITS
2250
3036
3056
3066
321 0
3210
3213
3215
3270
3278
5213
mdll
DlsDlav. Unit
Console
Remote System Console
SYstem Console -- mdl 2 3
Console Printer-KeYboard
mdll
Console Prlnter-KeCi.board
mdl2
Console Printer
Console Printer-Keyboard
Units (see Systems Daile,)
Disctay Printer - mdl 2A
Printer -- mdl 1
DATA CHANNEL UNITS
S/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032 13033
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4341
4331
8100
S/7
X
X
S 370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
2860 Selector Channel
2870 MultiDlexer Channel
2880 Block MultiDlexer Channel
S/7
X
X
X
8100
3032
3033
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
x -- Attachment is made by standard equipment.
•• Through 2150 only.
tt Not S/370 mdl 145-3.
Not 10 be reproduced without written permission.
---------- ---------==-=':'=
M5
May 79
DP Machines
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS
INPUT /OUPUT UNITS (Including control units)
5 370
138 145 148 15
X
X
X
AUDIO RESPONSE UNITS
x
7770 Audio Res onse Unit
5/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 lR8 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CARD READERS/PUNCHES
1442
1442
2501
2520
2520
2540
2560
2560
2821
2821
2821
3504
3505
3525
5424
5425
5496
Card Reader Punch -- mdl Nl
mdl N2
Card Punch
mdl B1 B2
Card Reader
mdl B1
Card Read Punch
mdl B2 B3
Card Punch
Card Read Punch
Multi-function Card Mach - AI
Multi-function Card Mach -- A2
Control Unit
mdll 5
Control Unit -- mdl 4
Control Unit
mdl6
Card Reader
Card Reader
Card Punch
Mult Function Card Unit
Multi-function Card Unit
Data Recorder
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032
3033
X
X
-X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032 3033
X
X
X
X
8100
5/7
8100
5/7
tt
X
COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
3791 Controller
5/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
COMMUNICA TlONS TERMINALS
2740
2741
3735
3767
3771
3774
3775
3776
3777
3780
Communications Terminal
Communications Terminal
Proarammable Bullered Termll18l
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal -- P1 P2
Communication Terminal - P1
Communication Terminal
Communication Terminal
Data Ccmmunlcatlons Terminal
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DATA ADAPTER UNITS
5026 Enclosure
DATA TRANSMISSION MULTlPLXR
2701
2711
3704
3705
Data Adapter Unit
Line Adapter Unll
Communications Controller
Communications Controller
5/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1(1) 1(1) X X X X X X X
(1) 1(1)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032 3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8100
5/7
X
X
(I) See tl).e .3704 and 3705 Machines and Programming sales manual pages for attachment capability and refer to Host System Programming pages for possible
tt
restnctlOns to any of the above attachments.
Not 145-3 models.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-
-------------=':':::';"5:
M6
May 79
DP Machines
DATA PROCESSING .SYSTEMS
S 370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
DISPLA Y UNITS
2250
2798
2840
3271
3272
3274
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3264
3266
3267
3266
3269
6775
Dlsclav Unit -- mdl 1 3
Guidance Dlsclav Unit
Disclav Control
Control Unit
Control Unit
Control Unit - mdl 1 A 16
Conlrol Unit - mdl 1C
Disclav Station
Control Unit Dlsclav Station
Dlspl~l1 Station
Disclav Station
Printer
Printer
Printer
line Printer
Line Printer
Dlsclay Terminal
DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE
4300 Processor
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032
3033
4331
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
' X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032
3033
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5-/370
115 125 135 136 145 146 156 166 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3310 Direct Access Storage
Disk Storaae -- mdl 1 2
Disk Stor~ae -- mdl 11
Disk Storaae and Control - mdl 1
Disk Storaae and Control -- mdl 11
Disk Pack
Disk Storaae and Control
Rlrect Access Storaae
Data Module
Direct Acces Storaae
Direct Access Storaae
Storaae Control -- mdl 2
StoraJle Control -- mdl 3
Mass Storag~ Facilitv
Storage Control
Disk Storage Module
Disk CartrlQge
S/7
X
1316 Disk Pack
2316 Disk Pack
3330
3330
3333
3333
3336
3340
3344
3346
3350
3370
3830
3830
3651
3880
5022
5440
8100
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8100
S/7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DISKETTE INPUT/OUTPUT UNIT
3540 Diskette In ut Out ut Unit
DRUM/FIXED HEAD STORAGES
2305
2305
2635
2635
Fixed Head Storage Fixed Head Storage -Storaae Control -- mdl
Storaae Control -- mdl
mdl 1
mdl 2
1
2
MAGNETIC CHARACTER READERS
1255 Maanetic Character Reader
1419 Magnetic Character Reader
3890 Document Processor
S 370
115 125 135 136 145 146 156 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S/370
115 125 135 136 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
3032
3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4331
4341
3032
3033
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
S/7
8100
S/7
X
X
4300 Processor
X
8100
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M7
May 79
DP Machines
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS
MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
2401
2401
2415
2420
2803
2804
2816
3410
3411
3420
3420
3420
3803
3803
8809
Magnetic Tape Unit -- mdt 1 2 3
Mag. Tape Unit -- mdt 4 5 6 8
Maanetic Tape Unit and Cntrl
Maanetlc Taoe Unit -- mdl 5 7
Taoe Control
Tape Control
Switchina Unit
Maanetic Taoe Unit
Maanetic Taoe Unit and Cntrl
Magnetic Taoe Unit -- 3 5
Ma.QlJetic Taoe Unit -- mdl 7
Maanetic Taoe Unit -- mdl 4 6 8
T aae Control -- mdl 1 2
T ap_e Control -- mdl 3
Magnetic Tape Unit
OPTICAL READERS
1287
1287
1288
3881
3886
Ootical
Optical
Ootlcal
Ootical
OpJlcal
Reader -- mdl 1 3
Reader -- mdl" 5
Paae Reader
Mark Reader
Character Reader
PAPER TAPE UNITS
2671 Paper Tape Reader
2822 Paper Tape Reader Control
5028 Ooerator Station
PRINTERS
1403
1404
1416
1443
1445
2821
2821
3203
3203
3203
3211
3216
3262
3287
3289
3289
3800
3811
Printer -- mdl 2 7 Nl
Printer
Interchanaeable Train CartridQe
Printer - mdl N1
Printer -- mdl Nl
Control Unit -- mdl 1 2 3 5
Control Unit -- mdl 4
Printer mdl 1 2
Printer mdl 4
Printer mdl 5
Printer
Interchanaeable Train Cartridae
Line Printer
Line Printer
Line Printer mdl 3
Line Printer mdl 4
Printing Subsystem
Printing Control Unit
5203 Printer
5 370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032
3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X'
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
5/7
X
X
X
8100
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
3032
3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3032
3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
4300 Processor
4331
4341
X
X
8100
5/7
8100
5/7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
X
I X
! t
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3033
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
t
4300 Processor
4331
4341
3032
X
X
X
8100
X
tt
t
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
• Model 4 only on 4331.
t Not \35-3 models.
tt Not 145-3 models.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
X
X
X
X
5/7
M8
May 79
DP Machines
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS
PRINTER~KEyaOARDS
3210
3210
3215
5028
Console PriAter-KeYboard mdt1
Console Prlnter·Keyboard mdl 2
Console Printer Keyboard
ODerator Station
POWER UNITS
3017
3027
3037
3046
3047
3067
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Power
Unit
& Coolant Dlst Unit
& Coolant Dist. Unit
Unit
Unit
& Coolant Dlst Unit mdl 2 5
S/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
4300 PrOCeS&Of
3032
3033
4331
4341
8100
S/7
X
X·
X
X
X
S/370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
X
3032 3033
4300 Processor
4331
4341
8100
S/7
4300 Proeessor
4331
4341
8100
S/7
X
X
X
X
X'
X
X
X
READER/INSCRIBER
3895 Doc~ment Reader Inscriber
SENSOR BASED MODULES
S 370
115 125 135 138 145 148 158 168 3031
3032 3033
5012 Multifunction Module
5013 Dialtal InDut OutDut Module
5014 AnaloD InDut Module
X
X
X
• Not 3145·3 models.
•• Through 21S0 only ... Not 3145-3 models.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- - ---
- - -----------
M 9
Jul79
DP Machines
LIST OF SPECIAL FEATURES/MODEL UPGRADES FOR PURCHASED MACHINES FOR WHICH THE REPLACED PARTS BECOME THE
PROPERTY OF IBM
Machine
Type
Special
Feature
Additions
3032
7850
3033
7850
3145
Model Conversions
From
To
'U4,6,8; or
'M4,6,8; or U12,16; M12,16; A12,16
'A4,6,8
GE
GFD
H
HG
I
3155
H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2
H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2
H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2
12, IH2, J2
IH2, J2
2151
7220
3158-8
2151
7220
3165
7220
3168-3
7220
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U38
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
A31 thru A38
A32 thru A38
A33 thru A38
A34 thru A38
A35 thru A38
A36 thru A38
A37, A38
A38
M31 thru M38
M32 thru M38
M33 thru M38
M34 thru M38
M35 thru M38
M36 thru M38
M37, M38
M38
3344
B2
B2F
3350
A2
B2
C2
A2F
B2F
C2F
3601
2A
2B
3A
2B, 3A, 3B
3B
38
3602
lA
18
3631
lA
18
3632
lA
18
3651
A25
825
A50
A60
A50
850
A60
860
A75
C75
825, A75, 875
875
850
860
A75, 875
875
A75,875
875
875
D75
3653
8101
Al0
All
All, A13
A13
8130
A21
A22
A23
A22, A23, A24
A23, A24
A24
8140
A31
A32
A33
A41
A42
A43
A51
A52
A53
A32,
A33,
A34
A42,
A43,
A44
A52,
A53,
A54
A33, A34
A34
A43, A44
A44
A53, A54
A54
lP
3661
2
3880
1
3
3684
lP
3P
2
3776
1
2
3
2, 3, 4
4
4
3777
1
2
2, 3
3
3220
3221
lA
18
2151
2
3
3803
3830-1, 2
Model Conversions
From
To
Conversion to 165 II
3168
3791
Special
Feature
Additions
Conversion to 1 55 II
3158
3663
Machine
Type
2
~
;!
, Single dense storage technology models (U4, U6, U8; M4, M6, M8; A4, A6, A8).
NOTE: This list does not include standard machine types below 3000, RPQ machine types. special feature or model conversion RPQs, or
GSD "Exclusive" machines.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
~~~s
-=.g:S"fS:
M 10
Jul 79
DP Machines
LIST OF NON-FIELD INSTALLABLE SPECIAL FEATURES/MODEL CONVERSIONS
SPECIAL FEATURES
SPECIAL FEATURES
MODEL CONVERSIONS
Not ReI>At Time of ommended
Manufacture for Field
Only
Installation
At Time of
Manufacture
Only
Machine
Type.
Model
357
1450
All
3066-3
372
7578
7127
7128
7129
3067-1
4520
7117
7118
7119
3067-2
4525
7127
7128
7129
3067-3
4525
7127
7128
7129
3067-5
4525
Machine
Type.
Mode'
Not Recommended
for Field
Installation
729
803
1222
1001
1031
All
1032
All
1033
9509
1201
1231
All
1255
1287
5370
All
5370
1288
1401
Not RIICommended
for Field
Installation
MODEL CONVERSIONS
NotReCo
At Time of
ommended
Manufacture for FIeld
Only
Installation
3115-2
3115-2 to
3115-0
3135-3
3135-3 to
3135
1403
5381
1419
3610
3791
3795
3145
4650
3145-2 to
3145-0
3145·3
4650
3145-3 to
3145-2
5567
5568
5569
3158-3
1442
1443
2250
All
2305
All
2401
4520
7117
7118
7119
3168
4525
7127
7128
7129
3168-3
4525
7127
7128
7129
2403
2415
2420
All
2501
2520
3168-3 to
3168
3203
2540
4151
2560
1575
2701
7695
7696
2'740
3210
3274
3401
3402
All
All
8100
AU
2804
All
2821
7945
8100
2835
AU
2860
All
.2880
1200
8801
3275-2
3440
3275-3
2792
2803
1 to 2
2 to 1
3271-11,12
2791
All
All
3275-12
3276
1200
1068
3277
3278-2A
All
4631
4632
4633
4634
2A
3284
3286
3062
4525
3289
3066-1
4520
7117
7118
7119
3310
4525
7127
7128
7129
3345
3066-2
3158-3 to
3158
3165
2402
At Time of
Manufacture
Only
3330
All
3340
3350
3360
All
r:
~
• See applicable machine page tor model conversion/feature restrictions.
NOTE: This Ust does not include GSD "Exclusive" machines or RPQ machines.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ----
-----_.-
---- -----
MODEL CONVERSIONS
SPECIAL FEATURES
Machine
TypeModel
Not Recommended
for Field
Installation
3370
3420-3.5.7
Not Racommended
At Time of
Manufacture for Field
Only
Installation
SPECIAL FEATURES
At Time of
Manufacture
Only
Machine
TypeModel
All
3762
3767
3771
3773
1010
1011
6352
3603
3604-1
4661
4663
3604-2.3,4 4771
4772
4773
4774
3604-5. 6
3774
3604-7
3606
3608
3610-1.2.3
3632
3641
5 to 6
All. except
5 to 6
All
All
All
All
3776
3777
3782
3791
3803
3830
3845
3846
3872
3881
5424
5496
MODEL CONVERSIONS
Not RecAt Time of
om mended
Manufacture for Field
Only
Installation
1201
1201
1201
4660
1201
4660
1201
3551
4660
1201
1201
All
All
All
3602
6510
3666
All
7801
7850
All
8701
3550
3860
6301'
6302'
7820'
7950
1010
1011
5781
5801
5802
All
4652
4653
4772
4774
1501
3850
All
All
All
4990
All
3425
3451
5330
6660
At Time of
Manufacture
Only
1310
3805
4660
5100
All
All
3647
3741
3760
All
6900
6901
6903
6904
6900
6901
6903
6904
3642
3643
3651
3653
3659
3663
3775
All
All
3612
3624
All
5454
6900
6901
6903
6904
3610-4
3611
3614
3615
3616
3618
Not Racommended
for Field
Installation
3550
6407
3921
3921
1421
3504
3505
3525
3601
3602
M 11
Jul 79
DP Machines
LIST OF NON-FIELD INSTALLABLE SPECIAL FEATURES/MODEL CONVERSIONS
All
, See applicable machine page for model conversion/feature restrictions.
NOTE: This list does not include (3SD "Exclusive" machines or RPQ machines.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[rever~e
side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- - --=-- =------ -=
':' =
M 357 - 361
May 79
DP Machines
358 INPUT CONTROL UNIT
357 INPUT STATION
[The 357 Models 4, 5 and 6 are no longer
available]
Purpose: Badge and/or serial card reader input unit for a 357
Data Collection System.
Model 4 -- a badge reader which operates as an independent
input station. Reads identification badges (size of a 22-column
stub card) prepunched in IBM code with a maximum of ten
numeric digits. Badges, which are punched on a 13 Badge
Punch, are inserted and removed manually. Badge read-out is
automatic with insertion of badge. See Manual GA21-9028 for
badge specifications. Badges can be purchased from outside
vendors or produced with commercially available laminating
equipment.
ModelS -- a serial ~ard reader. Standard unscored 80-column
cards are inserted and removed manually, one at a time. Reads
numbers, letters, IBM special characters, and instruction codes.
Blank columns are not recognized and are automatically
skipped over. Provision is made for 'attaching a 372 Manual
Entry or 374 Cartridge Reader.
Model 6 -- a combination serial card reader and badge reader.
Information pertaining to mdls 4 and· 5 applies to mdl 6. This
model, in conjunction with a 372 or 374, provides a means of
loading the station with variable source data as well as fixed
employee and job data prior to transmission to the output unit.
An instruction code in the card shifts transmission of data from
card to badge. A separate column must be used in the card
being read for each column of the badge which is to be read
out, unless Badge Read-out (# 1450), a special feature, is
installed. See Manual GA21-9028 for badge specifications.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
PREREQUISITE: A 358 Input Control Unit ... each 358 controls up
to twenty 357s, in any combination of models.
Badge GaUlle: Available at no charge for use with mdls 4 and 6
to check width and thickness of badges ...
Manuals: See
G320-1621.
"IBM
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
[The 358 Model 1 is no longer available]
Purpose: Links up to twenty 357 Input Stations with one 24/26'
Card Punch in a 357 Data Collection System.
Highlights: Analyzes instruction codes In input cards and controls
card reading. Instruction codes are wired through a transaction
selector in the 358 to format control. Data, in the form of DC
pulses, is transmitted over multi-conductor cable and punched at
the rate of approximately 18 characters/second on the 26, or 20
characters/second on the 24.
Manuals: See
G320-1621.
"IBM
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
SPECIFY: Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz):
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
PRICES:
Mdl
358
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Index,"
#9880 for
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 86
$2,450
$ 25
Purchase Option: 50% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
360 CLOCK READ-OUT CONTROL
[The 360 Model 1 is no longer available]
Purpose: Controls read-out of time from a 361 Read-out Clock to
up to thirty-five card punches in a 357 Data Collection System ...
see "Limitation" below.
Highlights: Has connections for two 361s ... a toggle switch
permits switching from one clock to the other.
Limitation: Time can be provided for simultaneous output to up to
ten 24/26's ... for applications such as attendance recording, a
360 and 361 are required for each group of ten 24/26's which
may simultaneously call for time.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
PREREQUISITE:
Punch.
Clock Read-in (#1945) on the 24/26' Card
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
Manuals: See
G320-1621.
"IBM
PRICES:
357
MAC/
MRC
Mdl
$ 39
4
5
46
63
6
Purchase
$
884
1,155
1,505
Purchase Option: 50%
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MMMC
$ 4.00
13.00
18.00
Maintenance: C
Per Call:1
SPECIAL FEATURES
CONTROLLED RESET (#2287). [Model 5, 6 only] Manually
operated switch in non-reset position permits retention for
re-r.eading of any fixed combination of the badge, 372 Manual
Entry setting, or the data cartridge. Operator set-up time at a
terminal is reduced when entering a ·series of transactions with
common data in the manual entry, data cartridge and/or badge.
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Cable: #9081 for direct connection to a single output punch,
or #9082 for connection to multiple punches via a common line
... see Physical Planning Manual GA24-1032.
PRICES:
Mdl
360
BADGE READ-OUT (#1450). [Model 6 only] [Plant installation
only] Enables the mdl 6 to read a badge only. When both a card
and a badge are to be read, a Single instruction code in the card
shifts transmission to the badge reader for automatic read-out of
the badge. Patch panel wi ring in themdl 6 controls read-out. A
"Badge" position on the mode switch provides automatic badge
read-out upon insertion of a badge.
Marketing
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 54
$1,675
$3.50
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
361 READ-OUT CLOCK
[The 361
Model 1 is no longer available]
Purpose: Provides a means of punching time in output cards in
357 Data Collection System.
a
Highlights: Time is read out as four digits ... hours (0-23) and
nearest hundreths of hours.
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Badge Read-out
Controlled Reset
#1450
2287
$ 5 $ 238
2
95
FIC
$2.00 PO
NC $ 32
PREREQUISITE: A 360 Clock Read-out Control and Clock Read-in
(#1945) on the 24/26' Card PunCh.
Manuals: See
G320-1621.
PRICES:
"IBM
Mdl
361
Plan Offering: Plan 6
Warranty: B
• The 24 and 26 are GSD Machines.
Not to be reproduced without wrHtenpermisSion.
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 41
$1,345
$3
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
-------- --- - - --.:....::...:- ==--';' ==
M 372 - 374
May 79
DP Machines
373 PUNCH SWITCH
372 MANUAL ENTRY
[The 372 Models 1, 2 and 3 are no longer
available]
Purpose: For manual entry of data for transmission in a 357 Data
Collection System.
Modell
Has six slides.
Model 2
Has nine slides.
Model 3
Has twelve slides.
Model Changes: II Supervisor Key (#7578) is not installed,
changes can be made from mdl 1 to 2 or 3, or mdl 2 to 3.
Highlights: Has up to twelve numeric slides, each with eleven
character pOSitions (0-9 and blank), which can be individually
labeled. Slides may be locked in any desired position, or may
restore to blank after each transmission. CE can wire any or all of
the slides to read out zero from the blank position ... to change all
positions to read out zero from the blank position, no additional
parts are required ... to change any other number of positions,
Part No. 765993, Jumper Assembly, must be ordered
a
no-charge
Slides are coded for individual read-out under card read control.
The high order code position is on the left. Model 1 has six
lefl-hand positions blanked out and the six right hand slides are
coded 6 thru 1 ... model 2 is similar with the three left hand
positions blanked out and the slide positions coded 9 thru 1 ...
model 3 is coded 12 thru 1.
[The 373 Model
1 is no longer available]
Purpose: For automatic switching to a second output punch in a
357 Data Collection System.
Highlights: Provides automatic switching to a second back-up
punch if the first fails to duplicate, jams, or runs out of cards.
Either or both punches may be placed on offline mode for use as
a regular card punch by placing the "Auto" switch to
"Keypunch."
PREREQUISITES: Two output punches per system ... 24/26 mdls
7 or 8, each with Punch Switch Control (#5930) .,. see 26.
Manuals:
See
G320-1621
"IBM
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
SPECIFY: If old-style Elco (rectangular) connector on 358, order
Adapter Cable Assembly, 765183,
no-charge
.
... if old-style Elco (rectangular)
connector on punch cable and an adapter cable which provides
a round Cannon connector is not available, order Adapter Cablp.
Assembly, 765181,
no-charge
PRICES:
Mdl
373
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC I
MRC
Purchase
$ 30
$
MMMC
$ .75
859
Purchase Option: 65%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
Limitation; Either a 372 or a 374 Cartridge Reader can be
attached to a 357 mdl 5 or 6, not both.
PREREQUISITE: Each 372 requires a 357 mdl 5 or 6.
Manuals:
See"IBM
G320-1621.
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
SPECIFY: Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for
blue, or #9045 for gray.
PRICES:
Mdl
MACI
MRC
372
1
$ 15
2
3
18
21
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purchase
$
520
607
694
Purchase Option: 60%
MMMC
$ 1.00
1.50
1.50
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
SUPERVISOR KEY (#7578). Replaces left hand slide on mdl 1,2
or 3 with a key-operated switch which provides a controlled ability
to insert a specific authorizing digit in the output card for a
transaction. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture
only.
MACI
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Supervisor Key
#7578
NC
NC
NC
374 CARTRIDGE READER
[The 374 Model 1 is no longer available]
Purpose:
System.
Data cartridge input. unit for a 357 Data Collection
Highlights: The IBM Data Cartridge permits the user to pre-set up
to 12 positions of variable numeric data at his regular work station
... use is applicable primarily where variable numeric data must be
entered into the system at a peak period. Throughput and
accuracy in the 357 Input Station are increased and employee
waiting time is reduced.
The cartridge is manually inserted and removed from the reader,
which is cable-connected (3-1/2 feet) to and wall mounted to the
right of the 357.
For use with 357 mdl 5 or 6, the cartridge is read out by the card
in the same manner as the 372.
One data cartridge is supplied with each 374 ...
FIC
PREREQUISITE: Each 374 requires a 357 mdl 5 or 6.
PO
Limitation: Either a 374 or a 372 Manual Entry can be attached
to a 357 mdl 5 or 6, but not both ... however, 372s and 374s can
be interchanged on a terminal without requiring changes in the
output card of the output program.
Manuals: See
G320-1621.
"IBM
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Index,"
SPECIFY: Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for
blue, or #9045 for gray.
PRICES:
Mdl
374
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MACI
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 21
$
$ 1.50
637
Purchase Option: 60%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
'---------- -------== =.::: i' ==
M 729
May 79
DP Machines
729 II IIV IV IVI MAGNETIC TAPE UNITS
[No longer available]
Characten a Second
Recording Denalty (CPI)
Model
72911
15,000/41,700
200/556
729 IV
22,500/62,500
200/556
729 V
15,000/41,700/60,000 200/556/800
729 VI
22,500/62,500/90,000 200/556/800
Model Changes: 729 lis can be changed to 729 Vs, or 729 IVs to
729 Vis.
The following specifications can be changed In the field:
[1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 60 Hz): ..oa for 206 V, or #1805 for
230 V (must be consistent with system voltage).'
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, -.cM3 for blue, or
#1045 for gray.
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following special feature Is on an "88 available" basis for field
installation.
TAPE SWITCHING FEATURE (#7830). Modifies the tape unit so
that It can be logically switched between any two tape channels to
which It Is normally attached. Switching can be between two
channels In the same system, channels of any two systems which
use 729 IIIIV IV IVls, or a system channel and an offline auxiliary
unit. [Caution: Care should be exercised In connection with density
compatibility between channels, or the system channel and the
offline unit.] Two add'i signal cable connectors, switching relays, a
control cable connector and 50' of control cable are provided for
attachment to the 7155. Advantagea are: [1] Lese tape unit set-up
time ... [2] Less tape reel handling time ... [3] Permits scheduling
of peak load use of tape units ... [4] Possible reduction of tape
units required In an Installation. See Manual GG22-6587 for details. Prerequlalte: A 7155 Switch Control Console or 7711 Data
Communication Unit.
- FTP··
MAC/MLC MLC
MR.C 1 yr. 2 yn Purcbue MMMC FIC
Special Feature Prices:
Tape Swit<:h Feature
#7830 591
5 84
5 76
$4,070
59.00
5106
• FTP - 12·23 months.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproc;illce.d without written permission.
--- ------
M 803
May 79
--- ---- -------,-
DP Machines
803 PROOF MACHINE
Note: The 802 Proof Machine is no longer available ... for
models changes and special features, see below.
Purpose: The 803 Proof Machine is used to simultaneously list,
sort and prove business documents.
Model 1
Endorsing ... 32 compartments and keys.
Model 2
No endorsing ... 32 compartments and keys.
Model 3
Endorsing ... 24 compartments and keys.
Model 4
No endorsing ... 24 compartments and keys.
PRICES:
Mdl
MACI
MRC
Purchase
803
1
2
3t
4t
$205
193
167
156
$9,000
8,480
7,345
6,805
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 35%
MMMC
$108,00
99,50
69,50
80,50
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
t Prices for 802 mdl 1 are Rental -- $120, Purchase -- $7,785
and MMMC -$73.50 ... prices for 802 mdl 2 are Rental -$110, Purchase -- $7,215 and MMMC -- $66.00.
SPECIAL FEATURES
Note: Models 3 and 4 are capacity reduced from models 1
and 2 by rendering compartments 25 thru 32 inoperative.
NOTE: The following 803 feature can also be ordered for field
installation on installed 802 Proof Machines.
Model Changes: Can be made in the field ... except from a 24
compartment machine to a 32 compartment machine.
MULTIPLE CREDIT (#5245). To simplify processing of multiple
credit transactions under control of automatic group processing ..
can also be used where single item deposits are processed in
batches. A total can be obtained for a group of debits and
balanced against a group total of the related credits. A "Multiple
Credit" key replaces the standard "Auxiliary Credit" key. Prior to
taking a group total of debit items, the "Group Balance By-pass"
switch and "Multiple Credit" key are depressed, in that order.
Any number of credit items can then be distibuted without
depressing the by-pass switch before recording each transaction.
The multiple credit key remains depressed until the by-passed
debit total is entered on the keyboard and a group balance
operation is performed. Limitation: Cannot be installed if Disabling
Clamp (#9122) for Auxiliary Credit Key is installed.
Note: 802 models changes may be made in the field.
Highlights: Each sorting receptacle can hold approximately 150
documents (5/8" to 21/32"). Documents within the following
dimensions can be fed: Width -- 2-1/4" to 4-1/4" ... Length -4" to 9-1/2" ... Thickness -- cannot exceed 3/32". The cycling
speed, fully-electric adding keyboard, repeat key, and other
operating features permit continuous high-speed operation.
Amounts are simultaneously listed on both the control tape and
one of the compartment tapes and accumulated in the grand,
group and compartment total counters. All items, together with
their identifying distribution numbers, are listed on a control tape.
Up to 9-diglt amounts can be entered through the adding keyboard
for listing.
Each total counter has a printing capacity of 10 digits.
Progressive totals (sub-totals) can be obtained on all counters and
printed with an identifying symbol.
For subtraction, the
complement of the amount to be subtracted is entered on the
adding keyboard and the "Subtract" key is depressed. 9s are
then automatically printed to the left of the amount. . On total
accumulation and printing, the tenth position is not lost even
though subtraction is by complementary addition.
Standard Features -- Control Panel with Non-feed Lock
Suppression, Multiple Entry, Endorse Suppression (mdls 1, 3),
Group Balancing, Group Balance Compartment Add '" Amount
Clearance Lever ... Repeat, Multiple Entry, Auxiliary Credit, Adding
Machine, Non-add C, Non-add C and C, Key Release, Subtraction,
Grand Total, Group Total, Compartment Total, and Progressive
Total Keys ... Ready, Add Key Depression, Near Depletion of
Listing Tape, Non-endorse (mdls 1, 3), Non-feed, Full Pocket,
Improper Feeding, and Non-balance Condition when Group
Balancing Signals ... Switches -- for control of credit feeding and
by-passing of automatic group balance tutals for single machine
cycle ... Paper Clip Receptacle ... Selected Compartment Indicator
... Ticket Tray... two 5-position Transaction Counters ...
Upholstered Arm Rest ... Work Tray.
Special Feature Prices: (803)
Multiple Credit
Manuals -- see
G320-1621.
Marketing
Publications
KWIC
Purchase MMMC
FIC
$ 257
$19
$ 2.50
Endorser Plate (#3792) -- 803 mdls 1 and 3 only.
Blank Endorser Plate (#3793) -- 803 mdls 1 and 3 only.
illuminating Lamp (#4610) -- 803, all mdls.
Note: When ordering #3792, it is recommended that at least
one spare plate be stocked, as they cannot be immediately
replaced.
See M 10000 pages for description, ordering instuctions and field
installation.
For the 802, #3792 is available for field installation on mdl 1 ...
#4610 is available for field installation on all mdls.
endorsing ink roll, paper and
"IBM
#5245 $ 4
Acce880rles -- The following items are available on a purchase
only basis for the 803. For shipment with machine, order the
desired Feature # indicated below at the price listed in M 10000
pages.
Endorsing -- mdls 1 and 3 can endorse documents with date,
identification numbers, and bank's legal endorsement. The
Endorser Plate is made to the customer's specifications. See
"Accessories" below. A Blank Endorser Plate is also available if
only partial endorsements are required. When ordering #3792
attach Endorser Plate Specification
... not required
for #3793.
Supplies
ribbon supplies.
MAC I
MRC
Index,"
Specify: [1) Voltage (AC, I-phase, 60 Hz): Locking plug - #9880
for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock
plug - #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230
V.
[2) Endorsing (mdls " 3 only): See "Endorsing" above.
[3) Disabling Clamps: If required to prevent depression of the
following keyes) - #9120 for Subtract Key, #9121 for Repeat
Key, #9122 for Auxiliary Credit Key. Limitation: #9122
cannot be installed with Multiple Credit (#5245).
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
------- ------==::..:
- ==---;' ==
M 1001 - 1026
May 79
DP Machines
1001 DATA TRANSMISSION TERMINAL
Purpose: Combination punched card and keyboard unit for direct
transmission to a 26' Card Punch mdl 5 or 6, or to a 7770 Audio
Response Unit.
"
Highlights: Has a 1 O-digit keyboard and a card carriage with a
fixed 80, 51 or 22-column feed. First 22 columns of prepunched
data can be read from each card. To transmit data from a card,
operator inserts card in carriage, face down, column 80 first,
moves carriage to the left until it strikes carriage stop and releases it. As carriage returns to right hand position, first 22 columns
of card are read serially from column 1 to 22. Limitations: Field
skipping is not possible ... columns 23 and 24 must be unpunched.
SPECIAL FEATURES
ALPHABETIC TRANSMIT (#1222). [Plant installation only] To
transmit 26 alphabetic characters and three special characters
("12", "11" and "0-1"), as well as the standard 1 0 digits, from
first 36 columns of each pre punched card. In transmitting to a 26,
if a "space" is preferred to the "0-1" punch at the 26, order
Space Code Generation (#7244) for the 26. Limitations: Operates only with an 80 or 51-column feed .. , 22-column stub cards
cannot be processed ... columns 37 and 38 in cards to be transmitted must be left unpunched (in lieu of columns 23 and 24 left
blank when this feature is not installed) ... field skipping is not
possible.
MAC/
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
Alphabetic Transmit
#1222 $ 8
Purchase MMMC
FIC
# 281
PO
$ .75
Variable numeric data is entered via the keyboard ... additional
function keys control the receiving unit. The 80-column card in a
26 mdl 5 or 6 can accept up to 80 columns of transmitted data.
When equipped with Alphabetic Transmit (#1222), the 1001 can
transmit alphameric data to a 26 equipped with Alphabetic Receive
(#1221) ... see "Special Features" below and under 26. When
# 1221 is installed on a 26, numeric 1001 s can be used only if
they use alphabetic transmitting data sets, or if the 26 is equipped
with Intermix (#4702).
The unit weights only 21 pounds. It is cable-connected to the
telephone hand set, from which it obtains its power. Its size, 181/2" x 8" x 5", makes it a convenient desk or table top unit.
Communication Facilities: The 1 001 transmits at a rate of 12
characters/second over common carrier leased private line telephone service, common carrier switched telephone networks, or
privately owned voice grade facilities. Connection from the 1001
to the output unit is set up by normal telephone dialing.
Port-A-Punch'" Cards: Column 80 of card cannot be part of a
Port-A-Punch field ... a maximum of 11 Port-A-Punch columns can
be read on a numeric 1001; a maximum of 18 if Alphabetic Transmit (#1222) is installed ... no punching is allowed in the columns
adjacent to the Port-A-Punch columns ... the columns to be read
can vary in number within the maximums, but must be adjacent ...
on a numeric 1001, column 24 cannot be punched; with #1222,
column 38 cannot be punched. Care should be exercised in handling and inserting Port-A-Punch cards so that chads will not be
loosened.
Limitations: The standard machine feeds only standard punched
card stock ... Aqua Cards or other special cards (except Port-APunch) cannot be fed by either feed.
Environment: The unit should be located in an area free of significant abrasive, corrosive and vibration producing elements. It
should not be subjected to temperatures beyond the range of 40 0
to 120 0 F, or relative humidities of 20% to 85% ... where no cards
are used, humidities to 95% are allowable. For best transmitting
results, it is recommended that the unit be located in an area free
of background noise.
Manuals: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
SPECIFY: [1] Feed: #9181 for 80-column, #9183 for 51-column,
or #9184 for 22-column. #9181 can be changed to #9183,
or vice versa, in the field.
[2J Ouptut Unit: #9470 if transmission is to a 26, or #9471 if
transmission is to a 7770.
PRICES:
Mdl
1001
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MACI
MRC
Purchase
$ 16
$ 455
Purchase Option: 45%
MMMC
$ 4
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
1026 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT
[No longer available]
The following specifications can be changed in the field:
[1] Voltage (AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V, or
#9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
The following special features are on an "as available" basis for
field installation:
ADDITIONAL LINE FEATURE (#1058). Required on each 1026
attached to a system after the first 1026. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Expanded Line Feature (#3937) on the
first 1026 attached to the system.
AUTOMATIC ANSWERING (#1286). Provides the 1026 with the
ability to automatically answer incoming calls initiated by remote
1050s over common carrier switched (dial-up) facilities ... the line
must be equipped with an appropriate data set. Maximum: One.
AUTOMATIC CALLING (#1304). Provides the 1026 with the
ability to automatically initiate outgoing calls to remote 1050s over
common carrier switched telephone and 150 baud TWX facilities
'" the line must be equipped with an appropriate data set and
Maximum: One.
automatic calling unit.
Prerequisite: Automatic Answering (#1286).
EXPANDED LINE FEATURE (#3837). Provides controls on the
first 1 026 attached to the system for attachment of up to three
additional 1026s and/or a 1032 Digital Time Unit. Maximum:
One, on first 1026 only.
FIXED TIME-OUT (#4415). Provides for a transmission delay of
approximately 1 second following the transmission of either a
Horizontal Tab, or a New Line and Line Feed. Maximum: One.
Specify: One or both of the following - #9340 for
Horizontal Tab ... #9485 for New Line and Line Feed.
LINE ADAPTER (#4790). For attachment of a communication line
that can be used for on-site 1030, 1050, 1060 or 107~ terminals
for a distance up to 8 wire-miles. No common carrier data sets
are required. Line lengths for this feature will vary, depending
upon type of cable and configuration of system. Use of common
carrier channels also requires special considerations. For assistance with line configuration problems, consult Regional Physical
Planning Representatives. Maximum: One.
Specify: One of the following -- #9420 for use with 1030s,
#9421 for 1060s. #9422 for 1050s or 1071 mdl 1s, or #9423
for 1071 mdl 2s.
Special Feature Prices:
Additional Line Fea
#1058
Automatic Answering
1286
Automatic Calling
1304
Expanded Line Feature 3837
4415
Fixed Time-out
Line Adapter
4790
MACI
MRC
$5
10
41
5
5
10
• The 26 is a GSD machine.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Purchase MMMC
$ 252
506
1,945
252
252
506
$.50
.50
.75
.50
.50
.50
FIC
$30
14
32
32
15
29
-------==-:=~=
----
M 1031
May 79
DP Machines
LIMITATIONS:
1031 INPUT STATION
1031 mdl As
Purpoee: Input station for a 1030 Data Collection System. Used to
transmit data at 60 cps from cards. badges. data cartridges or
manual entry to a 1026/1448 Transmission Control Unit. 1034
Card Punch. 2025 Processing Unit with Integrated Communications Attachment (#4580). 3115 or 3125 Processing Unit with
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640). 2701 Data Adapter
Unit. 2702/2703 Transmission Control. or 3704/3705 Communications Controller.
Models:
For
For
For
For
For
For
For
card Input
card input and manual entry
card and data cartridge Input
card and badge Input and manual entry
card. badge. and data cartridge Input
badge Input
card and badge Input
Control
Stetlon
Seteliite
Stetlon
AI
14.2
14.3
14.4
AS
14.6
14.7
Bl
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
Model Chang..: Cannot be made In the field.
Hlghlighte: A compact Industrial unit. Offers station set-up checkIng prfor to communication line acknowledgement. ease of operation. Installation and relocation. NOTE: Can be mounted on a wall
or a free standing pedestal. Wall brackets or pedestal are not
Included In the unit's price. Pedestals are available from IBM
or outside vendors. See SRL 014.24-3021 for
pedestal specifications.
[1] Distance - the maximum length of a customer-provided 2-wlre
communication line Is a function of the number of Input stations.
line characteristics and network configuration. Approximate
limitations are up to 8 miles. A Common Carrier Adapter
(#2088). operating with external data sets. or an IBM Line
Adapter (#4647) permits transmission over greater distances
via a 4-wlre full duplex common carrier leased voice grade
channel. Detailed Information on communication lines Is contained In SRL 014.24-3021. See the M 2700 pages for Information on communication facilities.
[2] The maximum number of 1031 As per 2-wlre line Is ten.
(3) A maximum of eight 1031 Bs can be connected to a 1031 A.
(4) A maximum of twenty-four 1031s. mdl As and Bs combined.
can be attached to a 2-wlre line.
(5) Up to nine 1033s can be attached to a 1031 A equipped with
a 1033 Printer Attachment (# 1279) ... up to twenty-four 1033s
can be attached to one 2-wlre line. NOTE: Up to twenty-four
1033s. plus twenty-four 1031s can be attached to one Hne.
[6) When the line terminates In a 1034 Card Punch. 1033s cannot
be sttached to the line.
[7] Either a 1033 Printer Attachment (# 1279) or a Common Carrier Adapter (#2068) can be Installed on a 1031 A. not both.
1031 mdl Be
[1) Maximum cable length (1031 B to 1031 A) Is 3.000 feet.
[2) A maximum of eight 1031 Bs can be attached to a 1031 A.
1031 mdl As provide data transmlaalon via 2-wlre communication
lines and control 1031 mdl Bs and 1033 Printers attached to them
by multlwlre cables. As far as the user Is concerned. operation of
comparable A and B models are Identical. Depending upon the
model. the 1031 has one or more of the following means of Input
and standard features:
Environment: See 1030 In "Systems."
Card Reader - standard or Port-A-Punch- prepunched 8O-column
cards can be individually Inserted and removed manually. An
upper left comer cut Cl Is required. M3. M4 and M5 scores can
be used. Numbers. letters and IBM special characters (see SAL
GA24-3018) are read. Blank card colum,ns are not recognized and
are automatically skipped.
[2) Color: #e041 for red. #e042 for yellow. #9043 for blue. or
#e045 for gray.
[3) Method of Installation: #9410 If junction box. or #9411 If
Junction ,.PQlpt. Cables or connectors will be shipped automatically
prior to scheduled delivery. 14.20".
2-wlre main line signal cable Is shipped for a 1031 A. See
Physical Planning Manual 014.24-3021.
Badge Reader - reads identification badges (22-column stub card
size) prepunched In IBM code with a maximum of ten digits. The
badges. which are punched on a 13 Badge Punch. are Inserted
and removed manually. Badges with or without a pocket clip can
be read. They can be purchased from outside vendors. or produced by commercially available equipment. See SRL 014.21-9028
for badge specifications. NOTE: A badge gauge Is provided at no
charge with each badge punch ... see 13 Badge Punch.
Manuals: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index." 03201621.
SPECIFY: [1) Voltage (AC. I-phase. 3-wlre. 60 Hz): #9880 for
115 V. locking plug. or #9881 for 115 V. non-lock plug.
MAC/
MRC
PRICES:
Mdl
1031
14.1
14.2
14.3
A4
14.5
14.8
14.7
B1
B2
$108
135
120
151
135
108
125
B3
B4
85
98
B5
Be
B7
54
Manual Entry - a means of entering variable numeric source data
in addition to the fixed data entered by card and badge. Each of
the 12 slides has 11 character positions (0-9. and blank). and can
be Individually labeled. The slides restore to blank after each
correct transmission. or may be restored by depressing the clear
button for operator or retransmission error. Panel wiring provides
detection of columns set to blank for selected groups of slides.
Cartridge Reader - reads the data cartridge. a device which
provides for off-station entry of up to 12 positions of variable
numeric data. The cartridge Is Inserted and removed manually.
Cartridge slides retain their setting and are not restored by action
of the reader. Panel wiring provides detection of columns set to
blank for selected groups of slides.
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
54
81
Purcha..
MMMC
$4,540
5,585
4,870
8,220
5,510
4,540
5,040
'2,270
3,315
$13.00
15.50
19.50
30.50
32.00
9.50
27.50
7.00
11.00
14.00
15.00
19.50
5.50
14.00
2,800
3,955
3,230
2,270
81
2,855
70
Purchase Option: 45%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
One data s:artridge is furnished with each 1031 mdl 14.3. AS. B3.
B5 ... pocket size - 7-3/8" long. 3-1/4" deep. and 1/2" thick ...
used for setting up variable Information away from the 1031.
reducing station set-up time and making the 1031 available to
additional cartridges.
more users In a given period.
ATTACHMENT, 1033 PRINTER (#1279). [Models AI thru 14.7
only) To control up to nine 1033 Printers bv one 1031 A. Includes
4' junction box cable or connector
•
as specified in "Method of Installation"
under "Specify" above.
Limltetlon: Cannot be
Installed with Common Carrier Adapter (#2068).
Llghte - all models have appropriate Card. Badge. Manual Control. Repeat. and In-process Indicator lights.
Cleer Button - on all models. ejects all cards. badges and data
cartridges and restores the manual entry and cartridge reader.
tcOUUON CARRIER ADAPTER (#2088). [Models AI thru 14.7 only)
Provides for long distance data transmlaalon via external data sets
over 4-wlre full duplex communication lines provided by common
carriers. Note: Where multiple 1031 mdl As are to operate over a
4-wlrs full duplex line. only one 1031 mdl A Is directly connected
to the external data set ... additional 1031 mdl As are connected
to the first 1031 mdl A. which Is Interfaced to the external data
set. via a 2-wlre communication line ... specifications for the
2-wlre line are contained In SRL 014.24-3021. Llmltetlon: Cannot
be Installed with 1033 Printer Attachment (#1279) or IBM Litle
Adapter (#4847).
Specify: For cable assembly
from 1031 mdl A to common carner data set - #9021 and quantity (length In feet ... maximum. 40).
Mode Switch - on mdls 14.2 thru AS. 14.7. B2 thru B5. B7. places
the 1031 in card. badge or manual control mode.
Set-up lnatructlon Reference - on mdls 14.2. 14.4. B2. B4. a thumb
knob and scroll which gives rapid reference to set-up Instructions.
¢uatomer Responsibilities - see 1030 In "Systems."
PREREOUISITE:
line terminators will be
Line
shipped from the plant
terminators are provided to the customer at no charge. for guidance in determining the number of line terminators required. see
Physical Planning Manual. 014.24-3021.
CONTROLLED RESET (#2290). [Models 14.2 thru AS. 14.7. B2 thru
B5. B7 only) For operator switch control of badge. manu,,1 entry.
or data cartridge retention for subsequent records.
t
Por l\uther iDformatioJl 00 IBM Line Ada"",n. _
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 2700
poacI.
--- ------------
-
M 1031 - 1032
May 79
==-= ':' =
DP Machines
1031 Input Station
(cont'd)
tlBM LINE ADAPTER (#4647). [Models Al thru A7 only] A modem
to allow the 1031 mdl A terminal to communicate over unlimited
distances with a 2702/2703 Transmission Control, 3704/3705
Communications Controller, a 2025 with ICA (#4580) via a 2711
Line Adapter Unit, a 3115 or 3125 with ICA (#4640), or a 1034
Card Punch. This adapter uses 4-wire leased common carrier
private lines, or equivalent privately owned communication facilities. When Installed, the standard 2-wire, 8 mile modem cannot be
used. For line specifications, see SRL GA24-3435* *. Up to
twenty-four 1031 mdl As, each equipped with this feature, can be
multi-dropped on a line. Common carrier considerations, however,
will limit the size of the network. If a system with more than ten
points is proposed, a service inquiry to the common carrier must
be initiated by the customer. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Common Carrier Adapter (#2068).
Prerequisite:
An IBM line Adapter (#4647) on the 1034 or 2711.
INDIVIDUAL SLIDE LOCK (#4852).
[Models A2, A4, B2, B4
only] A group of three slide controls ... for operator control of
individual manual entry slide reset. Maximum: Four groups.
INPUT EDIT LEVELS, ADD'L (#4654). [Models A2 thru AS, B2
thru B5 only] A group of four additional input levels (E, F. G. H).
Input edit levels are used to select the proper input device for a
given transaction. edit the input before transmission, and select
the proper point for end-of-block code. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with 1035 Attachment (#7961).
INQUIRY KEY (#4684). [Models A2 thru A7, B2 thru B7 only]
Permits authorized inquiry to a system processor ... output is via a
1033 Printer. One key is provided ...
additional keys,
MONITOR KEY (#5140). [Models A2 thru A7, B2 thru B7 only]
Used where a supervisor's approval Is required before a record
additional keys.
can be transmitted. One key is provided ...
1035 ATTACHMENT (#7981). To attach from one to four 1035
Badge Readers. Provides a means of scanning up to 30 columns
of !)adge punching and assigning badge reader identification
characters. Includes a 4' cable for Junction box connection to
1035s. shipped automatically
Limitations: Plant installation only
on 1031 A models ... cannot be installed with Add'i Input Edit
Levels (#4654) ... installation of this feature is incompatible with
some 1031 RPQs.
Prerequisites: For 1031 A mdls - 1035 Control (#7962) ... for
1031 B mdls - #7962 on the controlling 1031 mdl A.
1035 CONTROL (#7982). [Models A1 thru A7 only) Required on
a 1031 mdl A to install a 1035 Attachment (#7961) on the 1031
mdl A itself, or on any 1031 mdl Bs controlled by the 1031 mdl A.
The feature detects any blanks and invalid data transmitted from
badge readers and controls operation- of Repeat lights for the
1035s.
Special Feature Prlc..:
Attach, 1033 Printer
#1279
Common Carrier Adapt 2088
Controlled R...t
2290
IBM Line Adapter
4647
Indvl Slide Loek,9P of 3 4652
Input Edit Leve.s, Add'i
gp of 4
4654
Inquiry Key
4684
5140
Monitor Ke~
1035 Abc ment
7981
1035 Control
7982
MAC/
MRC Purcha.. MMMC
$18
28
2
10
2
FIC
$ 715
1,155
95
347
95
$1.50
1.00
1.00
3.50
1.00
$ 21
188
43
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.50
1.00
16
17
9
138
47
4
2
2
16
5
30
650
225
34
17
132
9
1032 DIGITAL TIME UNIT
Purpose: Used to associate time of day with output records of a
data collection system.
Model 1
Has a synchronous motor drive.
Model 2
Is minute impulse self-regulating ... for attachment to
user's master clock system.
Model Chang..: Cannot be made In the field.
Highlights: Can furnish time data to any combination of up to
twenty 24/26 Card Punches and 1034 Card Punches, and, in
addition, to one 1026 Transmlsalon Control Unit, or two 1448
Transmission Control Units. or two 2702 Transmlsaion Controls.
Time advances once each minute and is read out as 4 digits ...
hours (0-23) and nearest hundreths of hours. Can be used for
357 and 1030 Data Collection Systems, either on or off-line.
•*
Warning is provided upon the return of interrupted power. or
failure of the timing source (synchronous motor or master time
system) to initiate an advance cycle once each minute. Clocking
periods for 24/268 or 1034s can be activated on any minute
automatically or by manual operation. Synchronous standby is
provided with the 1032 mdl 2.
PREREQUISITES:
For 24/26a (357s) - Clock Read-in (#1945) on each 24/26 ...
Digital Time Read-out Control. 24/26/1034 (#3267) on the
1032 itself ... see "Special Features" below and GSD sales
manual for 24/26 description.
For 1034s (1030a) - Digital Time Read-in (#3266) on each
1034 ... Digital Time Read-out Control, 24/26/1034 (#3267) on
the 1032 itself ... see "Special Features."
For 1448s - Common Carrier Adapter Set - 1050/1060 (#2070)
on each 1448 ... Digital Time Read-out Control. 1448 (#3268)
on the 1032 itsalf ... see "Special Features."
For 1026a - Expanded Line Feature (#3837) on the first 1026
... Digital Time Read-out Control. 1026 (#3269) on the 1032
itself ... see "Special Features."
For 27028 - 1032 Attachment (#7918), IBM Terminal Control Type II (#4616) and Speed Extension (#7387) on each 2702,
plus either IBM Line Adapter (#4613) or Data Set Line Adapter
• (#3233) on line No. 1 of each 2702 ... Digital Time Read-out
Control, 2702 (#3273) on the 1032 itself ... JIBe "Special Features."
Environment: See 1030 in "Systems."
Manuals: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
SPECIFY: Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): Locking plug - #9880
for 115 V. #9884 for 208 V, or #9888 for 230 V. Non-lock
plug - #9881 for 115 V. #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230
V ... must be consistent with voltage of 1026, 1448 or 2702.
PRICES:
Mdl
1032
1
2
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purcha..
MMMC
$ 106
$3,785
125
4,830
$ 3
3
Purchase Option: 50%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
CLOCKING PERIOD ON-OFF CONTROL, ADD'L (#1940).
For
packed card punch operation ... a group of four periods in addition to those supplied with feature #3267 ... see below.
Maximum: One.
DAy-oF-WEEK READ-OUT, 24/26/1034 (#3219). Numbers the
days of the week 1 thru 7 for punching Into cards on 24/26/1034
card punches in 357 or 1030 Data Collection Systems. Upon
reaching day 7, the next advance returns the device to day 1.Advancement from one day to the next may be wired (pluggable)
to cause a day change at any minute during the 24-hour period.
Read-out to 1034s consists of 5 digits (tens of hours. units of
hOUfS, tenths of hours, hundredths of hours. and day-of-week).
Read-oul to 24/26s Is limited to 4 digits (tens of hours, units of
hours. tenths of hours, and day-of-week) ... hundredths of hours
cannot be punched in output records when used with a 24/26.
Prerequlslt..: Diglta' Time Read-out Control,
24/26/1034 (#3267) ... Oay-of-Week Read-in (#3200) on each
1034.
DIGITAL TIME READ-OUT CONTROL, 24/26/1034 .(#3267).
Provides compattblllty with 24/26/1034 card punches used for
output from 357 and 1030 Data Collection Systems ... can read
time to any combination of up to twenty card punches. SpecIfy:
#9018. for 4' cable assembly from 1032 to Junction box for multiple 24/26s (cable is shipped 30 days prior to scheduled delivery),
or #9019. for 15' cable assembly from 1032 to a single 24 or 26.
Note: Cable assembly for 1034 attachment to 1032 is included
with Dlgita' Time Read-In (#3268) on 1034 ... see 1034.
DIGITAL TIME READ-OUT CONTROL, 1448 (#3268). Provides
compatibility with a 1448 Transmission Control Unit. A maximum
of two 1448s can be attached to a 1032 for time read-out. One
#3268 la required on the 1032 tor each 1448. A 20' cable (1032
to 1448) is provided with each feature. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with #3269 or #3273. Maximum: Two.
DIGITAL TIME READ-OUT CONTROL, 1026 (~3269). PrOVides
compatibility with a 1026 TransmiSSion Control' Unit. A 15' cable
(1032 to 1026) is provided. Limitation: Cannot be Installed with
#3268 .or 3273. Maximum: One.
DIGITAL TIME READ-OUT CONTROL, 2702 (.3273).
SRL GA24-3435·2, Or .ubllequcnt revisions.
Not to be reproduced without written .permission.
Provides
------- --------
M 1032 - 1034
May 79
:i:'=':::';'=
DP Machines
1032 Digital Time Unit (cont'd)
compatibility with a 2702 Transmlsalon Control. A maximum of two
2702s can be attached to a 1032 for time read-out. One #3273
Is required on the 1032 for each 2702. A 20' cable (1032 to
2702) Is provided with each feature. Limitation: Cannot be Installed with #3268 or #3269. Maximum: Two.
Installation - to order add'i platens, or to order one for field Installation
1034 CARD PUNCH
MAC/
MRC Purcha.. MMMC
FIC
•"
• .50
'15
3.50
54
.50
.75
.75
1.25
21
28
28
78
Hlghllghta: The 1034 receives data from up to twenty-four 1031s
over a single communication line. Two lines ·can be attached to a
1034. The second line Is normally used for emergency back-up
for another 1034, or, where the application does not require emergency back-up, as provision for attaching up to forty-elght 1031s
to one 1034.
PurpoH: Output page printer for 1030 Data Collection Systems
used online with a data processing system via a 1026/1448
Transmlsalon Control Unit, 2701 Data Adapter Unit, or 2702/2703
Transmlsalon Control.
Transmitted data Is punched at 60 characters/second ... nontransmitted data, time and common data Is punched at 80
characters/second. Eight rotary dials controlled by the 1034
operator each permit entry of "12", "11" and "0-9" punches as
common data Into the output record. Time can be punched Into
output records when a 1032 Digital Time Unit Is attached to a
1034 equipped with Digital Time Read-In (#3266) ... see "Special
Features. "
Special Feature Prlc. .:
Clocking Period On-Off
#1840
Control, Add'i
Day-of-WHk RNd-out,
3218
24/26/1034
DIgital Time Read-out Control
3267
24/26/1034
3268
1448
1026
32"
3273
2702
• 5
10
10
37
37
48
434
4.
1,615
1,615
1,700
1033 PRINTER
Hlghllghta: A compact Industrial unit which can be mounted
wall or on a free standing pedestal. Note: Wall brackets or
estals are not Included with the unit. Pedestals are available
outside vendors or from IBM
... see
GA24-3021 for pedestal specifications.
on a
pedfrom
SRL
The printer Is controlled by the data procesalng system through
the 1033 Printer Attachment (#1279) on a 1031 Input Station A
model. Addressing Is performed by programming In the proc:esaor.
Remote Inquiries for prlnt-out Initiate from a card reader, badge
reader, or manual entry of an associated 1031 A or B model. Data
Is transmitted to the printer at 14.8 cps. The printer operates In
downshift mode ... prints 26 letters, 10 digits and 8 special characters ... uses a removable Procesaor Printing Element - see
"Type Catalog" ... horizontal spacing Is 10 characters/Inch ... roll
paper Is fed by a 15" friction feed. solid plsten with a 13" print
line ... ribbons are available through the OP division or outside
vendors. Note: For unattended operation or multi-part (up to 5)
form paper, a Pin Feed Platen Is required ... see "Special Features."
System Checking - each character received by the printer must
contain an odd number of bits. A 6-blt BCD code plus a parity bit
and a start and stop bit (total of nine bits) Is used. Parity checkIng of each character Is performed by the receiving 1031 mdl A.
PREREQUISITES: A 1033 Printer Attachment (#1279) on the
8880Ciated 1031 mdl A .. , Attachment Feature - 1030 (#1274)
and Attachment Feature - 1033 (#1277) on a 1448 ... for requirements for use with a 1026 or 2701, see those units.
Umltatlons: 1033s cannot be used In 1030 systems attached to a
1034 Card Punch ... 1033s cannot be attached to a 1031 with a
Common Carrier Adapter (#2068) Installed ... a maximum of nine
1033s can be attached to a 1031 mdl A ... maximum cable length
(1033 to 1031 mdl A) Is 3,000' ... see SRL GA24-3021 for detailed Information.
Environment: See 1030 In "Systems."
Manuals: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
PurpoH: Output card punch for data transmission from 1031
Input Stations and 1035 Badge Readers In a 1030 Data Collection
System.
The unit has a 1,2OQ-card capacity hopper and a 1 ,3OQ-card
capacity stacker. Interlocks stop machine operation when the
hopper becomes empty. If the stacker Is full, a card jams, or
transmlsalon Is Interrupted, an audible alarm signals the operator.
Systems Checking - provides odd parity on all characters received, plus a record length, blank column and punch compare
check. Five consecutive records In error stop the punch and
activate an audible alarm.
Control Capabllltl.. - each 1034 can poll up to twenty-four
10318 on each of two lines, with a maximum of two lines possible.
A mixture of 1031 mdl As and Bs can be attached to each line.
However, only 1031 mdl As can be connected directly to the
2-wlre communication line leading to the 1034. See 1031 for
allowable ratios of 1031 mdl As and Bs and SRL GA24-3021 for
communication line specifications.
U.. with 10358 - 1035 Receive Control (#7963) Is required
when 1035 Badge Readers are used In the system. Also review
Variable Record Length (#8695) and Packed Card Column Counter (#5491) under "Special Features."
Umltatlon: 1033 Printers cannot be attached to 1031 mdl As
which transmit to a 1034.
Environment: See 1030 In "Systems."
Manuals: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
SPECIFY: [1J Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wlre, 60 Hz): #9880 for
115 V, locking plug, or #9881 for 115 V, non-lock plug.
NOTE: Two 20', 2-wlre main line signal cables are shipped
automatically
prior to scheduled delivery
of the 1034 ... see SRLGA24-3021.
[2J Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #8043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
PRICES:
1034
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
SPECIFY: [1J Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wlre, 60 Hz): #9880 for
115 V, locking plug, or #9881 for 115 V, non-lock plug.
[2J Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #8043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3J Method of Installation: #9410 If Junction box, or #9411 If
Junction point. Cables or connectors will be shipped automatiprior to scheduled delivery date. See SRL GA24cally
3021.
[4J Printing Element: #8575 for Procesaor - Standard, or #8578
for Procesaor - "H" Option ... see "Type Catalog."
PRICES:
1033
MAC/
MRC
Mell
1
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purch...
$4,125
'117
Purchase Option: 50%
MMMC
• 8.50
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
ACCESSORY FEATURE
PfN FEED PLATEN (#8509). [Purchase OnlyJ For Plant Installation - specify #9509. Maximum one, In lieu of standard friction
feed platen. See "Pin Feed Platens" on M 10000 pages for available options, feature #s to be specified and price. For Field
Mell
MAC/
MRC
Purcha..
• 404
'16,580
Purchase Option: 50%
MMMC
• 37.00
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
tCOMMON CARRIER ADAPTER (#2068). Provides for long distance data transmlsaloll' via external data sets over 4-wlre full
duplex communication lines provided by a common carrier. Transmlsalon rate Is 60 cps/600 bps. Local 2-wlre capabilities of standard machine are not affected by Installation of this feature.
Specify: For cable assembly from 1034 to external data set,
#8021 and quantity (length In feet) ... maximum length with Line
Tran.fer (#4835) Installed Is 20' .. , without #4835, maximum
length Is 40'. Umltatlon: Cannot be Installed with IBM Line Adapter (#4647). DAY-OF-WEEK READ-IN (#3200).
Required If Day-of-Week
Read-out (#3219) Is Installed on a 1032 ... see 1032.
Prerequisite: Digital Time Read-In (#3266).
DIGITAL TIME READ-IN (#3266).
Required to attach a 1032
Digital Time Unit for time read-In to the 1034 ... a 15' cable (1034
to 1032 or adjacent 1034) Is furnished.
t
For further informatiOll OD IBM Line Adapten, ... M 2700 paa...
•• SRL 0A24-30435·2, or 'UboeqUCDt reviaiOllo.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------=- =-------=--':' =
M 1034 - 1035
May 79
DP Machines
1034 Card Punch
(conrd)
tlBM LINE ADAPTER (#4847). A modem for unlimited distance use
with a 4-wire leased common carrier private line or equivalent
privately owned communication facilities. For line specifications,
refer to SRL GA24-3435··. When this feature is installed, the
standard 2-wire, 8 mile modem can also be used. Limitation.:
Cannot be Instalied with Common Carrier Adapter (#2068) ... all
1031& connected through this feature must have their polling
addresses in sequence at the beginning of the polling list (B, C, 0,
etc.) ... a 1034 used for backup of another 1034 equipped with
this feature must also have this feature.
LINE TRANSFER (#4835). Provides the ability to transfer automatically the communication line or lines from the normal channel
of a 1034 to the backup channel of an adjacent operating 1034.
If the card punch requires the Common Carrier Adapter (#2068)
for normal operation, the card punch assigned to back up this unit
must also have #2068 installed. Limitation.: Up to Ihree 1034s
in a given installation can be connected in a backup configuration.
However, only a single punch can be assigned to back up anyone
other puncl! ... for systems using common carrier data sels, the
length 01 the cable from the data set to the 1034 must not exceed
20'. A 15' Inler-machlne cable is provided. Prerequlelte: All
1034s connected in an automatic backup configuration must be
equipped with #4835.
PACKeD CARD (#5490). For punching more than one record
i,,\o a single card during specified time periods under control of a
1032 Digital Time Unit. Prerequlelte: Digital Time Read-in
(#3266).
PACKED CARD COL.UMN COUNTER (#5491).
Provides better
packing of records punched in output card when 1035 Badge
Readers are used in the system and the 1034 is operating in
packed card mode. Also provides the ability to punch two record
types (two transection codes) in the packed card mode. The
feature effectively counts card columns punched in the output card
and feeds a new card when Insufficient columns remain to punch a
maximum lenj;lth record. Transaction codes and counter column
count are wired at Installation as specified by the customer.
Prerequ'eltos: 1035 Receive Control (#7963), Packed Card
(#5490), and Digital Time Read-in (#3266).
SEL.ECTIVE STACKER (#6406).
An additional stacker which
mall be used to sil1ect cards containing a specifiC transection error
or error indicatiolt
1035 RECEIVE CONTROL (#1963). Required when 1035 Badge
Readers are used in a 1030 system. Provides Immediate repolling
01 an address whEon an error Is detected by the 1034.
VARIABLE RECORD LENOTH (#8695). Provides record length
checking for variable length records received under the same
transsction code. Required when data is received from 1035
Badge Readers and the record length varies in increments of
either 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 or 11 characters. Wired at installation
for a singie transactior, code and increment specified by customer.
Note: Increment used is equal to number of columns read from a
single badge, plus 1 .,. for an increment of 8 (7-column badge),
the standard modulus 8 feature is used. Prerequlelte: 1035 Receive Control (#7963).
Special Featur. PrieN:
MAC/
MRC Purcha.. MMMC
Common Carrl.r Adapt #2068 $ 28
3200
4
Day-of-Week R.aO-ln
3286
18
Digital Time Read-ln
4647
42
IBM line Adapter
line Tranafer
4835
13
Packed Card
5490
32
5491
Packed Card Col Cntf
5
Selective Stacker
6406
21
1005 Receive Control
7963
5
5
Vrbl Record length
8695
$1,155
113
715
1,675
418
828
$3.50
.50
3.00
4.00
203
.50
.50
.50
918
.75
203
.50
.50
211
FIC
$40
9
31
371
54
29
29
79
29
29
1035 BADGE READER
PUfpoas: An input station for a 1030 Data Collection System or a
2790 Data Communication System. Used to transmit numeric data
read from badges via a 1031 Input Station or a 2791 Area Station
mdl 1 10 a central collection point.
Highlight.: A small industrial unit which can be wall or shelfmounleq. Simple In operation, the 1035 reads identification
badges (22-column stub card size) prepunched In IBM card code
with a maximum of ten numeric digits. See SRL GA21-9028 for
badge specifications.
attachment cable to the junction box ... see "Specify." See Physical Planning Manual, GA24-3021 for details.
Functionally, 1035s can be thought of as additional columns of
badge reading which are located remotely from the 1031 with
which they are associated. When the 1031 is polled, all bedge
readers (including the one In the 1031 if it is so equipped and the
mode switch is set to badge) are scanned sequentially and transmit as one block of data. Empty badge readers are scanned
timewise, but no data Is transmitted. Thus, a transmitted block of
data will vary in length, depending upon the number of badge
readers ready when the 1031 is polled. If no badge readers are
ready when the 1031 is polled, no data is transmitted. Each
badge record in a transmitted block (up to a total of five) is automatically preceded by a character Identifying the badge reader.
From a user point of view, the 1035 operates In a manner identical to a 1031 mdl A8 or B6. An inserted badge is locked in position, read, and automatically released.
For 2790 SYitem. - up to three 1035s can be connected to any
2791 mdl 1 via a common multi-wire cable not exceeding 1,000
feet. Cable connections are made via customer-provided junction
boxes and cables, except for the IBM-provided 4 foot cable to the
Junction box ". see "Specify." See Physical Planning Manual
GA27-3017 for details.
Operator Controla: A Repeat light indicates a detected transmission error. A Clear button is provided to turn off the Repeat light
and to release the badge.
CU8tomer Reeponelbllltl. .: See M 2700 pages.
PREREQUISITES:
For 1030 - [1] 1035 Attachment (#7961) on the associated
1031 ... [2] 1035 Control (#7962) on a 1031 mdl A equipped
with #7961 and/or which controls 1031 mdl Bs equipped with
#7961 ... [3] 1035 Receive Control (#7963) on the 1034 Card
Punch (for offline systems) ... [4] Variable Record Length
(#8695) on the 1034 if the number of columns read per badge is
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9 or 10. For 7 digits of badge (plus 1 for station
number), the standard modulus 8 checking in the 1034 suffices.
For 2790 (#8030).
a 2791 mdl 1 equipped with 1035 Attachment
Limitation.:
For 1030 - [1] The maximum cable distance from the farthest
1035 to its associated 1031 Is 1,000 feet; total aggregate cable
length connecting 1035s to their associated 1031 cannot exceed
2,000 feet; the total cable distance from the farthest 1035 via its
associated 1031 to the controlling 1031 mdl A cannot exceed
3,000 feet. For details refer to SRL GA24-3021 ... [2] The number of 1035s attached to a 1031 cannot exceed four ... [3] The
number of badge columns read from each 1035 (and associated
1031 If equipped with a badge reader and operating in badge
mode) must be equal ... [4] The number of badge columns read
in any badge reader cannot exceed ten ... [5] The total number
of badge columns transmitted in one block cannot exceed 30.
Thus, with five badge readers (one 1031 and four 1035s) the
maximum number of columns read from each badge is six; with
four badge readers - seven; with three badge readers or less ten.
For 2790 - [1] The maximum cable distance from the farthest
1035 to its associated 2791 mdl 1 is 1,000 feet ... [2] The number of 1035s attached to a 2791 mdl 1 cannot exceed three.
Environment: See 1030 or 2790 in "Systems."
Manual.: See "IBM Marketing Publlcationa KWIC Index," 03201621.
SPECIfY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz); #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Cable to Junction Box: #9410, if required. A 4-fdot cable
from the 1035 to a custoner-provlded Junction box ... see Physical Planning Manual GA24-3021 or OA27-3017 for requirement. Not.: If #9410 is specified, provide complete person's
name and addresafor shipment ... cables will be shipped automatically, approximately 30 days prior to scheduled delivery.
MAC/
PRICES:
1035
Mdt
MAC
Purcha. .
MMMC
1
$ 32
$ 944
$ 4
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45%
For 1030 Systems - up to four 1035s can be connected to any A
or B model 1031 via a common multi-wire cable not exceeding
1,000 feet. Cabie connections are made via customer-provided
Junction boxes and cables, except for the IBM-provided 4 foot
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
M 1071 - 1072
May 79
DP Machines
quired for 1078s.
1071 TERMINAL CONTROL
[No longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Control unit for a 1070 Process Communication System.
Model 1
Used for 14.8 cps transmission.
Model 2
Used for 66.6 cps transmission.
Model Changes: Can be made in the field.
Highlights: A 1071 is required in each system ... it controls selection and conversion of process signals in either random or sequential mode ... speed of selection and conversion depends upon the
1071 model.
Supplies the line control governing data transmission and checks all
transmitted and received data for validity. NOTE: For communications facilities and attachment to communications lines. see 1070 in
"Systems."
The basic 1071 contains logic for addressing 50 input/ output
points. This capacity can be expanded to 300 points. in modules of
50 ... see "Special Features." Performs contact sense. decimal and
BCD input. and contact operate functions. Process alert logic informs the associated processor of interrupt requests ... see
"Special Features" for extended input/output functions.
PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#55611. To attach one or more 1053
mdl 2s to a 1071.
Prerequisite: Display Attachment
(#33451.
RANGE SELECT 1#59601. For ADC conversion of analog signal.
full scale ranges -10 to +50. -20 to + 100. and -100 to +500 millivolts. to their equivalent 3-digit values. Note: Only one analog
input range may be terminated per I/O Switching Module (#4663)
on a 1072.
Prerequisite: Analog-to-Digital Converter
(#1262).
Special Feature Prices:
Add'i Address Module #1048
Analog-to-Digit Convert 1262
ADC Extend Resolution 1263
DC Power Supply Adapter
for +24 V
3217
for +12 V
3218
Display Attachment
3345
Line Adapter
4792
Multi-character Input
5185
Printer Attachment
5561
Range Select
5960
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
FIC
131
2,565
232
$ .25
5.00
.25
$26
55
12
423
423
1.50
1.50
1.50
.50
.50
1.50
1.50
55
55
55
12
36
$ 3
79.
10
$
10
10
24
10
10
24
24
848
476
423
848
848
40
12
A compact unit designed for industrial environments. it can be
mounted in standard 19" relay racks ... racks are available from
outside vendors.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC. l-phase. 60 Hz. locking plug): #9880 for
115 V. #9884 for 208 V. or #9886 for 230 V. unless DC Power
(#3217.3218) is ordered.
[2] Data Set Attachment: One of the following. depending upon the
data set to be used -- #9110 or #9111 for facility 01. #9110 for
facility 02. #9112 for the IBM Line Adapter (#4792). See the
01 M and D2M facilities in the M 2700 pages for applicability of
these codes.
[3] Cables: Use 1070 Cable Order Form -- (a) length of cable to
data set ... (b) length of Digital Input Channel cable. Display
Attachment cable and Printer Attachment cable. when purchased
from IBM. NOTE: The three cables after (b) are special cables.
purchased at $1.90 per foot and i.nstalled by the customer.
Completed cable order form must be received at least 90 days
prior to installation date.
[4] When 1070 terminals are controlled by a 1050 system as a
master station. consult
for special
requirements.
PRICES:
Mdl
1071
1
2
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
$
199
212
MMMC
$6,775
$ 23
7,190
23
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: B
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADD'L ADDRESSING MODULE 1#10481. Adds 50 addresses to
the 1071's addressing range. One feature is required for each 1072
Terminal Multiplexer added after the first one. Maximum: Five.
ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER 1#12621.
Converts analog
input signals. full scale range -1 to +5 V. to their equivalent 3-digit
values. Conversion rate is approximately 5/second for 1071 mdl 1.
20/second for mdl 2.
ADC EXTENDED RESOLUTION (#12631.
Increases Analog-toDigital Converter (#1262) resolution from 0.1 % to 0.025 % of full
scale range ... for improved analog conversion accuracy.
Prerequisite: Analog-to Digital Conversion (#1262).
DC POWER SUPPLY ADAPTER 1#3217, 32181. For operation of
the 1071 from +12 to +24 V DC power to permit use with back-up
battery power. #3217 -- for +24 V ... #3218 -- for + 12 V.
DISPLAY ATTACHMENT 1#33451.
Converts output data into
decimal "one-out-of-ten" code for attachment of 1074 Binary
Display. 1075 Decimal Displays. and customer's decimal output
devices to the 1071 ... also required for 1073 mdls 1 and 3.
t LINE ADAPTER 1#47921. For attachment to customer-owned or
leased telephone cable facilities for in-plant operation ... not exceeding 8 wire-miles.
MULTI-CHARACTER INPUT 1#51851. Extends basic 1071 digital
input capability to include extended BCD code (B. A. 8. 4. 2. 1. C)
'and externally synchronized multi-character input devices ... re-
t
FOI" further infOl"mation on IBM Line Adapters. see M 27()O pages.
1072 TERMINAL MULTIPLEXER
[No longer available ... MS orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for addressing and
input/ output points ... analog inputs.
inputs. BCD and extended BCD inputs.
digital output/contact operate points in a
terminating up to 50
decimal "one-out-of-ten"
contact sense inputs. or
1070 system.
Highlights: Every 1070 system has at least one 1072 ... up to six
can be connected to the 1071 Terminal Control for a total of 300
input/output points ... I/O points are installed in groups of ten (see
"Special Features"). Each 1072 is cabled separately to the 1071 for
maximum installation flexibility ... the unit is designed for mounting
in a standard 19" relay rack.
PREREQUISITES: A 1071 mdl 1 or 2. plus one Add'l Addressing
Module (#1048) on the 1071 for each 1072 attached after the first
one.
Maximum: Six per system.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
Specify: [1] I/O Switching Module(s) (#4663)
see "Special
Features." NOTE: No function is provided unless one or more
I/O Switching Modules (#4463) is specified.
[2] Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use ,1070 Cable Order
Form -- (al lenght of address cable (1072-1071) for each 1072
ordered ... (b) length of Analog Signal cable (1072-1071). required for each 1072 terminating analog input signals. NOTE:
Address cable is a special cable. purchased at $1.90 per foot
and installed by the customer ... Analog Signal cable is a special
cable. purchased at $.25 per foot and installed by the customer.
PRICES:
Mdl
1072
1
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 10
$ .50
$ 476
Purchase Option: 55% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
I/O SWITCHING MODULE (#46631.
A multiplexer card for
selection and termination of up to ten customer input or output
points ... each module is assigned to anyone of the following
functions at time of installation:
Analog Input -- for selection of up to ten analog input points in
anyone of the following four ranges ... -1 to +5 V. -10 to +50
millivolts. -20 to +100 millivolts. or -100 to +500 millivolts. Note:
ADC calibration requires two addresses of lowest analog input
range and one address of each additional analog input range.
Digital Input -- for selection of up to ten contact sense. decimal
or BCD inputs in any combination.
Digital Output -- for selection of up to ten contact operate
points. display devices. or output printers in any combination.
Maximum: Five per 1072.
THERMOCOUPLE BLOCK 1#79401. Provides an isothermal block
and resistance bulb thermometer to measure "cold junction" thermocouple termination temperature. Each 1072 having thermocouple
inputs must have a #7940. Note: Two analog input addresses. -10
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
DP Machines
M 1072 - 1073
May 79
1072 Terminal Multiplexer (cont'd
to +50 millivolt range, are required to read the thermocouple block
temperature. Maximum: One.
Prerequisites:
Analog-to-Digital Converter (#1262) and Range Select (#5960) on
the 1071, plus at least one I/O Switching Module (#4663) on the
1072.
MACI
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
$ 6
1/0 Switching Module #4663
Thermocouple Block
7940
10
Purchase MMMC
$ 211
423
$ .50
.50
PREREQUISITES: Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071, plus
one or more I/O Switching Modules (#4663) on one or more 1072s
... each latching contact operate point uses one address assigned
to Digital Output in an I/O Switching Module.
Maximum: Depends upon number of available addresses in I/O
Switching Modules (#4663) on 1072s.
1073
INPUT TERMINATIONS, VOLTAGE 1#4682).
A group of ten
points for addressing and terminating inputs from customer voltage
sources. Any pulse must have a minimum duration of 16 milliseconds, a minimum interval between pulses of 16 milliseconds, an
off-level (nominal voltage level) of -30 V to + 1 V DC, and an onlevel of + 12 V to +48 V DC. Maximum: Sixty points per 1073 mdl
2. This maximum is reduced by ten points for each Input Terminations, Contact (#4681) also ordered for the 1073 mdl 2. limitation:
5 i.nputs assigned to Pulse Duration Telemetry require a complete
group of ten points. Prerequisite: Installation of Input Terminations
31 to 60 require a Terminal Extension (#7936).
TERMINAL EXTENSION (#7936).
Required for installation of
Input Terminations 31-60. Maximum: One per 1073 mdl 2.
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 16
$1.50
$ 635
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
LATCHING CONTACT OPERATE POINTS (#4781). A group of
two points for terminating outputs to customer devices. Output is
one relay contact per point, rated at 100 Volt Amps, with a l-amp
non-inductive maximum current. Maximum: Twenty per 1073 (40
points).
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC
Purchase MMMC
Latching Contact Operate
Points (group of 2)
#4781
$ 5
$ 184
$ .50
$ .75
$ 704
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
or specific system
Specify: Cables (when purchased from 18M): Use 1070 Cable
Order Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1073-1072), a second
Address cable is required if more than 20 L.C.O. points are installed in the 1073 mdl 1, and (b) length of Data cable (1073junction with Display Attachment cable) for each 1073 mdl 1 ordered. NOTE: Address cable and Data cable are special cables,
purchased at $1.90 and $1.15 per foot respectively and installed by
the customer.
Plan Offering: Plan 8
Warranty: 8
Plan Offering: Plan 8
Warranty: 8
MMMC
$ 16
SPECIAL FEATURES
Highlights: Each latching contact operate point is individually
addressable and provides control of contact status (operating
customer's devices) for any desired time period as determined by
the processor program ... latching contact operate points are ordered in groups of two (see "Special Features"). Designed for
mounting in standard 19" relay racks.
Mdl
2
INPUT TERMINATIONS, CONTACT 1#4681).
A group of ten
points for addressing and terminating inputs from customer contact
sources. Contact closures, sensed by an IBM supplied voltage of
+48 V DC, must have a minimum duration of 16 milliseconds, and
an interval between consecutive closures of at least 16 milliseconds. Maximum: Sixty points per 1073 mdl 2. This maximum is
reduced by ten points for each Input Terminations, Voltage (#4682)
also ordered for the 1072 mdl 2.
limitation: 5 inputs
assigned to Pulse Duration Telemetry reqUIre a complete group of
ten points. Prerequisite: Installation of Input Terminations 31 to
60 require a Terminal Extension (#7936).
Purpose: Unit for control and termination of up to 40 latching
contact operate points in a 1070 Process Communication System.
PRICES:
1073
MACI
MRC "Purchase
FIC
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
Mdl
$12
12
1073 LATCHING CONTACT OPERATE - Model 1
[No long6r available ...
PRICES:
FIC
$ 6
MACI
MRC
Input Terminations
Contact (group of 10) #4681 $ 3
Voltage (group of 10) 4682
2
Terminal Extension
7936
5
Purchase MMMC FIC
$
$ .25
.25
.50
89
52
211
$ 4
4
2
1073 DIGITAL-PULSE CONVERTER - Model 3
[No longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for buffered pulse or pulse duration output in a 1070
Process Communication System.
Highlights: Accepts a three digit value (000-999) from the 1071 ...
when the "execute circuit" is activated, the digital value is converted into an equal number of contact closures of proportional contact
closure duration ... optional read back check before "execute"
command ... interlock during "execute" prevents readdressing
before conversion is complete ... pulse ouput rate of 90 pulses per
second .. output multiplexing via L.C.O. points in a 1073 mdl 1.
Designed for mounting in standard 19" relay racks ... the standard
unit operates from a 12 V DC power source to facilitate use with
backup battery power.
PREREQUISITES: Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071, plus
available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ...
each 1073 mdl 3 uses four 1072 addresses assigned to Digital
Output.
Maximum: Depends upon number of available addresses in I/O
Switching Modules (#4663) on 1072s.
1073 COUNTER TERMINAL - Model 2
[No longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for terminating pulse input points and/or pulse
duration input points in a 1078 Pulse Counter ... each unit has a
maximum capacity of 60 points.
Highlights: Input points may be
source .. ' input points are ordered
Features"). Designed for mounting
connected to 1078 via special cable
customer contact or voltage
in groups of ten (see "Special
in standard 19" relay rack ...
(up to 10') furnished by IBM.
PREREQUISITES: A 1078, plus one Counters, Group of Ten
(#2410) for each group of ten input terminations.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
Specify: Cables (when purchased from 18M): Use 1070 Cable
Order Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1073-10721. (b) length
of Data cable (1073-junction with Display Attachment cablel. and, if
required, (c) length of Data cable (1073-junction with Digital Input
Channel cable) for each 1073 mdl 3 ordered. NOTE: Address cable
is a special cable, purchased at $1.15 per foot and installed by the
customer. Data cables are special cables, purchased at $1.90 per
foot and installed by the customer.
PRICES:
Mdl
Maximum: Three per 1078.
1073
3
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Plan Offering: Plan 8
Warranty: 8
Specify: Cable: Use 1070 Cable Order Form -- length of cable
between 1073 mdl 2 and 1078.
or specific system
MACI
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 58*
$6.50*
$2,200
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
AC POWER SUPPLY (#8680, 8684, 8686).
For operation from
one of the following 1-phase, 60 Hz power sources -- #8680 for
115 V, #8684 for 208 V, or #8686 for 230 V. (Locking plugs).
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
DP Machines
1073 Digital-Pulse Converter - Model 3
(cont'd)
EXTERNAL OUTPUT CONTROL (#38641. Enables the 1073 mdl
3 to control the duration of an externally synchronized operation ...
i.e.. proportional blending systems, fluid delivery systems, etc.
External contact closures decrement the 1073 mdl 3 output register
to zero ... 1073 Latching Contact Operate Points (#4781) provide
program control of External Output Control use.
VARIABLE OUTPUT SPEED (#8675).
Provides program controlled selection of one of the following output rates -- 96, 48, 24,
12,6,3, 1.5 or 0.75 pulses per second. Note: Requires one additional 1072 address assigned to Digital Output.
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
AC Power Supply
115 V
#8680
208 V
8684
230 V
8686
External Output Control3864
Variable Output Speed 8675
$ 16
16
16
5
10
$ 689
689
689
211
423
$1.50
1.50
1.50
.50
.50
FIC
$ 40
40
40
4
12
M 1073 - 1076
May 79
An error lamp indicates improper data received by the 1071 ... each
display position may be labeled by the customer ... the standard
unit operates from a 12 V DC power source to facilitate use with
backup battery power.
PREREQUISITES: Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071, plus
available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ...
each display position uses one address assigned to Digital Output
in an I/O Switching Module.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
Specify: Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use 1070 Cable
Order Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1075-1072) and (b)
length of Data cable (1 075-junction with Display Attachment cable)
for each 1075 ordered. Note: Address cable is a special cable,
purchased at $1.15 per foot and installed by the customer. Data
cable is a special cable. purchased at $1.90 per foot and installed
by customer.
PRICES:
Mdl
1075
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
1074 BINARY DISPLAY
INo longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for display of process on-off conditions and other
on-off information received from the data processing system associated with a 1070 Process Communication System.
Highlights: Has ten pairs of lamps for display of on-off conditions
... each pair of lamps (one green, one amber) is individually addressable ... can be set -- green on, amber on, or both on ... error
lamp lights when 1071 detects improper data transmission ... each
pair of lamps may be labeled by the customer (lamp test feature
standard unit
provides simple visual check for faulty lamps)
operates from a 12 V DC power source to facilitate use with backup battery power.
PREREQUISITES: Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071, plus
available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ...
each pair of lamps uses one address assigned to Digital Output in
an I/O Switching Module.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-f621
bibliography.
Mdl
1074
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$
$1.275
$3.00
33
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
AC POWER SUPPLY (#8680. 8684. 86861.
For operation from
one of the following l-phase. 60 Hz power sources -- #8680 for
115 V. #8684 for 208 V, or #8686 for 230 V AC. (Locking plugs)
MAC/
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
AC Power Supply
115 V
208 V
230 V
#8680
8684
8686
$ 16
15
15
Purchase MMMC
$ 689
689
689
$1.50
1.50
1.50
FIC
$40
38
38
1075 DECIMAL DISPLAY
[No longer available ...
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 68
$2.615
$6.00
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
AC POWER SUPPLY (#8680. 8684. 8686).
For operation from
one of the following l-phase. 60 Hz power sources -- #8680 for
115 V, #8684 for 208 V, or #8686 for 230 V AC. (Locking plugs)
ADDITIONAL DISPLAY MODULE (#3348).
Four additional
display positions. Note: Requires four additional addresses assigned to Digital Output in an I/O Switching Module.
MAC/
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
AC Power Supply
115 V
#8680
208 V
8684
230 V
8686
Add'l Display Module
3348
$ 16
15
15
38
Purchase MMMC
$ 689
689
689
1.485
$1.50
1.50
1.50
3.00
FIC
$ 40
38
38
26
or specific system
Specify: Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use 1070 Cable
Order Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1074-1072) and (b)
lenght of Data cable (1074-junction with Display Attachment cable)
for each 1074 ordered. NOTE: Address cable is a special cable,
purchased at $1.15 per foot and installed by the customer. Data
cable is a special cable, purchased at $1.90 per foot and installed
by the customer.
PRICES:
or specific system
orders are on an "as available" basis]
1076 MANUAL BINARY INPUT
I No longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for operator entry of on-off conditions to a data
processing system associated with a 1070 Process Communication
System.
Highlights: Has ten 2-position switches for entry of on-off data.
each switch is individually addressable ... position of switch reeach switch position may be labeled by the
mains as last set
customer ... an execute button requests associated processor
attention ... an execute lamp informs the operator that a transaction
has been completed.
PREREQUISITE: Available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ... each switch position and the execute button uses
one address assigned to Digital Input in an I/O Switching Module.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
Specify: Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use 1070 Cable
Order Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1076-1072) and (b)
length of Data cable (1076-junction with Digital Input Channel
cable) for each 1076 ordered. Note: Address cable is a special
cable, purchased at $1.15 per foot and installed by the customer.
Data cable is a special cable. purchased at $1.90 per foot and
installed by the customer.
PRICES:
Mdl
1076
1
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purpose: Unit for display of decimal information received from a
data processing system associated with a 1070 Process Communication System.
Highlights: Displays four decimal digits as determined by the data
four
processing system ... each digit is individually addressable
additional digits can be added (see "Special Features").
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 29
$ 3.50
$1.120
Purchase Option: 50% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
M 1077 - 1078
Mav 79
DP Machines
1077 MANUAL DECIMAL INPUT
[No longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for operator entry of decimal data to a data processing system associated with a 1070 Process Communication System.
Highlights: Has six switches for entry of six decimal digits of
information ... each switch is individually addressable ... position of
switch remains as last set ... each switch position may be labeled
by the customer ... an execute button requests associated processor attention ... an execute lamp informs the operator that a
transaction has been completed.
PREREQUISITE: Available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ... each switch position and the execute button uses
one address assigned to Digital Input in an I/O Switching Module.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Specify: Cables (when ordered from IBM): Use 1070 Cable Order
Form -- (a) length of Address cable (lP77-1072) and (b) length of
Data cable (1077 -junction with Digital Input Channel cable) for each
1077 ordered. Note: Address cable is a special cable, purchased at
$1.15 per foot and installed by the customer. Data cable is a
special cable, ·purchased at $1.90 per foot and installed by the
customer.
PRICES:
Mdl
1077
1
Plan Offerin9: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 31
$ 3.50
$1,185
Pyrchase Option: 50% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
1078 PULSE COUNTER
[No longer available ...
orders are on an "as available" basis]
Purpose: Unit for counting events or rates represented by pulses
or switch closures for up to 180 customer input devices in a 1070
Process Communication System.
Highlights: Provides for up to 180 five-position pulse counters ...
pulse rates of up to 30 per second ... continuous parity checking of
each counter position .. , up to 18 (6 standard) scan groups provide
variable length read-out control ... pulse duration and telemetered
pulse duration options with selectable resolution ... counters are
ordered in groups of ten ... counters may be read by the system in
predetermined groups, or Read and/or Reset using programmable
addressing for greater flexibility .,. see "Special Features."
PREREQUISITES: Multi-character Input (#5185) on the 1071, plus
available I/O Switching Module (#4663) addresses on a 1072 ...
each 1078 uses one 1072 address assigned to Digital Input and at
least one 1072/1073 in which Input Terminations are ordered as
special features.
Maximum: Depends upon number of available addresses in I/O
Switching Modules (#4663) on 1072s.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, l-phase, 60 Hz): Locking plug -- #9880
for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V, unless DC
Power Supply Adapter (#3217, 3218) is ordered ... see "Special
Features."
[2] Cables (when purchased from IBM): Use 1070 Cable Order
Form -- (a) length of Address cable (1078-1072) ... (b) length of
Data cable (1078-junction with Digital Input Channel cable) ... (c)
lenght of second Data cable if Selective Read / Reset (#6050)
and/ or Consecutive Read/Reset (#6051) are ordered (1078junction with Display Attachment Features cable) for each 1078.
Note: Address cable and Data cable are special cables, purchased at $1.90 per foot and installed by customer.
PRICES:
Mdl
1078
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$249
$10.00
$8,220
Pulse Duration -- accumulates duration of input pulses or switch
closures at a resolution of 107 or 10.7 pulses per second.
Note: Pulse Duration (#58681 is required to use this mode.
Resolution is assigned at time of installation.
Pulse Duration Telemetry -- alternately accumulates the duration
0"1' each pulse or switch closure in two counters ... thus the
last complete pulse duration value is preserved ... resolutIon of
107 or 10.7 pulses per second. Note: Pulse Duration (#5868)
and Pulse Duration Telemetry (#5869) are required to use this
mode .. Resolution is assigned at time of installation ... each
pulse duration telemetry input uses two 5-position pulse
counters.
Maximum: 18 per 1078, counter groups may be assigned to the
three input modes in any combination.
DC POWER SUPPLY ADAPTER (#3217, 32181. For operation of
the 1078 from + 12 or +24 V DC power to permit use with backup
battery power. #3217 -- for +24 V ... #3218 -- for +12 V. FIT: 1
hr.
PULSE DURATION (#5868). Causes all counter groups assigned
to the pulse duration mode to accumulate 107 or 10.7 counts per
second during the time corresponding customer inputs are actuated. Either counting rate (107 or 10.7 counts/second) is selected for
all pulse duration counters at time of installation.
.
PULSE DURATION TELEMETRY (#5869).
Causes all counter
groups assigned to the pulse duration telemetry mode to accumulate, alternately in two consecutive counters, 107 or 10.7 counts
per second during the time corresponding customer inputs are
actuated. Counting rate depends upon Pulse Duration (#5868)
setting. Each counter is limited to 4 digits with this feature. the
fifth position is used as a flag. Prerequisite: Pulse Duration
(#5868).
READ/RESET, SELECTIVE (#60501. For selecting a single pulse
counter to request either a readout or a reset operation. Provides
access to the 3-digit counter address register (000 to 179) and a
l-digit function control register in the 1078. A control digit "2" sent
to the function control register will reset the counter specified in
the counter address register. No control digit is required for a
readout operation. The possible 4-digit output control messages
require four 1072 addresses assigned to Digital Output mode and
the Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071. Input data from the
1078 is accepted via a 1072 address assigned to Digital Input
mode. Prerequisites: Display Attachment (#3345) on the 1071 and
five 1072 addresses, four assigned to Digital Output and one to
Digital Input.
READ/RESET, CONSECUTIVE 1#60511.
Used in conjunction
with Selective Read/Reset (#6050) to permit program addressable
groups of pulse counters to be read or reset. Provides access to
the 3-digit "Stop" address register to receive an ending pulse
counter address which stops the operation after its initiation at the
Selective Read / Reset start address. Two additional functions are
added to the function control register ... a "1" digit establishes the
consecutive readout mode for the next read operation only ... a "4"
digit resets those counters specified, from the start address
through the stop address. Prerequisites: Selective Read / Reset
(#6050) and three 1072 addresses assigned to Digital Output.
SCAN GROUPS (#6370). A module of six groups which provide
variable length readout of 1078 counters. Each scan group defines
a start and stop address selected at time of installation ... basic
1078 includes six Scan Groups. Maximum: Two ... 12 additional
Scan Groups. Prerequisite: One 1072 address assigned to Digital
Input for each Scan Group.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
Counters, group of 10 #2410
DC Power Supply Adapter
for +24 volts
3217
for + 12 volts
3218
Pulse Duration
5868
Pulse Duration, Tlmty 5869
Read/Reset, Selective 6050
6051
Read/Reset, Con sec
Scan Grps, module of 6 6370
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
COUNTERS (#24101. A group of ten 5-position counters ... each
group of ten counters is assigned to anyone of the following input
modes at time of installation:
Pulse Count -- accumulates number of input pulses or switch
closures.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$ 5
10
10
10
10
31
11
5
$
FIC
169
$ .25
$ 4
423
423
423
343
1,025
465
204
1.50
1.50
1.00
.25
1.50
.25
.25
55
55
26
18
3
3
9
------- --------
- ':' =
===
M 1201
May 79
DP Machines
1201 PROOF INSCRIBER
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purcha..
MMMC
[No longer available ... features, model conversions, RPQs and
accessories are not affected.]
1201
1
A1
B1
2
A2
B2
3
B3
4
B4
$ 419
385
347
410
372
333
385
347
372
333
$11,880
11,880
11,880
11,340
11,340
11,340
10,280
10,280
9,720
9.720
$99.50
99.50
99,50
93.50
93.50
93.50
85.50
85.50
80.00
80,00
Purpose: Performs all functions, except subtraction, of an 803
Proof Machine '" plus document inscribing.
Models: Models with or without endorsing and variuos pocket
capacities are available, as follows:
Number of Pocket.
Model
E~ng
Operative
Inoperative
Yes
Yes
Yea
1-32
1-24
1-16
None
25-32
17-32
2
A2
82
No
No
No
1-32
1-24
1-16
None
25-32
17-32
3
83
4
84
Yea
Yes
No
No
1-24
1-16
1-24
1-16
None
17-24
None
17-24
1
A1
81
Selector Key Arrangement
4 rows of 8
4 rows of 6, or 3 'rows of 8
2 rowa of 8, or 2 rowa of 6,
plus 1 row of 4
4 rows of 8
4 rowa of 6, or 3 rows of 8
2 rows of 8, or 2 rowa of 8,
plus 1 row of 4
4 rows of 6
2 rows of 6, plus 1 row of 4
4 rows of 6
2 rows of 6, plus 1 row of 4
Model Changes: Changes from endorsing to non-endorsing models, and vice versa, can be made between the following models: 1
and 2 ... Al and A2 ... Bl and B2 ... 3 and 4 ... B3 and B4. For
other changes, see Branch Manager Letter 348.
Highlights: List, distribute, prove, inscribe, and (mdls 1 and 3)
endorse checks, deposit slips, batch control slips and similiar
documents in one operation. Each pocket holds about 150 documents. See 803 for proof machine functions. Intermixed card and
paper documents within the following specifications can be inscribed: Length - 6" to 8-3/4" (paper) or 4.852" to 8-3/4"
(card) ... Width - 2-3/4" to 3-2/3" ... Thickness - .003" to
.007".
Inec:rlblng - recommendations of the American Bankers Association are used. Two fields can be inscribed in magnetic ink on face
of documents in a 1/4" band parallel to and 3/16" up from
bottom edge. Spaced 8 characters/inch, starting approximately
5/16" from right edge. Type font is E13B. Fields are, from right
to left: Amount - set up on adding keyboard and Inscribed as ten
digits bracketed by amount symbol ... Process Control - established by setting levers mounted in top cover of machine and
inscribed adjacent to amount. Used to Identify types of transactions or batches of work. Distribution pocket totals, as well as
process control codes, can be inscribed on control slips during
compartment total printing operations. NOTE: If desired, up to four
process control positions are supplied at no charge ... see
"Specify."
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 50%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
PROCESS CONTROL, ADO'L (#5701, 5702). Up to four digits
are standard ... see "Specify" above. Up to two add'i digits can
be installed. #5701 - for fifth digit ... #5702 - for sixth.
Prerequisite: For #5701 - #9193 ... for #5702 - #5701.
Special Feature Prlc..:
MAC/
MRC Purcha.. MMMC
Proc... Control, Add'i
fifth digit
#5701
sixth digit
5702
$ 5
5
$ 20e
20e
$1,00
1.00
FIC
$77
5
Acc..eorles: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis for mdls 1, A.l, Bl, 3 and B3 only. For shipment with machine, order the desired Feature # indicated below at the price
listed in M 10000 pages.
Endorser Plate (#3792).
Blank Endorser Plate (#3793).
Note: When ordering #3792, It is recommended that at least
one spare plate be stocked, as they cannot be immediately
replaced .
See M 10000 pages for description, ordering instructions and field
Installation.
Endo"ln~
- endorsing models can endorse documents with date,
identification numbers and bank's legal endorsement. The Endorser Plate is made to the customer's specifications. See
"Accessories" below. A Blank Endorser Plate is also available if
only partial endorsements are required. When ordering #3792
attach Endorser Plate Specification fi! 1feu 18"~... not required
for #3793.
Control Panel - has hubs for Inscribe Suppress and Process
Control Suppress, plus hubs for all 803 functions.
Supplies:
Magnetic Transfer Ribbon and
Endorsing Roll. Each magnetic transfer ribbon provides about
13,300 line impressions.
Manuals: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G32Q1621.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, l-phase, 60 Hz, locking plug): #9880
for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
[2] Process Control: If desired, #9190 for 1 position, #9191 for
2, #9192 for 3, or #9193 for 4 ... number of positions can be
changed or eliminated
[3] Endorsing (mdls 1, A1, Bl, 3, B3 only): See "Endorsing"
under "Highlights."
[4] Selector Key Arrangement: Mdls Al, A2 - #9771 for 4 rows
of 6 keys, or #9772 for 3 rows of eight keys. Mdls Bl, B2 #9773 for 2 rows of 8 keys, or #9774 for 2 rows of 6 keys
plus 1 row of 4 keys.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -- ----- -- ----
---- ----
M 1203
May 79
DP Machines
1203 UNIT INSCRIBER
[No longer available ... features, RPQs and accessories are not
affected.]
Purpo..: Key-operated machine for printing numerals and special
symbols on checks and other documents in magnetic ink ... combined with functions of an adding machine.
Highlights: Continuous high-speed proving possible with a 10-key
electric adding machine which prints individual amounts and totals
on a paper tape. At the same time, document can be inscribed
with an amount field, a process control field, and be fully or partially
endorsed
and
serial
numbered
see
Serial
Numbering/Endorsing (#3791) under "Special Features."
Speed depends upon operator and type of work processed. Has
one stacker and one 1O-position net balance accumulator which
accumUlates ll-position totals. Storage space provided for documents which cannot be processed. Intermixed card and paper
documents within the following specifications can be inscribed:
length - 6" to 8-3/4" (paper) or 4.852" to 8-3/4" (card) ...
Width - 2-3/4" to 3-2/3" ... Thickness - .003" to .007".
Inscribing - recommendations of American Bankers Association
are used. Two fields can be inscribed in magnetic ink on face of
documents in a 1/4" band parallel to and 3/16" up from bottom
edge. Spaced 8 characters/inch, starting approximately 5/16"
from right edge. Type font is E13B. Fields are, from right to left:
Amount - set up on adding keyboard and inscribed as ten digits
bracketed by amount symbol ... Process Control - established by
setting knobs in top cover of machine, inscribed adjacent to
amount field as one to four digits. Used to identify types of transactions or batches of work. Machine total and process control
codes can also be inscribed on control slips during total printing
operations. NOTE: If desired, up to four process control poSitions
are supplied at no charge ... see "Specify."
Document Counter - a six position counter ... reset manually.
Supplies:
Magnetic Transfer Ribbon,
Disposable Ink Roll, Adding Machine Unit Ribbon and Adding
Machine Paper Roll. Each MagnetiC Transfer Ribbon provides
about 13,300 impreSSions.
attach Endorser Plate Specification
for #3793.
not required
NON-ZERO BALANCE TEST (#5350). Depression of Sub-total
Key automatically locks keyboard if accumulated total is not zero.
PROCESS CONTROL, ADO'l (#5701, 5702). Up to four digits
are standard ... see "Specify" above. Up to two add'i digits can
be installed. #5701 - for fifth digit ... #5702 for sixth digit.
Prerequlslt..: For
#5761 - #9193 ... for #5702 - #5701.
TRANSIT NUMBER FIELD INSCRIBER (#8020).
Transit-Routing numbers. dash and transit symbols.
Special Feature Prlc..:
MAC/
MRC Purcha.. MMMC
Acct No. Field Inscribe #1012
Serial Number /Endor.. 3791
Non-zero Balance Test 5350
Proc..s Control, Add'i
fifth digit
5701
sixth digit
5702
Transit Number Field
Inscriber
8020
$2.00
6.50
2.00
5
5
174·
174
1.00
1.00
52
52
20
505
3.00
316tt
Endor..r Plate (#3792).
Blank Endoreer Plate (#3793).
NOTE: When orderins #3792, it is recommended that at least one spare
plate be stocked, as they cannot be immediately replaced.
See M 10000 pages for description, ordering instructions, and
field installation.
[2] Process Control: If desired, #9190 for 1 digit, #9191 for 2,
#9192 for 3, or #9193 for 4 ... number of positions can be
changed or eliminated
1203
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purcha..
MMMC
$ 169
$4,140
$ 70
Purchase Option: 50%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
ACCOUNT NUMBER FIELD INSCRIBER (#1012).
Inscribes a
fixed-length account number and "On-Us" symbols. Field can be
anyone length from 5 10 10 digits, as specified by customer.
Specify: #9210 for 5 digits. #9211 for 6,
#9212 for 7, #9213 for 8, #9214 for 9, or #9215 for 10.
SERIAL NUMBERING/ENDORSER (#3791). Imprints full or partial endorsement and serial number. Endorsement prints fixed
distance (about 1-1/4") from bottom of document. Operator can
select left or right horizontal printing position. Serial number
consists of 4 automalic advancing positions separated from 2
manually-set positions by a seiectabie blank or dash. Serial number advance available In anyone of the following options: [1]
Advance one digit on credit feed (subtract key depression) ... [2]
Advance one digit on zero balance test (sub-total key depression)
... [3] Advance one digit on each document feed ... [4] Advance
one digit on manual key control. Advancing method will be set by
CE at installation or as required subsequently by customer. With
this feature, documents can be endorsed with date, identification
number and bank's legal endorsement. The etched Endorser Plate
is made to the customer's specifications. See "Accessories"
below. A Blank Endorser Plate is also available if only partial
endorsements are required.
Note: The old Endorser on 1203s shipped prior to July 1, 1964 may be changed to
the new feature by ordering #3791. A new Endorser Plate must
also be ordered. On purchased machines, the new feature may be
substituted for the old one at no charge except for the Field Installation Charge and price of the new Endorser Plate ... see
"Accessories" below and M 10000 pages. When ordering #3792
$276t
106
39
Accesaorl..: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the desired Feature #
indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): locking plug - #9880
for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock
plug - #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230
V.
Mdl
FIC
$20 $ 505
20
413
180
5
Manuals: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
PRICES:
Inscribes
t s135 if #8020 is already installed.
tt $174 if #1012 is already installed.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ ---------:E:::': =~5:
M 1230 - 1231
Mav 79
DP Machines
1230 OPTICAL MARK SCORING READER
Purpoee: Used to score objective t88ts or questlonalres.
Hlghllghta: Positionally marked test forma. questlonares. surveys.
etc.. are automatically scored at a rated speed of 1.200
documents/hour. Scores are digitally accumulated for number of
right, wrong or omitted answers. Scores are printed on right
margin of answer sheets In one of two operator selected positions.
The unit has solid state circuits. It optically reads ordinary #2
pencil marks and marks made by a 1403 Printer. a 1443 Printer
mdl 1 or 2 with a 52- or 63-character type bar with arrangements
A. H or K, a 1443 mdl N1 or 2203 mdl A1 with a 52- or 63character type bar, or a 5203 Printer. The 1403/5203 print chain
or train or the 1443/2203 type bar must be equipped with an
enlarged dash which replaces the standard dash. See "Type
Catalog." Double threshold recognition distinguishes between
marks and erasures.
A correctly marked answer sheet Is used to store correct responses and program controls Internally. Answer sheets are fed from a
pneumatically controlled hopper with a 600-sheet capacity,
through the scoring area, and directed to one of two stackers. The
main stacker has a capacity of 600 answer sheets. 8heets with
detected errors are directed to a separate stacker with a 50-sheet
capaCity. Answer sheets are stacked In reverse sequence In both
stackers.
Answer Sheets - 8-1/2" x 11" ... up to 1,000 response positions
printed on a side ... 2,000 poSitions when printed on both sides.
Preprinted response positions are printed In rows of 20 positions.
Each row is divided Into two 1o-posltion groups. Each 10-p0sltlon
group is called a word for the purpose of defining an answer area.
The maximum of 100 words per answer sheet can be divided Into
various combinations of scorable parts. The answer sheet can
accommodate a maximum of 400 two-part questions ... 200 three-,
four- or flve-parl questions ... or 100 slx- to ten-part questions.
Successive words can be designated for Identification number as
necessary to accommodate customer requirements. When an
Identification number Is used on a tw~lded answer sheet. It must
be marked on both sides.
SUDDlI..: An electric typewriter ribbon (1136238)
or Its equivalent, Is used for printing scores.
For printing marks, use IBM ribbon 1136430 or 1136940 on the
1403 (all mdls). 422536 on the 1443/2203, 1136990· on the
5203, or equivalent ribbons capable of producing acceptable
marks.
Acceaaory: A Hand Punch (171787) is available for punching
scoring keys to manually score mutilated answer sheets ... see
IRD sales manual.
Manuala: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G32o1621.
Specify: [11 Voltage -<115 V AC 1'1-phase. 60 Hz): #9880 for
locklng prug, or #11881 for nOlHOCk plug.
[2] Kickstrips: #9431 ... field installable. When kickatrlps are
installed. the open area under the machine is enclosed. This
reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the operator and may be
inconvenient to the customer If the power outlet Is located
under the machine.
MAC/
PRICES:
Mdl
MRC
Purch...
MMMC
1230
1
• 238
148.50
'12,080
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Warranty: B
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#1620). To cable-connect a 534
Card Punch mdl 3 for punching Identification number, part scores,
and Item responses Into a standard 8O-column card. All Information to be punched Is stored as bits In a sonic delay line storage
unit until transfarred to the card punr.h. The duplicating. feature of
the punch can be used to duplicate common data such ss date,
school number, test number. etc. Into all the cards. Up to 42
columns of data may be punched while maintaining a throughput
of 1,200 sheets/hour. Throughput decreases progressively as the
number of columns .punched increases. Throughput Is approximately 750 sheets/hour when punching 80 columns of data.
When not used with the 1230. the 534 can ba used as an independent card punch ... see 534 for details.
COUNTER, FORMULA (#2398). An additional counter which can
be controlled to add, subtract and transfer its contents to the
standard counter. Can be programmed to accumulate Rights,
Wrongs, or Rights minus (N) Wrongs. where N can be equal to 1,
1/4, 1/3 or 1/2. Also provid88 tor counting as right answers as
many responses (up to five) to a test Item as have been program• Available via price request
med as possible right answers to the Item. M6xlmum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be Installed with Counter, RWO (#2399).
COUNTER, RWO (#23"). An additional counter which can be
controlled to count the number of Rights, or Wrongs, or Omits,
and transfer its contents to the standard counter. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be Installed with Counter, Formula (#2398).
10 FIELD CHECKING (#4808).
Provides the capability of checkIng words In the identification field for one of the following conditions: blank, multi-marks, or other than one mark. 10 field Is defined as all words programmed to read prior to first end of field
mark. No scoring of test answers can take place In the 10 field.
, Prerequlalte: Card Punch Attachment (#1620).
STORAGE (#7467). Used as intermediate buffering device which
ailows the counter to be cleared immediately after completion of a
part score ... permits the counter to be reused for additional
scorlna without sacrificing answer sheet space. Maximum: One.
MAC/
Special F..ture PriceS:
MRC Purchase MMMC
#1620 $129 $6,185
$3.00
Card Punch Attach
2398
42
2,485
4.00
Counter, Formula
21
1,240
4.00
Counter, RWO
23"
7
1.00
10 Field Checking
4808
321
1,240
2.50
Storage
7467
21
FIC
• 52
66
52
29
52
1231 OPTICAL MARK PAGE READER
Purpo..: Reads marked data from 8-1/2" x 11" data sheets
directly Into a 1401 (except A or H mdls), 1440 (except with 1441
mdl A2), 1480 or 8/380 mdl 22, 25. 30, 40 or 50.
NOTE: For use with the 1130 system, see G8D
' manual.
Model 1 For use with 1401, 1440 or 1460.
Model N1 For use with 8/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40 or 50.
Model Chang..: Cannot be made In the field.
Hlghllghta: Data sheets are fed from a pneumatically controlled
hopper with a 600-sheet capaCity. through the reading area, and
directed to one of two stackers. The main stacker has a capacity
of 600 sheets. Sheets with detected errors are directed to a
separate stacker with a 50-sheet capacity. Documents are stacked
In reverse sequence in both stackers.
Data to be read can be placed on data sheets with ordinary #2
pencils, or by a 1403 Printer. a 1443 Printer mdl 1 or 2 with a
52- or 63-character type bar with arrangement A, H or K, a 1443
mdl 1 or 2203 mdl A1 with a 52- or 63-character type bar, or a
5203 Printer. The 1403/5203 print chain or train or the
1443/2203 type bar must be equipped with an enlarged dash
which replaces the stanQard dash. See "Type Catalog."
1401, 1440, 1460 - documents are read at varying speeds,
dependent updn the mode switch setting. When set to
"Continuous," feeding is at a constant speed of 2,000
documents/hour. When set to "Demand," feeding Is controlled by
computer program. with speeds varying up to 1,600
documents/hour. The feeding mode selected depends upon the
computer program control method used. The 1231 mdl 1 can be
located up to 25 feet from the proceaaor.
S/360 - documents can be read at a maximum constant rate of
2,000 documents/hour. Actual throughput depends upon computer
programming. Sheets are fed upon command from the computer.
Data is transferred to the processor by operation of the channel to
which the 1231 is attached.
Data TranamlHlon:
1401, 1440, 1460 - all marks read from a data sheet are stored
as bits in a sonic delay line storage unit until transferred to the
proce;sor by execution of a read Instruction. Less than 10 milliseconds are required to transfer data from the delay line to
proceaaor storage.
S/360 - marks read from the data sheet are stored in the 1231
mdl N1 by word and are transferred to the proceaaor by operation of the channel to which the 1231 Is attached.
Data Sheets - 8-1/2" x 11" ... up to 1,000 mark poSitions printed on a side ... 2,000 positions when printed on both sides.
Preprinted mark positions are printed in rows of 20 positions.
Each row is divided Into two 1o-position groups. Each 1o-posltion
group is called a word for the purpose of defining a marking area.
Each word can be divided Into two 5-positlon segments. Data
words and segments can be grouped In various combinations to
form fields for recording the source data..
PREREQUISITES:
For 1401, 1440, 1460 - a Serial I/O Adapter (#7080) on the
1401 or 1441 Processing Unit ... In a 1401, diagnostic programs
require at least 4,000 poSitions of core storage.
For S/360 - up to four 1231 mdl N1s can be attached to a
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ---------
M 1231 - 1232
May 79
== =-= == ';' ==
DP Machines
1231 Optical Mark Page Reader (cont'd)
system ... each requires a channel control unit position.
S/360 mdl 25 - special feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel,
or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 - standard multiplexer channel, or
Selector Channels (special features, except on 20;12 one sel~c-.
tor channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
[NOTE: If the 1231 is attached to a multiplexer channel, special
consideration must be given to priority.]
Limitation.:
S/360 mdl 25, 30 - operation of 1231s is not included under
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility Features.
S/360 mdl 40 - operation of 1231s is not included under the
1401/1460 Compatibility Feature (#4457).
SupD!I. .: For printing marks, use IBM ribbon 1136430 or
1136940 on the 1403 (all models), 422536 on the 1443/2203,
1136990' on the 5203, or equivalent ribbons capable of producing acceptable marks.
Bibliography: 1401/1480 - GA24-1495, 1440 - GA24-3OO5,
S/360 - GC20-0360.
Spaclfy: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V, or
#9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color (mdl N1 only): #9041 lor red, #9042 lor yellow, #9043
lor blue, #9045 for gray, or #9048 lor white.
[3] Kickstrips: #9431 ... field Installable. When klckslrips are
installed, the open area under the machine is enclosed. This
reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the operator and may be
inconvenient to the customer if the power outlet is located
under the machine.
[4] Isolation Feature: May be required on units shipped prior to
December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Fealures."
MAC/
Mdl
MRC
Purcha..
MMMC
1231
1
$ 465
$20,520
$ 4'1
Nl
549
23,760
54
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45% Maintenance: C
Metering: I/O Unit (online)
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [For field installation only
on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped alter that] To turn po~er on Of off on the 1231 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power Is turned off,
can continue operating. Prerequisite:
In all cases there are
compatib,e EC level requirements,
PRICES:
MASTER MARK (#5045). A master d.ata sheet, containing up to
10 words of marked data, can be read by the 1 231. The master'
data sheet is identified by a special preprinted mark and contains
data that is to be associated with all subsequent data sheets until
a new master sheet Is read. Thus, data common to a series of
data sheets need be recorded and read only once. When used
with a 1401. 1440 or 1460. the 1231 mdl 1 stores master mark
data on the sonic delay line and transfers the data with the data
for each subsequent detail sheet ... when used with a S/360, the
1231 mdl N1 transfers master mark data only one time, as it is
being read from the master mark sheet:
MAC/
Spacial Feature Prlc..:
MRC Purch... MMMC FIC
leoIatJon, Control Unit #4700
NC
NC
NC
NC
Master Mark
5045 $ 54
$2,225 $1.50 $ 77
1232 OPTICAL MARK PAGE READER
Purpo..: Reads marked data from 8-1/2" x 11" data sheets into
a 534 Card Punch mdl 3 for punched card output.
PREREQUISITE: A 534 Card Punch mdl 3.
Hlghllghta: Data sheets are fed from a pneumatically controlled
hopper with a 600-sheet capacity. through the reading area, and
directed to one of two stackers. The main stacker has a capacity
of 600 sheets. Sheets with detected errors are directed to a
separate stacker with a 50-sheet capacity. Documents are stacked
in reverse sequence in both stackers.
Data to be read can be placed on data sheets with ordinary #2
pencil, or by a 1403 Printer. a 1443 Printer mdl 1 or 2 with a 52or 63-character type bar with arrangement A, H or K, a 1443 mdl
Nl or 2203 mdl A1 with a 52- or 63-character type bar, or a 5203
Printer. The 1403/5203 print chain or train, or 1443/2203 type
bar must be equipped with an enlarged dash which replaces the
standard dash. See "Type Catalog."
A 534 Card Punch mdl 3 is cable-connected to the 1232 to Runch
data read from the data sheets. Ali marks read from II document
are stored as bits In a sonic delay line storage unit until transferred to the card punch. The duplicating feature of the card punch
can be used to duplicate common information into a group of
cards. When not used with the 1232, the 534 can be used as an
independent card punch ... see 534 for details.
Documents are read at Varying rates of speed, depending upon
how many card columns 'are punched into a card. Throughput
ranges from approximately 850 to 2,000 documents/hour.
Data Sheet. - 8-1/2" x 11" ... up to 1,000 mark positions printed on a side ... 2,000 positions when printed on both sides. Preprinted mark positions are printed in rows of 20 positions. Each
row is divided into two 1o-posiijon groups. Each 10-position group
is called a word lor the purpose of defining a marking area. If
Segmented Word (#6405) is instailed. each word can be divided
into two 5-position segments. Data words and segments can be
grouped into various combinations to form fields for recording the
source data.
Sup!)lIe.: For printing marks, use IBM ribbon 1136430 or
1136940 on the 1403 (ali models), 422536 on the 1443/2203,
1136990· on the 5203, or eauivalent ribbons capable of producing acceptable marks.
Manuals: See "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G32o1621.
Spaclfy: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lOCk plug.
[2] Kickstrips: #9431 ... field Installable. When kickstrlps are
Installed. the open area under the machine is enclosed. This
reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the operator and may be
inconvenient to the customer if the power outlet is located
under the machine.
MACI
Purcha..
MMMC
MRC
$353
$14,400
$60.50
Purchase Option: 45% Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
MASTER MARK (#5045). A master data sheet, containing up to
1 0 words of marked data. can be read and stored on the delay
line for punching into output cards. The information read from the
master sheet is retained on the delay line until a new master data
sheet Is read. The master data sheet is identified by a special
preprinted mark and contains data that is to be associated with all
subsequent data sheets until a new master sheet is read. Thus,
data common to a series of data sheets need be recorded and
read only once.
MULTIPLE SPREAD CARD (#5262).
For punching up to four
cards for each data sheet read. Each card will be numbered sequentially by a punch in column 1. Any or all of the following can
be punched Into each card: master sheet data [if Master Mark
(#5045) is installed] ... page or identification data ... and a portion of the detail data from the data sheet in spread card form.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Unit Record
Card (#8580).
SEGMENTED WORD (#6405). For punching data from a word or
segment into a single card column. A two-position mode switch
marked "Segment" and "Word" controls mode of operation. When
set to "Segment," marks in postions 0 thru 4 are punched in one
card column and marks in postion 5 thru9. are punched in the
next card column. When set to "Word," m&n<:s in positions 0 thru
9 are punched in one card. column.
UNIT RECORD CARD (#8580). For punching a separate card for
each field on the data sheet. Cards will be punched only for those
fields containing marks. Each card can contain: master sheet data
[if Master Mark (#5045) is installed] ... identification data (page
number, order number, selesman's number, etc.) ... field number
(to identify item) ... and marked detail data (quantity, etc.).
.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Multiple Spreao
Card (#5262).
PRICES:
Mdl
1232
Plan Offering: Pian B
Warranty: B
MAC/
Spacial F.ature Prlca.:
MRC Purcha.e MMMC FIC
Ma.ter Mark
#5045 $ 54
$2,225
$2.00
$77
Multiple Spread Card
5262
32
1,330
2.00
44
32
1,330
1.00
21
Segme"ted Word
8405
Unit Record Card
8580
42
1,775
2.00
44
Document Inspactlon Gauge: One is furnished with each 1 230,
1 231 or 1232 as a Customer Engineering tool. Used for checking
printing alignment on data sheets.
additional gauges
(628848).
• Avail.ble via price request
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--------- --- - - -- --==::..: == ';' ==
M 1255.1
May 79
DP Machines
1255 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER
Purpose: Sorts documents, used in banking and other applications, meeting specifications under "Highlights" below. Available
as a stand alone sorter, or with an appropriate attachment feature,
reads magnetic character data into a 2770 system in home or line
mode, into a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 50, a S/370 mdl 115
thru 158, 3031 Processor, or a 4331 or 4341 Processor.
For use with System/3, System/32, System/34 and S/360 mdl
20, see GSD
manual.
Model 1
Reads and/or sorts up to 500 six-inch documents
per minute into six stackers.
Model 2
Reads and/or sorts up to 750 six-inch documents
per minute into six stackers.
Model 3
Reads and/or sorts up to 750 six-inch documents
per minute into twelve stackers.
Model Changes: Field installable only between mdl 1 and mdl 2.
Highlights: Actual sorting and processing speeds depend upon
length of document, paper quality, atmospheric conditions, and/or
2772 terminal and transmission limitations, or host system limitations. Reads all fields and sorts on any field.
Uses a new, lower cost, single gap MICR reading technique,
providing MICR capabilities for smaller volume operations. Reading
performances may differ from other reader sorters. Pre-installation
runs of actual documents are strongly recommended to determine
expected performance. The input hopper holds 5-1/2" of documents in a\gravity feed permitting non-stop feeding. Models 1 and
2 each have six horizontal stackers in one vertical bay, while
model 3 has twelve horizontal stackers arranged in two vertical
bays of six stackers each. Individual stackers have a document
capacity of 2-1/2". The transport mechanism opens for access to
the document path. An operator-resettable total document counter
is provided.
Designed for ease of operation and operator training. The operator panel, feed hopper and stackers are in a compact area for
operator convenience and minimum space requirements.
In addition to performing the basic modulus 10 or 11 checking
function, the self-checking number/improved recognition feature,
when installed and operative, is integrated with the MICR reading
circuitry to reduce account number rejects and substitutions. This
field is especially subject to folds, banding, and print specification
deviations. Rejects and character substitutions will be reduced in
proportion to the severity of document degradations, thus reducing
customer reconciliation expense.
Sorting -- for mdls 1 and 2, offline sorting uses five sort stackers
and one reject stacker for a two-phase digital sort. Phase 1 sorts
even digits, rejecting odd digits which are sorted in phase 2. This
conforms to the sort pattern of other six-stacker sorters and permits the start of phase 2 sorting without removing phase 1 documents from the stacker. If Alternate Sort Pattern (#9301) is specified, digits 0-4 sort in phase 1 and digits 5-9 sort in phase 2.
For mdl 3, one-phase sorting on digits 0-9 with rejects directed to
stacker "R" at top of first bay. Stacker "A" at top of second bay
is used to select items when the High Order Zero and Blank Column Selection feature is installed.
Online 2770 systems operation suspends sorting, automatically
alternating between two stackers on a stacker full condition, with
the rejecting of invalid documents.
Stacker selection is under program control when operating online
to a computer system.
Field Lengths -- the amount field and transit-routing field are fixed
length ... the process control field and serial number field are
variable length ... the account number field may be fixed or variable length. See "Specify" below.
Checking --' readability of each magnetic character and special
symbol, and the field length check on fixed-length fields, are
checked on all fields designated by the operator for reading into
the system or terminal in the online mode, or on all fields designated for checking in the offline mode. When attached to the
2770 system, error documents are automatically rejected by the
1255 and data is not transferred to the 2772 buffer.
MICR E13B Printing -- the type font, print quality, and code line
arrangement on the documents must meet the specifications recommended by the American Bankers Association Technical Committee on Check Handling. The specifications and related data are
available in booklets 147R3 and the Supplement to 147R3, both
of which are available at a nominal charge from thll American
Bankers Association, 1120 Connecticut Avenue NW, Washington,
D.C. 20036.
Documents -- intermixed paper and card documents (including
travelers checks) within the following specifications can be processed:
Width -- 2.5" to 4.25"
Length -- 5.75" to 8.875"
Thickness -- .003" to .007"
Paper Stock -- 20 lb. to 44 lb. (card stock)
Carrier documents, enclosing a non-proccessable item, up to
.013" in thickness may be processed.
Document Evaluation -- documents must be evaluated at least six
months prior to installation to determine whether the level of print
quality is acceptable to the customer, with time for corrective
action if necessary. Sub-standard E 1 3B quality may cause excessive rejects and character substitutions.
Transmission -- when used with the 2770 system, the 1255 reads
into the two 2772 buffers, automatically stopping and alternating
between buffers on a specified number of documents. Buffer
Expansion (#1490) is required on the 2772. The number of records (documents) held by the buffer is determined by the maximum record length for the fields selected for reading. The
records/buffer is set at 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12. The records/buffer may
be chnaged by the CE, but is not subject to customer control. In
online transmission and pretransmission verification operations,
reading characters in excess of the maximum record length specified causes an error condition. The following options are available:
Maximum Record Length
(including special symbols)
Records/buffer
53
41
30
24
20
4
6
8
10
12
Balance-List (#1470) facilitates pretransmission balancing to
batch total tickets of stacked batches. In Mode A, operating under
1255 speed limitations, the feature totals the Amount Field on
good items and prints the good item total, batch ticket total, and
derived difference on the 2770 system printer. In Mode B, under
2770 system printer speed limitations, good items are detail listed
with the same total cycles as Mode A. Documents are listed with
limited print editing and limited columnar formatting.
PREREQUISITES:
For 1255 -- all documents must be mechanically joggered prior to
each pass through the machine ... joggers are available from
commercial sources. A sorting tray is recommended.
For 2770 -- one 1255 can be attached to a 2770 system. 1255
Attachment (#9755) and Buffer Expansion (# 1490) are required
on the 2772 ... 2772 Adapter (#7850) is required on the 1255
itself. See "Special Features." For audit, maintenance, error
recovery and application procedures, the 2770 system must include a printer.
For S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50, as/370 mdl 115 thru 158,3031
Processor, or a 4331 or 4341 Processor -- one 1255 can be attached to a system ... requires a channel control unit position ... a
byte multiplexer channel is recommended. The 1255 should normally be the
highest priority
device on the channel.
System/360/370 Adapter (#6360) is required on the 1255 ... see
"Special Features." Direct Control (#3274) or External Interrupt
(#3895) is required on the processing unit. There are no special
features required on the 4341 Processor to attach the 1255. External
Signal (#3898) is required on the 3115, 3125, and the 4331
Processor.
S/360 mdl 25 -- special feature on the 2025: Multiplexer Channel, or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
cheannel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), External Signal (#3898) ... see 3115, 3125. On a 3115-0,
#9336 is required.
S/370 mdl 135 - multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channels (special features) ... see 3135.
S/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (special feature) '" see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multi-Iexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nc1 Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer Chf..1nels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
3031 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is standard),
block multiplexer channels( five are standard) ... see 3031.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--------- ---------= = = ':' =
M 1255.2
May 79
DP Machines
1255 Magnetic Character Reader
(cont'd)
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional), block mulliplexel
channel (optional).
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer
channels (2 are standard).
Limitations: For S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors -- the 1255 is
not supported by any 1400 or 7000 series compatibility features.
The 1255 is not supported by the Model 20 Compatibility Feature
(#7520) on the 3115, 3125.
Bibliography: 2770 -- GA24-3089, S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370
-- GC20-0001.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): Fore stand alone and
use with 2770 system; Locking plug -- #9880 for 115 V,
#9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V ... Non-lock plug -#9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230 V. For
use with S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors; #9902 for 208 V,
or #9904 for 230 V. Must be consistent with system voltage ...
specify code consistent with system/voltage for pre-system
installation.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Alternate Sort Pattern: #9301, if desired. Replaces the standard even/odd pattern with the 0-4/5-9 pattern. See "Sorting"
under "Highlights." May be chang~d in the field
[4] Account Number Field Length: Specify one # from the table
below. A fixed field length assures maximum processing accuracy. However, a variable field length may be specified in lieu
of a fixed length. Lenqth of the account field length may be
changed in the field
FIXED FIELD
LENGTH (positions)
ACCOUNT NUMBER
5
7
6
8
9
10
#9210 #9211 #9212 #9213 #9214 #9215
VARIABLE
LENGTH
FIELD
#9219
[5] Superior Reading Performance: Self-checking Number/ Improved Recognition (#7060) is recommended
see
"Highlights" above and "Special Features" below.
[6] Use with 2770: Transmission Code -- #976t" for EBCDIC, or
#9762 for ASCII ... must be consistent with 2772 code. May be
changed in the field
PREREQUISITE: 2772 Adapter
(#7850) ... see "Special Features" below.
[7] Use with S/360 mdls 22, 25, 30, 40, 50 or S/370 mdls 115
thru 158, a 3031 Processor, or a ,4331 or 4341 Processor -System/360/370 Adapter (#6360) is required ... see "Special
Features" below.
[8] Kickstrips: #9431, if desired. Field installable. NOTE. When
installed, the open area under the machine is enclosed. This
reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the operator and may be
inconvenient to the customer if the power outlet is located
under the machine.
PRICES:
1255
Mdl
1
2
3
MAC/
MRC
$
904
1,100
1,450
Purchase
MMMC
$35,460
40,590
55,260
$251
400
527
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online/Offline)
Maintenance: C
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40%
Per Call: 2
Useful Life Category: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
BALANCE-LIST (#1470).
[For use on 2770 system only] For
pre-transmission balancing of stacked document batches. Accumulates the total of good items, with or without detail listing ... a
batch total ticket initiates terminal printing of the good item lotal,
batch ticket total, and net difference. Invalid items are rejected. In
totaling mode. documents are checked for the maximum characters per document specified for transmission. In listing mode, a
different number of characters per document may be specified on
installation. In listing mode, selected fields are printed in document
order with limited print editing ... the amount field is right justified
with decimal insertion and high order zero suppression ... other
fields are left justified in columns tabulated on the terminal printer
... special symbols, except dashes and the right amount field
symbol, are indicated with substitute printer symbols. Selected
fields, other than the process control field, missing from the document causes fields to print in alternate columns. Limitation: The
feature is not operative during line transmission or fine sorting
operations. Prerequisites: 2772 Adapter (#7850) ... the 2770
system must include a printer or display unit. Field Installation:
Yes.
DASH SYMBOL TRANSMISSION (#3215).
dash symbol from transit field to storage. With symbol in storage,
the program can distinguish between duplicate foreign and U. S.
transit numbers. Field Installation: Yes.
51-COLUMN CARD SORTING (#4380).
Modell -- for reading
iJ.'nd sorting 51-column card documents. When installed, machine
speed is reduced to approximately 405 dpm for six-inch documents. For 51-column cards, speed is approximately 500 dpm.
Models 2 and 3 -- when installed, machine speed, is reduced to
approximately 605 dpm for six-inch documents. For 51-column
cards, speed is approximately 750 dpm. Note: For optimum performance on all models, card documents should be separated out
from standard size ABA documents on first pass operations. Field
Installation: Yes.
This perHIGH ORDER ZERO & BLANK SELECTION (#4520).
mits selection to pocket A of documents during a digit sort having
only blanks or zeros in the sort position and in all higher order
positions of the field. Limitation: Available on the mdl 3 only ...
operates offline only. Field Installationi Yes.
S/360/370 ADAPTER (#6360).
To attach the 1255 to the
Multiplexer Channel (#5248) on the 2025, 3115, 3125 or 4331, or
Ihestandard multiplexer channel on the 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050,
3135,3135-3,3138,3145,3145-3,3148,3155.3158.3031 or
4341. Field Installation: Yes.
t
'
SELF-CHECKING NUMBER/IMPROVED RECOGNITION (#7060).
For reducing rejects and substitutions caused by defects in the
account number field and for checking Modulus 10 or 11 selfcheck digit account numbers up to 10 positions long, including the
self-check digit and dashes. SL T pluggable card wiring determines
the modulus calculated and weighting factor for each digit. SLT
card is removed and inserted by the CE for customer wiring. An
operator panel on/off switch is the only customer control of the
feature. The self-check digit may be in any position, always using
a weighting factor of 1. Modulus 10 will check any weighting
factor 0 thru 9, summing the product digits, and checking for an
even multiple of 1 O.Modulus 11 will check any weighting factor,
summing the products and checking for either an even multiple of
11, or for a constant remainder of 4.
This feature, when installed and operative, replaces the basic
character substitution checking circuitry with the more accurate
modulus 10 or 11 checking circuitry while the account number
field is being read. Documents with marginal printing that might
normally be'· rejected as potential substitutions will be processed if
all characters pass the self-checking digit test, thus reducing the
chances of a reject. All account numbers that fail the selfchecking digit test will cause the document to reject, thus reducing the ,chances of a substitution. Since the account number field
is frequently subject to folds, banding, multilation and print specification deviations, rejects and substitutions will be reduced in
proportion to the severity of documnet degradation. Field
Installation: yes.
2772 ADAPTER (#7850). To attach the 125!do a 2772 Control
Unit. A switch (adjacent to the self-checking number switch) is
provided which permits listing documents previously rejected to
determine which field and which character caused the reject. Field
Instaliation:Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Balance-List
#1470 $ 75
$2,990 $ 7.00
Dash Symbol Transmis 3215
56SUC
35
NC
51-Column Card Sorting 4380
16
661
NC
High Order Zero &
Blank Selection
4520
33
1,315
5.00
S/360/370 Adapter
6360 506
19,800 37.00
Self Checking Number/
Improved Recognition 7060
54
2,135
2.50
2772 Adapter
7850
1,915
48
3.00
Transmits the E13B
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
FIC
$ 343
21
93
157
1,255
173
323
-------- - - - ------ ---
=- =- - =--':" =
M 1260.1
May 79
DP Machines
1260 ELECTRONIC INSCRIBER
Limitation: Cannot be installed with
(#1294, 1296).
Purpose: A key operated unit for proving deposits, sorting and
listing of checks into eight individual stackers, and MICR inscribing of checks and deposits in the ABA recommended E13B format.
Highlights: The ten-key keyboard permits fast, accurate, touch
amount entry for sorting, listing, proving, inscribing and, with
Endorsing and Serial Numbering (#3791), endorsing checks in a
single operation. Has eight machine distribution stackers and
detail tapes. Three or five external stackers are provided for nonprocessable documents ... see "Specify" below.
Intermixed card and paper documents within the following specifications can be inscribed: Length -- 5.750" to 9.000", plus 51column cards ... Width -- 2.750" to 3.750" ... Thickness -- .003"
to .001".
All arithmetic functions are accomplished by a single electronic
accumulator which has a ten-digit addition, subtraction and accumulation capability. Electronic storage is provided to store the
following data and totals: Thirteen distribution totals, nine of which
develop item count (maximum, 9999) [see Additional Totals
(#1071) under "Special Features"] ... group debit total ... group
net total ... grand total ... second field storage and/or adding
machine total ... serial number (control tape - maximum 99999) .. '
deposit item count (maximum, 9999) ... grand total item count
(maximum, 10 digits).
Inscribing -- as standard, two fields can be inscribed in E13B font
on the face of documents in the clear band field. The fields are,
from right to left: Amount -- set up in the amount keyboard and
inscribed as ten digits bracketed by the amount symbol ... Process
Control -- emitted under program and selector key control and
inscribed adjacent to the amount for identification of transaction or
batch. Deposit item count total also inscribes in the process control field on deposit tickets. Distribution totals with automatic
process control codes identifying the stacker and item count totals
are inscribed on control documents. Six positions of process
control inscribing and printing are standard. For Routing and
Transit, and Account Number, see "Special Features" below.
One cycle automatic group balance with efficient multiple credit
ability provides printout of total debits and net debit/credit difference on non-balance.
Automatic high dollar selection may be accomplished through
program wiring to override normal selector key operation and sort,
add and list checks of $1,000.00 and over into pocket number 8.
Programs -- three programs may be stored in the machine and are
selected by a dial program switch. One set of program cards is
shipped with each machine. A second set will be provided, if
specified ... see "Specify" below. A third set is also available ...
see "Special Features."
Supplies -Magnetic Transfer Ribbon,
Endorsing Ink Roll, and paper and ribbon supplies ... each Magnetic Transfer Ribbon provides approximately 33,000 line impressions.
Manuals -- see "IBM Marketing Publications KWIC Index," G3201621.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz, locking plug): #9880
for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] External Stackers: #9686 for three, or #9687 for five.
[4] Up-ending Kit: #9840, if require1 ... loan basis, remains property of IBM.
[5) Program Cards, Second Set: #9552, if required
PRICES:
Mdl
1260
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 308
$11,700
$119
Purchase Option: 40%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEARURES
ACCOUNT NUMBER FIELD (#1010).
Permits inscribing of the
amount, process control, and account number in one pass of the
document. Operation is sililiar to that of the Routing and Transit
Field (#6300), in that the account number may be transferred to
storage and inscribed in the same pass as the amount and process control field. A repeat key and a means of clearing the storage are provided. Includes an additional setup key adjacent to the
ten-key keyboard which allows the operator to set a blank or dash
in either the account number or routing and transit field.
Automatic Float Analysis
AUTOMATIC FLOAT ANALYSIS (#1294,1296),
#1294 -- designed to be used with the Routing and Transit Field
if the deposit ticket has not been pre-printed. A 4-digit serial
number is printed in the field on the deposit ticket and is
repeated in the four high-order positions of the field on each
float document.
#1296 -- designed to be used when the Routing and Transit
Field on the deposit ticket has been pre-printed with the bank
number. No printing will occur in the field on the deposit
ticket, but 5555 is printed in the four high-order positions of
the field on each float document.
Either # 1294 or # 1296 permit from one to six float amounts in
dollars and cents (10 digits) and corresponding item counts (4
digits) to be classified and accumulated under program control
wiring and selector key control as the debit items are processed
for proof of deposit. The activity of programmed float classes is
detected, so that when the balance status of the deposit is established as the deposit ticket is processed, the developed float data
can be inscribed. Operator feeding of one float ticket is required
for each two classes of float developed. No documents or machine
cycles are required for inactive float accumulators. When this
feature is installed, the total number of assignable counters is 20,
each with an associated 4-digit item count. When the "Float"
switch is "OFF," these may be used as normal distribution counters ... when the switch is "ON," only 14 of these are available as
distribution counters.
Maximum:
One, #1294 or #1296.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Additional Totals (#1071).
CHECKER SIGNAL (#1935).
A light signal under switch control
that provides the operator with a means of signalling a supervisor.
ENDORSING AND SERIAL NUMBERING (#3791).
The endorsement prints at random in an area approximately 3" wide. In addition to printing the bank's endorsement stamp, a date, a 5-digit
machine, batch or branch identification, and a 5-digit serial number is provided. The serial number may be programmed in advance for each document fed, or to advance for each deposit. The
serial number printed on the check is also printed on the control
tape to provide a complete audit trail. With this feature, documents
can be endorsed with date, identification number and bank's legal
endorsement. The etched Endorser Plate is made to the
customer's specifications. See "Accessories" below. A Blank
Endorser Plate is also available if only partial endorsements are
required. When ordering #3792 attach Endorser Plate Specification
... not required for #3793.
HIGH VOLUME TOTAL (#4603). To print one quick kill total in
the Routing and Transit Field of the deposit ticket. The quick kill
total will print in the normal Routing and Transit format with a dash
symbol separating the four high-order and four low-order digits.
This feature assumes only one float level of quick kill items.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Transit Analysis (#8016).
PROCESS CONTROL KEYBOARD (#5705). Consists of two rows
of keys, numbered blank thru 9, located to the right of the ten-key
keyboard. Used either to key in a special transaction code, or to
override any two digits of the emitted process control code.
ROUTING AND TRANSIT FIELD (#6300).
PerMits printing of the
Routing and Transit Field as well as the Amount Field and Process
Control Field in one pass of the document. The field is keyed in
the ten-key keyboard and transferred into a storage area. The
amount is then keyed and the document dropped into the check
chute. The document will be positioned at the inscribing station,
the amount will be inscribed and process control if programmed.
The document will advance to the Routing and Transit Field and
the field will be inscribed. A "Routing and Transit" key and means
of clearing the routing and transit storage are provided.
SHIFT IDENTIFICATION SWITCH (#7138), A dial switch, labelled
OFF-1-2-3, that provides the operator with a means of identifying
a shift rumber in anyone of the five positions of the Distribution
Total Identification number. The switch is located adjacent to the
program switch.
THIRD PROGRAM (#7948).
Provides program cards, wires and
overlays for a third program. Prerequisite: Program Cards, Second Set (#9552) ... see "Specify" above.
TRANSIT ANALYSIS (#8016).
To print two float figures in the
Routing and Transit Field of the deposit ticket. The four high-order
digits of the field will inscribe one class of float in hundreds of
dollars .. ' the last four (or low-order) digits of the field will inscribe
a second class of float in hundreds of dollars. The feature uses
two of the standard distribution amount accumulators. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with High Volume Total (#4603).
ADDITIONAL TOTALS (#1071).
Adds sufficient counters to
provide a total of 20 distribution totals, each with a 4-digit item
count. These counters are used and controlled in the same manner as the normal distribution counters in the basic machine.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ------------ - - -.. -
M 1260.2
May 79
-
DP Machines
(cont'd)
MAC/
Special Feature PrIces:
MRC Purchase MMMC
FIC
$ 551
Account Number Field #1010 $ 17
1071
17
551
AddItional Totals
Auto Float AnalysIs
1294
34
1,060
1296
1,060
Auto Float Analysis
34
1935
25SUC
25
Checker SI9nal
Endorse & Serial Num 3791
17
689
4603
10
321
High Volume Total
Process Control Keybd 5705
17
551
RoutIng & TransIt FIeld 6300
17
551
ShIft Identification Sw 7136
2
73
Third Program
7948
3
123
TransIt Analysis
8016
13
482
$ 91
23
32
32
92
100
23
66
91
27
15
23
~,--
1260 Electronic Inscriber
$4.00
5.50
5.50
5.50
NC
6.00
1.50
1.50
4.00
NC
NC
3.50
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the desired Feature
# indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages.
Endorser Plate (#3792)
Blank Endorser Plate (#3793)
NOTE: When ordering #3792, it is recommended that at least one spare
plate be stocked, as they cannot be immediately replaced.
See M10000 pages for description, ordering instructions, and field
installation.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --==- =-=
--- -==--';' ==
1282
M 1282.1
May 79
OP Machines
OPTICAL
READER
CARD
PUNCH
Purpose: Optically reads numeric data and three special characters from printed 51- or 80-column cards and punches the data
read into the same card at a maximum rate of 200 cards/minute.
Highlights: The digits 0-9 and three special characters, plus (+),
dash (-) and a solid vertical Line q), are read at a character recognition station. A maximum of 32 characters can be read and
punched during a single pass. Unreadable information is automatically rescanned up to two times. Standard card punching, punch
suppression, special symbol punching, gang punching, zero insertion, and double punch-blank column detection are determined by
control panel wiring. A program card is premarked by the user to
control field selection. A line selection device permits operator
selection of anyone of eight to ten horizontal line positions on the
forms, depending upon the type of font to be read. Self-checking
number detection is controlled by the premarked program card
and control panel wiring.
PRICES:
Mdl
1282
1
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$1,848
$64,080
$339
Purchase Option: 45%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
ALTERNATE FIELD CONTROL (#1250).
To select fields for
reading under control of hand-printed vertical field mark.
DOUBLE PUNCH AND BLANK COLUMN DETECTION (#3435).
An additional group of 20 positions. Maximum: One group.
EXPANDED FIELD SUPPRESSION (#3833).
Basic machine
permits punch suppression of up to four fields. each containing a
maximum of 12 character positions ... this feature increases the
number of punch suppression control fields to six ... it is prerequisite for Optical Mark Reading (#5480-5484) ..
Printing: For efficient operation, the printing to be read must
conform to the specifications established for the 1282. Cards can
be printed by a 1403 Printer mdl 1, 2, 3, 7 or N1, 1404 Printer
mdl 2, IBM Selectric® Typewriter mdl 721, 723 or 725, and IBM
Standard Electric Typewriter mdl C. They can also be created by
any imprinters which produce the specified print quality.
FARRINGTON 7B FONT RECOGNITION (#3950, 3952). To read
and pun~h documents printed in Farrington 7B Font by credit plate
imprinters. #3950 -- without Bar Code or Alpha Blanking ...
#3952 -- with Bar Code and Alpha Blanking. Specify: Either or
both -- #9714 for front reading test deck. #9716 for reverse
reading test deck.
The standard machine can be ordered to read any two of the
following (see item [2] under ' 'Specify"): [1] 1428 front reading
for typewriters, 1403 and 1404 '" [2] 1428 enlarged front reading
for imprinters ... [3] 1428 enlarged reverse reading for imprinters.
OPTICAL MARK READING (#5480-5484). Information marked on
cards in addition to printed characters can be read and converted
to punched holes. Similiar to mark sensing, but location of marking positions and type of marking pencil differ. See Manual GA243106 for details. Specify: One of the following -- #5480 for 5
pOSitions, 80-column card, front field ... #5481 for 6 positions,
80-column card, front field ... #5482 for 12 positions, 80-column
card ... #5483 for 5 positions, 80-column card, center field, and
51-column card ... #5484 for 6 positions, 80-column card, center
field, and 51-column card.
Prerequisite: Expanded Field Suppression (#3833).
The 1403 and 1404 normally print 10 characters per inch (10
pitch). However, there is no restriction on the pitch of printing to
be read other than that it be no greater than 10 pitch. Any number
of characters less than 10 pitch per inch can be read. Adjacent
fields can have differing pitch.
Documents: Both 51- and 80-column cards can be processed, but
only one size can be processed at a time. Additonal document
considerations, relating to the printing device, recommended
ribbons, and type styles, are specified in the table below.
Standard Features: One single-section, 22-hub, self-contacting
control panel with complement of wires (see "Specify" below) ... a
1,200-card capacity hopper ... a lens selector knob [a 2-position
selector to change between the reading of either enlarged font
(1428 or Farrington 7B) or 1428 standard font] ... a digit emitter
... a character reading station ... a rescan feature ... self-checking
number detection ... twenty positions of DPBC detection ... two
document counters ... two radial stackers, each with a 1,000-card
capacity ... charcoal covers and a white operator console.
Manuals: See "Catalog of Marketing Publications KWIC Index,"
G320-1621.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9884 for 208
V, or #9886 for 230 V (locking plugs only).
[2] Characters to be Read: Specify one of the following:
#9090 -- for 1428 standard front reading and 1428 enlarged
front reading.
#9091 -- for 1428 standard front reading and 1428 enlarged
reverse reading.
#9092 -- for 1428 enlarged front reading and 1428 reverse
reading.
[3] Test Decks: One or both of the following test decks must be
specified unless Farrington 7B Font Recognition (#3950, 3952)
is ordered ... to test the machine, either #9719, 9720 or Farrington 7B Font test documents must be used, depending upon
the application.
#9719 -- for 1428 enlarged front test deck ... #9090 or
#9092 above is required.
#9720 -- for 1428 enlarged reverse test deck ... #9091 or
#9092 above is required.
SELF-CHECKING NUMBER FIELD CORRECTION (#7065). Operates in conjunction with the standard self-checking number error
detection feature. Documents with a single unreadable character
in a self-check field ordinarily are rejected .. This feature automatically corrects a single unreadable character and makes the document acceptable. Documents with more than a single unreadable
character are rejected. This feature is not recommended for use
with imprinter applications .
SERIAL NUMBER PUNCHING (#7090).
To punch consecutive
numbers from one to five digits in length in ascending or descending sequence. The first number to be punched is manually set by
the operator.
SpeCial Feature Prices:
Alternate Field Control #1250
DPBC Detection
3435
Expanded Field Suppress 3833
Farrington 7B Font Recognition
no bar code or alpha blk 3950
bar code & alpha blank 3952
Optical Mark Reading
5 pas, 80 col, front fld 5480
6 pas, 80 col, front fld 5481
1 2 pas, 80 col
5482
5 pos,80/51 col,cntr fld 5483
6 pos,SO/51 col,cntr fld 5484
Self-chk No. Field Carr
7065
Serial Number Punching 7090
[4] Scan Line Boundary: Specify one -- #9576 for right edge,
#9577 for left edge, or #9500 for center. LIMITATION: #9500
cannot be specified with #9092 above.
[5] Control Panel: Specify one -- #9081 for self-contacting with
manual wires, #9082 for self-contacting with fixed wires, or
#9084 for no panel or wires ... specify #9084 for all mechanical replacement machines.
[6] Extended Memory: #9145, if applicable. Provides for storing
the variable wheel amount field (5-digit only) or account number
field when a rescan is necessary to read the other field. NOTE:
Will not operate with other than a 5-digit variable wheel amount
field. Can be field installed.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
$ 23 $ 734
35 1,090
17
551
FIC
$ 3.00
5.50
1.50
$ 45
66
62
166
166
6,050
6,050
3.50
3.50
76
76
166
166
215
166
166
125
105
5,425
5,425
7,300
5,425
5,425
4,365
3,735
13.00
13.00
16.00
13.00
13.00
3.00
6.00
104
104
138
104
104
32
84
=~~=
.5.
.:~:.
_.::::::
__
. _
1282 Optical Reader Card Punch
Printing Unit
1403 mdl I or 2
Other
Than
S/360
S/360
M 1282.2
May 79
DP Machines
(cont'd)
Recommended
Ribbon/ Carbon Paoer lor eouivalen"tl
MYL\~ (424~\25)/
Nvlon 414486
Type Style Required for
Reading by 1282
1!~~9~~pe Style. J4
1404 mdl 2
Nylon (419031)
1403 mdl 2 or 7
MYLAR (424325)/
Nvlon /414486)-
1428 Type Style. J4
#9599Y
1428 ~~pe Style. J4
#9599
1428 ~~pe Style. AN4
#9621
1416,\1403 mdl 3
or NI
Nylon (414486)
1!~~2~~pe Style. AN4
1404 mdl 2
Nylon (419031)
1!~~2~\Pe Style. AN4
Nylon No. 50
(1010655) 5121 Polythylene (1010760)
Type Code 097. Type
Mark VA5 Type Code
096. Type Mark V A8
Nylon No. 50
( 1136076)
Type Code 009
1416 (1403 mdl 3) Nylon (414486)
Model C - IBM
Electric Typewriter with Keyboard
Available 069
thru
Selectric TypewritOPD
er mdl 721, 723 or
~~ w Keyboard
Credit Card Imprinter
Carbon paper to be
1428 Enlarged Font or
used will be based on Farrington
7B Self-check
the aoolication
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------.=.- =:
--------== ';' ==
M 1287.1
May 79
DP Machines
1287 OPTICAL READER
Purpose: Optically reads machine printed numeric digits, alphabetic char'!cters, special symbols and handprinted numeric digits
and certain alphabetic characters into a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30,
40, 50, 65, 65MP, 67 (in 65 mode), . 75, any S/370 Processor
(1287 mdl 5 only on 115 and 125), or any 4300 Processor. Machine
printed or handprinted character reading dependent on model and
features. See "Special Features."
Model 1
Can read multiple lines of numeric printed data from
cut form paper or card documents.
Model 2* In addition to reading multiple lines of numeric printed data from cut form paper or card documents, can
also read data from continuous rolls of paper
(journal tapes) ... machine design permits easy operator c.hange-over from document to tape handling,
and vice versa, in a matter of seconds.
Model 3
Identical to model 1, with the added capability of
reading ANSCS OCR Size A font character set specified in the "Table of Acceptable Characters."
Model4* Identical to model 2, with the added capability of
reading alphameric ANSCS OCR Size A font character set specified in the "Table of Acceptable Characters."
Model 5
Can read multiple lines of numeric handprinted digits
and certain alphabetic characters from cut form paper or card documents.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights:
All Models - the basic machine includes an input hopper with a
capacity for an 11-inch stack of documents, an optical read
station, a document transport, and three output stackers each
with a capacity for 4 inches of documents. Documents are fed,
one at a time, under program control to the read station where
each document is held stationary while it is scanned and read by
an electronic flying spot optical scanner. Documents can range in
size from 2.25" x 3" to 5.91" x 9".
Format control flexibility is provided under S/260, S/370 or 4300
Processor program control to allow reading variable length fields
in any sequence. Depending on model and feature mix, fields
may contain machine printed, typewritte,l, imprinted, or handprinted characters, oriented in either of two directions on the same
document. The stored pr09ram directs the beam, a field at a
time, to the data to be read. Information is scanned from right to
left (units to high order) and fed serially, a character at a time, to
the system channel.
Unreadable characters are automatically rescanned. Unrecognizable characters may be displayed selectively under program control for online correction (except ANSCS OCR characters read in
alphameric mode), or they may be transmitted to the processor
as the standard EBCDIC substitute character code (use of "@"
symbol is available on RPQ) for possible programmed correction
or reconstruction. The document remains in the read statIon until
ejected under processor program control. Final disposition of
each document into one of three output stackers (A, B or R) is
controlled by the program. Stackers A and B can be used for
selecting two classes of documents. Stacker R is normally used
for selecting documents with unrecognizable characters. Automatic overflow between stackers A and B can be used to extend the
length of document runs without stopping the machine.
All models provide the following features:
Multi-line, normal and plus 90 degrees reading of numeric
1428 or ANSCS OCR Size A type fonts produced by high
speed printers and IBM SelectricR typewriters, and reading
of imprinted (1428 E or ANSCS OCR Size C fonts) or handprinted numeric digits and certain alphabetiC characters from
documents.
- Format flexibility under processor program control.
- Automatic rescan of unreadable characters.
-
Cathode ray tube character display with selective online
correction of unreadable numeric characters from the operator keyboard.
- Document counter.
Model 1 or 2 - the digits 0-9 and the alphabetiC characters C,
N, S, T, X, Z printed in 1428 font, plus a special preprinted
vertical field mark symbol, can be recognized ... or the digits 0-9
and the three abstract symbols, "hook", "fork" and "chair"
printed in the American National Standard Character Set for
Optical Character Recognition (ANSCS OCR) font, plus the special preprinted vertical field mark symbol, can be recognized.
Model 3 or 4' - the alphameric ANSCS OCR character set deThe 1287 Models 2 and 4 are no longer available ... features, model
conversions, RPQs and accessories are not affected.
scribed in the "Table of Acceptable Characters - 1287" below
and the characters described for mdl 1 or 2 can be read.
Model 5 -- the handprinted digits 0-9 and alphabetiC characters
C, S, T, X and Z and numbers preprinted in Gothic 3/16" can be
recognized.
Features for Model 5 are:
- Numeric hand printing basic font.
- Alternate NHP character Read-Verify Mode selectable under
program control.
- Keyboard and Display Console for online correction.
- Hopper Preload Tray.
- Stacker Foot Treadle start-stop control.
- Background color contrast.
Speed (Documents) -- maximum document throughput depends
upon document size, the number of characters and fields to be
read (machine printed, handprinted, mark read), printed character
registration or alignment, use of online correction, and the processor program. For full details, including speed formula, see SRL
GA21-9064 and GA21-9150.
Maximum document throughput can range from 665 documents
per minute for a 3" long stub with one field of 20 machineprinted characters, to less than 100 documents per minute for a
6" long document containing 50 fields of handprinted characters.
Documents and Printing (all models) - for optimum operation,
print quality must conform to quality specifications established for
the 1287 described in SRL GA21-9064 and GA21-9150. Except
for imprinting, only original copy may be processed. Document
sizes and weights must conform to those specified in SRL GA219064 and GA21-9150. Also see Serial Numbering (#6550, 6555)
under "Special Features" for special document size restriction.
Additional document considerations relating to the printing device, recommended ribbons and type styles can be found in SRL
GA21-9064 and GA21-9150.
Journal Roll Reading (model 2 or 4 only) - a journal tape transport permits reading the digits 0-9 and the selected characters C,
N, S, T, X, Z and "slash-dash" printed in 1428 Font (#9735 or
#4470); 0-9, the selected characters C, N, S, T, X, Z and symbols "hook", "fork" and "chair" printed in ANSCS OCR font
Size A (with #9736 or #4470); or the digits 0-9 and six special
symbols printed in NCR Optical Type Font (with #5300) from
journal rolls. The same reading station described above for document reading is used for reading rolls. A maximum of 38 characters may be read from a single journal roll line. Maximum character spacing is 10 characters/inch. Unreadable characters are
automatically rescanned.
The line to be read is pOSitioned automatically and scanned
under program control from units to high-order (right to left - read
forward orientation) ... tapes may be processed in either direction. The operator can control the fields to be scanned, the font
selection and tape processing direction (forward or backward) by
manual console settings. Unreadable characters may be corrected online by the operator, or the line containing the unreadable
characters may be marked under program control for offline
correction.
In addition to all the features of the model 1 and 3, models 2 and
4 provide:
- Forward or backward tape reading.
- Input roll feeding up to 200' capacity.
- Online manual correction of unreadable characters via operator keyboard.
- Line marking of lines containing unreadable characters under
program control.
- Easy operator changeover from document to journal tape
handling, and vice versa, in a matter of seconds.
Speed (Journal Rolls) - depends upon the number of characters
per line, tape width, line spacing and vertical registration printing
accuracy. For full details, including speed formulae, see SRL
GA21-9064.
Throughput is affected by online correction and the user's program ... rescan and line marking of lines containing unreadable
characters may also affect throughput.
Journal Rolls - size ranges, and specific journal tape considerations relating to the printing device, ribbons, type styles, paper
color, and quality are contained in SRL GA21-9064.
Printing - for efficient operation, printing must conform to the
quality specifications established in the 1287. For optimum operation, black, purple or approved red ink colors should be used ...
colors other than black or cash register purple should be referred
to the Data Entry Product Center for review. Journal rolls may be
prepared by adding machines, cash rf;lgisters and similiar devices. Acceptable type styles are IBM 1428, ANSCS OCR Size A
and NCR Optical Font (NOF type style developed by NCR) ... for
allowable characters, see "Table of Acceptable Characters"
below. For reading NOF type style, NCR Optical Type Font
(#5300) is required ... see "Special Features."
Optional Features: Available on models 1, 2, 3, 4 are -- Numeric
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ---- --=---= =
---=
M 1287.2
May 79
"!'
DP Machines
1287 Optical Reader
(cont'd)
Handwriting (#5370) including preprinted number recognition of
3/16" Gothic characters, Farrington 7B Font (#3945), 1428 and
ANSCS OCR Font (#4470) which permits alternate reading of
both fonts in separate, pre-identified fields under program control,
and Serial Numbering (#6550), The following are also available:
On models 2 and 4 -- NCR Optical Font (#5300) ... on models 3
and 4 -- Expanded Symbol Set (#3850) ... on model 5 -- Machine
Printed OCr: Font (#4900) which includes alternate reading of
numeric 1428, ANSCS OCR and Farrington 7B fonts in separate,
pre-identified fields under program control and Serial Numbering
(#6555) ... on all models -- Optical Mark Reading (#5479). See
"Special Features."
PREREQUISITES: Multiple 1287s, all models in any combination,
can be attached to a system ... each 1287 contains its own control unit and requires a channel control unit position.
S/360 mdl 25 -- special feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel or
Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 22. 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050. For attachment to a S/360 mdl 30, a 2030 mdl D or larger is required.
S/360 mdl 65, 65MP, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 -- basic multiplexer
channel of a 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) of a
2870 ... see 2870.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- (1297 mdl 5 only) Multiplexer Channel
(special feature) ... see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (special features), Block Multiplexer Channel (special
feature) ... see 3135.
S/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (first one is standard), Block Multiplexer Channel
(special feature) ... see 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), Block Multiplexer Channels (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
S/370 mdl 165, 168 -- basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) on 2870 ... see 2870.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see 3031
or 3032.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Processor -- byte mUltiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional).
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer
channels (2 are standard).
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Type Font (mdls 1, 2, 3, 4 only): #9735 for reading 1428 and
1428 E Type Font only, or #9736 for reading the American
National Standard Character Set for Optical Character Recognition only ... neither of these are to be specified if 1428 and
ANSCS OCR Font (#4470).is ordered. See "Special Features."
[4] Background Color Contrast: #9030, if desired (standard on
mdl 5). This feature allows use of darker background colors for
outlining numeric handwriting boxes and mark read positions on
documents where high visual contrast is desired. Background
color is limited to blue range of visual. spectrum when printed to
maximum intensity permissable with this feature. Consult SRL
GA21-9064 and GA21-1950 for description of ink characteristics. The feature is compatible with 1287 approved blue-green
to blue range of background colors printed at standard machine
maximum intensities. Limitations: Not compatible with purple
ink journal tape processing (models 2 and 4). Certain background colors approved for the 1287 mdls 1 thru 4 (particularly
in the yellow-green range) are not compatible with this feature.
The Data Entry Product Center will review existing forms for
background ink compatibility with this feature.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/MRC
Purchase
MMMC
1287
1
$2,925
$ 89,280
$ 881
3.350
102,240
2
991
4,505
134,640
3
1,265
4
150,480
4,930
1,320
3,670
99,360
1,275
5
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40%
Maintenance: C
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
EXPANDED SYMBOL SET (#3850). [Mdl;3 or 4 only] To recognize the following eight special symbols when they are created by
an IBM Selectric Typewriter, or equivalent: + = {} ? % ' "
FARRINGTON 7B FONT (#3945).
[Mdls 1 thru 4 only] For
reading characters imprinted on documents by credit plate imprinters in Farrington Selfchek * 7B Font ... see characters shown
under "7B - #3945" in "Table of Acceptable Characters - 1287"
below.
1428 AND ANSCS OCR FONT (#4470).
[Mdls 1 thru 4 only]
Provides the ability to read numeric 1428 and ANSCS OCR fonts,
each in separate, pre-identified fields of a document ... selection
of a font to be read for a specific field or document type is under
program control. See characters under "IBM 1428 Font" and
"ANSCS OCR" shown in the "Table of Acceptable Characters 1287" below. On models 2 or 4 only -- reading of 1428 or ANSCS
OCR Size A font on journal rolls is interchangeable under operator
switch control. Note: When this feature is ordered for plant installation, neither #9735 nor #9736 under "Specify" need be specified.
MACHINE PRINTED OCR FONT (#4900). [Mdl 5 only] Provides
the ability to read numeric 1428, ANSCS OCR and Farrington
Selfchek * Font, each in separate pre-identified fields in a document ... selection of the font to be read for a specific field or
document type is under program control. See characters under
"IBM 1428 Font," "ANSCS OCR" and "7B" shown in the "Table
of Accepatable Characters - 1287" below.
NCR OPTICAL TYPE FONT (#5300).
[Mdl 2 or 4 only] For
reading characters from journal tapes printed in "NOF" type style
developed by NCR. The character shapes shown under "NOF #5300" in the "Table of Acceptable Characters" below can be
read. Reading of this type style and IBM 1428 or ANSCS OCR
Size A type style is interchangeable, under operator switch control. This feature also provides the capability to selectively skip the
ll-digit account number field in the NCR C-53 NOF journal tape
format. Reading or skipping is under console switch control and
customer specified characters in columns "1" and "2" on the
journal tape. Partial line correction (one-two character keyboard
entry) may be performed by the operator when processing NOF
tapes. Specify: Customer may specify up to three character code
combinations in positions "1" and "2" to control selective reading
of account number field for NCR C-53 format only. Note: If NCR
registers' tapes contain Line Finder Character Marks, RPQ
is also required.
NUMERIC HANDWRITING (#5370). [Mdls 1 thru 4 only] [Plant
installation only] For reading handprinted numeric digits 0-9 and
handprinted aplhabetic characters C, S, T, X, Z from documents
(N is not available) ... C, S, T, Z must be used in the units position
of a field ... X can be anywhere. For optimum operation, character
shapes and spacing must conform to the basic rules of handwriting as outlined in SRL GA21-9064 and GA21-9150. Information
should be handprinted with ordinary #2 pencils or grade HB fine
line lead for mechanical pencils. Includes the ability to read numbers preprinted on documents by the forms supplier in Gothic
3/16" font.
OPTICAL MARK READING (#5479).
For reading mark entered
data from documents. Marks may be oriented vertically, slanted at
an angle of 45' as defined for mark reading with the 1418 Optical
Character Reader feature codes #4950, #4951 respectively, or
drawn horizontally as defined for mark sensing features on the
519 Document Originating Machine. A timing mark is required for
each mark read column regardless of the orientation of the marks.
Data should be recorded with ordinary #2 pencils.
SERIAL NUMBERING (#6550).
[Mdls 1 thru 4 only] Provides
the capability of sequentially numbering documents from 00000 to
99999. Printing is done along the trailing edge of the front face of
·the document after reading. A ten-position numbering head is
provided, of which five positions are unit advanced and five are
stationary. Selection of documents to be printed is governed by
manual control switch setting in conjunction with stacker select
commands. Printin9 in flight is accomplished without decreasing
machine throughput. Printing is non-OCR Quality. Ribbons: The
feature uses a black ribbon (1136843) or purple ribbon
(1136844), or equivalent.
Limitations:
Cannot be field installed on units below serial no. 10155 shipped
from the plant prior to March, 1969 ... machines equipped with
*
Trademark of Farrington Manufacturing Company.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-------- ----=-- =---- --=
--':' =
M 1287.3
May 79
DP Machines
1287 Optical Reader (conI' d)
this feature cannot process documents smaller than 3.00" wide x
4.75" long.
SERIAL NUMBERING (#6555). [Mdl 5 only) Function and limitations same as Serial Numbering (#6550) except provides two
alternate print pOSitions in a band adjacent to the normal print
position. Selection of print position is under manual control ... also
provides five stacker-serial numbering control combinations and
independent batch numbering document printing control.
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC Purchase MMMC
Expanded Symbol Set #3850 $ 73
27
Farrington 7B Font
3945
142880 ANSCS
OCR Font
4470
27
Mach Printed OCR Font 4900 541
NCR Optical Type Font 5300 104
Numeric Handwriting
5370 837
Optical Mark Reading
5479
104
Serial Numbering
6550 313
Serial Number (mdl 5) 6555 313
$ 2,240 $ 3.50
FIC
$
799
1.00
282
119
799
14,688
3,204
25,632
3,204
9,144
9,144
1.00
29.50
5.00
55.00
5.00
66.00
66.00
119
1,070
467
PO
587
1,225
1,225
TABLE OF ACCEPTABLE CHARACTERS - 1287
1287 Fonts
1287 mdl 3 or 4 only
;;
ANSCS OCR Size A (10) (11)
1287 mdl5; or
3211 (14), 1403 "5370 on 1287
IBM Selectric® mdls 2,3,7,Nl,
mdls 11~~4 __
Typewriter
3203 (all mdls),
Handprinted Char-
:====~===~=~~~====!=====*=========i.:.:tt:,,:t::::t===~or 3800.:15)
Basic 1287:
o AN :
1 B o ;
2 C P
3 D Q ,
4 E R I
5 F S b G T •
1 B 0
2 C P
3 DQ
4 E R I
5 F S -
6 (, T •
7 H U $
7 H U ..
8 I V &
8 I V &
9 J W
9 J W 1(7)
Y K X -(8)
3 L Y :J: (9)
M z blank
~
With!i3850:
+ %
=
{
}
...
?
',Digits 0-9 only available in 1428 f ([Iongated) for imprinting.
tt National Optical Font shown by permission of National CaSh Register Co.
ttt 78 shown by permission of Farrington Manufacturing Co.
tttt or equivalent.
(1) Recognized and transmitted in document mode only (LVM-Long Vertical Mark,
VFM-Vertical Field Mark>.
(2) Recognized and transmitted in tape mode only (1428 font).
(3) No blanks are transmitted in ANSCS OCR Size C, Farrington 7B, or 1428 fonts.
(4) In 1428 font the characters C, N, S, T, X and Z may only occupy the units
position of the field or line.
(5) In ANSCS OCR Size A font, the characters C, N, S, T, X and Z may only
occupy the units position of the lines in journal mode (mdls 2 and 4).
(6) Only the characters 0-9 are available in ANSCS OCR Size C font.
(7) For machine printed fields a pre-printed long vertical mark is permitted.
(8) Group Erase permits ignoring a line or field. Symbol must be at least .300" long
overstriking at least one standard heigl,t character. It must overstrike the
first character on that end of the line on which scanning is initiated.
(9) Character erase not in the ANSCS OCR Size A character set. Available to ignore
a character and its space for typewriters.
nO) Two reading modes are available, numeric defined and afphameric intermixed.
The following characters are available in numeric defined mode:
o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 . , I - $ • Y 3 rl I (LVM I X and with "3850 +
The following characters are available in A/N Intermixed mode:
All numeric defined characters except Y. In addition, A-Z, & • ,
andwith'l3850, + = { } %? • "
(11) See "Note 5" above for journal mode characters on Model 4.
(12) C, S, T and Z must be in the units position, X can be anywhere.
(13) See ;.5370 under "Special Features" for further details.
(14) The OCR Print Package (.. 5450)"on the'321i, is it'p'rerequisite for OCR applications. 20·24 lb. bond is recommended for optimum performance. When other papers
are used, customer testing should be performed to assure reading performance. Group
or character erase feature should be inactive when reading 3211 generated documents,
'15) Minimum paper weight for documents produced on the 3800 is 20 lb.
o AN
%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
YK X
3 L Y
rl M Z
blank
....
~c;..tI!!~~UP) _.
o
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C;
S I
T (12)
X
Z.
blank
--------- --- - - ---==- - =--':' =
M 1288
May 79
DP Machines
1288 OPTICAL PAGE READER
Purpose: Optically reads printed alphabetic and numeric characters and specified symbols on up to page size documents (max.
9" x 14") into a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 50, 65, 65MP, 67 (in
65 mode), all S/370 Processors (except 115 and 125), or all 4300
Processors. With Numeric Handwriting (#5370) it can also read
handprinted numeric digits and certain alphabetic characters.
Highlights: The basic machine includes an input hopper with a
capacity for up to a 10" stack of documents, a document separator and aligner station, an optical read station, a document transport, and two output stackers each with a capacity of up to 4.5"
of documents. Documents are fed, one at a time, under program
control to the read station where each document is held stationary
while it is scanned and read by an electronic flying spot optical
scanner. Multiple lines of printed data can be read on documents
which range in size from 3" x 6.5" to 9" x 14".
The digits 0-9, twenty-six alphabetic characters and certain special
symbols printed by the devices noted in the "Table of Acceptable
Characters" below in the American National Standard Character
Set for Optical Character Recognition (ANSCS OCR) Font, plus the
character erase symbol, can be recognized.
Format control flexibility, called the formatted mode, is provided
under S/360 or S/370 or 4300 Processors program control to allow
reading variable length fields in any sequence. Fields may contain
machine printed, typewritten or handprinted (with #5370) characters, oriented in either of two directions on the same document.
The stored program directs the beam, a field at a time, to the data
to be read. Information is scanned from right to left (units to high
order) and fed serially, a character at a time, to the system channel.
Unformatted mode permits multiple and continuous variable length
alphameric lines, up to 6 lines/inch, right or left justified, to be
read in the "normal" direction only. Preprinted reference marks
are not required, however, a clear margin of at least 1" at the top
and 1 /2" on the other three sides must be provided.
Multi-line field mode allows the mixture of both formatted and
unformatted reading on a document. See the 1288 SRL GA219081 for details on this capability and document design limitations
when using this mode of operation on the 1288.
Unreadable handprinted and Gothic characters are automatically
rescanned. Unrecognizable characters are transmitted to the
processor as the standard EBCDIC substitute character code (use
of @ symbol available on RPQ for possible programmed correction
or reconstruction). The document remains in the read station until
ejected into one of two stackers (A or R) under control of the
processor program. Stacker R is normally used for selecting documents with unrecognizable characters.
Speed -- maximum document throughput depends upon document
size, the number of characters and fields to be read (machine
printed, typewritten, handprinted, mark read), and the processor
program. For throughput for both formatted and unformatted documents, see formulae in SRL GA21-9081 .
Documents and Printing -- for optimum operation, print quality
must conform to quality specifications established for the 1288
described in SRL GA21-9081. Document sizes and weights must
conform to those specified in SRL GA21-9081.
Additonal document considerations relating to the printing device,
recommended ribbons and type styles can be found in SRL GA219081.
TABLE OF ACCEPTABLE CHARACTERS AND PRINTING DEVICES
1288
ANSCS OCR Font Size A Only
IBM SelectriC'" Typewriter
(or equivalent)
Basic 1288
IBM
IBM
IBM
IBM
0 A N :
0 ;
P
1 !l
2 C
3 D
4 E
5 F
b G
Q
,
~
/
S -
T
7 H U $
8 I V &
9 J W I (LVM) (1)
y K X (2)
(3)
of L y :c
blank
nM Z
*
With #3850
+
%
;
,
{
}
~
?
1403
3203
3211
3800
0 A
1 8
2 C
3 D
4 E
5 f
6 G
N
0
mdls 2,3,7, N1
(all mdls>
(4) (or equivalent)
(5)
,
P /
Q -
R
S
*$
T &
7 H U
II I V
9 J ill
y K X
or L y
n M Z
bJank
(I) Lithograph printing approved.
(2) Group Erase permits ignoring a line or field. Symbol must be at least .300"
long overstriking at least one standard height character. It must overstrike
the first character on that end of the line on which scanning is initiated.
(3) Character Erase is not available in the ANSCS OCR Size A character set.
Available to ignore a character and its space for typewriters.
(4) The OCR Print Package (#5450) is a prerequisite for OCR applications.
20-24 lb. bond is recommended for optimum performance. When other
papers are used customer testing should be performed to assure adequate
reading performance. Group or character erase feature should be inactive
when reading 3211 generated documents.
(5) Minimum paper weight for documents produced on the 3800 is 20 lb.
Optional Features: Expanded Symbol Set (#3850), Numeric
Handwriting (#5370) including preprinted number recognition of
3/16" Gothic characters, Optical Mark Reading (#5479), and
Serial Numbering (#6550) are available ... see "Special Features."
PREREQUISITES: Multiple 1288s can be attached to a system ...
each 1288 contains its own control unit and requires a channel
control unit position.
S/360 mdl 25 -- special feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel or
Selector Channel ... see 2025. If the 1288 is equipped with
Numeric Handwriting (#5370), the 2025 must be at EC level
132845 and the 1288 at EC level 81521 OB.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard) or
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050. For attachment to a S/360 mdl 30, a 2030 mdl D or larger is required.
S/360 mdl 65, 65MP, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 or S/370 mdl 165,
168 -- basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels
on 2870.
S/370 mdl 135 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (special features), Block Multiplexer Channel (special
feature) ... see 3135.
S/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (first one is standard), Block· Multiplexer Channel
(special feature) ... see 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
5/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), Block Multiplexer
Channel (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer Channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional).
Not to be reproduced without written permisSion.
--------- --------= = =':' =
M 1288 - 1316
May 79
DP Machines
1288 Optical Page Reader
(cont'd)
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer
channels (two are standard).
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
1316 DISK PACK
Purpose: High-speed, removable, interchangeable disk storage for
all models of the 1311 Disk Storage Drive and 2311 Disk Storage
Drive.
The 1316 is marketed by IRD
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
PRICES:
Mdl
1288
MACI
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$5,140
$163,440
$1,340
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40% Maintenance: C
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
EXPANDED SYMBOL SET (#3850). To recognize the following
eight special symbols when they are created by an IBM SelectricR
typewriter, or equivalent: + = {} % ? ...
NUMERIC HANDWRITING (#5370). [Plant installation only] For
reading handprinted numeric digits 0-9 and handprinted alphabetic
characters C, S, T, X, Z from documents (N is not available) ... C,
S, T, Z must be in the units position of a field ... X can be anywhere. For optimum operation, character shapes and spacing must
conform to the basic rules of handwriting as outlined in SRL
GA21-9064. Information should be handprinted with ordinary #2
pencils or grade HB fine lead for mechanical pencils. Includes the
ability to read numbers preprinted on documents by the forms
supplier in Gothic 3/16" font. Prerequisite: For attachment to a
S/360 mdl 25, this feature requires that the 1288 be at EC level
815210B and the 2025 be at EC level 132845.
OPTICAL MARK READING (#5479). For reading marks that have
been either handmarked or machine printed onto documents. The
feature is format compatible (except for horizontal marking) with
the similiar feature (#5479) on the 1287 Optical Reader, with the
basic capability for reading ten- or twelve-position mark read
columns. On the 1288, flexibility is increased by allowing these
1287 -type mark read fields to be located anywhere in the scannable area and in either +90 or normal rotation. A further innovation
provides the ability to select, by programming, any number of
positions from 1 to 12 to be read from a column or group of
columns. A timing mark is required for each mark read column
whether 1, 2, 3, etc. up to 12 positions. Handmarked data should
be recorded with ordinary #2 pencils. Marks may be parallel to
the timing mark or in any orientation up to 45 0 in either direction
from parallel to the timing mark.
SERIAL NUMBERING (#6550). For serial numbering the front
side of documents after reading. A ten-position numbering head is
provided ... 5 digits are manually set .. , 5 are unit advanced for
each document read. A control switch provides either selective
serial numbering based on stacker selection or a 10-digit batch
number without unit advancing. Ribbons: The feature uses a black
ribbon (1136843) or purple ribbon (1136844), or equivalent.
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC Purchase MMMC
Expanded Symbol Set #3850 $
73
Numeric Handwriting
5370 1,050
Optical Mark Reading
5479
104
Serial Numbering
6550
313
$ 2,240 $ 3.50
38,448 82.00
3,772
7.50
9,144 66.00
FIC
$282
PO
275
449
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._---- ---=':::5~
M 1401.1
Mav 79
OP Machines
1401 PROCESSING UNIT
[No longer available]
Model.: Choice depends upon core storage capacity and I/O
configuration desired ... see "Prices" below.
Model Chang. .: Model changes can be made within groups 1
thru 3, 11 thru 13, 4 thru 6, 14 thru 16, or 24 thru 26 having the
same alphabetic prefix.
Except for G or H models, a 1401 from group 1 thru 3, 11 thru
13, can be changed to group 4 thru 6, 14 thru 16, or 24 thru 26
while adding a 1406, if the 1401 Is serial no. 20000 or above.
A model Gll thru G13 may be changed to a Gl thru G3, or vice
versa.
NOTE: When a model Gl thru G3 is changed to a Gll thru
G13, a 1403 mdl 6 must physically replace a 1403 mdl 4 or 5
... when a Gll thru G13 includes a 1402 mdl 5, the 1402 must
be field changed to a mdl 4 when converting to a 1401 mdl Gl
thru G3.
If the 1401 is serial no. 20263 or above, an F23 thru F26 can be
changed to an F13 thru Fl 6, or a model B to a C, or vice versa,
or an E to a C, or an F3 thru F6 to an F13 thru F16, or vice
versa.
NOTE: When changing an installed E to C, specify which of the
following features are installed - Expanded Print Edit (#3835),
Print Control, Add'i (#5540), Read Punch Release (#6040),
Sense Switches (#7600). If not installed, they will be included
in the model conversion. Also specify which model of the 1403
Printer is installed, and whether the 729 tape units to be installed are model 2 and/or 5, or model 4. A 1401 model C
system requires a 1403 mdl 2. An installed 1403 mdl 1 must
be converted to a mdl 2.
The following specifications can be changed in the field.
[1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V .... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: Color Accent - #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow,
#9043 for blue, or #9045 for gray. Extended Color - #9031
for red, #9032 for yellow, or #9033 for blue.
Mdl
PRICES:
I
Basic Card System - I
I
I
L
1 ,400
2,000
4,000
1 ,400
2,000
4,000
storage
storage
storage
storage
storage
storage
pOSitions
positions
pOSitions
positions
positions
positions
Gl
G2
G3
Gll
G12
G13
MAC/
MRC
$
Purcha••
MMMC
975
1,080
1,205
863
964
1,100
$ 57,290
$ 89.50
58,130
61,450
56,880
57,710
61,040
89.50
91.50
82.50
82.50
83.50
1 ,400 storage positions
I 2,000 storage positions
Card System - I 4,000 storage positions
I 8,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 1
I 12,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 2
L 16,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 3
Al
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
1,225
1,330
1,465
1,515
1,535
1,535
86,100
86,930
90,160
82,340
92,760
92,760
83.00
83.00
85.50
89.50
91.50
91.50
I
Expanded Card System - I
I
I
L
1 ,400 storage pOSitions
2,000 storage positions
4,000 storage positions
8,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 1
12,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 2
16,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 3
81
82
83
B4
85
86
1,380
1,485
1,620
1,670
1,690
1,690
96,290
97,130
100,300
102,500
102,900
102,900
91.50
91.50
93.50
95.50
98.00
98.00
I
729 Tape/Card System - I
I
I
L
1 ,400 storage positions
2,000 storage pOSitions
4,000 storage positions
8,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 1
12,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 2
16,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 3
Cl
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
2,510
2,615
2,750
2,805
2,825
2,825
129,950
131,000
134,100
136,200
137,250
137,250
138.00
138.00
141.00
146.00
147.00
147.00
I
729 Tape-oriented System - I
I
I
L
1 ,400 storage positions
2,000 storage positions
4,000 storage pOSitions
8,000 system storage pos w 1406 omdl 1
12,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 2
16,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 3
01
02
03
04
05
06
2,480
2,585
2,720
2,770
2,805
2,805
128,900
129,950
133,050
135,150
136,200
136,200
124.00
124.00
126.00
129.00
130.00
130.00
I
7330 tape-oriented System - I
I
I
L
1 ,400 storage positions
2,000 storage positions
4,000 storage pOSitions
8,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 1
12,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 2
16,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 3
011
012
013
014
015
016
1,995
2,095
2,230
2,285
2,305
2,305
128,900
129,950
133,050
135,150
136,200
136,200
119.00
119.00
124.00
126.00
128.00
128.00
El
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
1,900
1,995
2,140
2,180
2,210
2,210
125,800
125,800
129,950
132,150
132,550
132,550
122.00
122.00
124.00
127.00
129.00
129.00
1 ,400 storage positions
I 2,000 storage positions
7330 Tape/Card System - I 4,000 storage positions
I 8,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 1
I 12,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 2
L16,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl3
I
1405/Card System - I
I
L
4,000 storage positions
8,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 1
1 2,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 2
16,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 3
F3
F4
F5
F6
1,650
1,700
1,720
1,720
101,650
103,950
104,350
104,350
95.50
99.50
102.00
102.00
I
1405/729 Tape/Card System - I
I
L
4,000 storage positions
8,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 1
12,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 2
16,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 3
F13
F14
F15
F16
2,660
2,710
2,730
2,730
131,000
133,600
134,000
134,000
130.00
136.00
137.00
137.00
I
1405/7730 Tape/Card System - I
I
L
4,000 storage positions
8,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 1
12,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 2
16,000 system storage pos w 1406 mdl 3
F23
F24
F25
F26
2,160
2,210
2,240
2,240
131,000
133,600
134,000
134,000
127.00
129.00
133.00.
133.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Purchase Option: 45%
Maintenance: B
Per call: 3
Metering: Base Unit (meters 1406)
Warranty: B
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- =':' =
=- =
-- -- ---- - - ------
M 1401.2
May 79
DP Machines
1401 Processing Unit (cont'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following special features are on an "as available" basis for
field installation,
• For General Use
ADVANCED PROGRAMMING (#1060). [B, C, 0, E, F mdls only]
Includes the following instructions: Indexing -- three index locations are provided to modify addresses automatically .. Store
A-Address Register - Q(AAA) -- stores contents of "A" address
register in (AAA) prior to reading this instruction ... Store BAddress Register - H(AAA) -- stores contents of "B" address
register in (AAA) prior to reading this instruction ... Move Record
-- a special "Move" instruction for moving a complete record from
one storage area to another without regard to word marks within
the record. For details see SRL Reference Manaual.
BIT TEST (#1470). [B, C, 0, E, F, G mdls only] To test any
position in storage for any bit. limitation: Since the function
provided by this feature is part of Column Binary (#1990); it is not
required and cannot be installed if # 1990 is installed. Note: This
feature is required to attach a 7641 Hypertape Control if # 1990 is
not installed.
HIGH-LOW-EQUAL COMPARE (#4575). [B, C, 0, E, F, G mdls
only] Indicators can be tested for a high, low or equal condition
after a "Compare" instruction has been executed ... applies to
alphabetic as well as numeric data.
MULTIPLY-DIVIDE (#5275). [B, C, E, F mdls only] Provides the
following: Multiply -- an area of core storage must be set aside
equal in length to the combined lengths of the multiplier and multiplicand, plus one. This area, or "B" field, is used to hold the
multiplier in the high-order positions and develop the product in
the low-order positions. The multiplicand. is placed in the "A"
field. After the multiplier has been moved to the high-order positions of the "B" field, the multiply operation is executed. Upon
completion of the operation, the product is available beginning
with the units position of the "B" field. Speed depends upon the
size of the multiplier and multiplicand; e.g., a 6-position field
multiplied by a 4-position field requires only 1 .96 milliseconds.
Divide -- a field in which the quotient will be developed is set
aside immediately to the left of the dividend field. The divisor can
be any other place in core storage. After the "Divide" instruction
is executed, the quotient is available beginning with the units
position of the field set aside for it; the remainder beginning with
the units position of the dividend field. Speed depends upon the
size of the expected quotient.
PROCESSING OVERLAP (#5730).
[B, C, 0, E, F mdls only]
Allows the system to compute while input/output is in process.
Computing continues while the I/O unit prepares to send or receive data, and between character transfers. When the transfer
begins, computing is interrupted to receive a character when
signalled by the I/O unit. limitation: Can be field installed only
on 1401 s serial no. 26410 or above . .
Notes: [1] For most efficient system operation involving card
operations, installation of Early Card Read (#3550) on the 1402
in conjunction with this feature is recommended ... [2] This feature
is recommended for optimum operation of a 1419 Magnetic Character Reader ". [3] This feature is not effective with a 1009 Data
Transmission Unit, a 1012 Tape Punch, 1412 Magnetic Character
Reader, 1418 Optical Character Reader, or 1428 Alphameric
Optical Reader.
The Read Release and Punch Release
standard on C mdls]
instructions are installed as one feature and operate as follows:
Read Release - operation code "8" causes the card reader to
start the next cycle and allows processing to continue. A "Read"
instruction must then be given prior to the time the reader is ready
to read the "9" row of the card ... allows a gain of 21 milliseconds for processing time between succesive card feed cycles.
Punch Release -- operation code "9" causes the card punch to
start the next cycle and allows processing to continue. A "Punch"
instruction must be given prior to the time the 1401 must read
data to the punch for punching the "12" row of the card ". allows
a gain of 37 milliseconds of processing time between succesive
punch cycles.
• For Printers
EXPANDED PRINT EDIT (#3835). [A, B, E, F, G, H mdls only".
standard on C and 0 mdls] Expands print edit as follows: Asterisk Protection -- printing of high-order zeros replaced with asterisks until a significant digit is sensed. Floating Dollar -- printing of
all high-order zeros is suppressed and a dollar sign prints immediately to the left of the first high-order significant digit. Decimal
Control -- when a decimal point is sensed, suppression of zeros is
stopped unless a significant digit is not sensed in any of the pOSitions to the right of the decimal point, in which case all zeros and
the decimal point are suppressed. Sign Control Left -- a "CR" or
"-" character is printed in the high-order position of the control
word if the edited word is negative.
NUMERICAL PRINT CONTROL (#5380).
[B, C, 0, E, F mdls
only] Required for Numerical Print Feature (#5381) on a 1403
mdl 1 or 2, limitation: Can be field installed only on 1401 s serial
no. 20000 or above.
PRINT CONTROL (#5539). [B, E, F mdls only". standard on C
mdls] Required to control the 32 additional print positions of a
1404 Printer.
PRINT CONTROL, ADD'L (#5540). [A, B, E, F, G1, G2, G3 mdls
only" .. standard on C and 0 mdls] Required to control the 32
additional print positions of a 1403 Printer mdl 2 or 5.
PRINTER (1404) ADAPTER (#5563). [B, C, E, F mdls only] To
attach a 1404 Printer. Limitation: Can be field installed on 1401 s
serial no. 26410 or above only.
PRINT STORAGE (#5585). [B, C, 0, E, F mdls only] Provides
additional storage to print a line from the main storage print area
with the "Print" instruction. Upon completion of the transfer,
normal program execution is resumed while the printer prints a
line from print storage, increasing available process time by the 84
milliseconds normally interlocked by a print operation. Reduces
job time on combination I/O operations involving printing. Two
additional instructions, "Branch on Carriage Busy" and "Branch
on Printer Busy", are provided to int~rrogate the status of carriage
and printer and to allow maximum utilization of the additional
processing time.
READ-GOMPARE ADAPTER (#5991).
[B, C, E, F mdls only]
Required for Read-Compare (#5990) on a 1404. Limitation: Can
be field installed only on 1401 s serial no. 26410 or above.
SELECTIVE TAPE LISTING CONTROL (#6412). [B, C, E, F mdls
only] Required for Selective Tape Listing Feature (#6411) on a
1403 mdl 1 or 2. Limitations: Can be installed only on 1401 s
serial no. 20000 or above ". cannot be installed on a 1401 ordered for future installation of a 1404 Printer.
SENSE SWITCHES (#7600).
[A, B, E, F, G, H mdls only ...
standard on C, 0 mdls] A group of six sense switches which
provide manual control of a stored program and give six additional
conditions the "Branch" instruction can test ... the "d" modifier of
the instruction specifies which switch is to be tested. Maximum:
One group.
SPACE SUPPRESSION (#7246). [For any mdl] Provides 1403
or 1404 space suppression under program control.
• For Card and Tape Systems
COMPRESSED TAPE (#2210). [C, 0, E, F (except F3-F6) mdls
only] Two additional instructions permit the 1401 to read a tape
record written with zero elimination by a 7070/7074 system and
to expand it within core storage for processing. Prerequisite:
Advanced Programming (# 1 060).
COLUMN BINARY (#1 990) , [B, C, E, F mdls only] To convert
binary cards to magnetic tape, and vice versa ... cards with multiple significant digit punching in a single column can also be processed, This feature is required to attach a 7641 Hypertape Control, if Bit Test (#1470) is not installed. limitations: When reading such characters, the validity check is inhibited because all
characters are considered valid ... since this feature includes the
function provided by Bit Test (#1470), it is not required and
cannot be installed if # 1470 is installed.
• For 1402 Card Read Punch
PUNCH FEED READ CONTROL (#5895),' [A, B, C, E, F, G, H
mdls only] Required for Punch Feed Read (#5890) on a 1402
mdl 1, 4, 5 or 6. limitation: For field installation 1401 must be
serial no. 20000 or above.
READ PUNCH RELEASE (#6040).
[A, B, E, F, G, H mdls only ...
• For Tape Systems
800 CPI FEATURE (#3580). [C1-C6, 01-06, F13-F16 mdls only]
To operate 729 V Magnetic Tape Units at 800 cpi density". see
Tape Densities Option Switch under 729 II/IV/V /VI.
TAPE INTERMIX (#7804, 7805). [C1-C6, 01-06, F13-F16 mdls
only] #7804 -- to mix 729 IVs with 729 lis or Vs ." #7805 -- to
mix 729 II or Vs with 729 IVs, limitation: Can be installed only on
1401 s serial no. 20263 or above.
Prerequisite:
To operate 729 Vs at 800 cpi in any of these combinations, an
800 CPI Feature (#3850) is also required.
• For 1311 Disk Storage Drives
DISK STORAGE DRIVE ADAPTER (#3339).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[B, C, E mdls only]
------------=- =
----=--':' =
M 1401 - 1402
May 79
DP Machines
1401 Processing Unit (conI' d)
Required for the attached 1311 mdl 4 ... also permits attachment
of up to four additional 1311 mdl 2s.
1402 CARD READ PUNCH
[No longer available]
• For Serial I/O Units
SERIAL I/O ADAPTER (#7080). [B, C, 0, E, F, G mdls only] To
attach a 1012 Tape Punch, 1231 Optical Mark Page Reader,
1419 Magnetic Character Reader, or Direct Data Channel (#3271)
to the system. One adapter can be used for all these attachments,
but only one attachment can be made at a time. Limitation: Only
a 1012 or a 1231 can be attached to 1401 G mdls.
Prerequisites: Diagnostic programs require the following minimum
storage positions: For 1012 -- 2,000 ... for 1231 -- 4,000.
• For Direct Inter-system Data Transfer
DIRECT DATA CHANNEL (#3271).
[B, C, 0, E, F mdls only]
Permits two 1 401 s, or a 1401 and a 1441 (1440 or 1460) to
transfer data between systems. Data is transferred via a cable
connected to a Serial I/O Adapter (#7080) on each system. The
cable can be manually attached or detached. When attached, no
other attachment can be made to #7080. Only one #3271 is
required to connect the two systems ... it may be ordered for
either system, but Emergency Power-Off (#9144) must be ordered
for the other system. Specify: Length of cable, to a maximum of
100 feet ... also indicate system to which the 1401 will be attached and whether it is installed or on order. Prerequisites: Advanced Programming (#1060) and Serial I/O Adapter (#7080).
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
FIC
• For General Use
Advanced Programming #1060
Bit Test
1470
Hlgh-Low-Equal Compare 4575
5275
Multiply-Divide
5730
Processing Overlap
7600
Sense Switches
$108 $ 4,040 $ 1.50 $592
1.00
20
848
6
76
2,865
2.50
269
333
11,950 14.00
674
255
15,380 25.00
839
15
582
1.00
29
• For Card and Tape Systems
Column Binary
1990
101
3,685
3.50
377
56
25
2,095
1,005
2.50
1.00
363
22
795
20
2,045
50
2,510
61
2,510
61
1,410
25
12,890
386
76
4,365
4,415
86
78SUC 63
1.00
1.50
1.50
1.50
2.00
40.50
2.00
NC
NC
29
1J
29
For 1402 Card Read Punch
Punch Feed Read Control 5895
Read-Punch Release
6040
• For Printers
Expanded Print Edit
Numerical Print Control
Print Control
Print Control, Add'i
Printer (1404) Adapter
Print Storage
Read-Compare Adapter
Selective Tape List Cntrl
Space Suppression
3835
5380
5539
5540
5563
5585
5991
6412
7246
t
71
71
t
578
Model4
For a 1401 mdl G1, G2, G3, G11, G12 or G13
Model5
Fora 1401 mdlG11,G120rG13
Model Changes: Model 5 can be changed in the field to model 4,
or vice versa.
The fol/owing specifications can be changed in the field:
[1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: Color Accent -- #9043 for blue, or, if other system units
are to have red, yellow or gray accents, #9044 for charcoal.
Extended Color - #9031 for red, #9032 for yellow, or #9033
for blue.
[3] Numerical Print Feature: #5381. For 1401 system only. Required if Numerical Print Feature (#5381) is installed on a
1403 Printer.
PRICES:
1402
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
4
$ 504
5
478
$30,520
29,420
$187
182
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45%
Maintenance: C
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
The fol/owing features, as appropriate, are on an "as available"
basis for field instal/ation.
EARLY CARD READ (#3550). [Mdl 1 only ... standard on mdls
4,_ 5 and 6 ... not available on mdl 2] To allow the 1402 to maintain high reading speed during lengthy processing routines. In
such routines, the card reading mechanism can engage sooner,
reducing time between reading of cards ... see appropriate Reference Manual for details.
PUNCH FEED READ (#5890). [Mdls 1, 4, 5 and 6 only... not
available on mdl 2] For punching output data into the same card
from which input data was read. Adds a special set of 80 reading
brushes one station ahead of the punch station. Limitation: Refer
to SRL GA24-3074 for limitations on use of prepunched cards.
Prerequisite: Punch Feed Read Control (#5895) on 1401.
Special Feature Prices:
Early Card Read
Punch Feed Read
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
#3550 $ 10
5890
31
$ 241
1,045
• For Tape Systems
Compre88ed Tape
800 CPI Feature
Tape Intermix
to add 729-IVs to II/Vs
to add 729 II/Vs to IVs
2210
3580
35
35
1,330
1,620
4.50
NC
52
106
7804
7805
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
101
4,925
6.50
335
101
3,845
2.00
299
NC
NC
NC
• For 1311 Disk Storage Drives
Disk Storage Drive Adptr 3339
• For Serial I/O Units
Serial I/O Adapter
7080
• For Direct Inter-system Data Transfer
Direct Data Channel
t
3271
NC
[reverse side is blank]
Field installation charge
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
FIC
NC $234··
$5.50
75
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 1403.1
May 79
DP Machines
1403 PRINTER
Purpose: Printed output unit for the data processing systems
indicated below.
For use with System/3, S/360 mdl 20 and 1130, see GSD
manual.
Model
Print Speed
Pos.
(max)
For Use With
1t
100
600lpm
2
132
600lpm
3t
132
1 ,100 Ipm 141 0, 1440, 1460, 7010, 7040, 7040
7044, S/360 mdls 30, 40, 44, 50, 65,
67, 75, S/370 mdls 135 thru 165.
4t
100
465 Ipm
1401 mdls Gl, G2, G3.
5t
132
4651pm
1401 mdl Gl, G2, G3, 1440.
6
120
340 Ipm
1401 mdls Gll, G12, G13, H3, 1440.
7
120
600 Ipm
S/360 mdls 22, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65,
67, 75, 85, 195, all S/370 Processors, all 4300 Processors.
Nl
132
1,100 IpmS/360 mdls 22,30,40,44,50,65,
67, 75, 85, 195, all S/370 Processors, all 4300 Processors.
1401 mdls A, B" E, F, 1410, 7010,
7040, 7044
1401 mdls A, B, C, D, E, F, 1410,
1440, 1460, 7010, 7040, 7044,
S/360 mdls 22, 30, 40, 50, 65, 67,
75, 85, 195, all S/370 Processors, all
4300 Processors.
Model Changes: Can be made in the field between models 1 and
2, models 2 and 7, models 4 and 5, or models 5 and 2.
PREREQUISITES: 1403 mdl 3 or Nl only -- a 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge is required on each 1403 mdl 3 or Nl ... see
1416.
1401 (except G and H mdls) - one 1403 mdl 2 (by field change
from a mdl 1) can be attached. The 1403 mdl 2 requires Print
Control, Add'i (#5540) on the 1401.
1401 Model H3 -- one 1403 mdl 6 can be attached.
1401 G Models - one 1403 mdl 4 or 5 can be attached to a
1401 mdl Gl, G2, G3. Print Control, Add'i (#5540) is required
on the 1401 for a 1403 mdl 5. One 1403 mdl 6 can be attached
toa1401 mdIGl1,G12,G13.
1440 -- one 1403 mdl 2, 3, 5 (by field change from a mdl 4) or a
mdl 6 can be attached to a system via a 1446 Printer Control
equipped with the appropriate Attachment feature (#1325, 1326,
1327, 1328) ... see 1446.
1460 -- 1403 mdl 2s and 3s. can be attached only if the prerequisite 1461 I/O Control and 1462 Printer Control and any of
their required features are already installed.
7040/7044 -- up to three 1403s [mdls 1 , 2 and 3 in any combination] can be attached only if the prerequisite 1414 I/O Synchronizer mdl 3, 4 or 8 and its prerequisites are already installed.
5/360 mdl 25 -- one 1403 mdl 2 or 7 can be attached via an
Integrated 1403 Attachment (#4590) on the 2025, or one mdl
Nl can be attached via #4590 and an 1100 LPM Printer Adapter
(#3615) on the 2025 ... see 2025. For these attachments, an
appropriate adapter is also required on the 1403 itself ... see
item [3] under "Specify." 1403 mdl 2s, 7s or Nls can also be
attached to a system via a 2821 Control Unit mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5
attached to the S/360 mdl 25 multiplexer or selector channel ...
see 2821 for 1403 attachment details.
5/360 mdl 30, 40, 44, SO, 65, 67, 75, or 5/370 mdl 115, 125,
135,135-3,138,145,145-3,148,155,165 - 1403 mdls 2, 7
and Nl are attached via a 2821 Control Unit mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5 ...
see 2821 for attachment details. Notes: [1] 1403 mdl 3 is not
available on a S/370 mdl 115, 125 ... [2] For a 1403 mdl 2 or
3, an appropriate adapter is required on the 1403 itself. See
"Specify". For a S/370 mdl 125, 135, 135-3 or 138 also see
the following paragraph.
5/370 mdl 125, 135, 135-3, 138 -- a 1403 mdl 2, 7 or Nl can
be attached via an appropriate Integrated Adapter ... see
"Special Features" under 3125, 3135, 3135-3 or 3138. Note:
For a 1403 mdl 2, an appropriate adapter is required on the
1403 itself ... see "Specify." On a 1403 mdl 2, 7 or Nl, an
appropriate voltage conversion adapter is required on the 1403
itself '" see "Specify."
attachment details. Note: For a 1403 mdl 2, an appropriate
adapter is required on the 1403 itself ... see item [2] under
"Specify."
Highlights: Actual speeds depend upon the operation. The
system's processing unit performs all format and anlysis control. A
line of printing is presented to the printer in the arrangement in
which it is to be printed. All data printed is checked against data
received from core storage.
Each print position can print anyone of 48 characters ... alphabetic, numeric, and 12 special characters. Characters are spaced
10/inch. Line spacing is 6 or 8 lines/inch, under operator control. Continuous marginally punched forms from 3-1/2" to 183/4" in overall width are fed by an automatic carriage. Minimum
form depth is 1" ... maximum is 22" at 6 lineS/inch, or 16-1/2"
at 8 lines/inch. Forms spacing and skipping governed by the
stored program. A standard pre-punched 1 2-channel tape is
supplied with each 1403 for use in verification of forms movement.
Standard skipping is approximately 33" /second. The standard
carriage on printers used with all systems is dual-speed, except
for a 1403 mdl 1 or 2 used in a 1 401 mdl A system, or a 1 403
mdl 6 or 7 regardless of system. The dual speed carriage permits
skipping at approximately 75" /second on skips over 8 lines long.
Note: On a mdl Nl, under certain unique conditions, the
75" /second skip is turned off and skipping continues at approximately 33"/second ... see SRL GA24-3073 for details.
The printer and carriage open for easy loading and alignment of
forms. On all mdls except mdl Nl, forms are wheeled to and from
the printer on a double-duty, two-section forms stand which reduces paper handling and set-up time. The mdl Nl has sound
absorbent covers extending to the floor for reduced noise level. A
motorized cover facilitiates operator handling. The accoustical
cover design incorporates platforms for feeding and stacking of
forms. A forms cart is available for the mdl Nl ... see
"Accessories" below.
Program Compatibility -- the 1403 mdl 3 is program compatible
with the mdl 2 or 5. Existing programs for mdl 2s and 5s need not
be changed for a mdl 3, except in those cases where, because of
the reduced time required to print a line, the overall I/O scheduling must be re-optimized.
Note: Program compatibility between 1400 series systems and
S/360 mdls 25, 30, 40, 50 or S/370 mdls 125, 135, 135-3,
138, 145, 145-3, 148, 155 requires compatibility features on the
appropriate S/360, S/370 Processor or a 4331 Processor.
The 1403 mdl Nl is program compatible with the mdl 2 or 3 used
in S/360 mdls 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67, 75 and with the mdl 2
used in S/360 mdls 22, 85, 195, any S/370 Processor or any
4300 Processor. Existing programs for the mdl 2s and 3s need not be
changed for a mdl Nl, except in those cases where, because of
the reduced time required to print a line, the overall I/O scheduling must be re-optimized.
The 1403 mdl 2 is program compatible with 5203 Printer mdls,
including the tapeless carriage facility. Existing programs for the
5203 need not be changed, except in those programs where the
overall I/O scheduling must be re-optimized to utilize the reduced
print time/line, or if the user wishes to use more print positions on
a 1403 than were on the 5203 being replaced.
Printed Output for Optical Character Reading -- 1403 print
chains and 1416 trains can be equipped for printing on documents
to be read by the following optical character readers:
1230 Optical Mark Scoring Reader
1418 Optical Character Reader
1231/1232 Optical Mark Page Reader 1428 Alphameric Optical Reader
1282 Optical Reader Card Punch
3881 Optical Mark Reader
1287 Optical Reader
3886 Optical Character Reader
1288 Optical Page Reader
Depending upon system with which the 1403 will be used, and the
optical character reader involved, see appropriate section of the
"Type Catalog" for feature #(s) to be specified for the required
1403 print arrangement. The ribbons used on the 1403 must be
capable of producing printed characters suitable for recognition by
the optical reader used. For recommended ribbons and document
specifications, see appropriate optical reader description.
Limitations: [1] The dual-speed carriage is not available on a
1403 mdl 6 or 7, or on printers used with 1401 mdl As.
[2] 1403 mdls 3 and Nl: Forms sets used on 1403 mdls 1, 2, 4,
5, 6 or 7 (chain printers) may not produce acceptable results
when used on 1403 mdl 3 or Nl (train printers). A six-part set
which gives satisfactory results on a chain printer may show a
decrease in the print quality of the last copies when used on an
1100 Ipm train printer ... for details, see SRL GA24-3041.
5/360 mdl 22, 85,195, S/370mdl 158, 168, 195, 3031, 3032,
3033 and 4300 Processors -- 1403 mdls 2, 7 and Nl are attached via a 2821 Control Unit mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5. See 2821 for
[3] Multiple-part forms are not recommended for OCR pri.~ting.
The print quality of the top sheet is affected by the underlying
sheets. Under no circumstances should the copy shdets be
used for optical scanning. For best results, use single-part
forms for OCR printing.
t
Bibliography:
No longer available.
S/360
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-
GC2G-0360,
S/370
--
GC20-0001,
----- --
---- - - ----===
':' =
DP Machines
1403 PRINTER (cont'd)
1401/1460 -- GA24-1495, 1410/7010 GA24-3005, 7040/7044 -- GA28-6288.
M 1403.2
May 79
GA22-6826,. 1440 -
Specify: [1] Voltage (AG, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Voltage Adapter: #9709. Required when a 1403 mdl 2 or 3 is
to be attached to any S/360, S/370 Processor or 4300
Processor. Limitation: 1403 mdl 3 is not available for attachment
to a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 85, 195, or any 4300 Processor. Note:
When an installed mdl 2, 3 or 5 (from other than S/360, S/370
or 4300 Processors) is retained for attachment to these systems,
new cables must be ordered. Refer to Physical Planning Manual for cable requirements and ordering procedure.
When #9709 is field installed, the standard configuration
chain/train previously installed will be ·modified to an AN or HN
arrangement of the same type size or style. See "Type
Catalog" (S/360, S/370 and 4300 Processors) - 1403 and 1404
Printers) for feature # to which chain (or train) is to be modified. Submit
(on 1403 mdl 2, or 1416 for 1403 mdl 3)
specifying "Change installed chain (train) # __ to # __ ."
If Interchangeable Chain Cartridge Adapter (#4740) is installed
on mdl 2, both alphameric chains (standard configuration only)
will be modified, one to AN and one to HN. Modification is
restricted to same type size or style as· previously installed.
[3] Attachment to 2025 via Integrated 1403 Attachment (#4590):
The following adapters are required on the 1403; On 1403 mdl
2 or 7, a 600 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9725) ... on
1403. mdl N1, an 1100 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter
(#9726). These can be field installed. Note: On a 1403 mdl 2,
a Voltage Adapter (#9709) is also required ,.. see [2] above.
[4] Attachment to a S/370 mdl 125 via an Integrated Printer
Adapter (#4662,4667,4668) or a S/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138
via an Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670) with
either the Integrated 1403 Printer Mdl 2, Mdl 1 Attachment
(#4672) or the Integrated 1403 Printer Mdl 7 .Attachment
(#4677). The following adapters are required on the 1403; on
1403 mdl 2 or 7, a 600 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter
(#9725) ... on 1403 mdl N1, an 1100 LPM Voltage Conversion
Adapter (#9726). These can be field Installed. Note: On a
1403 mdl 2, a Voltage Adapter (#9709) is also required ... see
.
item [2] above.
[5] Print Chain/Train Arrangement:
With S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors (1403 mdl 2, 3 or Nl) see "S/360, S/370 and 4300 Processors -- 1403 and 1404
Printers" in "Type Catalog". For mdls 3 and Nl, also see item
[6] below. Universal Character Set Feature (#8640,8641) is
required on a mdl 2, 3 or Nl, or Multiple Character Set Feature
(#5110, 5111) on a mdl 2 or N1 for any arrangement other
than the 48-character set composed of identical arrays of standard sequence ... see "Special Features" below and "Type
Catalog" page TC-71 , etc.
With 1401, 1410, 1440, 1460, 7010, 7040, 7044 (1403 mdls
1, 2, 4, 5· or 6» - one feature #, unless Interchangeable Chain
Cartridge (#4740) is ordered. See "Special Features" below
and "Other than S/360 - 1403 and 1404 Printers" in "Type
Catalog". For mdl 3, also see item [6] below.
[6] 141 6 Interchangeable Train Cartridge (mdl 3 or N 1 only): At
least one '1416 Is required with each 1403 mdl 3 or Nl ... see
1416.
[7] Color: For mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 -- Color Accent -- #9043 for
blue, or, if other system units are to have red, yellow or gray
accents, #9044 for .charcoal. Extended Color - #9031 for red,
#9032 for yellow, or #9033 for blue: For mdl Nl -- #9041 for
red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, #9045 for gray, or
#9046 for white .. For mdls 2, 5, 6, 7 -- #9046 for white.
[8] Tape Punch: Order Part No. 120910
if the 1403 is for a New Name Account. One
punch is furnished at no charge per installation.
[9] For mdl 3 or N1, cross reference Branch/Plant Order No. of
1416(s) which will be used with the 1403.
[10] Kickstrips: [on 1403 mdl N1 only] #9350, if desired. Also
available
.
When kickstrips are installed, the open area
underneath the machine is enclosed. They reduce the amount
of "toe-room" and may be inconvenient to the user if the power
outlet is located beneath the machine.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
1403
It
2
3t
4t
5t
6
7
N1
$869
925
1,081
660
715
480
777
1,081
- FTP/MLC MLC
1 yr** 2 yr
$799
851
995
607
658
442
715
995
$730
777
908
554
601
403
653
908
Purchase
MMMC
$21,300
22,000
38,140
20,370
21,070
18,760
21,140
38,140
$256
295
341
199
213
195
229
341
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online) Warranty: B
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45% Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
SPECIAL FEATURES
• Any of the following field installable special features, as appropriate, are on an "as available" basis for field installation on
discontinued 1403 models.
AUXILIARY RIBBON FEEDING FEATURE (#1376). [mdls 1, 2,4,
5, 6, 7 ... standard on mdls 3 and N1] Recommended for satisfactory utilization of polyester film ribbons ... can also be used for
conventional fabric ribbons. The polyester film (424325), or its
equivalent, provides improved print quality for both optical character recognition and other quality printing applications. See IRD
sales manual,
Note: For specific details for optical
character recognition covering printing unit, document types,
recommended ribbons and type style, see 1282.
INTERCHANGEABLE CHAIN CARTRIDGE ADAPTER (#4740).
[mdls 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 only] Permits operator to insert an interchangeable chain cartridge with different type font, style or special
character arrangement. The change can be made quickly without
special tools. Operation of the printer remains unchanged. Two
interchangeable cartridges with chains are supplied, one in lieu of
the standard fixed cartridge and one additional. See "Type
Catalog" for feature #s of available arrangements.
For Plant Installation - Specify: For other than S/360, S/370 or
4300 Processors, #4740 and any two alphameric print chain arrangements, except if Numerical Print Feature (#5381) is also
ordered. If #5381 is ordered, specify #4740, one numeric chain
(#9485 for .095" type size, or #9484 for .079") and one alphameric print chain arrangement. See appropriate section of
"Type Catalog." For mdl 2 to be used with a S/360 mdl 22 thru
85, S/370 or 4300 Processors, or mdl 7 for use with a S/360
(except mdl 67), S/370 or 4300 Processors, specify #4740 and
any two alphameric print chain arrangements. See "Type Catalog
- S/360, S/370 and 4300 Processors - 1403 and 1404 Printers"
for available arrangements.
For Field Installation - the installed fixed cartridge is modified
for interchangeability and an additional interchangeable cartridge
with chain is supplied. Specify #4740 and anyone alphameric
print chain arrangement. [Note: When an installed 1403 mdl 2 is
to be modified for use with S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors.
both alphameric chains will be modified at no charge ..• see item
[2] under "Specify."
MULTIPLE CHARACTER SET FEATURE (#5110,5111). [For use
on a 1403 mdl 2 or N1 natively attached to a S/360 mdl 25 only]
#5110 - for mdl 2 ... #5111 --for mdl N1. Required for use of
any print arrangement other than a 48-character set composed of
identical arrays of standard character sequence ... see "Type
Catalog", TC-71 , etc. Permits use of all standard print arrangements. Arrangements with identical repeatable sets will achieve
the same printing speed as with the Universal Character Set Feature on these models. Preferred arrangements in non-repeatable
sets will result in speed degradation from those speeds specified
for the UCS feature. Note: This feature provides the same function
as the Universal Character Set Feature on the 1403 mdl 2
(#8641) or N1 (#8640). If 1403 is already equipped with UCS
(#8640/8641), do not order #5110 or #5111. Prerequisites:
For either model - Integrated 1403 Attachment (#4590) and
Multiple Character Set Adapter (#51()0) on the 2025; plus Utility
Load Program 360-P-UT-048. In addition, the following are required: For mdl 2 -- 600 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter
(#9725) and Interchangeable Chain Cartridge Adapter (#4740) on
the 1403 itself ... see #4740 above and item [3] under "Specify."
For mdl Nl - 1100 LPM Printer Adapter (#3615) on the 2025,
and 1100 .LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9726) on the 1403
mdl Nl itself ... see item [3] under "Specify."
NUMERICAL PRINT FEATURE (#5381).
[mdl 2 only] [Plant
installation only] For numerical output at a rate of 1,285 Ipm ...
actual speed depends upon the operation. When operating in
numeric mode, standard carriage operation and checking, remain
•• FTP is 12-23 months.
t
No longer available
Not to .be reproduced witl10Ht .wrilten permj$sion.
-------- - -------------_.--- -----
M 1403.3
May 79
DP Machines
1403 PRINTER (cont'd)
unchanged, except that an alphabetic character causes a print
check error. The numeric chain (#9485 for .095" type size, or
#9484 for .079") has ten numeric characters and the special
characters $ [] . • , and - arranged in fifteen identical type
arrays. Limitation: Not available for printers used with 1401 A
mdls, S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors. Specify: #5381, one
numeric chain (#9485 or #9484) and Interchangeable Chain
Cartridge Adapter (#4740) with one alphameric print chain arrangement ... see "Type Catalog" for feature #s. Prerequisites:
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge Adapter (#4740) on the 1403 ...
Numerical Print Control (#5380) on the 1401 Processing Unit,
1414 I/O Synchronizer mdl 3, 4 or 8, 1446 Printer Control, 1461
I/O Control, or 1462 Printer Control Unit ... in a 1401 system,
Numerical Print Feature (#5381) on the 1402 Card Read Punch
(no charge).
PREFERRED CHARACTER SET FEATURE (#5523). [Mdl 3 only]
[1440 or 1460 only] Provides for printed output up to 1,400 Ipm.
When only numeric printing is required, 1,400 Ipm is possible.
With alphameric printing, when the content is predominantly numeric, speeds in excess of 1,100 Ipm can be obtained. The PCS
feature has 48 characters on the chain, so arranged that the most
common characters can be presented to the print hammers more
frequently. For example, the alphameric train of Preferred Character Set A (# 9561) consists of:
0-9 . , ••
Characters of primary preference, appearing 8 times
Characters of secondary preference, appearing 4 times
A-Z [] $ / &
Characters of least preference, appearing 2 times
%#@*
If output consists only of characters of primary preference, illustrated above, at least 1,385 Ipm can be printed ... for characters
of secondary preference only, at least 920 Ipm ... for those of
least preference, at least 550 Ipm. Actual speed depends upon
the frequency of printing of characters most common on the train.
Prerequisites: A 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge equipped with Preferred Character Set print train. See 1416
and "Type Catalog - Other than S/360 - 1403 and 1404 Printers"
for PCS print trai n arrangements ... Preferred Character Set Adapter (#5524) on the 1446 Printer Control, 1461 I/O Control or
1462 Printer Control Unit to which the 1403 is attached. Note: A
rental 1416 must be replaced by a capacity increase 1416 when
#5523 is to be field installed on the 1403, unless customer desires to order an additional 1416. See 1416 and "Type Catalog"
for items to be specified on 1 41 6 order.
If both a standard
train and a Preferred Character Set are desired~ two 1416s are
required, one with a Preferred Character Set print train. If only
Preferred Character Set train is desired, only one 1416 is required. Each print train requires its own 1416.
SELECTIVE TAPE LISTING FEATURE (#6410, 8411).
[1401,
except A or D mdls, 1440, 1460 or S/360 only] #6410 -- for
mdl 3 or N1 ... #6411 -- for mdl 1 or 2. Permits operation of
eight 1.5" or four 3.1" tapes ... may be fanfold or roll (fanfold
only on mdl N1) ... up to 13 characters per 1.5" tape; up to 29
per 3.1" tape. Combinations of 3.1" and 1.5" tapes are possible.
However, each 3.1" tape requires one of the following pairs of
1.5" tape positions; 1 and 2, 3 and 4, 5 and 6, or 7 and 8. Each
tape is individually spaced under program control. No forms skipping is provided when the feature is in use. Easily interchangeable
by operator between tape listing and standard 1403 forms printing. On mdls 1, 2 and 3, a feature mode switch is provided. This
switch temporarily disconnects the standard carriage control circuits and activates the tape-feeding circuits when the tape-spool
assembly tray is latched in the operating position. On mdl N1, this
switching is accomplished when the center glJide plate is installed.
Can be used with either an alphameric chain or Numerical Print
Feature (#5381) on mdls 1 and 2, with Universal Character Set
Feature (#8641) on a mdl 2, with an alphameric train or Preferred
Character Set Feature (#5523) on a mdl 3, or with an alphameric
train or Universal Character Set Feature (#8640) on a mdl 3 or
N1. A stacker is available for stacking tapes. See "Accessories"
below. Limitations: A 1403 mdl 2, 3 or N1 is required to utilize
the full capacity of this feature ... see SRL GA24-3073 for details.
#6411 cannot be installed on a 1403 mdl 2 attached to a S/360
mdl 25 via the Integrated 1403 Attachment (#4590).
Prerequisites: Selective Tape
Listing Control (#6412) on 1401, 1446, 1461 or 1462. 1401
must be serial no. 20000 or above. Note: This feature should not
be ordered for a 1401 if future installation of a 1404 Printer is
planned.
Warning: Orders are no longer being accepted for #6410 on
1403 mdl N1 s to be used in any S/360 '" for Selective Tape
Listing on a 1403 mdl N1 for use in a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40
or 50, see #6420 below.
one of the following pairs of 1.5" tape positions: 1 and 2, 3 and
4, 5 and 6, or 7 and 8. Each tape is individually spaced or skipped under program control. Skipping is CE adjustable between 3
and 22 inches. Five manual skip buttons control the four master
tape positions ... the fifth button manually skips all tapes. Top
front stacker and access window provide for front loadin9 and
unloading of tapes. Detection is provided for failure to line space.
Easily interchangeable by operator between tape listing and standard forms printing. Improved operation with all covers closed -low accoustical level. Can be used with an alphameric train or
Universal Character Set Feature (#8640). Limitation: Cannot be
installed on a 1403 mdl N1 attached to a 8/360 mdl 25 via the
Integrated 1403 Attachment (#4590). Prerequisite: Selective Tape
Listing Control (#6425) on the 2821 Control Unit.
UNIVERSAL CHARACTER SET FEATURE (#8640, 8641).
[For
S/360 mdl 22 thru 195, any 8/370 Processor or any 4300
Processor] #8640 -- for mdl 3 or N1 ... #8641 -- for mdl 2 or 5.
Required on a 1403 mdl 2, :3, 5 or N1 for any print arrangement
other than a 48-character set composed of identical arrays of
standard character sequence. Any set of 240 codes can be loaded from cards into a special storage unit in the 2821 Control Unit
mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5, or a 3125 Processing Unit.
The 240 codes must correspond in sequence to codes assigned to
the graphics on the chain or train selected. This includes any
announced print arrangement for S/360, 1400 series systems, or
any arrangement of characters slected / designed by the customer
for optimization of his application requirements ... see "Type
Catalog." Charges for artwork, matrix, etc., for special slugs are
to be added if applicable.
Note: This feature provides the same function as the Multiple
Character Set Feature (#5110, 5111) on the 1403 mdl 2 or N1
when attached to a 2025 Processing Unit via the Integrated 1403
Attachment (#4590) ... see Multiple Character Set Feature above.
If 1403 is already equipped with the MCS Feature (#511 0, 5111),
do NOT order #8640 or #8641.
A 1403 with Multiple Character Set Feature can be attached to a
2821 Control Unit equipped with the appropriate UCS Adapter
(#8637, 8638 or 8639) or to a 3125 Processing Unit with appropriate features (#4662 or #4668).
Limitations: (1) Printing speed of the 1403 mdl 2 is limited to 750
Ipm; that of the 1403 mdl 5 to 585 Ipm; that of the 1403 mdl 3 or
N1 to 1,400 Ipm ... (2) The allowable code/graphiC selection is
restricted to the 256 code positions of the EBCDIC Code ... see
SRL GA24-3312.
Prerequisites: For each 1403 with #8640 or #8641, the appropriate UCS Adapter is required on the 2821, 3125, 3135-3 or
3138 ... see "Special Features" under the appropriate unit ... for
mdl 2, Interchangeable Chain Cartridge Adapter (#4740) ... for
mdl 3 or N1, each different train arrangement requires its own
1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge ... for 8/360 mdl 22 thru
195, S/370 mdl 115 thru 168, and 4331 and 4341 Processors, Utility
Load Program 360P-UT-048.
Note: If this feature is to be installed on a 1403 mdl 2 or 5
equipped with a fixed cartridge and an AN or HN arrangement,
Interchangeable Chain Cartridge (#4740) must also be ordered.
Specify any two UCS print arrangement:; ... see Type Catalog,
"S/360, S/370 and 4300 Processors - 1403 and 1404 Printers."
If customer desires to retain the former arrangement and to
receive one additional one, the fixed cartridge will be modified for
interchangeability and an additional interchangeable cartridge
with selected print arrangement will be furnished.
If #4740 is alrsady instalied with AN or HN arrangements, and
customer desires to change to any other arrangement{s), order
new chain{s) as follows:
Rental Customer -for UCS feature, specify print chain
feature #s ... see "Type Catalog."
Purchase Customer - purchase new chain{s) ... see "New
Print Chains" under "S/360, S/370 and 4300 Processors -1403 and 1404 Printers" in "Type Catalog."
SELECTIVE TAPE LISTING FEATURE (#6420). [Mdl N1 only ...
for use in S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40 or 50 only] Permits preparation of eight 1.5" or four 3.1" fanfold tapes ... up to 13 characters per 1.5" tape, up to 29 per 3.1" tape. Combinations of 3.1"
and 1.5" tapes are possible. However, each 3.1" tape requires
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--......- --------- ---.---.- ......
-
1403 PRINTER
M 1403.4
May 79
DP Machines
(cont'd)
-- FTP/--
MJ\C/M.,C MLC
Special Fea\ure Prices:
MRC I yr··2yr
Aux Ribbon Feed
#1376 $ 88 $ 81 S 74
Interchangeable Chain
Cartridge Adapter
4740
88
81
74
Multiple Character Sot Feature
5110
II
10
9
for mdl2
IQ
formdl NI
5111
II
9
Numeric Print Fea
5381 267 246 224
39
552,3
46
42
Preferred Char Set
Selective Tape Listing Feature
for mdl3 or NI
6410 225 207 189
6411 225 207 189
for mdll or2
for mdl NI (new)
6420 334 307 281
Universal Character Set Feature
for mdl 3 or NI
8640
II
10
9
for mdl2 or 5
8641
10
9
II
Purchase
MMMC
$ 2,000
$26.00
$ 88
2,030
NC
60
299
426
5,865
1,385
2.50
2.50
14.00
3.00
PO
42
7,50S
5,260
11,010
15.00
15.00
39.50
1,265
426
299
2.50
2.50
197
FIC
t
t
432
246
tt
•• FTP is 12-23 months.
Acceaaorles: The following Item Is IlVllllable on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with mac!)lne, order the feature # Indicated
below at the price listed in M10000 pages. See M10000 for additional Information and field installation. '
Stacker (#6413) - for use with Selective Tape Listing Feature
(#6410 or #6411) which is prerequisite.
t
tt
CharI" must be obtained ftom IBM.
FIC for model 3 is SI91 ... for model Nt is S1I9.
Not to be reproduced without written permission_
----------=-- =---- ---=--':' =
M 1404
Mav 79
DP Machines
fled for use with a S/360, both alphameric chains will be modified at no charge ... see [4] under "Specify" above.]
1404 PRINTER
Purpose: Printed paper and card document output unit for a 1401
(except A, D, G and H mdls), or S/360 mdl 25, 30, 40 or 50.
Highlights: Has all continuous form printing functions of the 1403,
plus a dual channel cut-card feeding mechanism mounted on the
left of the continuous form printing stations. Printing assembly is
shifted to the cut-card or continuous form printing positions in a
few seconds by the operator. Card documents and continuous
forms cannot be printed on the same run. Cut-card feed becomes
operative when printing assembly is shifted to the card side. The
printing assembly has 132 print positions and has all 1403 features. Operation for printing continuous forms is identical to that
of the 1403.
READ-COMPARE (#5990).
Permits the 1404 to read any 30
columns of the card(s) being processed. By programming, this
data can be compared with the data being printed on the card(s)
... eliminates need for an off-line proof.
PrereqUisite:
Read-Compare Adapter (#5991) on the 1401 Processing Unit or
2821 Control Unit mdl 4.
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC Purchase MMMC
Interchangeable Chain
Cartridge Adapter
#4740
Read-Compare
5990
S
Card Printing -- during single card feeding, cards can vary in
width from 51-column (4.852") to 80-column stub (14.75"). When
feeding two cards, two 51-column or two 80-column cards can be
printed at one time. Cards can vary from .006" to .009" in thickness. The number of cards. printed per minute depends upon
factors such as lines per document, position of first printed line,
and number of lines per inch.
Speeds up to 800
documents/minute are possible with the dual card feed capability.
PREREQUISITES:
For S/360 -- a 2821 Control Unit mdl 4.
For 1401 -- Printer (1404) Adapter (#5563) and Print Control
(#5539) on the 1401 Processing Unit ... can be field installed on
1401 B, C, E, F mdls serial no. 26410 or above ... see 1401.
NOTE: Print Control is standard on 1401 C mdls and need not be
ordered.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, 1401 -- GA24-1495
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: Color Accent -- #9043 for blue, or, if other system units
are to have red, yellow or gray accents, #9044 for charcoal.
Extended Color -- #9031 for red, #9032 for yellow, or #9033
for blue.
[3] System/360 Adapter: #9709. Required when 1404 is to be
attached to a 2821 mdl 4 ... also see [4] below.
[4] Print Chain Arrangement: One feature # unless Interchangeable Chain Cartridge (#4740) is ordered. See "Special
Features" below and appropriate section of "Type Catalog."'
When #9709 is field installed, the standard configuration chain
previously used will be modified to an AN or HN arrangement of
the same type size or style. See "Type Catalog - S/360 and
S/370 - 1403 and 1404 Printers" for feature # to which chain
is to be modified. Submit
specifying "Change Installed
chain # _ _ to # _ _ ."
If Interchangeable Chain Cartridge Adapter (#4740) is installed,
both alphameric chains (standard configurations only) will be
modified, one to an AN and one to an HN. Modification is restricted to same type size or style as previously installed. Submit MES as indicated above.
[5] Up-ending Kit: #9840, if required. Loan basis, remains property of IBM.
[6] Tape Punch: Order Part No. 120910
if the 1404 is for a New Name Account. One
punch is furnished at no charge per installation.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$1,680
$81,790
$645
2
1404
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online) Warranty: B
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45%
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
INTERCHANGEABLE CHAIN CARTRIDGE ADAPTER (#4740).
Permits operator to insert changeable chain cartridge with different
type font, style or special character arrangement. The change can
be made quickly without special tools. Operation of the printer
remains unchanged. Two interchangeable cartridges with chains
are supplied, one in lieu of the standard fixed cartridge and one
additional. Depending upon system, see appropriate section of the
"Type Catalog" for feature #s of available arrangements.
For Plant Installation - specify #4740 and any two alphameric
print chain arrangements.
For Field Installation - the installed fixed cartridge is modified
for interchangeability and an additional interchangeable cartridge
with chain is supplied. Specify #4740 and anyone alphameric
chain arrangement. [Note: When an installed 1404 is to be modi-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
91
190
S
3,400
10,620
NC
$39.00
FIC
S
65
177
-------- - ----=
- --=
---=--'": =
M 1412
May 79
DP Machines
1412 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER
[No longer available]
• Thefol/owing specifications can be changed in the field.
[1] Voltage (AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V, or
#9904 for 230 V.
[2] Field Lengths: Two feature #s, one for Account Number, one
for Process Control, from table below. Field lengths can be
changed in the field
Len2th
2
Acct No
Proc
Cntrl 9190 9191
3
4
5
6
9210 9211
7
8
9
9212 9213 9214
10
9215
9192 9193 9194 9195
[3) Color: Color Accent -- #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow,
#9043 for blue, or #9045 for gray. Extended Color -- #9031
for red, #9032 for yellow, or #9033 for blue.
Once this feature is installed, the 1412 cannot be used with a
1 400 series processor.
Prerequisites: In order to
operate with DOS or BPS. Direct Control (#3274) or External
Interrupt (#3895) is required on the processing unit ... to operate
with DOS. the 1412 must have EC 131182. Note: Inter-system
attachment via Direct Control is limited when the 1412 uses the
external interrupt lines. Signal in lines used by 1412s cannot be
shared with the second processing unit.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Document Counter
#2385 $ 16 $ 674
Dash Symbol Trans
3215
S6SUC 38
Isolation Control Unit
4700
NC
NC
Multiple Column SelectSort Suppress
5215
54
2,445
Self-checking Number
ModulUS 10
7061
42
2,110
Modulus 11
7062
,3,260
70
S/360 Adapter
7720
108
5,770
[4] Kickstrips: #9431 ... field installable. When kickstrips are
installed, the open area underneath the machine is enclosed.
This reduces the amount of "toe-room" for operator and may
be inconvenient to customer if the power outlet is located under
machine.
[5] Isolation Feature: May be required on units shipped prior to
December 29, 1967 for attachment to S/360 mdl 30 '" see
"Special Features" below.
• The fol/owing special features are on an "as available" basis
for field instal/ation.
DOCUMENT COUNTER (#2385).
Six-position counter which
counts all documents passing thru machine. On and Off Control
and Reset provided on operator's panel.
Maximum: One.
DASH SYMBOL TRANSMISSION (#3215).
[Units serial no.
10058 or above only] Transmits the E13B dash symbol from
transit field to storage ... with symbol in storage, program can
distinguish between duplicate Canadian and U.S. transit numbers.
Maximum: One.
ENDORSER PLATE The endorser plate is a purchase item made
to the customer's specifications. For description and field installation, see M 10000 pages. It is recommended that at least one
spare plate be stocked, as they cannot be immediately replaced.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [Field installation only on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 1412 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off,
can continue operating. Prerequisites: S/360 Adapter (#7720) ...
in all cases there are compatible EC level requirements,
MULTIPLE COLUMN SELECT - SORT SUPPRESS (#5215).
Operator's panel controls all operations of the feature. Multiple
Column Select -- selects documents with specific numbers in four
or less columns of any field. The numbers can be in a field other
than that being sorted and the four columns need not be adjacent.
Sort Suppress -- suppresses sorting on specific digits in any single
column and selects those documnets into a specific pocket. All
other documents are sorted manually. Overflow stacking eliminates stoppage due to filled pockets. Limitation: Multiple column
select and sort suppress cannot be simultaneous. Maximum: One.
SELF-CHECKING NUMBER (#7061, 7062).
A self-checking
number has two parts, the basic identifying number and its check
digit. The check digit, derived from the identifying number by one
of two techniques, is always the units digit of a self-checking
number. The feature assures that all digits in the self-checking
number have been correctly recorded. The field is verified as it is
read during any pass. Limitation: Self-checking numbers for
Modulus 10 are not compatible with those of Modulus 11.
#7061 - Modulus 10 -- has weighting factor of 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2.
Will not detect following types of errors: 09 to 90 transposition ...
interchange of digits between alternate columns, e.g., 32647 for
34627 ... substitution of one setf-checking number for another ...
in some instances, transpositions having the formula "BAB" for
"ABA", e.g., 121 for 212 ... in some instances, ramdom errors,
e.g., 23 printed as 56.
#7062 - Modulus 11 -- has weighting factor 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2.
When the self-checking number is greater than six digits, weighting factor is repeated. In some instances, random type errors will
not be detected, nor can a basic number requiring a check dig.it
of lObe used.
S/360 ADAPTER (#7720).
[1412s serial no. 10085 or above
only] Permits operation with a S/360 mdl 25 or 30. Limitation:
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
FIC
$ 3.00
$ 23
NC
NC
22
NC
3.00
189
2.50
3.50
10.00
32
26
575
,---- -------==- =-=
== ~ ==
M ~416
May 79
DP Machines
1416 INTERCHANGEABLE TRAIN CARTRIDGE
Inspection: Field Inspection of damaged 1416s will be at no
charge (except for travel time and expanse, if applicable).
Purpo..: A cartridge and print train which provides interchangeability of type font for the 1403 Printer mdl 3 or N1, and 3203
Printer (all mdls).
Rapalr: Purchased 1416s which become damaged or inoperable
may be returned to the IBM plant
for repair. Transportation charges to and from the plant are to be paid by the customer.
The following repairs will be performed at the prices Indicated per
1416:
Highlight.: At least one 1416 is required with each 1403 mdl 3 or
N1 or 3203 (all mdls).
Interchangeability - when multiple 1416s are available, they may
be interchanged by the operator, providing flexibility for printing
different type fonts, type styles, or character arrangements. This
flexibility opens new application areas with unique printing requirements such as form-letter writing, engineering and scientific data,
chemical abstracts, and text printing.
PREREQUISITES: The 1416 functions only when mounted in a
1403 mdl 3 or N 1, or a 3203 (all mdls).
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-Q360, S/370 - GC2O-QOO1,
141017010 - GA22-6826, 1440 - GA24-3005, 1460 - GA241495, 707017074 - GA28-6288.
Specify: Print Train Arrangement - see "Type Catalog" for
characters in each available arrangement and feature #s to be
specified.
[1] A rental 1416 must be capacity rer-Iaced (unless customer
desires to order an add'i 1416) when the following are to be
field installed:
a) Preferred Character Set Feature (#5523) on 1403 mdl 3 In
1400 series system.
b) Universal Character Set Feature (#8640) on 1403 mdl 3 or
N1 in S/360, S/370, 43()() Processors.
Disassemble, inspect, test, clean, replace idler
gear and drive gear, and reassemble
Replace cams on original base plate assembly
Replace base plate assembly (856186)
Replace standard type slugst
t
tt During the fourth thru twelfth month of the warranty period,
this labor charge is $105. There will be no charge for replacement of defective parts during this period. After the
twelfth month, when the warranty has expired, the charge
will remain at $360, plus the cost of additional necessary
replacement parts.
In the event a 1416 is damaged to the pOint where, in the opinion
of IBM, repair is not possible, the 1416 will be returned to the
customer. In this case, none of the prices listed above will apply.
d) A change in type size or style.
[2] When a Voltage Adapter (#9709) is field installed on a 1403
mdl 3, the standard configuration train previously used will be
modified to an AN or HN arrangement; a PCS-A arrangement
will b8 modified to a PCS-AN; or PCS-H will be modified to
PCS-HN. Any of these changes is restricted to the same type
size (style). See "Type Catalog - S/360, S/370 and 43()()
Processors - 1403 and 1404 Printers" for feature # to which
train is to be modified. Submit
on 1416, specifying
"Change Installed train # __ to # __ ."
[3] Except as stated in [1] and [2] above, order type slug substitutions whenever changes between the following train arrangements are to be made in the field: A and H ... AN and HN ...
PCS-A and PCS-H ... PCS-AN and PCS-HN. See "Type
Catalog" for applicable charges.
[4] A separate 1416 is required for each print train.
[5] Depending upon the system involved, see appropriate section
of "Type Catalog" for feature numbers of desired OCR arrangements and associated sales manual "Reader" description palles
to assure compatibility of printer/reader recognition ability.
Nota: The ribbons used on the 1403 and 3203 must be capable
of prodUCing printed characters suitable for recognition by the
optical reader used. Recommended ribbons and document
specifications are referenced in the optical reader "Machines"
pages.
[6] Cross reference Branch/Plant Order No. of 1403 and 3203 on
which 1416 will be used. If multiple 1416s are ordered, reference appropriate 1403 or 3203 order number(s). The required
information should be entered into the "Remarks Section" of
the order at order entry time.
Storage Container: #9668, if needed for the 1416.
[Recommended for use when multiple 1416s are ordered for a
single printer.]
MAC/
MMMC
MRC
Purcha..
PRICES: Mdl
[7]
1416
1
$ 101
$2,665
Purchase Option: 55%
230
745
21 per slug
When a character is replaced, all identical characters should
be replaced to ensure consistent print-out of Identical characters. Unless otherwise specified, the plant will replace
these slugs at the stated price per type slug. See "Type
Catalog."
When replacement of special characters (special slugs) is
required, the original charges (excluding artwork and matrix
charges) for those special characters will apply for this
replacement.
c) Any UCS train arrangement to replace AN or HN arrangement on a 3203 (all mdls), or a 1403 mdl 3 or N1 already
equipped with Universal Character Set Feature (#8640).
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
$ 360tt
TM
Per Call: 3
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- --- ---------::;:: = = =
~
M 1419.1
May 79
DP Machines
1419 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER
Purpose: Reads magnetically inscribed data from card and paper
documents into a 1401, 1410, 1460, S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40,
50, 65, 67, any S/370 Processor, or any 4300 Processor. Can be
used for off-line sorting.
For possible use with the 8/360 mdl 20. see G8D
manual.
Highlights: Documents read at a maximum rate of 1,600 documents a minute. Actual speed depends upon length of document
and stored program. Contains the standard features and performs
all functions of a 1219 Reader Sorter. Pocket selection may be
controlled by the 1419 or system's program. Feeding is controlled
by the system. Can also be used for Off-line sorting. Processing
Overlap (#5730) is required on the 1401 or 1461 (1460) to take
full advantage of the 1419's speed. Individual fields can be processed immediately after they are read. Document reading can be
overlapped with processing. Minimum processing time, including
pocket selection. is 32.2 milliseconds ... more than ample for
sophisticated applications.
Documents -- magnetic characters must be recorded in the type
font (E13B) and location designated by American Bankers Association Technical Committee on Mechanization of Check Handling.
Intermixed paper and card documents within the following specifications can be processed: Width -- 2-3/4" to 3-2/3" ... Lenght-6" to 8-3/4" ... Thickness -- .003" to .001" ... Paper Stock -- 20
lb. short grain to 44 lb. card stock. hi-column card stock can be
fed at a rate of approximately 1 ,960 cards a minute. Note: For
sorting 51-column cards, see 51-column Card Sorting (#4380)
under "Special Features."
Checking -- readability of each magnetic character, including
special symbols, in each field processed can be verified each time
a document is read and/or sorted. A field length check is made
on all fixed length fields being processed to assure that all numeric digits in the field have been printed. Documents not satisfying
checking conditions are rejected. Fixed field lengths provide a
powerful technique for controlling accuracy of processing.
Programming Compatibility -- reprogramming is required whenever:
a) A 1419 replaces a1412 in an existing 1400 series installation.
b) A S/360. S/370 or 4300 Processor replaces a 1400 series
installation.
c) A S/360 mdl 22. 25, 30, 40, 50, 65, any S/370 or 4300
Processor replaces a S/360 mdl 20.
d) A conversion is made from one programming system to another.
PREREQUI51TES:
5/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 50, 65, 67, any 5/370 or 4300
Processor -- each 1419 requires a S/360 Single Address Adapter
(#7720) or S/360 Dual Address Adapter (#7730) ... see "Special
Features" below. Ea"h 1419 requires a channel control unit
position.
5/360 mdl 25 -- special feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel,
or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
5/360 mdl 22, 30. 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022. 2030, 2040. 2050.
5/360 mdl 65, 67 - selector channel of 2860. basic multiplexer
channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) on a
2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
5/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), External Signal (#3898) ... see 3115, 3125. On a 3115-0.
#9336 is required.
5/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channels (special features) ... see 3135.
5/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
5/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) '" see 3138.
5/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see 3145.
5/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels .. , see 3145-3;
5/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
5/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard). 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
5/370 mdl 165, 168 --selector channel of 2860, basic multi-
plexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (optional). block multiplexer
channel (optional).
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard). block multiplexer
channels (two are standard).
Note: Before ordering, read descriptions of #7720 and #7730
under "Special Features" below for further prerequisites and
limitations.
1401/1460 - one 1419 can be attached. A Serial I/O Adapter
(#7080) Is require(l on the 1401 or 1441 Processing Unit. Note:
For optimum operation, Processing Overlap (#5730) is recommended on the 1401 or 1461 I/O Control. Without it, a maximum
of 9.5 milliseconds are available for processing of data from the
1419. Limitations: A 1419 cannot be installed with 1401 A, G or
H models ... on a 1401, diagnostic programs require a minimum
of 4,000 pOSitions of storage.
1410 -- one 1419 can be attached to each channel ... simultaneous use of two 1419s increases the number of documents converted up to 90%, exclusive of operator handling time. A Magnetic
Character Reader Adapter (#4900, 4902, 4903) is required on
the 1411 Processing Unit. Limitation: Can be installed only on
1411 mdls Ai thru AS.
'-Imitations:
5/360 mdl 25, 30 - operation of 1419s is not included under
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility features.
5/360 mell 40 -- operation of 1419s is not included under
1401/1460 Compatibility (#4457) or 1410/7010 Compatibility
(#4478).
S/360 mdl 50 - operation of 1419s is not included under
1410/7010 Compatibility (#4478).
5/360 mdl 67 -- only when operating in mdl 65 mode.
5/370 mdl 115 -- operation of 1419s is not included under
S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility (#7520).
5/370 mdl 125 -- operation of 1419s is not included under
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) or S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility (#7520).
5/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138 -- operation of 1419s is not included
under 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457).
5/370 mdl 145, 145-3, 148 - operation of 1419s is not included
under 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility or 1401/1440/1460,
1410/7010 Compatibility (#4458).
5/370 mdl 155, 158 -- operation of 1419s is not included under
1401/1440/1460. 1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950).
4331 Processor - operation of /419s
/401//440//460 Compatibility (#3950).
is
not
Bibliography: S/360 GC20-0360. S/370
1401/1460 -- GA24-1495, 1410 - GA22-6826.
included under
--
GC20-0001,
Specify: [1) Voltage (AC, i-phase, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V, or
#9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2) Color: Color Accent -- #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow,
#9043 for blue, or #9045 for gray. Extended Color -- #9031
for red, #9032 for yellow, or #9033 for blue.
[3) Field Lengths: SpeCify two feature #s, one for Account Number, one for Process Control ... see table below. Fixed field
lenQths assure maximum processing accuracy. Variable length
fields may be specified in lieu of fixed lengths. Field lengths on
installed machines may be changed
Fixed
Field
Lenght
(nos)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
\0
Account
9210 9211 9212 9213 9214 9215
Number
Process
9190 9191 9192 9193 9194 9195
Control
Variable
Field
Lenghl
9219
9189
[4) Shipping Instructions: #9691 for stackers assembled (sorter
section 35-3/4" deep), or #9692 for stackers disassembled
(sorter section approximately 32" deep).
[5) Up-ending Kit (sorter section only): #9840, if required ... loan
baSis on initial machine order only, remains property of IBM.
Note: also see [9] below.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------------ - - --.:. =-=
- ==";'
---==
M 1419.2
May 79
DP Machines
1419 Magnetic Character Reader (conI' d)
[6] System 360 Model 20 Attachment: #9710. See GSD sales
manual for details. Note: With #9710 installed, the 1419 cannot be used interchangeably with a 1400 series processor or a
S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 50, 65, 67, any S/370 Processor
or any 4300 Processor.
[7] Kickstrips: #9431, if desired ...
When
kickstrips are installed, the open area under the machine is
enclosed. This reduces the amount of "toe-room" for the operator and may be inconvenient to the customer if the power
outlet is located under the machine.
[8] Isolation Feature: May be required on units shipped prior to
December 29, 1967 for attachment to a S/360 ... see "Special
Features."
[9] Crane/Hoist Cable: #9070 ... specify only if delivery of machine requires lifting by crane or hoist. Loan basis on initial
machine order only, remains property of IBM. Prerequisite:
Up-ending Kit (#9840).
PRICES:
1419
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$2,665
$120,100
$418
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online/Offline)
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
BATCH NUMBERING (#1445).. Provides an automatic means of
advancing a batch number document identification under program
control. Consists of a 6-position impact printer which prints up to
999,999. The five low-order digits are advanced under processor
control ... the high-order digit is set manually. The batch number
can be printed in anyone of six locations on the back of the
document. Limitations: [1] Batch number advance instructions
given more often than once in a given three second period will
cause suspension of feeding for remainder of period. Minimum
batch sizes that can be processed without restriction are influenced by those factors affecting throughput. Refer to Reference
Manual... [2] Legibility of batch numbers is influenced by the
quantity of reverse side printing, the color and density of the ink
used in reverse side printing, and surface irregularities caused by
the printing process used. Typical examples of documents with
one or more surface irregularities are Traveler's and Certified
Checks. Customers must be advised that on these types of documents reduced ribbon life can be expected ... [3] When 51-column
cards are processed, print location 6 cannot be used ... [4] This
feature is not available for use in 1410 systems ... [5] Cannot be
installed with Endorser (#3791). Uses purple ribbon (413193), or
equivalent. See SRL GA24-3342 for details. Prerequisite: For
field installation, 1419 must have EC 127244 or above.
DASH SYMBOL TRANSMISSION (#3215). Transmits the E13B
dash symbol from transit field to storage. With symbol in storage,
program can distinguish between duplicate Canadian and U.S.
transit numbers. Maximum: One.
ELECTRONIC ACCUMULATOR AND SEQUENCE CHECKING
(#3610). [Plant installation only] Accumulating -- amounts read
from documents and accumulated total printed on paper tape.
Maximum accumulation is ten digits. Rejected documents not
accumulated. Sequence Checking -- selected positions in a field
compared with same positions in preceding documents to assure
that all documents are in proper order. Maximum of ten positions
can be sequence checked in single pass. Limitation: This feature
does not function when 1419 operates in "online" mode with any
S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor. Note: This feature is a separate
unit, cable connected to 1419 ... 17" x 20-1/2" x 38-1/2" ...
weight, 105 Ibs. Prerequisite: Multiple Column Control (#5201).
ENDORSER (#3791). [Plant installation only] Imprints full endorsement at speed of 1419. Operator can select one of six endorsing positions in accordance with ABA specifications. With this
feature, documents can be endorsed with date, identification
number and bank's legal endorsement. The Endorser Plate is
made to the customer's specifications. See "Accessories" below.
A Blank Endorser Plate is also available if only partial endorsements are required. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Batch
Numbering (#1445) or Endorse Only (#3795).
ENDORSE ONLY (#3795). [Plant installation only ... if Endorser
(#3791) is installed, it can be changed in the field to #3795.]
Imprints full endorsement at speed of 1419. Vertical location of
endorsement is specified by customer and set at plant. A left or
right printing position can be selected by operator. Identification
number printing is not provide:!. The date printing unit is at trailing
end of endorsing device. With this feature, documents can be
endorsed with date, identification number and bank's legal endorsement. The Endorser Plate is made to the customer's specifications. See "Accessories" below. A Blank Endorser Plate is also
available if only partial endorsements are required. Specify:
#9167 for endorsement at top, #9618 for center, or #9169 for
bottom. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Endorser (#3791).
EXPANDED CAPABILITY (#3800).
Provides a command for
operation under OS. When in OS mode, stacker select time available using the Dual Address Adapter (#7730) is reduced by 2 ms.
Exposure to data overuns caused by 1419s interfering with other
1419s operating on the same channel is eliminated. Overrun
exposure and maximum number of 1419s per channel are configuration and application dependent ... refer to .SRL GC21-5006.
Compatibility with DOS Dual Address Support is provided for
conversion to OS.
or DOS mode of operation is established by
a field modification to the feature by FE. Prerequisites: Each
1419 requires the Dual Address Adapter (#7730) ... EC 259399
is required on a 5/360 mdl 50, and EC 712822 is required on a
2870 for operation on a 5/360 mdl 65 or 5/370 mdl 165.
as
51-COLUMN CARD SORTING (#4380).
For sorting 51-column
card documents, which may be intermixed with documents and
cards within the specifications listed under "Documents" above.
When installed, machine speed is reduced. Formula for calculating feeding rate is:
15.720 + (L + .725L) ... where L is document length in inches.
approximately
1,875
For
51-column
cards,
speed
is
documents/minute ... for 6-inch documents, approximately 1,515
documents/minute. Decks containing 51-column cards must be
mechanically joggled prior to each pass.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [Field installation on units
shipped prior to December 29, 1967 only ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 1419 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off,
can continue operating. Prerequisites: S/360 Adapter, Single
Address (#7720) or Dual Address (#7730) ...
in all cases
there are compatible EC level requirements
MULTIPLE COLUMN CONTROL (#5201).
To select documents
with specific number in four or less columns of any field.
PROGRAM CONTROL FOR POCKET LIGHTS (#5739). To facilitate control of output batches in the transit application. On 1419s
attached to S/360, S/370, 4300 Processor, 1401 or 1460, the
program stops the 1419 when a predetermined number of documents has entered one of six pockets designated by the program
and turns on the appropriate pocket light(s) [A-3]. Limitation: Not
available for use in a 1410 system.
PROGRAM CONTROL FOR POCKET LIGHTS, 7-12 (#5741).
Facilitates control of output batches in the transit application when
more than six pockets are being filled. Provides lights for pockets
4-9, enabling program to turn on light(s) for any of the first twelve
pockets designated. Limitation: Not available for use in a 1410
system.
Prerequisites: Program Control for Pocket Lights
(#5739), plus EC 125358A, or, for field conversion, FBM 488231.
SELF-CHECKING NUMBER (#7061, 7062).
A self-checking
number consists of two parts, the basic identifying number and its
check digit. The check digit, derived from the basic identifying
number by one of two techniques, is always the units digit of a
self-checking number. The feature assures that all digits in a
self-checking number have been correctly recorded. The field is
verified as it is read during any pass. Limitation: Self-checking
numbers for Modulus 10 are not compatible with those for Modulus 11.
#7061 - Modulus 10 -- has weighting factor of 1, 2, 1, 2, 1. 2.
Will not detect the following errors: 09 or 90 transposition ...
interchange of digits between alternate columns, e.g., 32647 for
34627 ... substitution of one self-checking number for another ...
in some instances, transpositions having the formula "BAB" for
"ABA" ... in some instances, random errors, e.g., 23 printed as
56.
#7062 - Modulus 11 - has weighting factor of 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 ...
when self-checking number is greater than six digits, weighting
factor is repeated. in some instances, random type errors will not
be detected, nor can a basic number requiring a digit of lObe
used.
SPLIT FIELD (#7440).
The first ABA dash symbol following a
digit (e.g., a dash in units position of a field is ignored) will separate any field into two elements. Each of the elements may vary in
length. With this feature, either element can be treated as a sepdrate field. Specify: First Element (#9180) ... required when Selfchecking Number (#7061; 7062) is ordered and is to operate only
on the first element of the split field.
S1360 ADAPTER (#7720 for Single Address, #7730 for Dual
Address). One of thes.e adapters is required on each 14 ~ 9 attached to a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 50. 65 or 67, any 8/370
Processor or any 4300 Processor. Limitation: Once #7720 or
#7730 has been installed, the 1419 cannot be used with a 1400
series processor
Maximum: One
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'-------- --- - - --
M 1419.3
May 79
-
--=
----=- =
':' =
DP Machines
1419 Magnetic Character Reader
per 1419, #7720 or #7730.
(conI' d)
5/360 Adapter - Single Address (#7720) -- up to six 1419s
attached to a system are supported by DOS ... exposure to late
stacker selects should be considered in determining the maximum
number of 1419s that may effectively operate on a system, in
addition to those factors outlined under DOS in "Programming."
Limitation: Programming support precludes concurrent operation
of 1419s equipped with #7720 and those equipped with #7730.
Prerequisites: In order to operate with DOS or BPS, Direct Control (#3274) or External Interrupt (#3895) is required on the
processing unit. Note: Intersystem attachment via Direct Control
is limited when the 1419 uses external interrupt lines. Signal in
lines used by 1 419s cannot be shared with the second processing unit. To operate with DOS, the 1419 must have EC 131182.
When equipped with #7720, it is recommended that 1419s be
attached to a multiplexer channel and they should normally be
the highest priority devices on the channel.
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the desired Fearure #
indicated below at the price listed in M10000 pages.
Endorser Plate (#3792) ... for use with #3791 or #3795.
Blank Endorser Plate (#3793) ... for use with #3791
#3795.
Note: When ordering #3792, it is recommended that at least
one spare plate be stocked, as they cannot be immediately replaced.
See M 10000 pages for description, ordering instructions, and field
installation.
5/360 Adapter - Dual Address (#7730) -- with this feature more
stacker select time is available than with #7720. Available stacker select time is based on the last field selected for reading;
account number -- 27 ms, transit number -- 21 ms, serial number
-- 15 ms. In order for these times to be valid, document field
placement must be within ABA Common Machine Language
Specifications. The feature includes two distinct control units ...
each with a separate address, its own set of executable commands, and status and sense indicators. Prerequisites: If the
1419 is attached to a 2022 or 2030 multiplexer channel via
#7730, 1419 Dual Address Compatibility (#9185) must be specified on the 2022 or 2030. If #7720 is changed to #7730 by
MES, #9185 must be added to the 2022 or 2030.
---------- DOS ---------Up to six 1419s attached to a system are supported by DOS.
The limiting factors concerning the number of 141 9s that may be
attached to a system are stacker select time requirements and
channel capacity. Since these factor are application and configuration dependent, consult the appropriate channel loading and
DOS SRLs to determine the maximum number that may be operated effectively. Limitation: DOS support precludes concurrent
operation of 1419s equipped with #7730 and those equipped
with #7720 ... 1419s equipped with #7730 can be attached
only to a multiplexer channel and should normally be the highest
priority devices on the channel. Prerequisites: Direct Control
(#3274), External Interrupt (#3895) or External Signal (#3898)
is required on the processing unit (except the 4341 Processor).
Note: Intersystem attachment via Direct Control is limited when
the 1419 uses the external interrupt lines. Signals in lines used
by 1419s cannot be shared with the second processing unit. For
field installation of #7730, the 1419 must have EC 131196 or
above.
---------- OS ---------Limitation: 1419s equipped with #7730 (required for OS) can be
attached only to a multiplexer channel, must be physically cabled
last on the channel, and should be the highest priority devices on
the channel. Prerequisite: For operation under OS, each 1419
must be equipped with Expanded Capability (#3800).
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
Batch Numbering
#1445 $145 $ 6,805
Dash Symbol Trans
3215
56SUC
38
Elec Accum & Seq Ck 3610 293
10,620
3791
441
19,950
Endorser
3795 293
13,100
Endorser Only
Expanded Capability
3800 181
8,185
51-col Card Sorting
4380
NC
NC
Isolation, Control Unit 4700
NC
NC
Multiple Column Cntrl
5201
58
2,445
Program Control for Pocket Lights
pockets 1-6
5739
30
1,080
5741
10
pockets 7-12
426
Self-checking Number
7061
46
2,110
Modulus 10
7062
75
Modulus 11
3,260
Split Field
7440
22
1,335
5/360 Adapter
Single Address
7720 116
5,770
14,210
Dual Address
7730 315
FIC
$15.00
NC
31.00
55.00
35.50
1.00
NC
NC
3.00
$575
21
PO
PO
PO
108
NC
NC
189
1.00
1.50
113
65
2.50
3.50
1.50
32
26
26
10.00
13.00
966
966
or
Not to be reproduced wi.thout written permission.
._--------- -------== =-= == ';" 5:
M 1441.1
May 79
DP Machines
DISK STORAGE FEATURES
1441 PROCESSING UNIT
(No longer available)
Model
Storage
Cycle Rate
(milliseconds)
Core Storage
Pos,ltlons
(alphameric)
2,000
4,000
8,000
12,000
16,000
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
System
I
I
L
.0111
1440
I
_I
I
8,000
C4
1450
.0111
L
12,000
C5
_I
16,000
C6
Model Changes: Any A model can be changed to another A model
... any C model to another C model.
The following specifications can be changed in the field.
[1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3) Additional Disk Storage: #9010, maximum one. Required when
the second 1311 mdl 2 is attached.
[4) Card Image: #9035. Required if Card Image (#1531) is installed on a 1442 mdl 1, 2 or 4.
PRICES:
Mdl
1441
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
C4
C5
C6
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$
$ 43,570
$ 81.00
46,890
64,890
82,880
100,850
40,030
58,130
76,120
82.50
84.50
86.00
86.00
99.00
101.00
102.00
788
995
1,330
1,660
1,995
853
1,180
1,515
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 1447 mdl 1)
Maintenance: B
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
The following special features are on an "as available" basis for
field Installation.
GENERAL PURPOSE FEATURES
BIT TEST (#1470).
To test any position in storage for any bit.
INDEXING AND STORE ADDRESS REGISTER (#4631). [A mdls
only ... standard on C mdls) Includes the following instructions:
Indexing - three index locations provided to modify addresses
(AAA) -- stores conautomatically. Store A-Address Register tents of "A" address register in (AAA) prior to reading next instruction. Store B-Address Register - H (AAA) - stores contents of
"B" address register in (AAA) prior to reading next instruction.
a
MULTIPLY-DIVIDE (#5275). Provides the following: Multiply -- an
area of core storage must be set aside equal in length to combined lengths of multiplier and multiplicand, plus one. This area, or
"B" field, Is used to hold multiplier in high-order positions and
develop product in low-order positions. Multiplicand is placed in
"A" field. After multiplier has been moved to high-order positions
of "B" field, multiply operation is executed. Upon completion,
product Is available beginning with units position of "B" fieid.
Speed depends upon sizes of multiplier and multiplicand, e.g., a
6-positlon field multiplied by a 4-posltlon field requires 1.89 milliseconds. Divide - a field in which the quotient will be developed
Is set aside immediately to the left of the dividend field. This field
must be equal in length to dividend field. Divisor can be any other
place In storage. After divide operation Is executed, quotient Is
available beginning with units position of field set aside for it ...
remainder beginning with units position of dividend field. Speed
depends upon length of expected quotient.
CARD I/O FEATURE
PUNCH COLUMN SKIP CONTROL (#5881). Required for Punch
Column Skip (#5880) on 1442 Card Read Punch mdl 1 or 2 ...
only one #5881 is required for #5880s on 1442s.
DIRECT SEEK (#3281).
[Not avai.lable for mdl A2) Improves
disk storage access time by mo~ing 1311 access mechanisms
directly to specified cylinder under program control. Maximum
access is 250 milliseconds for 1311 md 1 or 2 ... 1,200 milliseconds for 1311 mdl 6 or 7. Average access is 150 milliseconds
for 1311 mdl1 or 2 ... 400 miliseconds for 1311 mdl 6 or 7.
Prerequisites: Direct Seek
(#3283) on the 1311 mdl 1 or 6 and Direct Seek (#3282) on
each 1311 mdl 2 or 7.
DISK STORAGE CONTROL (#3321). [Not available for mdl A2 ...
standard on C mdls) To attach a 1311 mdl 1 or 6 with up to four
1311 mdl 2s or 7s and/or up to five 1301 disk arrays. Note: For
1301s, Expanded Disk Storage Control (#3832) is also required
... in addition, Additional Disk Storage (#9010) may be required.
See "Specify."
EXPANDED DISK STORAGE CONTROL (#3832). [Not available
for mdl A2 or C mdls) To attach 1301(s).
.
Prerequisite: Disk
Storage Control (#3321).
SCAN DISK (#6396). [Not available for mdl A2] ·Provides automatic rapid search of 1301 or 1311 disk data for a specific identifier or condition ... only one #6396 is required for this function
on both 1 301s and 1 311 s.
SEEK OVERLAP ADAPTER (#6399). [Not available for mdl A2]
Required for Seek Overlap (#6400) on 1311s. Not required for
1301s.
TRACK RECORD (#8011). [Not available for mdl A2] For 1301 s
- stores one 2,543-character record on each track, increasing
disk array capacity to 25,430,000 characters. For 1311s -- stores
one 2,980-character record on each track, increasing disk pack
capacity to 2,980,000 characters. Only one #8011 is required for
this function on both 1301s and 1311 s.
PRINTER FEATURES
EXPANDED PRINT EDIT (#3835). Expands print edit as follows:
Asterisk Protection -- printing of high-order zeros replaced with
asterisks until a significant digit is sensed. Floating Dollar -- printing of all high-order zeros is suppressed and a dollar sign prints
immediately to the left of first high-order significant digit. Decimal
Control - when a decimal point is sensed, suppression of zeros is
stopped unless a significant digit is not sensed in any of the positions to the right of the decimal point, in which case all zeros and
decimal point are suppressed. Sign Control Left -- a "CR" or "-"
character is printed in high-order position of control word If edited
word is negative.
PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#5561). [A mdls only ... standard on C
mdls] To attach a 1443 or 1445 Printer and/or a 1444 Card
Punch to a 1440, or a 1443 to a 1450. Note: In a 1440, only one
#5561 Is required to attach both a printer and a card punch.
Limitation: If a 1 446 Printer Control and 1403 Printer are used in
a 1440, this feature can be used only to attach a 1444.
hours.
MAGNETIC TAPE FEATURE
TAPE ADAPTER (#7802). [mdll1 A3 thru A6 only]
7335 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 or 2 to a 1440.
To attach a
SERIAL INPUT/OUTPUT FEATURE
SERIAL INPUT/OUTPUT ADAPTER (#7080). [Not available for
mdl A2 .. , standard on C mdls) 1440 - to attach a 1009 Data
Transmission Unit, 1011 Paper Tape Reader, 1012 Tape Punch, .
1 231 Optical Mark Page Reader, 7740 Communication Control
System, or Direct Data Channel (#3271). Note: On mdls A3-A6,
an Expanded Serial I/O Adapter (#3845) may be used in lieu of
#7080 ... see below. 1450 -- this feature is standard on C mdls
and is used to attach the 1259 Magnetic Character Reader.
Prerequisita: In a 1440, if a 7740 is to be attached via this fecture, Emergency Power Off (#9144), a no-charge feature, is
required on the 1441".
DATA TRANSMISSION FEATURES
To attach a 1447 Console
CONSOLE ATTACHMENT (#2260).
mdl 2 or 3 in addition to the required 1447 mdl 1. Limitation:
Cannot be installed if a Transmission Control Unit Attachment 1026 (#8024) is used.
DIRECT DATA CHANNEL (#3271). [Not available for mdl A2 or
C mdls] A cable for direct data transfer between the 1441 and a
1401 (1401 system) or another 1441 (1440 system). The cable is
connected to a Serial I/O Adapter (#7080) on each system .. , see
#7080 above. The cable can be manually attached or detached.
When attached, no other attachment can be made to #7080. Only
one #3271 is required and it can be ordered for either system,
but Emergency Power Off (#9144), a no-charge feature, must be
ordered for the other system. Specify: Length of cable to a maximum of 100 feet ... also identify other system and whether it is
installed or on order. Prerequisites: Indexing and Store Address
Register (#4631) and Serial I/O Adapter ,.#7080).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----...,.
---- ---:5:
=-= ==
M 1441.2
May 79
~ ==
DP Machines
1441 Processing Unit (cont'd)
EXPANDED SERIAL INPUT/OUTPUT AQAPTER (#3845). [mdls
A3-A6 only] To attach the 1441 (1440) directly to a 1411 or
7114 Processing Unit (1410 or 7010). This feature can also be
used in lieu of a Serial I/O Adapt!!r (#7080) for any of the attach:
ments possible via #7080 ... #3845 and #7080 cannot both be
installed. See SRL Reference Manual for details. Specify: Length
of cable, to a maximum of 100 feet. .
.
Prerequisites:
Bit Test (#1470) and Indexing and Store Address Register
(#4631) ... Control Adapter (#1067,1068) on 1411 or 7114 ...
Priority Feature (#5620) and Processing Overlap (#5730) on
1411.
INTERRUPT (#4708). Allows processor to perform shared time
operations. More time can be spent on processing and less on
1026 Transmission Control Unit operations.· Programmed Instructions which continuously test for line service will not be required.
Prerequlalte: Transmission Control Unit Attachment - 1026 (#8024).
TIME EMITTER (#7958). Causes a process Interrupt every 3.6
seconds for program simulation of a real time clock and/or Interval timers.
Prerequlslte: Interrupt(#4708).
TRANSLATE FEATURE (#8023).
[Not ,available for mdl A2]
Provides a fast and flexible code translation capability for nonstandard IBM codes.
TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ATTACHMENT - 1026 (#8024).
[Not available for mdl A2] To attach up to four 1026 Transmission Control Units and the 1447 Console mdl 1, and, if desired, a
1447 mdl 2. Limitation: Cannot be Installed with Transmission
Control Unit Attachment - 1448 (#8025) or Console Attachment
(#2260). Prerequisite: In Ii 1440. Indexing. and Store Address
Register (#4631).
TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT ATTACHMENT - 1448 (#8025).
[Not available for mdl A2 or C mdls] To attach Ii 1448 Transmission Control Unit. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Transmission Control Unit Attachment - 1026 (#8024).
Prerequisite: Indexing and Store Address Register (#4631).
MACI
MRC
Purchase MMMC
Spacial Featura Prices:
FIC
• General Purpose Features
Bit Test
#1470 $ 20 $ 848 $ 1.00
Index & Store Address
4631
91
5,080
1.50
Register
Multiply-Divide
5275
333 11,950
12.50
• Csrd I/O Feature
Punch Col Skip Control
$ 11
28
309
5881
10
529
1.00
35
3281
3321
3832
6396
6399
8011
50
255
50
35
NC
40
2,460
12,260
2,565
1,720
NC
1,960
4.00
11.00
5.50
1.00
NC
1.00
29
108
267
9
NC
9
• Printer Features
3835
Expanded Print Edit
Printer Attach (for 1440) 5561
20
25
795
1,410
1.00
1.00
14
26
7802
118
7,295
2.50
162
• Serial Input/Output Feature
7080
Serial I/O Adapter
101
3,845
2.00
80
2,250
NC
12,470
4,625
476
3,075
1.00
NC
2.50
1.50
3.00
31
NC
80
21
44
88
2;670
6,920
1.00
2.50
71
101
• Disk Storage Features
Direct Seek
Disk Storaga Control
Exp Disk Storage Cntrl
Scan Disk
Seek Overlap Adapter
Track Record
• Magnetic Tapa Feature
Tape Adapter
• Data Transmission Features
2260
Console Attachment
40
Direct Data Channel
3271
Ne
Expnd Serial I/O Adptr 3845
333
Interrupt
4708
101
Time Emitter
10
7958
Translate Feature
8023
61
Transmission Control Unit Attachment
for 1026(s)
8024
50
for 1448
152
8025
1.00
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._--------- ---------= =-- =--":' =
M 1442.1
May 79
DP Machines
1442 CARD READ PUNCH - Models 1, 2 and Nl
Purpose: A combination punched card I/O unit for a 1240, 1440,
1450, S/360 mdl 22 thru 85 and 195, any S/370 Processor or
any 4300 Processor.
Model 1
Model 2
[No longer available] For 1240, 1440 or 1450 ...
reads at rated speed of 300 cards/minute
punches at rated speed of 80 columns/second ...
has one stacker.
[No longer available] For 1240, 1440 or 1450 ...
reads at rated speed of 400 cards/minute
punches at rated speed of 160 columns/second ...
has two stackers.
Model N1 For S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor ... reads at
rated speed of 400 cards/minute ... punches at rated speed of 160 columns/second ... has two stackers.
Model Changes: Can be made between mdl 1 and 2 ... a mdl 1 or
2 can also be changed to a 1442 Card Reader mdl 4, but not vice
versa ... no changes can be made to or from a mdl Nl
Highlights: Format control and analysis are controlled by the
system's processing unit. Model Nl reads and punches the 256
codes of the Extended BCD Code. Hopper capacity is 1,200
cards ... stacker capacity is 1,300 cards. In mdl Nl, cards go to
sta.cker 1 unless program directed to stacker 2. Model Nl contains its own control unit.
Input Section -- invalid codes and mispositioned cards are detected. The light-sensing mechanism is checked for proper functioning
in every read cycle.
Output Section -- cards are punched serially after passing through
the light-sensing station. Cards can be either blank or prepunched. Actual punching speed depends upon the number of
columns punched, including interspersed blank columns. Rated
speed for punching columns I-lOis 265 cards/minute for mdl Nl
... for punching columns 1-80 is 91 cards/minute for mdl Nl.
Punching is checked.
Card Limitations -- generally, scored cards require careful handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores has
been approved.
Internal Scores (before separation) -- S-I, 10-1, 10-2, and for a
maximum of three passes, M-4 and M-5.
Block Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135.
S/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 - multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), or block multiplexer channel (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard)
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional).
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer
channels (two are standard).
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
The following specifications can be changed in the field (also
applies to mdls 1 and 2).
Specify: [1] Voltage: Models 1 and 2 (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz)
-- #9903 for 208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... Model Nl (AC,
I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz) -- #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for 230
V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or (mdl Nl only), #9046 for white .
[3] 1442 Nl Compatibility Attachment (mdl Nl
required ... see "Special Features."
Aqua cards and C-4 corner cut cards
cannot be used.
Maximum: S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor -- the 1442 mdl Nl
includes its own control unit. The number attachable depends
upon the total complement of I/O control units in the system.
There is a natural limit of eight control units on each channel... in
a S/360 mdl 44, up to two control units can be attached to each
High Speed Multiplexer Channel subchannel.
PREREQUISITES: For S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor -- a conl(ol
unit position on a system channel.
S/360 mdl 25 -- special feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel or
Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/360 mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Add'i High Speed Multiplexer
Subchannels ... see 2044.
S/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
S/360 mdl 85, 195 or S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- selector
channel of 2860, basic multip!exer channel of 2870, Selector
Subchannels (special features) on 2870, or shared subchannel of
a 2880 '" see 2860, 2870, 2880.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector or
May be
[4] Isolation Control Unit (mdl Nl only): May be required on units
shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
PRICES:
External Scores (after separation) -- for reading and punching:
On column 80 end -- M-3, M-7, M-ll (with round corners) or
CF-ll (with round corners); On column 1 end -- an M-7, M-ll
(with round corners) or CF-l1 (with round corners) score may be
used on a md! Nl with serial no. 40044 or above, or a machine
having punch unit serial no. 2638 or above stamped on the back
of the tie bar. For reading without punching: On column 80 end,
and for a maximum of three passes, M-5, OM-2 and CF-4.
All other scores may result in unstisfactory performance.
only):
1442
Mdl
1t
2t
N1
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
$ 352
498
661
$14,280
15,130
19,990
MMMC
$68.00
83.00
152.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
NOTE: On a 1442 mdl 1 or 2, the fol/owing features, as appropriate, are on an "as available" basis for field installation.
CARD IMAGE (#1531, 1532). In any system - permits processing of cards with multiple punching in a single card column. In
1240, 1440 or 1450 -- converts binary coded cards into BCD
codes, and vice versa ... approved scored cards can be read
without suspending validity checking on other than scored columns
... cards with interspersed conventional codes and binary coded
data can be read.
#1531 -- for mdl 1 or 2 ... #1532 -- for mdl Nl.
When reading in card image mode, the validity check is suspended because all characters are considered valid. When installed on
the first 1442 attached to a 1240, 1440 or 1450, this feature also
functions on a second 1442. Prerequisite: For mdl 1 or 2 -- Card
Image (#9035) on the 1241 or 1441 ... see "Specify" under
1 241 or 1 441 .
1442 N1 COMPATIBILITY ATTACHMENT (#4445).
[Mdl Nl
only] Required if the 1442 mdl Nl is to be used with 1440 Compatibility (#4442) on a 2025, or with 1442/1443 Attachment
(#4464) or 1620 Compatibility (#7190) on a 2030. Required only
for operation in compatibility mode, not required for normal S/360
operation of the 1442 mdl Nl. Limitation: Cannot be installed on
a unit with serial no. under 40100.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [Mdl Nl only ... for field
installation on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the
1442 mdl Nl without generating spurious signals. Thus, a Processor program, if it can be logically disconnected from the system
before power is turned off, can continue operating. Limitation:
Cannot be installed on a unit with serial no. under 40068.
Prerequisite:
in all cases there are compatible EC itlvel
t
No longer available.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------.-- ---- --=----=- =
':' =
M 1442.2
May 79
DP Machines
1442 Card Read Punch - Models 1, 2 and N1
requirements,
(cont'd)
1 442
PUNCH COLUMN SKIP (#5880).
[Mdls 1, 2 only] Increases
system throughput by allowing the punch to space over card
columns without interlocking the system ... a "Punch Column
Skip" instruction specifies the number of card columns to be
spaced through by the punch. If two 1442s, mdls 1 and 2 in any
combination, are installed, each may be equipped with this feature.
Prerequisite: Punch Column Skip Control (#5881) on the 1241 or
1441 .,. only one #5881 is required if #5880 is installed on two
1442s.
SELECTIVE STACKER (#6406). [Mdl 1 only] Provides a second stacker ... cards can be selected into this stacker under
program control.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
FIC
Card Image#1531
for mdl 1, 2
1532
for mdl Nl
1442 Nl Com pat Attach 4445
4700
Isolation, Control Unit
6406
Selective Stacker
$ 35
36
NC
NC
25
$ 41
42
NC
NC
73
$1,260
1,260
NC
NC
831
$1.00
1.00
NC
NC
1.00
Model 4
CAR 0 REA 0 E R - Mod e I s
[No longer available]
3
and
4
For 1240 or 1440 ... has two stackers.
Model Changes: A 1442 Card Read Punch mdl 1 or 2 can be field
changed to a 1442 Card Reader mdl 4, but not vice versa.
Highlights: Provides high-speed, low-cost punched card input.
Cards are read by a light-sensing unit at speeds up to 400
cards/minute. The 64 codes of the BCD Code can be read. Invalid
codes and mispositioned cards are detected. The Light-sensing
mechanism is checked for proper functioning in every read cycle.
Has a 1 ,200-card capacity hopper and two 1,300-card capacity
radial stackers.
Card Limitations; Generally, scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores has been
approved.
Internal Scores (before separation) -- S-1, 10-1, 10-2, and for a
maximum of three passes, M-4 and M-5.
External Scores (after separation) -- column 1 end:
M-4, M-5, M-7, M-11 (with round corners), CF-4 and
round corners) ... column 80 end: M-3, M-6, M-7,
round corners), CF-11 (with round corners), and for
of three passes, M-5, OM-2, CF-4.
OM-2, M-3,
CF-11 (with
M-11 (with
a maximum
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Aqua cards and C-4 corner cut cards
cannot be used.
Maximum: Up to two 1442 mdl 4s can be attached to a 1240 or
1440 system.
Limitations: On a 1240 or 1440, if a 1442 Card Read Punch mdl
1 or 2 or a 1444 Card Punch is used, only one 1442 mdl 4 can·
be installed ... if two 1442 nldl 1sand 2s in any combination or
both a 1442 mdl 1 or 2 and a 1444 are used, a 1442 mdl 4
cannot be installed.
Prerequisite: For 1240 or 1440 -- the first 1442 (mdl 1, 2 or 4)
attached to the system must have a Card Read Punch Adapter
(#1632) ... see "Special Features."
Bibliography: GA22-3005
The following specifications can be changed in the field.
[1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
1442
4t
$ 249
$8,720
$77.50
Rental Plan: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Met'ering: I/O Unit (Online)
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following features, as appropriate, are on an "as available"
basis for field installation on a 1442 mdl 3 or 4.
CARD IMAGE (#1531). [Mdl 4 only] To convert binary coded
cards into BCD codes ... also permits processing of cards with
multiple punching in a single card column. Approved scored cards
can be read without suspending validity checking in other than the
scored columns. When reading in card image mode, the validity
check is suspended because all characters are considered valid.
Cards with interspersed conventional punching codes and binary
coded data can be read. When installed on the first 1442 attached
to a system, this feature also functions on a second 1442 in the
system. Prerequisite: Card Image (#9035) on the 1241 or 1441
... see "Specify" under 1241 or 1441.
CARD PUNCH ADAPTER (#1&32). [Mdl 4 only] Required on the
first 1442 attached to a system ... the second 1442 does not
require this feature. When a 1442 mdl 1 or 2 and a 1442 mdl 4
are both attached to a system, the 1442 mdl 1 or 2 must be the
first unit attaGhed and must be equipped with this feature.
INPUT/OUTPUT ADAPTER (#4661). [Mdl 3 only] To attach a
1414 I/O Synchronizer mdl 5 or 8 with the teleprocessing ,mits or
printer it controls to the 1442 mdl 3.
t
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
Card Image
#1531
Card Read Punch Adptr 1632
Input/Output Adapter
4661
$ 35
25
64
No longer available.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Purchase MMMC
$1,260
1,260
2,095
$1.00
1.00
1.25
FIC
$ 35
70
58
-------
---==- =-=
== ';" ==
M 1442.3
May 79
DP Machines
1442 CARD
PUNCH - Models 5
and
N2
Purpose: Punched card output unit for a S/360 mdl 20 thru 75,
any S/370 Processor or any 4300 Processor ... punches cards at a
rated speed of 160 columns/second.
For use of the 1442 mdl 5 with an 1130 system, see GSD
manual.
Model 5
For a S/360 mdl 20.
Model N2 For S/360 mdl 22 thru 75 any S/370 Processor and
any 4300 Processor ... includes its own controls.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional).
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer
channels (two are standard).
Card Limitations: Generally, scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores has been
approved.
Internal Scores (before separation) -- M-4, M-5, S-1, 10-1.
External Scores (after separation) - M-7, M-11 (with round
corners), CF-11 (with round corners) on either end. M-3 on column 80 end only.
Model Changes: Changes between mdls 5 and N2 are not possible, nor are changes to any other 1442 model.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Highlights: Format control and analysis are performed by the
system's processing unit. Blank or prepunched cards are punched
serially. Actual speed depends upon the number of columns
punched, including interspersed blank columns. Rated speed in
cards/minute: Columns 1 thru 10 is 265 ... columns 1 thru 80 is
91. Punching is checked. The unit has a 1,200-card capacity
hopper and a 1,300-card capacity stacker. The Extended BCD
Interchange Code (256 codes) is punched. The model N2 requires
Card Image (#1531) to punch binary codes. See "Special Features."
cannot be used.
Maximum:
S/36O mdl 20 -- one 1442 mdl 5 can be attached to the 2020
Processing Unit ... see S/360 mdl 20 in GSD sales manual for
allowable I/O unit configurations.
S/36O mdl 22 thru 75, any S/370 Processor and any 4300
ProcesllOr -- the number of 1442 mdl N2s that can be attached
depends upon the number of available system channel control
unit positions.
Aqua cards and C-4 corner cut cards
Bibliography: S/360 mdl 20 - GA26-3565, S/360 mdl 22 thru
75 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001.
Specify: [1) Voltage (must be consistent with system voltage): Mdl
5 - with S/360 mdl 20, #9903 for 208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
Mdl N2 - #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for 230 V.
[2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3) Cable Adapter (mdl 5 only): #9099. Required if the 1442 is to
be attached to an installed 2020 which has serial no. under
20000. Plant installation only, but can be removed in the field.
[4) Isolation, Control Unit (mdl N2 only): May be required on units
shipped prior to Decmeber 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
[5) If the 1442 mdl 5 is to be used as an emulating unit in a
S /360 mdl 20 with 1401 /1 440 Compatibility (# 3901) see
#3901 under 2020 (GSD
manual).
PREREQUISITES:
S/36O mdl 20 -- a 2020 Processing Unit submodel 1, 2, 5 or 6
equipped with a 1442 Model 5 Attachment (#4460) .. , if the
installed 2020 has a serial no. under 20000, a Cable Adapter
(#9099) is required on the 1442. See "Specify" below.
S/36O mdl 22 thru 75, any S/370 Processor and any 4300
Processor - an available control unit position on a system channel.
S/36O mdl 25 - special feature on 2025: Multiplexer or Selector
Channel ... see 2025.
S/36O mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/36O mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, or Add'i High S\:leed Multiplexer Subchannels.
S/36O mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, or Selector Subchannels (special features) on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 - Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 - multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channels or Block Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see
3135.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
1442
5
N2
$ 330
472
$ 9,720
14,280
$98.00
134.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
[Mdl N2 only) Permits punching of
CARD IMAGE (#1531).
cards with multiple punching in a single column.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [Mdl N2 only) For field
installation on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 :.. standard on unit shipped after that) To turn power on or off on the
1442 mdl N2 without generating spurious signals. Thus, a Processor program, if it can be logically disconnected from the system
before power is turned off, can continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all case there are compatible EC level requirements,
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
Card Image
#1531 $ 35
Isolation, Control Unit
4700
NC
S/370 mdl 135-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see 3145.
S/370 mdl 3145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
r:nultiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
S/370 mdl 165, 168 - selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
of 2870, or the shared subchannel of a 2880 ... see 2860, 2870,
2880.
3031 or 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Purchase MMMC
$1,260
NC
$1.00
NC
FIC
$145
NC
---- ---
--- ----== =-: == ';' ==
M 1443.1
May 79
DP Machines
1443 PRINTER
Channels (special features), or Block Multiplexer Channels
(special features) ... see 3135.
Purpose: Printed output unit for a 1450, S/360 mdl 22 thru 85,
195, any S/370 Processor or any 4300 Processor.
S/370 mdl 135-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
Model3
[No longer available] For 1450
speed with 52-character set.
140 Ipm rated
S/370 mdl 138 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
Model4
[No longer available] For 1450
speed with 52-character set.
230 Ipm rated
5/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector
channels ... see 3145.
Model N1 For S/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195, any S/370 Processor or any 4300 Processor ... 240 Ipm rated speed
with 52-character set.
5/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
NOTE: For speeds with other character sets, see Selective
Character Set (#6402) under "Special Features."
Model Changes: Can be made in the fielt:! between mdls 3 and 4
only ... see "Limitations."
5/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplex.er channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 - multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer
channels (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158, 3158-3.
Highlights: Models 3 and 4 have 1 44 print positions ... standard
on all other models are 1 20 print positions. On all models the
52-character set is standard. Actual speed depends upon the
operation ... see Selective Character Set (#6402) under "Special
Features." The system's processing unit performs all format and
analysis control. A line of printing is presented to the printer in the
arrangement in which it is to be printed.
S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 - selector channel of 2860, basic
multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special
features) of 2870, or shared subchannel of 2880 .... see 2860,
2870,2880.
Each print position can print any of 52 characters ... alphabetic,
numeric and 16 special characters. Characters are spaced
10/inch. Line spacing is 6 or 8 lines/inch, under operator control. Marginally punched continuous forms from 4" to 16-3/4" in
overall width are fed by an automatic carriage. Maximum form
depth is 22" at 6 lines/inch ... 16-1/2" at 8 lines/inch. Forms
spacing and skipping are controlled by a 12-channel tape in the
carriage. Skipping is at approximately 15" /second.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
An enlarged dash (character no. 630704) is available for printing
on documents to be read by 1230, 1231 and 1232 optical mark
readers. Depending upon the system, see appropriate section of
"Type Catalog" for ordering instructions: The ribbon used on the
1443 must be capable of producing print~d characters suitable for
recognition by the optical reader used.
Limitations: When a model change is made between a mdl 3 and
4, serial no. 10330 and below, type bars (less segments) must be
replaced ... replacement bars will be furnished at no charge on a
one-for-one basis. Previously installed segments will be installed
in the new type bares) without charge. Submit MES, indicating:
(a) Model change from 3 to 4, or vice versa.
(b) Feature #(5) and quantity of each character set requiring a
new type bar.
(c) Feature # for type size, #9731 for .079", or #9733 for
.095".
A 120 print-position bar cannot be used in a machine equipped
with Print Positions, 24 Add'i (#5558) unless one additional segment is added and all segments are rearranged in the required
sequence .,. conversely, a 144 print-position bar cannot be \,Ised
In a 1 20 print-position machine unless one segment is removed
arid the remaining segments are rearranged in the required sequence ... see "Type Catalog."
Neither segments nor type bars are interchangeable between any
model 1443 and 2203 Printers.
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer channel (optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Bibliography: 1450 -- GA24-3005, S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370
- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage: For 1450 (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz) #9903 for 208 V, or #9905 for 230 V. For S/360 or S/370
(AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz) -- #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for
230 V... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Print Arrangement for standard 52-character set unless Selective Character Set (#6402) is ordered and the 63-character set
is desired Instead ... see appropriate section of "Type Catalog"
(page 41 or 81) depending upon the system involved. Character
substitutions are also covered in the "Type Catalog."
[4] Type Size: #9731 for .079", or #9733 for .095" .
[5] Order Tape Punch, Part No. 120910,
if 1443 is for New Account Name ... one is furnished at no charge per installation.
[6] Isolation, Control Unit (mdl Nl only): May be required on units
shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features"
below.
PRICES: Mdl
1443
PREREQUISITES:
For 1450 - attachment features are standard on the 1441 and
the 1443. Limitation: Only one printer, a 1443, can be attached
to a 1450 system.
For S/360, 5/370 and 4300 Processors - the 1443 mdl Nl includes its own control. It requires a control unit position on a
system channel.
S/360 mdl 25 -- special features on 2025: Multiplexer Channel,
or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 - multiplexer channel (standard), or
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/360 mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Add'i High Speed Multiplexer
Subchannels ... see 2044.
S/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
5/360 mdl 85, 195 - selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
on 2870, or the shared subchannel of a 2880 ... see 2860,
2870,2880.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 - Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 -
3031 or 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) '" see
3031 or 3032.
multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
3tt
4tt
Nl
- FTP/MAC/ MLC
MLC
MRC
1 yr· 2 yr
Purchase MMMC
$465
741
954
$23,360
37,030
41,000
878
601
$107.00
156.00
149.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Warranty: B
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45% Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHARACTER SETS #1890-1893, #1895-1896 for mdl 3 or 4
#1901-1904 for mdl Nl. See "Type Catalog" for graphics and
ordering instructions. Prerequisites: On mdl Nl, Selective Character Set (#6402) is required for any character set other than
#1903.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700).
[Mdl Nl only... field
installation on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 only ...
standard on units shipped after that] To turn power on or off on
the 1443 mdl Nl without generating spurious signals. Thus, a
Processor program, if it can be logically disconnected from the
system before power is turned off, can continue operating.
Prerequisite:
in all cases there are compatible EC level
requirements,
PRINT POSITIONS, 24 ADD'L (#5558). [Standard on mdls 3, 4]
#5558 -- for mdl Nl. Increases print span from 120 positions to
144 positions. Operation of printer remains unchanged. When this
feature is field installed, all character sets must be modified. This
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------=- =----------=
--':' =
M 1443.2
May 79
DP Machines
1443 Printer (cont'd)
modification will be made at no charge, provided that only a standard segment is to be furnished .. , see "Character Sets" in appropriate section of "Type Catalog."
ordering
#5558 should include the following: [1] Quantity and feature #(s)
of all installed character sets that require an additional segment ...
[2] Feature # for type size, #9731 for .079", or #9733 for .095"
... [3] 1443 Type Specifications Sheet (120-0658), if non-standard
segments are involved. See "Substitute Characters" in "Type
Catalog" for charges that apply.
#6402 for mdl N1 ...
SELECTIVE CHARACTER SET (#6402).
standard on mdls 3 and 4. Required if any type bar other than the
standard 52-character bar is to be used. Provides controls which
permit the 1443 to use all available character sets. When ordered
for plant installation, the 63-character set may be specified at no
charge in lieu of the standard 52-character set for use with this
feature. See "Type Catalog" for characters in each set. The various character sets print at the following speeds:
Character Set
13
39
52
63
Special Feature Prices:
Mdl3
385
175
140
110
----LPM---Mdl4
Mdl N1
565
285
230
190
600
300
240
200
--- FTP/ --MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC I yr" 2 yr Purchase MMMC FIC
Character Sets ... see "Type Catalog," pg 42 for mdls 3 and 4 ...
pg 81.1 for mdl NI
Isolation, Control Unit #4700 NC NC NC
NC
NC
Print Positions, 24 add'i
for mdl Nl
5558 $ 48 $ 44 $ 40
$ 2,290 $ 3.00
Selective Character Set
for mdl NI
6402
26
24
22
1,265
3.00
NC
$189
26
" FTP is 12-23 months.
tt No longer available.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----==- =':' -=
------- - - -----
M 1445
May 79
DP Machines
42-character set (alphameric) -- 240 Ipm.
56-character set (alphameric with E13B symbols) - 190 Ipm.
1445 PRINTER -- Model N1
Purpose: Conventional or MICR printed output fOJ a S/360 mdl 25
or 30.
Highlights: Has 113 print positions. With standard alphameric
56-character set, which includes fourteen E13B symbols, rated
speed is 190 Ipm. Rated speed can be increased to 240 Ipm with
a 42-character alphameric set, or 525 Ipm with a 14-character
numeric set .:. see Character Set and Selective Character Set
under "Special Features." Actual speed depends upon the operation. The system's processing unit performs all analysis and format control. A line of printing is presented to the 1445 in the
arrangement in which it is to be printed.
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC
NOTE: The fourteen E13B symbols are furnished only in the
standard 56-character set.
Depending upon the character set used, each print position can
print anyone of 56 characters ... alphabetic, numeric, six special
characters, and the fourteen E13B symbols. Characters are
spaced 8/inch. Line spacing is 6 or 8 lines/inch under operator
control. Marginally punched continuous paper forms from 4" to
16-3/4" in overall'width are fed by an automatic carriage. Maximum forms depth is 22" at 6 lines/inch ... 16-1/2" at 8
lines/inch. Forms spacing and skipping are controlled by a 12channel tape in the carriage. Skipping is approximately 15" a
second. When using the E13B symbols, it is recommended that
24# paper (safety paper, if required by the customer) with a MICR
finish, or equivalent, be used ... see TNL N24-0342 for 1445
MICR Print Quality Considerations.
Two separate ribbon feeds -- one controls a MICR ribbon, the
other a conventional ribbon. Only one ribbon feed can be used on
the machine at a time. They can be mounted by the operator,
depending upon printing requirements.
PREREQUISITE: For S/360 -- a control unit position on a system
channel.
S/360 mdl 25 - special feature on 2025; Multiplexer Channel,
or Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 30 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or Selector
Channel (special feature) ... see 2030.
Bibliography: GC20-0360
"Voltage" and "Color" can be changed in the field.
Specify: [1] Voltage (must be consistent with system voltage): For
mdl N1 (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz) - #9902 for 208 V, or
#9904 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Type Size: #9733 for .095" ... all characters except E13B
symbols.
[4] 56-character Set: #9570.
[5] Order Tape Punch, part no. 120910,
. the 1445 is for a New Name Account ... one
per installation is furnished at no charge.
[6] Isolation, Control Unit (mdl N1 only): May be required on units
shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
PRICES:
Mdl
1445
N1
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 1,540
$67,570
$179
Purchase MMMC FIC
Character Sets - see "Type Catalog," page 91.1
Isolation, Control Unit #4700
NC
NC
NC
Selective Character Set
for mdl N1
6402 $ 28
$1,495 $2.50
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHARACTER SETS (#1896, 1899, 1906). See "Type Catalog,"
page 91.1 for graphics and ordering instructions. Prerequisite: For
#1898 or #1899, Selective Character Set (#6402) is required.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700).
{Mdl N1 only ... field
installation on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 '" standard on units shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the
1445 without generating spurious Signals. Thus, a CPU program,
if it can be logically disconnected from the system before power is
turned off, can continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all
cases there are EC level requirements,
SELECTIVE CHARACTER SET (#6402).
#6402 for mdl Nt.
Required il any type bar other than the standard 56-character bar
is used. Provides controls which permit the 1445 to use all available character sets. See "Type Catalog," page 91.1. for characters in each set. The various character sets print at the following
speeds:
14-character set (numeric) - 525 lpm.
Not to. be reproduced without. wotten permission.
NC
$ 26
M 2152 - 2250
May 79
DP Machines
Add'i High Speed Multiplexer Channels ... see 2044.
2152 PRINTER-KEYBOARD
For description and use with S/360 mdl 20, see GSD
al.
manu-
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- Multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
5/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, Selector
Subchannels (special features) on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
5/360 mdl 85, 195, or 5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 - selector
channel of 2860, Selector Subchannel (special feature) on 2870,
or the shared subchannel of a 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
2250 DISPLAY UNIT - Models 1, 2, 3
5/370 mdl 115, 125 - Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125. Note: No DOS support.
Purpose: A cathode ray tube unit for displaying output in alphameric and graphic form from a S/360 mdl 22, 30 thru 85 and 195,
any S/370 Processor or any 4300 Processor. Input features provide
broad man-machine communication ability.
5/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138 - multiplexer channel (standard) ...
.
see 3135,3135-3,3138.
Model 1
Includes its own control unit ... used for a single
display unit configuration.
Model 2
[No longer available] Requires a 2840 Display Control mdl 1 ... applicable special features listed below
can be ordered for field installation on installed
units.
Model 3
Requires a 2840 Display Control mdl 2 ... used in
multiple display unit configurations for computeraided design and scientific analysis applications. Up
to four 2250 mdl 3s can be attached to each 2840
mdl 2. Each 2250 mdl 3 can be located 2,000 cable
feet from the 2840 mdl 2.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights: An I/O unit. offering both pictorial (line drawing) and
alphameric input and output for analysis, design and file maintenance applications. It features:
Large Display Area - images are drawn anywhere within a 12" x
12" area on the face of the display tube.
Large Capacity Display -- up to 3,848 character positions ... 52
lines with 74 characters to the line.
Vector Graphics - straight lines of any length, at any angular
orientation and at any pOSition on the screen. Note: For this
function, Absolute Vectors and Control (#1002) is required on
a model 1, or Absolute Vectors (#1001) on a model 2.
Dynamic Display -- buffer areas are addressable ... individual
characters or lines can be changed rapidly without timeconsuming re-write of complete buffer area.
Additional Data Modes -- incremental vectors permit improved
buffer utilization and programming flexibility. Note: This function is standard on a model 3 ... on model 1, Graphic Design
Feature (#4485) is requirec!.
Format Flexibility -- characters, point plots, and vector end
points can be positioned in any combination at any of the
1,048,576 program addressable positions on the 1,024 x
1,024 grid.
Large Capacity Display (model 3 only) -- up to 2,100 characters
or 2,800 incremental vectors may be displayed at 40 cps
regeneration rate without noticeable flicker ... up to 2,800
characters or 3,700 incremental vectors at 30 cps regeneration rate with commonly accepted flicker. Note: Vector and
character times vary depending upon cable length.
Fast TUrnaround (model 3 'only) - a complete buffer (32K) can
be rewritten in less than a tenth of a second ... manual inputs
are presented to the CPU as fast as they are presented to
display unit.
Graphic Input -- program controllable light pen provides for a
variety of input techniques, including pen search and tracking.
Note: For this function, Graphic Design Feature (#4485) is
required on model 1.
Light Pen Detection Processing (model 3 only) - extensive order
set reduces CPU attention handling requirements ... see 2840
mdl2.
Application Flexibility - optional alphameric and programmed
function keyboards for operator input ... see "Special Features."
Prerequisites:
For either model
in any S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor, a
minimum of 64K of storage is required for .use of graphic support
under OS/360. A minimum of 16K is required for diagnostic
support only.
S/370 mdl 145, 145-3, 148 - multiplexer channel (standard),
selector channels ... see 3145, 3145-3, 3148.
5/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158 and 3158-3.
3031 or 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
For Model 3 -- a 2840 Display Control mdl 2.
Bibliography: S/360 -GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 cycle): #9902 for
208 V, or #9904 for 230 V.
[2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3) Buffer (mdl 1 only): Buffer (#1498 or 1499) is required ... see
"Special Features."
[4) Isolation, Control Unit (mdl 1 only): May be required on units
shipped prior to December 29,1967 ... see "Special Features."
MAC/
MRC
PRICES:
Mdl
Purchase
MMMC
2250
1
$1,185
$57,530
3
1,740
34,830
$198
223
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ABSOLUTE VECTORS (#1001). [Model 2 only] Provides the
ability to "draw" a continuous straight line betwep.n any two points
of the 1,024 x 1,024 reference grid. Prerequisite: Absolute Vectors and Control (# 1003) on the 2840 mdl 1.
ABSOLUTE VECTORS AND CONTROL (#1002). [Model 1 only)
Provides controls and ability to "draw" a continuous straight line
between any two points of the 1,024 x 1,024 reference grid.
ALPHAMERIC KEYBOARD (#1245). [Any model] A keyboard
similar to that on a 1052 Printer-i if: [1] Channel Interface, Second (# 1860) is ordered ... [2]
Adapters from two different categories are required ... [3] More
IBM LINE ADAPTER BASE (#4708). Provides for mounting of up
to two IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters and their associated Automatic Call Origination features. Limitation: Cannot be installed when
Not to be reproduced
w~thout
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700).
[For field installation on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967
standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 2701 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off,
can continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are
compatible EC level requiraments.
t
tt
For further information, see M 2700 pages.
SRL GA24-3435-2. or subsequent revisions.
written permiSSion.
----- --- -----_.-
-- -------
M 2701.4
Jul 79
DP Machines
2701 Data Adapter Unit (conl'd)
anyone of the following features is installed: IBM Line Adapter
(#4636 or #4637), Telegraph Adapter, Type I (#7860, 7861 or
7862). Maximum: One per 2701. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Synchronous Data Adapter, Type II (#7698), with a
Synchronous Clock (#7692).
IBM 1200 BPS LINE ADAPTER, LEASED (#4781). Provides one
IBM 1200 bps Line Adapter which is suitable for communications
over facility 03 with a similiar line adapter. Maximum: Two per
2701. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: IBM Line Adapter
Base (#4708).
IBM 1200 BPS LINE ADAPTER, SWITCHED (#4782). Provides
one IBM 1200 bps Line Adapter which is suitable for communications over facility C4 with a similiar line adapter. Attachment of
this line adapter to the switched telephone network requires the
use of a Type CBS Data Access Arrangement. This line adapter
includes the automatic answering capability. Maximum: Two per
2701. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: IBM Line Adapter
Base (#4708).
AUTOMATIC CALL ORIGINATION (#4791). Provides the capability of automatically (under program control) dialing over the
switched telephone network to a remote terminal. Limitations: This
feature can be used on rotary dial systems only. Cannot be installed with Selectable Synchronous Clock (#7401). Maximum:
One per IBM 1200 BPS Line Adapter, Switched (#4782).
Prerequisites: IBM Line Adapter, Switched (#4782) and Autocall
(#1314).
PARALLEL DATA ADAPTER (#5500).
Provides a 16-bit wide
path to customer devices ... odd parity and redundancy checking
... can be expanded to 48 bits [see Parallel Data Expansion
(#5505) below] Mode of operation is half-duplex at speeds limited
only by channel and system configuration. A maximum of eight
customer devices can be connected to the interface. However,
there is but one data path shared by all devices. Maximum: One
per 2701 without Expansion Feature (#3855) ... two per 2701
with one #3855 [neither #5500 can have more than two Parallel
Data Expansions (#5505)] ... two per 2701 with one #3855 and
Expanded Capability (#3815) [either or both #5500s may have
more than two #5505s] ... three per 2701 with two #3855s and
#3815 [only one of the three #5500s may have more than two
#5505s] ... four per 2701 with three #3855s and #3815 [none
of the #5500s may have more than two #5505s]. Limitations:
See "Maximum Configuration" below.
PARALLEL DATA TIMEOUT (#5501).
Provides a 2-second
timeout of the external device responses to data transfer requests
from a Parallel Data Adapter (#5500). Maximum: One per
#5500.
PARALLEL DATA EXTENSION (#5505).
Provides an add'l 8
data bit extension to the parallel data customer interface.
Maximum: Four per Parallel Data Adapter (#5500). Limitations:
See #5500 above and "Maximum Configuration" below.
ProSECOND CHANNEL ENABLE/DISABLE SWITCH (#6301).
vides ability to disable 2701 functions to either CPU when the
Second Channel Interface (# 1860) is being used with two CPUs
... for field installation on units with #1860 installed prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on #1860s shipped after that.
Prerequisites: Second Channel Interface (#1860) ... 2701 must
be at EC level 306675.
SELECTABLE SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7401).
Provides a
synchronous clock which is capable of operation at 600 bps or at
1200 bps and provides a manual switch to allow the operator to
select one of these two speeds. Maximum: One per Synchronous
Data Adapter, Type II (#7698). Limitations: Cannot be installed
with any other synchronous clock or with Automatic Call Origination (#4791) ... when the Dual Communication Interface is installed, and this clock is to operate on both the basic and dual
interface, both interfaces must operate at the same speed.
Prerequisite: Synchronous Data Adapter, Type II (#7698).
tttSYNCHRONOUS DATA ADAPTER TYPE I (#7695, 7696).
[Plant Installation only] Provides control of data transfers between
S/360 or S/370 and 4-out-of-8 code synchronous terminals
[1009~ 1013s, 7701s, 7702s, 771~ 7711, 7740s, 7750~ S/360
mdl 20s with #2073s, 1130s with #7690s].
#7695 -- permits operation on common carrier Type 5701, 5703,
8801 or 8803 Wideband Services.
#7696 - permits operation on the Public Switched Telephone
Network or a Non-switched Voice Grade Line.
Maximum: One per 2701 without Expanded Capability (#3815) ...
two with #3815 and one Expansion Feature (#3855). Limitations:
See "Maximum Configuration" below. Special Requirements: See
Autocall (#1303) and Internal Clock (#4703) for applicability.
tSYNCHRONOUS DATA ADAPTER TYPE II (#7697, 7698).
Pro-
vides control of data transfers belween S/360 or S/370 and
binary synchronous terminals ... see "Terminal Devices" above.
#7697 -- permits operation with high speed digital facilities.
#7698 -- permits operation with voice grade facilities.
Specify: For each adapter one of the ..following is required
#9060 for EBCDIC code, #9061 for ASCII code, or #9062 for
6-bit Transcode. Limitations: #9062 cannot be used to communicate with a System/32 with #2074, a S/360 mdl 20 with #2074,
a S/360 mdl 25 with #4580. a 2703 with #7703 or #7706, an
1800 system with #7550, a 2770 system. a 3735, 3741 mdl 2 or
4. 3747. 3780 or 2715 mdl 2
also see "Maximum
Configuration" below. Neither #9061 nor #9062 can be used to
communicate with a 3671 Shared Terminal Control Unit or a 5231
mdl 2. Maximum: One per 2701 without Expanded Capability
(#3815) ... two with #3815 and one Expansion Feature (#3855)
... for added line capability per adapter, see Dual Communication
Interface (#3463. 3464).
Special Requirements: See Autocall (#1314), Dual Code
(#3455), Station Selection (#7477). Synchronous Clock
(#7692, 7693) and Transparency (#8029) for applicability. Note:
When ordering #7697 or #7698 for field installation in adapter
position No.1. all features in position No. 1 and No. 2 must be
removed
for field installation in position No.3. all adapter
features in position No. 3 and all features in position NO.4 must
be removed.
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7692, 7693).
#7692 -- required for a Synchronous Data Adapter Type II
(#7698) or Dual Communication Interface (#3464) if at least
one data set attached requires external clocking at 1200 bps.
#7693 -- required for the same combinations above if at least
one data set attached requires external clocking at 2400 bps.
Maximum: One per #7697 or #7698. Limitation: If #7692 or
#7693 is required for both lines when using Dual Communication
Interface (#3464). both lines must operate at the same speed.
STATION SELECTION (#7477).
Required when a Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II (#7697. 7698) and/or Dual Code (#3455)
is functioning on a leased communications line as a tributary
(terminal) station. Maximum: One per #7697 or #7698.
tTELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE I (#7860-7862).
Controls data
transfers between S/360 or S/370 and various teletypewriter
terminals ". line control must be identical to AT&T Selective Calling Terminals Type 83B2/83B3 or WU Plan 115A Terminals ... a
62.6 milliampere neutral DC Loop is required
both types of
terminals cannot be mixed on the same line.
#7860 -- for operation at 45.5 bps with facility A 1.
#7861 -- for operation at 56.9 bps with facility A2.
#7862 -- for operation at 74.2 bps with facility A3.
Maximum: One per 2701 without Expansion Feature (#3855) ...
two with one #3855
three with two #3855s and Expanded
Capability (#3815) ... four with three #3855s and #3815.
Limitations: See "Maximum Configuration" below.
tTELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE "(#7885). Controls data transfers between S/360 or S/370 and Mdl 33/35 TTY Terminals (8
level code at 110 bps only) with facility C2. Maximum: One per
2701 without Expansion Feature (#3855) ... two with one #3855
... three with two #3855s and Expanded Capability (#3815) ...
four with three #3855s and #3815. Limitations: See "Maximum
Configuration" below. Special Requirements: See Autocall
(#1302) for applicability.
TRANSPARENCY (#8029).
Provides a Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#7697. 7698) and/or Dual Code (#3455) with the
ability to transmit and receive 8-bit binary data as well as EBCDIC
or ASCII codes ... or 6-bit binary data as well as 6-bit Transcode.
Transparency for ASCII modifies VRC/LRC checking to VRC/eRC
checking. Limitation: ASCII code transparency is not available on
the 2780 Data Transmission Terminal, 2770 Data Communication
System, 3780 Data Communications Terminal, 3735 Programmable
Buffered Terminal, or a System/3 or System/32. Therefore a
2780, 3735 or System/3 with ASCII code will not operate with a
2701 equipped with #8029 when the # 8029 is assigned to Ihe
ASCII code. To communicate with a 2701 in transparenl mode. the
2780 must be equipped with EBCDIC Transparency (#8030). the
2770 with EBCDIC Transparency (#3650). the 3780 with EBCDIC
Transparency (#3601), or the System/3 with Text Transparency
(#7850). The 3735 will operate in EBCDIC with a 2701 with or
without #8029 assigned to EBCDIC. On System/32. ASCII,
EBCDIC and EBCDIC Transparency are standard and one is selected by programming. The 5231 mdl 2 does not support transparent mode. Specify: Either or both of the following -- #9700 for
use with #9060. 9061 or 9062 on Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II (#7697, 7698). or #9701 for use with #9070, 9071 or
9072 on Dual Code (#3455). Maximum: One per #7697 or
#7698. Prerequisites: A Synct">ronous Data Adapter Type II
t
ttt
For further information, see M, 2700 pages
Orders for #7695 or #7696 are on an "as available " basis ... customer initiated
deferrals or orders for 270ls which include either feature will subject the 2701 orders to
an "as available" basis.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- - - - ---=
----=-- =--':' =
M 2701.5
Jul 79
DP Machines
2701 Data Adapter Unit (cont'd)
(#7697, 7698) ... when this feature is ordered there are additional
restrictions and limitations to the facility and operation. For details,
see SRL GA27-3004.
SPECIAL FEATURE PRICES: Before ordering, consult individual
feature desriptions and "Maximum Configuration" above.
MAXIMUM CONFIGURATION
As an aid in determining allowable and maximum adapter configurations, the adapters have been categorized as belonging
to Category I or Category II.
If more than two adapters from Category I, more than one adapter from Category II, or at least one adapter from each of the
two Categories are to be installed, Expanded Capability (#3815)
is required.
Category I
IBM Terminal Adapter Type I, Mod II (#4640)
IBM Terminal Adapter Type II (#4648)
Telegraph Adapter Type 1(#7860, 7861, 7862)
Telegraph Adapter Type II (#7885)
Parallel Data Adapter (#5500), with two or less Parallel Data
Extensions (#5505)
Category II
Parallel Data Adapter (#5500), with more than two Parallel
Data Extensions (#5505)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type I (#7695, 7696)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#7697, 7698)
IBM Terminal Adapter Type III (#4656, 4657)
Maximum Basic 2701 (w/o Expanded Capability, #3815)
Two adapters from Category I ... or one from Category II.
Maximum 2701 w #3815
Four adapters from Category I ... or two from Category II ...
or two from Category I and one from Category II.
Notes: [1] An Expansion Feature (#3855) is required for each
adapter after the first.
[2] Channel Interface, Second (# 1860) requires Expanded
Capability (#3815).
[3] Unless otherwise stated, an adapter as listed in the above
Categories includes the adapter and all its associated
features.
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Autocall
#1302 $ 38 $ 1,325
1303
38
1,325
1314
1,675
54
Channel Interface, 2nd 1860
38
1,325
Dual Code
42
1,090
3455
Dual Commun Interface 3461
21
824
3462
21
824
3463
48
1,505
3464
48
1,505
Expanded Capability
3815
28
1,005
Expansion Feature
3855
89
3,060
IBM Line Adapter
134.5 bps
4636
434
10
600 bps
4637
434
10
IBM Terminal Adapter
Type I
4640
2,850
84
Type II
4648
84
2.850
Type 111-1200 bps
4656 140
4;565
Type 111-2400 bps
4657
140
4,565
Internal Clock
4703
49
1,785
Isolation, Control Unit
4700
NC
NC
IBM Line Adapter Base 4708
49
1,360
IBM 1200 BPS Line Adapter
Leased
4781
16
535
Switched
4782
21
714
Auto Call Origination
4791
72
1,970
Parallel Data Adapter
4,235
5500 145
Parallel Data Timeout
5501
10
260
Parallel Data Extension 5505
10
260
2nd Channel Enable/
NC
Disable Switch
6301
NC
Selectable Sync Clock 7401
50
1,555
Station Selection
7477
42
1,090
1,505
Synchronous Clock
7692
48
'1,505
7693
48
tttSync Data Adptr Ty 17695 336 11,730
7696 336 11,730
Sync Data Adptr Ty II
7697 336 11,730
7698 336 11,730
Telegraph Adapter Type I
45.5 bps
7860
2,850
84
56.9 bps
7861
84
2,850
7862
74.2 bps
84
2,850
Telegraph Adptr Ty II
7885
84
2,850
2,840
Transparency
8029
81
FIC
$ 3.50
3.50
1.00
1.50
1.00
1.50
1.50
1.00
1.00
NC
9.00
$193
193
166
295
39
116
116
166
166
423
397
2,50
2,50
193
193
9,50
9.50
12.00
12.00
3,00
NC
1.50
270
270
321
321
142
NC
95
3.50
4.00
14.00
14.00
1.00
3.00
NC
NC
135
473
116
270
NC
1.00
1.00
1,00
1.00
28.50
28.50
28.50
28.50
NC
226
142
91
91
PO
PO
729'
729-
9.50
9.50
9.50
9.50
1,00
270
270
270
270
54
* The FlC for conversion from #7697 to #7698 or vice versa is $127.
ttt
Orders for #7695 or #7696 are on an "as available" basis ." customer initiated
deferrals or orders for 2701s which include either feature will subject the 2701 orders to
an "as available" basis.
[rev.erse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ------- - -----_.-
--
M 2702
May 79
DP Machines
2702 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
[no longer available]
Specify: Communication Cable Order. A Cable Order must be
submitted for each
order where the added feature requires
external cable. See S/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning.
SRL GC22-7004. for cabling information.
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following special features are on an "As Available" basis for
field installation.
Limitations:
[1] Up to three of the four available terminal controls #4615.
#4616. #7911. #7912 can be installed.
[2] Up to four selective speeds can be specified.
(a) With either #4615 or #7911. one selective speed must
be specified.
(b) With each Add'l Selective Speed (#1065). another
selective speed other than that specified for #4615 or
#7911 must be specified.
[3] The combined total of terminal controls [maximum. three].
Add'l Selective Speeds (#1065) [maximum. twol. 2741 Break
(#8055) [maximum. one]. and Type I Terminal Interrupt
(#8200) [maximum. one] cannot exceed four.
[4] #4616 cannot be used when 2741 Break (#8055) is installed.
ADDITIONAL SELECTIVE SPEED (#1065). To add an additional
different selective speed with IBM Terminal Control-Type I
(#4615) or Telegraph Terminal Control-Type I (#7911). Permits
attachment of terminals/facilities of more than one speed to the
same terminal control. Maximum: Two ... one with #4615. the
other with #7911 ... also see "Limitations" above. Specify: With
#4615 -- #9683 for 75 bps. #9684 for 134.5 bps. or #9685 for
600 bps. With #7911 - #9680 for 45.5 bps. #9681 for 56.9
bps. or #9682 for 74.2 bps. Prerequisites: IBM Terminal ControlType I (#4615) or Telegraph Terminal Control-Type I (#7911) ...
Selective Speed (#9685) requires Speed Extension (#7387).
AUTOCALL ADAPTER (#1290). For attachment to an automatic
calling unit. Maximum: Eight ... with Autocall Expansion (#1311).
sixteen. Prerequisites: Autocall Feature (#1310). and. for each
line. a Data Set Adapter (#3233).
AUTOCALL FEATURE (#1310). Provides automatic dialing capabilities on facilities C1 and C2 for up to eight lines. 'Maximum:
One.
AUTOCALL EXPANSION (#1311). Expands the automatic dialing
capability to
sixteen line attachments.
Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Autocall Feature (#1310).
AUTO POLL (#1319). Operates in conjunction with IBM Terminal
Control-Type I (#4615) and/or IBM Terminal Control-Type 11
(#4616) to allow continuation of polling after negative responses
on all of the lines served by those terminal controls without having
program interruptions. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: IBM Terminal
Control-Type I (#4615) or Type 11 (#4616).
t DATA SET LINE ADAPTER (#3233). To attach an external data
set for operation -- at 110 bps over facility C2 -- at 134.5 bps
over facility C1. C2 or 01 - at 600 bps over facility 02. Or to
attach a line to a 2711 Line Adapter Unit. Maximum: Fifteen ...
with 31 Line Expansion (#7955). thirth-one.
EXPANSION BASE (#3853).
Required if an IBM Line Adapter
(#4634. 4635) is to be installed. Maximum: One.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4612, 4613). A modem for 2-wire. limited
distance use up to 8 wire-miles. See "Limited Distance Line Adapter. Type 2" in SRL GA24-3435* * for specifications and restrictions.
#4612 -- for use with 1060 or 1070 systems. or 2740/2741
terminals or 5010 operating at 134.5 bps over facility
G2.
#4613 - for use with 1030. 1070 systems. or 2740 mdl 2 terminals or 5010 operating at 600 bps over facility G2.
Maximum; #4612 and #4613 are assigned a weight of three (3)
each. where the total weight of IBM Line Adapters (#4612. 4613
4634 and 4635) may not exceed fifty (50). Limitations: #4612
and #4613 may not be installed if both 1032 Attachment (#7918)
and IBM Line Adapters (#4634 or #4635) are to be installed.
Only fifteen #4612s/4613s may be installed if #7918 is installed.
If maximums are exceeded. investigate possible use of a 2711
Line Adapter Unit. Prerequisites: For either -- IBM Terminal
Control-Type I or 11 (#4615.4616) .. , For #4613 -- Speed Extension (#7387) ... for more than fifteen #4612s - 31 Line Expansion (#7955).
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4634, 4635). A modem for local use up to
t
For further information. see M 2700 pages.
* * SRL GA24·3435·2. or subsequent releases.
4.75 wire-miles over facility G1. See "Limited Distance Line Adapter. Type I." in SRL manual GA22-3435 * * for specifications and
restrictions. Maximum: #4634 and #4635 are assigned a weight
of two (2) each. where the total weight of IBM Line Adapters
(#4612. 4634. 4635) may not exceed fifty (50). Limitations:
#4634 and #4635 may not be installed if both 1032 Attachment
(#7918) and IBM Line Adapters (#4612. 4613) are to be installed. Only twenty-one #4634/46355 may be installed if #7918
is installed. Prerequisites: IBM Terminal Control-Type I (#4615)
and Expansion Base (#3853) and. for more than fifteen. 31 Line
ExpanSion (#7955).
IBM TERMINAL CONTROL-TYPE I (#4615). Controls for attachment of 1060s/1 070s/2740s/2741 s/5010. Includes vertical and
horizontal redundancy -checking for 10605/10705/5010 ... the
same checking is provided for 27405 if they are equipped with
Record Checking (#6114). 2740s can be attached when equipped
with any combination of their Record Checking (#6114) and
Station Control (#7479) features. or with neither. Maximum: One
... also see "Limitations" above. Specify: Selective Speed #9683 for 75 bps operation. #9684 for 134.5 bps. or #9685 for
600 bps ... for more than one speed. see Add'l Selective Speed
(#1065). Prerequisites: Terminal Control Base (#9696) ... see
"Specify". Selective Speed (#9685) also requires Speed Extension (#7387).
IBM TERMINAL CONTROL-TYPE 11 (#4616). Controls for attachment of 1031 Input Station mdl As ... includes vertical redundancy
checking. Maximum: One ... also see "Limitations" above.
Limitation: Not available if 2741 Break (#8055) is installed.
Prerequisite: Speed Extension (#7387) ... Terminal Control Base
(#9696) [see "Specify"].
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (4700). [For field installation only
on units shipped prior to December 29. 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 2702 without
generating spurious signals. Thus. a CPU program. if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off.
can continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are
compatible EC level requirements.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). Provides partitioning
and the ability to attach the Two Processor Switch (# 811 0) to a
S/360 mdl 65 MP which has the Configuration Control Panel
(#1505) installed or to a 2167 Configuration Unit ... for use in a
multiprocessor S/360 mdl 65 or a S/360 mdl 67-2 only.
SPEED EXTENSION (#7387). Increase line speed capability to
600 bps on all fifteen lines of the basic 2702. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with 31 Line Expansion (#7955). Maximum: One.
t TELEGRAPH LINE ADAPTER (#7895). For attachment to the A1
facility at 45.5 bps. the A2 facility at 56.9 bps or the A3 facility at
74.2 bps. A 62.5ma neutral DC Loop is required. Maximum:
Fifteen .,. with 31 line Expansion (#7955). thirty-one.
TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CONTROL-TYPE I (#7911). Controls for
attachment of AT&T 83B2/83B3 or WU Plan 115A terminals.
Maximum: One .. , also see "limitations" above. Specify: Selective Speed - #9680 for 45.5 bps operation. #9681 for 56.9 bps.
or #9682 for 74.2 bps ... for more than one speed. see Add'i
Selective Speed (#1065). Automatic Downshift on Space Character - #9100. When specified. it governs for all lines using #7911
... used with this type terminal control only. Prerequisite: Terminal
Control Base (#9697) ... see "Specify."
TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CONTROL-TYPE II (#7912).
Controls
for ~ttachment of TWX stations using 8 . level code at 110 bps.
MaXimum: One ... also see "Limitations" above. Prerequisite:
Terminal Control Base (#9697) ... see "Specify."
1032 ATTACHMENT (#7918).
To attach a 1032 Digital Time
Unit via a 20' cable supplied with the 1032. Limitations: Must go
on Line Address No.1... unavailable if more than fifteen IBM Line
Adapters (#4634. 4635) are installed. or if both an IBM Line
Adapter (#4612. 4613) and an IBM Line Adapter (#4634. 4635)
are installed. Maximum: One. [Note: Other 1030 terminals may
operate remotely on the same line.] Prerequisites: IBM Terminal
Control-Type 11 (#4616) and Speed Extension (#7387) ... if not to
be attached t~ a line previously specified for Line Address No.1.
a Data Set Line Adapter (#3233) or IBM Line Adapter (#4613)
specified for line Address No. 1 is also required. Digital Time
Read-out Control. 2702 (#3273) is required on the 1032.
TERMINAL CONTROL EXPANSION (#7935).
Required if both
IBM and telegraph terminals are to be attached to the same 2702.
Maximum: One. Prerequisites: Terminal Control Base (#9696)
and (#9697) ... see "Specify."
31 LINE EXPANSION (#7955). Increase line attachment capability to thirty-one half-duplex communications lines operating at
speed up to 200 bps. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Speed
Extension (#7387). Maximum: One.
2741 BREAK (#8055). Allows the IBM Terminal Control-Type I
(#4615) to operate with a 2741 with Receive Interrupt (#4708).
#4615 may be used independently of this feature even though
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - --=- =-------=
--':' =
M 2702 - 2703
May 79
DP Machines
2702 Communication Control (conl'd)
#8055 is installed. limitation: Not available if Terminal ControlType II (#4616) or Type I Terminal Interrupt (#8200) is installed.
Maximum: One. Prerequisites: IBM Terminal Control-Type I
(#4615) with Selective Speed (#9684) ... If IBM Line Adapters
are used they must be 4-wire version ... if the #4615 is to control
other. non-interrupt 134.5 bps terminals. two #9684s are required. one associated solely with the interrupt terminals. the other
solely with the non-interrupt terminals.
TWO PROCESSOR SWITCH (#8110).
For switching the 2702
between two S/360 or S/370 multiplexer channels. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: In a S/360 mdl 67-2. Remote Switch Attachment (#6148) is required. If the Two Processor Switch is routed
through the Configuration Control Panel (#1505) of a multiprocessing S/360 mdl 65 system. Remote Switch Attachment
(#6148) is required.
TYPE I TERMINAL INTERRUPT (#8200). A"ows the IBM Terminal Control-Type I (#4615) to operate in a bi-directional interrupt
mode capability with a 2741 with Transmit Interrupt (#7900) and
Receive Interrupt (#4708 on 2741). #4615 may be used with
non-interrupt equipped terminals even though #8200 is installed.
Limitation: Not available if Terminal Control-Type" (#4616) or
2741 Break (#8055) is installed. Maximum: One. Prerequisites:
IBM Terminal Control Type I (#4615) with Selective Speed
(#9684) ... If the #4615 is to communicate with 2741s with
Transmit Interrupt and any other 134.5 bps terminal. two #9684s
are required. one associated solely with the 2741 s. and the other
solely with the other terminals.
verify compatibility when #8200 is to be
added to a 2702 with an installed RPQ.
Special Feature Prices:
Before ordering features. consult
"Limitations" and individual feature descriptions above. A completed. revised 2702 Specification Sheet.
and a copy of
the lastest preceeding specification sheet must be submitted with
each
order for soecial features.
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Add'i Selective Speed #1065 $ 16 $ 786
16
1290
786
Autoca" Adapter
1310
67
2,960
Autoca" Feature
1311
16
786
Autoca" Expansion
1319
56
2,535
Auto Po"
3233
21
1,065
Data Set Line Adapter
NC
NC
Expansion Base
3853
IBM Line Adapter
134.5 bps
4612
33
1,505
600 bps
4613
33
1,505
IBM Terminal Control 4615
38
1,715
Type I
4616
38
1,715
Type II
IBM Line Adapter 2-wlre
4634
24
1,175
4-wlre
4635
24
1,175
NC
NC
Isolation, Control Unit
4700
6148
Remote Switch Attach
NC
NC
Speed Extension
7387
84
3,795
Telegraph Line Adapter 7895
21
1,010
Telegraph Terminal Control Type I
7911
38
1,715
7912
38
1,715
Type II
7918
43
1,750
1032 Attachment
Terminal Control Expans 7935
21
1,065
112
31 Line Expansion
7955
4,965
8055
10
506
2741 Break
8110
3,795
Two Processor Switch
84
Type I Terminal Interrupt 8200
33
1,345
FIC
$1.00
1.00
3.00
1.00
4.00
3.00
NC
$ 39
91
321
166
166
91
NC
1.00
1.00
116
116
1.00
1.00
142
142
1.00
1.00
NC
NC
4.00
4.00
116
116
NC
NC
270
193
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.25
4.00
1.00
3.50
NC
142
142
91
91
321
91
423
236
2703 TRANSMISSION CONTROL
[No longer available]
Specify: A Cable Order must be submitted for each
order
where the added ieature requires external cable. See S/370
Installation Manual - Physical Planning. SRL GC22-7004 for cabling information.
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following special features are on an "As Available" basis for
field installation.
• LINE BASE FEATURES
START-STOP BASE TYPE I (#7505).
To attach up to 88 halfduplex line appearances (11 Line Set Features) operating up to
165 bps. May be intermixed with Starl-Stop Base Type" (#7506)
and/or Synchronous Bases Type 1 A (#7703), Type 1 B (#7704).
or Type 2A (#7706). Maximum: three .. , but total half-duplex line
appearances per 2703 cannot exceed 176. Prerequisite: The
second #7505 installed requires Base Expansion (#1440).
START-STOP BASE TYPE II (#7506). To attach up to 24 halfduplex line appearances (3 Line Set Features) operating up to 600
bps. May be intermixed with Start-Stop Base Type Is (#7505)
and/or Synchronous Bases Type 1 A (#'7703). Type 1 B (#7704).
or Type 2A (#7706). Maximum: Three. [Note: A #7506 may be
used to attach features normally attached via #7505. although the
limitations for #7506 remain unchanged.] Prerequisite: The second #7506 installed requires Base Expansion (#1440).
SYNCHRONOUS ATTACHMENT (#7702).
To attach any synchronous lines to a 2703. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Base Expansion (# 1440).
SYNCHRONOUS BASE TYPE 1A (#7703), TYPE 1B (#7704),
TYPE 2A (7706).
#7703 -- to attach up to 24 half-duplex lines (6 Synchronous
Line Sets) at bit rates up to 2400 bps using Synchronous Terminal Control (#7715 for EBCDIC or #7716 for ASCII).
#7704 -- to attach up to 16 half-duplex lines (4 Synchronous
Line Sets) at bit rates up to 2400 bps using Synchronous Terminal Control (#7717 for 6-bit Transcode). either by itself. or in
combination with #7715 or #7716.
#7706 -- to attach up to 12 half-duplex lines (3 Synchronous
Line Sets) at bit rates up to 4800 bps using Synchronous Terminal Control (#7715 lor EBCDIC. or #7716 for ASCII).
May be intermixed with Start-Stop Base Type I (#7505) and/or
Type II (#7506). Maximum: Two. Limitation: No more than two
Synchronous Terminal Controls can be associated with one Synchronous Base. Prerequisite: Synchronous Attachment (#7702).
BASE EXPANSION (#1440). Required to attach a Synchronous
Attachment (#7702). or more than one Start-Stop Base Type I
(#7505) or Type II (#7506). Maximum: One.
• TERMINAL CONTROL FEATURES
To attach an IBM
IBM TERMINAL CONTROL BASE (#4619).
Terminal Control Type I (#4696) and/or Type " (#4697).
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: A Start-Stop Base Type I (#7505)
or Type II (#7506).
IBM TERMINAL CONTROl. TYPE I (#4696).
To communicate
with 1060s. 1070s. 2740. 2741 s. and 5010. Includes vertical and
longitudinal checking for 1060/1070/5010 ... the same checking
is provided tor 27405 if they are equipped with Record Checking
(#6114). [Note: 27405 may be attached when eqUipped with any
combination of #6114 and Station Control (# 7479). or with neither.] Maximum: One. Prerequisite: IBM Terminal Control Base
(#4619).
2741 BREAK (#8055).
Allows the IBM Terminal Control Type I
(#4696) to operate with a 2741 equipped with Receive Interrupt
(#4708). #4696 may be used independently of this feature even
though #8055 is installed. Note: All lines on any Line Set Expander to which this feature is applied must operate with this feature.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Not available if Type I Terminal Interrupt (#8200) is installed. Prerequisites: IBM Terminal Control
Type I (#4696) ... If IBM Line Adapters are used. they must be
the 4-wire version.
TYPE I TERMINAL INTERRUPT (#8200).
Allows IBM Terminal
Control Type I (#4696) to operate in a bi-directional interrupt
mode capability with a 2741 equipped with Transmit Interrupt
(#7900) and Receive Interrupt (#4708 on 2741). #4696 may be
used with non-interrupt equipped terminals even though #8200 is
installed. Maximum: One. Limitation: Not available if 2741 Break
(#8055) is installed. Prerequisites: IBM Terminal Control Type I
(#4696) ... if IBM Line Adapters are used they must be the 4-wire
version.
verify
compatibility when #8200 is to be added to a 2703 with an installed or on-order RPQ.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'------ ----
- ---::E:":";":5';'5:
M 2703.1
May 79
DP Machines
2703 Transmission Control (cont'd)
IBM TERMINAL CONTROL TYPE II (#4697).
To communicate
with 1030 systems. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: IBM Terminal
Control Base (#4619).
TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CONTROL BASE (#7905). To attach a
Telegraph Terminal Control, Type I (#7911) and/or Type II
(#7912). Maximum: One.
TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CONTROL TYPE I (#7911). To communicate with AT&T 83B2/83B3 or WU 115A terminals. Maximum:
One. Specify: #9129 for downshift on space, if desired.
Prerequisite: Telegraph Terminal Control Base (#7905).
TELEGRAPH TERMINAL CONTROL TYPE II (#7912). To communicate with TWX Model 33/35 terminals. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Telegraph Terminal Control Base (#7905).
TELEGRAPH ATTACHMENT (#7876). To attach Telegraph Line
Sets (#7897) ... required when one or more 83B2/83B3, 115A,
2740 mdl 2 lines are attached via Telegraph Line Sets (#7897) ...
NOT required when 83B2/83B3 and 115A lines are attached via
2712 Remote Multiplexer mdl 2s. Maximum: One.
SYNCHRONOUS TERMINAL CONTROL (#7715, 7716, 7717).
To communicate with synchronous terminals.
#7715 -- for terminals communicating in EBCDIC code.
#7717 -- for terminals communicating in 6-bit Transcode.
#7716 - for terminals communicating in non-transparent ASCII
code.
#7716/9100 -- for terminals communicating in transparent ASCII
code.
Note: Transparency (#9100) modifies the VRC/LRC check to a
CRC check, making the #7716/9100 a fourth synchronous terminal control type. Transparency capability is included in the #7715
and #7717 Synchronous Terminal Controls. When transparency is
used with any of these codes, there are additional restrictions and
limitations which are covered in SRL GA27-3004. Maximum: One
of each ... three if no IBM Terminal Control Type I (#4696) or
Type II (#4697), Telegraph Terminal Control Type I (#7911) or
Type II (#7912) is installed ... otherwise, only two. Prerequisites:
For #7715 or #7716 - Synchronous Base Type 1A (#7703),
Type 1B (#7704) or Type 2A (#7706). For #7717 - Synchronous Base Type 1 B (#7704). Station Selection (#7473) may also
be required ... see below.
STATION SELECTION (#7473).
Required when one or more
lines are assigned to a Synchronous Terminal Control (#7715,
7716, 7717) which is functioning on a leased communications line
as a tributary (terminal) station. Maximum: One per #7715, 7716,
7717. Prerequisite: Synchronous Terminal Control (#7715, 7716,
7717).
e LINE SET FEATURES -- All lines in a given line set or line set expander
must operate at the same speed (unless clocking is supplied by
the data set) over the same type communications facilities with
terminals employing the same type of line control; with either
business machine or data set clocking, but not a combination.
t DATA LINE SET (#32('5). For attachment of up to eight line
appearances of asynchronous terminals (1030, 1060, 1070, 2740,
2741, 5010 and TWX Model 33/35 type) over facilities C1, C2,
01 or 02 ... or for attachment of up to eight line appearances to a
2711 Line Adapter Unit. Maximum: Twelve. Prerequisites: StartStop Base Type I (#7505) or Type II (#7506) ... Line Speed
Option (#4877, 4878 or 4879) as appropriate ... either IBM Terminal Control Base (#4619), or for TWX, Telegraph Terminal
Control Base (#7905) ... one of the following: IBM Terminal Control Type I (#4696) or Type II (#4697), or for TWX, Telegraph
Terminal Control Type II (#7912).
t DATA"LINE SET EXPANDER (#3206). Permits attachment of up
to eight add'i lines to a Data Line Set (#3205). Maximum: One
per #3205 ... ten per 2703. Prerequisite: One #3205 per
#3206.
t IBM LINE SET 1A (#4686). Eight limited distance IBM line adapters for 2-wire local use up to 4.75 wire-miles each over facility
G1. See Limited Distance Line Adapter Type I in SRL
GA24-3435tt for specifications and restrictions. To attach up to
eight half-duplex line appearances accommodating 2740/2741
terminals. Limitation: Cannot be installed if any IBM Line Set 2s
(#4688) are installed. Maximum: Total number of #4686s and
IBM Line Adapter 1Bs (#4687) cannot exceed twelve.
Prerequisites: Start-Stop Base Type I (#7505) or Type II (#7506)
... Line Speed Option (#4878) for 134.5 bps ... IBM Terminal
Control Base (#4619) ... IBM Terminal Control Type I (#4696) ...
for more than nine #4686s, an add'i #7505 or #7506 and its
prerequisites.
t IBM LINE SET 1 B (#4687). Eight limited distance line adapters
for 4-wire local use (up to 4.75 wire-miles) over facility G1. See
Limited Distance Line Adapter Type I in SRL GA24-3435tt for
specifications and restrictions. To attach up to eight line appearan-
t
tt
For further information, see M 2700 pages.
SRL OA24-3435-2, or subsequent ·revisions.
ces accommodating 2740/2741 terminals. Limitation: Cannot be
installed if any IBM Line Set 2s (#4688) are installed. Maximum:
Total number of #4687s and IBM Line Set 1 As (#4686) installed
cannot exceed twelve. Prerequisites: Same as for #4686.
tt IBM LINE SET 2 (#4688). Eight limited distance line adapters for
2-wire local use (up to 8 wire-miles each) over facility G2. See
Limited Distance Line Adapter Type 2 in SRL GA24-3435tt for
specifications and restrictions. To attach up to eight half-duplex
line
appearances
accommodating
1030/1 060/1 070/
2740/2741/5010 systems and terminals. Limitation: Cannot be
installed if any IBM Line Set 1 As (#4686) or 1 Bs (#4687) are
installed. Maximum: Four. Prerequisites: Start-Stop Base Type I
(#7505) or Type II (#7506) ... Line Speed Option (#4878 for
134.5 bps, or #4879 for 600 bps) ... IBM terminal Control Base
(#4619) ... IBM Terminal Control Type I (#4696) or Type II
(#4697).
t TELEGRAPH LINE SET (#7897). For attachment of up to eight
line appearances via facilities A1, A2 or A3 ... interfaces AT&T
83B2/83B3 and WU Plan 115A terminals, or at 75 bps, 1050 or
2740 mdl 2 terminals. Maximum: Twelve. Caution: When operating TWO 2703s with #7897s in series on the same telegraph
current loop, RPQ must be applied to one
2703 and RPQ
must be applied to the other
2703. These RPQs are NOT required for a single 2703 operating
two telegraph line appearances on the same telegraph current
loop. Prerequisites: Start-Stop Base Type I (#7505) or Type II
(#7506) ... Line Speed Option (#4873, 4874, 4875 or 4876) as
appropriate ... Telegraph Terminal Control Base (#7905) ... Telegraph Terminal Control Type I (#7911) ... Telegraph Attachment
(#7876).
t TELEGRAPH LINE SET EXPANDER (#7898). For attachment of
up to eight add'i lines to a Telegraph Line Set (#7897).
Maximum: One #7898 per #7897 ... ten per 2703. Prerequisite:
A Telegraph Line Set (#7897) for each #7898.
t SYNCHRONOUS LINE SET (#7710). For attachment of up to four
synchronous line appearances via facilities C4, C5, C6, 03, D4,
D4SB, D5 or D5SB ... accommodates 2701 sand 2703s with
S/360/370s, System/3s with #2074, S/360 mdl 20s with
#2074, S/360 mdl 25s with #4580 and #7551 or #7552,
1130s with #7690, 2715 mdl 2s, 2770s, 1800s with #7550,
2780s and 3780s. Maximum: Six per Synchronous Base Type 1 A
(#7703) ... four per Type 1B (#7704) ... three per Type 2A
(#7706) ... twelve per 2703. Limitation: See Synchronous Clock
(#7705). Prerequisites: Base Expansion (# 1440) ... Synchronous
Attachment (#7702) ... Synchronous Base Type 1 A (#7703),
Type 1B (#7704) or Type 2A (#7706) ... Synchronous Terminal
Control (#7715, 7716 or 7717). Synchronous Clock (#7705) may
be required.
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7705).
Required for attachment of
facilities C4, D3 ... each #7705 permits attachment of up to four
such facilities. LImitation: The maximum number of Synchronous
Line Sets (#7710) is reduced when any #7705s are installed ...
see "General Limitation·· below. Maximum: One per each #7110
... three per Synchronous Base Type 1A (#7703), Type 1B
(#7704) or Type 2A (#"1706) ... six per 2703. Prerequisites:
Synchronous Line Set (#7710) ... Synchronous Line Speed Option
(#7711).
'
eSPEEDOPTIONS
ASYNCHRONOUS DEVICES
LINE SPEED OPTION (#4873-4879).
Defines the line speed
available for asynchronous features on the 2703. Maximum:
Seven, one of each of the following:
#4873 - 45.5 bps for common carrier half-duplex
#4874 - 56.9 bps telegraph service
#4875 - 74.2 bps
#4876 -- 75 bps
for 2740 mdl 2s connected via
telegraph channels
#4877 -- 110 bps
for TWX
#4878 -- 134.5 bpsfor 1060 systems, 2740/2741
terminals, 1070 systems or 5010 not
requiring 600 bps
#4879 -- 600 bps
for 1030 systems, and 2740 mdl 2s,
1070 systems or 5010 requiring 600 bps .
SYNCHRONOUS DEVICES
SYNCHRONOUS LINE SPEED OPTION (#7711).
Defines the
1200 bps synchronous line speed for Synchronous Clock(s)
(#7705). Note: This option may not be used with any Synchronous Line Set on which a data set clocked line appears.
Maximum: One per 2703
eAUTOCALLFEATURES
AUTOCALL (#1340 for first, #1341 for second).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Each provides
---------- ---- ----
M 2703.2
May 79
,.:. =-= == ';" ==
DP Machines
2703 Transmission Control
(cont'd)
up to eight line appearances of a given Data Line Set (#3205) or
Data Line Set Expander (#3206), or two Synchronous Line Sets
(#7710), with automatic calling capability. For attachment to
facilities C4, C5 or C6.
When using # 1340 or # 1341 with a Synchronous
Line Set, a first or second autocall feature may be associated with
two Synchronous. Line Sets (eight binary synchronous communications lines) if both #7710s are on the same Synchronous Base,
have consecutive addresses, and the first begins on a base address boundary which is a multiple of eight. Maximum: One of
each. Prerequisites: One Data Line Set (#3205) or Data Line Set
Expander (#3206) for each #1340 or #1341 ... or one or two
Synchronous Line Sets (#7710) for each #1340 or #1341 ...
#1341 requires #1340.
.TWO PROCESSOR ATTACHMENT FEATURE
TWO PROCESSOR SWITCH (#8110).
For switching the 2703
channel interface between two S/360 or S/370 multiplexer channels. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Emergency Power-Off Control
on attached processing units.
.ISOLATION FEATURE
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [For field installation on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 2703 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off,
can continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are
compatible EC level requirements,
GENERAL LIMITATION
Combinations of the following features may not exceed a
total assigned weight of nine (9) per Start-Stop Base Type I
(#7505) or Type II (#7506) and six (6) per Synchronous
Base Type 1 A (#7703), Type 1 B (#7704) or Type 2A
(#7706). Due to this limitation, it may be necessary to order
three Start-Stop Base Type Is (#7505) with some unusual
configurations.
Feature
Assigned Weight
Data Line Set (#3205)
Data Line Set Expander (#3206)
Telegraph Line Set (#7897)
Telegraph Line Set Expander (#7898)
IBM Line Set 1 A (# 4686)
IBM Line Set 1 B (#4687)
IBM Line Set 2 (#4688)
Synchronous Line Set (#7710)
Synchronous Clock (#7705)
1
o
1
o
1
1
2
1
1
MACI
MRC Purchase MMMC
Start-Stop Base Type I #7505 $ 81 $ 3,795 $ 4,50 $ 805
Start-Stop Base Type II 7506
81
3,795
4.50
805
Synchronous Attachment 7702 524 21,710 10.00 1,110
Synch Base Type 1 A
7703 156
6,530
4.50
789
Synch Base Type 1 B
7705 156
6,530
5.00
789
Synch Base Type 2A
7706 288 13,000
4.50
239
Base Expansion
1440
81
3,795
4.00
318
.TERMINAL CONTROL FEATURES
IBM Term Control Base 4619
IBM Term Control Type I 4696
2741 Break
8055
Type I Terminal Interrupt 8200
IBM Term Cntrl Type II
4697
Tele Term Cntrl Base
7905
Tele Term Cntrl Type I
7911
Tele Term Cntrl Type II 7912
Telegraph Attachment
7876
Synchronous Terminal Control
EBCDIC code
7715
ASCII code
7716
6-Bit Transcode
7717
Station Selection
7473
21
37
10
65
37
21
37
37
48
1,065
1,715
506
2,615
1,715
1,065
1,715
1,715
2,270
1.25
1.00
1.00
NC
1.00
1.25
1.00
1.00
4.50
348
87
104
104
104
52
4,345
4,345
4,345
1,680
3,00
3.00
3.00
.50
420
474**
420
106
81
59
101
101
156
90
70
421
63
3,510
2,475
4,275
4,275
7,280
3,940
2,905
17,410
2,605
12.00
8.50
4.00
4.00
5.50
16.50
13.50
4.50
2.50
589
143
425
441
640
455
148
445
280
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
16
533
533
533
533
533
533
533
674
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
1,00
.50
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
30
129
129
6,080
6,080
7.00
7.00
511
425
44
159
80
278
95
87
111
.L1NE SET FEATURES
Data line Set
Data line Set Expander
IBM Line Set 1 A
IBM line Set 1 B
IBM Line Set 2
Telegraph line Set
Tele Line Set Expander
Synchronous Line Set
Synchronous Clock
3205
3206
4686
4687
4688
7897
7898
7710
7705
.SPEED OPTIONS
Line Speed Option (asynchronous)
45.5 bps
4873
56,9 bps
4874
74,2 bps
4875
75 bps
4876
110 bps
4877
134.5 bps
4878
600 bps
4879
Synch Line Speed Option 7711
.AUTOCALL FEATURES
Autocall -- first
Autocall - second
• Special Feature Prices: Before ordering, consult individual feature
description and "General Limitation" above. A completed, revised
2703 Specification Sheet,
(or later), and a copy of
the latest preceding specification sheet must be submitted with
each
order for special features.
FIC
.L1NE BASE FEATURES
1340
1341
.TWO PROCESSOR ATTACHMENT FEATURE
Two Processor Switch
8110
81
3,795
3.50
830
4700
NC
NC
NC
NC
.ISOLATION FEATURE
Isolation, Control Unit
•• Add $189 when Full Transparency (#9100) is specified.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- - --==--- --=
----':' =
M 2711
May 79
DP Machines
2711
LINE ADAPTER UNIT
Purpose: Unit for attachment to 2025 Processing unit(s) equipped
with an Integrated Communications Attachment, 3135, 3135-3,
3138 Processing Unit(s) equipped with an Integrated Communications Adapter and/or 2702/2703 Transmission Control(s), and/or
3704/3705 Communications Controller. It provides for the addition
of IBM Line Adapters for a 2025 or 3135,3135-3,3138 using an
ICA feature and attachment of additional IBM Line Adapters for
2702s/2703s/3704s/3705s. The IBM Line Adapters serve as
modems for use on appropriate communications facilities, permitting communications with similiarly equipped IBM terminals.
Highlights: A modular unit ... provides for installation of up to
thirty-two IBM Line Adapters. See "Special Features" below.
These
adapters
are
for
use
by
the
attached
2702/2703/3704/3705(s). They provide for modulating and
demodulating signals over communications facilities in a manner
similiar to common carrier data sets that would otherwise be required for those functions. Thus, when IBM Line Adapters are
used, common carrier data sets are not required.
Three types of IBM Line Adapters can be installed to provide for:
limited distance (8 wire-miles) communications ... communications
over privately owned or leased common carrier facilities, and/or ...
the equivalent of up to four independent low speed channels from
a single voice grade channel (each low speed channel may be
operated point-to-point or multipoint).
The basic 2711 accommodates up to four IBM Line Adapters, in
any combination ... for more than four, Line Adapter Modules
(#4794) are required. Each #4794 permits attachment of up to
four additional IBM Line Adapters, in any combination. A maximum
of seven #4794s can be installed, for a total of thirty-two IBM
Line Adapters per 2711 ... see "Special Features" below.
Communications FaCilities: The 2711, when equipped with appropriate IBM Line Adapter(s), can attach to common carrier leased
private line telephone channels or privately owned communications
facilities conforming to the specifications described in SRL GA243435' under: Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2 '" Leased
Line Adapter, or ... Shared Line Adapter.
Attachment to Communications Lines: Attachment to communications facilities conforming to the specifications above is via the
appropriate IBM Line Adapter(s) for the type(s) of communications
service being used ... see "Special Features" below.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages.
PREREQUISITES:
Attachment to 2025 -- attachment is made via the Integrated
Communications Attachment (#4580) on a per line basis to EIA
Start/Stop Data Adapters ... see 2025. NOTE: In a S/360 mdl
25, attachment can also be made via a 2702 or 2703 ... see
below.
Attachment to 3135, 3135-3, 3138 -- attachment is made via the
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) on a per line basis,
to a Terminal Adapter Type I Model I (#9721-9728) ... see
3135, 3135-3, 3138. LIMITATION: Only IBM Line Adapter
(#4647) is supported ... see "Special Features". NOTE: In a
S/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138, attachment can also be made via a
2702 or 2703 ... see below.
Attachment to 2702 -- attachment is made on a per line basis to
the Data Set Line Adapter (#3233) on the 2702 ... see 2702.
Attachment to 2703 -- attachment is made on a per line basis
for up to eight lines to each Data Line Set (#3205) or Data Line
Set Expander (#3206) ... see 2703.
Attachment to 3704/3705 -- attachment is made on a per line
basis to Line Set Type 1A or 1D (#4711 or #4714).
any combination, can be installed ... operation with 1030 or 2741
[with Interrupt (#4708)] is limited to the 4-wire versions of the
leased line adapter (#4647) or shared line adapters (#4691,
4692, 4693 or 4694).
SPECIAL FEATURES
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4790).
A modem for 2-wire limited distance use (up to 8 wire-miles). Line turnaround time is approximately 12 ms ... see Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2 in SRL
GA24-3435' for specifications and restrictions. For operation with
similiarly
equipped
1030/1050/1060/1070
systems
and
2740/2741 terminals at speeds up to 600 bps. Limitations: See
below. Prerequisite: An available position in the basic unit or in a
Line Adapter Module (#4794).
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4639 for 2-wlre, #4647 for 4-wire).
A
modem for leased common carrier or privately owned voice grade
facilities. Line turnaround time is approximately 200 ms for
#4639 anri 20 ms for #4647, both plus line propagation time ...
see Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435' for specifications
and restrictions. For operation with similiarly equipped 1030/1060
systems and 2740/2741 terminals at speeds up to 600 bps, as
applicable. There is no limitation on the length of the communications line that can be served, if it conforms to the specifications in
SRL GA24-3435, . Limitations: See above. Prerequisite: An
available position in the basic unit or in a Line Adapter Module
(#4794).
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4641-4644 for 2-wire, #4691-4694 for
4-wire). A modem for shared use of a leased common carrier or
privately owned voice grade facility. Line turnaround time is approximately 200 ms for #4641-4644 and 20 ms for #4691-4694,
both plus line propagation time ... see Shared Line Adapter in SRL
GA24-3435' for specifications and restrictions. For operation with
similiarly equipped 1060 systems and 2740/2741 terminals at
speeds up to 134.5 bps. When used, a single leased telephone
line can provide up to four independent 134.5 bps "subchannels"
... the equivalent of up to four low-speed lines from a single voice
grade channel. Each "subchannel" is obtained through use of one
of the four shared line adapters. Thus, to operate four
"subchannels" on a single telephone channel, four line adapters
(#4641 thru #4644) for a 2-wire channel, or (#4691 thru
#4694) for a 4-wire channel are required. Limitations: See above.
Prerequisite: Each line adapter requires an available position in
the basic unit or in a Line Adapter Module (#4794). Ordering:
The terminal with which each "subchannel" on the 2711 is to
communicate must be equipped with the same shared line adapter,
i.e., the same feature #. Line adapters for use with each different
leased telephone channel must be ordered in sequence, as follows:
For
For
For
For
subchannel
subchannel
subchannel
subchannel
1
2
3
4
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Line Assignments: Must be specified on 2711 Line Assignment
Form (120-1468).
[4] A Cable Order must be submitted for: (a) Each new machine
order ... (b) Each
order where the added feature requires
external cable. See S/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004, for cabling information.
Prices:
Mdl
2711
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 145
$ 6,610
$24.00
Purchase Option: 50%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Limitations: Up to thirty-two of the IBM Line Adapters below, in
4-wire
#4641
4642"
4643' ,
4644' ,
#4691
46a2"
4693' ,
4694"
Subchannel 1 is prerequisite for installation of higher numbered subchannels, unless Shared Line Adapter 4/1 Terminator (#6350) is ordered.
LINE ADAPTER MODULE (#4794). For attachment of up to four
additional IBM Line Adapters ... any of those above, in any combination. Maximum: Seven.
SHARED LINE ADAPTER 4/1 TERMINATOR (#6350). A pluggable device for physically attaching up to four different 2-wire IBM
shared line adapters (#4641-4644) or up to four different 4-wire
IBM shared line adapters (#4691-4694) to a single 4048 Telephone Co. line terminating jack ... see Shared Line Adapter installation practices in SRL GA24-3435 *. Prerequisite: The appropriate IBM Line Adapters (#4641-4644) or (#4691-4694).
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V.
2-wire
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
IBM Line Adapter
Limited Distance
Leased Line, 2-wire
Leased Line, 4-wire
Shared Line, 2-wire
subchannel 1
subchannel 2
subchannel 3
subchannel 4
Shared Line, 4-wire
subchannel 1
subchannel 2
subchannel 3
subchannel 4
Line Adapter Module
Shared Line Adapter
4/1 Terminator
#4790 $ 10
4639
10
4647
10
$
506
448
448
$ .50
1.00
1.00
$ 39
39
39
4641
4642
4643
4644
21
21
21
21
899
899
899
899
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
39
39
39
39
4691
4692
4693
4694
4794
21
21
21
21
10
899
899
899
899
538
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
2.00
39
39
39
39
28
6350
5
168
.50
19
'" SRL GA24~3435-2, or subsequent revisions.
t
For further information on IBM Line Adapters, see M 2700 pages.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
FIC
------- --==-=
- ----- ----':' =
M 2715
May 79
DP Machines
2715 TRANSMISSION CONTROL UNIT
[no longer available]
The following specifications can be changed in the field.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz, locking plug):
#9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
Model 2] For local attachment of a 2740 Communlcallons Terminal mdl 1 ... 2740 must be located within 40 wire-feet of the
2715. Maximum: One. Prerequisites: the 2740 must be equipped
with 2715 Attachment (#9715), Dial Up (#3255), and Print Element (#9592) ... no other special features may be installed on the
2740. No data set is required.
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7705).
[Model 2 only] An internal
clock for use with data sets which do not provide clocks. See M
2700 pages for facilities that require this feature. Maximum: One.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on floor.
TWO PROCESSOR SWITCH (#8110). [Model 1 only] To switch
the 2715 mdl 1 between two S/360 or S/370 multiplexer channels. Maximum: One.
[4] When Extended Distance Repeater, Receive or Send (#3874,
3875) is ordered, #9486 must be specified for 2715s having
serial no. 10071 or below.
MODEMS -- one IBM Modem can be attached to a 2715 mdl 2
only. Two IBM Modems can be attached with Dual Communications Interface (#3460) installed.
[5] If any Extended Distance Repeater, Receive or Send (#3874,
3875) features are used in the 2790 system, #9548 (oscillator
change) must be specified on each 2791 mdl 1 or 2 or 2793 in
the system. See feature description under 2791 or 2793 for
prerequisites.
PRICES:
2715
Mdl
1
2
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$1,740
1,740
$67,240
67,240
$221
221
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenence: B
Per Call: 2
Purchase Option: 50%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online/Offline)
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following special features are on an "as available" basis for
field installation.
Modem
3872 mdl 1
3874
Speed (bps)
2400
4800
Note: For communications capabilities, product utilization
and special features, see M 2700, 3872 and 3874 pages.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Dual Commun Interface #3460 $ 37 $ 1,470
Expanded Capability
3801 325
12,580
Extended Distance Repeater,
3874
13
Receive
520
Send
3875
14
520
Line Transfer Switch
4750
16
650
Line Trans Sw - 3rd Unit 4751
16
650
Local 2740 Adapter
4850 102
3,995
Synchronous Clock
7705
42
1,675
Two Processor Switch
8110
91
3,570
DUAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (#3460). [Model 2 only]
Provides a switched interface which allows the BSC adapter to be
manually switched between two types of communications lines for
back-up purposes. Maximum: One. Limitation: This feature does
not provide the capability to operate two lines simultaneously.
EXPANDED CAPABILITY (#3801). Provides the system with an
additional 16K of control storage for a system total of 32K. Required for a maximum device configuration on a 2715, for control
of the External Alarm Contacts (#3690) feature on attached
2791/2793 Area Stations, 2798 Guidance Display Units, or 2792
Remote Communications Controllers, and for message routing
independent of host CPU intervention. Maximum: One.
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, RECEIVE (#3874). Provides
for operation with a 2791 or 2793 Area Station equipped with
Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) located up to 6,000
wire-feet away. See Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017, for
cable
specifications.
Maximum:
Four.
Limitations:
See
"Limitations" for Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875)
below. Prerequisites~ Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875)
on the "up-line" 2791/2793. Also see "Specify" [4] and [5].
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, SEND (#3875). Provides for
operation with a 2791/2793 Area Station equipped with Extended
Distance Repeater, Receive (#3874) located up to 6,000 wire-feet
away. See Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017, for cable specifications. Maximum: Four. Limitations: [1] The use of two pairs of
Extended Distance Repeaters, Receive/Send (#3874, 3875) in
tandem is not recommended. If the Area Station having both
Receive ,and Send Repeater features should fail, the entire segment would be inactive. [2] Maximum of eight pairs per transmission line attached to the 2715. Maximum of two pairs may be
used on a secondary loop attached to a 2792. [31 In the 2715,
each of the four segments may include (a) EDR, Send (#3875)
only, or, (b) EDR, Send (#3875) and EDR, Receive (#3874);
EDR, Receive (#3874) only is not available. Prerequisites: Extended Distance Repeater, Receive (#3874) on the "down-line"
2791/2793. Also see "Specify" [4] and [5].
To manually switch the
LINE TRANSFER SWITCH (#4750).
2790 transmission lines between two adjacent 2715s acting as
back-up for each other. All terminals must be defined identically in
the user tables of both 2715s affected. Limitation: When switching from one system to another, the total number of terminals
allowed cannot exceed the maximum number allowable on one
2715. Maximum: One. Note: This feature is required on only one
of the two 2715s.
LINE TRANSFER SWITCH - THIRD UNIT (#4751). To use a third
2715 as back-up for either of two other 2715s. All terminals must
be defined identically in the user tables of both 2715s affected.
Limitation: When switching from one system to another, the total
number of terminals allowed cannot exceed the maximum number
allowable on one 2715. Maximum: One. Prerequisites: The two
primary 2715s must each be equipped with Line Transfer Switch
(#4750) ... the third (back-up) 2715 requires only #4751.
LOCAL 2740 ADAPTER (#4850).
[Model 1 only ... standard on
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Fie
$ .50
12.50
$283
319
2.50
2.50
.50
.50
4.00
49
49
114
114
332
211
241
.50
8.50
·_----------=- =-------=--':" =
M 2740.1
Mav 79
DP Machines
2740 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL
Purpose: A Selectric typewriter terminal (printer/keyboard) for
transmission of data or text to or from another terminal or data
processing system.
NOTE: For possible use with Series/1, see GSD
Model 1
Model 2
manual.
Keyboard/printer terminal for transmission to or from
another 2740 mdl 1, or to or from a S/360 mdl 22
thru 85, 195, or any S/370 or 4300 Processor ...
see "Communications Facilities" and "Prerequisites"
below. Also attaches directly to a 2715 Transmission
Control for keyboard input or printed output ... see
"Prerequisites" below.
Bufferd keyboard/printer terminal for transmission to
or from a S/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195, or any S/370
or 4300 Processor ... see "Communication Facilities"
and "Prerequisites" below.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights: The unit's Selectric typewriter provides the optimum in
operator/machine relationship. Special features available permit
tailoring of terminals to the requirements of a specific work station.
Communication with a 5/360 mdl 30 thru 195 (except mdl 44,
67 in T5S Mode, 85 or 91), or any 5/370 Processor -- via a
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller. NOTE: See 3704 and
3705 Machines and Programming sales manual pages for attachment capability and refer to Host System Programming pages for
possible restrictions to any of the above attachments.
Communication with a 4300 Processor - via a 2701, 3704 or 3705 to all
4300 Processors and via the Communications Adapter feature on the
4331. See 2701, 3704, 3705, 4331 and 4341 pages for details and
prerequisites.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC 'Index G320-1621 or specific system
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug -#9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887
for 230 V. If a 2740 is to be installed on a raised floor, specify
Moisture Proof Plug -- #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for 230 V.
[NOTE: Consideration of voltage must be made independently
of CPU voltage and should be specified only after checking
available voltage at terminal location.]
System control keys and indicator lights, located conveniently
alongside the keyboard, make it a compact console-like unit.
When not used for data transmission, the typewriter may be used
for office typing. [NOTE: There are basic design differences in the
2740 which will result in a different printing output than the Selectric typewriter. Customers with applications requiring critical printing must be directed to evaluate 2740 outout capability in light of
their own needs.
[2] Printing Element: One element is supplied .. see "Type
Catalog," page TC 21, etc., for available PTTC/BCD,
PTTC/EBCD and standard OPD Selectric elements available,
feature #s, and prices of additional elements. The element
specified determines the keyboard arrangement. [NOTE: The
byte structure of the standard OPD Selectric character set
differs from that for PTTC/BCD or PTTC/EBCD character sets.
The 2740 mdl 1 or 2 is not Type I programming supported on
S/360 with an}! standard OPD Selectric elements. Standard
OPD Selectric elements are not available for the 2740 mdl 2.]
Model 1 -- code and system capability permit transmission to or
from other 2740 mdl 1 s, or to or from a suitably equipped
S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor ... see System Application, under
"Specify" below.
[3] Character Spacing: #9104 for 10 characters/inch, or #9105
for 12 characters/inch. [NOTE: #9105 is not recommended
unless a 12-pitch element is specified ... intermixing of character spacing or. terminals in anyone system should be avoided
... character spacing cannot be changed in the field.]
Model 2 - code and system application permit transmission to or
from a suitably equipped S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor. The
basic unit has a 120-position magnetic core buffer. Data entered
from the keyboard can be stored and visually verified before
transmission to the S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor. Data from
the S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor is received directiy by the
printer, except when the unit is equipped with Buffer Receive
(#1499) ... see "Special Features." This model also includes the
functions provided by Station Control (#7479) on the model 1.
Communication Facilities: Either model operates in half duplex
mode over the following facilities at the speeds indicated. For
information concerning the facilities, see the M 2700 pages.
Model 1
At 134.5 bps via facility C1, C2, D1, G1 or G2.
Model 2
At 75 bps via facility A4.
At 134.5 bps via facility D1, G1 or G2.
At 600 bps via facility D2 or G2.
Note: For attachment to facility A4, the channels must be capable of 75 bps operation, use non-code sensitive regenerators
and a 9-bit character code, and be terminated in a 62.5 ma
neutral DC loop of the terminal.
Also see Data Set Attachment under "Specify" for required facility
specification code. On appropriate lines, IBM Line Adapters may
be used in lieu of data sets ... see "Special Features." IBM Line
Adapters and line sets cannot be mixed on the same circuit.
PREREQUISITES:
Attachment to a 2715 Transmission Control Unit (mdl 1 only) -requires a 2715 mdl 2, or a 2715 mdl 1 equipped with a Local
2740 Adapter (#4850) ... 2715 Attachment (#9715) is also
required on the 2740 mdl 1 itself. See" Specify" below.
Communication with another 2740 (mdl 1 only) -- System Application (#9701) is required on each 2740 ... in addition, the same
Data Attachment is required on each 2740. See "Specify" below.
Communication with a S/360 mdl 25 - via the Integrated Communications Attachment (#4580) with approriate features on the
2025 ... see " Special Features" under 2025. NOTE: Communication with a S/360 nidi 25 may also be via a 2701, 2702 or
2703.
Communication with a 5/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3, 138via the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) on the 3115,
3125,3135,3135-3,3138. Also, a 2701,2702,2703,3704 or
3705 can be used ... see below.
Communication with a 5/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195 or any
5/370 Processor - via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit or 2702/2703
Transmission Control equipped with appropriate features ... see
2701, 2702, 2703.
[4] Line Feeding: #9435 for 6 lines/inch,
lines/inch. If a Pin Feed Platen is desired
dard friction feed platen, see "Special
#9435 or #9436 must be specified even
Platen is ordered.
or #9436 for 8
in lieu of the stanFeatures" below.
though a Pin Feed
[5] Data Set Attachment: Unless an IBM Line Adapter, Telegraph
Line Attachment (#7807), or 2715 Attachment (#9715) is
specified, one of the following must be specified, depending
upon the facility to be used.
#9114 -- [mdl 1 only] for facility C1 or C2. PREREQUISITE:
Dial Up (#3255) ... see" Special Features."
#9115, #9116 or #9120 for facility D1 M. See this facility in
the M 2700 pages for applicability of these codes.
#9121 -- for facility 02. PREREQUISITE: Speed Base - 600
BPS (#7106) ... see "Special Features."
See M 2700 pages for information on these communication
facilities.
[6] System Application (mdl 1 only): #9700 for terminal-tomultiplexer system (except 2715), or #9701 for terminal-toterminal.
[7] 2715 Attachment (mdl 1 only): #9715 ... required for attachment to a 2715. PREREQUISITE: Dial Up (#3255) and Print
Element (#9592). Cable for the 2740 must be ordered on the
2715 Cable Order Form. LIMITATION: When attached to a
2715, Dial Up (#3255) is the only special feature that can be
installed on the 2740.
PRICES:
2740
MAC/
MRC
Mdl
1
2
$ 105
162
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purchase
MMMC
$3,400
5,210
$39.00
39.00
Purchase Option: 40%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 1
5PECIAL FEATURES
• For Either Model
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4634 for 2-wire, #4635 for 4-wire). A
modem for local use up to 4.75 wire-miles over facility G1. See
Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 1 in SRL GA24-3435, • for
specifications and restrictions. Note: Operation with a 2712 Remote Multiplexer requires #4635.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4639 for 2-wire, #4647 for 4-wire). A
modem for leased or privately owned voice grade use (facility D1
or D2). See Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435" for speci• or equivalent.
•• SRL GA24-3435-2 or subsequent revisions.
t For further information, see M 2700 pages.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ----- -==--';' ==
~.:..:
DP Machines
2740 Communications Terminal
(conI' d)
fications and restrictions. Limitation: For point-to-point terminal-tomultiplexer operation, #4647 cannot be used on the 2740 mgl 1
when the multiplexer is operated in continuous carrier mode.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4641-4644 for 2-wire, #4691-4694 for
4-wire).
A modem for shared use of a type 3002 Private Line
Service' or privately owned voice grade facility (facility 01). See
Shared Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435" for specifications, use
and restrictions. When used, a single voice grade line can provide
up to four independent . 'subchannels" ... the equivalent of up to
four independent low-speed lines from a single voice grade line.
Each "subchannel" operates on a separate frequency and simultaneous data flow is possible on all four "subchannels", either on a
point-to-point or multipoint basis.
2-wire
#4641 -- for subchannel 1 #4643 -- for subchannel 3
#4642 -- for subchannel 2 #4644 - for subchannel 4
4-wire
#4691 -- for subchannel 1 #4693 -- for subchannel 3
#4692 -- for subchannel 2 #4694 -- for subchannel 4
Maximum: One per 2740. Prerequisite: All units expected to
communicate directly with each other must be on the same
"subchannel", i.e., must be equipped with the same shared line
adapter (same feature #) ... it is recommended that that if no
more than two "subchannels" are required on a line facility, that
#4641 and #4642, or #4691 and #4692 be used. Limitation:
For point-to-point terminal-to-multiplexer operation, #4691-#4694
cannot be used on the 2740 mdl 1 when the multiplexer is operated in continuous carrier mode.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4790). A modem for 2-wire limited distance use up to 8 wire-miles at speeds up to 600 bps over facility
G2. See Limited Distance Line Adapter, Type 2B, in SRL GA243435" for specifications and restrictions.
PIN FEED PLATEN (#9509). [Purchase only] For Plant Installation -- specify #9509 ... maximum one, in lieu of standard friction
feed platen. See "Pin Feed Platens" on M 10000 pages for available options, feature #s to be specified and price. For Field
Installation -- to order add'i platens or order one for field installaLimitation: Cannot be used if Docution,
ment Insertion (#3401 or #3402) is installed.
RECORD CHECKING (#6114).
acters (parity) checking and
checking.
Provides a combination of charblock (longitudinal redundancy)
• For Model 1 Only
AUTOMATIC EOB (#1313). Provides an automatic EOB (End Of
Block) code following the carriage return code upon depression of
the carriage return key. Prerequisite: Record Checking (#6114).
DIAL UP (#3255). Required when a dial data set is used, i.e.,
when Data Set Attachment (#9114) is specified. Limitation:
Cannot be used with Station Control (#7479).
STATION CONTROL (#7479). Gives the terminals the ability to
react to a poll or address from a multiplexer. The polling scheme
employs a "character + space" poll or address. The addressing
sequence is identified by the "start of address" (comma) character. Limitation: Cannot be used with Dial Up (#3255) or 2760
Attachment (#8301). [Note: The functions provided by this feature
on a mdl 1 are standard on the mdl 2.]
M 2740.2
May 79
Pin Feed Platen (#9509) cannot be used if this feature is installed.
#3401 -- accepts a ledger card 6"' wide (maximum), with a
minus 1/32" tolerance, and length of at least 5". With a
1 O-pitch printing element, 25 characters may be printed before
printing on the ledger begins ... with a 12-pitch element, 30
characters. The 26th character (10-pitch) and 31 st (12-pitch)
are not printable on the ledger card. The 27th (10-pitch) and
32nd (12-pitch) will be the first printable character and the
85th (10-pitch) and 102nd (12-pitch) last printable character
on the ledger card.
#3402 -- accepts a ledger card 7-3/8" wide (maximum), with
minus 1/32" tolerance, and a length of at least 5". With a
1 O-pitch printing element, 55 characters may be printed before
printing on the ledger begins ... with a 12-pitch element, 66
characters. The 56th character (10-pitch) and 67th (12-pitch)
are not printable on the ledger card. The 57th (10-pitch) and
68th (12-pitch) will be the first printable character and the
129th (10-pitch) and 155th (12-pitch) the last printable character on the ledger card.
Helps in error correction of keyboard-entered
EDIT (#3600).
data. Provides two additional keys, Line Return and Line Type, for
operator use in making corrections.
HEADER CONTROL (#4510).
Permits customer designation of
the first 28 positions of the buffer (in groups of 4 positions) for
repetitive header information. Under switch control, keyed data
may be entered into the header area and played back for verification. Header is transmitted each time the buffer is read out of the
line. The header size (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24 or 28 positions) is
specified by the customer at installation time.
SPEED BASE - 600 BPS (#7106). To transmit and receive data
over common carrier leased or privately owned facilities at 600
bps ... transmission character rate is 66.7 characters/second.
Note: Buffer print will be at normal 14.8 cps rate. Limitations:
Cannot be used when 2740 is connected to a 2712 Remote Multiplexer ... cannot be used with Data Set Attachments (#9115,
#9116 or #9120) or with IBM Line Adapters (#4634, #4635,
#4641-4644 or #4691-4694). Prerequisite: Buffer Receive
(#1499).
SPLIT FRICTION FEED PLATEN (#9600). [Plant installation only]
One 2-section platen with the split located to provide a 5-1/2"
printing line on the left and 7-1/2" printing line on the right can
be purchased in lieu of the standard friction feed platen '" with
this platen and Document Insertion (#3401, 3402), two separate
forms, in addition to printing on a ledger card, can be inserted and
individually controlled. For purchase price, see "Split Friction Feed
Platen"' on M 10000 pages. Maximum: One.
additonal platens,
Prerequisites:
Document Insertion (#3401 or #3402) and Line Feeding (#9435)
(6 lines/inch).
tTELEGRAPH LINE ATTACHMENT (#7807). For operation with
75 baud common carrier leased private line telegraph service, or
privately owned equivalent, only. With this feature, transmission
rate is 8.33 characters/second. [Note: If Buffer Receive (#1499)
is also installed, buffer print will be at normal 14.8 cps.]
Limitation: Cannot be used when 2740 is connected to a 2712
Remote Multiplexer.
TRANSMIT CONTROL (#8028). Gives the terminal the ability to
respond to a 2-character control code .sequence from a multiplexer
and to switch from a standby condillon to a transmit condition.
Limitation: Cannot be used with a 2760 Attachment (#8301).
Prerequisite: Dial Up (#3255).
2760 ATTACHMENT (#8301). To attach a 2760 Optical Image
Unit. A PTTC/BCD or PTTC/EBCD Data 1 or Data 2 type font
printing element must be specified with this feature. See '"Type
Catalog", page 23, for feature #s. Limitations: Can be field
installed only on units serial No. 15000 or above ... cannot be
installed with Station Control (#7479) or Transmit Control
(#8028). Prerequisite: Record Checking (#6114).
• For Model 2 Only
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1495, 1496). To increase the capacity
of the basic 120-position magnetic core buffer. #1495 -- for
positions 121 to 248 ... #1496 -- for positions 249 to 440.
Prerequisite: # 1496 requires # 1495.
BUFFER RECEIVE (#1499).
Permits data to enter the buffer
from the communication line in lieu of going directly to the printer.
Incoming data is stored until an EOT is received ... terminal then
automatically goes to a receive buffer print state and prints out the
contents of the buffer.
DOCUMENT INSERTION (#3401, 3402). [Plant installation only]
For insertion of single part ledger cards in front of the typewriter
platen without using the platen knobs. See SRL GA24-3403 for
details on portions of ledger cards which cannot be used for
printing. Manual positioning is required for each new print line.
Includes controls and lights necessary for a Split Friction Feed
Platen (#9600). Maximum: One, #3401 or #3402. Limitation:
,. SRL GA24-3435-2 or subsequent revisions.
t For further information, see M 2700 pages.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - ------_.----------
M 2740 - 2741
May 79
DP Machines
2740 Communications Terminal
Special Feature Prices:
(cont'd)
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
2741
• For Either Model
IBM Line Adapter (Limited Distance, Type 1)
#4634 $ 3.00 $ 116
2-wire
3.00
116
4-wire
4635
IBM Line Adapter (Leased Line)
347
4639
10.00
2-wire
10.00
347
4647
4-wire
IBM Line Adapter
(Shared Line) - 2-wire
4641
21.00
694
subchannel 1
4642
21.00
694
subchannel 2
21.00
694
4643
subchannel 3
21.00
4644
694
subchannel 4
(Shared Line) - 4-wlre
21.00
694
4691
subchannel 1
21.00
694
subchannel 2
4692
21.00
694
subchannel 3
4693
4694
21.00
694
subchannel 4
IBM Line Adapter (Limited Distance,
4790
10.00
390
Type 2B)
6114
17.00
645
Record Checking
NC
NC
$ 57
57
$1.50
1.50
96
96
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
96
96
96
96
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
96
96
96
96
1.00
NC
29
32
1313
3255
7479
8028
8301
3.50
3.00
16.00
5.00
10.00
139
116
585
195
390
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
29
40
37
48
35
1495
1496
1499
10.00
16.00
5.00
360
537
178
1.00
1.00
NC
29
29
21
3401
3402
3600
4510
7106
7807
6.00
6.00
10.00
5.00
10.00
3.00
217
217
360
178
360
112
2.00
2.00
NC
NC
NC
1.50
PO
PO
23
21
5
49
• For Model 2 Only
Buffer Expansion
pOSitions 121-248
positions 249-440
Buffer Receive
Document Insertion
6" wide cards
7-3/8" wide cards
Edit
Header Control
Speed Base - 600 BPS
Telegraph Line Attach
TERMINAL
Purpose: A Selectric·) typewriter terminal to satisfy special system applications that require one-terminal-per-line operation.
• For Model 1 Only
Automatic EOB
Dial Up
Station Control
Transmit Control
2760 Attachment
COMMUNICATIONS
FIC
An accesory that proRoll Paper Holder for 2740 or 2741
vides for mounting rolis of paper or continuous forms. Includes
a tear bar and forms guide. Available for field installation only.
For details and prices, see M 10000 (Accessories) pages.
Highlights:
Looks
like
and
includes
the
optimum
operator /machine relationship of the standard Selectric typewriter.
The only terminal controls located in the keyboard area are the
"On/Off' switch and "Attention" key. Mounted on a stand similiar
to that of the 2740. The typewriter may be used for office typing
when not used for data transmission. [NOTE: There are basic
design differences in the 2741 which will result in different printing
output than the Selectric typewriter. Customers with applications
requiring critical printing must be directed to evaluate 2741 output
capability in light of their own needs.
Code and systems compatibility provide for transmission to and
from a suitably equipped S/360 mdl 22 thru 85, 195, any S/370
Processor except the 3115, or any 4300 Processor. The 2741 can
attach to a 3790 system via a 3792 Auxiliary Control Unit. The
2741 can attach to an 8100 Information System via the communications capability
of
the
8101,
8130
or
8140.
See
"Prerequisites" below.
Communications Facilities: The 2741 operates in half-duplex
mode over the following facilities. For information concerning these
facilities, see M 2700 pages.
At 134.5 bps via facilities Cl, C2, Dl, Gl or G2.
Also see Data Set Attachment under "Specify" for required facility
specification code. On appropriate lines, IBM Line Adapters may
be used in lieu of data sets ... see "Special Features." IBM Line
Adapters and data sets cannot be mixed on the same circuit.
PREREQUISITES:
Communication with a S/360 mdl 25 -- via the Integrated Communications Attachment (#4580) with appropriate features on the
2025. Communication wittl the S/360 mdl 25 may also be via a
2701, 2702 or 2703.
Communication with a S /370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3, 138 -via the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) on the 3115,
3125,3135,3135-3 or 3138. Also a 2701,2702,2703,3704
or 3705 can be used ... see below.
Communication with a S/360 mdl 22 thru' 85, 195, or any
S/370 Processor -- via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit, or 2702/2703
Transmission Control equipped with approriate features ". see
2701, 2702, 2703.
Communication with a S/360 mdl 30 thru 195 (except mdl 44,
67 in TSS Mode, 85 or 91), or any S/370 Processor -- via a
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller. NOTE: See the 3704
and 3705 Machines and Programming sales manual pages for
attachment capability and refer to Host System Programming
pages for possible restrictions to any of the above attachments.
Communication with a 4300 Processor -- via a 2701, 3704 or 3705 to all
4300 Processors and via the Communications Adapter on the 4331. See
2701, 3704, 3705, 4331 and 4341 pages Jor details and prerequisites.
Communication with a 3792 Auxiliary Control Unit -- via an IBM
Leased Line Adapter (#5400) or EIA Interface (#3701) on the
3792.
Communication with an 8100 Information System -- via Communications Adapter with Clock - BSC/SS (#1603) and EIA
Interface (#3701) in the 8101, 8130 or 8140.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
Specify: [1] Voltage tt (AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug
-- #9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887
for 230 V. If a 2741 is to be installed on a raised floor, specify
Moisture Proof Plug -- #9902 for 208 V, or #9904 for 230 V.
[NOTE: Consideration of voltage must be made independently
of CPU voltage and should be specified only after checking
available voltage at terminal location.]
[2] Printing Element: One element is supplied ... see "Type
Catalog" page TC 21
etc. for available PTTC/BCD,
PTTC/EBCD and standard OPD Selectric elements available,
feature #s, and prices of additional elements. The element
specified determines the keyboard arrangement. [NOTE: The
• or equivalent.
.. SRL GA24-343S-2 or subsequent revisions.
t For further information, see M 2700 pages.
tt Only these specify codes and special features are supported by the 3790
system.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---
------- --==-==~=
M 2741
May 79
DP Machines
2741 Communications Terminal (conI' d)
byte structure of the standard OPD Selectric character set
differs from that for PTTC/BCD or PTTC/EBCD character sets.]
[3] Character Spacing: #9104tt for 10 characters/inch, or #9105
for 12 characters/inch. [NOTE: #9105 is riot recommended
unless a 12-pitch element is specified ... intermixing of character spacing on terminals in anyone system should be avoided
... character spacing cannot be changed in the field.]
[4] Line Feeding: #9435tt for 6 lines/inch, or #9436 for 8
lines/inch. If a Pin Feed Platen is desired in lieu of the standard friction feed platen, see "Special Features" below.
#9435 or #9436 must be specified even though a Pin Feed
Platen is ordered.
[5] Data Set At1achmenttt: Unless an IBM line Adapter is specified, one of the following #s must be specified, depending
upon the facility to be used.
#9114 -- for facility C1 or C2. PREREQUISITE: Dial Up
(#3255) ... see "Special Features."
#9115, #9116 or #9120 -- for facility D1M.
See the 01 M facility in the M 2700 pages for the applicability of these codes.
See M 2700 pages for information on these communication
facilities.
PRICES:
Mdl
2741
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 105
$ 2,380
$42.00
Purchase Option: 40%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
tt DIAL UP (#3255). Required when a dial data set is used, I.e.,
when Data Set Attachment (#9114) is specified.
INTERRUPT, RECEIVE (#4708)tt, TRANSMIT (#7900).
Either
can be used with any of the communication facilities listed above.
Receive Interrupt (#4708) - used to interrupt transmission
from the processor at the operator's convenience.
Transmit Interrupt (#7900) -- allows the processor to interrupt
transmission from the 2741 .
Limitation: Cannot be used when 2741 is connected to a 2701, or
to a S/360 mdl 25 via the Integrated Communications Attachment
(#4580). Prerequisites: For #4708, either 2741 Break (#8055)
or Type I Terminal Interrupt (#8200) on a 2702 or 2703 or a
S/370 mdl 125 Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) or a
S/370 mdl 135 Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) with
Write Interrupt (#9745-9752) ... For #7900, Type I Terminal
Interrupt (#8200) on a 2702 or 2703 or a S/370 mdl 125 Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) or a S/370 mdl 135
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) with Read Interrupt
(#9737-9744) ... if an IBM Line Adapter is used, it must be a
4-wire version. Both #4708 and #7900 are supported by the 4331
tt PIN FEED PLATEN (#9509). [Purchase only] For Plant Installation -- specify #9509 .,. maximum, one, in lieu of standard friction
feed platen. See "Pin Feed Platens" on M 10000 pages for available options, feature #s to be specified and prices. For Field
Installation - to order add'i platens or to order one for field installation,
tt PRINT INHIBIT (#5501). Allows the processing unit to inhibit the
2741 from printing transmitted or received data.
tt TYPAMATIC KEYS (#8341). Allows repeat action when key
level is depressed to a lower level... operations included are
Hyphen/Underscore/Space and Backspace.
Special Feature Prices:
Dial Up
#3255
Receive Interrupt
4708
IBM Line Adapter
Limited Distance, Type 1
4634
2·wire
4-wire
4635
Leased Line
2-wire
4639
4-wire
4647
Shared Line, 2-wlre
subchannel 1
4641
subchannel 2
4642
subchannel 3
4643
subchannel 4
4644
Shared Line, 4-wire
4691
subchannel 1
subchannel 2
4692
subchannel 3
4693
subchannel 4
4694
Limited Distance, Type 2 4790
Print Inhibit
5501
Transmit Interrupt
7900
Typamatic Keys
8341
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
FIC
$ 3.00 $ 116
2.50
99
NC
NC
$ 34
27
3.00
3.00
116
116
NC
NC
57
57
10.00
10.00
347
347
$1.50
1.50
96
96
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
694
694
694
694
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
96
96
96
96
21.00
21.00
21.00
21.00
10.00
10.00
8.00
5.00
694
694
694
694
390
303
242
195
2.00
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.00
NC
NC
NC
96
96
96
96
29
87
132
89
Communications Adapter without additional prerequisites.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4634 for 2-wlre, #4635 for 4-wlre). A
modem for local use up to 4.75 wire-miles over facility G1. See
Limited Distance Adapter, Type 1 in SRL GA24-3435* * for specifications and restrictions. Note: Operation with a 2712 Remote
Multiplexer requires #4635.
t IBM UNE ADAPTER tt (#4639 for 2-wire, #4647 for 4-wire). A
modem for leased or privately owned voice grade use (facility 01).
See Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435 * * for specifications
and restrictions.
t IBM LINE ADAPTER (#4641-4644 for 2-wire, #4691-4694 for
4-wire). A modem for shared use of a type 3002 Private Line
Service * or privately owned voice grade facility (facility 01). See
Shared Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435* * for specifications, use
and restrictions. When used, a single voice grade line can provide
up to four independent "subchannels" ... the equivalent of up to
four independent low-speed lines from a single voice grade line.
Each "subchannel" operates on a separate frequency and simultaneous data flow is possible on all four "subchannels."
2·wire
4-wire
#4641
#4642
#4691
#4692
----
for
for
for
for
subchannel
subchannel
subchannel
subchannel
1
2
1
2
#4643
#4644
#4693
#4694
---
for
for
for
for
subchannel
subchannel
subchannel
subchannet
3
4
3
4
Maximum: One per 2741. Prerequisites: The multiplexer with
which the 2741 is to communicate must be equipped with the
same "subchannel", i.e., the same feature # ... it is recommended that if no more than two "subchannels" are required on a line
facility, that #4641 and #4642, or #4691 and #4692, be used.
t IBM liNE ADAPTER (#4790). A modem for 2~wire limited distance use up to 8 wire-miles over facility G2. See Limited Distance
Line Adapter, .Type 2 in SRL GA24-3435* * for specifications and
restrictions.
* or equivalent.
.* SRL GA24-3435-2 or subsequent revisions.
t For further information, see M 2700 pages.
tt Only these spedfy codes and special features are supported by the 3790
system.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
,-------- - - - --
- -----
-.:.=-:=';'=
M 2791
May 79
DP Machines
2791
AREA STATION
Purpose: An input/output station and local device data controller
for a 2790 Data Communication System.
Model 1
Model 2
For card, identification badge and 12-key manual
entry ... available adapters provide for attachment of
up to three 1035 Badge Readers, up to thirty-two
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units with a 2715, or
System/7, up to twelve 2798 Guidance Display Units
(2715 and System/7 only), and an OEM digital device. See "Special Features" and "2791/2793
Limitations" under 2793.
For card, identification badge, and 12-key manual
entry only.
Model Changes: Model 2 can be changed in the field to modell,
but not vice versa.
Prerequisites: The 2790 system controller can be a 2715 Transmission Control Unit, or a properly equipped System/7.
With 2715
With System/7
See 2715 for details.
See 2790 Control (#8195) under 5012 or
5013.
Highlights: A solid state, industrially packaged unit. It features
data entry via pre-punched cards, identification badges, and 12key manual entry ... display of manually entered data for verification before transmission ... step-by-step display of operator instructions ... display of data in response to an inquiry ... time-ofday display... designed for attachment to a unique transmission
line capable of handling large volumes of short messages from
many stations.
Card Reader -- standard or Port-A-Punch@ prepunched 80-column
cards can be individually inserted and removed manually. An
upper left corner cut card, Cl, is required. M-3, M-4 and M-5
scores can be used. Numbers, letters and certain special character card codes are read ... see SRL GA27 -3015. Blank card
columns are not recognized and are automatically skipped.
Badge Reader -- reads identification badges (22-column card size)
pre punched in IBM code with a maximum of ten digits. The
badges which are punched on a 13 Badge Punch, are individually
inserted and removed manually. Badges with or without a pocket
clip can be used. They can be purchased from vendors or produced by commercially available equipment. See SRL GA21-9028
for badge speCifications. Note: A badge gauge is shipped at no
charge with each badge punch .,. see 13.
Manual Entry - ten numeric and two special keys provide for
entry of variable numeric source data. As each key is depressed,
the number or special character is displayed to the operator for
verification. Up to six positions are displayed for anyone data
field. After verification, an enter key is depressed to transmit the
data to the system controller. The number of fields that may be
entered is specified by the system controller program.
Digital Display - when not being used for display of manual entry,
time-of-day is displayed. Digital display may also be used for
display of six digits of data in response to an inquiry.
Operator Guidance -- step-by-step instructions are provided to the
operator for each transaction. The thirty-one guidance indicators
are designed to permit the user's own terminology. The indicators
are activated under program control of the system controller.
Transaction Selection -- nine transaction and one release keys
are provided. The transactions may be expanded by subsequent
card, badge, or manual entry to provide a greater number of
transactions.
Monitor Key -- used where a supervisor's approval is required
before a record can be transmitted .. , one key is supplied.
Indicators -- advise the operator that: [1] The station is online and
ready for use ... [2] The station is in process of transmitting a
record ... [3] The record is not valid and the "Repeat Clear"
button should be depressed ... [4] A card is in the card reader.
Control Keys - the "Enter" key is used to transmit the manually
keyed data ... the "Clear" key is used to reset the station to
normal ready status ... the "Next Guidance" key is used to advance the operator guidance when required for unusual transactions.
Attachment Features -- on the mdl 1, available features permit
attachment of up to three 1035 Badge Readers, up to thirty-two
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units (any combination), or up to
twelve 2798 Guidance Display Units and up to eight
2795/2796/2797s (2715 and System/7 only), and one OEM
digital device such as a scale, meter, or counter. See "Special
Features."
Customer Responsibilities: See 2790 in "Systems."
Limitations: See "2791/2793 Limitations" following 2793.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Cable to Junction Box: #9030, if required. If initial machine
order includes #3330, #7990, #8030 or #8295, or any combination of these features, #9030 must be specified. Any subsequent
to add any of these features must also specify
#9030. Note: Do not specify #9030 on mechanical replace
orders ... See Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017 for requirement. Note: If #9030 is specified, provide complete person's
name and address for shipment ... cables will be shipped autoprior to scheduled delivery.
matically,
[4] For initial 2791 machine order having Extended Distance Repeater, Receive or Send (#3874, 3875), specify #9547 and
#9548 ... also specify #9548 (oscillator) for each 2791 ordered
for the 2790 system.
[5] If a 2792 Remote Communications Controller is used in the
2790 system, specify #9790 for each 2791 mdl 1 or 2 attached
to the 2792 mdl 2 on the second "loop."
PRICES:
2791
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
1
$205
151
$7,140
5,880
2
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MMMC
$56.50
56.50
Purchase Option: 40% Maintenance: C
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
SPECIAL FEATURES
DIGITAL DEVICE READ-IN (#3330). [Mdl 1 only] For attachment
of an OEM digital device such as a scale, meter, or counter via a
customer-supplied junction box and cable ... reads up to ten
decimal digits. Electrical resistance of OEM device and cable is
limited to 10 ohms ... OEM device must comply with the 2791
interface ... see "Specify" [3] above. Maximum: One.
EXTERNAL ALARM CONTACTS (#3690). [Mdl 1 only] Provides
a pair of dry contacts which can be momentarily (35 milliseconds
nominal) closed to allow operation of a customer's attached external alarm device (bell, whistle, light, etc.). Momentary closure of
the contacts is activated by receipt of an EBCDIC "Bell" character. The contacts are capable of switching 115 V AC or DC at no
more than 0.5 amperes. Maximum: One. Note: Includes a 4-foot,
2-wire cable for attachment of a customer-provided alarm or junction box. Limitation: Not available when System/7 is the system
controller. Prerequisites: 1053 Attachment (#8050) on the 2791
and Expanded Capability (#3801) on the 2715 controller.
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, RECEIVE (#3874). Provides
for operation with another 2791 or 2793 Area Station or 2715
Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) located up to 6,000 wire-feet away. See
Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017 for cable specifications.
Maximum: One. Limitations: See Limitations for Extended Distance Repeater, Send below. Field install able on units shipped
prior to October 2, 1971 which also include B/M 5992893 and all
units shipped after October 1, 1971. B/M 5992893 is plant install able only... when #3874 is added anywhere in the 2790
system an MES, #9548 (oscillator change) must be ordered for
each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system. Prerequisite: Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) on the "up-line" 2791, 2793
or 2715.
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, SEN,D (#3875). Provides for
operation with another 2791 or 2793 Area Station or 2715 Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance Repeater,
Receive (#3874) located up to 6,000 wire-feet away. See Physical Planning Manual GA27-3017 for cable specifications.
Maximum: One. Limitations: [1] The use of two pairs of Extended
Distance Repeaters, Receive/Send (#3874, 3875) in tandem is
not recommended. If the Area Station having both Receive and
Send Repeater should fail, the entire segment would be inactive ...
[2] When an System/7 is the 2790 System controller, these repeaters cannot be used between the system controller and the first
Area Station or between the last Area Station and the system
controller. However, they can be used between all other Area
Stations attached to the system within the maximum limit ... [3]
Maximum of eight pairs per 2715, or System/7 .. , [4] Maximum of
two pairs of EDRs may be used on a secondary loop attached to a
2792. Field installable on units shipped prior to October 2, 1971
which also include B/M 5992893 and all units shipped after October 1, 1971.B/M 5992893 is plant installable only... when
#3875 is added anywhere in the 2790 system, an MES, #9548
(oscillator change) must be ordered for each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system. Prerequisite: Extended Distance Repeater,
Re,ceive (#3874) on the "down-line" 2791, 2793 or 2715.
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=-- =------- --=--':' =
M 2791-2792
May 79
DP Machines
(cont'd)
2791 Area Station
2798 ATTACHMENT, BASIC (#7990). [Mdl 1 only] For attachment of up to four 2798 Guidance Display Units. Maximum: One.
Limitations: See "2791/2793 Limitations" under 2793. Field
installable on units shipped prior to October 2, 1971 which also
include B/M 5992893 and all units shipped after October 1,
1971. B/M 5992893 is plant installable only. Prerequisite: Expanded Capability (#3801) on the 2715 ... see "Specify" [3]
above.
2798 ATTACHMENT, ADDITIONAL (#7991). [Mdl 1 only] Each
provides for attachment of up to four 2798 Guidance Display
Units.
Maximum:
Two.
Limitations:
See
"2791/2793
Limitations" under 2793. Prerequisite: 2798 Attachment, Basic
(#7990).
1035 ATTACHMENT (#8030). [Mdl 1 only] For attachment of up
to three 1035 Badge Readers via customer-supplied junction
boxes and cable ... see "Specify" [3] above. Maximum cable
length is 1,000 feet. Maximum: One.
more, or if the communication facilities round-trip delay is expected to approach 80 milliseconds, the customer should be advised
to consult the common carrier to determine the expected communication facilities delay.
The 2792 mdl 1 attaches to the 2715 or System/? via the 2-wire
high speed communications line, in the "loop," similar to the
2791/2793 Area Stations.
2791/2793 Area Stations attach to the 2792 mdl 2 via a 2-wire
customer-provided high-speed communication line.
Distances between Area Stations and the 2792 depend upon the
characteristics of the line used (e.g., up to 1,000 wire-feet for
#22 AWG). The Extended Distance Repeater feature cannot be
installed on the 2792s. However, they can be installed in the
attached Area Stations. See Physical Planning Manual, GA273017.
2795/2796/2797 ATTACHMENT, BASIC (#8295). [Mdl 1 only]
For attachment of up to eight 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units
(any combination) ... see "Specify" [3] above. Maximum: One.
Prerequisites: [1] A 2715 Transmission Control Unit with Expanded Capability (#3801) or a System/? with a 2790 Control (#8195
on 5012 or 5013) for the 2790 System Controller ... [2] Specify
#9790 on each 2791 Area Station mdl 1 or mdl 2 on the secondary "loop". See "Specify" under 2791.
2795/2796/2797 ATTACHMENT, ADD'L (#8296). Each provides
for attachment of up to eight additional 2795/2796/2797 Data
Entry Units (any combination) ... see "Specify" [3] above.
Maximum: Three. Limitations: See "2791/2793 Limitations"
under 2793. Prerequisite: 2795/2796/27.97 Attachment, Basic
(#8295).
IBM FE Service: To facilitate servicing of the 2790 terminals on
the secondary "loop" by the IBM CE, a minimum of one 1053
Printer is required proximate to each 2792 mdl 2. When System/7
is the 2790 System controller, IBM service requires the resident
On-Line Diagnostics program ... see System/? Programming.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Digital Device Read-in
#3330 $ 10 $ 434
434
External Alarm Contacts
3690
10
Extended Distance Repeater,
3874
13
520
Receive
3875
520
14
Send
2798 Attachment
7990
56 2,075
Basic
21
832
Additional
7991
8030
16
650
1035 Attachment
2795/2796/2797 Attachment,
8295
28 1,045
Basic
16
650
Additional
8296
FIC
$ 1.00
1.00
$ 72
189
3.00
3.00
96
96
14.00
4.50
2.00
188
109
72
2.50
1.50
99
51
Maximum Confi9uration: Each 2792 mdl 1 is set in the field to
respond to its own address plus the address{es) of 1, 3, 7 or 15
of the Area Stations remotely attached or reserved for future
attachment. The maximum number of Area Stations that can be
locally attached to the 2790 System controller is reduced by the
set number of addresses. The number of 2791/2792 mdl
1/2793s is limited by the number of addresses available to the
system controller; i.e., maximum of 100 addresses per 2715.
See 2790 Configurator, SRL GA27-3021. Maximum eight pairs of
2792 mdl 1 sand 2s per 2715. Maximum of two pairs of Extended
Distance Repeater (EDR) features may be used on a secondary
"loop." When System/7 is the controller, the maximum number of
2792 mdl 1 s is two per "loop" or four per system.
Limitations: [1] The system configuration and the delays encountered in the common carrier facilities can affect the waiting time at
the remote 2790 terminals served by the 2792s. Graphs and
formulas to assist the user in determining thruput will be found in
SRL GA27-3015. Common carrier communication facilities roundtrip delay cannot exceed 80 milliseconds.
Customer Responsibilities: See 2790 in "Systems" and M 2700
pages.
2792 REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER
Purpose: For 2790 Data Communication System ... controls exchange of data between the 2790 System Controller and remote
2790 terminals via common carrier leased communication facilities.
Model 1
Model 2
Attaches to the 2790 System Controller (via the
"loop") and directly to the local termination of the
common carrier facilities.
Attaches directly to the remote termination of the
common carrier facilities and up to fifteen
2791/2793 Area Stations (via a secondary "loop").
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621
or specific system
Specify: Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
PRICES:
2792
Mdl
1
2
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$308
308
$10,710
10,710
$82.50
82.50
Purchase Option: 45% Maintenance: D
Per Call: 1
Both a Model 1 and Model 2, operating point-to-point with one
another on the common carrier facilities are required to attach
each group of up to fifteen Area Stations.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: For 2790 Systems in which 2790 terminals are inaccessible to the System Controller via in-house wiring, viz., across
a thoroughfare, across the city, or in another city; the 2792s
enable exchange of data via common carrier leased communication facilities.
Terminal Devices: Each pair of 2792s establishes a secondary
communications loop at the remote location to which can be attached up to fifteen 2791/2793 Area Stations with their associated
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units, 2798 Guidance Display Units,
Production Monitoring Pulse Count (#5550), and other related
features ... see 2715 "Maximum Configurations."
Communication Facilities: Between the 2792 mdl 1 and 2792
mdl 2, the communications facilities must be a leased four-wire
duplex channel, Type 3002 with C1 conditioning (or better), or
privately owned equivalent. No data sets (modems) are required.
If the communication facilities round-trip delays exceed 80 milliseconds, the 2792 cannot be used. If the communications route
between the 2792s, mdl 1 and mdl 2, approximates 1,000 miles or
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------:5::::::=';'=
--
- ----
M 2793
May 79
DP Machines
2793 AREA STATION
Purpose: A local device data controller for a 2790 Data Communication System.
Prerequisites: The 2790 system controller can be a 2715 Transmission Control Unit or a properly equipped System/7.
With 2715
With System/7
See 2715 for details.
For details see 2790 Control (#8195)
under 5012.
Highlights: A solid state, industrially packaged unit. It controls
data transfer between locally attached I/O units and the system
controller. It is designed for attachment to a unique transmission
line capable of handling large volumes of short messages from
many stations.
The basic unit provides for attachment of up to eight
2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units (any combination) ... available
special features provide for attachment of up to twenty-four additional 2795/2796/2797s, and up to sixteen 2798 Guidance Display Units (2715 and System/7 only). See "Special Features."
Customer Responsibilities: See 2790 in "Systems."
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Limitations: See "2791/2793 Limitations" below.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
Specify; [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
lor locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 lor yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Cable and Junction Box: #9030, if required. A four foot cable
and junction box from the 2793 for initial installation of
2795s/2796s/2797s, or #7990, or #5550 and #5552 ... see
Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017. for requirement. Note: If
#9030 is specified, provide complete person's name and address for shipment ... cables will be shipped automatically,
. prior to scheduled delivery.
[4] For initial 2793 machine order having Extended Distance Repeater, Receive or Send (#3874, 3875), specify #9547 and
#9548. Also specify #9548 (oscillator) for each 2793 ordered
for the 2790 system.
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
2793
$135
$5,255
$ 19
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45% Maintenance: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
PRICES:
Mdl
SPECIAL FEATURES
EXTERNAL ALARM CONTACTS (#3690). Provides a pair of dry
contacts which can be momentarily (35 milliseconds nominal)
closed to allow operation of a customer's attached external alarm
device (bell, whistle, light, etc.). Momentary closure of the contacts is activated by receipt of an EBCDIC "Bell" character. The
contacts are capable of switching 11 5 V AC or DC at not more
than 0.5 amperes. Maximum: One. Note: Includes a 4-foot,
2-wire cable for attachment of a customer-provided alarm or junction box. limitation: External Alarm not available when System/7
is the system controller. Prerequisite: Expanded Capability
(#3801) on the 2715.
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, RECEIVE (#3874). Provides
for operation with another 2793 or 2791 Area Station or 2715
Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) located up to 6,000 wire-feet away. See
Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017, for cable specifications.
Maximum: One. Limitations: See Limitations for Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) below. Field installable on units
shipped prior to October 2, 1971 which also include B/M
5992893 and all units shipped after October 1, 1971. The B/M is
plant installable only ... when #3874 is added anywhere in the
2790 system, an
#9548 (oscillator change) must be ordered
lor each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system. Prerequisite:
Extended Distance Repeater, Send (#3875) on the "up-line"
2791. 2793 or 2715.
EXTENDED DISTANCE REPEATER, SEND (#3875). Provides for
operation with another 2793 or 2791 Area Station or 2715 Transmission Control Unit equipped with Extended Distance Repeater.
Receive (#3874) located up to 6.000 wire-feet away. See Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017, for cable specifications.
Maximum: One. limitations: [1] The use of two pairs of EDRs,
Receive or Send in tandem is not recommended. If the Area
Station having both features should fail. the entire segment would
be inactive. [2] When a System/7 is the 2790 controller. these
repeaters cannot be used between the system controller and the
first Area Station, or between the last Area Station and the system
controller. However, they can be used between all other Area
Stations attached to the system within the maximum limit. [3]
Maximum of eight pairs per 2715. or System/7. [4] Maximum of
two pairs of EDRs may be used on a secondary loop attached to a
2792. Field installable on units shipped prior to October 2, 1971
which also include B/M 5992893 and all units shipped after October 1, 1971. B/M 5992893 is plant installable only... when
#3875 is added anywhere in the 2790 system, an
#9548
(oscillator change) must be ordered for each 2791 or 2793 ordered for the system. Prerequisite: Extended Distance Repeater,
Receive (#3874) on the "down-line" 2791, 2793 or 2715.
PULSE COUNTERS, BASIC (#5550). Provide necessary control
circuits. an FE diagnostic counter for serviCing all cO\lnters on the
Area Station. and the first 7 pulse counters for customer attachment to his production pulsing points. Each counter may be used
as an ACCUMULATOR or as a PRE-SET accumulator. Decimal
counts to 29.999 may be handled at Area Station level before
requiring overflow service from the system controller. Each counter has a unique address. Each counter has Overflow Interrupt and
Counter Advance Test indicators. Maximum: One. Additional
counters are provided via #5551 and #5552 below. to a maximum of 63 counters per Area Station. Note: In the event of a
power failure, all pulse counters so affected will reset to zero with
a resultant loss of count. There are commercially available backup
systems via which customers can elect to ensure power continuity.
if they so choose. Customers should be advised of the exposure
and assurance measures available to meet it. Also see Visual
Read-out (#8710) below. Specify: #9030 for shipment of a
four-foot cable and junction box for attachment of the counters.
See "Specify" [3] above. Limitations: Cannot be used if 2798
Attachment, Basic (#7990) is used. Prerequisites: [1] Customer's
production count pulsing contacts must meet the interface requirements for the pulse counter sensing circuits. They are designed to
operate with contacts specified as follows: 16 milliseconds minimum closed time; 16 milliseconds open time (equivalent to approximately 30 pulses per second); maximum contact bounce of 4
milliseconds on open or close; maximum contact reSistance of 10
ohms ... [2] Wiring (single pair required) from the Area Station
pulse counter points ,to the customer's production pulse counting
contacts must be provided, installed and maintained by the customer. The series wire resistance of the wire from the contact to
the Area Station must be less than 40 ohms. This requirement can
be met by several types of wiring with maximum distance shown
such as: Twisted Pair, AWG #22 -- 1,000' ... AWG #18 3,000' ... AWG #14 -- 7,500' '" [3] Expanded Capability (#3801)
on the 2715.
PULSE COUNTERS, ADDITIONAL (#5551). Provides a group of 8
counters. See #5550 above for description of counter functions.
Maximum: 6 groups. Prerequisites: #5550 for the first three
additional groups (total 31 counters); #5552 for additional groups
4,5 and 6.
PULSE COUNTER EXPANSION (#5552). Provides a group of 8
counters (nos 32-39) and their necessary circuits and controls.
See #5550 for description of counter functions. #5552 also
provides controls for adding #5551 groups 4. 5 and 6. Maximum:
One. Specify: #9030 for shipment of a 4-loot cable for attachment of the counters to a customer-supplied junction box. See
"Specify" [3] above. Prerequisites: #5550 and first three groups
of #5551.
2798 ATTACHMENT, BASIC (#7990). For attachment of up to
four 2798 Guidance Display Units. Maximum: One. Limitations:
See "2791/2793 Limitations" below. Cannot be used if Pulse
Counters (#5550) is used. Field installable on units shipped prior
to October 2, 1971 which also include B/M 5992893 and all units
shipped after October 1,1971. B/M 5992893 is plant installable
only. Prerequisite: Expanded Capability (#3801) on the 2715.
See "Specify" [3] above.
2798 ATTACHMENT, ADDITIONAL (#7991). Each provides for
attachment of up to four 2798 Guidance Display Units. Maximum:
Three.
Limitations:
See "2791/2793 Limitations" below.
Prerequisite: 2798 Attachment, Basic (#7990).
2795/2796/2797 ATTACHMENT, ADDITIONAL (#8296). Each
provides for attachment of up to eight add'i 2795/2796/2797
Data Entry Units (any combination) ... cable provided by specify
#9030 accommodates #8296 also. Maximum: Three.
VISUAL READOUT (#8710). Provides a backup means for manual
readout (inside the Area Station cover via coded display lights) of
pulse counters if for some reason the Area Station, is bypassed, or
the system controller is unable to provide service. This feature is
dependent upon continuous power being supplied to the counters.
Should power be lost. the counters reset to zero. See the "Note"
under Pulse Counters, Basic (#5550) above. Maximum: One.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ----------------_.- - -----
M 2793 - 2796
May 79
DP Machines
2793 Area Station
(conI' d)
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
External Alarm Contacts #3690 $ 10 $ 434
Extended Distance Repeater,
3874
13
520
Receive
3875
520
14
Send
5550
99 3,900
Pulse Counters, Basic
5551
17
694
Pulse Counters, Add'i
Pulse Counter Expansion 5552
41 1,640
2798 Attachment,
7990
56 2,075
Basic
7991
832
Additional
21
2795/2796/2797 Attach8296
16
650
ment, Additional
8710
33 1,300
Visual Readout
FIC
For further information on loop delay, see Physical Planning
Manual, GA27-3017.
$ .50
$189
2.50
2.50
14.50
1.00
4.50
96
96
362
71
71
12.00
4.00
188
109
Purpose: A data entry unit for a 2790 Data Communication System.
1.00
1.00
51
77
Prerequisite: A 2791 Area Station mdl 1 or 2793 Area Station
equipped with an appropriate attachment feature ... see 2791 and
2793; or a 5013 equipped with RPQ #0 08249.
2791 /2793 LIMITATIONS
[1] When using a 2715 -- the maximum number of 2791/2793
Area Stations (any combination) is 100 ... the maximum number
of 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units (any combination) is
1 ,024 ... the maximum number of 2798 Guidance Display Units
is 256 ... the maximum number of Pulse Counters is 1 ,008.
When using 2792 Remote Communications Controllers with the
2715, the number of Area Stations that can be attached is
reduced. Each 2792 mdl 1 is set in the field to respond to its
own address plus the address(es) of 1, 3, 7 or 15 of the Area
Stations remotely attached or reserved for future attachment.
The maximum number of Area Stations that can be locally
attached to the 2715 is reduced by the set number of addresses. The number of 2791 s/2792 mdl 1s/2793s is limited by the
number of addresses available to the 2715: i.e., maximum 100
addresses. Maximum, eight pairs of 2792 mdl 1 sand 2s per
2715. Maximum of two pairs of Extended Distance Repeater
(EDR) features may be used on a secondary loop. See 2790
Configurator, SRL GA27-3021.
When using a System 7 -- the maximum number of 2791/2792
mdl 1 s/2793s combined is 64 '" the maximum number of
2795/2796/27975 combined is 512 ... the maximum number
of 2798 Guidance Display Units is 256 per 2790 control feature or 256 per System/7 ... External Alarm is not provided.
[2] One 2791 mdl 1 will accommodate: (a) Up to thirty-two
2795/2796/2797s (any combination), or (b) Up to eight
2795/2796/2797s (any combination) and up to twelve 2798s.
In addition to the above combinations, up to three 1035s, and
one OEM digital device can be attached.
[3J One
2793
will
accommodate:
Up
to
thirty-two
2795/2796/2797s (any combination) and up to sixteen 2798s,
or (b) Up to thirty-two 2795/2796/2797s (any combination)
and up to 63 Pulse Counters.
In addition to the above combinations, one 1053 mdl 1 can be
attached.
[4] The permissable distance between Area Stations or between
the Area Stations and the system controller depends upon the
transmission line characteristics. For example: Without Extended Distance Repeater (#3874, 3875), using #22 AWG
outside-type telephone cable, these units may be separated up
to 1,000 wire-feet apart ... using #19 AWG cable, separation
may be up to 1,750 wire-feet. With Extended Distance Repeaters, available on the 2791, 2793 and 2715, units may be separated up to 6,000 wire-feet apart. For cable specifications and
other distances, see Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017.
See "Limitations" under Extended Distance Repeat, Send
(#3875).
2796 DATA ENTRY UNIT
Highlights: A compact, industrially packaged reporting unit for use
by one or two production workers at their stations. It features a
unique reader that accepts either end of a punched card or an
identification badge ... four ten-position code selection dials ...
4-position manual entry for quantitative data ... a monitor key... a
telephone jack. It attaches to a 2791 mdl 1 or 2793 or 5013 via a
twisted pair cable. Transmission speed is 40 characters/second.
Card-Badge Reader -- reads up to ten numeric digits from either
end of a punched card (columns 1-10, or 71-80) or from an identification badge. Data is read interchangeably, from a card or
badge, into a given record. Cards and badges are inserted manually. For badge specifications, see SRL GA21-9028. Badges with
attached pocket clips cannot be accommodated.
Code Selection -- four 10-position (0-9) rotary dials are used to
identify various codes such as production status, services required, labor codes or operation, during execution of a production
order.
Manual Entry -- a group of four rocker thumbwheel switches for
entry of quantitative data.
Monitor Key -- a three position, key-operated switch permits
supervisory control of specific transactions ... one key is supplied.
Telephone Jack -- for supervisor's use in communicating by voice
with support groups ... requires a separate voice communication
network ... will accommodate a sound powered telephone handset.
Customer Responsibilities -- The DP Marketing Representative
must advise the customer that maintenance is provided as defined
in "2795/2796/2797 Maintenance" following the 2797. The
customer is responsible for: [1] Providing a central maintenance
facility ... [2] Installation and removal of the unit from its operational location.
Limitations: See "2795/2796/2797 Limitations" following 2797.
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Maintenance:
2797.
See
"2795/2796/2797 Maintenance" following
Bibliography: See KWIC Index, G320-1621, or specific system
bibliograph.
PRICES:
Mdl
2796
Rental Plan: B
Warranty: B
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$28
$986
$7.50
Purchase Option: 45%
Useful Life Category: 2
[5] Loop Delay -- System/7 - 2790 performance is affected by
delay on the local loop and must be considered when developing a configuration. Maximum loop configurations are determined by a formula for "loop delay" that will assist you in
quickly determining the viability of the configuration you are
considering. The following calculation should be used for each
5012/5013 module equipped with 2790 Control (#8195). The
resultant figure (total usec) must not exceed 316 usec per
5012/5013.
Quantity
Area Stations ..... 2791
2792 mdl 1
2793
Total Area Stations
x
17.6 usec =
Extended Distance Repeater
Pairs (send/receive)
1000' increments of cable
x
x
8.4 usec =
2.0 usec =
Total usec
=
Not to be reproduced without written permisSion.
Per Call: 1
'--------------=-- =-=
- ==--';r ==
M 2797 - 2798
May 79
DP Machines
2795/2796/2797 MAINTENANCE
2797 DATA ENTRY UNIT
Purpose: A data entry unit for a 2790 Data Communication System.
Prerequisite: A 2791 Area Station mdl 1 or 2793 Area Station
equipped with an appropriate attachment feature ... see 2791 and
2793, or a 5013 equipped with RPQ
Highlights: A compact, industrially packaged reporting unit for use
by production workers or other employees at their work stations.
I! features a unique reader that accepts either end of a punched
card or an identification badge ... two 10-position code selection
dials ... 10 keys for manual entry ... 6-position visual display of
manual entry data for verification before transmission ... a monitor
key ... an "Enter" key to cause data transmission ... a telephone
jack. It attaches to the 2791 mdl 1, 2793 or 5013 via a twisted
pair cable. Transmission speed is 40 characters/second.
Card-Badge Reader -- reads up to ten numeric digits from either
end of a punched card (columns 1-10, or 71-80) or from a
punched identification badge. Data is read interchangeably, from a
card or a badge, into a given record. Cards and badges are
inserted manually. For badge specifications, see SRL GA21-9028.
Badges with attached pocket clips cannot be accommodated.
Code Selection -- two 10-position (0-9) rotary dials are used to
input codes for things such as status, names or service required
during execution of of a production order.
Manual Entry -- 10-key keyboard provides for entry of variable
numeric data. As each key is pressed, the number is displayed to
the operator for verification. Up to six positions are displayed per
data field.
Visual Display -- a 6-position visual display in which digits shift
from right to left as keyed. Each position can display any of ten
characters, 0-9, and blank.
Monitor Key -- a 3-position, key-operated switch permits supervisory control over the validity of specific records ... one key is
supplied.
Control Buttons -- the "Enter" button activates an electric powered unit to transmit to the system controller data read by the
card-badge reader, codes selected by the rotary dials, data keyed
and visually displayed, and the monitor key digit ... "Reset" button
is used to reset the visual display when an error is seen during
operator verification.
Telephone Jack -- for supervisor's use in communicating by voice
with support groups ... requires a separate voice communication
network '" will accommodate a sound powered telephone handset.
Customer Responsibilities: The DP Marketing Representative
must advise the customer that maintenance is provided as defined
in "2795/2796/2797 Limitations" below. The customer is responsible for: [1] Providing a central maintenance facility ... [2]
Installation and removal of the unit from its operational location.
Limitations: See "2795/2796/2797 Limitations" below.
Environment: See 2790 in "Systems."
Maintenance: See "2795/2796/2797 Maintenance" below.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
Specify: Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
PRICES:
Mdl
2797
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 45%
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
$52
$1,990
$9.00
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
2795/2796/2797 LIMITATIONS
[1] The 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units and 2798 Guidance
Display Units may be attached up to 1 ,000 wire-feet from the
2791 mdl 1 or 2793 Area Station or the 5013 Digital
Input/Output Module. For cable specifications and other distances, see Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017.
[2] See "2791/2793 Limitations" under 2793 or to D&PT for
RPQ
for maximum combinations of Data Entry Units
and other deviCes.
Installation of 2795s, 2796s and 2797s in the immediate work
area precludes the acceptibility of online repair due to loss of
the terminal's use and interruption of the workers' production.
Maintenance of the Data Entry Units will be by hardware replacement as opposed to repair at the operational location. The customer will determine the failing unit and deliver the unit to the
central maintenance facility located at his central site. At this
facility, the customer engineer will repair and online test the Data
Entry Unit. Installation of the units at the operational location is
the cutomer's responsibility. To facilitate CE maintenance and
checkout, the customer must provide a dedicated line termination
in the central maintenance facility. This line would be wired to
address CO of an Area Station. A printer (5028, 1053, 2741,
etc.) must be located in the proximity of the maintenance facility.
Although the Data Entry Units of anyone type are interchangeable, the customer may wish to replace the failing unit witha spare
for availability.
2798 GUIDANCE DISPLAY UNIT
Purpose: For the 2790 Data Communication System -- an alphameric keyboard, 16-position variable data display and 48 instruction
operator guidance panel for interactive transaction via a 2715
Transmission Control Unit with a S/360 or S/370 Data Base, or
with a System/7 as the 2790 system controller.
Prerequisite. A 2791 mdl 1 or 2793 Area Station equipped with
an appropriate attachment feature ... see 2791 and 2793.
Highlights: A small, desk/bench mounted, self-contained, buffered, data entry and output unit for multi-step interactive transactions via a 2715 Transmission Control Unit or with a System/7 as
the 2790 system controller ... packaged for industrial environment
... featuring a typewriter-style 56-character alphameric keyboard ...
8 control keys ... a 16-position visual display... a unique 48
instruction operator guidance panel which can be customized by
the user to suit his specific applications ... 6 operational indicators
... a monitor key ... and an ON/OFF switch. Each unit is attached
to a 2791 mdl 1 or 2793 Area Station via a 4-wire user-provided
cable (up to 1 ,000 wire-feet).
Keyboard -- the 56 data keys include the 26 alphabetic, 10 numeric, 4 printer functions represented by symbols for tab, new
line, line feed and space, 8 special characters and 8 functional
keys (assignable by the user) ... the 8 control keys for functions
such as Enter, Clear, Cancel, Backspace, Transaction-Lock and
Unlock, Advance and Display-Inhibit.
Display -- for visual verification, prior to transmission, of any
16-character combination of the 56 characters entered from the
keyboard ... response data or messages ... guidance expansion
messages ... time-of-day, when not used for data, from the system
controller.
Guidance Panel -- up to 16 customer defined instructions can be
actuated at a time on the guidance panel by the system controller
to direct the operator step=by-step through transactions or for
status information ... instructions are written on two removable
overlays provided by the customer to suit his specific applications
... overlays are similar to those used on the 2791 Area Station ...
three manual settings on each of the two panels provide for a total
of 48 instructions or lines of information.
Operational Indicators -- advise the customer that: [1] The unit is
"online" and ready for use ... [2] A transaction is 'in-process" .,.
[3] The record is not valid, the "Clear" button should be depressed and data re-entered ... [4] The "transaction-selection"
code must be entered ... [5] The "transaction-lock" mode is in
effect ... [6] The "first step" of a multi-step transaction shpuld be
initiated.
Monitor Key -- a 2-position common key operated switch permits
supervisory control of specific transactions.
ON/OFF Switch -- a power on-off switch.
Customer Responsibilities -- see 2790 in "Systems."
Environment -- See 2790 in "Systems."
Limitations: [1] Using #22 AWG inside-type telephone cable,
2798s may be attached up 10 1,000 wire-feet from the 2791 mdl 1
or 2793. See Physical Planning Manual, GA27-3017 for cable
specifications and other distances ... [2] See "2791/2793
Limitations" under 2793 for maximum combinations of 2798s and
other devices ... [3] 2798 attachment is not available when an
1800 System is the system controller.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ----- - --===
':' =
----- --
DP Machines
2798 Guidance Display Unit
(cont'd)
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography,
Specify: Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug,
PRICES
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
2798
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
$96
Purchase MMMC
$3,740
Maintenance: B
$18,50
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 45%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 2798
May 79
'------ -------
---=-- =-=
== ';" ==
M 2803 - 2804·1
May 79
DP Machines
2803/2804 TAPE CONTROL
Purpose: Control unit for 2401 (and/or 2402) Magnetic Tape
Units in a 5/360, 5/370 or 4300 Processor. With an appropriate
special feature, a 2803 mdl 2 can also control 2420 Magnetic
Tape Units ... see "Special Features."
Models
2803 Tape Control - a single channel, read or write control unit
to which up to eight tape drives can be attached.
Model 1 - controls up to eight 800 bpi drives (2401 /2402 mdls
1,2 and 3).
Model 2 -- the basic unit controls up to eight 1 600 bpi drives
(2401/2402 mdls 4, 5, 6). With an 'appropriate special feature,
it can also handle 800 bpi drives (2401 /2402 mdls 1, 2 an 3) ...
see "Special Features." Another special feature permits attachment of 2420 mdl 5s and 7s (1600 bpi). See #7900 under
"Special Features."
Model 3 -- controls up to eight 2401 mdl 8s only. The data
conversion function is standard.
2804 Tape Control - a two channel, simultaneous read-whilewrite control unit to which up to eight tape drives can be attached.
Model 1 - controls up to eight 800 bpi drives (2401/2402
mdls 1, 2 and 3).
Model 2 -- the basic unit controls up to eight 1600 bpi drives
(2401/2402 mdls 4, 5 and 6). With an appropriate special
feature, it can also handle 800 bpi drives (2401 /2402 mdls 1,
2 and 3) ... see "Special Features."
Model 3 -- controls up to eight 2401 mdl 8s only.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights:
2803 -- can be used with a 2816 Switching Unit(s) for tape drive
switching ... see 2816 and 16 Drive Addressing (#7185) under
"Speci~1 Features" below.
2804 - considering "Write," "Write Tape Mark" and "Erase" as
write operations, the 2804 can perform a read and a write operation simultaneously.
2803/2804 -- each unit contains error detection and single track
error correction facilities.
Tape compatibility special features permit reading/writing of
tapes of varying formats and bit denSities by attached drives
equipped with appropriate read/write heads .. see compatibility
features under "Special Features."
Prerequisites: For 2803 - a control unit position on a system
channel... For 2804 -a control unit position on each of two
channels of the same system. For channel limitations, see
"5/360, 5/370, 4300 Processors" below.
Simultaneous Read-while-Write (#7160, 7161) is required on
each 2401/2402 attached to a 2804 ... Mode Compatibility
(#5121, 5122) is required on each 2401/2402 mdl 1, 2 or 3
attached to a 2803/2804 mdl 2 .. see "Special Features" under
appropriate unit.
S/360, S/370, 4300 Processors:
2803 - can be attached to 5/360 mdls 22 thru 91 and 195, any
5/370 Processor (except 3115 or 3125), or any 4300 Processor.
2804 -- can be attached to 5/360 mdls 22, 30 thru 91 and 195,
all 5/370 Processors (except 3115 and 3125), and the 4341
Processor. Limitations: For individual tape drive limitations on
specific 5/360 and 5/370 models or 4300 Processors, see 2401
(or 2402), or 2420.
[1] In a 5/360 mdl 25, only 2803 mdl 1s, 25 or 3s can be
attached, and they must be attached to the selector channel. In addition, only 2401 s which do not exceed a 60KB
data rate can be attached ... see 2401.
[2] In a 5/360 mdl 22, 30 thru 50, or 5/370 mdl 135, 135-3
,1 38, 145, 145-3 or 1 48, if attached to a multiplexer channel, a 2803 or 2804 must be attached via a shared-path
channel
Mdl 1 35, 135-3, 1 38 -- not supported on byte multiplexer
channel for concurrent operation with Integrated File Adapter, Integrated Communications Adapter, or selector channel.
[3] A 2803 mdl 2 can be attached to a 5/360 mdl 67 only if
the the mdl 67 is operated in 65 mode.
[4] In a 5/360 mdl 67-2, both channels required by a 2804
must be attached to the same 2846.
[5J See 4331 byte multiplexer channel/or restrictions.
Bibliography: 5/360 -- GC20-Q360, 5/370 - GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. For 2803 only #9046 for white.
[3] 2420 Prospect (2803 mdl 2 only): #9701 ... must be specified
on AAS ,if the 2803 mdl 2 is to be used for future attachment of
2420 mdl 5s/7s. See 2420 Model 5/7 Attachment (#7900)
under "Special Features."
[4] Control Unit Isolation: Field installation may be required on
certain units ... see #4701-4705 under "Special Features."
-FTP/PRICES:
Mdl
2803
1
2
3
2804
MAC/ MLC
MRC 1 Yr·
$729
898
503
$671
826
463
MLC
2 Yr Purchase
$612 $29,200
754 36,040
423 17,190
1,040
957
874
1,210 1,113 1,016
701
645
589
1
2
3
41,880
48,710
23,810
MMMC
$30.50
40.00
48.50
56.50
65.50
74.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
DATA CONVERSION (#3228 on 2803, #3236 on 2804). A program controlled feature to process data with maximum packing
efficiency. On a write operation, three 8-bit bytes are written as
four 6-bit tape characters '" on a read operation, four 6-bit characters are converted to three 8-bt bytes. Not required on the
2803 mdl 3 or 2804 mdl 3. Limitation: Cannot be used when
reading 7-track tape backwards. Prerequisite. Seven Track Compatibility (#7125, 7126, 7127, 7128) or Seven and Nine Track
«800 BPI NRZI) Compatibility (#7135, 7136).
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4701-4705). [for field installation
on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that] To turn DC power on or off on the tape control
without generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU, if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power is turned off,
can continue operating.
#4701 -- for basic 2803 mal 1.
#4702 - for a 2803 mdl 1 with Two Channel Switch
(#8100).
#4703 -- for a 2803 mdl 2.
#4704 -- for 2804 mdl 1.
#4705 -- for 2804 mdl 2.
Prerequisite:
in all cases there are compatible EC level
requirements and technical limitations,
#4702 requires #8100 on the 2803 mdl 1.
NINE TRACK (800 BPI NRZI) COMPATIBILITY (#5320 on 2803
mdl 2, #5321 on 2804 mdl 2). Required if any tape drive attached to the 2803/2804 mdl 2 has a 9-track Read/Write Head
(#9558), or if any attached tape drive mdl 4, 5 or 6 has Dual
Density 800-1600 BPI (#3471, 3472). Allows the reading and
writing of 800 bpi, 9-track NRZI tape in addition to 1600 bpi.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Seven Track COmpatibility
(#7127, 7128) or Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NAZI) Compatibility (#7135, 7136).
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). [2803 mdl 1 only] To
attach the Two Channel Switch (#8100) to a 2167 Configuration
Unit in a 5/360 mdl 67-2, to a 5/360 mdl 158 MP or 158 MP.
SEVEN TRACK COMPATIBILITY (#7125-7128). [2803/2804 mdls
1, 2 only] Permits any attached tape drive equipped with a 7-track
Read/Write, Head (#9557) to read or write in 7-track format
by
compatible
with
tape
generated
727/729/7330/7335/7701/7702/7765 tape units. Specify: The
number of drives equipped with 7-track Aead/Write Heads that are
to be associated with this feature. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with Nine Track (800 BPI NAZI) Compatibility (#5320. 5321) or
Seven and Nine Track (800 BPI NAZI) Compatibility (#7135.
7136).
#7125
#7126
#7127
#7128
-----
for
for
for
for
2803
2804
2803
2804
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
1
1
2
2
SEVEN AND NINE TRACK (800 BPI NRZI) COMPATIBILITY
(#7135, 7136). [2803/2804 mdl 2 only] Provides the functions of
• FTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - --=-- =-------=
--':' =
M 2803 - 2804.2
May 79
DP Machines
2803/2804 Tape Control
(cont'd)
both Nine Track (800 NRZI) Compatibility (#5320, 5321) and
Seven Track Compatibility (#7127, 7128). Permits reading and
writing by attached mdl 1, 2 or 3 tape drives equipped with either
7-track or 9-track Read/Write Heads (#9557, 9558) or attached
mdl 4, 5 or 6 drives with Dual Density 800-1600 BPI (#3471,
3472). Specify: The number of drives equipped with 7-track
Read/Write Heads that are to be associated with this feature.
#7135 - for 2803 mdl 2 ... #7136 -- for 2804 mdl 2.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Nine Track (800 BPI NRZI)
Compatibility (#5320, 5321) or Seven Track Compatibility
(#7127, 7128).
16 DRIVE ADDRESSING (#7185). [2803 mdl 1 or 2 only] Required when the pool of drives attached through 2816 Switching
Unit mdl 1 s exceeds eight. Permits the 2803 to address up to
sixteen drives. Prerequisite: Two 2816 mdl 1 s with appropriate
features ... see 2816.
2420 MODEL 5/7 ATTACHMENT (#7900). [2803 mdl 2 only] To
attach up to eight 2420 mdl 5s and 7s in any combination. With
this feature, the tape drive combination can include 2401/2402
mdl 4s, 5s and 6s. If #5320, #7127 or #7135 is also installed
on the 2803 mdl 2, the eight tape drive combination can also
include 2401/2402 mdl 1 s, 2s and 3s. Prerequisite: The 2803
must be serial no. above 14000 and below 30000 ... if this feature
is not specified
and 2420s will be attached to the 2803 at
a future date, see item [3] under "Specify."
Notes:
[1] A 2803 md 2 (serial no. 14001 through 15999) with
#7900 requires a 2420 Model 5 Modification (#9690) if 2420
mdl 5s are to be attached. Submit
specifying #9690).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100). [2803 mdl 1 only] [Plant
installation only] To attach the 2803 mdl 1 to a second channel.
Switching is under program control. Includes partitioning. For use
in a S/360 mdl 67, a S/360 mdl 65 MP, or a S/370 mdl 158 MP
or 168 MP only. Limitation: Only 2803 mdl 1 s above serial no.
30000 can be modified at the plant with this feature. New production on 2803 mdl 1 s above serial no. 30000 ceased in April,
1968. Prerequisites: If #8100 is routed through the Configuration Control Panel (#1505) of a S/360 mdl 65 MP, Remote
Switch Attachment (#6148) is required. #6148 is also required in
a S/360 mdl 67-2, or a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP.
---FTP/--MAC/MLC MLC
MRC I Yr' 2 YrPurchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
FIC
On 2803/2804 (any model)
Data Conversion
on 2803
on 2804
Isolation, Control Unit
on basic 2803 mdl I
on 2803 mdl I w #8100
on 2803 mdl 2
on 2804 mdll
on 2804 mdl2
7 Track Compatibility
on 2803 mdll
on 2804 mdll
on 2803 mdl2
on 2804 mdl2
#3:28
3236
$49
77
$45
71
4701
4702
4703
4704
4705
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
7125
7126
7127
7128
54
83
195
223
50
76
179
205
45
70
164
187
5320
5321
256
311
7135
7136
$41 $1,935
65 3,070
$1.50
2.00
$88
179
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
2,145
3,270
7,545
8,625
2.00
3.00
29.50
34.00
131
179
869
1,070
236
286
215 9,925
26112,000
45.00
35.00
1,140
420
503
386
463
353 16,090
42319,400
77.00
70.00
1,245
1,530
7185
26
24
22 1,100
1.50
66
Remote Switch Attachment 6148
Two Channel Switch
8100
NC
110
NC
101
NC
NC
92 3,765
NC
5.50
NC
14.50
251
On 2803/2804 model 2
9 Track Compatibility
on 2803 mdl 2
on 2804 mdl 2
7 & 9 Track Compatibility
on 2803 mdl 2
on 2804 mdl 2
946
On 2803 mdl I or 2
16 Drive Addressing
On 2803 mdll
PO
On 2803 mdl 2 ... serial no. above 14000 and below 30000 only
2420 Md15/7 Attachment
7900
381
351
32015,210
• FTP is 12·23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- ---- -.----
== =':' =
M 2816
May 79
DP Machines
2816 SWITCHING UNIT
installed in a second 2816. If this feature is installed, it must be
connected to the second 2816 at all times. Prerequisite: Second
2816 Attachment - First Control (#6392).
Purpose: To switch drives between tape control units and a common group of magnetic tape drives in a S/360 mdl 22, 30 thru 85
or 195, any S/370 Processor (except 3115 or 3125), or any 4300
Processor.
Highlights: For switching between 2803 Tape Controls and 2403
Magnetic Tape Unit and Controls and drives of all models of
2401 s, 2402s, 2403s, except for switching between 2803 mdl 3
and 2401 mdl 8, which cannot be attached via the 2826. Also
provides switching capability for 2420 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 5s
and 7s and all models of 2401 sand 2402s used with 2803 mdl
2s. Note: Phase Encoded tape control units (2803 mdl 2, 2403
mdl 4s,5s,6s) cannot be connected to NRZI control units (2803
mdl 1, 2403 mdl 1, 2, 3) via the same 2816 ... see SRL GA226866 for complete details.
Switching is on a per record basis under program control. The
2816 provides the ability to manually isolate any tape drivels) from
the control of one or more tape controls. It reduces the number of
tape drives necessary for any given application by providing each
tape unit with an increased number of access paths.
TAPE DRIVE INTERMIX (#7803). Required on each 2816 when
2400 mdl 1 s, 2s or 3s are to coexist with 2400 mdl 4s, 5s or 6s,
or with 2420 mdl 5s or 7s.
Special Feature Price.:
Additional Drive.
Basic Switch
3rd Control
4th Control
Add'l Drive Adapter
Control for Base Drives
3rd
4th
4th Control Attachment
2nd 2816 Attachment
1st Control
2nd Control
Tape Drive Intermix
The basic 2816 provides for switching between two tape controls
and up ti four tape drives. This switching ability can be expanded
in increments of one tape control and/or four tape drives to a
maximum of four tape controls and eight tape drives. Two 2816s
can be coupled to provide switching between a maximum of four
tape controls and sixteen drives. See "Special Features" for
feature requirements. Note: The use of two 2816s to switch more
than eight tape drives requires 16 Drive Addressing (#7185) on
the tape control units ... see 2803 or 2403.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 - GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-Rhase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on floor.
PRICES:
2816
Mdl
-FTPMAC/ MLC MLC
MRC 1 Yr' 2 Yr Purchase
$617
$588
$518 $23,810
MMMC
$4.50
Plan Offering: Plan B.
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADD'L DRIVES FOR B6.SIC SWITCH (#1050). For switching
between four additional tape drives and the first and second tape
controls attached to the basic switch.
ADD'L DRIVES FOR THIRD CONTROL (#1051). Permits the third
tape control to access the four additional tape drives associated
with #1050. Prerequisites: Add'i Drives for Basic Switch
(#1050) and Add'i Drive Adapter (#1055).
ADD'L DRIVES FOR FOURTH CONTROL (#1052). Permits the
fourth tape control to access the four additional tape drives associated with #1050. Prerequisites: Add'i Drives for Basic SWitch
(#1050), Add'i Dive Adapter (#1055), and Fourth Control Attachment (#4455).
ADD'L DRIVE ADAPTER (#1055). Provides for the installation of,
and is prerequisite for, feature #1051 and/or #1052.
Prerequisites: Add'i Drives for Basic Switch (#1050) and Control
for Base Drives, Third (#2285).
CONTROL FOR BASE DRIVES, THIRD (#2285). To attach a third
tape control to the basic switch with access to the. four tape drives
included with the basic switch.
CONTROL FOR BASE DRIVES, FOURTH (#2286). To attach a
fourth tape control to the basic switch with access to the four tape
drives included with the basic switch.
FOURTH CONTROL ATTACHMENT (#4455); To attach a fourth
tape control ... prerequisite to feature #2286 and/o #1052.
Prerequisite: Control for Base Drives,Thirri (#2285).
SECOND 2816 ATTACHMENT- FIRST CONTROL (#8392). Interconnects two 2816s. Connects the tape control occupying the
first position on a 2816 or to a feature installed in a second 2816.
If this feature is installed, it must be connected to the second
2816 at all times.
SECOND 2816 ATTACHMENT - SECOND CONTROL (#6393).
Interconnects two 2816s. Connects the tape control occupying the
second position on a 2816 to a second 2816 or to a feature
---FfP/--MAC/MLC MLC
MRC I Yr' 2 YrPurchase MMMC
• FrP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without .FtUen permissien.
#1050 $166 $153 $139 $6,455
1051
67
62
56 2,595
1052
67
56 2,595
62
1055
33
30
842
28
2285
2286
4455
94
26
67
86
24
62
6392
6393
7803
10
9
9
9
\0
\0
79 3,675
22 1,100
56 2,595
8
8
8
448
448
460
FIC
$3.00
1.00
1.00
NC
$221
32
32
21
1.50
1.50
NC
88
32
54
NC
NC
NC
88
88
29
·_--- ---------
==-=:i';'5:
M 2821.1
Mav 79
DP Machines
2821
CONTROL UNIT
Purpose: Control and buffer storage unit for a card read punch
and/or one or more printers in a S/360 mdl 22 thru 85 and 195,
any S/370 Processor, or any 4300 Processor.
cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158 and 3158-3. Note:
2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 185, 188, 195 - selector channel of 2860, basic
multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special
features) of 2870, shared or unshared subchannels of 2880
(non-shared are recommended) ... see 2860, 2870, 2880. Note:
2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
Model 1
Controls a 2540 Card Read Punch and one printer.
Model 2
Controls one printer.
Model 3
Controls two printers ... with Third Printer Control
(#7945) controls three printers.
Model 4
Controls a 2540 Card Read Punch and one 1404
Printer.
3031 or 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032. Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
Model 5
Controls a 2540 Card Read Punch and two printers
... with Third Printer Control (#7945) controls three
printers.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033. Note:
2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
Model 8
Controls a 2540 Card Read Punch.
4331 Processor -'" byte multiplexer challllel (optiollal), block mUltiplexer
challllel (optiollal) '" see 4331. NOTE: 2821 mdl4 call1lot be attached.
Model Changea: Model 1 can be field converted to model 6
Highlights:
Models 1 and 2 - the printer may be a 1403 mdl 2, 3, 7 or N1
.,. for attachment for a 1403 mdl 2 or 7, see "Specify" ... for
attachment of a 1403 mdl 3 or N1, see 1100 LPM Printer Adapter (#3615) under "Special Features."
Models 3 and 5 - two printers, or with Third Printer Control
(#7945), three printers can be attached. They may be in any
combination of 1403 mdls 2, 3, 7 and N1 ... for attachment of
1403 mdl 2s and 7s, see "Specify" ... for attachment of 1403
mdl 3s or N1 s, see 1100 LPM Printer Adapter (#3615) under
"Special Features." Program priority for multiple printers on
these models is:
1st Priority
2nd Priority
3rd Priority
Printer Control No.1
Printer Control No. 2
Printer Control No. 3
. Model 4 - the printer must be a 1 404.
LlmltaHons: 1403s - for models available for each S/360, S/370
model, or allY 4300 Processor, see "Models" under 1403 ... 1404s
- cannot be attached to a S/360 mdl 22, 44, 65, 67, 75, 85 or
195, S/370 or 4300 Processors.
Prerequisite.: A control unit position on a system channel.
S/380 mdl 25 - special feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel,
or Selector Channels ... see 2025.
S/380 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 - multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/380 mdl 44 - special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Add'i High Speed Multiplexer
Subchannels '" see 2044. Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/380 mdl 65, 75 - selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer
channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) on
2870 ... see 2860, 2870. Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/380 mdl 87 - basic multiplexer channel of 2870 ... see 2870.
Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/380 mdl 85, 195 - selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features) on
2870, shared or unshared subchannels of 2880 (non-shared is
recommended) ... see 2860, 2870, 2880. Note: 2821 mdl 4
cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 - Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125. Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 135 - multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channel, Block Multiplexer Channel ... see 3135. Note: 2821 mdl 4
cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 135-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3. Note:
2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 138 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138. Note: 2821 mdl 4
cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 145 - multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see 3145. Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3. Note: 2821 mdl 4 cannot
be attached.
S/380 mdl 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138. Note: 2821 mdl 4
4341 Processor - byte multiplexer challllel (stalldard). block multiplexer challlleis (two are stalldard) ... see 4341. NOTE: 2821 mdl4 call1lot
be attached.
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360 S/370 - GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: . #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] 1403 Model 2 Attachment - for each 1403 mdl 2 to be attached to a 2821 mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5, specify one of the following:
#9241 - to attach a 1403 mdl 2 to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, or to
Printer Control No. 1 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 ... #9242 -- to
attach a 1403 mdl 2 to Printer Control No.2 on a 2821 mdl 3
or 5 ... #9243 - to attach a 1403 mdl 2 to Printer Control No.
3 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5. Third Printer Control (#7945) also
required ... see "Special Features."
[4]1403 Model 7 Attachment - for·each 1403 mdl 7 to be attached to a 2821 mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5, specify one of the following:
#9246 - to attach a 1403 mdl 7 to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, or to
Printer Control No. 1 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 ... #9247 - to
attach a 1403 mdl 7 to Printer Control No. 2 on a 2821 mdl 3
or 5 ... #9248 - to attach a 1403 mdl 7 to Printer Control No.
3 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5. Third Printer Control (#7945) also
required ... see "Special Features."
[5] 1403 Model 3 or N1 Attachment: Each 1403 mdl 3 or N1
requires the appropriate 1,100 LPM Printer Adapter (#3615) ...
see "Special Features."
[6] Compatibility Attachment: If the 2540 is to be used with
1401/1403 Attachment (#4463) with 1401/1440/1460 Basic
Compatibility (#4456) or 1620 Compatibility (#7190) on a
2030, or with 1401/1460 Compatibility (#4457) on a 2040,
then 2540 Compatibility Attachment (#8065) is required ... see
"Special Features."
[7] Compatibility Attachment: If the 2540 is to be used with
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) on a 3115, 3125,
3135, 3135-3, 3138, 3145, 3145-3 or 3148, or with
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#4458) on a
3145, 3145-3 or 3148, or 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010
Compatibility (#3950) on a 3155, 3158 or 3158-3, then 2540
Compatibility Attachment (#8065) is required ... see "Special
Features."
[8] Isolation Feature: May be required on units shipped prior to
December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
[9J Compatibility Attachmellt:
If the 2540 is to be used with
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#3950) 011 a 4331 Processor. thell
2540 Compatibility Attachmellt(#8065) is required ... see "Speciai
Features...
PRICES:
Mdl
2821
1
2
3
4
5
8
-FTP/MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC 1 Yr' 2 Yr
$1,085 $998 $911
674
620
586
1,345 1,237 1,130
1,175 1,081
987
1,750 1,610 1,470
493
454
414
Purchase
MMMC
$41,770
25,900
51,690
45,300
67,670
14,210
$75.50
57.50
118.00
80.00
133.00
166.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: Assignable Unit
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
l.IIodel/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- - --':'':':::E';'=
--- ----
M 2821.2
May 79
DP Machines
2821 Control Unit
(conl'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
COLUMN BINARY (#1990). [Models 1, 4, 5, 6 only] Cards with
multiple significant digit punching in a single card column can be
processed by the 2540 ... the Extended BCD Interchange Code
used by S/360 assemblers and compilers does not require this
feature on the 2821. Prerequisite: Column Binary (#1990) on -,he
2030 Processing Unit if column binary cards are to be processed
on the 2540 when the S/360 mdl 30 is operating in
1401/1440/1460 compatibility mode.
1 100 LPM PRINTER ADAPTER (#3615). [Models 1, 2, 3, 5 only]
T~ attach a 1403 Printer mdl 3 or N1. One #3615 is required for
each 1,100 Ipm printer attached. Specify: With each #3615, one
of the following, depending upon the control position to which the
printer is to be attached: #9262 -- to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, ~r to
Printer Control No. 1 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 ... #9263 - to Printer
Control No.2 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 ... #9264 -- to Printer Control
No.3 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5. Third Printer Control (#7945) is also
required.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4701-4705). [For field installati?n
on units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on Units
shipped after that] To turn power on or off on the 2821 without
generating spurious signals. Thus, a CPU program,. if it can be
logically disconnected from the system before power IS turned off,
can continue operating.
#4701 - for a 2821 mdl 4.
#4702 -- for a 2821 mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5 with neither Two Channel
Switch (#8100) nor Universal Character Set Adapter (#8637,
8638, 8369).
#4703 -- for a 2821 mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5 with #8637, 8638 or
8639 but not # 8100.
#4704 -- for a 2821 mdl 1, 2, 3 or 5 with #8100 but not with
#8637, 8638 or 8639.
#4705 -- for a 2821 mdl 1 2, 3 or 5 with both #8100 and
#8637, 8638 or 8639.
Prerequisites:
in all cases there are compatible EC level
requirements,
#4703 requires
#8637, 8638 or 8639 ... #4704 requires #8100 ... #4705
requires both #8100 and #8637,8638 or 8639.
PUNCH FEED READ CONTROL (#5895). [Models 1, 4, 5, 6 only]
Required for Punch Feed Read (#5890) on a 2540.
READ-COMPARE ADAPTER (#5991). [model 4 only] Required for
Read-Compare (#5990) on a 1404.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). [Models 1, 2, 3, 5
only] To attach the Two Channel Switch (#8100) to a 2167 Configuration Unit in a S/360 mdl 67-2, to a S/360 mdl 65 MP
which has the Configuration Control Panel (# 1505) installed, or to
a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP.
SELECTIVE TAPE LISTING CONTROL (#6412). Required for
Selective Tape Listing Feature (#6410,6411) on a 1403 mdl 2, 3
or N1. One #6412 is required for each printer equipped with
#6410 or 6411. Specify: With each #6412, one of the following,
depending upon the control position to which the printer with
#6410 or 6411 is to be attached:
#9761 -- to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, or to Printer Control No. 1 on a
2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#9762 -- to Printer Control No.2 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#9763 -- to Printer Control No. 3 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 '"
#7945 is also required.
Note: Orders for this feature for a 1403 mdl Nl equipped with
Selective Tape Listing Feature (#6410) are no longer accepted ...
for 1403 mdl Nl s equipped with the new Selective Tape Listing
Feature (#6420), see #6425 below.
required for normal S/360 operation of the 2540. Required if
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) is used on a 3115,
3125 3135,3135-3,3145,3145-3 or 3148 Processing Unit, or If
1~01 /1440/1460,1410/7010 Compatibility (#4458) is used on a
3145,3145-3 or 3148 Processing Unit, or if 1401/1440/1460,
1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950) is used on a 3155, 3158 or
3158-3 Processing Unit ... not required for normal S/370 operation of the 2540. Required if 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#3950)
is used on a 4331 ... not required for normal 4300 Processor operation of
the 1540.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100). [Models 1, 2, 3, 5 only] [Plant
installation only] To attach the 2821 to a second channel. Switching is under program control. Includes partitioning. For use in a
S/360 mdl 67, a multiprocessor S/360 mdl 65, or a S/370 mdl
158 MP or 168 MP only. Prerequisites: If the Two Channel
Switch is routed through the Configuration Control Panel (#1505)
of a muitiproce!>iiing S/360 mdl 65, Remote Switch Attachment
(#6148) is required. #6148 is also required in a S/360 mdl
67-2, or a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP. See above. For a
2821 mdl 1 or 5, a Two Channel Switch Adapter (#8~ 02) is
required on the attached 2540.
UNIVERSAL CHARACTER SET ADAPTER (#8637-8639). [Models
1, 2, 3, 5 only] Required for Universal Character Set Feature
(#8641 on 1403 mdl 2, #8640 on 1403 mdl 3 or Nl) ... one
adapter is required for each printer so equipped. Note: A 1403
previously equipped with a Multiple Character Set Feature (#5110
on 1403 mdl 2, #5111 on Nl) can be attached to the 2821. The
MCS Feature provides the same function as the UCS Feature on
the pri nter.
#8637 -- to attach such a printer to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, or to
Printer Control No.1 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#8638 -- to attach such a printer to Printer Control No. 2 on a
2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#8639 -- to attach such a printer to Printer Control No. 3 on a
2821 mdl 3 or 5 '" #7945 is also required.
Special Feature Prices:
Column Binary
#1990 $110 $101 $92 $3,225
1,100 LPM Printer Adptr 3615
83
76
70 2,685
Isolation, Control Unit
for mdl4
NC NC
4701
NC
NC
for mdl 1,2,3,5
w neither #8100 nor
#8837-8639
4702
NC NC
NC
NC
w #8637-8839 only
4703
NC NC
NC
NC
w #8100 only
4704
NC
NC NC
NC
NC NC
NC
w #8100 & #8637-86394705
NC
Punch Feed Read Control 5895
60
55
50 1,835
Read-Compare Adapter
5991
76
83
70 3,810
Remote Switch Attach
6148
NC
NC NC
NC
Selective Tape listing Control
for #6410 or #6411
6412
94
86
79 3,855
for #6420
6425
94
86
79 3,855
Third Printer Control
7945 562 517 472 21,490
2540 Compatiblity Attach 8065
NC
NC NC
NC
Two Channel Switch
8100 223 205 187 9,425
Universal Character Set Adapter
for Printer Cntrl No. 1 8637
15
16
1'3
684
for Printer Cntrl No. 2
8638
13
16
684
15
for Printer Cntrl No. 3
8639
16
13
15
684
SELECTIVE TAPE LISTING CONTROL (#6425). [Models 1, 2, 3,
5 only] [For use in S/360 mdls 22, 25, 30, 40, 50 only] Required
for the new Selective Tape Listing Feature (#6420) on a 1403 mdl
Nl. One #6425 is required for each printer equipped with
#6420. Specify: With each #6425, one of the following, depending upon the control position to which the printer with #6420 is to
be attached:
#9765 -- to a 2821 mdl 1 or 2, or to Printer Control No. 1 on a
2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#9766 - to Printer Control No. 2 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5.
#9767 -- to Printer Control No. 3 on a 2821 mdl 3 or 5 '"
#7945 is also required.
THIRD PRINTER CONTROL (#7945). [Models 3, 5 only] [Plant
installation only] To attach a third printer. Any combination of
three 14.03s, mdls 2, 3, 7, Nl can be used. An 1,100 LPM Printer
Adapter (#3615) is required for each 1403 mdl 3 or Nl attached.
2540 COMPATIBILITY ATTACHMENT (#8065). [Models 1,4, 5, 6
only] Required if the 1402/1403 Attachment (#4463) wit~
1401/1440/1460 Basic Compatibility (#4456) or 1620 Compatibility (#7190) is used on a 2030 Processing Unit,. or 14<:11/1460
Compatibility (#4457) is used on a 2040 Processing Unit ... not
>II
FTP is 12-23 months.
-FTP/MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC 1 Yr" 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
• FTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
FIC
$3.50
1.50
$56
106
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
2.50
2.00
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
66
92
NC
NC
NC
10.00
NC
12.50
102
549
PO
NC
PO
4.50
4.50
4.50
401
267
267
---- - - - --....-..-~
M 2822
May 79
~
5,3:f?§:
DP Machines
2822 PAPER TAPE READER CONTROL
Purpose: Control unit for a 2671 Paper Tape Reader in a S/360
mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 67, a S/370 mdl 115 thru 158, a
3031 or 3032 Processor, or a 4300 Processor.
Highlights: Provides status and data information from the 2671 to
the processing unit ... checks for parity ... signals end of record
and end of tape ... code translation, where required, is performed
by the processing unit.
Prerequisite: A control unit position on a system channel:
S/36O mdl 25 -- special feature on 2025: Multiplexer Channel or
Selector Channel ... see 2025.
S/36O mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one selector
channel is standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/360 mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Add'i High Speed Multiplexer
Subchannels ... see 2044.
S360 mdl 67 -- basic multiplexer channel of 2870 ... see 2870.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channels (special features), Block Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ... see 3135.
S/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), selector channel (one is standard), Block Multiplexer Channel (special feature)
... see 3145.
S370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels\five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional), block multiplexer
channel (optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer
channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz):
V, or #9904 for 230 V.
#~~02
for 208
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Isolation, Control Unit: Me reproduced without wrj.lten permission.
'-------- -------- --=--=- =':'=
M 2835
May 79
DP Machines
2835 STORAGE CONTROL
Purpose: Control unit for 2305 Fixed Head Storage(s) in a S/360
mdl 85, 195, S/370 mdl 145, 145-3, 148, 155, 158, 165, 168,
195, a 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, or any 4300 Processor.
Modell
For attachment of 2305 mdl 1 s.
Model 2
For attachment of 2305 mdl 2s.
Model Changes: Cannot be made in the field.
Highlights: Up to two 2305 mdl 1 s can be attached to a 2835
mdl 1 ... a total data capacity of up to 10.8 million 8-bit bytes.
Data is transferred ~o and from a group of non-shared subchannels
of a 2880 or the block multiplexer channel of a 3031, 3032 or
30~3, at a rate of 3.0 million bytes/second.
Up to two 2305 mdl 2s can be attached to a 2835 mdl 2 '" a total
data capacity of up to 22.4 million bytes. Data is transferred to
and from a group of non-shared subchannels of a 2880 or the
block multiplexer channel of a 3031, 3032 or 3033 at a rate of
1.5 million bytes/second.
A pattern of correction code bytes is automatically recorded after
each count, key, and data area. Error detection and correction is
accomplished by decoding the bytes generated while reading and
comparing with the recorded bytes.
File organization and format are under program control, allowing
data and key fields to be variable in length on an individual record
basis.
Greater utilization of available storage is made by allowing a record to "overflow" from one track to another. Logical files are
protected by a combination of commands in the 2835 and checks
within the control program.
Multiple track operation allows search and read operations to
proceeed from track to track. Command chaining allows multiple
records to be read/written by a sequence of channel commands,
without rotational delays between records.
Rotational positional sensing allows the channel to "seek" to an
angular track position by using the "Set Sector" command. This
permits disconnection during most of the rotational latency period
and thus contributes to increased channel availability. The unit
attaches to the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel or integrated
block multiplexer channel of a 3145, 3145-3, 3148 or '3155 and
will accept and properly act upon the "Set Sector" and "Read
Sector" commands.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Non-standard Environment: #9485 ... must be specified if the
2835 is not to be installed as part of a 2305-2835 combination.
[4] Two Drive Facility: #9702 ... must be specified if two 2305s
are to be attached to the 2835. Note: If a second drive is to
be field installed, #9702 must be ordered
Refer to
2305 for further ordering instructions.
PRICES:
Mdl
2835
1
2
MAC/
MRC
$3,245 $2,985 $2,726
2,705 2,489 2,272
Purchase
$76,860
63,630
MMMC
$286
244
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: Assignable Unit
Purchase Option: 45%
Useful Life Category: 1
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
SPECIAL FEATURES
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148, 6149). To attach the
Two Channel Switch (#8170, 8171) to the configuration control
panel of a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP. #6148 -- for 2835 mdl
1 ... #6149 -- for 2835 mdl 2.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8170, 8171). To attach the 2835 to a
second channel, allowing two S/360s, S/370s or 4341s, or two
channels of the same S/360, S/370 or 4341, access to a common
data capacity under program control. #8170 -- for 2835 mdl 1 ...
#8171 -- for 2835 mdl 2.
Special Feature Prices:
- FTPjMACj MLC MLC
MRC 1 Yr' 2 Yr Purchase MMMC FIC
Remote Switch Attachment
for Model 1
#6148
HC
HC
HC
for Model 2
6149
HC
He
HC
Two Channel Switch
$215
$181
for Modell
8170
$198
for Model 2
8171
215 198 181
Multiple requesting is provided which allows for chain or command
queuing within the 2835. This is accomplished by allowing multiple (up to 16) channel command chains to be active in the facility.
For more information, see the 2305 Fixed Head Storage.
Limitations:
2305 mdl 1 and mdl 2 cannot be intermixed on the same 2835.
S/370 mdl 145 - 2835 mdl 1 cannot be attached ... the 2835
mdl 2 must be attached to channel 2 on 3145 IFA systems ... the
Word Buffer (#8810) is required on the 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3, 148 -- 2835 mdl 1 cannot be attached.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 or 3031 Processor -- 2835 mdl 1 cannot be
attached ... 2835 mdl 2 can be attached only to the first and
second block multiplexer channels ... no more than two may be
attached to anyone channel.
4341 Processor -- 2835 mdl 1 cannot be attached.
Prerequisites: A control unit position on a block multiplexer channel of a 3145,3145-3,3148,3155,3158,3031,3032, 3033 or
4341, or a 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel ... Word Buffer
(#8810) is required on the 3145 ... the 2835 mdl 1 also requires
Two Byte Interface (#7850, 7851) on the 2880 or on the 303.2 or
3033 channel to which it is attached.
The 2835 is designed for interconnected operation as part of a
2835/2305 facility. Customers who wish to order a 2835 for
stand-alone or individual use should submit an RPQ to provide the
necessary safety elements (covers, cable connectors, etc.) to
complete the unit for a non-standard (i.e., not interconnected with
a 2305) environment. In lieu of the RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent to the standard 2835/2305 configuration or that provided by the above RPQ. If not provided, the
unit will be offered on a purchase-only basis.
Agreement for IBM to install and maintain the 2835 in any nonstandard environment must be reviewed
... see item [3] under
"Specify."
Elibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360
- FTP/ MLC
MLC
1 Yr' 2 Yr
S/370 - GC20-0001
• FTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
HC
HC
$5,125
5,125
HC
HC
HC
HC
$7.00 $359
7.00 694
'---=--=-=-==
=
==
=---=
a.:::e,,=
M 2840
May 79
DP Machines
2840 DISPLAY CONTROL (Maciel 2)
2840 DISPLAY CONTROL (Model 1)
The 2840 Display Control mdl 1, used for control of 2250 Display
Unit mdl 2s, Is no longer available ... the following special feature
Is available for field Installation on installed units.
ABSOLUTE VECTORS CONTROL (#1003). Controls which permit
attached 2250 mdl 2s equipped with Absolute Vectors (# 1001) to
"draw" a continuous straight line between any two points of their
1,024 x 1,024 reference grids. Maximum: One.
Special Feature Price.:
Abaoluta Vectors Cntrl
MAC/
MRC Purcha.e MMMC
#1003 $217 $8,715
$8.00
FIC
$203
Purpose: Control unit that provides common circuits for multiple
2250 Display Unit mdl 3s in a S/360 mdl 22, 30 thru 85, 195,
any S/370 Processor, or any 4300 Processor.
Limitation: Cannot be used for 2250 mdl 1 s.
Highlights: Provides controls and attachments for up to two 2250
mdl 3s. With Display Multiplexer (#3352), up to four 2250 mdl 3s
can be controlled. See "Special Features." Each 2250 mdl 3 can
be located 2,000 cable feet from the 2840. Includes 32,768·bytes
of core buffer, a character generator, absolute vectors control, the
2250 set of eleven orders, and an additional set of orders for
graphic design applications.
Prerequisites: A control unit on a system channel and a minimum
of 64K bytes of processor storage for use of graphic support
under OS ... a minimum of 16K for diagnostic support only.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard),
Selector Channels (special features, except on 2022 one is
standard) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/360 mdl 44 -- special features on 2044: Multiplexer Channel,
High Speed Multiplexer Channels, Add'i High Speed Multiplexer
Subchannels ... see 2044.
S/360 mdl 65, 67, 75 -- selector channel of 2860, Selector
Subchannels (special features) on 2870 ... see 2860, 2870.
S/360 mdl 85, 195, or 5/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- selector
channel of 2860, Selector Subchannels (special features) on
2870, shared subchannel of 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector Channel or Block Multiplexer Channel ... see 3135.
S/370 mdl 135-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 - multiplexer channel (standard), selector channels ... see 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature), block multiplexer channels
(first two are standard ... see 3155, 3158.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexar channel (one is
standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) '" see 3033.
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (optional), block mUltiplexer
channel (optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360
S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
PRICES:
2840
Mdl
2
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$4,345
$80,900
$183
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Maintenance: B
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: B
SPECIAL FEATURES
DISPLAY MULTIPLEXER (#3352). Provides two additional attachments for two 2250 mdl 3s. Maximum: One.
Special Feature Prices:
Display Multiplexer
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
#3352 $437 $8,990
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Fie
$16.00 $407
-------- - ---------- ----------_.-
M 2860
May 79
DP Machines
2860 SELECTOR CHANNEL
Purpose: Selector channel(s) for attachment and control of a wide
variety of I/O control units for a S/360 mdl 65 thru 195. or a
S/370 mdl 165. 168. 195.
Model 1
Has one selector channel.
Model 2
Has two selector channels.
Model 3
Has three selector channels.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: Channels permit data rates up to 1 .3 million
bytes/second. A full set of channel control and buffer registers
permit each channel to operate with minimal interference. Up to
eight I/O control units can be attached to each channel. permitting a wide variety of attached devices. I/O operations are overlapped with processing and. depending upon the data rate. all
channels can operate simultaneously.
Maximum:
S/36O mdl 65, 67-1 (2067 mdl 1), 75 -- up to two 2860s in any
combination of models can be attached. Up to two 2870 Multiplexer Channels can also be attached. Total channels (both 2860
and 2870) cannot exceed seven per CPU.
Limitations: On either a 65 MP system with eight 2365 mdl 13
frames. or on a system with four 2361 mdl 2s. only three channel frames or seven logical channels. whichever occurs first.
can be attached. The 2860 may only use channel addresses 1
through 6. If no 2870s are attached. only up to six logical
channels can be attached per CPU.
S/36O mdl 67-2 (one or two 2067 mdl 2s) -- up to two 2860s in
any combination can be attached to each 2846 Channel Controller. A 2870 Multiplexer Channel can also be attached to each
2846.
S/360 mdl 85, 195, or S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -- up to two
2860s in any combination of models can be attached. 2870
Multiplexer Channels and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channels can
also be attached. For combinations possible. see 3165. 3168 or
3195.
Prerequisites:
With 2065 or 2067 mdl 1 -- Channel Attachment (#9065) is
required to attach channels addressed 3 and 4. Channel Attachment (#9066) is required in addition to #9065 to attach
channels addressed 5 and 6. See "Specify" under 2065 and
2067.
With 2067 mdl 2 -- a 2846 Channel Controller is required.
With 2075 -- a 2075 Attachment (#9820) is required on each
2860 ... see "Specify."
With 2085 -- a 2085 Attachment (#9821) is required on each
2860 ... see "Specify." On the 2085. Channel Attachment
(#9065) is required to attach channels addressed 3 and 4.
Channel Attachment (#9066) is required in addition to #9065
to attach channels addressed 5 and 6. Consult Special Product
Marketing.
With 3195 -- a 3195 Attachment (#9828) is required on each
2860 ... see "Specify."
With 3165, 3168, 3168-3 -- a 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment
(#9830) is required on each 2860 ... see "Specify." When
attaching this channel to a S/370 mdl 165. the 3165 must have
sufficient addressing capability ... see "Channel Attachment"
under "Specify" for the 3165. For S/370 mdl 165 systems.
the power distribution unit must be equipped for at least the
number of frames actually attached ... see "Channel Frames"
under "Specify" for the 3067 mdl 1. Channel Indirect Data
Addressing feature is required for a system operating in EC
mode ... see "Special Features."
Isolation: Appropriate features are required on any 2860 shipped
prior to September 7. 1967 ... see "Special Features."
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360
S/370 - GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC. 3-phase. 4-wire. 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V. or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Method of Installation: #9400. if 2860 will not be installed on
a raised floor.
[3] 2075 Attachment:
2075.
#9820
required for attachment to a
[4] 2085 Attachment:
2085.
#9821
required for attachment to a
[5] 3195 Attachment:
3195.
#9828
required for attachment to a
[6] 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment: #9830 '" required for attachment to a 3165. 3168. or 3168-3.
[7] Unit Position: Required on 2860s when more than one unit.
either 2860 or 2870. is attached to a 2065. 2067 mdl 1. 2075.
2085. 2846. or 3165. Specify #9501 on each 2860 that is not
attached last on the channel bus. If the 2860 is to be last (only
when there is no 2870) no code is required. When field installing an additional 2860 which will be last on the bus. order
#9501 for the installed 2860 that is currently last on the bus.
All
orders for #9501 must give the model. serial number
and special features on the installed 2860. On the 3168. 31683 or 3195. the bus is two cable strings to which the channels
are attached. Therefore. for each string specify #9501 for
each 2860 that is not attached last on that string. If the 2860
is last on either string. no code is required. When field installing an additional 2860 which is to be last on the string. order
#9501
for the installed 2860 that is currently last on
the string.
[8] Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
[9] Two-processor System: A 2860 that is to be used in a S/360
mdl 67-2 with two 2067 mdl 2s requires Address Prefixing
(#1095) ... see "Special Features."
[10] 2301 Drum Storage: tn a S/360 mdl 67-2. or a S/370 mdl
165. High Speed Direct Access Storage Priority (#4597) is
required on the selector channel to which the 2820 Storage
Control for the 2301 is to be attached ... see "Special Features."
[11] Isolation Features: Appropriate features must be ordered for
field installation on units shipped prior to September 7. 1967 ...
see "Special Features."
PRICES:
2860
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
1
2
3
$2,400 $2,185
3,420 3,110
4,455 4,050
Purchase
$112,050
159,600
206,600
MMMC
$63.50
103.00
144.00
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: Assignable Unit
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Chg Months: 6
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDRESS PREFIXING (#1095). [For use in a S/360 mdl 67-2
only] One is required on each selector channel in a two-processor
system : .. provides prefixing to identify the processing unit that
has initiated an I/O operation. Specify: #9026 for first channel of
2860 ... #9047 for second ... #9048 for third. Maximum: One
per 2860 mdl 1. two per 2860 mdl 2, three per 2860 mdl· 3.
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850). To interconnect two
system channels ... only one of the two connected channels requires this feature. The feature uses one control unit pOSition on
each of the channels. The plant must know on which of the three
possible 2860 channel gates the adapter is to be installed.
Specify. #9095 for installation on first gate ... #9096 for second
gate ... #9097 for third gate. Maximum: One per gate.
CHANNEL INDIRECT DATA ADDRESSING (#1861-1863). For use
on a S/370 mdl 165 II or 168 ... 3165/3168/3268-3 Attachment
(#9830) is required on channel. One is required on each selector
channel to provide indirect access for data transfer. Required for
a system operating in EC mode. #1861 -- for 2860 mdl 1 ...
#1862 for 2860 mdl 2 ... #1863 for 2860 mdl 3. Maximum: One
per 2860.
HIGH SPEED DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE PRIORITY (#4597).
[For use in a S/360 mdl 67-2 or 85, or S/370 mdl 165 only]
Gives storage priority to a 2301 Drum over all other devices in the
system. Required On a 2860 channel to which a 2301 is attached
in the above systems.. Specify: #9171 for installation on first
channel ... #9172 on second channel. Maximum: In a S/360 mdl
67-2, only one #4597 may be attached to a 2860. regardless of
model. Although two 28605 may be attached to a 2846, only one
may have this feature. In a S/360 mdl 85 or S/370 mdl 165, up
to two features may be used, but they must be located on the first
2860 in the system. Prerequisite: Storage Priority (#7516) on
the 2820 Storage Control associated with the 2301.
3803 MODEL 2 ATTACHMENT (#7850). One is required for each
2860 channel to which 3803 mdl 2s are attached. Specify.
#9181 for first channel of a 2860 ... #9182 for second channel ...
#9183 for third channel. Maximum: One for 2860 mdl 1 ... two
for 2860 mdl 2 ... three for 2860 mdl 3.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- - ----
:S: ~.:r~1:
M 2860 - 2870
May 79
DP Machines
2860 Selector ehannel
(cont'd)
TLP/
Special Feature Prices:
Add,... Prefixing
#1095 $44
Chnl-to-Chnl Adapter
1850 256
Channel Indirect Data Addressing
for 2860 mdl 1
1861 171
for 2860 mdl 2
1862 342
for 2860 mdl 3
1863 515
High Speed Direct
Access Strg Priority 4597
16
3803 Mdl 2 Attachment 7850
23
$40
233
156
311
469
15
21
$1,930 $2.00 $563
10,820 4.00
197
7,995 2.00 1,760
15,940 3.00 3,425
23,910 5.50 5,080
772 2.00
1,140 1.00
340
299
ISOLATION FEATURES - the following features, as appropriate,
must be .ordered for field Installation on each 2860 Installed or
shipped prior to September 7, 1967.
ISOLATION, 2860 CHANNEL (#4611-4613). Permits power to be
turned on or off on the 2860 without introducing transient noise
signals on the I/O interface bus during the powering operation.
#4611 - for 2860 mdl 1 ... #4612 - for 2860 mdl 2 ... #4613for 2860 mdl 3. Maximum: One per 2860.
ISOLATION,
ON
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL
ADAPTER
(#4621-4623). Permils power to be turned on or off on the 2860
without introducing transient noise signals on units attached via
Channel-Io-Channel Adapter(s) (#1850) during Ihe powering
operation. #4621 - if there is only one #1850 on the 2860
frame ... #4622 - if there are two # 1850s ... #4623 - if there
are three #1850s. Maximum: One, #4621, #4622, or #4623.
Prerequisites: For #4621, one #1850 ... For #4622, two
#1850s ... For #4623, three #1850s.
Special Feature Prices:
Isolation
2860 Channel
for model 1
#4611
for model 2
4612
for model 3
4613
On Chnl-to-Chnl Adapter
with one #1850
4621
with two #18508
4622
with three #18508
4623
2870 MUL TIPLEXE.RCHANN.EL
MAC/MLC
MRC 4 Vr Purchase MMMC FIC
Purpose: For attachment of a wide variety of low to medium
speed I/O control units and devices to a S/360 mdl 65, 67, 85,
195, or S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195.
Highlights: Provides up to 196 subchannels ... including four
Selector Subchannels. See "Special Features." Aggregate data
rates range from 110KB to 670KB, depending upon the features
installed.
The basic channel can attach· up to eight I/O control units and
can address up to 192 I/O devices. Up to four Selector Subchannels can be added, each of which can operate one device simultaneously with the basic channel. Up to eight I/O control units can
be attached to each Selector Subchannel. If one 2841 is attached, no other control unit can be attached to that Selector Subchannel... see 2841. A maximum of sixteen devices can be
attached to each Selector Subchannel. The first 2870 attached to
a System must be assigned address zero (0). The second 2870
may be assigned any address 1 through 6, dependent upon the
total number of channels installed and Ihe priority desired ... see
Functional Characteristics SRL for.the using system.
Maximum aggregale data rates are shown in the following table.
These are machine rates for Ihe 2870 ... for 5/360 mdl 65, 67-1,
75 and 85, or S/370 mdl 165, 168 or 195, information on system
data rates may be found in the appropriate Functional Characteristics SRL.
SELECTOR SUBCHANNELS
TLP/
MAC/MLC
MRC 4 Vr Purchase MMMC FIC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Basic
Channel
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
#6990 #6991 #6992 #6993
110KB
88KB
66KB
44KB
30KB
180KB
180KB 180KB
180KB 180KB 180KB
180KB 180KB 180KB 100KB
• Not inslalled.
Maximum:
S/360 mdl 65, 67-1 (2067 mdl1), 75 - two 2870s can be
attached ... up to two 2860 Selector Channels in any combination of models can also be attached. The total number of channels (both 2870s and 2860s) cannot exceed seven per CPU.
Limitations: On either a 65 MP system with eight 2365 mdl 13
frames or on a system with four 2361 mdl 2s, only three channel
frames or seven logical channels, whichexer occurs first, can be
attached. If no 2870s are attached only up to six logical channels can be attached per CPU. The first 2870 address must be
zero and the second is assigned an available address from 1 to
6.
S/360 mdl 67-2 (one or two 2067 mdl 2s) - one 2870 can be
attached 10 each 2846 Channel Controller ... up 10 two 2860
Selector Channels in any combination of models can also be
attached to each 2846.
S/360 mdl 85,195 and S/370 mdl165, 168, 195 - two 2870s
can be attached. 2860 Selector Channels and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channels can also be attached. For combinations possible, see 3165,3168,3168-3 or 3195.
Note: The 2870 may be connected to another system channel
for channel-Io-channel interconnection of two system channels.
However, the Channel-Io-channel Adapter required for this
interconnection must be installed on the other channel, not the
2870 ... unbuffered devices precede buffered devices. A 2821
Control Unit should normally be last in priority because of the
high instantaneous data rates.
Prerequisites:
With 2065 or 2067 mdl 1 - Channel Attachment (#9065) is
required to attach channels addressed 3 and 4. Channel Attachment (#9066) is required for channels addressed 5 and 6. See
"Specify" under 2065 or 2067.
.
With 2067 mdl 2 - a 2846 Channel Controller is required.
With 2075 - a 2705 Attachment (#9820) is required on each
2870 ... see "Specify."
With 2085 - a 2085 Attachment (#9821) is required on each
2870 ... see "Specify." On the 2085, Channel Attachment
(#9065) is required to attach channels addressed 3 and 4.
- Channel Attachment (#9066) is required for channels addressed
5 and 6. Consult Special Product Marketing Support.
With 3195 - a 3195 Attachment (#9828) is required on each
2870 ... see "Specify."
With 3165, 3168, 3168-3 - a 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ---------
==-==~= DP Machines
2870 Multiplexer Channel (cont'd)
(#9830) is required on each 2870 ... see "Specify." When
attaching this channel to a S/370 mdl 165, the 3165 must have
sufficient channel addressing capability... see . ·Channel
Attachment" under "Specify" for the 3165. For S/370 mdl 165
systems, the power distribution unit must be equipped for at
least the number of frames actually attached ... see "Channel
Frames" under "Specify" for the 3067 mdl 1. Channel Indirect
Data Addressing (#1861) is required for a system operating in
EC mode ... see "Special Features." Isolation Feature: An
appropriate Isolation Feature is required on any 2870 shipped
prior to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special, Features."
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360
S/370 ~ GC20-0001
Specify: [1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
[2) Method of Installation: #9400, if 2870 will not be installed on
a raised floor.
[3) 2075 Attachment:
2075.
#9820
required for attachment to a
[4) 2085 Attachment:
2085.
#9821
required for attachment to a
[5) 3195 Attachment: #9828 ... required for attachment to a
3195. Note: 2870s serial no. 70,000 to 79,999 must be used with
a 3195.
[6) 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment: #9830 ... required for attachment to a 3165, 3168 or 3168-3. Note: 2870 serial nos. 70,000
to 79,999 must be used with a 3165,3168 or 3168-3.
[7) Unit Position: The 2870 is normally last on the channel bus of
a 2065, 2067 mdl1, 2075, 2085, 2846 or 3165. If two 2870s are
installed, one should be last and the other next to last on the
channel bus. #9501 must be specified for the 2870 which is next
to last. The 2870 which is last does not require a code. All
orders to add #9501 to an installed 2870 must specify the serial
no. and special features on the installed unit. On the 3168, 31 683 or 3195, the bus is two cable strings to which the channels are
attached. Therefore, when one or two 2870s are installed, they
should be last on separate strings. If on the same string, one
should be last and the other next to last. #9501 must be specified for the 2870 which is next to last on the string. The 2870
which is last on either string does not require a code. Note:
28708 with serial nos. 60,002 through 69,999 must be installed as the first 2870 with channel address of zero on all
systems except the S/360 mdl 195 or S/370 mdl 165.
M 2870
May 79
channels also attached). On a 2065 MP, the maximums are: Four
on the first 2870 ... none on the second. Prerequisites: #6991
requires #6990 ... #6992 requires #6991 ... #6993 requires
#6992.
Address Prefixing
Chnl Ind Data Addsg
Selector Subchannel
first
second
third
fourth
·FIC:
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
458
285
285
285
417
260
260
260
19,870
12,010
12,010
12,010
22.00
13.50
13.50
13.50
400
200
200
200
ISOLATION, CHANNEL-CONTROL UNIT (#4600, 4601). To turn
power on or off on the 2870 without introducing noise signals on
the I/O interface bus. #4600 -- for a 2870 with no Selector
Subchannels ... #4601 -for a 2870 with one or more Selector
Subchannels
(#6990-6993).
Maximum:
One
per
2870.
Prerequisite: #4601 requires at least #6990.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MAC/MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC FIC
Isolation, Channel-Control Unit
without #6990
#4600
with #6990
4601
[10) Isolation Feature: The appropriate Isolation Feature must be
ordered for field installation on units shipped prior to December
29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
MAC/
MRC
6990
6991
6992
6993
$3.50
2.50$3,040
ISOLATION FEATURES - one of the following features, as appropriate, must be ordered for field installation on each 2870 shipped
prior to December 29, 1967 ...
[9) Two-processor System: A 2870 which is to be used in a
S/360 mdl 67-2 with two 2067 mdl 2s requires Address Prefixing
(#1095) ... see "Special Features."
Mdl
#1095 $129 $118 $5,565
1861
228 208 10,790
2870 Serial Nos. 60,000 - 69,999 ... $864
2870 Serial Nos. 70,000 - 79,999 ... $119
[8) Coior: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
$9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
PRICES:
TLP/
MAC/MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC FIC
Special Feature Prices:
MMMC
$2,500 $2,275
$117,900 $145
1
2870
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Metering: Assignable Unit
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 1 5%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL .FEATURES
ADDRESS PREFIXING (#1095). [For use on a S/360 mdl 67-2
only) One required on each 2870 in a two-processor system ...
provides prefixing to identify the processing unit that has initiated
an I/O operation. Maximum: One per 2870.
CHANNEL INDIRECT DATA ADDRESSING (#1881). For use on a
S/370 mdl 165 II or 168 ... 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment
(#9830) is required on channel. Provides indirect address for
data transfer. Required for a system operating in EC mode.
SELECTOR SUBCHANNEL (#899~993). Each Selector Subchannel permits attachment of up to eight I/O control units for
devices with a data rate not exceeding 1 80KB ... see aggregate
data rates possible under "Highlights." Each selector subchannel
operates simultaneously with devices on the basic 2870 channel.
Limitation: Regardless of the number of control units attached, a
maximum of sixteen I/O devices can be attached to a selector
subchannel. #8990 -- for first selector subchannel ... #8991 for second ... #8992 -- for third ... #6993 -. for fourth.
Maximum: Four on the first or only 2870 (channel address 0) ...
two (#6990 and #6991) on the second 2870 (channel address 1
through 6, depending on the number of 2860 and 2880 logical
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
------- ----------------_.- -----
M 2880
May 79
DP Machines
2880 BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL
[6] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
Purpose: Block multiplexer channel(s) for attachment and control
of a wide variety of I/O control units in a S/360 mdl 85, 195, or
S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195.
[7] Unit Position: #9505. For the mdl 165, #9505 must be specified on the 2880 which is last on the channel bus. For a mdl
168 or 195, where there are two cable strings, each 2880
which is last on a string must have #9505 specified. All
orders to add #9505 to an installed 2880 must specify the
serial number and special features on the installed unit.
Modell
Has one block multiplexer channel.
Model 2
Has two block multiplexer channels.
Model Changes: Not recommended for field installation.
Highlights: Channels permit data rates up to 1.5 million
bytes/second. With Two Byte Interface (#7850, 7851), data rates
up to 3.0 million bytes/second are possible ... see "Special Features."
Provides up to 56 non-shared (block multiplex mode operation)
subchannels per block multiplexer channel, allowing up to 56
block multiplex devices to operate concurrently in a burst interleaved mode on the single data path of the channel. Thus, although only one device may actually be transmitting data at any
given instant, multiple channel programs may be concurrently
active for up to 56 block multiplex devices at one time. Up to
eight control units, of which seven may be block multiplexed, can
be attached to each channel, permitting a wide variety of attached
devices. There will always be one shared (non-block multiplex
mode operation) subchannel having all addresses not assigned to
non-shared subchannels. Subsequently, the shared channel will
always have at least 200 unit addresses and may have up to 256
unit addresses, depending on the number of non-shared subchannels plugged during installation. With the Extended UCW feature
installed, the capability of the channel to operate non-shared
subchannels is extended from 56 to 256.
All block multiplex devices must be assigned to a non-shared
subchannel. [Exception: The 2821 and 3811 control units may be
attached to either type of subchannel, bt non-shared subchannel
attachment is recommended.]
Can be connected to a S/360 or S/370 selector channel via a
Channel-to-channel Adapter (# 1850) on the selector channel. Can
be connected to a 4341 Processor via a Channel to Channel Adapter of
the block multiplexer channel of the 4341 Processor.
I/O operations are overlapped with processing and, depending
upon system considerations and upon data rate, all channels can
operate simultaneously.
Maximum: Up to three 28805 (six channels), in any combination
of models, can be attached. With Extended Channels (#3850) on
the 2085, #3851 on the 3195, #3850 on the 3165, or #3855 on
the 3168, up to six 28805 (twelve channels) may be attached to a
2085, up to seven 28805 (thirteen channels) may be attached to a
3195, or up to six 28805 (eleven channels) may be attached to a
3165, 3168 or 3168-3. See 3195, 3165, 3168 or 3168-3 for
allowable channel combinations. For 2085, consult Special Product Marketing Support.
Limitation: A 2820 Storage Control equipped with Storage Priority
(#7516) cannot be attached to a 2880.
PRICES:
2880
Mdl
1
2
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$3,705 $3,370
5,310 4,830
$121,850
174,500
$288
382
MAC/
MRC
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: l!5%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHANNEL INDIRECT DATA ADDRESSING (#1861, 1862). For
use on a S/370 mdl 165 II or 168 ... 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment (#9830) is required on channel. One is required on each
channel to provide indirect address for data transfer. Required for
a system operating in EC mode. #1861 -- for 2880 mdl 1 ...
#1862 -- for 2880 mdl 2. Maximum: One per 2880.
EXTENDED UNIT CONTROL WORDS (#3851, 3852). Extends
channel storage to 256 control words. May be installed on either
or both channels of a 2880 mdl 2. #3851 -- for mdl 1 or first
channel of a mdl 2 '" #3852 -- for second channel of a mdl 2.
Limitation: Cannot be installed on the same channel with #7850
or #7851, RPQ WE4259 channel-to-channel adapter and specify
feature 2085 Attachment (#9821). Field Installation: Yes.
TWO BYTE INTERFACE (#7850, 7851). One is required on each
channel attaching a 2835 Storage Control mdl 1 for 2305 Fixed
Head Storage(s). #7850 -for a 2880 mdl 1 or the first channel of
a 2880 mdl 2 ... #7851 -- for the second channel of a 2880 mdl
2. Limitation: Cannot be installed on the same channel with
#3851 or #3852. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP
MAC/MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC FIC
Channel Indirect Data Addressing
#1861 $171
for 2880 mdl 1
for 2880 mdl 2
1862 342
Extended Unit Control Words
for mdl 1 or 1st
chnl of mdl 2
3851
415
for 2nd chnl of mdl 2 3852 415
Two Byte Interface
for mdl 1 or 1st
chnl of mdl 2
7850 432
for 2nd chnl of mdl 2 7851
432
Prerequisites:
With 2085 -- 2085 Attachment (#9821) is required on each
2880 ... see Specify. On the 2085, an appropriate Channel
Attachment (#9065-9069) may be required. Consult Special
Product Marketing Support.
With 3195 -- 3195 Attachment (#9828) is required on each
2880 '" see "Specify."
With 3165, 3168, 3168-3 -- a 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment
(#9830) is required on each 2880 ... see "Specify." When
attaching the channel to a S/370 mdl 165, the 3165 must have
sufficient channel addressing capability... see "Channel
Attachment" under "Specify" for the 3165. For S/370 mdl 165
systems, the power distribution unit must be equipped for at
least the number of frames actually attached .,. see "Channel
Frames" under "Specify" for the 3067 mdl 1. Channel Indirect
Data Addressing feature is required for a system operating in EC
mode ... see "Special Features."
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360
S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] 2085 Attachment:
2085.
#9821
required for attachment to a
[3] 3195 Attachment:
3195.
#9828
required for attachment to a
[4] 3165/3168/3168-3 Attachment: #9830 .,. required for attachment to a 3165,3168 or 3168-3.
[5] Method of Installation: #9400, if 2880 will not be installed on
a raised floor.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$156
311
$5,650 $1.00$1,540
11,240 2.00 3,090
378
378
13,100 4.50
13,100 4.50
393
393
14,220
14,220
370
370
5.00 2,645
5.00 2,645
--5 =P..F-
==-==l'i:
M 3017 - 3027
May 79
DP Machines
3027 POWER AND COOLANT
DISTRIBUTION UNIT
3017 POWER UNIT
Purpo..: Provides power for a 3031 Processor or Attached Processor Complex.
Highlight.: One 3017 Power Unit Is required with each 3031
Processor ... two 3017s are required In an ,Attached Processor
Complex.
Blbllogr.phy: GC20-0001
Specify: [1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 ,Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #H05 for 230 V.
[2) Color: #Il080 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #SKJe2
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #90e4 for charcoal
brown, #SKJe5 for pebble gray, or #1JOee for pearl white.
[3) Cabling: #tM)8() for below floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[4) Unit Emergency Power Off: See 5/370 Intallatlon Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004, for details.
PRICES:
Mdl
3017
1
Monthly
Monthly L••••
R.nt.1 Ch.rg.
Ch.rg. 4 V••r
Purch...
MMMC
$482
S20,000
S30
$420
Purpo..: Provides power and coolant distribution required by a
3032 Processor Complex.
Highlight.: One 3027 Is required with each 3032 Processor.
Blbllogr.phy: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #H03 for
208 V, or #H05 for 230 V.
[2) Color: #IlO8O for willow green, #9081 for garnet rose, #SKJe2
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #SKJe4 for charcoal
brown, #SKJeS for pebble gray, or #IJOee for pearl white.
PRICES: Mdl
3027
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036)
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Monthly
Monthly L....
Ch.rg.
R.ntal
Ch.rg. 4Vaar
S3,825
S3,480
Purch...
MMMC
S18O,OOO
S210
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036)
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
[3) Unit Emergency Power Off: Sees/370 InstallatIon Manual PhysIcal PlannIng, GC22-7004. for details.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._------- ------ -
----=- =- - =
~=
M 3031
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3031
PROCESSOR
PRICES:
Purpose: Performs arithmetic, logic, processor storage, channel,
and control functions for a 3031 Processor or Attached Processor
Complex. 3031 A models are used with a 3041 Attached Processor.
A2
2,097,152
3
A3
3,145,728
4
A4
4,194,304
5
A5
5,242,880
6
A6
6,291,456
$23,450 $21,320
26,490 24,090
29,530 26,860
33,080 30,100
36,120 32,870
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Bytes of Processor Storage
2
Highlights: Depending on the model, contains up to 6,291,456
bytes of monolithic processor storage ... processor cycle time of
115 nanoseconds ... eight-byte parallel data flow with four-way
interleaving ... 128 word instruction buffer ... processor functions
are controlled by reloadable control storage ... includes 32,768
bytes of buffer storage which is transparent to the programmer
and reduces the effective cycle time of processor storage ... sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are implemented in high speed internal circuits with a four-byte data flow to
the I/E function.
Standard Features: S/370 Universal Instruction Set ... extended
precision floating point ... interval timer .. , store and fetch protect
... byte oriented operand feature ... main storage error checking
and correction ... instruction retry ... dynamic address translation
... extended control mode ... program event recording ... one
microsecond time-of-day clock With clock comparator '" one
microsecond CPU timer ... buffer storage (32,768 bytes) ... reloadable control storage '" physically integrated channels ... VMA &
OS/VS1 ECPS ... S/370 Extended Facility... . .. compare and
swap ... compare double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW
key from address ... storage configuration control ... clear I/O ...
Unit Emergency Power Off.
Channels: Six channels are standard: One byte multiplexer channel and five block multiplexer channels. The byte multiplexer
channel is capable of a data rate of 40 to 75 kilobytes per second. A block multiplexer channel is capable of a data rate of up
to 1.5 megabytes per second. 256 subchannels per channel, of
which up to eight subchannels per channel may be shared. Channel Indirect Addressing is standard. One optional channel-tochannel adapter.
PREREQUISITES: Each 3031 requires one 3036 Console and one
3017 Power Unit. Two 3017 Power Units, a 3036 Console, a
3041 Attached Processor, and a 3031 Processor Model A are
required in an Attached Processor Complex. See S/370 Instal/ation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
Unit Emergency Power Off: See S/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004, for details.
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal browm, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl
white.
MLC
4 Yr
MRC
2
3
4
5
6
3031
Model
Mdl
23,910
26,950
29,990
33,540
36,580
21,740
24,510
27,280
30,520
33,290
Purchase
MMMC
$830,000
905,000
980,000
1,070,000
1,145,000
$2,450
2,590
2,730
2,930
3,070
850,000
925,000
1,000,000
1 ,090,000
1,165,000
2,505
2,645
2,785
2,985
3,125
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036)
Maintenance: D
Warranty: A
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 2
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changes: Field installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
To
2
3
4
5
From To
A2
A3
A4
AS
4
3
5
6
$75,000
$75,000
$90,000
$75,000
A3
A5
A4
A6
$75,000
$75,000
$90,000
$75,000
MODEL CONVERSION PURCHASE PRICE - 3031 to 3031
Model (no change In memory size)
A
$20,000
SPECIAL FEATURES
To interconnect
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850).
two channels (either S/360, S/370 or 4341 Processor). Only one of
the processors requires this feature. Uses one control unit position on each of the connected channels. Function can be expanded under program control so that the adapter will operate as a
standard control unit. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two instructions, "Read
Direct" and "Write Direct", and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes,
between two cable-connected processors or a cable-connected
processor and external devices. The read and write instructions
must use real addresses only. Maximum: One. Cable Order:
Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: External devices
must meet the interface specifications outlined in S/370 Direct
Control Feature - OEMI, GA22-6845.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
MLC
4 yr
Chnnl-to-chnnl Adapter #1850 $410 $375
Direct Control
3274
104
95
Cabling: Cables can be used above or below the floor ... no specify
required.
Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in a 3031 Processor Complex.
RETAIN/370: The capability of using remote service/logout
analysis facility is standard. Customer must provide interface
for this facility to the telephone line if he desires the feature
to be used.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Purchase
MMMC
$15,000
3,700
$10.00
1.50
M 3032
May 79
DP Machines
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
IBM 3032 PROCESSOR
From
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, processor storage, channels
and control functions for a 3032 Processor Complex.
2
4
To
6
4
$172,000
$156,000
2,097,152 bytes of processor storage
SPECIAL FEATURES
Model 4
4,194,304 bytes of processor storage
Model 6
6,291,456 bytes of processor storage
CHANNEL·TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850). To interconnect two
channels (either S/360, S/370 or 4341 Processor). Only one of the
processors requires this feature. Uses one control unit position on
each of the connected channels. Function can be expanded under
program control so that the adapter will operate as a standard
control unit. Limitation: Cannot be installed on extended channels. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes .
Model 2
Highlights: Depending upon the model, can ci>ntain up to 6,291,456 bytes of monolithic processor storage ... double-word storage
accesses are four-way interleaved ... eight-byte parallel data flow
... includes 32,768 bytes of buffer storage which is transparent to
the program and significantly reduces the effective access time of
storage .,. buffer storage does not Increase the amount of addressable storage ... 80 nanosecond processor cycle ... overlapped operation of instruction preprocessing and execution functions
... extensive data checking is coupled with increased availability
and serviceability. Improved instruction execution rates over the
3158-3. Improved availability and serviceability through dual
console and main storage reconfiguration functions.
Standard Features: Universal Instruction Set ... extended precision floating point ... one-microsecond time-of-day clock with
clock comparator ... one-microsecond CPU timer ... dynamic address translation ... channel indirect data addressing ... extended
control mode ... program event recording ... monitoring ... byteoriented operand feature ... buffer storage (32,768 bytes) ... fetch
and store protection ... direct control feature ... six channels ...
S/370 Extended Facility ... remote log analysis and remote support facilities ... storage configuration control ... reloadable control
storage ... interval timer ... processor storage error checking and
correction ... instruction retry ... compare and swap ... compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address
... clear I/O.
EXTENDED CHANNELS (#3850). Provides an additional group of
five block multiplexer channels and one byte multiplexer channel.
lftrequ;,ite: #9145 on the 3027 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit ...
see "Specify" under 3027. Speeify; Color - #9160 for willow green.
#9161 for garnet red. #9162 for sunrise yellow. #9163 for classic blue.
#9164 for charcoal brown. #9165 for pebble gray. or #9166 for pearl
white. Maximum; One. Field Installation: Yes.
TWO·BYTE INTERFACE (#7850). One is required on each channel attaching a 3838 Array Processor in two-byte mode or a 2305
Fixed Head Storage mdl 1. Maximum: One per channel group on
the first block multiplexer channel of that group. Prerequisite:
Second #7850 requires Extended Channels (#3850). Field
Installation: Yes. Specify: #9201 for standard channel group,
#9202 for extended channel group (#3850).
Special Feature Prices:
Chnl·to-Chnl Adapter
Extended Channels
Two-Byte Interface
#1850
3850
7850
Channels: Six functionally independent channels in one group are
standard. A group consists of one byte multiplexer channel and
five block multiplexer channels. Single block multiplexer channel
speed of up to 1.5 million bytes/second is standard and up to 3
million bytes/second with the Two-Byte Interface (#7850). Each
byte multiplexer channel will generally operate in the range of
40-75 KB/second. Each channel has 256 subchannels, of which
up to 8 subchannels/channel may be shared. One optional
channel-to-channel adapter per processor is available ... see
"Special Features."
With the addition of Extended Channels (#3850), a group of five
additional block multiplexer channels and one byte multiplexer
channel may be added. Availability and serviceability are improved
with the addition of this second group through the independent
maintenance capability of each channel group.
Prerequisites: Each 3032 requires [1] One 3027 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit ... [2] One 3036 Console ... and [3] An
appropriate 415 Hz power input. Customer-supplied chilled water
is required for cooling the system. See S/370 Installation Manual
- Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Motor Generator and Starter: If desired, see M 10000 pages
for ordering instructions and prices.
.
[3] Unit Emergency Power Off: See S/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004, for details.
[4] Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, #9065 for pebble gra.y, or #9066 for pearl white.
PRICES Mdl
3032
2
4
6
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
$40,700 $37,000
47,550
43,240
53,840
48,970
Purchase
MMMC
$1,590,000 $5,700
1,762,000 6,020
1,918,000 6,310
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 3
Warranty: A
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036)
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field installable.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
$410 $375
9,900 9,000
38
35
Purchase MMMC
$15,000
360,000
1,400
$10
525
1
._---- -----------=== ':' =
M 3033
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3033 PROCESSOR
Mdl
MRC
3033
U4
·U6
U8
U12
U16
$70.1020 $63,660
70,280 69,360
82,360
74,900
95,650
87,010
107,810 98,090
M4
·M6
M8
M12
M16
70,220
76,480
82,560
95,850
108,010
63,840
69,540
75,080
87,190
98,270
3,075,500 7,215
3,230,500 7,535
3,380,500 7,815
3,708,500 ·8430
4,008,500 8:990
A4
*A6
A8
AU
A16
70,220
76,480
82,560
95,850
108,010
63,840
69,540
75,080
87,190
98,270
3,075,500
3,230,500
3,380,500
3,708,500
4,008,500
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, control functions, processor
storage and channels for a 3033 Processor Complex. A and M
models provide multiprocessing function.
Bytes of Processor Storage
Models
U4
U6t
U8
U12
U16
M4
M6t
M8
M12
M16
A4
A8
AI2
AI6
4,194,304
6,291,456
8,388,608
12,582,192
16,777,216
t Models U6 and M6 are no longer available.
Hlghllghta: Depending upon the model, can contain up to
16,777,216 bytes of monolithic processor storage ... double-words
are eight-way interleaved .. eight byte parallel data flow .,. includes 65,536 bytes of 57 nanosecond cycle buffer storage which
is transparent to the program and significantly reduces the effective access time of storage ... buffer storage does not increase the
amount of addressable storage ... 57 nanosecond processor cycle
... overlapped operation of instruction and execution functions ...
extensive data checking is coupled with increased availability and
serviceability.
The A -series is basically identical to the M -series ... A or M designates
whether the model is used in an AP or MP complex.
Improved instruction execution times over the 3168-3. Improved
interrupt execution times over the 3168-3. Improved availability
and serviceability through integrated channels.
Standard Features: Universal Instruction Set ... ex·tended precision floating point ... one microsecond time-of-day cloc.k with clock
comparator ... one microsecond processor timer ... dynamic address translation ... extended control mode ... program event
recording ... byte-oriented operand feature ... buffer storage
(65,536 bytes) ... fetch and store protection ... direct control
feature ... integrated channels ... 5/370 Extended Facility .. .
storage configuration control... reload able control storage .. .
interval timer ... storage error checking and correction ... instruction retry ... compare and swap ... compare double and swap ...
insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address ... clear I/O.
In addition to the above, A and M models provide channel-set
switching and four additional instructions: signal processor ... set
prefix .,. store prefix ... store CPU address.
Channels: Twelve integrated channels in two groups are standard.
Each group consists of 1 byte multiplexer channel and 5 block
multiplexer channelS. Single channel block transfer rate of up to
1.5 million bytes/second is standard and up to 3 million
bytes/second with the Two-Byte Interface (#7850) installed on
the block multiplexer channel. 256 subchannels per channel, of
which up to 8 subchannels/channel may be shared. Two optional
channel-to-channel adapters per processor.
Prerequisites: Each 3033 requires one 3037 Power and Coolant
Distribution Unit, one 3036 Console, and an appropriate 415 Hz
power input. Customer-supplied chilled water is required for cooling the system. See S/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
The 3033Attached Processor Complex requires a 3033 mdl A processor.
a 3042 Attached Processor. a 3038 Multiprocessor Communication Unit.
two (2) 3036 Consoles. and two (2) 3037 Power and Coolant Distribution
Units {each equipped with Multiprocessing (#5050)].
A 3033 Multiprocessor Complex requires two 3033 mdl M processors, a 3038 Multiprocessor Communication Unit, two (2) 3036
Consoles, and two (2) 3037 Power and Coolant Distribution Units
[each equipped with Multiprocessing (#5050).] A 3033 Processor
mdl M must be attached to a 3038 whether or not a second processor is in the complex.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
•
Motor Generator Set and Starter: If desired, see M 10000
pages for ordering instructions and prices.
•
Unit Emergency Power Off: See S/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004 for details.
•
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, #9065 fOr pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl white.
•
RETAIN/370: The capability of using remote service/logout
analysis facility is standard. Customer must provide interface
for this facility to the telephone line if he desires the feature to
be utilized.
.
MLC
4 Yr
Prices:
D
,"1\,
IV \
A~
,...r
Purchase
MMMC
$3,070,000 $7,200
3,225,000 7,520
3,375,000 7,800
3,703,000 8,415
4,003,000 8,975
7,215
7,535
7,815
8,430
8,990
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036)
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
• Models U6. M6 and A6 are not available.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
3033 TO 3033 MODEL CONVERSION PURCHASE PRICE
3033 Model U to 3033 Model A or M
(no change In storage size) ..... $5,500
3033 Model A to 3033 Model M
(no change in storage size) ..... No CIuuge
3033 Model M to 3033 Model A
(no change in storage size) ..... No Charge
3033 to 3033 MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES
From
To
U8
U12
U16
U4
U6
U8
U12
$305,000 $633,000 $933,000
150,000 478,000 778,300
328,000 628,000
300,000
From To
M8
M12
M16
$305,000 $633,000 $933,000
150,000 478,000 778,000
328,000 628,000
300,000
M4
M6
M8
M12
From To
A4
A6
A8
A12
A8
A12
A16
$305,000
150,000
$633,000
478,000
328,000
$933,000
778,000
628,000
300,000
Notes:
[1] There are no additional installation charges over the
above model conversion and model upgrade prices.
[2] The above model conversions and model upgrades are
field installable.
[3] Planning for Model Conversions and Model Upgrades:
When a customer requires model (storage) upgrades In
addition to a model conversion, the changes must not be
consolidated into a single
Also, model (storage)
upgrades should be ordered individually in one-model
increments.
{4] Parts removed in upgrades from single density models (A4.
A6. A8 ... U4. U6. U8 ... M4. M6. M8) to double density models
(AI2. AI6 ... Ul2. UI6 ... M12. MI6)" become the property of
IBM and must be returned.
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850 for first, #1851 for
second). To interconnect two channels (either S/360, 8/370, or
4341 Processor). Only one of the processors requires this feature.
Uses one control unit pOSition on each of the connected channels.
Function can be expanded under program control so .that the
adapter will operate as a standard control unit. Limitation: Cannot be installed on extended channels. Maximum: Two, one
#1850 and one #1851. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED CHANNELS (#3850). Provides four additional block
multiplexer channels. or three block multiplexer and one byte
multiplexer channels. Specify: #9150 for lour block multiplexer
channels, or #9151 for three block multiplexer and one byte
multiplexer channels. l'reretplisite: #9145 on the 3037 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit ... see "Specify" under 3037. Specify: Color --
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--- ------
--- ---- --==-=
':' =
M 3033 - 3038
May 79
DP Machines
3033 Processor (cont'd)
#9160 for wiilow green, #9161 for garnet rose, #9162 for sunrise yellow,
#9163 for classic blue, #9164 for charcoal brown, #9165 for pebble gray,
or #9f66 for pearl white. Maxllmum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
TWO-BYTE INTERFACE (#7850). One is required on each channel attaching a 3838 Array Processor in two-byte mode or a 2305
Fixed Head Storage mdl 1. Prerequisite: Third #7850 requires
Extended Channels (#3850). Maximum: One per channel group.
Field Installation: Yes. Specify: #9201 for first channel group,
#9202 for second channel group, #9203 for extended channel
group.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
Channel-to-channel Adapter
First
#1850
Second
1851
Extended Channels
3850
Two-Byte Interface
7850
MLC
4 Yr Purchase MMMC
$410 $375
410 375
8,800 8,000
38
35
$15,000
15,000
320,000
1,400
$10
10
500
1
IBM 3037 POWER AND COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT
Purpose: Provides power and coolant distribution required by a
3033 Processor or 3042 Attached Processor.
.
Highlights: One 3037 is used with each 3033 Processor or 3042
Attached Processor ... two 3037s are used in a 3033 AP or MP Complex.
Bibliography: GC20-0001.
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
•
Extended C1unme1s: #9145. Required
is installed on the 3033.
•
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl white.
•
Unit Emergency Power Off: See 8/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004 for details.
IBM 3036 CONSOLE
Purpose: Provides the switches, lights, displays and control function for a 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, 3031 Attached Processor Complex, or a 3042 Attached Processor.
Also included are devices for loading the control store from a
diskette drive, and a modem for the remote service facility. A
systems activity monitor is provided for the 3032 and 3033 Processors and the 3042 Attached Processor.
PREREQUISITE: Requires two control unit positions and four
device addresses on a channel, or preferably on two channels if a
second channel group is installed [not on 3031]. A fifth device
address is required if the remote service option is elected.
Channels (#3850)
MLC
PRICES: Mdl
3037
Highlights: One 3036 is used with each 3031, 3032 or 3033
Processor, or 3031 Attached Processor Complex. Two 3036s are
used in a 3033 AP or MP Complex. Data can be entered into processor storage or into internal registers by means of the keyboard.
Contents of storage or internal registers of the processor can be
displayed.
Basic diagnostic tests of the processor complex, including processor, storage, channels and console can be operated from the
console. Dual displays, individually addressable, with their associated input keyboards and control logic combine to provide a complete console I/O function. Either display may be used by the
customer as an operator console or by the customer engineer as a
service support console.
if Extended
1
MRC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$3,825
$3,480
$160,000
$210
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3036) ... Assignable Unit when attached to a 3042.
SPECIAL FEATURES
MULTIPROCESSING (#5050). Provides functions for operation in
a 3033 AP or MP complex ... required on each 3037 in a 3033
AP or MP complex. The 3037 must be attached to a 3033 A or M
model, or a 3042. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Multiprocessing
MRC
#5050
MLC
4 Yr
$365 $335
Purchase MMMC
$10,000
$15
IBM 3038 MULTIPROCESSOR COMMUNICATION UNIT
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
•
Cabling: [For use with 3031 Processor only] #9080 for below
floor, or #9081 for on floor.
Purpose: Control unit used in configuring a 3033 Attached Processor or Multiprocessor Complex. One is required for each complex.
Highlights: Contains hardware for communications between two
processors. Permits either processor and any channel to address all
processor storage.
•
Unit Emergency Power Off: see 8/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004 for details.
Prerequisites ... Multiprocessing (#5050) on each 3037 in the
complex, plus:
•
RETAIN/370: May be used with a 3031, 3032 or 3033 Complex: However , it is not required. Remote Support Facility
(RSF) is a customer option. When the option is selected, customer must provide the telephone lines required for the remote
service facility modem. The customer must also arrange for the
connection of the telephone interface cable provided by IBM to
the telephone network.
In a 3033 AP Complex -- a 3033 model A processor and a
3042 Attached Processor.
PRICES: Mdl
3036
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$3,585
$3,260
$150,000
$590
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Metering: Base Unit (meters other units in Processor Complex)
when attached to a 3042, the 3036 is an assignable unit and it meters the
3042 and its associated 3037.
In a 3033 MP Complex -- one or two 3033 model M
processors.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
•
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl white.
PRICES: Mdl
3038
1
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
$13,530 $12,300
Purchase
MMMC
$369,000
$340
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Metering: Base Unit (in a 3033 AP Complex -- meter on 3036
Console of 3033 mdl A ... in a 3033 MP Complex -- meter on 3036 of
first 3033 mdl M installed.)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --===
----- ----':' =
M 3041 - 3042
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3041
ATTACHED PROCESSOR
Purpose: Provides Instruction/Execution Function, Buffer Control
Function, and communication logic for a 3031 Attached Processor
Complex.
Highlights
Can access up to 6 megabytes of monolithic processor storage on
the host 3031 Processor A model ... 115 nanosecond processor
cycle ... includes 32K bytes of high speed buffer storage ...
Instruction/Execution Function similar to that of the 3031 Processor ... Buffer Control Function similar to that of the 3031 ...
controlled by reloadable control storage.
Standard features include: Universal Instruction Set ... interval
timer ... store and fetch protect .. , byte oriented operand feature
... instruction retry... dynamic address translation .. extended
control mode ... program event recording ... time-of-day clock with
clock comparator ... CPU timer ... compare and swap ... compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address
... Extended Precision Floating Point ... Virtual Machine Assist
(VMA) and OS/VS1 Extended Control Program Support (ECPS)
when operating under VM/370 ... S/370 Extended Facility.
Prerequisites: The 3041 requires a 3031 Processor A model and
a second 3017 Power Unit.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl white.
Prices: Mdl
3041
MRC
$12,820
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
$11,660 $335,000
MMMC
$900
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
SPECIAL FEATURES
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274). Provides two instructions, "Read
Direct" and "Write Direct", and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data and channel operations. The read
and write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single
byte between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. The read and
write instructions must use real addresses only. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
8/370 - Direct Control Feature - OEMI, GA22-6845.
Special Feature Prices:
Direct Control
#3274
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
$104
$ 95
Purchase MMMC
$3,700
$ 1 .50
IBM 3 0 4 2 A T T A C H E.D P R OC E S S 0 R
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, and control functions in a
3033 Attached Processor Complex.
Highlights: Can access up to 16,777,216 bytes of processor
storage on the host 3033 Model A processor ... double-words are
eight-way interleaved ... eight byte parallel data flow... includes
65,536 bytes of 57 nanosecond cycle buffer storage which is
transparent to the program and significantly reduces the effective
access time of storage ... buffer storage does not increase the
amount of addressable storage ... 57 nanosecond processor cycle
... overlapped operation of instruction and execution functions ...
extensive data checking.
Standard Features: Universal Instruciion Set ... extended precision floating point ... one microsecond time-of-day clock with clock
comparator ... one microsecond processor timer ... dynamic address translation ... extended control mode ... program event
recording .. , byte-oriented operand feature ... buffer storage
(65,536 bytes) ... fetch and store protection ... direct control
feature .. , S/370 Extended Facility ... reloadable control storage
... interval timer ... instruction retry... compare and swap ...
compare double and swap .. , insert PSW key... set PSW key
from address ... channel-set switching and four instructions: signal
processor ... set prefix ... store prefix ... store CPU address.
Prerequisites: The 3033 Attached Processor Complex requires a
3042 Attached Processor, a 3033 Model A processor, a 3038
Multiprocessor Communication Unit, two (2) 3036 Consoles, two
(2) 3037 Power and Coolant Distribution Units [each with Multiprocessing (#5050)], and an approximate 415 Hz power input.
Customer-supplied chilled water is required for cooling the system.
See 8/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
Bibli09raphy: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
Motor Generator Set and Starter: If desired, see M 10000
pages for ordering instructions and prices.
Unit Emergency Power Off: See 8/370 Installation Manual Physical Planning, GC22-7004 for details.
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose,
#9062 for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for
charcoal brown, #9065 for pebble gray, or #9066 for pearl
white.
RETAIN/370: The capability of using remote support/logout
analysis facility is standard. Customer must provide interface
for this facility to the telephone line if he desires to utilize this
feature.
Prices:
3042
Mdl
MRC
MLC
4 Yr
$39,400 $35,820
Purchase
MMMC
$895,500
$2,750
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 3
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 50%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Metering: Assignable Unit (meter on attached 3036)
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'---- --------== =-= == ==
M 3046 - 3052
May 79
~
DP Machines
3052 ATTACHED
IBM 3046 POWER UNIT
Purpose: Provides power for a 3135, 3135-3 or 3138 Processing
Unit, or for a 3345 Storage and Control mdl 1, 2, 4 or 5 with a
3145 Processing Unit mdl HG or I.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
SPECIFV: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor: #9081 for qn the floor.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3046
1
$356
TLP/
MLC
4 Vear
$324
Purchase MMMC
$10,860
$ 30
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3135, 3138 or 3145)
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 45%t
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, control and communication
function for an Attached Processor System.
Hlghllghtl: Can access up to 6,291,456 bytes of monolithic processor storage on the host 31 58 or 31 58-3 ... 115 nanosecond
processor cycle ... includes 16,384 bytes of buffer storage which
is transparent to the programmer and reduces the effective cycle
time accessing the host storage. Sixteen general purpose and four
floating point registers are implemented in high speed internal
circuits with a four byte data flow. The APU functions are controlled by reloadable control storage.
Standard features include: Universal instruction set ... interval
timer ... store and fetch protect ... byte oriented operand feature
... instruction retry '" dynamic address translation ... extended
control mode ... program event recording ... time-of-day clock with
clock compl\rator ... CPU timer ... compare and swap ... compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address.
PREREQUISITES: The 3052 Attached Processor Unit mdl 1 requires (1) A 3158 or 3158-3 A series processing unit ... (2) A
3056 Remote System Console.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Speci1y: £11 Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, #9045 for
gray, or #9046 for white.
IBM 3047 POWER UNIT
Purpose: Provides power for a 3145 Processing Unit mdl H2,
HG2, 12, IH2, J2, JI2 or K2, or 3145-3,3148 Processing Unit.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on floor.
[4] If two processors are installed and the 3052 is additional and
. emer~ency power of! ability is required on the systems, then the expanded Emergency ]>ower Off Control (#3622) should be ordered for
the host processor.
.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9.081 for on the floor.
[4] Field Conversion of a 3145 mdl FED, GE, GFD, H, HG or I to a
mdl H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2, JI2 or K2, requires a 3047 mdl 2.
Conversion from a mdl FED, GE, GFD, H, HG or I to a mdl JI2
or K2 will be made via RPQ.
PRICES:
Mdl
3052
TLP/
MAC/
MLC
MRC
4 Vear
Purchase
$12,670 $11,520 $360,000
MMMC
$2,200
Plan Offering: A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
Prlcel:
3047
Mdl
1
MAC/
MRC
$378
TLP/
MLC
4 Vear
$344
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274). Provides two instructions, "Read
Direct" .and "Write Direct", and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequlalte8:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
S/370 - Direct Control Feature - OEMI, GA22-6845.
Purchase MMMC
$1~,550 $ 29
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3145 or 3148) Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 45%t
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Provides
EXTENDED PRECISION FLOATING POINT (#3700).
instructions to handle extended precision (28-hexadeclmal digit
fraction) floating point operands. Extended pre.::lsion operands
may also be rounded to long-precision format, which in turn may
be rounded to short-precision format. Field Inlt,lIatlon: Yes.
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 COMPATIBILlTV (#3950).
Provides the system with the ability to execute 1401/1440/1460 and
1410/7010 Instructions under specific conditions of minimum and
matching configurations ... see P 360N pages for DOS and P
360C pages for as. Field Inltolllatlon: Yes. LImitation: This
feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with
System/370Extended (#7730).
OS/DOS COMPATIBILITY (#5450). Provides the system with the
ability to execute DOS programs under specific conditions ... see
P 360C pages in "Programming." Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730).
PROCESSOR .ATTACH (#5552).
Provides additional .storage
protect capability required when the APU .is attached to a model
A-Serles processing unit whose storage size Is over one megabyte.
One feature is required for each megabyte. of storage in the ASeries processor above one megabyte, e.g.
t
Purchase Option is SO'll under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without .written ;petmission_
------- -----------
M
==-==~= DP Machines
3052 Attached Processing Unit (cont'd)
Proceaaor Model
No. of Processor
Attach Feature
AP3 or AP4, A33 or A34
AP5, A35
AP6, A36
AP7, A37
AP8, A38
Purp0a8: Control unit used In configuring a S/370 mdl 158 Multiprocessor System. One is required for each system containing one
or two 3158/3158-3 multiprocessor models.
Maximum: Five. Field Installation: Yes.
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
System/370 Extended (#7730) and
Yes.
Prerequisites:
System/370 Extended. Add'i (#7731) on the A-series processor.
limitation: This function cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950),
OS/DOS Compatibility (#5450), or 7070/7074 Compatibility
(#7117).
7070/7074 COMPATIBiliTY (#7117). Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7070/7074 instructions under specific conditions ... see P 360C pages in " Programming." Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at
IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730).
Highlights: Permits two 3158/3158-3 multiprocessing units to be
interconnected to form a multiprocessing system. Contains configuration control facilities for mode of operation (MP /UP), storage address assignment, and attachment of I/O control units
having the remote switch attachment feature.
PREREQUISITES: One or two 3158 multiprocessing models ... I/O
control units which are to be connected to the I/O assignment
switches on the configuration control panel must have the two
channel switch feature and the remote switch ,attachment feature.
Field Installation: Yes.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 foryellow, #9043 for
blue, #9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[2] Processor Models: Must be specified.
Feature
Symmetrical Procesaors
MPl or M31
#9501
MP2 or M32
9502
MP3 or M33
9503
MP4 or M34
9504
9505
MP5 or M35
MP6 or M36
9506
Asymmetric Procesaors
Left Procesaor
Feature
Right Procesaor
#9181
M32
M32
M34
M34
9183
M35
9185
M35
M36
9187
M36
M37
9189
M37
M38
9191
M38
VIRTUAL MACHINE ASSIST (#8740).
Provides assist to VS
operating systems operating under VM/370 by emulation of certain privileged operations. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr Purchase
#3274 $123 $112
Direct Control
NC
NC
Extnd Prec Fltng Pt
3700
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010
Compatibility
3950
NC
NC
NC
OS/DOS Compatibility
5450
NC
82
Processor Attach
5552
90
NC
7070/7074 Compatibility 7117
NC
935 850
System/370 Extended
7730
Virtual Machine Assist
8740
NC
NC
MMMC
$3,705
NC
$ 4
NC
NC
NC
2,700
NC
17,000
NC
NC
NC
15
NC
6
NC
PRICES:
IBM 3056 REMOTE SYSTEM CONSOLE
Purpose: Provides an additional keyboard and cathode ray tube
for remote operation of a S/370 mdl 158 or is used as a diagnostic console for the 3052 Attached Processing Unit.
Highlights: Permits remote system operation up to 200 feet from
the 3158 or 3158-3, including the ability to communicate with the
operating system via PROGRAM frame, IPL via MANUAL frame,
system debug via ALTER/DISPLAY frame, and display hardware
status via maintenance frames. The unit has no light pen. Also,
acts as a diagnostic console for a 3052 Attached Processing Unit
(APU), permitting most APU maintenance functions to be performed while the A-8eries Processing Unit continues operation in
uniprocessor mode. A 3056 attached to a 3052 is required as
part of a S/370 mdl 158 Attached Processor System. When attached to a 3052, the 3056 may not be used as a remote console.
A 3056 attached to a 3158 or 3158-3 for remote system operation
may not be used as a diagnostic console for the 3052. If both
modes of operation are required for a S/370 mdl 158 AP System,
two 3056s should be ordered.
MAC/
MAC
Mdl
TLP
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase MMMC
SPECIAL FEATURES
I/O ASSIGNMENT SWITCH EXPANSION (#4800),
Adds an
,additional 14 assignment switches to the basic 14 on the configuration panel of the 3058. Maximum: One. Field Inatallatlon: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
I/O Aaalgn Sw Expan
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 yr Purchase MMMC
#4600 $112 $102 $5,495
Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: (1) One per 3158 or 3158-3 ... (2) One per 3052 ...
when attached to a 3052, the maximum distance between the
3056 and the 3052 is twenty feet.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
3056
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
$ 545 $ 496
Purchase MMMC
$20,800
Featur.
#9182
9184
9188
9188
9190
9192
$1,370 $1,250
$48,990 $21.50
3058
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 1st 3158 mdl MP or M3 installed)
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination .Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
PREREQUISITE: 3056 Remote Console Attachment (#7820) on
the 3158 or 3158-3. Not required when the 3056 is attached to a
3052.
PRICES:
- 3058
May 79
IBM 3058 MULTISYSTEM UNIT
1
2
3
4
5
MAC/
MRC
305~
$ 10
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3158, 3158-3 or 3052)
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$ 1
------:E:=-:
------==" ==
M 3060 - 3062
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3080 SYSTEM CONSOLE
IBM 3062 ATTA'CHED PROCESSING UNIT
[No Longer Available]
Purpose: Provides the switches and lights necessary to operate
the S/360 mdl 195 or S/370 mdl 195.
Highlight.: One unit Is used with each 3195 Processing Unit.
Data can be entered Into proceBBOr storage or Into internal registers by keys and switches. Contents of storage or Internal registers of the mdl 195 can be displayed. Basic maintenance tests of
the processor, including storage, can be operated from the console. A display console Is Included which Is functionally equivalent
to a 2250 mdl 1 with the following features: Alphameric keyboard,
8K buffer (4K Is maintenance only), character generator, light pen,
and OCP-Flrst. The display console and Operator Console Panel
which are Included may be used as an operator's console.
PREREQUISITE: A control unit position on a 2860, 2870 with
Selector Subchannel (special feature), or a non-shared subchannel
of a 2880.
'
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #1103 for
208 V, or #1105 for 230 V.
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following special feature Is on an "as available" basis for field
installation.
OPERATOR CONTROL PANEL - SECOND (#5478). Provides a
duplicate of the on/off and program load facilities (OCP) of a
second processing unit. Maximum: One.
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, control, and communication
function for an Attached Processor System.
Highlight.: Can access up to 8,388,608 bytes of monolithic processor storage on the host 3168-3 ... eight byte parallel data flow
... includes up to 32,768 bytes of 80 nanosecond cycle buffer
storage which is transparent to the program and significantly
reduces the effective cycle time of storage ... buffer storage does
not increase the amount of addressable storage ... 80 nanosecond
processor cycle ... double-words are four-way interleaved ... overlapped operation of instruction and execution units ... extensive
data checking is coupled with 3168-3 reliability, availability and
serviceability. Improved availability and serviceability through a
service processor.
Stana.rd Featur..: Universal instruction set ... extended p..-cision ... one-microsecond time-of-day clock with clock comparator
... one-microsecond CPU timer ... dynamic address translation ...
extended control mode ... program event recording ... additional
variable field length instructions ... control registers, expanding the
functions of PSWs ... byte oriented operand feature ... buffer
storage (32,768 bytes) ... fetch and store protection ... wrlteable
control storage ... interval timer ... storage error checking and
correction ... Instruction retry ... compare and swap ... compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address
... store CPU 10, additional instructions on the APU signal processor ... set prefix store prefix ... store CPU address.
PREREQUISITES: The 3062 APU mdl 1 requires: [1] A 3168
model A series processor ... [2] A 3066 System Console mdl 3
(shared with 3168-3) ... [3] A 3067 mdl 5 for the APU ... [4] A
3062 Mdl 1 Attached Processing Unit Support (#7901) on the,
CPU 3067 mdl 3 ... [5] All appropriate 415Hz power illput.
Customer-supplied chilled water is required for cooling the system.
See S/370 Installation Manual - Phyical Planning, GC22-7004 ...
[6J Special features 011 the 3062 must match those 011 the 3168 for a
IIormal illstallation. Whell special features do II0t match, RPQ
must be orderedfor the 3168.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #'9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Motor Generator Set and Starter if desired: See M 10000
pages for ordering instructions and prices.
[4] If two processors are installed and the 3062 is added alld emergellcy
power off ability is required 011 the systems, thell the expanded Emergellcy Power Off COlltrol (#3624) should be ordered for the host
processor.
.
PRICES:
3082
Mdl
1
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
$53,000 $48,190
Purchase
MMMC
$1,078,000 $5,100
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: NOli-assignable (runs with Processor)
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: A
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (4525). Improves AU speed in both fixed
and floating point multiply operations. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisites: High Speed Multiply (#4525) on the
3066 System Console mdl 3 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant
Distribution Unit mdl 5.
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: System/370 Extended (#7730) on the Aseries processor or on a 3168 with RPQs,
(Performance
(APU Attach).
Improvements) and
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr
High Speed Multiply #4525 $3,035$2,760
System/370 Extended 7730 3,575 3,250
t
1'urcbaR 0pIi0D is
so.
uader Term Leuc PIa1l (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
Purchase MMMC
$145,950 $131
65,000
50
----------- ----- -.---=_=
':' =
M 3066
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3066 SYSTEM CONSOLE - MODEL 1
[The 3066 model 1 ;s no longer available ... features and model
changes can be ordered on an "as available" basis.]
Purpose: Provides the switches, lights, display and control functions for a S/370 mdl 165.
Highlights: One 3066 mdl 1 is used with each 3165 Processing
Unit. Data can be entered into processor storage or into internal
registers by keys and switches. Contents of storage or internal
registers of the system can be displayed.
Basic maintenance tests of the processor, including storage, can
be operated from the console. A display console with a 4K buffer,
an input keyboard, and associated control logic combine to provide a complete console I/O function. In normal mode, the CRT
and the alphameric keyboard are designed to be used as the
operator's console.
Also included is a microfiche projection display, a microfiche
document viewer, a main storage configuration plugboard, a systems activity monitor, and a device for inputting microcode from a
magnetic disk cartridge to the writable control storage.
A 3066 mdl 3 is used with each 3168-3 A series to support a
3062-1 APU.
Basic maintenance tests of the processor, including storage, can
be operated from the console. A display console with a 4K buffer,
an input keyboard, and associated control logic combine to provide a complete console I/O function. In normal mode, the CRT
and the alphameric keyboard are designed to be used as the
operator's console.
PREREQUISITE: A control unit position on a 2860 Selector Channel, 2870 Basic Multiplexer Channel, 2870 Selector Subchannel
(special feature), or a non-shared subchannel of a 2880 Block
Multiplexer Channel ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
Also included is a microfiche projection display, a microfiche
document viewer, a main storage configuration plugboard, a systems activity monitor, and a device for inputting microcode from a
magnetic disk cartridge to the writable control storage.
SPECIFY: (1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
PREREQUISITE: A control unit position on a 2860 Selector Channel, 2870 Basic Multiplexer Channel, 2870 Selector Subchannel
(special feature), or a non-shared subchanne.1 of a 2880 Block
Multiplexer Channel ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
Mdl
3066
(2) 3168-3 Attachment: #9650 ... req'd to attach a 3168-3 Processing Unit.
PRICES:
3066
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
PRICES:
Bibliography: GC20-0001
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$3,825
$128,150
$552
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meters 3165, 3067 mdl 1)Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 1
Model 1 to Model 2 ..•.. $ 4,165
Modell to Model 3 ..... $ 8,715
SPECIAL FEATURES
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4520). Required if feature #4520 is
installed on the 3165 Processing. Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: High Speed Multiply (#4520) on the
3165 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117).
Required if feature
#7117 is installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation:
Not recommended.
Prerequisite:
7070/7074
Compatibility
(#7117) on the 3165 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7118).
Required if feature #7118 is
installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7118) on the
3165 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7119). Required if
feature #7119 is installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7119) on the 3165 and
on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdt 1.
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
High Speed Multiply
7070/7074 Compatibility
7080 Compatibility
709/7090/7094/7094 II
Compatibility
#4520
7117
711.8
$ 10
5
5
7119
5
$
589
262
262
NC
NC
NC
262
NC
2
3
MAC/
MRC
TLPI
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$3,825
3,960
$3,480
3,600
$128,150
132,700
$552
562
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meters 3168[any mdl), 3067 mdl 2, 3)
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6
Machine Group: 0
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges.)
Model 2 to Model 3 ..... $4,550
Note: The 3066 mdl 1 can be field upgraded to a 3066 mdl 2 or
3.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges.)
Mdl
SPECIAL FEATURES
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4525). Required if feature #4525 is
installed on the 3168/3168-3 Processing Unit. Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: High Speed Multiply (#4525) on the
3168/3168-3 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution
Unit mdl 2, 3 or 5.
MULTIPROCESSING (#5050).
Required if the 3066 mdl 2 is
used with a 3168 or 3168-3 multiprocessor model. Field
Installation: Yes.
POWER WARNING (#5760). Provides signal to the 3168/31683 system when power is outside specified limits. Prerequisites: All
models require customer supplied uninterruptible power supply
with line sensor. Multiprocessing models also require special cable
... consult physical planning representative. Field Installation: Yes.
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7127).
Required if feature
#7127 is installed on the 3168/3168-3 Processing Unit. Field
Installation: Not recommended. Prerequisite: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127) on the 3168/3168-3 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdi 2 or 3.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7128).
Required if feature #7128 is
installed on the 3168/3168-3 Processing Unit. Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7128) on
the 3168/3168-3 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution
Unit mdl 2 or 3.
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7129). Required if
feature #7129 is installed on the 3168/3168-3 Processing Unit.
Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
709/7090/7094/7094
II
Compatibility
(#7129)
on
the
3168/3168-3 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution
Unit mdl 2 or 3.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC
Purpose: Provides the switches, lights, display and control functions for a S/370 mdl 168.
High Spead Multiply
#4525 $ 10 $ 10 $ 589
4,475
5050
90
82
Multiprocessing
5760 142 130
5,725
Power Warning
5
5
262
7070/7074 Compatibility 7127
7080 Compatibility
7128
5
5
262
709/7090/7094/7094 II
5
262
Compatibility
7129
5
Hlghlfghts: One 3066 mdl 2 is used with each 3168/3168-3
Processing Unit. Data can be entered into processor storage or
internal registers by keys and switches. Contents of storage or
internal registers of the 3168/3168-3 can be displayed.
t
IBM 3066 SYSTEM CONSOLE - MODEL 2 AND
3
Pu~cha.e Option, is 50% unde~ Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
NC
$ 1
1
NC
NC
NC
"----- --------
M 3087
May 79
==-==~=
DP Machines
3067 POWER and COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT - MODEL
1
[The 3067 model 1 Is no longer BVBilBble .. feBtures Bnd model
chBnges CBn be ordered on Bn "BS BVBilBble" bBSis.]
3067 POWER and COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT - MODEL
2
Purpose: Provides power and coolant distribution control required
by a S/370 mdl 168.
Highlights: One 3067 mdl 2 is used with each 3168 Processing
Unit.
Purpose: Provides power and coolant distribution control required
by a S/370 mdl 165.
Bibliography:
Hlghllghta: One 3067 mdl 1 Is used with each 3165 Processing
Unit.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
Bibliography:
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9048 for white.
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9042 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9048 for white.
[3] Channel Frames: The number of channel frames specified on
the power distribution unit must be equal or greater than the
channel frames actually attached. Required for channel frame
attachment are the following:
#9132 - for 2nd channel frame
#9133 - for 3rd channel frame ... #9132 required
#9134 - for 4th channel frame ... #9133 required
#9135 - for 5th channel frame ... #9134 required
#9138 - for 6th channel frame ... #9135 required
#9137 - for 7th channel frame ... #9136 required
NOTE: Customers who may elect to purchase and have present
or future requirements for seven channel frames should order
#9132 thru #9137.
PRICES:
Mdl
3087
1
GC20-0001
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3087
2
S2,825
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
S2,570
S95,130
S131
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066 mdl 2)
Maintenance: A
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
Useful life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model 2 can be changed to Model 3 in the field.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 2 to Model 3 ........ S1,230
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 2,825
S95,~30
S131
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066 mdl 1)
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful life Category: 1
Warranty: B
SPECIAL FEATURES
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1435).
Required if feature #1435 is
installed on the 3168 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Buffer Expansion (#1435) on the 3168.
Note: The 3067 mdl 1 can be field upgraded to a 3067 mdl 2.
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4525). Required if feature #4525 is
installed on the 3168 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: High Speed Multiply (#4525) on the
3168 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
Installation charges)
Multiprocessing (#5050).
Required if the 3067 is used with a
3168 mdl MP. Field Installation: Yes.
From Model 1 to Model 2 ••.•• S 3,040
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7127). Required if feature #7127
is installed on the 3168 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127) on
the 3168 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
SPECIAL FEATURES
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1432).
Required if feature #1432 is
Installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Buffer Expansion (#1432) on the 3165.
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4520). Required if feature #4520 is
installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: High Speed Multiply (#4520) on the
3165 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 1.
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117). Required if feature #7117
Ise installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117) on
the 3165 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 1.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7118).
Required if feature #7118 is
installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7118) on the
3165 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 1.
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7119).
Required if
feature #7119 is installed on the 3165 Processing Unit. Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
709/7090/7094/7094 II (#7119) on the 3165 and on the 3066
System Console mdl 1.
t
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7129).
Required if
feature #7129 is installed on the 3168 Processing Unit. Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7129) on the 3168 and
on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
Special Feature Prices:
#1432
4520
7117
7118
7119
S114 S 5,630
148
7,105
422
20,440
422 20,440
422
20,440
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC
Buffer Expansion
#1435 $114 S104 S 5,830
High Speed Multiply
4525 148 135
7,105
Multiprocessing
5050 342 311
16,720
7070/7074 Compatibility 7127 422 384
20,440
7080 Compatibility
7128 422 384 20,440
709/7090/7094/7094 "
Compatibility
7129 422 384
20,440
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Buffer Expansion
High Speed Multiply
7070/7074 Compatibility
7080 Compatibility
709/7090/7094/709411
Compatibility
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7128).
Required if feature #7128 is
installed on the 3168 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7128) on the
3168 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
S 5.00
5.00
35.50
35.50
35.50
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
S 5.00
5.00
23.00
35.50
35.50
35.50
-----~---:i =:: :5~~
M 3067 - 3068
May 79
DP Machines
3087 POWER and COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT - MODEL
3
Purpoae: Provides power and coolant distribution control required
by a S/370 mdl 168.
Highlights: One 3067 mdl 3 is used with each 3168-3 Processing
Unit.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V. or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#8045 for gray, or #9048 for white.
PRICES:
3087
MAC/
Mdl.,..,.. MRC
3...
$2,875
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
$2,815
$98,380
$132
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate:10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066 mdl 2)
Maintenance: A
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3087
5
$2,825
MULnPROCESSING (#5050). Required If the 3067 Is used with
a 3168-3 multiprocessing model. Field Installation: Yes.
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7127). Required If feature #7127
Is Installed on the 3168-3 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127) on
the 3188-3 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
7080 COMPAnBILITY (#7128). Required if feature #7128 Is
Installed on the 3168-3 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7128) on the
3168-3 and on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
Purchase
$2,570
$95,130
MMMC
$131
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066 mdl 3)
Maintenance: A
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: B
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 6
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4525). Required If feature #4525 is
Installed on the 3062 Attached Processing Unit. Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prarequlslte: High Speed Multiply (#4525) on
the 3062 Attached Processing Unit and on the 3066 System
Console mdl 3.
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC
Spacial Feature Prices:
High Speed Multiply
#4525 $148 $135 $7,105
$5
3088 MULTISVSTEM COMMUNICATION UNIT
SPECIAL FEATURES
HIGH SPEED MULnPLY (#4525). Required If feature #4525 Is
Installed on the 3168-3 Processing Unit. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisite: High Speed Multiply (#4525) on the
3168-3 and on the 3086 System Console mdl 2.
TLP
MLC
4 Yr
Purpose: Control unit used in configuring a S/370 mdl 168 Multiprocessor System. One is required for each system containing one
or two 3168/3168-3 multiprocessor models.
Hlghllghta: Contains hardware for communications between two
S/370 mdl 168 multiprocessing processors together with configuration control facilities for mode of operation (MP /UP), storage
address assignment, and attachment of I/O control units having
the remote switch attachment feature.
PREREQUISITES: One or two 3168/3168-3 multiprocessor models
... I/O control units which are to be connected to the I/O assignment switches on the configuration control panel must have the
two channel switch feature and the remote switch attachment
feature. If the 3068 is to be installed with only one of the 3168/3168-3
multiprocessors models. order additional end cover via RPQ
709/70fJ0/7094/7094 II COMPAnBILITY (#7129). Required If
feature #7129 Is Installed on the 3168-3 Processing Unit. Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
709/1090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7129) on the 3168-3 and
on the 3066 System Console mdl 2.
Field Installation: Yes.
Bibliography: GC2()"()001
3082 ATTACHED PROCESSING UNIT MDL 1 SUPPORT (#7901).
Required If a 3062 APU mdl 1 Is attached to the 3168. Field
lnatallatton: Yes. Corequlslte: 3082 APU mdl 1.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9048 for white.
TLP/
SpecIal Feature Prices:
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr
Purchase MMMC
#4525 $148 $135 $ 7,105 $ 5.00
High Speed Multiply
Multiprocessing
5050 342 311 18,720 23.00
7070/7074 Compatibility 7127 422 384 20,440 35.50
7080 Compatibility
7128 422 384 20,440 35.50
709/70fJ0/7094/7094II
Compatibility
7129 422 384 20,440 35.50
3082 APU Support
7901
50
48
2,500
5.00
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for
208 V, or #9904 for 230 V.
PRICES:
Mdl
3088
1
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
$14,590 $13,270
Purchase
MMMC
$500,800
$387
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
3087 POWER AND COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT - MODEL 5
EXTENDED STORAGE ATTACHMENT (#3850),
Provides for
attachment of Extended Storage Control (t4MB) if either processor
Is a model MP5, MP6, MP7, MP8, M35, M36, M37 or M38.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Purpose: Provides power and coolant distribution control required
by a 3082 Attached Processing Unit mdl 1.
I/O ASSIGNMENT SWITCH EXPANSION (#4800).
Adds an
additional 14 assignment switches to the basic 14 on the configuration panel of the 3068. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Highlights: One 3087 mdl 5 ·Is used with the 3062 Attached ProceSSing Unit mdl 1.
PREREQUISITE: A 3062 Attached Processing Unit mdl 1.
Bibliography: GC2()"()OO1
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #H03 for
208 V or #9SI05 for 230 V.
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purchase MMMC
Spacial Feature Prlcea:
Extended Storage Attach #3850 $140 $128 $8,875
NC
I/O Assign Sw Expansn
4800 112 102
5,495
$ 1 ,
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#8045 for gray, or #9048 for white.
t
Purdwe Optio1l iI ~ UDder Term Leue Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- - -- -----_.-
-
M 3080 - 3086
Nay 79
DP Machines
3080 POWER UNIT
[No longer Available]
Purpose: Provides power for the S/360 mdl 195 or S/370 mdl
195.
Highlights: One unit of each model of the 3080 Is used with each
3195 Processing Unit. Model 1 provides power for the Floating
Point Execution Element ... Model 2 provides power for the Fixed
Point and Variable Field length Execution Element ... Model 3
provides power for the Instruction Processor and the Storage
Control Unit.
Bibliography: GC2o.:0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3085 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNIT
[No longer Available]
Purpose: Provides power control and distribution for a S/360 mdl
195 or S/370 mdl 195.
Highlights: One unit is used with each 3195 Processing Unit.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
3086 COOLANT DISTRIBUTION UNIT
[No longer Available]
Purpose: Provides distribution control for coolant required by the
S/360 mdl 195 or S/370 mdl 195.
Highlights: One unit Is used with each 3195 Processing Unit.
PREREQUISITE: Customer-supplied chilled water is required for
the cooling system. See 5/360 Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GC22-6820.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - -----_.----------- -----
M 3115.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3115 PROCESSING UNIT
conditions and provides control for the display, keyboard. console
file and optional console printer.
Purpose: Provides main and control storage. plus arithmetic and
logic circuits for a S/370 mdl 115 including a direct disk attachment.
The standard console file is the basic microprogram loading device
for the system. It contains a small file device, which reads and
writes on a removable magnetic IBM Diskette. The diskettes that
will be supplied with the system will contain the required microcode for the basic system, the optional features ordered for the
system. and CE diagnostics.
The 3115-0 and 3115-2 Processing Units are available in the
following model groups:
Models:
3115-0
3115-2
Processor Storage Size
F
F2
65,536 bytes
FE
FE2
98,304 bytes
131,072 bytes
Dynamic Address Translation (OAT) is a standard facility on the
model 115. Since logical storage addressing is not limited by the
amount of available real storage, program size may exceed real
storage size. This logical storage is referred to as "virtual
storage" and may be as large as 16,777.216 bytes on the model
115.
G
G2
GE
GE2
163,840 bytes
GF
GF2
196,608 bytes
H2
262,144 bytes
HG2
393,216 bytes,
For differences between the two model
"Systems" pages.
series refer to the
, NOTE: If 3411 Magnetic Tape and Control is attached see Magnetic
Tape Adapter special feature paragraph for RPQ requirement.
Highlights: Depending upon the model, 65,536 to 393,216 bytes
of processor storage are available. The basic main memory cycle
time is 480 nanoseconds for 2 bytes. Sixteen general, sixteen
control and four floating point re9isters are provided. The system
design provides distributed microcoded processors within the
Central Processing Unit for the independent handling of programs,
input/output processing and diagnostic/maintenance.
Direct
attachment of the 3340 DASF Subsystem or the 3340/3344 DAS
Subsystem (3115-2 only) is provided. Depending on model and
features up to eight drives can be attached. In a 3340 DASF
Subsystem, via the string switch capability (#9315), the 3340 mdl
A2 can be shared with another S/370, except 3115-0 and 3125O. For details and restrictions refer to the Direct Disk Attachment
paragraph.
The 2311 Mdl 1/3340 - Series and the 2314/3340 - Series
Compatibility features are available as options. They are mutually
exclusive. Emulation is under DOS and DOS/VS only. 2311 mdl 1
emulation under DOS/VS requires SYSRES on 3340.
Capability to attach the 3803/3420 or 3411/3410 magnetic tape
subsystem model 1, 2 or 3 via the optional Magnetic Tape Adapter.
Capability to natively attach one of the following card I/O: 2560
mdl A1 or A2, or the 5425 mdl A1 or A2 (96 column card) via the
optional Integrated Card I/O Attachment features.
Capability to attach a wide variety of I/O devices via the optional
Byte Multiplexer Channel. NOTE: The Integrated Card I/O Attachment and the Byte Multiplexer Channel cannot be installed on the
are installed.
same system unless RPQs
Capability to natively attach the 5213 Printer mdl 1 (85 cps) is
provided with the optional integrated console printer attachment on
the 3115. This console printer provides hardcopy output of operator messages presented on the Display Operator Console (DOC).
The optional 1052 Compatibility feature is available to emulate the
1052 Printer keyboard in the S/370 mdl 115. 1052 Compatibility
(#8005) in combination with the 5213 Printer mdl 1 allows the
model 11 5 to be used as a remote workstation with HASPRMT /360. NOTE: The 1052 compatibility mode is not supported
under DOS/VS. With DOS/VS, the 5213 mdl 1 will act as a slave
unit to the DOC.
Capability to attach up to 5 synchronous lines, or up to 4 synchronous and up to 8 asynchronous lines is provided by the optional
Integrated Communications Adapter with appropriate features.
Capability to attach the 5203 Printer mdl 3 or 3203 Printer mdl 1
or 2 is provided with optional Integrated Printer Attachment features.
The optional S/360 Model 20 and 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility
features are available to allow execution 01 the instructions of
those programs.
y'
The CE logout of machine and I/O related control checks and
errors are recorded on the diskette for CE diagnosis, to enhance
the reliability, availability, and serviceability of the S/370 mdl 115.
Standard features include S/370 commercial instruction set,
Extended Control (EC) Mode, Dynamic Address Translation, Channel Indirect Data Addressing, Program Event Recording (PER),
Monitor Call, interval timer, time-of-day clock, CPU-Timar and
Clock Comparator, store and fetch protect, byte oriented operand
feature, error checking and correction of single bit errors on main
storage, and Audible Alarm.
Control Storage: On the 3115-0, reloadable control storage for
the Service Processor (SVP), and Direct Disk Attachment and the
basic part of the Machine Instruction Processor (MIP) is provided
as standard on the 3115 Processor Unit. In addition, reloadable
control storage is provided with the optional Card I/O Attachment,
Printer Attachment, Integrated Communications Adapter (ICA), Byte
Multiplexer Channel. The MIP contains as standard, 20K words of
22 bits of control storage and may be expanded either to 24K
words (4K Control Storage Extension, #4101) or to 28K words
(8K Control Storage Extension, #4104). #4101 and #4104 are
mutually exclusive. See Chart A below for possible feature combinations and control storage requirements.
NOTE: Customers who elect to purchase the 4K Control Storage
Extension and later upgrade to the 8K Control Storage Extension
should consider the purchase of the 8K Control Storage Extension
initially because this field upgrade requires replacement of the 4K
Control Storage Extension and installation of the 8K Control Storage Extension. This is, however, not recommended for customers
considering to eventually convert to a 3115-2.
On the 3115-2, the Instruction Processing Unit (IPU) contains as
standard, 12K words of control storage. Certain feature combinations can use up to two additional 4K words increments totaling
20K words of control storage. See Chart B for details.
Chart A: Listed below are the valid feature combinations and their
respective requirements for additional control storage on the
3115-0.
Optional FeaBasic
4K Control Storage
8K Control Storage
tures -- Model
Control Extension ... t4101 Extension ... t4104
3115-0
Storage Req ulred*
Req uired *
Floating Point
x x
x
x
xx xx
. t3900 *"
Floating POint
incldg Ext'd
x
xx x x
xx
pc
Precision
,t3910 *"
'1401/1440/1460
x
x xxxx xx
xx x
CmD!b'ltv *4457
S/360 Mdl20
x
x
xxx
x
xxxxx
Cmptblty *7520
2311-1/3340
Series Cmptblty
x
x X Ix
X
X X
x
t8060***
2314/3340
Series Cmptblty
x
x
x
X
x x
*8070***
• #4101 and #4104 are
.. #3900 and #39 IO are
• •• #8060 and #8070 are
#8060 and #8070 are
mutually
mutually
mutually
mutually
The Display Operator Console (DOC) is an integral part of the
S/370 mdl 115 and enhimces operator-machine communications.
Data can be entered into main storage or into internal registers via
the keyboard. Contents of storage or internal registers of the
S/370 mdl 115 can be shown on the video screen with 16 lines of
56 characters/line. A portion of the screen is reserved to display
machine status. The Service Processor (SVP) continuously monitors system operation and logs errors on the magnetic IBM Diskette device. The SVP initiates recovery on detection of error
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
exclUSive.
exclusive.
exclusive. In addition,
exclusive with specify #9190.
M 3115.~
Jul79
DP Machines
3115 Processing Unit (cont'd)
Chart B: Listed below are the valid feature combinations and their
respective requirements for additional control storage on the
115-2.
Second Control
Storage InereFirst Control Storage
Optional Features Basic
ment -14101 &
Control
Increment - *4101
- Model 3115-2
*4102 Required
Storage Required
F loaUng POint Including Extended
Precision '113910
x x
xx
x x x x
x
x
1401/1440/1460
Compatibility
.4457 *"
5/360 Mdl 20
Compatibility
*7520 *"
2311-1/3340
Series Cmptblty
*8060*
23l4/3340
Series Cmptblty
1*8070*
x
x
x
x x
x x
x x x
x
x
x
x x
x
on the 3203. On the 5203, UCS control may be specified on
Integrated 5203 Mdl 3 Attachment (#4690).
Integrated Console Printer Attachment (optional) - attaches the
5213 Printer mdl 1 to the 3115 to provide hardcopy of operator
messages presented on the standard Display Operator Console.
It uses address X'OI F' (same as the Display Operator Console)
on Channel O. When the 1052 Compatibility feature is installed,
the 5213 Printer mdl 1 is required.
Integrated Communications Adapter (ICA) (optional) - provides
the basic control storage and common circuits for direct attachment of up to five synchronous (BSC) communications lines OR
up to eight asynchronous (start/stop) lines. See individual ICA
features for limitations. The Integrated Communications Adapter
Extension (ICAE) provides the capability to attach up to four
BSC AND up to eight start/stop lines. IBM line adapters are
provided within the model 115.
Input/Output Channel:
x
I~
x
x
x x
x x
x
x
x
x
..
addItIon,
#8060 and #8070 are mutually exclusIve. In
#8060 and
#8070 are mutually exclusive with Specify feature #9190 or 3344
Attachment specify feature #9317.
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) and S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility (#7520) are mutually exclusive (may not be ordered on the same
system unless RPQ
is installed on the 3115-2). NOTE: RPQ
cannot be installed if the 2311 Mdl 1/3340-Serie8 Compatibility (#8060) or 2314/3340-Series Compatibility (#8070) is installed.
Cannot be installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317).
Specify feature #9315 is mutually exclusive with #4102 and/or #4460.
Input/Output Attachments - Native: The following integrated I/O
attachments/ adapters are provided for controlling the designated
I/O devices. They are designed to interact with their respective
I/O devices and should be installed/removed with them since the
system is inoperative with only the attachment/adapter installed.
Direct Disk Attachment (standard) -- this attachment is provided
to attach the 3340 mdl A2 dual drive unit and control directly to
the S/370 mdl 115. The attachment is addressed as channell.
This attachment provides block multiplexing.
3340 DASF SUBSYSTEM. On the 3115-0 one 3340 mdl A2 and
one 3340 mdl B2/Bl can be attached to provide up to four
spindles. On the 3115 mdl 2 (w/o 3344 Attachment #9317) one
3340-A2 and up to three 3340 mdl B1/B2s can be attached to
provide up to eight spindles.
3340/3344 DAS SUBSYSTEM. On the 3115-2 with 3344 Attachment #9317 installed: One 3340 mdl A2 and any combination of
up to three 3340 mdl Bl/B2s and 3344 mdl B2/B2Fs can be
attached. With the String Switch (#8150) installed, the 3340 mdl
A2 may be shared with another S/370 except 3115-0 and 3125O. Specify features, String Switch Capability (#9315) and 3344
Attachment (#9317) are mutually exclusive. String Switch capability is not supported on a 3344 configuration. 4K DASF Control
Storage Extension is required when either #9315 or #9317 is
installed. Specify Fixed Head Attachment (#9190) if Fixed Head
Feature is installed on 3340 Series drives. See Chart A for
control storage requirements.
MagnetiC Tape Adapter (optional) -- this feature attaches one 01
the following tape control units and is addressed as channel 2:
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1 - tape control
(20KB) housing one tape drive. Up to three 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 s may be attached to the 3411 mdl 1.
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 2 -- tape control
(40KB) housing one tape drive. Up to five 3410 Magnetic
Tape Unit mdl 2s may be attached to the 3411 mdl2.
3411 MagnetiC Tape Unit and Control mdl 3 -- tape control
(80KB) hOUSing one tape drive. Up to five 3410 Magnetic
Tape Unit mdl 3s may be attached to the 3411 mdl 3.
3803 Tape Control mdl 3 -- up t6 eight 3420 mdl 3 (120KB) or
mdl 5 (200KB) may be attached to the 3803.
Integrated Card I/O Attachments (optional) -- these features
provide native attachment of one of the following: 2560 Multifunction Card Machine md! A 1 or A2
5425 Multi-function Card Unit mdl A 1 or A2
The integrated Card I/O Attachment uses channel 0,
address X'OOD' is reserved for the 2560 or 5425.
Device
Byte Multiplexer Channel (Optional) -- provides for the attachment of a wide variety of low speed devices. The single channel
available on the S/370-115 is functionally equivalent to the Byte
Multiplexer Channel on S/360 mdls 22, 25, 30 and 40 and
provides for a maximum of up to 8 control unit positions. 32
subchannels are provided as standard and are divided into 8
shared and 24 unshared subchannels.
The Integrated Card I/O Attachments and the Byte Multiplexer
Channel cannot be installed together on the same system unless
RPQs
are installed.
Console Function -- system control functions are provided by the
standard integrated Display Operator Console. It has the
switches, keyboard, and lights necessary to operate and control
the system. It uses address X'OI F' on channel O. The 5213 mdl
1 console printer (85 cps) may be attached optionally.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Specify Fixed Head Attachment (#9190) ~ if Fixed Head Feature is installed on 3340 Series drives .. NOTE: The Fixed Head
Attachment (#9190) cannot be installed with 2311-1/3340
Series Compatibility (#8060) or 2314/3340 Series Compatibility (#8070).
[4] Specify String SWitch Capability (#9315)~ if String Switch
(#8150) is installed on the 3340 mdl A2. NOTE: 4K DASF
Control Storage Extension (#4210) is prerequisite. Cannot be
installed with #4102 or #4460 or 3344 Attachment (#9317)S.
When String Switch is installed, an Emergency Power Off connection between the sharing systems is mandatory. RPQ DC
3621 (two system connection) or DC 3622 (multiple system
connection) must be ordered.
The 3115-2 uses fixed addresses 160 to 167 for its attached
disk drives. In the case of string switch, to avoid confusion in
Job - Control and Operation, the same addresses should be
assigned to shared drives on the other system. In the case of
the 3135, 3135-3, 3138 IFA, this requires specify code #9821
on the 3135 providing addresses 160 thru 167 to comply with
the fixed addresses of the 3115. If intermixing 3330s and
3340s on the 3135 (#9315), no string switching with the
3115-2 is possible.
NOTE: The string switch of the DASD hardware function can be
operated with the present DOS/VS standard DASD support.
DOS/VS does not support the device reserve/release channel
commands for program controlled sharing of attached DASD
units. Therefore, it is the user's responsibility by appropriate
organization and programming procedures to resolve conflicting
references to shared files and insure data integrity. One method
for controlling potential conflicts involves the use of operator
commands OVC UP /DVe ON. For additional information, consult DOS/VS System Management Guide, GC33-5371.
[5] On the 3115-2 ... specily 3344 Attachment (#9317)~ when
3344 md] B2/B2F are installed. 4K OASF Control Storage
Extension is required. Cannot be installed with any of the following: String Switch Capability (#9315), 231X/3340 Compatibility (#8060/#8070), S/360 Mdt 20 Compatibility (#7520),
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457), or 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature (#4460).
The Integrated Cerd I/O Attachments and the optional Byte
Multiplexer Channel cannot be installed together on the same
are installed.
system unless RPQs
{6] Minimum configuration: See "Minimum Configuration" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required on a S/370 mdl
115,
Integrated Printer Attachment (optional) -- attachment features
for the 5203 Printer mdl 3 or the 3203 Printer mdl 1 or 2 are
provided. One printer unit may be natively attached. The printer
attachment is addressed as channel 0 and the device address is
X'OOE'. The Universal Character Set (UCS) control is standard
[7] 1255, 1259 or 1419 Attachment -
specify #9336 (3115-0
,5
I
; CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when .ordered at time 'Of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines t() includ.e any
number of diskene-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written ,permission.
I
M3115.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
3115 Processing Unit (conl'd)
only). External Signal (#3898) is required to attach a 1255,
1259 or 1419 ..
[8) Specify #9807 for attachment of 3803 mdl 3 on the Magnetic
Tape Adapter (#4675).
NOTE: RETAIN/370 ... CE access is by telephone.
PRICES:
3115
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
TLP/
MLC
4 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$ 2,585
2,706
2,827
2,948
3,159
3,400
3,521
3,642
3,763
3,884
4,126
4,715
$ 2,355
2,465
2,575
2,685
2,880
3,090
3,200
3,310
3,420
3,530
3,750
4,285
$ 78,150
80,500
82,850
85,200
91,000
102,550
104,900
107,250
109,600
111,950
116,650
129,950
$309
314
319
326
337
362
368
373
378
383
394
420
F
FE
G
GE
GF
F2
FE2
G2
GE2
GF2
H2
HG2
NOTE: Models H2 and HG2 require special feature #3860 unless
RPQs
are installed.
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 1 0%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: A
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field installable ... model downgrade from 31152 to 3115-0 is not recommended for field installation.
Planning for Model Conversions: When a customer requires
feature changes and / or memory upgrades in addition to a model
upgrade, cOrlsolidating the several charlges into a single
is
not recommended.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES
installation charges)
From To
F
FE
G
GE
From To
F
FE
G
G£
GF
F2
FE2
G2
GE2
GF2
H2
FE
$2.350
G
$4.700
2.350
GE
GF
$7.050
4.700
2.350
$12,850
10.500
8,150
5,800
(there are no additional
F2
FE2
G2
GE2
GF2
H2
$24,40(1
J26,750
$29.100
26,750
24.4UU
$3/.450
29.100
26.750
24.40U
S33.8OO
3/,450
29./00
26.75U
20,950
9,400
7.050
4.700
2.350
$38.500
36./50
33.800
3/.450
25,650
14.100
11,750
9.400
7.050
4,700
24.400
2.350
4.700
2.350
7.050
4,700
2.350
HG2
$5/.800
49.450
47./00
44,750
38.950
27,400
25,050
22,700
20.350
18.000
18,300
SPECIAL FEATURES
EXPANSION BASE (#3860). [3115-2 only) Provides additional
gate and blowers, etc., and is required if RPQs
are not installed:
- for all model H2s and HG2s
- for models F2, FE2, G2, GE2 or GF2 if a Line Adapter Base 2
(#4792) or Line Adapter Base 3 (#4793) is required.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTERNAL S!GNALS (#3898).
Provides six distinct external
interrupt tines to request and identify an external interrupt' response from the processing unit. Maximum: One per 3115. Cable
Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: External
devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in S/360 Direct Control Featllre - OEM 1, SRL GA22-6845.
FLOATING POINT (#3900). [3115-0 only) Adds 44 floating pOint
arithmetic instructions
these instructions with the standard set
make up the Scientific Instruction Set. Field installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Floating Point Including Extended Precision (#3910).
FLOATING POINT INCLUDING EXTENDED PRECISION (#3910).
Adds 51 floating point arithmetic instructions. Provides for floating
point operation including extended precision to 28 hexadecimal
, CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP) .
digits. Field installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with Floating Point (#3900). Prerequisite: See Chari A/B above
for control storage requirements.
4K CONTROL STORAGE EXTENSION (#4101).
Adds 4,096
words (22 bits wide) of control storage to the Machine Instruction
Processor (3115-0) or Instruction Processing Unit (3115-2). ReQuired for certain feature combinations ... see Chart A/B above for
details. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 8K Control Storage
Extension (#4104). Field installation: Yes
see "Note" following "'Field Installation"' for 8K Control Storage Extension (#4104)
below.
4K CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT - 2nd (#4102).
[3115-2
only) Expands the IPU control storage by 4,096 words (22 bits
wide). Required for certain feature combinations
see Chart B.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4210 or specify feature
#9315. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 4K
Control Storage Extension (#4101).
8K CONTROL STORAGE EXTENSION (#4104).
[3115-0 only]
Adds 8,192 words (22 bits wide) of control storage to the Machine
Instruction Processor. Required for certain feature combinations
see Chart A above for details. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with 4K Control Storage Extension (#4101). Field Installation:
Yes ... Note: Customers who may elect to purchase the 4K Control Storage Extension and later upgrade to the 8K. Control Storage Extension should consider the purchase of the 8K Control
Storage Extension initially because this field upgrade requires
replacement of the 4K Control Storage Extension and installation
of the 8K Control Storage Extension.
4K DASF CONTROL STORAGE EXTENSION (#4210).
[3115-2
only] Adds 4,096 words (22 bits wide) to the DDA control storage. Required for string switch capability specify feature (#9315)
or 3344 Attachment specify feature (#9317). Limitation: Cannot
be installed with #4102 or #4460. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1460 COMPATIBILITY (#4457).
Microprogram
controlled feature which, in combination with an emulator program
under DOS/VS, permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460
instructions. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: See Chart A/B
above for control 3torage requirements. Note: On the 3115-2,
#4457 and S/370 Mdl 20 Compatibility (#7520) are mutually
exclusive (may not be ordered on the same system unless RPQ
is installed). Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3344
Attachment (#9317).
1403/3203 CARRIAGE CONTROL FEATURE (#4460).
Allows
the 3203 Printer with its tapeless carriage control to emulate the
function of a tape controlled carriage and thus run programs
written for a 1403 Printer. Limitations: The 5203 Printer is not
supported by this feature. Cannot be installed with string switch
capability (#9315) or 3344 Attachment specify feature (#9317).
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 3203 Printer. Note: This
feature is not required with DOS/VS Release 31 and subsequent
releases.
INTEGRATED 3203 PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#4650).
Control
for attaching the 3203 Printer mdl 1 or 2. The Universal Character
Set is standard. Specify: #9770 for mdl 1, or #9771 for mdl 2.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Integrated 5203 Attachment
(#4690). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Integrated 3203/5203 Printer Prerequisite (#4653).
INTEGRATED 3203/5203 PRINTER PREREQUISITE (#4653).
Provides a common control base for attaching either the 3203 or
5203 Printer. Required as a feature for installation of the Integrated 3203 Printer Attachment (#4650) or Integrated 5203 Printer
Attachment (#4690). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 2560 ATTACHMENT (#4670).
Control for attaching the 2560 Multi-function Card Machine mdl A1 or A2. Specify:
#9800# for mdl A 1, or #9801 # for mdl A2. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Integrated 5425 Attachment (#4695) or Basic Byte
Multiplexer Channel (#5248) ... installation of RPQs
are required to install #4670 with Basic Byte Multiplexer
Channel (#5248).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: #9727 is required on the 2560 MFCM
see
"Specify" under 2560.
2560 CARD PRINT CONTROL (#4674).
Provides control for
Card Print capability on the 2560 Multi-function Card Machine mdl
A1. Specify: #9797# for first two print lines, #979895 for second
two, #9799# for third two, when corresponding Card Print features
(#1575, 1576, 1577) are installed on the 2560 mdl A 1. Field
Installation: Yes. PrerequiSite: Integrated 2560 Attachment
(#4670) on the 3115.
MAGNETIC TAPE ADAPTER (#4675).
Provides control for attachment of one 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1. 2 or 3
or one 3803 Tape Control mdl 3. See 3420 and 3803 or 3411
and. 3410 for additional ordering instructions. The Magnetic Tape
Adapter is addressed as channel 2. Maximum: One. Specify:
#9807 for attachment of 3803 mdl 3. See "'Highlights" for additional information. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: A 3803
and 3411 cannot coexist on the Magnetic Tape Adapter.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
DP Machines
M 3115.4
Jul79
3115 Processing Unit (cont'd)
Prerequisites: S/370 mdl 115/125 Attachment (#7361) on the
3411, except for 3115 mdl HG2. When attached to 311 5 mdl
HG2, RPQ
is required on the 3411.
INTEGRATED 5203 MOL 3 PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#4690).
Control for attaching the 5203 Printer mdl 3. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with Integrated 3203 Printer Attachment (#4650).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated 3203/5203 Printer Prerequisite (#4653) and #9223 on the
5203 mdl 3. Specify: #9151~ for 5203 with 120 print positions,
or #9152~ for 5203 with 132 print positions. Specify Universal
Character Set Control (#9848)~ when Universal Character Set
Attachment (#8639) is specified on the 5203 mdl 3.
INTEGRATED 5213 PRINTER MOL 1 ATTACHMENT (#4692).
Attaches the 5213 Printer mdl 1. Includes a special cable to
support the printer. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 5425 ATTACHMENT (#4695). Control for attaching the 5425 Multi-function Card Unit mdl Ai or A2. Specify:
#9183~ for mdl Ai, or #9184~ for mdl A2. Limitations: Cannot
be installed with Integrated 2560 Attachment (#4670) or Basic
Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5248) ... installation of RPQs
are required to install #4695 with Basic Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5248). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: If the 5425 is attached to the 3115 either a 3203
or 5203 Printer is required to provide the necessary power. If,
however, a separate power supply for the 5425 is desired, IBM
will provide it on an RPQ basis.
BASIC BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#5248). To attach low
speed byte multiplex devices ... see "Byte Multiplexer Channel"
under "Input/Output ChanneL" Feature includes control storage
necessary for lOP operation. Limitations: The Basic Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5248) and the Integrated Card I/O Attachments
(#4670 or #4695) cannot be installed together on the same
system unless RPQs
are installed. On the
3115-2, only the Extended Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5249 with
#5248 as a prerequisite) with a data rate up to 25 KB is available. Specify: On the 3115-0, specify #9336 when attaching a
1255, 1259 or 1419. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#5249).
[3115-2
only] Provides the additional circuitry to enable the Basic Byte
Multiplexer Channel to operate at an improved byte data rate up to
25KB. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Basic
Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5248).
S/360 MODEL 20 COMPATIBILITY (#7520).
Microprogram
controlled feature which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute S/360 mdl 20 instructions. Field
Installation:
Yes.
Note:
On
the
3115-2,
#7520
and
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) are mutually exclusive
(may not be ordered on the same system unless RPQ
is
installed). Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3344 Attachment
(#9317).
1052 COMPATIBILITY (#8005).
Operates on the 5213 Printer
mdl 1 and standard keyboard as an operator console in S/3601052 mode only. In this emulation mode of operation the
Video/Display acts as a slave unit to the printer. The 1052 Compatibility feature in combination with the 5213 Printer mdl 1 allows
running of HASP /360 RMT 360 (stand alone program) on the
S/370 mdl 115. Note: The 1052 compatibility mode is not supported under DOS/VS. With DOS/VS the 5213 mdl 1 acts as a
slave unit to the DOC. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated 5213 Printer Mdl 1 Attachment (#4692) and the 5213
Printer mdl 1.
2311 MOL 1/3340 - SERIES COMPATIBILITY (#8060). Permits
the emulation of 2311 mdl 1 files on the 3340 disk storage. The
user program may access both the emulated 2311 mdl 1 data as
well as the native data set. This provides a "mixed mode" operating environment. Limitation: #8060 cannot be installed with
#8070, #9190 or #9317. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
See Chart A/B above for control storage requirements. Note:
When running DOS ReI. 21 thru 26, 1052 Compatibility (#8005),
the 5213 mdl 1 console printer and, if a 3203 Printer is attached.
the 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature (#4460) are prerequisites. The 5203 Printer is not supported by #4460. Emulation
under DOS/VS requires SYSRES on the 3340 DASF.
2314/3340 - SERIES COMPATIBILITY (#8070).
Permits the
emulation of 2314 files on the 3340 disk storage. The user pro ..
gram may access both the emulated 2314 data set as well as the
native data set. This provides a "mixed mode" operating environment. Limitation: #8070 cannot be installed with #8060, #9190
or #9317. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: See Chart A/B
above for control storage requirements. Note: When running DOS
ReI. 21 thru 26, 1052 Compatibility (#8005), the 5213 mdl 1
console printer and. if a 3203 Printer is attached. the 1403/3203
Carriage Control Feature (#4460) are prerequisites. The 5203
Printer is not supported by #4460. Emulation under DOS/VS
requires SYSRES on the 3340 DASF.
~ CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable, feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (ICA) (#4640).
Provides the basic control storage and common circuits for direct
attachment of up to five synchronous (BSC) communication lines
or up to eight asynchronous (start/stop) communication lines
depending upon line speed. All combinations of BSC and
start/stop lines require the Integrated Communications Adapter
Extension (#4641). Additional features are required to create
appropriate line interfaces for the individual lines. Figures 1 A and
1 B schematically represent the feature build-up. Figure 1A shows
the feature build-up for asynchronous lines or for combinations of
asynchronous and synchronous lines. Figure 1 B shows the feature
build-up when only synchronous lines are required. The ICA provides as standard:
-
Autopoll
Multipoint central station functions
Multipoint tributary station functions
EBCDIC transparent mode
EBCDIC or ASCII code
Start/Stop and BSC
Start/Stop and BSC
BSC only
BSt only
BSC only
Refer to Figures 2A and 2B for attachable terminals and for configuration requirements prior to ordering features below. The
normal procedure requires completion of ICA Specification Form
with each model 115 containing feature #4640.
Note:
(or refer to ICA Configurator
Manual, GA33-1513).
Customer Responsibilities -- see M 2700 pages for customer
responsibilities regarding communications facilities and services.
Communications Facilities -- see M 2700 pages for communications facility requirements with this feature.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER EXTENSION (lCAE)
(#4641).
This feature is required for all combinations of BSC
and start/stop lines. Extends the communications capability to up
to four BSCand up to eight start/stop lines depending upon line
speed. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
ICA (#4640).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE GROUP (ALG) (#1201). Permits attachment of up to four Medium Speed Asynchronous Lines (Al)
(#1231) or up to four low Speed Asynchronous Line Pairs (ALP)
(#1241) or up to four Telegraph line Pairs (TlP) (#7881). The
lines within the AlG, positions A1 thru A4, must be installed in
ascending order. Specify: One line control specify code from
Figure 2A. limitation: All lines in the AlG must have the same
line speed and control. Different terminals can be attached, provided they use the same speed and line control. See Figure 2A.
AlG (#1201) and SlHS (#7121) are mutually exclusive.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: ICA
(#4640).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE, MEDIUM SPEED (Al) (#1231). Provides
for the attachment of one non-switched 600 bps start/stop communications line. The 3767 terminal can be attached to this feature (at EC 380427 plus EC 380628) via switched or non-switched
lines at 300 bps and via non-switched lines at 600 or 1200 bps.
Clocking speed is selected at installation time. Connects to the
line via a modem or IBM line Adapter. The lines are installed in
ascending order, A1 thru A4. Note: IBM line Adapters are tied to
specific line positions ... see Figures 4C and 40. limitations: See
Figure 5, Max. ICA Configuration. #1231, #1241 and #7881
cannot be intermixed within the AlG. Maximum: Four. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: AlG (#1201).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE PAIR, lOW SPEED (ALP) (#1241). Provides for the attachment of two switched 110.0 bps or two
switched or non-switched 134.5 bps start/stop communications
lines. Connects to the line via a modem or IBM line Adapter. The
lines are installed in ascending order, A1 thru A4. Note: IBM line
Adapters are tied to specific line positions ... see Figures 4C and
40. limitations: See Figure 5, Max. ICA Configuration. #1231,
#1241 and #7881 c.annot be intermixed within the AlG.
Maximum: Four. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: AlG
(#1201).
AUTO CAll ADAPTER (ACA) (#1291, 1292, 1295, 1296). Provides automatic dialing capabilities on switched facilities. One of
these features is required for each line equipped to automatically
originate calls on switched networks. See Figure 3 for the selection of correct feature code. limitation: The use of Auto Call in a
line group precludes the last two lines/line pairs of that group ...
see Figure 3,. Maximum: Two per line group ... maximum total,
four. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: See Figure 3.
IBM lEASED LINE ADAPTER (#4743). A modem for start/stop
data transmission at 134.~ or 600 bps over non-switched facilities.
This line adapter operates with leased line Adapters on other IBM
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
M 3115.5
Jul 79
DP Machines
3115 Processing Unit (cont'd)
products. Selection between 2-wire and 4-wire operation is made
at installation time. See Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435
for specifications and restrictions. Specify: See Figures 4C and
40. Maximum: See Figures 4C and 40. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: AL (# 1231) or ALP (# 1241) and a Line Adapter
Base (#4792 or #4793) ... also see Figures 4C and 40.
IBM 1200 BPS LINE ADAPTER (#4781, #4782, #4791),
A
modem for BSC data transmission at up to 1200 bps over nonswitched facilities or switched network. Also for start/stop transmission at 300, 600 or 1200 bps over non-switched facilities to
the 3767 terminal. Unclocked and must interface to a SLC
(#7141-7144) or AL (#1231).
The Line Adapter is available in three different versions:
#4781 -- non-switched
#4782 -- switched with autoanswer
#4791 -- switched with autocall and autoanswer
Attachment to non-switched facilities is via an IBM provided cable
directly to the line. Attachment to the switched network is via an
IBM provided cable to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or
equivalent. Customer Responsibilities ... see M 2700 pages.
Communications Facilities ... see M 2700 pages. Specify: See
Figures 4C and 40. Maximum: See Figures 4C and 40. Fletd
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SLC (#7141-7144) or AL
(#1231) and a Line Adapter Base (#4792 or #4793). Also see
Figures 4C and 40. ACA (# 1295 or # 1296) is required for
#4791.
SYNCHRONOUS LINE MEDIUM SPEED (SL) (#7151-7154).
#7151
#7152
#7153
#7154
-----
Line
Line
Line
Line
position
position
position
position
Sl
S2
S3
S4
Line positions Sl thru S4 must be installed in ascending order.
Each feature provides for the attachment of one switched or nonswitched BSC line. Non-switched lines with switched network
back-up are supported. Maximum line speed on non-switChed
lines is 7200 bps; on switched back-up network 3600 bps; on
switched network 4800 bps. See Figure 2B for detailed speed and
facility information. Connects to the line via a modem. The modem must provide clocking. Note: SL(#7151-7154) may be
intermixed with SLC (#7141-7144) within the SLG. Limitations:
See Figure 5, Max. tCA Configuration. #7151 is mutually exctusive with #7141, #7152 with #7142, #7153 with #7143, and
#7154 with #7144. Maximum: #7151 thru #7154, one each.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SLG (#7100).
TELEGRAPH LINE PAIR (TLP) (#7881). Provides for the attachment of two non-switched single current telegraph lines at 45.5,
56.9, 74.2 or 75 bps. Attachment to the lines is via an IBM
provided external cable. Lines A 1 thru A4 are installed in ascending order. Limitations: See Figure 5, Max. ICA Configuration.
#1231, #1241 and #7881 cannot be intermixed within the ALG.
Maximum:
Four. Fletd Installation: Yes, Prerequisite: ALG
(#1201).
LINE ADAPTER BASE 2 (LAB 2) (#4792). Permits attachment of
up to two IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters and up to four IBM Leased
Line Adapters. The Line Adapters are tied to specific line positions. See Figure 4C for configuration and possible line combinations. Note: LAB 2 is required for IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters
with autoanswer (#4782) or with autocall and autoanswer
(#4791). Limitation: LAB 2 (#4792) and LAB 3 (#4793) are
mutually exclusive. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: On 3115-2, LAB 2 requires Expansion Base (#3860)
unless RPQs 7B0141 and 7B0132 are installed.
MODEMS
One of the following modems can be attached to each
of the BSC lines of the ICA (#4640). Prerequisite: SL (#71517154).
LINE ADAPTER BASE 3 (LAB 3) (#4793). Provides attachment
of up to four IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters and up to eight IBM
Leased Line Adapters. The Line Adapters are tied to specific line
positions. See Figure 4D for configuration and possible line combinations. Limitation: LAB 2 (#4792) and LAB 3 (#4793) are
mutually exclusive. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: On 3115-2, LAB 3 requires Expansion Base (#3860)
unless RPQs
are installed.
Note: For communications capabilities, product utilization and
special features, see 3863,3864, 3872, 3874, 3875 and M 2700
pages.
Modem
3863
3872
3864
3874
3875
SYNCHRONOUS LINE GROUP (SLG) (#7100).
Permits attachment of up to four medium speed BSC lines. SLC (#7141-7144)
and/or SL (#7151-7154). Maximum line speed is 1200 and 7200
bps respectively. The lines in this group, positions S 1 thru S4,
must be installed in ascending order. The lines can have different
line speeds within the maximum specified. Specify: Maximum line
speed in the group: #9751!1i for 1200 bps maximum ... #9753!1i
for 2400 bps max ... #9754!1i for 4800 bps max ... #9757!1i for
7200 bps max.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: ICA (#4640).
SYNCHRONOUS LINE HIGH SPEED (SLHS) (#7121).
Provides
for the attachment of one non-switched SSC line at speeds up to
50.0 kbps. See Figure 1 B. This is a digital current interface for
attachment to facility E1, E2 or E3. Note: Only for non-switched
point-to-point lines. Limitations: This line has a load factor of
100% and must not be operated simultaneously with any other line
in the ICA ... see Figure 1 B. SLHS (#7121) and ALG (#1201) are
mutually exclusive. Maximum: One Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: ICA (#4640).
SYNCHRONOUS
(#7141-7144).
#7141
#7142
#7143
#7144
-----
Line
Line
Line
Line
LINE
MEDIUM
position
position
position
position
SPEED
WITH
CLOCK
(SLC)
Sl
S2
S3
S4
Line positions S 1 thru S4 must be installed in ascending order.
Each feature provides for the attachment of one switched or nonswitched BSC line. The clock can be set by the user for a transmission rate of 600 bps or 1200 bps. Connects to the line via an
unclocked modem or IBM Line Adapter. Notes: IBM Line Adapters are tied to specific line positions ... see Figures 4C and 4D.
SL (#7151-7154) may be intermixed with SLC (#7141-7144)
within the SLG. Limitations: See Figure 5, Max. ICA Configuration. #7141 is mutually exclusive with #7151, #7142 with
#7152, #7143 with #7153, and #7144 with #7154. Maximum:
#7141 thru #7144, one each.
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: SLG (# 7100).
; CPU diskette-only specify feature, No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Speed (bps)
2400/1200
2400/1200
4800/2400
4800/2400
7200/3600/1800
DP Machines
3115 Processing Unit
M 3115.6
Jul79
(cont'd)
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 yr Purch
Special Feature Prices:
FIGURE lA
MMMC
iNTEGRATED
COMMUNiCATIONS
FEATURE BUILD-UP
ADAPTER
SCHEMATIC
3115-0 and 3115-2
External Signals
#3898'
Fltg Pt Incld Ext Precision
3910
4K Control Storage Extension 4101
1401/1440/1460 Compat
4457
1403/3203 Carr Cntrl Fea
4460
Int 3203 Printer Attachment 4650'
Int 3203/5203 Ptr Prereq
4653
Int 2560 Attachment
4670'
2560 Card Print Control
4674'
Magnetic Tape Adapter
4675'
Int 5203 Ptr Mdl 3 Attach
4690'
Int 5213 Ptr Mdl 1 Attach
4692'
Int 5425 Attachment
4695*
Basic Byte Mplxr Channel
5248'
S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility
7520
1052 Compatibility
8005
2311 mdl 1/3340-Series Cmpt 8060
2314/3340-Series Cmpt
8070
$110$100 $4,125 $1.00
NC NC
NC
**
1.50
55 50 1,335
NC NC
NC
**
NC
NC NC
76 2,515
7.50
83
8.50
88 80 2,585
153 140 5,780 11.50
30 1,235
2.00
33
110 100 4,125
3.00
76 3,145
7.50
83
110 100 4,125
3.00
153 140 5,780 19.50
208 190 7,865 20.50
NC
NC NC
**
NC
NC NC
**
NC
NC NC
NC
NC NC
ICAE
(#4641)
LINE
GROUP
SLG
(#7100)
4640*
4641*
1201*
1231*
1241*
1291*
1292*
1295*
1296'
4743*
4781*
4782*
4791*
4792*
4793*
7100*
7121*
225 205
76
83
40
43
43 40
60 55
21
21
21
21
15
20
20
20
20
14
16 15
21
20
71
65
28 26
26
28
43 40
110 100
8,460 25.50
1.50
3,105
3.00
1,660
1,660
2.50
2,255
3.50
808
808
808
808
417
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
2.50
525
2.50
3.00
700
1,935 11.50
1,020
2.00
1,020
2.00
3.00
1,660
4,125
8.50
7141'
7142*
7143*
7144*
60
60
60
60
55
55
55
55
2,255
2,255
2,255
2,255
3.50
3.50
3.50
3.50
7151*
7152*
7153*
7154*
7881*
49
49
49
49
60
45
45
45
45
55
1,870
1,870
1,870
1,870
2,255
3.00
3.00
3.00
3.00
9.00
Floating Point
3900
8K Control Storage Extension 4104
NC NC
110 100
2,670
NC
3.00
3860
4102
4210
5249
45
55
55
35
41
50
50
32
1,710
1,335
1,335
1,330
1.00
1.50
1.50
3.00
LINE
GROUP
•
A4 (I)
SL #7151), or SLC
(#7141)
SI
SL (#7152), or SLC
(#7142)
S2
SL (#7153), or SLC
(#7143)
S3 (I)
Sk7\!J~54), or SLC
S4 (I)
LINE INTERFACE
SYNC LINE POSITION
I~L
SLG
(#7100)
ICA
(#4640)
(#7151), or SLC
#7141)
SI
SL (#7152), or SLC
(#7142)
S2
SL (#7153). or SLC
(#7143)
S3
SL (#7154), or SLC
(#7144)
S4
SLHS (#7121) (2)
S5
(2) ALG (#1201) and SLHS (#7121) are mutually exclusive. Note: SLHS
(#7121) cannot be operated concurrently with lines in position S I thru S4.
FIGURE 2A
START /STOP TERMINALS
SPEED
(bps)
FACILITIES
LINE
INTERFACE
FEATURE
LINE
CONTROL
SPECIFY
1030
600.0
D2
1231
9740!f
1050
75.0
A4
7881
9736!f
134.5
CI. C2, 01
1241
9738!f
1060
134.5
01
1241
9738!f
2740 mdl I
134.5
CI. C2. 01
1241
9738!f
2740 mdl2
75.0
A4
7881
9736!f
134.5
DI
1241
9738!f
600.0
02
1231
9739!f
2741
134.5
CI. C2, DI
1241
9738!f
3767 mdl 1,2
w #7111 or
#7113
300.0
CI,OI
1231
9739!f
3767 mdl 1.2,
3 w #7112
600 or 1200 02
1231
9739!f
5100/5110
No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of dlskerte-only changes ordered on the same diskette.
Feature supplies CPU diskette.
A3(!)
FIGURE lB
5010 mdl Ax>
# CPU diskette-only specify feature.
A2
line positions ... see Figure 3.
(2) ALG (#1201) and SLG (#7121) are mutually exclusive.
3115-2 Only
Expansion Base
4K Control Stor Inc rem nt-2nd
4K DASF Cntrl Storage Exten
Extended Byte Mplxr Channel
AL (#1231), or ALP
(#1241), or TLP
(#7881)
Synch Line
Position
(I) Auto Call Adapters (#1291. 1292, 1295 and 1296) restrict the use of these
TERMINALS
3115-0 Only
AI
AL (#1231). or ALP
(#1241). or TLP
(#7881)
ICA
(#4640)
Asynch Line
Position
AL (#1231), or ALP
(#1241), or TLP
(#7881)
ALG
(#1201) (2) AL (#1231), or ALP
(#1241). or TLP
(#7881)
Communications Features
Int Communications Adapter
Int Comm Adapter Extension
Asynchronous Line Group
Async Line, Medium Speed
Async Line Pair, Low Speed
Auto Call Adapter,
- line position A 1
- line position A2
- line position Sl
- line position S2
IBM Leased Line Adapter
IBM 1200 bps Line Adapter,
non-switched
switched w autoanswer
sw w autocall & autoans
Line Adapter Base 2
Line Adapter Base 3
Synchronous Line Group
Sync Line High Speed
Sync Line Med Spd w Clock,
line position S 1
line position S2
line position S3
line position S4
Sync Line Med Speed,
line position Sl
line position S2
line position S3
line position S4
Telegraph Line Pair
LINE INTERFACE
134.5
CI. C2, 01
1241
9738!f
600.0
D2
1231
9739!f
134.5
BI. B2, CI.
C2,Ol
1241
9738!f
300.0
CI,OI
1231
9739!f
AT&T
45.5
AI
7881
9733!f
83B2/83B3
56.9
A2
7881
9734!f
WU liSA
74.2
A3
7881
9735!f
110.0
C3
1241
9737!f
TWX-33/3S
CPU diskette-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture
or when field installed. $290 on putchased machines when combined with changes
subject to a distribution fee to include any number of diskette-only cbanges ordered on
the same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
OP Machines
M3115.7
3115 Processing Unit
FIGURE 2B
Jul79
(cont'd)
BINARY SYNCHRONOUS TERMINALS
0
0
;:
It)
~
~
~
It)
~
£!
;: Nog
co
:CMg
~~
:'!
;:
EcnQ:
.n
M
N
M
~
~
~
0co
It)
"0
1il 08 £!
M
It)
;:
NO~
M
0
"
0
:'!
:'!
~
0
;b
;b
It)
£! 0 0
It)
;: ;:
C"
o~
in 'i5 'i5
~
0
It)
0
i; E E
..c: 0 0
"
M
N
N
'i5 'i5
E E
0
;:
E
!ll
It)
r::: r:::
1il«
N
'i5
'i5
;: ;: E
E
··
~
:¢'
to
~
~
It)
N
0
"
!:?
It)
'"
'"
in
c
" "'"
;: "
0
£!
""
'",...
"N
N
M ~l!l M M M
'" M M M
M
(J)
SPEED
M
0
"0
M
"
"-
in
~ ~ ...
!
iO
It)
X
X
X
X
X X X x kx
X
X X X X
X
X X
X
X X p Machines
M 3115.8
3115 Processing Unit
Juli9
(cont'd)
FIGURE 40
LINE ADAPTER BASE 3 (#4793) ... Maximum, 12 IBM Line
Adapters
LINE
POSITION
LINE
ADAPTER
LINE
ADAPTER
POSITION
SPECIFY
AI 1st line
AI 2nd line
A2 1st line
4743
4743
4743
A2
A3
A3
A4
A4
4743
4743
4743
4743
4743
9491£
94921
1241
9489
1241
9491
4781
4781
4781
4781
94931
94941
9495!$
94961
7141
7142
7143
7144
2nd line
1st line
2nd line
1st line
2nd line
SI
S2
S3
S4
NOTE
PREREQ
94851
1241
9485
1241
9487
94861
9487,
94881
94891
94901
---- OR --AI (2)
A2 (2)
4743 or 4781
4743 or 4781
9481,9501 1
9482,9502 1
1231
Excludes line
adapter in
1231
Excludes line
adapter in
P(:~~~6~4
position5~3
(#9495
A3 (2)
4743 or 4781
9483,9503 1
1231
A4 (2)
4743 or 4781
9484,9504 1
1231
Excludes line
adapter in
position S2
(#9494)
Excludes line
adapter in
Pl:~~~3~I
Excludes line
adapter in
position A4
(#9484)
Excludes line
adapter in
position A3
(#9483)
SI
4781
94931
7141
S2
4781
94941
7142
S3
4781
94951
7143
Excludes line
adapter in
P'(=M 2
S4
4781
94961
7144
Excludes line
adapter in
position AI
(#9481)
(2) #4781 may be used only with the 3767 terminal.
FIGURE 5
MAXIMUM ICA CONFIGURATION
All lines/line pairs are assigned load factors.
The sum of all load factors must not exceed 100%.
LOAD FACTOR IN %
1-2 Line
ASYNCHRONOUS LINES Pairs (1-4
lines)
20%
TLP at 45.5 & 56.9 bps
20
TLP at 74.2 & 75.0 bps
20
ALP at 110.0 & 134.S bps
ALG, up
AL at 300/600/1200 bps
SYNCHRONOUS LINES
SLG
SLG
SLG
SLG
w max
w max
w max
w max
1200
2400
4800
7200
bps
bps
bps
bps
SLHS at max. 50 kllps
3-4 Line
Pairs (5-8
lines)
20%
40
40
to 4 lines
20
1-2 Lines
Autopoll Autopoll
Used
Not Used
20
25
20
25
40
50
60
75
I Line
pt-to-pt
100
3-4 Lines
Autopoll
Autopoll
Not Used
Used
20
25
40
50
80
100
, CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- - ---- -----
----- - ---
--_
-.-
M 3125.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3125 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose; Provides main and control storage, plus arithmetic and
logic circuits for a S/370 mdl 125.
The 3125-0 and 3125-2 Processing Units are available in the
following model groups:
Models:
3125-0
3125-2
Processor Storage Size
FE
FE2
98,304 bytes
G
G2
131,072 bytes
GE
GE2
163,840 bytes
GF
GF2
1 96,608 bytes
H
H2
262,144 bytes
HG2
393,216 bytes
~
12
524,288 bytes
~
For differences between the two model series refer to the
"Systems" pages.
f If 3411 Magnetic Tape and Control is attached see Magnetic Tape
Adapter special feature paragraph for RPQ requirement.
Highlights: 98,304 bytes up to 524,288 bytes of processor storage are available. The basic main memory cycle time is 480
nanoseconds for 2 bytes. Sixteen general purpose, sixteen control
and four floating point registers are provided. The system design
provides distributed microcoded subprocessors for the independent handling of programs -- Instruction Processing Unit (IPU),
Input/Output Processing (lOPs), and Diagnostic/Maintenance
(SVP).
Direct attachment of the 3333/3330 DASD Subsystem or the
3340 DASF Subsystem or the 3340/3344 DAS Subsystem (31252 only) is provided. Depending on model and features up to sixteen drives can be attached. In a 3340 Subsystem the 3340 mdl
A2 and its attached 3340 drives can be shared with another
S/370, except 3115-0 or 3125-0, via the String Switch ca~ability
(#9315).
The 2311/3330 - Series, the 2311 Mdl 1/3340 - Series and the
2314/3340 - Series Compatibility features are available as options. They are mutually exclusive. Emulation is under DOS and
DOS/VS only. 2311 mdl 1 emUlation under DOS/VS requires
SYSRES on 3340 or on 3330.
magnetic IBM Diskettes. The diskettes that are supplied with the
system will contain the required microcode for the basic system,
the optional features ordered for the system, and CE diagnostics,
The CE logout of machine and I/O related control checks and
errors are recorded on the console file diskette for CE diagnosis,
to enhance the reliability, availability, and serviceability of the
model 125.
Extended Control (EC) Mode expands the structure of the Program
Status Word to accommodate the control of new S/370 features
and extends the number of permanently assigned main storage
locations. The model 125 can operate in either EC Mode or Basic
Control (BC) Mode as defined for the S/360,
Dynamic Address Translation (DAT) is a standard facility on the
model 125. When the model 125 is in EC Mode with Translation
Mode operable, programs are not required to be completely resident in main memory for execution. Under Supervisor Control,
portions of programs (Pages) may be stored on a direct access
device until needed, at which time they will be returned to main
storage and may be relocated to any available location, Program
addresses are treated as "logical addresses" and the translation
feature develops "real addresses." Since logical storage addressing is not limited by the amount of available real storage, program
size may exceed real storage size. This logical storage is referred
to as "virtual storage" and may be as large as 16,777,216 bytes
on the S/370 mdl 125.
Program Event Recording (PER), a standard feature, is a debugging aid which permits four types of events to be selectively monitored: (1) Successful branches ... (2) Instruction fetch address
compare ... (3) Main storage alteration address compare ... (4)
General Register alteration address compare.
Standard features include a 5/370 commercial instruction set,
Extended Control (EC) Mode, Dynamic Address Translation, Channel Indirect Data Addressing, Program Event Recording, Monitor
Call, interval timer, time-of-day clock, CPU-Timer and Clock Comparator, store and fetch protect, byte-oritmted operand feature,
error checking and correction on main storage, automatic instruction retry, and audible alarm.
Control Storage: Reloadable control storage for the Service
Processor (SVP), direct DASD attachment, and Instruction Processing Unit (IPU) are provided as standard on the 3125 Processing Unit. In addition, reloadable control storage is available for the
optional Card I/O Attachment, Printer Attachment, Integrated
Communications Adapter (ICA), byte Multiplexer Channel, and
Console Printer Attachment. Control storage is loaded from the
diskette housed in the Service Console Unit.
Capability to attach the 3803/3420 or 3411/3410 magnetic tape
subsystem mdls 1, 2 or 3 via the Magnetic Tape Adapter.
The IPU of the 3125-0 contains as standard 12K words of control
storage. Certain features/combinations require up to two 4K word
increments in addition. See Chart A for details.
Capability to natively attach the following card I/Os through appropriate Integrated Card I/O Attachments: 2560 mdl A 1; 3504 mdls
A1, A2; 3525 mdls P1, P2, P3; and the 5425 mdls A1, A2 (96
column card).
The IPU of the 3125-2 contains as standard 16K words of control
storage. One 8K word increment may be ordered as an optional
feature for use with certain feature combinations. See Chart A for
details.
Capability to natively attach the 5213 mdl 1 console printer (85
cps) is provided with the Integrated 5213 Printer Mdl 1 Attachment. This console slave printer provides hardcopy output of
operator messages presented on the Video/Display (CRT) console. The 1052 Compatibility feature is available.
Chart A: Listed below are the valid feature combinations and their
respective requirements for additional control storage.
Capability to natively attach up to 6 synchronous and up to 1 6
asynchronous lines is provided by the Integrated Communications
Adapter with appropriate features.
Capability to natively attach the 3203 Printer is provided with the
Integrated 3203 Printer Attachmert.
The 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature provides the capability
to load information contained in the 1403 Carriage Control Tape
Into the 3203 Forms Control Buffer.
S/360 Model 20 Compatibility and 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility
features are provided to allow execution of the instructions of
those systems.
The Operator Console is an integral part of the 3125. The standard on-line Video/Display-Keyboard enhances operator (human
factor) - machine communications. Data can be manually entered
into processor main storage or into internal registers via the keyboard. Contents of storage or internal registers of the 3125 can
be displayed on the Video/Display screen. The Video/Display with
16 lines of 56 characters/line and keyboard are designed for use
as an operator console. A portion of the screen is reserved to
display machine status. The Service Processor (SVP) continuously
monitors system operation and logs errors on the magnetic IBM
Diskette device. The SVP initiates recovery on detection of error
conditions and provides control for the Display, Keyboard, Magnetic Diskette and optional console printer.
The standard console file is the basic microprogram loading device
for the system. The console file contains a small re'ad/write file
device that provides the microcode for the system on removable
Optional Features
Model 3125-2
Model 3125-0
1401/1440/1460
Compatibility
(#44571 *
S/360 mdl20
Compatibility
(#75201 *
Floating Point Including Extended
Precision (#3910)
2311 Mdl 1/3330Series Compatibility (#80401 **
*1 ~ •
x
x x*
x
•xx
.
x x
xx
x
x
x
x
.
~
x
xl><
* xix
xx x *
x x
xix
2311 Mdl 1/3340Series Compatibilitv (#8060) **
2314/3340-Series
I f:~)~~~I~y
(#41051 Control Storage
Extension Req'd
~econd Control Storage
Incr.ment .. , (#41011
d (#41021 Re 'd
Basic Control Storage
Basic
First Control Storage
Control Increment '" (#41011
Storage Req'd
xix
I><
x x
x
Ix
• 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) and S/360 Model 20 Compatibility
(#7520) are mutually exclusive (may not be ordered on the same system
is installed on the 3125.
Cannot be
unless
cannot be
installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317), NOTE RPQ
installed if the 2311 Mdl 1/3340-Series Compatibility (#8060~ or
2314/3340-Series Compatibility (#8070) is installed,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- ---- ----
- - --===
':' =
M 3125.2
Jul 7'<1
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit
(conl'd)
•• (#8040) and (#8060) and (#8070) are mutually exclusive. In addition,
#8060 or #8070 are mutually exclusive with specify feature #9190 or 3344
Attachment specify feature (#9317). #9190 does not require additional
control storage.
NOTE: Specify feature #9315 is mutually exclusive with #4105 and/or #4460.
Input/Output Attachments - Native: The following integrated I/O
attachments/adapters are provided for controlling the designated
I/O devices. They are designed to interact with their respective
I/O devices and should be installed/removed with them since the
system is inoperative with only the attachment/adapter installed.
Direct Disk Attachment (standard) -- Attaches either the 3340
mdl A2 or the 3333 mdl 1 dual disk drive and control unit directly to the 3125. The attachment supports block multiplexing.
Channel address is 1, physical drive addresses are 160 to 167
on the first string and 168 to 16F on the second string. For
logical address assignment for 3344 refer to the Functional
Characteristics manual, GA33-1506.
3333/3330 DASD Subsystem ... one 3333 mdl 1 and one additional 3330 mdl 1 or 2 can be attached to provide up to four
spindles.
3340 DASF Subsystem ... on the 3125-0 one 3340 mdl A2 and
up to three 3340 mdl Bl/82s can be attached to provide up to
eight spindles. On the 3125-2 (with 16 Drive Expansion #9315)
one or two 3340 mdl A2s can be directly attached with up to
three 3340 mdl 81/82s attached to each 3340 mdl A2 to provide up to sixteen spindles on the system.
3340/3344 DAS Subsystem ... On the 3125-2 with 3344 Attachment #9317 installed: One 3340 mdl A2 and any combination of
up to three 3340 mdl Bl/B2s and 3344 mdl B2/B2Fs can be
attached on the first string. In addition, on the 3125-2, one 3340
mdl A2 and up to three 3340 mdl 81/B2s can be attached on
the second string to provide up to 16 physical or the equivalent
of up to 34 logical spindles on the system.
Magnetic Tape Adapter (optional) -- This feature attaches one of
the following tape control units and is addressed as channel 2.
Byte Multiplexer Channel (optional) -- A wide variety of I/O
devices may be attached to S/370 mdl 125 via the optional byte
Multiplexer Channel. One channel is available on the 3125 as a
special feature and is functionally equivalent to the byte multiplexer channel on S/360 mdls 22, 25, 30 and 40. Thirty-two
subchannels are provided as standard '" eight channels may be
shared and twenty-four are unshared. The byte Multiplexer Channel provides eight control unit positions and permits I/O units to
operate normally in byte mode, giving the effect of several I/O
operations simultaneous with computing. In burst mode, the
channel handles one high speed unit with a maximum data rate
of 29 KB per second. It is capable of sustained data rates up to
25 KB per second in byte mode. It is addressed as channel O.
For OS exclusions, refer to SRl GC28-6554, "System/360
Operating Systems System Generation."
Console Function -- System control functions are provided by the
standard integrated Video/Display Keyboard. It has the switches
and lights necessary to operate and control the system. Optionally, the 5213 mdl 1 console printer (85 cps) may be attached via
speCial feature #4692. The optional 1052 Compatibility feature
(#8005) operates the 5213 Printer mdl 1 and standard system's
keyboard as an operator console in S/360-1052 mode only. In
this mode of operation the Video/Display-Keyboard acts as a slave
unit to the printer.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[4] CPU Configuration: #9091 for Configuration 1 (CPU located
behind console table), or #9092 for Configuration 2 (CPU
bolted to right side of console table). Configuration 2 excludes
a 5425 MFCU from being natively attached. See S/370 Installation Manual for details.
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1 (20KB) housing
one magnetic tape drive. Up to three 3410 Magnetic Tape
Unit mdl 1 s can be attached to the 3411 mdl 1.
[5]
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 2 (40KB) housing
one magnetic tape drive. Up to five 3410 Magnetic Tape
Unit mdl 2s can be attached to the 3411 mdl 2.
[6] DASD Attachment: Specify one -- #9313# for 3333 Attachment, or #9314# for 3340 Attachment or for 3340/3344 Attachment (3125-2 only).
Specify Fixed Head Attachment
(#9190)# if Fixed Head Feature is installed on the 3340 Series
drives. NOTE: The Fixed Head Attachment Feature (#9190)
cannot be installed with 2311 Mdl 1/3340-Series Compatibility
(#8060) or 2314/3340-Series Compatibility (#8070).
3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 3 (80K8) housing
one magnetic tape drive. Up to five 3410 Magnetic Tape
Unit mdl 3s can be attached to the 3411 mdl 3.
3803 Tape Control mdl 3. Up to eight 3420 mdl 3 (120KB) or
mdl 5 (200KB) may be attached to the 3803.
Integrated Card I/O Attachments (optional) -- These features
provide native attachment of one of the following:
3504
3525
2560
5425
3504
Card Reader mdl A 1 or A2
Card Punch mdl P1, P2 or P3
Multi-function Card Machine mdl AI
Multi-function Card Unit mdl A 1 or A2
Card Reader mdl AI or A2 and 3525 Card Punch mdl
PI, P2 or P3
3504 Card Reader mdl AI or A2 and 2560 MFCM mdl AI
3504 Card Reader mdl AI or A2 and 5425 MFCU mdl AI or
A2
The Integrated Card I/O Attachment uses channel O. Device
address X'OOC' is reserved for the 3504 Card Reader and device
address X'OOD' is reserved for the 2560, 3525 or 5425.
Integrated Printer Attachment (optional) -- Attachment features
for the 1403 Printer mdl 2, 7 or Nl and for the 3203 Printer mdl
1 or 2 are available. Only one printer unit can be natively attached. The printer adapter is addressed as channel 0 and the
device address is X'OOE'. The Universal Character Set feature
can be optionally selected for the 1403 mdl 2 or N 1 on the 3125
at no charge.
Integrated Console Printer Attachment (optional) -- attaches the
5213 Printer mdl 1 to the 3125 to provide hardcopy of operator
messages presented on the standard Display Operator Console.
It uses address X'OI F' (same as the Display Operator Console)
on channel O. When the 1052 Compatibility feature is installed,
the 5213 Printer md! 1 is required.
Integrated Communications Adapter (ICA) (optional) -- Provides
the basic control storage and common circuits for direct attachment of up to six synchronous (BSC) communications lines OR
up to sixteen asynchronous (start! stop) lines. The Integrated
Communications Adapter Extension (ICAE) (#4641) adds the
capability to attach up to six BSC AND up to sixteen start/stop
lines. IBM line adapters are provided within the 3125.
Input/Output Channel
Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configuration" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in a S/370 mdl
125.
[7] Specify #9315# (3125-2 only) for String Switch Capability /16Drive Expansion if String Switch (#8150) is installed on one or
both 3340 mdl A2s, or if a second 3340 mdl A2 is installed no
matter how many drives there are (16-Drive Expansion). Specify #9306 Second String if two 3340 mdl A2s are installed.
#9315 requires 4K DASF Control Storage Extension (#4210).
#9315 cannot be installed with #4105 or #4460 and is mutually exclusive with 3344 Attachment (#9317)S.
When String Switch is installed, an Emergency Power Off connection between the sharing systems is mandatory. RPQ DC
3621 (two system connection) or DC 3622 (multiple system
connection) must be ordered.
The 3125-2 uses fixed addresses 160 to 16F for its attached
disk drives. In the case of string switch, to avoid confusion in
Job Control and Operation, the same addresses should be
assigned to shared drives on the other system. In the case of
3135, 3135-3, 3138 IFA this requires specify code #9821 on
the 3135 providing addresses 160 thru 16F to comply with the
fixed addresses of the 3125. If intermixing 3330 and 3340 on
the 3135,3135-3,3138 (#9315), no string switching is possible.
NOTE: The string switch of the DASD hardware function can be
operated with the present DOS/VS standard DASD support.
DOS/VS does not support the device reserve/release channel
commands for program controlled sharing of attached DASD
units. Therefore, it is the user's responsibility by appropriate
organization and programming procedures to resolve conflicting
references to shared files and insure data integrity. One method
for controlling potential conflicts involves the use of operator
commands DVC UP /DVC ON. For additional information consult
DOS/VS System Management Guide, GC33-5371.
[8] On the 3125-2 ... specify 3344 Attachment (#9317)# when
3344 mdl B2/82Fs are installed. 4K DASF Control Storage
Extension is required. Cannot be installed with any of the following: String Switch Capability (#9315) ... 231 X/3340 Capability (#8060/#8070) ... S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility (#7520)
1 CPU diskette~only sPecify feature.
No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------=-- =---- --=----':' =
M 3125.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (conl'd)
... 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) ... 1403/3203
Carriage Control Feature (#4460). Specify #9306 Second
String if two 3340 mdl A2s are installed;
[9) Specify #9807 for attachment of the 3803 mdl 3 on the Magnetic Tape Adpter (#4675).
NOTE: RETAIN/370 ... CE access is by phone.
TLP/
MLC
4 yr
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3125
FE
G
GE
GF
H
FE2
G2
GE2
GF2
H2
HG2
12
$ 4,285
4,406
4,527
4,648
4,890
4,825
4,946
5,067
5,188
5,430
6,019
6,503
Purchase
MMMC
$ 3,5 $129,050
4,005
131,400
4,115
133,750
4,225
136,100
4,445
140,800
4,390
145,300
4,500
147,650
4,610
150,000
4,720
152,350
4,940
157,050
5,475
170,350
5,915
179,750
$382
387
394
399
411
429
435
440
446
457
484
506
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: A
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field installable.
Planning for Model Conversions: When a customer requires
feature changes and/or memory upgrades in addition to a model
upgrade, consolidating the several changes into a single
not recommended.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (There are no additional
installation charges)
From To
FE
G
GE
GF
From To
FE
G
GE
GF
H
FE2
G2
GE2
GF2
H2
HG2
G
$2.350
GE
GF
$4.700
2.350
$7.050
4.700
2.350
H
$11.750
9.400
7.050
4.700
G2
GE2
GF2
H2
$18,600
16,250
$20,950
18,600
16.250
$23,300
20,950
18.600
16,250
$28,000
25,650
23,300
20,950
16,250
$4UOO
38,950
36.600
34.250
29,550
$50.700
48.350
46.000
43.650
38.950
$4.700
2.350
$7.050
4,700
2.350
$11,750
9,400
7,050
4,700
$25,050
22,700
20.350
18.000
13,300
$34,450
32.100
29.750
27.400
22,70
9.400
$2.350
HG2
12
FE2
$16,250
SPECIAL FEATURES
EXTERNAL SIGNALS (#3898),
Provides six distinct external
interrupt lines to request and identify an external interrupt response from the processing unit. Maximum: One. Cable Order:
Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: External devices
must meet the interface specifications outlined in 8/360 - Direct
Control Feature - OEM 1, SRL GA22-6845.
FLOATING POINT, INCLUDING EXTENDED PRECISION FLOATAdds 51 floating point arithmetic instrucING POINT (#3910).
tions. Extended precision floating point provides for the precision
of up to 28 hexadecimal digits.
Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite:
See "Control Storage Requirements"
under
"Highlights. "
4K CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT (#4101, 4102), [3125-0
only) Each adds 4,096 words (22 bits wide) of control storage,
Required for some feature combinations ... see "Control Storage
Requirements" under "Highlights" for details. #4101 -- for first
4K increment ... #4102 -- for second 4K increment. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #4102 requires #4101.
8K CONTROL STORAGE EXTENSION (#4105).
[3125-2 only)
Adds 8,192 words (22-bits wide) of control storage to the IPU.
Required for some feature combinations ... see Chart A.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4210 or specify feature
#9315. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
4K DASF CONTROL STORAGE EXTENSION (#4210).
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
[3125-2
only) Adds 4,096 words (22-bits wide) to the DDA control storage
for use with either or both the String Switch Capability or 16-Drive
Expansion specify feature (#9315) or 3344 Attachment specify
feature (#9317). Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4105 or
#4460. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1460 COMPATIBILITY (#4457),
Microprogram
controlled feature which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460 instructions.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317)
or with S/360 Model 20 Compatibility (#7520) unless RPQ No.
is installed on the 3125
RPQ
cannot be
installed if the 2311 Mdl 1/3340 or 2314/3340 Compatibility
feature (#8060, #8070) is installed
Also
note Control Storage requirements in Chart A. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: See "Control Storage Requirements" under
"Highlights" above.
1403/3203 CARRIAGE CONTROL FEATURE (#4460),
Allows
the 3203 Printer with its tapeless carriage control to emulate the
function of a tape controlled carriage and thus run programs
written for a 1403 Printer. Limitations: The 5203 Printer is not
supported by this feature. Cannot be installed with String Switch
Capability /16-Drive Expansion specify feature (#9315) or 3344
Attachment specify feature (#9317). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: 3203 Printer. Note: #4460 is not required with
DOS/VS Release 31 and subsequent releases.
5425 MULTI-FUNCTION CARD UNIT POWER PREREQUISITE
(#4500),
Provides the power supply for the 5425 Multi-function
Card Unit when no native printer (1403 or 3203) is attached.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with 1403 Printer /5425 Card Unit
Power Prerequisite (#4505). Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
1403 PRINTER/5425 CARD UNIT POWER PREREQUISITE
(#4505).
Provides the power supply for the natively attached
1403 Printer with or without a 5425 MFCU. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with 5425 Multi-function Card Unit Power Prerequisite
(#4500). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 3203 PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#4650).
Control
for attaching the 3203 Printer mdl 1 or 2. Specify: #9770 for
3203 mdl 1, or #9771 for 3203 mdl 2. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Integrated 1403 Printer Attachment (#4662, 4667 or
4668). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MDL 2 ATTACHMENT (#4662).
Provides control for attaching the 1403 Printer mdl 2. Specify:
#9847~ to support UCS (#8641) on the 1403 mdl 2. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Integrated 3203 Printer Attachment
(#4650). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Integrated 1403 Printer Attachment (#4667) and its prerequisite
(#4505).
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER ATTTACHMENT (#4667).
Control
for attaching the 1403 Printer mdl 7. Prerequisite feature required
for installation of the Integrated 1403 Printer Mdl 2 or Mdl N1
Attachment (#4662, #4668). Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Integrated 3203 Printer Attachment (#4650). Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 1403 Printer /5425 Card
Unit Power Prerequisite (#4505).
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL N1 ATTACHMENT (#4668),
Control for attaching the 1403 Printer mdl N1. Specify: #9847~
to support UCS (#8640) on the 1403 mdl N1. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with Integrated 3203 Printer Attachment (#4650).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated
1403 Printer Mdl 2 Attachment (#4662) and its prerequisites
(#4667, #4505).
INTEGRATED 2560 MOL A1 ATTACHMENT (#4670). Control for
the 2560 Multi-function Card Machine mdl A 1. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with Integrated 3525 Card Punch Attachment (#4685)
or with Integrated 5425 Attachment (#4695). Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #9726 on the 2560 mdl
A1 ... see "Specify" under 2560.
2560 CARD PRINT CONTROL (#4674),
Provides control for
Card Print capability on the 2560 MFCM mdl A 1. Specify:
#9797~ for first two print lines, #9798~ for second two print lines,
#9799~ for third two print lines, when corresponding Card Print
(#1575, 1576, 1577) features are installed on the 2560 mdl A 1.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated 2560 Mdl A 1
Attachment (#4670).
MAGNETIC TAPE ADAPTER (#4675),
Provides control for attachment of one 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1, 2 or 3
or one 3803 Tape Control mdl 3. See 3420 and 3803 or 3411
and 3410 for additional ordering instructions. The Magnetic Tape
Adapter is addressed as channel 2. See "Highlights" for additional information. Maximum: One. Specify: #9807 for attachment of
3803 mdl 3. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: A 3803 and
, CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced w:thout written permission.
-------- --=- =---- --=
----':' =
M 3125.4
Jul79
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (conl'd)
3411
cannot coexist
on
the
Magnetic Tape Adapter.
Prerequisites: S/370 Mdl 115/125 Attachment (#7361) on the
3411, except for 3125 mdls HG2 and 12. When attached to 3125
mdl HG2 or 12, RPQ
is required on the 3411.
INTEGRATED 3504 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#4680),
Control for attaching the 3504 Card Reader mdl A1 or A2. Supports Read Column Eliminate capability on the 3504 Card Reader.
Specify: #9781 for 3504 mdl A 1, or #9782 for 3504 mdl A2;
#9783 provides Optical Mark Read capability on the 3125 when
Optical Mark Read (#5450) is installed on the 3504 mdl A1 or
A2; #9784 provides the capability of using the Selective Stacker
(#6555) feature on the 3504 mdl A1 or A2. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 3525 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#4685).
Control for attaching the 3525 Card Punch mdl P1, P2 or P3.
Specify: #9791; for 3525 mdl P1, #9792; for 3525 mdl P2, or
#9793; for 3525 mdl P3. Specify #9794; when the Card Read
(#1533) feature is installed on the 3525. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Integrated 2560 Mdl A1 Attachment (#4670) or
Integrated 5425 Attachment (#4695). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 5213 PRINTER MOL 1 ATTACHMENT (#4692).
Attaches the 5213 Printer mdl 1. Includes a special table to suppar' the Printer. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
3525 CARD PRINT CONTROL (#4693).
Provides control for
Card Print (#8339, #5273) capability on the 3525 Card Punch.
Specify: #9795; when Two-line Card Print (#8339) is installed
on th"l 3525, or #9796; when Multiline Card Print (#5273) is
installed on the 3525. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Integrated 3525 Card Punch Attachment (#4685).
INTEGRATED 5425 ATTACHMENT (#4695). Control for attaching the 5425 Multi-function Card Unit nidi A1 or A2. Specify:
#9183; for 5425 mdl A1 or #9184; for 5425 mdl A2.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Integrated 3525 Card Punch
Attachment (#4685) or with Integrated 2560 Mdl A1 Attachment
(#4670). Can only be installed with CPU Configuration 1 (#9091)
... see' 'Specify" above. Maximum; One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: 1403 Printer /5425 Card Unit Power Prerequisite
(#4505) required when 1403 is natively attached, or 5425 Multifunction Card Unit Power Prerequisite (#4500) if no native printer
(1403 or 3203) is configured. When 3203 Printer is attaohed,
#4500 or #4505 is not required.
BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#5248). To attach low speed
byte multiplex devices. See "Byte Multiplexer Channel" under
"Input/Output Channel" in "Highlights" section. #5248 includes
control storage necessary for lOP operation. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
S/360 MODEL 20 COMPATIBILITY (#7520).
Microprogram
controlled program which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute S/360 mdl 20 instructions.
limitations; Cannot be installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317) or
with 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457) unless RPQ
is installed on the 3125 ... RPQ
cannot be installed
it either 2311 Mdl 1/3340 or 2314/3340 compatibility feature
(#8060. #8070) is installed ...
Also note control
storage requirements in Chart A. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites:
See "Control Storage Requirements" under
"Highlights" above.
1052 COMPATIBILITY (#8005).
Operates the 5213 Printer mdl
1 and standard keyboard as an operator console in S/360-10S2
mode only. In this emulation mode of operation the Video/Display
acts as a slave unit to the printer. Field Installation: Yes.
Prer"lquisites: Integrated 5213 Printer Mdl 1 Attachment (#4692)
anel trle 5213 Printer mdl 1.
2311 MOL 1/3330 - SERIES COMPATIBILITY (#8040). Permits
the emulation of 2311 mdl 1 files on the 3333/3330 Disk Storage.
The user program may access both the emulated 2311 mdl 1 data
set as well as the native data set. This provides a "mixed-mode"
operating environment. Prerequisites: Minimum of one 4K Increment of Control Storage (#4101, #4102) ... see "Control Storage
ReQUl'ements'" under '"Highlights" above. Note: When running
0)08 Release 21-27, 1052 Compatibility (#8005) is a prerequisite.
fhe 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature (#4460) is also required
;; a 3203 Printer is attached. Emulation under DOS/VS requires
3YSRES on 3330 in native mode. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: #8040, #8060 and #8070 are mutually exclusive.
2311 MDL 1/3340 - SERIES COMPATIBILITY (#8060). Permits
the emulation of 2311 mdl 1 files on the 3340 Disk Storage. The
user program may access both the emulated 2311 mdl 1 data as
weil as the native data set. This provides a "mixed-mode'" operat;ng enviror·ment. Prerequisites: Minimum of one 4K Increment of
COlltrol Storage (#4101, #4102) ... see "Control Storage
!p ('pt.r diskette-ordy specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
I'..hargcoblc feature !hat supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
flllmber of dlSkefte-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Requirements'" under "Highlights'" above. Note: When running
DOS Release 21-27, 1052 Compatibility (#8005) is a prerequisite.
The 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature (#4460) is also required
if a 3203 Printer is attached. Emulation under DOS/VS requires
SYSRES on 3340. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot
be installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317) ... #8040, #8060,
#8070 and #9190 are mutually exclusive.
2314/3340 - SERIES COMPATIBILITY (#8070).
Permits the
emulation of 2314 files on the 3340 Disk Storage. The user program may access both the emulated 2314 data set as well as the
native data set. This provides a '"mixed-mode'" operating environment. Prerequisites: Minimum of one 4K Increment of Control
also see '"Control Storage
Storage (#4101, #4102)
Requirements'" under '"Highlights'" above. Note: When running
DOS Release 21-27, 1052 Compatibility (#8005) is a prerequisite.
The 1403/3203 Carriage Control Feature (#4460) is also required
if a 3203 Printer is attached. Emulation under DOS/VS requires
SYSRES on 3340 in native mode. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with 3344 Attachment (#9317) ...
#8040, #8060, #8070 and #9190 are mutually exclusive.
COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (ICA) (#4640).
Provides the basic control storage and common circuits for direct
attachment of up to six synchronous (BSC) communications lines
OR up to sixteen asynchronous (start/stop) communications lines
depending upon line speed. All combinations of BSC AND
start/stop require the Integrated Communications Adapter Extension (#4641). Additional features are required to create appropriate line interfaces for the individual lines. Figure 1 A schematically
represents the feature build-up. The ICA provides as standard:
-
Autopoll
Multipoint central station functions
Multipoint tributary station functions
EBCDIC transparent mode
EBCDIC or ASCII code
Start/Stop and BSC
Start/Stop and BSC
BSC only
BSC only
BSC only
Refer to Figures 2A and 2B for attachable terminals and for configuration requirements prior to ordering features below.
Note:
to assist in configurating the ICA
Manual, GA33-1S08).
refer to ICA Configurator
Customer Responsibilities -- see M 2700 pages for customer
responsibilities regarding communications facilities and services.
Communications Facilities -- see M 2700 pages for communications facility requirements with this feature.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER EXTENSION (ICAE)
(#4641).
This feature is required for all combinations of BSC
and start/stop lines. Extends the communications capability to up
to six BSC AND sixteen start/stop lines depending upon line
speed. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
ICA (#4640).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE GROUP 1. (ALG1) (#1201).
Permits
attachment of up to four medium speed asynchronous lines (AL)
(#1231) or up to four low speed asynchronous line pairs (ALP)
(#1241) or up to four telegraph line pairs (TLP) (#7881). ALGi
and ALG2 are identical in function and either one can be installed
as the first line group in the ICA. The lines within ALG1, positions
A 1 thru A4, must be installed in ascending order. Limitation: All
lines within ALG1 must have the same line speed and line control.
Different terminals using the same speed and line control can be
attached within one line group. See Figure 2A. Specify: One line
control specify code from Figure 2A. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: ICA (#4640).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE GROUP 2 (ALG2) (#1202).
Permits
attachment of up to four medium speed asynchronous lines (AL)
(#1232) or up to four low speed asynchronous line pairs (ALP)
(#1242) or up to four telegraph line pairs (TLP) (#7882). ALG1
and ALG2 are identical in function and either one can be installed
as the first line group in the ICA. The lines within ALG2, positions
AS thru A8, must be installed in ascending order. Limitation: All
lines in ALG2 must have the same line speed and line control.
Different terminals using the same line speed and line control can
be attached within one line group. See Figure 2A. Specify: One
line control specify code from Figure 2A. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Pre~equisite: ICA (#4640).
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE, MEDIUM SPEED (AL) (#1231 in ALGi,
#1232 in ALG2).
Provides for the attachment of one nonswitched 600 bps start/stop communications line. The 3767 can
be attached to this feature (at EC 380427 plus EC 380627) via
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
('
\
-------- --=
---- =---- --=--':' =
M 3125.5
Jul79
OP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (cont'd)
switched or non-switched lines at 300 bps and via non-switched
lines at 600 or 1200 bps. Clocking speed is selected at installation time. Connects to the line via a modem or IBM Line Adapter.
The lines are installed in ascending order, Al thru A4 in ALGI
and A5 thru A8 in ALG2. Note: IBM Line Adapters are tied to
specific line positions ... see Figures 4C and 40. Maximum: Four
#1231
and
#1232.
Field Installation:
Yes.
each of
Prerequisites: ALGI (#1201) is prerequisite to #1231; ALG2
(#1202) is prerequisite to #1232. Limitations: See Figure 5,
Maximum ICA Configuration. #1231, #1241 and #7881 cannot
be intermixed within ALGI. #1232, #1242 and #7882 cannot be
intermixed within ALG2.
ASYNCHRONOUS LINE PAIR, LOW SPEED (ALP) (#1241 in
ALG1, #~ 242 In ALG2).
Provides for the attachment of two
switched 110.0 bps or two switched or non-switched 134.5 bps
start/stop communications lines. Connects to the line via a modem or IBM Line Adapter. The lines are installed in ascending
order, Al thru A4 in ALGI and A5 thru A8 in ALG2. Note: IBM
Line Adapters are tied to specific line positions ... see Figures 4C
and 40. Limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum ICA Configuration.
#1231, #1241 and #7881 cannot be intermixed within ALGI.
#1232, #1242 and #7882 cannot be intermixed within ALG2.
Maximum: Four each of #1241 and #1242. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: ALGI (#1201) is prerequisite to #1241, and
ALG2 (#1202) is prerequisite to #1242.
AUTO CALL ADAPTER (ACA) (#1291-1296). Provides automatic
dialing capabilities on switched facilities. One of these features is
required for each line equipped to automatically originate calls on
switched networks. See Figure 3 for the selection of correct
feature code. Limitations: The use of Auto Call in a line group
precludes the last two lines/line pairs of that group ... see Figure
3. Maximum: Two per line group ... maximum total six. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: See Figure 3.
IBM LEASED LINE ADAPTER (#4743). A modem for start/stop
data transmission at 134.5 or 600 bps over non-switched facilities.
This line adapter operates with Leased Line Adapters on other IBM
products. Selection between 2-wire and 4-wire operation is made
at installation time. See Leased Line Adapter in SRL GA24-3435
for specifications and restrictions. Specify: See Figures 4C and
40. Maximum: See Figures 4C and 40. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Adapter Base, #4792 or #4793. Also see
Figures 4C and 40.
IBM 1200 BPS LINE ADAPTER (#4781, #4782, #4791).
A
modem for BSC data transmission at up to 1200 bps over nonswitched facilities or switched network. Also for start! stop transmission at 300, 600 or 1 200 bps over non-switched facilities to
the 3767 terminal. Unclocked and must interface to a SLC
(#7141-7144) or AL (#1231).
The IBM 1200 bps Line Adapter is available in three different
versions:
#4781 -- Non-switched
#4782 -- Switched with Autoanswer
#4791 -- Switched with Autocall and Autoanswer
Attachment to non-switched facilities is via an IBM provided cable
directly to the line. Attachment to the switched network is via an
IBM provided cable to a common carrier arrangement type CBS or
equivalent. Customer Responsibilities -- see M 2700 pages.
Communications Facilities -- see M 2700 pages. Specify: See
Figures 4C and 40. Maximum: See Figures 4C and 40. Field
Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: SLC (#7141-7144) or AL
(#1231) and a Line Adapter Base (#4792 or #4793). Also see
Figures 4C and 40. ACA (#1295 or #1296) is prerequisite for
#4791.
LINE ADAPTER BASE 2 (LAB 2) (#4792). Permits attachment of
up to two IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters for BSC lines and up to
four IBM Leased Line Adapters. The line adapters are tied to
specific line positions. See Figure 4C for configuration and possible line combinations. Note: LAB 2 is required for IBM 1200 bps
Line Adapters with Autoanswer (#4782) or with Autocall and
Autoanswer (#4791). Limitation: #4792 and #4793 are mutually
exclusive. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
LINE ADAPTER BASE 3 (LAB 3) (#4793). Permits attachment of
up to twelve IBM 1200 bps Line Adapters and IBM Leased Line
Adapters. The line adapters are tied to specific line positions. See
Figure 40 for configuration and possible line combinations.
Limitation: #4792 and #4793 are mutually exclusive. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
SYNCHRONOUS LINE GROUP (SLG) (#7100).
Permits attachment of up to four medium speed BSC lines -- SLC (#7141-7144)
and SL (#7151-7154). Maximum line speed is 7200 bps. The
lines in this group, positions S1 thru S4, must be installed in
ascending order. The lines can have different line speeds within
the maximum specified. Specify: Maximum line speed in the
group:
Max. Line Speed
1200
2400
4800
7200
Maximum:
(#4640).
Specify Code
#9751p
#9753p
#9754p
#9757p
bps
bps
bps
bps
One.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite:
ICA
SYNCHRONOUS LINE, HIGH SPEED (SLHS) (#7121).
Provides
for the attachment of one non-switched BSC line at speeds up to
50.0 kbps. See Figure 1. This is a digital current interface for
attachment to an E1, E2 or E3 facility. Note: Only for nonswitched point-to-point lines. Limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum
ICA Configuration. #7121 and #7131 are mutually exclusive.
This line has a load factor of 100% and must not be operated
concurrently with any other line in the ICA. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: ICA (#4640).
SYNCHRONOUS LINE, LOW LOAD (SLLL) (#7131 - First Line,
#7132 - Second Line). Each provides for the attachment of one
switched or non-switched BSC line. Non-switched lines with
switched network backup are supported.
Maximum line speed on non-switched lines is 7200 bps. Maximum
line speed on switched backup network is 3600 bps. Maximum
line speed on switched network is 2400 bps. See Figure 2B for
detailed speed and facility information.
Requires external modem. This feature has a lower load factor
than #7151-7154 ... see Figure 5. The modem must provide
clocking.
Specify: The highest line speed used on #7131 and #7132:
#9758 if the highest line speed is from 1200 bps up to 4800
bps.
#9759 if the highest line speed is above 4800 bps and up to
7200 bps.
Note: 1200 bps is the LOWEST allowed line speed for these
5LG (#7100) not required as a prerequisite.
features.
Limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum ICA Configuration ... #7131
and #7121 are mutually exclusive. Maximum: One each, #7131
and #7132. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: ICA (#4640)
... #7132 requires #7131 or #7121.
SYNCHRONOUS LINE,
(#7141-7144).
#7141
#7142
#7143
#7144
-----
Line
Line
Line
Line
MEDIUM
position
position
position
position
SPEED WITH
CLOCK
(SLC)
51
52
53
S4
Line positions S1 thru 54 must be installed in ascending order.
Each feature provides for the attachment of one switched or nonswitched BSC line. The clock can be set by the user for a transmission rate of 600 bps or 1200 bps. Connects to the line via an
unclocked modem or IBM Line Adapter. [Notes: IBM Line Adapters are tied to specific line positions ... see Figures 4C and 40.
SL (#7151-7154) may be intermixed with SLC (#7141-7144)
within the SLG.] Limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum ICA Configuration. #7141 is mutually exclusive with #7151, #7142 with
#7152, #7143 with #7153, and #7144 with #7154. Maximum:
One. each, #7141 thru #7144.
Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: SLG (#7100).
SYNCHRONOUS LINE, MEDIUM SPEED (SL) (#7151-7154).
#7151
#7152
#7153
# 7154
-----
Line
Line
Line
Line
position
position
position
position
51
82
S3
S4
Line positions S1 thru S4 must be installed in ascending order.
Each feature provides for the attachment of one switched or nonswitched BSC line. Non-switched lines with switched network
backup are supported.
Maximum line speed on non-switched lines is 7200 bps. Maximum
line speed on switched backup network is 3600 bps. Maximum
line speed on switched network is 4800 bps. See Figure 2B for
detailed speed and facility information.
Connects to the line via a modem. The modem must provide
clocking. Note: SL (#7151-7154) may be intermixed with SLC
(#7141-7144) within the SLG. Limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum ICA Configuration. #7151 is mutually exclusive with #7141,
#7152 with #7142, #7153 with #7143, and #7154 with
#7144.
Maximum: One each, #7151 thru #7154. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SLG (#7100).
TELEGRAPH LINE PAIR (TLP) (#7881 in ALG1, #7882 in ALG2).
# CPU diskette~only specify feature.
No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. -$290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette·only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- -------- - ----------_.-
M 3125.6
Jul 79
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (cont'd)
Provides for the attachment of two non-switched single current
telegraph lines at 45.5. 56.9, 74.2 or 75 bps. Attachment to the
lines is via an IBM provided external cable. The lines, A 1 thru A4
in ALG1 and AS thru A8 in ALG2, are installed in ascending order.
Limitations: See Figure 5, Maximum ICA Configuration. #1231,
#1241 and #7881 cannot be intermixed within ALG1. #1232,
# 1242 and #7882 cannot be intermixed within ALG2. Maximum:
Four each, #7881 and #7882.
Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: ALG1 (#1201) is prerequisite to #7881; ALG2
(# 1202) is prerequisite to # 7882.
MODEMS One IBM modem can be attached to each of the BSC
lines of the ICA (#4640). Prerequisite: SL (#7151-7154) or
SLLL (#7131, #7132).
Modem
Speed (bps)
3863
3872
3864
3874
3875
2400/1200
2400/1200
4800/2400
4800/2400
7200/3600/1800
Note: For communications capabilities, product utilization and
special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874, 3875 and M 2700
pages.
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 yr Purch
Special Feature Prices:
MMMC
3125-0 and 3125-2
#3898" $112 $102$ 4,200 $ 1.00
External Signals
Fltg Pt Incld Ext Precision
3910
NC NC
NC
""
4457
NC NC
NC
1401/1440/1460 Com pat
1403/3203 Carr Cntrl Feature 4460
NC NC
NC
"
5425 MFCU Power Prereq
4500
179 163 6,715 14.00
1403/5425 Cd Unit Pwr Prereq 4505
313 285 11,730 39.00
Int 3203 Prntr Attachment
4650" 173 158 5,205 16.50
Int 1403 Prntr Mdl 2 Attach
4662"
10 10
434
1.00
Int 1403 Prntr Attachment
4667' 145 132 5,455 12.00
5
217
1.00
Int 1403 Prntr Mdl N1 Attach 4668'
5
Int 2560 Mdl A1 Attachment
4670' 156 142 5,890 12.00
30 1,250
2.00
2560 Card Print Control
4674"
33
Magnetic Tape Adapter
3.50
4675' 112 102 4,200
Int 3504 Card Reader Attach
4680"
72
66 2,730
8.50
81 3,375 11.00
Int 3525 Card Punch Attach
4685'
89
3.50
Int 5213 Prntr Mdl 1 Attach
4692" 112 102 4,200
67
61 2,510
3.00
3525 Card Print Control
4693'
Int 5425 Attachment
4695" 156 142 5,890 21.00
Byte Multiplexer Channel
5248' 224 204 8,405 24.00
5/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility
7520
NC NC
NC
NC
8005
NC NC
1052 Compatibility
2311 Mdl 1/3330-Series Cmpt 8040
NC NC
NC
NC
2311 Mdl 1/3340-Series Cmpt 8060
NC NC
NC
2314/3340-Series Cmpt
8070
NC NC
'"
".
".
Communications Features
Int Communications Adapter
Int Comm Adapter Extension
Asynchronous Line Group 1
Asynchronous Line Group 2
Async Line, Med Spd - ALG1
Async Line, Med Spd - ALG2
Async Line Pr, Low 5pd-ALG1
Async Line Pr, Low Spd-ALG2
Auto Call Adapter line position A 1
line position A2
line position A5
line position A6
line position S1
line position S2
IBM Leased Line Adapter
IBM 1200 BP5 Line Adapter non-switched
switched w autoanswer
sw w autoans & autocall
Line Adapter Base 2
Line Adapter Base 3
Synchronous Line Group
Synchronous Line, High Speed
Synchronous Line, Low Load first line
second line
Sync Line, Med Spd w Clock line position S1
line position S2
line position S3
line position S4
Sync Line, Med Spd line position S1
line position 52
line pOSition S3
line position 54
Telegraph Line Pair - ALG1
Telegraph Line Pair - ALG2
4640" 230 210
4641'
84
77
1201*
43
40
1202"
43
40
1231'
43
40
43
1232'
40
1241'
61
56
56
1242"
61
8,585
3,160
1,685
1,685
1,685
1,685
2,295
2,295
27.50
1.50
3.50
3.50
3.00
3.00
4.00
4.00
20
20
20
20
20
20
14
824
824
824
824
824
824
424
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
1.50
3.00
4781'
4782"
4791"
4792"
4793"
7100'
7121"
16
15
21
20
72
66
28
26
28
26
43 40
112 102
535
714
1,970
1,035
1,035
1,685
4,200
3.00
3.50
12.00
2.00
2.00
3.50
9.00
7131 "
7132"
112 102
112 102
4,200
4,200
9.00
9.00
1291'
1292'
1293"
1294"
1295'
1296"
4743"
21
21
21
21
21
21
15
7141"
7142"
7143"
7144"
61
61
61
61
56
56
56
56
2,295
2,295
2,295
2,295
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
7151"
7152"
7153'
7154'
7881'
7882"
49
49
49
49
61
61
45
45
45
45
56
56
1,905
1,905
1,905
1,905
2,295
2,295
3.50
3.50
3.50
3.50
9.50
9.50
55
55
50
50
1,335
1,335
1.50
1.50
110 100
55
50
2,670
1,335
3.50
1.50
3125-0 Only
4K Control Storage Increment
4101
first
4102
second
3125-2 Only
8K Control Storage Extension
4K DASF Control Storage Ext
4105
4210
• Feature supplies CPU diskette.
.... CPU diskette-only feature. No fee when ordered at lime of manufacture or
when field installed. $290 on purchased machines when combined with changes subject
to a distribution fee to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on the
same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----------=-- =--- ---=----':' =
M 3125.7
Jul 79
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (canl'd)
FIGURE 1A
INTEGRATED
COMMUNICATIONS
FEATURE BUILD-UP
ICAE
(#4641)
LINE
GROUP
ADAPTER
LINE INTERFACES
Async Line
Position
SCHEMATIC
AL (#1231), or ALP
I~:mg, orTLP
ALG I
(#1201)
ICA
(#4640)
1050
A2
1060
AL (#1231), or ALP
1~:~~~
ALG 2
(#1202)
1030
AI
orTLP
g. or TLP
A3 (I)
AL (#1231), or ALP
(#1241), or TLP
11#7881)'
A4(I)
AL (#1232), or ALP
(#1242), or TLP
(#7882)'
AS
AL (#1232), or ALP
(#1242), or TLP
11#7882)
AL (#1232), or ALP
2740 mdll
2740 mdl2
2741
A7(1)
AL (#1232), or ALP
(# 1242), or TLP
,1#7882\
5010 mdl Axx
A8 (I)
l~k7\~WI), or SLC
SI
1~L (#~J52), or SLC
#7142
S2
5100/5110
SLG
(#7100)
1~k7 \~~J53), or SLC
S3 (I)
SL (#7154), or SLC
1(#7144)
S4 (I)
D2
1231
9740~
1232
9750~
75.0
A4
7881
9736~
7882
9746~
134.5
CI,C2,
DI
1241
9738~
1242
9748~
134.5
DI
1241
9738~
1242
9748~
134.5
CI, C2,
DI
1241
9738~
1242
9748~
75.0
A4
7881
9736~
7882
9746~
134.5
DI
1241
9738~
1242
9748~
600,0
D2
1231
9739~
1232
9749<$
134.5
CI, C2,
DI
1241
9738~
1242
9748~
CI, DI
1231
9739~
1232
9749~
D2
1231
9739~
1232
9749<$
CI,C2,
DI
1241
9738~
1242
9748~
9749~
SLLL (#7131), or
SLHS (#7121)'
S5
SLLL (#7132)
S6
134.5
600.0
D2
1231
9739~
1232
134.5
BI, B2,
CI,C2,
Dl
1241
9738~
1242
9748~
300.0
Cl, DI
1231
9739~
1232
9749<$
45.5
AI
788i
9733~
7882
9743~
56.9
A2
7881
9734~
7882
9744<$
74.2
A3
7881
9735~
7882
9745<$
110.0
C3
1241
9737~
1242
9747~
AT&T
83B2/83B3
WU liSA
TWX-33/35
I
LINE
LINE
INTER- CNTRL
SPECIFY
FACE
600.0
3767 mdl 1,2
w#71110r
300.0
#7113
3767 mdl I, 2, 600 or
1200
3 w #7112
A6
(:~~morTLP
ALG2
ALG I
FACIL- LINE
LINE
TERMINAL SPEED
(bps)
ITiES INTER- CNTRL
SPECIFY
FACE
Sync Line
Position
AL (#1231), or ALP
I~:nm
FIGURE 2A
START /STOP TERMINALS
CPU diskette-only specity feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
(I) Auto Call Adapters (#1291-1296) restrict the use of these line positions '"
see Figure 3.
FIGURE 2B
BINARY SYNCHRONOUS TERMINALS
SPEED
(bps)
600
1200
1200
2400
2400
2400/
1200
4BOO
4BOO/
2400
4800/
2400
7200/
3600
72001
3600 &
3600/
1800
19,200
40,800
50,000
LINE
INTERFACE
FACILITIES
7141-7144
7141-7144
7141-7144
7151-7154
7151-7154
C3
C4
03
C5
04, XIM tt
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
x X
x X X
X
X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
x
X
X X X X
X X
X
X X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X
XX
X X
X X
XX
X
7151-7154
04SB
X K
7151-7154 or
7131/7132
05, X2M ttt
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
x
X X X X X X
X X X XX
7151-7154
C6
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X
X X X X X X
X X XX
7151-7154
X
X X X X X
'X X X X
X
X X X X X X
X X
05SB
X X
7151-7152 or
7131/7132
06
X X X X X X X
X
X X X X
X X
X X X
X
7151-7152 or
7131/7132
06SB
X X
X X X X
X
X X X X
X X
X
X
7121
7121
7121
El
E2
E3
X X
X X
X X
X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X
•• 3125 leA must use the IBM 1200 bps Modem (#4781 or #4782),
X X
X
X
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X'
tt XIM may not be used for communications with a 2703 or a S/360 mdl 25,
ttt X2M may not be used for communications with. 2703 or a S/360 mdl 25,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- - ---=- - ---
----- - =---':' =
=----
M 3125.8
Jill 79
DP Machines
3125 Processing Unit (cont'd)
FIGURE 3
AUTO CALL ADAPTERS
AUTO CALL
ADAPTER
FEATURE
CODE
PROVIDES
AUTO CALL
FOR LINE
POSITION
Al (I)
1291
1292
A2(l)
AS (I)
1293
1294
1295
A6 (I)
SI
1296
S2
FIGURE 40
LINE ADAPTER BASE 3 (#4793) ... Maximum, 12 IBM Line
Adapters.
PREREQUISITES
PRECLUDES
LINE
POSITIONS
1241
A3 and A4
1241 and 1291
A3 and A4
1242
A7 and A8
1242 and 1293
7141 or 7151
A7 and A8
S3 and S4
7142 or 7152 and
1295
S3 and S4
LINE
POSITION
LINE
ADAPTER
Al (3)
4743 or 4781
A2 (3)
LINE
ADAPTER
POSITION
SPECIFY
PREREQ
NOTE
9481,9501 1
1231
Excludes line
adapter in Po~;tion
S4 (#9496
4743 or 4781
9482,9502 1
1231
ada~~r(~~;\tion
A3 (3)
4743 or 4781
9483,9503 1
1231
Excludes line
adapter in position
S2 (#9494)
A4(3)
4743 or 4781
9484,9504 1
1231
Excludes line
adapter in position
SI (#9493)
Excludes line
(I) Provides Autocall in this line position for the first line of the Asynchronous
Line Pair (#1241 or #1242).
FIGURE 4A
IBM LINE ADAPTERS
BSC
FACILITY
IBM 1200 bps
Line Adapter
Non-switched pt-to-pt
4781
START/STOP
up to 600 bps
Start/Stop (2) up
to 1200 bps
IBM Leased
Line Adapter
4743
IBM 1200 bps
Line Adapter
4781
Non-switched
multipoint control
4781
4743
4781
Non-switched
multipoint tributary
4781
---
---
4782
---
---
4791
---
---
Switched with
autoanswer
Switched with autocall
and autoanswer
(2) Only with 3767 terminal.
FIGURE 4C
LINE ADAPTER BASE 2 (#4792) ... Maximum, 6 IBM Line
Adapters.
LINE
POSITION
LINE
ADAPTER
4743
AS 1st line
AS 2nd line
4743
A6 1st line
4743
A6 2nd line
SI
S2
LINE
ADAPTER
POSITION
SPECIFY
PREREQ
1242
94631
94641
9463
4743
94651
94661
9465
4781
94711
7141
1242
4782
4791
94731
94751
7141
7141
4781
94721
94741
94761
7142
4782
4791
NOTE
7142
AS 1st line
4743
9485#
1242
AS 2nd line
4743
9485
A6 1st line
4743
94861
94871
A6 2nd line
4743
4743
9487
1242
A8 1st line
4743
A82nd line
4743
94881
94891
94901
94911
94921
SI
4781
9493#
7141
Excludes line
adapter in position
A4 (#94S4)
S2
47S1
9494#
7142
ada~~r(~rs3~tion
S3
47S1
94951
7143
ada~~r(~~~\tion
S4
47S1
94961
7144
Excludes line
adapter in position
Al (#94SI)
A7 1st line
A7 2nd line
4743
1242
9489
1242
9491
Excludes line
Excludes line
(3) #47SI may be used only with the 3767 terminal.
FIGURE 5
MAXIMUM ICA CONFIGURATION
All lines/line pairs are assigned load factors.
The sum of all load factors must not exceed 100% if SLHS is not
Installed.
The sum of all load factors must not exceed 200% if SLHS is
Installed.
WAD FACTOR IN %
Select one line
adapter
Select one line
adapter
7142
ASYNCHRONOUS LINES
1-2 line
pairs
3-4 line
I pairs
5-6 line
pairs
7-Sline
pairs
TLP at 45.5 and 56.9 bps
TLP at 74.2 and 75.0 bps
ALP at 110.0 and 134.5 bps
20%
20%
40
20
20
40
First Line Group
(AW)
Up to 4 hnes
40%
40%
SO
60
60
SO
Second Line Group
ALGI +ALG2
5 to Slines
AL at 300/600/1200 bps
SYNCHRONOUS LINES
20
\-2 lines
40
3-4 lines
Autopoll Autopoll
Not Used Used
SL and SLC at max. 1200 bps
SL and SLC at max. 2400 bps
SL at max. 4800 bps
SL at max. 7200 bps
20
20
40
60
25
25
50
75
Iline
Autopoll Autopoll
Not Used Used
SLLL at max. 4800 bps
SLLL at max. 7200 bps
SLHS at max. 50 kbJiS
20
20
100·
25
30
Autopoll Autopoll
Not Used Used
20
40
80
25
50
100
2 lines
Autopoll Autopoll
Not Used Used
20
40
30
60
• See "Limitations" in the Special Feature description of the feature.
/
'\
I
CPU diskette·only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased maChines to include any
number of diskette·only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ----- ==--.:.- =-=
';' ==
M 3135.1
Jul79
DP Machines
TABLE OF CONTROL STORAGE REQUIREMENTS (conl'd) BYTES
IBM 3135 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Has main and control storage, plus arithmetic and logic
circuits for a S/370 mdl 135.
Model FE
98,304 bytes of processor storage.
Model GO
147,456 bytes of processor storage.
Model GF
196,608 bytes of processor storage.
Model H
262,144 bytes of processor storage.
Model HF
327,680 bytes of processor storage.
Model HG
393,216 bytes of processor storage.
Model I
524,288 bytes of processor storage.
For additional models of the 3135, see 3135-3 "Machines"
pages.
Highlights: Depending upon the model, up to 524,288 bytes of
processor storage are available. CPU cycle time varies from 275
to 1485 nanoseconds depending on the internal operation being
performed. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are provided.
Capability to natively attach a 2319 Disk Storage mdl A1" (and
additional 2319 mdl A3", 2312" or 2318" Disk Storage).
Capability to natively attach one or two 3333 Disk Storage and
Control modules. Capability to natively attach one or two 3340
Direct Access Storage Facility mdl A2s. Capability to natively
attach a 1403 Printer mdl 2, 7 or N1. See "Special Features."
Virtual Storage capability to increase the effective utilization of
main storage,
Up to eight teleprocessing lines are attachable via the Integrated
Communications Adapter (#4640).
Standard features include a commercial instruction set, new
S/370 instructions, Extended Control (EC) Mode, Dynamic Address Translation, Channel Indirect Data Addressing, Program
Event Recording, interval timer, time-of-day clock, store and fetch
protect, console file, byte-oriented operand feature, error checking
and correction on main and control storage, automatic instruction
retry, channel command retry, byte multiplexer channel, OS/DOS
Compatibility Feature, and audible alarm,
A standard console file is the basic microprogram loading device
for the system, The console file contains a small, low performance
read only file device that provides all the microcode for the system
on removable. magnetic disk cartridges. The disks that will be
supplied with the system will contain all of the required microcode
for the basic system, the optional features ordered for the system,
and FE diagnostics.
An optional Clock Comparator and Timer provides additional timing
facilities for the programmer.
Control Storage Requirements - Reloadable Control Storage is
housed in the 3135, and is loaded from the console file. 24,576
bytes of control storage are standard ". two additional increments
of 12,288 bytes are available if required to support special features.
TABLE OF CONTROL STORAGE REQUIREMENTS
Basic Systems Microcode
APL Assist (#1005)
Conditional Swapping (#1051)
AutocoJl (#1290) •
Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421)
Block MUltiplexer Shared Subchannel (#1431)
Clock Comparator and CPU Timer (#2001)
Direct Control (#3274)
Extended Precision Floating Point (#3840)
Floating Point (#3900)
64 Multiplexer Subchannels (#3905)
128 MUltiplexer Subchannels (#3906)
256 Multiplexer Subchannels (#3907)
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#4457)
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640)
IFA Conversion Feature (#4645)
2319 Integrated File Adapter (#4650)
3333/3340 Series IFA (#4655) with:
String Switch Attachment (#9841) with:
Fixed Head Attachment (#9190) with:
BYTES
15,482
13,800
300
440
1,568
14
#9313
#9314
#9315
#9316···
#9317 ++
#9313
#9314
#9315
#9316·"
#9314
#9315
1,400
50
676
1,200
1,024
2,048
4,096
3,492
2,100
2,048
.4,652
10,192
9,768
12,800
300
2,200
300
370
334
o
300
300
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670)
Integrated 1403 Printer mdt 2, mdl N I Altachment (#4672)
Integrated 1403 Printer mdl 7 Attachment (#4677)
First or First and Second Selector Channel (#6981.6982)
S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility (#7520)
3210 Model I Adapter (#7844)
3215 Adapter (#7855)
Virtual Machine Assist (#8740)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#9649·9656) •
Adapter Base Type I +*
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II (#9721·9728) +'
Telegraph Adapter Type II (#9785-9792) +'
Terminal Adapter Type III (#9753-9760) •
2314/3340 Series Compatibility (#8070)
1,300
o
o
1.584
876
1,494
1,930
2,000
3.700
1,200
500
200
2.100
6,400
For the basic system and applicable special features, total the
control storage requirements given in the table. If the total exceeds 24,576 bytes, First 12K Control Storage Increment (#7861)
is required. II the total exceeds 36,864 bytes, Second 12K Control
Storage Increment (#7862) is also required,
Limitations: The maximum configuration that can operate at any
one time is determined by the available control storage (maximum
49,152 bytes). Alternate feature configurations can be operated
by utilizing additional magnelic disk cartridges with another set of
3135 features, Alternate cartridges for an installation will be
available by RPQ_
Virtual Storage: Extended Control (EC) Mode expands the structure of the Program Status Word to accommodate the control of
new S/370 features and extends the number of permanently
assigned main storage locations. The S/370 mdl 135 can operate
in either EC Mode or Basic Control (BC) Mode as defined for the
S/360. Dynamic Address Translatioh (OAT) is a standard feature
on the S/370 mdl 135. When the S/370 mdl 135 is in Extended
Control (EC) Mode with Translation Mode operable, program addresses are treated as "logical addresses" and the translation
feature develops "real addresses." Since logical storage addressing is not limited by the amount of available real storage, program
size may exceed real storage size. This logical storage is referred
to as "virtual storage" and may be as large as 16,777,216 bytes
on the S/370 mdl 135. For I/O operations, Channel Indirect Data
Addressing provides a means to transmit data that spans pages in
noncontiguous real storage.
Program Event Recording, a standard feature, is a debugging aid
which permits four types of events to be selectively monitored in a
virtual environment: [1) Successful branches ... [2) Instruction
fetch address compare ... [3) Main Storage alteration address
compare ... [4) General Purpose Register alteration address compare.
Input/Output Attachments - a wide variety of I/O devices may
be attached to the S/370 mdl 135 via the standard byte multiplexer and optional selector channels. There are additionally, five
direct attachment features for the 3135. They are:
Console Printer-Keyboard (Required) - this unit serves as the
on-line I/O device for operator/system communications. It provides a means of manually entering data into the system, altering
or displaying data already in storage, and for printing error logout
messages.
2319 Integrated File Adapter (#4650) (Optional) - this feature
enables native attachment of a 2319 Disk Storage mdl A1" (and
a 2319 mdl A3", 2312 mdl A1s" or 2318 mdl A1") up to a
total of eight drives. The IFA is addressed as channel 1.
LlMITA nON: Cannot be installed if 3333/3340 Intermix (#9315)
is specified when 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655) is also ordered.
3330/3340 Series Integrated File Adapter (#4655) (Optional) -this feature allows the native attachment of one or two 3333
modules or 3340 mdl A2 units. Each 3333 module (either mdl 1
or mdl 11) can attach up to three 3330 modules (any combination of mdls 1, 2 or 11). Each 3340 mdl A2 can attach 3340 mdl
1012 or B1 units and one 3340 mdl A2 can also attach 3344 units
to a maximum of eight drives. Maximum is sixteen drives per IFA.
II 2319 IFA (#4650) is also present, IFA Conversion Feature
(#4645) is required.
Integrated Communications Adapter (Optional) -- this feature
provides attachment of up to eight teleprocessing lines to the
3135, These may be any combination of supported BSC and
StartlStop lines and appear to the processor as if connected via
one or more 2701 s on the byte multiplexer channel.
Integrated Printer Adapter (Optional) -- this feature enables
• The specified control storage is required once only for any number of lines of
one type.
+ For Telegraph Adapter Type II or Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, the
contr~l
storage required is the Adapter Base Type I plus the control storage for the appropnate adapter. One copy of Adapter Base Type I is automatically included whenever
either or both of these adapters are ordered.
++ Requires #9314.
•• No longer available .
••• Requires either #9313 or #9315.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=--=------- --=--':' =
M 3135.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (conI' d)
native attachment of a 1403 Printer mdl 2, 7 or Nl. The Universal Character Set Feature can be optionally specified on the
1403 mdl 2 or Nl.
3135
Input/Output Channels
Byte Multiplexer Channel -- one is standard on the 3135 and is
functionally equivalent to the byte multiplexer channel on S/360
mdls 22, 25, 30, 40, 50. Sixteen subchannels are provided as
standard with the option to extend to 64, 128 or 256 ... see
"Special Features." From the number of subchannels chosen,
one must be allocated to the Console Printer-Keyboard (see
"Specify"), and one for each ICA line installed. The byte multiplexer channel provides eight control unit positions and permits
I/O units to operate normally in byte mode, giving the effect of
several I/O operations simultaneous with computing. Burst mode
operation of unbuffered devices operating in excess of 10KB is
not allowed for concurrent operation with the Integrated File
Adapter, the Integrated Communications Adapter, or a Selector
Channel. For further clarification refer to IBM S/370 Model 135
Channel Characteristics Manual, GA33-3010. For OS exclusion,
refer to SRL GC28-6554, "System Generation."
Selector Channels - two are available as special features. Data
rates are 1.3 megabytes per second.
Direct access devices may be attached to selector channels
and/or to the Integrated File Adapters. If either or both the 2319
IFA and the 3330/3340 Series IFA is present, the following applies:
- Direct access devices should be attached to the higher priority
selector channel (normally the first).
- If the device on the higher priority selector channel is the 3330
or 3340 Disk Storage series, the lower priority selector channel should be limited to devices with data rates not exceeding
144KB per second.
- The selector channel priorities for command chaining may be
reversed by specifying Channel Priority (#1501).
If the 3330/3340 Series IFA, or both !FAs, are present without
additional direct access devices attached via a selector channel,
tape units on selector channels 2 and 3 are limited to an aggregate 950 KB.
If an IFA is not present, two channels of 3330 Series, 3340 Series, and/or 3350 Series DASD can be attached. For additional
information and limitations, see S/370 Model 135 Channel
Characteristics, GA33-301 O.
Console Function -- a standard system control panel is located on
the 3135. It has switches and lights necessary to operate and
control the system. A system console I/O function is provided with
either of two alternatives. Feature #7844 attaches the 3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 (15.5 cps) on the console table reading board. Optionally, the 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard (85 cps)
may be attached via feature #7855. A right reading board extena left extension is not available.
sion is standard on the 3135
Either feature # 7844 or # 7855 is required in the system ... see
"Special Features."
PREREQUISITES: Each 3135 requires a 3046 Power Unit ... see
3046.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: (1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
(2) Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
(3) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
(4) Console Printer-Keyboard Address: Recorded on console file
disk at the plant. #910H for X'OlF', or #9102~ for X'009'.
(5) Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum 1/0 units required in a S/370 mdl
135.
(6) Console Printer-Keyboard: A 3210 mdl 1 or 3215 is required in
every system .. , see 3210, 3215 and "Special Features" below.
(7) Shipping Instructions: Unless otherwise specified, shipping
dimensions of the 3135 Frame 01 (CPU) are 31-1/2" wide x
70" long x 60" high. Removal of the side covers will reduce
the width to 29-1/2". If further reduction in length is required,
specify #9570. Shipping dimensions will then be 29-1/2" wide
x 60" long x 60" high.
NOTE: RETAIN/370 ... CE access is by telephone.
Mdl
MACI
MRC
FE
GO
GF
H
HF
HG
I
$6,355
7,370
8,385
9,740
10,440
11,140
12,540
TLP/
MLC
4 Year Purchase
$5,780
6,705
7,630
8,870
9,510
10,150
11,430
$252,800
284,950
317,100
350,550
372,450
394,350
438,150
MMMC
$497
529
560
658
712
766
874
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 50%t
Warranty: A
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From To
FE
GO
GF
OH
H
HF
HG
OH
GO
GF
$32,150
$64,300
32,150
$96,450
64,300
32,150
H
HF
HG
$97,750 $119,650 $141,550 $185,350
65,600
87,500 109,400 153,200
33,450
55,350
77,250 121,050
55,350
77,250 121,050
33,450
21,900
43,800
87,600
21,900
65,700
43,800
SPECIAL FEATURES
APL ASSIST (#1005). Provides performance assist to APL programs when used with VS APL PP #5748 AP1. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: 12K control store increments (#7861 and
#7862) and Floating Point (#3900).
CONDITIONAL SWAPPING (#1051).
Provides two additional
instructions ... Compare and Swap ... Compare Double and Swap.
This feature is a prerequisite for the execution of VTAM programming support and for TCAM/NCP. Field Installation: Yes.
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#1421).
Increases the efficiency of the 3330/3340 Series IFA and selector channels when
using direct access storage devices equipped with rotational position sensing or other devices capable of disconnected command
chaining. The disconnected command chaining feature of the
channel allows multiple devices to perform non-data transfer operation concurrently with one data transfer operation. This permits
increased utilization of the channel(s) by performing operations of
other devices while the channel would normally have been waiting
on one device. The feature provides 16 non-shared selector and 1
shared subchannel. The shared selector subchannel may attach a
control unit having a maximum of 16 device addresses. Devices on
a block multiplexer channel which cannot utilize the block multiplexer feature will function as if attached to a conventional selector channel. Maximum: One. Applies to both Selector Channels
and the 3330/3340 Series IFA. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: First Selector Channel (#6981) or 3330/3340
Series IFA (#4655).
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER SHARED SUBCHANNEL (#1431). Note:
This feature should only be installed if devices capable of "Block
Shared" operation are installed on the block multiplexer channel.
See I/O Configuration Form, GA22-7002. Allows anyone of the
following combinations of "Non-Shared", "Block Shared", or
selector subchannels to be attached to the Block Multiplexer
Channel (#1421): (1)16 non-shared and one shared selector (see
address restrictions) ... [2) 8 non-shared, 8 block shared, and 1
shared selector (see address restrictions) ... [3] 8 non-shared, 4
block shared, 1 shared selector (see address restrictions). If
option [2) is selected, then each block shared subchannel may
have attached to it a control unit having a maximum of 16 device
addresses. If option [3) is selected, the four block shared subchannels may each have attached a control unit having a maximum of 32 device addresses. If option [1) is selected, no block
shared subchannels are available, and addresses XOO through X7F
are not available. With any option, the selector subchannel may
have attached to it control units with a maximum of 16 device
addresses. This feature will apply to both selector channels if
installed. The options are selectable by the Customer Engineer
and may be defined differently on each channel. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Block Multiplexer Channel
(#1421). Address Restrictions with #1431:
, CPU diskette-only feature. No fee when ordered at time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature thai supplies diskette.
$405 on purchased machines to include a·oy number of diskette-only
changes ordered on same diskette.
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------=- =---- -------=':' =
M 3135.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (conI' d)
a)
Addresses XOO through X7F are assigned as block shared
subchannels. With option [1], they may not be used. With
option [2], each control unit address position, i.e., XOO, X10,
X20, etc., through X70 is available. With oprion [3], "even"
control unit address positions only are available, i.e., 00, 20,
40, and 60.
b)
Selector and non-shared addresses are limited to addresses
X80 through XFF.
CHANNEL PRIORITY (#1501). When the IFA (#4650 or #4655)
and both selector channels are present, this feature changes the
higher priority for command chaining from the first selector channel (Channel 2) to the second selector channel (Channel 3).
# 1501 is required if any DASD devices are to be attached to
Channel 3. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated File
Adapter (#4650 or #4655) and both Selector Channels (#6981
and #6982).
CLOCK COMPARATOR AND CPU TIMER (#2001).
The Clock
Comparator provides a means of causing an interruption when the
time-of-day clock has passed a program-specified value. The CPU
Timer is a binary counter which is decremented every microsecond
but has a readout resolution of 16 microseconds. It provides a
means of measuring elapsed CPU time by causing an interruption
when a prespecified amount of time has elapsed. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two instructions, Read
Direct and Write Direct, and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
8/360 Direct Control Feature - OEMI, GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622).
To provide a single emergency power-off switch in a "room" or "area."
see Emergency Power-Off Control under S/370 mdl 135 in
"Systems." #3621 -- to interconnect two emergency power-off
switches ... #3621 -- to interconnect up to twelve emergency
power-off switches. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED PRECISION FLOATING POINT (#3840). Extends the
precision of floating point instructions to. 28 hexadecimal digits.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Floating Point (#3900).
FLOATING POINT (#3900).
Adds 44 floating point arithmetic
instructions ... these, with the Standard Set, make up the Scientific Instruction Set. Field Installation: Yes.
MULTIPLEXER SUBCHANNELS, ADO'L (#3905-3907).
To increase the number of I/O devices on the byte multiplexer channel,
the number of subchannels can be increased by specifying one of
the following: #3905 - for 64 subchannels ... #3906 -- for 128
subchannels ., #3907 - for 256 subchannels. The maximum
number of shared subchannels is eight. When 256 subchannels
are installed there are no shared subchannels. Note: The number
of subchannels ordered must be equal to or greater than the
device addresses. Also see "Byte Multiplexer Channel" under
"Input/Output Channels" above. Field Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1460 COMPATIBILITY (#4457).
Microprogrammed
controlled feature, which, in conjunction with special software,
permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460 instructions.
Field Installation: Yes.
IFA CONVERSION FEATURE (#4645). Permits co-residence of
both 2319 Integrated File Adapter (#4650) and 3330/3340 Series
Integrated File Adapter (#4655). Both IFAs are addressed as
Channel 1. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed if
3333/3340 Intermix (#9315) or 3344 Attach (#9317) is specified
'" cannot be installed with 2314/3340 Compatibility Feature
(#8070). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: 2319 Integrated
File Adapter (#4650) and 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655).
2319 INTEGRATED FILE ADAPTER (#4650).
Permits native
attachment of a·2319 mdl A1 (and a 2319 mdl A3, 2312 mdl A1s
or 2318 mdl A1) up to a total of 8 drives ... see item [4] under
"Ordering Instructions" on the 2319. Standard features include
file scan and record overflow functions. The IFA is always addressed as Channel 1. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be
installed if 3333/3340 Intermix (#9315) is specified under
3330/3340 Series iFA (#4655) ... cannot be installed with
2314/3340 Compatibility Feature (#8070). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: IFA Conversion Feature (#4645) required if installed
with 3330/3340 SerieslFA (#4655).
3330/3340 SERIES INTEGRATED FILE ADAPTER (#4655).
Permits native attachment of up to two 3333s or 3340 mdl A2s. A
maximum of sixteen 3330 or 3340 series drives can be attached
to the IFA. The IFA supports rotational position sensing, disconnected command chaining and multiple requesting if the Block
Multiplexer Channel (#1421) is installed. Record overflow is standard. For 3330, standard I/O addresses are (hex) 150 thru 15F.
For 3340, standard addresses are (hex) ICO thru ICF. For 3340
with 3344, standard addresses are (hex) 1CO thru 1 E1 .
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: IFA Conversion Feature (#4645) is required if installed with 2319 IFA
(#4650).
Specify: [1] DASD Designation -- Specify ONE of the following -#9313~ (DASD 3333/3330) to attach up to two 3333 mdl 1s,
each with up to three 3330 mdls 1 /2 in any combination ...
#9314~ (DASD 3340 Only) to attach up to two 3340 mdl
A2s, each with up to three 3340 mdls B1/B2 in any combination ... #9315~ (3333/3340 Intermix) to attach one 3333 mdl
1 (with up to three 3330 mdls 1 /2 in any combination) plus
one 3340 mdl A2 (with up to three 3340 mdls B1/B2 in any
combination). #9315 cannot be installed with IFA Conversion
Feature (#4645).
[2] If any 3333 mdl 11 and/or 3330 mdl 11 is to be attached,
also specify #9316~ (3333/3330 mdl 11) in addition to
#9313 or #9315.
With #9313 plus #9316, a mixture of one 3333 mdl 1 and
one 3333 mdl 11, each with up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2 and
11 (in any combination) can be attached ... or two 3333 mdl
11 s, each with any mixture of up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2
and 11.
With #9315 plus #9316, one 3333 (either mdl 1 or mdl 11)
with up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2 and 11 (in any combination)
can be attached in addition to one 3340 mdl A2 with up to
three associated mdls B1/B2. The standard addresses with
#9315 for 3330 are (HEX) 150 thru 157, for 3340 (HEX)
158 thru 15F.
[3]11 any 3344 is to be attached, specify #9317~ in addition to
#9314 (#9317 and #9315 are mutually exclusive). #9190~
must also be specified if 3344 mdl B2Fs or the 3340 Fixed
Head Feature (#4301/4302) is ordered.
With #9314, #9317, and #9190 up to three 3344 mdl
B2/B2F and/or 3340 mdl B2, B1 units in any combination
can be attached to one 3340 mdl A2. The second 3340 mdl
A2 if present can attach up to three 3340 mdl B1/B2 units.
#9317 is mutually exclusive with IFA Conversion Feature
(#4645) and with 2314/3340 Compatibility Feature
(#8070).
[4] When #9314 is specified, also specify 3340 Address Designation: #982~ for addresses (HEX) 1CO thru 1 CF, or
#9821 ~ for addresses (HEX) 160 thru 16F. The specifiication
of 160 allows the 3135 IFA addresses to coincide with those
of the 3115 and 3125 IFAs.
[5] When #9314 or #9315 is specified, also specify #9190~
(Fixed
Head
Attachment)
if
Fixed
Head
Feature
(#4301/4302) is ordered for any 3340 attached to the IFA.
[6]11 String Switch (#8150) is ordered for any attached 3333 or
3340 mdl A2, specify String Switch Attachment (#984H·
[7] When #9821 ~ is specified in conjunction with #9313 the
addresses for the 3333/3330s are (HEX) 160 thru 16F.
[8] When #9821 ~ is specified and both #9314 and #9317 are
specified the addresses for the 3340/3344s are as follows:
- - - - 3344 B2/B3Fs •• - -
3340 A2
String 0
Physical
Dnve
I
160
I 161
o
3340 A2
String I
162
172
IE2
IF2
2
163
173
1E3
IF3
164
174
IE4
IF4
165
175
IE5
IF5
4
166
176
IE6
IF6
167
177
IE7
IF7
6
- - - • 3340 B2s - - - -
I 168 I 169 I I 16A I 16B I I 16C I 16D I I 16E I 16F
Note: The DASD control combinations that can be attached to the
3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655) are shown in the left hand column of the table below. From Section A of the table select one
of the feature numbers shown (one and only one must be selected). From Section B select the feature number(s) required to
support your configuration (select none, one or more than one
from Section B). Section C of the table shows the adrlresses
available. The specification of the (HEX) 160 addresses allows
the 3135 IF A addresses to coincide with those of the 311 5 and
3125 IFA. Select a number from Section C if required.
~ CPU diskett~only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture OT with
ehargeable feature that supplies diskette. S40S on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---.----- --=
-- =---- --=----':' =
M 3135.4
Jul79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (cont'd)
SECTION A
DASD Control DASD DesigCombinations nation, one
on IF A (#4655) req'd
If any 3333
Mdl II
3344
and/or 3330
Mdl II
SECTION B
Fixed
Head Fea2314/3340
~tm~~~itch Compatibili3344
ture
ty Feature
Mdl B2F (#4301/ 3333/3340
4302) on
(see #8070)
3340
3333 Disk Stora~e Control
93)3 ~
9316~
--
--
--
9841 ~
3333/3340 Intermix
9315 ~
9316 ~
--
--
9190 ~
9314 ~
--
9317 ~
9317; +
9190 ~
9190 ;
3340 Direct Ac-I
cess Storage
Facility
I
3330/3340 Supports
RPS Disconnected
2319
CMMD Chaining
Multiple Requestmg IFA
(#4650)
ifBLK MPX #1421
installed
1421
4645
9841 ~
---
1421
--
9841 ~
" 8070
1421
'"
4645
SECTION C
ADDRESSES
Standard
Address 160
'HEX 150-15F 9821 ~ HEX
160-16F
'3330 HEX 1501573340 HEX
158-15F
9820 ~ Not 3344 9821 ~ Not
HEX ICO-ICF 3344 HEX
160-16F
3344 HEX ICO- See Item 8
lEI
above
--
*
No feature number required.
Mutually exclusive with String Switch #9841, 2319 IFA (#4650), IFA Conversion feature (#4645), 3344 Attachment (#9317) .
... Mutually exclusive with 3344 Attachment (#9317) and 2314/3340 Compatibility (#8070).
c.
INTEGRATED PRINTER ADAPTER BASIC CONTROL (#4670)_
Provides the power supply and basic control for a natively attached 1403 Printer. The standard address is "OOE". Specify:
#9485~ if optional address of "OOF" is desired. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Note: If the optional address of "01 F" for
the Console Printer Keyboard (#3210 or #3215) and "OOF" for
the integrated 1403 are both used, Multiplexer Subchannels, Add'i
(#3905) must be specified.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL 2, MDL N1 ATTACHMENT
(#4672),
Provides control for attaching 1403 mdl' 2 or Nl.
Specify: #9182~ to attach 1403 mdl 2, #9188 to attach 1403
mdl Nl. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670). On the 1403,
Voltage Adapter (#9709) and 600 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9725) are required on a mdl 2; 1100 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9726) is required on a mdl Nl. See Specify under
1403.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL 7 ATTACHMENT (#4677).
Provides control for attaching a 1403 mdl 7. Maximum: One. F,leld
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated Printer Adapter Basic
Control (#4670). On the 1403, 600 LPM Voltage Conversion
Adapter (#9725) is required on a mdl 7. See Specify under 1403.
SELECTOR CHANNEL (#6981, 6982). Each adds a high-speed
channel to the system. The channel permits overlapped I/O operation with processing. Eight control unit positions are provided on
each channel. If an Integrated File Adapter (#4650 or #4655) is
present, these channels are addressed as 2 and 3 respectively.
Otherwise, they are addressed as 1 and 2. #6981 -- for first
selector channel... #6982 -- for second. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: #6982 requires #6981.
S/360 MODEL 20 COMPATIBILITY (#7520). Microprogrammed
controlled feature which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute S/360 mdl 20 or S/360 mdl 25 in
mdl 20 mode instructions. Field Installation: Yes.
3210 MOL 1 ADAPTER (#7844).
To attach a 3210 Console
Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 (15.5 cps) for systems console I/O ...
includes an alter-display ability. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3215 Adapter (#7855). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Uses one address on the standard byte multiplexer channel, but does not use a control unit position. See
"Specify." Can be field changed to 3215 Adapter (#7855) ... See
RPQ
3215 ADAPTER (#7855).
To attach a 3215 Console PrinterKeyboard (85 cps) for systems console I/O ... includes alterdisplay ability. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with 3210 Mdl 1 Adapter (#7844). Field Installation: Yes.
PrerequiSite: Uses one address on the standard byte multiplexer
channel, but does not use a control unit position. See "Specify."
12K CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENTS (#7861, 7862), Each
adds 12,288 bytes of control storage. Required for ·some feature
combinations ... see "Control Storage Requirements" under
"Highlights" for details. #7861 -- for first 12K increment ...
#7862 - for second. Field Installation: .Yes. Prerequisite: #7862
requires #7861.
2314/3340 COMPATIBILITY FEATURE (#8070),
Permits the
emulation of 2314/2319 volumes on the 3340 Disk Storage. The
user program may access both the emulated 2314 data set as well
as 3340 volumes. This provides a "mixed-mode" operating environment. "Mixed-mode" is only possible with DOS releases which
1 CPU diskette~only specify feature.
No fee when ordered. at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines 10 include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
support 3340 on the mdl 135. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with IFA Conversion Feature
(#4645), 2319 IFA (#4650),3333/3340 Intermix (#9315), 3344
Attach (#9317), or String Switch Attachment (#9841).
PrerequiSite: #9314 on 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655).
UNIVERSAL CHARACTER SET ADAPTER (#8637). Permits the
use of the Universal Character Set feature on a 1403 mdl 2 or Nl
attached via the Integrated 1403 Printer mdl 2, mdl Nl Attachment
(#4672). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670), Integrated 1403
Printer mdl 2, mdl Nl Attachment (#4672).
VIRTUAL MACHINE ASSIST (#8740).
Provides assist to VS
operating systems operating under VM/370 by emulation of certain privileged operations. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Clock Comparator and CPU Timer (#2001) and Floating Point
(#3900).
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (#4640). Provides
the circuits and controls for direct attachment of up to eight teleprocessing lines to the 3135. The controls for the first line adapter
are included in this feature. Lines can be any combination of
Start/Stop or BSC. Provides for the attachment of 1050, 2260 mdl
" 2260 mdl 2, 2265 mdl " 2740 mdl " 2740 mdl 2, 2741 mdl
" 2760 mdl " 5010 Axx, or any IBM computer, multiplexer or
terminal conforming to the Binary Synchronous Communications
(BSC) standard. Note: In addition to the appropriate adapter, each
communications line attached to the system requires an external
modem.
Refer to Table 2 below to define customer configuration requirements prior to ordering features below. Customer Responsibilities
-- see M 2700 pages for customer responsibilities regarding communications facilities and servicing requirements. Communications
Facilities -- see M 2700 pages for communications facility requirements with this feature. Field Installation: Yes.
Provides automatic calling capabilities on
AUTOCALL (#1290).
facilities Cl, C2, C4 or C5 to initiate (dial) through stored program
control, a data link to a remote station. For the appropriate automatic calling units, see M 2700 pages. Specify: Refer to Table
1-C for Terminal Adapter Type I Model II or Table 1-E for Synchronous Data Adapter Type II or Table 1-F for Telegraph Adapter
Type II for appropriate feature code according to line positions
desired. Maximum: Four. Limitations: Each Autocall feature installed reduces the number of lines available on the ICA by one.
Autocall must be ordered once for each line where the function is
desired. Thus, the ICA can accommodate a maximum of four lines
if each of these lines also has the Autocall feature. A single Autocall feature can be associated with any of the lines from one to
seven.
Cable Order:
Required.
Field
Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Terminal Adapter Type I Model II (#9721-9728) or
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#9649-9656) or Telegraph
Adapter Type II (#9785-9792) and Switched Network Facility
(#9625-9632).
ADDITIONAL LINES (#4722 - 4728). Each provides circuits and
controls for attachment of an additional line adapter ... for a total
of eight lines in a system. Specify: Order additional lines according to line position required ... see Table 1-A below. Each line
specified requires the next lower order line as a prerequisite.
Maximum: One of each (#4722 thru #4728). Field Installation:
Yes. prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
SPECIFY REQUIREMENTS FOR INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS
ADAPTER For each line (#4722-4728) attached to the ICA,
including the first line included in #4640, one of the following line
adapters must be specified: Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
(#9721-9728), Terminal Adapter Type III (#9753-9760), Tele-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------------==
---- - =
--':' =
M 3135.5
Jul79
DP Machines
3135 Processin9 Unit (cont'd)
graph Adapter Type II (#9785-9792), or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#9649-9656). Each line adapter and all associated
features must be specified according to the line position to which
they correspond. Refer to Table 2 below prior to ordering features
for the ICA.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE I MODEL II (#9721-9728). Controls
data transfers between the
3135 and
1050/2740 mdl
1/2741/5010 mdl Axx over facility C1 or 01, and between the
3135 and 2740 mdl 2 or 5010 mdl Axx over facility 01 or 02.
Includes vertical and longitudinal checking for 1050 terminals and
2740s equipped with Record Checking (#6114). Specify: Refer to
Table 1-B for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Special Requirements: See Table 1-C and
features below for additional specify requirements if Switched
Network Facility, Write Interrupt, Unit Exception Suppression,
Read Interrupt, or Autocall are required. Normal operation is at
134.5 bps. 600 Bits per Second feature must be specified for
operation at 600 bps to 2740s or 5010 mdi Axx. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter
(#4640).
300 BITS PER SECOND (#9593-96oo),p
Allows the
Adapter Type I Model II to operate at 300 bps. Specify:
Table 1-C for appropriate feature code according
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Adapter Type I Model II.
Terminal
Refer to
to line
Terminal
Type I Model II or the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II to operate at 600 bps. Specify: Refer to Table 1-C for Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II or Table 1-E for Synchronous Data Adapter Type II
for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type I
Model II, or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
Allows the
SWITCHED NETWORK FACILITY (#9625-9632).p
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Synchronous Data Adapter Type
II, or Telegraph Adapter Type II to operate over C type switched
lines. Specify: Refer to Table 1-C for Terminal Adapter Type I
Model II, Table 1-E for Synchronous Data Adapter Type II or
Table 1-F for Telegraph Adapter Type II for appropriate feature
code according to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II, or Telegraph Adapter Type II.
WRITE INTERRUPT (#9745-9752),p Allows the Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II to operate with a 2741 equipped with Receive
Interrupt (#4708). Not supported under BTAM, QTAM or TCAM.
Specify: Refer to Table 1-C for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II.
Model II to operate with a 2741 equipped with Transmit Interrupt
(#7900). Not supported under BTAM, QTAM or TCAM. Specify:
Refer to Table 1-C for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal
Adapter Type I Model II.
UNIT EXCEPTION SUPPRESSION (#9729-9736).p If this feature is
installed with Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Unit Exception will
not be set in response to a Circle C. Not supported under BTAM,
QTAM or TCAM. Specify: Refer to Table 1-C for appropriate
feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type I Model II.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYF-E III (#9753-9760).~
Controls data
transfers between the 3135 and either remote 2845 Display Controls or 2848 Display Controls operating at 1200 bps over facility
03. Permits operation at 2400 bps over facility 04 if Modem
Clocking is specified. Specify: Refer to Table 1-B for appropriate
feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequiste: Integrated Communications Adapter
(#4640).
MULTIPOINT (#9761-9768).p Specifies that a Terminal Adapter
Type III is to operate in multipoint mode. If #9761-9768 is not
ordered for a given Terminal Adapter Type III, point-to-point operation is presumed. Specify: Refer to Table 1-0 for appropriate
feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type III.
Allows a Terminal Adapter
MODEM CLOCKING (#9609-9616).
Type III to operate at 2400 bps or a Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II to operate at 2000 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps or 7200 bps.
Requires the appropriate clocking to be in the attached modem.
Note: Certain modems such as the IBM 3863 mdl 1 or 3872 mdl 1
although basically 2400 bps modems, offer a 1200 bps half speed
facility. Since the requirements for the Modem Clocking feature
are defined by the type of modem, not the line speed, when such
modems are attached to the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II
and are switched for 1200 bps operation, Modem Clocking is still
required as a prerequisite on the ICA. Specify: Refer to Table 1-0
for Terminal Adapter Type III or Table 1-E for Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal
Adapter Type III or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
NEW SYNC (#9808-9815).~ Allows the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II or Terminal Adapter Type III to be connected to modems which offer the New Sync feature option and have this
option installed. New Sync feature minimizes modem turnaround
and allows faster bit synchronization of the following data.
Specify: Refer to Table 1-0 for Terminal Adapter Type III, or
Table 1-E for Synchronous Data Adapter Type II for appropriate
feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Modem Clocking (#9609-9616),
and a modem offering New Sync. Note: New Sync is NOT required if Half Duplex Facility (#9617-9624), Tributary Station
(#9665-9672), or Switched Network (#9625-9632) is installed for
the line position in question.
TELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE II (#9785-9792).9i
Controls data
transfers between leA and Model 33/35 TTY terminals (8 level
code at 110 bps only) with facility C2. Specify: Refer to Table 1-B
for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated Communications
Adapter (#4640) and Switched Network Facility (#9625-9632).
SYNCHRONOUS DATA ADPTER TYPE II (#9649-9656).p
Provides control of data transfers between the 3135 and binary synchronus terminals. See "Binary Synchronous Terminals" under
2701 Data Adapter Unit. Control Station is included with this
feature. Specify: Refer to Table 1-B for appropriate feature code
according to line position(s) desired. Speed Selection: Provides
operation over C3. 02 and 03 facilities at 600 bps if 600 Bits Per
Second feature is specified ... see above. Provides operation over
C4 and 03 facilities at 1200 bps (no speed need be specified).
Provides operation over C5M facility at 2000 bps if Modem Clocking is specified ... see above. Provides operation over C5, 04 or
X1 M at 2400 bps, over C6, 05 or X2M at 4800 bps , or over 06
at 7200 bps ... see above. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
Special Requirements: See Table 1-E and features below for
additional specify requirements if Half Duplex Facility, Transparency, Tributary Station, Switched Network Facility, Autocall, EON, or
New Sync are required. See required. See Table 1-E and Modem
Clocking above if 2000 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, or 7200 bps
operation is required. The appropriate Data Code feature must be
specified if other than EBCDIC is required as the primary data
code ... see Data Code Features below.
Limitations: For line speed limitations refer to Model 135 Channel
Characteristics Manual GA33-3010.
HALF DUPLEX FACILITY (#9617-9624).~ Required if the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is attached to a two-wire facility.
Note: This feature is not required with Switched Network (#96259632) or Tributary Station (#9665-9672). Specify: Refer to Table
1-E for approriate feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II.
TRIBUTARY STATION (#9665-9672).~ Required when a Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is installed and functioning on a
leased communications line as a tributary station and not functioning as a control station. Specify: Refer to Table 1-E for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
DATA CODE FEATURES.
The primary data code for the SDA
Type II is EBCDIC. As an option to EBCDIC either ASCII or 6-bit
Transcode (2780 Data Transmission Terminal only) may be specified as the primary code. In addition to the primary code, an
alternate data code, selected under program control, may be
specified for the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II. EBCDIC,
ASCII or 6-bit Transcode may be selected as an alternate
to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
TRANSPARENCY (#9673-9680).p
Provides the Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II with the ability to transmit and receive 8-bit
binary as well as EBCDIC or ASCII codes ... or 6-bit binary data
as well as 6-bit Transcode. This feature with ASCII modifies
VRC/LRC checking to VRC/CRC checking. Limitation: ASCII code
and Transparency cannot be installed together for the same line
position when attached to the 2770, 2780, 3735, 3780,
System/3, System/7, System/32 or System/34. Specify: Refer
to Table 1-E for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
Automatically generates an EON digit at
EON (#9801-9807).g;
the end of the dial sequence. Specify: Refer to Table 1-E for
approriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Specify for 3872 and 3874 Modem with EON option. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Autocall (#1290) ... Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II.
~ CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------=-- =------------=
--':' =
M 3135.6
Jul79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (cant' d)
MODEMS Up to eight modems can be attached to a 3135, any
model.
Prerequisites:
Integrated
Communications
Adapter
(#4640) and Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#9649-9656)
2400 bps to 7200 bps, Terminal Adapter Type I Model II (#97219728) 134.5 bps to 600 bps, or Terminal Adapter Type III
(#9753-9760) 1200 bps or 2400 bps. See feature descriptions
for limitations.
Speed (bps)
Modem
Type I Model II 1
Terminal Adapter
Type III 1
Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II 1
Telegraph Adapter
Type II 1
2400
3863
2400
4800
4800
7200
3872
3864
3874
3875
TABLE I-C
Note: For communications capabilities, product utilization and
special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874, 3875 and M 2700
pages.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 yr Purch
..
..
......
9722
9723
9724
9725
9726
9727
9728
9753
9754
9755
9756
9757
9758
9759
9760
9649
9650
9651
9652
9653
9654
9655
9656
9785 9786 9787 9788 9789 9790 9791 9792
Any adapter added. removed. or relocated to another line
position requires reconfiguration of the entire line.
Select one terminal adapter for each line position specified in
TABLE I-A.
OPTIONS FOR TERMINAL ADAPTER
TYPE I MODEL II
- - - - . - - - - - ,. - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FEATURE
MMMC
NC
NC NC
#1005
APL Assist
NC
NC
NC NC
Conditional Swapping
1051
Autocall
1290· $ 56$ 51 $2,180 $ 1.00
NC
Block Multiplexer Channel
1421
NC NC
NC
NC NC
Block Mltpxr Shared Subchnl 1431
NC
NC NC
Channel Priority
1501
Clk Comprtor & CPU Timer
2001
NC
NC NC
1.00
Direct Control
3274· 131 120 5,205
Emergency Power-Off Control NC NC
NC
NC
for 2 switches
3621
NC
NC
NC NC
for up to 12 switches
3622
1.00
Extnd Precision Fltng Point
3840·
30 28 1,485
NC
Floating Point
3900
NC NC
Multiplexer Subchannels, Add'i
NC
NC NC
64 subchannels
3905
NC NC
NC
128 subchannels
3906
NC
NC
NC
256 subchannels
3907
NC NC
NC
1401/1440/1460 Cmptblty
4457
Intgrd Comm Adapter
4640· 242 220 9,470 22.50
IFA Conversion Feature
4645
NC NC
NC
2319 Intgrd File Adapter
4650· 515 468 22,740 13.00
3.00
3330/3340 Series IFA
4655· 708 644 19,820
Int Prntr Adptr Basic Cntrl
4670· 400 364 19,850 19.50
415
.50
Int 1403 Prntr -2,-N1 Attach 4672·
10 10
415
.50
10 10
Int 1403 Prntr -7 Attach
4677·
Lines, Additional
47 43 1,900
4.50
Second
4722·
9.00
Third
4723·
95 87 3,815
Fourth
4724·
47 43 1,900
4.50
Fifth
4725· 144 131 5,690 14.50
43
1,900
4.50
Sixth
4726·
47
47 43 1,900
4.50
Seventh
4727·
4.50
47 43 1,900
Eighth
4728·
4.00
Selector Channel - first
6981· 211 192 10,480
Selector Channel - second
6982· 181 165 8,990
4.00
••
NC
S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility
7520
NC NC
4.00
3210 Mdl 1 Adapter
7844· 121 110 5,990
3215 Adapter
7855· 204 186 10,160
4.50
12K Control Storage Increment
First
7861· 252 230 12,330 20.00
Second
7862· 252 230 12,330 20.00
2314/3340 Compatibility Fea 8070·
55 50 1,535
NC
40 37 1,630
7.50
Universal Char Set Adapter
8637·
NC
••
Virtual Machine Assist
8740
NC
NC
..
..
..
1
1
300 bps
600 bps
Switched Network
Facility 1
Read Interrupt #
Write Interrupt;
Unit Excptn Supprso ;
Autocall
9593
9601
9594
9602
9595
9603
9596
9604
9597
9605
9598
9606
9599
9607
9600
9608
9625
9737
9745
9729
9777
9626
9738
9746
9730
9778
-627
9739
9747
9731
9779
9628
9740
9748
9732
9780
9629
9741
9749
9733
9781
9630
9742
9750
9734
9782
9631
9743
9751
9735
9783
9632
9744
9752
9736
TABLE 1-0
OPTIONS FOR TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE III
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FEATURE
4
Multipoint 1
New Sync 1
Modem Clocking
9761 9762 9763 9764 9765 9766 9767 9768
9808 9809 9810 9811 9812 9813 9814 9815
9609 9610 9611 9612 9613 9614 9615 9616
Select modem clocking feature for each line position for which
Terminal Adapter Type III is specified and operation at 2400
bps is desired.
TABLE l-E
OPTIONS FOR SYNCHRONOUS
DATA ADAPTER TYPE II
..
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FEATURE
Transparency #
Switched Network
Facility 1
Half Duplex Facility 1
Tributary Station;
Modem Clocking
New Sync 1
Autocall
EON 1
9673
9674
9675
9676
9677
9678
9679
9625 9626 9627 9628 9629 9630 9631
9617 9618 9619 9620 9621 9622 9623
9665 9666 9667 9668 9669 9670 9671
9609 9610 9611 9612 9613 9614 9615
9808 9809 9810 9811 9812 9813 9814
9777 9778 9779 9780 9781 9782 9783
9801 9802 9803 9804 9805 9806 9il1J7
Select features required for each line position
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is specified.
9680
9632
9624
9672
9616
9815
for which
OPTIONAL PRIMARY DATA CODES
ASC1l1
6-Bit Transcode (I) 1
Before ordering, check Special Feature write-ups for Prerequisites and
Limitations.
TABLE I-A
9721
9681 9682 9683 9684 9685 9686 9687 9688
9689 9690 9691 9692 9693 9694 9695 9696
Select one of the above data codes if required in lieu of
EBCDIC for each line position for which Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II is specified.
ADDITIONAL LINE APPEARANCES
OPTIONAL ALTERNATE DATA CODES
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EBCDIC
ASC1l1
6-Bit Transcode (I) 1
9697 9698 9699 9700 9701 9702 9703 9704
9705 9706 9707 9708 9709 9710 9711 9712
9713 9714 9715 9716 9717 9718 9719 9720
Select one of the above Alternate Data Codes if required for
each line position for which Synchronous Data Adapter Type II
is specified.
TABLE I-F
OPTIONS FOR TELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE II
FEATURE
Additional Lines
in 46404722 4723 4724 4725 4726 4727 4728
Specify additional lines according to line position.
TABLE I-B
TERMINAL ADAPTERS
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1
FEATURE
- - - - .. - - - • - - - - • - Line Position - - - - - - - - - . - - - - - -
Terminal Adapter
FEATURE
; CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
cbargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Telegraph Adapter
Type 11 1
Autocall
Swtchd Ntwk Facility;
• Feature supplies CPU diskette.
•• CPU diskette-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture
or when field installed. $405 on purchased machines when combined with changes
subject to a distribution fee to include any number of diskette-only cbanges ordered 00
the same diskette.
9785
9777
9625
9786
9778
9626
9787
9779
9627
9788
9780
9628
9789
9781
9629
9790
9782
9630
9791
9783
9631
8792
9632
(I) 6-Bit Transcode can be used only with a 2780 Data Transmission Terminal.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=-- =---------=----":' =
M 3135.7
Jul79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (conl'd)
TABLE 2 -- Part I
Terminal
IBM
Modem
1050 Data Communication
System
FEATURES REQUIRED FOR START/STOP TERMINALS
Line Speed
(Bits/sec)
Communication Line and
Modem Facilities
134.5
Features Required
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II: and Switched Network
Facility
01
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
2260 Display Station Model I
Connects .ia 2848 Display Control Model 3 - see this table
2260 Display Station Model 2
Connects .ia 2848 Display Control Model I or 2 - see this table
2265 Display Station Model I
Connects .ia the 2845 Display Control Model I - see this table
C1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility
D1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
2740 Communication Terminal
Modell
134.5
2740 CommunicatioD Terminal
Model 2
134.5
01
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
600
Dl
Terminal AdaJller
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility
D1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
C1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and Write Interrupt; and Unit-Exception Suppression
(if required)
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Write Interrupt; and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and Read Interrupt~ and Unit-Exception Suppression (if
reguired)
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Read Interrupt; and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
C1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and Write Interrupt; and Read Interrupt; and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
D1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Write Interrupt; and
Read Interrupt; and Unit-Expansion Suppression (if required)
2741 Communication Terminal
Modell (without interrupt
feature)
134.5
2741 Communication Terminal
Model I (with Recei.e
Interrupt Feature)
134.5
2741 Communication Terminal
Modell (with Transmit
Interrupt feature)
134.5
2741 Communication Terminal
Modell (with Recei.e
Interrupt and Transmit
Interrupt features)
134.5
2760 Optical Image Unit
Modell
2845 Display Control Modell
(point-to-point or multipoint)
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 2 with (#7113) 2741 Line Control (with
Recel.e Interrupt feature)
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 2 with (#7113) 2741 Line Control (with
Transmit Interrupt feature)
I Model II; and 600 Bits Per Second
Connects .ia 2740 Communication Terminal Modell- see this table
3872 Model
1
2848 Display Control Models 1,
2 and 3 (point-to-point or
3872 Model
multipoint)
1
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 2 with (#7113) 2741 Line Control (without
Interrupt feature)
Ty~e
1200
D3
Terminal Adapter Type III multipoint for multipoint operation
2400
04
Terminal Adapter Type III and Modem Clocking multipoint for
multipoint o~eration and New Sync (if required)
1200
03
Terminal Adapter Type III multipoint for multipoint operation
04
Terminal Adapter Type III and Modem Clocking multipoint for
multipoint operation and New Sync (if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed
01
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and 300 Bits Per Second
Line Speed
C1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
D1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Write Interrupt, and 300
Bits Per Second Line Speed and Unit-Exception Suppression (if
required)
C1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, and Read Interrupt, and 300 Bits Per Second Line
Speed, and Unit- Exception Suppression (if required)
D1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, and 300
Bits Per Second Line Speed, and Unit-Exception Suppression
(if required)
C1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Switched Network Facility,
Read Interrupt, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line
Speed, and Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
D1
Terminal Adapter Type 1 Model II, and Write Interrupt, and
Read Interrupt, and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
C1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed
D1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and 300 Bits Per Second
Line SjlCed
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and 600 Bits Per Second
Line Speed
C1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
02
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and 600 Bits Per Second
Line Speed
2400
300
300
f--
300
3767 Communications Terlmnal
Modell or 1 ..ith (#7113) •
1741 Line Control (with
Recel.e Interrupt and Transmit
Interrupt features)
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 2 with (#7111) •
1740-1 Line Control
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 2 or 3 with (#7112)
- 2740-2 Line Control
600
134.5
System/7
600
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- ------==--= ':' =
M 3135.8
Jul 79
DP Machines
3135 Processing Unit (cont'd)
REATURES REQUIRED FOR START /STOP TERMINALS
TABLE 2 -- Part I (cont'd)
C\
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Read interrupt. Write Interrupt, and Unit~Exception
Suppression (if required)
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, Write
Interrupt, and Unit-Exception SUJ>llression (if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Read Interrupt, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second
Line Speed, and Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
Dt
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, Write
Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and Unit-Exception
Suppression (if required)
C2
Telegraph Adapter Type II
134.5
5100/51110 Computer Systems
300
TTY 33/35
TABLE 2 -- Part 2
Line Speed
(Bits/Sec)
110
FEATURES REQUIRED for BINARY SYNCHRONOUS TERMINALS
IBM
Modem
Communication Line and
Modem Facilities
Manner of Une Operation
Point-to-Point
600
Multipoint - 3135 as Control
Station
Features Required
D3 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Half Duplex Facility, and Data Code Features
D2 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Data Code Features
C3
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Switched Network Facility, and Data Code Features
D2 (four-wire)
Synchronous Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second, and
Data Code Features
Multipoint -- 3135 as Tributary D2 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Tributary Station, and Data Code Features
D3 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Half Duplex Facility,
and Data Code Features
D3 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Data Code Features
C4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Switched Network
Facility, and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
1200
Multipoint -- 3135 as Control
Station
D3 (four-wire)
Multipoint -- 3135 as Tributary D3 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Data Code Features
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Tributary Station, and
Data Code Features
2400
3863
Point-lo·Point
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type If: and Modem Clocking: and
Swiuhed Network Facility; and Data Code Features
2400
3863
Multipoint- 3135 a.. Control
Station
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type U; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Feature.v; and New Sync (if required)
2400
3863
Multipoint- 3135 a.. Tributary
Station
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Feature.v
2400
3872 Model
1
Point-to-Point
C5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Switched Network Facility; and Data
Code Features
D4 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Data Code Features
D4 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
D4 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync (if re'luired)
Multipoint - 3135 as Tributary D4 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
PoiDt-t~PoiDt
2400
3872 Model
1
Multipoint - 3135 as Control
Station
Point-to-Point, Multipoint
XIM
Synchronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
4800
3864
Point-to-Poillt
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Switched Network Facility; and Data Code Features
4800
3864
Mtdtipoint- 3135 a.. Control
StatiM
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type U; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync (if required)
4800
3864
Mtdtipoitlt - 3135 as Tributary
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
C6
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Switched Network Facility; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3135 as Control
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync
Multipoint - 3135 as Tributary D5
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
4800
3874 Model
1
X2M
Synchronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
Point-to-Point
D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3135 as Control
Station
D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3135 as Tributary D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point, Multipoint
7200
3875 Model
1
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ----- -------------- _.-
M 3135-3.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3135-3 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Provides a performance improvement for S/370 mdl 135
models H. HF. HG and I only.
Model
Al '
262.144 Bytes of Processor Storage
A2'
327.680 Bytes of Processor Storage
A3'
393.216 Bytes of Processor Storage
A4'
524.288 Bytes of Processor Storage
NOTE: The 3135-3 is available as a non-removable, field installable upgrade to a S/370 model 135 mdl H, HF, HG and I
only.
, A complete systems assurance review/approval at the branch
office level required before ordering.
Highlights: Depending on the model, up to 524,288 bytes of
processor storage are available. CPU cycle time varies from 275
to 1485 nanoseconds depending upon the internal operation being
performed. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are provided.
Standard Features Include: APL Assist ... Audible Alarm ... Byte
Oriented Operand ... 1 Byte Multiplexer Channel ... 64 Byte Multiplexer Subchannels ... Channel Command Retry ... Channel Indirect Addressing ... Clock Comparator and CPU Timer ... Conditional Swapping ... Console File ... Control Registers ... Dynamic
Address Translation ... Error Checking and Correction (on Main
and Control Storage) ... Extended Control Mode ... Extended
Control-Program Support ... Instruction Retry ... Interval Timer ...
Machine Check Handling ... OS/DOS Compatibility... Program
Event Recording ... Storage Protection (Store and Fetch). S/370
Universal Instruction Set (Floating Point included) ... Time of Day
Clock ... PSW Key Handling.
Control Storage: 131,072 bytes of Reloadable Control Storage
are provided for each model in addition to the applicable main
storage. This feature permits emulator and control routines to
function. The Reloadable Control Storage is housed in the CPU
and is loaded from the Console File. Reloadable Control Storage
is not addressable by to the user.
Virtual Storage: Virtual Storage capability is provided to increase
the effective utilization of main stroage.
Console File (standard): This is the basic microprogram loading
device for the system. The console file contains a small file device
that provides all of the microcode for the system on removable
magnetic disks. The several disks that will be supplied with the
system will supply all of the required microcode for FE diagnostics, basic systems features, plus the optional features ordered for
the system.
Console Function: Operator communications with the system is via
a system control panel located on the 3135-3 and a 3210 mdl 1
or 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard as on other models of the
S/370 mdl 135. A right reading board extension is standard ... a
left extension is not available.
Input/Output Channels:
Byte Multiplexer Channel -- one is standard ... functionally
equivalent to the byte multiplexer channel on the S/370 mdl 135
... provides eight control unit positions ... in byte mode, permits
simultaneous operation of many low-speed devices. Burst mode
operation of unbuffered devices operating in excess of 10KB is
not allowed for concurrent operation with the Integrated File
Adapter, the Integrated Commv1ications Adapter, or the Block
Multiplexer Channel -- see IBM S/370 Model 135 Channel Characteristics Manual, GA33-3010 for further clarification ... for OS
exclusion, refer to SRL GC28-6554, System Generation.
Block Multiplexer Channels -- two are available as special features ... data rates are 1.3 megabytes per second ... permit(s)
simultaneous operation of high-speed devices '" ability to "Block
Multiplex" provides greater channel efficiency... devices on
these channels which cannot utilize block multiplexing will function as if attached to selector channels ... if the 3330/3340
Series Integrated File Adapter is present these channels are
addressed as 2 and 3 respectively. Otherwise they are addressed
as 1 and 2.
Subchannels -- on the byte multiplexer channel 64 subchannels
are provided as standard with the option of 128 or 256 (see
"Special Features") ... on each of the two available block multiplexer channels, 16 non-shared subchannels and 1 shared subchannel are provided as standard with the option of 8 non-shared
and 9 shared or 8 non-shared and 5 shared (see "Special
Features") ... on a block multiplexer channel a single shared
subchannel may attach a control unit having a maximum of 16
device addresses.
Input/Output Attachment:
Non-native -- a wide variety of I/O devices may be attached to
these models of the S/370 mdl 135 via the standard byte multiplexer channel, and/or the optional block multiplexer channel(s).
In particular, any I/O device which is attachable to a 3135 is
attachable to the 3135-3.
Native -- the following integrated I/O attachments/adapters are
provided for controlling the designated I/O devices.
Console Printer-Keyboard (Required) -- this unit serves as the
on-line I/O device for operator/system communications. It
provides a means of manually entering data into the system,
altering or displaying data already in storage, and for printing
error logout messages.
2319 Inte9rated File Adapter (#4650) (Optional) -- this feature
enables native attachment of a 2319 Disk Storage mdl A 1 ' ,
(and a 2319 mdl A3", 2312 mdl A1s" or 2318 mdl A1") up
to a total of eight drives. The IFA is addressed as channel 1.
LIMITATION: Cannot be installed if 3333/3340 Intermix
(#9315) is specified when 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655) is
also ordered.
3330/3340 Series Integrated File Adapter (#4655) (Optional)
-- this feature allows the native attachment of one or two 3333
modules or 3340 mdl A2 units. Each 3333 module (either mdl
1 or mdl 11) can attach up to three 3330 modules (any combination of mdls 1, 2 or 11). Each 3340 mdl A2 can attach 3340
mdl B2 or B1 units and one 3340 mdl A2 can also attach 3344
units to a maximum of eight drives. Maximum is sixteen drives
per IFA. If 2319 IFA (#4650) is also present, IFA Conversion
Feature (#4645) is required.
Integrated Communications Adapter (Optional) -- this feature
provides attachment of up to eight teleprocessing lines to the
3135-3. These may be any combination of supported BSC and
Start/Stop lines and appear to the processor as if connected
via one or more 2701 s on the byte multiplexer channel.
Integrated Printer Adapter (Optional) -- this feature enables
native attachment of a 1403 Printer mdl 2, 7 or N1. The Universal Character Set Feature can be optionally specified on the
1403 mdl 2 or N 1.
Programming Features:
APL Assist (standard) -- this feature is an APL emUlator. It replaces functions performed by the APL software interpreter. This
feature can provide a performance improvement for many APL
applications when used with VS APL PP #5748 AP1.
Conditional Swapping (standard) -- provides two additional instructions ... Compare and Swap ... Compare Double and Swap.
PSW Key Handling (standard) -- provides two additional instructions ... Insert PSW Key ... Set PSW Key from Address.
Extended Control Program Support (standard) -- the 3135-3
processor models of the S/370 mdl 135 include Extended
Control-Program Support. This is a hardware assist that reduces
the CPU time needed to execute certain frequently used supervisor functions in both VS-1 and VM/370.
The functional areas for VM/370 include:
Virtual Machine I/O
Storage Management
Page Management
SVC Handler
Privileged Instruction Interfaces
Dispatching
Virtual Interval Timer
For VS-1 the functional areas are:
Storage Management
lOS
SVC FLiH
Systern Trace
Page Management
PREREQUISITES: The following prerequisites apply to each 31353 processor model.
(1) 3046 Power Unit ... see 3046.
(2) Extended Precision Floating Point Feature (#3840) ... see
3135 Processing Unit Special Features.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Volt?ge (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 'n' 230 V.
[2] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
,.. No longer available.
~ See footnote on following page.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
---- -----_.-
---- - -- ----------
M 3135-3.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3135·3 Processing Unit (cant' d)
[4] Console Printer-Keyboard Address: Recorded on console file
disk at the plant. #9101# for X'Ol F', or #9102# for X'009'.
on each channel. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Prerequisite: Block Multiplexer Channel, First (# 1425).
[5] Minimum Configuration: See "Monimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in a S/370 mdl
135.
Address Restrictions with #1431
a)
Addresses XOO through X7F are assigned as block shared
subchannels. With option [1] they may not be used. With
option [2] each control unit address position, i.e., XOO, Xl0,
X20, etc., through X70 is available. With option [3) "even"
control unit address positions only are available, i.e., 00, 20,
40 and 60.
b)
Selector and Non-Shared addresses are limited to addresses
X80 through XFF.
[6] Console Printer-Keyboard: A 3210 mdl 1 or 3215 Console
Printer·keyboard is required in every system ... see 3210, 3215
and "Special Features."
[7] Shipping Instructions: Unless otherwise specified, shipping
dimensions of the 3135 Frame 01 (CPU) are 31-1/2" wide x
70" long x 60" high. Removal of the side covers will reduce
the width to 29-1/2". If further reduction in length is required,
specify #9570. Shipping dimensions will then be 29-1/2" wide
x 60" long x 60" high.
NOTE: RETAIN/370 ... CE access is by telephone.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3135·3
Al
A2
A3
A4
$13,240
13,940
14,640
16,040
TLP/
MLC
4 Year
Purchase MMMC
$12,055
12,695
13,335
14,615
$470,550 $ 801
492,450
855
514,350
909
558,150 1,020
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changes: Field installable.
Planning For Model ConverSions: When a customer requires
feature changes (except for the prerequisite feature Extended
Precision Floating Point, #3840), and/or memory upgrades in
addition to a model upgrade to a 3135-3, consolidating the
several changes into a single
is not recommended.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additonal
installation charges and parts removed remain the property of
the customer)
From
H •
HF'
HG'
I •
Al
A2
A3
To
Al
$120,000
A2
A3
A4
$141,900
120,000
$163,800
141,900
120,000
21,900
43,800
21,900
$207,600
185,700
163,800
120,000
87,600
65,700
43,800
• Prices shown do not include charges for any 3135-3 prerequsite features.
SPECIAL FEATURES
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#1425, 1426). Each adds a
block multiplexer channel with 16 non-shared subchannels and
1 shared selector subchannel to the system. #1425 -- first ...
#1426 -- second. If the 3330/3340 Series Integrated File
Adapter is present these channels are addressed as 2 and 3
respectively. Otherwise they are addressed as 1 and 2. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #1426 requires #1425.
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER SHARED SUBCHANNELS (#1431). Note:
This feature should only be installed if devices See 370 I/O
Configuration Form GA22-7002. Allows anyone of the following combinations of "Non-Shared," "Block Shared," or selector subchannels to be attached to the block multiplexer channel: [1] 16 Non-Shared and 1 Shared Selector (see address
restrictions) ... [2] 8 Non-Shared, 8 Block Shared, and 1
Shared Selector (see address restrictions) ... [3] 8 Non-Shared,
4 Block Shared, and 1 Shared Selector (see address restrictions). If option [2] is selected, then each block shared subchannel may have attached to it a control unit having a maximum of 16 device addresses. If option [3] is selected, the four
block shared subchannels may each have attached a control
unit having a maximum of 32 device addresses. If option [1] is
selected, no block shared subchannels are available, and addresses XOO through X7F are not available. With any option,
the selector subchannel may have attached to it control units
with a maximum of 16 device addresses. This feature will apply
to both selector channels if installed. The options are selectable by the Customer Engineer and may be defined differently
Yes.
MULTIPLEXER SUBCHANNELS, ADDITIONAL (#3906, 3907). To
increase the I)umber of I/O devices on the byte multiplexer
channel, the number of subchannels can be increased by specifying one of the following: #3906 -- for 128 subchannels, or
#3907 -- for 256 subchannels. The maximum number of
shared subchannels is eight. When 256 subchannels are installed, there are no shared subchannels. Note: The number of
subchannels ordered must be equal to or greater than the
device addresses. Also see "Byte Multiplexer Channel" under
"Input/Output Channels" above. Field Installation: Yes.
3330/3340 SERIES INTEGRATED FILE ADAPTER (#4655),
Permits native attachment of up to two 3333s or 3340 mdl
A2s. A maximum of sixteen 3330 or 3340 Series drives may be
attached to the IFA. The IFA supports rotational position sensing, disconnected command chaining, and multiple requesting.
Record overflow is standard. For 3330, standard I/O addresses are (hex) 150 thru 15F. For 3340, standard addresses are
(hex) 1 CO thru 1 CF. For 3340 with 3344 standard addresses
are (hex) 1 CO thru 1 El. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: IFA Conversion feature (#4645) is required
if installed with 2319 IFA (#4650).
Specify: [1] DASD Designation: Specify ONE of the following -#9313# (DASD 3333/3330) to attach up to two 3333 mdl ls,
each with up to three 3330 mdls 1/2 in any combination
... #9314# (DASD 3340 only) to attach up to two 3340 mdl A2s,
each with up to three 3340 mdls B 1 /B2 in any combination ...
#9315# (3333/3340 Intermix) to attach one 3333 mdl 1 (with
up to three 3330 mdls 1/2 in any combination) plus one 3340
mdl A2 (with up to three 3340 mdls Bl /B2 in any combination).
#9315 cannot be installed with IFA Conversion Feature
(#4645).
[2] If any 3333 mdl 11 and/or 3330 mdl 11 is to be attached,
also specify #9316# (3333/3330 mdl 11) in addition to #9313
or #9315.
With #9313 plus #9316 a mixture of one 3333 mdl 1 and one
3333 mdl 11, each with up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2 and 11 ( in
any combination) can be attached ... or two 3333 mdl 11 s,
each with any mixture of up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2 and 11.
With #9315 plus #9316, one 3333 (either mdl 1 or mdl 11)
with up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2 and 11 (in any combination)
can be attached in addition to one 3340 mdl A2 with up to
three associated mdls B1/B2. The standard addresses with
#9315 for 3330 are (hex) 150 thru 157, for 3340 (hex) 158
thru 15F.
[3] If any 3344 is to be attached, specify #9317p in addition to
#9314 (#9317 and #9315 are mutually exclusive). #9190#
must also be specified if 3344 mdl B2Fs or the 3340 Fixed
Head Feature (#4301/4302) is ordered.
With #9314, #9317 and #9190 up to three 3344 mdl B2/B2F
and/or 3340 mdl B2, Bl units in any combination can be attached to one 3340 mdl A2. The second 3340 mdl A2 if present
can attach up to three 3340 mdl Bl /B2 units.
#9317 is mutually exclusive with IFA Conversion Feature
(#4645) and with 2314/3340 Compatibility Feature (#8070).
[4] When #9314 is specified, also specify 3340 Address Designation: #9820# for addresses (hex) 1 CO thru 1 CF, or #9821 # for
addresses (hex) 160 thru 1 6F. The speCification of 160 allows
the 3135 IFA addresses to coincide with those of the 3115 and
31251FAs.
[5] When #9314 or #9315 is specified, also specify #9190#
(Fixed Head Attachment) if Fixed Head Feature (#4301 /4302)
is ordered for any 3340 attached to the IFA.
[6] If String Switch (#8150) is ordered for any attached 3333 or
3340 mdl A2, specify String Switch Attachment (#9841)#.
[7] When #9821 # is specified in conjunction with #9313 the
addresses for the 3333/3330s are (HEX) 160 thru 16F.
[8] When #9821 # is specified and both #9314 and #9317 are
specified, the addresses for the 3340/3344s are as follows:
# CPU diskette-only speciry feature.
No fe€' when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only change::. ordered on same diskette
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- --- -- -----
M 3135-3.3
Jul 79
- - =---':' =
=- =
DP Machines
3135-3 Processing Unit (cont'd)
- - - - 3344 B2/B2Fs - - - •
3340 A2
String 0
I 160 I 161
Physical
Dnve
162
172
lE2
lF2
163
173
lE3
lF3
165
175
lE5
lF5
167
177
lE7
lF7
166
176
lE6
lF6
4
0
••• - 3340 B2s •• - -
3340 A2
String I
164
174
lE4
lF4
I 168 I 169 I I 16A I 16B I I 16C I 16D I I 16E I
16F
Note: The DASD control combinations that can be attached to the
3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655) are shown in the left hand column
of the table below. From Section A of the table select one of the
feature numbers shown (one and only one must be selected). From
Section B select the feature number(s) required to support your
configuration (select none, one or more than one from Section B).
Section C of the table shows the addresses available. The specification of the (HEX) 160 addresses allows the 3135-3 IFA addresses to coincide with those of the 3115 and 3125 IFA. Select a
number from Section C if required.
3135-3,3330/3340 IFA (#4655)
SECTION A
DASD Control DASD DesigCombinations nahon, one
on [FA (#4655) req'd
SECTION B
[f any 3333
Mdlll
3344
and/or 3330
Mdlll
Fixed Head
Feature
3344
(#4301/
Mdl B2F
4302) on
3340
String
Switch
#8150 on
3333/ 3340
2314/
3340
Compatibility Feature (see
#8070)
3330/3340 Supports
RPS Disconnected
2319
CMMD Chaining
[FA
Multiple Requesting if
(#4650)
BLK MPX #1421 installed
SECTION C
ADDRESSES
Standard
I
Address 160
3333 Disk Stora~e Control
9313 ;
9316~
--
--
'-
9841 ~
--
1421
4645
* HEX 150-15F
9821;HEX
160-16F
3333/3340 [ntermlX
9315 ~
9316 ~
--
--
9190 ~
9841 ;
--
1421
.-
*3330 HEX ISO·
1573340 HEX
158-15F
.-
9317 ~
9317 ~ +
9190 ~
:Ii
9841 ~
•• 8070
1421
***
4645
3340 Direct Access Storage
Facility
9314 ~
--
9190
9820 ~ Not 3344
HEX ICO-ICF
3344 HEX ICOlEI
9821 :Ii Not
3344 HEX
160-16F
See Item 8
above
.. No feature number required .
•• Mutually exclusive with String Switch #9841, 2319 [FA (#4650), [FA Conversion feature (#4645), 3344 Attachment (#9317) .
••• Mutually exclusive with 3344 Attachment (#9317) and 2314/3340 Compatibility (#8070).
CHANNEL PRIORITY (#1501), When the IFA (#4650 or #4655)
and both block multiplexer channels are present, this feature
changes the higher priority for command chaining from the first
block multiplexer channel (Channel 2) to the second block multiplexer channel (Channel 3). #1501 is required if any DASD devices are to be attached to Channel 3. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Integrated File Adapter (#4650 or #4655) and
both Block Multiplexer Channels (#1425 and #1426).
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two instructions, Read
Direct and Write Direct, and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
8/360 Direct Control Feature - OEMI, GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622).
To provide a single emergency power-off switch in a "room" or "area."
See Emergency Power-Off Control under S/370 mdl 135 in
"Systems." #3621 -- to interconnect two emergency power-off
switches ... #3622 -- to interconnect up to twelve emergency
power-off switches. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED
PRECISION
FLOATING
POINT
(#3840),
[Prerequisite for 3135-31 For description, see M 3135 pages.
1401/1440/1460 COMPATIBILITY (#4457),
Microprogrammed
controlled feature, which, in conjunction with special software,
permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460 instructions.
Field Installation: Yes.
IFA CONVERSION FEATURE (#4645).
Permits co-residence of
both 2319 Integrated File Adapter (#4650) and 3330/3340 Series
Integrated File Adapter (#4655). Both IFAs are addressed as
Channel 1. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be installed if
3333/3340 Intermix (#9315) or 3344 Attach (#9317) is specified
... cannot be installed with 2314/3340 Compatibility Feature
(#8070). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: 2319 Integrated
File Adapter (#4650) and 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655).
2319 INTEGRATED FILE ADAPTER (#4650),
Permits native
allachment of a 2319 mdl A1 (and a 2319 mdl A3, 2312 mdl A1s
or 2318 mdl A1) up to a total of 8 drives ... see item [4] under
"Ordering Instructions" on the 2319. Standard features include
file scan and record overflow functions. The IFA is always addressed as Channel 1. Maximum: One. Limitations: Cannot be
installed if 3333/3340 Intermix (#9315) is specified under
3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655) ... cannot be installed with
2314/3340 Compatibility Feature (#8070). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: IFA Conversion Feature (#4645) required if installed
with 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655).
INTEGRATED PRINTER ADAPTER BASIC CONTROL (#4670),
Provides the power supply and basic control for a natively allached 1403 Printer. The standard address is "OOE". Specify:
#9485 if optional address of "OOF" is desired. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL 2, MOL N1 ATTACHMENT
(#4672).
Provides control for attaching 1403 mdl 2 or N1.
Specify: #9182; to attach 1403 mdl 2, #9188# to attach 1403
mdl N1. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670). On the 1403,
Voltage Adapter (#9709) and 600 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9725) are required on a mdl 2; 1100 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9726) is required on a mdl N1. See Specify under
1403.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL 7 ATTACHMENT (#4677),
Provides control for attaching a 1403 mdl 7. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated Printer Adapter Basic
Control (#4670). On the 1403, 600 LPM Voltage Conversion
Adapter (#9725) is required on a mdl 7. See Specify under 1403.
S/360 MODEL 20 COMPATIBILITY (#7520).
Microprogrammed
controlled feature which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute S/360 mdl 20 or S/360 mdl 25 in
mdl 20 mode instructions. Field Installation: Yes.
3210 MOL 1 ADAPTER (#7844).
To attach a 3210 Console
Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 (15.5 cps) for systems console I/O ...
P CPU
diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time Of manufacture or ""ith
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased m.achines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- ---- ----- -----------_.-
M 3135-3.4
Jul79
DP Machines
3135-3 Processing Unit (cont'd)
includes an alter-display ability. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3215 Adapter (#7855). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Uses one address on the standard byte multiplexer channel. but does not use a control unit position. See
'·Specify."
3215 ADAPTER (#7855).
To attach a 3215 Console PrinterKeyboard (85 cps) for systems console I/O ... includes alterdisplay ability. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with 3210 Mdl 1 Adapter (#7844). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Uses one address on the standard byte multiplexer
channel, but does not use a control unit position. See "Specify."
2314/3340 COMPATIBILITY FEATURE (#8070).
Permits the
emulation of 2314/2319 volumes on the 3340 Disk Storage. The
user program may access both the emulated 2314 data set as well
as 3340 volumes. This provides a "mixed-mode" operating environment. "mixed-mode" is only possible with DOS releases which
support 3340 on the 3135-3. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with IFA Conversion Feature
(#4645), 2319 IFA (#4650), 3333/3340 Intermix (#9315), 3344
Attach
(#9317),
or String
Switch
Attachment (#9841).
Prerequisite: #9314 on 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655).
UNIVERSAL CHARACTER SET ADAPTER (#8637).
Permits the
use of the Universal Character Set feature on a 1403 mdl 2 or N1
attached via the Integrated 1403 Printer mdl 2, mdl N1 Attachment
(#4672). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670), Integrated 1403
Printer mdl 2, mdl N1 Attachment (#4672).
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (#4640). Provides
the circuits and controls for direct attachment of up to eight teleprocessing lines to the 3135-3. The controls for the first line adapter are included in this feature. Lines can be any combination of
Start/Stop or BSC. Provides for the attachment of 1050, 2260 mdl
1, 2260 mdl 2, 2265 mdl 1, 2740 mdl 1, 2740 mdl 2, 2741 mdl
1, 2760 mdl 1, 5010 Axx, or any IBM computer, multiplexer or
terminal conforming to the Binary Synchronous Communications
(BSC) standard. Note: In addition to the appropriate adapter, each
communications line attached to the system requires an external
modem.
Refer to Table 2 below to define customer configuration requirements prior to ordering features below. Customer Responsibilities
-- see M 2700 pages for customer responsibilities regarding communications facilities and servicing requirements. Communications
Facilities -- see M 2700 pages for communications facility reQuirements with this feature. Field Installation: Yes.
AUTOCALL (#1290).
Provides automatic calling capabilities on
facilities C1, C2, C4 or C5 to initiate (dial) through stored program
control, a data link to a remote station. For the appropriate automatic calling units, see M 2700 pages. Specify: Refer to Table 1G
for Terminal Adapter Type I Model II or Table 1-E for Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II or Table 1-F for Telegraph Adapter Type II
for appropriate feature code according to line positions desired.
Maximum: Four. Limitations: Each Autocall feature installed reduces the number of lines available on the ICA by one. Autocall
must be ordered once for each line where the function is desired.
Thus, the ICA can accommodate a maximum of four lines if each
of these lines also has the Autocall feature. A single Autocall
feature can be associated with any of the lines from one to seven.
Cable Order: Required.' Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II (#9721-9728) or Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II (#9649-9656) or Telegraph Adapter Type II
(#9785-9792) and Switched Network Facility (#9625-9632).
ADDITIONAL LINES (#4722 - 4728). Each provides circuits and
controls for attachment of an additional line adapter ... for a total
of eight lines in a system. Specify: Order additional lines according to line position required ... see Table I-A below. Each line
specified requires the next lower order line as a prerequisite.
Maximum: One of each (#4722 thru #4728). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
SPECIFY REQUIREMENTS FOR INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS
ADAPTER For each line (#4722-4728) attached to the ICA,
including the first line included in #4640, one of the following line
adapters must be specified: Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
(#9721-9728), Terminal Adapter Type III (#9753-9760), Telegraph Adapter Type II (#9785-9792), or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#9649-9656). Each line adapter and all associated
features must be specified according to the line position to which
they correspond. Refer to Table 2 below prior to ordering features
for the ICA.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE I MODEL II (#9721-9728).!p Controls
data transfers between the 3135-3 and 1050/2740 mdl
1/2741/5010 mdl Axx over facility C1 or 01, and between the
3135-3 and 2740 mdl 2 or 5010 mdl Axx over facility 01 or 02.
Includes vertical and longitudinal checking for 1050 terminals and
2740s equipped with Record Checking (#6114). Specify: Refer to
Table 1-B for appropriate feature code according to line position(s)
desired. SpeCial Requirements: See Table 1-Gand features below
for additional specify requirements if Switched Network Facility,
Write Interrupt, Unit Exception Suppression, Read Interrupt, or
Autocall are required. Normal operation is at 134.5 bps. 600 Bits
per Second feature must be specified for operation at 600 bps to
2740s or 5010 mdl Axx. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
300 BITS PER SECOND (#9593-9600).!p
Allows the
Adapter Type I Model II to operate at 300 bps. Specify:
Table 1-G for appropriate feature code according
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Adapter Type I Model II.
Terminal
Refer to
to line
Terminal
600 BITS PER SECOND (#9601-9608).!p
Allows the Terminal
Adapter Type I Model II or the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II
to operate at 600 bps. Specify: Refer to Table 1-G for Terminal
Adapter Type I Model II or Table 1-E for Synchronous Data Adapter Type II for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal
Adapter Type I Model II, or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
SWITCHED NETWORK FACILITY (#9625-9632).!p
Allows the
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Synchronous Data Adapter Type
II, or Telegraph Adapter Type II to operate over C type switched
lines. Specify: Refer to Table 1-C for Terminal Adapter Type I
Model II, Table 1-E for Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, or
Table 1-F for Telegraph Adapter Type II for appropriate feature
code according to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II, or Telegraph Adapter Type II.
WRITE INTERRUPT (#9745-9752).!P Allows the Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II to operate with a 2741 equipped with Receive
Interrupt (#4708). Not supported under BTAM, QTAM or TCAM.
Specify: Refer to Table 1-G for appropriate feature code according
to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II.
READ INTERRUPT (#9737-9744).!p Allows the Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II to operate with a 2741 equipped with Transmit
Interrupt (#7900). Not supported under BTAM, QTAM or TCAM.
Specify: Refer to Table 1-C for appropriate feature code according
to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II.
UNIT EXCEPTION SUPPRESSION (#9729-9736).!p If this feature
is installed with Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Unit Exception
will not be set in response to a Circle C. Not supported under
BTAM, QTAM or TCAM. Specify: Refer to Table 1-G for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type I Model II.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE III (#9753-9760).!p
Controls data
transfers between the 3135 and either remote 2845 Display Controls or 2848 Display Controls operating at 1200 bps over facility
03. Permits operation at 2400 bps over facility 04 if Modem
Clocking is specified. Specify: Refer to Table 1-B for appropriate
feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequiste: Integrated Communications Adapter
(#4640).
MULTIPOINT (#9761-9768).!P Specifies that a Terminal Adapter
Type III is to operate in multipoint mode. If #9761-9768 is not
ordered for a given Terminal Adapter Type III, point-to-point operation is presumed. Specify: Refer to Table J-O for appropriate
feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type III.
Allows a Terminal Adapter
MODEM CLOCKING (#9609-9616).
Type III to operate at 2400 bps or a Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II to operate at 2000 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps or 7200 bps.
Requires the appropriate clocking to be in the attached modem.
Note: Certain modems such as the IBM 3872 mdl 1 although
basically 2400 bps modems, offer a 1200 bps half speed facility.
Since the requirements for the Modem Clocking feature are defined by the type of modem, not the line speed, when such modems are attached to the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II and
are switched for 1200 bps operation, Modem Clocking is still
required as a prerequisite on the ICA. Specify: Refer to Table 1-0
for Terminal Adapter Type III or Table J-E for Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal
Adapter Type III or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
NEW SYNC (#9808-9815).!P Allows the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II or Terminal Adapter Type III to be connected to modems which offer the New Sync feature option and have this
option installed. New Sync feature minimizes modem turnaround
and allows faster bit synchronization of the following data.
Specify: Refer to Table 1-0 for Terminal Adapter Type III, code
according to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Modem Clocking (#9609-9616), and a modem
P CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when manufacture or with chargeable feature that
supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only
changes ordered on same diskette
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ---- -- ---------------_.-
M 3135-3.5
Jul79
DP Machines
3135-3 Processing Unit (cont'd)
offering New Sync. Note: New Sync is NOT required if Half Duplex Facility (#9617-9624), Tributary Station (#9665-9672), or
Switched Network (#9625-9632) is installed for the line position
in question.
Controls data
TELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE II (#9785-9792).S
transfers between ICA and Model 33/35 TTY terminals (8 level
code at 110 bps only) with facility C2. Specify: Refer to Table 1-B
for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated Communications
Adapter (#4640) and Switched Network Facility (#9625-9632).
SYNCHRONOUS DATA ADPTER TYPE II (#9649-9656).~
Provides control of data transfers between the 3135-3 and binary
synchronus terminals. See "Binary Synchronous Terminals" under
2701 Data Adapter Unit. Control Station is included with this
feature. Specify: Refer to Table 1-B for appropriate feature code
according to line po[ition(s) desired. Speed Selection: Provides
operation over C3, 02 and 03 facilities at 600 bps if 600 Bits Per
Second feature is specified ... see above. Provides operation over
C4 and 03 facilities at 1200 bps (no speed need be specified).
Provides operation over C5M facility at 2000 bps if Modem Clocking is specified ... see above. Provides operation over C5, 04 or
X1 M at 2400 bps, over C6, 05 or X2M at 4800 bps, or over 06
at 7200 bps ... see above. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
Special Requirements: See Table 1-E and features below for
additional specify requirements if Half Duplex Facility, Transparency, Tributary Station, Switched Network Facility, Autocall, EON, or
New Sync are required. See Table 1-E and 600 Bits Per Second
above if operation at 600 bps is required. See Table 1-E and
Modem Clocking above if 2000 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, or 7200
bps operation is required. The appropriate Data Code feature must
be specified if other than EBCDIC is required as the primary data
code ... see Data Code Features below.
Limitations: For line speed limitations refer to Model 135 Channel
Characteristics Manual, GA33-3010.
HALF DUPLEX FACILITY (#9617-9624).~ Required if the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is attached to a two-wire facility.
Note: This feature is not required with Switched Network (#96259632) or Tributary Station (#9665-9672). Specify: Refer to Table
1-E for approriate feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II.
TRIBUTARY STATION (#9665-9672).~ Required when a Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is installed and functioning on a
leased communications line as a tributary station and not functioning as a control station. Specify: Refer to Table 1-E for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
DATA CODE FEATURES.
The primary data code for the SDA
Type II is EBCDIC. As an option to EBCDIC either ASCII or 6-bit
Transcode (2780 Data Transmission Terminal only) may be specified as the primary code. In addition to the primary code, an
alternate data code, selected under program control, may be
specified for the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II. EBCDIC,
ASCII or 6-bit Transcode may be selected as an alternate code.
Specify: Refer to Table 1-E for appropraite feature codes according to line position(s) desired.
Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
TRANSPARENCY (#9673-9680).~
Provides the Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II with the ability to transmit and receive 8-bit
binary as well as EBCDIC or ASCII codes ... or 6-bit binary data
as well as 6-bit Transcode. This feature with ASCII modifies
VRC/LRC checking to VRC/CRC checking. Limitation: ASCII code
and Transparency cannot be installed together for the same line
position when attached to the 2770, 2780, 3735, 3780,
System/3, System/7, System/32 or System/34. Specify: Refer
to Table 1-E for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Synchronous Data Adapter Type II.
EON (#9801-9807).~
Automatically generates an EON digit at
the end of the dial sequence. Specify: Refer to Table 1-E for
approriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Specify for 3872 and 3874 Modem with EON option. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Autocall (#1290) ... Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II.
Modems Up to eight modems can be attached to a 3135, any
model.
Prerequisites:
Integrated
Communications
Adapter
(#4640) and Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#9649-9656)
2400 bps to 7200 bps, Terminal Adapter Type I Model II (#97219728) 134.5 bps to 600 bps, or Terminal Adapter Type III
(#9753-9760) 1200 bps or 2400 bps. See feature descriptions
for limitations.
Modem
Speed (bps)
3863
3872
3864
3874
3875
2400
2400
4800
4800
7200
Note: For communications capabilities, product utilization and
special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874, 3875 and M 2700
pages.
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr Purch
Special Feature Prices:
MMMC
1290- $ 56$ 51 $ 2,180 $ 1.00
Autocall
1425- 211 192 10,480
Block Mltplxr Channel, 1 st
4.00
1426- 181 165
Block Mltplxr Channel, 2nd
8,990
4.00
Block Mltpxr Shared Subchnl 1431
NC
NC NC
Channel Priority
1501
NC NC
NC
3274- 131 120
Direct Control
5,205
1.00
Emergency Power-Off Control for 2 switches
3621
NC NC
NC
NC
3622
NC NC
NC
NC
for up to 12 switches
1.00
Extnd Precision Fltn9 Pt
3840t- 30
28
1,485
Multiplexer Subchannels, Add'i
128 subchannels
3906
NC NC
NC
256 subchannels
3907
NC NC
NC
1401/1440/1460 Cmptblty
4457
NC NC
NC
4640- 242 220
Intgrd Comm Adapter
9,470 22.50
4645
NC NC
NC
IFA Conversion Feature
2319 Intgrd File Adapter
4650' 515 468 22,740 13.00
19,810
3.00
3330/3340 Series IFA
4655' 708 644
Int Prntr Adptr BaSic Cntrl
4670' 400 364 19,850 19.50
Int 1403 Prntr -2,-Nl Attach 4672'
10 10
415
.50
10
415
.50
10
Int 1403 Prntr -7 Attach
4677'
Lines, Additional
47
43
1,900
4.50
Second
4722'
472387
9.00
Third
95
3,8,15
Fourth
4724'
47
4.50
43
1,900
Fifth
4725' 144 131
5,690 14.50
4.50
Sixth
4726'
47
43
1,900
47
43
1,900
4.50
Seventh
4727'
Eighth
4728'
47
43
1,900
4.50
S /360 Mdl 20 Compatibility 7520
NC NC
NC
4.00
3210 Mdl 1 Adapter
7844' 121 110
5,990
3215 Adapter
4.50
7855' 204 186 10,160
2314/3340 Compatibility Fea 8070'
55
50
1,535
NC
Universal Char Set Adapter 863740
37
1,630
7.50
-.
,.
t Prerequisite feature
for 3135~3. see M 3135 pages (special features) for details.
... Feature supplies CPU diskette.
... ... CPU diskette-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or
when field installed. $405 on purchased machines when combined with changes subject
to a distribution fee to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on the
same diskette.
Before ordering, check Special Feature write-ups for
Prerequisites and
Limitations.
TABLE I-A
ADDITIONAL LINE APPEARANCES
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - -
FEATURE
Additional Lines
in 4640 4722
4723 4724 4725 4726 4727
Specify additional lines according to line position.
TABLE I-B
TERMINAL ADAPTERS
4728
- - - - - - - - - .. - - - - - Line Position - - - .. - . - - - - - - - - FEATURE
Terminal Adapter
Type I Model [[ g;
Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II #
Tel Adptr Type II ~
9721
9722
9723
9724
9725
9726
9727
9728
9649 9650 9651
9652 9653 9654 9655 9656
9792
9785 9786 9787 9788 9789 9790 9791
Any adapter added. removed, or relocated to another line
position requires reconfiguration of the entire line.
Select one terminal adapter for each line position specified in
TABLE I-A.
P CPU diskette-only specify feature.
No fee when ordered at time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette.
$405 on purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only
changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- --= =-- ---
- - =':' =
M 3135-3.6
Jul 7S
DP Machines
3135-3 Processing Unit (cont'd)
TABLE I-C
OPTIONS FOR TERMINAL ADAPTER
TYPE I MODEL II
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - FEATURE
4
9594
9602
9626
9738
9746
9730
9778
9595
9603
9627
9739
9747
9731
9779
9596
9604
9628
9740
9748
9732
9780
9597
9605
9629
9741
9749
9733
9781
9598
9606
9630
9742
9750
9734
9782
300 bps f
600 bps f
Swt.hd Netwk Fa.ility f
Read Interrupt f
Write Interrupt f
Unit Exeed, and Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
Dt
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt. Write
Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and Unit-Exceplion
Suppression (if required)
C2
Telegraph Adapler Type II
134,5
5100/5tlO Computer Systems
300
ITY 33/35
TABLE 2 -- Part 2
Line Speed
(Bits/Sec)
tlO
FEATURES REQUIRED for BINARY SYNCHRONOUS TERMINALS
IBM
Modem
Communication Line and
Modem Facilities
Manner of line Operation
Point-to-Point
600
Multipoint -- 3135 as Control
Station
Features Required
03 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Half Duplex Facility, and Dala Code Features
02 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Data Code Features
C3
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Switched Network Facility, and Data Code Features
02 (four-wire)
Synchronous Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second, and
Data Code Features
Multipoint -- 3135 as Tributary 02 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Tributary Station, and Data Code Features
03 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Half Duplex Facility,
and Data Code Features
03 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Data Code Features
C4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Switched Network
Facility, and Data Code Features
03 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
1200
Multipoint -- 3135 as Control
Station
Multipoint -- 3135 as Tributary 03 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Tributary Station, and
Data Code Features
UOO
3863
Po;nt~to-Point
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Switched Network Facility; and Data
Code Features
UOO
3863
MUltipoint - 3IJ5 as Control
Station
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features: and New Sync (if required)
Multipoint - 3IJ5 as Tributary
Station
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter T}pe II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
C5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Switched Network Facility; and Data
Code Features
D4 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Data Code Features
D4 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
D4 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync (if required)
Multipoint - 3135 as Tributary D4 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
24003863
2400
3872 Model
1
Point-to-Point
2400
3872 Model
I
Multipoint - 3135 as Control
Station
Point-to-Point, Multipoint
XIM
Synchronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
4800
3864
Point·to·Point
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type If; and Modem Clocking; and
Switched Network Facilify: and Data Code Features
4800
3864
Multipoint - 3IJ5 as Control
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync (if required)
4800
3864
Multipoint - 3IJ5 as Tributary
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type U; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Feature~'
Point-to-Point
C6
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Switched Network Facility; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
05
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3135 as Control
Station
05
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync
Multipoint - 3135 as Trihutary 05
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
4800
3874 Model
1
X2M
Synchronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
Point-to-Point
D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3135 as Control
Station
D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3135 as Tributary D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point, Multipoint
7200
3875 Model
1
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
i
-------- - --.:.- .=..:
-----== ';- ==
M 3138.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3138 PROCESSING UNIT
sole file.) A right reading board extension is standard ... a lett
extension is not available.
Input/Output Channels:
Purpose: Provides main and control storage plus arithmetic and
logic circuits for the S/370 mdl 138.
.
Model I
524,288 bytes of processor storage
Model J
1,048,576 bytes of processor storage.
Highlights: 524,288 bytes or 1,048,576 bytes of processor storage are provided. CPU cycle time ranges from 275 to 1485 nanoseconds depending on the internal operation being performed.
Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are
provided.
Standard Features Include: Conditional Swapping ... APL Assist
... Audible Alarm ... Byte Oriented Operand ... 1 Byte Multiplexer
Channel ... 64 Byte Multiplexer Subchannels ... 2 Block Multiplexer Channels ... 16 Non-Shared Block Multiplexer Subchannels ... 1
Shared Block Multiplexer Subchannel ... Channel Command Retry
... Channel Indirect Addressing ... Clock Comparator & CPU Timer
... Console File ... Control Registers '" Dynamic Address Translation ... Error Checking and Correction (on Main and Control Storage) ... Extended Control Mode ... Extended Control-Program
Support ... Extended Precision Floating Point ... Instruction Retry
... Floating Point ... Interval Timer ... Machine Check Handling
OS/DOS Compatibility ... Program Event Recording ... Storage
Protection (Store and Fetch) ... S/370 Universal Instruction Set ...
Time of Day Clock ... PSW Key Handling.
Control Storage: 131,072 bytes of Reloadable Control Storage
are provided in addition to main storage. This permits emulator
and control routines to function. The Reloadable Control Storage
is housed in the CPU and is loaded from the Console File. Reloadable Control Storage is not available to the user.
Virtual Storage: Virtual Storage capability is provided to increase
the effective utilization of main storage.
Console File (Standard): This is the basic microprogram loading
device for the system. The console file contains a small file device
that provides all of the microcode for the system on removable
magnetic disks. The several disks that will be supplied with the
system will supply all of the required microcode for FE diagnostics, basic systems features, plus the optional features ordered for
the system.
Console Function: A display console is standard ... includes a
cathode ray tube, and a keyboard ... functions as an operator's
I/O console to communicate with the operating system ... standard
attachment for an optional 3286 Printer mdl 2 or 3287 Printer mdl
1 or 2 for hard copy output. CRT can accommodate twenty-four
80-character lines of information. A system control panel is also
located on the 3138 for additional operator communication with
the system. Three console modes are available: "KeyboardPrinter" Mode, "Display" Mode, "115/125 Console-DisplayEmulation" Mode.
In "Printer-Keyboard" mode, the display console uses the keyboard for input and the CRT and a recommended 3286 Printer mdl
2 or 3287 mdl 1 and 2 for output. The CRT, keyboard and printer
appear to the system as a 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard.
"Printer-Keyboard" mode is supported by DOS, DOS/VS,
OS/360, OS/VS and VM/370.
In "Display" mode, the keyboard is used for input, the CRT with
24 lines by 80 characters/line for output, and DIDOCS or equivalent support ·is required. DOS/VS does not support Display Mode.
The 3286 Printer mdl 2 or 3287 Printer mdl 1 or 2 (optional) has
a separate address and requires MCS support or equivalent. When
present the printer appears to the system as a 321 3 Console
Printer.
In "115/125 Console-Display-Emulation" mode, the keyboard is
used for input, the CRT is used for output, and the CRT displays
twelve, 56-character lines of information. The 3286 Printer mdl 2
or 3287 mdl 1 or 2 are optional. When present, the printer emulates a 5213 Printer mdl 1 and acts as a slave unit to the display
console. That is, the 3286 mdl 2 or 3287 mdl 1 or 2 are not
separately addressable in this mode. The "115/125 ConsoleDisplay-Emulation" mode is available in DOS/VS ReI. 28 and
above.
The display console provides the capability to select three aspects
of the system's environment at IMPl time:
Console mode - See above (Mode Descriptions)
CPU mode (31 38 or 3135) - See Programming Features
Unit addresses of natively attached I/O
Byte Multiplexer Channel: One is standard ... functionally
equivalent to t~e byte multiplexer channel on the S/370 mdl
135 ... provides eight control unit positions ... in byte mode,
permits simultaneous operation of many low-speed devices ...
burst mode operation of unbuffered devices operating in excess
of 10KB is not allowed for concurrent operation with the Integrated File Adapter, the Integrated Communications Adapter, or
a Block Multiplexer Channel - see IBM S/370 Model 138 Channel Characteristics Manual, GA24-3633 for further clarification
... for OS exclusion refer to SRL GC28-6554. "System
Generation . ..
Block Multiplexer Channels: Two are standard ... data rates
are 1.3 megabytes per second ... permits simultaneous operation of high-speed devices ... ability to "Block Multiplex" provides greater channel efficiency and increases the efficiency of
the 3330/3340 Series IFA when using direct access storage
devices equipped with rotational position sensing ... devices on
these channels which cannot utilize block multiplexing will
function as if attached to selector channels ... if the 3330/3340
Series Integrated File Adapter is present these channels are
addressed as 2 and 3 respectively. Otherwise they are addressed as 1 and 2.
Subchannels: On the byte multiplexer channel 64 subchannels
are provided as standard with the option of 128 or 256 (see
"Special Features") ... for each of the two standard block
multiplexer channels 16 non-shared subchannels and 1 shared
selector subchannel are provided as standard with the option of
8 non-shared and 9 shared or 8 non-shared and 5 shared (see
"Special Features") ... each of the standard single shared
subchannels may attach a control unit having a maximum of 16
device addresses.
Non-Native: A wide variety of I/O devices may be attached to
the S /370 model 138 via the standard byte multiplexer channel
or any of the 2 standard block multiplexer channels.
Native: The following integrated I/O attachments/adapters are
provided for controlling the designated I/O devices.
Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment, First Printer
(Optional) Provides the capability to natively attach the 3203
Printer mdl 4 as the first systems printer. The Universal
Character Set feature is standard on the 3203.
Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment, Second Printer
(Optional) - Provides the capability to natively attach the
3203 Printer mdl 4 as the second systems printer. The Universal Character Set feature is standard on the 3203.
Integrated 1403 Printer Adapter (Optional) - This feature
allows native attachment of a 1403 Printer mdl 2, 7, or N1 ...
the Universal Character Set Feature can be optionally specified on the 1403 mdl 2 or N1 .
Integrated Console Printer Adapter (Standard) - Provides
the capability to natively attach the optional 3286 Printer mdl
2, 3287 mdl 1 and 2 as a hard copy console printer.
3330/3340 Series Integrated File Adapter (Optional) - This
feature allows the native attachment of one or two 3333
modules or 3340 mdl A2 units ... each 3333 module (either
mdl 1 or mdl 11) can attach up to three 3330 modules (any
combination of mdls 1, 2 or 11) ... each 3340 mdl A2 can
attach 3340 mdl B2 or B1 units, and one 3340 mdl A2 can
also attach 3344 units to a maximum of eight drives ... maximum is sixteen drives per IFA.
Integrated Communications Adapter (Optional) - This feature provides attachment of up to eight teleprocessing lines
to the S/370 mdl 138 ... these may be any combination of
supported BSC and Start/Stop lines and appear to the proces::.or as if connected via one or more 2701 s on the byte
multiplexer channel.
Integrated Communications Adapter Features: To improve the
ordering of the ICA on the S/370 mdl 138 the user may define,
from the display-console-keyboard, the following line Characteristics for each line installed (a maximum of 8 lines are attachable to
the ICA):
[1] leased Facility' or Switched Network Facility: Allows the
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II (SDM, or Telegraph Adapter Type II to operate over
leased or C type switched lines.
Integrated Communications Adapter line Characteritics - See
Integrated Communications Adapter Features
[2] Half Duplex Facility or Full Duplex Facility' - Allows the user
to make a business tradeoff between his TP applications and
turn-around requirements and available teleprocessing facilities
These selections will be recorded on the console file for permanent reuse until such time as any new selection is made during a
subsequent IMPl. (Note: This is the only user access to the con-
* These options will comprise the standard microcode on the console file" as
shipped from the plant. They may be altered as explained from tl,e displayconsole-keyboard at the operator's discretion.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- --...,..=
= -~--=
== === == ";' ==
M 3138.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3138 "rocessing Unit (conl'd)
and the cost of those facilities ... half-duplex is required if the
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is attached to a two-wire
facility or that facility is part of a switched network unless that
facility is a leased line and the Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II is installed and functioning as a tributary station and
not functioning as a control station on that leased line.
performance of the S/370 mdl 138 will be available to the user.
Moreover the user will have the same recovery capabilities on
the S/370 mdl 138 as he has on a S/370 mdl 135 when 3135
CPU Mode is selected. NOTE: S/370 mdl 138 Extended
Logout/EREP is nol supported in this mode.
Extended Control Program Support (Standard): The S/370
model 138 includes Extended Control-Program Support. This is
a hardware assist that reduces the CPU time needed to execute
certain frequently used supervisor functions in both VS-l and
VM/370.
[3] Primary Code for the SDA Type II (EBCDIC', ASClI, 6-Bit)
[4] Secondary or Alternate Code for the SDA Type II (EBCDIC',
ASCII, 6-Bit)
[5] Tributary Station Address - Allows the user to speqify a station
address A to R of any Synchronous Data Adapter Type II
which is installed and functioning on a leased communications
line as a tributary station and not functioning as a control
station on that leased line. (Station address 0829'). Only
addresses A to R are valid.
The functional areas for VM/370 include:
Virtual Machine I/O
Storage Management
Pag.e Management
SVC Handler
Privileged Instruction Interfaces
Dispatching
Virtual Interval Timer
[6) Line Speed
(a) 134 bps', 300 bps, or 600 bps for Terminal Adapter Type
1 Model II.
For VS-l the functional areas are:
Storage Management
lOS
SVC FUH
System Trace
Page Management
(b)600 bps or 1200 bps' for Synchronous Data Adapter Type
11.
(c)Not applicable for Terminal Adapter Type '" or Telegraph
Adapter Type II.
[7] Transparency - Yes Or No' - Provides the SDA Type II with the
ability to transmit and receive 8-bit binary as well as EBCDIC
or ASCII codes or 6-bit binary data as well as 6-bit Transcode
... Transparency with ASCII modifies VRC/LRC checking to
VAC/CRC Checking '" LIMITATION: ASCII code and Transparency cannot be installed together for the same line position
when attached to the 2770, 2780, 3735, 3780, System/3,
System/?, System/32 or System/34 ... PREREQUISITE: SDA
II.
[8] Write Interrupt - Yes or No' - Allows the Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II to operate with a 2741 equipped with Receive
Inlerrupt (#4708) ... LIMITATIONS: Not supported under
BTAM, QTAM, or TCAM ... PREREQUISITE: Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II.
[9] Read Interrupt - Yes or No'- Allows the Terminal Adapter Type
I Model II to operate with a 2741 equipped with Transmit
Interrupt (#7900) ... LIMITATIONS: Not supported under
BTAM, QTAM, or TCAM ... PREREQUISITE: Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II.
[10]New SYNC - Yes or No' - Allows the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II or Terminal Adapter Type IJI to be connected to
modems which offer the New Sync feature option and have
this option installed ... New Sync minimizes modem turnaround
and allows faster bit synchronization of the following data ...
PREREQUISITES: Modem Clocking (#9606-9616), and a
modem offering New Sync. NOTE: New Sync is not required if
Half Duplex Facility, Tributary Station, or Switched Network is
selected for the line position in question.
[11]Multipoint - Yes or No' - Specifies that a Terminal Adapter
Type III is to operate in multipoint mode. If multipoint is not
selected for a given Terminal Adapter Type III, point-to-point
operation is presumed. PREREQUISITE: Terminal Adapter
Type III.
[12]Unit Exception SupresSion - Yes or No' - If selected with
Terminal Adapter Type 1 Model II, Unit Exception will not be
set in response to a Circle C ... LIMITATION: Not supported
under STAM, QTAM, or TCAM ... PREREQUISITE: Terminal
Adapter Type 1 Model ".
Note: See "Special Features" for optional "ICA features" on the
S/370 model 138.
Programming Features:
Conditional Swapping (Standard): Provides two additional
instructions ... Compare and Swap ... Compare Double and
Swap.
PSW Key Handling (Standard): Provides two additional instructions ... Insert PSW Key ... Set PSW Key from Address.
APl Assist (Standard): This feature is an APL emulator. It
replaces functions performed by the APL software interpreter.
This feature can provide a performance improvement for many
APL appi1cations when used with VS APL PP #5748 AP1.
IMPL 3135 CPU Mode Selection: Provides the capability to
"r:un" on 5/370 mdl 138 any SCP Which will "run" today on a
S/370 mdl 1:35. No performanCe degradation or loss of S/370
mdl 135 recovery/rom error capabilities will be experienced in
this mode. That is, in 3135 CPU Mode the improved hardware
• These options will comprise the $llmdard microcode on the console file as
shipped from the plant. They may be altered as explained from the displayoonsole-keyboard at the operator's discretion.
Prerequisite: Each S/370 mdl 138 requires a 3046 power unit ...
see 3046.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify:
[1
J Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V.
[2] Cabling #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[4] Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum 1/0 units required in S/370 mdl 138.
{5] Shipping Instructions: Unless otherwise specified, shipping
dimensions of the 3138 Frame 01 (CPU) are 21-1/2" wide x
70" long x 60" high. Removal of the side covers will reduce
the width to 29-1 /2". If further reduction in length is required,
specify #9570. Shipping dimensions will then be 29-1/2"
wide x 60" long x 60" high.
NOTE: RETAIN/370 ... CE access is by telephone.
Prices:
3138
Mdl
I
J
MLC
MRC4 Yr
$ 9,600 $ 8,730
11,120
10,115
Purchase
MMMC
$222,900
260,400
$1,275
1,335
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55% Useful life Category: 2
Warranty: A
Termination Charge Months: 6Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model I to Model J .•... $37,500
SP£CIAL FEATURES
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER SHARED SUBCHANNEL (#1431). Note:
This feature should be installed only if devices capable of "Block
Shared' 'operation are installed on the block multiplexer channel.
See 370 I/O Configuration Form GA22-7002. Allows anyone of
the following combinations of "Non-Shared," "BlOCk Shared" or
selector subchannels to be attached to the block multiplexer
channel: III 16 Non-Shared and 1 Shared Selector (see address
restrictions) ... (2) 8 Non Shared. 8 Block Shared and 1 Shared
Selector (see address restrictions) ... I3) 8 Non-Shared, 4 Block
Shared and 1 Shared Selector (see address restrictions). If option
[2] is selected, then each block shared subchannel may have
attached to it a control unit having a maximum of 16 device addresses. If option [3] is selected, the four block shared subcl1annels may each have attached a control unit having a maximum of
32. device addresses. If option [1 Jis selected, no block shared
subchannels are available, and addresses XOO through X7F aTe
not available. With any option, the selector subchannel may have
attached to it control units With a maximum of 16 device addresses. This feature wltl apply to both selector chan.Mls tf installed.
The optiOns are selectable by the Customer Engineer and may be
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
r-A {2'
tJI.
23:1:..
?
L'3 ~t-t
'L
I
------=- - =':' =
------ -= - ---
DP Machines
3138 Processing Unit (cont'd)
defined differently on each channel.
Installation: Yes.
M 3138.3
Jul79
Maximum:
One.
Field
With #9314, #9317, and #9190 up to three 3344 mdl
B2/B2F and/or 3340 mdl B2, Bl units in any combination
can be attached to one 3340 mdl A2. The second 3340 mdl
A2 if present can attach up to three 3340 mdl Bl/B2 units.
a)
Addresses XOO through X7F are arsigned as block shared
subchannels. With option [1] they may not be used. With
option [2] each control unit address position, I.e., XOO, Xl0,
X20, etc., through X70 is available. With option [3] "even"
address positions only are a"ailable, I.e., 00, 20, 40 and 60.
[4] When #9314 is specified, also specify 3340 Address Designation: #9820; for addresses (hex) 1 CO thru 1CF, or
#9821; for addresses (hex) 160 thru 16F. The specification
of 160 allows the 3138 IFA addresses to coinCide with those
of the 3115 and 3125 IFAs.
b)
Selector and Non-Shared addresses are limited to addresses
X80 through XFF.
[5] When #9314 or #9315 is specified, also specify #9190;
(Fixed
Head
Attachment)
if
Fixed
Head
Feature
(#4301/4302) is ordered for any 3340 attached to the IFA.
Address Restrictions with #1431
CHANNEL PRIORITY (#1502). When the IFA (#4655) is present,
this feature changes the higher priority for command chaining from
the first block multiplexer channel (Channel 2) to the second block
multiplexer channel (Channel 3). #1502 is required if any DASD
devices are to be attached to Channel 3. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Integrated File Adapter (#4655).
[6] If String Switch (#8150) is ordered for any attached 3333 or
3340 mdl A2, specify String Switch Attachment (#9841);.
[7] When #9821; is specified in conjunction with #9313 the
addresses for the 3333/3330s are (HEX) 160 thru 16F.
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two instructions, Read
Direct and Write Direct, and six distinct external interrUPt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
S/360 Direct Control Feature - OEMI, GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622). To provide
a single emergency power-off switch in a "room" or "area". See
Emergency Power-Off Control under S/370 ... #3622 -- to interconnect up to twelve emergency power-off switches. Field
Installation: Yes.
MULTIPLEXER SUBCHANNELS, ADD'L (#3906, 3907). To increase the number of I/O devices on the byte multiplexer channel,
the number of subchannels can be increased by specifying one of
the following: ... #3906 -- for 128 subchannels ... #3907 -- for
256 subchannels. The maximum number of shared subchannels is
eight. When 256 subchannels are installed there are no shared
subchannels. Note: The number of subchannels ordered must be
equal to or greater than the device addresses. Also see "Byte
Multiplexer Channel" under "Input/Output Channels" above. Field
Installation: Yes.
[8] When #9821; is specified and both #9314 and #9317 are
specified the addresses for the 3340/3344s are as follows:
3340 A2
String 0
I 160 I 161 I
162
172
IE2
IF:
Physical
Dnve
o
3340 A2
String I
2
- - - - 3344 B2/B2Fs - - - 166
164
165
176
174
175
IE4 IE5
IE6
IF4 IF5
IF6
167
177
IE?
IF?
163
173
IE3
IF3
4
6
- - - - 3340 B2s - - - -
I 168 I 169 I I 16A I 16B I I 16C I 16D I
116E
I
16F
Note: The DASD control combinations that can be attached to the
3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655) are shown in the left hand column
of the table below. From Section A of the table select one of the
feature numbers shown (one and only one must be selected). From
Section B select the feature number(s) required to support your
configuration (select none, one or more than one from Section B).
Section C of the table shows the addresses available. The specification of the (HEX) 160 addresses allows the 3138 IFA addresses
to coincide with those of the 3115 and 3125 IFA. Select a number
from Section C if required.
1401/1440/1460 COMPATIBILITY (#4457). Microprogrammed
controlled feature, which, in conjunction with special software,
permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460 instructions.
Field Installation: Yes.
3330/3340 SERIES INTEGRATED FILE ADAPTER (#4655).
Permits native attachment of up to two 3333s or 3340 mdl A2s. A
maximum of sixteen 3330 or 3340 series drives can be attached
to the IFA. The IFA supports rotational position sensing, disconnected command chaining and multiple requesting. Record overflow is standard. For 3330, standard I/O addresses are (hex) 150
thru 15F. For 3340, standard addresses are (hex) ICO thru ICF.
For 3340 with 3344, standard addresses are (hex) ICO thru 1 El .
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Specify:
[1] DASD Designation -- Specify ONE of the following - #9313;
(DASD 3333/3330) to attach up to two 3333 mdl 1 s, each
with up to three 3330 mdls 1/2 in any combination ...
#9314; (DASD 3340 only) to attach up to two 3340 mdl
A2s, each with up to three 3340 mdls Bl/B2 in any combination ... #9315; (3333/3340 Intermix) to attach one 3333
mdl 1 (with up to three 3330 mdls 1/2 in any combination)
plus one 3340 mdl A2 (with up to three 3340 mdls Bl /B2 in
any combination).
[2] If any 3333 mdl 11 and/or 3330 mdl 11 is to be attached,
also specify #9316; (3333/3330 mdl 11) in addition to
#9313 or #9315.
With #9313 plus #9316, a
one 3333 mdl 11, each with
11 (in any combination) can
11 s, each with any mixture
and II,
mixture of one 3333 mdl 1 and
up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2, and
be attached ... or two 3333 mdl
of up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2
With #9315 plus #9316, one 3333 (either mdl 1 or mdl 11)
with up to three 3330 mdls 1, 2 and 11 (in any combination)
can be attached in addition to one 3340 mdl A2 with up to
three associated mdls Bl/B2. The standard addresses with
#9315 for 3330 are (hex) 150 thru 157, for 3340 (hex) 158
thru 15F.
[3] If any 3344 is to be attached specify #9317; in addition to
#9314 (#9317 and #9315 are mutually exclusive). #9190;
must also be specified if 3344 mdl B2Fs or the 3340 Fixed
Head Feature (#4301/4302) is ordered.
f
CPU diskette~nly specify reature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
cbu.scable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -- --=---=-- =-----':' =
M 3138.4
Jul 79
DP Machines
3138 Processing Unit (cont'd)
3138,3330/3340 IFA (#4655)
SECTION A
DASD Control DASD DesigCombinations
nation, one
on IFA (#4655) req'd
3333 Disk SlOraee Control
3333/3340 Intermix
If any 3333
Mdlll
3344
and/or 3330
Mdlll
String
Switch
#8150 on
3333/3340
2314/
3340
9316#
--
--
--
9841 #
--
9315 #
9316 #
--
--
9190 #
9841 #
--
9314 #
--
9317 #
9317 f +
9190 #
9190 #
9841 #
., 8070
Facility
SECTION C
ADDRESSES
Compati-
bility Feature (see
#8070)
9313 #
3340 Direct Access Storage
SECTION B
Fixed Head
Feature
3344
(#4301/
Mdl B2F 4302) on
3340
Standard
Address 160
, HEX IS0-15F 9821 # HEX
160-16F
'3330 HEX 1501573340 HEX
-15R-15F
9820 f Not 3344 9821 # Not
3344 HEX
HEX ICO-ICF
160-16F
3344 HEX ICO- See Item 8
lEI
above
• No feature number required .
• , Mutually exclusive with String Switch #9841,2319 IFA (#4650), IFA Conversion feature (#4645), 3344 Attachment (#9317).
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER ADAPTER BASIC CONTROL
(#4670).
Provides the power supply and basic control for a
natively attached 1403 Printer. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL 2, MOL Nl ATTACHMENT
(#4672).
Provides control for attaching 1403 mdl 2 or N1,
Specify: #9182# to attach 1403 mdl 2, #9188# to.attach 1403
mdl N1. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670). On the 1403,
Voltage Adapter (#9709) and 600 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9725) are required on a mdl 2; 1100 LPM Voltage Conversion Adapter (#9726) is required on a mdl N1. See Specify under
1403.
INTEGRATED 1403 PRINTER MOL 7 ATTACHMENT (#4677).
Provides control for attaching a 1403 mdl 7. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated Printer Adapter Basic
Control (#4670). On the 1403, 600 LPM Voltage Conversion
Adapter (#9725) is required on a mdl 7. See Specify under 1403.
S/360 MODEL 20 COMPATIBILITY (#7520). Microprogrammed
controlled feature which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute S/360 mdl 20 or S/360 mdl 25 in
mdl 20 mode instructions. Field Installation: Yes.
2314/3340 COMPATIBILITY FEATURE (#8070).
Permits the
emulation of 2314/2319 volumes on the 3340 Disk Storage. The
user program may access both the emulated 2314 data set as well
as 3340 volumes. This provides a "mixed-mode" operating environment. "Mixed-mode" is only possible with DOS releases which
support 3340 on the mdl S/370 mdl 138. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3333/3340
Intermix (#9315), 3344 Attach (#9317), or String Switch Attachment (#9841). Prerequisite: #9314 (DASD 3340 only), on
3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655).
INTEGRATED 3203-4 PRINTER ATTACHMENT, FIRST PRINTER
(#8075)_
Provides the capability to natively attach the 3203
Printer mdl 4. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED
ER (#8076).
3203 Printer
Prerequisite:
(#8075).
3203-4 PRINTER ATTACHMENT, SECOND PRINTProvides the capability to natively attach a second
mdl 4. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment, First Printer
UNIVERSAL CHARACTER SET ADAPTER (#8637).
Permits the
use of the Universal Character Set feature on a 1403 mdl 2 or N1
attached via the Integrated 1403 Printer mdl 2, mdl Nl Attachment
(#4672). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Integrated Printer Adapter Basic Control (#4670), Integrated 1403
Printer mdl 2, mdl Nl Attachment (#4672).
INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (#4640).
Provides
the circuits and controls for direct attachment of up to eight teleprocessing lines to the S/370 mdl 138. The controls for the first
line adapter are included in this feature. Lines can be any combination of Start/Stop or BSC. Provides for the attachment of 1050,
2260 mdl I, 2260 mdl 2, 2265 mdl I, 2740 mdl I, 2740 mdl 2,
2741 mdl I, 2760 mdl I, 5010 Axx, or any IBM computer multiplexer or terminal conforming to the Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) standard. Note: In adition to the appropriate adapter, each communications line attached to the system requires an
external modem.
Refer to Table 2 below to define customer configuration require~ CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
ments prior to ordering features below. Customer Responsibilities
-- see M 2700 pages for customer responsibilities regarding communications facilities and servicing requirements. Communications
Facilities -- see M 2700 pages for communications facility requirements with this feature. Fielcl Installation: Yes.
AUTOCALL (#1290).
Provides automatic calling capabilities on
facilities Cl, C2, C4 or C5 to initiate (dial) through stored program
control, a data link to a remote station. For the appropriate automatic calling units, see M 2700 pages. Specify: Refer to Table 1C
for Terminal Adapter Type I Model II or Table 1E for Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II or Table 1F for Telegraph Adapter Type II for
appropriate feature code according ~o line positions desired.
Maximum: Four. Limitations: Each Autocall feature installed reduces the number of lines available on the ICA by one. Autocall
must be ordered once for each line where the function is desired.
Thus, the ICA can accommodate a maximum of four lines if each
of these lines also has the Autocall feature. A single Autocall
feature can be associated with any of the lines from one to seven.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Terminal Adapter Type 1 Model II (#9721-9728) or Telegraph
Adapter Type II (#9785-9792) and Switched Network Facility
selection from the display console.
.
ADDITIONAL LINES (#4722-4728).
Each provides circuits and
controls for attachment of an additional line adapter ... for a total
of eight lines in a system. Specify: Order additional lines according to line position required ... see Table 1-A below. Each line
specified requires the next lower order line as a prerequisite.
Maximum: One of each (#4722 thru #4728). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
SPECIFY REQUIREMENTS FOR INTEGRATED COMMUNICATIONS
ADAPTER.
For each line (#4722-4728) attached to the ICA,
including the first line included in the Integrated Communications
Adapter (#4640), one of the following line adapters must be
specified: Terminal Adapter Type 1 Model II (#9721-9728), Terminal Adapter Type III (#9753-9760), Telegraph Adapter Type II
(#9785-9792), or Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#96499656). Each line adapter and all associated features must be
specified according to the line position to which they correspond.
Refer to Table 2 below prior to ordering features for the ICA.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE 1 MODEL II (#9721-9728).!Ji Controls data transfers between the 3138 and 1050/2740 mdl
1/2741/5010 mdl Axx over facility C1 or D1. and between the
3138 and 2740 mdl 2 or 5010 mdl Axx over facility D1 or D2.
Includes vertical and longitudinal checking for 1050 terminals and
2740s equipped with Record Checking (#6114). Specify: Refer to
Table 1-B for appropriate feature code according to line position(s)
desired. Special Requirements: See Table 1-C for additional
specify requirements if Autocall is required. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE III (#9753-9760).f Controls data
transfers between the 138 and either remote 2845 Display Controls or 2848 Display Controls operating at 1200 bps over facility
D3. Permits operation at 2400 bps over facility D4 if Modem
Clocking is specified. Specify: Refer to Table 1-6 for appropriate
Field
feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
MODEM CLOCKING (#9609-9616).
Allows a Terminal Adapter
Type III to operate at 2400 bps or a Synchronous Data Adapter
Type II to operate at 2000 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps or 7200 bps.
Requires the appropriate clocking to be in the attached modem.
Note: Certain modems such as the IBM 3872 mdl 1 although
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- - -------------_.- -------
M 3138.5
Jul 79
OP Machines
3138 Processing Unit (cont'd)
basically 2400 bps modems, offer a 1200 bps half speed facility.
Since the requirements for the Modem Clocking feature are defined by the type of modem, not the line speed, when such modems are attached to the Synchronous Data Adapter Type II and
are switched for 1200 bps operation, Modem Clocking is still
required as a prerequisite on the ICA. Specify: Refer to Table 1-0
for Terminal Adapter Type III or Table 1-E for Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II for appropriate feature code according to line
position(s) desired. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Terminal
Adapter Type III or Synchronous Oata Adapter Type II.
TELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE II (#9785-9792).~
Controls data
transfers between ICA and Model 33/35 TTY terminals (8 level
code at 110 bps only) with facility C2. Specify: Refer to Table 1-B
for appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Integrated Communications
Adapter (#4640) and Switched Network Facility selection from the
display console.
SYNCHRONOUS DATA ADAPTER TYPE II (#9649-9656).~ Provides control of data transfers between the 3138 and binary
synchronous terminals. See "Binary Synchronous Terminals"
under 2701 Data Adapter Unit. Control Station is included with this
feature. Specify: Refer to Table 1-B for appropriate feature code
according to line position(s) desired. Speed Selection: Provides
operation over C3, 02 and 03 facilities at 600 bps if 600 Bits Per
Second is selected from the display console. Provides operation
over C4 and 03 facilities at 1200 bps (no speed need be specified). Provides operation over C5M facility at 2000 bps if modem
clocking is provided ... see above. Provides operation over C5, 04
or X1 M at 2400 bps, over C6, 05 or X2M at 4800 bps, or over
06 at 7200 bps
see above. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640).
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS: See Table 1-E for additional specify
requirements if Autocall or EON are required. See Table 1-E and
Modem Clocking above if 2000 bps, 2400 bps, 4800 bps, or 7200
bps operation is required. The appropriate Data Code must be
selected from the display console.
Special Feature Prices:
Autocall
#1290- $ 56 $ 51 $ 2,180 $ 1.00
1431
Blk Mlplxr Shrd Subchnnls
NC
NC
NC
Channel Priority
1502
NC
NC
NC
3274- 131 120
1.00
Direct Control
5,205
Emergency Power-Off Control
3621
NC
for 2 switches
NC
NC
NC
NC
for up to 12 switches
3622
NC
NC
NC
Mlplxr Subchannels, Add'i
128 subchannels
3906
NC
NC
NC
3907
NC
256 subchannels
NC
NC
4457
NC
NC
1401/1440/1460 Com pat
NC
4640- 242 220
25.00
Int Communications Adptr
9,470
46553330/3340 Series IFA
708 644 19,820
3.00
21.50
Int 1403 Prt Adpt Basic Cnt 4670" 400 364 19,850
Int 1403 Prt-2,-Nl Attach
10
10
415
.50
4672"
Int 1403 Prntr ·7 Attach
4677"
10
10
415
.50
Lines, Additional
Second
4722"
47
43
1,900
5.00
3,815
10.00
Third
4723"
95
87
47
1,900
5.00
43
Fourth
4724"
4725- 144 131
16.00
Fifth
5,690
47
1,900
5.00
43
Sixth
4726"
472747
43
1,900
5.00
Seventh
4728Eighth
47
43
1,900
5.00
NC
S/360 Mdl 20 Compatibility 7520
NC
NC
""
80701,535
2314/3340 Compat Feat
55
50
NC
Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment,
4,750
First Printer
8075 180 164
30.00
Second Printer
8076 180 164
4,750
30.00
Universal Char Set Adapter 8637"
40
37
1,630
8.00
."
.. Feature supplies CPU diskette.
.. '" CPU diskette~only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture
or when field installed. $405 on purchased machine when combined with changes
subject to a distribution fee to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on
the same diskette.
'
LIMITATIONS: For line speed limitations refer to Model 138 Channel Characferistics Manual GA33-3010.
EON (#9801-9807).~
Automatically generates an EON digit at
the end of the dial sequence. Specify: Refer to Table 1-E for
appropriate feature code according to line position(s) desired.
Specify for 3872 and 3874 Modem with EON option. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Autocall (# 1290) ... Synchronous
Data Adapter Type II.
MODEMS: Up to eight modems can be attached to a 3138.
Prerequisites: Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) and
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II (#9649-9656) 2400 bps to
7200 bps, Terminal Adapter Type I Model II (#9721-9728) 134.5
bps to 600 bps, or Terminal Adapter Type III (#9753-9760) 1200
bps or 2400 bps. See feature descriptions for limitations.
Modem
Speed (bps)
3863
3872
3864
3874
3875
2400
MLC
MRC 4 yr Purchase MMMC
2400
4800
4800
7200
Note: for communications capabilities, product utilization and
special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874, 3875 and M 2700
pages.
~ CPU diskeue~only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - -------------------_.-----
M 3138.6
Jul 79
DP Machines
3138 Processing Unit
(cont'd)
write~ups
Before ordering. check Special Feature
TABLE I-A
for Prerequisites and Limitations.
ADDITIONAL UNE APPEARANC!,;S
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FEATURE
Additional Lines
in 46404722 4723
4724 4725 4726 4727
Specify additional lines according to line position.
TABLE I-B
TERMINAL ADAPTERS
4728
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FEATURE
Terminal Adapter
Type I Model II ,
Terminal Adapter
Type III ,
Synchronous Data
Adapter Type II ,
TABLE I-e
9721
9722
9723
9724
9725
9726
9727
9728
9753
9754
9755
9756
9757
9758
9759
9760
9649 9650 9651 9652 9653 9654 9655 9656
Any adapter added. removed, or relocated to another line
position requires reconfiguration of the entire line.
Select one terminal adapter ror each line position specified in
TABLE I-A.
OPTIONS FOR TERMINAL ADAPTER
TYPE I MODEL II
~ ~
-
~ ~ ~
-
~
---
~
- ,- - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FEATURE
Autocall
9777
9778
9779
9780
978 I
9782
9783
TABLE I-D
OPTIONS FOR TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE III
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FEATURE
Modem Clocking
9609 9610 961 I 9612 9613 9614 9615 9616
Select modem clocking feature for each line position for which
Terminal Adapter Type III is specified and operation at 2400
bps is desired.
TABLE I-E
OPTIONS FOR SYNCHRONOUS
DATA ADAPTER TYPE II
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
FEATURE
EON,
9609 9610 961 I 9612 9613 9614 9615 9616
9777 9778 9779 9780 9781 9782 9?g3
9801 9802 9803 9804 9805 9806 9807
Select features required for each line position for which
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II is specified.
TABLE I-F
OPTIONS FOR TELEGRAPH ADAPTER TYPE II
Modem Clocking
Autocall
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Line Position - - - - FEATURE
Telegraph Adapter
Type II,
Autocall
9785
9777
9786
9778
9787
9779
9788
9780
9789
9781
9790
9782
979 I
9783
9792
; CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskette-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- --
------- ----------- -= = =--':' =
M 3138.7
Jui 79
DP Machines
3138 Processing Unit (cont'd)
FEATURES REQUIRED FOR START/STOP TERMINALS
TABLE 2- Part I
Terminal
IBM
Modem
1050 Data Communication
System
Line Speed
(Bits/sec)
134.5
Communication Line and
Features Required
Modem Facilities
C1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II: and Switched Network
Facilitv
DI
Terminal AdaDter TVDe I Model II
2260 Display Station Model I
Connects via 2848 Displa. Control !\IIodel 3 . see this table
2260 Display Station Model 2
Connects via 2848 Display Control Model I or 2 - see this table
2265 Display Station Model I
Connects via the 2845 Displav Control Model I - see this table
2740 Communication Terminal
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facilitv
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II
Modell
134.5
1740 Communication Terminal
Model 2
134.5
DI
Terminal Adapter Tvpe I Model II
600
D2
Terminal Adapter Tvpe I Model II; and 600 Bits Per Second
C1
Ternlinal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facilitv
DI
Terminal AdaDter TVDe I Model II
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and Write Interrupt~ and Unit-Exception Suppression
(if remiired)
DI
T.rminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Write Interrupt; and
Unit-ExceDtion SUDj,ression (if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facility; and Read Interrupt; and Unit-Exception Suppression (if
required)
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Read Interrupt; and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II: and Switched Network
Facility; and Write Interrupt; and Read Interrupt; and
Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Write Interrupt; and
Read Interrupt; and Unit-Expansion Suppression (if required)
2741 Communication Terminal
134.5
Model I (without interrupt
f.ature)
2741 Communication Terminal
Model I (with Receive
Interrupt Feature)
134.5
2741 Communication Terminal
Model I (with Transmit
Interrupt feature)
134.5
1741 Communication Terminal
Model I (with Receive
Interrupt and Transmit
Interrupt features)
134.5
2760 Optical Image Unit
Modell
2845 Display Control Model 1
(point-tn-point or multipoint)
Connects via 2740 Communication Terminal Model I - see this table
3872 Model
I
2848 Display Control Models I,
2 and 3 (point-tn-point or
3872 Model
multipoint)
1
3767 Communications Terminal
Model I or 2 witb (#7113) 2741 Line Control (without
interrupt feature)
3767 Communications Terminal
Model I or 2 with (#7113) 1741 Line Control (with
Receive Interrupt feature)
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 2 witb (#7113) 2741 Line Control (with
Transmit Interrupt feature)
1200
03
Terminal AdaDter Tvoc III multipoint for multipoint operation
2400
04
Terminal Adapter Type III and Modem Clocking multipoint for
multipoint o.,eration and New Sync (if required)
1200
D3
Terminal AdaDter Type III multipoint fur multipoint operation
04
Terminal Adapter Type III and Modem Clocking multipoint for
multiooint o..eration and New SYnc (if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and Switched Network
Facilitv; and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II; and 300 Bits Per Second
Line Soeed
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and
Unit-Exception Suopression (if required)
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Write Interrupt, and 300
Bits Per Second Line Speed and Unit-Exception Suppression (if
required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, and Read Interrupt, and 300 Bits Per Second Line
Speed, and Unit-Exceotion SuoDression (if required)
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, and 300
Bits Per Second Line Speed, and Unit-Exception Suppression
(if required)
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, Switched Network Facility,
Read Interrupt, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line
Soced, and Unit-Exceotion Suporession (if required)
Dl
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Write Interrupt, and
Read Interrupt, and 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and
Unit- Exception Suppression (if required)
C1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, and 300 Bits Per Second Lille Speed
D1
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and 300 Bits Per Second
Line Soced
02
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and 600 Bits Per Second
Line Speed
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facilitv
D1
Terminal Adapter Tvpe I Model II
02
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and 600 Bits Per Second
Line Speed
2400
300
300
300
3767 Communications Terlmnal
Model I or 2 with (#7113) •
2741 Line Control (with
Receive Interrupt and Transmit
Interrupt features)
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Modell or 2 wltb (#7111) •
2740-1 Line Control
300
3767 Communications Terminal
Model I or 1 or 3 with (#7112)
• 1740·2 Line Control
600
134.5
System/7
600
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------=-- =------ --=----':' =
M 3138.8
Jul79
DP Machines
3138 Processing Unit
(cont'd)
TABLE 2 -- Part 1 (cont'd)
FEATURES REQUIRED FOR START/STOP TERMINALS
CI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
Facility, Read interrupt, Write Interrupt, and Unit-Exception
Suppression (if required)
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, Write
Interrupt, and Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
134.5
5100/5110 Computer Systems
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Switched Network
CI
Facility, Read Interrupt, Write Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second
Line Speed, and Unit-Exception Suppression (if required)
DI
Terminal Adapter Type I Model II, and Read Interrupt, Write
Interrupt, 300 Bits Per Second Line Speed, and Unit-Exception
Suppression (if required)
C2
Telegraph Adapter Type II
300
TTY 33/35
TABLE 2 - Part 2
Line Speed
(Bits/Sec)
110
FEATURES REQUIRED for BINARY SYNCHRONOUS TERMINALS
IBM
Modem
Communication Line and
Modem Facilities
Manner of Line Operation
Point-to-Point
600
Multipoint -- 3138 as Control
Station
D3 (two-wire)
D2 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Data Code Features
C3
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Switched Network Facility, and Data Code Features
D2 (four-wire)
Synchronous Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second, and
Data Code Features
Multipoint -- 3138 as Tributary D2 (four-wire)
Station
Point-to-Point
1200
Multipoint -- 3138 as Control
Station
Features Required
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Half Duplex Facility, and Data Code Features
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and 600 Bits Per Second,
and Tributary Station, and Data Code Features
D3 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Half Duplex Facility,
and Data Code Features
D3 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Data Code Features
C4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Switched Network
Facility, and Data Code Features
D3 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Data Code Features
Multipoint -- 3138 as Tributary D3 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II, and Tributary Station, and
Data Code Features
2400
3863
Point-ta-Point
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Switched Network Facility; and Data
Code Features
2400
3863
Multipoint - 3138 as Control
Station
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type 11; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync lif required)
2400
3863
Multipoint - 3/38 as Tributary
Station
D4
Synchronous Data Adapter Type 11; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
2400
3872 Model
Point-to-Point
C5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facility; and Switched Network Facility; and Data
Code Features
D4 (two-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Half Duplex Facilitv; and Data Code Features
D4 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
D4 (four-wire)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync (if required)
Multipoint - 3138 as Tributary D4 (four-wire)
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
1
Point-to-Point
2400
3872 Model
I
Multipoint - 3138 as Control
Station
Point-to-Point, Multipoint
XIM
Synchronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
4800
3864
Point-to-Point
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Switched Network facility; and Data Code Features
4800
3864
Multipoint - 3138 as Control
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type 11; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync (if required)
4800
3864
Multipoint - 3138 as Tributary
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type 1/; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
C6
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Switched Network Facility; and Data Code Features
Point-to-Point
D5
Synchronous Dala Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3138 as Control
Station
D5
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features; and New Sync
Multipoint - 3138 as Tributary D5
Station
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
4800
3874 Model
1
X2M
Synchronous Data Adapter Ty II, Modem Clock, Data Code
Feature
Point-to-Point
D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3138 as Control
Station
D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Data Code Features
Multipoint - 3138 as Tributary
Station
D6 (with C2 conditioning)
Synchronous Data Adapter Type II; and Modem Clocking; and
Tributary Station; and Data Code Features
Point-Io-Point, Multipoint
7200
3875 Model
1
Not to be reproduced without written permission_
·_----=- =---------=--':' =
M 3145.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3145 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Has program, control and auxiliary storage, plus arithmetic and logic circuits for a S/370 mdl 145.
Model GE
163,840 bytes of processor storage.
Model GFD
212,992 bytes of processor storage.
Model H
262,144 bytes of processor storage.
Model HG
393,216 bytes of processor storage when used
with a 3345 mdl 1 or 4.
Modell
524,288 bytes of processor storage when used
with a 3345 mdl 2 or 5.
Model H2
262,144 bytes of processor storage.
Model HG2
393,216 bytes of processor storage.
Model 12
524,288 bytes of processor storage.
ModellH2
786,432 bytes of processor storage.
Model J2
1,048,576 bytes of processor storage.
Model JI2
Model K2
1,572,864 bytes of processor storage.
2,097,152 bytes of processor storage.
For additional models of the 3135, see 3135-3 in "Machines"
pages.
Highlights: Depending upon the processing unit model, up to
2,097,152 bytes of processor storage are available. CPU cycle of
202.5 - 315 nanoseconds depending upon internal operation being
performed. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers.
Virtual storage capability to increase the effective utilization of
main storage.
On the 3145 mdls FED', GE, GFD, H, HG or I, the 2319 Disk
Storage mdl A1 (with 2312, 2313, 2318 or 2319 mdl A2 Disk
Storages) can be natively attached via the Integrated File Adapter
(#4650). 3333 Disk Storage and Control modules (with 3330
modules) and/or 3340 Disk Storage mdl A2s (with 3340 B mdls
and/or 3344s) and/or 3350 Disk Storage mdls A2/A2F (with
3350 B2/B2F, C2/C2F mdls) can be attached to 3145 mdls FED,
GE. GFD, H, HG or I via the Integrated Storage Control on 3345
mdls 3. 4 or 5. Attachment of 3330 series, 3340 series and 3344s
and/or 3350 series disk storage to 3145 mdls H2, HG2, 12, IH2,
J2, JI2 or K2 is via ~he Integrated Storage Control (#4660).
In addition to main storage, 32,768 bytes of Reloadable Control
Storage are included in the CPU for all storage configurations.
This feature permits emulator and control routines to function. Any
expansion of control storage beyond 32,768 bytes (up to 65,536
bytes maximum) is provided in 2,048 byte increments at the expense of main memory ... see "Coptrol Storage Requirements"
below for basic machine and selected feature requirements in
microcode.
An optional Clock Comparator and CPU Timer provides additional
timing facilities for the programmer.
Virtual Storage: Extended Control (EC) Mode expands the structure of the Program Status Word to accommodate the control of
new S/370 features and ex~ends the number of permanently
assigned main storage locations. The S/370 mdl 145 can operate
in either EC Mode or Basic Control (BC) Mode as defined for
S/360. Dynamic Address Translation (OAT) is a standard feature
on the 5/370 mdl 145. When the S/370 mdl 145 is in EC Mode,
with Translation Mode operable, program addresses are treated as
"logical addresses" and the translation feature develops "real
addresses." Since logical storage addressing is not limited by the
amount of available real storage, program size may exceed real
storage size. This logical storage is referred to as "virtual
storage" and may be as large as 16,777,216 bytes on the S/370
mdl 145. For I/O operations, Channel Indirect Addressing provides
a means to transmit data that spans pages of noncontiguous real
storage.
Program Event Recording, a standard feature, is a debugging aid
which permits four types of events to be selectively monitored in a
virtual environment: [1] Successful branches ... [2] Instruction
fetch address compare ... [3] Main Storage alteration address
compare ... [4] General Purpose Register alteration address compare.
Standard features include a commercial instruction set, new
S/370 instructions, Extended Control (EC) Mode, Dynamic Addr-!3ss Translation, Channel Indirect Data Addressing, Program
Event Recording, interval timer, time-of-day clock, store and fetch
protect, console file, byte-oriented operand feature, error checking
and correction code on main storage, micro-instruction retry,
channel retry information, byte multiplexer channel, audibl& alarm,
OS/DOS Compatibility Feature, and one selector channel.
PREREQUISITES:
For 3145 mdl HG or I - 3345 Storage and Control Frame and
3046 Power Unit.
For 3145 mdl H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2, JI2 or K2 - 3047 Power
Unit.
Control Storage Requirements: The Reloadable Control Storage is
housed in the CPU and is loaded from the Console File, which is
located below the console reading board. This area of control
storage Is not available to the user. Control Storage requirements
for the system are as follows:
Basic System Microcode - does not include 16 standard
subchannels on the byte multiplexer channel
26,000 bytes
Byte Multiplexer Channel UCWs - select one of the
1. 16 MPX Channel Units
256
2. 32 MPX Channel Units
512
3. 64 MPX Channel Units
1024
4. 128 MPX Channel Units
2048
5. 256 MPX Channel Units
4096
Optional System Features
1.Console Printer/Keyboard and Alternate Console
Facility (select one of the following):
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 3200
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 1
3440
with remote 3210 mdl 2
3215 Console Printer-Keyboard
3800
3215 Console Printer-Keyboard
with remote 3210 mdl 2
4570
2.Selector Channel Block Multiplex Feature
(basic microcode which supports any and all
selector channels with block multplxr) 2500
3.UCWs for the Block Multiplexer Channel
come in multiples of 16 which are shared
among all Block Multiplexer Channels
8 bytes x UCWs NOTE: 512 UCWs are maximum.
4.lntegrated File Adapter
9760
5.Compatibility Support - select one:
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility
5200
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010
Compatibility
6000
2240
6.Floating POint
7. Direct Control Feature
80
8.Clock Comparator and CPU Timer
1800
9.Conditional Swapping
140
10.Advanced Control Program Support
860
11. Virtual Machine Assist
2400
12.APL Assist
19500
following:
+-hytes
+-hytes
+ __bytes
+-hytes
+-hytes
+-hytes
+-hytes
+-hytes
+-hytes
+ __bytes
+-hytes
+ __bytes
+-hytes
+ __bytes
Control storage requirements in excess of 32,768 bytes will reducs processor storage by the amount exceeding 32,768 bytes in
2,048-byte increments to a maximum of 65,536 bytes.
26,000 bytes
Example: Basic System
16 UCWs on byte multiplexer channel
256 bytes
3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 1
3,200 bytes
9,760 bytes
Integrated File Adapter
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility
5,200 bytes
44,416 bytes
The Movable Control Storage Boundary is set on 2,048 bytes.
Control Storage required is 45,056 (32,768 + 6 x 2,048). The
impact on processor storage is 12,288 bytes.
The address boundary between control and processor storage is
assigned' at Initial Micro Program (IMPL) time. The boundary is
established by the value loaded (during IMPL) according to the
requirements in the console file. The boundary established is the
upper limit of main storage addresses. If an I/O operation or
program instruction attempts to address a main storage location at
or above this boundary, an address check occurs and no storage
location is accessed. If a control storage access is attempted
below the boundary, a machine check occurs. Control storage will
never be less than 32,768 bytes. Above this amount - to a maximum of 65,536 bytes - control storage is allocated from processor
storage in 2,048-byte increments depending upon requirements
specified to the system. This allocation can be changed by utilizing an alternate magnetic disk cartridge with another set of 3145
features. Alternate cartridges for an installation will be available
via RPQ.
For S/360 Programming Systems (DOS and OS), the amount of
processor storage available after control storage requirements
have been met must be equal to or larger than the S/360, memory
• 3145 mdl FED is no longer available.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- - - -----==-=
'":' =
M 3145.2
May 79
DP Machines
3145 PrQcesslng Unit (cont'd)
size that the version of the operating system requires. Any decrementing of processor storage for control storage requirements will
be made in increments of 2,048 bytes.
Input/Output Attachment - a wide variety of I/O devices may ba
attached to the S/370 mdl 145 via the standard byte multiplexer
channel and the optional selector channels. There are, however,
four direct attachment features for the 3145. They are:
Console File (standard) - this is the basic microprogram loading
device for the system. The console file contains a small, lowperformance read-only file device that provides all of the microcode for the system on removable magnetic disk cartridges. The
several disks that will be supplied with the system will supply all
of the required microcode for FE diagnostics, basic systems
features, plus the optional features ordered for the system.
Console Printer-Keyboard (required) - this unit serves as the
on-line input! output device for operator/system communications.
It provides a means of manually entering data into the system,
altering data already in storage, and for printing error logout
messages.
Integrated File Adapter (optional on 3145 mdls FED, GE, GFD,
H, HG or I ... not available on mdls H2, HG2, 12, IH2, J2, JI2 or
K2) - this feature enables native attachment of 2319 Disk Storage mdl Al (and additional 2312*, 2313*, 2318* or 2319 mdl
A2 * Disk Storages) through an integrated adapter. The adapter
is permanently assigned to the standard selector channel
(Channell), and requires space normally assigned to Selector
Channel 4. When the IFA is installed, Selector Channel 2 becomes standard, and only Selector Channel 3 can be ordered.
Integrated Storage Control (optional on mdls H2, HG2, 12, IH2,
J2, JI2 or K2 ... not available on mdls FED, GE, GFD, H, HG or I)
- this feature allows native attachment of 3333 Disk Storage and
Control modules (with 3330 modules) and/or 3340 Disk Storage
mdl A2s (with 3340 B mdls and/or 3344s) and/or 3350 Disk
Storage mdls A2/A2F (with 3350 B2/B2F, C2/C2F mdls). This
feature requires an available control unit position on a system
channel. A Block Multiplexer Channel and one unshared subchannel per logical device are required for support of block
multiplexing and rotational position sensing. If this support is not
required, attachment to a system selector channel is permitted.
This attachment capability is provided for the 3145 mdls FED,
GE, GFD, H, HG or I via the 3345 mdls 3, 4 and 5 ... see 3345.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color:
#9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9048 for white.
[3] Console Table (Reading Board) Extension: #9824 for extension to operator's right, or #9825 for extension to left.
[4] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[5] Additional Multiplel(er Subchannels: 16 are standard ... if more
are required, see "Special Features."
[6] Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required ... see
"Special Features" and S/370 Manual, Installation Information
Physical Planning, for requirements.
[7] Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required on a S/370 mdl
145.
[8] RETAIN/370: #9570 for non-use of FE DAU, #9571 for first
CPU using FE DAU, #9572 for second CPU using FE DAU, or
#9573 for third CPU using FE DAU. Customer must provide
interface for FE DAU to the telephone line.
(9] Shipping Instructions: Unless otherwise specified, shipping
dimensions of the 3145 Frame 01 (CPU) are 31-1/2" wide x
70" long x 60" high. Removal of the side covers will reduce
the width to 29-1/2". If further reduction in length is required,
specify #9892. Shipping dimensions will then be 29-1/2" wide
x 60" long x 60" high.
[10] Console Printer-Keyboard Address: Recorded on the console
file disk at the plant. #910H for "OlF," or #9102# for "009".
[11] Alternate Console Printer-Keyboard Address: #9105# ...
alternate address of "009" for the Second Console PrinterKeyboard (3210 mdl 2). Address is in lieu of the standard
Alternate Console Printer-Keyboard address of "01 E" when the
Primary Console Printer-Keyboard address is "01 F'·. Recorded
on the console file disk at the plant. PREREQUISITE: #9101.
Primary Console Printer-Keyboard Address "01 F".
[12] When attaching a 3345 mdl 3, 4 or 5, specify #9851.
Input/Output Channels
Byte Multiplexer Channel - one is standard on the 3145 and is
functionally equivalent to the byte multiplexer channel on the
S/360 mdls 30, 40 and 50. Sixteen subchannels are provided as
standard with the option of 32, 64, 128 or 256 ... see "Special
Features." At system order time, the number of units on the
multiplexer channel must be specified in order that the correct
amount of control storage is reserved. The byte multiplexer channel provides eight control unit positions and permits several I/O
operations simultaneous with computing. In burst mode, the
channel handles one high speed unit. For Operating System/360
exclusion, refer to SRL GC28-6554, System/360 Operating
Systems System Generation.
Selector Channels - one is standard and three additional are
available ... see "Special Features." NOTE: If the Integrated File
Adapter is specified, see Selector Channel under "Special
Features" for limitations. With the optional Word Buffer Installed,
the selector channel data rate will approximate 1.85
megabytes/second, while unbuffered, the data rate will be
820KB. The Block Multiplexer Channel is also available for the
selector channels and the channel data rates apply with or without the feature. On channels without the Word Buffer (#8810),
the 3330/3830 or 3345 mdl 3, 4, 5 with 3330 drives must be
attached to channel 1 of non-IFA systems and to channel 2 of
IFA systems. On channels with #8810, the 2305/2835 mdl 2
must be attached to channel 1 on non-IF A systems and to channel 2 on IFA systems, and the 3330/3830 or 3345 mdl 3, 4, 5
may be attached to any available channel. NOTE: If block multiplexing or rotational position sensing is required, the Block Multiplexer Channel feature must be installed. The Word Buffer
(#8810) is required to attach the 2305/2835 mdl 2 or 3340. If
the S/370 mdl 145 has 3 or 4 selector channels (lFA counts as
a selector channel), the Word Buffer (#8810) is required to
attach a 3330 series facility.
TLP/
MLC
4 Year
PRICES:
MOL
MAC/
MRC
3145
GE
GFD
H
HG
I
$13,890 $12,830
14,930 13,575
15,970 14,520
15,990 14,540
18,010 14,580
H2
HG2
12
IH2
J2
JI2
K2
15,880
17,570
18,980
21,750
24,540
30,630
38,210
Purchaae
$534,700
588,800
598,900
800,050
801,200
MMMC
$1,150
1,185
1,215
1,215
1,215
14,240
585,200
15,985
844,050
17,255
888,700
19,795
778,000
22,335
867,300
27,880 1,062,100
32,980 1,240,700
1,175
1,280
1,395
1,610
1,825
2,245
2,885
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Maintenance: A
Purchase Option: 45%* * Warranty: A
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changea: Field Installable. When ordering field conversion
of a 3145 mdl FED, GE, GFD, H, HG or I to a mdl H2, HG2, 12,
IH2, J2, JI2 or K2, see "Specify" under 3047 for additonal requirements.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From To
OE
OFD
H
HO
OFD
H
HO*
532,100 564,200 565,350 $66,500
32,100 33,250 34,400
1,150
2,300
1,150
Console Function - a standard system control panel is located on
the 3145. It has switches and lights necessary to operate and
control the system. A systems control I/O function is provided with
either of two alternatives. Feature #7844 attaches the 3210 Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 (15.5 cps) on the console table reading board. Optionally, the 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard (85 cps)
can be attached via feature #7855. Either #7844 or #7855 is
required in the system. A remote 3210 mdl 2 may also be attached ... see "Special Features."
*=C~~~ l:~:"'~~ ~~~~= :~~:!i'o:W"!'~':Jk':~
Bibliography:
t
GC20-0001
• Applicable only when the 3145 mdl HO or I is used with the appropriate
3345 Storage and Control Frame as described under "Models" above. Prices
do not include those of the required 3345.
CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
machines to in.lude any
•• Purohaae Option i.; SO% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
• No looler an.ilable.
NOTE: Up to three CPU, in the same pby,ioal loc:alion SOC,.Ied 3330,
l:l Strinq Switch (81501 on
any 3333
One o. two 3340 mdl A2~
with associall/d mdl 81182
~
Up to fOljr 3340 nidi A2s
0 with ..soci.led m(ll 8.1/82
String
Switch (81 SOlon
i
any 3340 mdl A2
Fixed H,ad Fealu,e
(4301/43021 on any 3340
Vp 10 four 3340 mell A2s
of which up tCl twQ may
attac" 3344'
String Switch (81501 on
a... y 3340 mdl A2 and/Cl'
l:l Fixed Head Feature -
......
931St
9190t
•
9317
subchannels are installed there are NO shared subchannels. Not.:
The number of Multiplexer Subchannels does not affect the number of UCWs speCified for thE! alock Multiplexer Channel(s). See
alock Multiplexer Channel (#1421) specify. FI.ld In.tallatlon:
Ves .
x
I!
x
i!
,
x
~
T
"
I
I
x
I
I,
i
ISC diskette-only s~ feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufa,ctllle or with chargc:able feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased nw:hines IQ include any nlUBber of diskette-only chanaes ordered
on S81De lIisk.C!tte.
Any chanae to an installed OASO Configuration requires an MES ONL Y
if the new configllration indicates that II difl'C!mlt SJ10Cify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. Thco MES must include addition of any new Specify and/or Special Fea.tures IIOt previously instdled AND removal of any
not ~ted as requ,ired for the new configu,ration.
•• Contl'Ol Store ExteJQion (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, the ISC
requires 32 contiguolj,$ deviCe! addr_ regardless of the nlUBber of drives
attached.
+ Control. StQre E.xtension (#2150) and Register Expan.mn (#6111) are
prerequisilO4. For configlUationa in this &I'OUp the ISC u,ses 64 contiguous
should CQnsider tile purchase of Expanded Control
Stor:. (#~152) Initially b.cause thl8 field upgrade requires replacement of Contfol Store Extension (#2150) and Installation of
Expanded Control Store (#2152). Th. prerequisite of Control
Store Ext.nslon (#2150) for #9315 or #9317
c:
associated 33305
0
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 45% ttt Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Up to four 3333. with
M
M
M
M
aS50cldted
>-
0
Model Changes: Field Installable.
0
.,....
M
M
H2 ff
HG2 #f
12 #f
IH2 ##
12 ;#
112 #;
K2;;
AI
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
To
AI
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
$190,000 $248,850 $293,500 $382,800 $472,100 $666,900 $845,500
190,000 234,650 323,950 413,250 608,050 786,650
190,000 279,300 368,600 563,400 742,000
190,000 279,300 474,100 652,700
190,000 384,800 563,400
190,000 368,600
190,000
58,850 103,500 192,800 282,100 476,900 655,500
44,650 133,950 223,250 418,050 596,650
89,300 178,600 373,400 552,000
89,300 284,100 462,700
194,800 373,400
178,600
;; Prices shown do not include charges for any 3145-3 prerequisite
features.
SPECIAL FEATURES
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#1427-1429). Each adds a
high-speed channel to the system. The channel permits overlapped
I/O operation with processing. Eight control unit positions are
provided on each channel. #1427 - for second channel ...
#1428 - for third ... #1429 - for fourth. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: #1428 requires #1427 ... #1429 requires #1428.
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER SUBCHANNELS, ADDITIONAL (#1450).
To increase the number of I/O devices on the block multiplexer
channels, the number of subchannels (UCWs) can be increased by
specifying one of the following: #9581# for 128 ... #9582; for
256 ... #9583; for 512. The number of subchannels selected will
be shared by the Block Multiplexer Channel(s) attached to the
system.
INTEGRATED STORAGE CONTROL (#4660). Provides for the
attachment of 33335 (mdls 1 and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl A2s
and/or 3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs ... see DASD Configuration under
Specify. Additional storage is provided by attaching 3330 modules
to the 3333 or by attaching 3340 mdl Bs and/or 334.4s to the
3340 mdl A2 or by attaching 3350 mdl Bs and/or a mdl C to the
;3350 mdl A2 or A2F ... see DASD Configuration table under SpecIfy and 3330. 3333, 3340, 3344, 3350 "Machines" pages.
# CPU diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordere:ied Head Feature
:~30l/43021 on any 3340
Up to four 3340 mdl A2,
M
M
+.
1
H
""
with associated mol 81/82
.,.
Planning for Model Conversions: When a customer requires
feature changes (except for one or both of the prerequisite features - Word Buffer #8810, and Clock Comparator and CPU Timer
#2001) and/or memory upgrades in addition to a model upgrade
to a 3145-3, consolidating the several changes into a single
is not recommended.
Required DASD Sp.eify Futu,.s •..
+
93~St 9317 9318
3t'3 9314 93141~ 9315
t 9190
t
t
9190 t t
33305
Stronq Switch (8150) on
any 3333
One or two 3340 mdl A2,
with associa:ed mdl Bl/B2
Up to four 3340 mdl A2,
c:
From
..
..
1,600
I.
i
xr
!
I·
I
t ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on same diskette.
• Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONLY
if the new configuration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition of any new Specify and/or Special Features not previously installed AND removal of any
not listed as required for the new configuration.
•• Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, the ISC
requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the number of drives
attached.
+ Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For confl8urations in this group the ISC uses 64 contiguous
device addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The 3340
mdl A2s on the first and third strings may attach up to three 3340 mdl
BI, B2s, and/or 3344s in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on the
second string may attach up to three 3340 mdl B I/B2s. The 3340 mdl A2
on the fourth string may attach one 3340 mdl BI or B2.
++ Expanded Control Store (#2152) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the ISC uses 8 or 16 or 32
or 64 device addresses depending upon the DASD confl8uration installed
and whether any 3350 drive is in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
'------- =-=
------==---==
M 3145-3.3
May 79
~::
DP Machines
3145-3 Processing Unit (cont'd)
NOTE: Customers who may elect to purchase Control Store
Extension (#2150) and later upgrade to Expanded Control Store
(#2152) should consider the purchase of Expanded Control
Store (#2152) initially because this field upgrade requires replacement of Control Store Extension (#2150) and installation of
Expanded Control Store (#2152). The prerequisite of Control
Store Extension (#2150) for #9315 or #9317 can be satisfied
by Expanded Control Store (#2152).
MULTIPLEXER SUBCHANNELS, ADDITIONAL (#4953, 4954).
To increase the number of I/O devices on the byte multiplexer
channel, the number of subchannels can be increased by specifying one of the following: #4953 for 128 , or #4954 for 256.
The maximum number of shared subchannels is eight. When 256
multiplexer subchannels are installed there are NO shared subchannels. Note: The number of Multiplexer Subchannels does not
affect the number of UCWs specified for the Block Multiplexer
Channel(s). See Block Multiplexer Subchannels, Additional
(#1450) specify. Field Installation: Yes.
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850).
To interconnect
two channels (S/360, S/370, or 4341 Processor). Only one of
the processors requires this feature. Uses two control unit positions on each of the connected channels. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
CLOCK COMPARATOR AND CPU TIMER (#2001). [Prerequisite
for 3145-3] See M 3145 pages for description of feature.
CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). Provides additional
control store for microprogram use on the ISC (#4660) ... see
"Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4660) to determine
when required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Expanded Control Store
(#2152).
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2152).
Provides additional
control storage for microprogram use on the ISC (#4660) ... see
"Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4660) to determine
when required. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Control Store
Extension (#2150). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Provides two Instructions, Read
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Direct and Write Direct and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequlsltea:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
8/360 - Direct Control Feature - OEM, SRL GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622). To provide, in effect, a single emergency power-off switch in a "room"
or "area" ... see Emergency Power-Off Control under S/370 mdl
145 in ··Systems." #3621 - to interconnect two emergency
power-off switches ... #3622 - to interconnect up to twelve
emergency power-off switches.
1401/1440/1460 COMPATIBILITY (#4457).
Microprogram
controlled feature which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460 instructions.
Field Inetallatlon: Yes.
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 COMPATIBILITY (#4458). Gives
1401/1440/1460 compatibility, plus 1410/7010 compatibility.
Field Installation: Yes.
Keyboard (85 cps) for systems console I/O ... includes alterdisplay ability. Position of the 3215 to the right or left of the
operator depends upon Console Table Extension (#9824 or
#9825) ... see "Specify" above. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with 3210 Mdl 1 Adapter (#7844). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Uses one .address on the standard
byte multiplexer channel, but does not use a control unit position.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100).
To attach the Integrated
Storage Control (#4660) to a second channel ... the two channels
may be on the same or different CPUs. Switching is under program control. The ISC feature in the 3145 can be dedicated to a
single channel by means of an Enable/Disable switch. Limitation:
Cannot be installed on a mdl FED, GE, GFD, H, HG or I.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: See
"Prerequisites" under ISC (#4660).
WORD BUFFER (#8810). [Prerequisite for 3145-3] See M 3145
pages for description of feature.
MAC/
MRC
Blk Multplxr Chani - 2nd
#1427· $ 277 $ 252
1428·
277
252
Blk Multplxr Chanl - 3rd
Blk Multplxr Chanl - 4th
1429·
277
252
Blk Mltplr Subchnls, Add'i
NC
1450
NC
Channel-to-channel Adptr
328
297
1850
Clk Cmprtr .. CPU Timer
114
104
2001t·
2150··
Control Store Extension
282+ 238+
Expanded Control Store
2152··
421+ 383+
Direct Control
3274·
148
133
Emergency Power.()ff Control
for 2 switches
3821
NC
NC
for up to 12 swltchea
3822
MC
NC
1401/1440/1480 Compat
4457
NC
NC
1401/1440/1480, 1410/7010
Compatibility
NC
4458
HC
Integrated Storage Contrl
4880·· 1,007+ 915+
Multiplexer Subchannela, Add'i
128 eubchanneie
4953
NC
NC
NC
NC
258 aubchannela
4954
8111··
Regleler Expansion
22+
24+
7844·
3210 Model 1 Adapter
153
140
112
3210 Model 2 Adapter
7845·
123
3215 Adapter
7855·
215
198
Two Channel Switch
8100
205+ 188+
Word Buffer
8810t·
247
225
+
Purch
MMMC
$13,240 $18.00
13,240 18.00
13,240 18.00
NC
n,510 13.00
3.00
5,485
10.00
8,350
13,420 20.50
4.00
5,840
...
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
40,480 101.00
882
7,410
5,925
10,380
7,075
11,780
NC
NC
4.00
4.00
8.50
8.50
10.00
8.50
MAC/MRC and TLP/MLC prices effective June I, 1979.
prerequisite feature ... see M 3145 pages (spocial features) for details.
• Feature supplies CPU diskette.
•• Feature supplies ISC diskette.
• '" '" CPU diskette-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture
or when field installed. $405 on purchased machines when combiaed with changes
subject to a distribution foo to include any number of diskotte-only changes ordered
on the same d~te.
t 3145·3
REGISTER EXPANSION (#6111),
Provides additional registers
for microprogram use on the ISC ... see "Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4660) to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes Maximum: One.
3210 MOL 1 .ADAPTER (#7844).
To attach a 3210 Console
Printer-Keyboard mdl 1 (15.5 cps) for system console I/O ...
includes an alter-C\isplay ability. Position of the 3210 to the right
or left of the operator depends on Console Table Extension
(#9824 or #9825) ... see "Specify" above. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with 321.5 Adapter (#7855). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Uses one address on the standard
byte multiplexer channel, but does not use a control unit position.
3210 MOL 2 ADAPTER (#7845). To attach a free-standing 3210
Console Printer-Keyboard mdl 2 for remote systems console I/O.
Limitation: Maximum distance from the console is 75 feet.
Maximum: One. Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequlsttea: Either a #7844 or #7855 and a #4953 or #4954.
Uses one address on the standard byte multiplexer channel, but
does not use a control unit position. The standard address for the
Alternate Console Printer-Keyboard is "01 E" if the Primary Console Printer-Keyboard address is "OlF". If the Primary Console
Printer-Keyboard address is "009", the standard address for the
Alternate Console Printer-Keyboard is "008". Also see "Specify"
for alternate address.
3215 ADAPTER (#7855).
TLP/
MLC
4 Yr
To attach a 3215 Console Printer-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._--- --------== =.: == '!' ==
M 3148.1
May 79
DP Machines
3148 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpoee: Provides main and control storage plus arithmetic and
logic circuits for the S/370 model 148.
Model
J
1 ,048,576 Bytes of Processor Storage
K
2,007,152 Bytes of Processor Storage
Highlights: 1,048,576 bytes or 2,007,152 bytes of processor
storage are provided. CPU cycle time ranges from 180 to 270
nanoseconds depending upon the internal operation being performed. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers
are provided.
Standard Features Include: Advanced Control Program Support
... APL Assist ... Audible Alarm ... Byte Oriented Operand ... 1
Byte Multiplexer Channel •.. 64 Byte Multiplexer Subchannels ... 4
Block Multiplexer Channels ... 64 Block Multiplexer Subchannels
... Channel Command Retry ... Channel Indirect Addressing .. ,
Clock Comparator and CPU Timer ... Console File ... Control
Registers '" Dynamic Address Translation ... Error Checking and
Correction (in Main and Control Storage) ... Extended Control
Mode '" Extended Control-Program Support ... Extended Precision
Floating Point ... Il'lterval Timer ... Machine Check Handling ...
Microprogram Instruction Retry ..• OS/DOS Compatibility ... Program Event Recording ... Storage Protection (Store and Fetch) ...
S/370 Unlverssl Instruction Set .•. Time of Day Clock ... Word
Buffer.
Control Storage: 121,072 bytes of Reloadable Control Storage
are provided in addition to main storage. This permits emulator
and control routines to function. The Reloadable Control Storage
is housed in the CPU and is loaded from the Console File. Reloadable Control Storage is not available to the user.
Virtual Storage: Virtual Storage capability is provided to increase
the effective utilization of main storage.
ConlIOIe File (Standard): This is the basic microprogram loading
device for the system. The console file contains a small file device
that provides all of the microcode for the system on removable
magnetic disks. The several disks that will be supplied with the
system will supply all of the required microcode for FE diagnostics, basic systems features, plus the optional features ordered for
the system.
ConlIOIe Function: A display console is standard '" includes a
cathode ray tube, and a keyboard ... functions as an operator's
I/O console to communicate with the operating system ... standard
attachment for an optional 3286 Printer mdl 2 or 3287 Printer mdl
1 or 2 for hard copy output. CRT can accommodate twenty-four
8O-character lines of information. A system control panel is also
located on the 3148 for additional operator communications with
the system.
Three console modes are available - "Printer-Keyboard" Mode,
"Display" Mode, "115/125 Console-Display-Emulatlon" Mode.
In "Printer-Keyboard" mode, the display console uses the keyboard for input and the CRT and a recommended 3286 Printer mdl
2 or 3287 Printer mdl 1 or 2 for output. The CRT, keyboard and
printer appear to the system ss a 3215 Console Printer-Keyboard.
"Printer-Keyboard" mode is supported by DOS, DOS/VS,
OS/360, OS/VS and VM/370.
In "Display" mode, the keyboard is used for input, the CRT with
24 lines by 80 characters/line for output, and DIDOCS or equivalent support is required. DOS/VS does not support Display Mode.
The 3286 Printer mdl 2 or 3287 Printer mdl 1 or 2 (optional) has
a separate address and requires MCS support or equivalent. When
present, the printer appears to the system as a 3213 Console
Printer.
In "115/125 Console-Display-Emulation" mode, the keyboard is
used for input, the CRT is used for output, and the CRT displays
twelve 56-character lines of information. The 3286 Printer mdl 2
or 3287 Printer mdl 1 or 2 is optional. When present, the printer
emulates a 5213 Printer mdl 1 and acts as a slave unit to the
display console. That is, the 3286 Printer mdl 2 or 3287 Printer
mdl 1 or 2 is not addresssble in this mode. The "115/125
Console-Dlsplay-Emulation" mode is available in DOS/VS ReI. 28
and above.
The display console provides the capability to select three aspects
of the system's environment at IMPL time:
Console Mode - see above (Mode descriptions)
CPU Mode (3148 or 3145)- see Programming Features
subsequent IMPL. NOTE: This is the only user access to the
console file.
.
Input/Output Flies:
Byte Multiplexer Channel - one is standard ... functionally
equivalent to the byte multiplexer channel on the S/370 mdls
145 ... provides eight control unit positions ... in byte mode,
permits simultaneous operation of many low-speed devices '" in
burst mode, handles one high-speed unit.
Block Multiplexer Channels - four are standard ... each contains
the Word Buffer ... as described, each Block Multiplexer Channel
approximates 1.85 megabytes/second ... ability to "Block
Multiplex" provides greater channel efficiency when using direct
access storage devices equipped with rotational position sensing
... devices on these channels which cannot use block multiplexing will function as if attached to selector channels.
Subchannels - on the byte multiplexer channel, 64 subchannels
are provided as standard with the option of 128 or 256 (see
"Special Features") ... for the four block multiplexer channels 64
block multiplexer subchannels (UCWs) are provided as standard
with the option of 128, 256 or 512 (see "SpeCial Features") ...
the number of block multiplexer subchannels (UCWs) chosen will
be shared by the number of Block Multiplexer Channel(s) attached to the system.
Input/Output Attachment
Non-Native - a wide variety of I/O devices may be attached to
the S/370 mdl 148 via the standard byte multiplexer channel or
any of the four standard block multiplexer channels.
Native - the following integrated I/O attachments/adapters are
provided for controlling the designated I/O devices:
Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment, First Printer (optional)
- provides the capability to natively attach the 3203 Printer mdl
4 as the first systems printer.
Integrated 3203-4 Printer Attachment, Second Printer
(optional) - provides the capability to natively attach the 3203
Printer mdl 4 as the second systems printer.
Integrated Console Printer Adapter (standard) - provides the
capability to natively attach the optional 3286 Printer mdl 2 or
3287 Printer mdl 1 or 2 as a hard copy printer.
Integrated Storage Control (optional) - allows native attachment of 3333 Disk Storage and Control modules (with 3330
modules) and/or 3340 Disk Storage mdl A2s (with 3340 B mdls
and/or 3344s) and/or 3350 Disk Storage mdls A2/A2F (with
3350 B2/B2F, C2/C2F mdls) '" requires an available control
unit position on a block multiplexer channel... block multiplexing and rotational position sensing require one unshared subchannel on the block multiplexer channel per logical device•.
Programming Features:
Advanced Control Program Support (standard) - provides four
additional instructions and an additionai function ... Compare and
Swap ... Compare Double and Swap ... Insert PSW Key ... Set
PSW Key from Address .. , Clear I/O Function.
APL Assist (standard) - this feature is an APL emulator. It replaces functions performed by the APL software interpreter. This
feature can provide a performance Improvement for many APL
applications when used with VS APL PP #5748 AP1.
IMPL 3145 CPU Mode Selection - provides the capability to
"run" on S/370 mdl 148 any SCP which will "run" today on a
S/370 mdl 145. No performance degradation or loss of S/370
mdl 145 recovery from error capabilities will be experienced in
this mode. That is, in 3145 CPU Mode, the improved hardware
performance of the S/370 mdl 148 will be available to the user.
Moreover, the user will have the same recovery capabilities on
the S/370 mdl 148 as he has on a S/370 mdl 145 when 3145
CPU Mode is selected. NOTE: S/370 mdl 148 Extended
Logout/EREP is not supported in this mode.
Extended Control-Program Support (standard) - the S/370 mdl
148 includes Extended Control-Program Support. This is a hardware assist that reduces the CPU time needed to execute certain
frequently used supervisor functions in both VS-1 and VM/370.
The functional areas for VM/370 Include:
Virtual Machine I/O
Storage Management
Page Management
SVC Handler
Privlledged Instruction Interfaces
Dispatching
Virtual Interval Timer
Unit addesses of natively attached I/O (except for those attached to the Integrated Storage Control)
These .selections will be recorded on the console file for permanent reuse until such time as any new selection is made during a
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------------ ----
M 3148.2
May 79
==-='='=
DP Machines
3148 Proceaalng Unit (cont'd)
For VS-l the functional areas are:
Storage Mangement
lOS
SVC FLiH
System Trace
Page Management
PREREQUISITE: Each S/370 mdl 148 requires a 3047 Power Unit
... see 3047.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for biue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[4] Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in S/370 mdl 148.
[5] Console Table (Reading Board) Extension: #9824 for extension
to operator's right, or #9825 for extension to operator's left.
NOTE: Extension direction may not be changed in the field.
[6] RETAIN/370: #9570 for non-use of FE DAU, #9571 for first
CPU using FE DAU, #9572 for second CPU using FE DAU, or
#9573 for third CPU using FE DAU. Customer must provide
Interface for FE DAU to the telephone line ..
NOTE: Up to three CPUs in the same physical location
can be serviced by a single FE DAU.
(7] Shipping Instructions: Unless otherwise specified, shipping
dimensions of the 3145 Frame 01 (CPU) are 31-1/2" wide x
70" long x 60" high. Removal of the side covers will reduce
the width to 29-1/2". If further reduction in length is required,
specify #9692. Shipping dimensions will then be 29-1/2" wide
x 60"long x 60" high.
[8] Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required ... see
"Special Features" and S/370 Manual, Installation Information
Physical Planning, for re~uirements.
Prlcea:
3148
Mdl
J
K
MLC
4 Yr
MRC
$19,000 $17,280
22,040 20,050
Purchaae ·'MMMC
$438,750 $2,235
513,750 2,405
Direct and Write Direct and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes
between two cable-connected proceSSing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field InstallaUon: Yes. Prerequlaltes:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
S/360 - Direct Control Feature - OEM, SRL GA22-6845 .
EMERGENCY POWER-oFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622). To· provide, in effect, a single emergency power-off switch in a "room"
or "area" ... see Emergency Power-Off Control under S/370 mdl
148 in "Systems."· Field Inatallatlon: Yes.
#3621 - to interconnect two emergency power-off switches ...
#3622 - to interconnect up to twelve emergency power-off
switches.
1401/1440/1480 COMPATIBILITY (#4457).
Microprogram
controlled feature which, in combination with special software,
permits the system to execute 1401/1440/1460 instructions.
Field Inatallatlon: Yes.
1401/1440/1480, 1410/7010 COMPATIBILITY (#4458). Gives
1401/1440/1460 compatibility, plus 1410/7010 compatibility.
Field InatallaUon: Yes.
INTEGRATED STORAGE CONTROL (#4880). Provides for the
attachment of 3333s (mdls 1 and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl A2s
and/or 3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs ... see DASD Configuration under
Specify, below. Additional storage is provided by attaching 3330
modules to the 3333 or by attaching 3340 mdl Bs and/or 3344s
to the 3340 mdl A2 or by attaching 3350 mdl Bs and/or a mdl C
to the 3350 mdl A2 or A2F '" see DASD Configuration table below
and 3330, 3333, 3340, 3344, 3350 "Machines" pages.
Maximum: One. Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Prerequlalte: Requires a
control unit position on a block multiplexer channel. Block Multiplexing and rotational pOsition sensing require one unshared
subchannel on the block multiplexer channel per logical device.
Specify: The available combinations of storage devices which can
be attached are shown in the table below. One, two or three Xs in
a vertical column indicate the type of machine(s) listed under
DASD Configuration which can be attached when the "Required
DASD Specify Features" are installed. Based on the DASD, and
the special features listed below being ordered for them, order the
required DASD Specify Feature(s). [Note that #9190 is 3340
Fixed Head Attachment for #9314 and #9315 and is not specified for #9317 or #9318.]
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3 Purchase Option: 55%
Metering: Base Unit
Warranty: A Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
P...,
~
Model Changea: Field installable.
J
~~~I
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
k-
;:)'3, ~
;;2 S", l/
~.;:, {p
From Model J to Model K ••••• $75,000
SPECIAL FEATURES
To
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER SUBCHANNELS, ADD'L (#1450).
increase the number of I/O devices on the block multiplexer
channels, the number of subchannels (UCWs) can be increased by
specifying one of the following: #95811 for 128 ... #95821 for
256 ." #95B3f for 512. The number of subchannels selected will
be shared by the Block Multiplexer Channel(s) attached to the
.
system. Field Inatallatlon: Yes.
To interconnect
CHANNEL-TO-CHANMEL ADAPTER (#1850).
two channels (either S/360, S/370, or 4341 Processor) Only
one of the processors requires this feature. Uses two control unit
positions on each of the connected channels. Maximum: One
'
Field Inetallatlon: Yes.
CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150).
Provides additional
control storage for microprogram use on the ISC (#4660) ... see
"Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4660) to determine
when required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Expanded Control Store (#2152).
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2152).
Provides additional
control storage for microprogram use on the ISC (#4660) ... see
"Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4660) to determine
when required. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Control Store
Extension (#2150). Maximum: One. Field Inatallatlon: Yes.
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
I
Provides two instructions, Read
CPU di.skette-oniy specilY feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with
chargeable feature that supplies diskelle. $405 on purchased machines to include any
number of diskctle-oniy changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without wriUenpermission.
-------- - --=- =-------=
--':' =
M 3148,3
May 79
DP Machines
3148 Processing Unit (cont'd)
ISC (#4660) WITH ONE CHANNEL OR WITH TWO CHANNEL
SWITCH (#8100)
..
Roquired DASD
>
c
0
M
M
M
DASD Conliguf.tion
On. or Iwo 3333, Wllh
assocIated 3330s
Up to four 3333, wilh
x x
as:;ocldted 33305
M
Slrloq SWIlch (8150) on
any 3333
One or two 3340 mdl A2,
\'\j'ith assQcia!ed mdl B 11 82
>
C
0
a
Up
10
lour 3340 mdl A2,
x
I
I
x x
•
with 2ssociC!t0d mal 81/82
.,.
String Switch 1815m on
any 3340 mdl A2
Fixed Head Feature
:~301 /4302) on any 3340
Up 10 four 3340 IOdl A2.
M
M
I
...
I
att.c~
3344.
String Switch 18150) on
any 3340 mdl A2 and/or
.,.0
M
M
I
~xJ
i
I
!
I!
ixlx
x x
x
X
I
xxx
:
I
x x
<.
Fixed Head Feature on
i ,i
X
apy 3340 14:;Cl/43021
3333. and 3340 mdl A2,
I
{any combinatic., of twO,
I
I three, or toud each with
~ ~i associated driYfS
~ ~
String Switch (81501 en
;;; _ any 3333 or 3340 mdl A2
~
~ .Ej Fi'ICed Head Feature
I (4301143021 on any 3340
'"
2: jUP to four 3350 mdl A2s1
A2Fs w associated mdl
o iS2s/B2Fs, C2!C2F
~ e;'ing Sw (8150) on any
M
13350 mdl A2IA2F,C2/C2F
_, 3333" 3340 mdl A2s and
~ 13350 rndl A2,IA2Fs (any
~ ~ c~""binatj?" 0: 2,.3 or 4~
6
o
M
_
I\-&.'Itn
i Ir
2SSCCI<.1tea
drives
~ ~IStringSw 18150) on any
33 , 3340 mdl A2, or
~ ~ 3350
mdl A2!A2F,C2/C2F
M
I
I
I
I
xx
xix
"
!
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
i;
!
•I
i
I
..
I
XiX
I·
I
(4301/43021 On any 3340
t
t
!
and/or Fixed Head Fea
ISC diskette2
$37,500
MP3
MP4
MPS
i!='rom
MP4
$37,500
$90,000
$75,000
To
AP2
AP3
AP4
AP5
APS
AP7
AP8
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151).
Provides additional
control storage for microprogram use on the ISC ... see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Control (#4650) to determine when
required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion
(#6111).
ISC/SA CONTROL STORE ADDITIONAL (#2152) Provides additional control store for microprogram use on the ICS (#4650).
Required if 3350 DASD is attached to an ISC/SA (#7220).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Register
Expansion (#6111), Expanded Control Store (#2151) and Staging
Adapter for ISC (#7220).
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two instructions, "Read
Direct" and "Write Direct," and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes,
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
S/370-Direct Control Feature-OEMI, GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622).
To provide, in effect, a single emergency power-off switch in a "room"
or "area"
see Emergency Power-Off under S/370 in
"Systems." #3621 -- to interconnect two emergency power-off
switches ... #3622 -- to interconnect up to twelve emergency
power-off switches. Field Installation: Yes.
$37,500
$37,500
$37,500
$90,000
$75,000
$75,000
$75,000
Notes:
1. There are no additional installation charges over the above
model conversion and model upgrade prices.
2. The above model conversions and model upgrades are field
installable.
3. Planning for Model Conversions and Model Upgrades: When a
customer requires storage upgrades in addition to a model
conversion, the changes must not be consolidated into a single
Also, storage upgrades for storage above two megabytes
should be ordered individually in one megabyte increments.
4. When
an MP storage upgrade is submitted, the
proper number of Processor Attach features (#5552) for the
remote processor should be ordered.
5. When
an AP storage upgrade is submitted, the
proper number of Processor Attach leatures (#5552) for the
3052 APU should be ordered.
6. When
an upgrade to an MP system is submitted,
the proper number of Processor Attach features (#5552) for
the remote processor must be ordered.
7. 3158 units with System/370 Extended (#7730) that are converted to an AP model require System/370 Extended, Add'l
(# 7731) on the AP model processing unit.
8. 3158 units with System/370 Extended (#7730) that are converted to an MP model require System/370 Extended (#7730)
and System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731) on both processing
units.
SPECIAL FEATURES
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#1433-1435).
Each adds a
channel for attachment of I/O devices ... for devices thai can be
attached see S/370 in '"Systems.'" The channel permits overlapped I/O operation with processing. Eight control unit positions are
provided on each channel. Channel Indirect Addressing is included !n each channel. # 1433 -- lor third block multiplexer channel
#"1434 -- for fourth ... #1435 -- for fifth. Limitation: #1434
can'1ot be installed if 2nd Byte Multiplexer Channel (#4990) is
installed. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: #1434 requires
"'1433 ... #1435 requires #1434 or #4990.
CHANNEl-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850).
To interconnect
two channels (either S/360, S/370 or 4341 Processor). Only one
of the processors requires this feature. Uses one control unit
position on each of the connected channels. Function can be
expanded under program control so that the adapter will operate
as a standard control unit. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
The
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF PANEL EXPANSION (#3625).
basic S/370 mdl 158 provides for EPO control for up to 16 control units. When single mdl 158 configurations exceed this limit,
#3625 should be ordered. Each #3625 attaches up to four additional EPO terminations. Maximum: Five.
Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED PRECISION FLOATING POINT (#3700).
Provides
instructions to handle extended precision (28-hexadecimal digit
fraction) floating point operands. Extended precision operands may
also be rounded to long-precision format, which in turn may be
rounded to short-precision format. This function is also included in
and enabled by the OS/VS1 ECPS (Extended Control Program
Support) (#8750). Field Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 COMPATIBILITY (#3950).
Provides the system with the ability to execute 1401/1440/1460 and
1410/7010 instructions under specific conditions of minimum and
matching configurations ... see P 360N pages for DOS and P
360C pages for as. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: This
feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with
System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370 Extended, Add'i
(#7731), or with OS/VS1 ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750).
INTEGRATED STORAGE CONTROLS (ISC) (#4650).
Provides
for the attachment of 3333s (mdls 1 and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl
A2s and/or 3350 mdl A2s/ A2Fs when Staging Adapter for ISC
(#7220) is NOT ordered. Additional storage is provided by attaching 3330 modules to the 3333 or by attaching 3340 mdl Bs
and/or 3344s to the 3340 mdl A2 or by attaching 3350 mdl Bs
and/or a mdl c to the 3350 mdl A2/ A2F ". see DASD Configuration table below and 3333, 3330, 3340, 3344, 3350 "Machines"
pages. The ISC is organized functionally into two separate paths
with up to 16 drives per path ... up to 32 drives per path when
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is installed. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Each ISC path requires a
control unit position on a block multiplexer channel. Specify: The
following applies only when Staging Adapter lor ISC (#7220) is
NOT ordered:
The available combinations of storage devices which can be
attached are shown in the table below. One, two or three Xs in a
vertical column indicate the type of machine(s) listed under DASD
Configuration which can be attached when the "Required DASD
Specify Features" are installed. Based on the DASD, and the
Special. Features listed below being ordered for them, order the
required DASD Specify Feature(s). Note: The selected "Required
DASD Specify Feature(s)" applies to both ISC paths. Within this
constraint the DASD Configuration on one ISC path may be different from that on the other ISC path.
!SC CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). Provides additional
control store lor microprogram use on the ISC (#4650). When the
Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) in NOT ordered, see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Controls (#4650) to determine when
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
---- - --=- =----- =----':' =
M 3158.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3158 Processing Unit (cont'd)
ISC (#4650) WITH ONE CHANNEL OR WITH TWO CHANNEL
SWITCH (#7905)
ReQuired OASO Soocil. FUh•••
OASO CONFIGURATION
One or two 33335 with
~
Up to Our 3333, with
~
associated 33305
'"'"
String Switch'81S0 on
on. 3333
On. or two 3340 mell AZ,
with associated mell B1Al'Zs
Up to our 3340 mell AZ.
with associated mdl 81/a2s
String SWitcht:;SO on
on. 3340 mell
~
o
:i [
~
'"'"...,
0
'"'"
......
",'"
",,,,
o~
,,,,
"'~!
'"
**
93151
9190t
..
9317
9318
t
t
xx
:~~~t/~tZ·::Y
::
**
9315
t
Remote Processor
Storage Size
(megabytes)
x~
e
associated 33305
o
C
9>13 9314 .93141
9190t
t
t
*
PROCESSOR ATTACH (#5552)_
[MP mdls only) One is required for each megabyte of storage over one megabyte in the
remote processor of an MP system.
3340
, Up to our 3340 mill AZs
of which up to two may
attach 3344s
String SWitch .8150 on
ony ~34 0 mell AZ and/or
x
• x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
or four) each with associated
drive'S
String SWitch .8150) on
an. 3333 or 3340 mell A2
Fixed Head F.ature
.430114302 on
3340
~ Up toroUr3350 mell AZ5/
any
REGISTER EXPANSION (#6111)_
Provides additional registers
for microprogram use on the ISC ... see "Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4650) to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
x x
•
Fixed Head Feature
.4301l430Z on an. 3340
[3333' IiiB'340 mell AZs
(a\Y cormination of two, IN-ee
xx
x
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148)_ [MP models only) To
attach the Two Channel Switch for ISC (# 7905) to the configuration control panel on the 3058 Multisystem Unit. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch for ISC
(#7905).
.
.
7070/1074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117)_ Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7070/7074 instructions under specific conditions ... see P 360C pages in "Programming." Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time,
concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370
Extended, Add'i (#7731), Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with
OS/VS1 ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750).
x
~ :~~:..~:='~~~~,";t!
~
~tring SWitch .Sl?O_ on any
'" 3350 mell A2IA2F· C2!C2F
3333"
3340 mell AZ,
0
.... 3350 mell 112s/A2Fs (MY
cOt1'bination of 2, :3 or 4)
and
'"0"'~
' ......
x~
with associated drjy~s
... ", [String SWitch '8150 on any
"''''
~o
"'e
....
....
....
t
•
+
++
o
1/2, 1
1
1-1/2,2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
Field Installation: Yes. Corequisite: MP Model.
POWER WARNING (#5760)_ Provides signal to the 3158 system
when power is outside specified limits. Prerequisites: All models
require customer supplied uninterruptable power supply with line
sensor. MP models also require special cable -Field Installation: Yes.
•
x
Quantity of Processor
Attach Features
(Required)
3333,3340 mell 112,01'
3350 mell A2/A2F; C2!C2F
- :.;t~~~~::d::~~:o
~
ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased
machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on same
diskette.
Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONL Y
If the new configuration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition of any new Specify
and/or Special Features not previously installed AND removal of any not
listed as required for the new configuration.
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, each
path of the ISC requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the
number of drives attached.
Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the 3830-2 uses 64 contiguous d~vlce addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The
3340 mdl A2s on the first and third strings may attach up to three 3340
r;ndl B I, B2s, and/or 3344s in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on the
second string may attach up to three 3340 mdl Bl/B2s. The 3340 mdl A2
on the fourth string may attach one 3340 mdl B 1 or B2.
Expanded Control Store (#2151) and Control Store Extension (#2150) and
Register Expansion (#6111) are prerequisites. For configurations in this
group each ISC path uses 8 or 16 or 32 or 64 device addresses depending
upon the respective DASD configuration installed and whether any 3350
drive is in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
SECOND BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#4990)_ Provides the
same function as the standard multiplexer channel ... contains
Channel Indirect Data Addressing. Takes the place of Block Multiplexer Channel No.4. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Block
Multiplexer Channel No. 4 (# 1434). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Block Multiplexer Channel No. 3 (# 1433).
OS/DOS COMPATIBILITY (#5450)_ Provides the system with the
ability to execute DOS programs under specific conditions
see
P 360C pages in "Programming." Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370 Extended, Add', (#7731), or with OS/VS1 ECPS (Extended Control
Program Support) (#8750).
STAGING ADAPTER FOR ISC (#7220).
Enables each path of
the ISC to attach a maximum of four 3333 Mdls 1 and 11 and/or
3350 Mdl A2/A2F's with associated 3330 Mdls 1, 2 and 11 and
3350 Mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F, for a maximum of 32 drives per
path. See 3333, 3330 and 3350 for additional information. Also
see note on M3333 pages for feature changes required when
3333's are retained for use with a 3851. Provides up to 64 virtual
3330 addresses for each channel interface on each path of the
ISC. Provides for the attachment of up to four Data Recording
Controls in one or two 3851 Mass Storage Facilities to each path
of the ISC. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes ...
must
include removal of any of the following which are installed:
#9190, 9313, 9314, 9315, 9317, 9318. Prerequisites: Integrated
Storage Controls (#4650) and ISC Control Store Extension
(#2150). For 3350 attachment the additional prerequisites are
Expanded Control Store (#2151), Register Expansion (#6111)
and ISC/SA Control Store Additional (#2152). Limitations: If
String Switch (#8150) is installed on a 3333, see writeup for this
feature on 3333 "Machines" page. 3340 drives cannot be attached to the ISC when #7220 is installed. 3350 drives attached to
the ISC when #7220 is installed cannot be used as staging drives
and must be designated as real in 3350 native mode only. 3350
devices may not be mixed with other type devices in the same
string. Specify: #9319 (Staging Adapter 3333/3330/3350).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: Required, together with System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731), on each processor in an MP system and on
the A-series processor in an AP system. System/370 Extended
(#7730) is also required on the 3052 Attached Processing Unit in
an AP system. Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL
time, concurrently with 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950), as/DOS Compatibility (#5450), 7070/1074 Compatibility (#7117). Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with OS/VS1
ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED, ADD'L (#7731). Provides S/370
Extended facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: Required, together with System/370 Extended
(#7730), on each processor in an MP system, and on the A-series
processor in an AP system. System/370 Extended (#7730) is
also required on the 3052 Attached Processing Unit in an AP
system. Limitation: This feature cannot be· loaded, at IMPL time,
concurrently with 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility
(#3950), as/DOS Compatibility (#5450), 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117). Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with OS/VS1
ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750).
3056 REMOTE CONSOLE ATTACHMENT (#7820).
Provides
attachment to the Display Console of an optional console up to
150 feet away. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced wHhoutwritten permission_
----- ---- -- -------------_.3158
3213
er to
Field
M 3158.4
Ju\ 79
DP Machines
Processing Unit
(cont'd)
PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#7840). To attach a 3213 Printthe Display Console for optional hard copy. Maximum: One.
Installation: Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH FOR ISC (#7905). To provide each of
the two paths of an ISC with the capability of attaching to a second channel. The channels may be on the same CPU or different
CPUs. Switching is under program control. Each path of the ISC
can be dedicated to a single channel by means of a Configuration
Switch. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: An
available control unit position and eight unshared subchannels on
a system block multiplexer channel. For S/360 mdl 195 and
5/370 mdls 165, 168. 195, see 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel.
For 5/370 mdls 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148, 155, 158,
3031, 3032 or 3033, see 3135, 3135-3,3138, 3145, 3145-3,
3148 3155, 3158, 3031, 3032, 3033 respectively. For 4300
Processors, see 4341 .
VIRTUAL MACHINE ASSIST (#8740).
Provides assist to VS
operating systems operating under VM/370 by emulation of certain privileged operations. This function is also included in and
enabled by the OS/VS1 ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750). Field Installation: Yes. limitation: This feature
cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with 7070/7074
Compatibility (#7117), System/370 Extended (#7730), or with
System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731).
OS/VS1 ECPS (EXTENDED CONTROL PROGRAM SUPPORT)
(#8750).
Provides assist to OS/VS1 by emulation of certain
supervisor functions. This feature also includes and enables Virtual
Machine Assist and Extended Precision Floating Point functions.
Prerequisite Feature must be selected at system generation on
OS/VS1 Release 6 or subsequent releases. limitations: This
feature cannot be loaded, at IMPl time, concurrently with
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950), as/DOS
Compatibility (#5450), 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117), or in
Multiprocessing Mode. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Vr Purch
Block Multiplexer Channel
·3rd
#1433
$ 463
• 4th
1434
432
. 5th'
1435
215
Channel-Io-channel Adptr
1850
432
ISC Control Store Extens
526
2150t
318
Expanded Control Store
2151·t
318
ISC/SA Control Store Add'i
2152t
Direct Control
3274
123
Emergency Power-Off Control
for 2 switches
NC
3621
for up to twelve switches
3622
NC
Emerg Power·Off Panel Exp
3625
NC
Extnd Precision Floating Pt
3700
NC
1401/1440/1460,1410/7010
NC
Compatibility
3950
Integrated Storage Controls
4650t
1,920
2nd Byte Multiplexr Channl
4990
463
as/DOS Compatibility
5450
NC
Processor Attach
5552
90
Power Warning
5760
142
Register Expansion
6111
47
6148
NC
Remote Switch Attachment
7117
NC
1070/1074 Compatibility
Staging Adapter lor ISC
1220·t 2,065
5151"171/370 Extended
7730
715
System/3l0 Extd, Add'i
7731
220
3056 Remote Consol Attch
7820
51
3213 Printer Attachment
7840
114
7905
351
Two Channel Sw for ISC
Virtual Machine Assist
8740
NC
OS/VSl Extended Control
Program Support
8750
NC
MMMC
$ 421 $16,160 $14.00
393
196
393
478
269
289
112
15,040
7,565
15,040
21,060
12,720
12,720
3,705
11.00
5.00
9.00
23.00
23.00
23.00
4.00
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
1,745
421
NC
82
130
43
NC
NC
1,875
650
200
47
104
319
NC
NC
NC
NC
77,600 258.00
16,160 14.00
NC
NC
2,700 15.00
5,725
1.00
1,330
8.50
NC
NC
NC
NC
83,200 245.00
13,000
4.00
4,000
2.00
2,545
4.00
5,545
1.00
14,220 23.00
NC
NC
NC
NC
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
:nust state: ··Installation of thiS
feature involves removal of parts which become the property of
IBM."
t
Feature supplies .lSC diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- - - ----------------_.-
M 3158-3.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3158-3 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Performs arithmetic, logic, processor storage and control
functions for a S/370 mdl 158.
Bytes of Processor Storage
Models
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
UZ7
U38
A31
A32
M31
M32
A33
M33
A34
A35
M34
M3S
M36
M37
M38
A36
A37
A38
524,288
1,048,576
1,572,864
2,097,152
3,145,728
4,194,304
5,242,880
6,291,456
Highlights: Depending upon the model contains up to 6,291,456
bytes of monolithic processor storage with a cycle time of 1035
nanosecorlds for a 16-byte read, of 690 ns for an 8-byte write,
920 ns for a write of 1 to 7 bytes, and 920 ns for a write of 9 to
16 bytes ... 16 byte parallel data flow ... includes 16,384 bytes of
buffer storage which is transparent to the programmer and reduces the effective cycle time of processor storage. Sixteen general purpose and four floating point registers are implemented in
high speed internal circuits with a four byte data flow. The 115
nanosecond cy.;le CPU and I/O functions are controlled by reloadable control storage. An optional integrated storage control feature
allows direct attachment of 3330, 3340, 3344, 3350 direct access
storage devices. 128 word instruction buffer, improved instruction
execution times over the 3158, increased block multiplexer subchannel pool over the 3158. Asymmetric multiprocessor storage.
Alternate CPU power down while all storage is left available to the
other processor (MP models only). Attached Processing is available by attachment of a 3052 Attached Processing Unit mdl 1.
Standard features include: S/370 universal instruction set ...
interval timer ... store and fetch protect ... byte oriented operand
feature ... error checking and correction code on main storage ...
instruction retry ... channel retry... one byte multiplexer channel
... block multiplexer channels number one and two ... dynamic
address translation ... extended control mode ... program event
recording ... time-of-day clock with clock comparator ... CPU timer
... channel indirect addressing function for channels ... compare
and swap ... compare double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set
PSW key from address ... clear I/O. Four additional instructions
on M models -- signal processor ... set prefix ... store prefix .. '
store CPU address.
Byte Multiplexer Channel: Permits simultaneous operation of
many low-speed devices. Can be operated in "burst" mode for
attachment of high-speed devices. For OS exclusion, refer to SRL
GC28-6554, as System Generation, ... for OS/VS exclusion, refer
to SRL GC26-3791, OS/VS1 System Generation, and SRL GC263792, OS/VS2 System Generation. Eight control unit positions are
provided on the channel.
Block M'Jltiplexer Channels: Up to five ... first two are standard
... up to three more can be attached. Seo "Special Features."
Permits simultaneous operation of high-speed devices ... ability to
"Block Multiplex" provides greater channel efficiency when using
direct access storage devices equipped with rotational position
sensing or buffered devices ... provides block multiplexing compatible witt-. the same function on the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel
... operates as a conventional selector channel otherwise.
Subchannels: In a 31 58-3, byte multiplexer channel 0 or 4 may
have 256 non-shared subchannels less 16 or 32 for each shared
subchannel. A 3158-3 block multiplexer channel may have 40
shared subchannels when the second byte multiplexer channel is
not installed. When the second byte multiplexer channel is installed, the block multiplexer channel may have 32 shared subchannels. The block multiplexer channel may have 736 nonshared
subchannels when the second byte multiplexer channel is not
installed on the 3158-3 and 480 nonshared subchannels when the
second byte multiplexer channel is installed.
Console Function: A Display Console is standard ... includes light
pen, keyboard, cathode ray tube, two console files and control
store ... functions as a manual console for IPL, reset, etc., as an
operator's console to communicate with the operating system, an
indicator display console, and as a diagnostic console for maintenance ... optional attachment for a 3213 Printer (85 cps) for hard
copy output. CRT has twenty-five 80-character lines of information;
as a system console, the last line displays machine status. Optional attachment for a 3056 Remote System Console for console
operation from an additional keyboard and cathode ray tube up to
150 feet from the processor.
The Display Console replaces the conventional indicators and
switches with displays, and diagnostics can be loaded under
lightpen control from one of the console files.
PREREQUISITES: Each AP system requires (1) a 3158-3 A series
processing unit ... (2) a 3052 APU mdl 1 ... (3) a 3056 Remote
System Console mdl 1. Identical MP CPU models are not required
for a multiprocessor system. 3158 and 3158-3 models may be
intermixed. However, when mixtures occur asymmetric MP storage
is not an option. In addition. alternate CPU power down does not
function. Asymmetric MP storage configuration options are available in the 3158-3 models with 1, 2, 3 or 4 megabytes of storage
in each processor. The 3058 Multisystem Unit is required for each
one or two processor MP system.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Console Table (Reading Board) Extension: #9824 for extension
to operator's right, or #9825 for extension to left.
[4] Cabling: #9080 for below the floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[5] Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required
"Special Features" and S/370 Installation Manual Planning, If two processors are installed and the 3052
added and emergency power off ability is required on
tems, then the expanded Emergency Power Off
(#3622) should be ordered.
... see
PhYSical
is to be
the sysControl
[6] Minimum Configuration: See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required in a S/370 mdl
158.
[7] RETAIN/370: Provided by integrated data adapter which is
standard on the console. Customers must provide interface to
telephone line.
[8] CPU Position: #9441 tor left CPU in MP configuration, or
#9442 for right.
[9] Remote MP Processor: Asymmetric MP storage providesasymmetric multiprocessor storage on the 3158-3 with the use of
the appropriate optional specify feature to specify the model of
the remote processor. The 3158-3 multiprocessor may have
asymmetric model combinations of M32, M34, M35 and M36.
With this feature, symmetric model combinations are standard.
For asymmetric combinations specify: Remote Processor
#9001 for 1 megabyte ... #9002 for 2 megabytes '" #9003
for 3 megabytes ... #9004 for 4 megabytes ... #9005 for 5
megabytes '" #9006 for 6 megabytes. Field Installation: Yes.
[10] Processor Attach Feature: When one processor is combined
with another in a multiprocessor system, each processor must
contain sufficient Storage Protect capability for the total storage in the system. Therefore, each processor must add additional Storage Protect capability to reflect the storage in the
remote processor. The first megabyte of Storage Protect for
the remote processor is included in the M31 and M32 Processors. One Processor Attach feature is required in an MP
processor for each additional megabyte, beyond the first megabyte in the remote processor. See "Special Features."
PRICES:
Mdl
3158
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U38
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
In "Printer-Keyboard" mode, the Display Console uses the keyboard for input and CRT and mandatory 3213 for output. It appears to the system as a 3215, and is supported by DOS,
DOS/VS, OS/360, OS/VS and VM/370. In "Display" mode, the
keyboard and light pen are used for input, the CRT for output, and
DIDOCS support or equivalent is required. The 3213 (optional) has
a separate address and requires MCS support or equivalent.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MAC/
MRC
$42,280
43,800
45,320
46,840
50,400
53,440
56,480
59,520
43,910
45,430
46,950
48,47l>
52,030
55,070
58,110
61,150
TLP/
MLC
4 Year
Purchase
MMMC
$38,440 $1,381,100 $2,360
39,825
1,418,600 2,430
41,210
1,456,100 2,500
42,595
1,493,600 2,570
1,583,600 2,780
45,835
48,605
1,658,600 2,920
51,375
1,733,600 3,060
54,145
1,808,600 3,200
1,430,100 2,760
39,920
41,305
1,467,600 2,830
42,690
1,505,100 2,900
44,075
1,542,600 2,970
47,315
1,632,600 3,180
50,085
1,707,600 3,320
52,855
1,782,600 3,460
55,625
1,857,600 3,600
------ ---- -- ------
=== ':' =
M 3158-3.2
Jul 79
DP Machines
3158-3 Processing Unit
M3l
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
(conl'd)
41,730
43,115
44,500
45,885
49,125
51,895
54,665
57,435
45,900
47,420
48,940
50,460
54,020
57,060
60,100
63,140
1,509,100
1,546,600
1,584,100
1,621,600
1,711,600
1,786,600
1,861,600
1,936,600
(#7730) and System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731) on both
processing units.
2,430
2,500
2,570
2,640
2,850
2,990
3,130
3,270
SPECIAL FEATURES
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#1433-1435).
Each adds a
channel for attachment of I/O devices
for devices that can be
attached see S/370 in "Systems." The channel permits overlapped I/O operation with processing. Eight control unit positions are
provided on each channel. Channel Indirect Addressing is included in each channel. # 1433 -- for third block multiplexer channel
... #1434 -- for fourth .. ' #1435 -- for fifth. limitation: #1434
cannot be installed if 2nd Byte Multiplexer Channel (#4990) is
installed. Field Installation: Yes. Prllrequisites: # 1434 requires
#1433. #1435 requires #1434 or #4990.
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%t
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper limit Percent: 5%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
CHANNEl-TO-CHANNEl ADAPTER (#1850).
To interconnect
two channels (either S/360, S/370 or 4341 Processor). Only one
of the processors requires this feature. Uses one control unit
pOSition on each of the connected channels. Function can be
expanded under program control so that the adapter wiil operate
as a standard control unit. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
3158 to 3158-3 Model CONVERSION Purchase Prices
3158 to 3158-U3
3158-AP to 3158-A3
3158-MP to 3158-M3
$85,900 (No change in storage size)
$85,900 (No change in storage size)
$85,900 (No change in storage size)
ISC CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). Provides additional
control store for microprogram use on the ISC (#4650). When the
Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) in NOT ordered, see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Controls (#4650) to determine when
required. NOTE: When #7220 IS ordered, #2150 is prerequisite.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
3158-3 to 3158-3 Model CONVERSION Purchase Prices
3158-U3 to 3158-M3
3158-U3 to 3158-A3
3158-A3 to 3158-M3
$128,000 (No change in storage size)
$ 49,000 (No change in storage size)
$ 79,000 (No change in storage size)
3158-3 to 3158-3 Model UPGRADE Purchase Prices
From To U32
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U35
U36
U37
U38
$37,500
$37,500
$90,000
$75,000
$75,000
$75,000
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
$37,500
$37,500
$37,500
$90,000
$75,000
$75,000
$75,000
From To A32
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
U34
$37,500
From To M32
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
U33
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
$37,500
$37,500
$37,500
$90,000
$75,000
$75,000
$75,000
NOTES:
1.
There are no additional installation charges over the above
model conversion and model upgrade prices.
2.
The above model conversion and model upgrades are field
installable.
3.
Planning for Model Conversions and Model Upgrades: When
a customer requires storage upgrades in addition to a model
conversion, the changes must not be consolidated into a
single
Also, storage upgrades for storage above two
megabytes should be ordered in one megabyte increments.
4.
5.
When
an MP storage upgrade is submitted, the
proper number of Processor Attach features (#5552) in the
remote processor should be ordered.
When
an AP storage upgrade is submitted, the
proper number of Processor Attach features (# 5552) for the
3052 APU should be ordered.
6.
Field change from 3158-3 to 3158 is not recommended.
7.
When
an upgrade to an MP System is submitted,
the proper number of Processor Attach features (#5552) for
the remote processor must be ordered.
8.
3158-3 units with System/370 Extended (#7730) that are
converted to an AP model require System/370 Extended,
Add'i (#7731) on the AP model processing unit.
9.
3158-3 units with System/370 Extended (#7730) that are
converted to an MP model require System/370 Extended
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151).
Provides additional
control storage for microprogram use on the ISC ... see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Control (#4650) to determine when
required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion
(#6111).
ISC/SA CONTROL STORE ADDITIONAL (#2152). Provides additional control store for microprogram use on the ISC (#4650) ..
Required if 3350 DASD is attached to an ISC/SA (#7220).
Maximum: One Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Register
Expansion (#6111), Expanded Control Store (#2151), and Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220).
DIRECT CONTROL (#3274).
Provides two instructions, "Read
Direct" and "Write Direct," and six distinct external interrupt lines
which are independent of data channel operations. The read and
write instructions provide timing signals and transfer a single byte
of information, normally for controlling or synchronizing purposes,
between two cable-connected processing units, or a cableconnected processing unit and external devices. Maximum: One.
Cable Order: Required. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
External devices must meet the interface specifications outlined in
S/370-Direct Control Feature-OEMI, GA22-6845.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622).
To provide, in effect, a single emergency power-off switch in a "room"
or "area"
see Emergency Power-Off under S/370 in
"Systems." #3621 -- to interconnect two emergency power-off
switches ... #3622 -- to interconnect up to twelve emergency
power-off switches. Field Installation: Yes.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF PANEL EXPANSION (#3625).
The
basic S/370 mdl 158 provides for EPO control for up to 16 control units. When single mdl 158 configurations exceed this limit,
#3625 should be ordered. Each #3625 attaches up to four additional EPO terminations. Maximum: Five. Where assistance is
needed in determining requirements, consult Installation Planning
Representatives. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED PRECISION FLOATING POINT (#3700).
Provides
instructions to handle extended precision (28-hexadecimal digit
fraction) floating point operands. Extended precision operands may
also be rounded to long-precision format, which in turn may be
rounded to short-precision format. This function is also included in
and enabled by the OS/VS1 ECPS (Extended Control Program
Support) (#8750). Field Installation: Yes.
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 COMPATIBILITY (#3950).
Provides the system with the ability to execute 1401/1440/1460 and
1410/7010 instructions under specific conditions of minimum and
matching configurations
see P 360N pages for DOS and P
360C pages for OS. Field Installation: Yes. limitation: This
feature cannot be loaded, at IMPl time, concurrently with
Syslem/370 Extended (#7730), System/370 Extended, Add'l
(#7731), or with OS,IVS1 ECPS (Extended Control Program Support)(#8750).
INTEGRATED STORAGE CONTROLS (lSC) (#4650).
Provides
for the attachment of 3333s (mdls. 1 and / or 11) and / or 3340 mdl
A2s and/or 3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs when Staging Adapter for ISC
(#7220) is NOT ordered. Additional storage is provided by attaching 3330 modules to the 3333 or by attaching 3340 mdl Bs
and/or 3344s 10 the 3340. mdl A2, or' by attaching 3350 mdl Bs
t
Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Pian (TLP)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- ----===
--- ----':' =
M 3158-3.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
3158-3 Processing Unit
(cont'd)
and/or a mdl C to the 3350 mdl A2/ A2F ... see DASD Configuration table below and 3333, 3330, 3340, 3344, 3350 "Machines"
pages. The ISC is organized functionally into two separate paths
with up to 16 drives per path ". up to 32 drives per path when
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is installed. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Each ISC path requires a
control unit position on a block multiplexer channel. Specify: The
following applies only when Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) is
NOT ordered:
The available combinations of storage devices which can be
attached are shown in the table below. One, two or three Xs in a
vertical column indicate the type of machine(s) listed under DASD
Configuration which can be attached when the "Required DASD
Specify Features" are installed. Based on the DASD, and the
Special Features listed below being ordered for them, order the
required DASD Specify Feature(s). Note: The selected "Required
DASD Specify Feature(s)" applies to both ISC paths. Within this
constraint the DASD Configuration on one ISC path may be different from that on the other ISC path.
ISC (#4650) WITH ONE CHANNEL OR WITH TWO CHANNEL
SWITCH (#7905)
>-
One or two 33335 with
C
associated 33305
'"'"
'"'"
associated 33305
0
>-
e
0
0
Up to our.
~~~~.
..
..
~
9315t 9317 9318
t
t
91901
9315
t
x~
with
String Switch >8150 on
any 3333
One or two 3340 mell A2.
with associated mdl B11B2s
~
x
x x
x
UP to four 3340 mell A2.
with associated mdl Bl&2s
x
Fixed Head Feature
.4301/4302 on any 3340
::
0
.....
","
",'"
o~
x
x
x
x
x
..... '"
"'~!
'"
x x
.4301/4302 on any 3340
3333. and 3340 mell A2.
xx
x
x
x
Fixed Head Feature
.4301/4302 on
an~
3340
x
mell A2./
~ I:~~~~;~s~c~~t;g2n;t!
~ I ~~~6 ~i~~;:Nuco;;'iF
and
0
on
'"~.
0 ...
"'",
3333., 33~0 mell A2s
3350 mell A2s/A2Fs (any
cor!bination of 2, 3 or 4)
x
with associated drives
"'''' i~;~j ,S;j~~ .~~~~~or.ny
~o 3350 mell A2/A2F; C2!C2F
m.s
'" :t~~~;~::d'::~~:O
•
+
1 /2, 1
1-1/2, 2
0
1
3
4
5
2
3
4
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117). Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7070/7074 instructions under specific conditions ... see P 360C pages in "Programming." Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time,
concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370
Extended, Add'i (#7731), Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with
OS/VS1 (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750).
drives
J:o Up to four 3350
Quantity of Processor
Attach Features
(Required)
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). [M models only] To
attach the Two Channel Switch for ISC (#7905) to the configuration control panel on the 3058 Multisystem Unit. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch for ISC
(#7905).
x
Fixed Head Feature
String Switch .8150) on
any 3333 Of 3340 mell A2
PROCESSOR ATTACH (#5552).
[MP mdls only] One is required for each megabyte of storage over one megabyte in the
remote processor of an MP system.
Provides additional registers for
Register Expansion (#6111).
microprgram use on the ISC ... see "Specify" under Integrated
Storage Control (#4650) to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
x
of which up to two may
attach 3344.
String Switch .8150 on
any 3340 mell A2 and/or
(~y cormination of two, three
or four) each with associated
OS/DOS COMPATIBILITY (#5450), Provides the system with the
ability to execute DOS programs under specific conditions ... see
P 360C pages in "Programming." Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731), or with OS/VS1 ECPS (Extended Control
Program Support) (#8750).
POWER WARNING (#5760). Provides signal to the 3158/31583 system when power is outside specified limits. Prerequisites: All
models require customer supplied uninterruptable power supply
with line sensor. MP models also require special cable -- consult
PhYSical Planning Representative. Field Installation: Yes.
x
I Up to our 334u mol A2.
'"'".....
...
'"'"
SECOND BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#4990), Provides the
same function as the standard multiplexer channel... contains
Channel Indirect Data Addressing. Takes the place of Block Multiplexer Channel No.4. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Block
Multiplexer Channel No. 4 (#1434). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Block Multiplexer Channel No.3 (#1433).
6
5
Field Installation: Yes. Corequisite: MP Model.
xx
... , :~i3~~t:t:i50 on
'"'"
19313 9314 ,9314t
91901
t
t
Register Expansion (#6111) are prerequisites. For configurations in this
group each ISC path uses 8 or 16 or 32 or 64 device addresses depending
upon the respective DASD configuration installed and whether any 3350
drive is in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
Remote Processor
Storage Size
(Megabytes)
Reauired DASD Soecilv Feahre. *
DASD CONFIGURATION
++ Expanded Control Store (#2151), Control Store Extension (#2150) and
ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased
machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on same
diskette.
Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONL Y
if the new configuration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition of any new Specify
andlor Special Features not previously installed AND removal of any not
listed as required for the new configuration.
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, each
path of the ISC requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the
number of drives attached.
Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the 3830-2 uses 64 contiguous device addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The
3340 mdl A2s on the first and third strings may attach up to three 3340
mdl BI, B2s, and/or 3344s in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on the
second string may attach up to three 3340 mdl B I/B2s. The 3340 mdl A2
on the fourth string may attach one 3340 mdl B I or B2.
STAGING ADAPTER FOR ISC (#7220).
Enables each path of
the ISC to attach a maximum of four 3333 Mdls 1 and 11 and/or
3350 Mdl A2/A2F's with associated 3330 Mdls 1, 2 and 11 and
3350 Mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F, for a maximum of 32 drives per
path. See 3333, 3330 and 3350 for additional information. Also
see note on M3333 pages for feature changes required when
3333's are retained for use with a 3851. Provides up to 64 virtual
3330 addresses for each channel interface on each path of the
ISC. Provides for the attachment of up to four Data Recording
Controls in one or two 3851 Mass Storage Facilities to each path
of the ISC. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes ...
must
include removal of any of the following which are installed:
#9190,9313,9314,9315,9317,9318. Prerequisites: Integrated
Storage Controls (#4650) and ISC Control Store Extension
(#2150). For 3350 attachment the additional prerequisites are
Expanded Control Store (#2151), Register Expansion (#6111)
and ISC/SA Control Store Additional (#2152). Limitations: If
String Switch (#8150) is installed on a 3333, see writeup for this
feature on 3333 "Machines" page. 3340 drives cannot be attached to the ISC when #7220 is installed. 3350 drives attached to
the ISC when #7220 is installed cannot be used as staging drives
and must be designated as real in 3350 native mode only. 3350
devices may not be mixed with other type devices in the same
string. Specify: #9319 (Staging Adapter 3333/3330/3350).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: Required, together with System/370 Extended, Add'i (#7731), on each processor in an MP system and on
the A-series processor in an AP system. System/370 Extended
(#7730) is also required on the 3052 Attached Processing Unit in
an AP system. Limitatation: This feature cannot be loaded, at
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--------=- =---- -- =--':' =
M 3158-3.4
Jul 79
DP Machines
3158-3 Processing Unit (cont'd)
IMPL time, concurrently with 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950), OS/DOS Compatibility (#5450), 7070/7074
Compatibility (#7117), Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with
OS/VSl ECPS (Extended Control Program Support)(#8750).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED, ADD'L (#7731). Provides S/370
Extended facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: Required, together with System/370 Extended
(#7730), on each processor in an MP system, and on the A-series
processor in an AP system. System/370 Extended (#7730) is
also required on the 3052 Attached Processing Unit in an AP
system. Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time,
concurrently with 1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility
(#3950), OS/DOS Compatibility (#5450), 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117), Virtual Machine Assist (#8740), or with OS/VSl
ECPS (Extended Control Program Support)(#8750).
3056 REMOTE CONSOLE ATTACHMENT (#7820).
Provides
attachment to the Display Console of an optional console up to
150 feet away. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
3213 PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#7840). To attach a 3213 Printer to the Display Console for optional hard copy. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH FOR ISC (#7905). To provide each of
the two paths of an ISC with the capability of attaching to a second channel. The channels may be on the same CPU or different
CPUs. Switching is under program control. Each path of the ISC
can be dedicated to a single channel by means of a Configuration
Switch. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: An
available control unit position and eight unshared subchannels on
a system block multiplexer channel. For S/360 mdl 195 and
S/370 mdls 165, 168, 195, see 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel.
For S/370 mdls 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148, 155, 158,
and 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, see 3135, 3135-3, 3138,
3145, 3145-3, 3148 3155, 3158, 3031, 3032, 3033 respectively.
For 4300 Processors, see 4341.
VIRTUAL MACHINE ASSIST (#8740).
Provides assist to VS
operating systems operating under VM/370 by emulation of certain privileged operations. This function is also included in and
enabled by the OS/VSl ECPS (Extended Control Program Support) (#8750). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: This feature
cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with 7070/.7074
Compatibility (#7117), System/370 Extended (#7730), or with
System/370 Extended, Add'l (#7731).
Special Feature Prices:
TLP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Year Purch
MMMC
Block Multiplexer Channel
#1433
$ 463 $ 421 $16,160 $14.00
- 3rd
- 4th
1434
432
393 15,040 11.00
1435
215
7,565
- 5th
196
5.00
1850
432
Channel-to-channel Adapter
393 15,040
9.00
ISC Control Store Extens
526
478 21,060
23.00
2150t
Expanded Control Store
318
289 12,720 23.00
2151't
ISC/SA Control Store Add'l
318
289 12,720 23.00
2152t
Direct Control
3274
123
112
3,705
4.00
Emergency Power-Off Control
for 2 switches
3621
NC
NC
NC
NC
for up to twelve switches
NC
3622
NC
NC
NC
Emerg Power-Off Panel Exp
3625
NC
NC
NC
NC
Extnd Precision Floating Pt
3700
NC
NC
NC
NC
1401/1440/1460,1410/7010
Compatibility
3950
NC
NC
NC
NC
Integrated Storage Controls
1,920 1,745 77,600 258.00
4650t
2nd Byte Multiplexr Channl
4990
463
421 16,160 14.00
NC
OS/DOS Compatibility
NC
NC
5450
NC
Processor Attach
5552
90
82
2,700
15.00
Power Warning
5760
142
130
5,725
1.00
Register Expansion
6111
47
43
1,330
8.50
Remote Switch Attachment
6148
NC
NC
NC
NC
7070/7074 Compatibility
NC
NC
7117
NC
NC
Staging Adapter for ISC
2,065
1,875
83,200
245.00
7220't
System /370 Extended
7730
715
650 13,000
4.00
System/370 Extd, Add'l
7731
220
4,000
200
2.00
3056 Remote Cnsl Attach
7820
51
47
2,545
4.00
3213 Printer Attachment
7840
114
104
5,545
1.00
Two Channel Sw for ISC
7905
351
319 14,220 23.00
8740
NC
NC
NC
Virtual Machine Assist
NC
OS /VS 1 Extended Control
Program Support
8750
NC
NC
NC
NC
,
t
Customer price quotations and order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this feature involves removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
Feature supplies ISC diskette.
OS/VS1 ECPS (EXTENDED CONTROL PROGRAM SUPPORT)
(#8750),
Provides assist to OS/VSl by emulation of certain
supervisor functions. This feature also includes and enables Virtual Machine Assist and Extended Precision Floating Point functions.
Prerequisite: Feature must be selected at system generation on
OS/VSl Release 6 or subsequent releases. Limitations: This
feature cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with
1401/1440/1460, 1410/7010 Compatibility (#3950), OS/DOS
Compatibility
(#5450),
7070/7074
Compatibility
(#7117),
System/370 Extended (#7730), System/370 Extended, Add'l
(#7731), or in Multiprocessing Mode. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
--------- - ----==--- --=--":' =
M 3165.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3165 PROCESSING UNIT
necessary safety elements (covers, cable connectors, etc.) and the
changes required for quality testing and installing.
[The 3165 is no longer available ... features and model changes
can be ordered on an "as available" basis.]
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic and control functions for a
S/370 mdl 165.
[2] Motor Generator Set and Starter: See M 10000 pages for
ordering instructions and prices.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
[3] Channel Attachment: The basic 3165 has connection facilities
for channels addressed 0, 1 and 2. SPECIFY; #9065 for attachment of channels addressed 3 and 4 ... #9066 for channels
addressed 5 and 6. #9065 is a prerequisite for #9066. For
channels 7 - 11, see Extended Channels (#3850). Customers
who may elect to purchase and have present or future requirements for channels addressed 5 and 6 should specify #9066.
Model I
Used with two 3360 mdl 4s in a S/370 mdl 1165
(524,288 bytes).
Model J
Used with two 3360 mdl 5s in a S/370 mdl J165
(1,048,576 bytes).
Model JI
Used with two 3360 mdl 4s and two 3360 mdl 5s
in a S/370 mdl JI165 (1,572,864 bytes).
Model K
Used with four 3360 mdl 5s in a S/370 mdl K165
(2,097,152 bytes).
[4] Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required ... see
"Special Features" and S/370 Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GC22-7004, for details.
Model KJ
Used with six 3360 mdl 5s in a S/370 mdl KJ165
(3,145,728 bytes).
[5] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
Highlights: Depending upon the model, can attach up to
3,145,728 bytes of 2-microsecond processor storage ... eight byte
parallel data flow... includes up to 16,384 bytes of 80nanosecond cycle buffer storage which is transparent to the program and significantly reduces the effective cycle time of storage
... buffer storage does not increase the amount of addressable
storage ... 80-nanosecond processor cycle ... double words are
four-way interleaved ... overlapped operation of instruction and
execution units ... extensive data checking is coupled with increased reliability, availability and serviceability.
[6] RETAIN/370: #9570 for non-use of FE DAU, #9571 for first
CPU using FE DAU, #9572 for second CPU using FE DAU, or
#9573 for third CPU using FE DAU. Customer must provide
interface for FE DAU to the telephone line.
Standard Features -- universal instruction set ... extended precision floating point feature ... one-microsecond time-of-day clock
... additional variable field length instructions ... control registers,
expanding the functions of PSWs ... byte-oriented operand feature '" buffer storage (8,192 bytes) ... fetch and store protection
'" direct control feature ... attachment for 2860 Selector Channels, 2870 Multiplexer Channel(s) and 2880 Block Multiplexer
Channel(s) ... storage configuration control... writable control
storage ... interval timer ... storage error checking and correction
... instruction retry.
Channels -- separate channels facilitate maximum overlap with
processing. Channel speeds of 1.5 million bytes/second are
standard and up to 3 million bytes/second with Two Byte Interface (#7850, 7851) on the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. Up
to seven logical channels can be attached per CPU. Valid combinations include: (a) One 2870 plus up to six channels of 2860s
and 2880s ... (b) Two 2870s plus up to five channels of 2860s
and 2880s ... (c) If no 2870 is attached, only up to six channels,
2860s and/or 2880s, can be attached per CPU. See 2860,
2870 and 2880.
With ths addition of Extended Channels (#3850), up to twelve
channels can be attached ... for valid combinations, see "Special
Features." Depending upon data rates, all channels, including the
Selector Subchannels and basic multiplexer channel of the 2870
can operate concurrently. Each selector or block multiplexer
channel can control up to eight control units. The basic multiplexer channel and each Selector Subchannel of the 2870 controls
up to eight control units. If one 2841 is attached, no other control unit can be attached to that Selector Subchannel ... see
2841.
Limitations: High performance devices can be accommodated
by the 3165 only by adhering to the following requirements and
limitations:
Storage Control
2835 mdl 1
2835 mdl 2
2820
Channel Type
2880
2880
2880 or 2860
Channel Priority
1
1 or 2
1 or 2
When attaching 2835s and 2820s, the control units must be
attached to channels contained in the channel frames located in
the first or second position of the channel bus.
The maximum number of 3330 facilities is determined by the
total system configuration ... consult your SO and I Center.
PREREQUISITES: In addition to appropriate 3360 Processor Storages, each 3165 requires: [1] At least one selector channel
(2860), block multiplexer channel (2880), or a 2870 with at least
one Selector Subchannel ... [2] One 3066 System Console mdl 1
... [3] One 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1 ... [4]
A motor generator set.
Customer-supplied chilled water is required for cooling the system
... see S/370 Installation Manuel - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
Each model of the 3165 has been designed for interconnected
operation with a specified number of 3360 Processor Storage
Units. Customers who wish to order the 3165 for use without the
specified number of 3360s should submit an RPQ to provide the
PRICES:
Mdl
3165
I
J
JI
K
KJ
MAC/
MRC
$ 37,790
37,900
38,370
38,680
39,820
Purchase
MMMC
$1,814,600
1,819,900
1,841,900
1,858,200
1,913,100
$2,790
2,800
2,835
2,885
2,980
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066)
Machine Group: D
Useful life Category: 1
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option:55%
Warranty: A
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From To
I
J
JI
K
J
$5,300
K
JI
$27,300
22,000
$43,600
38,300
16,300
KJ
$98,500
93,200
71,200
54,900
The model conversion prices above are applicable only when
the 3165 is used with the combinations of 3360 Processor
Storages as indicated under "Models" above.
SPECIAL FEATURES
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1432).
Expands the basic 8,192-byte
buffer to 16,384 bytes. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Buffer Expansion (#1432) on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3621, 3622).
To provide, in effect, a single Emergency Power-Off Switch in a "room"
or "area" ... see "Emergency Power-Off" in "Systems" and SRL
GC22-7004 for details. #3621 -- to interconnect 2 emergency
power-off switches ... #3622 -- to interconnect up to 12 emergency power-off switches. Field Installation: Yes.
EXTENDED CHANNELS (#3850). To attach up to twelve channels, in combinations of 2860 Selector Channels, 2870 Multiplexer
Channels, and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channels. A maximum of
twelve channels or a total of seven channel frames, whichever
occurs first, can be attached. The feature includes the capability
of addressing channels 7 thru 11. Valid maximum channels attachable are:
2860s -- maximum 6 channels
2870s -- maximum 2 channels
28805 -- maximum 11 channels
limitations: The 2860 channel addresses must be numbered one
thru six. The first 2870 channel must be numbered zero ... the
second 2870 must be numbered one thru six. The 2880 channel
addresses may be any number one thru eleven. If the address of
the 2880 is seven thru eleven, only 2301 s, 2303s, 2305s, 2311 s,
2314s, 2321 s, 2420s, 3211 S, 33305, 3420s or 35055 may be
attached. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #9066 ... see
"Specify" above. The number of channel frames specified on the
power distribution unit must be equal to or greater than the channel frames actually attached. See 3067 mdl 1.
t
NOTE: Up to three CPUs in the same physical location can be serviced by a single
FEDAU.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----==--- - =----':' =
--- --
M 3165.2
Jui 79
DP Machines
3165 Processing Unit (conI' d)
HIGH SPEED MUL TIPL Y (#4520).
Improves processor speed in
both fixed and floating point multiply operations. Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: High Speed Multiply (#4520) on
the 3066 System Console mdl 1 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7117).
Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7070 and 7074 instructions. This capability
is integrated under OS and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT. 7070/7074 system features included are: Channels, 729 magnetic tape, 7501 Console
Card Reader, and Floating Decimal Arithmetic. NOT included are:
Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage, punched card I/O, printer, Hypertape, Interval Timer, and core storage addresses above
9989. For a detailed explanation of system requirements with this
feature, see "Compatibility Features" under S/370 in "Systems."
limitation: Cannot be installed with any other compatibility feature.
Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
7070/7074 Compatibility (#7117) on the 3066 System Console
mdl 1 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7118).
Provides the system with the
ability to execute 705 and 7080 instructions. This capability is
integrated under OS and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT. 7080 system features included
are: Channels, punched card input, typewriter, and 729 magnetic
tape. NOT included are: Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage,
Hypertape, and 705 units on-line with the 7080. Only the 7080 is
emulated, but 705 programs can be run because the "705 mode"
of the 7080 is emulated. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under
S/370 in "Systems." Limitation: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Field Installation: Not recommended.
Prerequisite: 7080 Compatibility (#7118) on the 3066 System
Console mdl 1 and on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution
Unit mdl 1.
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7119). Provides the
system with the ability to execute 709, 7090, 7094, 7094 II in··
structions. This capability is integrated under OS and emulated
programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT.
Included are the following features of those systems: Channels,
punched card I/O, printer and 729 magnetic tape. NOT included
are: Hypertape, teleprocessing equipment, direct couple, disk
storages, drum storages, 1401 adapter, direct data on 7094 special and custom features. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see "Compatibility Features"' under
S/370 in "'Systems."' Limitation: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Field Installation: Not recommended.
Prerequisite: 709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#"1119) on
the 3066 System Console mdl 1 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 1.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
Buffer Expansion
#143~ $1,610 $ 71,160
Emergency Power-Off Control,
for 2 switches
3621
NC
NC
for up to 12 switches
3622
NC
NC
Extended Channels
3850
24,640
513
High Speed Multip!y
4520 2,815 135,150
7070/7074 Compatibility
7117 2,930 140,350
7080 Compatibility
7118 2,930 140,350
709/7090/7094/7094 II Cmpt 7119 2,930 140,350
MMMC
$ 52.00
NC
NC
66.00
104.00
155.00
155.00
155.00
DYNAMIC ADDRESS TRANSLATION (Purchased Models J, K and
KJ)
Purchased installed model 165s may be field converted to 165-11
through installation of the Dynamic Address Translation Facility.
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement
letters for purchase
must state: "'Instaliation of model
change to the '11' Model involves the removal of parts which become the property of IBM."'
NQt tQ be reproduced without written permiSSion.
---------- --- -- --- -----------_.-
M 3168.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3168 PROCESSING UNIT
Purpose: Provides arithmetic. logic. processor storage and control
functions for a S/370 mdl 168.
Models
J
K
KJ
L
LJ
LK
LKJ
M
Bytes of Processor Storage
MPl
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
MP7
MP8
1.048,576
2,097,152
3,145,728
4,194,304
5,242,880
6,291,456
7,340,032
8,388,608
(4)
Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required ... see
"Special Features" and S/370 Installation Manual - ?hysical
Planning, GC22-7004 for details.
[5) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[6) RETAIN/370: Customer must provide interface for FE DAU to
the telephone line.
PRICES:
Mdl
3168
J
K
KJ
L
LJ
LK
LKJ
M
MPl
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
MP7
MP8
$ 61,620 $ 56,020 $2,094,500
64,660
58,790
2,169,500
67,700
61,560
2,244,500
70,810
64,390
2,321,500
74,370
67,630
2,411,500
77,410
70,400
2,486,500
80,450
73,170
2,561,500
83,490
75,940
2,636,500
63,470
57,700
2,158,100
66,510
60,470
2,233,100
69,550
63,240
2,308,100
72,660
66,070
2,385,100
76,220
69,310
2,475,100
79,260
72,080
2,550,100
82,300
74,850
2,625,100
85,340
77,620
2,700,100
Highlights: Depending upon the model, can contain up to 8,388,608 bytes of monolithic processor storage ... eight byte parallel
data flow ... includes up to 16,384 bytes of 80 nanosecond cycle
buffer storage which is transparent to the program and significantly reduces the effective cycle time of storage ... buffer storage
does not increase the amount of addressable storage ... 80 nanosecond processor cycle ... double-words are four-way interleaved
... overlapped operation of instruction and execution units ...
extensive data checking is coupled with increased reliability,
availability and serviceability.
Standard Features: Universal instruction set ... extended precision
... one-microsecond time-of-day clock with clock comparator ...
one-microsecond CPU timer ... dynamic address translation
extended control mode ... program event recording ... dual channel I/O bus ... additional variable field length instructions ... control registers, expanding the functions of PSWs ... byte-oriented
operand feature ... buffer storage (8,192 bytes) ... fetch and store
protection ... direct control feature ... attachment for 2860 Selector Channel(s), 2870 Multiplexer Channel(s), and 2880 Block
Multiplexer Channel(s) ... storage configuration control ... writable
control storage ... interval timer ... storage error checking and
correction ... instruction retry ... compare and swap ... compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address
... clear I/O. Channel Reconfiguration Hardware and four additional instructions on the MP models: signal processor ... set prefix ...
store prefix ... store CPU address.
Channels: Separate channneis facilitate maximum overlap with
processing. Channel speeds of 1.5 million bytes/second are
standard and up to 3 million bytes/second with Two Byte Interface
(#7850, 7851) on the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. Up to
seven logical channels can be attached per CPU. Valid combinations include: (a) One 2870 plus up to six channels of 2860s and
2880s ... (b) Two 2870s plus up to five channels of 2860s and
2880s ... (c) If no 2870 is attached, only up to six channels,
28605 and/or 2880s, can be attached per CPU. See 2860, 2870,
2880.
With the addition of Extended Channels (#3855), up to twelve
channels can be attached ... for valid combinations, see "Special
Features." Depending upon data rates, all channels, including the
Selector Subchannels and basic multiplexer channel of the 2870
can operate concurrently. Each selector or block multiplexer
channel can control up to eight control units. The basic multiplexer
channel and each Selector Subchannel of the 2870 controls up to
eight control units. If one 2841 is attached, no other control unit
can be attached to that Selector Subchannel ... see 2841 .
PREREQUISITES: Each 3168 requires [1] At least one selector
channel (2860), block multiplexer channel (2880), or a 2870 with
at least one Selector Subchannel ... [2] One 3066 System Console
mdl 2 ... [3] One 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2
... [4] An appropriate 415Hz power input. Customer-supplied
chilled water is required for cooling the system. See S/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
An MP system requires two MP CPU models of any size. Each MP
CPU model requires Multiprocessing (#5050) on both the 3066
mdl 2 and the 3067 mdl 2. The 3068 Multisystem Communication
Unit is required for each one or two processor MP system. If
either of the processors is a mdl MP5, MP6, MP7 or MP8, Extended Storage Attachment (#3850) is required on the 3068.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Motor Generator Set and Starter: If desired, see M 10000
pages for ordering instructions and prices.
[3] Channel Attachrrent: The basic 3168 has connection facilities
for channels addressed 0-6. For channels 7-11, see Extended
Channels (#3855).
.
• Purchase Option is 50% under Term Leas-e Plan (TLP)
t
NOTE: Up to three CPUs in the same physical location can be serviced by a single
FE DAU.
TLP/
MLC
4 Year
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$5,070
5,210
5,350
5,500
5,710
5,850
5,990
6,130
5,080
5,220
5,360
5,510
5,720
5,860
6,000
6,140
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066-2)
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%'
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changes:
Field Installable.
3168 to 3168 Model CONVERSION Purchase Prices
3168 to 3168 MP
$63,600
(no change in storage size)
3168 to 3168 Model UPGRADE Purchase Prices
From To
J
K
KJ
L
LJ
LK
LKJ
K
KJ
L
LJ
LK
LKJ
M
$75.000
$75,000
$77.000
$90,000
$75,000
$75,000
$75,000
MP2
MP3
MP4
From To
MP5
MP6
MP7
MP8
MPI
$75,000
MP2
$75,000
MP3
$77,000
MP4
$90,000
MP5
$75,000
MP6
$75,000
MP7
$75,000
NOTES:
1. There are no additional installation charges over the above
model conversion and model upgrade prices.
2. The above model conversion and model upgrades are field
installable.
3.
Planning for Model Conversions and Model Upgrades: When a
customer requires model (storage) upgrades in addition to a
model conversion, the changes must not be consolidated into
a single
Also, model (storage) upgrades should be
ordered individually in one-model increments.
SPECIAL FEATURES
Expands the basic 8,192-byte
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1435).
buffer to 16,384 bytes. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Buffer Expansion (:It 1435) on the 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2.
ISC CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). Provides additional
control store for microprogram use on the ISC (#4650). When the
Staging Adapter for ISC (:lt7220) is NOT ordered, see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Controls (#4650) to determine when
required. Note: When #7220 IS ordered, #2150 is prerequisite.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Provides additional
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151).
control storage for microprogram use on the ISC. See "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Control (#4650) to determine when
required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion
(#6111).
ISC ISA CONTROL STORE ADDITIONAL (#2152). Provides additional control store for microprogram use on the ISC (#4650).
Required if 3350 DASD is attached with Staging Adapter for ISC
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - --===
------- - --':' =
M 3168.2
Jul 79
DP Machines
3168 Processing Unit (cont'd)
(#7220). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Register Expansion (#6111), Expanded Control Store (#2151),
and Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220).
ISC (#4650) WITH ONE CHANNEL OR WITH TWO CHANNEL
SWITCH (#7905)
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3623, 3624).
To provide, in effect, a single Emergency Power-Off Switch in a "room"
or "area" ... see "Emergency Power-Off" in "Systems" and SRL
GC22-7004 for details. #3623 -- to interconnect 2 Emergency
Power-Off Switches ... #3624 -- to interconnect up to 12 Emergency Power-Off Switches. Field Installation: Yes.
~
EXTENDED CHANNELS (#3855). To attach up to twelve channels, in combinations of 2860 Selector Channels, 2870 Multiplexer
Channels and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channels. A maximum of
twelve channels, or a total of seven channel frames, whichever
occurs first, can be attached. The feature includes the capability
of addressing channels 7 thru 11. Valid maximum channels attachable are:
2860s -- maximum 6 channels
2870s -- maximum 2 channels
2880s -- maximum 11 channels.
Limitations: 2860 channel addresses must be numbered one thru
six. The first 2870 must be numbered zero. The second 2870
must be numbered one thru six. The 2880 channel addresses may
be any number one thru eleven. " the address of the 2880 is
seven thru eleven, only 2301 S, 23035, 2305s, 2311 S, 23145,
2321 s, 2420s, 3211 s, 3330s, 3340s, 3350s, 34205, 35055 or
3705s may be attached. Field Installation: Yes.
is
~
'"'"
..
e0
..
'"
0
'"
::
'"'".....
'"'"
..
....
",'"
0
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4525). Improves processor speed in
both fixed and floating point multiply operations. Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: High Speed Multiply (#4525)
on the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2.
o~
","
One or two 33335 with
associated 33305
Up to four 3333, with
~313 9314 .93141
91901
1
t
with associated mdl
A'
Fixed Head Feature
~.5
'"
.
c
0
0
*
. ..
9317
9318
t
t
x
x x
x
x
x
Blls2s
Winq ,witch 0815000
any 3340 mdl
'
93151
91901
xx
aSSOCiated 33305
String Switch \III: 815 0 on
any 3333
One Of two 3340 mdl A2s
with associated mdl Bl'iS'2s
UP to four 3340 mdl A2s
**
9315
t
x
x
04301/4302 on any 3340
• Up to four 3340 mdl A2s
xx
x
x
x
x
x x
of which up to two may
attach 33445
Strinq Switch <8150 on
any 334 Omdl A2 and/or
Fixed Head Feature
04301/4302 on any 3340
3333, and 3340 mdl A2s
(any corminatioo of two, three
or four) each with associated
x
xx
x
x
x
drives
..... '" String SWitch *8150> on
"'-
INTEGRATED STORAGE CONTROLS (ISC) (#4650).
Provides
for the attachment of 33335 (mdls 1 and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl
A2s and/or 3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs when Staging Adapter for ISC
(#7220) is NOT ordered. Additional storage is provided by attaching 3330 modules to the 3333 or by attaching 3340 mdl Bs
and/or 3344s to the 3340 mdl A2, or by attaching 3350 mdl Bs
and/or a mdl C to the 3350 mdl A2/A2F ... see DASD Configuration table below and 3333, 3330, 3340, 3350 "Machines" pages.
The ISC is organized functionally into two separate paths with up
to 16 drives per path ... up to 32 drives per path when ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is installed. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Each ISC path requires a control
unit position on a block multiplexer channel. Specify: The following applies only when Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) is NOT
ordered:
The available combinations of storage devices thai can be attached are shown in the table below. One, two or three Xs in a
vertical column indicate the type of machine(s) listed under DASD
Configuration which can be attached when the "Required DASD
Specify Features" are installed. Based on the DASD, and the
Special Features listed below being ordered for them, order the
Required DASD Specify Feature(s). NOTE: The selected
"Required DASD Specify Feature(s)" applies to both ISC paths.
Within· this constraint the DASD Configuration on one ISC path
may be different from that on the other ISC path.
..
R.. uir.d DASD Slleci'. F.at ....
DASD CONFIGURATION
<01y 3333
Of 3340 mdl A2
Fixed Head Feature
04301/4302 on any 3340
Up to four 3350 mdl A2V
x
~~~~~;!S~C;~~,";t!
on ,trinq
0
'"'"
on
~witcn .Bl~o on any
3350 mdl A~2F. C2!C2F
3333s, 334 mdl A2s and
3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs (any
cormination of 2,3 or 4)
'""'~
....... with
associated drives
I Strinq Switch .8150 on any
"'"
3333,
3340 mdl A2, or
"''''
~o
0 ..
~S
'"'"
3350 mdl A2/A2F; C2!C2F
and/or Fixi!'d Head FeatlWt
.4301/4302011 .,y 3340
ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on same diskette.
Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONLY
if the new configuration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition of any new Specify
and/or Special Features not previously installed AND removal of any not
listed as required for the new configuration.
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, each
path of the ISC requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the
number of drives attached.
+ Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the 3830-2 uses 64 contiguous device addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The
3340 mdl A2s on the first and third strings may attach up to three 3340
mdl BI, B2s, and/or 3344s in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on the
secon~ string may attach up to three 3340 mdl B I/B2s. The 3340 mdl A2
on the fourth string may attach one 3340 mdl B I or B2.
++ Expanded Control Store (#2151), Control Store Extension (#2150) and
Register Expansion (#6111) are prerequisites. For configurations in this
group each ISC path uses 8 or 16 or 32 or 64 device addresses depending
up . .)n the respective DASD configuration installed and whether any 3350
drive IS in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
•
REGISTER EXPANSION (#6111). Provides additional registers for
micropr09ram use on the ISC ... see "Specify" under Integrated
Storage Control (#4650) to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
To attach the Two
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENt (#6148).
Channel Switch for ISC (#7905) to the configuration control panel
on the 3068 Multisystem Communication Unit. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch for ISC
(:tI7905).
7070/7074 COMPATIBILITY (#7127). Provides the system with
the ability to execute 70io and 7074 instructions. This capability
is integrated under OS and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT. 7070/7074 system features included are: Channels, 729 magnetic tape, 7501 Console
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- - - ------ - ----------_.-
M 3168.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3168 Processing Unit (conrd)
Card Reader, and Floating Point Decimal Arithmetic. NOT included
are: Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage, punched card I/O,
printer, Hypertape, Interval Timer, and core storage addresses
above 9989. For a detailed explanation of system requirements
with this feature, see '"Compatibility Features'" under S/370 in
"Systems." Limitations: Cannot be installed with any other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently
with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisites: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127)
on the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7128).
Provides the system with the
ability to execute 705 and 7080 instructions. This capability is
integrated under OS and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT. 7080 system features included
am: Channels, punched card input, typewriter, and 729 magnetic
tape. NOT included are: Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage,
Hypertape, and 705 units on-line with the 7080. Only the 7080 is
emulated, but 705 programs can be run because the '"705 mode'"
of the 7080 is emulated. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see '"Compatibility Features'" under
S/370 in '"Systems'" Limitations: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Installation;
Not recommended. Prerequisites: 7080 Compatibility (#7128) on
the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2.
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7129). Provides the
system with the ability to execute 709, 7090, 7094 and 7094 II
instructions. This capability is integrated under OS and emulated
programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT.
Included are the following features of those systems: Channels,
punched card I/O, printer, and 729 magnetic tape. NOT included
are: Hypertape, teleprocessing equipment, direct couple, disk
storages, drum storages, 1401 adapter, direct data on 7094 special and custom systems. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see '"Compatibility Features'" under
S/370 in "Systems.'" Limitations: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: 709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7129) on the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the
3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 2.
see 3135,3135-3,3138,3145,3145-3,31483155,3158,3031,
3032 or 3033 respectively. For 4300 Processors, see 4341.
Special Feature Prices:
TLP
MAC/ MLC
MRC 4 Yr
Purch
MMMC
Buffer Expansion
#1435
$1,740$1,585 $83,340 $65.50
ISC Control Store Extn
2150526
478 21,060 23.00
Expanded Control Store 2151318
289 12,720 23.00
ISC/SA Cntrl Store Add'i 2152318
289 12,720 23.00
Emergency Power-Off Control
for 2 switches
3623
NC
NC
NC
NC
for up to 1 2 switches
3624
NC
NC
NC
NC
Extended Channels
3855
554
504 26,610 83.00
High Speed Multiply
4525
3,035 2,760145,950131.00
Integrated Storage .Cntrls 4650'
1,920 1,745 77,600 258.00
Register Expansion
6111
47
43
1,280
8.00
Remote Switch Attach
6148
NC
NC
NC
NC
7070/7074 Compatibility 7127
3,160 2,875151,600 197.00
7080 Compatibility
7128
3,160 2,875151,600 197.00
709/7090/7094/7094 II
3,160 2,875151,600 197.00
Compatibility
7129
Staging Adapter for ISC 7220t· 2,065 1,875 83,200 245.00
System/370 Extended
7730
3,575 3,250 65,000 50.00
Two Chnl Switch for ISC 7905
351
319 14,220 23.00
t
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purmust state: "Installation of this feature involves the removal of parts which
chase
become the property of IBM.".
Feature supplies ISC diskette.
STAGING ADAPTER FOR ISC (#7220).
Enables each path of
the ISC to attach a maximum of four 3333 Mdls 1 and 11 and/or
3350 Mdl A2/ A2F's with associated 3330 Mdls I, 2 and 11 and
3350 Mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F, for a maximum of 32 drives per
path. See 3333, 3330 and 3350 for additional information. Also
see note on M3333 pages for feature changes required when
3333 's are retained for use with a 3851. Provides up to 64 virtual
3330 addresses for each channel interface on ea;;h path of the
ISC. Provides for the attachment of up to four Data Recording
Controls in one or two 3851 Mass Storage Facilities to each path
of the ISC. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes ...
must
include removal of any of the following which are installed:
#9190, 9313, 9314, 9315, 9317, 9318. Prerequisites: Integrated
Storage Controls (#4650) and ISC Control Store Extension
(#2150). For 3350 attachment the additional prerequiSites are
Expanded Control Store (#2151), Register Expansion (#6111)
and ISC/SA Control Store Additional (#2152). Limitations: If
String Switch (#8150) is installed on a 3333, see writeup for this
feature on 3333 '"Machines'" page. 3340 drives cannot be attached to the ISC when #7220 is installed. 3350 drives attached to
the ISC when #7220 is installed cannot be used as staging drives
and must be designated as real in 3350 native mode only. 3350
devices may not be mixed with other type devices in the same
string. Specify: #9319 (Staging Adapter 3333/3330/3350).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: RPQ
Performance Improvements.
RPQ
APU Attach, is also required if the 3168 is used
with a 3062. Required on each processor in an MP system and
on a 3168 with RPQs
System/370 Extended (#7730) is also required on the 3062 Attached Processing Unit
in an AP system. Limitation: This feature cannot be loaded, at
IMPL time, concurrently with 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127),
7080 Compatibility (#7128), or 709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7129).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH FOR ISC (#7905). To provide each of
the two paths of an ISC with the capability of attaching to a second channel. The channels may be on the same CPU or different
CPUs. Switching is under program control. Each path of the ISC
can be dedicated to a single channel by means of a Configuration
Switch. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: An
available control unit position and eight unshared subchannels on
a system block multiplexer channel. For S/370 mdls 165, 168,
195, see 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. For S/370 mdls 135,
135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148, 155, 158, 3031, 3032 and 3033.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- ---------= =- =
':' =
IBM
M 3168-3.1
Jul79
DP Machines
3168-3
PROCESSING
UNIT
Purpose: Provides arithmetic, logic, processor storage and control
functions for a S/370 mdl 168.
Bytes of Processor Storage
Models
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U38
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
1,048,576
2,097,152
3,145,728
4,194,304
5,242,880
6,291,456
7,340,032
8,388,603
Highlights: Depending upon the model, can contain up to 8,388,608 bytes of monolithic processor storage ... eight byte parallel
data flow ... includes up to 32,768 bytes of 80 nanosecond cycle
buffer storage which is transparent to the program and significantly reduces the effective cycle time of storage ... buffer storage
does not increase the amount of addressable storage ... 80 nanosecond processor cycle ... double-words are four-way interleaved
... overlapped operation of instruction and execution units ...
extensive data checking is coupled with increased reliability,
availability and serviceability. Improved instruction execution times
over the 3168. Improved interrupt execution times over the 3168.
Improved availability and serviceability through a service processor. Attached Processing by attachment of a 3062 Attached
Processing Unit mdl 1.
Standard Features: Universal instruction set ... extended precision
... one-microsecond time-of-day clock with clock comparator .. .
one-microsecond CPU timer ... dynamic address translation .. .
extended control mode ... program event recording ... dual channel I/O bus ... additional variable field length instructions ... control registers, expanding the functions of PSWs ... byte-oriented
operand feature ... buffer storage (32,768 bytes) ... fetch and
store protection ... direct control feature ... attachment for 2860
Seiector Channel(s), 2870 Multiplexer Channel(s), and 2880 Block
Multiplexer Channel(s) ... storage configuration control ... writable
control storage ... interval timer ... storage error checking and
correction ... instruction retry ... compare and swap
compare
double and swap ... insert PSW key ... set PSW key from address
... clear I/O. Channel Reconfiguration and four additional instructions on the M models: signal processor ... set prefix ... store
prefix ... store CPU address.
Channels: Separate channneis facilitate maximum overlap with
processing. Channel speeds of 1.5 million bytes/second are
standard and up to 3 million bytes/second with Two Byte Interface
(#7850, 7851) on the 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. Up to
seven logical channels can be attached per CPU. Valid combinations include: (a) One 2870 plus up to six channels of 2860s and
2880s ... (b) Two 2870s plus up to five channels of 2860s and
2880s ... (c) If no 2870 is attached, only up to six channels,
2860s and/or 2880s, can be attached per CPU. See 2860, 2870,
2880.
With the addition of Extended Channels (#3855), up to twelve
channels can be attached ... for valid combinations, see "Special
Features." Depending upon data rates, all channels, including the
Selector Subchannels and basic multiplexer channel of the 2870
can operate concurrently. Each selector or block multiplexer
channel can control up to eight control units. The basic multiplexer
channel and each Selector Subchannel of the 2870 controls up to
eight control units. If one 2841 is attached, no other control unit
can be attached to that Selector Subchannel ... see 2841.
PREREQUISITES: Each 3168-3 requires [1] At least one selector
channel (2860), block multiplexer channel (2880), or a 2870 with
at least one Selector Subchannel ... [2) One 3066 System Console
mdl 2 ... [3] One 3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 3
... [4] An appropriate 415Hz power input. Customer-supplied
chilled water is required for cooling the system. See 8/370 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004.
Each AP system requires [1 J a 3168-3 Model A series processor
... J2] a 3062 APU mdl 1 ... [3] a 3066 System Console mdl 3 ...
an [4] a 3067 PDU/CDU mdl 5.
An MP system requires two M CPU models of any size. Each M
CPU model requires Multiprocessing (#5050) on both the 3066
mdl 2 and the 3067 mdl 3. The 3068 Multisystem Communication
Unit is required for each one or two processor M system. If either
of the processors is a mdl MP5, MP6, MP7, MP8, M35, M36, M37
or M38, Extended Storage Attachment (#3850) is required on the
3068.
SPECIFY: [1]. Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2) Motor Generator Set and Starter: If desired, see M 10000
pages for ordering instructions and prices.
[3] Channel Attachment: The basic 3168-3 has connection facilities for channels addressed 0-6. For channels 7-11, see Extended Channels (#3855).
[4] Emergency Power-Off Control: May be required ... see
"Special Features" and S/370 Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GC22-7004 for details. If two processors are install ad and the 3602 is to be added and emergency power off
ability is required on the systems, then the expanded Emergency Power Off Control (#3624) should be ordered.
[5] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[6] RETAIN/370: Customer must provide interface for FE DAU to
the telephone line.
t RETAIN may be
used with the 3168-3, however it is not required. Remote service is a customer option where it is available. When the option
is selected, the customer must provide the telephone lines
required for the service processor remote link capability. The
customer must also arrange the connection of the telephone
interface cable provided by IBM to the telephone network.
Mdl
MACI
MRC
3168
U31
U32
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U38
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
$ 70,920 $ 64,480 $2,311,700
73,960
67,250
2,386,700
77,000
70,020
2,461,700
80,110
72,850
2,538,700
76,090
83,670
2,628,700
86,710
78,860
2,703,700
89,750
81,630
2,778,7op
92,790
84,400
2,853,700
66,160
72,770
2,375,300
75,810
68,930
2,450,300
78,850
71,700
2,525,300
74,530
81,960
2,602,300
85,520
77,770
2,692,300
88,560
80,540
2,767,300
91,600
83,310
2,842,300
94,640
86,080
2,917,300
72,910
66,290
2,357,200
75,950
69,060
2,432,200
78,990
71,830
2,507,200
82,100
74,660
2,584,200
77,900
85,660
2,674,200
88,700
80,670
2,749,200
91,740
83,440
2,824,200
94,780
86,210
2,899,200
Purchase
MMMC
$5,180
5,320
5,460
5,610
5,820
5,960
6,100
6,240
5,190
5,330
5,470
5,620
5,830
5,970
6,110
6,250
5,600
5,740
5,880
6,030
6,240
6,380
6,520
6,660
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3066-2)
Machine Group: D
Purchase Option: 55%'
Warranty: A
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 15%
Model Changes:
Field Install able.
3168 to 3168-3 Model CONVERSION Purchase Prices
3168 to 3168 U3
3168 MP to 3168 M3
$217,200 (no change in storage size)
$217,200 (no change in storage size)
3168-3 to 3168-3 Model CONVERSION Purchase Prices
3168 U3 to 3168 M3
3168 U3 to 3168 A3
3168 A3 to 3168 M3
$63,600
$45,500
$18,100
(no change in storage size)
(no change in storage size)
(no change in storage size)
3168-3 to 3168-3 Model UPGRADE Purchase Prices
From To
U32
U31
U32
U33
U34
U3S
U36
U37
U33
U34
U35
U36
U37
U38
575,000
$75.000
Bibliography: GC20-0001
• Purchase Option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP)
t
TLPI
MLC
4 Year
PRICES:
NOTE: Up to three CPUs in the same physical location can be serviced by a single
fEDAU.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
577,000
590,000
575,000
$75.000
575,000
--------- ---- ---------------_.-
M 3168-3.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3168-3 Processing Unit
M32
M33
(conrd)
M34
M35
M36
M37
M38
$75,000
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35
M36
M37
$75,000
$77,000
590,000
$75.000
$75.000
$75,000
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
A38
$75,000
A31
A32
A33
A34
A35
A36
A37
$75,000
577,000
$90,000
575,000
$75,0005.15
$75.000
NOTES:
1.
There are no additional installation charges over the above
model conversion and model upgrade prices.
2.
The above model conversion and model upgrades are field
instailable.
3.
Planning for Model Conversions and Model Upgrades: When a
customer requires model (storage) upgrades in addition to a
model conversion, the changes must not be consolidated into
Also, model (storage) upgrades should be
a single
ordered individually in one-model increments.
4.
Field change from 3168-3 to a 3168 is not recommended.
5.
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "All parts which
are removed from purchased processors to accomplish a
model change to and from the A series become the property
of IBM."
only] #9440 for #4525 on the 3062 APU, or #9441
#4525 on the 3062 APU.
The available combinations of storage devices that can be attached are 3hown in the table below. One, two or three Xs in a
vertical column indicate the type of machine(s) listed under DASD
Configuration which can be attached when the "Required DASD
Specify Features" are installed. Based on the DASD, and the
Special Features listed below being ordered for them, order the
Required DASD Specify Feature(s). NOTE: The selected
"Required DASD Specify Feature(s)" applies to both ISC paths.
Within this constraint the DASD Configuration on one ISC path
may be different from that on the other path.
ISC (#4650) WITH ONE CHANNEL OR WITH TWO CHANNEL
SWITCH (#7905)
Reauired DASD S...cify Fe.t .....
CASD CONFIGURATION
~
1""1
ISC CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). Provides additional
control store for microprogram use on the ISC (#4650). When the
Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) is NOT ordered, see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Controls (#4650) to determine when
required. Note: When #7220 IS ordered, #2150 is prerequisite.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
'"
'"
C
e
~
:::
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151).
Provides additional
control storage for microprogram use on the ISC ." see "Specify"
under Integrated Storage Control (#4650) to determine when
required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150), and Register Expansion
(#6111).
:
'"'"a'"'"
..
ISC/SA CONTROL STORE ADDITIONAL (#2152). Provides additional control store for microprogram use on ISC. Required if 3350
DASD is attached with Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220). Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Register Expansion
(#6111), Expanded Control Store (#2151), and Staging Adapter
for ISC (#7220).
HIGH SPEED MULTIPLY (#4525), Improves processor speed in
both fixed and floating point multiply operations. Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: High Speed Multiply (#4525)
on the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 3 and/or mdl 5. Specify;[A mdls
One or two 33335 with
associated 33305
our. ~~~~s with
associated 33305
String SWitch .8150 on
any 3333
One or two 3340 mdl A25
with associ.ted mdl.B I JR,
Up to four 3340 mdt ,6,25
19313 9314 ,93141
9190t
t
t
....","
o~
",'"
,-'"
"'~!
'"
with assocIated mdl
any 3340 mdl A2
Fixed Head Feature
.4301/4302 "" MY 3340
93151
9190t
*
9317
t
..
93HI
xx
~
x
x x
X
X
x
Sl/82s
I Strin9_~witCh.8150 on
*Ii
**
9315
t
x~
c5 . Up to
~
EXTENDED CHANNELS (#3855). To attach up to twelve channels, in combinations of 2860 Selector Channels, 2870 Multiplexer
Channels and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channels. A maximum of
twelve channels, or a total of seven channel frames, whichever
occurs first, can be attached. The feature includes the capability
of addressing channels 7 thru 11. Valid maximum channels attachable are:
2860s -- maximum 6 channels
2870s -- maximum 2 channels
2880s -- maximum 11 channels.
Limitations: 2860 channel addresses must be numbered one thru
six. The first 2870 must be numbered zero. The second 2870
must be numbered one thru six. The 2880 channel addresses may
be any number one thru eleven. If the address of the 2880 is
seven thru eleven, only 2301 s, 2303s, 2305s, 2311 s, 2314s,
2321 s, 2420s, 3211 s, 3330s, 3340s, 3350s, 3420s, 3505s or
3705s may be attached. Field Installation: Yes.
1)0
INTEGRATED STORAGE CONTROLS (ISC) (#4650).
Provides
for the attachment of 3333s (mdls 1 and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl
A2s and/or 3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs when Staging Adapter for ISC
(#7220) is NOT ordered. Additional storage is provided by attaching 3330 modules to the 3333 or by attaching 3340 mdl Bs
and/or 3344s to the 3340 mdl A2, or by attaching 3350 mdl Bs
and / or a mdl C to the 3350 mdl A2 / A2F ." see DASD Configuration table below and 3333, 3330, 3340, 3350 "Machines" pages.
The ISC is organized functionally into two separate paths with up
to 16 drives per path
up to 32 drives per path when ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is installed. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Each ISC path requires a control
unit position on a block multiplexer channel. Specify: The following applies only when Staging Adapter for ISC (#7220) is NOT
ordered:
SPECIAL FEATURES
EMERGENCY POWER-OFF CONTROL (#3623, 3624).
To provide, in effect, a single Emergency Power-Off Switch in a "room"
or "area" ... see "Emergency Power-Off" in "Systems" and SRL
GC22-7004 for details. #3623 -- to interconnect 2 Emergency
Power-Off Switches ... #3624 -- to interconnect up to 12 Emergency Power-Off Switches. Field Installation: Yes.
for
x
I Up to our jj4U I11!lI A2s
of which UP to two may
attach 33445
String Switch.SISO on
any 3340 mdl A2 and/or
Fixed Head Feature
.4301/4302 on My 3340
33335 and 3340 mal A25
(any cofl"bination of two, thre
or four) each with associated
drives
String SWitch 08150) on
.,y 3333 or 3340 mdl A2
Fixed Head Feature
.4301 4302 on any 3340
'" UP to four 3350 I11!lI A25/
xx
x
x
x
x
x x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
6o ~:a~;~Sociated
mdl
5
5, C2s/C2Fs
'" I String Switch .8!-.:> 0. on any
'"
~ ~50 mdt A~F' C2!C2F
10
on
'"0~~..
"'"
"''''
~o
~..s
'"'"
•
33335, 334 mdl A25 and
3350 mdl A2s/A2Fs (My
co"*,ination of 2, .3 or 4)
with associated drives
!5tring
SWitch .8.~~~
on any
3333, 3340 mdl A2, or
3350 mdl A2/A2F; C2!C2F
and/or Fixed Head Feltan
..4301 4302 on .. y 3340
ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on same diskette.
Any change to an installed DASD Configuration requires an MES ONL Y
if the new configuration indicates that a different Specify and/or Special
Feature(s) is required. The MES must include addition of any new Specify
and/or Special Features not previously installed AND removal of any not
listed as required for the new configuration.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
t
·_------- --=- =------ --=--':' =
M 3168-3.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3168-3 Processing Unit (cont'd)
ISC Control Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315. each
path of the ISC requires 32 contiguous device address.s regardless of the
number of drives a!lached.
+ Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are are
prerequisites. For configurations in this group the 3830-2 uses 64 contiguous device addresses irrespective of the number of drives attached. The
3340 mdl A2s on the first and third strings may a!lach up to three 3340
mdl B I, B2s, and/or 3344s in any combination. Th. 3340 mdl A2 on the
second string may a!lach up to three 3340 mdl B I/B2s. The 3340 mdl A2
on th. fourth string may a!lach one 3340 mdl B 1 or B2.
++ Expanded Control Store (#2151), Control Store Extension (#2150) and
Register Expansion (#6111) are prerequisites. For configurations in this
group each ISC path uses 8 or 16 or 32 or 64 device addresses depending
upon the respective DASD configuration installed and whether any 3350
drive is in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
REGISTER EXPANSION (#6111).
Provides additional registers
for microprogram use on the ISC ... see "Specify" under Integrated Storage Control (#4650) to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
To attach the Two
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148).
Channel Switch for ISC (#7905) to the configuration controi panel
on the 3068 Multisystem Communication Unit. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch for ISC
(#7905).
7070/1074 COMPATIBILITY (#7127). Provides the system with
the ability to execute 7070 and 7074 instructions. This capability
is integrated under OS and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT. 7070/7074 system features included are: Channels, 729 magnetic tape, 7501 Console
Card Reader, and Floating Point Decimal Arithmetic. NOT included
are: Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage, punched card I/O,
printer, Hypertape, Interval Timer, and core storage addresses
above 9989. For a detailed explanation of system requirements
with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under S/370 in
"Systems." Limitations: Cannot be installed with any other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently
with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisites: 7070/7074 Compatibility (#7127)
on the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 3.
7080 COMPATIBILITY (#7128).
Provides the system with the
ability to execute 705 and 7080 instructions. This capability is
integrated under OS and emulated programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT. 7080 system features included
are: Channels, punched card input, typewriter, and 729 magnetic
tape. NOT included are: Teleprocessing equipment, disk storage,
Hypertape, and 705 units on-line with the 7080. Only the 7080 is
emulated, but 705 programs can be run because the "705 mode"
of the 7080 is emulated. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under
S/370 in "Systems." Limitations: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Installation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: 7080 Compatibility (#7128) on
the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the 3067 Power and
Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 3.
709/7090/7094/7094 II COMPATIBILITY (#7129). Provides the
system with the ability to execute 709, 7090, 7094 and 7094 II
instructions. This capability is integrated under OS and emulated
programs operate as processing programs under MFT and MVT.
Included are the following features of those systems: Channels,
punched card I/O, printer, and 729 magnetic tape. NOT included
are: Hypertape, teleprocessing equipment, direct couple, disk
storages, drum storages, 1401 adapter, direct data on 7094 special and custom systems. For a detailed explanation of system
requirements with this feature, see "Compatibility Features" under
S/370 in "Systems." Limitations: Cannot be installed with any
other compatibility feature. Cannot be loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with System/370 Extended (#7730). Field Instahation:
Not recommended. Prerequisites: 709/7090/7094/7094 II Compatibility (#7129) on the 3066 System Console mdl 2 and on the
3067 Power and Coolant Distribution Unit mdl 3.
and ISC/SA Control Store Additional (#2152). Limitations: If
String Switch (#8150) is installed on a 3333, see writeup for this
feature on 3333 "Machines" page. 3340 drives cannot be attached to the ISC wnen #7220 is installed. 3350 drives attached to
the ISC when #7220 is installed cannot be used as staging drives
and must be designated as real in 3350 native mode only. 3350
devices may not be mixed with other type devices in the same
string. Specify: #9319 (Staging Adapter 3333/3330/3350).
SYSTEM/370 EXTENDED (#7730). Provides S/370 Extended
facilities which are a prerequisite for operation with the
MVS/System Extensions Program Product. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisites: Required 011 each processor in an MP system,
and on the A-series processor in an AP system. System/370
Extended (#7730) is also required on the 3062 Attached Processing Unit in an AP system. Limitation: This feature cannot be
loaded, at IMPL time, concurrently with 7070/7074 Compatibility
(#7127). 7080 Compatibility (#7128), or 709/7090/7094/'1094
II Compatibility (#7129).
3213 INTEGRATED PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#7850). Provides
the interface needed to attach the optional 3213 Printer to the
service processor on the 3168-3. The 3213 can be used to print
error data captured and stored in the service processor. The
printer does not attach to the channel interfacE,'. Field Installation:
Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH FOR ISC (#7905). To provide each of
the two paths of an ISC with the capability of attaching to a sec.ond channel. The channels may be on the same CPU or different
CPUs. Switching is under program control. Each path of the ISC
can be dedicated to a single channel by means of a Configuration
Switch. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: An
available control unit position and eight unshared subchannels on
a system block multiplexer channel. For S/370 mdl 195 and
S/370 mdls 165, 168, 195, see 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel.
For S/370 mdls 135, 135-3, 138, 145. 145-3, 148, 155, 158,
and 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, see 3135, 3135-3, 3138,
3145, 3145-3, 3148 3155, 3158 and 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor respectively. For 4300 Processors, see 4341 .
Special Feature Prices:
ISC Control Store Extens#2150t
Expanded Control Store
2151 t
ISC/SA Cntrl Store Add'i 2152t
Emergency Power-Off Control
for 2 switches
3623
for up to 1 2 switches
3624
Extended Channels
3855
High Speed Multiply
4525
Integrated Storage Cntrls 4650t
Register Expansion
6111
Remote Switch Attach
6148
7070/7074 Compatibility 7127
7080 Compatibility
7128
709/7090/7094/7094 II
Compatibility
7129
Staging Adapter for ISC
7220*t
System/370 Extended
7730
3213 Int9rd Printer Adptr 7850
Two Channel Sw for ISC 7905
•
t
TLP/
MAC/ MlC
MRC 4 Yr Purch
MMMC
$ 526 $ 478$ 21,060 $23.00
318
289 12,720 23.00
318
289 12,720 23.00
NC
NC
NC
HC
Ne
HC
t~C
HC
554
504 26,610 83.00
3,035 2,760 145,950 131,OU
1,920 1,745 77,600 258.00
47
43
1,280
8.00
NC
NC
NC
NC
3,160 2,875 151,600 197.00
3,1602,875 151,500 197.00
3,1602,875 151,600 197.00
2,065 1,875 83,200 245.00
3,575 3,250 65,000 50.00
72
66
2,425
2.00
351
319 14,220 23.00
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must stale: "Installation of this feature involves the rem(,vai (If part:. which
become the propelty of IBM."
Feature supplies ISC diskette.
Enables each path of
STAGING ADAPTER FOR ISC (#7220).
the ISC to attach a maximum of four 3333 Mdls 1 and 11 and/or
3350 Mdl A2/ A2F's with associated 3330 Mdls 1, 2 and 11 and
3350 Mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F, for a maximum of 32 drives per
path. See 3333, 3330 and 3350 for additional information. Also
see note on M3333 pages for feature changes required when
ns included in Configuration Support
A plus the ability to attach 3278 mdl 5 displays, and support for the
following functions:
Pacing of inbound message traffic (mdls 1A and 1CISNA).
Automatic session recovery in both single and multidomain networks (mdl 1C/SNA).
Host notification of changes in the power ani off status at attached
terminals (mdls 1A and 1C/SNA).
Customer Responsibilities:
The customer is responsible for:
Specify #9111 for Configuration Support B.
Adequate site, system and other vendor preparation.
Physical setup, connection of cables to TP lines/modems and
IBM devices incorporating protected customer access areas,
switch settings, and checkout.
Contact IBM Field Engineering to make cable connections of IBM
CSU units to IBM non CSU units where customer access areas
are not provided.
Notify IBM of intent to relocate and follow IBM instructions for
relocation,
Use and follow the problem determination procedures and fill out
the trouble report prior to calling for IBM service.
Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's shipping
dock at the time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions will
be provided by IBM.
Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking, and placement of the 3274.
Contacting IBM Field Engineering to accomplish the channel
connection tasks ... for the 3274 mdl 1 A, 1 B or 1D.
[5] Operational Mode: [Mdl 1C only} Specify #9433 if the control unit
will use SNA/SDLC IML. (Record purposes only/order verification.)
[6) Alternate Mailing Address: #9011 ... for diskette only updates.
Order this optional feature to specify that diskette only updates
are to be mailed to an alternate site address
using a Teleprocessing Control number (TPC)
rather than to the address of the 3274 Control Unit installation
site. The alternate address selected is usually that of a central
site location. Redistribution of the diskettes containing the
diskette update is the responsibility of the customer. The user
may decide to replace the existing diskette himself with the
diskette containing the updates or, if requested, the IBM Customer Engineer will replace the diskette. The purpose of this
feature is to assist the customer with his network management.
Field Installation: Yes.
3274
Connection of communication cable to the communication facility
for the 3274 mdl 1 C,
Performing 3274 Control Unit Customization in accordance with
IBM supplied procedures.
a. For initial installation.
b, When made necessary by changes in configuration.
c, Updating of the control unit diskettes (at the customer's
option).
Prerequisites: [1] One 3278 Display Station with keyboard is
needed on each 3274 as a diagnostic aid. It must be attached to
the first terminal address on the control unit (Port 0) ... [2] For a
model 1 C, External Modem Interface (#3701) or DDS Adapter
(#5650 or #5651) must be ordered along with either Common
Communications Adapter (#6302) or High Performance Communications Adapter (#6303) ... see "SpeCial Features." Either an IBM
or non-IBM external modem, with its own clocking, must be provided.
Bibliography: See applicable KWIC Index listed below, or specific
system bibliography.
3274
3274
3274
3274
3274
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
lA
1B
1B
1C
10
------
G320-1621
GC20-0360 (S/360)
GC20-0001 (S/370)
GC20-0001
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, l-phase,3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking Plug
-- #9890 for 120 V (Mdl 1 Conly), #9884 for 208 V, or #9894
for 240 V. Non-lock Plug -- #9891 for 120 V (Mdl 1 Conly),
#9885 for 208 V, or #9895 for 240 V. For Watertight Connector, see "Special Features."
[2] Power Cable Length: If standard 4.3 meter (14 feet) power
MRC
PRICES: Mdl
1A
1B
1C
10
$490
490
344
490
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase
$417
417
293
417
$18.770
18,770
13,190
18,770
MMMC
$83
87
70
92
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Chg Months: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Useful Life Category: 2
Model Changes: Any local channel interface - SNA (model 1 A), or
3272 compatible (model 1B), or 3272 version with expanded
character handling capability (model 10) can be converted to one
of the others. Model 1 C to model 1 A, 1 B or 10 or vice versa is
not field installable ..
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
1A
1B
10
To
1A
$ 830
830
1B
10
$1,310
$1,210
700
800
SPECIAL FEATURES
Note: Some combinations of functions and features may exceed
the capacity of the control storage in the basic machine. After the
Configuration Support and the desired special features have been
selected, the control storage requirement must be determined by
using the tables under Extended Function Store features.
CONTROL STORAGE EXPANSION (#1801).
[Mdls 1A, lC, 10
only] Provides the ability to install storage above the basic level.
This feature must be installed with Extended Function Store Type
Cl (#3622). This combination is also a prerequisite to installing
the other Extended Function Store features [Type C3 (#3625),
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---==- =':' -=
------- - - -----
M 3274.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3274 Control Unit (cont'd)
Type 01 (#3627)]. Maximum: One. Field Inatallatlon: Yes.
Table 1 - Part 2
EXTENDED FUNCTION STORE (EFS) Type C1 (#3622), Type C3
(#3625), Type D1 (#3627).
Provides increments of control
storage to accommodate combinations of functional features which
exceed the storage capacity of the basic machine. Types C1, C3
and 01 (#3622, 3625, 3627) each provide Increments of 16,384
bytes. To determine which Extended Function Store features may
be required, refer to the 3274 Control Storage Requirement Tables
1 and 2 below.
Note: A decription of non-"Speclfy", non-"Feature" and non"Machine" Control Storage Requirement Functions is given later
in this section, with the exception of "Category A Terminals",
"Category B Terminals", EBCDIC and ASCII, which have been
described above.
3274 CONTROL STORAGE REQUIREMENT TABLES
Configuration flexibility is provided tllrougll two Configuration Support
options.
STEP #1: Determine whicll Configurtltlon Support contains the functions desired.
3274 MODEL 1C/SNA
Configuration Support A
Co';!iguration Support B (#91 II )
13,700
15,096
41,446
46,518
15.496
Category B Terminals
4,900
4,600
APL/Text Control Function
1,700
1,200
Model 1 C/SNA ASCII (including Copy)
Configuration Support A
Co';{if"uration Support B (#91II)
3289 Text Print Control
512
High Performance Communications
Adapter (#6303)
600
-500
Host Loadable Printer
Authorization Matrix
500
0
Between Bracket Printer Sharing
800
100
1,600
100
600
1,630
316
3,200
900
SCS Printer Support (3287-#9660)
STEP #3: Total the Type C and Type D storage requirements determined in Step #2.
Encrypt/Decrypt (#3680)
3275/3277 Like 100Character Set
Numeric & A lDhameric Character Sets
Keyboards
Typewriter(1) (3278-#4621,
#4624, #4627, #4628)
Data Entry(1) (3278-#4622)
Data Entry KP(1) (3278-:*4623)
Text (3278-#4629)
APL (3278-#4626)
TYPEC
TYPE D
Model 1 A Base (including copy)
Configuration Support A
co;jt~~ation SUriDort B (#911lJ
13,600
41.200
45.072
14,484
Category B Terminals
4,900
4,600
APL/Text Control Function
1,700
1,200
0
512
3289 Text Print Control
Host Loadable Printer Authorization
trix
~a-
500
0
800
100
1,600
100
Between Bracket Printer Sharina
SCS Printer Support (3287-#9660)
Magnetic Reader Control (3278-#4999)
3275/3277 Like 100Character Set
Numeric & Alphameric Chartleter Sets
600
1.630
Keyboards
Typewriter(1) (3278-#4621.
#4624, #4627, #4628)
Data Entry(1) (3278-#4622)
Data Entry KP(1) (3278-#4623)
Text (3278-#4629)
APL (3278-#4626)
Add'i Category A Termlnala (8 Included In ba. .)
9 to 16 total category A terminals
1 7 to 24 total category A terminals
25 to 32 total category A terminals
Cateaory B Terminals (3)
1 to 4 category B terminals
5 to 8 category B terminals
9 to 1 2 category B terminals
1 3 to 1 6 category B terminals
60
316
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
786
786
786
1,560
1,560
Type D
2,048
4,096
6,144
Type D
1,024
2,048
3,072
4.096
60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
786
786
786
1,560
1,560
Add" Category A Terminals (8 included in base)
3274 MODEL 1A
14,100
0
Magnetic Reader Control (3278-#4999)
Table 1 - Pert 1
TYPE D
41,030
46,102
STEP #2: After determining tile usind Configuration Support, select
tile applicable port of Table 1 (Part 1. 2. 3 or 4) to determine the Type C
and Type D storage requirements for tile 3274 mdls lA, lC/SNA,
lC/BSC, or ID respectively.
STEP #4: With the total 32741tortlge requirements found in Step #3,
use Table 2 to determine if tile base 3274 storage is adequate or if additional storage must be ordered. If additional storage il required, Table 2
will show which Extended Function Store (EFS) type feature(s) must be
ordered.
TYPE C
Model 1C /SNA EBCDIC (including Copy)
Type D
9 to 16 total category A terminals
17 to 24 total category A terminals
25 to 32 total category A terminals
2,048
4,096
6,144
Category B Terminals (3)
Tvpe D
1 to 4 category B terminals
5 to 8 category B terminals
9 to 12 category B terminals
13 to 16 category B terminals
1,024
2,048
3,072
4,096
Table 1 - Part 3
3274 MODEL 1C/BSC
TYPE C
TYPE D
Model 1C/BSC EBCDIC
Configuration Support A
Co';diuration Support B (#9111)
38,000
41,872
13,800
14,684
Model 1 C/BSC ASCII
Configuration Support A
Co;;fi;;'~ation Support B (#91 II )
38,000
14,500
41,872
15,384
APL/Text Control Function
4,700
2,200
4,700
Copy (Print Key Function)
2,700
0
0
512
550
0
600
1,120
316
Category B Terminals
3289 Text Print Control
Host Loadable Printer
Authorization Matrix
700
Magnetic Reader Control (3278-#4999)
3275/3277 Like 10-Character Set
Numeric & A lphameric Character Sets
Keyboards
Typewriter(1) (3278-#4621,
#4624, #4627, #4628)
Data Entry(1) (3278-#4622)
Data Entry KP(1) (3278-#4623)
Text (3278-#4629)
APL (3278-#4626)
Add'i Category A Terminals (8 included in base)
9 to 16 total category A terminals
17 to 24 total category A terminals
25 to 32 total category A terminals
Category B Terminals (3)
1 to 4 cat.egory B terminals
5 to 8 category B terminals
9 to 12 category B terminals
13 to 1 6 catego~ B terminals
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
60
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
786
786
786
1,560
1,560
TYPE D
2,048
4,096
6,144
TYPE D
1,024
2,048
3,072
4,096
-------- - - - ---=
----=-- =--':' =
M 3274.4
Jul79
DP Machines
3274 Control Unit (conl'd)
Table 1 - Part 4
3274 MODEL 1 D
TYPE C
TYPE D
Model 10
Configuration Support A
Coijfiguration Support B (#9 JIl)
34,500
17,000
38,372
17,884
Category B Terminals
4,300
2,700
APL/Text Control Function
1,700
4,600
Copy (Print Key Function)
2,700
0
0
512
550
0
600
1,120
316
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
786
786
786
1,560
1,560
3289 Text Print Control
Host Loadable Printer
Authorization Matrix
Magnetic Reader Control (3278-#4999)
3275/3277 Like IO-Character Set
Numeric & Alphameric Character Sets
Keyboards
Typewriter(1) (3278-#4621,
#4624, #4627, #4628)
Data Entry(1) (3278-#4622)
Data Entry KP(1) (3278-#4623)
Text (3278-#4629)
APL (3278-#4626)
Add'i Category A Terminals (8 Included In base)
9 to 1 6 total category A terminals
17 to 24 total category A terminals
25 to 32 ttotal category A terminals
60
TYPE D
2,048
4,096
6,144
Category B Terminals (3)
TYPE 0
1 to 4 category B terminals
5 to 8 category B terminals
9 to 12 category B terminals
13 to 16 category B terminals
1,024
2,048
3,072
4,096
(I) (Configuration Support A restriction only) Only two of the three keyboard types (Typewriter, Data Entry or Data Entry-Keypunch like) can be
supponed at anyone time on displays attached to a 3274 Control Unit.
Text and APL keyboards are not affected by this limitation and can be
installed with any of the other keyboards without restriction.
(2) If the total Type D requested for Category A and Category B terminals
exceeds 6,144, use 6,144.
(3) There is no customizing option nor additional control storage required
to support 10 Numeric only Character Set for Operator Identification
Card Reader (#4600) on 3277 Display Stations (Category B terminals) which are aI/ached to a 3274.
Table 2
FACTORS
+
+
SIZE
Type 0
~65,536
Type 0
Type C
and Type C
and Type 0
>65,536
Type C + Type 0
and Type C
and Type 0
>65,536
>49,152
Type C + Type 0
and Type C
and Type 0
>65,536
Type C + Type 0
and Type C
and Type 0
>65,536
>49,152
>32,768
Type C
~49,152
FEATURE CODES
None
#1801 and #3622
~32,768
~32,768
~49,152
>32,768
#1801, #3622 and
#3625
#1801, #3622 and
#3627
#1801, #3622, #3625
and #3627
EF5-Type C1 (#3622): [Mdls 1 A, 1 C, 10 only] Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Control Storage Expansion
(#1801) must be installed with this feature.
EF5-Type C3 (#3625): [Mdls 1 A, 1C, 10 only] Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Control Storage Expansion
(# 1801) and Extended Function Store Type C1 (#3622) must be
installed before this feature can be installed.
EFS-Type 01 (#3627): [Mdls 1A, 1C, 10 only] Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Control Storage Expansion
(#1801) and Extended Function Store Type C1 (#3622) must be
installed before this feature can be installed.
ENCRYPT/DECRYPT (#3680), [Mdl 1C (SDLC) only] Provides
the Federal Data Encryption Standard algorithm to encrypt and
decrypt data messages under a 56-bit key variable. When used in
conjunction with the ACF/VTAM Encrypt/Decrypt feature (#6010,
Program 5735-RC2) and the IBM Programmed Cryptographic
Facility Program Product (Program 5740-XY5), data transmitted
over unprotected communications lines can be safeguarded
through cryptography. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Note: A mercury battery, IBM Part No. 1743456 or equivalent, is
needed. A battery is shipped with this feature. See M10000 pages
for additional or replacement battery. Replacement of the discharged battery is the customer's responsibility. The discharged
IBM battery should be returned to IBM.
EXTERNAL MODEM INTERFACE (#3701). [Model 1C only] Provides the appropriate cable and interface logic necessary to attach
either an external IBM or non-IBM modem with its own clocking for
communication over analog facilities or to allach a dala service unit for
communication over non-switched digital facilities such as the AT&T
Dataphone' digital dala service network. See item [3] under "Specify"
for cable length. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Digital Data
Service (DDS) Adapter feature (#5650 or #5651). Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Either Common Communications Adapter
(#6302) or High Performance Communication Adapter (#6303).
Field Installation: Yes.
DIGITAL DATA SERVICE (DDS) ADAPTER (#5650 for Point-topoint Operation ... #5651 for Multipoint Operation.) [Mdl 1C
only] An adapter for BSC or SDLC data transmission at speeds of
2400,4800 or 9600 bps over the AT&T non-switched Dataphone'
Digital data service. The DDS Adapter interfaces to a DDS channel service unit, the customer site termination of the DDS network.
See "Note" below for communication cable length. Specify:
#9822 for 2400 bps, #9823 for 4800 bps, or #9825 for 9600
bps. Maximum: One #5650 or #5651. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with External Modem Interface (EM I) (#3701) feature.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Either Common Communications Adapter (#6302) or High Performance Communications
Adapter (#6303).
Note: When ordering this feature
for field installation, use
one of the following Specify codes if it is desired to have the
length of the communications cable other than the standard 6.1
meters (20 feet) provided. Specify: #9061 for 3.0 meters (10
feet), #9062 for 9.1 meters (30 feet), or #9063 for 12.2 meters
(40 feet).
COMMON COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (#6302). [Model 1C
only] Required for attachment to communication lines at speeds
up to 9600 bps (SNA/SDLC or BSC transmission control protocols) through either an IBM or non-IBM Modem with its own clocking. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: [1]
High Performance Communications Adapter (#6303) must be
ordered/installed in lieu of this feature, if SNA/SDLC protocol is
required with a line speed greater than 7200 bps and a Category
B Terminal Adapter(s) (#7802 - 7805) is installed. [2] This feature
cannot be installed with the High Performance Communications
Adapter (#6303).
HIGH PERFORMANCE COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (#6303).
[Model 1 C only] When SNA/SDLC protocol is required with a line
speed of 9600 bps and a Terminal Adapter Type B(s) is installed,
this feature is required for attachment to the communications lines
through either an IBM or non-IBM modem with its own clocking.
Maximum: One. Limitations: [1] With this feature installed, operation is restricted to SNA/SDLC protocol. IML load for BSC protocol is no longer possible. [2] This feature cannot be installed with
Common Communications Adapter (#6302). Field Installation:
Yes.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE A1 thru A3 (#69(11, 6902, 6903).
One each of these adapters can be installed. Each adapter provides for the attachment of an additional eight Category A terminals. The base control unit, which provides for attachment of eight
Category A terminals, can be expanded with these three terminal
adapters to a maximum configuration of thirty-two Category A
terminals. These terminal adapters must be installed in sequence,
making it important to order the correct adapter feature code(s).
Terminal Adapter Type A 1 (terminals 9-16) -- #6901
Terminal Adapter Type A2 (terminals 17-24) -- #6902
Terminal Adapter Type A3 (terminals 25-32) -- #6903
Limitation: Terminal Adapter Type A3 (#6903) cannot be installed
with Terminal Adapter Types B3 (#7804) and B4 (#7805).
Maximum: One of each type terminal adapter. Prerequisite:
#6902 requires #6901
#6903 requires #6902. Field
Installation: Yes.
TERMINAL ADAPTER TYPE 81 (#7802). Permits the attachment
of four Category B terminals and provides for the installation of
Terminal Adapters Types B2, B3 and B4 when additional Category
B terminals are desired. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Note: When installed on a 3274 mdl lA, or on a 3274 mdl IC with
SNA IML (#9433), Extended Function Store feature(s) (#3622, #3625,
#3627) and Control Storage Expansion (#1801) are required, See 3274
Control Storage ReqUirement Tables under Extended Function Store
• Trademark of American Telephone and Telegraph Co. (AT&T).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
':;::-5
== S
:: n 5!:r:
=====
'::::
M 3274.5
Jul79
OJ:) Machihes
3274 Control Unit (cont'd)
featutek to accurotelJ> deurmine what storage features are .required on
3274 ttadls lA, Ie and IV in specific cOllfiguratiolls.
t~AMINAL
ADAJ>Tt:R rvJ>1: 82 iHRU B4 (#7803 thru #7805).
Each of thes. termil'lal adapters permits the attachment of. fOur
additio'nal Category 8 terminals. A maximum of one each of these
terminal adapters can be installed for a combined total of twelve
additional or sixte'en Category B terminals attached to a control
unit. these terminal adaPters must be installed in sequence,
making it important to order the correct adapter feature code(s).
Field Installation: Yes.
Terminal Adapter Type 82 (terminals 5-8)-- #7803
terminal Adapter Type B3 (terminals 9-12) - #7804
Terminal Adapter Type B4 (terminals 13-16) -- #7805
LImitation: Terminal Adapter Type 83 (#7804) and Terminal
Adapter Type B4 (#7805) cannot be installed with Terminal Adapter Type A3 (#6903). Maximum: One of each type terminal
adapter. Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter Type Bl (#7802) must
be installed before these adapters can beinstatled. ,Field
Installation: Yes.
WATt:RTIGHT POWER CONNECTOR (#8801). [MOdels lA, lB
and 10 only] Provides a watertight connector on the power cable
to satisfy local ordinances requiring this type termination in specific locations. See "Specify" for cable length to be ordered.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended. Limitation:
The only valid voltage specify codes are #9884 and #9894. One
of these two voltage codes must be specified when ordering this
feature.
Special Feature PriCes:
Control Storage Expn
#1801
Extended Function Store
Type C1
3622
Type C3
3625
Type 01
3627
Encrypt/Decrypt
3680
Extnl Modem Interface
3701
DDS Adapter, Pt-to-pt
5650
DDS Adapter, Multlpt
5651
Common Cmnctns Adapt 6302
High Performance
Communications Adapter 6303
Terminal Adapter
Type A1
6901
Type A2
6902
Type A3
6903
Type B1
7802
type B2
7803
Type B3
7804
Type 84
7805
Watertight Pwr Connector 8801
MRC
MLC
2Yr
$31
$26
$1,055
$5.50
58
58
58
61
12
24
24
12
49
49
49
52
10
20
20
10
1,170
1,170
1,170
2,115
400
840
840
450
10.00
10.00
10.00
2.50
4.00
2.00
2.00
2.50
35
30
1,200
10.50
32
32
32
38
32
32
32
NC
27
27
27
32
27
27
27
NC
1,215
1,215
1,215
1,300
1,100
1,100
1,100
NC
2.50
2.50
2.50
5.00
3.00
3.00
3:00
HC
Purch
MMMC
CONTROL STORAGt: Rt:QUIREMENT FUNCTIONS
APL/Text Control Function: .This functron. selectable during the
customization of a '3274mdl 1A, 1<:: or 10,expands the character
handling capabllfty of the 3274 to accommodate the APL, Text.
and graphic plot character sets for the APL/Text Feature (#1120)
on 327a Display Stations and 3287 Printers attached via Type A
Termirral Adapters (#6901, 6002, '6903).
Note: The 3274 Control Unit. with ot without this APL/Text control
function, does NOT support the 3270 Data Analysis/APL Feature
(#1066) on attached 3277 Display Stations or 3284, 3286 or
3287 Printers, NOR does it support the Text Print Feature
(#7880) on attached 3288 Line Printers.
3289 Text Print Control Function: This function, selectable during
the customization 01 a 3274 mdl 1A, 1 C or 10, extends thecnaracter handling capability of the 3274 to accommodate the Text
characters for the Text Print Feature (# 1130) on attached 3289
Line Printers.
Copy Function: This function, selectable during the customization
of a 3274 mdl 1C (8SC) or 10, enables the copying of the screen
contents Of an attached 3278 Display·Station to an attached 3287
or 3289 printer through use of the Local Print Key on the display
keyboard. This function is provided as baSic on the 3274 mdls
1 A, 1B and 1C (SNA). The ability to perform host initiated local
copies from a 3278 to a 3287 or 3289 attached to a 3274 mdl 1A
or 1C (SNA) is also provided as basic. In addition, the 3274 mdt
1C (BSC) supports the 3270 host Copy command as basic.
Local Copy Summary
3274 Model
Print Key
Host Initiated
lA
18
1C (EISC)
1C (SNA)
8aslc
Basic
Cust.Option
BasiC
Cust. Option
Basic
Not Applicable
Basic
Basic
Not Applicable
10
Host Loadable Authorization Matrix: This function, selectable
during the 3274 customization process, provides the capability for
the 3274, during subsequent IML procedures, to receive, from a
user-written application program at the host CPU, an updated
Printer Authorization Matrix to override the matrix created by the
customization operator or by system default.
Between Bracket Sharing Functlcm! This function, selectable
during the customization 01 a 3274 mdl 1A or 1C (SNA), enables
attached 3287 and 3289 printers to be used as Local Copy output
devices for the screen contents of attached 3278 Display Stations,
when the printers are Between BraCkets with the host application
program. Printers are available for Local Copy operations only
when they are not in session with an application program if this
option is not selected.
Not to be reprodoced without written .permission.
-------- - - --- ---- -- -------_.-
M 3275.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3275 DISPLAY STATION Model 2
Purpose: A single remote cathode ray tube display station. Provides controls and display of alphameric information from a S/360
mdl 25, 30, 40, 50, 65. 67 (in 65 mode). 75. 85. 195 or any
S/370 Processor via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit. 2703 Transmission Control or, except for S/360 mdls 25 or 85. a 3704 or 3705
Communications Controller on half-duplex or duplex communications facilities using binary synchronous transmission. It also
provides controls and display of alphameric information from any
4300 Processor via a 2701 Data Adapter Unit. or 3704 and 3705
Communications Controller on a half-duplex or duplex communications facilities using binary synchronous transmission. Communication is also possible via a Communications Adapter feature on the
4331 Processor (Note: This is not supported by ACF /VTAME).
NOTE: See 3704 and 3705 Machines and Programming sales
manual pages for attachment capability and refer to Host System
Programming pages for possible restrictions to any of the above
attachments.
NOTE: For possible use with 1130. S/360 mdl 20 or System/3,
see GSD
Manual.
Model 2
Displays 1.920 characters ... 24 lines of 80 characters
each.
Highlights: Displays sixty-three 7 x 9 dot matrix characters ... 36
alphamerics, 27 special characters, including the space. Features
Data-Field Organization, which permits individual fields of data on
the screen to be program-defined with various attributes such as
protected or unprotected, alphameric or numeric. normal intensity.
non-displayed, or brightened intensity, and selector light-pen
detection-allowed or disallowed.
Display Exception Monitoring Facility (OEM F) a software tool for
network problem determination/isolation enhances the availability
and serviceability of the 3275 in BSC mode. See DEMF in the
Programming/SCP sections for OS/VS1 and OS/VS2.
Editing Features - typamatic, cursor, tab, protected-data, insert
and delete, and extended-erase (erase to end-of-field. erase all
keyboard input data, erase entire screen) are standard features
for displays equipped with a keyboard.
Input Flexibility - a choice of keyboards, a selector light-pen,
and a set of program function keys provide unmatched input
flexibility ... see "Special Features" below.
Security Enhancement Features - a special Non-displayed
Keying Mode (standard) provides for fields of data to be
program-defined so that they will accept data entered from the
keyboard without displaying the data on the screen. A Security
Keylock (optional) prevents modification of data on the display
unless the key is turned to the "On" position. An Operator Identification Card Reader (optional) is provided to enter system user
identification. This enhances the (programmed) control of his
access to data and audit of his actions. It may also be used to
enter any sequence of characters (pre-recorded on a card) for
other purposes such as transaction control, account control, and
billing.
Optional features allow the attachment of a 3284 mdl 3 dedicated
printer, EBCDIC or ASCII keyboard, selector light-pen, audible
alarm and other features ... see "Special Features" below.
Communications: The 3275 may be multidropped on the same
facility with other BSC devices (1800, 2715. 2770. 2780. 3271,
3275 and 3780) as tributary stations on a multipoint line with a
S/360 mdl 25-195 (except mdl 44). or any S/370 or 4300 Processor as the control station.
Communications with a S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3 or 138
can be made via the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640)
and appropriate binary synchronous features on th~ 3115. 3125.
3135, 3135-3 or 3138 (or via the Communications Adapter feature
on the 4331.
Note: These units are not supported by
ACF /VTAME.) as well as via the 2701. 2703, 3704 or 3705.
Communications FaCilities: The 3275 operates in half-duplex
multipoint mode on half-duplex facilities at transmission speeds of
1200, 2000 or 2400 bps on facilities 03, 04 or X1 M via the 2701,
2703, 3704, 3705 or #4640 on the 3115. 3125, 3135, 3135-3,
3138 using binary synchronous transmission.
The 3275 operates in half-duplex multipoint mode on duplex facilities at transmission speeds of 1200. 2000. 2400 or 4800 bps on
facilities 03. 04, 05, X1 M or X2M via the 2701. 2703. 3704,
3705, or #4640 on the 3115, 3125, 3135, 3135-3 or 3138, using
binary synchronous transmission. Half-duplex multipoi.nt operation
at a speed of 7200 bps is available on facility 09 via the 2701,
3704, 3705. or #4640 on the 3115, 3125. 3135, 3135-3, 3138
using binary synchronous transmission. The 3275 operates on
switched network facilities at a transmission speed of 600/1200
bps when equipped with feature #3440 using binary synchronous
transmission. See M 2700 pages for facilities.
Modems:
One
IBM
modem
may
be
attached
to
a
PREREQUISITE: #7821 is required on the 3275 for speeds over
2400 bps on leased lines.
Modem
Speed (bps)
31163 mdl J
31164 mdll
4800/2400
3872 mdl 1
3874 mdl 1
3875 mdl 1
2400
4800
7200
Z40f1/1]OO
NOTES: 4 wire .,witched network backup is available on the 3863 and
3864 modem.'. Switched network backup operation is available on the
3872 mdl 1, 3874 and 3875. For communications capabilities,
product utilization and special features. see M 2700, 2701, 3705,
3863.31164,3872.3874 and 3875 pages.
PREREQUISITES: Transmission via common carrier facility to a
2701. 2703. 3704. 3705 or #4640 on 3115. 3125, 3135, 31353. 3138, or a Communications Adapter (#1601) feature on the
4331, requires a modem. See M 2700 puges.
A keyboard must be installed on each 3275 as a diagnostic aid.
System 360/370 or 4300 Processor availability will be restricted
unless the using system provides sufficient core to allow diagnostic programs (OLTs) to be executed. For details associated with
the required additional core sizes, see the appropriate SRL
(TCAM. BTAM and VTAM),
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Cables: Cable to attach modem should be ordered. Refer to
3270 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2787.
[3] System Attachment:
identify the host
processor(s) by specifying the following codes;
Note: See GSD
manual for codes for use with System/3.
Processor
S/360
8/360
8/360
S/360
8/360
8/360
S/360
S/360
S/360
S/370
8/370
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
Code
Processor
Code
5/370 mdl 135, 135-3 #9581
5/370 mdl 138
9595
5/370 mdl 145, 145-3 9582
5/370 mdl 148
9596
5/370 mdl 155
9583
5/370 mdl 158
9587
5/370 mdl 165
9584
5/370 mdl 168
9588
3031 Processor
9599
3032 Processor
9598
3033 Processor
9597
4331 Processor
9606
4341 Processor
9607
25 #9571
30 9572
40 9573
50 9575
65 9576
67 9577
75 9578
85 9579
195 9580
115 9589
125 9586
[4] Transmission Code: Specify one; #9761 - for EBCDIC Transmission Code (available at time of manufacture only) ... utilizes
8-bit EBCDIC code over the transmission facilities ... used in
conjunction with EBCDIC Character Set (#9089). #9762 - for
ASCII Transmission Code (available at time of manufacture
only) ... utilizes 8-bit ASCII code over the transmission facilities
... used in conjunction with ASCII Character Set (A) (#9091) or
(B) (#9092).
[5J Character Set: Specify one of the following;
#9089 - for EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 characters described on the
EBCDIC typewriter keyboard. PREREQUISITE: EBCDIC
Transmission Code (#9761).
#9091 - for ASCII Character Set (A) (available at time of
manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters but
substitutes the Logical OR (!) and Logical NOT (~) for the
exclamation mark (!) and circumflex (1\) PREREQUISITE:
ASCII Transmission Code (#9762).
#9092 - for ASCII Character Set (B) (available at time of
manufacture only) ... provides the standard 64 ASCII character set.
PREREOUISITE: ASCII Transmission Code
(#9762),
PRICES:
Mdl
MACI
MRC
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
3275
2
$ 136
$116
$4,735
$21 .00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 60%,
Useful life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
3275.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- - =':' -=
----- - - ----==
M 3275.2
Jut 79
DP Machines
3275 Display Station Model 2 (cont'd)
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges,)
From
2
To
7200 bps. Clocking provided by modem. Field Installation: Yes,
Maximum: One Limitations: Mutually exclusive with Dial (#3440).
12
Special Feature Prices:
$2,505
SPECIAL FEATURES
An alarm, sounded under program
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1090).
control, to alert the operator to a special condition, This alarm,
during keyboard operation, is sounded when a character is entered into the next to last position on the screen. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
DIAL (#3440), [Available at time of manufacture only] Provides
the capability of operating over switched communications facilities
at speeds of 600/1200 bps. Limitation: Mutually exclusive with
Transmission Speed #7820 and #7821.
OPERATOR IDENTIFICATION CARD READER (#4600), Provides
the capability of reading a 2-1/8 inches x 3-3/8 inches (53.9mm x
85.7mm) plastic data processing card with an encoded magnetic stripe.
Using the 10·numeric character set, the number of characters that can be
read is 1-37 characters al 75 BPI (bits per inch).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Any Keyboard.
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 yr Purch
MMMC
Audible Alarm
#1090 $ 4 $ 3 $ 145 $ .50
Dial
3440
328
1.00
7
8
Operator Ident Card Reader 4600 13
3,50
11
437
Keyboard,
66 Key EBCDIC Typewriter 4630 13
11
520
5.50
66 Key EBCDIC Data Entry 4631
13
11
520
6.50
78 Key Operator Console 4632
32
27 1,010 15.00
78 Key EBCDIC Typewriter 4633
28
24
869
9.00
66 Key ASCII Typewriter
4634
13
11
520
5.50
78 Key ASCII Typewriter
4635
28
24
869
9.00
66 Key EBCDIC Data Entry
(keypunch layout)
4636
15
13
522
6.50
Keyboard Numeric Lock
4690 NC
NC
NC
NC
1200 bps Integrated Modem 5500 16
14
535
3.00
1200 bps Integrated Modem w
Auto Answer
5501
21
3,50
18
714
Printer Adapter
5550 NC
NC
NC
NC
Security Keylock
6340
35SUC NC
35
Selector Light-Pen
20'
6350
24
728
1.50
Transmission Speed
- 1200 bps
7820 NC
NC
NC
NC
- 4800 bps
7821
4
145
.50
3
KEYBOARD (#4630 - 4636).
#4630 - 66 key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard, typewriter-like
layout, movable, with 45 alphameric keys and 21 control keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
#4631 - 66 key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard, movable, with 36
alphameric keys and 30 control keys. Prerequisite: EBCDIC;
Character Set (#9089).
#4632 -- 78 key Operator Console Keyboard, operator-console
layout, movable, with 45 alphameric keys, 21 control keys,
and 1 2 program function keys. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
#4633 -- 78 EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard, 66 key EBCDIC
layout with 12 additional program function keys, movable.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
#4634 -- 66 key ASCII Keyboard, ASCII typewriter layout, movable, 'with 45 alphameric keys and 21 control keys.
Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (A) or (B) (#9091 or
#9092).
#4635 -- 78 key ASCII Keyboard, 66 key ASCII typewriter layout,
with 12 additional function keys, movable. Prerequisite: ASCII
Character Set (A) or (B) (#9091 or #9092).
#4636 - 66 key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard, keypunch layout,
movable, with 36 alphameric keys and 30 control keys. This is
the recommended keyboard for data entry, including Video
370. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
Maximum: One of the above. Field Installation: Yes.
Provides the ability to
KEYBOARD NUMERIC LOCK (#4690).
lock the keyboard, if a non-numeric key [other than 0-9, minus (-),
period (.) or dup] is depressed in a predefined numeric-only field.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5500), Provides a modem
capable of operation at a speed of 1200 bps on non-switched
communications facilities or at speeds of 600/1200 bps on the
switched communications facilities via a similiarly equipped 2701,
3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Dial (# 3440) on the switched
communications facilities ... Transmission Speed (#7820) on
non-switched communications facilities.
1200 BPS INTERGRATED MODEM WITH AUTO ANSWER
(#5501).
Provides a modem with automatic answering for use
with the switched telephone network at speeds of 600/1200 bps
via a similiarly equipped 2701, 3705 or Communications Adapter
on 4331 Processor. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Dial
(#3440).
PRINTER ADAPTER (#5550). To attach a 3284 Printer mdl 3.
Provides the controls to print out the contents of the 3275 buffer.
Used with the basic 3275. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6340). A lock and key which prevents
modification and display of data on the display when in the "off"
position, Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
A hand-held, pen-like device
SELECTOR LIGHT-PEN (#6350),
that permits the operator to select fields of data from a display for
computer input. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
#7820 -- for transmitTRANSMISSION SPEED (#7820, 7821).
ting over communications facilities at 1200 bps. Clocking is provided by the 3275. #7821 - for transmitting at speeds of 4800 or
IBM 3275 DISPLAY STATION Model 3
Purpose: A single remote cathode ray tube display station for use
in the 3650 Programmable or Retail Store System. Provides controls and display of alphameric information from a 3651 Store
Controller utilizing a 2400 bps Loop communications facility. See
the 3650 Programmable or Retail Store System description for
communications facility details.
Highlights: Displays 1,920 characters ... 24 lines of 80 characters
each. Displays sixty-three 7 x 9 dot matrix characters ... 36 alphamerics. 27 special characters, including the space. Features
Data. Field Organization, which permits individual fields of data on
the screen to be program-defined with various attributes such as
protected or unprotected, alphameric or numeric, and normal
intensity, non-displayed, or brightened intensity.
Editing Features -- Typamatic cursor, tab, back-tab, protecteddata, insert and delete, and extended-erase (erase to end-of-field,
erase all keyboard input data, erase entire screen) are standard
features.
Input Flexibility -- The keyboard provides a set of three program
action keys and five program function keys for input flexibility.
Security Enhancement Features - A special non-displayed
keying mode (standard) provides for fields of data to be programdefined so that they will accept data entered from the keyboard
without displaying the data on the screen. A Security Keylock
(optional) prevents modification of data on the display screen
unless the key is turned to the "On" position.
Optional features allow the attachment of a 3284 mdl 3 dedicated
printer, an audible alarm, and the Security Keylock ... see
"Special Features" below.
Communications: The.3275 mdl 3 may be attached to the Loop of
the 3650 Programmable or Retail Store System along with the
other types of terminals supported in that system.
Communicates only with a 3651 Store Controller mdl 25, 50 or
75. The 3275 mdl 3 includes the Loop Adapter and a 15 foot
cable for attachment to the Loop as described in the 3650 Programmable or Retail Store System description.
Maximum: The maximum number of 3275 mdl 3s that can be
attached to a 3651 mdl 25, 50 or 75 depends upon the number of
positions available and the traffic volumes and response times
required.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Keyboard: A 66 key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard (#4631)
must be installed on each 3275 mdl 3.
(3) Transmission Code: Specify #9761 -- EBCDIC Transmission
Code.
[4) Character Set: Specify #9089 -- EBCDIC Character Set.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - -------------- --_.-----
M 3275.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3275 Display Station Model 3
(cant' d)
MAC/
MLC
PRICES: Mdl
MRC
2 yr
Purchase
3275
3
$ 184
$ 157
$4,935
MMMC
$25.00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 60%
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: 3275 model 3 cannot be changed in the field
from or to model 1 or 2.
SPECIAL FEATURES
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1090).
An alarm, activated under program
control, to alert the operator to a special condition. This alarm,
during keyboard operation, is sounded when a character is entered into the next to last position on the screen. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
KEYBOARD (#4631).
66 Key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard,
key-punch like layout, movable, with 36 alphameric keys and 30
control keys. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
KEYBOARD NUMERIC LOCK (#4690).
Provides the ability to
lock the keyboard if a non-numeric key [other than 0-9, minus (-),
period <-l, or dup] is depressed in a predefined numeric-only field.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
PRINTER ADAPTER (#5550).
To attach a 3284 Printer mdl 3.
Provides the controls to print out the contents of the 3275 mdl 3
buffer. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6340).
A locK and key which prevents
modification and display of data on the display when in the "off"
position. For additional or replacement keys, see M 10000 pages.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
TRANSMISSION SPEED, 9600 BPS (#7825). Provides for transmission at 9600 bps over a local Loop on a 3651 mdl A50, B50.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 9600 bps
Loop Adapter (#4890) on the 3651 mdl A50 or B50.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 yr Purch
Audible Alarm
#1090 $ 4
$ 3
Keyboard
4631
11
13.
Keyboard Numeric Lock
4690 NC
NC
Printer Adapter
5550 NC
NC
Security Keylock
6340
35SUC TransmiSSion Spd, 9600 bps 7825
9
8
$ 145
520
NC
NC
35
297
MMMC
$ .50
6.50
NC
NC
NC
2.50
IBM 3275 DISPLAY STATION Model 12
[Remote Attachment]
Purpose: A single remote cathode ray tube display station. Provides controls and display of alphameric information from any
S/370 or 4300 Processor via a 3704 or 3705 Communications
Controller on half-duplex or duplex communications facilities using
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) transmission. Communication is also possible via a Communications Adapter feature on the
4331 Processor (Note: This is not supported by ACF /VTAME).
NOTE: See the 3704/3705 and 4331 Processor Machines and
Programming sales manual pages for attachment capability and
refer to Host System Programming pages for possible restrictions
to any of the above attachments.
Model 12 Displays 1,920 characters '" 24 lines of 80 characters each. The basic unit will transmit EBCDIC transmission code at line speeds of 2000 to 9600 bps.
Highlights: Displays sixty-three 7 x 9 dot matrix characters ... 36
alphamerics, 27 special characters, including the space. Features
Data-Field Organization, which permits individual fields of data on
the screen to be program-defined with various attributes such as
protected or unprotected, alphameriC or numeric, normal intensity,
non-displayed, or brightened intensity, and selector light-pen
detection-allowed or disallowed.
Editing Features -- typamatic cursor, tab, back-tab, protecteddata, insert and delete, and extended-erase (erase to end-of-field,
erase all keyboard input data, erase entire screen) are standard
features for displays equipped with a keyboard.
input Flexibility - a choice of keyboards, a selector light-pen, and
a set of program function keys provide unmatched input flexibility
... see "Special Features" below.
Security Enhancement Features -- a special Non-displayed Keying Mode (standard) provides for fields of data to be programdefined so that they will accept data entered from the keyboard
without displaying the data on the screen. A Security Keylock
(optional) prevents modification of data on the display unless the
key is turned to the "On" position. An Operator Identification Card
Reader (optional) is provided to enter system user identification.
This enhances the (programmed) control of his access to data and
audit of his actions. It may also be used to enter any sequence of
characters (pre-recorded on a card) for other purposes such as
transaction control, account control, and billing.
Optional features allow the attachment of a 3284 mdl 3 dedicated
printer, EBCDIC or ASCII keyboard, selector light-pen, audible
alarm and other features ... see "Special Features" below.
Communications: The 3275 mdl 12 may be multidropped on the
same facility with other SDLC devices on a multipoint or a duplexmultipoint line with any S/370 or 4300 Processor as the control
station.
Communications Facilities: The 3275 mdl 12 operates in halfduplex multipoint mode on half-duplex facilities at transmission
speeds of 1200, 2000 or 2400 bps via the 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on the 4331 Processor using SDLC transmission. The 3275 mdl 12y operate in half-duplex multipOint mode or
in duplex multipoint mode on duplex facilities at transmission
speeds of 1200, 2000. 2400, 4800, 7200 or 9600 bps via the
3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on the 4331 Processor
using SDLC transmission. See M 2700 and M 3704/3705 and M
4331 sales manual pages.
Modems: One IBM modem may be attached to a 3275 mdl 12.
Modem
Speed (bps)
3863 mdl 1
3864 mdll
3865 mdll, 2
2400/1200
4800/2400
9600/4800
3872 mdl 1
3874 mdl 1
3875 mdl 1
2400
4800
7200
NOTES: 4 wire switched network backup is available on 3863, 3864
and 3865 modems. Manual switched network backup is available on
the 3872, 3874 and 3875. For communications capabilities, product utilization and special features. see M 2700, 3863, 3864, 3865,
3872,3874 and 3875 pages.
PREREQUISITES: (1) Transmission via communications facilities to
a 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on the 4331 Processor
requires a modem. Clocking for 1200 bps is provided by the
3275. Clocking above 1200 bps is provided by the modem ... (2)
A keyboard must be installed on each 3275 mdl 12 as a diagnostic aid.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index, G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Cables: Cable to attach modem should be ordered. Refer to
3270 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2787, for
cable information.
[3] System Attachment:
identify the host
processor(s) by specifying the following codes;
Processor
S/370
S/370
S/370
S/370
S/370
S/370
S/370
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
Code
115
#9589
125
9586
135, 135-3 9581
138
9595
145, 145-3 9582
148
9596
155 II
9583
Processor
Code
S/370 mdl 158, 158MP#9587
S/370 mdl 165 II
9584
S/370 mdl 168. 168MP 9588
3031 Processor
9599
3032 Processor
9598
3033 Processor
9597
4331 Processor
9606
4341 Processor
9607
[4] Character Set: Specify one of the following;
#9089 -- for EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters described
on the EBCDIC typewriter keyboard.
#9091 -- for ASCII Character Set (A) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters but substitutes the Logical OR (I) and Logical NOT (~) for the exclamation mark (!) and circumflex (A). PREREQUISITE: ASCII
Transmission Code (#1200).
#9092 -- for ASCII Character Set (B) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the standard 64 ASCII character
set. PREREQUISITE: ASCII Transmission Code (#1200).
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 yr
3275
12
$186
$158
Purchase
MMMC
$6,440
$53.00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 60%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- --- --------------_.-
M 3275.4
Jul 79
DP Machines
3275 Display Station Model 12 (conI' d)
SPECIAL FEATURES
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1090).
An alarm, sounded under program
control, to alert the operator to a special condition. This alarm,
during keyboard operation, is sounded when a character is entered into the next to last position on the screen. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
ASCII TRANSMISSION CODE (#1200). Utilizes 8-bit ASCII Code
over transmission facilities. Used in conjunction with ASCII Character Set (A) (#9091) or ASCII Character Set (B) (#9092). Field
Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
OPERATOR IDENTIFICATION CARD READER (#4600).
Provides
the capability of reading a 2-1/8" x ]-3/8" (53.9mm x 85.7mmj plastic
data processing card with an encoded magnetic stripe. Using the 10numeric character set, the number of characters that can be read is 1-37
characters at 75 BPI (bils per inch) ..
Maximum: Une.
board.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Any key-
KEYBOARDS (#4630 thru 4636).
#4630 - 66 key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard, typewriter-like
layout, movable, with 45 alphameric keys and 21 control keys.
#4631 -- 66 key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard, movable, with 36
alphameric keys and 30 control keys.
#4632 -- 78 key EBCDIC Operator Console Keyboard, operatorconsole layout, movable, with 45 alphameric keys, 21 control
keys anrJ 12 program function keys.
#4633 - 78 key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard, movable. with 66
key EBCDIC layout and 12 additional program function keys.
#4634 -- 66 key ASCII Keyboard, ASCII typewriter layout, movable, with 45 alphameric keys and 21 control keys.
Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (A) (#9091) or (B) (#9092).
#4635 -- 78 key ASCII Keyboard, 66 key ASCII typewriter layout,
with 12 additional function keys, movable. Prerequisite: ASCII
Character Set (A) (#9091) or (B) (#9092).
#4636 -- 66 key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard, keypunch layout,
movable, with 36 alphameric keys and 30 control keys.
Maximum: One of the above. Field Installation: Yes.
KEYBOARD NUMERIC LOCK (#4690).
Provides the ability to
lock the keyboard if a non-numeric key [other than 0-9, minus (-),
period (.) or dup] is depressed in a predefined numeric-only field.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5500). Provides a modem
capable of operating at a speed of 1200 bps on non-switched
communications facilities via a similiarly equipped 3704, 3705 or
Communications Adapter on the 4331 Processor. Maximum: One.
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: Transmission Speed
(#7820).
PRINTER ADAPTER (#5550).
To attach a 3284 Printer mdl 3.
Provides the controls to print out the contents of the 3275 mdl 12
buffer. Used with the basic 3275 mdl 12. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6340).
A lock and key which prevents
modification and display of data on the oisplay when in the "off"
position. MaXimum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SELECTOR LIGHT-PEN (#6350).
A hand-held, pen-like device
that permits the operator to select fields of data from a display for
computer input. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
TRANSMISSION SPEED (#7820).
For transmitting over communications facilities at 1200 bps. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 yr Purch
MMMC
Audible Alarm
#1090 $ 4
$ 3 $ 145 $ .50
ASCII Transmission Code
1200
8
7
286
.50
Operator Ident Card Reader 4600
13
11
437
3.50
Keyboard 66 Key EBCDIC Typewriter 4630
13
11
5.50
520
66 Key EBCDIC Data Entry 4631
13
11
520
6.50
78 Key Operator Console
4632
32
27 1,010 15.00
78 Key EBCDIC Typewriter 4633
28
24
869
9.00
66 Key ASCII Typewriter
4634
13
11
520
5.50
78 Key ASCII Typewriter
46::S5
28
24
869
9.00
66 Key EBCDIC Data Entry
(Keypunch layout)
15
4636
13
522
6.50
Keyboard Numeric Lock
4690 NC
NC
Ne
NC
1200 bps Integrated Modem 5500
16
14
535
3.00
Printer Adapter
5550 NC
Ne
NC
NC
Security Keylock
6340
35SUC 35
NC
Selector Light-Pen
6350 24
728
1.50
20
Trans Speed - 1200 bps
7820 NC
Ne
NC
NC
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
------------_.-
-- ----- -------
M 3276.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3276 CONTROL UNIT DISPLAY STATION
Purpose: An enhanced. cathode-ray tube (CRT). display station
used for displaying alphameric data. and for entering data into and
receiving data from a S/360, a S/370, a 4300 Processor, a 3790
Communication System or an 8100 System. The 3276 optionally
provides control and multiplexing capabilities to support up to
seven 3278 Display Stations or 3287 Printers or 3289 Line Printers, allowing a maximum cluster size of eight displays or printers
including the 3276's own display. A keyboard, or a selector lightpen permit an operator to display and manipulate data on the
screen in a flexible and efficient manner. The 3276 meets both
general and unique display requirements with its set of basic and
optional features.
The 3276 communicates: with a S/370 or 4300 Processor using
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) or Binary Synchronous
Communication (BSC) over communications facilities; or with a
S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor using BSC over comml>nications
facilities; or communicates with a 3790 Communication System
using SDLC over communications facilities; or with an 8100 System using SDLC via a communication link, or a direct or data link
attached loop.
For possible use with System/3, see GSD
manual.
Models 1 through 4 -- for use with BSC transmission control.
Model 1
Displays up to 960 characters ... 12 lines of 80
characters each. Can attach up to seven 3278 mdl
1s, 3287s (mdls 1 and 2) or 3289s (mdls 1 and 2)
in any combination.
Model 2
Displays up to 1920 characters ... 24 lines of 80
characters each. Can attach up to seven 3278 mdls
1 and 2, 3287s (mdls 1 and 2) or 3289s (mdls 1
and 2) in any combination.
Model 3
Displays up to 2560 characters ... 32 lines of 80
characters each. Can attach up to seven 3278 mdls
1, 2 and 3, 3287s (mdls 1 and 2) or 32895 (mdls 1
and 2) in any combination.
Model 4
Displays up to 3440 characters ... 43 lines of 80
characters each. Can attach up to seven 3278s
(mdls 1, 2, 3 and 4), 3287s (mdls 1 and 2) or 3289s
(mdls 1 and 2) in any combination.
Models 11 through 14 -- for use with SNA/SDLC transmission
control.
Model 11 Displays up to 960 characters ... 12 lines of 80
characters each. Can attach up to seven 3278s
(mdls 1, 2, 3 and 4), 3287s (mdls 1 and 2) or 32895
(mdls 1 and 2) in any combination.
Model 12 Displays up to 1 920 characters ... 24 lines of 80
characters each. Can attach up to seven 3278s
(mdls 1, 2, 3 and 4), 3287s (mdls 1 and 2) or 32895
(mdls 1 and 2) in any combination.
Model 13 Displays up to 2560 characters ... 32 lines of 80
characters each. Can attach up to seven 32785
(mdls 1, 2, 3 and 4), 3287s (mdls 1 and 2) or 3289s
(mdls 1 and 2) in any combination.
Model 14 Displays up to 3440 characters ... 43 lines of 80
characters each. Can attach up to seven 32785
(mdls 1, 2, 3 and 4), 3287s (mdls 1 and 2) or 3289s
(mdls 1 and 2) in any combination.
NOTE: Models 1 and 11 have a 480 character mode for existing 480 character programs, and models 3, 4, 13 and 14 have
a 1920 character mode to accommodate existing 1920 character programs.
For use with the 3790 Communication System: The 3791 Controller suppol;ls selected models of the 3276 in 1920 character
mode. See the 3791 Configurator, GA27-2768-6, and 3791
Machines pages for additional information.
For use with an 8100 Information System: See the 8100 System configurator, GA27-2876 8100, and refer to the
8130/8140/8101 Machines and Programming pages for possible support restrictions.
\
;)
Highlights: .Displays a character within a 7 x 14 character matrix
in 960, 1920 and 2560 character models; within a 7 x 11 character matrix in the 3440 character model. The basic 26 character
upper case letters are presented in a 7x9 character matrix for the
960, 1920 and 2560 character models, and in a 7x8 character
matrix for the 3440 character model. Displays 62 alphameric and
32 special characters, not including the Space and Null characters. The display character set may be restricted to upper case
characters by the monocase switch. Uses 3270 Field Formatting
capability which permits individual fields of data on the screen to
be
program
defined
with
various
attributes
such
as
protected/unprotected, alphameric, normal/highlighted intensity,
displayable/non-displayable, and selector light-pen detection
allowed/disallowed. The operator may initiate a local display-toprinter copy function (I.e., without host intervention) from the
keyboard of a 3276 or 3278 attached to a 3276. The printer
designation is controlled by a configuration default matrix which is
fixed by the relative port positions of displays and printers attached to the 3276. Other printers may be accessed using the
IDENT key. All terminals attached to a 3276 can be driven at
distances of up to 1500 meters (4920 feet).
Devices attached to the 3276 are assigned port positions 1
through 8. Displays are authorized to print only to printers which
are attached to higher numbered ports. If the IDENT key is not
used, a PRINT operation from a given display will cause printing to
take place at the first printer whose port posion is higher than the
display. The operator may use the IOENT key to print to any
printer. (The host can perform copy in a manner compatible with
existing 3271/3272 support).
Operator Factors -- the 3276 has a anti-glare screen. Indicators
are displayed on the bottom row of the screen, outside the data
display area, and provide useful operator information. Host display of data on the screen is accomplished without refresh interrupt (I.e., no blinking). The keyboard which is low in profile
provides a palm rest area and has separators to help prevent
accidental striking of control keys. The operator may select one
of several cursor modes.
Cluster Capability - up to seven 3278s, 3287s or 3289s may be
attached. The basic 3276 provides a display and a port for one
device, a 3278, 3287 or 3289. Up to three Terminal Adapters,
each controlling up to two devices, can be attached to the 3276.
The 3276 allows the attachment of seven additional displays
and/or printers for a maximum cluster size of eight including its
own display ... see "Special Features" below.
Editing Functions -- cursor move, tab, home key, back tab,
insert, delete, extended erase (erase to end-of-field, erase all
keyboard input data, and erase entire screen), and cursor select
keys are all basic. All alphameric, special symbol, and cursor
move keys have typamatic capability. Double speed cursor typamatic is attained with a simultaneous depressing of the ALT key
and a horizontal cursor positioning key. The cursor select function provides an alternative to the Selector Light-pen function.
Fields of data may be selected by positioning the cursor and then
using the Cursor Select Key.
Input Flexibility - a choice of keyboards or the selector light-pen
provide input flexibility ... see "Special Features" below. Fields
of data can be selected by positioning the cursor and operating
the cursor select key, instead of using the Selector Light-Pen.
Twelve program function (P.F.) keys are basic with all typewriter
keyboards.
Security Functions - a special non-displayed input mode provides for fields of data to be program-defined so that they will
accept data entered from the keyboard without displaying the
data on the screen. A Security Keylock prevents modification or
display of data in the display buffer unless the key is turned to
the "on" position. An Address Keylock (optional) controls access
to the address switches. These capabilities and the terminal's
ability to identify itself to the host program (SNA/SOLC operation
only), allow customer-supplied security program routines to control access to data and audit of actions. A Magnetic Slot Reader
is
available
to
enter
system
user
identification.
An
Encrypt/Decrypt feature (optional) protects data transmitted over
unsecured communications lines from accidental or intentional
disclosure and/or modification (models 11, 12, 13 and 14 in
S/370 or 4300 Processor attachment only).
Communications: The 3276 mdls 11 - 14, and the 3276 mdls 1 4 with the ·SOLC/BSC Switch (#6315) communicate with a S/370
or 4300 Processor using Synchronous Data Link Control (SOLC)
transmission over communications facilities to a 3704/3705 Communications Controller, or a Communications Adapter feature
(#1601) on the 4331. The 3276 mdls 1 - 4 communicate with a
S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor using Binary Synchronous
transmission over communications facilities to, where applicable, a
2701 Data Adapter Unit, a 2703 Transmission Control, a
3704/3705 Communications Controller, or an Integrated Communications Adapter (S/370 mdls 115, 125, 135 or 138), or a Communications Adapter feature (#1601) on the 4331. Selected
models of the 3276 communicate with the 3790 Communication
System using Synchronous Data Link Control (SOLC) transmission
over communications facilities. See 3790 Systems pages for
specific models. All models of the 3276 can also communicate
with a 3704/3705 Communications Controller or a Communications Adapter feature (#1601) on the 4331 at 1200 bps without
need for communication facilities or a modem. The 3276 mdls 11,
12, 13 and 14 communicate with an 8100 System using ·Synchronous Data Link Control (SOL C) transmission via a data link, or a
direct or data link attached loop. The 3276 mdl 1, 2, 3.and 4 with
the SOLC/BSC Switch (#6315) can communicate with the 8100
System using SOLC transmission via a data link~
Communications Facilities:
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
The 3276 operates in data half-
-- ----=----=--':' =
=--
M 3276.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3276 Control Unit Display Station (cont'd)
duplex point-to-point or multipoint mode on half-duplex or duplex
faciltles at transmission speeds of 1200/600, 2000, 2400/1200,
4800/2400, 7200/3600 and 9600 (SNA/SDLC only) bps on
non-switched facilities 03, D3M, D3SB, 04, D4M, D4SB, 05, D5M,
D5SB, 06, D6M, D6SB, D7, D7M, D7SB, X1, X1 M, X2, X2M, X3
and X3M. In addition, the 3276 mdls 11 - 14 also operate in
half-duplex point-to-point mode at transmission speeds of
1200/600, 2400/1200 and 4800/2400 bps on switched facilities
C4, C4M, C5, C5M, C6 and C6M. See M 2700 pages. The 3276
mdls 11, 12, 13 and 14 also operate In half duplex mode at 9600
bps over a direct attached loop, and at 2400 bps over a data link
attached loop. For details, see M10000 pages.
#9082 -- for EBCDIC character set -- used in conjunction with
75 Key Typewriter Keyboard (#4621), Data Entry Keyboard
(#4622 or #4623), 87 Key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard
(#4627), EBCDIC Typewriter/APL Keyboard (#4626), or
EBCDIC Typewriter/Text Keyboard (#4629).
#9084 -- for ASCII Character Set (B) -- used in conjunction
with 75 Key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard (#4624), or 87 key
ASCII Typewriter Keyboard (#4628).
[4] System Attachment:
identify the host
processor(s) by specifying tne following codes: (Note: See
manual for codes for use with System/3.)
GSD
Modems: If a Digital Data Service (DDS) Adapter (#5650 or
#5651) is not installed, a 1200 bps Integrated Modem feature or
an external IBM modem may be attached to a 3276. External
modems require the External Modem Interface (#3701).
Modem
Speed (bps)
3863 mdll, 2
3864 mdll, 2
3865 mdl J, 2
2400/1200
4800/2400
9600/4800
3872 mdl 1
3874 mdl 1
3875 mdl 1
2400/1200
4800/2400
7200/3600
Processor
Code
Processor
Code
2030
2040
2050
2065
2075
3115
3125
3135
31 38
3145
#9572
#9573
#9575
#9576
#9578
#9589
#9586
#9581
#9595
#9582
3148
3155, 3155 II
3158, 3158MP
3165,3165 II
3168,3168MP
3195
3031
3032
3033
3791
4331
4341
8100 System
#9596
#9583
#9587
#9584
#9588
#9580
#9599
#9598
#9597
#9253
#9606
#9607
#9600
4 wire switched network backup is available on 3863, 3864 and 3865
modems. Switched network backup operation with Manual Call and
Manual or Auto Answer, is available on the 3872 mdl 1, 3874 mdl
1 and 3875 mdl 1. For communications capabilities, product utilization and special features, see M 2700, 3863, 3864, 3865, 3872,
3874 and 3875 pages.
Problem Determination Procedurea: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the customer. This has been done through the use of problem determination
and recovery routines and procedures that are easily understood
and used by the operator. See Customer Responsibilities below.
Display Exception Monitoring FaCility (DEMF), a software tool for
network problem determination/isolation enhances the availability
and serviceability of the 3276 in BSC mode. See DEMF in the
Programming/SCP sections for OS/VS1 and OS/VS2.
Customer Set-Up (CSU): The 3276 is designated Customer SetUp thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
PRICES:
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
3276
1
2
3
4
11
12
13
14
$167
172
176
181
167
172
176
181
$142
146
150
154
142
146
150
154
Purchase, MMMC
$6,390
6,570
6,750
6,930
6,390
6,570
6,750
6,930
$32.00
33.00
34.00
34,50
28.00
28.50
29,00
29.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Customer Set-Up: Yes.
Customer Responaibillties: The customer is responsible for:
- Adequate site, system and other vendor preparation.
- Receipt at customer's receiving dock, unpacking and placement of 3276.
- Physical set-up, connection of cables to TP lines/modems and
IBM devices incorporating protected customer access areas.
switch settings, and check out.
- Contact Field Engineering to make cable connections of IBM
CSU units to non-CSU units where customer access areas are
not provided.
- Notify IBM of intent to relocate and follow IBM instructions for
relocation.
- Use and follow the problem determination procedures and fill
out trouble report prior to calling for IBM service.
- Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's ship-.
ping dock at the time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions will b~ provided by IBM.
PREREQUISITES: The 3276 requires an integrated or external
modem or DDS Adapter for TP attachment.
A keyboard is needed on each 3276 for diagnostic purposes.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index, G32()"1621, or specific system
bibliography.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (120 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9890
for locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug. If standard 2.8
meter (9 foot) power cable Is not desired, specify #9511 for
1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, #9512 for 3.7 meter (12 foot) cable,
or #9513 for 4.5 meter (15 foot) cable.
[2] Communication Cable: A 6.1 meter (20 foot) communication
cable is provided as standard for attachment to a standalone
modem, or to a communication facility when a DDS Adapter or
an integrated modem is used. If standard 6.1 meter (20 foot)
communication cable is not desired, specify: #9061 for 3.0
meter (10 foot) cable, #9062 for 9.1 meter (30 foot) cable, or
#9063 for 12.2 meter (40 foot) cable. A 1.8 meter (6 foot)
communication cable (loop station connector cable) is provided
as standard for attachment to a direct or data link attached
loop. If standard cable is not desired, specify #9405 for 4.3
meter (14 foot) cable.
[3] Character Set: Specify one;
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
1
2
3
4
11
12
13
To 2
3
4
$1,080 $1,110 $1,140 $
1,110 1,140
1,140
11
12
13
14
880 $1,400 $1,460 $1,520
880 1,400 1,460
880 1,400
880
610
650
710
650
710
710
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDRESS KEYLOCK (#1009). Controls access to the unit address switches (and transmit level switches) which are located in
the Operator Panel Drawer. Maximum: One. Field Inatallatlon:
Yes.
APL/TEXT CONTROL (#1067).
Provides the control for 3276,
3278, or 3287 with APL/Text feature or 3289 with Text Print
feature. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
.Extended Function Base (# 1068).
EXTENDED FUNCTION BASE (#1068).
Allows the addition of
APL/Text Control (#1067) feature. limitation: Cannot be installed with Encrypt/Decrypt (#3680) or SDLC/BSC Switch
(#6315). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1090). An alarm, sounded under program
control, to alert' the operator to a special condition. This alarm,
during keyboard operation, is also sounded when a character is
entered into the next-te-Iast position on the screen. The operator
may adjust the volume of the tone. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
APL/TEXT (#1120). Provides the capability for display of the
222 character APL/Text set including the 94 character EBCDIC
set. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Corequlslte: 87-key
EBCDIC Typewriter/APL Keyboard (#4626) or 87-key EBCDIC
Typewriter/Text Keyboard (#4629). Limitations: This feature is
only valid when installed with the APL/Text Control (#1067). This
feature is EBCDIC only and is NOT compatible with ASCII.
Prerequisite: Extended Character Set Adapter (#3610); EBCDIC
Character Set specify #9082.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
(
------- --=-- =---- --=----':' =
M 3276.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3276 Control Unit Display Station (cont'd)
TERMINAL ADAPTER (#3255, 3256, 3257).
#3255 - Terminal Adapter No.1, enables attachment of tWO
terminals (3278s, 3287s and/or 3289s). Maximum: One.
Limitations: See Attachment Matrix below for 3278 model
restrictions.
#3256 -- Terminal Adapter No.2, enables attachment of two
terminals (3278s, 3287s and/or 3289s). Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter No.1 (#3255). Maximum: One. Limitations:
See Attachment Matrix below for 3278 model restrictions.
#3257 -- Terminal Adapter No.3, enables attachment of two
terminals (3278s, 3287s and/or 3289s). Prerequisite: Terminal Adapter NO.2 (#3256). Maximum: One. Limitations:
See Attachment Matrix below for 3278 model restrictions.
3276/3278 Attachment Matrix
3276
Model
1
11
2
12
3
13
4
14
- - - - 3278 Model - - - 234
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE: 3276 mdl 1, 2, 3 (with SDLC/BSC Switch) in SDLC
mode will support the same 3278 models as the mdls 11, 12
and 13.
Field Installation: Yes. Note: The 3276 provides a display and a
port for attaching one terminal, a 3278, 3287 or 3289. The 3276
with the three Terminal Adapters (#3255, #3256, #3257) thus
allows a maximum cluster size of eight displays or printers.
EXTENDED CHARACTER SET ADAPTER (#3610). Provides the
additional control and buffering necessary for the extended character set in the APL/Text (#1120) feature. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Corequisite: APL/TEXT (#1120). Prerequisite:
APL/Text Control (# 1067).
ENCRYPT /DECRYPT (#3680). Provides a hardware implementation of the Federal Data Encryption Standard algorithm to encrypt
and decrypt data messages under a 56-bit key variable. When
used in conjunction with the ACF /VTAM Encrypt/Decrypt feature
(Feature Number 6010, Program Nunber 5735-RC2) and the IBM
Programmed Cryptographic Facility Program Product (Program
Number 5740-XY5), data transmitted over unprotected communications lines can be safe-guarded through cryptography. Limitations:
3276 mdls 11, 12, 13 and 14 only. Cannot be installed with
Extended Function Base (#1068).
Maximum: One. Field
installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Security Keylock (#6340). Note:
A mercury battery, IBM part no. 1743456, or equivalent is needed.
A battery is shipped with this feature. See M10000 pages for
additional or replacement battery. Replacement of the discharged
battery is the customer's responsibility. The discharged battery
should be returned to IBM.
KEYBOARD (#4621 - 4629). One is needed on each 3276 for
diagnostic testing.
#4621 - 75 key Typewriter Keyboard ... typewriter-like layout,
movable, with 49 data keys and 26 control keys. 12 program
function keys are included in the top row of data keys
through use of an alternate shift key. Prerequisite: EBCDIC
Character Set (#9082).
#4622 - 75 key Data Entry Keyboard ... movable, with 35 data
keys, 10 program function keys and 30 control keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9u82).
#4623 - 75 key Data Entry Keyboard ... keypunch layout,
movable, with 35 data keys, 10 program function keys and
30 control keys. This is the recommended keyboard for high
volume data entry. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set
(#9082).
#4624 -- 75 key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard ... ASCII typewriter
layout, movable, with 49 data keys and 26 control keys. 12
program function keys are included in the top row of the
data keys through use of an alternate shift key.
Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (B) (#9084).
#4626 - 87 key EBCDIC Typewriter / APL Keyboard ... an
87 -key EBCDIC typewriter keyboard (ref #4627) with modified key tops to allow entry of 81 APL specific characters in
addition to the 94 character EBCDIC set. An APL On/Off
key controls whether the keyboard is in EBCDIC typewriter
or APL mode. In contrast to the 87 -key EBCDIC typewriter
keyboard without APL (ref #4627), this keyboard has only
twelve program function keys (PF1 thru PF12) which are the
group of twelve keys to the right of the main keyboard area.
Prerequisites: APL/Text (#1120); EBCDIC Character Set
(#9082).
#4627 -- 87 key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard ... typewriterlike layout, movable, with 49 alphameric data keys, 26 control keys, and 12 program function keys (24 total P.F. keys).
Twelve of the program function keys are included in the top
row of data keys through the use of an alternate shift key.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4628 -- 87 key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard ... ASCII
typewriter-like layout, movable, with 49 alphameric data
keys, 26 control keys, and 12 program function keys (24
total P.F. keys). Twelve of the program function keys are
included in the top row of data keys and are available
through the use of an alternative shift key. Prerequisite:
ASCII Character Set (B) (#9084).
#4629 -- 87 key EBCDIC Typewriter/Text Keyboard ... an
87-key EBCDIC typewriter keyboard (ref #4627) with modified key tops to allow entry of 65 Text specific characters in
addition to the 94 character EBCDIC set. A Text On/Off key
controls whether the keyboard is in EBCDIC typewriter or
Text mode. In contrast to an 87-key EBCDIC typewriter
keyboard without Text (ref #4627), this keyboard has only
twelve program function keys (PF1 thru PF12) which are the
group of twelve keys to the right of the main keyboard area.
Prerequisites: APL/Text (#1120); EBCDIC Character Set
(#9082).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. The keyboard is set up
by the customer. Specify: If standard 0.9 meter (3 foot) keyboard
cable is not desired, specify #9399 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable.
Limitation: Keyboards used on 3275/3277 machines are not
interchangeable with keyboards used on 3276/3278 machines.
Provides any Keyboard
KEYBOARD NUMERIC LOCK (#4690).
with the ability to lock the keyboard if a non-numeric key [other
than 0-9, minus, (-), decimal sign, or dup) is depressed in a predefined numeric-only field. Maximum: One. Fi~ld Installation: Yes.
MAGNETIC READER CONTROL (#4999). Provides the capability
of attaching a Magnetic Slot Reader which reads encoded information (numeric only) from a magnetic stripe. Maximu'm: One; Field
Installation: Yes.
SDLC/BSC SWITCH (#6315).
[Mdls 1 - 4 only)
Provides
SNA/SDLC transmission control in addition to the basic Binary
Synchronous Communications (BSC). SDLC or BSC can be selected by the operator with a switch on the operator panel. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Extended Function Base (#1 068).
SECURITY KEY LOCK (#6340).
A lock and key which prevents
modification or display of data in the display terminal when in the
"off" position. When the Security Keylock feature is combined
with the Encrypt/Decrypt feature (#3680), a third position of the
lock permits modification of the 56 bit Encrypt/Decrypt key variable. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SELECTOR LIGHT-PEN (#6350 for mdls 3, 4, 13 and 14; #6351
for mdls 1, 2, 11 and 12). A hand-held pen-like device which
permits the operator to select fields of data from a display for
input to the host system. The Selector Light-Pen, while not being
used, can be placed in a recess of the keyboard, which is used
for user's incidental items. Selector Pen (and Cursor Select)
operations have been expanded to include a new designator character "&". When this designator is used the Read Modified operation results in the return of both the addresses and the data of all
modified fields on the screen. The #6351 Selector Lig1.t Pen has
a slightly wider field of view to facilitate operator ease-of-use.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
TELECOMMUNICATION FEATURES
For TP attachment each 3276 must be equipped with one of the
Communications Features (#6301 or #6302) and either the External Modem Interface (#3701) or DDS Adapter (#5650 for pointto-point operation, #5651 for multipoint operation) or one of the
1200 bps Integrated Modem features (#5500, #5501, #5502,
#5507 or #5508). In addition, the SDLC/BSC Switch (#6315)
may be selected on mdls 1, 2, 3 or 4 (see above). For loop attachment (3276 mdls 11, 12, 13 and 14 only) each 3276 must be
equipped with the Communications Feature without Business
Machine Clock (#6302) and the Loop Adapter (#4850).
EXTERNAL MODEM INTERFACE (#3701).
Provides an
EIA/CCITT interface for attachment of an IBM or other external
modem. Specify: #9490 for operation on the public switched
network (mdls 11, 12, 13, 14), or #9491 for operation on private
non-switched communication facilities. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with #4850,
#5500, #5501, #5502, #5507, #5508, #5650 or #5651.
Prerequisite: Communication Feature With or Without Business
Machine Clock (#6301 or #6302).
LOOP ADAPTER (#4850).
[Mdls 11-14 only)
Provides the
capability to attach to either a direct or data link attached loop of
the 8100 System. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: Cannot be ordered with #3701, #5500, #5501,
#5502, #5507, #5508, #5650 or #5651. Prerequisite: Com-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- --- ------= = =':' =
M 3276.4
Jul 79
DP Machines
3276 Control Unit Display Station (cont'd)
munications Feature without Business Machine Clock (#6302).
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides an integrated modem for operation over non-switched
communications facilities at speeds of 1200/600 bps. No external
modem is required. Specify: #9651 for use with 4-wire facility or
#9652 for use with 2-wire facility. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with #3701,
#4850, #5501, #5502, #5507, #5508, #5650 or #5651.
Prerequisite: Communications Feature with Business Machine
Clock (#6301).
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, AUTO ANSWER
(#5501). [Models 11, 12, 13, 14 only] Provides an integrated
modem with auto/manual answer capabilities for operation over
switched communication facilities at speeds of 1200/600 bps. No
external modem is required. Prerequisite: Communication Feature
with Business Machine Clock (#6301). Limitation: Cannot be
ordered with #3701, #4850, #5500, #5502, #5507, #5508,
#5650 or #5651. Field Installation: Yes. Note: This feature
requires a CBS type data access arrangement or FCC registered
equivalent.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, MANUAL ANSWER
(#5502).
[mdls 11, 12, 13, 14 only] Provides an integrated
modem for communications with a remote CPU over the public
switched telephone network at speeds of 1200/600 bps. No
external modem is required. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with #3701, #4850, #5500,
#5501, #5507, #5508, #5650 or #5651. Prerequisite: Communications Feature with Business Machine Clock (#6301). Note:
This feature requires a data access arrangement type COT, or
FCC registered equivalent.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED WITH.
SWITCHED NETWORK BACKUP (#5507). Provides an integrated modem at speeds of 1200/600 bps for operation over nonswitched communications facilities, and also provides manual
switched network backup capability. No external modem is required. Specify: #9651 for communication over 4-wire facility or
#9652 for communication over 2-wire facility. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with
#3701, #4850, #5500, #5501, #5502, #5508, #5650 or
#5651. Prerequisite: Communications Feature with Business
Machine Clock (#6301). Note: This feature requires a data access arrangement type COT, or FCC registered equivalent, for
switched network backup operation.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED WITH
SWITCHED NETWORK BACKUP, AUTO ANSWER (#5508). Provides an integrated modem for operation over non-switched communication facilities at speed of 1200/600 bps and also provides
auto/manual answer switched network backup capabilities. No
external modem is required. Specify: #9651 for communications
over 4-wire facility, or #9652 for communications over 2-wire
facility. Prerequisite: Communications Feature with Business
Clock (#6301). Limitation: Cannot be ordered with #3701,
#4850, #5500, #5501, #5502, #5507, #5650 or #5651.
Field Installation: Yes. Note: This feature requires a CBS type
data access arrangement or FCC registered equivalent.
DIGITAL DATA SERVICE (ODS) ADAPTER (#5650 for point-topoint operation, #5651 for multipoint operation).
An adapter
for BSC or SDLC data transmission at a speed of 2400 bps, 4800
bps, or 9600 bps (mdls 11-14 only) over the AT&T non-switched
Dataphone' digital data service network. The DDS Adapter interfaces to a DDS channel service unit, the customer site termination
of the DDS network. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701,
#4850, #5500, #5501, #5502, #5507 or #5508. Field
installation: Yes. See 3276 Specify [2] -- Communication Cable.
Maximum: One #5650 or #5651. Prerequisite: Communications
Feature without Business Machine Clock (#6302) with Specify
Code #9822 for 2400 bps, or #9823 for 4800 bps, or #9825 for
9600 bps (mdls 11-14 only).
COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH
BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCK (#6301).
Required for attachment to communications
facilities through any 1200 bps Integrated Modem, or the External
Modem Interface (#3701) at 1200 bps, to any external modem
that does not provide its own clocking. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with #6302.
COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
Required for attachment to communications
CLOCK (#6302).
facilities, at speeds up to 9600 bps using SDLC, or up to 7200
bps using BSC, through the External Modem Interface (#3701)
and any external modem that provides its own clocking, or through
the DDS Adapter. It is also required for attachment of the 3276
mdls 11, 12, 13 and 14 to a direct or data link attached loop of
the 8100 System, at a speed of 9600 or 2400 bps respectively.
Specify: #9821 for 2000 bps, #9822 for 2400 bps, #9823 for
4800 bps, #9824 for 7200 bps, or #9825 for 9600 bps.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be
ordered with #6301 .
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
Address Keylock
#1009 $60SUC 1067 29
25
APL/Text Control
Extended Function Base
1068
6
5
Audible Alarm
1090
2
2
APLIText
1120
9
8
Terminal Adapter No. 1
3255
16
14
Terminal Adapter No. 2
3256
16
14
Terminal Adapter No.3
3257
16
14
Ext Character Set Adapter 3610
11
9
EncryptlDecrypt
3680 49
42
External Modem Interface 3701
12
10
Keyboard
75 Key Typewriter
4621
13
11
75 Key Data Entry
11
4622
13
75 Key Data Entry
(Keypunch Layout)
4623
13
11
75 Key ASCII Typewriter 4624
13
11
87 Key EBCDIC
4626
18
15
Typewriter / APL
87 Key EBCDIC Typewrtr 4627
18
15
87 Key ASCII Typewriter 4628
18
15
87 Key EBCDIC
Typewriter IText
4629
18
15
Keyboard Numeric Lock
4690 N/C NIC
Loop Adapter
4850
25
21
Magnetic Reader Control
4999
11
9
1200 bps Integrated Modem,
Non-switched
5500
19
16
Switched, Auto Answer
5501
25
21
19
16
Switched, Manual Answer 5502
Non-Sw w Switched Network
5507
Backup
26
22
Non-Sw w Switched Network
5508
25
'Backup, Auto Answer
29
ODS Adapter, pt-to-pt
5650 24
20
ODS Adapter, multipoint
5651
24
20
Communications Feature
w Business Machine Clk
6301
19
16
12
10
w /0 Business Mach Clk
6302
6315
21
18
SDLC IBSC Switch
Security Keylock
6340 35SUC Selector Light-Pen
6350 15
13
Selector Light-Pen
6351
15
13
$ 60
1,125
225
90
360
630
630
630
405
1,710
400
.50
$1.50
1.50
1.50
2.50
2.50
4.00
495
495
2.50
3.50
495
495
3.50
2.50
675
675
675
3.50
3.00
3.00
675
N/C
945
405
3.50
668
840
668
5.00
3.00
4.00
910
7.00
1,015
840
840
4.00
2.00
2.00
670
450
810
35
585
585
3.00
2.50
3.00
NIC
.50
.50
NIC
NIC
3.50
4.50
NIC
.50
.50
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature Number as
shown below at the price listed in the M 10000 pages. See M 10000 pages
for additional information and for ordering
Item
Feature
Number
Magnetic Slot Reader
Magnetic Reader Extension Cable
19.7 ft (6 meter)
39.4 ft (12 meter)
#9106
#9107
for field installation.
Maximum
Quantity
#9441
••
••
• A maximum of one Magnetic Slot Reader may be ordered.
•• A maximum of one extension cable may be ordered.
MERCURY BATTERY (Part No. 1743456).
Provides power to
sustain the master key of the Encrypt/Decrypt feature (#3680)
when normal power is not present. This supply item is a 4.14 volt
non-rechargeable mercury battery. This battery has a shelf life of
1 year under normal conditions, and can be expected to provide
3.5 years of normal operation. Note: Discharged battery should be
returned to IBM. Field installation: Yes. Limitation: Can be installed on 3276 mdls 11,12,13 and 14 only. Prerequisite:
Encrypt/Decrypt feature (#3680).
MAGNETIC SLOT READER (#9441IPart No. 41135(0).
A free
standing Magnetic Slot Reader (MSR) that reads encoded information from a magnetic stripe. It attaches by a 1.5 meter cable thru
the Magnetic Reader Control (#4999). The MSR has 3 lights and
a buzzer which provide feedback to the user on the status of the
read data. The MSR accommodates a wide range (height and
length) of magnetic striped plastic cards such as: 10 badges,
security operator identification cards, etc. Using the 3275/3277 like
10-numeric character set, the maximum number of data characters that
can be read are 7 to 37 characters at 75 bpi or 210 bpi, and 7 to 100
characters at 127 bpi. A minimum of seven characters must be encoded
between the start sentinel and end sentinel characters.
The folloWing cable assemblies can be used to extend the Magnetic Slol
Reader distance. Limitation: Extension cables CANNOT be plugged into
other extension cables.
• Trademark of American Telephone & Telegraph Co. (AT&T).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ------==::: == ~ ==
M 3276.5
Jul79
DP Machines
3276 Control Unit Display Station
(cont'd)
Descript_
19.7 feet (6 meters) -- #9106/Part No. 4832986
39.4 feet (12 meters) -- #9107/Part No. 4832987
A variety of magnetic documents, tags, and labels that the MSR can read,
may be obtained from IRD, some of which, depending on length, can be
encoded by devices such as the IBM 3642 Encoder Printer.
Note: Magnetic cards encoded with the Alternate End of Message
character (hexidecimal "C") cannot be read by this reader. SSCPLU communication for MSR is not supported when the MSR is
attached to a 3276 or a 3278 which is attached to a 3276.
Limitation: Valid for numeric only data encoded according to the
American National Standard entitled "Magnetic Strip Encoding for
Credit Cards, ANSI x4.16 - 1973" when the MSR is attached to a 3276
or to a 3278 which is attached to a 3276. Prerequisite: Magnetic
Reader Control (#4999).
rreverse side is blan kJ
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -------- --- ----___
w_
---
M 3277.1
Jul79
DP Machines
For Model 2 -- a 3271 mdl 2 or 12. a 3272 mdl 2. a 3274 with
appropriate Device/Terminal Adapters. or a 8101 with #1505 or
# 1506 ... see 3271. 3272. 3274 or 8101 pages.
IBM 3277 DISPLAY STATION
Purpose: A high-performance cathode-ray tube used in clusters
with the 3271. 3272 or 3274 Control Unit for displaying alphameric data. and for entering data into and retrieving data from a
S/360. S/370. 4300 Processor. 8100 Information System or
3790 Communication System. A keyboard or li9ht-pen or both
permit an operator to display and manipulate data on the screen in
a highly flexible and efficient manner. With it's comprehensive and
powerful set of standard and optional features. the 3277 meets
both genaral-purpose and unique display requirements.
NOTE: For possible use with System/3. see GSD
Manual.
Model 1 For use with the 3271 mdl 1. 2. 11 or 12 or 3272 mdl
1 or 2 or 3274 mdl 1 A, 1 B, 1 C or 1 D. to display up to
480 characters ... 12 lines of 40 characters each. For
use with 3790 or 8100. see below.
Model 2 For use with the 3271 mdl 2 or 12 or 3272 mdl 2 or
3274 mdl 1 A. 1 B. 1 C or 10 to display up to 1.920
characters ... 24 lines ot 80 characters each. For use
with 3790 or 8100. s",e below.
NOTE: 3277 mdl 1 and 2 displays may be intermixed on a
3271 mdl 2 or 12. 3272 mdl 2. or 3274 mdl 1 A. 1 B. 1 C or 1D.
In this configuration. each 3277 mdl 1 will display 480 characters supplied by the CPU to the 1.920 character buffer in the
3271.3272 or 3274.3277 mdl lsand 2s may not be intermixed on a 3271 mdl 1 or 11. or 3272 mdl 1. or 3791. 3277 mdl
1 aM 2 displays may be intermixed on the 8100 System via the
8101 Storage and Input/O ... tput Unit.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: Displays sixty-three 7 x 9 dot-matrix characters ... 36
alphamerics. 27 special characters. including the space. Features
Data-Field Organization which permits individual fields of data on
the screen to be program-defined with various attributes such as
protected or unprotected. alphameric or numeric. normal intensity.
non-displayed. or brightened intensity. and selector light-pen
detection-allowed or disallowed.
Editing Features - typamatic. cursor. tab. back-tab. protecteddata. insert and delete. and extended-erase (erase to end-of-field.
erase all keyboard input data. erase entire screen) are standard
features for displays equipped with a keyboard.
Input Flexibility - a choice of keyboards. a selector light-pen. and
a set of program function keys provide unmatched input flexibility
... see "SpeCial Features" below.
Output Flexibility -- information on the screen can be directed to
another display or hard copy device under program control.
Security Enhancement Features -- a special Non-displayed Keying Mode (standard) provides for fields of data to be programdefined so that they will accept data entered from the keyboard
without displaying the data on the screen. A Security Keylock
(optional) prevents modification of data on the display unless the
key is turned to the "on" position. An Operator Identification Card
Reader (optional) is provided to enter system user identification.
This enhances the (programmed) control of his access to data and
audit of his actions. It may also be used to enter any sequence of
characters (pre-recorded on a card) for other purposes such as
transaction contrOl. account control. and billing.
For use with the 8100 Information System: For special features
that are supported. see M 8101 pages. A 3271 or 3272 is not
required when the 3277 mdl 1 or 2 is attached to the 8101 with
#1505 or #1506. For character set. specify #9089. For power.
see Specify [1] below. For cables. see Ml0000 pages for 8100
System. Host programs written for the 3270 are not supported by
the 8100 System.
For use with 3790 Communication System: For special features
that are supported. see 3791. A 3271. 3272 or 3274 is not required when the 3277 mdl 1 or 2 is attached to the 3791. For
character set. specify #9089. For power. see Specify [1] below.
For cables. see M 10000 pages for 3790.
Maximum: Up to thirty-two 3277s can be attached to a 3271 or
3272. Up to sixteen 3277s can be attached to a 3274. The maximum is reduced by one on a 3271 or a 3272 for each 3284 mdl
1. 2. 3286 mdl 1. 2. 3287. or 3288 Printer attached. The maximum is reduced by one on a 3274 for each 3284 mdl 1. 2. 3286
mdl 1. 2. 3287. or 3288 Printer attached through Terminal Adapter #7802 through #7805 ... see 3271. 3272 or 3274. Up to 24
- 3277 mdls 1 or 2 can be attached to the 8101 of the 8100
System. This maximum is reduced by one for each 3284. 3286 or
3288 attached to the 8101. See M 8101 pages.
PREREQUISITES: For Model 1 - a 3271 mdl 1. 2. 11 or 12. a
3272 mdl 1 or 2. a 3274 mdl lA. lB. lC or 10 with appropriate
Device/Terminal Adapters. or a 8101 with #1505 or #1506 ...
see 3271.3272.3274 or 8101 pages.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621
or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC. l-phase. 3-wire. 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug. or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Cables: See M 10000 pages for 3277 cable prices and ordering instructions. For cable specifications. see 3270 InsfaUation
Manual - Physical Planning. GA27-2787.
[3] Character Set: Specify one of the following unless Data
Analysis-APL Feature (#1066) is selected;
#9089 -- for EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 characters described on the
EBCDIC keyboard. PREREOU/S/TE: If used with the 3271
mdl 1 or 2. EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) is a prerequisite on the 3271 mdl 1 or 2.
#9091 -- for ASCII Character Set (A) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters but substitutes the Logical OR (I) and Logical NOT (.) for the exclamation mark (,) and circumflex (A). PREREQUISITE: If used
with the 3271. ASCII Transmission Code (#9762 or #1200)
is a prerequisite on the 3271.
#9092 -- for ASCII Character Set (B) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the standard 64 ASCII characters.
PREREQUISITE: If used with the 3271. ASCII Transmission
Code (#9762 or #1200) is a prerequisite on the 3271.
[4] Console Use with System/3 mdl 15 (mdl 1 only). #9590 for
System/3 mdl 15 console use.
PRICES:
Mdl
3277
1
MACI
MRC
MLC
2 year
2
Purchase
MMMC
$2,470
3,200
$ 9.00
19.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Purchase Qption: 60%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
SPECIAL FEATURES
DATA ANALYSIS-APL FEATURE (#1066).
[Mdl 2 only and
attached to 3271. 3272] Provides dual case EBCDIC. the APL
set. and (for output only) 120 TN print train (see Type Catalog.
S/370 Printers) characters. 93 TN characters are input and output
both. 27 are output only. Field Installation: Yes .
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1090).
An alarm. sounded under program
control. to alert the operator to a special condition. This alarm
during keyboard operation. is sounded when a character is entered into the next to last POSition on the screen. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
Provides
rhe capabiliry of reading a 2-1/8 inch X 3-3/8 inch (53.lJmm X 85.7mm)
plasric dora processing card wirh an encoded magneric srripe. Using the
10-numeric characrer set. rhe number of characrers thar can be read is
1-37 characters ar 75 BPI (bits per inch).
OPERATOR IDENTIFICATION CARD READER (#4600).
Prerequisite: Any keyboard. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
KEYBOARD (#4630 thru #4639).
#4630 -- 66 key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard. typewriter-like
layout. movable. with 45 alphameric keys and 21 control keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
#4631 -- 66 key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard. movable. with 36
alphameric keys and 30 control keys. Prerequisite: EBCDIC
Character Set (#9089).
.
#4632 -- 78 key Operator Console Keyboard. operator-console
layout. movable. with 45 alphameric keys, 21 control keys.
and 12 program keys. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set
(#9089).
#4633 -- 78 key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard. 66 key EBCDIC
typewriter layout with 12 additional program function keys.
movable. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
#4634 -- 66 key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard. ASCII typewriter
layout. movable. with 45 alphameric keys and 21 control keys.
Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (A) (#9091) or (B) (#9092).
#4635 -- 78 key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard. 66 key ASCII typewriter layout with 12 additional function keys. movable.
Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (A) (#9091) or (B) (#9092).
#4636 -- 66 key EBCDIC Data Entry Keyboard. keypunch layout.
movable. with 36 alphameric keys and 30 control keys. This is
the recommended keyboard for Data Entry including Video
370. PrerequiSite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9089).
#4637 -- 66 key EBCDIC Typewriter / APL keyboard with 45
alphameric and 21 control keys. Prerequisite: EBCDIC/ APL
characters via special feature (# 1066).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- - ---
- --- = =-- =--'":' =
M 3277.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3277 Display Station (cont'd)
#4638 - 78 key EBCDIC Typewriter I APL keyboard with 45
alphameric keys, 21 control keys, and 12 program keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC/APL characters via special feature
(#1066).
#4639 - 78 key EBCDIC Fast Cursor Text Keyboard, with 45
alphameric keys, 21 control keys, and 12 program keys. The
speed of the Cursor and Typamatic key operation is approximately twice that of a non-Text keyboard. Includes Typamatic
Delete and a function similiar to typewriter carriage return.
Prerequisite: Data Analysis - APL Feature (#1066) on 3277
mdl 2 as well as on a control unit (only 3271-2 or 12, or
3272-2).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Provides the ability to
KEYBOARD NUMERIC LOCK (#4690),
lock the keyboard if a non-numeric key [other than 0-9, minus (-),
period (.), or dup] is depressed in a pre-defined numeric-only field.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6340). A lock and key which prevents
modification and display of data on the display when in the "off"
position. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SELECTOR LIGHT-PEN (#6350).
A hand-held, pen-like device
which permits the operator to select fields of data from a display
for computer input. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC
MLC
2 yr Purch
MMMC
Data Analysis-APL Feature #1066 $ 25 $ 21 $ 504 $ 1.00
145
.50
Audible Alarm
1090
4
3
3.50
Operator Ident Card Reader 4600 13
11
437
Keyboard,
66 Key EBCDIC Typewriter 4630 13
11
520
5.00
11
520
6.00
66 Key EBCDIC Data Entry 4631
13
4632 32
27 1,010 14.00
78 Key Operator Console
24
8.50
78 Key EBCDIC Typewriter 4633 28
869
66 Key ASCII Typewriter
4634 13
11
520
5.00
78 Key ASCII Typewriter
4635 28
24
869
8.50
66 Key EBCDIC Data Entry
4636 15
(keypunch layout)
13
522
6.00
22
807
5.50
66 Key EBCDIC APL/Type 4637 26
34
1,250
9.50
78 Key EBCDIC APL/Type 4638 40
78 Key EBCDIC Fast
Cursor Text
4639 40
34 1,250
8.50
Keyboard Numeric Lock
4690 NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Security Keylock
6340
35SUC35
Selector Light-Pen
6350 24
20
728
1.50
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -----=- =-- --=----':' =
M 3278.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3278 DISPLAY STATION
Purpose: An enhanced, cathode-ray tube (CRT), display station
used in clusters with the 3274 Control Unit or the 3276 Control
Unit Display Station for displaying alphameric data, and for entering data into and receiving data from a S/360, a S/370, 4300
Processor, a 3790 Communication System or a 8100 Information
System. A Keyboard, Selector Light-pen or both permit an operator to display and manipulate data on the screen in a flexible and
efficient manner. With its set of basic and optional features, the
3278 meets both general purpose and unique display requirements.
NOTE: For use with the System/3, see GSD
manual.
Model 1
For use with 3274 or 3276 to display up to 960
characters ... 12 lines of 80 characters each.
Model 2
For use with 3274 or 3276 or to attach to the 4331
Processor via the standard Display/Printer Adapter
or optional Display/Printer Adapter Expansion. Displays up to 1920 characters ... 24 lines of 80 characters each.
Model 3
For use with 3274 or 3276 to display up to 2560
characters ... 32 lines of 80 characters each.
Model 4
For use with 3274 or 3276 to display up to 3440
characters ... 43 lines of 80 characters each.
Mode/.5
For use with 3274 mdls lA, IC or ID to display up to
3564 characters ... 27 lines of 132 characters each.
For use with the 3790 Communication System: The 3791 Controller only supports the 3278 mdl 2. See the 3791 Configura/or, GA272768-6./or additional information.
For use with the 8100 Information System: See the System Configura/or, GA27-2876.
Highlights: Displays a character within a 7 x 14 character matrix
in 960, 1920 and 2560 character models; within a 7 x 11 character matrix in the 3440 and 3564 character models. The ·basic 26
character upper case letters are presented in a 7x9 character
matrix for the 960, 1920 and 2560 character models, and in a
7x8 character matrix for the 3440 and 3564 character models.
Displays a 94 character set: 26 upper case alphabetic, 26 lower
case alphabetic, 10 numeric and 32 special characters. A monocase switch provides the capability of switching to upper case
alphameric mode for 3277 compatibility. Uses 3270 field formatting capability which permits individual fields of data on the screen
to be program defined with various attributes such as
p~otected/unprote.cted, alphameric, normal/highlighted intensity,
displayable/non-displayable, and selector light-pen detection
allowed/disallowed.
data ... see "Special Features" below. Fields
selected by positioning the cursor and operating
key, instead of using the Sell!cior Light-Pen.
Function (P.F.) keys arl! basic with all typewritllr
of data can be
the cursor select
Twelve Program
keyboards.
Security Functions -- a special non-displayed input mode provides for fields of data to be program-defined so that they will
accept data entered from the keyboard without displaying the
data on the screen. A Security Keylock (optional) prevents modification or display of data in the display terminal unless the key
IS turned to the '·on·' position. These capabilities and the
terminal"s ability to identify itself to the host program allow customer supplied security program routines to control access to
data and .audit of actions. A Magnetic Slot Reader (optional) and,
for 3278 s attached to a 3274 Control Unit, a Magnetic Hand
Scanner (optional) are available to enter system user identification.
When attached to the 4331 Processor via the standard
Display /Printer Adapter or optional Display/Printer Adapter Expansion, functional support varies from that of the 3278-2 attached to
a 3274 or 3276. See M 4331 pages for details of support.
Problem Determination PrOcedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the customer. This increased availability has been achieved through the use
of problem determination and recovery procedures that are easily
understood and used by the operator. The procedures are provided by the Problem Determination Guide manual that will be stored
under the
keyboard
palm
rest.
Also,
see
"Customer
Responsibilities·· below.
Customer Set-Up (CSU): The 3278 is designated Customer SetUp thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for:
- Adequate site, system and other vendor preparation.
- Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking and
placement of the 3278.
- Physical set-up, connection of cables in protected customer
access areas, switch settings, and checkout.
- Contact Field Engineering to make cable connections of IBM
CSU units to non-CSU units where customer access areas are
not provided.
- Notify IBM of intent to relocate and follow IBM instructions for
relocation.
- Use and follow the problem determination procedures and fill
out trouble report prior to calling for IBM service.
- Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer'·s shipping dock at the time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions will be provided by IBM.
The operator may initiate a local display-to-printer copy function
(i.e., without host intervention) from the keyboard of a 3278.
When the 3278 is attached to a 3274 Control Unit, the printer
designation is controlled by operator use of the IDENT key and (a)
by a printer authorization matrix which is loaded into the 3274
Control Unit through a user written host application program, or (b)
by a customer definable matrix loaded from the system diskette at
IML time. For further details see the IBM 3270 Information Display
System Planning and Setup Guide, GA27-2827. When the 3278 is
attached to a 3276 Control Unit Display Station, the printer designation is controlled by the operator use of the IDENT key and by a
configuration default matrix. This matrix is determined by the
relative positions of devices attached to the 3276. (The host can
perform a copy in a manner compatible with existing 3271/3272
support.)
PREREQUISITES: The 3278 requires a 3274 or 3276 with appropriate Terminal Adapter. 3278 mdl 5 requires Configuration Support
B (#9111) on the 3274 /0 which il is aI/ached. ... see 3274 or 3276
Machines pages. When attached to the 3790 Communication
System or the 8100 System via the 3276 Control Unit all 3278
display units must have a keyboard.
'
Operator Factors - the 3278 has a anti-glare screen. Indicators
are displayed on the bottom row of the screen, outside the data
display area, and provide useful operator information. Host display of data on the screen is accomplished without refresh interrupt (I.e., no blinking). The keyboard, which is low in profile
provides a palm rest area and has separators to help preveni
accidental striking of control keys. The operator may select one
of several cursor modes.
[2] Cables: See M 10000 pages for 3270 cable prices and ordering instructions. For cable speCifications, see IBM 3270 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2787.
~diting Functions Cursor move, tab, home key, back tab,
Insert, delete, extended erase (erase to end-of field, erase all
keyboard input data, and erase entire screen), and cursor select
keys are all basic for displays equipped with a keyboard. All
alphameric, special symbol, and cursor move keys have typamatic capability. Double speed cursor typamatic is attained with a
simultaneous depressing of the ALT key and a horizontal cursor
positioning key. The cursor select function provides an alternative to the Selector Light-pen function. Fields of data may be
selected by positioning the cursor and then using the Cursor
Select Key:
Input Flexibility -- a choice of keyboards or the selector light-pen
provide input flexibility. A Magnetic Slot Reader (optional) and,
for 3278·s attached to a 3274 Control Unit, a Magnetic Hand
Scanner (optional) provide for the input of magnetically encoded
Bibliography: See KWIC Index, G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (120 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9890
for locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug. If standard 2.8
meter (9 foot) power cable is not desired, specify: #9511 for
1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, #9512 for 3.7 meter (12 foot) cable,
or #9513 for 4.5 meter (15 foot) cable.
[3] Character Set: For record purposes, specify one;
#9082 -- for EBCDIC Character Set -- used .in conjunction with
75 Key Typewriter Keyboard (#4621), Data Entry Keyboard
(;tt4622 or ;tt4623), 87 Key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard
(#4627).
Typewriter/APL
Keyboard
(#4626)
or
Typewriter/Text Keyboard (#4629).
#9084 - for ASCII Character Set (B) - used in conjunction
with 75 Key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard (#4624) or 87 Key
ASCII Typewriter Keyboard (#4628).
[4] System Attachment:
3276 model this 3278 attaches to.
3274
3274
3274
3274
3274
3276
3276
or 3276
mdl 1A
mdl 1B
mdl 1C
mdl 10
mdl1, 2, 3, 4
mdl11, 12, 13, 14
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
identify the 3274 or
Code
#9549
#9550
#9551
#9261
#9552
#9553
------- ----------===
- - --':' =
M 3278.2
Jul79
'DP Machines
3278 Display Station (conl'd)
MLC
2 yr
PRICES:
Mdl
MRC
Purchase
3278
1
2
3
4
$ 58
61
71
74
$ 49
52
60
63
$2,205
5
86
73
3,285
2,340~
2,700
2,835
MMMC
$11.50
12.00
13.50
14.50
16.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Customer Set-Up: Yes.
Model Changes: Model changes from mdl 1 to any mdl; or mdl 2 to
mdl 3, 4 or 5; or mdl 3 to mdl 4 or 5; or mdl 4 to mdl 5, are field installable. Model downgrades are not recommendedfor field installation.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
1
2
3
To
2
3
4
5
$ 610
$ 650
650
$ 710
710
710
$1.240
1.240
1.240
1.240
4
SPECIAL FEATURES
NOTE: Not all of the following special features are supported by
3278-2s attached to the 4331 system via the standard
Display/Printer Adapter or the Display/Printer Adapter Expansion.
See M 4331 pages for a list of supported special features.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1090).
An alarm. sounded under program
control, to alert the operator to a special condition. This alarm,
during keyboard operation, is also sounded when a character is
entered into the next-to-Iast position on the screen. The operator
may adjust the volume of the tone. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
APL/TEXT (#1120). Provides the capability for display of 222character APL/Text Character set including the 94-character
EBCDIC set. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Corequislte:
87-key EBCDIC Typewriter/APL Keyboard (#4626) or 87-key
EBCDIC Typewriter/Text Keyboard (#4629). Limitations: This
feature is only valid on a 3278 Display Station attached to a 3276
with APL/Text Control feature (#1067) or to a 3274 mdl lA, 1C
o'r 10 customized to include the APL/Text Control Function. This
feature is EBCDIC only and is NOT compatible with ASCII.
Prerequisites: Extended Character Set Adapter (#3610) and
EBCDIC Character Set Specify (#9082).
SWITCH CONTROL UNIT (#1720). This feature, when installed
on a 3278 Display Station, permits switching operational control of
that display between two different control units. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Customer Set-Up: Yes.
EXTENDED CHARACTER SET ADAPTER (#3610). Provides the
additional control and buffering necessary for the extended character set in the APL/Text (#1120) feature. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Corequislte: APL/Text (#1120).
KEYBOARD
#4621 - 75 Key Typewriter Keyboard ... typewriter-like layout,
movable, with 49 data keys and 26 control keys. Twelve
program function keys are included in the top row of data
keys through use of an alternate shift key. Prerequisite:
EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4622 - 75 Key Data Entry Keyboard ... movable, with 35 data
keys, 10 program function keys and 30 control keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4623 -- 75 Key Data Entry Keyboard ... keypunch layout,
movable, with 35 data keys, 10 program function keys and
30 control keys. This is the recommended keyboard for data
entry. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4624 -- 75 Key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard ... ASCII typewriter layout, movable, with 49 data keys and 26 control keys.
Twelve program function keys are included in the top row of
the data keys through use of an alternate shift key.
Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (B) (#9084).
#4626 -- 87 Key EBCDIC Typewriter/APL Keyboard ... an
87-key EBCDIC typewriter keyboard (ref. #4627) with modified keytops to allow entry of 81 APL specific characters in
addition to the 94-character EBCDIC set. An APL On/Off key
controls whether the keyboard is in basic EBCDIC typewriter_~
or APL mode. In contrast to the 87-key EBCDIC typewriter
keyboard without APL (ref #4627), this keyboard has only
twelve program function keys (PF1 thru PF12) which are the
group of 'twelve keys to the right of the main keyboard area.
Prerequisites: APL/Text (#1120) and EBCDIC Character Set
(#9082).
#4627 - 87 Key EBCDIC Typewriter Keyboard ... typewriter-
like layout, movable, with 49 alphameric data keys, 26 control keys, and 12 program function keys (24 total P.F. keys).
Twelve of the program function keys are included in the top
row of data keys through the use of an alternate shift key.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4628 - 87 Key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard ... ASCII
typewriter-like layout, movable, with 49 alphameric data
keys, 26 control keys, and 12 program function keys (24
total P.F. keys). Twelve of the program function keys are
included in the top row of data keys and are available
through the use of an alternate shift key. Prerequisite: ASCII
Character Set (#9084).
#4629 -- 87 Key EBCDIC Typewriter/Text Keyboard ... an
87-key EBCDIC typewriter keyboard (ref #4627) with modified keytops to allow entry of 65 Text specific characters in
addition to the 94-character EBCDIC set. A Text On/Off key
controls whether the keyboard is in EBCDIC typewriter or
Text mode. In contrast to an 87-key EBCDIC typewriter
keyboard without Text (ref #4627), this keyboard has only
twelve program function keys (PF1 thru PF12) which are the
group of twelve keys to the right of the main keyboard area.
Prerequisites: APL/Text (#1120) and EBCDIC Character Set
(#9082).
Maximum: One of the above. Field Installation: Yes. The keyboard is set up by the customer. Limitation: Keyboards used on
the 3275/3277 machines are not interchangeable with keyboards
used on 3276/3278 machines. Only two of the three keyboard
types (Typewriter, Data Entry, or Data Entry-Keypunch like) can be
supported at anyone time on displays attached to a 3274 Control
Unit. Text and APL keyboards are not affected by this limitation
and can be installed with any of the other keyboards without
restriction. Specify: If standard 0.9 meter (3 foot) keyboard cable
is not desired, specify #9399 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable.
KEYBOARD NUMERIC LOCK (#4690).
Provides any keyboard
with the ability to lock the keyboard if a non-numeric key [other
than 0-9, minus (;), decimal sign, or dup] is operated in a predefined numeric-only field. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
MAGNETIC READER CONTROL (#4999).
Provides the capability
of attaching a Magnetic Hand Scanner (MHS) or Magnetic Slot Reader
(MSR) which reads encoded information from a magnetic stripe. The
MSR can be used when the 3278 is connected to either a 3274 or 3276,
butthe MHS can only be used when the 3278 is connected to a 3274
Control Unit. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6340). A lock and key which prevents
modification or display of data in the display terminal when in the
"off" position. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SELECTOR LIGHT-PEN (#6350 for mdls 3, 4 and 5; #6351 for
mdls 1 and 2). A hand-held, pen-like device which permits the
operator to select fields of data from a display for input to the·host
system. The Selector Light-Pen, while not being used, can be
placed in a recess of the keyboard, which isused for user's incidental items. Selector Pen (and Cursor Select) operations have
been expanded to include a new designator character "&". When
this designator is used the Read Modified operation returns both
the addresses and the data of all modified fields on the screen.
The #6351 Selector Light Pen has a slightly wider field of view to
facilitate operator ease-of-use. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
MLC
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
#1090 $ 2 $ 2
Audible Alarm
1120
APL/Text
9
8
1720
5
4
Switch Control Unit
Extended Char Set Adptr 3610
11
9
Keyboard
75 Key EBCDIC Typewritr 4621
13
11
75 Key EBCDIC Data Enty 4622
13
11
75 Key EBCDIC Data Entry
(Keypunch Layout)
4623
13
11
75 Key ASCII Typewriter 4624
13
11
87 Key EBCDIC
4626
Typewriter / APL
18
15
87 Key EBCDIC Typewritr 4627
15
18
15
87 Key ASCII Typewriter 4628
18
87 Key EBCDIC
18
15
Typewriter /Text
4629
4690 N/C N/C
Keyboard Numeric Lock
Magnetic Reader Control
4999
11
9
Security Keylock
6340
35 sueSelector Light-Pen
6350
15
13
Selector Light Pen
6351
15
13
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
$
90
360
180
405
N/C
.50
N/C
2.50
495
495
$ 2.50
3.50
495
495
3.50
2.50
675
675
675
3.50
3.00
3.00
675
N/C
405
35
585
585
3.50
N/C
4.50
N/C
.50
.50
(
-------- -------------------_.-
M 3278.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
3278 Display Station
(conrd)
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment wilh machine, order Ihe FealUre Number as
shown below at the price lisled in the M IOOOU pages. See M lUUUU pages
for addilional informalion and for ordering
for field inslal/alion.
Fealure
Number
Item
Maximum
Quantity
Maximums shown are ALL numeric or ALL non-numeric characlers. If
a combination of numeric and non-numeric characters is recorded, the
lotal number of hex CODES must not exceed the numeric characler
maximum. For example: At 127 bpi, a combination of 60 numeric and 20
non-numeric characters is permissible.
Limitation: 3277 -like 10 character set numerics only magnetic
cards coded with Alternate End of Message character (hexidecimal
"C") cannot be read by the MSR or MHS. The 10/63 character
set and the MHR are only supported on 3278s which are attached
to 3274 Control Units. IBM Host Programming Support is provided
for 10/63 character set non-protected, display data entry.
#9440
MagnetiC Hand Scanner
MagnetiC Slot Reader
#9441
Magnelic Reader EXlension Cable ... for use wirh
Magnelic Hand Scanner or Magnetic Slol Reader
#9106
19.7 fl. (6 meier)
39.4 fl. (12 meier)
#9107
Protected. non·display dala entry is supported by IMS and TSO. With
this prolected, non-display dala entry support, all cards and documents
which can be read by the 3630 Plant Dara Communications Syslem, up to
100 data characlers, can be read by the 3270 System .
• A maximum of one magnetic reader or scanner may be ordered.
•• A maximum of one extension cable may be ordered.
MAGNETIC HAND SCANNER (#9440/1''''' No. 41234(5): The Magnetic Hand Scanner (MHS) attaches by a 1.5 meter (4.9 ft) coiled
cable to a number of data entry and reporting devices that have
an appropriate magnetic adapter feature. It allows the user to read
magnetic stripe laoels thaI are attaChed to Shelves, cartons. machines, etc. It can also be used to read magnetiC stripe tags
which are hand-held or placed on a flat surface.
A varielY of magnetic documents, lags. and labels which Ihe MSR and
M HS can read,
some of which, depending on
length, can be encoded by devices such as Ihe 3642 Encoder Printer.
The MHS has three lights and an audible buzzer which provide
feedback to the user on the status of the scanned data. It can
read a stripe in either direction. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Magnetic Reader Control (#4999). See Note 1.
MAGNETIC SLOT READER (#9441/1''''' No. 4113500): The Magnetic Slot Reader (MSR) attaches by a 1.5 meter (4.9 ft) cable to a
number of data entry and reporting devices that have an appropriate magnetic adapter feature. The slot reader accommodates a
wide range (height and length) of magnetic striped card stock and
plastic badges including: job tickets, magnetic striped 80 column
cards, operator identification badges, large and small credit cards,
etc.
The MSR has three lights and an audible buzzer which provide
feedback to the user on the status of scanned data. Holes in the
bottom of the MSR allow optional attachment to an appropriate flat
surface. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Magnetic Reader
Control (#4999). See Note 1.
NOTE 1
The following cable assemblies can be used to extend the Magnetic Hand Scanner and Magnetic Slot Reader distances.
Limitations: Extension cables cannot be plugged into other extension cables.
Description
Part Number
19.7 ft. (6 meter)
39.4 ft. (12 meter)
#9106/Part No. 4832986
#9107/Part No. 4832987
Both the MHS and the MSR read magnetically encoded information from a 10/63 alphanumeric character set; the MSR also reads
the same 10 character numeric only set as the 3277 Operator
identification Card Reader (#4600) which is not a subset of the
10/63 alphanumeric character set. For a further description of
both character sets see IBM 3270 Information Display System
Character Set Reference GA27-2837. Either (not both) the 10/63
alphanumeric or the 10 numeric only 3277 like character set may
be selected for the 3274 Control Unit at customization time. The
3276 Control Unit Display Station and aI/ached 3278s support only
the MSR and the 10 character numeric only set as used by the
3277.
Numeric and Alphameric Character Sel Capacities are as follows:
MSR/MHS
Minimum Numbt:r
of Hex Codes Between Start Sentinel
and End Sentinel
Characters
3277 Like
IQ-Numeric
Character
Set
7
7
37
100
75
127
3
5
Alphameric
Character
Set*
7
7
37 numerics
18 non-numerics
100 numerics
50 non-numerics
75
75
127
127
"210
3
3
5
5
8.3
I
7
7
Maximum Number of Bit Density
Characters Between
Bits per Bits per
Stan Sentinel and End
Inch
mm
Sentinel Characte~s
37 numerics
• 1 Hex code = 1 numeric charuc·ter,
2 Hex codes = 1 non-numeric character
•• MSR only.
NOTE: Full width encoding is recommended for the MSR and is requiredfor the MHS.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
"i~~_i
=~= ~ =
M 3278.4
Jul79
DP Machines
SPECIAL FEATURES
IBM 32.78 OtSPLAY CONSOLE
Model 2A
KEYBOARDS
Cabling: Cables jrQm the DIsplay Co_Ie tQ the ProceSStN will
be furnished by IBM for keyboards #4631, 4632 and 4634.
The fixed cable length provided jQr theR jeatures is 25 jeet (7.6
meters). The cables must be ordered via normal procedures.
For keyboard #4633 the cables must be supplied by the
customer as outlined for the 3278 model 2 in the IBM Information Display System Installation Manual - Physical Planning. GA27-2787. The maximum cable length IQr this j~lure is
Purpose: A cathode-ray tube (CAT) display console which at.
taches to 4331 and 4341 Processors and provides for operator
interaction for both normal operations and maintenance. An operator console keyboard with an operator control panel available on
the primary 3278 mdl 2A is the means to Power On (4341 only).
Power Off. Initial Mic.rocode Load (IML). and Start or Stop processor operations. See feature # 4631 or #4632 for the 4341. or
#4634 for the 4331 in "Special Features" below.
Highlights: Displays characters in a 7 x 14 matrix (uppercase
alphabet is displayed in a 7 x 9 matrix). arranged in 24 rows of 80
characters each. Rows 1 through 20 are usable by the operator.
rows 21 through 24 are used for system status information. A
96-character set is used. consisting. of 26 upper case alphabetic.
26 lower case alphabetic. 10 numeric and 32 special characters.
plus space and null.
In ~dditjon to Pow~r On (4341 only). Power Off. IML and
Start/Stop. the conGole allows the operator to manually control
such functions as storage display and operation. address comparIng. ar.d normal versus instruction step processing. The console
indicates to the operator both proper operations and malfunctions.
should they occur.
For maintenance and service support the console can display and
store the status of the processor complex and other valuable
servicing information. It also provides a means for using diagnostic tools.
The 3278 model 2A that is used as the primary console is normally installed concurrently with the installation of the 4331 or 4341
Processor.
Operator Factors: The 3278 has an anti-glare screen. Indicators
are displayed in symbols and/or words outside of the data area.
The keyboard. which is low in profile. provides a palm rest area
and has separators to help prevent accidental striking of control
keys.
Editing: Cursor move, tab. home. back tab. insert. delete. erase to
end-of-field and erase all input keys are basic to the console
keyboard. Alphameric. special symbol and cursor move keys have
typamatic capability. Twelve (12) Program Function (PF) keys are
basic.
Audible Alarm: An alarm is is sounded under program control to
alert the operator to a special condition. This alarm. during keyboard operation. is also sounded when a character is entered into
the next-to-Iast pOSition on the screen (except when attached to a
4331). The operator may adjust the volume of the tone.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide high availability to the customer.
This high availability has been achieved through use of problem
determination and recovery procedures that are easily understood
and used by the operator. The procedures are provided by the
Problem Determination Guide Manual that will be stored under the
keyboard palm rest.
Prerequisites: An available console position on a 4300 Processor
... see 4331 or 4341. 3278 md! 2As require an Operator Console
Keyboard. The 3278 mdl 2A used as the primary console on a
4300 Processor must be equipped with an Operator Console
Keyboard with an operator control panel... see "Special
Features" below.
SPECIFY
•
Voltag, (120 V. AC. 1-phase. 3-wire. 60Hz): #9890 for locking
plug. or #9891 for non-lock plug.
•
Power Cable: If the standard 2.8 meter (9 foot) power cable is
not desired. specify #9511 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable. #9512
for 3.7 meter (12 foot) cable. or #9513 lor 4.5 meter (15 foot)
cable.
•
System Attachment: For record purposes only. specify #9606
for attachment to 4331. or #9607 for 4341.
Prices:
3278
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
2A
$79
$67
$2,680
$21.50
49251eel (1500 meters).
.
Limitations: Keyboards used on the 3278 mdl 2A are not
interchangeable with keyboards used on 3278 mdls 1 thru 4.
nor with keyboards used on 3277 mdls 1. 2. A maximum of
one keyboard can be ordered· for a 3278 mdl 2A.
75-KEY OPERATOR CONSOLE KEYBOARD WITH CHANNEL TO
CHANNEL (#4631). [For use with 4341 only] Typewriter-like
layout. movable. with 12 PF keys available on the top row through
use of the "Alternate" shift key. Provides 49 data keys and 26
control keys. and contains an operator control panel with 4 control
keys (Power Off. Lamp Test. Power On/IML. Channel 10 Channel)
and 6 LED indicators (Basic Check. System, Wait. Power in Process. Power Complete. Channel IQ Channel Disabled). Note: Channel
IQ Channel is required for a 4341 Processor equipped with a
Adapter. (#1850).
Maximum:
One.
Channel-to-channel
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4632 or #4633. Field
Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
75 KISY OPERATOR CONSOLE KEYBOARD WITHOUT CHANNEL
TO CHANNEL (#4632). [For use with 4341 only] Same as #4631
but the operator control panel does not have the Ch~nel IQ
Ch~nnel control key or the Channel IQ Channel Disabled Indicator.
Maximum: .One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4631 or
#4633. Field In8tallatlon: Available at time of manufacture only.
75-KEY OPERATOR CONSOLE KEYBOARD (#4633). [For use
with 4341 only] Same as #4631 but with no operator control
panel. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#4631 or #4632. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
75-KEY OPERATOR CONSOLE KEYBOARD WITHOUT CHANNEL
TO CHANNEL OR POWER ON (#4634). [For use with 4331 only]
Same as #4631 but the operator control panel does not have the
Channel IQ Channel control key. or the Channel to Ch~el Disabled
Indicator. or the Power On key. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Available att/me of manufacture only.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6340). A lock and key which prevents
modification or display of data in the display terminal when in the
"Off" position. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature
Prices~
MRC
MLC
2 Yr Purchase MMMC
75-Key Operator Console
Keyboard (4341)
#4633 $16 $14
75-Key Operator Con80le Keyboard
w Chan-to-Chan (4341) 4631
34
29
w/o Chan·ta-Chan (4341)4632 32
27
w/o Chan-ta-Chan (4331) 4634 32
27
Security Keytock
6340 35SUC-
$560
$6.00
1,160
1,080
6.50
6.50
35
6.50
N/C
1,080
ACCESSORIES: A Console Table (#1550) is available... see
"Accessories" under 4331 or 4341 for Ordering instructions and
price.
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Mod_ Changes: Not recommended jQr field install~tUm.
(
\
Not to be
feprQd~ed
withQut written permission.
--------------_.- - ---
-------- -
M 3.28~
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3284 PRINTER
Purpose: Provides hardcopy output at a speed of 40 cps.
NOTE: For possible use with System/3, see GSD
Manual.
Model 1 Provides storage of 480 characters and attaches to a
3271 Control Unit mdl 1. 2, 11 or 12, or a 3272 Control Unit mdl 1 or 2, or a 3274 Control Unit mdl 1 A,
1 B, 1C or 1 D, or a 8101 on a 8100 System. For use
with 3790 or 8100, see below.
Model 2 Provides storage of 1,920 characters and attaches to
either a 3271 Control Unit mdl 2 or 12, or a 3272
Control Unit mdl 2. or a 3274 mdl 1 A, 1 B, 1 C or 1 D,
or a 8101 on a 8100 System. For use with 3790 or
8100, see below.
Model 3
Attaches to and uses the storage buffer of a 3275
Display Station mdl 2, 3 or 12.
Highlights: Provides a hardcopy output at a speed of 40 cps,
using the EBCDIC character set ... for ASCII character sets, see
"Specify" below. Model 1 and 2 may print from the Processor or
the contents of a 3277 Display Station, 3284, 3286 or 3287
Printer buffer via the 3271, 3272 or 3274 Control Unit. When
used with the 8100 System, the 3284 prints under control of the
operating system. Model 3 prints the contents of the buffers of the
3275 Display Station or the 5275 Direct Numerical Control Station.
The unit has a pin feed platen which permits the feeding of marginally punched continuous forms paper. 120, 126 or 132 print
positions may be specified ... see "Specify." Line spacing is 6
lines/inch. Matrix characters are formed by 7 vertical wires printing dots in up to 4 of 7 possible horizontal positions (see Note
below). Use of the underscore in conjunction with another character will overprint the lowest dot in that character and is not recommended. Refer to SRL GA24-3488 for forms design considerations
and limitations. Up to 6-part forms can be printed with a maximum
thickness of .018" (for optimum feeding and stacking, no more
than 3 parts are recommended). Forms lengths can be 3" to 14"
in increments of 1/6". Card stock continuous forms are not recommended. Note: With special feature # 1066 matrix characters
are formed using 8 vertical wires.
For use with 3790 Communication System: A 3271 or 3272 is not
required when the 3284 is attached to the 3791. For additional
information see the 3791 Configurator GA27-2768-6. For power,
see Specify [1] below; for cable, see M10000 for 3790. Host
programs written for the IBM 3270 are not supported by the 3790
System.
stitutes the Logical OR (\) and Logical NOT (~) in place of
the exclamation mark(!) and circumflex (1\). PREREQUISITE:
If used with the 3271, ASCII Transmission Code (#9762 or
# 1200) is required on the 3271.
#9092 -- for ASCII Character Set (B) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the standard 64 ASCII characters.
PREREQUISITE: If used with the 3271, ASCII Transmission
Code (#9762 or #1200) is required on the 3271.
[4] Cables: See M 10000 pages for 3284-1, -2 cable prices and
ordering instructions. For cable specifications, see 3270 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2787.
PRICES:
3284
Mdl
MACI
MRC
MLC
2 yr
1
$141
2
3
150
$120
128
122
104
MMMC
$45.00
45.00
24.00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 60%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model changes between model 1 and model 2
are field installable. Model 3 is field installable on the 3275 or
5275 but is not interchangeable with a model 1 or model 2.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
3284 model 1 to model 2 ..... $694
SPECIAL FEATURES
DATA ANALYSIS-APL FEATURE (#1066). [Mdl 2 only with 3271
or 3272] Provides dual case EBCDIC, the APL set, and TN print
train (see Type Catalog, 5/370 Printers) characters. Field
Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Data Analysis-APL Fea
MACI
MRC
#1066$ 42
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
$ 36
$1,385
MMMC
$2.00
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available. on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) - Permits placement of continuous
forms (out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
For use with the 8100 Information System: For special features
that are not supported, see M 8101 pages. A 3271 or 3272 is not
required when the 3284 mdl 1 or 2 is attached to the 8101 with
#1505 or #1506. For character set, specify #9809. For power,
see Specify [1] below. For cables, see M10000 pages for 8100
System. Host programs written for the 3270 are not supported by
the 8100 system.
PREREQUISITES: Model 1 -- a 3271 mdl 1, 2, 11 or 12, or a
3272 mdl 1 or mdl 2, or a 3274 mdl 1 A, 1 B, 1 C or 1 D with
appropriate Device/Terminal Adapter, or a 8101 with #1505 or
#1506 (see 8101 pages).
Model 2 -- a 3271 mdl 2 or 12, or a 3272 mdl 2. or a 3274 mdl
1 A, 1 B, 1C or 1 D with appropriate Device/Terminal Adapter, or a
8101 with #1505 or #1506 (see 8101 pages).
Model 3 -- a 3275 mdl 2, 3 or 12 with Printer Adapter (#5550)
or a 5275 with Printer Adapter (#5555).
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136'970 or equivalent, is
required.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
Purchase
$4,255
4,775
4,070
or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Pin Feed Platen: #9162 for 126 print positions (13-1/8"
hole-to-hole), or #9167 for 120 print positions (12-1/2" holeto-hole), or #9168 for 132 print positions (13-7/8" hole-tohole). NOTE: Do not order #9167 or #9168 unless paper is
available in your area.
[3] Character Set: Specify one of the following unless Data
Analysis-APL Feature (#1066) is selected;
#9089 - for EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 characters described on the
EBCDIC typewriter keyboard. #9089 required if used with
the 3275 mdl 3. PREREQUISITE: If used with the 3271 mdl
1 or 2, EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) is required on
the 3271 mdl 1 or 2.
#9091 -- for ASCii Character Set (A) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters but sub-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - --- --=----=- =--':' =
M 3286
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3286 PRINTER
Purpose: Provides hard copy output at a speed of 66 cps.
NOTE: For possible use with S/3, see GSD
manual.
Model 1 Provides storage of 480 characters and
either a 3271 Control Unit mdl 1, 2, 11
3272 Control Unit mdl 1 or 2, or a 3274
1C or 1 D, or a 8101 on a 8100 System.
3790 or 8100, see below.
attaches to
or 12, or a
mdl 1A, 1B,
For use with
Model 2 Provides storage of 1,920 characters and attaches to
either a 3271 Control Unit mdl 2 or 12, a 3272 Control Unit mdl 2, a 3274 Control Unit mdl 1 A, 1 B, 1 C
or 1 D, a 8101 on a 8100 System, or S/370 mdls 138
and 148 as a hard copy console printer via their standard Integrated Console Printer Adapter. For use with
3790 or 8100, see below.
Model 3 Attaches to and uses the storage buffer of a 3735
Programmable Buffered Terminal mdl 1.
Highlights: Provides controls, storage and hard copy output at a
speed of 66 cps, using the EBCDIC character set ... for ASCII
character sets, see "Specify" below. The unit may print from a
Processor or the contents of a 3277 Display Station, 3284, 3286
or 3287 Printer buffer via the 3271, 3272 or 3274 Control Unit.
When attached to a 3735, the 3286 mdl 3 prints under 3735
Program Control. When attached to a S/370 mdl 138 or 148 via
the standard Integrated Console Printer Adapter the 3286 mdl 2
prints under system control program control as supported by that
system control program (see 3138 or 3148 "Machines" pages for
details). When attached to a 8100 Information System, the 3286
prints under control of the operating system.
The unit has a pin feed platen which permits the feeding of marginally punched continuous forms paper. 120, 126 or 132 print
positions may be specified ... see "Specify." Line spacing is 6
lines/inch. Matrix characters are formed by 7 vertical wires printing dots in up to 4 of 7 possible horizontal positions (see Note
below). Use of the underscore in conjunction with another character will overprint the lowest dot in that character and is not recommended. Refer to SRL GA24-3488 for forms design considerations
and limitations. Up to 6-part forms can be printed with a maximum
thickness of .018" (for optimum feeding and stacking, no more
than 3 parts are recommended). Forms lengths can be 3" to 14"
in increments of 1/6". Card stock continuous forms are not recommended. Note: With Data Analysis-APL Feature (#1066)
matrix characters are formed using 8 vertical wires.
For use with 3790 Communication System: A 3271 or 3272 is not
required when the 3286 is attached to the 3791. For additional
information see the 3791 Configurator, GA27-2768-6. For power,
see Specify [1] below; for cable, see M10000 for 3790. Host
programs written for the IBM 3270 are not supported by the 3790
System.
For use with the 8100 Information System: For special features
that are not supported see 8101 machine pages. A 3271 or 3272
is not required when the 3286 mdl 1 or 2 is attached to the 8101
with #1505 or #1506. For character set, specify #9089. For
power, see Specify [1] below. For cables, see M10000 pages for
the 8100 System. Host programs written for the 3270 are not
supported by the 8100 System.
PREREQUISITES:
Printer Adapter or unless Data Analysis-APL Feature (#1066)
is selected.
#9089 -- for EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 characters described on the
EBCDIC typewriter keyboard. PREREQUISITE: If used with
the 3271 mdl 1 or 2, EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) is
requi'fed on the 3271 mdl 1 or 2.
#9091 -- for ASCII Character Set (A) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters but substitutes the Logical OR (I) and Logical NOT (~) in place of
the exclamation mark (!) and circumflex (A). PREREQUISITE:
If used with the 3271, ASCII Transmission Code (#9762 or
# 1200) is required on the 3271.
#9092 - for ASCII Character Set (B) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the standard 64 ASCII characters.
PREREQUISITES: If used with the 3271, ASCII Transmission
Code (#9762 or #1200) is required on the 3271. If used
with the 3735, ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) is required on the 3735.
[4] Character Set when attaching to a S/370 mdl 138 or 148 via
the standard Integrated Console Printer Adapter:
#9089 only -- for EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of
manufacture only) ... provides the 64 characters described
on the EBCDIC typewriter keyboard.
[5] Cables unless attaching to the S/370 mdl 138 or 148 via the
standard Console Printer Adapter: See M 10000 pages for
3286 cable prices and ordering instructions. For cable specifications, see 3270 Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27-2787.
[6) Cables when attaching to the S/370 mdl 138 or 148 via the
standard Integrated Console Printer Adapter: Cable order
required. For ordering instructions see Installation Manual Physical Planning, GA22-7004.
PRICES:
Mdl
3286
1
2
3
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 yr
$169
179
155
$144
152
132
Model 2 - a 3271 mdl 2 or 12, a 3272 mdl 2, or a 3274 mdl
1 A, 1B, 1 C or 1 D with appropriate Device/Terminal Adapter, or a
S/370 mdl.138 or 148. Also attaches to a 8101 with #1505 or
#1506. See 8101 pages.
$47.00
47.00
45.50
Model Changes: Model changes between model 1 and model 2
are field installable ... model 3 is not interchangeable with model 1
or model 2.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
3286 model 1 to model 2 ..... $736
SPECIAL FEATURES
DATA ANALYSIS-APL FEATURE (#1066).
[Mdl 2 only and
attached to 3271 or 3272) Provides dual case EBCDIC, the APL
set, and TN print train (see Type Catalog, S/370 Printers) characters. Field Installation: Yes. Note: Not available when attaching
the mdl 2 to a S/370 mdl 138 or 148 via the standard Integrated
Console Printer Adapter.
MAC/
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
#1066$ 42
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
$ 36 $1,385
MMMC
$2.00
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) -- Permits placement of continuous
forms (out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
Model 3 -- a 3735 mdl 1 with #7880 installed.
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136970 or equivalent, is
required.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Pin Feed Platen: #9162 for 126 print positions (13-1/8"
hole-to-hole), or #9167 for 120 print positions (12-1/2" holeto-hole), or #9168 for 132 print positions (13-7/8" hole-tohole). NOTE: Do not order #9167 or #9168 unless paper is
available in your area, or if attaching the 3286 mdl 2 to a
S/370 mdl 138 or 148 via their Integrated Console Printer
Adapter.
[3] Character Set: Specify one of the following unless attaching to
a S/370 mdl 138 or 148 via their standard Integrated Console
MMMC
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 60%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Data Analysis-APL Fea
Model 1 -- a 3271 mdl 1, 2,11 or 12, or a 3272 mdl 1 or 2, or
a 3274 mdl 1 A, 1 B, 1 C or 1 D with appropriate Device/Terminal
Adapter, or a 8101 with #1505 or #1506. See 8101 pages.
Purchase
$5,690
6,305
5,475
* Corrects Termination Charge Percent.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- --- - --_.-
--- -----------
M 3287.1
Jul79
DP Machines
- Use and follow the problem determination procedures and fill
out trouble report prior to calling for IBM service.
- Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer shipping
dock at the time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions
will be provided by IBM.
- Providing a desk or table top to support the 3287.
IBM 3287 PRINTER Models 1 and 2
Purpose: Provides hard copy output. The 3287 mdls 1 and 2
attach to a 3271 Control Unit mdl 1, 2, 11 or 12, a 3272 Control
Unit mdl 1 or 2, a 3274 Control Unit mdl 1 A, 1 B, 1 C or 1 D, a
3276 Control Unit Display Station mdl 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13 or
14, a 3791 Controller, or to the 8101 Storage and Input/Output
Unit of the 8100 Information System. The 3287 mdl 1 or 2 also
attaches, via the Integrated Console Printer Adapter, to a S/370
mdl 138 or 148 as a console printer. The 3271 mdl 1 or 2 also
attaches to the 4331 Processor via the Display/Printer Adapter, or
directly to a 4341 Processor.
Model 1
80 cps maximum bi-directional printer.
Model 2
120 cps maximum bi-directional printer.
NOTE: Actual printer throughput is dependent upon operational
and system characteristics. Factors such as controller configuration and line transmission speed, output format, and programming application processing must all be considered in determining actual throughput.
Highlights: The 3287 consists of control functions, printer and
indicator lights in one integrally designed desk-top unit. Special
features are available which permit tailoring of the printer to the
user"s requirements.
Where the 3287 replaces a 3284 or 3286 Printer the Variable
Width Forms Tractor (special feature) is used in lieu of the Pin
Feed Platen or Forms Tractor RPQ
In addition, Friction
Feed Paper Handling is available as a special feature.
Control Functions: Provides the control for all online operations.
This unit requires the 3271/3272 Attachment (#8330) for receiving data from a 3271/3272 Control Unit, a 3274 Control Unit
(Terminal Adapter Type B), a 3790 Communication System,
through the 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit of the 8100
System, a S/370 mdl 138/148 (Integrated Console Printer Adapter), or the 3274/3276 Attachment Feature (#8331) for receiving
data from a 3274 Control Unit (Terminal Adapter Type A) or a
3276 Control Unit Display Station, a 4331
Processor
Display/Printer Adapter or a 4341 Processor.
Printer: Maximum printer throughput is obtained with bi-directional
serial matrix printing and indexing without unnecessary print head
movement. The printer dot matrix is 4 of 7 wide by 8 high giving
high legibility with character spacing at 10 to the inch. Line spacing is 6 and 8 lines to the inch. Up to 1 32 characters can be
printed in a line. Up to 6 part forms (total thickness -0.457mm/0.018·') may be used. For any multi-part or pre-printed
continuous forms the Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700) is
recommended. Five and six part continuous forms should be tried
on an individual basis for acceptable feeding, registration, and
print quality.
Friction Feed Paper Handling (# 411 0) is recommended for use
with non-preprinted single part roll or fan-fold paper, with a minimum width of 203mm/8", when the Variable Width Forms Tractor
(#8700) is not used. Maximum overall forms width is 378mm/147/8"; card stock forms are not recommended. See GA24-3488 for
form specifications and limitations.
PREREQUISITES:
Attachment
Attachment
Fea. on 3287
Device Adapter on
Control Unit
3271/3272
3274
#8330
#8330/8331
Available port or added #3250
Type A or B Adapter
(see M 3274 pages)
Available port or added #3255,
#3256, #3257
Available port or #7911 or
#7912 or added #7912.
#9425
Available port on #1505 or
#1506
3276
#8331
3791
#8330
S/370 mdl 138/148 #8330
8101
#8330
Forms Handling; Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700) or Friction
Feed Paper Handling (#4110) must be ordered for each 3287 mdl
1 or 2.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136653 or equivalent, is
required.
Specify Features (For details, see Specify descriptions):
(AA) (BB) (CC) (DO) (EE) (FF) (GG)
(d) •
-
-
-
-
-
Locking Plug
#9890
Non-lock Plug
9891
Power Cord
1.8m (6 foot)
9511
2.8m (9 foot)
default
9512
3.7m (12 foot)
9513
4.5m (15 foot)
Cables ... see Specify below
Character Set (Note a)
EBCDIC
9082
ASCII (B) (Note b)
Y084
Variable Width Forms
9185
Tractor-Paper Handlg
Page Length Cntrl (a)
9550
SCS Support
9660
X Print Error Indication
9488
Character Print Operation
480 Characters
9520
960 Characters
9521
1920 Characters
9522
2560 Characters
9523
3440 Characters
9524
3564 Char. (Note e)
9525
System Attach ... see Specify
Blower
9030
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Audible Alarm, Mono/Dual case, Single/Double line spacing, and
Maximum Print Position are standard functions. Audible Alarm
(activated under program control) and Dual Case are not supported by S/370 mdls 138/148 as a Console Printer, or when attached to any 4300 Processor. Dual Case is not supported for
ASCII-B when using 3271/3272 Attachment (#8330). Mono/Dual
switch is inoperative when the 3287 is operating in SCS (SNA
Character String) data stream mode or when copying from a display or when operating in APL mode.
-
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the customer. This has been done through the use of problem determination
and recovery routines and procedures that can be understood and
used by the operator. See Customer Responsibilities below.
NOTES:
(a) Do not specify if Data Analysis-APL Feature (#1066) is selected for attachment to the 3271 or 3272 Control Unit.
(b)Cannot be installed with SCS Support (#9660) or APL/Text
(#1120).
(c)For use of the 3287 mdl 1 or 2 as a Console Printer.
(d)For Terminal Adapter Type B on the 3274 Control Unit select
from Specify Features #9520 and #9522 for Character Print
Operations. For Terminal Adapter Type A Specify Feature
#9520 is not required. Specify Features #9521, 9523, 9524,
9525 and 9660 cannot be selected for Terminal Adapter Type
Customer Set-Up (CSU): The 3287 is designated as Customer
Set-Up thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation flexibility.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for:
- Adequate site, system and other vender preparation.
- Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking, and
placement of the 3287.
- Physical set-up, connection of cables, switch settings, and
checkout.
- Contact Field Engineering to make cable connections of IBM
CSU units to IBM non CSU units where customer access areas
are not provided.
- Notify IBM of intent to relocate and follow IBM instructions for
relocation.
(AA) = 3271 /3272 Control Unit
(BB) = 3274 Control Unit
(CC) = 3276 Control Unit Display Station
(DO) = 3791 Control Unit
(EE) = S/370 mdl 138/148 (Note c)
(FF) = 8100 System (8101 attach)
(GG) = 4331, 4341 Processors
B.
(e) Not applicable to 3274 mdl lB.
SPECIFY: [1] Plug (120 V AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9890 for
locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug.
[2] Power Cord: If standard 2.8m (9 foot) power cord is not desired, specify #9511 for 1.8m (6 foot) power cord, #9512 for·
3.7m (12 foot) power cord, or #9513 for 4.5m (15 foot) power
cord.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --:;:- =---- --=----":' =
M 3287.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3287 Printer Models 1 and 2 (cont'd)
[3] Cables: See M 10000 pages for 3287 mdls 1 and 2 cable
prices and ordering instructions. See Installation Manual Physical Planning, GA27-2787, for cable details. When attaching to the S/370 mdl 138/148 via the Integrated Console
Printer Adapter, refer to Installation Manual-Physical Planning,
GA22-7004, for cable ordering information.
[4] Character Set: Specify one of the following unless the Data
Analysis-APL Feature (#1066) is selected. See "Special Features."
#9082 ... for EBCDIC Character Set.
#9084 .,. for ASCII Character Set (B).
NOTES: The character set specified [EBCDIC or ASCII (B)]
must be the same as the transmission code/character
set used on the control unit to which it is attached .,.
ASCII (B) (#9084) is not supported as S/370 mdl
138/148 Console Printer, or when attached to any 4300
Processor. ... If used with the 3791, ASCII Support
(#9022) is required on the 3791. Do not specify ASCII(B) Character Set (#9084) when APL/Text (#1120) has
been selected.
[5] Variable Width Forms Tractor - Paper Handling #9185: Specify
if Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700) is ordered and there is
a requirement to handle forms with an overall width from 76.2
to 203.2mm (3 to 8 inches). PREREQUISITE: Variable Width
Forms Tractor (#8700).
[6] Page Length Control #9550: Allows customer insertion of
Forms Feed (FF) Character (HEX OC) into the data stream.
Upon detection of the FF character, the printer will skip to the
first print line of the next form. The form length is entered into
two decade switches on the 3287 by the operator and is variable from 00 to 99. (The programming implementation of this
feature is the customer's responsibility.) PREREQUISITE: Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700). LIMITATIONS: Cannot be
installed with Data Anaysis-APL Feature (#1066) or SCS Support (#9660). NOTES: Not supported as S/370 mdl 138/148
Console Printer ... When SCS Support (#9660) has been selected (includes page length control), the user can perform the
page length control function when not in SCS mode of operation.
[7] SCS Support #9660: Provides the capability to receive SCS
(SNA Character String) data stream from the host via a 3274
Control Unit or a 3276 Control Unit Display Station. This feature
allows the 3287 to perform such functions as:
- Vertical forms skipping to a header or to a vertical tab position
- Horizontal skipping to a horizontal tab stop position.
Page size, header location, vertical and horizontal tab positions
are host-loaded through the 3274 or 3276 via application
programming. Included in SCS Support (#9660) are Cancel
and Program Attention l/Program Attention 2 (PAl /PA2)
switches. Cancel switch allows operator termination of the
current print operation. PAl /PA2 switch allows an operator to
request a specific action from the user written program in the
MAXIMUM:
One.
FIELD
INSTALLATION:
Yes.
host.
LIMITATIONS: Cannot be installed with 3271/3272 Attachment
(#8330), with 3274 mdl 1 B or 10, or ASCII Character Set (B)
(#9084). PREREQUISITES: Variable Width Forms Tractor
(#8700). 3276 mdls 11, 12, 13 or 14 or 1, 2, 3 or 4 with
SDLC/BSC Switch (#6315) in SDLC mode or SNA/SDLC
Support specified/configured on the 3274. Operator settings
for page size, 6 or 8 L?I, and Maximum Print Position can be
overriden by the host program when the 3287 has 3274/3276
Attachment (#8331) and SCS Support (#9660) and only when
user is operating in SCS mode.
[8] X Print Error Indication #9488: To indicate an error an X is
printed on the print line immediately below the last line normally
printed. LIMITATION: Inactive when 3287 is attached to a 3274
or 3276 via feature #8331 and is operating in SCS mode.
To specify the printer buffer size when the printer is used in
3270 data stream mode.
#9521 -- (960 character print operation) for use with a program which requires a printer buffer size of 960 bytes while
using Erase/Write Alternate Command.
#9522 - (1920 character print operation) for use with a program which requires a printer buffer size of 1920 bytes
while using Erase/Write Alternate Command.
#9523 - (2560 character print operation) for use with a program which requires a printer buffer size of 2560 bytes
while
using
Erase/Write
Alternate
Command.
PREREQUISITE: Extended Print Buffer (#3880).
#9524 -- (3440 character print operation) for use with a program which requires a printer buffer size of 3440 bytes
Erase/Write
Alternate
Command.
while
using
PREREQUISITE: Extended Print Buffer (#3880).
#9515 (3564 character print operation) ., for use with a program
which requires a printer buffer size of 3564 bytes while using
Erase/Write Alternate command. Prerequisite: Extended Print
Buffer (#3880). Limitation: This specify code only valid when
3287 is attached to a 3274 mdl lA, I C or I D.
NOTE: To provide compatibility with current application programs on the 3270 Information Display System the customer
can use an Erase/Write command for Specify #9521 to provide 480 character print operation and Specify #9522,
#9523, #9524 and #9525 to provide 1920 character print
operation. Allowable usage in SNA Character String of the full
buffer varies according to the control unit (3274 or' 3276) to
which the printer is attached and to programming considerations. See IBM 3270 Information Display System Component
Description, GA27-2749, for details. Copy operation from
larger screen display to smaller printer buffer is not acceptable.
3287 PRINTER ATTACHMENT TABLE
-- CHARACTER PRINT OPERATION 480/960 1920/1920 1920/2560 1920/3440
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
3276 Mdl
1
11
2
12
3
13
4
14
NOTE: 3276 mdls 1, 2 and 3 with the SDLC/BSC Switch feature installed and operating in SDLC mode will support all 3287
character print operations except 3564 Character Print Operation
(#9525), (see previous Copy operation restriction).
[10] Blower (#9030): Must be specified for 3287 mdl 1 or 2 to be
used in an environment above 32.3°C (90°F) ambient temperature [specification limits up to 40.5°C (104 OF)]. Not recommended for field installation.
[11] System Attachment: Identify the attaching Control Unit or the
natively attached Host Processor by specifying the following
codes:
Control Unit/
Natively Attached
Host Processor
3271
3272
3274-1 A
3274-1 B
3274-1 C
3274-10
Code
#9251
#9252
#9549
#9554
#9551
#9261
3276, 1-4
3276,11-14
3791
S/370 mdl 138
S/370 mdl 148
8101 (direct attach)
4331
4341
[9] Character Print Operation:
For 3271/3272 Attachment specify one of the following:
#9520 - (480 character print operation) for use with a 3271
Control Unit mdl 1 or 11, a 3272 Control Unit mdl 1, a
3274 Control Unit mdl 1 A, 1 B, 1 C or 10, or a 3791 Controller, or to the 8101 of the 8100 System when attached
via feature #8330. NOTE: #9E20 (480 character print
operation) can also be specified for use with a 3271 Control Unit mdl 2 or 12, or a 3272 Control Unit mdl 2.
#9522 - (1920 character print operation) for use with a 3271
Control Unit mdl 2 or 12, a 3272 Control Unit mdl 2, a
3274 Control Unit mdl 1 A, 1 B, 1 C or 10, a 3791 Controller,
or to the 8101 of the 8100 System when attached via feature #8330, or a S/370 mdl 138/148 Integrated Console
Printer Adapter.
For 3274/3276 Atfachment specify one of the following:
PRICES:
Mdl
3287
1
2
MRC
MLC
2 yr
$167
203
$142
173
Purchase
$5,680
6,055
#9552
#9553
#9253
#9254
#9255
#9606
9262
9263
MMMC
$ 47
58
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Customer Set-Up Designated: Yes.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Modell to Model 2 ..... $ 375
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ------=- =- - =--':' =
M 3287.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3287 Printer Models 1 and 2 (conl'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
(For details, see Special Feature descriptions.)
(AA) (BB) (CC) (DO) (EE) (FF)
Data Analysis-APL
#1066
Feature (Note a)
APL/Text (Note c)
1120
ECSA (Note c)
3610
Ext Print Buffer
3880
Friction Fd Paper Hndlg 4110
3271/3272 Attachment 8330
3274/3276 Attachment 8331
Var. Width Forms
Tractor
8700
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
(AA) = 3271/3272 Control Unit
(BB) = 3274 Control Unit
(CC) = 3276 Control Unit Display Station
(DO) = 3791 Control Unit
(EE) = S/370 mdl 138/148 (Note b)
(FF) = 8100 System (8101 attach)
NOTES:
(a) Cannot install Page Length Control (#9550) or Character Set
(#9082 or #9084) and Data Analysis-APL Feature (# 1066) on
the same machine.
(b) For use of 3287 as a console printer.
(c) Cannot be installed on a 3287 that will attach to a 3274 mdl
1 B.
DATA ANALYSIS-APL FEATURE (#1066).
Provides dual case
EBCDIC, the APL set, and support of TN characters as defined in
Type Catalog, S/370 Printers, under "TN Text Printing."
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Customer Set-Up: No.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Page Length Control
(#9550), Character Set #9082 or #9084, 3271/3272 Attachment (#8330) to a 3274, or 3274/3276 Attachment (#8331).
Prerequisites: 1920 Character Print Operation (#9522) on 3287
... Data Analysis-APL Feature (#1066) on 3271 mdl 2 or 12, or
3272 mdl 2. Note: Not supported as a S/370 mdl 138/148 console printer or for the 3791 or the 8100 System when attached by
feature #8330, or when attached to any 4300 Processor.
APL/TEXT (#1120).
Provides the capability for printing the
222-character APL/Text character set including the 94-character
EBCDIC character set. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Customer Set-Up: No. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
3271/3272 Attachment (#8330), or on a 3287 Printer which is to
attach to a 3276 without ,APL/Text Control feature (#1067) or
3274 mdl 1 B control unit. or to a 3274 Control Unit customized
without the APL/Text Control Function. or when attached to any
4300 Processor. ASCII-(B) Character Set (#9084) cannot be
specified with this feature. Prerequisites: Extended Character Set
Adapter (#3610) and EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
(#1066) to a 3274. Prerequisites: For 3271/3272 Control Unit -available port or added feature #3250 on a 3271 mdl 1. 2, 11 or
12. or 3272 mdl 1 or 2 ... see M 3271 or M 3272 pages. For
3274 Control Unit -- an available Type B port or added Type B
Adapter ... see M 3274 pages. For 3791 Controller ... Qevice
Attachment Type II (#7911/7912) ... see M 3791 pages. For
8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit ... Display and Printer Adapter (#1505) or Display and Printer Additional (#1506) ... see
8100 Information System. For S /370 mdl 138 or 148 -- an Integrated Console Printer Adapter (#9425) ... see M 3138. M 3148
pages.
3274/3276 ATTACHMENT (#8331).
Provides one interface for
attachment of a 3287 mdl 1 or 2 to a 3274 Control Unit mdl 1 A.
1 B. 1C or 1 D. or to a 3276 Control Unit Display Station mdl 1. 2.
3. 4. 11, 1 2. 13 or 1 4. or to any 4300 Processor. Provides buffer
storage required for print operation. Included in this feature is
Buffer Reprint support. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Customer Set-Up: No. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
3271/3272 Attachment (#8330) or Data Analysis - APL Feature
(#1066). Prerequisites: An available port or added feature
#3255. #3256, #3257 on a 3276. or an available Type A port or
added Type A Adapter on a 3274, or an available port on the
4331 Processor Display/Printer Adapter. or an available console
position on a 4341 Processor.
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). A forms feeding
device for continuous margin punched forms. Overall forms width
from 76.2mm to 381.0mm (3 to 15 inches) can be fed. Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Customer
Set-Up:
Yes.
Prerequisites: Variable Width Forms Tractor-Covers (#9850) and
Variable Width Forms Tractor - Paper Handling (#9185) where
there is a requirement to handle forms with an overall width from
76.2 to 203.2 mm (3 to 8 inches).
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
Data Analysis-APL Fea #1066 $ 11
APL/Text
1120
6
Ext Char Set Adapter
3610
15
7
Extended Print Buffer
3880
Friction Fd Paper Hndlng 4110
6
3271 /3272 Attachment 8330
31
3274/3276 Attachment 8331
6
Var Width Forms Tractor 8700
6
MLC
2 yr
$
9
5
13
6
5
26
5
5
Purchase MMMC
$ 315
N/C
175
455
210
160
910
175
160
$ .50
4.00
.50
.50
3.50
.50
.50
Accessory Feature: Available on a purchase only basis. For shipment with machine. order number indicated below at the purchase
price indicated on the M 10000 pages. See M 10000 pages for
additional information and field installation.
Permits placement of continuous
FORMS STAND (#4450).
forms on stand above floor level and provides for stacking after
printing.
EXTENDED CHARACTER SET ADAPTER (#3610). Provides the
additional control and buffering necessary to access the extended
character set in APL/Text (#1120) feature. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Customer Set-Up: No. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with 3271/3272 Attachment (#8330). Corequisite:
APL/Text (# 1120).
EXTENDED PRINT BUFFER (#3880).
Provides additional buffer
storage which allows 2560. 3440 or 3564 character print operation
on the 3287. See SRL GA27-2749 for details. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Customer Set-Up: No. Limitations: Cannot
be installed with 3271/3272 Attachment (#8330). Allowable
usage in SNA Character String of the full buffer varies according
to the control unit (3274 or 3276) to which the printer is attached
and to programming considerations. See IBM 3270 Information
Display System Component Description. GA 27-2749 .. for details.
FRICTION FEED PAPER HANDLING (#4110).
For friction feeding of single part non-preprinted continuous and fan fold paper
with a minimum width of 203mm (8 inches). Included in this feature is a paper tear bar for tearing continuous forms approximately
64mm (2-1/2 inches) above the printline. Feature #4110 is used
interchangeably with the Variable Width Forms Tractor and is
attached and removed by the customer. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Customer Set-up: Yes.
3271/3272 ATTACHMENT (#8330).
Pr.:)Vides one interface for
attachment of a 3287 mdl 1 or 2 to a 3271 Control Unit mdl 1. 2.
11 or 12, a 3272 Control Unit mdl 1 or 2. a 3274 Control Unit mdl
1 A. 1 B, 1 C or 1 D, a 3791 Controller. an 8101 Storqge and
Input/Output Unit. or a 3287 mdl 1 or 2 to a S/370 mdl 138 or
148 Integrated Console Printer Adapter. It provides the buffer
storage required for print operation. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Customer Set-Up: No. Limitations: Cannot be
installed with Extended Character Set Adapter (#3610). or with
3274/3276 Attachment (#8331) or Data Analysis-APL Feature
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=- =----- --=-----=
'!'
IBM
M 3287.4
Jul79
DP Machines
3287
PRINTER
Models
11
and
12
Purpose: Provides hard copy output for the 8100 Information
System via Loop attachment.
Model 11
80 cps maximum bi-directional printer.
Model 12
120 cps maximum bi-directional printer.
Note: Actual printer throughput is dependent upon operational
and system characteristics. Factors such as controller configuration, line transmission speed, output format, and programming
application processing must all be considered in determining
actual throughput.
Highlights: The 3287 mdls 11 and 12 consist of Loop communication functions, printer and indicator lights in one integrally designed desk-top unit. EBCDIC Dual Case Operation, Audible
Alarm, and Cancel Print are provided as standard functions. Variable Width Forms Tractor and Friction Feed Paper Handling are
available as special features.
The printer operates in SCS mode, which provides for customer
program defineable horizontal and vertical formatting, including
line density (6 or 8 lines per inch). Operator capability to set the
page length, page width, and the line density from the operator
panel is available via RPQ
Printer: Maximum printer throughput is obtained with bi-directional
serial matrix printing and indexing without unnecessary print head
movement. The printer dot matrix is 4 of 7 wide by 8 high giving
high legibility with character spacing at 10 characters per inch.
Line spacing is 6 and 8 lines to the inch. Up to 132 characters
can be printed on a line. Up to 6 part forms with total thickness of
.457mm (0.018 inches) may be used. For any multi-part or preprinted continuous forms, the Variable Width Forms Tractor
(#8700) is recommended. Five and six part continuous forms
should be tested on an individual basis for acceptable feeding,
registration and print quality. Maximum overall forms width is
381 mm (15 inches); card stock forms are not recommended. (See
GA24-3488 for form specifications and limitations.)
The Friction Feed Paper Handling (#4110) is recommended for
use with non-preprinted single part roll or fan-fold paper, with a
minimum width of 203mm (8 inches), when the Variable Width
Forms Tractor (#8700) is not used. Maximum overall forms width
is 378mm (14-7/8 inches); card stock forms are not recommended. (See GA24-3488 for form specififations and limitations.)
Problem Determination Procedure: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the customer. This has been done through the use of problem determination
and recovery routines and procedures that can be understood and
used by the operator. See Customer Responsibilities below.
Customer Set-up (CSU): The 3287 is designated as Customer
Set-up thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation flexibility.
[3] Carrier Rate: One of the following must be specified: -- #9825
for up to 9600 bps or #9829 for 38,400 bps.
[4] Variable Width Forms Tractor Paper Handling: Specify #9185 if
there is a requirement to handle forms with an overall width
from 76.2 to 203.2mm (3 to 8 inches).
[5] Blower: #9030 must be specified for 3287 mdl 11 or 12 to be
used in an environment above 32.3°C (90°F) ambient temperature [specification limits up to 40.5°C (104°F)]. Field
instal/ation: Not recommended.
[6] Direct Attach or Data Link Attach: Identify direct attached or
data link attached by specifying one of the following:
#9607 - Direct Attached Loop Operation
#9608 - Data Link Attached Loop Operation
PRICES
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 yr
3287
11
12
$196
233
$167
198
• Adequate site, system and other vendor preparation.
• Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking and
placement of the 3287.
$5,875
6,250
MMMC
$51.50
62,50
Rental Plan: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Customer Set-up: Yes
Model Changes: Can be made in the field.
Model Upgrade Purchase Price (there are no additional installation charges)
From Model 11 to Model 12 .... $375
Note: Model changes from models 1 and 2 to models 11 and 12
are not recommended for field installation.
SPECIAL FEATURES
One of the following two features must be ordered, or both features may be ordered.
FRICTION FEED PAPER HANDLING (#4110).
For friction feeding of a single part non-preprinted continuous and fan fold paper
with a minimum width of 203mm (8 inches). Included in this feature is a paper tear bar for tearing continuous forms approximately
64mm (2-1/2 inches) above the print line. #4110 is used interchangeably with the Variable Width Forms Tractor and is attached
and removed by the customer. Maximum: One. Field installation:
Yes. Customer Set-up: Yes.
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). A forms feeding
device for continuous margin punched forms. Overall forms width
from 76.2 to 381.0mm (3 to 15 inches) can be fed. Maximum:
One. Field installation: Yes. Customer Set-up: Yes. Prerequisite:
Variable Width Forms Tractor Paper Handling (#9185) where
there is a requirement to handle forms with an overall width from
76.2 to 203.2mm (3 to 8 inches).
Note: For applications that require forms skipping the Variable
Width Forms Tractor (#8700) is recommended.
Special feature Prices:
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for:
Purchase
Friction Fd Paper Hndlg #411 0
Variable Width
Forms Tractor
8700
MRC
MLC
2 yr
Purchase MMMC
$ 6
$ 5
$ 160
$ .50
6
5
160
.50
• Physical set-up connection of cables, switch settings and
checkout.
Accessory Feature: Available on a purchase only basis. For
shipment with machine, order number indicated below at the purchase price indicated in the M10000 pages. See Ml0000 pages
for additional information and field installation.
• Notify IBM of intent to relocate and follow IBM instructions for
relocation.
FORMS STAND (#4450). Permits placement of continuous forms
on stand above floor level and provides for stacking after printing.
• Use and follow the problem determination procedures and fill
out trouble report prior to calling for IBM service.
• Disconnecting, packing and removals to the customer shipping
dock at the time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions
will be provided by IBM.
• Providing a desk or table top to support the 3287.
Prerequisites: For direct attached Loop operation - #4830 or
#4835 on the 8100 System. For data link attached Loop operation - a 3842 Loop Control Unit.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index, GA20-1621, or specific system
bibliography.
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136653 or equivalent, is
required.
Specify: [1] Plugs (120 V AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): #9890 for
locking plug or #9891 for non-locking plug.
[2] Power Cord: If standard 2.8 meter (9 foot) power cord is not
desired, specify #9511 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) power cord,
#9512 for 3.7 meter (12 foot), or #9513 for 4.5 meter (15
foot) power cord.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
---------=- =---- --=----':' =
M 3288
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3288 LINE PRINTER
Purpose: Provides hard copy output at speeds up to 120 LPM.
NOTE: For possible use with S/3, see GSD
manual.
Highlights: Printing is from characters engraved on a revolving
print belt. Included as standard is one interchangeable print belt.
Provides hard copy output at a speed of up to 120 LPM (64 character set, EBCDIC or ASCII) or up to 80 LPM (120 character set,
EBCDIC only) ... see character set in "Specify" below. May print
fror.1 the CPU or the contents of a 3277 Display Station via the
3271 mdl 2 or 12, 3272 mdl 2, or 3274 mdl lA, lB, lC or 10.
When attached to a 8101 of a 8100 System the 3288 prints under
control of the operating system.
Prints 10 characters per inch, 132 characters or positions per line
at 6 lines per inch on continuous fan-fold paper. The paper handling mechanism is adjustable to accept paper from widths of 3.5"
(8.9cm) to 15.0" (38.10cm). Paper up to 6 parts plus carbon
(maximum total thickness is .020" or .50mm) can be accommodated. Use of card stock forms is not recommended (refer to Forms
Design Reference Guide for Printers, GA24-3488). Forms jam
detection is provided.
For use with 3790 Communication System: A 3271 or 3272 is not
required when the 3288 is attached to the 3791. For additional
information see the 3791 Configurator, GA27 -2768-6. For power,
see Specify [1] below; for cable, see Ml0000 for 3790. Host
programs written for the IBM 3270 are not supported by the 3790
System.
For use with the 8100 Information System: For special features
that are not supported, see M 8101 pages. A 3271 or 3272 is not
required when the 3288 mdl 2 is attached to the 8101 with
#1505 or #1506. For character set specify #9089. For power,
see Specify [1] below. For cables, see Ml0000 pages for 8100
System. Host programs written for the 3270 are not supported by
the 8100 System.
NOTES: (1) The 3288 Line Printer is recommended for use in a
machine room environment due to its higher noise level while
printing ... (2) The 3288 is supported by programming as a 3286
mdl 2 or 12 printer, unless Text Print Feature (#7880) is installed.
The 3288 Text Data Stream, required for program support of
feature #7880, is described in the 3270 Component Description
Manual (and TNLs).
PREREQUISITE: A 3271 mdl 2 or 12, 3272 mdl 2, or 3274 mdl
1 A, 1 B, 1 C or 1 D. with appropriate Device/Terminal Adapter, or
8101 with #1505 or #1506. See M 8101 pages.
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent, is
required.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
entered into two decade switches by the operator and is variable from 00 to 99. (The implementation of this feature is the
customer's responsibility.)
[5] Cables: See M 10000 pages for 3288 cable prices and ordering instructions. For cable specifications see 3270 Insfal/ation
Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2787.
ETP/
PRICES:
3288
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
2
$ 384
$ 327
$10,625
$ 91
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 60% Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
TEXT PRINT FEATURE (#7880).
[Mdl 2 only and attached to
3271 or 3272] Provides 120 character set 'TN/TIl' (see Type
Catalog, S/370 Printers) logic. Also provides character underscore and overstrike (accomplished with a new order inhibiting line
advance). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Available on 32tl8s
attached to 3271 mdl 2 or 12, or 3272 mdl 2 only. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: For new orders, use character set specify code
#9093. For field upgrades, an order for a Text Print Belt - Additional (#5921) must accompany the MES order for feature
#7880, and specify #9093 is not used. Note that if the 3288 is
attached via a 3271 mdl 2, EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761)
is required on the 3271 mdl 2.
Special Feature Prices:
Text Print Feature
MAC/
MRC
#7880 $ 45
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
$ 38 $1,405
$ 1.00
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the feature # indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000
for additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) -- Permits feeding of continuous forms
from the carton and provides for forms stacking after printing.
This accessory is a one-shelf forms stand.
EBCDIC PRINT BELT (#5920-Additional).
the 64 character set.
Permits printing of
TEXT PRINT BELT (#5921-Additional). Sans Serif font characters. Permits printing of the 120-character TN/TIl character
set.
or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Character Set: Specify one of the following;
#9089 - for EBCDIC Character Set (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 characters described on the
EBCDIC typewriter keyboard. PREREQUISITE: If used with
the 3271 mdl 2, EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) is
required on the 3271 mdl 2.
#9091 - for ASCII Character Set (A) (available at time of manufacture only) ... provides the 64 ASCII characters but substitutes the Logical OR (I) and Logical NOT (~) in place of
the exclamation mark (I) and circumflex (A). PREREQUISITE:
If used with the 3271 mdl 2, ASCII Transmission Code
(#9762) is required on the 3271 mdl 2. If used with the
3271 mdl 12, ASCII Transmission Code (#1200) is required
on the 3271 mdl 12.
#9092 -- for ASCII Character Set (B) (availablp. at time of manufacture only) ... provides the standard 64 ASCII characters.
PREREQUISITE: If used with the 3271 mdl 2, ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) is required on the 3271 mdl 2. If
used with the 3271 mdl 12, ASCII Transmission Code
(#1200) is required on the 3271 mdl 12.
#9093 - for EBCDIC 'TN/TIl' Character Set, with Sans Serif
font print belt ... (available at time of manufacture only) ...
provides the 120 characters of the 'TN/TIl' print train (see
Type Catalog, S/370 Printers page). Prerequisites: Text
Print Feature (#7880) ... If used with the 3271 mdl 2,
EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) is required on the
3271 mdl2.
[3] X Print Error Indication: Specify #9944. To indicate an error
an X is printed on the print line immediately below the last line
normally printed.
[4] Vertical Forms Control: Specify #9850. Allows customer insertion of a Forms Feed Character (Hex OC) into the data stream.
Upon detection of the Forms Feed character, the printer will
skip to the first print line of the next form. The form length is
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - - -------------- ------
M 3289.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3289 LINE PRINTER
Purpose: A series of line printers for attachment to a 3274 Control Unit, a 3276 Control Unit Display Station, or an 8100 Information System via the Loop, at carrier speed and data rate of 9600
bps maximum.
cord.
[3] Print Belt Character Set: Specify One. Available at time of
manufacture only. If more than one belt is required, see Accessories below and M 10000 pages.
#9490 -- 48 Character Set EBCDIC
#9491 -- 64 Character Set EBCDIC
#9492 -- 94 Character Set EBCDIC
Highlights: Line printing is from characters engraved on a revolving metal belt. The 3289 models operate at the following speeds:
Maximum Lines
Per Minute'
155
120
80
40
48
64
94
125 Text
Model 2 and 3 400
300
230
160
48
64
94
125 Text
Modell
#9493 -- 48 Character Set ASCII (B)"
#9494 -- 64 Character Set ASCII (B) * *
#9495 -- 94 Character Set ASCII (B)* *
Character
Set
* Actual printer throughput is dependent on operational and
system characteristics. Maximum print speed may be de9raded
by such factors as communication line speed, control unit load,
application program, loop speed, print line length, and multiple
device operation.
Included is one interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or 94 character
set) --- see "Specify." A variable width forms tractor for feeding of
marginally punched continuous forms (one to six parts) up to 15"
overall width is provided. The following functions are basic: paper
jam detection; front forms loading; vertical forms control; Systems
Printer Communications (SCS mode on mdls 1 and 2 only); end-offorms detection; single/double vertical spacing on mdl 1, 2; 132
print positions; character spacing of 10 per inch; line spacing of 6
or 8 lines per inch; 4016 byte buffer on mdl 1 and 2; 256 byte
alternating buffers on mdl 3; and SNA Character String (EBCDIC
only) data stream handling. Standard color accent panel will be
pebble gray;
#9496 -- 125 Character Text Print EBCDIC
*' SNA Character String Mode of Operation is not available
with ASCII. ASCII belts available for models 1 and 2 only.
NOTE: The Character Set specified (EBCDIC or ASCII) must be
the same as the Transmission Code/Character Set used on the
control unit to which it is attached.
[4] Cables: For mdls 1 and 2 -- Customer is responsible for procurement, maintenance, and installation of co-axial signal cable.
See M 10000 pages for cable prices and ordering instructions.
See 3270 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2787,
for cable details. For mdl 3 -- Customer is responsible for
procurement, maintenance and installation of the Loop network
as defined in the IBM 8100 Information System Installation
Manual - Physical Planning. A signal cable with a standard
Loop polarized plug is supplied with the printer.
[5] Print Error Indication #9488: An error graphic is printed on
line immediately below the last print line for that data buffer
when the printer is used in 3270 data stream mode. Limitation:
Modell and 2 only.
[6] Character Print Operation: To specify the printer buffer size
when the printer is used in 3270 data stream mode. limitation:
Modell and 2 only.
#9521 (960 character print) ... for use with a program which
assumes the buffer size is 960 bytes while using
Erase/Write Alternate Command.
Concurrent printer (model 3) and card read/punch operation is
possible. See Special Features.
#9522 (1920 character print) ... for use with a program which
assumes the buffer size is 1920 bytes while using
Erase/Write Alternate Command.
Limitations: Refer to GA24-3488 for forms design considerations.
Printed output is not supported for optical character reading.
#9523 (2560 character print) ... for use with a program which
assumes the buffer size is 2560 bytes while using
Erase/Write Alternate Command.
PREREQUISITE: For mdls 1, 2, a 3274 Control Unit with appropriate adapter, or a 3276 Control Unit Display Station. See 3274
and 3276 for details. For mdl 3, an 8100 Loop is required. See
81 00 Processor pages for details.
#9524 (3440 character print) ... for use with a program which
assumes the buffer size is 3440 bytes while using
Erase/Write Alternate Command.
Problem Determination Procedures - Significant function has
been designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the
customer. This has been done through the use of problem determination and recovery routines and procedures that are easily understood and used by the operator. See Customer Responsibilities
below.
#9525 (3564 character print operation) ... for use with a program
which assumes the buffer size is 3564 bytes while using
Erase/Write Alternate Command. Limitation: This specify code
only valid when 3289 is attached to a 3274 mdllA, lC or lD.
Customer Set-Up (CSU) - The 3289 mdls 1 and 2 are designed
as Customer Set-Up thereby offering the customer early availability
and relocation flexibility. Pre-installation Planning responsibilities
are covered in 3270 Set-Up Planning Guide, GA27-2827.
NOTE: To provide compatibility with programs written for
3271/3272 using Erase/Write Command, #9521 provides 480
character print operation and #9522, #9523, #9524 and
#9525 provide 1920 character print operation. Allowable usage
in SNA Character String of the full buffer varies according to
the control unit (3274 or 3276) to which the printer is attached
and to programming considerations. See IBM Information Display Component Description, SRL GA27-2749, for details. Copy
operation from larger screen size display to smaller printer
buffer is not accepted.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for:
- Adequate site, system and other vendor preparation.
-
Receipt at the customer's receiving dock, unpacking, and
placement of the 3289.
-
Physical setup, connection of cables, switch settings, and
check out. (Mdls 1 and 2)
- Notify IBM of intent to relocate and follow IBM instructions for
relocation. (Mdls 1 and 2)
- Use and follow the problem determination procedures and fill
out trouble report prior to calling IBM for service.
- Disconnecting, packing, and removal to the customer's shipping dock at the time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions will be provided by IBM. (Mdls 1 and 2)
[7]
System Attachment: Identify the attaching control unit by
specifying the following codes:
Control Unit
Code
3274
3274
3274
3274
#9549
#9550
#9551
#9261
mdl
mdl
mdl
mdl
PRICES: Mdl
Code
3276 mdl 1-4
3276 md111-14
8100
#9552
#9553
#9606
MRC
MLC
2 year
Purchase
MMMC
$368
556
556
$313
473
473
$ 8,900
13,250
13,250
$105
179
179
Supplies: Black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent for
model 1, or IBM Part No. 1136670 or equivalent for models 2 and
3, are required
3289
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
bibliography.
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Specify: [1] Voltage (120 AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9890 for
locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug.
1
2
3
1A
lB
1C
1D
System
Controt Unit
Model Changes: Not field installable.
[2] Power Cord: If standard 2.8m (9 foot) power cord is not desired, specify #9511 for 1.8m (6 foot) power cord, #9512 for
3.7m (12 foot) power cord, or #9513 for 4.6m (15 foot) power
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - -----_.------------- ---
M 3289.2
Jut 79
DP Machines
3289 Line Printer
(conI' d)
SPECIAL FEATURES
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1090).
Sounds an alarm that alerts the
operator of conditions that require manual intervention. The operator can set loudness level and, on models 1 and 2 only, duration
(short or continuous). Field Installation: Yes. Customer Set-Up:
No.
TEXT PRINT FEATURE (#1130). [Mdl 1 and 2 only] Provides
the capability to print 32 Text characters in addition to 93 characters of the 94-character EBCDIC set. 3289 Line Printers with and
without this feature may be mixed on the 3276 Control Unit Display with APl/Text Control feature (#1067) or on the same appropriately configured 3274 Control Unit along with 3278 Display
Stations and 3287 Printers with and without the APL/Text
(#1120) feature and on the 3274 only, may be mixed with 3277
Display Stations and 3284, 3286, 3287 and 3288 printers without
the Data Analysis-APl (# 1066) feature. Limitations: The Text
print belt used with this feature is only interchangeable with the
48/64/94-character set EBCDIC print belt. This feature is only
valid on a 3289 Line Printer attached to a 3274 mdl 1 A, 1 C or
1 D, customized to include the 3289 Text °rint Control Function or
to a 3276 with APl/Text Control feature (#1067). Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Customer Set-Up: No. Prerequisite:
For new orders, use Print Belt Character Set specify code #9496.
For field installation, an order for a Text Print Belt, Additional
(#5824) must accompany the
order for this feature (#1130).
KEYLOCK (#4650).
[Mdl 3 only] Provides a mechanical keylock to activate controls that disable all operator activity related to
input, output, or control of data at the printer. Two identical keys
are supplied with the feature. Refer to M10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Field installation: Yes.
Customer Set-Up: No.
CARD CONTROL FEATURE (#8010).
[Mdl 3 only] Provides
additional storage and control for specific card I/O attachment.
Required once only for any card attachment feature(s). Field
installation: Yes. Customer Set-Up: No.
3501 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8050). [Mdl 3 only] To
attach a 3501 Card Reader. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8149).
Prerequisite: Card Control Feature (#8010). Field installation:
Yes. Customer Set-Up: No.
3782/2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8149).
[Mdl 3
only] To attach a 3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 2 and a 2502
Card Reader mdl A1. The 2502 can be equipped with special
features for 51/80 or 66/80 column cards. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3501 Card Reader Attachment
(#8050). Optical Mark Read Feature (#5450) on 2502 is not
supported. Prerequisite: Card Control Feature (#8010). Field
Installation: Yes. Customer Set-Up: No.
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). [Mdl 3 only]
To attach a 3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card
Punch. The 3521 can be equipped with special features for Card
Read/Punch Check and/or Card Print.
Maximum: One.
Limitations: If a 2502 or 3501 Card Reader is also attached
(#8050 or #8149), the Card Read/Punch Check special feature
on the 3521 is limited to the punch checking function only. Simultaneous operation of a 3521 equipped with Card Print Feature
(#1501) with a Card Reader (3501 or 2502) is not permitted.
Simultaneous operation of printer, reader, and punch without Card
Print is permitted. Prerequisite: Card Control Feature (#8010).
Field installation: Yes. Customer Set-Up: No.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
AudIble Alarm
#1090
Text Print Feature
1130
Keylock
4650
Card Control Feature
8010
3501 Card Reader Attch 8050
3782/2502 Cd Rdr Attch 8149
3782/3521 Cd Pch Attch 8150
$
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
6 $ 5
7
6
35SUe 29
25
13
11
19
16
19
16
$ 175
210
35
875
440
640
640
N/C
N/C
N/e
$ 1.50
.50
4.00
3.50
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in the M 10000 pages. See M 10000
pages for additional information and field installation.
Print Belt, Additional -- permits the customer to obtain more than
one character set print be.lt.
#5811
#5812
#5813
#5821
#5822
#5823
#5824
-----
48-character ASCII (6) •
64-character ASCII (B) •
94-character ASCII (B) •
48-character EBCDIC
64-character EBCDIC
94-character EBCDIC
125-character Text Print EBCDIC
• Models I and 2 only.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'-------- - ---------- --------_.---
M 3289.3
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3289 LINE PRINTER
Model 4
Purpose: A line printer for attachment to a 4331 Processor.
Highlights: Line printing is from characters engraved on a revolving metal belt. The 3289 mdl 4 operates at the following speeds:
Maximum Lines
Per Minute •
Character Set
400
300
230
48
64
94
and maintenance of coaxial signal cable. See M 10000 pages
for cable prices and ordering instructions. For cable details,
see 3270 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-27B7.
Prices:
3289
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2Yr
Purchase
MMMC
4
$556
$473
$13,250
$179
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field changes of Model 2 to/from Model 4 are
not recommended. All other 3289 model changes are available at
time of manufacture only.
• Actual throughput is dependent upon operational and
system characteristics. Maximum print speed may be degraded by such factors as control unit load and the application program.
Included is one interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or 94 character
set) .. , see "Specify." A variable width forms tractor for feeding
marginally punched continuous forms (one to six parts) up to
38.1 cm (15") overall width is provided. The following functions
are basic: paper jam detection ... front forms loading ... universal
character set buffer ... end of forms detection '" 132 print positions ... character spacing of 10 per inch ... line spacing of 6 or 8
lines per inch and vertical channel select (under 4331 Processor
control). The standard color accent panel is pebble gray;
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with the 3289, order the Feature #
indicated below at the price listed in the M 10000 pages. See M
10000 pages for additional information and field installation.
Print Belt, Additional -- permits the customer to obtain more
than one character set print belt.
Description
#5821 -- 48-character'.f:BCDIC
#5822 -- 64-character EBCDIC
#5823 -- 94-character EBCDIC
Limitations: Refer to Forms Design Reference Guide, GA24-34BB
for forms design considerations. Printed output is not supported
for optical character reading.
Prerequisite: A position on the standard Display/Printer Adapter
on a 4331 Processor. see 4331 for details.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to increase availability to the customer.
This has been done through the use of problem determination and
recovery routines and procedures that are easily understood and
used by the customer. See "Customer Responsibilities" below.
Customer Setup (CSU): The 3289 mdl 4 is designated as Customer Setup thereby offering the customer early availability and
relocation flexibility. Pre-installation planning responsibilities are
covered in 32B9 Model 4 Site Preparation Guide, GA27-319B.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for:
Adequate site, system and other vender preparation.
Receipt at the customer receiving dock, unpacking and placement of the 3289.
Physical setup, connection 0; cables, switch settings and
check out.
Contacting Field Engineering to make cable connections of
IBM CSU units to IBM non-CSU units where customer access
areas are not provided.
Notifying IBM of intent to relocate and following IBM instructions for relocation.
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service.
Disconnecting, packing and removal to the customer's shipping dock at time of discontinuance. Appropriate instructions
will be provided by IBM.
Supplies: Black ribbons, IBM Part No. 1136670, or equivalent,
are required
Bibliography:
~ibliography .
See KW I C Index,
G320-1 621, or specific system
SPECIFY
o
Voltage (120V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking
plug, #9891 for non-lock plug.
o
Power Cord: If standard 2.8 meter (9 foot) power cord is not
desired, specify #9511 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cord, #9512 for
3.7 meter (12 foot) cord, or #9513 for 4.6 meter (15 foot)
cord.
o
Print Belt Character Set: Specify One. Available at time of
manufacture only. If more than one print belt is required, see
"Accessories" below and M 10000 pages.
#9490 -- 48-character set EBCDIC
#9491 -- 64-character set EBCDIC
#9492 -- 94-character set EBCDIC
•
Cables: Customer is responsible for procurement, installation
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -------====~=
M 3310
Mav 79
OP Machines
IBM 3310 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE
PRICES Mdl
3310
Purpose: Direct access storage for attachment to a 4331 Processor.
Disk Storage and Control
Model Al
Single-drive disk storage and associated control
for attachment to a 4331 Processor via its DASD
Adapter (#3201). It also provides the logic required to support attachment of up to three additional spindles for a maximum string of four.
Model A2
Two disk storage drives and associated control
for attachment to a 4331 Processor via its DASD
Adapter (#3201). It also provides the logic required to support attachment of up to two additional spindles for a maximum string of four.
Disk Storage
Model B1
Single-drive storage unit which attaches to a
Model A2 to provide for configurations requiring
three (3) drives.
ModelB2
Two disk storage drives which attach to a Model
A2 to provide for configurations requiring a full
string of four (4) drives.
MRC
A1
A2
B1
B2
MlC
2 Yr
$423
703
335
615
$360
598
285
523
Purchase
$12,960
21,530
10,260
18,830
Model Changes: Model changes between mdl Al and A2 or
between mdl 61 and 62 are field installable. Model changes
between mdl A and mdl B units cannot be made.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model A1 to A2 ... $8,570
Model B1 to B2 ..• 8,570
One Drive
A 3310 model A1
Two Drives
A 3310 model A2
Three Drives A 3310 model A2 and a 3310 model Bl
Four Drives
A 3310 model A2 and a 3310 model B2
Highlights; The 3310 employs a fixed storage medium and features high data rate, fast access, modularity and a high degree of
reliability.
Capacity - each drive has a capacity of 64,520,192 bytes.
Format - uses fixed block architecture and the cylinder concept providing the following:
512
Bytes per Sector
352
Sectors per Cylinder
Bytes per Cylinder
180,224
358
Cylinders per Drive
Acc... Time - Seek Time (MS)
9
27
Average Rotational Delay (MS)
9.6
Data Rate- 1,031,000 bytes per second.
Rotational P08Itlonlng Senalng - permits the disk storage
device to disconnect during rotational delay, thereby increasing
DASD Adapter availability for other operations.
E"or Correction - provides capability of correcting single data
error bursts of up to 3 bits span as well as detecting all single
error bursts of up to 14 bits span.
Prerequisites: A 3310 mdl Al or A2 requires a position on the
DASD Adapter (#3201) on a 4331 Processor '" a 3310 mdl Bl or
82 requires a 3310 mdl A2.
Mexlmum: See DASD Adapter (#3201) under "Special Features"
for the 4331 Processor.
Bibliography: GA26-1660
SPECIFY
•
•
$53
90
40
77
Plan Offering: Plan 0
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Warranty: 6
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 60%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Drive Configurations: Drives are attached as follows:
Minimum
Average
MMMC/
AMMCR
Voltage: (AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V, or
#9914 for 240 V.
Color: [A models on!y] #9080 for willow green, #9061 for
garnet rose, #9062 for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue,
#9064 for charcoal brown, or #9065 for pebble gray. Note:
One accent panel from the model A unit is exchanged with the
outer side panel of the model B unit.
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._------ ---------==-:=~=
M 3330 - 3333
May 79
OP Machines
IBM 3330 DISK STORAGE
Purpo..: Large capacity, fast access, high data rate storage for
general purpose data storage and programming system residence.
Model 1
Contains two disk storage drives ... available on
S/360 mdl 195, any S/370 Processor except 3115,
... available on the 4341 Processor.
Model 2
Contains one disk storage drive ... available on S/360
mdl 195, all S/370 Processors except 3115 ...
available on the 4300 Processor.
Contains two disk storage drives ... available on all
virtual storage S/370 Processors except 3115 and
3125 ... available on the 4341 Processor.
Hlghllghta: Each drive uses an electromagnetic actuator to move
and control the head assembly.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... voltage must be consistent with
that of the unit to which the 3330 Is to be attached.
[2] Non-standard Environment: #9485 ... must be specified If the
3330 Is not to be Installed as part of a 3330 facility ... also see
"Prerequisites" above.
[3] POSition Designator: For cable definition and drive identification
(Ready Indicator and Logical Address Plug), one position designator code must be specified for each 3330, Indicating Its
relative position as shown in the diagram belo\(>':
Mod.1 11
Cyllnd.r Conc.pt - 404 data cylinders per pack for mdls 1 and 2
... 808 data cylinders per pack for mdl 11. Each cylinder has 19
data tracks ... up to 13,030 bytes per track ... up to 247,570
bytes available per cylinder.
D.ta Rat. - 806,000 bytes per second.
NOTE: If any configuration change (Increase or decrease)
results In a position change of Installed units, their position
designator codes must be changed
for rental machines.
If an Installed 3830 mdl 1/3330 configuration is being changed
to a 3830 mdl 2/3330 series configuration and the 3330 with
position deSignator code #9493 has serial no. 12490 or balow, BM 2276789 (80 Hz) must be ordered via
for
rental machines.
Acc... Tim. - average access time is 30 milliseconds with a
minimum of 10 milliseconds and a maximum of 55 milliseconds.
Power Dr.went - each disk drive Is mounted In a drawer ...
opened or closed by a switch on the operator control panel.
Writ. Inhibit Switch - a toggle switch for each drive, mounted on
the operator's panel, which provides the means to protect packs
mounted within the facility from being written upon. The switch Is
manually set by the system operator under instructions from the
customer operating procedure. Programming Support then" protects the user's data by terminating a program which attempts to
write to a protected drive.
Writ. Form.t R.I.... - standard feature on the mdl 11, which
frees the subsystem while the drive erases from the end of a
"formatted" write record to the end of the track.
Rotatlon.1 Position Sensing - enables a "seek" to an explicit
position on a track ... permits channel disconnect during most of
the rotational latency period and thus contributes to increased
channel availability ... requires one unshared subchannel on a
block multiplexer channel for each drive.
Multlpl. Requ. .tlng - allows multiple channel command sequences to be active, up to one sequence per drive ... permits better
utilization of control unit, devices, channel and CPU ... requires
one unshared subchannel on a block multiplexer channel for each
drive.
Disk P.ck - each drive requires a 3336 Disk Pack. The 3336 mdl
1 provides up to 100 million bytes of storage per pack. The 3336
mdl 11 provides up to 200 million bytes of storage per pack. The
3336 mdl 1 is interchangeable on all 3330 mdls 1 and 2 and
3333 mdl 1 drives; it cannot be used with the 3330 mdl 11. The
3336 mdl 11 Is Interchangeable on all 3330 mdl 11 and 3333 mdl
11 drives; it cannot be used with the 3330 mdl 1 or 2.
PREREQUISITES: The 3330 mdls 1 and 2 are deSigned for interconnected operation with the 3333 mdl 1, 3333 mdl 11, or the
3830 mdl 1. The 3330 mdl 11 Is designed for Interconnected
operation with the 3333 mdl 1 or mdl 11. Customers who wish to
order a 3330 for stand-alone or individual use should submit an
RPQ to provide the necessery safety elements (covers, cable
connectors, etc.) to complete the unit for a non-standard (I.e., not
Installed as part of a 3330 facility) environment. In lieu of the
RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent to the
standard configuration or that provided by the above RPQ. ,If not
provided, the unit will be offered on a purchase only basis.' See
Item [2] under "Specify."
See appropriate DASD storage control feature or machine to
determine prerequisite specify and/or special features to attach
3333/3330s.
Agreement for IBM to Install and maintain the 3330 In any nonstandard configuration must be reviewed
PRICES:
Mdl
3330
1
2
11
MAC/
MRC'
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
'1,450 '1,218·
734··
882
2,070 1,739···
Purch...
MMMC
$31,310
1~3"0
.,
090
'170
100
170
Plan Offering: Plan B
Per Call: 3
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 60%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
• Fixed Term Plan Prices are: 12-23 mos. - $1,334,
24 mos. - $1,218.
•• Only ETP and MLC prices apply.
• •• Fixed Term Plan Prices are: 12-23 mos. - $1,904,
24 mos. - $1,739.
Mod.1 Ch.ng.s: Mdl 1 to mdl 11 Is field Installable. Mdl 2 to mdl
1 or 11 available at time of manufacture only.
When ordering model change for field Installation on 3135/3135-3
and 3138 systems, check for appropriate prerequisite specify
feature (microcode diskette) on the IFA. Refer to appropriate
processing unit sales manual pages.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
Installation charges)
Mod.1 1 to Model 11 .......... $13,710
IBM 3333 DISK STORAGE AND CONTROL
Purpose: Large capacity, fast access, high data rate storage for
general purpose data storage and programming system residence
with additional control for the attachment of up to three 3330 Disk
Storage modules.
Model 1
Contains two disk storage drives. Available on
S/360 mdl 195, any S/370 Processor except 3115
... available on the 4341 Processor.
Model 11 Contains two disk storage drives. Available on all
virtual storage S/370 Processors except 3115 or
3125 ... available on 4341 Processor.
Hlghllghta: Each drive uses an electromagnetic actuator to move
and control the head assembly.
Cylinder Conc.pt - 404 data cylinders per pack for mdl 1 ... 808
data cylinders per pack for mdl 11. Each cylinder has 19 data
tracks ... up to 13,030 bytes per track ... up to 247,570 bytes
available per cylinder.
D.ta Rate - 806,000 bytes per second.
Each disk storage drive requires a 3336 Disk Pack. These must
be ordered separately
M.xlmum: Up to four 3330 modules, in any combination of mdls
1 and 2, can be attached to the 3830 mdl 1. Up to three 3330
modules, In any combination of mdls 1, 2 or 11, can be attached
to the 3333 mdl 1 or 11 ... see system availability under "Models"
above. On the S/370 mdl 125, only one 3330 module, either mdl
1 or 2, can be attached to the 3333 mdl 1. For combinations
allowed on a Storag~ Director of a 3880 Storage Control, see
"Maximwn" under 3880.
Blbllogr.phy:
Ace... Time - average access time Is 30 milliseconds with a
minimum of 10 milliseconds and a maximum of 55 milliseconds.
Pow.r Dr.w.... - each disk drive Is mounted In a drawer .. ,
opened or closed by a switch on the operator control panel.
Writ. Inhibit Switch - a toggle switch for each drive, mounted on
the operator's panel, which provides the means to protect packs
mounted within the facility from being written upon. The switch Is
manually set by the system operator under Instructions from the
customer operating procedure. The operating systems program-
GC2Q-0001
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ------- - ---=
===":'
M 3333 - 333e
May 79
-
DP Machines
3333 Disk Storage and Control (cont'd)
ming support then protects the user's data by terminating a program which attempts to write to a protected drive.
Write Format Releaee - standard feature on the mdl 11, which
frees the subsystem while the drive erases from the end of a
"formatted" write record to the end of the track.
Rotational Position Sensing - enables a "seek" to an explicit
position on a track .. , permits channel disconnect during most of
the rotational latency period and thus contributes to increased
channel availability ... requires one unshared subchannel on a
block multiplexer channel for each drive.
Multiple Requeiltlng - allows multiple channel command aequences to be active, up to one sequence per drive ... permits better
utilization of control units, devices, channel, and CPU ... requires
one unshared subchannel on a block multiplexer channel for each
drive.
Disk Pack - each drive requires a 3336 Disk Pack. The 3336 mdl
1 provides up to 100 million by1es of storage per pack. The 3336
mdl 11 provides up to 200 million by1es of storage per pack. The
3336 mdl 1 is interchangeable on all 3333 mdl 1 and 3330 mdl 1
and 2 drives; it cannot be used with the 3333 mdl 11. The 3336
mdl 11 is interchangeable on all 3333 mdl 11 and 3330 mdl 11
drives; it cannot be used with the 3333 mdl 1.
PREREQUISITES: Each disk storage drive requires a 3336 Disk
Pack. These must be ordered separately ... see I~D Sales Manual.
See appropriate DASD storage control feature or machine to
determine prerequisite specify and/or special features to attach
3333/3330s.
Each system attachment requires a specify code ... see "SpeCify"
below.
NOTE: If a 3333/3330 configuration Is replacing a 3830 mdl
1/3330 configuration (or any configuration change Is made
where installed 3330s are repoSitioned with respect to a
3333), the poSition designator Specify codes of the 3330s
... see 3330.
must be changed
Maximum: S/370 mdl 125, one 3333 mdl 1 (with associated
3330s) ... For other systems, see 3135, 3135-3, 3138, 3145,
3145-3,3148,3158,3158-3,3168,3168-3,3031,3032,3033,
3830 mdl 2, 3830 mdl 3, 3880.
Bibliography:
GC2C>-OO01
Maintenance: Agreement for IBM to install and maintain the 3333
in any non-standard configuration must be reviewed
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V. NOTE: The 3333 requires a 60
amp AC power cord. Consult Physical Planning.
[2] System Attachment: One of the following must be specified:
370/125 •
#9586
3345 mdls 3, 4, 5
9583
3830 mdl 2
9581
370/1581SC
9584
370/135,135-3IFA9582
370/1681SC
9585
370/1381FA
9579
370/158 ISC w (#7220) 9587
370/145, 145-3 ISC9583
370/168 ISC w (#7220) 9588
370/1481SC
9580
3830 mdl 3
9589
3880
9684
• The 370 ,"dll25 is not valid/or the String Switch (#8J50).
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Purchaee
MMMC
1
$1,810 $1,540
UO,51O
$199
11
2,428 2,085
54,290
199
Plan Offering: Plan B.
Per Call: 3
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 60%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#8148). To attach the String
Switch (#8150) to a configuration control panel. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: String Switch: (#8150).
STRING SWITCH (#8150).
To attach the 3333 to a second
attachment. The two attachments may be on the same CPU or
different CPUs and may be any two of the following: 3830 Storage
Control mdl 2, 3880 Storage Control, the S/370 mdl 135, 135-3,
138 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4655), the 3345 Storage and Control mdls 3, 4 and 5 or the ISC (#4660) for attachment to S/370
mdl 145, 145-3, 148, and the S/370 mdl 158 and 168 ISCs
(#4650) ... see appropriate machines for additional requirements.
The String Switch may also be Installed on a 3333 within a 3850
Mass Storage System with attachment to a 3830 mdl 3 or S/370
ISC (#4650) with Staging Adapter (#7220). Installation Is not
recommended In a mixed 3850 MSS/non-MSS environment. If a
3333 Is shared between any two ISC paths and/or 3830 mdl 3s,
then any other 3333s attached to th. same ISC paths and/or
3830 mdl 3s must also be shared Identically. In all of the above
cases, switching between the two attachments is under program
control. The 3333s may also be dedicated to a single attachment
with an enable/disable switch. Field Installation: Yes. Specify: To
indicate the attachment to which this feature will be made, specify
one of the following:
3830mdl2
#9591
370/1581SC
9594
370/135,135-3IFA9592
370/1681SC
9595
370/158 ISC w (#7220) 9597
370/138 IFA
9801
3345 mdls 3, 4, 5 9593
370/168 ISC w (#7220) 9598
3830 mdl3
9599
370/145, 145-3 ISC9593
3880
370/1481SC
9802
9605
NOTE: Installed 3333s retained for use with 3850 Mass Storage
System
System Attachment Specify Features must be changed on presently Installed 3333s attached to a 3830 mdl 2 or 3158/3168
ISC (#4650), If the 3333s will be retained for use with a 3850
MSS when a· 3830 mdl 2 Is field upgraded to mdl 3 or Staging
Adapter for ISC (#7220) is field installed on the 3158/3168
ISC. Submit
Specify Feature Chang..
Remove
Install
9581
9584
9585
9589
9587
9588
If the installed 3333s are equipped with String Switch (#8150),
the Specify Features indicative of String Switch attachment are
also to be changed
Specify Feature Chang..
Remove
Inetall
9591
9599
9594
9597
9595
9598
Special Feature PrlCH:
MAC/ ETP/
MRC 2 Yr
Remote Switch Attach #8148 NC
String Switch
8150 $223
NC
$190
Purcha.. MMMC
NC
S5,760
NC
$ 9.50
3336 DISK PACK
3333
Model Chang..: Mdl 1 to mdl 11 is field Installable.
When ordering model change for field Installation on 3135/3135-3
and 3138 systems, check for appropriate prerequisite specify
feature (microcode diskette) 0,' thelFA. Refer to appropriate
processing unit sales manual pages.
Model 1 - removable and interchangeable disk storage for the
3333 Disk Storage and Control mdl 1 and 3330 Disk Storage mdls
1 and 2.
Model 11 - removable and interchangeable disk storage for the
3333 Disk Storage and Control mdl 11 and the 3330 Disk Storage
md111.
The 3336 Is marketed by IRD .. , for details and prices,
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (There are no additional
Installation charges)
Model 1 to Model 11 •••••••••• S13,710
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
"----=----:-:.
===
=== ':" =
M 3340
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3340 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE
FACILITY
PREREQUISITES: A 3340 facility requires - a 3340 mdl A2 ... a
S/370 or 4300 ProcelMlr with appropriate attachment and features
... each 3340 drive requires a 3348 Data Module. A 3145 requires Word Buffer (#8810) to attach 3340&.
PurpoM: Multiple capacity, high-speed, direct acceas storage for
attachment to any virtual storage S/370 or 4300 ProeelMlrll.
See appropriate DASD storage control feature or machine to
determine addHlonal prerequisite specify and/or special features
to attach 3340&.
For poaslble use with S/3 or S/7, see GSD
Model A2
Model B1
Model B2
manual.
Two disk storage drives and aasoclated control for
attachment to a 3115 or 3125 via their native attachments, to the 3135, 3135-3, 3138 via the IFA
(#4855), to 3145 mdls GE, GFD, H, HG or I via the
3345 mdl 3, 4 or 5, to 3145 mdl H2, HG2, 12, IH2,
J2, JI2 or K2, 3145-3, 3148 via the ISC (#4660),
to the 4331 ProeelMlr Ilia tile 3340 Direct AttQCII feature
(#7851), to the 3158, 3158-3, 3168 or 3168-3 via
the ISC (#4660), to the 3830 mdl 2, artd to the
3880. It provides logic and power for the attachment
of up to three 3340 mdl B units and/or 3344 units
(3344 /lOt attQCMble to 4331).
Contains one disk storage drive. Can be Intermixed
with the 3340 mdl B2 and/or 3344 units to provide
3, 5 or 7 drive configurations (3344 not attQCllabk to
4331).
Contains two disk storage drives. Up to three 3340
mdl B2s can be attached to a 3340 mdl A2 (33#
not attacllable to 4331).
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights: Each 3340 contains an air filtration system and the
load/unload mechanism for the 3348 Data Module. It features low
cost, muHlple capeclty, fast aceeas and high data rate ... up to 4
drives attach to a 3115-0, up to 8 drives to a 3115-2 or a 3125-0,
up to 16 drives to a 3125-2 with 16 Drive Expanalon (#9315), artd
up to 16 dri,es to a 4331. See 3135, 3135-3, 3138, 3145, 3145-3,
3148, 3158, 3158-3, 3168, 3168-3, 3031, 3032, 3033, 3345,
3830, 3880,4331 or 4341 for other S/370 or 4300 ProceslOr attachment capabilities.
The 3340 Introduces a new design In which a sealed cartridge
(3348 Data Module) contains the disks, aceeas arms, read/write
heads and spindle. Multiple capacHy options on each drive become poaslble due to the modularity provided by this unique
design. In addition, the 3348 mdl 70F contains fixed heads which
provide low COllt, fixed head capability for the 3340 user. The user
mey place selected components of IBM software as well as his
own programs In the fixed head area to Increase device performance. The 3348 mdl 70F requires the Fixed Head Feature on the
3340. See "Special Features."
Cylinder Concept:
3348 mcll70
3348mdl35
(34.9 MB)
8,368
Bytes per Track
12
Tracks per Cylinder
348
Cylinders per Data Module
Bytes per Cylinder
100,416
or 70F
(89.8 MB)
8,368
12
696
100,416
DatAl Rate: 885,000 bytes per second.
Acceu Time:, For the 3348 mdl 35 and 70, the average seek
time Is 25 ms with a minimum of 10 ms and a maximum of 50 ms.
For the mdl 70F, the average seek time Is 0 ms for cylinders 1
through 5 while all othe,r cylinders retain the above seek timing.
Rotation time Is 20.2 ms and latency Is 10.1 ms, the same as for
the 3348 mdls 35 and 70.
Autoloading: Data modules are automatically loadad after the
Data Module Is placed In the drive, the drive cover Is closed and a
switch Is turned on. The Data Module Is a sealed unit and requires
no cover removal. Start up time Is leas then 20 seconds.
Read Onl,: A switch Is provided on every 3340 drive. This switch
Is activated by Inserting a latch In the Data Module. When the
latqh Is NOT Inserted, the Data Module Is protected from being
written upon or erased.
Data Modu"': Each drive requires a Data Module to operate.
These must be ordered separately ... see 3348.
3348 Data Module mdl 35 provides 34,944,768 bytes of storage.
3348 Data Module mdl 70 provides 69,689,536 bytes of storage.
3348 Data Module mdl 70F provides 69,889,536 bytes of storage of which 502,060 are acceaslble by fixed heads.
Either the mdl 35 or the mdl 70 may operata on any drive and
they are Interchangeable between drives, Including drives with the
Fixed Head Feature (#4301, #4302) Installed. The mdl 7OF,
however, requires the Fixed Head Feature (#4301, #4302) on the
drive.
Data written on a Data Module by S/3 CQrl/lOt be retrlned by S/370 artd
'Ike
Data written on a Data Module by a S/3 rrull12 or 15 may
be read by a 4331 ruing Sylll_/3 Data lmportfeatun (#6305). ,
,.1ItI.
Maximum: 3115-0 - four 3340 drives
3115-2 - eight 3340 drives
3125-0 - eight 3340 drives
3125-2 - sixteen 3340 drives
Other S/370 or 4300 ProcelllOrll - see 3135, 3135-3,
3138, 3145, 3145-3, 3148, 3158, 3158-3, 3168,
3168-3, 3031, 3032, 3033, 3345, 3830 mdl 2, 3880,
4331 or 4341.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9SI05 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #8041 for red, #8042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9046 for gray, or #9048 for white.
[3] System Attachment: One of the following must be specified on
each 3340 mdl A2: (For System/3 Specify Codes, see GSD
manual)
ATTACHMENT
SPECIFY
#9581
3830 mdl 2
S/370 mdl 135 IFA 9582
S/370 mdl 135-3 IFA 9582
S/370 mdl 138 IFA 9579
3345 mdls 3, 4, 5
9583
S/370 mdl 158 ISC 9584
System/7
9580
3880
ATTACHMENT
SPECIFY
S/370 mdl 168 ISC #9585
S/370 mdl 125 DDA 9588
S/370 mdl 115 DDA 9587
S/370mdl 145 ISC 9588
S/370 mdl 145-3 ISC 9588
S/370 mdl 148 ISC 9580
4331 • 3340 Dir Attacll , .
9607
[4] If String Switch (#8150) Iii ordered or Installed on 3340 mdl
A2, String Switch (#9570) must be specified on each 3340 mdl
B1 or B2 In the string.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purch_
MMMC
A2
$1,100 $ 93e
$ 92
$38,000
B1
815
523
19,800
49
B2
778
25,200
eeo
79
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 60'111 Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25'111
Upper Limit Percent: 0'111
3340
SPECIAL FEATURES
FIXED HEAD FEATURE (#4301, 4302). #4301 - for model A2
or B2 .•. #4302 - for model B1. To operate the 3348 mdl 70F on
the 3340. The Fixed Head Feature Is available on S/370 VS
systems from the 115 and up, and 4300 ProceslOrll. Attachment Is
via the following: On the S/370 mdl 115 and 125 via their native
attachment, the 3830 Storage Control mdl 2, the 3880 Storage
Control. the 3330/3340 Series IFA (#4855) on the &/370 mdl135,
135-3, 138, the 3345 Storage Control Frame mdl 3, 4 or 5 or the
ISC (#4680) on the S/370 mdl 145, 145-3, 148, the S/370 mdl
168 and 188 ISCs (#4660), artd to tile 4331 Processor ,ia tile 3340
Direct AttQCII future (#7851) ... see appropriate machines for additional requirements (Speclfys, Special Features, Etc.). Umltatlonl:
Cannot be Installed with eHher the 2311 mdl 1/3340 Series Compatibility (#8080) or the 2314/3340 Series Compatibility (#8070)
on S/370 mdls 115 and 125. Cannot be Installed with Two Channel SWitch, Add'i (#8171) on the 3830 mdl 2. FIeld lnetanatlon:
Yes.
REMOTE SWITCH AnACHMENT (#8148). [Model A2 only] To
attach the String Switch (#8160) to the configuration control
panel of a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP. Field Inltallatlon: Yes.
ROTATIONAL POSmON SENSING (#8201, 8202).
Permits
channel disconnect during most of the rotational latency period
and thus contributes to Increased channel avallabliHy. #8201 for mdl B1 ... #6202 - for mdl A2 or B2. If Installed, It Is dealrable for efficient operation to have on every 3340 mdl A.2, B2 or B1
In a string. LiIrtittJtiDu: TIlls featun may be installed but Is /lOt 1Iup'
ported by the 4331 ProeellOr j340 Direct AttQCluntmt featun (#7851).
¥Ield Inltallatlon: Yes. Prerequlllte: A block multlplexer channel
on the system.
STRING SWITCH (#8150). [Model A2 only] To attach the 3340
to a second attachment. The two attachments may be on the same
CPU or different CPUa and may be any two of the following: 3830
Storage Control mdl 2, 3880 Storage Control. the 3340 Direct Dlak
Attachment (DDA) on the 3115-2 or 3125-2, the, 3330/3340
Serles,lFA (#4855) on the S/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138, the 3345
Storage and Control Frame mdl 3, 4 or 5 or the ISC (#4660) for
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ------- - --==-=
':' =
11.1 3340 - 3344
-
May 79
DP Machines
3340 Direct Access Storage Facility (cont'd)
attachment to 5/370 mdl 145, 145-3,148, and the 5/370 mdl
158 and 168 ISCs (#4650) ... see appropriate machines for additional requirements. Switching between the two attachments Is
under program control. The 3340 may also be dedicated to a
single attachment with an enable/disable switch.
Field
Installation: Yes. Specify: To Indicate the attachment to which this
feature will be made, specify one of the following:
#9591
3830 mdl 2
3135,3135-3IFA 9592
3138 IFA
9801
3345 mdls 3,4,5 9593
3145,3145-3ISC 9593
3880
9707
31481SC
31581SC
3168 ISC
3115-2 DDA
3125-2DDA
#8e02
9594
9595
95"
9597
In addition, String Switch (#9570) must be ordered on each 3340
mdl Bl or B2 which will be attached to the 3340 mdl A2 with
String Switch (#8150).
Special Feature Prices:
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr Purcha.. MMMC
Fixed Head Feature
for model A2 and B2 #4301 $ 48 $ 41 $1,710
24
20
855
for model Bl
4302
Remote Switch Attach
6148 NC
NC
NC
Rotational Position Sansing
for mdl Bl
6201
20
17
684
for mdl A2 or B2
6202
25
21
664
String Switch
8150 220 187
7,200
PREREQUISITES: A 3344 requires a 3340 mdl A2 and any virtual
storage 5/370 or 4341 Processor. with appropriate attachment
and features. Control Store Extension (#2150) and Register
Expansion (#6111) are prerequisite features on the 3830 mdl 2
and 3145, 3345, 3158, 31681SCs to attach 3344. On the 3115-2
and the 3125-2,'4K DASF Control Storage Extension (#4210) Is
required.
IMPORTANT: See the appropriate DASD storage control feature or
machine to determine any additional prerequisite specify and/or
special features to attach 3344.
Limitation.: A. 3340 string containing the 3344 may not be Intermixed with a 3330 string on a 3135, 3135-3, 3138 IFA. 3340
strings containing the 3344 cannot be Intermixed with 3330 or
3350 strings on a 3145, 3145-3, 3148, 3345, 3158, 3168 ISC or
3830 mdl 2.
Data written by 8/3 cannot be retrieved by 8/370 or 4341 Processor and
vice versa.
Maximum: One 3340 string on a 3115-2/3125-2 DDA or on a
3135,3135-3, 31381FA may contain 3344s.
$1.50
1.00
NC
Up to two 3340 strings on a 3830 mdl 2, 3145, 3145-3, 3148 or
3345 ISC, on each path of a 3158 or 3168 ISC or 3880 may
contain 3344s.
.50
.50
12.00
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with that of
the unit to which the 3344 Is attached.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for 'gray, or #9046 for white.
IBM 3344 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE
Purpo..: Dual drive, large capacity, direct access storage for
attachment via a 3340 mdl A2 to any virtual storage 5/370 Processor, available on the 4341 Processor.
For possible use with System/3, see GSD
manual.
Model B2
Model B2F
Two-drlve disk storage unit which attaches to a
3340 mdl A2. It may be Intermixed with 3340
model B units and/or 3344 mdl. B2F units In any
combination up to three B units per 3340 mdl A2.
Two-drive disk storage unit with the same attachment capabilities as the 3344 mdl B2. It features
Fixed Heads which provide 1,004,160 bytes of
zero seek time storage on each drive.
Highlights: The 3344 features a large capacity, fixed storage
medium. Each drive Is equivalent In capacity and format to four
logical 3348 mdl 70s. Each 3344 has two drives and requires
eight logical device addresses. The Fixed Head storage capacity
on the 3344 mdl B2F Is associated with the first of the four logical
volumes on each drive.
Cylinder concept - each drive has 2,784 logical cylinders with 12
tracks per cylinder. Maximum track capacity Is 8,368 bytes providing up to 100,416 bytes per logical cylinder.
The 3344 mdl B2 provides 279,558,144 bytes of storage per
drive.
[3] System Attachment: One of the following must be specified on
each 3344 mdl B2/B2F: (For System/3 Specify Codes, see
GSD
manual.)
ATTACHMENT
SPECIFY
ATTACHMENT
SPECIFY
3830 mdl 2
#9581
5/370 mdl 168 ISC #9585
5/370 mdl 135 IFA 9582
5/370 mdl 125 DDA 9586
5/370 mdl 115 DDA 9587
5/370 mdl 135-3 IFA 9582
5/370 mdl 145 ISC 9586
S/370 mdl 138 IFA 9579
3345 mdls 3, 4, 5
9583
5/370 mdl 145-3 ISC 9586
5/370 mdl 158 ISC 9584
S/370md11481SC 9580
3880
9697
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
3344
B2
B2F
11,034t
1,n?\,
UB&!'
1,155t
Purcha..
MMMC
131,680
41,600
I~~
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 60% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Chang..: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
Installation charges)
•
The 3344 mdl B2F provides 279,558,144 bytes of storage per
drive of which 1,004,160 bytes are accessible by fixed heads.
Model B2 to Model B2F ..... 112,610·
Customer price quotations and customer acknowledgement
letters for purchase MESs must state: "Installation of this model change Involves removal of parts which become the property
of IBM."
Data Rate - 885,000 bytes per second.
Acce.. Time: Average seek time Is 25 ms with a minimum of 10
ms and a maximum of 50 ms. For the 3344 mdl B2F logical cylinders 1 thru 10 of the first logical volume on each drive have a
seek time of zero ms while all other cylinders retain the above
seek timing. Rotation time Is 20.2 ms and latency Is 10.1 ms.
Read Only - a two position switch Is provided for each drive.
When the switch is in the "read only" pOSition, the drive is protected from being written upon or erased.
Rotational Position Sansing - a standard feature on the 3344
which permits channel disconnect during most of the rotational
latency period and thus contributes to increased channel availability. Requires a block multiplexer channel on the system. If RPS Is
used, it is advisable for efficient operation to also have It on every
3340 in a string.
Data Recovery (Plant Only) - should data In the field prove unrecoverable, data recovery assistance at the plant of manufacture
will be provided.
Alternate TraCks: There are 96 alternate tracks per drive. The
3344 will be shipped from the plant with not more than five flagged tracks per drive. Therefore, a minimum of 91 alternate tracks
per drive are available for customer use.
t
MAC/MRC, ETP/MLC and MMMC prices effective 6/1/79.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
·----------- ------==-=
':" =
M 3345
May 79
DP Machines
3345 MODEL 3, 4 or 5 WITH ONE CHANNEL OR
WITH TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100)
3345 STORAGE AND CONTROL FRAME
PurpoH: Additional processor storage and I/O control in a S/370
md1145.
DASD Confi,uruion
Model 1
Used with the 3145 mdl HG to provide 393,216
bytes of processor storage.
Model 2
Used with the 3145 mdl I to provide 524,288 bytes
of processor storage.
...
Used with the 3145 mdl H and below to provide for
the attachment of 3330, 3340, 3344 or 3350 series
disk storage via its standard Integrated Storage
Control •.. see 3330, 3333, 3340, 3344, 3350.
M
Model 3
Model 4
Used with the 3145 mdl HG to provide 393,216
bytes of processor storage and to provide for the
attachment of 3330, 3340, 3344 or 3350 series
disk storage via its standard Integrated Storage
Control •.. see 3330, 3333, 3340, 3344, 3350.
Used with the 3145 mdl I to provide 524,288 bytes
of processor storage and to provide for the attachment of 3330, 3340, 3344 or 3350 series disk
storage via Its standard Integrated Storage Control
... see 3330, 3333, 3340, 3344, 3350.
ModelS
Highlights: -
607.5 nanosecond "store" cycle with 0-4 capability.
- 540 nanosecond "fetch" cycle with 8 byte parallel
access.
-
Error checking with correction is an Integral part of
mdls 1, 2, 4, 5.
-
Store and Fetch Protect are provided by the 3145.
PREREQUISITES: (1) Models 1 and 4 require a 3145 mdl HG ..•
models 2 and 5 require a 3145 mdl I ... model 3 Is used with
3145 mdls H and below ... when 3345 mdl 3, 4 or 5 is to be
Installed with a 3145, #9851 is required on the 3145 •.. for mdls
" 2, 4 and 5, a 3046 Power Unit is required. (2) For models 3, 4
and 5, the standard Integrated Storage Control requires an available control unit position on a system channel. A block multiplexer
channel and one unshared subchannel per logical device are
required, for support of block multiplexing and rotational position
sensing. If this support is not required, attachment to a system
selector channel is permitted. Word Buffer (#8810) Is prerequisite
on 3145 to support 3340, or If Selector Channel, 3rd (#69~3) is
installed on the 3145 ... see 3145.
Maximum: Only one 3345 can be attached to a 3145. For 3345
mdl 3, 4 or 5, see DASD DeSignation under "Specify" for maximum number of 3333/3340/3350s which can be attached to the
standard Integrated Storage Control.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltag!t (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V... must be the same as 3145
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#904S for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
[4] DASD Configuration [Mdls 3, 4, 5 only]: The available combinations of storage devices which can be attached are shown In
the table below. One, two or three Xs in a vertical column
Indicate the type of machlne(s) listed under DASD Configuration
which can be attached when the "Required DASD Specify
Features" are Installed.
Based on the, DASD, and the Special Features ilsted below
being ordered for them, order the Required DASD Specify
Feature(s). [Note that #9190 Is 3340 Fixed Head Attachment
for #9314 and #9315 and i& not specified for #9317 or
#9318.]
M
M
..
"E
0
..
with associet~d mol 81/82
0
String Sw.tch 181501 on
M
any 3340 mdl A2
M
Fixed Head Feature
:~301143021 on any 3340
Up to four 3340 mdl A2.
of which uo to two may
allllCh
3344,
M
M
Siring SwitCh (81501 on
0
..,. any 3340 mdl A2 andlor
M
Fixed Head Feature on
.ny 3340 (4301/43021
3333s and 3340 mdl A2s
(any combinatif... 01 two,
three, or ,fourl each with
~ ; a..ociated dri""s
!::! ::l String Switch (8150) on
::l :; any 3333 or 3340 mal A2
::l Fi.ed Head Feature
14301/43021 on any 3340
to four 3350 mdl A2s1
A2Fs w associated mdl
o 82s/82Fs, C21C2F
i!l ~!rin9 Sw (81 SO} on any
M 33!jO mdl A21A2F ,C2fC2F
_13333$.3340 mell A2s and
~ 3350mdl A2s/A2Fsiany
'" M cc",bination of 2, 3 or 41
~.~ with associated drives
;:j E. String Sw (81501 on anV
M 0 3333, 3340' mdl A2, or
.., i!l 3350 mdl A2/A2F.c2/C2F
M andlor Fixed Head Fe.
14301/4302) on any 3340
I
I
i
I!
JCII
I
H
"
x
x
II!
"I"
Ix
I
II
I
I
X
i
II
!
x II
II I
...
,
o
-"
I,
x x
III
x
I
xi_
I
"'I
.:: jUP
6
!
X"
.....
x
!
I I
I
I
x
Ixx
I I
I.
i
x
I
I
I
I!
I
.
x
'j
I
I
i
xi-
I
!
I
I
IX
I
t
ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased
machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered on same
diskette.
• Any c:1um&e to an installed DASD Conf"lIuration requirea an MES ONL Yif
the new conf"tguration indicates that a dilferent Specify and/or Special
Feature(8) is required. The MES must include addition of any new SPecify
and/or Special Featurea not previously inatalled AND removal of any not
listed as required for the new conf"lIuration.
•• Conuol Store Extension (#2150) is prerequisite. With #9315, the ISC of the
3345 requires 32 contiguous device addresses regardless of the number of
drives attached.
+ Conuol Store Extension (#2150) and Register Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For confiauratioDS in this group the ISC uses 64 contiguous
device acldreases inespective of the number of drives attached. The 3340 mdl
Als on the fust and third smnp may attach up to three 3340 mdl BI, B2s,
and/or 334411 in any combinauon. The 3340 mdl A2 on the second string
may attach up to three 3340 mdl BI/B2I. The 3340 mdl A2 on the fourth
striD& may attach one 3340 mdl B I or B2.
++ Expanded Control Store (#2152) and Registet Expansion (#6111) are
prm:equisites. For conftguratioDS in this grou~ the ISC uses 8 or 16 or 32 or
64 deVice addresses deJienclin& upon the DASD configuration installed and
whether any 3350 drive is in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
Note: Customers who may elect to purchase Control Store Extension (#2150)
and later upgrade to Expanded Control Store (#2152) should consider the
purchase of Expanded Control Store (#2152) initially because this flOld ul?grade
requires replacement of Control Store Extension (#2150) and installauon of
Expanded Control Store (#2152). The prerequisite of Control Store Extension
(#2150) can be satisfied by Expanded Control Store (#2152).
PRICES:
3345
o MAC/MIlC prIeo etJcetivc 1..... I, 1979.
9314~
One or two 3333$ with
" x
associated 3330.
Up to lou' 3333s with
• .. oc •• ted 3330s
StnnqSw.lch 181501 on
,x
any 3333
One or twO 3340 mdl A2s
x x
with associated mdl 81182
Up to four 3340 mdl A2s
c:>-
0
..
..
Required DASD Sp.cily F •• tur •••
+
9315t 9317 9318
9;;5
9~13 9314
t
t 9190 t
t
t
9190 t
Mdl
1
2
3
MAC/
MRC
Purch...
MMMC
$ 3,285
6,015
l,tI9O°
4,21So
$104,950
189,650
43,980
143,100
$ 98.50
178.00
91.00
189.00
4
5
6,99S o
227,BOO
270.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Warranty: A
Purchase Option: 50% Maintenance: D
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3145)
Per Call: 3
Useful Life Category: 2
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- - ----
---- ----= =-=
- - --':' =
M 3345 - 3348
May 79
DP Machines
3345 Storage and Control Fraine (cont'd)
Model Change8: The following 3345 model upgrades are field
install able:
Model 1 to model 2, 4 or 5 ... model 2 to model 5 ... model 4
to model 5. Model changes involving model 3 are not recommended for field installation.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
To
Model 1
Model 2
Model 4
Model 2
Model 4
$84,700
$ 38,150
Model 5
$122,850
38,150
Removable -can be installed and removed from the 3340 by the
operator.
84,700
SPECIAL FEATURES
CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). [Models 3, 4, 5 only]
Provides additional control store for microprogram use ... see
DASD Configuration under "Specify" to determine when required.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Expanded Control Store
(#2152). Maximum: One. Field In8tallatlon: Yes.
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2152). [Models 3, 4, 5 only]
Provides additional control storage for microprogram use on the
ISC ... see DASD Configuration under "Specify" to determine
when required. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Control Store
Extension (#2150). Maximum: One. Field In8tallatlon: Yes.
REGISTER EXPANSION (#8111). [Mdls 3, 4, 5 only] Provides
additional registers for microprogram use on the ISC ... see DASD
configuration under "Specify" to determine when required. Field
In8tallatlon: Yes. Maximum: One.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100). [Models 3, 4, 5 only] To
attach the standard Integrated Storage Control to a second channel ... the two channels may be on the same CPU or different
CPUs. An available control unit position is required on each channel. Switching is under program control. The ISC can be dedicated
to a single channel by means of an Enable/Disable switch. Field
In8tallatlon: Yes. Maximum: One. Prerequl8lte8: See item [2]
under "Prerequisites."
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Control Store Extension
Expanded Control Store
Register Expansion
Two Channel Switch
#2150· $262·
2152· 421"
8111.
24·
8100
205
$8,350 $10.00
. 13,420
662
7,075
20.50
4.00
10.00
• Feature supplies ISC diskette.
D
the read/write heads and the access arms. The access arms and
heads are not part of the drive as in previous disk pack/disk
drive interfaces. The sealed module design protects the disk
surfaces by reducing outside contamination. Multiple capacity
options on each drive become possible due to the modularity
provided by ·this unique design. In addition, the mdl 70F contains
fixed heads which provide low cost, fixed head capability for the
3340 user. The user may place selected components of IBM
software as well as his own programs In the fixed head area to
increase device performance. The 3348 mdl 70F requires that the
Fixed Head Feature be installed on the 3340.
Interchangeable - the mdl 35 or the mdl 70 may operate on any
drive and are Interchangeable between drives, including those
with the Fixed Head Feature installed. The mdl 70F, however,
requires that #4301 or #4302 be installed on the drive.
Auto-loading - Data Modules are automatically loaded after the
Data Module is placed in the drive, cover is closed and a switch
is turned on. Start-up time Is less than 20 seconds.
Flag-Free - Data Modules are shipped from the plant flag-free. If
within 90 days after receipt the customer Is required to assign an
alternate track (using DOS/VS System utilities), he may return
the Data Module to IBM and it will be repaired at no cost to the
customer.
Capacity Upgrade - (Plant only) - the customer-owned model 35
may be capacity upgraded to a model 70. Data modules must be
returned to the plant of manufacture for the upgrade service.
Downgrading is not available. Recorded data will not be recoverable. Upgrade of either the model 35 or 70 to the model 70F is
not available.
Dlmen810ns
Model 35
Model 70
Model70F
8"
16"
18
23
8"
16"
18
24
Height
8"
Width
16"
Maximum Length
18
Shipping Weight (Ibs) 21
Covers are sealed at the plant and are unbreakable and nonflammable. A large handle is provided for ease of installation, removal
and transportation. The Data Module has an aperture that is
opened (or closed) automatically by the drive during loading (or
unloading). The Data Module is then connected to the drive for
power and communications.
A CE cylinder is assigned to facilitate maintenance of the 3340.
MAC/MRC price elTectivelune I, 1979.
Data Recovery (Plant only) - should data in the field, for any
reason, prove unrecoverable, a method for data recovery assistance at the plant of manufacture will be provided.
Initialization - the Data Module will be initialized at the plant.
Home addresses and record zero will be written for each track.
3348 DATA MODULE
(IRD Product)
Purpose: A new generation, removable and interchangeable Data
Module for the 3340 Disk Drive family.
For use with System/3 or System/7, see GSD
manual.
UPGRADE PRICE FOR PURCHASED DATA MODULES (Plant only)
Model 35 to model 70 ..... ••
3348 Data Module Repair Service (Plant only)
Mdl35 Mdl70 Mdl70F
Replace one or more damaged disks
(including servo disk) and heads,
clean and luricate, and retest to new
data module performance specifications. (Does not include covers.)
Replace one or more damaged heads
(including fixed head assembly on
the 70F), clean and lubricate, and
retest to new data module performance specifications.
Clean and lubricate and retest only.
(this price will be charged if no
disk/heads require replacement.)
Models: Three are available in two differel1t capacitites:
3348 Model 35 - 34,944,768 bytes
3348 Model 70 - 69,889,536 bytes.
3348 Model 70F - 69,889,536 bytes of which 502,080 are
accessible by fixed heads.
Hlghllght8:
Data Module Concept ~ the 3348 Data Module utilizes a new
concept in removable direct access storage devices. The .Data
Module, within a sealed cartridge, contains the disks, the spindle,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'------- ---- - --
- -----=
--==
":' =
M 3350
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3350 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE
Read Only: A two position switch is provided for each drive. When
the switch is in the "read only" position, the drive Is protected
from being written upon or erased.
'
Purpose: High speed, large capacity, direct access storage for
attachment to any virtual storage S/370 Processor (except 3115
or 3125), or a 4341 Processor.
Data Recovery (Plant Only): Should data in the field prove unrecoverable, data recovery assistance at the plant of manufacture
will be provided.
Model A2
Two-drive disk storage and assocIated control for
attachment to 3145 mdls GE, GFD, H, HG or I via
the 3345 mdl 3, 4 or 5, to the 3145 mdls H2, HG2,
12, IH2, J2, JI2 or K2 via the ISC (#4660), to the
3145-3, and the 3148 via the ISC (#4660), to the
3158, 3158-3, 3168 or 3168-3 via the ISC
(#4650), to the 3830 mdl 2 or 3, and the 3880. It
provides logic and power for the attachment of up
to three 3350 mdl B2/B2F units or up to two mdl
B2/B2F units and one C2/C2F unit.
Model A2F Two-drive disk' storage and associated control with
the same attachment capabilities as the model A2. It
features Fixed Heads which provide up to
1 ,144,140 bytes of zero seek time storage on each
drive in lieu of the same capacity under the moving
heads.
Model B2
Two-drive disk storage unit. Up to three 3350 mdl
B2/B2Fs can be attached to a 3350 mdl A2/A2F.
Model B2F Two-drive disk storage unit with the same attachment capabilities as the model B2. It features Fixed
Heads which provide up to 1,144,140 bytes of zero
seek time storage in each drive in lieu of the same
capacity under the moving heads.
Model C2
Two-drive disk storage and associated control.
Provides an alternate controller function within a
3350 string. The model C2 functions as a mdl A2 or
B2 depending upon the setting of a manual switch
on the unit. A 3350 string containing a model C unit
requires a model A unit with Primary Controller
Adapter (#1320) and may include 0, 1 or 2 model
B2/B2F units.
Model C2F Two-drlve disk storage and associated control with
the same attachment capabilities as the model C2. It
features Fixed Heads which provide up to
1,144,140 bytes of zero seek time storage in each
drive in lieu of the same capacity under the moving
heads.
Highlights: The 3350 features high data rate, fast access, multiple
formats and low cost per byte. It employs ~ fixed storage medium.
Selective Format: Drive format may be 3330 mdl 1 or 3330 mdl
11 compatibility mode or 3350 native mode. Format is specified by
individual drive. Format changes may be made by FE in the field.
In 3330 mdl 1 or mdl 11 compatibility mode the Fixed Head storage capacity on the models A2F, B2F and C2F is 742,710 bytes
per drive. In 3330 mdl 1 compatibility mode this Fixed Head storage capacity 15 associated with the first of the two logical 3330
mdl 1 volumes on each 3350 drive. In 3350 native mode Fixed
Head storage capacity on the models A2F, B2F and C2F is
1 ,144,140 bytes per drive.
Cylinder Concept:
3330 mdl1
Mode
13,030
Bytes per Track
Tracks per Logical Cylinder
19
Logical Cylinders per Drive 2 x 404
Approx capacity/drive (MB) 2 x 100
3350
3330 mdl11 Native
Mode
Mode
13,030
19,069
19
30
808
555
317.5
200
Data Rate: 1,198,000 bytes per second.
Access Time: Average seek time is 25 ms with a minimum of 10
ms and a maximum of 50 ms. Average rotational delay is 8.4 ms.
For 3350 mdls A2F, B2F C2F cylinders 1 and 2 (3350 Native
Mode), or cylinders 1 thru 3 (3330 mdl 11 compatibility mode), or
cylinders 1 thru 3 of the first of the two logical volumes on a drive
(3330 mdl 1 compatibility mode), have a seek time of zero ms. All
other cylinders retain the above seek timing.
Flag Free: The 3350 will be shipped flag free.
PREREQUISITES: A 3350 DAS requires - a 3350 mdl A2 or A2F;
any virtual storage S/370 Processor with appropriate attachment
and features (except 3115 or 3125), or a 4341 Processor via a 3830
Storage Control mdl 2 or 3, or a 3880 Storage Control. A 3145 requires
Word Buffer (#8810) to attach 3350s. Expanded Control Store
(#2151), Control Store Extension (#2150), and Register Expansion (#6111) are required on the 3830 mdl 2 or 3158, 31681SCs
to attach 3350. Expanded Control Store (#2152) and Register
Expansion (#6111) are required on the 3145, 3145-3, 3148 or
3345 ISCs, or 3830 mdl 3 to attach 3350s.
IMPORTANT: See the appropriate DASD storage control feature or
machine to determine any additional prerequisite specify and/or
special features to attach a 3350.
Maximum: See 3145,3158,3168,3345 ISC, 3830 mdl 2 or 3, or
3880 "Machines"pages.
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
First
Drive
[3] Format:
3330 mdl 1 Compatibility Mode
3330 mdl 11 Compatibility Mode
3350 Native Mode
#9731
9741
9751
#9732
9742
9752
[4] Control AI/achment: #9608 for al/achment to a 3880, or #9609
for al/achment to any of the following ... 3345 mdl 3, 4 or 5,
S/370 mdl144, 145-3 or 148 ISC, S/370 md1158, 158-3, 168 or
168-3 ISC, 3830 mdl2 or 3.
PRICES:
Mdl
3350
A2
A2F
B2
B2F
C2
C2F
MAC/
MRCt
1,304
1,627
1,034
1,357
1,351
1,674
ETP/
MLC
2 yr t
$1,100
1,385
880
1,155
1,150
1,425
Purchase
MMMCt
$40,000
49,920
31,680
41,600
41,380
51,300
$170
221
118
179
179
230
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60%Machine Group: A
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Model changes between 3350 mdl A and mdl B
units, or mdl C and mdl B units are available at time of manufacture only. Model changes between 3350 mdl A and mdl C units
are not recommended for field installation. Model changes between A2 and A2F units, or B2 and B2F units, or C2 and C2F
units are field installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model A2 to Model A2F •.••• $12,610·
Model B2 to Model B2F ••••• $12,610·
Model C2 to Model C2F ..••• $12,610·
• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgemust state: "Installation of this
ment leiters for purchase
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
Error Correction: Provides capability of correcting sIngle data
error bursts of up to four bits span as well as detecting all single
error bursts of up to ten bits span.
Write Format Release: Frees the subsystem while the drive erases from the end of a formatted write record to the end of the
track.
Rotational Position Sensing: Permits channel disconnect during
period of rotational latency, thereby providing greater channel
availability... requires one unshared subchannel on a block multiplexer channel for each logical device.
Command Retry: Enables the storage control to recover from
certain subsystem errors without recourse to system error recovery procedures.
Second
Drive
t' MAC/MRC,
ETP/MLC and MMMC price. effective 6/1/19.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----.:. =-= == ';" ==
---- -------
M 3350 - 3360
May 79
DP Machines
3350 Direct Access Storage (cont'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
IBM 3360 PROCESSOR STORAGE
PRIMARY CONTROLLER ADAPTER (#1320). [Mdls A2 and A2F
only]
Permits selection/deselection of the controller of the
A2/A2F unit as the online controller via a manual switch on the
C2/C2F unit .in the string. Maximum: One per A2/ A2F unit. Field
Installation: Yes. Corequislte: One C2 or C2F unit in the string.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). [Mdls A2, A2F, C2
and C2F only]
To attach the String Switch (#8150) to the configuration control panel of a S/370 mdl 158MP or 168MP. Field
Installation: Yes.
'STRING SWITCH (#8150). [Mdls A2, A2F, C2 and C2F only]
To link the 3350 to a second attachment. The two attachments
may be on the same CPU or different CPUs and may be any two
of the following: 3830 Storage Control mdl 2 or 3, 3880 Storage
Control, the 3345 Storage and Control Frame mdl 3, 4 or 5, the
ISC (#4660) on the S/370 mdl 145, 145-3 or 148, or the ISC
(#4650) on the S/370 mdl 158, 158-3, 168 or 168-3. See appropriate machines for additional requirements. Switching between
the two attachments is under program control. The 3350 may also
be dedicated to a single attachment with an enable/disable switch.
Specify: #9608 for attachment to a 3880, or #9609 for attachment to any
of the following ... 3345 mdl 3, 4 or 5, the ISC (#4660) on a S/370 mdl
/45, /45-3 or /48, the ISC (#4650) on a S/370 mdl158, 158-3, 168,
168-3, or a 3830 mdl2 or 3. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Primary Controller Adptr #1320
Remote Switch Attach
6148
String Switch
8150
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
$1.50·
$ 9*
NC
$ 8*
NC
$ 275
NC
NC
162*
138*
4,610
9.00*
[No longer available]
Purpose: Processor storage for a S/370 mdl 155 or 165.
Model 1
262,144 bytes ... one used in as/370 mdl H155 ...
one used with a 3360 mdl 3 in a S/370 md11H155.
Model 2
393,216 bytes ... one used in a S/370 mdl HG155.
Model3
524,288 bytes ... one used in a S/370 mdl 1155 ...
one used with a 3360 mdl 1 in a S/370 mdl IH155
." two used in a S/370 mdl J155 ... three used in a
S/370 mdl JI155 ... four in a S/370 mdl K155.
Model4
262,144 bytes ... two used in a S/370 mdl 1165 ...
two used with two 3360 mdl 5s in a S/370 mdl
J1165.
Model 5
524,288 bytes ... two used in a S/370 mdl J165 ...
two used with two 3360 mdl 4s in a S/370 mdl
JI165 ... four used in a S/370 mdl K165 ... six
used in a S/370 mdl KJ165.
Model Changes: Not recommended for field installation.
Highlights: Models 1, 2 and 3 have a 2. 1-microsecond storage
cycle with a 16-byte parallel access.
Models 4 and 5 have a 2.0-microsecond storage cycle with a
16-byte parallel access. Storage words are 4-way interleaved in
the S/370 mdl 165 to improve sequential access.
On all models Error Checking and Correction as well as Store and
Fetch Protect are provided by the processing unit.
PREREQUISITE: An appropriate 3155 or 3165. When ordering
3360s to change the size of a S/370 mdl 155 or 165, a companion order modifying the model of the 31 55 or 3165 must also be
submitted.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
3360
1
$ 3,060
$139,300
2
3
4
5
4,590
6,120
$187
279
372
187
372
3,060
6,120
209,000
279,700
139,300
279,700
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 65%
Machine GrC?up: 0
Metering: Mdls 1, 2, 3 - Base Unit (meter on 3155)
Per Call: 3
Mdls 4, 5 - Assignable Unit
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 1
• MAC/MRC, ETP/MLC and MMMC price. effective 6/1/79.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-------- - - ----------------_.-
M 3370
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3370 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208V, or
#9915 for 240V Note: 20 VAC is compatible with 230 VAC
systems.
•
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, or #9065 for pebble gray.
Purpose: High speed, large capacity, fixed media, direct access
storage for attachment to a 4331 or 4341 Processor.
Model A1
Single drive disk storage with two actuators and
associated control for attachment to a 4331 or 4341
Processor. It provides logic for the attachment of up
to three 3370 model B1 s.
Model B1
Single drive disk storage with two actuators. Up to
three 3370 model B 1 s can be attached to a 3370
model A1.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights
The 3370 features a high data rate, fast access, fixed block
format, and low cost per byte. It employs a fixed, sealed
Head/Disk Assembly (HDA) as the storage medium. The HDA is
a field replaceable unit. Two access arms per spindle, each
separately addressable with overlapped operation ... locatelocate/read/write. Each arm accesses one-half the data. Reduced power and space requirements. Fixed block architecture
allows the specification of DASD space in groups of blocks,
making space definition independent of tracks and cylinders.
Fixed Block Format
512
558,000
285.6
571.3
Bytes per block
Blocks per actuator
Bytes per actuator (megabytes)
Bytes per spindle (megabytes)
Prices:
3370
Mdl
MRC
A1
B1
$1,058
705
MLC
2 Yr
$900
600
$35,100
23,400
$120
90
SPECIAL FEATURES
STRING SWITCH (#8150). [Model A1 only ... for use with 3880
Storage Control mdl 1 only] To attach the 3370 model A1 to a
second Storage Director. The two Storage Directors may be on
the same processor or different processors. Switching between
the two Storage Directors is under program control. The 3370
may also be dedicated to a single attachment with an
enable/disable switch. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
String Switch
MRC
#8150 $118
MLC
2 Yr
Access Time
ms
ms
ms
ms
Error Correction: Provides the capability of correcting single
data error bursts of up to nine bits span as well as detecting all
single error bursts of up to sixteen bits span.
Automatic Position Sensing: Fixed Block Architecture provides
for relative block addressing ... each block separately addressable .,. channel automatic disconnect during period of rotational
latency providing greater channel availability... requires one
unshared subchannel on a block multiplexer channel for each
logical address.
Command Retry: Enables the storage control to recover from
certain subsystem errors without recourse to system error recovery procedures.
Write Protect Function: A switch for each Drive Address provides the means to protect data from being rewritten or erased.
When the read/write switch is in the read-only position, any
write command is rejected. The switch state can be changed
only when the device is not selected,
HDA Data Recovery: [Plant only] Should data in the field prove
unrecoverable, data recovery assistance at the plant of manufacture will be provided.
Prerequisites
For a 4331 Processor -- a 3370 mdl A1 requires a DASD
Adapter (#3201) on the 4331For a 4341 Processor -- a 3370 mdl A1 requires a 3880
Storage Control mdl 1 connected to a 2.0 megabyte block
multiplexer channel on the 4341.
A 3370 mdl B1 requires a 3370 mdl A1.
Electrical power is required during non-operating periods
except when maintenance is being performed. !=ach 3370
contains internal environmental control circuitry which remains active when machine power is turned off. Continued
or repeated failure to provide power to this circuitry' could
cause machine malfunction and could result in possible loss
of data.
Maximum: See 3880 Storage Control or 4331 Processor.
Bibliography: GA26-1657
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Purchase
$100 $3,900
Data Rate -- 1.859 ± 3% megabytes per second.
5
20
40
10.1
MMMC/
AMMCR
Plan Offering: Plan D
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 60%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
Blocks are separately addressable and jointly form a contiguous
address space.
Seek (Arm Motion)
Minimum
Average
Maximum
Latency
Purchase
MMMC/
AMMCR
$1.50
Not 10 be reproduced without written permission.
-- ----
---- -----.:.:-:
== ';' ==
M 3410 - 3411
May 79
DP Machines
3410 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
3411 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL
Purpose: Magnetic tape units and controls for a 3790 Communication System, S/360 mdls 22, 25, 30, 40, 50, S/370 mdls 115
thru 158, a 3031 Processor, or a 4331 or 4341 Processor ... the
3410 mdl 1 can be used with a 3881 Optical Mark Reader mdl 2
or a 3886 Optical Character Reader mdl 2 ... the 3411 and 341 0
mdl 3s can be used with a 3800 Printing Subsystem ... the 3411
mdl 1 can be used with a 3776 Communication Terminal mdl 3 or
4, or a 3777 Communication Terminal mdl 3.
NOTE: For possible use with System/3, see GSD
Manual.
Models: Data rates in 8-bit bytes per second (1600 bpi).
Model 1
Model 2
Model 3
3410
3411
20,000
40,000
80,000
20,000
40,000
80,000
Highlights: The 3410 is a single tape unit controlled by a 3411.
The 3411 is a single channel control unit with one tape drive.
-
Efficient compact space saving design.
Dual Density feature ... allows processing of data recorded
at 1 600 bpi PE or 800 bpi NRZI.
Seven Track feature ... tape written in seven-track format
compatible with tapes written at 200, 556, 800 bpi by
729/7330/7335 and 2401/2402/2403/2404/2415/3420
tape drives equipped with 7-track read/write heads. Note:
7-track tapes cannot be used witll a 3776 mdl 3 or 4, or a
3777 mdl3.
Radial attachment of tape units permits off-line maintenance.
Simplified tape threading path.
Checking -- during write operations, both parity and signal amplitude are checked. (When used with a 3881 Optical Mark Reader,
both are checked in 800 bpi NRZI ... signal amplitudes only in
1600 bpi.) During read operations, parity is checke~.
Error
error
track
3881
Correction - in 1600 bpi PE recording format single track
correction in flight takes place. For 9-track, 800 bpi NRZI,
in error (T.I.E.) is provided, (not applicable when used with a
Optical Mark Reader).
Functions: The following table indicates feature numbers for
corresponding functions:
or 12, RPQ
Features."
is required on the 3411 ... see "Special
For S/360 or S/370 mdl 135 and up, and all 4300 Processors -- a
control unit position on a system channel, plus S/360/370 Attachment (#7360) on the 3411 ... see "Special Features."
S/360 mdl 25 2025.
Selector Channel (special feature) ... see
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 -- multiplexer channel (standard), or
Selector Channels (special features, except one is standard on
2022) ... see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/370 mdl 135 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector or
Block Multiplexer Channels'(special features) ... see 3135. NOT
supported on byte multiplexer channel for concurrent operation
with Integrated File Adapter, Integrated Communications Adapter, or Selector Channel.
S/370 mdl 135-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (special features) ... see 3135-3. NOT
supported on byte multiplexer channel for concurrent operation
of Integrated File Adapter, Integrated Communications Adapter,
or Block Multiplexer Channel.
S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138. NOT supported on
byte multiplexer channel for concurrent operation of Integrated
File Adapter, Integrated Communications Adapter, or Block
Multiplexer Channel.
S/370 mdl 145 -- multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (one is standard), or Block Multiplexer Channel
(special feature) ... see 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) '" see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 -- block multiplexer channel (first two are
standard) '" see 3155, 3158.
3031 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is standard),
,block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see 3031.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (optional) ... see 4331 byte
multiplexer channel for restrictions. Block multiplexer channel
(optional) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor -- block multiplexer channels (2 are standard) ... see
4341.
3411 Control Unit
3410· Tape Unit
(includes tape unit
on 3411)
Subsystem Function
Feature Name
1600 boi 9-track only
Single Density Standard
#3211
1600 bpi PE/800 bpi
NRZI 9-track
Dual Density
#3211 or #3221
#9150
1600 bpi PE/200-556-800
#32 II or #6550
Seven Track
#9160
boi NRZI 7-track
• Tape Units must all be the same model as 3411.
Characteristics
Model 1 Model 2 Model 3
Data Rate (kb/sec)
at 1600 bpi (P.E.)
20
40
80
at 800 bpi (NRZI)
10
20
40
at 556 bpi
6.9
13.9
27.8
at 200 bpi
2.5
5.0
10.0
Recording Density (bpi)
1600/800/556/200 (all models)
Tape Speed (ips)
12.5
25
50
Nominal IBG (inch) -- 9-track
.6
.6
.6
Nominal IBG (inch) -- 7-track
.75
.75
.75
Nominal IBG Time (ms) -- 9-track 48
24
12
30
15
Nominal IBG Time (ms) -- 7-track 60
12
6
Nominal Rd/Wr Access Time (ms) 15
Rewind Time Full Reel (min)
3
3
2
Maximums: Interconnected 3410s and 3411 s must be of the
same model... models cannot be intermixed. The maximum number of tape units (341 Os) per 3411 are:
Model 1 - up to three 3410 mdl 1 s ... a total of 4 drives.
Model 2 - up to five 34.10 mdl 2s ... a total of 6 drives.
Model 3 - Up to five 3410 mdl 3s ... a total of 6 drives.
LIMITATION: A maximum of one 3410 mdl 1 can be attached
to a 3881 or 3886.
PREREQUISITES: Each 3411 requires the following:
For S/370 mdl 115, 125 - a 3411 Magnetic Tape Adapter
(#4675) on the 3115 or 3125 and S/370 mdl 115/125 Attachment (#7361) on the 3411 except with 3115 mdl HG2, 3125 mdl
HG2 and 12. When attached to 3115 mdl HG2, or 3125 mdl HG2
3776 Communication Terminal mdl 3 or 4, or 3777 Communication Terminal mdl 3 - 3411 Model 1 Attachment (#7801) on the
terminal ... see "Special Features" under 3776 or 3777. The
3411 itself requires S/3-3770/3790 Communication System
Attachment (#7003) ... see "Special Features" below.
3790 Communication System - a Magnetic Tape Attachment
feature (#7840) on the 3791 Controller. The 3411 requires a
3790 Attachment feature (#7003).
3800 Printing Subsystem - Tape-to-Printing, Subsystem Feature
(#7810) on the 3800 ... see "Special Features" under 3800.
Note: A control unit position is not required.
Each 341 0 requires an appropriate model of the 3411, except
when a 3410 mdl 1 is attached to a 3881 or 3886.
Magnetic Tape: The following tapes and reels can be used -- IBM
Series 500, IBM Heavy Duty, IBM Dynexcel, or competitive formulations which meet the tape and reel criteria in "Tape
Specifications", GA32-0006. NOTE: IBM tapes other than those
above do not provide adequate reliability and should not be used.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-Q360, S/370 -- GC20-0001, 3881
- GA21-9127. Also IBM 3410/3411 Component Summary, GA320015.
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V. If used with a 3881 Optical Mark
Reader , a 3886 Optical Character Reader, or a 3800 Printing
Subsystem, voltage must be consistent.
[2] Dual Density, Control (3411 only): #9150. Permits attachment
of 3410s equipped with Dual Density, Tape Unit (#3221) and
installation of Dual DenSity, Tape Unit (#3221) on the 3411
itself. 3410s equipped with Single Density, Tape Unit (#3211)
can also be attached. Limitation: Cannot be installed on same
3411 with Seven Track, Control (#9160). Field Installation:
Yes.
[3] Seven Track, Control (3411 only): #9160. Permits attachment
of' 341 Os equipped with Seven Track, Tape Unit (#6550) and
installation of Selien Track, Tape Unit (#6550) on the 3411
itself. 3410s equipped with Single Density, Tape Unit (#3211)
can also be attached. #9160 includes the translator function
which, when used, causes 8-bit bytes from the I/O interface to
be written on tape as 6-bit BCD characters and 6-bit charac-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- ---- ---------== = ':' =
M 3410-3420
May 79
DP Machines
3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control (cont'd)
ters read from tape to be translated into their EBCDIC equivalents. The Data Conversion function, also included, allows
reading and writing of 8-bit bytes on 7 -track tape by converting
4 tape characters to 3 storage bytes and vice versa.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Dual Density, Control
(#9150). Cannot be used with a 3776 mdl 3 or 4, or a 3777
mdl 3. Field Installation: Yes.
[4] Additional Tape Units (3411 only): #9001 .. , required if the
number of tape drives is to exceed four (one 3411 plus three
341 Os). Field Installation: Yes.
[5] Color:#9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[6] Tape Reels: If any color other than gray is desired, specify
#9051 for red, #9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
[7] Density Formats: The 3410/3411 subsystem can operate in
three density formats ... 1600 bpi PE, single density ... or
1600/800 bpi, dual density ... or 200/556/800 bpi, seven
track. With the exception of single density, which is standard
on the control unit of the 3411, a feature number for the format
desired must be specified for each tape unit and the control
unit ... see "Special Features" for limitations. Dual Density,
Control (#9150) is required on the 3411 for Dual Density,
Tape Unit (#3221) on the 3411 and attached 3410s .. , see
specify [2] above. Seven Track, Control (#9160) is required on
the 3411 for Seven Track, Tape Unit (#6550) on the 3411 and
attached 341 Os ... see specify [3] above.
[8]
System Attachments: S/370 Mdl 115/125 Attachment
(#7361) is required for attachment to a S/370 mdl 115 or 125
except with 3115 mdl HG2, 3125 mdl HG2 and 12. When attached to 3115 mdl HG2, 3125 mdl HG2 or 12, RPQ
is
required on the 3411 .,. see "Special Features" ... S/360/370
Attachment (#7360) is required for attachment to a S/360 or
S/370 mdls 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148, 155, 158, a
3031 Processor, or any 4300 Processor. System/3-3770/3790
Communication System Attachment (#7003) is required for
attachment to a 3790 system. System 3 - 3770/3790 Commu.nication System Attachment (#7003) is required for attachment
to a 3776 Communication Terminal mdl 3 or 4 or to a 3777
Communication Terminal mdl 3.
PRICES:
Mdl
3410
1
2
3
3411
1
2
3
- FTP/MLC
MAC/ MLC
MRC 1 yr- 2 yr
$206
274
342
454
578
701
Permits the 3410 or the tape unit on the 3411 to operate at 200,
556 or 800 bpi NRZI in the seven track format compatible with
729,7330,7335 and 2401, 2402, 2403, 2404, 2415, 3420 tape
units equipped with seven-track read/write heads. Tape units with
this feature will only read or write 7 -track tape. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Single Density, Tape Unit (#3211), or Dual
Density, Tape Unit (#3221). Cannot be used with a 3776 mdl 3 or
4 or a 3777 mdl 3. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Seven
Track, Control (#9160) on the 3411.
SYSTEM/3-3770/3790 COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ATTACHMENT (#7003). [3411 mdl 1 only] To atta,ch a 3411 mdl 1 with
up to three 3410 mdl 1s to a 3791 Controller, or to attach one
3411 mdl 1 to a 3776 Communication Terminal mdl 3 or 4, or a
3777 Communication Terminal mdl 3, Prerequisites: Magnetic
Tape Attachment (#7804) on the 3791, or 3411 Magnetic Tape
Unit and Control Mdl 1 Attachment (#7801) on the 3776 mdl 3 or
4, or 3777 mdl 3. Maximum: 1. Field Installation. Yes.
Limitations: Cannot be, installed with S/360/370 Attachment
(#7360), or S/370 Mdl 115/125 Attachment (#7361). For use
with System 3, see GSD sales manual.
S/360/370 ATTACHMENT (#7360).
[3411 mdl 1, 2, 3] To
attach the 3411 to a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 50 or a S/370
mdl 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148, 155, 158, a 3031 Processor, or any 4300 Processor. [3411 mdl 3] To attach the 3411 mdl
3 to a 3800 Printing Subsystem. Up to eight control units may be
attached to the 3800 provided that power sequencing and control
connection for all other than one are provided by the system.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with System/3-3790 Communication System Attachment (#7003) or S/370 Mdl 115/125 Attachment (#7361 or RPQ
). Field Installation: Yes.
S/370 Md1115/125 ATTACHMENT (#7361). [3411 mdll, 2, 3]
To attach the 3411 to a S/370 mdl 115 or 125, except to 3115
mdl HG2, 3125 mdl HG2 or 12. When attached to 3115 mdl HG2,
3125 mdl HG2 or 12, RPQ 870061 is required, Limitation: Cannot
be installed with System/3-3790 Communication System Attachment (#7003) or S/360/370 Attachment (#7360 or RPQ
870061). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 3411 Magnetic
Tape Adapter (#4675) on the 3115 or 3125 Processing Unit.
Special Feature Prices:
Purchase
MMMC
$190
252
315
$173
230
287
$ 5,655
7,560
9,360
$ 61.50
68.00
75.00
418
532
645
381
486
589
12,460
15,770
19,220
95.00
102.00
109.00
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 55%
Maintenance: C
Metering: 3410 (all mdls - I/O Unit Online) ... 3410 mdl 1 when
used with a 3881 mdl 2 -- I/O Unit (Offline).
3411 -- Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Single Density, Tape Unit
Dual Density, Tape Unit
Seven Track, Tape Unit
S/3-3770/3790
Communication Sys Attach
S/360/370 Attachment to mdls
135,145,155,158 or 3031
S/370 Mdl 115/125 Attach
3411 Mdll to Mdl 2
Mdl 1 to Mdl 3
Mdl 2 to Mdl 3
$4,140
8,460
8,460
SPECIAL FEATURES
SINGLE DENSITY, TAPE UNIT (#3211). [3410. 3411 any mdl]
Permits the 341 0 or the tape unit on the 3411 to operate at 1 600
bpi PE only. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Dual Density,
Tape Unit (#3221) or Seven Track, Tape Unit. (#6550). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: If installed on the 3886 Optical
Character Reader, Single Density Tape· Adapter (#6490) on the
3886.
DUAL DENSITY, TAPE UNIT (#3221).
[3410, 3411 any mdl]
Permits the 3410 or the tape unit on the 3411 to operate at 800
bpi as well as 1 600 bpi. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Single Density, Tape Unit (#3211) or Seven Track, Tape Unit
(#6550). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Dual Density,
Control (#9150) on the 3411 ... see "Specify," or Dual Density
(#3550) on the 3881 Optical Mark Reader, or Dual Density, Tape
Adapter (#6485) on the 3886 Optical Character Reader.
SEVEN TRACK, TAPE UNIT (#6550).
[3410, 3411 any mdl]
#3211
3221
6550
$ 60 $ 55
81
88
88
81
$ 50
74
74
$1,835
2,645
2,645
$ 9.50
36.50
17.00
7003
83
76
70
2,315
3,50
7360
7361
166
110
153
101
139
92
4,625
3,080
20,00
5,00
3420 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT - Models 3,5, 7
Purpose: Magnetic tape unit for S/360 and S/370.
Model 3
120,000 eight-bit bytes/second ... for use with
S/360 mdls 22, 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode),
75, 85, 91, 195, , with all S/370 Processors, or
with a 3800 Printing Subsystem.
Model 5
200,000 eight-bit bytes/second ... for use with
S/360 mdls 22, 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode),
75, 85, 91, 195, , with all S/370 Processors, or
with a 3800 Printing Subsystem.
Model 7
320,000 eight-bit bytes/second ... for use with
S/360 mdls 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75, 85, 91,
195, with all S/370 Processors except 3115 and
3125, or with a 3800 Printing Subsystem.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (There are no additional
installation charges)
3410 Mdll to Mdl 2 $2,385
Mdl 1 to Mdl 3 4,635
Mdl 2 to Mdl 3 4,635
-- FTP/ -MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC I yr- 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Highlights: Radial attachment of tape drives to the control unit via
a switch located in the control unit, permitting off-line service of
individual tape units without disturbing the subsystem. 24-line
multiplex interface provides advanced diagnostic capability.
MST circuitry reduces card count while increasing functions:
expanded sense data, better diagnostic capability, unique device identification, EC level and feature identification. Reads
and writes IBM Series/500, Dynexcel or Heavy Duty half-inch
magnetic tape on 10-1/2", 8-1/2". or minireels. Limitations:
The following half-inch tapes can be used: IBM Heavy Duty,
IBM Dynexcel, IBM Series/500, or competitive formulations
which meet the specifications described in SRL GA32-0006,
IBM Mylar'" and IBM Acetate tapes should not be used with
3420 tape units.
• FTP is 12-23 months.
• •• "Mylar" is a trademark of E. I. DuPont de Nemours & Co., Inc. "IBM
Mylar" is a brand of magnetic tape which includes a Mylar polyester substrate and
which was previously marketed by IBM.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----------==- ==:
----== ';' ==
~T
May 79
DP Machines
3420 Magnetic Tape Unit - Models 3,5,7 (cont'd)
Automatic threading and Cartridge Loading - threading is
automatic with or without the wraparound cartridge; automatic
retry (with cartridge only) in case of load failure, stopping on
the leader to prevent damage to the recorded surface. With
the wraparound cartridge, tape is not exposed to contamination or damage.
Nine Track 1600 bpi Phase Encoding Operation -- data is recorded parallel by bit, serial by byte at 1600 bytes/inch,
phase encoded, in nine tracks across the width of the tape.
The data format uses eight of the nine bits for data; the ninth
bit is a parity bit. Data is recorded in odd parity. The eight
bits of one byte can represent an alphabetic character, zoned
decimal digit, two decimal digits (packed), a special character,
or eight binary bits. The recording format is compatible with
the 1600 bpi PE recording of tape units 2401, 2402, 2403,
2404, 2415 mdls 4, 5 and 6, and 2420 mdls 5 and 7. For
nine track 1600 bpi PE operation only, specify Single Density
(#6631) ... see "Special Features" for limitations and prerequisites.
Nine Track 800 bpi NRZI Operation -- tape is written at BOO bpi
in the nine track NRZI format as well as in the 1600 bpi PE
format. Data representation is the same as for 1 600 bpi PE
operation. For nine track BOO bpi NRZI capability, Dual Density
(#3550) is required on the tape unit ... see "Special
Features" for limitations and prerequisites.
Seven Track Operation - tape is written in the seven track
format compatible with tapes written at either 556 or 800 bps
by 729/7330/7335 and 2401/2402/2403/2404/2415 tape
drives equipped with seven-track read/write heads. For seven
track operation, Seven Track (#6407) is required on the tape
unit ... see "Special Features" for limitations and prerequisites.
Checking -- each byte is parity checked while tape is being read.
Data written on tape is read back instantly and checked as in
reading, with full parity check.
Error Correction -- single track drop-out errors are corrected "in
flight" during 1600 bpi read operations.
Read Backwards -- all tapes (9- or 7 -track) written on a
2401/2402/2403/2404/2415/2420 can be read by the 3420
in a forward or backward direction. The Data Conversion function is inoperative during backward read of 7 -track tapes.
Limitations:
Model 3 cannot be attached to the multiplexer channel of the
S/360 mdl 22 or 30.
Model 5 cannot be attached to the multiplexer channel of the
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, or 50. Model 5 at 1600 bpi PE cannot
be attached to S/360 mdl 22. If the 3420 mdl 5 is ordered for
attachment to a selector subchannel feature of the 2870,
consult
Model 7 cannot be attached to S/360 mdl 22, 30 or 40, S/370
mdl 115 or 125, nor to the 2B70.
OS does not support burst mode devices on multiplexer channels
on S/360 mdls 22, 30, 40 or 50, or on the basic 2870 multiplexer channel. Programming support for the extended diagnostic capabilities of the 3420 requires a minimum of 32K
core.
Supplies - one standard 10-1/2" reel of magnetic tape in an
easyload cartridge is shipped with each tape unit. For additional
reels of tape and cartridges, see IRD sales manual.
PREREQUISITE: A 3803 Tape Control.
Model 3
ModelS
Model 7
Characteristics:
Nominal Data Rate (kb/sec)
120
200
320
At 1600 bpi PE
60
100
160
At 800 bpi NRZI
41.7
69.5
111.2
At 556 bpi (7 -track)
15
25
40
At 200 bpi (7 -track)
Recording Density (Bytes/inch) ---- 1 600/ BOO / 556 / 200 ---75
125
200
Tape Speed (Inches/second)
Nominal IBG (Inches)
0.6
0.6
0.6
Nine-track
0.75
0.75
0.75
Seven-track
NominallBG Time (ms)
B.O
4.B
3.0
Nine-track
10.0
6.0
3.75
Seven-track
Rewind Time
45
(2400' Reel, Seconds)
60
60
Rewind-Unload Time
51
(2400' Reel, Seconds)
66
66
7
10
Auto Threading Time' (Seconds) 10
Nominal Read/Write Access
4.0
2.9
2.0
Time" (ms)
•• Access time is the interval from initiation of a write or forward read com-
mand until the first data byte is read or written when tape is brought up to
speed from stopped status.
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360, S/370 - GC20-0001
Specify: [1] One AND ONL Y ONE of the following must
fied for each tape unit ... see "Special Features."
#6631 (Single Density) -- for 9-track 1600 bpi PE
only.
#3550 (Dual Density) - for 9-track 800 bpi NRZI
as well as 1600 bpi PE.
#6407 (Seven Track) -- for 7-track 556 or 800
operation.
be specioperation
operation
bpi NRZI
NOTE: MES orders for these features to effect field changes
should consider that one of these three features MUST be
installed on the 3420 or it is incomplete.
[2] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[4] Tape Reels: If any color other than gray is desired, specify
#9051 for red, #9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
PRICES:
- FTP/ ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MLC MLC
MRC 1 yrt
2 yr 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Mdl
$436
586
694
3
5
7
$401 $366 $366 $13,660
539 492 492
18,320
638 583 583
20,520
$ 83
91
108
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 55%
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Metering: I/O Unit (On-line)
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
ETP /FTP/MLC ... all models of the 3420 may be under ETP /MLC
or FTP/MlC.
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
To
Model 3
Model 5
ModelS
$4,660
Model 7
$8,580
8,580
NOTE: For upgrades to mdls 4, 6 or 8, see 3420 mdl 4, 6, 8.
SPECIAL FEATURES
DUAL DENSITY (#3550). Permits the tape unit to operate at 800
bpi NRZI nine track as well as at 1600 bpi PE. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with either Single Density (#6631) or Seven Track
(#6407). [Field installable except for machines with serial
#90XXX.] Prerequisite: Dual Density (#3551) on the 3803 Tape
Control.
SEVEN TRACK (#6407).
Permits the tape unit to operate at
either 556 or 800 bpi NRZI in the seven track format compatible
with 729, 7330, 7335 and 2401, 2402, 2403, 2404, 2415 tape
units equipped with seven track read/write heads. limitation:
Cannot be installed with either Single Density (#6631) or Dual
Density (#3550). [Field Install able only to replace Dual Density
(#3550), otherwise available at time of manufacture only.]
Prerequisite: Seven Track (#6408) on the 3803 Tape Control.
SINGLE DENSITY (#6631).
Permits the tape drive to read or
write tapes at 1600 bpi PE. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
either Dual Density (#3550) or Seven Track (#6407). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: One of the following on the 3803
Tape Control - Single Density (#9570), Dual Density (#3551), or
Sellen Track (#6408).
Special Feature Prices:
Dual Density
Seven Track.
Single Density
• From initiation (using mounted supply reel) to "Tape Drive Ready."
t
FTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
" FTP/ -. ETP/
MAC/MLC MLC MLC
MRC 1 yrt 2 yr 2 yr Purch
#3550 $134 S123 $ 113 $ 113
6407
103
95
87
87
103
95
87
87
6631
$4,245
3,290
3,290
MMMC
$41.00
41.00
24.50
------- ------ ---
.=~= o:r
=
M 3420.2
May.79
DP Machines
3420 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT - MODELS 4, 6, 8
Purpose: Magnetic Tape Unit for S/370.
Model 4
470,000 eight-bit bytes/second for use with any
S/370 Processor (except 3115 or 3125), or a
3800 Printing Subsystem.
Model 6
780,000 eight-bit bytes/second for use with any
S/370 Processor (except 3115 or 3125), or a
3800 Printing Subsystem.
Model 8
1,250,000 eight-bit bytes/second for use with any
S/370 Processor (except 3115 or 3125), or a
3800 Printing Subsystem.
Highlights: Nominal recording density of 6250 user bytes per inch
with 'a .3 inch inter-block gap.
Radial Attachment -- of tape drives to the control unit via a
switch located in the control unit, permitting Off-line service of
individual tape units without disturbing the subsystem. 24-line
multiplex interface provides advanced diagnostic capability.
Cleaning Mechanism -- a new cleaning mechanism is .engaged
during auto-threading, rewinding and unloading operations to
remove loose contaminants from the tape surface and to protect
the recording head. This new cleaning mechanism makes tape
cleaning a by-product of tape processing. The cleaning mechanism does not, however, replace drive cleaning by the operator,
nor does it replace the need for normal library maintenance.
Automatic Threading and Cartridge Loading - threading is
automatic with or without the wraparound cartridge; automatic
retry (with cartridge only) in case of load failure, stopping on the
leader to prevent damage to the recorded surface. With the
wraparound cartridge, tape is not exposed to contamination or
damage.
Characteristics
Read Backward - tapes written at 6250 bpi mode can be read
in a forward or backward direction. Tapes written at 1600 bpi
(Phase Encoded) mode can be read in a forward or backward
mode if the 3420 mdl 4, 6 or 8 is equipped with the 6250/1600
bpi optional feature ... see "Special Features."
6250/1600 BPI - an optional feature allows the 3420 mdl 4, 6
or 8 to read and record at 1600 bpi (Phase Encoded) density as
well as at 6250 bpi density ... see "Special Features." '
S/360 Attachment - one channel of 3420 mdl 4s may be attached via a 3803 mdl 2 to S/360 mdl 50 by no-charge RPQ ...
3420 mdl 4, 6 or 8 may be attached via a 3803 mdl 2 to S1360
mdls 65 thru 195 (mdl 67 operating in 65 mode) by no-charge
RPQ. S/360 stand-alone emulators are not supported.
Tape Media - most tape volumes which operate satisfactorily on
3420 mdls 3, 5 and 7 will operate with equal or better read-write
reliability for an equivalent number of bytes transferred on 3420
mdls 4, 6 or 8. Nevertheless, tapes must conform to the IBM
Tape Specifications, GA32-0006.
PRE:REQUISITE: A 3803 Tape Control mdl 2.
Limitations: 3420 mdls 4, 6 and 8 via a 3803 mdl 2 control unit
are not supported on byte multiplexer, multiplexer, or 2870 Selector Subchannels at either 6250 or 1 600 bpi. 3420 mdls 6 or 8
cannot be attached to S/360 mdl 50. When contemplating the
attachment of 3420 mdls 6 or 8 to S/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 145 or
145-3, consult System 370 Model 135 Channel Characteristics
(GA33-3010), System 370 Model 138 Channel Characteristics
(GA33-XXX), System 370 ModeJ 145 Channel Characteristics
(GA24-3573) or System 370 Model 148 Channel Characteristics
(GA24-XXXX).
Supplies: One standard 10-1/2" reel of magnetic tape tested for
6250 bpi in an Easyload I cartridge is shipped with each tape unit.
additional reels of tape and cartridges,
Model 6
Model 8
125
6250/1600
200
6250/1600
780
200
1250
320
0.3
0.6
0.3
0.6
1.6/1.5
1.1 / .95
2.6/2.0
1.7/1.3
45
60
51
66
10
7
• Access time is the time required to read or write the lirst byte of data in
a block after a read/write instruction has been initiated from a stopped
position (read/write head positioned in the 18G).
•• From initiation (using mounted supply reel) to "Tape Drive Ready."
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: ~1 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Tape Reels: If any coior other than gray is desired, specify
#9051 f('r red, #9053 for blue, or #9054 for white.
[4] Density: One and only one of the following, #6420 or #6425,
must be specified ... see "Special Features."
PRICES:
Automatic Read Amplification -- automatically adjusts the amplifier gain in the tape drive to each individual reel of tape when
operating at 6250 bpi.
Checking - data written on tape is read back instantly to ensure
later readability.
Model 4
Tape Speed (in/sec)
75
Recording Density
6250/1600
Nominal Data Rate (kb/sec)
at 6250
470
at 1600
120
Nominal IBG (in)
at 6250
0.3
at 1600
0.6
Nominal Read/Write Access (ms)'
at 6250
2.3/2.1
at 1600
4.0/3.0
Max Rewind Time (sec) 60
Max Rewind-Unload (sec) 66
Max Auto Thread (sec)" 10
Mdl
- FTP ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MLC MLC
MRC 1 yrt
2 yr2 yr Purchase MMMC
4
6
8
$608 $559 $511 $511 $21,960
702
646 590
590 25,650
834
767 701
701 28,440
$ 83
91
133
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 55%
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Metering: I/O Unit (on-line)
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
ETP /FTP/MLC: Both an ETP /MLC and a FTP/MLC Plan are
optionally available. Customers can transfer to ETP /MLC when the
3803 mdl 1 is converted to a mdl 2 or when 3420s are model
changed or at any time thereafter. The early termination charge
does not apply but the two year ETP /MLC committment period
begins at the date of the ETP/MLC contract, not the FTP/MLC
contract.
3420s and 3803s shipped from the plant may be under ETP /MLC,
FTP/MLC or MAC/MRC at the customer's option.
Model Changes: Field installable ... any 3420 mdl 3, 5 or 7 can
be converted to a 3420 mdl 4, 6 or 8 in the field.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there. are no additional
instlililation charges)
From
To
Model 4
Model 6
Model 8
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
3
5
7
4
6
$ 9,540
9,540
9,540
$13,230
10,150
10,150
3,690
$16,020
16,020
10,750
12,760
12,760
SPECIAL FEATURES
6250 DENSITY (#6420). Permits the tape unit to operate at nine
track 6250 bpi ... either this feature or #6425 must be specified.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with 6250/1600 Density (#6425).
6250/1600 DENSITY (#6425). Permits the tape unit to operate
at 6250 bpi density as well as 1600 bpi (Phase Encoded) density
... either this feature or #6420 must be specified. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with 6250 Density (#6420).
-- FTP/ -- ETP/
MAC/MLC MLC MLC
MRC I yrt 2 yr 2 yr Purch
Special Feature Prices:
6250 Density
6250/1600 Density
t
#6420
6425
$61
87
see preceding page
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$56
80
$51
73
$51
73
$2,295
3,160
MMMC
$41.00
49.50
-- ---.=. =:::: ~5:
M 3501
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3501 CARD READER
Purpo..: Punched card Input unit for the 3770 Data Communication System. or 8100 Infonnatlon System via 3289 Printer model
3.
Highlights: Used for automatic entry of punched card data. The
3289 Printer mdl 3 or 3770 System performs all format control
and analysis.
Rated 8Q..column card speed Is 50 oards per minute. Cards are
read serially by a sensing mechanism whloh is checked for proper
functioning In every card cycle. EBCDIC or ASCII (3770 System
only) code can be read. Hopper and staoker capacity is approximately 400 cards.
The 3501 Is packaged as a table-top device.
Card Limitations: Generally. special feature cards require careful
handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following has
been approved:
External Scor.. (after separation) - Column 1 Edge: M-3. M-4,
M-5. Column 80 Edge: M-7. All Edges: CF-l1.
Corner Cuts - Any corner: C5. Upper right and upper left
corners: C1. C2. C3.
Verified Cards - approved cards with verify notch between
rows 0 and 1. column 80 edge; or verify punch 2 and 3 in
column 81 area.
Card Stock - regular, edge coated. and heavy duty.
All other special feature cards may result in unsatisfactory performance.
PREREQUISITE: 3501 Card Reader Attachment (#8050) on the
3289-3. 3771. 3774, 3775 or 3776.
Limitation: Cannot be Installed on a machine with a 2502 Card
Reader.
Bibliography:
GC20-OO01
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC. 1-phase. 60 Hz): #9901.
[2] Documentation: One must be specified. #9101 for use with a
3771. #9102 for use with a 3289-3. 3774 or 3775, or #9103
for use with a 3776.
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer to
Installation Manual - Physical Planning. GA27-3006.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC!
MRC
3501
1
$114
ETP!
MLC
2 Yr
Purcha.. MMMC
$ 97
$3,400
$17.00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60% Maintenance: C
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- ----=
- =---- =':' =
M 3504
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3504 CARD READER
Purpose: Punched card input unit for a 5/370 mdl 125.
Model
Rated 8O-column Card Speed
A1
A2
800/minute
1200/minute
Highlights: The 3504 is a high-speed, fully buffered card reader
that attaches natively to a CPU via an Integrated 3504 Card Reader Attachment on the 3125. The 3504 is a natively attachable
version of the 3505 Card Reader.
Both models have a 3,OOO-card capacity file feed and two 1,750card capacity non-programmable stackers which operate in an
alternating mode. Feeding from the file feed hopper is by means
of friction feed rolls with vacuum assist. Failure to feed a card
from the hopper is followed automatically by up to 3 retries before
the machine stops.
Both models have read column eliminate capability which provides
the user, under program control, the ability to suppress the reading of selected card columns. It is recommended for use to prevent reading in columns that could cause validity and read checks
due to invalid codes or open-punched card scores.
Holes in the card are read by a light sensing mechanism which is
checked for correct operation in every card cycle. Cards punched
in either Extended BCD Interchange Code (Data Mode 1) or Card
Image (Data Mode 2) can be read. Machine checks are made for
invalid codes (Data Mode 1 punching only), off-punching, and
mispoSitioned cards.
SPECIAL FEATURES
51/80-COLUMN INTERCHANGEABLE READ FEED (#3921).
[Mdl A2 only] For feeding and reading 51-column cards. The 51
columns of data appear in positions 1 thru 51 of the 80-position
buffer. A special card weight, file feed and hopper liners and
stacker guide assemblies are provided so that the operator can
adjust for 80 or 51-column operations. Intermixed cards on the
same operation are not supported. Reading speed of the 3504 is
maintained. With this feature installed, the capacity of each stacker is permanently reduced to 1500 cards. Can be used with all
other 3504 features. Field Installation: Not recommended.
OPTICAL MARK READ (#5450). For reading up to 40 columns
of marked data. Marked and/or punched hole data can be read
from a card. Columns in which marks are unacceptable are transmitted as Hex "3F" characters. Same validity checking applies as
for holes. Can be used in Card Image mode, in which case the
validity check is suspended. Note: See SRL GA21-9124 for card
and format specifications. It is recommended that Selective Stacker (#6555) be installed for program selecting poorly marked
cards. Limitation: Cannot be used simultaneously with the read
column eliminate function. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
3504 Optical Mark Read Control (#9783) on the 3125.
SELECTIVE STACKER (#6555).
Provides a third stacker
(second logical stacker) which permits time-independent card
selection under program control. Card capacity is 1,750 cards.
When actually using this feature under DOS, the maximum speed
of model A2 on the 3125 is approximately 1,150 cards/minute.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 3504 Selective Stacker
Control (#9784) on the 3125.
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purchase
Maximum: One 3504 mdl A 1 or mdl A2 can be attached to a
3125.
Special Feature Prices:
PREREQUISITE: An Integrated 3504 Card Reader Attachment
(#4680) on the 3125.
51/80-Col Interchangeable
Read Feed
#3921 $157
Optical Mark Read
5450
234
61
Selective Stacker
6555
Card limitations: Generally, special feature cards require careful
handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following card
features has been approved:
Internal Scores (before separation) -- M-4, M-5, OM-2, OM-3,
10-1, 10-2, 10-3 and 5-1 NOTE: When using OM-2 or OM-3,
either reading must be terminated prior to the column that is
scored, or, reading of the scored column and the two adjacent
columns must be suppressed by means of program-controlled
Read Column Eliminate. 5-2 may be used prior to folding, and
after folding if the card is properly flattened.
External Scores (after separation) - column 1 and 80 end: M-3,
M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7, M-11, OM-2, CF-4 and CF-11. Column 1
end only: OM-3. 12 and 9 edge:
Corner Cuts - any corner: C1, C2, C3 and C5.
Card Stock - regular, edge coated, and heavy duty.
Port-A-Punch - can be processed.
All other special feature cards may result in unsatisfactory performance and should be tested in an actual application prior to being
recommended.
Blllography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1) Voltage (AC, 60 Hz supplied by system): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3) High Altitude Group: #9220 ... to be specified when Card
Reader is to be installed in an altitude exceeding 4,300 feet.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase MMMC
$ 516 $21,210
$103
$ 606
Al
22,250
139
736
626
A2
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Per Call: 2
Metering: I/O Unit (On-line)
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Useful Life Category: 2
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
3504
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model Alto Model A2 ..... $1,040
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$134
199
52
$5,300
8,420
2,375
MMMC
$ 51
48
9
-------- -------- ------
= =- =':' =
M 3505
'May 79
DP Machines
3505 CARD READER
Purpose: Punched card input for a S/360 mdl 195 or all S/370
or 4300 Processors.
Model
B1
B2
Rated 8O-column Card Speed
800/minute
1200/minute
Highlights: The 3505 is a high-speed, fully buffered, card reader,
containing its own control unit. With appropriate adapter and
control features installed (see "Special Features"), the 3505
provides the power and logic to control one 3525 Card Punch.
All models have a 3,OOO-card capacity file feed and two 1,750card capacity non-programmable stackers which operate in an
alternating mode. Feeding from the file feed hopper' is by means of
friction feed rolls with vacuum assist. Failure to feed a card from
the hopper is followed automatically by up to 3 retries before the
machine stops.
All models have read column eliminate capability which provides
the user, under program control, the ability to suppress the reading of selected card columns. It is recommended for use to prevent reading in columns that could cause validity and read checks
due to invalid or open-punched card scores.
Holes in the card are read by a light sensing mechanism which is
checked for correct operation in every card cycle. Cards punched
in either the Extended BCD Interchange Code (Data Mode 1) or
Card Image (Data Mode 2) can be read. Machine checks are made
for invalid codes (Data Mode 1 punching only), off-punching, and
mispositioned cards.
Maximum: S/360 mdl 195 and all S/370 or 4300 Processors'the number of 3505 mdls B1 and/or B2 that can be attached
depends upon the number of system channel control unit positions
available.
PREREQUISITES: Each 3505 requires an available control unit
position on a channel.
S/360 mdl 195 and S/370 mdl 195 -- selector channel of 2860,
basic multiplexer channel of 2870, or block multiplexer channel
of 2880 ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ... see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (special features), Block Multiplexer Channels (special
features) ... see 31 35.
S/370 mdl 135 - 3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels (first one is standard), Block Multiplexer Channels
(special features) ... see 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channel (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), Block Multiplexer
Channels (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
External Scores (after separation) - column 1 and 80 end: M-3,
M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7, M-11, OM-2, CF-4 and CF-11. Column 1
end only: OM-3. 12 and 9 edge:
Corner Cuts -- any corner: C1, C2, C3 and C5.
Card Stock - regular, edge coated, and heavy duty.
Port-A-Punch -- can be processed.
All other special feature cards may result in unsatisfactory performance and should be tested in actual application prior to being
recommended.
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20--0360, S/370 - GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1) Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2) Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3) High Altitude Group: #9220 ... to be specified when Card
Reader is to be installed in an altitude exceeding 4,300 feet.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
3505
B1
B2
$ 732
869
$29,940
30,960
$146
199
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Warranty: B
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 45% Useful Life Category: 2
Model Changes: Field installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model B1 to Model B2 ..... $1,040.
SPECIAL FEATURES
51/BO-COLUMN INTERCHANGEABLE READ FEED (#3921).
[Mdl B2 only) For feeding and reading 51-column cards. The 51
columns of data appear in positions 1 thru 51 of the 80-position
buffer. A special card weight, file feed and hopper liners, and
stacker guide assemblies are provided so that the operator can
adjust for 80 or 51-column operations. Intermixed cards on the
same operation are not supported. Reading speed of the 3505 is
maintained. With this feature installed, the capacity of each stacker is permanently reduced to 1500 cards. Can be used with all
other 3505 features. Field Installation: Not recommended.
OPTICAL MARK READ (#5450). For reading up to 40 columns
of marked data. Marked and/or punched hole data can be read
from a card. Columns in which marks are unacceptable are transmitted as Hex "3F" characters. Same validity checking applies as
for holes. Can be used in Card Image Mode, in which case the
validity check is suspended. Note: See SRL GA21-9124 for card
and format specifications. It is recommended that Selective Stacker (#6555) be installed for program selecting poorly marked
cards. Limitation: Cannot be used simultaneously with the read
column eliminate function. Field Installation: YEils.
SELECTIVE STACKER (#6555).
Provides a third stacker
(second logical stacker) which permits time-independent card
selection under program control. Card capacity is 1,750 cards.
When actually using this feature under DOS, the maximum speed
of model B2 on the 3115 or 3125 is approximately 1,150
cards/minute. Field Installation: Yes.
S/370 mdl 165, 168 -- selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannels (special features)
of·· 2870, or block multiplexer channel of 2880 '" see 2860,
2870,2880.
3525 CARD PRINT CONTROL (#8100).
Provides control for
BaSic Card Print (#1421) installed on a 3525 Card Punch. Specify
either #9791 for two-line, or #9792 for multi-line. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Either 3525 Punch Adapter
(#8103) or 3525 Read Punch Adapter (#8105).
3031, 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is standard), block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031,3032.
3525 PUNCH ADAPTER (#8103).
Permits attachment of the
3525 Card Punch, without Card Read (#1533). Limitation: Not
with #8105. Field Installation: Yes.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
3525 READ PUNCH ADAPTER (#8105). Permits attachment of
the 3525 Card Punch equipped with Card Read (#1533).
Limitation: Not with #8103. Field Installation: Yes.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (special feature),
block multiplexer channel (special feature) ... see 4331.
4341 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channel (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Card Limitations: Generally, special feature cards require careful
handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following card
features has been approved:
Internal Scores (before separation) - M-4, M-5, OM-2, OM-3,
10-1, 10-2, 10-3 and S-1. NOTE: When using OM-2 or OM-3,
either reading must be terminated prior to the column that is
scored, or, reading of the scored column and the two adjacent
columns must be suppressed by means of program-controlled
Read Column Eliminate. S-2 may be used prior to folding, and
after folding if the card is properly flattened.
Special Feature Prices:
51 /8O-Col Intchg Rd Fd
Optical Mark Read
Selective Stacker
3525 Card Print Control
3525 Punch Adapter
3525 Read Punch Adapter
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MAC/
MRC Purchase
#3921 $161
5450 237
6555
63
8100
72
8103 128
8105 161
$5,300
8,420
2,375
3,175
5,300
5,830
MMMC
$63.50
590
11.50
5.50
4.50
5.50
-------------=-- =-- --=--':' =
M 3521 - 3525
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3521
IBM 3525 CARD PUNCh
CARD PUNCH
Purpose: Punched card output unit for the 3770 Data Communication System or 8100 Information System.
Highlights: Used primarily for punched card output on the 3770
System or 8100 Information System via 3289 Printer mdl 3 but
can, when equipped with appropriate optional features, be used
alternately as a card reader and/or to print information on a card.
The 3289-3, 3771, 3774, 3775, 3776 or. 3777 mdl 2 or 3 performs all format control and analysis.
Rated 80-column card speed is 50 cards per minute. Hopper and
stacker capacity is approximately 400 cards.
The 3521 is a table-top unit that is placed on top of the 3782
Card Attachment Unit mdl 1.
Card Limitations: Generally, special feature cards require careful
handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following has
been approved:
External Scores (after separation) - column 80 end only: M-4
and M-6.
Internal Scores (before separation) -- M-4, M-5, OM-2, OM-3,
10-1, 10-2, 10-3, S-1. S-2 may be used prior to folding.
Note: Also see limitations that apply for Card Read/Punch
Check (#1521).
Corner Cuts -- any corner: C1, C2, C3 and C5.
Note: The use of corner cuts C1, C2, C3 in the lower left and
lower right corners of the card is not recommended since these
cards cannot be read by the 3501 Card Reader.
Card Stock - regular, edge coated, and heavy duty.
Verified Cards -- approved cards with verify notch between rows
o and 1, column 80 edge; or verify punch 2 and 3 in column 81
area.
Colors - brown, red, blue, white, yellow, salmon, green and
natural. With Card Print (#1501), print contrast will be reduced
on brown, red, blue, salmon· and green cards.
All other special feature cards may result in unsatisfactory performance.
PREREQUISITES: A 3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 for attachment to a 3289-3, 3771, 3774, 3775, 3776 or 3777 mdl 2 or 3
equipped with 3782/3521 Card Punch Attachment (#8150).
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9901.
[2] Documentation: One must be specified. #9101 for use with a
3771, or #9102 for use with a 3289-3, 3774, 3775, 3776 or
3777 mdl 2 or 3.
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer to
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
PRICES:
3521
Mdl
ETP/
MLC
MAC/
MRC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$236
$201
$7,000
$ 33
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option; 60% Maintenance: C
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CARD PRINT (#1501). For printing up to 80 positions along the
top edge of the card. A 64 character set (including blank) is provided. Orders must specify #9491 for EBCDIC, or #9494 for
ASCII (3770 System only). Uses a blank ink roll replaceable by
the customer ..
Field Installation: Yes.
CARD READ/PUNCH CHECK (#1521). Allows the 3521 to be
used alternately as either a card punch or card reader. Read
speed is the same as punch speed (50 cpm). This feature also
provides for detection of punching errors by comparing the data
read from the card with the punch data for each column. When an
error is detected, the machine stops and an error indicator is lit.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: (1) Punch checking must be
Inhibited using 3770 or 8100 job control when punching cards
with internal scores or cards that have been pre punched . (2) This
feature is limited to the Punch Checking function only if the host
3289-3, 3774, 3775, 3776 mdl 1 or :2 is also equipped with a
2502 or 3501 Card Reader. (3) This feature is limited to the
Punch Checking function only when the 3521 is attached to a
3776 mdl 3 or 4, or a 3777 mdl 2 or 3.
Special Feature Prices:
ETPI
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Card Print
#1501 $69 $59
61
52
Card Read/Punch Check 1521
$2,120
1,S80
$ S.OO
23.00
Purpose: Punched card output unit for a S/360 mdl 195 or any
S/370 Processor or 4300 Processor.
Model
P1
P2
P3
Rated SO-Column Card Speed
100/minute
200/minute
300/minute
Highlights: The 3525 is a full-function card punch which. when
equipped with the appropriate special features. can read and/or
print as well as punch 80 column cards in a single pass through
the machine. The 3525 attaches natively to a S/370 mdl 125, or
via (and within 20 feet of) a channel-attached 3505 Card Reader
mdl B1 or B2 to a S/360 mdl 195. any S/370 Processor, or~any
4300 Processor ... see "Prerequisites" below.
The basic unit has a 1,200-card capacity hopper and two 1,200card capacity stackers. Either the Extended BCD Interchange
Code (256 codes) or Card Image (Data Mode 2) can be punched.
Punches parallel, row by row. Cards go to stacker 1 unless program directed to stacker 2.
Card punching is checked by monitoring the movement of all 80
punches. A card in which a punching error is detected is automatically directed to a dedicated, 200-card capacity error stacker and
followed by two automatic punching retries ... the first prepunched
card is directed to the error stacker for analysis purposes ... the
second prepunched card Is directed to the stacker originally selected for the error card. Note: Because of automatic punch retry.
It Is recommended that prepunched· or serially numbered preprinted cards not be used In a punch only mode. When operating In a
read/punch mode ... see Card Read in "Special Features" ...
detected punching errors do not result In an automatic punching
retry and prepunched or serially numbered preprinted cards can
be used. In a read/punch mode. a detected punching error causes
the machine to stop and manual error recovery procedures are
required.
Maximum: S/360 mdl 195, any 5/370 Processor, or any 4300
Processor -- one 3525 can be attached via each 3505 Card
Reader mdl B1 or B2 ... 5/370 mdl 125 -- one 3525 can be
natively attached via the appropriate adapter on the 3125 ... see
3125.
PREREQUISITES: 5/360 mdl 195, any 5/370 Processor, or any
4300 Processor-- a 3505 Card Reader mdl B1 or B2 with a 3525
Punch Adapter (#8103), or 3525 Read Punch Adapter (#8105) ...
5/370 mdl 125 - native attachment via the Integrated 3525 Card
Punch Attachment (#4685) on the 3125.
Card Limitations: Generally special feature cards require careful
handling and a favorable environment. Use of the following card
features has been approved:
Internal Scores (before separation) -- M-4, M-5, OM-2, OM-3,
10-1, 10-2. 10-3 and S-1. When reading cards with internal OM-2
or OM-3 scores (Card Read feature installed), either reading must
be terminated prior to the column that is scored. or reading of
the scored column and the two adjacent columns must be suppressed by means of the program-controlled read column eliminate feature function provided standard with Card Read. S-2 may
be used prior to folding, and after folding if the card is properly
flattened.
External Scores (after separation) - Column 1 and 80 end: M-3.
M-4. M-5, M-6, M-7, M-11, OM-2, CF-4 and CF-11. Column 1
end only: OM-3. 12 and 9 edge: CF-1/9A.
Corner Cuts -- any corner, C1, C2, C3 and C5.
Card Stock - regular, edge coated, and heavy duty.
Port-A-PunchR -- can be punched in unscored fields of the card.
Scored columns of these cards cannot be read.
All other special feature cards may result in unstaisfactory performance and should be tested in an actual application prior to being
recommended.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 - GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC. 60 Hz power provided by the 3125 for
native attachment or by the 3505 mdl B1 or B2 for channel
attachment): #9903 for 208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be
consistent with 3505 or system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
[3] S/370 mdl 125 Adapter: #9690 ... required if the 3525 is to
be attached via an Integrated 3525 Punch Attachment (#4685)
on a 3125. Field Installation: Yes.
[4] Print Character Set: Required when Multiline Card Print
(#5273) or Two-line Card Print (#8339) is ordered. #9677 -for EBCDIC, or #9671 -" for ASCII. Field Installation: Yes.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- - - --===':'=
---- -- ---
M 3525
May 79
DP Machines
3525 Card Punch (cont'd)
Card
Code
12-8-2
12-8-3
12-8-4
12-8-5
12-8-6
12-8-7
12
ll-8-2
ll-8-3
1\-8-4
11-8-5
11-8-6
11-8-7
EBCD
Code
0100-1010
-lOll
-1\00
-llOI
-1110
-1111
0101-000
-1010
-101\
-1100
-1\01
-1\ 10
-1\ 1\
EBCDIC
¢ .
[
<
<
(
(
+
I
Card
Code
ASCII
1\
0-1
12-1\
0-8-3
0-8-4
0-8-5
0-8-6
0-8-7
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
+
I
&
!
$
&
)
;
)
~
~
. .
I
$
EBCD
Code
EBCDIC
01\0-0000
-0001
'I
0110-1010 (blank)
OlIO-lOll
-1\00
%
-1101
-lllO
>
-Ill I
?
0111-1010
:
-101\
#
-1100
~
-1\01
-11\0
=
-1\ 11
"
ASCII
-
/
\
%
-
>
?
:
#
~
=
"
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
3525
P1
P2
P3
$517
655
790
$21,210
22,040
22,870
$ 91.50
122.00
152.00
TWO-LINE CARD PRINT (#8339). Identical in function to Multiline Card Print (#5273) with the exception that printing is limited
to lines 1 and 3 (above the 12 punching row and between rows 12
and 11). Maximum speed in cards/minute, when printing, depends
upon the machine model only. Speeds are as follows:
P1
P2
P3
100 cpm 200 cpm 300 cpm
1 line
2 lines 100 cpm 200 cpm 300 cpm
Limitation: Not with #5273. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Basic Card Print (#1421) on the 3525. Also se'e "Specify" [4]
above for specifying the desired character set.
Special Feature Prices:
Basic Card Print
Card Read
Multiline Card Print
Two-Line Card Print
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Purchase Option: 45%
Mainte'nance: B
Per Call: 3
Metering: I/O Unit (On line)
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model P1 to Model P2 ..... $ 830
Model P1 to Model P3 ..... 1,660
Model P2 to Model P3 .....
830
SPECIAL FEATURES
BASIC CARD PRINT (#1421). Provides a print station following
the punch station. Print mechanism consists of a print chain, 64
hammers, and a card stepping device. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Prerequisites: 3525 Card Print Control (# 81 00)
on 3505 Card Reader or 3525 Card Print Control (#4693) on the
3125. Also requires Two-line Card Print (#8339).or Multiline Card
Print (#5273) on 3525.
CARD READ (#1533),
Provides an optical hole-sensing station
ahead of the punch station. Permits cards to be read in EBCDIC
(Data Mode 1) or Card Image (Data Mode 2). Cards are read in
parallel fashion (row by row) while the previous card is being
punched. Data read is fully buffered and can be used to control
later operations on the same card such as punching, printing, and
stacker selection.
Read column eliminate is standard with the feature. Provides the
ability, under program control, to $uppress the reading of selected
card columns. May be used to prevent reading in columns that
could cause validity and read checks due to invalid codes or
open-punched card scores. See Port-A-Punch under "Card
Limitations" for restrictions. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
3525 Read Punch (#8105) on the 3505 mdl B1 or B2, or 3525
Card Read Control (#9794) on the 3125.
MULTILINE CARD PRINT (#5273). Provides the ability to print,
under program control, on any or all of 25 printing lines on the
card. Each print line is 64 characters long and print locations are
identical to that of the 2560 MFCM. Maximum speed, in
cards/minute, when printing is dependent upon the machine model, the average number of lines printed and the location of the
printed lines. Typical speeds are as follows:
P1
P2
P3
100 cpm 200 cpm 300 cpm
1 line
2 lines 100 cpm 200 cpm 240 cpm
3 lines
67 cpm 133 cpm 150 cpm
67 cpm 114 cpm 133 cpm
4 lines
6 lines
57 cpm
89 cpm 100 cpm
10 lines
44 cpm
62 cpm
67 cpm
25 lines
24 cpm
29 cpm
30 cpm
Limitation: Not with #8339. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Basic Card Print (#1421) on the 3525. Also see "Specify" [4]
above for specifying the desired character set.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
#1421
1533
5273
8339
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
$334
154
92
15
$13,930
6,360
1,140
727
$90.00
23.00
26.00
4.50
--- -------==.::;..: == ';' ==
M3540
May 79
DP Machln~s
IBM 3540 DISKETTE INPUT /OUTPUT
UNIT
plexer channel of 2870, shared or non-shared subchannel of
2880 (non-shared is recommended) ... see 2860, 2870, 2880.
Purpose: Input/output device for use with any virtual storage
S/370 Processor, or any 4300 Processor,
3031, 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel ( one Is standard), block multiplexer channels (five ara standard) .•. see 3031,
3032.
Model B1
Model B2
3033 Proce880r - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard),
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) .,. see 3033.
Has one drive.
Has two drives.
Hlghllghta: The 3540 provides the ability to read or write IBM
Diskettes on S/370, or any 4300 Processor systems. The diskette
is the same recording medium used by the 3740 Data Entry System, and as such, the 3540' provides a facility for entering data
recorded by the 3740 directly Into a S/370, or any 4300
Processor. The IBM Diskette is organized Into 75 tracks, 26 sectors per track, 128 bytes per sector. 73 tracks are used for data.
The data capacity of the diskette Is therefore, 1,898 sectors, or
242,944 bytes.
The models provide a choice of one or two diskette drives. Each
drive uses a stepping motor to control the positioning of Its associated read/write head assembly. Each drive also has an associated
diskette hopper and stacker. Diskettes are fEid, one at a time, from
the hopper and automatically mounted on a drive spindle for
reed/write operations. Following completion of reading or writing,
the diskette Is automatically removed from the spindle and
stacked. Hopper and stacker capacities are 20 diskettes each.
Disk speed is 360 revolutions/minute.
The 3540 has a self-contained control unit and provides double
128-byte buffers associated with each drive. The control unit
operates the drives In a non-shared mode and thus each drive
requires a slMlarate subchannel when attached to a byte multiplexer channel. Effective speed depends upon the number of sectors
read or written per revolution and upon the average number of
sectors recorded on the diskettes. Maximum speeds per drive,
including program Open Time (2 seconds/disk for Read; 10
seconds/disk for Write), and including time to feed and stack
diskettes, are shown below for several combinations. For simultaneous processing or, both drives, the realizable speed per drive is
a function of the type of channel, speed of the channel, type of
operating system, and the application programs.
Seeton/
Revolution
1
2
13
26
Seeton/Minute (read)
Full Disk 1/2 Disk
liS Disk
600
600
2620
3635
575
575
2255
2970
520
520
1595
1925
4331 Proc888Or - byte multiplexer channel (special featura),
block multiplexer channel (special feature) ... see 4331.
4341 Proc...or - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channel (two ara standard) ..• see 4341.
Bibliography: 8/370 - GC20-o001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phaae, 3-wlre, 60 Hz): #9902 for
208 V, or #9904 for 230 V •.. must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
PRICES:
3540
Mdl
B1
B2
MAC/
MRC
$ 879
1,023
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$ 578
871
165
295
1250
1710
MMMC
$37.00
51.50
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Warranty: B
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 50% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 2
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model
Chan~a:
Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (ttlere are no additional
installation charges)
From model B1 to model B2 ••••• $11,geO
Seeton/Minute (write)
FuUDisk 1/2 Disk
I/S Disk
170
310
1500
2210
Purcha..
$22,870
34,830
155
265
835
1020
The 3540 is supported as a sequential DASD device only.
IBM DlskeUes:
Limitation: The use of a 3540 on a S/370 does not eliminate the
minimum configuration requirements for a card reader, except in a
S/370 mdl 115 or 125 card less configuration. Reter to "Minimum
Configuration" paragraph of the "Systems" section for S/370 mdl
115 and 125.
.
For minimum configuration requirements on the 4331 or 4341
Processors, refer to the "Minimum Configuration" paragraphs of
the "$ystems" section for the 4300 Processors.
Maximum: The number of 3540 mdls B1 and/or B2 that can be
attached depends upon the number of system channel control unit
positions available.
PREREQUISITE: Each 3540 requires an available control unit
position on a channel.
S/370 mdl115, 125 - Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature)
... see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdl 135 - Byte Multiplexer Channel (standard), Selector
Channels (speCial features), Block Multiplexer Channel (special
feature) ... see 3135.
S/370 mdl 135-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channels (special feature) ... see 3138-3.
S/370 mdl 138 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl145 - Byte Multiplexer Channel (standard), Selector
Channels (first one Is standard), Block Multiplexer Channels
(special features) •.. see 3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), block
multiplexer channels (standard) .•. see 3148.
S/370 mdl 145 II, 158 - Byte Multiplexer Channel (standard),
2nd Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), Block Multiplexer
Channels (first' two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
S/370 mdl 185 II, 188 - selector channel of 2860, beslc multi-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------==-=
- ':' =
---- ----- ---
M 3601.1
Jui79
DP Machines
IBM 3601
FINANCE COMMUNICATION
CONTROLLER
Purpose: A programmable controller for a$tachment of 3600 Finance Communication System terminals to S/370 or 4300 Processors using appropriate virtual storage system control programs.
S/370 or 4300 Processor attachment is via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller using synchronous data link control (SDLC)
transmission over various common carrier or user-owned transmission facilities. Attachment is also possible via the Communications
Adapter feature on the 4331. See 4331 for details. Note: See
"Programming" and "SCP" pages for attachment capability.
Model 1
A programmable controller with a diskette drive
which accommodates one-sided removable diskettes,
a maximum of six loops and a maximum of 56K
bytes of user programmable storage.
Remote terminal attachments· are available.
Model 2A A programmable controller with a diskette drive
which accommodates one-sided removable diskattes,
a maximum of three loops, and a maximum of 120K
bytes of user programmable storage.
Remote terminal attachments· are available.
All 3600 System terminals are attached by loops which operate at
speeds of 1200, 2400 or 4800 bps for locally attached terminals
and at 1 200 bps for remotely attached terminals. The base unit
provides one loop. Two additional loops are available on models
2A and 2B while five additional loops are available on models 3A
and 3B. 1200 bps loop integrated modems are available on models 1, 3A and 3B only ... see "Special Features." Note: Either
one or two 4800 bps loops per 3601 may be specified.
Communication between the 3601 and the 3704/3705 or the
Communications Adapter (#1601) on the 4331 Processor may be
either through the 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500) on the
3601 or through an external modem using the EIA Interface
(#3701) on the 3601. Local attachment can be made to a
3704/3705 or Communications Adapter (#1601) on the 4331
Processor via its local attachment feature using #3701 on the
3601. See "Modems" and "Special Features" below. Each 3601
operates in half-duplex mode. Duplex communication line operations are possible with multiple 3601 s attached to the line, one
3601 transmitting while the other receives.
Can be programmed to operate independently when the S/370 or
4300 Processor is unavailable. Capable of controlling all terminal
functions, executing arithmetic, and capturing data from the terminals for later transmission to the S/370 or 4300 Processor. A
keylock is provided for the removable diskette. One key is provided.
Model 2B A programmable controller with a diskette drive
which accommodates one or two-sided removable
diskettes, a maximum of three loops, and a maximum of 120K bytes of user programmable storage.
Remote terminal attachments· are available.
Transmission: The 3601 operates over common carrier-provided
or equivalent customer-owned communications facilities. For
information concerning these facilities, see the M 2700 pages.
Model 3A A programmable controller with a diskette drive
which accommodates one-sided removable diskettes,
diskette drive, a maximum of six loops, and a maximum of 120K bytes of user programmable storage.
Remote terminal attachments· are available.
Speed
Modem BPS
Model 3B A programmable controller with a diskette drive
which accommodates one or two-sided removable
diskettes, a maximum of six loops and a maximum of
120K bytes of user programmable storage.
Remote terminal attachments· are available.
Remote terminal attachments can be
achieved on the total number of loops indicated by one or a combination of the following, as applicable.
DEVICE OR FEATURE
DEVICE OR
FEAT. #
2A
3601
2B 3A
1 200 BPS Loop
Integrated Modem
Term. Attach Unit
EIA Interface
#8001
3603-1
RPQ
3
2
3
2
5
6
5
MOdems: External modems operating at speeds up to 9600 bps
may be used with SDLC features.
3863
2400
3872
2400
3864
4800
3874
3875
4800
7200
9600
9600
3865
Facility
Switched Or non-switched voice grade lines
Switched or non-switched voice grade lines
Switched or non-switched voice grade lines
Switched or non-switched voice grade lines
Non-switched voice grade lines
Non-switched voice grade lines
Non-switched digital data service
• No standard IBM Modem available.
Note: Switched line operation is not supported by the
3601/3602 integrated 1200 bps modem.
Supplies:
3B
5
6
5
Hi9hlights: Controls all the functions of 3600 Finance Communication System terminals. Controls data transmission betwe~n those
terminals and the central processing site. Four SDLC Com~unica
tions features are available one of which is required for transmission to and from the Host. An SDLC Communications feature at
speeds from 1 200 bps to 4800 bps or an SDLC Communications
feature at speeds from 1200 bps to 9600 bps can be selected.
Besides Host link speed differences the SDLC feature to 9600 bps
allows a maximum controller aggregate baud rate of 12,000 bps
for the loops independent of the host link speed ... see
"Communications Features."
Model 1 - contains approximately 24K bytes of programmable
storage. Four additional increments of 8K bytes of programmable
storage (for a total of 56K) are available. The amount of programmable storage available for application programming depends upon
the attached terminal configuration and user environment ... see
Additional Storage Feature (#1005).
Models 2A, 2B, 3A and 3B - contain approximately 24K bytes of
programmable storage. Six additional increments of 16K bytes or
three increments of 32K bytes of programmable storage (for a
total of 120K) are available. The amount of programmable storage
available for application programming depends upon the attached
terminal configuration and user environment ... see Additional
Storage Feature (#1006 or #1007).
Models 1, 2A and 3A house a direct access diskette drive with a
one-sided removable diskette which provides permanent storage
for control and user programs, plus temporary and permanent
storage for user data (sequential logging, random retrieval of data
records, etc.).
Models 2B and 3B house a direct access diskette drive with a
two-sided removable diskette which provides permanent storage
for control and user programs, plus temporary and permanent
storage for user data (sequential logging, random retrieval of data
records, etc.).
customer-usable diskettes
Prerequisites: Communications Controller equipped with appropriate features ... see 3704, 3705 or 4331 [for Communications
Adapter (#1601) on the 4331].
Bibliography: GC20-0370
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz). #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation:
Not recommended.
[2] Controller Designation: Media distribution of Controller Data.
Specify #9491 to identify the initial 3601 or 3602 ordered for
use with a host system location, or specify #9492 to identify
additional 3601 s per host system.
If #9491 is specified for the 3601, specify: #9494 if there is
no 3614 or 3624 with a first position designator attached to
any 3601 on the same host system, or ... #9493 if there is a
3614 or 3624, with a first position designator and #9002,
attached to any 3601 on the same host system, and/or ...
#9495 if there is a 3614 or 3624 with a first position designator and #9001 attached to any 3601 on the same host system,
or if encryption capability, via the Data Encryption Standard
(DES), is desired on the 3600 controller. See 3614 Host Attachment Designation under "Specify" for the 3614, or
Controller-Data Designation under "Specify" for the 3624.
If #9491 is specified, select the specify number of ' the desired
media.
#9412
#9413
#9414
9/800 Magnetic Tape.
9/1600 Magnetic Tape
9/6250 Magnetic Tape
If magnetic tape is not available on designated CPU, then select
one of the following media. [DOS/VS users only]
#9431
#9432
80-Column Cards
96-Column Cards
When feature #9491 is specified, additional shipping information is required.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion,
---- - - =':' =
==
-------- ------
M 3601.2
Jut 79
DP Machines
3601 Finance Communication Controller
(conrd)
This is the address to which the first controller data tape will be
automatically shipped for the first controller ordered (with specify #9491).
Whenever controller data is updated by an E.C, it will be shipped to the most current TPC address.
[3] Cables: See M 10000 pages for pricing and ordering instructions. Also see Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27-2766.
the combination of devices to be attached. Add the attachment
factor one time only for each device type. It the attachment factor
sum is 3 or less, feature #1005 (Specify #9581) is not required.
If the attachment factor sum is greater than 3 but does not exceed
11, feature #1005 (Specify #9581) is requir~. If the sum is
greater than 11, but does not exceed 14, two feature #1005s
(Specify #9581) are required. An attachment factor of greater
than 14 is not allowed. Maximum: For #1005 with #9581 specified - Two. Field Installation: Yes. Specify: #9582 for User
Programmable Storage. Additional Storage Feature (#1005) provides an additional 8,192 bytes of user programmable storage.
Maximum: For #1005 with #9582 specified - Four. Field
Installation: Yes
Device Attachment Table - A
Device Type/Feature/Function
3604
Mag. Stripe Encoder-Reader (#4905/4906)
3606
3608
3610,3611 and/or 3612
3614 [with AET only]
3618
Attachment Factor
0
0.6
3.0
5.8
2.4
2.2
3.0
If additional function is required, utilize Device Attachment Table B to determine if #1005 is required. Calculate the sum of the
attachment factors for the combination of devices or function
required. Add the attachment factor one time only for each device
type. If the attachment factor sum is 2 or less, feature #1005
(Specify #9581) is not required. If the attachment factor sum is
greater than two but does not exceed 10, feature # 1 005 (Specify
#9581) is required. If the sum ill greater than 10, but does not
exceed 14, two feature #1005s (Specify #9581) are required. An
attachment factor of greater than 14 is not allowed.
Device Attachment Table - B
A description of attachment factor functions not associated with a
specify, machine or feature is given later in this section: See
Attachment Factor Functions.
Device Type/Feature/Function
PRICES:
Mdl
3601
1
2A
28
3A
38
MAC/
MRC
$593
499
564
593
658
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$505
425
480
505
560
Purchase
MMMC
$17,800
11,100
12,600
13,100
14,600
$8b',qo
79.00
97.50
80,00
98.50
Plan Offering: Plan 8
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Warranty: 8
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
.
Model Changes: Model 2A can be changed to Model 28, 3A or
38. Model 28 to Model 38. Model 3A to Model 38. Field
Installation: Yes ... Model 2A to 28, 2A to 38, or 3A to 38 requires repiacement of the diskette storage device. Adequate
provision must be made for retaining data contained on the diSkette by having the user remove it prior to the start of any conversion.
Model changes from Model 1 to Model 3A or 38: At time of manufacture only.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges).
From
2A
28
3A
To
283A
$1,500-
2,000-
3B
$3,5002,000'
1,500'
'Customer price quotations and customer order a<;knowedgement
must state: "Installation of this model
,letters for purchase
change involves removal of parts which become the property of
18M."
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL STORAGE FEATURE (#1005).
[Madel 1 only]
PrOVides an additional 8,192 bytes of control storage for device
attachment or an additional 8,192 bytes of user programmable
storage, Specify: #9581 for Control Storage tor Device Attachment. Any combination of device types: 3603, 3604, 3606, 3608,
3~10, 3611, 3612, 3614, 3615, 3616, 3618 and/or 3624 may be
attached. Some combinations will require an optional 8,192 bytes
of control storage provided by the use of feature #1005. To
determine if #1005 is required, refer to rhe Device Attachment
Table - A below. Calculate the sum of the attachment factors for
3603 or 3604 mdls 1-6
SDLC (#4501 or #45.02)
Multiple Block I/O - Diskette
3614 or 3624 [Note 1]
3616 Part 1 [Notes 7 and 8]
Optional Instruction Locator
Instruction Enhancements
Address Sharing [Notes 2, 5 and 8]
3606 [Notes 2 and 5]
Translate Instruction (LTRT) [Note 3]
3270/3600 Datastream Mapping [Note 3]
Extended 3270/3600 Keyboard Mapping
[Note 9]
Data Encryption Standard (DES) [Note 1]
Alternate Encryption Technique
(AET) [Note 1]
Priority Dispatching (LCHAP) [Note 3]
Data Sequencing
Extended Statistical Counter Recording
[Note 3]
3618
3615
3616 Part 2 [Notes 7 and 8]
3610,3611 and/or 3612 [Note 4]
3608 Printer [Note 5]
Mag Stripe Encoder-Reader (#4905/4906)
[Note 6]
Set Diskette
3604 mdl 7
Attachment Factor
0
0.7
3.0
1.2
0.5
0.3
1 .7
0.6
2.4
1.2
8.0
1.2
1 .5
1 .0
0.3
1 .6
1.3
3.0
3.2
3.0
2.6
2.8
0.7
0.9
0.5
Notes
[1]
Although both DES and AET may be included, a single
3614 may have either DES or AET but not both. A
3624 may have only DES.
[2]
Address sharing must be included if a 3606 is used.
[3]
The optional instruction locator must be included if this
function is used. If more than one function reqUiring the
optional instruction locator is used, the attachment factor for the locator need be included only once.
[4]
Any 3610.3611 and 3612 combination constitutes one
device type.
[5)
Address sharing must be included if a 3608 is used.
The 3606 must also be included to use the 3608
keyboard/display. Address sharing need be included
only once to utilize both the 3608 printer and
keyboard/display.
Not to bereproduc:ed without written· permission.
-------- - - ----------------_.-
M 3601.3
J
lIS
'"
~
80 column cards
96 column cards
In order to apply 3601, 3602, or 3614 controller-data code from
cards, it is necessary to have applied an Independent Component Release (lCR) to Subsystem Support Services (SSS) in
DOS/VS Release 31.
.. U
c
9-track 800 bpi
9-track 1600 bpi
9-track 6250 bpi
._
~
V'lU
9351
9352
9353
9354
9355
9356
9357
9358
9359
9360
9361
9362
9363
9364
9451
9452
9453
9454
9455
9456
9457
9458
9459
9460
9461
9462
9463
9464
*
*0 0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*
o
0
*
000
o
0
0'"
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
000
0
o
o
0
0
o
o
o
0
0 0
000
o
*
0
0
0
0
0
0
o
o
o
o
o
*0
0
*
*
o
o
0
0
0
0
o
o
0
o
o
0
0 0
o 0 0
000
o 0 0
0
0
o
o
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0 0
00000
0
0
0
o
0
o
o
o
o
0 0
0
000
o
0
o
o
0
0
0
o
0
0
*
*0
0
000
0
0
0
*
0
o
o
0
o
o
o
0
o
0
o
0
o
• Does not have any transaction select or "from Account" keys.
NOTE I. Two currency denominations must be specified.
[5] Logo Panel [Purchase Only]: #9401, If ordered with the machine, or #9402 if ordered for shipment prior to machine ...
see M 10000 pages for price.
[6] Model 2/12 Accessory Group [Purchase Only]: #9571 ... see
M 10000 pages for price.
[7] 3614 Host Attachment Designation: 1st and 2nd position designation Is required to control distribution of 3614 controller-clata
media to host system location.
1st Position Designator - identifies first 3614 of each different
Controller Data Version attached to a host system ... used to
limit distribution of controller-clata media to one copy of each
version per host system location.
2nd Position Designator - identifies additional 3614s of each
version ... controller -data media Is not distributed to host
system location for 2nd position designated 3614s.
The following matrix Identifies Individual Controller Data Versions
and their corresponding 1st and 2nd position specify codes.
Limitations: Each 3614 must have either 1st or 2nd position
specified ... one 1at position must be specified for each version
... only one 1st position may be specified for each version.
Specify either
1st or 2nd Pos
Code below:
1st
2nd
#9701
#9703
#9801
#98Q3
#9702
#9704
#9802
#9804
Host
Encryption
Attachment: Technique
Loop-3601/2DES (#9001)
Version
3
3
5
5
[8] Specify one of the following:
DES: #9001 - provides the data encryption technique (DES)
proposed as a U.S. Federal Information Processing Data
Processing Standard by the U.S. National Bureau of Standards. DES facilitates multi-institution usage by providing for
personal identification number (PIN) validation based on
individual issuer PIN encryption keys for 50 different card
issuer identifiers ... PIN offset value may be recorded on
magnetic stripe to be used to validate PINs in 3614 which
were not based originally on DES technique ... accepts 4 to
16 digit fixed or variable length PINs ... option to load PIN
encryption keys via communication line from host. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be specified if #9002
is specified.
AET: #9002 - provides the Alternate Encryption Technique
(AET) which is the original 3614 encryption technique.
Limitation: May not be specified if #9001 is specified.
Prerequisite: DES and/or AET encryption capability required
on the 3601 or 3602 and in host system ... see 3601 and
3602 in "Machines." DES and AET are used to determine
3614 Host 1st and 2nd Position Host Attachment designation ... see item [7] above.
Customer Responsibilities: Because the 3614 mdl 2 and 12
attach to a customer premise, installation of cables, mounting
stand and enclosure and bezel are a customer responsibility. The
customer is also responsible for site preparation, such as cutting a
hole in the wall for mounting of the 3614 mdl 2 or 12. Installation
of cables and site preparation is also a customer responsibility for
the 3614 mdl 1 and 11. IBM is not responsible for any loss of
money incurred through the use of the 3614.
Sub host operation under control of the 3601 or 3602 Finance
Communication Controller requires special customer systems
design and suPPOrt. Maintenance of system integrity in the sub
host mode Is a customer responsibility.
IBM is not responsible for intentional damage to the 3614 mdls 1,
2, 11 or 12. Repair of such damage is not covered under the IBM
Rental Agreement or Maintenance Contract. Repair of such damage at cost of time and materials will be made to rental machines
and can be provided for purchases machines.
Customer Responsibilities - Currency Sorting: The general condition of used currency may vary. To 'achieve satisfactory operation,
the customer must ensure that only GOOD QUALITY used currency is loaded into the 3614. Used or recirculated currency must be
inspected to remove excessively worn, damaged or torn notes. The
3614 Operator's Guide, GA66-0001,contains procedures for preparation of new currencies and inspection of used currencies for
loading the 3614. For the 3614 mdl 11 and 12 the customer must
ensure that each hopper is loaded with the proper denomination
currency.
Direct-SDLC AET (#9002)
Loop
Direct
Loop
Direct
Alternate
Alternate
DES
DES
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- ------
----==
==-=-=::
~
DP Machines
3614 Consumer Transaction Facility (cont'd)
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
Purchase
Prices:
Mdl
MRC
2 Yr
3614
1
2
11
12
$ 629 $ 535
672
572
751
639
794
676
$15,710
16,750
18,750
19,790
M 3614.3
Jul79
MMMC
$ 95
136
100
141
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: D
Purchase Option: 55%
Warranty: B
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Calegory: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
DEPOSITORY (#3322). Provides a controlled access slot in the
front of the 3614 leadil)g to an internal deposit receptacle for the
collection of deposit documents. In addition to the controlled
access slot, the chute is designed to discourage tampering with
previously inserted deposits. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
One of the following keyboards - #9357, #9358, #9360,
#9457, #9458, or #9460.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701).
Provides an interface for external
modems. Limitation: Not available on Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Feature.
EXPANDED FUNCTION FEATURE (#3895). Provides the options
of transaction chaining, journal printing, and cash check transactions. Field Installation: Yes ... any of the individual functions
may be field installed. Prerequisite: DES (specify code #9001).
Llmltat;ion: May not be ordered with specify code #9002). Equivalent capability is available via RPQ
for customers ordering 3614s with specify code #9002. Specify: Any combination of
the following functions may be specified with #3895. Specify at
least one:
(1) Transaction Chalnln9 (#9721) - allows a series of multiple
transactions with single insertion of magnetic stripe card and
single keyed entry of PIN.
(2) Journal Printing (#9722) - print statement documents and
retain in 3614 ... can be used as an aid in machine balancing
and settlements. Prerequisite: Transaction Statement Printer
(#7900).
(3) Cash Check (#9723) - in single transaction, cash is issued
to user following deposit of check drawn on other institution.
Prerequisites: Depository (#3322) and one of the following
keyboards .,. #9362, #9363, #9364, #9462, #9463, or
#9464.
IBM 1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5500).
Provides an
integrated 1200 bps modem for use with leased voice grade lines
.. see M 2700 pages. This modem Is for a point-to-point or tributary SDLC station. Note: This integrated modem must communicate
with another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Specify: #9651 for
4-wlre strapping, or #9652 for 2-wire strapping. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Feature with Clocking
(#6301).
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH CLOCKING (#6301).
Provides communications capability to communicate with the same
8/370 models listed below for #6302. Required for attachment to
communications lines through the IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500) or any external modem which does not have internal
clocking. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Terminal Loop
Feature (#7820) or SDLC Communications Feature without Clocking (#6302). Field Installation: Yes. Transmission: This feature
operates over common carrier provided or equivalent customer
owned communications facilities. For information concerning these
facilities, .see M 2700 pages.
the loop ... (2) Depending on the the configuration, the Additional
Storage Feature (#1005 or #1006) may be required on the
3601/3602 . See M3601 or M3602 pages ... (3) Attachment to
remote 3601/3602 loop directly requires a 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). Specify: If loop attachment is without
Loop Integrated Modem (#8001), specify one of the following loop
speeds: (1) For local loop attachment to 3601/3602, specify local
loop speed: #9062 for 1200 bps, #9063 for 2400 bps, or #9064
for 4800 bps ... (a) For remote loop attachment via a 3603, 3604
mdl 2, 3 or 4, or 3624, specify loop speed: #9062 for 1200 bps.
Limitations: (1) Cannot be ordered with SDLC Communications
with Clocking (#6301) or SDLC Communications without Clocking
(#3602) ... (2) Remote loop speed is 1200 bps. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
TRANSACTION STATEMENT PRINTER (#7900). Prints a statement showing the record of the transaction and passes the printed
statement to the customer through the cash issue slot. Data is
printed on 96-column card stock (2-5/8" by 3-1/4"). A 57 character set is provided conSisting of 56 printable graphics and a
space (blank). Four lines, one character per line, are printed
simultaneously, for up to 34 characters per line ... a total of 136
characters on each statement. The data to be printed is determined by the host application program and by the data stored in
the 3614. Printing is overlapped with the cash issue cycle and the
user deposit cycle. Prerequisite: If a statement is to be issued for
any transaction on a given keyboard, then the Transaction Statement is required. Card Limitations: The 96-column card stock
used in the transaction statement printer must not have the optional 60 degree corner cuts. Detailed disclosure specifications describing the 96-column card stock are available from IBM Corporation, Commercial Development Office, Armonk, N.Y. Card configurations or card stocks which do not conform to these specifications may result in unsatisfactory performance. The configurations
available from IBM
Field
Installation: Yes.
1200 BPS LOOP INTEGRATED MODEM (#8001). Provides an
integrated 1200 bps modem for use over normal quality voice
grade lines. LImitation: If a 3604 mdl 2\ 3 or 4 and a 3614 or
3624 are located at the same remote loop location, it is recommended that the loop modem be located on the 3614 or 3624
because the 3614 or 3624 will often be operating when the 3604
mdl 2, 3 or 4 is not; e.g., weekends. Field Instailatlon: Yes.
Prerequisite: Terminal Loop Feature (#7820).
Special Feature Prices:
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purch
Depository
#3322 $ 87 $ 74
EIA Interface
3701
12
10
IBM 1200 BPS
Integrated Modem
5500
19
16
Expd Function Feature 3895
32
27
SDLC Communications Feature
with Clocking
6301
36
31
without Clocking
6302
26
31
Terminal Loop Feature 7820
31
26
Transaction Statement
7900
119 101
Printer
1200 BPS Loop
19
16
Integrated Modem
8001
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT CLOCKING
(#6302).
Provides communications capability to communicate
with any virtual storage S/370 Processor (except 3115), or any
4300 Processor via a 3704/3705 '" see 3704, 3705. Attachment
is also possible via the Communications Adapter feature on the
4331 ... see 4331. Required for attachment to communications
lines through an external modem which does have internal clocking. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820) or SDLC Communications Feature with Clocking (#6301).
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: EIA Interface (#3701).
Transmission: This feature operates over common carrier provided
or equivalent customer owned facilities. For information concerning
these facilities, see M 2700 pages. Modems: External modems
operating at up to 4800 bps may be attached ... IBM 3863 Modem
... IBM 3864 Modem ... IBM 3872 Modem ... IBM 3874 Modem.
TERMINAL LOOP FEATURE (#7820). Provides the capability to
attach either to a local or remote 3601 /3602 Finance Communication Controller loop directly; or to a remote 3601/3602 loop via a
3603, 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4, or a 3624 with 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). Prerequlaltes: (1) Available positions on
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MMMC
$2,010
424
$11.50
4.00
668
1,000
5.00
NC
1,270
1,060
1,060
7.00
7.00
10.50
2,765
23.50
668
5.00
-- ----- ----
--_ - =---":' =
=-
M 3615
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3615 ADMINISTRATIVE TERMINAL
PRINTER
Purpose: A printer for use with the 3600 Finance Communication
System to provide a hard-copy output of banking transactions.
Model 1
Prints at 60 cps (local or remote loops)
Model 2
Prints at 120 cps (local loops only)
SPECIAL FEATURES
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). A forms feeding
device for continuous edge-punched fan-fold forms. Overall forms
widths from 3 to 15 inches can be fed. This feature is required for
use of continuous forms. Friction fed cut forms may also be used
without removing the forms tractor. In this case, printing is limited
to 127 print positions. Field Installation: Yes.
MLC
5 Yr
Special Feature Prices:
Purchase MMMC
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Vrbl Wdth Forms Trctr
Highlights:
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase-only
basis.
The 3615 provides a hard copy output on a variety of cut forms
and fan-fold continuous forms to meet the customer's printing
requirement in banking applications. When combined with a 3604
Keyboard Display, the 3615 provides a bank teller or officer with a
workstation to use in performing banking administrative transactions. The 3615 can also be used alone for administrative printing
of required reports. The forms can be those usually used for
printing of one line or a number of lines. Speed ranges from 60
cps for the Model 1 to 120 cps for the Model 2. This microprocessor controlled printer is a bi-directional matrix printer with
high speed tabulation (Model 1 only) and indexing capability. The
printer's dot matrix is 4 of 7 wide by 8 high. The 3615 prints up
to 132 print positions with character spacing at 10 to the inch.
Line spacing is 6 lines to the inch. Up to 6-part forms (total thickness -- 0.018") may be used. Five and six part forms should be
tried on an individual basis for acceptable feeding registration and
print quality. For continuous fan-fold forms, the Variable Width
Forms Tractor (#8700) is required ... see "Special Features."
Maximum overall width for continuous forms is 381 mm (15"), and
355.6mm (14") for cut forms. Card stock forms are not recommended.
1) An available position on a local or remote loop of a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location needs either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a
3614/3624 Consumer Transaction' Facility equipped with a
Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or
a 3604 Keyboard Display mdl 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line
Feature Base (#4751 or 4752) and an appropriate modem. If
both a 3614/3624 and a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 are installed in
the same remote location, it" is recommended that the loop
modem be located with the 3614/3624 since the 36.14/3624
will often be operating when the 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 is not.
Note: The 3615 mdl 1 will attach to local or remote loops ... the 3615 mdl 2 will attach to local
loops only.
2) Depending. upon the configuration, the Additional Storage
Feature (#1005 or 1006) may be required on the 3601, or the
Additional Storage Feature (#1006) may be required on the
3602 ... see 3601 or 3602.
Forms Specifications: Refer to Form Design Reference Guide for
Printers, GA24-3488.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
Supplies: A black ribbon, Part No. 1136653, or equivalent is
required.
SPECIFY
Voltage (115V AC, '1-phase, 60 Hz) : #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation: Not recommended.
•
Cables:
See
GA27-2766.
PRICES:
Mdl
1
2
Installation
Manual
MLC
5 Yr
$160
186
Physical
Purchase
$3,485
3,825
$5
$160
1.00
FORMS STAND (#4450). Permits feeding of continuous forms
from the carton and provides for stacking after printing.
Prerequisites:
•
#8700
Planning,
MMMC
$28
38
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Useful Life Category: 2
Upper Limit Percent: 5% Warranty: B
• Pilot Test Plan applies: PTP Option Percent ..70%
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--------------= ==
':' =
--
M 3616
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3616 PASSBOOK AND DOCUMENT
PRINTER
Purpose: A matrix printer used on the 3600 Finance Communication System to print on passbooks, journal, and a variety of forms
and documents.
Highlights
The 3616 printer provides the ability to print on a variety of forms
and passbooks to meet printing requirements of financial applications. This printer, when combined with a 3604 Keyboard Display,
provides a teller or other operator with a full function workstation
capable of handling a wide range of financial transactions. The
printer is a bi-directional matrix printer with a maximum print
speed of 120 cps. The printer dot matrix is 4 of 7 wide by 8 high.
The printer has two separate print stations serviced by one print
head. The passbook print station can print up to 100 characters
on passbooks or single or multipart cutforms requiring single or
multi-line printing. The basic machine accepts horizontal fold
passbooks of a variety of sizes. Print spacing and line indexing
are both program selectable, spacing at 10 or 12 characters per
inch, indexing at 5 or 6 lines per inch. Note: For the Vertical Fold
Passbook Feature (#8701) limitations, see Forms Design Reference Guide, GA24-3488.
The journal print station prints up to 57 characters on a one, part
journal, with a locked internal take-up roll. Journal entries are
visible after the entire line is printed, and remain visible for several
entries thereafter. The journal may be manually advanced, but not
reversed. Cutforms may be inserted in front of the journal for
validation type printing of one line of print in a fixed location on
the lower left-hand corner of the document. Print spacing is program selectable at 10 or 12 characters per inch. Journal indexing
is nominally 6 lines per inch.
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (120 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug,
or #9891 for non-lock plug.
•
Cables: See M 10000 pages for pricing and ordering instructions. Also see Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27-2766.
•
Journal Security Feature: #9351. Provides a change in the
covers so that a cutform cannot be inserted in front of the
journal.
MLC
Mdl
3616
5 Yr
Purchase'
$185
$ 4,700
SPECIAL FEATURES
VERTICAL FOLD PASSBOOK (#8701). Provides modifications to
the basic machine to enable it to accept a single size of vertical
fold passbook in the passbook station. The size is adjustable by
the CE at initial installation. For details and limitations, see Forms
Design Reference Guide, GA24-3488. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
MLC
5Yr
Vertical Fld Passbook
#8701
AMMC/
Purchase MMMC
$ 3
The printer has 8 operator status lights, including 3 user programmable. The machine has two separated "Start" pushbuttons which
may be used to identify individual tellers to the 3600 controller
when two tellers are sharing the printer.
The 3616 provides address sharing between like devices. That is,
two 3616s can share the same loop allocation on a contention
basis.
Prerequisites:
1 . An available position on a local or remote loop of a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a
3614/3624 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a
Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or
a 3604 Keyboard Display mdl 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line
Feature Base (#4751 or #4752) and an appropriate modem.
If both a 3614/3624 and a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 are installed in
the same remote location, it is recommended that the loop
modem be located with the 3614/3624 since the Consumer
Transaction Facility may be operating when the 3604 mdl 2, 3
or 4 is not.
Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage
Feature (#1005 or #1006) may be required on the 3601, or
the Additional Storage Feature (#1006) may be required on
the 3602 ... see 3601 or 3602.
Forms Specifications: Refer to the
Guide for Printers, GA24-3488.
Supplies:
required
$ 40
Plan Offering: Plan 0
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
In either station, wide bold characters may be printed at 6 characters per inch. The customer may define and use up to 16 special
characters, addressable separately from the basic character set,
by defining their matrix patterns at CPGEN.
2.
AMMC/
MMMC
Forms Design Reference
A black ribbon, Part No. 7034365, or equivalent, is
Bibliography: GC20-0370
* Pilot Test Plan applies ,., PTP Option Percent. 70%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$100
NC
------- --=- =------ --=--':" =
M 3618
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3618 ADMINISTRATIVE LINE
PRINTER
Purpose: A medium-speed line printer for use in the 3600 Finance
Communication System.
Highlights: Provides the capability to print on continuous fanfold
paper up to 80 print positions on an 8 inch (200 mm) print line.
The unit has a pin feed mechanism. It accepts paper widths of 3.5
inches (89 mm) to 9 inches (229 mm) pin hole center-to-center.
Paper up to 14.875 inches (378 mm) can be handled with Expanded Print Line (#3860) ... see "Special Features."' Paper up
to six parts plus carbon [maximum total thickness is .02 inches (5
mm)] can be accommodated. A form jam detection capability is
provided. -Print speeds are dependent upon the number of characters printed per line, loop speed, and available slot position on the
loop.
Character Set
Nominal Print Speeds
1551pm
120lpm
80lpm
48
64
96
PREREQUISITES:
[1]An available position on a local or remote loop of a 3601 or
3602. If located remotely from the 3601 or 3602, the remote
location must have either a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit, a
3614/3624 Consumer Transaction Facility equipped with a
Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and an appropriate modem, or
a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 equipped with a Line Feature Base
(#4751 or #4752) and appropriate modem. If both a 3614 or
3624 and 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 are installed in the same remote
location, it is recommended that the loop modem be located
with the 3614 or 3624 since the 3614 or 3624 will often be
operating when the 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 is not.
[2]Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage
Feature (#1005 or #1006) may be required on the 3601, or
the Additional Storage Feature (#1006) may be required on
the 3602 ... see M 3601 or M 3602 pages.
Forms Specification: Refer to Form Design Reference Guide for
Printers, GA24-3488.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. Field Installation:
Not recommended.
[2] Cables: See M 10000 pages for pricing and ordering instructions. Also see Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA272766.
[3] Character Set Size: #9071 for 48 characters, #9072 for 64,
or #9073 for 96. A space (blank) character is included in each
character set, resulting in 47, 63 or 95 printable graphics.
Field Installation: Not recommended.
Prices:
Mdl
3618
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase
$ 293 $ 249 $10,600
MMMC
$53.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Per Call: 1
Machine Group: D
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
DUAL INDEPENDENT FORMS FEED (#3550).
Provides two
independently indexed pin feed mechanisms. Different sizes of
forms can be handled in each paper feed. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Not recommended.
EXPANDED PRINT LINE (#3880). Expands the print line to 132
print positions on a 13.2 inch (33.5 cm) line. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Not recommended.
Special Feature Prices:
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purch
Dual Indpnt Forms Feed #3550 $ 19
Expanded Print Line
3880
31
$ 16
26
$ 636
1,080
~MMC
$6.50
3.00
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipmsnt with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 pages
for additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450). permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for stacking after printing.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
- ----
--,-- ------===
--':' =
M 3624.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3624 CONSUMER TRANSACTION
FACILITY
Purpose: An unattended self-service banking terminal that issues
variable amounts of money, accepts deposits, and performs other
financial transactions ... other documents such as traveler's
checks may be dispensed If they complete a document issue
qualification test successfully... attaches to a 3601 .or 3602
Finance Communication Controller via loop, or to a virtual storage
S/370 or 4300 Processor through a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller. Communication is also possible via the Communications Adapter (#1601) on a 4331 Processor (Note: This is not
supported by ACF /VT AME) ..
Model 1
Model 2
Model 11
Model 12
Lobby - Single Document Feed Mechanism. For
use inside a building in a secure attended location.
The basic model includes a single cartridge feed
station, card reader, user guidance keyboard and
display unit and is suitable for counter-top or freestanding mounting ... includes covers and front trim
paneling ... covers contain locking handle, with a
standard key, and provision for customer insertion
of an additional keylock cylinder. A backlighted
logo panel, required for installation of a lobby model, is available as a purchase accessory. A pedestal is available as a purchase accessory to mount
the basic lobby. model. A pedestal base is included
as part of the depOSitory special feature when the
desposito,y is added to the basic· model.
Through the Wall - Single Document Feed Mechanism. For outdoor, vestibule, drive-up, and otherwise less secure, unattended locations to provide
availability on a 24-hour basis. The basic model
includes a single cartridge feed station, card reader, user guidance keyboard and display unit, and
has provision for mounting the currency dispensing
and depository mechanisms inside a heavy-duty
security enclosure. Covers ·are provided for the
components not contained within the heavy-duty
enclosure. A heavy-duty enclosure, pedestal base
for mounting the enclosure, through-the-wall bezel,
front trim paneling, and logo panel, for through-thewall installation, are available as purchase accessories.
Same as the modell, but with dual document feed
mechanism. Provides capability to issue the same
or two different denominations in a single transaction; to load the same denomination in both dispensers, effectively doubling the bill capacity of a single denomination 3624 model 1; or to issue currency and other documents as separate transactions
(e.g., cash and traveler's checks).
Same as the model 2, but with dual document feed
mechanism. Provides capability to issue the same
or two different denominations in a single transaction; to load the same denomination in both dispensers, effectively doubling the bill capacity of a single denomination 3624 model 2; or to issue currency and other documents as separate transactions
(e.g., cash and traveler'S checks).
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
and locking mechanism prevents removal of cartridge from machine unless cartridge is closed and locked ... reduces need for
dual-custody depository servicing.
Depository Envelope printer - a special feature which prints unit
and sequence number on envelope as it is deposited.
Additional Transactions - provides account balance inquiry,
funds transfer transaction, and special transactions.
Keyboard/Guidance -- comprehensive set of function keys and
customized display messages step a user through a transaction
... keyboard and transaction functions can be modified through
programming. Option for either numeric or alphanumeric keypad.
Multiline Display -- a special feature which provides 240character, 6-line display. Includes additional display-related
user-response capability for expanded interaction between user
and machine.
Transaction Chaining -- allows user to perform a series of transactions with a single insertion 'of the magnetic stripe card.
Transaction Statements -- can print and issue individual statements or messages to user.
Journaling -- can print and retain documents within the 3624.
Backlighted Logo - backlighted logo panel that can be customized, extending across full width of the front panel.
Host/Subhost Attachil'lent - .allows attachment to the host proceSsor either directly via SDLC or through subhost 3601/3602 via
loop cQmmunications ... offhost operation at 3601/3602 is possible.
Encrypt/Decrypt - encryption of Sensitive data for communication line transmission ... uses the U.S. Federal Information Processing Data Encryption Standard (DES) algorithm.
.
Multi-institution Usage -- provision to accept magnetic stripe
cards of many different card issuers. Base capacity of issuer
identifier table within the 3624 can be expanded by table overflow request message to host or with Additional Storage Feature
(#1301) ... "Special Features."
Personal Identification - user account is identified through
reading magnetic stripe card. To validate the identity of the
person using the card, a personal identification number (PIN) is
used ... validation of ~IN (up to 16 digits) may be performed in
the 3624 and/or host/subhost support system.
Installation Configurations - can be installed inside a building,
for lobby use; or through-the-wall of a building, for walk-up or
drive-up use.
Multiple Languages - capability to display different languages
based on identifier code recorded on magnetic stripe card.
Third Track -- a special feature provides reading and writing
third track data recorded on magnetic stripe card ... see "Special
Features."
Additional Storage - special feature(s) provide additional memory for expanding the number of custom messages and Financial
Institution Table entries ... see "Special Features."
Modular Packaging -- for model 2 or 12 through-the-wall installation, currency dispenser and depository mechanisms are contained in a heavy-duty enclosure independent of other functional
modules.
Compatibility -- 3614 family compatibility, designed to minimize
transition requirements.
Highlights
Cartridge Loading -- currency cartridge provides for quick, easy
loading and convenient, tamper-resistent transportation of the
currency.
Issues Cash - issues one denomination (mdls 1 and 2), or two
denominations (mdls 11 and 1 2) up to a maximum of 20 bills
from a choice of accounts. Issues all bills at one time in a single
stack ... no prepackaging or packets are used.
Individual Document-Feed Control - allows each cartridge drive
station on the dual-feed models 11 and 12 to be associated with
a separate transaction select key (e.g., cash and traveler's
checks).
Accepts Deposits -- allows user to make a deposit to choice of
accounts. Built-in depository envelope holder available as an
accessory on mdls 2 and 12. Envelope holder included with
depository on mdls 1 and 11.
Cash-Check - a single transaction that allows cash to be issued
to user, following deposit of a check.
Accepts Payments - allows user to make various payments by
depositing cash or check or by having funds deducted from
user's account.
Depository Cartridge Locking System -- depository cartridge
Security -- models 2 and 12 installed with' heavy-duty enclosure
and through-the-wall installation accessories meet security requirements of UL291 and comply with the intent of U.S. Federal
Regulation P for unattended automated paying and receiving
machines used when banking offices are closed.
Installation Units and Accessories - Heavy-duty enclosure,
through-the-wall bezel, optional pedestal base, front dress panel
and front trim border are required for installation of through-thewall models 2 and 1 2 ... these are available as purchase only
accessories, see "Accessories."
Walk-up Configuration - recessed through-the-wall bezel,
designed to provide a shelf surface for the user, is recommended for walk-up use.
Drive-up Configuration -- non-recessed through-the-wall bezel,
designed to position the user area nearer the outer wall surface,
is recommended for drive-up use.
A pedestal for mounting lobby models 1 and 11 is available as an
optional purchase only accessory ... see" Accessories."
A logo panel and cartridges are required for installation of all
models and are available as purchase accessories ... see
" Accessories."
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- - -=---':' =
==
---- -------
DP Machines
3624 Consumer Transaction Facility
PREREQUISITES
M 3624.2
Jul79
(cont'd)
[1] Each 3624 must be either loop attached to a 3601/3602 or
direct attached to a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor
via SDLC communications through a 3704/3705 Communications Controller. Also attaches via a Communications Adapter
(#1601) on a 4331 Processor.
For Loop, Attachment to a 3601/3602: There must be an
available position on a local or remote loop of the 3601/3602.
The 3624 must have Terminal Loop Feature (#7820). If located remotely from the 3601/3602, the 3624 can be attached
to a remote loop via any of the following: [1] Directly, using
the 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001) ... [2] Via a
subloop through a 3603 Terminal Attachment Unit mdl 1 for
1 200 bps or a 3603 mdl 2 for 1200 or 2400 bps ... [3] Via
subloop through a 3604 Keyboard Display mdl 2, 3 or 4
equipped with Line Feature Base (#4751 or #4752) and an
appropriate modem .. , [4] Via a subloop through a 3614 equipped with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and 1200 BPS Loop
Integrated Modem (#8001) ... [5] Via a subloop through another 3624 equipped with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and
1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). Note: The 3624
does not require #8001 if it is attached to a remote loop via a
subloop through a 3603, 3604, 3614, 3624, or if the 3624 is
attached to a local loop. It is recommended that the 3624 not
be attached through a 3604, as the 3624 might often be operating while the 3604 is not,' e.g., weekends and holidays.
For Direct Attachment to a Virtual Storage S/370 or 4300
Proce88or: The S/370 or 4300 Processor requires a
3704/3705 Communications Controller equipped with appropriate features to communicate with the 3624 via SDLC or the
Communications Adapter (#1601) on a 4331 (Note: These
units are not supported by ACF /VT AME). See 3704, 3705 or
Communications Adapter (#1601) on the 4331. The 3624
must have an SDLC Communications Feature (#6301 or
#6302).
[2] Encryption modules BQKDES and BQKDPRS are required with
3600 Host Support Independent Release program ... see
Guide for Ordering Programs for feature numbers used to
order these modules on the 3600 Host Support IR. Source
listings are not orderable for, nor supplied with, these modules. Customers should be informed of this fact before the
3624 is ordered.
[3] Depending upon the configuration, Additional Storage Feature
(#1005 or #1006) may be required on the 3601, or Additional Storage Feature (#1006) may be required on the 3602 ...
see 3601 or 3602.
[4] For 3624 mdls 1 and 11: Pedestal, Lobby (#5510) is available as an option for free-standing lobby configuration without
a depository feature ... sell "Accessories." #5510 is purchase only. Note: A pedestal is included with the Depository,
Lobby feature (#3233, #3234).
[5] For 3624 mdls 2 and 12: The following units are required for
through-the-wall installation: (1) Heavy-duty Enclosure, Single
Function (#3901) or Dual Function (#3902). Note: Single
function enclosure cannot be field modified to a dual function
enclosure ... (2) Bezel, Through-the-Wall, Recessed or nonRecessed. Recessed Bezel (#1490) is recommended for
walk-up configuration. Non-Recessed Bezel (#1491) is recommended for drive-up configuration ... (3) Front Dress Panel
(#3851) ... (4) Front Trim Border, with Envelope Holder
(#3961) or without Envelope Holder (#3962) ... (5) Pedestal
for single function heavy duty enclosure (#4901) or dual
function heavy duty enclosure (#4902) is optional for mounting heavy duty enclosure at appropriate height for walk-up or
drive-up use. Storage Cabinet (#4903) is optional when
mounting dual function heavy-duty enclosure without pedestal.
Note:, Storage cabinet is included with Pedestal (#4901 or
#4902). See "Accessories" and M 10000 pages for descriptions and ordering information. These accessories are for
purchase only.
[6] Logo Panel - required on all 3624 models. Shipment of the
logo panel is determined by the following specify codes: (1)
#9401 if panel is to be shipped with the 3624. (2) #9402 if
panel(s) are to be shipped prior to the 3624. Note: Specify
feature #9402 can be used to order more than one panel if
the customer desires to have several panels delivered before
the 3624 (e.g., for customization at one time). (3) #9403 if
panel is not to be ordered with the 3624 as it will either be
ordered separately by part number
or ordered
under specify code #9402 on another 3624 ... see "Specify"
and "Accessories." Purchase only.
[7] Currency Cartridge - For 3624 mdls 1 and 2: One is required. For 3624 mdls 11 and 12: Two are required. Currency cartridges are not included with the basic 3624 and must
be ordered separately. Spare cartridges are recommended for
convenience of operation. A minimum of one spare cartridge
for mdls 1 and 2, and two spare cartridges for mdls 11 and 12
must be made available by the customer to the CE for normal
3624 maintenance ... see "Accessories." Purchase only. See
"Customer Responsibilities - 3624 Currency Cartridge" 'in M
10000 pages for installation and maintenance requirements.
Customer Responsibilities
Installation Facilities - because the 3624 mdl 2 or 1 2 attaches
to customer premises, installation of cables, pedestal, heavyduty enclosure, through-the-wall bezel, front dress panel, front
trim border, and logo panel are customer responsibilities. The
customer is also responsible for site preparation, such as cutting a hole in the wall. For mdls 2 and 12, the customer is
responsible for placement of the document feed and depository
modules into the heavy-duty enclosure and attachment of the
I/O module to the heavy-duty enclosure. Installation of cables
and site preparation are customer responsibilities also, for 3624
lobby mdls 1 and 11. The customer is responsible for installation of the Currency Area Lockoff accessory.
Machine Maintenance -- IBM will not provide warranty or maintenance service on a 3624 containing money. The customer will
be responsible for removing, controlling and reloading all mnney
in the 3624 so that IBM can fulfill its warranty and maintenance
obligations.
Keylocks - covers included with lobby mdls 1 and 11 have a
locking handle, with a standard key, and provide for customer
insertion of an addi,tional keylock cylinder. Covers inciuded with
through-the-wall mdls 2 and 12 have a keylock cylinder, with a
standard key. Cabinet doors, included in all pedestals, have a
keylock cylinder with a standard key. The Currency Area Lockoff accessory includes a keylock with a standard key. Currency
cartridges provide for customer insertion of a keylock. Depository cartridge used with depository cartridge locking feature
requires customer insertion of the depository keylock. Depository locking mechanism in the 3624 requires customer installation
of the depository cartridge locking key. If the customer desire!:
to change the locks and/or keys included with these units or to
install additional keylock cylinders where provided for, he is
responsible for their procurement and installation.
Accessories Maintenance - the customer is responsible for
maintenance and parts procurement on all accessories. Repair
of the currency issue and depository slot protective environmental gates in the heavy-duty enclosure can be provided by IBM
on a time and material basis.
Currency Cartridge - the 3624 Currency Cartridge is a purchase only accessory and is not included with the -basic 3624.
One cartridge is necessary for mdls 1 and 2, and two for mdls
11 and 12 for installation checkout and operation of the 3624.
Models 2 and 12 may also be operated with a single cartridge.
Cartridges are not maintained by IBM under the normal lease
agreement or MMMC for a purchased machine. The customer is
responsible for determining if the cartridge is the failing unit; for
providing cartridge for CE 3624 maintenance and testing (a
minimum of one spare cartridge for mdls 1 and 2 and two for
mdls 11 and 1 2 must be made available by the customer to the
CE for normal 3624 maintenance); and for setting the keying
system on the cartridges and drive stations so that there is the
desired match of currency denomination to drive station ... see
"Customer Responsibilities - 3624 Currency Cartridge" in the M
10000 pages for intallation and maintenance requirements.
Currency Sorting - to achieve staisfactory operation, the customer must ensure that only new currency and good-quality
used currency are used in the 3624. The general condition of
used currency may vary. Used currency must be inspected to
remove excessively worn, damaged, or torn bills. The IBM 3624
Operator's Guide, GA66-0006 and IBM 3624 Cartridge Owner's
Manual, GA66-000S, contain procedures for preparation of new
currency and inspection of used currency for operation in the
3624, For the 3624 mdls 11 and 12, the customer must ensure
that each feed mechanism is loaded with the proper denomination currency. The cartridges contain a kilying mechanism
which can be set by the cust,omer to ensure a match between
specific cartridges and cartridge drive stations.
Printer lnk Rolls - the customer is responsible for procurement
and replacement of ink rolls in transaction statement and depository printers.
Logo Lamp - the customer is responsible for procurement and
replacement of the lamp in the logo panel light assembly.
Damage - IBM is not responsible for intentional damage to the
3624 or any 3624 accessories. Repair of such damage, is not
covered under the IBM Maintenance Contract, Lease Agreement
or under the Pilot Test Plan. Repair of such damage at cost of
time and materials will be provided for leased machines, Pilot
Test machines, and purchase machines.
System Integrity -
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
subhost operation, under control of the
'------- ------= ==--':'
--
=
M 3624.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3624 Consumer Transaction Facility (cont'd)
3600 Finance Communication Controller, requires customer
systems design and support. Maintenance of system integrity in
the subhost is a customer responsibility.
Transaction Type
Specify Number
From Account
To Account
IBM is not responsible for any loss of money to the financial
institution or its cUl\tomers through the use of the 3624.
Third Track System Security Statement - customers ordering
the Third Track feature (#7950) must be advised that:
"IBM believes that the system security is optimized in an
online environment, where PIN validation and transaction
authorization can be performed in conjunction with positivefile data bases. The scope of security exposure expands
with the degree of offline implementation, for which the Third
Track might be used. The U.S. Federal Information Process. ing Data Encryption Standard (DES) algorithm is utilized to
provide cryptographic security in the 3624 and may be used
in conjunction with the third track application. IBM recommends that the customer consider using DES for this purpose. An optional security feature of the proposed ANSI/ISO
Third Track Data Content standard is a Crypto Check Digits
(CCD) field in the card, that may be used to relate the data
elements of track 3 to the magnetic stripe. This does not.
imply, however, that its use is not subject to fraud techniques. ANSI/ISO has not prescribed using the optional CCD
field or any specific CCD implementation technique. IBM
recommends that the customer consider its value in his application, weighing possible enhancements in security with
economic and performance implications for his system. IBM
will continue to pursue a course of action with customers
and industry to maintain a high level of system security.
IBM reserves the right to modify the parameters of the track
3 function if the parameters of the final ANSI/ISO standard
differ from those now in the process of standardization.
However, this reservation of rights is not intended nor should
it be construed as a commitment by IBM to support parameters different from those published by ISO/DIS 4909-June
1976."
Bibliography: GC20-0370
U1
Qj
..,
o
:0
«
#9351 #9451
9352 9452
9353 9453
9354 9454
9355 9455
9356 9456
9357 9457
9358 9458
9359 9459
9360 9460
9361 9461
9362 9462
9363 9463
9364 9464
•
Voltage (120V, AC, 1-phase, 60Hz): #9911 ... usable on 115V.
Cabling: Refer to 'nstallation Manua'-Physical Planning, GA272766 and GA26-1658. Also see M 10000 pages for pricing
and ordering instructions.
•
Keyboard Arrangement: #9301 for numeric-only keypad, or
#9302 for alphanumeric keypad ... alphanumeric arrangement
is the basic touch-pad telephone format with the Q and Z added over the numeric "0".
•
Currency Cartridge: See M 100{lO pages for ordering instructions and prices.
Keyboard: Specify one of the following for standard keyboard
... an RPQ should be submitted for any keyboard not shown
below. All are field installable. The Change key allows the user
to request a change in the denomination mix to be issued on
mdls 11 and 12. The Change key is used also, on all models,
to page displays with the Multiline Display feature (#4750).
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
o
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0
o
0
0
0 0 0 o 0
0
0
0
0
0
0 0
(1)
0
0
(1)
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0
0
0
0
0 (l)
(1) Key position does not appear on the keyboard panel; single
function is selected automatically.
(2) Prerequisite: Depository #3233, 3234, 3243 or 3244.
(3) Prerequisite: Depository #3233, 3234, 3243 or 3244 if any
Special transactions are customized to require a deposit
step.
•
Logo Panel Group: Specify one of the following: #9401 if logo
panel is to be shipped with 3624 ... #9402 if logo panel(s) is
to be shipped prior to the 3624 ... #9403 if logo panel is not
to be ordered with 3624 and will either be ordered separately
or has been ordered through
by part number
#9402 on another 3624. Note: More than one panel may be
ordered on specify code #9402 if customer desires to have
several panels delivered before the 3624 (e.g., for customization at one time). Purchase only. See M 10000 pages for
prices and order information.
•
Controller-Data Designation: 1 st and 2nd position designation
is required to control distribution and maintenance of
controller-data media necessary for 3624 ioad images. Specify
#9491 or #9492 as follows:
• Currency Denomination: #9091 for 5, 10, 20 dollar.
•
(1)
Notes
SPECIFY
•
(1)
(1)
1st Position Designator (#9491). Used to determine which
controller-data set is to be distributed to the host-system location. One 3624 attached to a host-system processor is specified #9491.
2nd Position Designator (#9492). Used to identify additional
3624s attached t6 host-system ... controller-data set media are
not distributed to host-system location for· any 2nd position
designated 3624s.
When 1st position (#9491) is specified, also specify one of the
following:
If magnetic tape is used at the host-system location:
#9412
#9413
#9414
9-track, 800 bpi
9-track, 1 600 bpi
9-track, 6250 bpi
If magnetic tape is not used at the host-system location
(DOS/VS users only):
#9431
#9432
80 column cards
96 column cards
When 1st poSition (#9491) is specified, additional information
is required to determine the shipping address of the controllerdata media.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- -- ----_.--= =- =-==
D~ L"achinc:,
352<1
Tr"l"s?ction
M .3624.4
Jul 79
-
C~n~,-, ...... ""r
Facili~y
(cont'd)
place the ink roll when required. Prerequisite: Depository, Lobby
(#3233) or Depository, Through-the-Wall (#3243). Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
This is the address to which controller-data media
will be automatically shipped after first 3624 is ordered.
Changes to 1 st Position Designators for On-order and
Installed 3624s: If a 1 st position (#9491) 3624 is deferred, cancelled, or discontinued and 2nd position (#9492)
3624s have been specified, then one 2nd position 3624
must be altered from 2nd to 1 st position (from #9492 to
#9491) to ensure continued distribution of controller-data
media to the host system location. When altering a 3624
to 1 st position, include all items as required to be specified when #9491 is specified (items specified on previous
1 st position 3624) ... if the host system location changes
the input medium (e.g., from 1600 bpi to 6250 bpi tape),
the media specify code must be changed on the 3624
with #9491 specified. In this case, the former media
specify code must be deleted and the new one added
PRICES:
MDL
MLC
(5 Yr)
3624
1
2
11
12
$499
587
582
648
Purchase
$12,150
13,400
14,150
15,400
MMMC
$95
136
100
141
Maintenance: D
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 50%
Per Call 1
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Pilot Test Plan Purchase Option: 60%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL STORAGE FEATURE (#1301). Provides an additional 2,048 bytes of storage. The user can utilize this to increase the
number of custom messages, entries in Financial Institution Table,
and as might be necessary for RPOs. To determine the number of
additional storage features required, see IBM 3624 Programmer's
Reference Manual and Component Description, GC66-0009.
Prerequisite: Storage Expansion Feature (#6501) is required for
either: 1) first Add'i Storage Feature (#1301) increment when
ordered with Multiline Display (#4750) and SDLC Communications
Feature (#6301 or #6302), or 2) third Additional Storage Feature
(# 1301) increment when ordered with Multiline Display (#4750)
and Terminal Loop Feature(#7820). Maximum: Two if without
Multiline Display (#4750) ... five if with #4750. Field Installation:
Yes.
DEPOSITORY, LOBBY (#3233). [Models 1 and 11 only] Provides
envelope transport mechanism leading from a controlled access
slot to deposit receptacle inside the 3624. The depository transport is designed to discourage tampering with previously inserted
deposits. Includes a pedestal stand, with lockable rear access
door and standard key, and a built-in depository envelope holder.
Deposit envelopes may vary in size from 3.5" x 6.0" (88.9mm x
152.4mm) to 4.5" x 9.75" (114.3mm x 247.7mm) and shall be
constructed of paper having basic weight of sub 20 through sub
28. Maximum thickness of a deposit envelope and its contents is
0.5" (12.7mm). Limitation: Cannot be installed in Pedestal, Lobby (#5510). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
DEPOSITORY, THROUGH-THE-WALL (#3243). [Models 2 and 12
only] Provides envelope transport mechanism leading from a controlled access slot in the security enclosure to deposit receptacle
inside the 3624. In addition to the controlled access slot in the
security enclosure, the depository transport is designed to discourage tampering with previously inserted deposits. Deposit envelopes may vary in size from 3.5" x 6.0" (88.9mm x 152.4mm) to
4.5" x 9.75" (114.3mm x 247.7mm) and shall be constructed of
paper having basis weight of sub 20 to sub 28. Maximum thickness of a deposit envelope and its contents is 0.5" (12.7mm).
Prerequisite: Heavy-Duty Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902) ... see
"Accessories." Limitation: Cannot be installed with Heavy-Duty
Enclosure, Single Function (#3901). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Note: Field installation requires that Heavy-Duty
Enclosure, Dual Function (#3902) has been initially ordered.
DEPOSITORY PRINTER (#3245). Prints sequence number on
envelope as it passes through the depository throat. Six numeric
digits are printed horizontally at repeated intervals along the envelope. Three digits are set by the customer engineer to identify the
unit, and three digits are automatically sequenced when envelope
passes print station. The depository ink roll is IBM Part No.
457149. It is the customer's responsibility to purchase and re-
DEPOSITORY CARTRIDGE LOCKING FEATURE (#3150). [Models
2 and 12 only] Provides locking mechanism in the depository that
prevents removal of the depository cartridge unless' it is closed
and locked. Operates with Depository Cartridge (#3155) ... see
"Accessories" and M 10000 pages for purchase of cartridges.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Depository, Through-the-Wall (#3243). Minimum of one Depository Cartridge (#3155) is required for operation.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701), Provides the appropriate cables and
interface logic necessary to attach an external modem for communications attachment to the S/370 or 4300 Processor via SDLC
through a 3704/3705 Communications Controller, or the Communications Adapter (#1601) on a 4331 Processor. Non-IBM modems may be attached subject to the Multiple Suppliers System
Policy. Prerequisite: SDLC Communication Feature (#6301 or
#6302). Limitation: Cannot be installed with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500), or Terminal Loop Feature (#7820).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
MULTILINE DISPLAY (#4750). Displays up to 240 characters ...
six lines of 40 characters each. Characters are presented in
predefined 7 x 9 and 7 x 7 dot matrices for upper case alphameric, special characters, and language-unique characters including
the Hebrew alphabet. Additional interactive functions are provided
for expanded communications between the user and the attached
host. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: 1)
The Change key is required if display paging ... see Keyboard
under "Specify" or 2) Increased storage storage may be required
to support larger size of display and additional interaction function
... see Additional Storage Feature (#1301) and Storage Expansion
Feature (#6501).
IBM 1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5500). Provides an
internal modem for communications attachment to the S/370
processor via SDLC at 1200 bps over non-switched half-duplex or
duplex voice grade lines. Note: This integrated modem must communicate with another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Specify: #9651
for 4-wire strapping, or #9652 for 2-wire strapping. Prerequisite:
SDLC Communications Feature with Clocking (#6301). Limitation:
Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701), SDLC Communications Feature Without Clocking (#6302), Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820), or 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH CLOCKING (#6301).
Provides capability to attach to a host system via SDLC, e.g.,
S/370 or 4300 Processor through a 3704, 3705, or the Communications Adapter (#1601) on a 4331. Required for attachment to
communication facilities through the IBM 1200 BPS Integrated
Modem (#5500), or through the EIA Interface (#3701) to any
1200 bps external modem which does not have internal clocking.
Prerequisite: IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500) if no
external modem, or EIA Interface (#3701) if external modem.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820), SDLC Communication Feature without Clocking (#6302),
or 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Not recommended for field installation if Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) is installed. SDLC Communications
Feature Without Clocking (#6302) can be changed to #6301 in
the field. Transmission: This feature operates over common
carrier communication facilities. For information concerning these
facilities, see M 2700 pages.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT CLOCKING
(#6302). Provides capability to attach to a host system via SDLC,
e.g., S/370 or 4300 Processor through a 3704, 3705, or the
Communications Adapter (#1601) on a 4331. Required for attachment to communication facilities through the EIA Interface (#3701)
to any external modem which provides internal clocking speeds up
to 4800 bps. PrerequiSite: EIA Interface (#3701). Limitations:
Cannot be installed with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820), SDLC
Communications Feature With Clocking (#6301), IBM 1200 BPS
Integrated Modem (#5500), or 1200 SPS Loop Integrated Modem
(#8001). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended
for field installation if Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) is installed.
SDLC Communications Feature With Clocking (#6301) can be
changed in the field to #6302. Transmission: This feature operates over common carrier communication facilities. For information
concerning these facilities, see M 2700 pages. External Modems:
IBM external modems that may be attached are:
3863 Modem mdl 1
3864 Modem mdl 1
2400/1200 bps (non-switched)
4800/2400 bps (non-switched)
3872 Modem mdl 1
3874 Modem mdl 1
2400/1200 bps (non-switched)
4800/2400 bps (non-switched)
Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is avai/able on the 3863 mdl 1 and 3864 mdl i. For
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3624.5
Jul79
DP Machines
3624 Consumer Transaction Facility
(cont'd)
communications capability, product utilization
and features see 3863, 3864 and M 2700 pages.
STORAGE EXPANSION FEATURE (#6501). Provides capability to
add increments of the Additional Storage Feature (#1301) if
Multiline Display (#4750) is installed. Required for either: 1) the
first #1301 increment when ordered with #4750 and SDLC Communications Feature (#6301 or #6302), or 2) the third #1301
increment when ordered with #4750 and Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820). Prerequisite: Multiline Display (#4750). Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
TERMINAL LOOP FEATURE (#7820). Provides capability to
attach to a 3601/3602 loop. Attachment to local loop is directly.
Attachment to remote loop can be either directly or via remote
subloop through a 3603, a 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4, a 3614, or another
3624. Prerequisites: [1] Available position on the loop. [2] Depending upon the configuration, the Additional Storage Feature
(#1005 or #1006) may be required on the 3601/3602 ... see
3601 or 3602. [3] Attachment to a 3601/3602 local loop directly
does not require an additional feature. [4] Attachment to a
3601/3602 remote loop directly requires 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). [5] Attachment to a 3601/3602 remote loop
via remote subloop requires one of the following: 3603 Terminal
Attachment Unit mdl 1 or 2 for 1200 bps or mdl 2 for 2400 bps ...
3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4 with Line Feature Base (#4751 or #4752)
and appropriate modem .. ' 3614 with Terminal Loop Feature
(#7820) and 1200 BPS Loop Integrated Modem (#8001) ... or
another 3624 with Terminal Loop Feature (#7820) and 1200 BPS
Loop Integrated Modem (#8001). Specify: [1] For attachment to a
3601/3602 local loop specify one of the following loop speeds:
#9062 for 1200 bps, #9063 for 2400 bps, or #9064 for 4800
bps. [2] For attachment to 3601/3602 remote loop via subloop
through a 3603 mdl 1 or 2 at 1200 bps, #9062 ... [3] For attachment to 3601/3602 remote loop via subloop through 3603 mdl 2
at 2400 bps, #9063 ... [4] For attachment to 3601/3602 remote
loop via subloop through 3604, 3614 or another 3624, #9062 for
1200 bps. Limitations: [1] Cannot be installed with SDLC Communications Feature (#6301 or #6302), EIA Interface (#3701), or
IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500)
[2] Remote loop
speed is 1200 bps maximum when attached directly or via subloop
through 3603 mdl 1 or 2, 3604, 3614, or another 3624 ... is 2400
bps maximum via subloop through 3603 mdl 2 ... [3] Loop Integrated Modem (#8001) is not required if the 3624 is attached to
a local loop, or via subloop to remote loop through 3603, 3604,
3614 or another 3624. Maximum: One. Field Installation:' Not
recommended for field installation if SDLC Communications Feature (#6301 or #6302) is installed.
THIRD TRACK (#7950). Provides for reading data on track two
and/or both reading and writing data on track three of magnetic
stripe card. Presently conforms to ISO/3554/ AD1 Third Track
Standard, and proposed Data Content Standard ISO/DIS 4909.
Can read tracks two and three independently or in conjunction
with each other. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
TRANSACTION STATEMENT PRINTER (#8201). Prints document
showing record of transaction and issues to user through the
transaction statement slot. Prints documents for audit use that can
be retained in a journal stacker in the 3624. Print feed hopper
has a capacity of 2,000 documents. Journal stacker has a capacity of 400 documents. Data is printed on 96-column card stock
2-5/8" x 3-1/4" (66.7mm x 82.6mm) in size. Provides a 57
character set consisting of 56 printable graphics and space
(blank). Four lines can be printed with up to 34 characters per
line ... maximum of 136 characters on each document. The data
to be printed is determined by the host application program. Printing is overlapped with currency issue and user deposit cycles.
Card Limitations: The 96-column card stock used in the statement printer must not have corner cuts. Detailed disclosure specifications describing 96-column card stock are available from IBM
Corporation, Commercial Development Office, Armonk, N.Y. The
configurations available from IBM
Maximum: One. Field .Installation: Yes.
1200 BPS LOOP INTEGRATED MODEM (#8001). An internal
modem for attachment to a 3601/3602 remote loop. Operates at
1200 bps over non-switched unconditioned voice-grade lines.
Prerequisite: Terminal Loop Feature (#7820). Limitation: Not
required if 3624 is attached to a 3601/3602 remote loop through
a 3603, 3604 mdl 2, 3 or 4, 3614, or another 3624 ... or if attached to a 3601 /3602 local loop. If there are both a 3604 and a
3624 located at the same remote loop location that does not have
a 3603 or 3614, it is recommended that the loop modem (#8001)
be located on the 3624, because the 3624 might often be operating while the 3604 is not, e.g., weekends. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Add'i Storage Feature
#1301
Depository Cartridge
Locking Feature
3150
DepOSitory, Lobby
3233
Depository, Thru-the-Wall
3243
Depository Printer
3245
EIA Interface
3701
Multiline Display
4750
IBM 1200 BPS Intgd Modem
5500
SDLC Communictns Feature
with Clocking
6301
without Clocking
6302
Storage Expn Feature
6501
Terminal Loop Feature
7820
Third Track
7950
1 200 BPS Loop Intgd Modem 8001
Transaction Stmt Printer
8201
MLC
5 Yr
Purchase MMMC
$6
$142
$1.00
24
80
67
37
17
46
23
840
2,615
2,140
500
424
1,200
668
1.50
7.50
7.50
15
4.00
9.50
4.00
44
41
12
46
117
15
141
1,270
1,060
420
1,160
2,000
334
2,280
7.00
7.00
.50
10.00
41.00
4.00
23.50
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. See M 10000 pages for additional description, feature
codes, prices and order information.
HEAVY-DUTY ENCLOSURE, SINGLE FUNCTION (#3901). [Mdls
2 and 12 only] Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12 with
currency dispensing function only (Note: The dual function
heavy-duty enclosure may also be used with currency dispensing function only, if desired.) Provides a thick steel enclosure
for currency dispensing mechanism of through-the-wall models
that do not have depository. A single rear access door includes
a combination lock. The combination of the combination lock is
set by the customer. Dual Lock (#3375) is available as an
option, providing a second combination lock on rear access
door. Dial Keylock (#3310) is available as an option, providing
keylock that prevents turning the combination dial when locked;
used for dual control and/or where bank examiner type lock is
desired. Penetration-detection grid is provided across the inside
front face of enclosure.
HEAVY-DUTY ENCLOSURE, DUAL FUNCTION (#3902). [Mdls 2
and 12 only] Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12 with
currency dispensing and depository functions. Can also be used
to house currency dispensing function without depository, providing additional lockable storage area. Provides thick steel
enclosure for currency dispensing and depository mechanisms.
A single rear access door includes a combination lock. The
combination of the combination lock is set by the customer.
Dual Lock (#3375) is available as an option, providing a second
combination lock on the rear access door. Dial Keylock
(#3310) is available as an option, providing keylock that prevents turning the combination dial when locked; used for dual
control and/or where bank examiner type lock is desired.
Penetration-detection grid is provided across the inside front
face of enclosure.
BEZEL, THROUGH-THE-WALL (#1490 or #1491). [Mdls 2 and
12 only] Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12. Provides
bezel to interface outside wall surface with 3624 enclosure
through-the-wall of building or other structure. #1490 --- a
recessed bezel that provides a shelf surface. Recommended for
walk-up use ... #1491 -- a non-recessed bezel which positions
the user guidance area nearer outside wall surface. Recommended for drive-up use.
PEDESTAL, FOR HEAVY-DUTY ENCLOSURES (#4901 or
#4902). [Mdls 2 and 12 only] Available for installation of mdls
2 and 12. A mounting stand to locate the 3624 at a height most
convenient for user operation ... includes a lockable storage
cabinet ... available for single and dual function heavy-duty
enclosures in heights appropriate for walk-up or drive-up use.
Recommended nominal keyboard heights are 52" (1321 mm) for
walk-up, 42" (1067mm) for drive-up. #4901 -- for 3624s that
use the single function enclosure (#3901) ... #4902 -- for
3624s that use the dual function enclosure (#3902). Specify:
For keyboard centerline height from mounting surface -- #9701
for 42" (1067mm) ... #9702 for 47" (1194mm) ... or #9703 for
52" (1321 mm).
STORAGE CABINET, FOR DUAL FUNCTION HEAVY-DUTY
ENCLOSURE (#4903). [Mdls 2 and 12 only] Available for installation of mdls 2 and 12. A lockable storage cabinet for installation of the dual function heavy-duty enclosure (#3902) directly
to a mounting surface where a pedestal is not required.
PEDESTAL, LOBBY (#5510). [Mdls 1 and 11 only] A mounting
stand for free-standing configuration of lobby model without the
depository feature. Note: #5510 is not required if customer
intends to install a 3624 mdl 1 or 11, without the depository
feature, on an alternative mounting surface or stand. #5510 is
not required if a 3624 mdl 1 or 11 is installed with a depository
feature (#3233) since a pedestal base is included in #3233.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----------- --- -----=- =- - =
':' =
M 3624.6
Jul79
DP Machines
3624 Consumer Transaction Facility (conI' d)
FRONT DRESS PANEL (#3951). [Mdls 2 and 12 only] Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12. Provides user guidance
area panel covers and logo lamp assembly.
FRONT TRIM BORDER (#3961 or #3962). [Mdls 2 and 12
only] Required for installation of mdls 2 and 12. Provides trim
border panel around the bezel on the outside of building for
outer seal of through-the-wall installation. #3961 -- includes a
built-in depository envelope holder ... #3962 -- has no envelope
holder.
LOGO PANEL (#9401, #9402, #9403). [All Models] Required
for installation on all models of the 3624. Provides a panel that
can be personalized by the customer (silk-screened, painted,
etc.). Can be shipped with the 3624 or prior to the 3624. See
"Specify Section" above for specification of appropriate specify
code.
CURRENCY CARTRIDGE (#9110). Required for installation of
any 3624. Portable container for loading, storing, transporting,
and issuing currency or other approved documents ... interchangeable between 3624s. See M 10000 pages for customer
responsibilities, recommended number of spare cartridges. and
mai ntenance.
DEPOSITORY CARTRIDGE (#3155). [Mdls 2 and 12 only]
Portable container for receiving and transporting deposits. Required for operation' with Depository Cartridge Locking Feature
(#3150).
3624 CURRENCY AREA LOCKOFF (#3312). [Models 2 and 12
only] Provides a security panel to enclose the currency area.
Enables the document feed mechanism to be locked in the
machine. When used with the Depository Cartridge Locking
Feature (#3150), it restricts access to the currency area during
normal operational servicing of the depository and/or other
areas of the 3624. Includes key lock and standard key. Available only when installed with the Heavy Duty Enclosure. Dual
Function (#3902).
3624
MOL/Feature
1
2
11
12
#1301
3233
3234
3243
3244
3701
4750
5500
6501
6301
6302
7950
7820
8001
8201
PILOT TEST
6 MOS.
3 MOS.
$3,038
3,350
3,538
3,850
55
654
779
535
660
106
300
167
105
318
265
500
290
84
570
$1,519
1,675
1,769
1,925
28
327
390
268
330
53
150
84
53
159
133
250
145
42
285
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------
---- --- - ---===--"-:' =
M 3631.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3631
PLANT COMMUNICATION
CONTROLLER
Purpose: A programmable controller for attachment of 3640
terminals to S/370 or 4300 processors using appropriate virtual
storage system control programs, or an 8100 System using the
Distributed Processing Program Executive (DPPX).
S/370 or 4300 Processor attachment is via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller using synchronous data link control (SDLC)
transmission protocols over various common carrier or user-owned
transmission factilities. Communication is also possible via a
Communications Adapter feature on the 4331 Processor (Note:
This is not suppported by ACF /VTAME).
8100 System attachment is via the 8130, 8140 and/or the 8101
data link using SDLC transmission protocols over various common
carrier or user-owned transmission facilities.
Terminal attachment is via directly attached or data link attached
loops which utilize synchronous data link control (SOLe) transmission protocols. The loops are user-owned transmission facilities
wich are constructed from IBM accessories ... see "3630 Loop
Accessories" in M 10000 pages.
Model 1A Includes an IBM diskette drive which accommodates
an IBM Diskette 1 diskette of 250K byte capacity.
Model 1 B Includes an IBM diskette drive which accommodates
an IBM Diskette 2 diskette of 500K byte capacity.
Highlights
Controls the functions of a 3630 Plant Communication System.
Customers, using SCP programs on virtual storage S/370 or 4300
Processor systems or 8100 Systems, will prepare user-written
application programs which direct system operation. The controller
can be programmed to operate independently when the S/370 is
unavailable. It is capable of controlling terminal functions, executing arithmetic and logic functions, and capturing data from the
terminals for later transmission to the S/370. A keylock is provided for locking access to the diskette drive.
Communication with an 8100 System is via the 8130, 8140
and/or the 8101 data link using the SDLC protocol. The
EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701) on the 3631 is used on an
SDLC data link or direct connect facility provided by the 8100.
Each 3631 operates in half-duplex mode.
The/allowing IBM external modems can be used:
2400/1200 bps - non· switched
3863 mdll
4800/2400 bps - non-switched
3864 mdll
3865 mdll or 2
9600/4800 bps - non-switched
3872 mdll
2400/1200 bps - non-switched
4800/1200 bps - non-switched
3874 mdll
Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on
the 3863 mdll, 3864 mdll and 3865 mdll or 2. For
communications capabilities, product utilization and
jeatures, see 3863,3864,3865,.3872,3874 and M 2700
pages.
Supplies: For customer-owned diskettes
PREREQUISITES
Communication with a virtual storage host S/370 or 4300 processor is via a 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331
Processor equipped with appropriate features ... see 3704, 3705
or 4331 pages.
A 3604 Keyboard Display mdl 6 or its equivalent is required as a
control station and is directly attached to the controller. Two
10-foot cables will be supplied with the 3631. The magnetic stripe
features are not supported.
The 3631 Controller and 3604 control terminal have been designed for operation in physical environments characteristic of
office areas. See IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA24-3675.
One host communication feature: #6301, #6302 or #4502 is
required ... see "Special Features."
A 3630 Test Loop #9445 is required for installation with the first
3631 at each site ... see "Specify."
The model 1 A accommodates IBM Diskette 1 of 250K byte capacity. The Model 1 B accommodates IBM Diskettes 1 or 2 having
250K and 500K byte capacities. The diskette provides permanent
storage for control code and application programs, plus permanent
and temporary storage for user data. Data required to be on the
diskette, exclusive of customer data, will often exceed 200K bytes.
During normal operation, performance characteristics of the diskette drive dictate that that device be used primarily for infrequent
data logging.
Two wrap type Loop Station Connectors are required for each
local adapter (#4780).
IBM and customer code is transmitted to the controller where it is
written on a diskette. The diskette may also be used to hold
application data in the space not required for control code. At
controller start-up, diagnostics, control code and application code
are read from the diskette into control and application storage.
During system operation, the diskette may be used to access data
and code.
Telephone communication should be available at the controller site
for communication with the host, remote loops and key locations
along loops.
Storage included in the controller is used for control code, and
application control data and instructions. The amount of storage
available for application programming depends on the attached
terminal configuration and user environment. Included in the basic
machine is 65,536 bytes of application storage. Both control and
application storage may be extended in 16,384 byte increments ...
see "Special Features."
All 3640 terminals are attached to customer-owned loops. A
variety of accessories and wire are available for the construction
of the loops ... see "3630 Accessories" in the M 10000 pages.
Up to two Loop Adapters may be installed to directly connect one
loop each. The Loop Adapters each provide two loop lobes. Each
lobe may extend up to 3.2 cable kilometers (2 cable miles). Loops
are operated at 9600 bps. A loop, consisting of one lobe, may be
connected to a 3842 Loop Control Unit. The 3842 can be connected multipoint or point-to-point on a common carrier or
customer-owned transmission facility to an IBM 3863 or 3872
Modem at the 3631 site for operation at 2400 bps. A loop can
accommodate a number of loop-terminal connections. See the IBM
3630 Plant Communication System Description for additional
information.
Communication with a virtual storage host S/370 or 4300 processor is via a 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331
Processor using SDLC and SNA protocols. The EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701) and either an external modem or the Line Set
Type 1 F (#4716) on the 3704/3705 (on 4331, the Local Attachment Interface (#4801) feature) are required for host communicatilon. See M 2700 and M 4331 pages for Communications Adapter features on 4331. Each 3631 operates in half-duplex mode.
Duplex communication line operations are possible with multiple
3631 sand 3632s attached to the line ... one 3631/3632 transmitting while the other receives.
3631/3632 programming support material must be ordered from
PID and installed on the host processor.
Loop Continuity and Relay Testers, Part No. 1657420, should be
purchased by the customer for testing his loop wiring. One tester
should be available at each physical location of controller(s) loops
or remote loop(s) that will require loop cable testing.
A 3643 Keyboard Display terminal should be located in close
physical proximity to 3842 Loop Control Units for remote loop and
connected terminal testing.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - System
Description, GA24-3652 ... IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA24-3675 ... IBM
3630 Plant Communication System - Loop Installation Manual Physical Planning,GA24-3676 ... IBM 3630 Plant Communication
System: Controller Operating Guide, GA24-3678.
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (115 V AC, 1 phase, 60 Hz, 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable;
#9880 for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. These
are usable on 1 20 V AC systems. Field Installation: Not recommended.
•
Distribution of Microcode: One copy of the 3631 or 3632
System Microcode is required for each S/370 attaching a
3631 or 3632. The address for the initial shipment must be
supplied as a Supplementary Specification
Specify: #9491 for initial 3630 System ordered. for attachment
to the S/370 or, #9492 for any additional 3630 system ordered for attachment to the S/370.
For distribution of microcode to the S/370 location specify the
media:
#9412
#9413
#9414
#9431
#9432
9/800 magnetic tape
9/1600 magnetic tape
9/6250 magnetic tape
80 column card
96 column card
Shipping address for the 3630 System microcode must
be supplied
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- ----.!. ~ .s~"""i
____ • _
M 3631.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3831 Plant Communication. Controller/coordl
TERMINAL ATTACHMENT
This is the address to which the microcode will be automatically sent for the 3630 System (designated #9491). Whenever a 3630 is updated by an EC, the microcode will be sent
to the current TPC# address. The TPC# (Teleprocessing
Control Number)
•
Loop Accessories and Loop Cable: 10 Loop Accessory Keys
are shipped with the 3631. See M 10000· pages for descriptions, prices and ordering instructions for 3630 System Accessories.
•
3630 Test Loop: Specify #9445 on the first 3631 or 3632 to
be installed at each' site. Field Installation: Yes.
3831
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase
MMMC
1A
1B
$993
1,058
$845
900
$26,300
28,300
$224
247
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Machine Group: 0
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
The Data Link Adapter (#3211), Loop Adapter (#4780), and
EIA/CCITT Interface (#3703) features enable the 3631 Controller
to attach 3640 terminals. Data Link terminal attachment capability
is provided by selection of the EIA/CCITT Interface - Data Link
(#3703) with the Data Link Adapter (#3211). Direct terminal
attachment capability is provided by selection of the Loop Adapter
(#4780) and the Data Link Adapter (#3211). A maximum of two
directly attached loops and two data links for attachment of 3842s
may be installed.
The data links are used to provide point-to-point or multipoint
facilities for the connection of the 3842 Loop Control Units. The
3842 attaches at the remote ends of the data link where it establishes a remote loop. The 3872 Modem connects the EIA/CCITT
Interface - Data Link (#3703) and the data link at the controller.
The loop operates at the same speed as the data link.
Customer Responsibilities for Loops: The customer must purchase, install, and maintain loops for terminal attachment. See
ISM 3630 Plant Communication System Description for further
information. See ISM 3630 Plant Communication System Loop
Installation Manual - Physical Planning for further planning and
installation information on loop components, loop cable, loop
wiring configurations, Continuity and Relay Tester, and maintenance and test procedure. See M 10000 pages for bulk cable and
accessories.
Model Changes: Model 1A can be changed to Model 1B in the
field. Change from Model 1A to 1B requires replacement of the
diskette storage device. Adequate provision must be made for
retaining data contained on the diskette by having the customer
remove It prior to the start of any conversion.
DATA LINK ADAPTER (#3211). Provides the control logic to
establish SDLC communications for terminal attachment.
Maximum: Four. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Required
once for each Loop Adapter (#4780) and once for each
EIA/CCITT Interface - Data Link (#3703).
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE: All replaced parts become
the property of IBM ... there are no additional installation charges.
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE - DATA LINK (#3703). Provides an
EIA/CCITT interface for attachment of a 3872 Modem for the
connection of the 3842. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Data Link Adapter (#3211). Limitation: The sum of
the bps operating rates for all EIA/CCITT Interfaces (#3701 and
#3703) and the Loop Adapters (#4780) may not exceed 28,800
bps.
Model 1 A to Model 1B ..•.•..$2,000.
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL ST()RAGE FEATURE (#1006). Provides an additional 16,384 byte increment of storage for device attachment or
application storage. To determine the number and type of storage
features required see the configurator in the 3630 Plant Communication System Description. Specify: #9591 for Additional Device
Attachment Control Storage, or #9592 for Additional' Application
Storage. Maximum: Five ... one with specify #9591, up to four
with specify #9592. Field Installation: Yes. Note: The quantity
of feature #1006s must equal the combined quantities of specify
#9591 and #9592(s).
HOST COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES
For communication with the host processor, each 3631 must be
equipped with EIA/CCITT - Host (#3701) and one of the following
SDLC features: #4502, #6301, #6302.
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE - HOST (#3701). Provides the appropriate cables and Interface logic necessary to attach an external
modem for communication to the host processor through the
3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor or for
local attachment to the 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on
4331 without requiring modems.
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: A Communications Feature
(#4502, 6301 or 6302).
LOOP ADAPTER (#4780). Allows direct attachment of a loop with
one or two loops to the controller operating at a speed of 9600
bps. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Data
Link Adapter (#3211), and a wrap type Loop Station Connector. in
each connected lobe.
MRC
Add'i Storage Feature #1006
$58
Data Link Adapter
3211
35
EIA/CCITT Interface
3701
Host
12
Data Link
3703
12
Loop Adapter
4780
31
SDLC/Host Communications Feature
w /0 Clkg to 9600 bps 4502
35
w Clkg to 2400 bps
6301
19
w /0 Clkg to 4600 bps 8302
12
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase MMMC
$49
30
$1,170 $10.00
1,200 10.50
10
10
26
424
424
940
4.00
4.00
17.50
30
16
10
1,200
710
477
10.50
3.00
2.50
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#4502). Required for attachment to communication lines through an external modem which provides clocking at
speeds up to 9600 bps. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
Installed with #6301 or #6302. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
HOST COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCKING (#6301). Required for attachment to communlcati\>n
lines through any external modem which does not provide clocking
. for speeds of 600, 1200 and 2400 bps, or for local attachment to
the 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor.
See Feature #4716 under "Special Features" for the 3704 or
3705, or 4331 pages. Maximum: One. Limitation:' Cannot be
Installed with #6302 or #4502. Field Installation: Yes.
PrereqUisite: EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
HOST COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#6302). Required for attachment to communication lines through an external modem which provides clocking at
speeds up to 4800 bps. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
Installed with #6301 or #4502. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
('
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-------- - ---------- ----------,-
M 3632.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3632 PLANT COMMUNICATION
CONTROLLER
pie x communication line operations are possible with multiple
3631s and 3632s attached to the line ... one 3631/3632 transmitting while the other receives.
Purpose: A programmable controller for attachment of 3640
terminals to S/370 or 4300 processors using appropriate virtual
storage system control programs, or an 8100 System using the
Distributed Processing Program Executive (DPPX).
Communication with an 8100 System is via the 8130, 8140
and/or the 8101 data link using the SDLC protocol. The
EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701) on the 3632 is used on an
SDLC data link or the direct connect facility provided by the 8100.
Each 3631 operates in half-duplex mode.
S/370 or 4300 Processor attachment is via a 3704, 3705 or
Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor using Synchronous
Data Link Control (SDLC) transmission protocols over various
common carrier or user-owned transmission facilities. Communication is also possible via a Communications Adapter feature on the
4331 Processor (Note: This is not supported by ACF /VTAME).
Thefollowing IBM external modems can be used:
3863 mdll
3864 mdl 1
3865 mdl 1 or 2
3872 mdl 1
3874 mdll
8100 System attachment is via the 8130, 8140 and/or the 8101
data link using SDLC transmission protocols over various common
carrier or user-owned transmission facilities.
Terminal attachment is via directly attached or data link attached
loops. The loops are user-owned transmission facilities which are
constructed from IBM accessories
see "3630 Loop
Accessories" in M 10000 pages. The loops are connected via
common carrier or user-owned tranmission facilities.
Model1A
A programmable controller with a 5 megabyte
disk.
Model1B
A programmable controller with a 9.2 megabyte
disk.
Supplies:
Communications with a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor
is via a 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor equipped with appropriate special features
see
3704/3705 or 4331 pages.
Communications with the 8100 System is via the 8130, 8140
and/or the 8101 data link using the appropriate features ... see
8130, 8140 and 8101. When ordering this machine for attachment to an 8100 System, "Terminal Requirements" under 8130,
8140 and 8101 in "Machines" should be reviewed.
A 3604 Keyboard Display mdl 6, or its equivalent, is required as
a control station and is directly attached to the controller. Two
10 foot connecting cables will be supplied with the 3632. The
magnetic stripe optional features on the 3604 are not supported.
The 3632 Plant Communication Controller and 3604 Keyboard
Display mdl 6 have been designed for operation in physical
environments characteristic of office areas. See IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System - System Description Manual for further
information.
One host communication feature (#6301, 6302 or 4502) is
required ... see "Special Features."
Houses a direct access diskette drive which accepts both IBM
Diskette 1 and 2 having respectively 250K and 500K byte capacities. The diskette provides permanent storage for control code and
application programs, plus permanent and temporary storage for
user data. Data required to be on the diskette, exclusive of customer data, will often exceed 200K bytes. During normal operation
performance characteristics of the diskette drive dictate that the
device be used primarily for infrequent data logging.
Two wrap type Loop Station Connectors for each Loop Adapter
(#4780).
A 3630 Test Loop (#9445) for installation with the first 3632 at
each site ... see "Specify."
3631/3632 programming support material must be ordered from
PID and installed on the host processor.
IBM and customer code is transmitted to the controller where it is
written on a diskette. The diskette may also be used to hold
application data in the space not required for the control code. At
controller start-up, diagnostics, control code and application code
are read from the diskette into control and application storage.
During system operation, both the disk and the diskette may be
used to access data and code.
Communication with a host S/370 or 4300 processor is via a
3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor using
SDLC and SNA protocols. The EIA/CCITT Interface - Host
(#3701), and either an external modem or the Line Set Type 1 F
(#4716) on the 3704/3705 (on 4331, the Local Attachment
Interface [#4801] feature) are required for host communication.
See M 2700 and M 4331 pages for Communications Adapter
features on 4331. Each 3632 operates in half-duplex mode. Du-
customer-usable diskettes
Prerequisites:
It houses a disk storage device (5 or 9.2 Mb capacity) for storage
of user data. This storage device is not removable except by
service personnel. A fixed head feature is available which will
provide 8 additional heads with access to data on 8 tracks ... see
Additional Disk Heads (#1010,1011) under "Special Features."
All 3640 terminals are attached to customer-owned loops. A
variety of accessories and wire are available for the construction
of the loops ... see "3630 Accessories" in the M 10000 pages.Up
to two Loop Adapters may be installed to directly connect one
loop each. The Loop Adapters each provide two loop lobes. Each
lobe may extend up to 3.2 cable kilometers (2 cable miles). Directly attached loops are operated at 9600 bps. A loop, consisting of
one lobe, may be connected to the 3842 Loop Control Unit. The
3842 can be connected multipoint or point,to-point on a common
carrier or customer-owned transmission facility to a 3872 Modem
at the 3632 site for operation at 2400 bps. A loop can accommodate a number of loop-terminal connections ... see' 3630 Plant
Communication System Description for additional information.
- non-switched
- non-switched
- non-switched
- non-switched
- non-switched
Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on
the 3863 mdl 1, 3864 mdl 1 and 3865 mdl 1 or 2. For
communications capabilities, product utilization and
features, see 3863, 3864, 3865, 3872, 3874 and M 2700
pages.
Highlights: Controls the functions of a 3630 Plant Communication
System. Customers, utilizing SCP programs on virtual storage
S/370, 4300 Processor or 8100 Systems, will prepare userwritten application programs which direct system operation. The
controller can be programmed to operate independently when the
processor is unavailable. It is capable of controlling terminal
functions, executing arithmetic and logic functions, and capturing
data from the terminals for later transmission to the processor.
Information may be stored on the disk for use in responding to
terminal inquiries.
Storage included in the controller is used for control code, and
application control data and instructions. the amount of storage
available for application programming depends on the attached
terminal configuration and user environment. Included in the basic
machine is 65,536 bytes of application storage. Both control and
application storage may be extended in 16 384 byte increments ...
see "Special Features."
2400/1200 bps
4800/2400 bps
9600/4800 bps
2400/1200 bps
4800/2400 bps
Loop Continuity and Relay Testers, P /N 1657420, should be
purchased by the customer for testing his loop wiring. One
tester should be available at each physical location of
controller(s) loops or remote loop(s) that will require loop cable
testing.
Telephone communication should be available at the controller
site for communication with the host, remote loops and key
locations along loops.
A 3643 Keyboard Display terminal should be located in close
physical proximity to 3842 Loop Control Units for remote loop
and connected terminal testing.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - System
Description, GA24-3652 ... IBM 3630 Plant communication System
- Installation Manual - Physical Planning,GA24-3675 ... IBM 3630
Plant Communication System - Loop Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GA24-3676 ... IBM 3630 Plant Communication System:
Controller Operating Guide, GA24-3678.
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): 115 V (usable on 120 V) -#9880 for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. 208 V #9884 for locking plug, or #9885 for non-lock plug. 230 V -#9886 for locking plug, or #9887 for non-lock plug. Field
Installation: Not recommended.
•
Distribution of Microcode; One copy of the 3631 or 3632
System Microcode is required for each S/370 attaching a
3631 or 3632. The address for the initial shipment must be
supplied as a Supplementary Specification via AAS as shown
below.
Specify #9491 for initial 3630 system ordered. for attachment
to the S/370, or #9492 for any additional 3630 system ordered for attachment to the S/370.
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
-------- ---------_.--------
M 3632.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3632 Plant Communication Controller (conI' d)
For distribution of microcode to the S/370 location specify the
media;
#9412
#9413
#9414
#9431
#9432
9/800 magnetic tape
9/1600 magnetic tape
9/6250 magnetic tape
80 column card
96 column card
Shipping address for the 3630 system microcode must
be supplied
This is the address to which the microcode will be automatically sent for the 3630 System (designated #9491). Whenever a 3630 is updated by an EC. the microcode will be sent
to· the current TPC# address. the TPC# (Teleprocessing
Control Number)
•
Loop Accessories and Loop Cable: 10 Loop Accessory Keys
are shipped with the 3632. See M 10000 pages for descriptions, prices, and ordering instructions for 3630 System Accessories.
3630 Test Loop: Specify #9445 on the first 3631 or 3632 to
be installed at each site. Field Installation: Yes.
PRICES Mdl
1A
1B
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
$1,533 $1,305
1,622
1,380
Purchase
MMMC
$44,600
47,600
$273
281
Per Call:1
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55%
Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model 1 A can be changed in the field to Model
1 B ... requires replacement of the disk storage device. Adequate
provision must be made for retaining data contained on the disk
and for removal of any proprietary data prior to the start of the
conversion. limitation: Field installation of the additional disk
heads for Model 1 B (#1011) concurrently with a model change
from Model 1 A to Model 1 B requires submission of an RPQ.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges ... all replaced parts become the property of
IBM.)
Model 1 A to Model 1 B ...... $3,000.
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL STORAGE FEATURE (#1006). Provides an additional 16,384 byte increment of storage for device attachment or
application storage. To determine the number and type of storage
features required, see the Configurator in the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Description Manual. Specify: #9591 for
additional device attachment control storage, or #9592 for additional application storage. Maximum: #1006 with #9591 specified - 1 ... #1006 with #9592 specified -- 4 ... a maximum of
five # 1006s. Note: The quantity of # 1006s must equal the
combined quantities of specify codes #9591 and #9592. Field
Installation: Yes.
ADDITIONAL DISK HEADS (#1010 for mdl 1A, #1011 for mdl
1 B). Provides eight additional disk heads for the disk file, as
specified by model type selected. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Not recommended.
HOST COMMUNICATION FEATURES ... For communications with
the host processor, each 3632 must be equipped with EIA/CCITT
interface - Host (#3701) and. one of the following Communications
features ... #4502, #6301 or #6302.
HOST COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#6301). Required for attachment to communication lines through any external modem which does not provide clocking for speeds of 600, 1200 and 2400 bps, or for
local attachment to the 3704/3705 ... see Line Set Type 1 F
(#4716) under "Special Features" for the 3704 or 3705.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #6302 or #4502.
Maximum:
One.
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite:
EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
HOST COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS
MACHINE CLOCKING (#6302). Required for attachment to
communication lines through an external modem which provides
clocking at speeds up to 4800 bps. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #6301 or #4502. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
TERMINAL ATTACHMENT: The Data Link Adapter (#3211), Loop
Adapter (#4780), and EIA/CCITT Interface (#3703) features
enable the 3632 Controller to attach 3640 terminals. Data link
terminal attachment capability is provided by selection of the
EIA/CCITT Interface - Data Link (#3703) with the Data Link Adapter (#3211. Direct terminal attachment capability is provided by
selection of the Loop Adapter (#4780) and the Data Link Adapter
(#3211. A maximum of two directly attached loops and two data
links for attachment of 3842s may be installed.
The data links are used to provide point-to-point or multi-point
facilities for the connection of the 3842 Loop Control Units. The
3842 attaches at the remote ends of the data link where it establishes a remote loop. The 3872 Modem connects the EIA/CCITT
Interface - Data Link (#3703) and the data link at the controller.
The loop operates at the same speed as the data link.
CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES FOR LOOPS -- The customer
must purchase, install and maintain loops for terminal attachment
... see IBM 3036 Plant Communication System Description Manual
for further information. See IBM 3630 Plant Communication System Loop Installation Manual - Physical Planning for further planning and installation information on loop components, loop cable,
loop wiring configurations, Continuity and Relay Tester, and maintenance and test procedures. See M 10000 pages for bulk cable
and accessories.
DATA LINK ADAPTER (#3211). Provides the control logic to
establish SDLC communications for terminal attachment.
Prerequisite: Required once for each Loop Adapter (#4780)
and once for each EIA/CCITT Interface - Data Link (#3703).
Maximum: Four. Field Installation: Yes.
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE - DATA LINK (#3703). Provides an
EIA/CCITT interface for attachment of a 3872 Modem for the
connection of the 3842. Field installation: Yes Maximum: Two.
Prerequisite: Data Link Adapter (#3211). Limitation: The sum
of the bps operating rates for all EIA/CCITT Interfaces (#3701
and #3703) and the Loop Adapters (#4780) can not exceed
28,800 bps.
LOOP ADAPTER (#4780). Allows direct attachment of a loop
with one or two lobes to the controller operating at a speed of
9600
bps.
Maximum:
Two.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisite: Data Link Adapter (#3211), and a wrap type Loop
Station Connector in each connected lobe.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase MMMC
Add'i Storage Feature #1006
Add'i Disk Heads
For Model 1A
1010
1011
For Model 1B
3211
Data Link Adapter
EIA/CCITT Interface
3701
Host
3703
Data Link
Loop Adapter
4780
SDLC Communications Feature
w /0 clkg to 9600 bps 4502
with clkg to 2400 bps 6301
w /0 clkg to 4800 bps 6302
$58
$49
$1,170 $10.00
32
32
35
27
27
30
1,080
1,080
1,200
17.00
17.00
10.50
12
12
31
10
10
26
424
424
940
4.00
4.00
17.50
35
19
12
30
16
10
1,200
710
477
10.50
3.00
2.50
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE - HOST (#3701). Provides the appropriate cables and interface logic necessary to attach an external
modem for communications to the host processor through the
3704/3705 or for local attachment to the 3704/3705 without
requiring modems. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Communications Feature (#4502, 6301 or 6302).
SOLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS
MACHINE CLOCKING (#4502). Required for attachment to
communication lines through an external modem which provides
clocking at speeds up to 9600 bps. Maximum: One. Limitation;
Cannot be installed with #6301 or #6302. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: EIA/CCITT Interface - Host (#3701).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=-- =---- -- =
----":' =
M 3641.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3641
Proper terminal operator use of POPs will result in maximum terminal and system availability.
REPORTING TERMINAL
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
Purpose: The 3641 Reporting Terminal models 1 and 2 are interactive workstations with a wide range of options to meet individual
customer requirements for data entry and response.
Modell
Model 2
Has a 22-character alphameric display. Either a
35-key numeric keyboard or 70-key alphameric
keyboard feature must be specified. Optional features include a Magnetic Reader Attachment and
a Digital Input/Digital Output with 32 input and 8
output points.
Has a 22-character alphameric display. Either a
35-key numeric keyboard or 70-key alphameric
keyboard feature must be specified. Optional features include a Magnetic Reader Attachment, a
Numeric Punched Hole Badge Reader, an 80column Punched Card Reader, and Digital
Input/Digital Output with 32 input and 8 output
points.
HIGHLIGHTS
applies to
the 3641 terminal.
Maintenance of the 3641 terminals will normally be performed at
the installed location.
There is no regularly scheduled IBM preventive maintenance.
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenance coverage
immediately following expiration of the warranty period at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in prices.
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Physical Environments
The 3641, Models 1 and 2, and accessories may be used in the
industrialized work zones of a wide range of business, industrial
and commercial establishments.
They can resist:
The 3641 is an interactive workstation terminal that is designed to
be used on a table, counter, work bench or mounted via an accessory bracket on a wall or column. Its capability includes:
Concentrations of certain common, corrosive gases.
•
An easy-to-read display for input verification of keyed data and
alphameric operator messages of up to 22 characters.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common
to terminal operational sites for most industries.
•
Display of alphameric and special characters.
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interference associated with terminal operational sites.
•
Function keys for user-defined transactions.
•
Special features for fixed data input include: A 10-column
numeric punched hole badge reader, an 80-column card reader, and a magnetic character reader adapter.
•
A Digital Input/Output feature for exchange of data between
the 3641 and customer devices.
•
A removable keyboard overlay and function key mask which
can be customized by the customer.
Accumulations of dust, grit, and dirt.
Vibration and shock associated with the shipping, operation,and relocation of the terminal for most types of industries.
For environmental specifications refer to the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA24-3675.
SPECIFY
Voltage (120 V AC,1-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug,
or #9891 for non-lock plug.
Supplies; 80-column cards ... Punched Hole Badges ... Magnetic
Stripe Badges.
These supplies, if required, may be ordered through
Power Cable: #9986 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
IBM
Loop Connection Cable: #9976 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable,
#9976 for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
Or
PREREQUISITES
1.
Either the 35-key Numeric Keyboard (#4652) or the 70-key
Alphameric Keyboard (#4653) must be specified on both
3641 Models 1 and 2.
2.
A Loop Station Connector on a 3631/3632 or 3842 or 8100
System Loop.
3.
The Punched Card/Punched Badge Adapter (#5781) must be
specified if either Numeric Punched Hole Badge Reader
(#5810) or 80-column Punched Card Reader (#5802) is
specified. [Model 2 only]
4.
Magnetic Reader Attachment (#4910) must be specified if
either the Magnetic Hand Scanner, Magnetic Slot Reader, or
Dual Entry Magnetic Slot Reader is ordered. See "Special
Features."
When ordering this machine for attachment to an 8100 System,
"Terminal Requirements" under the appropriate 8130, 8140 or
8101 pages in "Machines" should be reviewed.
Bibliography: 3630 Plant Communication System - System Description, GA24-3652 ... 3641 Reporting Terminal Operating
Guide, GA24-3679, or Introduction to 8100 System.
Customer Setup: The 3641 is designated customer setup (CSU)
the,reby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, setup and checkout of the 3641
time of delivery or when relocating the 3641.
at
Removing and packing of the 3641 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
Relocation of the 3641 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (POPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operations to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or
#9065 for pebble gray.
Mdl
3641
1
2
MLC
5 Yr
$91
107
Purchase'
$2,955
3,530
MMMC
$13.50
15.00
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
SPECIAL FEATURES
DIGITAL INPUT/DIGITAL OUTPUT (#3251). Provides 32 bits of
TTL compatible digital input and 8 bits of TTL compatible digital
output on the 3641 model 1 and 2. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
35-KEY NUMERIC KEYBOARD (#4652). Provides 15 customerdefined function keys, 5 control keys, 10 numeric keys and 5
special character keys. Limitation: Canot be installed with
#4653. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Available at time of
manufacture only.
70-KEY ALPHAMERIC KEYBOARD (#4653).
Provides 20
customer-defined function keys, 5 control keys, 10 numeric keys,
A-Z, and 9 special character keys. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #4652. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Available at time
of manufature only.
'
MAGNETIC READER ATTACHMENT (#4910). Used to attach a
Magnetic Hand Scanner, Magnetic Slot Reader, or Dual Entry
Magnetic Slot Reader to the 3641 model 1 and 2. Note: The
three magnetic readers are plug compatible. Limitation: Cannot
be installed with both #5801 and #5802 on the model 2.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
PUNCHED CARD/PUNCHED BADGE ADAPTER (#5781). [Model
2 only] Required if either Numeric Punched Hole Badge Reader
(#5801) or 80-Column Punched Card Reader (#5802) is specified. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
•
Pilot Test Plan applies.
Whether terminal, controller, accessory or media is at fault.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- --- --------------_. -
M 3641.2
May 79
DP Machines
3641 Reporting Terminal (cont"d)
NUMERIC PUNCHED HOLE BADGE READER (#5801). [Model 2
only] Provides a badge reader which can read up to 10 digits of
numeric information. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
Punched Card/Punched Badge
Reader Adapter (#5781). Limitation: Cannot be installed with
both #4910 and #5802.
80-COLUMN PUNCHED CARD READER (#5802). [Model 2 only]
Allows the reading of 80-column tab cards. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with both #4901 and #5801. Maximum: One. Field
Installation:
Not
recommended.
Prerequisite:
Punched
Card/Punched Badge Adapter (#5781).
MLC
5 Yr
Special Feature Prices:
Digital Inpt/Digital Outpt #3251
35-Key Keyboard
4652
70-Key Keyboard
4653
Magnetic Rdr Attachmt
4910
Pnchd Card/Pnchd Badge
5781
Adapter
Num Pchd Hole Bdg Rdr
5801
80-Col Punched Card Rdr 5802
Purchase MMMC
$17
8
11
10
$510
163
288
318
$3.00
2.50
3.00
1.50
5
24
28
136
829
815
1.00
3.00
6.00
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature Number and
quantity as shown below at the price listed in the M 10000 pages.
See M 10000 for additional information and for ordering'
Item
Feature Number
Maximum Qty
Magnetic Hand Scanner
#9440
Magnetic Slot Reader
9441
Dual Entry Mag Slot Reader
9442
Mounting Bracket
9450
Magnetic Reader Extension Cable ... for
use with Magnetic Hand Scanner or Magnetic Slot Reader
6 meter
9106
••
12 meter
9107
•
A maximum of one magnetic reader or scanner may be ordered.
•• A maximum of one extension cable may be ordered.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3642
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3642 ENCODER PRINTER
Purpose: A work station printer and magnetic stripe encoder
which produces turn around documents. The magnetic stripe on
the documents encoded by the 3642 can be read by the Magnetic
Hand Scanner and the Magnetic Slot Reader.
Model 1
Has ten print lines and allows hand feed operation.
Model 2
Has ten print lines and allows the automatic
feeding of continuous forms as well as hand
feed operations.
Customer Setup: The 3642 Is designated customer setup (CSU)
thereby offering the customer earlv availability and relocation
flexibility.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, setup and checkout of the 3642 at
time of delivery or wnen relocating the 3642.
Removing and packing of the 3642 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
Relocation of the 3642 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Highlights
The 3642 is designed to produce magnetic stripe documents at a
workstation. Its capability includes:
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (POPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operation to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
Prints and encodes magnetic striped cards and labels.
Whether terminal, loop, controller, accessory, or media is at
fault.
Prints 10 lines of up to 70 alphameric characters each.
Proper terminal operator use of POPs will result in maximum terminal and system aV!lilability.
Encodes alphameric data.
Hand feed or automatic feed documents.
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
Large printed-character option.
applies to
Automatic Feeding and Bursting: The model 2 automatic feed
and burst capability permits unattended operation. It provides a
forms burster and a hopper which holds up to 400 continuous
forms. A forms stacker which holds up te ·400 cut forms is standard on both models. All continuous forms on the model 2 are
automatically burst prior to encoding and printing.
the 3642.
Maintenance of the 3642 terminals will normally be performed at
the installed Incation. See
There is no regUlarlY scheduled IBM preventive maintenance.
The automatic feed and burst capability .is designed to burst 99
pound card stock and adhesive backed labels. It is not designed
to burst 150 pound tag stock.
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenance coverage
immediately following expiration of the warranty period at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in prices.
Document Speed: The document speed depends upon the data
printed and the forms size and will have to be evaluated for each
application. The machine speed for a typical document is eight
documents per minute.
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Document Description: The 3642 contains a printer and magnetic
stripe encoder that can print and encode on the following documents.
Document Sizes: Height - 8.26cm (3.25 in) ... Length Min: 12.7cm (5.0 in) ... Length - Max: 18.733cm (7.375
in).
Physical Environments
The 3642 models 1 and 2 may be used in the industrialized work
zones of a wide range of business, industrial and commercial
establishments.
They can resist:
Concentrations of certain common, corrosive gases.
Accumulations of dust, grit, and dirt.
Document Types 99 pound card stock ... 150 pound
white tag stock ... pressure sensitive labels.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common
to terminal operational sites for most industries.
Document Thickness: Min. 0.018cm (0.007 in) ... Max:
0.030cm (0.011 in).
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interference associated with terminal operational sites.
See Forms Design Reference Guide, GA24-3488 for more details
on the 3642 forms.
Vibration and shock associated with the shipping, operation,
and relocation of the terminal for most types of industries.
Character Sets: The 48 printed character set consists of 0-9,
A-Z, and special characters period (.), single quote
plus (+),
ampersand (&), dollar sign ($), asterisk (.), hyphen or minus (-),
slash (f), comma D, percent (%), at sign (@) and number sign (#)
For environmental specifications refer to the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA24-3675.
A special (Large Character) 48-character set available at time of
manufacture provides 0-9, A-Z, slash(f), minus (-) and decimal (.)
and 9 special characters for creating large printed characters ...
see "Specify." Also see 3630 Plant Communications System
Description for details.
Voltage (120 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz) #9890 for locking plug,
or #9891 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 V AC is compatible
with existing 11 5 V systems. FIeld Installation: Not recommended.
n,
SPECIFY
The large character set has two options ... see "Specify."
Large-character printing on the first 4 lines only - standard printing on the last 6 lines.
Large-character printing on'all 10 lines.
Supplies: Magnetic striped forms ... an ink roll (part No. 457380),
'or equivalent.
These supplies may be ordered through
IBM
Prerequisite: A Loop Station Connector on a 3631/3632 or 3842,
or 8100 System loop.
When ordering this machine for attachment to an 8100 System,
"Terminal Requirements~' under the appropriate 8130, 8140 or
8101 pages in "Machines" should be reviewed.
Bibliography:
3630 Plant Communication System - System Description, GA24-3652
3642 Encoder Printer Operating Guide, GA24-3680
Forms Design Reference Guide for Printers, GA24-3488
Introduction to 8100 System.
Power Cable: #9986 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.27 meter (14 foot) cable.
•
Loop Connection Cable: #9976 for 1.83 meter (6 foot) cable,
or #9977 for 4.27 meter (14 foot) cable.
Character Set Groups: Specify one - #2956 for standard size
cha;acter set, #9401 for Large Character - Lines 1-4, or
#9402 for Large Character - Lines 1-10.
Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or
#9065 for pebble gray.
MLC
Mdl
1
5 Yr
$191
2
226
Purchase·
MMMC
$5,775
$31.50
6,825
38.00
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination C~arge Percent: 20%
• Pilot Test Plan applies.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- - - ---..:. =-= ==--';" ==
M 364~
May 79
DP Machines
Concentrations of certain common, corrosive gases.
IBM 3643 KEYBOARD DISPLAY
Concentrations of dust, grit and dirt.
Purpose: A combination keyboard and gas panel display terminal
for input and output in interactive 3630 Plant Communication
System applications, and when attached to an 8100 System.
Model 2
Model 3
Model 4
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common
to terminal operational sites for most industries.
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interference associated with terminal operational sites.
Displays 240 characters ... six rows of 40
characters. Keyboard consists of alphameric,
control, and function keys.
Displays 480 characters ... twelve rows of 40
characters. Keyboard consists of alphameric,
control, and function keys.
Displays 1024 characters ... sixteen rows of
64 characters. Keyboard consists of alphameric, control, and function keys.
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
Vibration and shock associated with shipping, placement,
operation and relocation of the terminal for most types of
industries.
For environmental specifications refer to the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Installation Manual' - Physical Planning,
GA24-3675.
SPECIFY
•
Voltaga (120 V, AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug,
or #9881 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 V AC is compatible
with existing 115 V AC systems. Field Installation: Not recommended.
•
Power Cable: #9986 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
•
Loop Connection Cable: #9976 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable,
or #9977 for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
•
Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or
#9065 for pebble gray.
Highlights
Gas panel display with buffer.
Keyboard options to meet input requirements.
Operates with manufacturing application programs.
Accesses control functions.
Prerequisites
Either the Alphameric Keyboard (#4772) or the Expanded
Alphameric Keyboard (#4774) must be selected to complete
the order. See "Special Features."
A Loop Station Connector on a 3631/3632 or 3842 loop, ot
8100 System loop.
•
Magnetic Attachment (#4910) must be ordered if the Magnetic Hand Scanner, Magnetic Slot Reader, or Dual Entry
Magnetic Slot Reader is to be attached. See "Special Features."
When ordering this machine for attachment to an 8100 System,
the section "Terminal Requirements" in the appropriate 8130,
8140 or 8101 pages in "Machines" should be reviewed.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - System
Description, GA24-3652 ... IBM 3643 Keyboard Display Operating
Guide, GA24-3631 ... Introduction to 8100 System.
Customer Setup: The 3643 is designated customer setup (CSU)
thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
Customer Responsibilities: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, set-up and checkout of the 3643 at time
of delivery or when relocating the 3643.
Removing and packing of the 3643 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
Relocation of the 3643 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (PDPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operations to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
Whether terminal, loop, controller, accessory, or media is at
fault.
Proper terminal operator use of PDPs will result in maximum terminal and system availability.
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
applies to the 3643 terminals and accessories.
Maintenance of the 3643 terminals will normallv h" oerformed at
the installed, location.
MLC
PRICES:
Mdl
3643
2
3
4
Purchasett
5 Yr
$ 99
133
138
$2,455
3,400
3,590
MMMC
$27.00
33.50
35.50
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
Termination Chg Percent: 20
SPECIAL FEATURES
Keyboards -- atl keyboards will have a combination of preengraved and non-engraved key tops. For the non-engraved function keys each 3643 will be provided with 3 sets of self-adhesive
key top labels. One set will be pre-printed with commonly used
function nomenclature and will have a protective plastic coating
applied. Also, a set of blank labels will be provided so that the
user may create his own labels. A clear plastic overlay set will
provide a protective cover for the blank label set.
ALPHAMERIC KEY80ARD (#4772). A 54-key alphameric section
pre-engraved as a typewriter keyboard to the left of a
function/transaction keypad. The function/transaction keypad
consists of 12 engraved and 8 non-engraved keys. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Expanded Numeric Keyboard (#4774).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
EXPANDED ALPHAMERIC KEYBOARD (#4774). The same as
#4772, except that function/transaction keypad has 20 additional
non-engraved keys. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #4772. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
MAGNETIC ATTACHMENT (#4910). Permits attachment of a
Magnetic Hand Scanner, Magnetic Slot Reader, or Dual Entry
Magnetic Slot Reader. Note: The Magnetic Hand Scanner and
Magnetic Slot Readers are plug compatible. 'Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
MLC
5 Yr
Special Feature Prices:
#4772
Alphameric Keyboard
Expnd Alphameric Kybd
4774
Magnetic Attachment
4910
Purch
$21 $763
26
932
10
318
MMMC
$1.00
1.50
1.50
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment ..with the machine order the Feature Number
and quantity as shown below at the price listed in th,e M 10000
pages. See M 10000 pages for additional information and for
ordering
Feature Number Maximum Qty
There is no regularly scheduled IBM preventive maintenance.
Item
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenance coverage
immediately following expiration of the warranty period at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in "Prices" below.
Magnetic Hand Scanner
9440
Magnetic Slot Reader
9441
Dual Entry Mag Slot Reader 9442
Magnetic Reader Extension Cable .. for
use with Magnetic Hand Scanner or MagnetiC Slot Reader
6 meter
9106' •
12 meter
9107
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Physical Environments: The 3643 mdls 2, 3 and 4 may be used
in industrialized work zones of a wide range of business, industrial
and commercial establishments. They can resist:
tt
• A maximum of one magnetiC reader or scanner may be or
dered .
•• A maximum of one extension cable may be ordered.
Pilot Test Plan applies.
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
------ ----
--- ---- == ';" ==
==::::
M 3644
May 79
OP Machines
IBM 3644 AUTOMATIC DATA UNIT
Purpo8e: The 3644 attaches to the 3631 or 3632 controller, or
8100 system via its loop features to provide system connection to
a variety of distributed sensors, actuators, and production and
laboratory equipment.
Hlghllght8:
PhY81c81 Envlronment8: The 3644 and Its Sensor I/O cards have
been designed to operate in the industrialized work zones of many
types of establishments.
They can resist:
Concentrations of certain common corrosive gases.
Accumulations of dust, grit and dirt.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common to
terminal operational sites for most industries.
The unit provides:
Power and housing for Sensor I/O cards.
Distributed attachment of user equipment.
Analog and digital attachments.
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interference associated
with terminal operational sites.
Vibration and shock associated with the shipping operation and
relocation of the terminal for most types of industries.
Bit serial asynchronous current loop.
User defined scan controls, data transmission and logic processing.
L1mltatlon8: The analog input function requires multiple Sensor
I/O cards. If analog input is installed, some card-socket usage
restrictions exist. See M 10000 pages for details.
Acce8sorle8: See M 10000 pages for descriptions of the Sensor
I/O cards.
Prerequisite: A Loop Station Connector on a 3631/3632 or 3842
loop, or 8100 System loop.
When ordering this machine for attachment to an 8100 system, the
"Terminal Requirements" listed in the appropriate 8130, 8140 or
8101 pages in "Machines" should be reviewed.
Bibliography: IBM Plant Communication System - System Description GA24-3652 ... IBM 3644 Automatic Data Unit - Component
Description Manual, GA24-3653 ... IBM 3644 Automatic Data Unit
- Programming Guide, GA24-5178 ... IBM 3644 Automatic Data
Unit Operating Guide, GA24-3682.
CU8tomer Setup: The 3644 is designated customer setup (CSU)
thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
CU8tomer Respon8lbllltle8: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, set-up and checkout of the 3644 at time
of delivery or when relocating the 3644; this includes the Sensor I/O cards.
Removing and packing of the 3644 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures of
the 3644 and filling out the trouble report prior to calling for
service.
Executing the problem determination procedures for the Sensor
I/O cards, determining the failing card, and mailing it to the
honoring IBM location.
Maintenance of the process sensors, actuators, and wiring.
Determining and stocking spare Sensor I/O cards.
Creating the parameter tables that direct the operation of the
3644.
Installation and physical planning for the 3644. IBM assistance
in determining the suitability of the industrial environment for
the 3644 installation is available.
Relocation of the 3644 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
Problem Determination Procedure8: Terminal problem determination procedures (POPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operations to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
Whether terminal, loop, controller, sensor I/O cards, or media
is at fault.
Proper terminal operator use of POPs will result in maximum terminal and system availability.
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
ap-
plies to the 3644 terminalS.
Maintenance of the 3644 terminals will normally be performed at
the installed location.
Warranty service of the Sensor 1/0 cards will be pe.rformed at the
honoring IBM location. See M 10000 pages.for details.
There is no regularly scheduled IBM preventative maintenance.
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenanc~ coverage
immediately following expiration of the warranty penod at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in "Prices" below.
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Nnt tn
For environmental specifications refer to the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA24-3675.
SPECIFY: [1) Voltage (120 V AC. l-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for
locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 V AC is
compatible with existing 11 5 V AC systems. Field In8tallatlon:
Not recommended.
[2) Power Cable: #9986 for 1.8 meters (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.3 meters (14 foot) cable.
[3J Loop Connection Cable: #9978 for 1.8 meters (6 foot) cable,
or #9977 for 4.3 meters (14 foot) cable.
[4) Color: #9083 for classic blue, #9084 for charcoal brown, or
#9085 for pebble gray.
[5) Distribution of 3644 Microcode: One copy of the 3644 microcode for machines with feature #4905 and/or one copy of the
3644 microcode for machines without fea:ure #4905 is required at each S/370 or 8100 system location.
for the initial shioment must be supplied as a Supplementary
Specify:
#9491 - for initial 3644 without MIO feature.
#9492 - for initial 3644 with MIO feature (#4905).
#9493 - for any additional 3644s.
For distribution of microcode to a S/370 location specify media:
#9412 - 9/800 magnetic tape
#9413 - 9/1600 magnetic tape.
#9414 - 9/6250 magnetic tape.
For distribution of microcode to an 810U system location specify
media:
#9415 - Diskette 1.
MLC
PRICES:
Mdl
5 Yr
Purcha8e· MMMC
3844
$174
$5,240
$34
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
Termination Chg Percent: 20%
SPECIAL FEATURES
MANUAL I/O (#4905). Provides a 22-character display and a
35-key numeric/function keypad. Allows inquiry into customer
data and status contained in 3644 storage when online to the
3630 system. When offline, additionally allo~'!s modification of
customer data locations to effect operator control of 3644 operation.
MLC
Special Feature Prices:
5 Yr Purcha8e MMMC
Manual I/O
#4905 $45 $1 ,480 $8.50
Acce8sorle8: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with the machine order the Feature Number
and quantity as shown below at the price listed in the M 10000
•
Pi10t Test Plan applies.
hp rpDroduced without written permission.
------ - ---
----- --= = =':' =
M 3644 - 3645
May 79
DP Machines
3644 Automatic Data Unit (cont'd)
pages. See M 10000 pages for additional information and for
ordering by MES.
Item
Feature Number Maximum Qty
16 Point Isolated 01
#9142
16 Point Non-isolated 01
9143
16 Point Isolated DO
9151
16 Point Non-isolated DO
9144
8 Point Reed Relay Mltplxr
9145
Analog to Digital Converter
9148
Current Loop
9141
9147
Process Termination Block
Socket Cover
9148
•
Removal and packing of the 3645 at time of discontinuance.
•
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
and filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
Relocation of the 3645 (if required) to allow IBM service.
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (POPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operation to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible
Whether terminal, loop, controller, accessory, or media is at
fault.
• A maximum of 8 sensor I/O cards can be ordered. See IBM
3644 Component Description Manual - Appendix C, GA24-3653,
for configuration limitations.
•• A maximum of 8 process termination blocks and socket covers
can be ordered. See IBM 3644 Component Description Manual,
GA24-3653.
IBM 3645 PRINTER
Purposa: A receive-only printer for printed output in interactive
3630 Plant Communication Cystem applications.
The 3645 is a 120 cps maximum bl-dlrectional printer.
Note: Actual printer throughput is dependent on system and application characteristics.
Highlights:
The 3645 provides a hard-copy output on a variety of fotms to
meet plant floor printing requirements. Th printer is a bi-directional
matrix printer with electronic tabulation and indexing. Line spacing
is 6 lines per inch. Up to 4 part cut forms can be used with standard friction feed. For continuous forms, the Forms Tractor
(#8700) or the Forms Tractor with Separator Bar (#8701) is
recommended. Card stock forms are not recommended.
Proper Terminal operator use of POPs will result in maximum
terminal and system availability.
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
applies to
the 3645 Printer.
Maintenance of the printer will normally be performed at the in"tailed location.
There is no regualrly scheduled IBM preventive maintenance.
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenance coverage
immediately following expiration of the warranty period at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in "Prices."
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Physical Environments: The 3645 may be used in industrialized
work zones of a wide range of business, industrial, and commercial establishments.
It can resist:
•
Concentration of certain common, corrosive gases.
Accumulations of dust, grit, and dirt.
•
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common
to terminal operational sites for most industries.
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interfence associated
with terminal operation sites.
Two printing feature options are provided:
Character Print - Standard (#1501) provides basic character size
printing (approximately .072 inch wide by 0.117 inch high). The
printer character dot matrix is four of seven wide by eight high,
giving high legibility. The maximum print line is 132 positions.
Character spacing is ten to the inch.
Character Print - Large (#1502) provides four character size
printing options under program control.
Basic character size (approximately 0.072 inch wide by 0.117 inch
high), and approximately two times standard, four times basic size,
and eight times standard size.
Intermix of printing sizes on a single line is not permitted.
The 3645 has been designed to operate in most industrial and
commercial environments. It attaches to a 3631 or 3632 Plant
Communication Controller via a local 9600 bps loop. The 3645
also attaches to a 3842 Loop Control Unit via a 2400 bpa loop, or
8100 System Loop.
Two variable width forms tractors are available
see "Special
Features."
Supplies: A black ribbon, Part No. 1136653
lent, is required.
Vibration and shock associated with shipping, placement,
operation, and relocation of the terminal for most types of
industries.
For environmental requirements refer to IBM 3630 Plant Communication System Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA24-3675.
SPECIFY
Voltage (120 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug,
or #9891 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 VAC is compatible
with existing 115 V AC systems. Field Installation: Not recommended.
•
Power Cable: #9988 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
Loop Cable: #9978 for 1.6 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9977
for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
Color: #9083 for classic blue, #9084 for charcoal brown, or
#9085 for pebble gray.
•
MLC
Mdl
or equiva-
Prerequisites:
•
A Loop Station Connector installed on a 3631/3632 or 3842
or 8100 System Loop.
Either Character Print - Standard (#1501) or Character Print
-Large (#1502) must be specified ... see "Special Features."
When ordering this machine for usa with an 8100 System, the
"Terminal Requirements" on the appropriate 8130, 8140 or 8101
machine page should be reviewed.
Forms Specification: Refer to Form Design Reference Guide for
Printers, GA24-3588... use 3767 specifications.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant communication System - System
Description, GA24-3652.
Customer Setup: the 3645 is designated customer aetup (CSU),
thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibilitv.
Customer Responsibilities The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, setup, and checkout of the 3845 at
time of delivery, or when relocating the 3645.
3645
5 Yr
$191
Purchasett MMMC
$4,700
$44
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Chg Months:8
Termination Chg Percent: 20%
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHARACTER PRINT - STANDARD (#1501), Provides dot matrix
character size approximately 0.072 inch wide by 0.117 inch high
at 10 characters per inch. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Character Print-Large Feature (#1502). Maximum: One. Field
InstallaUon: Yes.
CHARACTER PRINT - LARGE (#1502). Provides four character
size printing options under program control. Standard - approximetely 0.072 inch wide by 0.117 inch high at 10 characters per
inch, and approximately two times standard size, four times standard size, and eight eight times standard size. Intermix of printing
sizes on a single line is not permitted. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Character Print - Standard (#1501). Maximum:
One. Field InstallaUon: Yes. Prerequisite: Variable Width Forms
Tractor (#8700) or Variable Width Forms Tractor with Separator
(#8701).
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700), A forms feeding
ft
PiIoI Till PIIn .ppllea.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------=- =-------=
--':' =
M 3645 - 3646
May 7q
DP Machines
3645 Printer (cont'd)
device for continuous edge-punched fan-fold forms. Up to 6 parts
(total thickness - 46mm (0.018 inch) may be used. Five and six
part continuous forms should be tried on an Indldual basis for
acceptable feeding, registration, and print quality. Overall forms
width from 76mm to 381 mm (3 to 15 inches can be fed. End of
forms detection is provided. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Note: If this feature is ordered
color must be specified: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or
#9065 for pebble gray.
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR WITH SEPARATOR
(#8701). Forms feeding device for continuous edge punched
fan-fold forms. A separator bar permits tearing off continuous
forms at the perforation to within 40mm (1.5) inches) of the top
printing line without misalignment of subsequent forms. Forms
should have perforated carrier strips on both sides. Up to 4 part
continuous forms to a total thickness 0.3mm (0.012 inch) may be
used. Forms without perforated carrier strips and/or greater than
4 parts are not recommended. Form widths from 127mm to
378mm (5 to 14-7/8 inches) can be used. End of forms detection
is provided. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Note: If this
feature is ordered
color must be specified: #9063 for
classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, or #9065 for pebble
gray.
Special Feature Prices:
Character Print-Standard #1501
Character Print-Large
1502
Variable Wdth Forms Trctr 8700
Variable Wdth Forms Trctr
8701
with Separator Bar
MLC
5 Yr
Purchase MMMC
$15
$3
30
$400
900
5
180
1
6
170
4
IBM 3646 SCANNER CONTROL UNIT
Purpose: The 3646 allows attachment of Magnetic Hand Scanners
or Magnetic Slot Readers for rapid, accurate data collection.
The standard 3646 can attach up to two magnetic readers. Magnetic Hand Scanners or Magnetic Slot Readers. Two additional
magnetic readers can be attached via the optional Magnetic Reader Attachment (#6351). Each magnetic reader can be addressed
for independent operation.
Highlights: The 3646 is. a compact terminal designed, to bring
magnetic scanning capability to the work station. Its capabilities
include:
Free standing on a table. work beOlch. etc.
Wall or column mounted via accessory brackets.
•
Up to 4 magnetic readers .
Readers can be MagnetiC Hand Scanners or Magnetic Slot
Readers in any combination.
Suppllea: Magnetic Stripe Badges
IBM
may be ordered through
these supplies. if required.
Whether terminal. loop. controller. accessory. or media is at
fault.
Proper terminal operator use of POPs will result In maximum terminal and system availability.
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement as described
In the General Information section of the sales manual applies to
the 3646 terminals.
Maintenance of the 3646 terminals will normally be performed at
the Installed location.
For maintenance of 3646 accessories. refer to M 10000 pages.
There is no regularly scheduled IBM preventive maintenance.
If purchased, the terminals are eligible for maintenance coverage
immediately following expiration of the warranty period at the
monthly charge shown under MMMC in "Prices" below.
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Physical Environment: The 3646 and accessories may be used In
the Industrialized work zones of a wide range of business and
commercial establishments.
They can resist:
Concentrations of certain common corrosive gases.
Accumulations of dust. grit and dirt.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common to
terminal operational sites for most Industries.
Most Industrial types of electromagnetic interfence associated
with terminal operational sites.
Vibration and shock associated with the shipping. operation and
relocation of the terminal for most types of industries.
For environmental specifications, refer to the IBM 3630 Plant
Communication System Instal/ation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA24-3675.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (120 V AC. I-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for
locking plug. or #9891 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 V AC is
compatible with existing 115 V AC systems. Field Inataltatlon:
Not recommended.
[2] Power Cable: #9986 for 1.83 meter (6 foot) cable, or 9987 for
4.27 meter (4 foot) cable.
[3] Loop Connection Cable: #9976 for 1.83 meter (6 foot) cable,
or #9977 for 4.27 meter (14 foot) cable.
[4] Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown. or
#9065 for pebble gray.
MLC
5 Yr
$78
PRICES:
3646
Purchasett MMMC
$2,555
$11
Purchase Option: 55%
Machine Group: A
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Chg Mnths: 6
Termination Chg Percent: 20%
SPECIAL FEATURES
Prerequlaltea: A Loop Station Connector on a 3631/3632. 3842
or 8100 loop ... a Magnetic Hand Scanner or Magnetic Slot Reader ... see #6351 under "Special Features."
When ordering this machine for attachment to an 8100 system.
"Terminal Requirements" on the appropriate 8130. 8140 or 8101
pages in the "Machines" section should be reviewed.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant Communication System - System
Description, GA24-3652 ... IBM 3646 Scanner Control Unit Operating Guide, GA24-3683.
Cuatomer Setup The 3646 is designated customer setup (CSU)
thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
.
Customer Reaponalbllltlea: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement. set-up. and checkout of thtl 3646 at
time of delivery or when relocating the 3646. A Magnetic Hand
Scanner or Magnetic Slot Reader is required for checkout.
Removing and packing of the 3646 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
Relocation of the 3646 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (POPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operation to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
MAGNETIC READER ATTACHMENT (#6351). For attachment of
two additional Magnetic Hand Scanners. Magnetic Slot Readers. or
Dual Entry Magnetic Slot Readers. Maximum: One. Field
Inatallatlon: Yes.
Special Feature Prlcea:
MLC
5 Yr
Purch
MMMC
$2,50
MagnetiC Reader Attach #6351
$19 $630
Accea80rlea: The following Items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with the machine order the Feature Number
and quantity as shown below at the price listed in the M 10000
pages. See M 10000 pages for additional information and for
orderin!?
Item
Feature Number Maximum Qty
Magnetic Hand Scanner
#9440
Magnetic Slot Reader
9441
Dual Entry Mag Slot Reader 9442
Mounting Bracket
9450
Magnetic Reader Extension Cable ... for
use with MagnetiC Hand Scanner or MagnetiC Slot Reader
9106' •
6 meter
1 2 meter
9107
• A maximum of 4 magnetic readers or scanners may be ordered.
A maximum of 4 extension cables may be ordered.
tt
Pilot Te.t Plan applie•.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- ---- - - --- ==--.:.. =-=
';" ==
M 364Y
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3647 TIME AND ATTENDAIIJCE
TERMINAL
Purpose: A data entry terminal designed for attendance and other
data entry labor reporting applications.
Maintenance courses are offered to the customer for a separate
charge.
Physical Environments
The 3647 may be used in industrialized work areas of a wide
range of business, industrial and commercial establishments.
It can resist:
Highlights
The 3647 is designed for attendance, labor reporting and other
data entry applications. The basic 3647 has a magnetic scanner
adapter and a four digit display which can be used for time of day.
Two optional features are available:
Function Switch ... a six-position rotary switch that is customer
definable.
Control Feature ... provides control signals to allow door openings, audible alarms, etc.
An optional magnetic slot reader mounting bracket accessory
provides attachment for a slot reader. This mounting bracket is
firmly attached to the 3647 via a keylock. The slot reader cable is
coiled within the bracket. See "Accessories" below.
The 3647 can be table or wall mounted. An optional wall mounting bracket accessory is available. See "Accessories" below.
The 3647 provides:
Concentrations of cerlain common, corrosive gases.
Accumulations of dust, grit and dirt.
Temperature and relative humidity extremes that are common
to terminal operational sites for most industries.
Most industrial types of electromagnetic interference associated with terminal operational sites.
Vibration and shock associated with shipping, placement,
operation and relocation of the terminal for most types of
industries.
For environmental specifications, refer to the IBM 3630 Installation
Manual-Physical Planning, GA24-3675.
Bibliography: IBM 3630 Plant Communication System-System
Description, GA24-3652 ... IBM 3647 Time and Attendance Terminal - Operating Guide (SRL No. available March, 1980) ... Introduction to 8100 System, GA27-2875.
Time of Day Clock -- the initial time is set under program
control and can be set for a 12 or 24 hour clock with time
displayed in hours and minutes, or hours and hundreths of
hours.
Supplies: Magnetic striped badges and documents. These supplies may be ordered through
' IBM
Input Buffer - an input buffer mode of operation can be selected to store multiple input messages. This provides a high
walk-by rate and allows input when the controller, loop, or
data link is inoperative. A no-buffer mode of operation can
also be selected to permit interactive processing on each input
message.
Voltage (120 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9890 for locking plug,
or #9891 for non-lock plug. Note: 120 V AC is consistent
with existing 115 V AC systems. Field Installation: Not recommended.
Invalid Document Code -- an invalid document code option can
be selected which allows input messages to be checked for
the presence of a non-numeric character. Input without this
character is rejected by the 3647.
Time Stamping -- a time stamping option can be selected
which sends the displayed time of day with each input message transmitted to the controller.
Prerequisites: A loop station connector installed on a 3631 or
3632 Plant Communication Controller or an 8100 Information
System loop. For magnetic stripe reading a Magnetic Slot Reader,
Dual Entry Magnetic Slot Reader, or a Magnetic Hand Scanner is
required ... see "Accessories" below.
Customer Set-up: The 3647 is designated Customer Set-up (CSU)
thereby offering the customer early availability and relocation
flexibility.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for:
Unpacking, placement, set-up and checkout of the 3647 at
time of delivery or when relocating the 3647.
Removing and packing of the 3647 at time of discontinuance.
Using and following the problem determination procedures and
filling out the trouble report prior to calling for service.
Relocation of the 3647 (if :'equlred) to allow IBM service
access.
Problem Determination Procedures: Terminal problem determination procedures (POPs) prompt retry and recovery actions and the
analysis of operations to determine:
Whether or not continued operation is possible.
Whether terminal, loop, controller, accessory, or media is at
fauit.
Proper terminal operator use of POPs will result in maximum terminal and system availability.
Maintenance: The standard maintenance agreement
applies to
the 3647, however there is no regularly scheduled IBM preventive
maintenance.
Maintenance of the 3647 will normally be performed at the installed location.
II purchased, the terminals are eligible forMaintenance Agreement
service immediately following expiration of the warranty period.
SPECIFY
Power Cable: #9986 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9987
for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
Loop Cable: #9976 for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, or #9977
for 4.3 meter (14 foot) cable.
Color: #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal brown, a
#9065 for pebble gray.
MLC
5 yr
Mdl
3647
$84
MMMC/
AMMCR
Purchasett
$2,725
$12.50
Plan Offering: Plan 0
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Initial Period Maint. Svc: 3 mos.
SPECIAL FEATURES
CONTROL FEATURE (#1501). Provides one point of TTL compatible input, one point of TTL compatible output, and two TTL compatible control signals. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
FUNCTION SWITCH (#3950). Provides a 6 position rotary switch
which can be set by the operator. Five switch settings each transmit a unique function code when a magnetic stripe is scanned.
One switch setting is set to "null". The meaning of the switch
position is left to the customer and space is provided for a customer printed definition label near the switch. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
MLC
5 YR
Special Feature Prices
Control Feature
Function Switch
#1501
3950
$4
6
MMMC/
Purchase AMMCR
$100
225
$1.00
.50
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with the machine order the Feature
Number below and the quantity required at the prices listed in the
M 10000 pages. See M 10000 pages for additional information
and for field installation.
Item
Feature No. Maximum Qty
Magnetic Hand Scanner
9440
Magnetic Slot Reader
#9441
Dual Entry Mag Slot Reader9442
Mag Slot Rdr Mig Bracket 9445
Wall Mounting Bracket
9450
Magnetic Extension Cable
6 Meter
9106
12 Meter
9107
..
• A maxim~m of 1 magnetic slot reader or scanner may be ordered. •• A maximum of 1 extension cable may be ordered.
tt
Pilot Test Plan applies. PTP Purchase Option Percent, 70%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ---.----
--- ----
=::..:=~=
M 3651.!
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3651 STORE CONTROLLER MODELS PROGRAMMABLE STORE SYSTEM
Purpose: The control units for a 3650 Programmable Store System; through standard retail functions tailored by the customer to
the customer's own requirements, and/or customer supplied supermarket application programming, the 3651 controls the operation of the 3650 Programmable Store System and Its related terminals and provides for communications with an appropriate S/370
virtual storage processor.
Model A25 5 megabyte integral disk storage. Limited features
and processing capability.· Supported by Programmable Store System Host Support only. Attaches
3275 mdl 3, 3653 mdl 1 and 1P, and 3663 mdl 1 P,
2 and 3P terminals.
Model B25 Same as model A25 except has 9.2 megabyte
integral disk storage.
Model A75 5 megabyte integral disk storage. Many features,
full processing capability.· Supported by Programmable Store System Host Support only. Attaches
3275 mdl 3, 3653 mdl 1 and lP, 3657 mdl 1,
3784 md! 1, and 3663 mdl 1P, 2 and 3P terminals.
Model B75 Same as model A75 except has 9.3 megabyte
integral disk storage.
Model C75 Same as model A75 except has 18.6 megabyte
integral disk storage. The model C75 is physically
larger than the model A75 or 875.
Model 075 Same as model A75 except has 27.9 megabyte
integral disk storage. The model D75 is the same
physical size as the model C75.
• NOTE: The 3651 mdl A25 and 825 Store Controllers provide
a lower entry system for those users who do not require the
capacity and internal processing capability of the 3651 mdl
A75, B75, C75, and 075. The effect of the different internal
processing capability upon overall system performance is dependent upon the total system configuration and workload.
Host Communications Adapter - provides for transmission to and
from a properly equipped S/370. The basic transmission rate is
2400 bps over switched or non-switched networks with 4800 bps
as a specify option. This adapter interfaces to appropriate IBM
modems. With the appropriate features available on model 75 only
the Host Communications Adapter can communicate with, another
3650 Programmable Store System or locally attach a 3704 or
3705 ... see "Communications Facilities" below and M 2700
pages.
To communicate with another 3650 system or local attachment to
3704 or 3705, see Special Features below.
Audible Alarm - activated when predetermined events require
operator attention or intervention for system operation. A contact
closure to which the customer can attach his remote alarm is
available as an option with 3669 Attachment (see 3669 Attachment in Special Features below).
Controller Storage Save (Model 75 only) -- critical areas of controller storage are automatically written on the integral disk unit
when power is turned off or a power failure is detected.
Terminal Devices: The terminals which are identified above under
the different models of the 3651 are attached to the 3651 via
Local/Remote Loop Adapter. A maximum of 191 terminals can be
addressed by the 3651. However, the number of terminals which
can be supported depends upon traffic volumes, desired response
times, applications to be performed, and the model of the 3651.
One 3784 Line Printer mdl 1 can be attached to the 3651 model
75 control unit.
Communications· Facilities: The Host Communications Adapter
(mdl 25 and 75), Auxiliary Communications Adapter (#6185 - mdl
75 only) and 3669 Attachment (#8069 - mdl 75 only) permit
operation at the speeds indicated, over the facilities shown below,
when using the appropriate modem. For information concerning
the facilities, see M 2700 pages. The alphameric communications
facility references below correspond to those shown on the charts
on those pages.
At 2400 bps ... on facility C5, C5M, 04, 04M, 04S8 or Xl M
At 4800 bps ... on facility C6, C6M, 05, 05M, 05SB or X2M
NOTE: Neither the auxiliary communications adapter or the 3669
attachment can operate at 4800 bps.
PREREQUISITES: At the host location, a virtual storage S/370
Processor with properly equipped 3704 or 3705 (or ICA for 8SC
communications) ... see M 2700, 3704, 3705 pages.
Hlghllghta: The 3651 is a modular, programmable unit that provides the link between its attached terminals and the host data
processing center. The 3651 is normally used to collect data from
the various parts of the system, perform edit, logic, and arithmetic
operations on that data and then log and / or forward it to its ultimate destination within the overall system - terminal or data processing center. The 3651 mdl 75 can also communicate with another model 75. Application functions for retail operations via
3653 mdl 1 or 3653 mdl 1P terminals functioning as 3653 mdl 1
terminals are provided as standard. All other applications are
performed by customer supplied application programming. In
models A25, 825, A75, 875, C75 and 075, customer supplied
supermarket and/or retail application programs may be used along
with or instead of the standard retail operations.
SPECIFY: (1) Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): Locking plug #9884 for 208 V or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug - #9885
for 208 V or #9887 for 230 V.
[2] Modem Attachment Host Communications Adapter: One IBM
modem can be attached to this adapter on the 3651. The 3651
provides a cable and interface for connection of IBM modems
at transmission rates of 2400 bps or 4800 bps for communications with the S/370. If switched network is selected, auto
answer capabilty is standard. If leased operation is selected,
dial back-up is provided on a manual dial basis using the IBM
3872 or 3874 Modem with appropriate special features. 4-wire
Switched Network Backup is available with the 3863 mdl I and 3864
mdll.
Specify Code
Standard features include the following:
Speed (bps)
3872
3872
3872
3874
3874
3874
#9120
#9121
#9122
#9124
#9125
#9126
Controller Storage: The basic 3651 contains storage optionally
expandable via special features (see Special Features below).
System configuration as well as user programs determine if additional storage increments are required.
Basic Storage Maximum Storage
Model 25
61,440 bytes
77,824 bytes
Model 75
61,440 bytes
126,976 bytes
NOTES:
For communications capabilities, product description and
special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874 and M 2700
pages.
(2) Point-to-point netw!)rk.
(3) Multipoint network.
Integral Disk Storage - the Integral Disk Storage is used for
storage of selected controller functions, user written application
programs, system configuration data, data logging· and data sets
(files).
Model
Model
A25 (5MB) 825 (9.2MB) Model C75 Model 075
A75 (5MB) B75 (9.3MB) (18.6MB)
(27.9MB)
Bytes per Track
15,360
Tracks per Cylinder
2
Bytes per Cylinder 30,720
Cylinders per IDS
167
Storage Capacity:
Moveable Head 5,130,240
Fixed Head
(Mdl 75 only)
122,880
15.360
2
30,720
301
15,360
2
30,720
602
15,360
2
30,720
903
9,246,720
18,493,440
27,740,160
122,880
245,760
368,640
2400
2400
2400
4800
4800
4800
IBM Modem
Loop Adapter:
Model 25 - Provides for attachment of one in-store local loop.
Model 75 - Provides for attachment of one in-store local loop
and one additional loop which may be specified as
local or remote (see Figure 1).
(2)
(3)
(2)
(3)
3863
3863
3863
3864
3864
3864
(3) System Attachment:
identify the host
processor(s) for the 3650 Retail Store System by specifying the
following codes:
Processor
Proce880r
Code
Code
3115
#9589
3125
9588
3135,3135-3 9581
3138
9590
3145,3145-3 9582
3033
9592
3148
3155 II
3158
3165 II
3168
#9591
9583
9587
9584
9588
(4) Controller Designation: Specify #9491 on the first 3651 mdl
25 or 75 to be used with a host system location requiring 3650
Programmable Store System Host Support. Specify #9492 on
each additional 3651 mdl 25 or 75 in the network. Specification
of #9491 will result in controller data (OTR) being sent to host
Not to be re.produced without wrillen permission.
--- --------
M 3651.2
Jul79
==-==~= DP Machines
3651 Store Controller Models - Programmable Store System (cont'd)
location. When #9491 is specified, additional information must
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges) Note 2.
be specified as follows:
1) Specify one of the following to Indicate magnetic tape density
(media) used at the host system location. The tape media is
available under DOS/VS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 only.
#9412 - 9-track 800 bpi.
#9413 - 9-track 1600 bpi.
#9414 - 9-track 6250 bpi.
If magnetic tape Is not used at the host system, specify one of
the following media which are available under DOS/VS only.
#9421 - 2316 Disk Pack.
#9422 - 3336 Disk Pack Mdl 1
#9423 - 3336 Disk Pack Mdl II
#9424 - 3348 Data Module
The 3651 controller data will be sent via the specified media
to the IBM Programming Systems Representative at the host
system location for Installation. If disk media is required, the
IBM disk will be returned to the plant location after installation
of the controller data.
[5] Specify the following: #9504 - for 3650 BSC or SDLC Programmable Store Systems host support under DOS/VS VTAM
or BTAM, OS/VS1 VTAM or BTAM, and OS/VS2 VTAM or
BTAM. NOTE: The corresponding release of 3650 PSS Host
Support must be ordered
See SCP pages of the sales
manual.
[6] Store Loop Polarity Tester: Order Store Loop Polarity Tester
Part No. 1859559,
for
site of store loop wiring ... one is furnished at each site at no
charge. NOTE: The customer must provide (purchase, install
and maintain) all necessary 3650 communications lines within
the store. (Bulk Loop Cable is available from IBM. See M10oo0
pages.)
[7] Second Loop Adapter (Model 75 only): Specify #9442 to
designate the second loop adapter as local or specify #9552 to
designate the second loop adapter as remote. (See Figure 1
below.) NOTE: #9552 Is not allowed with 3669 Attachment
(#8069).
[8] Maintenance Documentation: Specify #9450 for 3653 maintenance documentation and/or #9451 for 3663 maintenance
documentation.
PRICES:
Mdl
3651
A25
B25
A75
B75
C75
075
MAC/
MRC
$ 746
864
872
959
1,469
1,880
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
$ 635
735
742
818
1,250
1,600
Purchase
MMMC
$19,000
22,000
26,500
29,880
47,960
$205
215
225
235
335
58,340
454
Plan Offering: Plan B Purchase Option: 55% Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent· 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Change.: The following model changes can be made In the
field:
From
To
From
To
A25
B25
A50
B50
B25', A75', B75'
B75'
A75,B75'
B75
A75
A60
B60
C75
B75'
A75,B75'
B75
•
075
On purchased model 50 to model 75 changes either Local Loop Adapter,
Additional (#4882 with specify code #9442 or #9443) or Remote Loop
Adapter (#6111 with specify code #9552 or #9553) is a prerequisite on
the model 50.
• These model changes require the replacement of the integral
disk storage. Adequate provision must be made for retaining data
contained on the replaced disk storage at the host location so it
can be transmitted to the new disk storage.
From
From
From
From
From
From
From
From
From
From
From
From
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
A25
A25
A25
B25
A50
A50
B50
A75
A60
A60
B60
C75
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
B25
A75
B75
B75
A75
B75
B75
B75
A75
B75
B75
075
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
....
$ 3,000"
$ 7,500"
$10,680"
$ 7,680"
$ 2,585"
$ 6,285"
$ 2,585' •
$ 3,180"
$ 4,100"
$ 7,800"
$ 4,100"
$10,380"
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
•• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
Note 1 Customers who elect to purchase the 3651 mdl A50 or
B50 with Storage Increment Type I (#1550) and/or second Additional Loop (#4882, #4890 or #6111) or the
3651 mdl A60 or B60 with Storage Increment (#7680)
should consider the model A75 or B75 initially as field
conversions to the model A75 or B75 require the replacement of these features.
SPECIAL FEATURES
CONTROL STORAGE FEATURES - the amount ot be ordered is
dependent upon the number and type of terminals attached to the
system as well as system configuration and user programs.
For available
storage configurations, see Table A below.
STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE II (#1564). [Mdl A75, B75, C75,
075 only] Each #1564 provides the 3651 with an additional
16,384 positions of storage. Maximum: Three (see Table A). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: The 3651 must be equipped with
Storage Expansion Feature (#1570) and First Storage Increment
(#1571).
STORAGE EXPANSION FEATURE (#1570). Provides the capability of expanding storage beyond 61 ;440 bytes; 'Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Note: First Storage Increment (#1571), or
First Storage Increment (#1571) and Storage Increment - Type II
(#1564) are required to provide the appropriate additional positions of storage (see Table A).
FIRST STORAGE INCREMENT (#1571). Provides the 3651 with
the first 16,384 additional positions of storage. See Table A.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Storage
Expansion Feature (#1570).
TABLE A
Storage Configuration
Total
Storage
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
61,440
77,824
94,208
110,592
126,976
Storage
Expansion
(#1570)
Feature Distribution
First
Storage
Storage
Increment
Increment
Type II
(#1571)
(#1564)
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
'1
1
1
0
0
1
2
3
IML-WRITE ADAPTER (#4633).
Provides the 3651 with the
ability to write an IML (Initial Machine Load) tape on a user provided tape cassette recorder to be read by a Point of Sale terminal
equipped with the IML-Read Adapter (#4632) feature. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
LOCAL LOOP ADAPTER, ADDITIONAL (#4682). [Mdl A75, B75,
C75, 075 only] Provides an additional Local Loop Adapter as the
third loop on the 3651. The actual number of terminals that can
be attached will depend upon the program capacity and time
requirements of the 3651 to service the loops as well as the
communications link to the S/370 ... see "Terminal Devices"
above. Specify: See Figure 1. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. limitation: Not available on the 3651 if 9600 bps Loop
Adapter (#4890) or Remote Loop Adapter (#6111) is installed.
9600 BPS LOOP ADAPTER (#4890). [Mdl A75, B75, C75, 075
only] Provides a 9600 bps Local Loop Adapter as the third loop.
The feature provides for the attachment of 3275 Display· Stetion
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=- =------ --=--':' =
M 3651.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
3651 Store Controller Models - Programmable Store System (conI' d)
mdl 3s with 9600 bps Transmission Speed (#7825) feature infeet of the controller. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
stalled. The actual number of 3275 Display Station mdl 3s inPrerequisites: Specify feature #9716 must be specified on the
3784 mdl 1 for attachment of the 3784 to the 3651 mdl A75 and
stalled will depend upon program capacity and time requirements
of the 3651 to service the loops and the communications link to
B75 and #9717 for attachment to the 3651 mdl C75 or 075.
the S/370 ... see "Terminal Devices" above. Limitations: Not
ETP/
available if Local Loop Adapter, Add'i (#4882) or Remote Loop
MAC/ MLC
Adapter (#6111) is installed. Only 3275 Display Station mdl 3s
Special
Feature
Prices:
MRC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
with 9600 bps Transmission Speed (#7825) can be attached to
this Loop Adapter. Specify: See Figure 1. Maximum: One. Field
Stor Increment Type II #1564 $ 58 $ 49 $1,170 $10.00
Installation: Yes.
Stor Expansion Feature 1570
39
33
1,100
5.50
10.00
1st Storage Increment
1571
58
49
1,170
REMOTE LOOP ADAPTER (#6111). [Mdl A75, B75, C75, 075
IML-Wrlte Adapter
4633
1.50
12
10
450
only] Provides a Remote Loop Adapter as the third loop on the
Local Loop Adptr, Add'i 4882
37
2.00
43
1,515
3651 for online service for up to twelve remote sites per Remote
9600
bps
Loop
Adapter
4890
87
74
3,020
4.00
Loop Adapter. The feature provides an interface to an IBM 3872
Remote Loop Adapter
6111
43
37
1,515
2.00
Modem on site which via leased line connects to a 3659 Remote
6185
37
1,515
2.00
Aux, Comm. Adapter
43
Communications Unit at each remote site. This allows for the
Aux. Comm. Adapter extension of the loop to up to (1) three remote locations, with a
2.00
43
Synchronous
Clock
6188
37
1,515
3659 mdl 1 at each site, (2) twelve remote locations, with a 3659
Synch Clock-Host
7708
15
13
572
.50
mdl 2 (mu!tipoint) at each site, (see "Terminal Devices" above).
3669 Attachment
8069
7
6
250
1.50
The 3651 treats the remote loop as if it were a local loop.
3764 Adapter
8154
El8
75
3,075
5.00
Limitations: Not available if Local Loop Adapter, Add'i (#4882) or
9600 BPS Loop Adapter (#4890) is installed. Specify: See Figure
1. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: One IBM
3872 Modem with Point-to-point (#6101 or #6102) feature per
FIGURE 1
Remote Loup Adapter at 3651 site and a 3659 Remote Communications Unit at each remote site. When more than one remote site
Loop Adapter
Specify
Loop Adapter Special Feature
is attached using 3659 mdl 1, a half-duplex 2-wire terminated,
Position'
non-switched voice grade line is required between the 3651 and
Add'i
Local
#94~~
the first remote site between successive remote sites, and from
2
the last remote site back to the 4-wire terminated, non-switched
#9552
Remote
voice grade line is required. When using the 3659 mdl 2 for more
Add'i Local
#4882
than one remote site, 4-wire duplex multipoint service is required.
..The 3659 mdl 2 requires that the 3872 be a basic control station
Remote
3
#61_~
(no special feature;;) or equipped with Second Modem (#6302).
9600 bps
#4890
AUXILIARY COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER (#6185).
(Mdl A75,
875, C75, 075 only] Provides a separate 2400 bps communica• Loop Adapter position 1 is occupied by the standard Local Loop
tions interface which can operate independently of the Host ComAdapter. Loop Adapter position 2 is standard and must be specimunications Adapter. It can be used for either one of the following
fied as Local (#9442) or Remote (#9552). If Loop Adapter
but not both:
position 2 is specified as remote, see Remote Loop Adapter
a. 3651-75 to 3651-75 communications.
(#6111) for prerequisites which will apply. For Loop Adapter
b. CommuniGstions with another 3650 system via a 3669 Store
position 3, either an Add'i Local (#4882) or Remote (#6111) or
Communications Unit.
9600 bps (#4890) Loop Adapter may be ordered.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Only one
Auxiliary Communications Adapter (#6185 or #6188) allowed per
3651-75, not allowed with 3669 Attachment (#8069) with Specify
#9200 for Host Communications Adapter.
Prerequisites:
a. For 3651-75 to 3651 communications
1. A 3872.
2. Another 3651-75 similiarly equipped.
b. For backup with another 3650 system
1 3669 Attachment (#8069) with specify #9210.
2. A :J669 Store Communications Unit.
-
--
-_._----
AUXILIARY
COMMUNICATIONS
ADAPTER
SYNCHRONOUS
[Mdl A75, 875, C75, 075 only] Provides a
CLOCK (#6188).
2400 bps communications intetiace which operates independently
from the Host Communioations Adapter to allow direct communications with another 3651-75 with the same feature without the use
of modems. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations:
Only one Auxiliary Communications Adapter (#6185 or #6188)
allowed per 3651-75, not allowed with 3669 Attaohment (#8069).
Prerequisite: Another 3651-75 with #6188.
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK - HOST (#7708).
[Mdl A75, 875, C75,
075 only] Provides clocking from the Host Communications
Adapter allowing the direct attachment to a local 3704 or 3705 at
2400 bps. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
'The 3704 or 3705 must be equipped with Line Set, Type 1F
(#4716). Note: A 6 meter (20 foot) external cable is provided
which connects to the 3704/3705 cable.
3669 ATTACHMENT (#8069).
[Mdl A75. B75, C75, 075 only]
Provides the capability to attaoh one 3669 Store Communications
Unit, which allows communications over switched networks at
2400 bps with another 3650 system, and alternately with a S/370
host processor. This feature can be provided for use with either
the Host Communications Adapter or the Auxiliary Communications
Adapter (#6185), but not with both. Limitation: When used with
Auxil;a.ry Communications Adapter (#6185), it cannot communicate with a host processor. Specify: (1) #9200 for use with Host
Communications Adapter, #9210 for use with Auxiliary Communioations Adapter (#6185) ... (2) #9220 if local audible alarm IS
desired, #9230 if contact closure is desired when operator attention is required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: (1) Local Loop Adapter, specify #9442 ... (2) a
3669 Store Communications Unit.
3764 ADAPTER (#8154). [Md! A75, 875, C75, 075 only) Provides the capability to di~ectly attach one 3784 Line Printer mdl 1
to the 3651 controlier. The 3784 mdl 1 must be located within 15
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
-------- --- ----=-- =-==--':' ==
M 3651.4
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3651 STORE CONTROLLER MODELS ASO and 850
Purpose: Through its standard functions, tailored by the customer
to the customer's own requirements, the 3651 controls the operation of the 3650 Retail Store System and its related terminals and
provides for communications with an appropriate S/370 or 4300
virtual storage processor.
Model A50
5 megabyte integral disk storage
Model BOO
9.3 megabyte integral disk storage
Highlights: The 3651 is a modular, programmable unit that provides the link between point-of-sale (3653), receiving-marking
(3275 mdl 3 and 3657), management (via 3275 mdl 3), and the
host data processing center. The 3651 collects data from the
various parts of the retail system, performs edit, logiC, and arithmetic operations on that data and then logs and/or forwards it to
its ultimate destination within the overall system-terminal or data
processing center. The 3651 also communicates with its attached
terminals on an interactive basis and processes inquiries against
its liIes.
Standard features include the following:
Local Loop Adapter store loop.
provides for the attachement of one in-
Controller Storage -- the basic 3651 contains storage optionally
expandable via special features to 106,496 bytes (see Special
Features below). System configuration as well as user programs
determine i1 additional storage increments are required. Operation
with many user programs will require the additional storage increments.
Integ rei Disk Storage -- the Integral Disk Storage is used for
storage of selected controlier functions, user written application
programs, system configuration data, data logging and data sets
(files).
Model A50 (5 MB)
Bytes per Track
Tracks per Cylinder
Bytes per Cylinder
Cylinders per IDS
Storage Capacity
Moveable Head
Fixed Head
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase. 60 Hz); Locking plug
#9884 for 208 V. or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug
#9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230 V.
[2J Modem Attachment Host Communications Adapter: One IBM
modem can be attached to this adapter on. the 3651. The 3651
provides a cable and interface for connection of IBM modems
at transmission rates of 2400 or 4800 bps for communications
with the S/370 or 4300 Processor. If switched network is
selected, auto-answer capability is standard. If leased point-topoint operation is selected, dial back-up is provided on a manual dial basis using the IBM 3863, 3864 or 3872 Modern with
appropriate special features.
Specify Code
#9120
#9121
#9122
#9124
#9125
#9126
Speed (bps)
2400
2400
2400
4800
4800
4800
(2)
(3)
(2)
(3)
IBM Modem
3872
3872
3872
3874
3874
3874
15,360
30,720
301
5,130,240
122,880
9,246,720
122.880
2
Host Communications Adapter -- provides for transmission to
and from a properly equipped S/370 or 4300 Processor. The
basic transmission rate is 2400 bps over non-switched or
switched networks with 4800 bps as a specify option. This adapter
interfaces
to
appropriate
iBM
modems
see
"Communications Facilities" below and M 2700 pages.
For local attachment to 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter
on 4331 Processor, see Special Features below.
Audible Alarm -- activated wi1en predetermined events require
operator attention or intervention for system operation.
Controller Storage Save -- critical areas of controlier storage are
automatically written on two areas of the integral disk unit when
power is turned off or a power failure is detected.
Terminal Devices: The following terminals are attached to the
3651 Store Controller via Local/Remote Loop Adapter -- 3653
Point of Sale Terminal, 3275 mdl 3 Display Slation, and the 3657
Ticket Unit. Locai Loop adapter number one can address 63
terminals and the other two Loop adapters (local or remote) can
each address 64 terminals. However, the number of terminals
which can be supported on each loop cepends upon !raffi<; volumes, desired respol1se times, and appli';aIT!lS to be performed.
3863
3864
3864
3864
Noies: (1) For communications capabilities. product description and special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872,
3874 and M 2700 pages.
(2) Point-to-point network.
(3) Multipoint network.
[3J System Attachment:
identify the host
processor(s) for the 3650 Retail Store System by specifying the
following codes:
Code
Processor
Code
3115
#9589
9586
3125
3135,3135-39581
9590
3138
3145,3145-39582
9592
3033
3148
315511
3158
3165 II
3168
4331
4341
#9591
9583
9587
9584
9588
Processor
Model B50 (9.3 MB)
15,360
2
30,720
167
l863
3863
9606
9607
[4] Controller Designation: Specify #9491 on the first 8651 to be
used with a host system location requiring BSC RSS/Host
support and on the first 3651 requiring SNA RSS/Hosl support
and specify #9492 on each additional 3651 in the network.
NOTE: #9491 may be specified twice if both BSC and SNA
RSS/Host support is required in the network.
When #9491 is specified, additional information must be specified as follows'
1) Specify one of the following to indicate magnetic tape
density (media) used at the host system location. The tape
media is available under DOS/VS, OS/VSl and OS/VS2
only.
#9412 -- 9-track 800 bpi
#9413 -- 9-track 1 600 bpi
#9414 - 9-lrack 6250 bpi
If magnetic lape is not used at thil host system, specify
one of Ihe following media whic'rl are available under
DOS/VS only.
#9421 -- 2316 Disk Pack
#9422 -- 3336 Disk Pack Mdl I
#9423 -- 3336 Disk Pack Mdl II
#9424 -- 3348 Data Module
The 3651 controller data will be sent via the specified
media to the IBM Programming Systems Representative at
the host system locatio" for installation. If disk media is
required, the IBM disk wi!! be returned to the plant localion after installation of the controller data.
3784 Line Printer mdl 1 may be aHached to the 3651 controlunit.
CommUl1iclltivl'lS FacUlties: Thf~ communications adapter permits
0p~·ration at the speeds indicated. over the facilities shown below,
when using the appropriate modem. For information concerning
the facilities, :lee M 2700 pages. The alphameric communications
facility references below correspond to those shown on the charts
on those pages.
A! 2400 bps ." on facility e5, C5M, D4, D4M, D4SB or X1 M
11.14800 bps ... on facility C6, C6M, 05, D5M or X2M
PREREQUISITES: A 3'104 or 3'105 in 2701, 2703 Emulation Mode
for BSe systems and in NCP /VS mode for SDLC systems (with
appropriate features ... $ee M 3704 and 3705 pages) attached to
any virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor. Also attaches Ilia a
Communications />,dapter feature on the 4331 Processor ... '>ee M
4331 pages for details.
[5] Specify one of the fol'(', ;ng:
#9501 -- lor 3650 f.!SC Retail Stofe System requiring Release I f18G/HOST Support. NOTE: Shipments of
3650 Sy:;terns requiring Release I Host Support
under DO'"'IVS BTAM and 08/VS1 BTAM terminale in December, 1975.
#9502 - lor 3550 SNA Retail Siore System requiring Release 2:)1 3 RSS/Host Support under DOS/VS
VTAM, OS/VS1 VTAM and OS/VS2 VTAM. Controllers specified with #9502 have a maximum of
57,344 positions of storage. Shipments of 3651
controilers specified as #9502 will terminate in
March, 1976 to new cuslomers and in July, 1976
to existing customers.
#9503 -- for 3(3';0 SNA Retail Store Systems requiring Re-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------==-=
----- --':" =
--- ----
M 3651.5
Jul79
DP Machines
3651 Store Controller Models A50 and B50 (cont'd)
lease 3 RSS/Host Support under DOS/VS VTAM,
OS/VS1 VTAM and OS/VS2 VTAM. All controllers
shipped to new customers after March, 1976 will
require RSS/Host Release 3 and should be specified with #9503. NOTE: #9503 is a prerequisite
for feature codes #1559, #1560 and #1564.
Note: The corresponding release of 3650 RSS Host Support
must be ordered from PID. See SCP pages of the sales manual.
[6] Store Loop Polarity Tester: Order Store Loop Polarity Tester,
for
Part No. 1859559,
site of store loop wiring ... one is furnished at each site at no
charge. NOTE: The customer must provide (purchase, install
and maintain) all necessary 3650 communications lines within
the store. (Bulk Loop Cable Is available from IBM. See M
10000 pages.)
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3651
A50
B50
$ 872 $ 742
959
816
Purchase
MMMC
$29,500
32,680
$225
235
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55%Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: %
Model Changes: Model changes between the models A50 or B50
and the model A60 or B60 are not recommended for field installation. 3651 features cannot be interchanged between models A50
or B50 and model A60 or B60. Model changes between model
A50 and B50 can be made in the field. This change requires the
replacement of the integral disk storage. Adequate provision must
be made for retaining the data contained on the replaced disk
storage.
Model changes between the A50 or B50 and the A75 or B75 can
be made in the field. See the 3651 model A75 and B75 machine
pages. Customers who elect to purchase the 3651 mdl A50 or
B50 and Storage Increment Type 1 (# 1 559) should consider the
model A75 or B75 initially as field conversions to the model A75
or B75 require the replacement of this feature.
On purchased model 50 to model 75 changes either Local Loop Adapter,
Additional (#4882 with specify code #9442 or #9443) or Remote Loop
Adapter (#61 J J with specify code #9552 or #9553) is a prerequisite on
the model 50.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model A50 to Model B50 •..•. $3,180*
•
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgemust state: . 'Installation of this
ment letters for purchase
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
Control Storage Features: The amount to be ordered is dependent upon the number and type of terminals attached to the system
as well as system configuration and user programs.
For available
storage configurations, see Table A below.
STORAGE EXPANSION (#1560). Contains 16,384 positions of
storage to provide the capability of expanding storage beyond
57,344 positions to a maximum of 106,496 positions. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. (See Table A) Prerequisite: Specify
Feature Code #9503.
STORAGE INCREMENT (#1561).
Each #1561 provides the
3651 with an additional 8,192 pOSitions of storage. Maximum:
Two. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1559, #1560, #1564 or #9503. (#1561 not available after
July, 1976)
STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE I (#1559). #1559 provides the
3651 with an additional 8,192 positions of storage. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. (See Table A) Prerequisite: Specify
Feature Code #9503.
STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE II (#1564).
Each #1564 provides the 3651 with an additional 16,384 pOSitions of storage.
Maximum: Three. Field Installation: Yes. (See Table A)
Prerequisite: Specify Feature Code #9503.
TABLE A
Storage Configuration
Total
Storage
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
Storage
Increment
- Type I
(8,192 Pos.)
40,960
49,152
57,344
65,536
73,728
81,920
90,112
98,304
106,496
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Feature Distribution
Storage
Increment
- Type II
(16,384 Pos.)
0
0
1
0
1
1
2
2
3
Storage
Expansion
(Including
16.384 Pos.)
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
Notes: 1. Field installation of Storage Increment - Type I is
only recommended in changing from configurations
A, E and G. Storage Increment - Type II is not used
in configuration A, Band D.
Customers who elect to purchase Storage Increment
Type I and later order additional storage should consider purchase of Storage Increment Type II initially
because some field upgrades of storage may require
replacement of initial feature and installat;on of new
feature.
2. Field upgrade from A to Band B to C is allowed via
Storage Increment (#1561) through July 30, 1976;
However, purchase customers should be advised
that Storage Increment (#1561) cannot be used in
configurations above 57,344 positions.
IML-WRITE ADAPTER (#4633).
Provides the 36(;1 with the
ability to write an IML (Initial Machine Load) tape on a user provided tape cassette recorder (refer to IBM 3650 Retail Store System
Introduction Manual, GA27-3075), to be read by a Point of Sale
terminal equipped with the IML-Read Adapter (#4632) feature.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
LOCAL LOOP ADAPTER, ADDITIONAL (#4882).
This feature
provides a second or third Local Loop Adapter on the 3651. Up to
a maximum of 64 terminals can be attached to each additional
Loop. The actual number of terminals will depend upon the program capacity and time requirements of the 3651 to service the
Loops as well as the communications link to the 5/370 or 4300
Processor ... see "Terminal Devices" above. Limitation: Cannot
exceed a total of three Loop adapters (local or remote) per 3651.
Specify: See Figure 1. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes.
9600 BPS LOOP ADAPTER (#4890). Provides a 9600 bps local
Loop Adapter. Available in lieu of a second or third Local Loop
Adapter. The feature provides for the attachment of 3275 mdl 3
Display Stations with 9600 bps Transmission Speed (#7825)
feature installed. The actual number of 3275 Display Station mdl
3s installed will depend upon program capacity and time requirements of the 3651 to service the Loops and the communications
link to the S/370 or 4300 Processor ... see "Terminal Devices"
above. Limitations: Cannot exceed a total of three Loop adapters
(local or remote) per 3651. Only 3275 Display Station mdl 3s with
9600 bps Transmission Speed (#7825) can be attached to this
Loop adapter. Specify: See Figure 1. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
REMOTE LOOP ADAPTER (#6111). Provides online service for
up to twelve remote sites per Remote Loop Adapter. Available in
lieu of a second or third Local Loop Adapter. The feature provides
an interface to an IBM 3872 Modem on site which via leased line
connects to a 3659 Remote Communications Unit at each remote
site. This allows for the extension of the Loop to up to (1) three
remote locations, with a 3659 mdl 1 at each site, (2) twelve remote locations, with a 3659 mdl 2 (multipoint) at each site, with a
total of 64 terminals per Loop (see "Terminal Devices" above).
The 3651 treats the remote Loop as if it were a local Loop.
Limitation: Cannot exceed a total of three Loop adapters (local or
remote) per 3651. Specify: See Figure 1. Maximum: Two. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: One IBM 3872 Modem with Point- '
to-Point (#6101 or #6102) feature per Remote Loop Adapter at
3651 site and a 3659 Remote Communications Unit at each remote site. When more than one remote site is attached using 3659
mdl 1, a half-duplex 2-wire terminated, non-switched voice grade
line is required between the 3651 and the first remote site, between successive remote sites, and from the last remote site back
to the 3651. When only one remote site is to be attached, a
duplex, 4-wire terminated non-switched voice grade line is required. When using the 3659 mdl 2 for more than one remote
site, 4-wire duplex multipoint service is required. The 3659 mdl 2
requires that the 3872 be a basic control station (no special features) or equipped with Second Modem (#6302).
Not to be reDroduced without written permiSSion.
'------ -----------------==-="!'=
M 3651.6
Jul79
DP Machines
3651 Store Controller Models ASO and 8SO (cont'd)
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7708).
Provides clocking from the
Host Communications Adapter allowing for direct attachment to a
local 3704. 3705 or Communications Adapter oil 4331 Processor
at 2400 bps.
Maximum: One; Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: The 3704 or 3705 must be equipped with Line Set,
Type 1F (#4716); 4331 must be equipped with Local Attachment
Interface (#4801) and prerequisites. Note: A 20' (6 meters)
external cable is provided which connects to the 3704, 3705 or
4331 cable.
3784 ADAPTER (#8154).
Provides the capability to directly
attach one 3784 Line Printer mdl 1 to the 3651 controller. The
3784 mdl 1 must be located within 15 feet of the controller.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Specify
feature #9716 must be specified on the 3784 mdl 1 for attachment of the 3784 to the 3651. Minimum storage required on the
3651 is 48K. Note: For attachment of the 3784 line printer, the
controller must have EC 349850 applied and operating under
RSS/Host Support Release 3. New 3651 controllers must have
#9503 specified.
Special Feature Prices:
Storage Expansion
#1560
Storage Increment
1561
Storage Incrmnt-Type I 1559
Storage Incrmnt-Type II 1564
IML-Wrlte Adapter
4633
Local Loop Adptr, Add'i 4882
9600 bps Loop Adapter 4890
Remote Loop Adapter
6111
Synchronous Clock
7708
3764 Adapter
8154
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
MRC
$96
32
32
58
12
43
87
43
15
88
$ 82 $2,270
27
637
27
637
49 1,170
10
4SO
37 1,515
74 3,020
37 1,515
13
572
75 3,075
$15.SO
5.00
5.00
10.00
1.SO
2.00
4.00
2.00
.SO
5.00
Figure 1
Loop Adapter
Position·
Loop Adapter
Special Feature
Specify
Add'l Local
#9441
#4882
#6111
2
Remote
#9551
#4890
#9Ci61
9600 bJlS
Add'l Local
#4882
#9443
3
Remote
#6111
#9553
#4890
9600 bps
#9Ci63
..
• Loop Adapter Position 1 IS OCCUPied by the standard Local Loop
Adapter. For Loop Adapter Position 2 and 3, either an Add'l Local
(#4882) or Remote (#6111) or 9600 bps (#4890) Loop Adapter may be
ordered. For each one ordered, also specify the applicable #9XXX code
from the chart above. ,The 9600 bps Loop Adapter (#4890) may be
ordered only once.
IBM 3651 STORE CONTROLLER - SUPERMARKET
Purpose: The control unit for a 3660 Supermarket System. Controls all functions of the 3663 Supermarket Terminals. A 3669
adapter is included, which allows communications at 2400 bps
over appropriate communications facilities with a properly equipped S/370 or 4300 Processor. For backup purposes, the control
unit, through the 3669 Store Communications Unit, can also communicate with and control 3663 Supermarket Terminals in one
other preassigned location. See ;'Communications Facilities" and
"Prerequisites.' :
Model A60
5 megabytes of integral disk storage
Model 860
9.3 megabytes of integral disk storage
Highlights: Up to twenty-four 3663 Supermarket Terminal stations
can be attached to a 3651 mdl A60 or 860 in one store. Each
3663 mdl 1 or each 3663 mdl 2 counts as 1 out of the 24. In
addition, for backup purposes, a 3651 mdl A60 or B60 can control all the 3663 Supermarket Terminals that are normally controlled by the other preassigned 3651 mdl A60 or B60 (normally at
another location).
The 3651 mdl A60 or B60 (using the 3663 Supermarket Terminal)
supports the following functions, in most combinations:
Customer Checkout
-
Automatic pricing through code lookup in a master price file.
Automatic handling of multiple priced items.
Automatic handling of mix and match group pricing.
Automatic distribution of net sales by department (up to 54).
Automatic application of transaction discounts.
Automatic computation of sales taxes with automatic handling
of taxable and non-taxable items.
Provision for tax exempt transactions.
Automatic control of maximum value of food stamps that
should be accepted.
Check authorization facilities (positive or negative) through
lookup against a check authorization record.
Computation of change and trading stamps due.
All functions can be controlled to inhibit initiation by unauthorized personnel.
Store Support
- Preparation of the following account reports
- store summary.
-- individual cashier performance and tender reconciliation.
-- store office tender reconciliation.
- sales by department (up to 54).
-- distribution of miscellaneous income and distributions by
account.
- Current inquiries for department sales, cashier performance
and cash position, and store cash position.
- Inquiries and changes to master price records and operator
authorization control records.
- Setting time and date for the internal clock.
- Customer checkout training mode.
- Printing miscellaneous messages received previously from the
host S/370 or 4300 Processor.
- Entry of miscellaneous messages for subsequent retrieval by
the host S/370 or 4300 Processor.
- Reporting of items returned by customers which are returned
to stock.
- Updating the system with data received from the host S/370
or 4300 Processor.
- Shelf Label Preparation
The above functions are compatible with variable length reconciliation periods, e.g., daily or weekly, and they are compatible with
24 hour store operation. All functions are individually controlled
to inhibit initiation by unauthorized personnel.
Data Accumulation
The 3651 mdl A60 or B60 accumulates the following by-product
data for subsequent retrieval by the host S/370 or 4300 Proc, essor: item movement toials, all accounting and performance
totals used in store reports, totals of taxes and taxable sales,
productivity totals for each terminal station in 15 minute increments, check authorization data requested, and individual logged
entries 'covering coupons received, exception events, and security sensitive events.
Host S/370 or 4300 Processor Transmission
The 3651 mdl A6P or B60 can transmit to the host, upon recieving a request, all of the data shown under "Data Accumulation,"
and other data, or records in the 3651. The 3651 will clear out
data or records upon request by the host. The 3651 can receive
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
------- ------------'-:' -=
-==-=
M 3651.7
Jul79
DP Machines
3651 Store Controller - Supermarket (cont'd)
records, record changes, commands or other pertinent data from
the host. See "Programming Support" section of sales manual
for description of host, programming support and requirements.
Communications Facilities: For in-store operation, two store
loops provide the communications linkage to the 3663 Supermarket Terminals. See Installation Manual - Physical Planning (GA273079) for the 3660 System and the 3660 Supermarket System
"Systems" pages for further information.
The communications adapter permits operation at 2400 bps over
communications common carrier facility type C5 for out-of-store
communications. For information concerning that facility. see M
2700 pages.
PREREQUISITES:
- A 3669 Store Communications Unit mdl 1 must be attached.
- A 3663 Supermarket Terminal mdl 1 must be attached.
- Any virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor ." (3158 or
3168 VTAM only). For minimum configuration requirements,
refer to Host S/370 or 4300 Processor System Programming
pages, One of the following must be utilized - a 3704, 3705 or
Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor equipped with
appropriate features. For S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3 or
138, this may be an ICA equipped with the proper BSC and
switched network features. The modem that is used by the
3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on 4331 Processor
must be either a 3872 or equivalent or an IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem with switched network features.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug
- #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230 V.
MAC/
MRC
PRICES: Mdl
3651
A60
860
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
$ 841 $ 716
928
790
Purchase
MMMC
$29,500
32,680
$178
188
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55%Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes -- between the A50 or B50 and the model A60 or
B60 are not recommended for field installation. 3651 features
cannot be interchanged between model 60 and a model 50 or 75.
Model changes can be made in the field from model A60 to B60,
A75 and B75; from B60 to B75. Changes from A to B models
require the replacement of the integral disk storage. Adequate
provision must be made for retaining the data on the replaced disk
storage. All replaced parts become the property of IBM.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
From
From
From
Model
Model
Model
Model
A60
A60
A60
860
to
to
to
to
Model
Model
Model
Model
860
A75
875
875
"".
" ...
.. ".
.•..•
$3,180'
$4,100'
$7,800'
$4,100'
• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
[2] Communications: #9071 for Binary Synchronous Communications. or #9072 for Synchronous Data Link Control Communications.
STORAGE INCREMENT (#7680). Provides the 3651 with 8,192
bytes of additional control storage. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
[3] Controller Designation: Specify #9491 on the first 3651 to be
used with a host system location and specify #9492 on each
additional 3651 in the network.
Special Feature Prices:
When #9491 is specified, additional information must be specified as follows:
Storage Increment
MAC/
MRC
#7680 $ 32
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase MMMC
$ 27
$ 637
1 )Specify one of the following to indicate magnetic tape density
(media) used at the host system location. This tape media is
available under DOS/VS, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 only.
#9412 - 9-track 800 bpi.
#9413 - 9-track 1600 bpi.
#9414 - 9-track 6250 bpi.
If magnetic tape is not used at the host system specify one
of the following media which is available under DOS/VS only.
#9421 -- 2316 Disk Pack.
#9422 -- 3336 Disk Pack Mdl I.
#9423 -- 3336 Disk Pack Mdl Ii.
#9424 - 3348 Data Module.
The 3651 controlier data will be sent via the specified media
If disk media is required, the
IBM disk will be returned to the plant location after installation of the controller data.
[4] Cable: A 10' cable to the 3669 is provided as standard. If a
longer cable is required, specify #9021, indicating length as a
quantity of 20, 30 or 40.
[5] Store Loop Polarity Tester: Order Store Loop Polarity Tester,
Part No. 1859559,
Order Department. One is furnished at no charge to each 3660
site for testing store loop wiring.
[6] Additional DAA Cable: Specify #9101 if second DAA cable is
required in configuration (for using switched 3872 modem to
reload controller from host while system is being backed up
from another store).
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$ 5
Not to be reproduced without wrltteil permission.
---------- --- - - -._---- _.---------3653
M 3653.1
May 79
OP Machines
POINT OF SALE
TERMINAL
Purpose: An intelligent input/output terminal for the 3650 Programmable or Retail Store System to provide retail point-of-sale
data collection, credit authorization, and inquiry functions. Selfcontained intelligence allows the 3653 to continue most sales
functions when disconnected from the 3650 system after a parameter initialization from either the Store Controller or magnetic wand
reader.
Modell
Not customer programmable. Attaches to 3651 mdl
A25, B25, A50, B50, A75, B75, C75 and 075.
Model 1 P Customer programmable. Optionally will function as
a model 1 (non-customer programmable). Attaches to
3651 mdl A25, B25, A50, B50, A75, B75, C75 and
075. When attached to model A50 or B50 it can
function as a model 1 only.
Basic storage is 36K bytes. This may be increased
to 60K bytes through installation of Storage Increment features.
Highlights: A solid state, unitized packaged unit. It features data
entry via the magnetic wand reader feature and a 10 numeric-key,
19 function-key keyboard ... step-by-step display of operator
instructions ... printing of data in response to an inquiry ... display
of numeric data as it is being key entered ... transmission of data
to a 3651 for logging, over a unique transmission line capable of
handling large volumes of short messages from many terminals ...
a cash drawer with removable till.
Keyboard -- a ten-key numeric pad and nineteen function keys
provide entry for variable source data. Types of transactions are
indicated through the numeric pad, as well as data fields. Once a
field has been entered, the depression of a function key causes
one or more of the following functions to happen: editing for
minimum and maximum field length, modulo check, price look-up,
credit authorization, printing, transmission to the 3651 Store
Controller, change in guidance or error feedback.
Printer -- a three station printer which produces a cash receipt or
salescheck as well as a journal for each transaction.
Display -- an eight-digit numeric display plus "$", ".", and "-"
with five backlit captions shows numeric data as it is being
keyed, extended prices, status codes for credit referrals, subtotals, totals, amount due, change, and refund amounts.
Operator Guidance -- step-by-step instructions are provided to
the operator for each transaction by twenty backlit messages.
Additional guidance is provided by the type of transactions shown
on the numeric keys.
Status Indicators -_. advise the operator that the terminal is:
ready for use, waiting for a response to an inquiry or transmission to the 3651, off-line from its 3651, or that the journal roll
take-up spool is full.
PREREQUISITE: The 3650 system (;ontroller is a 3651 Store
Controller Model 25, 50 or 75 ... see 3651 model 25, 50 or 75 for
details.
Customer Responsibilities: [1] See 3650 in "Systems" for general description of customer responsibilities ... [2] The following
statement is to be included in proposals:
"It is agreed that IBM will have no responsibility to provide warranty or maintenance service on an IBM 3653 Point of Sale Terminal when cash is contained in the unit. It shall be the purchaser's
(customer's) responsibility to remove, cantrol, and replace cash so
that IBM can fulfill its warranty and maintenance obligations.
The exception to the above shall be when a failure occurs in the
cash drawer and it cannot be opened prior to CE maintenance. In
those cases the customer shall assign one of his personnel to
assume responsibjlity for removal of the cash once the drawer has
been opened."
Environment: See 3650 Programmable or Retail Store System in
"Systems."
Maintenance: Installation of 3653s in the immediate sales area
may preclude the acceptability of on-line repair due to the public
scrutiny and loss of the selling location for custcmer service. In
these cases, the customer should remove the failing terminal to a
repair facility located within tile store for subsequent repair. At this
location the CE will repair and test the terminal on-line via a customer provided store loop termination.
Supplies: A black ribbon cartridge, IBM Part No. 1136970 or
equivalent, should be used for machines installed prior to June,
1975. Machines installed after this date and those machines previously installed that are changed to the new ribbon drive mechanism should use IBM Part No. 1136660 or equivalent.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Journal Lock: #9322 if lock is desired on access cover to
journal take-up roll, journal tape supply, and cash receipt tape
supply. For additional or replacement locks and keys, see M
10000 pages.
[3] Till Cover with Lock: #9770 if top cover for cash drawer till is
desired. For additional tills and covers and additional or replacement cash drawer locks and keys, see M 10000 pages.
[4] Till with Movable Bill Dividers: #9799 if movable bill dividers
are desired. Otherwise, a till with fixed bill dividers will be
supplied.
[5] Cash Drawer Lock: The 3653 is equipped with a cash drawer
lock. A group of 25 unique lock numbers has been reserved to
allow a customer to specify identical lock types on all terminals. This allows all cash drawers to be opened with the same
key. If this is desired, specify one of the following types on the
3653 order:
#9116
#9101
#9106
#9111
#9121
9102
9107
9112
9117
9122
9108
9103
9113
9118
9123
9119
9104
9109
9114
9124
9115
9105
9110
9120
9125
If none is specified, a lock will be seiected at random from a
larger group of lock types, each 3653 will be shipped with two
cash drawer keys. For additional or replacement keys, refer to
M 10000 pages.
[6] Fractional Quantity Key: #9188 if the Fractional Quantity
Selectable Function is chosen. Provides a key on the 3653
Keyboard with appropriate nomenclature.
PRICES:
3653
Mdl
1
1P
ATP/
MLC
5 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$ 124
137
$3,790"
4,090"
$ 17
20
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55% Maintenance: 0
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model changes from model 1 to model 1 P can
be made in the field. All replaced parts of the base model become
the property of IBM. The Functional Expansion Features (#4222,
4223 and 4224) cannot be interchanged between the 3653 mdl 1
and the 3653 mdl 1 P and would remain with the customer if a
model change is made.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From model 1 to model 1 P ..... $ 425
SPECIAL FEATURES
FUNCTIONAL EXPANSION (#4222). [Mdl 1 only] Provides the
3653 with the capability to support additional functions.
limitations: Not available for shipment after 3/25/77.
#4222 is mutually exclusive with #4223 and #4224. Maximum:
One. Field Instaltation: Yes. (Feature prices are based on plant
installation.
field installation of
this feature requires the submission of an RPQ.)
FUNCTIONAL EXPANSION INCREMENT - TYPE I (#4223). [Mdl
1 only] Provides the 3653 with the capability to support additional functions. The capability provided by this feature is equal to that
provided by Functional Expansion (#4222) ... see Note 1 below.
Limitations: The third Type I Increment (#4223) cannot be installed on a 3653 with Functional Expansion Increment - Type II
(#4224). #4223 is mutually exclusive with #4222 ... see Note 2
below for allowable configurations. Maximum: Three. Field
Installation: Yes.
FUNCTIONAL EXPANSION INCREMENT - TYPE II (#4224). [Mdl
1 only] Provides the 3653 with the capability to support additional functions. The capability provided by this feature is twice that
provided by Functional Expansion .Increment - Type I (#4223) ...
see Note 1. Limitations: Cannot be installed on 3653 with third
Functional Expansion Increment - Type I (#4223). #4224 is
mutually exclusive with #4'222 ... see Note 2 below for allowable
configurations.
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites: The 3653 must have two Functional Expansion
Increment - Type I (#4223) installed.
[Mdl 1P only] Provides an
STORAGE INCREMENT (#4225).
additional 8,176 bytes of storage. Maximum: Three. Field
Installation: Yes.
IML-READ ADAPTER (#4632).
Provides a means to initialize
** Pilot Test applies: PTP Option Percent: 70%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------=-- =--- - =--':' =
M 3653.2
May 79
DP Machines
3653 Point of Sale Terminal
(cont'd)
3653 terminals when a 3651 Store Controller mdl A25, B25, A50,
B50, A75, B75, C75 or D75 is unavailable or unable to provide
the IML (Initial Machine Load). An adapter is provided for attaching an external tape cassette recorder and reading data previously
recorded at a 3651 equipped with the IML-Write Adapter (#4633).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
A hand operated wand
MAGNETIC WAND READER (#4944).
used to read single track delta distance encoded magnetic merchandise tickets, credit cards, and employee badges. The small
light-weight wand attached via a four foot long, flexible cord,
allows encoded merchandise tickets to be read without removing
them from the merchandise. See Notes 3 and 4. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
Provides an alternate keyMODIFIABLE KEYBOARD (#4990).
board designed to aid in faster keying and in customizing to a
user's requirements. Provides up to 16 department motor keys.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
Notes:
(1) Order Confirmation of allowable or maximum combination of
additional functions to be used with Functional Expansion Increments must be obtained
(2) The table below defines Plant Installable configurations and the
maximum allowable field upgrades of #4223 and #4224.
Number of Functional Expansion Increments
If Plant Installed Type I (#4223)
Configuration is: Type II (#4224)
Is Field Upgrade Possible?
Maximum Up-
Type I (#4223)
0
0
I
0
0
0
I
0
2
0
2
0
2
I
3
0
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
2
3"
I
.2*
0
I"
0
,
0
~~~~f ~~t~lfed
Type II (#4224)
I
0
0
I
I
0
0
I'
Configuration
Allowable is:
Customers who elect to purchase the third #4223 ann anticipate later
ordering #4224 should consider purchase of #4224 initially because field
upgrade requires the replacement of the third #4223.
(3) The minimum encoding specifications that must be met by
suppliers of credit cards, merchandise tickets and employee
badges will be furnished upon request.
(4) See "Program Loading at Power-On Time" below for other use
of wand.
Special Feature Prices:
For Mdl 1 Only
Functional Expansion
#4222
Functional Expansion Increment
4223
- Type I
- Type II
4224
For Mdl 1 P Only
Storage Increment
4225
For Mdl 1 and 1P
IML-Read Adapter
4632
Magnetic Wand Reader 4944
Modifiable Keyboard
4990
ATP/
MLC
5 yr
$
3
Purchase
$ 72"
MMMC
$ .50
3
6
72"
142' ,
.50
1.00
4
113
.50
11
11
4
300"
371"
90' ,
2.00
2.00
1.00
Program Loading at Power On Time
With IBM 3650 Retail Store System Release I
3651 Available: The IML and Parameter Initialization are loaded
from the 3651 Store Controller.
3651 Unavailable: The IML must be obtained from a back-up
3651 Store Controller. Parameter Initialization is accomplished by
wanding magnetically encoded tickets with the Magnetic Wand
Reader (#4944) at each 3653.
With IBM Retail Store System Release II and Release III.
3651 Available: The IML, selectable functions (see Product
Announcement 274-20, May 3, 1974) and Parameter Initialization
are loaded from the 3651 Store Controller.
3651 Unavailable: The IML, selectable functions and Parameter
Initialization requires one 3653 with the IML-Read Adapter
(#4632) feature on each local loop and at each remote location.
With IBM 3650 Programmable Store System
3651 Available: The IML is loaded from the 3651 Store Controller.
3651 Unavailable: The IML requires one 3653 with the IML Read
Adapter (#4632) feature on each local loop and at each remote
location.
"
Pilot Test applies: PTP Option Percent: 70%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ------- - =-----= =':' =
M 3657 - 3659
May 79
OP Machines
3659 REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS UNIT
3657 TICKET UNIT
Purpose: Magnetic Merchandise Ticket Input/Output Unit for the
3650 Programmable or Retail Store System.
Highlights: The 3657 is an on-line, high speed batch ticket encoder that can also perform batch ticket reading. Tickets are one
inch high and contain a magnetic stripe 1/4 inch wide that runs
the length of the ticket. The 3657 encodes this stripe with machine readable data which is read by the 3657 or by a wand
reader available on the 3653 Point of Sale Terminal. Tickets also
contain 2 lines of human readable data.
Purpose: The IBM 3659 is a 2400 bps signal converter, used to
provide store loop capability to establishments that are remotely
located from the 3651 Store Controller mdl 50. The 3659 is used
at each remote location to interface to common carrier provided
voiceband private line (non-switched) channels for data transmission and to the store loop for Programmable or Retail Store System operations.
Model 1
Point-to-point remote communications unit.
Model 2
Multipoint remote communications unit.
Model Changes: At time of manufacture only.
Two general types of tickets are used:
Label - 1'· xl" self-adhering paper stock with a protective backing. The 1" xl" label dimension applies to label and backing.
The label when detached is approximately 0.940" x 0.940".
Tag -- 1" x 2" and 1" x 3" heavy-duty paper stock attached to
merchandise by hanging or stapling.
Highlights: If a single remote site is served, the 3659 mdl 1
operation is duplex over a four-wire duplex line connecting the
store to the 3651. If two or three remote sites are served, the
3659 mdl 1 operation is duplex over two-wire half-duplex lines
connecting the stores to the 3651 in a serial manner. The use of
the 3659 mdl 2 can provide service to up to twelve rel1llote sites
using a 4-wire duplex multipoint configuration.
Input -- 1", 2·' or 3" roll stock or 2" individual tags.
Data Rate -- 2400 bps.
Batch Reading -- Individual 2" tickets can be read from a cartridge. Tickets are fed from a removable cartridge and if successfully read directed to a ticket bin. Tickets that are unsuccessfully
read are stacked into an identical cartridge. For additional or
replacement cartridges, see M 10000 pages.
Equalization -- manually adjusted by an operator.
Output - 1", 2" or 3" roll, strip or 2" individual tags.
Rated Speed -- Speed is dependent on length of ticket, number of
header tickets, output method selected and competing traffic on
the Loop.
Header tickets are print-only tickets which may be interspersed in
the ticket output stream for batch or purchase order identification.
Header tickets are not considered as merchandise identifiers.
Tickets per Minute
Ticket Size
Approximate Speed
1" Roll
500
2" Roll
250
3" Roll
167
2" Individual
130 (both make mode and read mode)
Printing -- The two lines of human readable data lire printed with
two identical eight wire matrix print heads. Characters are 0.117
inch high spaced 12 ch"rg-:!ers per inch. A 64 character set
oriented to the retail industry is provided. Uses a cassette ribbon
replaceable by the customer
Ticket Data Content
No. Characters
Ticket Size
Encode
Print
1"
19
22
2"
40
42
3"
60
64
Maximum: The maximum number of 3657s that can be attached to
a 3651 depends on the number of positions available and the
traffic volumes and response times required.
PREREQUISITE: An available Loop position.
Supplies: Merchandise tickets may be purchased from the IBM
SPECIFY: Voltage (AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9901 for 115 V.
PRICES:
3657
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase MMMC
$ 685
$ 583
$23,850
$75.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55% Maintenance: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Categof-Y: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Problem Determination Aids:. Included in each 3659 Remote
Communications Unit are tile following problem determination aids
accessable to the operator:
- The unit may be wrap tested independently of the attached
telecommunication line and store loop.
- The unit may be line tested (with telecommunication lines) and
the modem at the 3651 or the adjacent 3659(s) independent
of the store loop.
Communications Facilities
Common Carrier Non-switched Facilities -- Voiceband private
line (non-switched) channel type 3002 (or equivalent).
Privately Owned Communications Facilities -- Equivalent to
above.
Attachment to Communications Line -- Via one cable provided
by the 3659 and a second cable to interface to the store loop.
Related Equipment -- The 3659 mdl 1 communicates with 3659
mdl 1s at other remote sites and/or an IBM 3872 Modem with
#6101 or #6102 which is connected to the first or second
Remote Loop Adapter special feature on the 3651 Store Controller Model 50. The IBM 3872 in this application may require an
RPQ. See M 3872 page, this section.
The 3659 mdl 2 communicates with an IBM 3872 Modem without
any special features or with #6302 only in a multipoint configuration. The 3872 is the control station modem in the multipoint
network.
Customer Responsibilities: [1] The customer must provide
(purchase, install, and maintain) all the necessary 3650 communications lines within the store. (Bu!k Loop Cable is available from
IBM. See M 10000 pages.) ... [2] See the M 2700 pages. The
customer is responsible for the following ... obtaining assurance
from the local common carrier that the telephone service provided
will comply with the facilities described in the Bell System Technical Reference, "Data Communications Using Voiceband Private
Line Channels", PUB 41004, Oct 1973, for a 3002 channel.
Inform the common carrier that the speed of the operation will be
2400 bps.
PREREQUISITE: See "Teleprocessing Systems" in the GI section
of the sales manual.
SPECIFY: Voltage (AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug -#9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887
for 230 V.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
3659
1
2
$112
200
$ 95
170
Purchase MMMC
$4,295
7,670
$19.50
29.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55%
Maintenance: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Terminaticn Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
(\,lot to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3661.1
May 79
DP Machines
3661
STORE CONTROLLER
Purpose: The control unit for a 3660 Supermarket Key-Entry
System controls all functions of the 3663 Supermarket Terminals
and provides for communications with the appropriate Host System. See "Communications Facilities" and "Prerequisites."
Model 1
A controller that houses a direct access diskette
drive with a one-sided removable diskette.
Model 2
A controller with a diskette drive which accommodates a one or a two-sided removable diskette.
Highlights: Up to twelve (optionally eighteen) 3663 Supermarket
Terminal Stations may be included in a 3660 Supermarket Key
Entry System. One 3663 mdl 2 must be attached to the 3661 via
local attachment (standard), and a second, or third 3663 mdl 2
may be attached locally to the 3661 via the optional 3663 Mdl 2
Local Attach Feature. All other 3663 Terminal Stations in the
system, up to 11, or optionally up to 17, depending upon the
number of locally attached stations, are attached via a store loop.
The 3661 with the 3663 Supermarket Terminals provides the
following functions:
Customer Checkout
- Automatic pricing through code look-up in a master price file
for up to 250 items standard and up to 1275 items with Additional Storage Feature (#1222).
- Automatic handling of multiple priced items in master file.
- Automatic handling of mix and match group pricing for items in
the master price file.
- Automatic distribution of net bales by department.
- Automatic application of transaction discounts.
- Automatic computation of sales taxes with automatic handling
of taxable and non-taxable items.
- Automatic control of maximum value of food stamps that
should be accepted.
- Check verification facilities (negative with reason
through look-up against a check verification record.
codel.
- Computation of change and trading stamps due.
All functions can be controlled to inhibit initiation by unauthorized
personnel.
Store Support
- Preparation of the following accounting reports;
Store Summary
Individual cashier performance and tender reconciliation
Store office tender reconciliation
Sales by department (up to 9)
Distribution of miscellaneous income and disbursements by
account.
- Current inquiries for department sales, cashier performance
and cash pOSition, and store cash position.
- Maintenance of master price file, check verification file, and
operator authorization file.
- Productivity totals for each terminal station and store totals in
60 minute increments.
- Setting time and date for the internal clock.
The 3661 can transmit to the host, upon receiving a request, all
of the data shown under "Data Accumulation" and other data or
records in the 3661. The 3661 will clear out data or records
upon request of the host. The 3661 can receive records, record
changes, commands or other pertinent data from the host. See
"Programming Support" section of the sales manual for description of host, programming support, and requirements. Host communications cannot be performed concurrent with customer
checkout or store support procedures.
Communications Facilities: For in-store operation, a store loop
provides the communications link to the 3663 supermarket terminals. See Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3079, for
further information.
The communications adapter permits operation at the speed indicated over the facility shown below when using the appropriate
modem. For information concerning the facility, see M 2700
pages.
1200 bps ... on facility C4.
PREREQUISITES:
- One 3663 Supermarket Terminal mdl 2 must be locally attached.
- A properly equipped S/370 or 4300 Processor must be available. The S/370 or 4300 Processor must contain a virtual storage processor. For minimum configuration requirements refer
to S/370 or 4300 System Programming pages. In addition,
either a 3704 or 3705 or an ICA must be used on a S/370
mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3 or 138, or a Communications Adapter
(#1601) feature on the 4331. 1200 bps external modems may be
used with 3704, 3705, and ICA on S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135,
135-3 or 138, or a Communications Adapter (#1601) feature on
the 4331. 1200 bps internal modems may be used with 3704,
3705, and ICA on S/370 mdl 115 or 125, or a Communications
Adapter (#1601) feature on the 4331. For required features, see M
2700 pages.
- IBM has not tested the 3660 Supermarket Key-Entry System
on non-virtual IBM systems. If a customer elects to establish
communications with other than a virtual host system, the
customer must understand that IBM does not assume responsibility for the resolution of any programming problems resulting
from this system configuration.
- Corr,munications Features -- one of the following arrangements
must be used ... (1) Communications Feature with Clocking
(#1482), EIA Interface (#3701), and an external modem
operating at 1200 bps, or ... (2) Communications Feature with
Clocking (# 1482), 1200 bps Integrated Modem - Switched
(#5501 ),~'lRda·Data. Coupler.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 VAC, l-phase, 60 Hz):
locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Communications: #9075 for Binary Synchronous Communications, or #9076 for Synchronous Data Link Control.
[3] System Attachment:
identify the host
processor(s) for the 3660 Supermarket Key-Entry System by
specifying the following codes:
Processor
Code
Processor
Code
3115
#9589
3125
9586
3135,3135-3 9581
3138
9590
3145,3145-3 9582
3148
3155 II
3158
3165 II
3168
3033
#9591
9583
9587
9584
9588
9592
4331
4341
- Customer checkout training mode.
- Printing miscellaneous messages received previously from the
host.
- Entry of miscellaneous messages for subsequent retrieval by
the host.
- Reporting of items returned by customers which are returned
to stock.
- Updating the system with data received from the hoSt.
#9880 for
9606
9607
[4] Modem Cable (external modem): A 10' cable to the modem is
standard. If a longer cable is required, specify #9442 as a
quantity of 20', 30', 40' or 50'.
[5] Store Loop Polarity Tester: Order Store Loop Polarity Tester,
IBM Part No. 1859559,
One is furnished at no charge to eaCh (lOOU
site for testing store loop wiring.
- Shelf Label Preparation
Most store support functions may be performed concurrent with
customer checkout. All functions are individually controlled to
inhibit initiation by unauthorized personnel.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
..AA&o MRC
366~~ -oaT'
QQQ.
Data Accumulation
The 3661 accumulates the following by-product data for subsequent retrieval by the host. Item movement totals, all accounting
and performance totals used in store reports, totals of taxes and
taxable sales, productivity totals for each terminal station in sixty
minute increments, exception events, and security sensitive
events.
$ 423
488
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$ 360
415
$12,620
14,620
$ 92
110
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 55%
Maintenance: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Host S/370 or 4300 Processor Transmission
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-------- - ---:- ---- - :§;=-§:
M 3661.2
May 79
DP Machines
3661 Store Controller (cont'd)
Model Changes: Model 1 may be changed to a model 2, Field
Installation: Yes. A model change requires the replacement of
the diskette storage device. Adequate provision must be made
for retaining data contained on the diskette by having the user
remove it prior to the start of any conversion.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRtCE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model 1 to Model 2 ..... $2,000'
•
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL STORAGE FEATURE (#1222).
Provides an additional 8,192 bytes of storage. The user can utilize this either to
increase the system's capacity for terminal stations from 12 to 18.
or to increase the system's capacity for items from 250 to 1.275.
Maximum: Two. Limitation: If two of these features are installed,
the user cannot utilize both of them for the same purpose. Field
Installation: Yes.
ReCOMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH CLOCKING (#1482).
quired for attachment to communications facilities through the
1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5501) or any external modem
which does not have internal clocking. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides the interface logic necessary
to attach an external modem for communications to the host processor. Non-IBM modems may be attached subject to the Multiple
Suppliers policy.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with 1200 bps Integrated. ModemSwitched (#5501). Prerequisites: (1) External Modem Cable
(#9442); for cable length specify quantity of 10, 20, 30, 40 or 50
feet ... (2) Communications Feature with Clocking (# 1482).
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM - SWITCHED (#5501).
Provides the point-to-Point operation over switched network facilities
using manual originate/auto answer for establishing connection.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with EIA Interface (#3701). Prerequisites: Communications Feature with Clocking (# 1482). User must provide a Data
Coupler type CBS or equivalent.
SCALE ADAPTER (#6672).
Allows attachment of an electronic
scale (Toledo 8210 with display or equivalent) for use with a
locally attached 3663 mdl 2. Specify #9576 if scale will be used
with first 3663 mdl 2. or #9577 if it will be used with second
3663 mdl 2, or #9578 if it will be used with the third 3663 mdl 2.
Maximum: Three. Note: See customer responsibilities under 3660
in "Systems" pages. Field Installation: Yes.
3663 MOL 2 LOCAL ATTACH FEATURE (#8110).
Provides for
the local attachment of a second 3663 mdl 2. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Note: The first 3663 mdl 2 attachment is
provided in the basic 3661.
LOCAL ATTACHMENT FEATURE FOR THIRD 3663 MOL 2
(#8111). Provides for the third local attachment of a 3663 mdl 2
terminal station. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: 3663 Mdl 2 Local Attach Feature (#8110).
Special Feature Prices:
ETPj
MACj MLC
MRC 2 yr
Add'i Storage Feature #1222 $ 32
Comm Fea w Clocking
1482
19
EIA Interface
3701
12
25
1200 bps Intgrtd Modem 5501
Scale Adapter
6672
6
11
3663 Mdl 2 Local Attach 8110
Local Attachment Feature
14
for 3rd 3663 mdl 2
8111
$ 27
16
10
21
Purchase MMMC
g
$ &37
710
424
840
143
292
$5.00
3.00
4.00
6.50
.50
3.00
12
365
4.00
5
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._-------- ------- - =--==
':" =
M 3663.1
May 79
OP Machines
3663 SUPERMARKET TERMINAL
Purpose: In conjunction with the IBM 3651 mdl A25, B25, A60,
B60, A75, B75, C75, 075 Store Controller, or the IBM 3661 Store
Controller, the 3663 Supermarket Terminal provides the input and
output facilities necessary to process transactions in a supermarket environment. II replaces and extends the function of mechanIcal supermarket registers.
Modell
Station and Control - one printer, display, keyboard,
cash drawer and control segment for operating one
checkstand. LIMITATION: Not available in conjunction with the 3651 Store Controller mdl A25, B25,
A75, B75, C75 or 075.
Model 1P Station and Control - one printer, display, keyboard,
cash drawer, and customer programmable control
segment for operating one checkstand. LIMITATION:
Not available in conjunction with the 3651 Store
Controller mdl A60 or B60 - Supermarket, or with
the 3661 Store Controller.
Model2
Model 3
Station Only - one printer, display, keyboard, and
cash drawer that attaches to a 3663 mdl 1, 1P, 3 or
3P, or to the 3661 Store Controller, for operating
additional checkstands. One 3663 mdl 2 must be
attached to the 3661, a second and a third 3663
mdl 2 may be attached via #8110 and #8111 respectively. (#8110 is a prerequisite for #8111.)
Control Segment Only - a control segment for controlling one, or optionally up to three, 3663 mdl 2s.
Limitation: Not available in conjunction with the 3651
Store Controller mdl A25, B25, A60, B60, A75, 875,
C75 or 075. NOTE: The first 3663 mdl 2 attachment
is provided in the basic 3663 mdl 3. Prerequisite:
One 3663 mdl 2 must be attached to the 3663 mdl
3.
Model 3P Control Segment Only - a customer programmable
control segment for controlling one, or optionally up
to three, 3663 mdl 2s. LIMITATIONS: Not available
in conjunction with the 3651 Store Controller mdl
A60 or B60 - Supermarket, or with the 3661 Store
Controller. NOTE: The first 3663 mdl 2 attachment
is provided in the basic 3663 mdl 3P. PREREQUISITE: One 3663 mdl 2 must be attached to the 3663
mdl3P.
Highlights: .Has a storage area for each station into which keyed
(or scanned if the 3666 or 3667 Checkout Scanner is attached)
data is entered prior to being transmitted to the IBM 3651 Store
Controller mdl A25, B25, A60, B60, A75, B75, C75 or 075 or the
IBM 3661 Store Controller. Checks for code accuracy, sequence
control, field length, and correct number of fields. Another storage
area for each station is used for receiving a previously entered
message after being processed at the 3651 mdl A25, B25, A60,
B60, A75, B75, C75 or 075 or the 3661. Upon receiving messages, data is edited and transferred to the printer and display.
Communications: Provided ever two 2-wire customer provided
loops called store loops. Mess8:Jes from the 3651 mdi A25, B25,
A60, B60, A75, B75, C75 or 015 or the 3661 are monitored by
the 3663 Supermarket Terminal for terminal destination. A pluggable address scheme is provided for te,minal numbering. See Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3079, for the 3660 Supermaket System and Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27-3167 for the 3650 Programmable Store System.
Packaging: The standard station can be specified fully integrated
(all I/O segments under a single cover) or integrated with a remote display. An optional special feature with a specify code will
provide a distributed station (I/O segments separately covered to
allow iocation flexibility).
PREREQUISITES:
With 3651 Store Controller mdl A25, B25, A75, B75, C75 or
075: (1) An available store loop position ... (2) For attachment
of a 3663 mdl 2 to the store loop, a 3663 mdl 1P with a Model
2 Attachment feature is a prerequisite, unless the 3663 mdl 2
is attached to a 3663 mdl 3P. For attachment of a 3663 mdl 2
to a 3663 mdl 3P, a Model 2 Attachment Feature (#4900) is a
prerequisite if it is the second 3663 mdl 2 attached to the
3663 mdl 3P ... a 3rd Model 2 Attachment Feature (#4901) is
a prerequisite if it is the third 3663 mdl 2 attached to the 3663
mdl 3P. NOTE: The first 3663 mdl 2 attachment is provided in
the basic 3663 mdl 3P.
With 3651 Store Controller mdl A60 or B60: (1) A 3669 Store
Communications Unit and an available store loop poSition ... (2)
a 3663 mdi 1 with a Model 2 Attachment (#4900) feature is
prerequisite for each 3663 mdl 2 to be added to a store loop.
With 3661 Store Controller: (1) An available local attachment on
the 3661 or a store loop position. (NOTE. One 3663 mdl 2
must be attached to the 3661 via the standard local attachment
... one or two additional 3663 mdl 2s can be locally attached
via optional Local Attachment Features) ... (2) For attachment
of a 3663 mdl 2 to the store loop a 3663 mdl 1 with a Model 2
Attachment Feature is a prerequisite, unless the 3663 mdl 2 is
attached to a 3663 mdl 3. For attachment of a 3663 mdl 2 to a
3663 mdl 3, a Model 2 Attachment Feature (#4900) is a prerequisite if it is the second 3663 mdl 2 attached to the 3663 mdl
3 ... a 3rd Model 2 Attachment Feature (#4901) is a prerequisite if it is the third 3663 mdl 2 attached to the 3663 mdl 3.
NOTE: The first 3663 mdl 2 attachment is provided in the basic
3663 mdl 3.
Customer Responsibilities: See 3650 and 3660 in "Systems"
section of sales manual. The following statement is to be included
in proposals:
"II is agreed that IBM is relieved of responsibility for loss of
funds contained in, dispensed by or associated with any machine
under an IBM Agreement after its delivery to the customer. II is
also agreed that IBM will have no responsibility to provide warranty or maintenance service on any such machine when such
machine contains funds. II shall be the customer's responsibility
to remove, control, and replace or reload funds so that IBM can
fulfill its warranty and maintenance obligations.
With the appropriate special adapter features, the 3663 can attach
non-IBM coin and trading stamp dispensers, non-IBM front end
scales, and IBM 3666 or 3667 Checkout Scanners. In addition, a
Document Insert feature can be added to the printer to allow
"franking" (printing special data) on checks.
The exception to the above shall be when a failure occurs in the
cash drawer of any machine under the Agreement, and it cannot
be opened prior to maintenance by IBM. In those cases, the
customer shall assign one of its personnel to assume responsibility for removal of the funds once the drawer has been opened."
Keyboard: Have a ten-key numeric pad plus function keys. In part
these include department keys, special item modification keys (for
price, quantity and weight entries), tender payment keys, coupon
entry keys, and other related supermarket required keys. See the
IBM 3660 Supermarket System Introduction Manual GA27-3076 or
the IBM 3650 Programmable Store System Introduction Manual,
GA27-3163 for details.
Maintenance: Agreement for IBM to install and maintain the 3663
must be reviewed
Printer: Has two tape print locations as standard. Using a horizontal radial printing technique, the first tape printed is the customer
receipt. The second tape is for summary journal data. An optional
Document Insert feature position may be added. Alphanumeric
printing is accomplished with a dot matrix print head. Printing in
each pOSition is up to 30 characters. Customer receipt tape printing is at 80 lines per minute. Summary journal tape printing is at
50 lines per minute. Document Insert printing is at 35 lines per
minute. Shelf labels can be printed at 3-4 labels per minute,
depending upon the size of the label.
Cash Drawer: Has a removable and lockable till with five springweiQ.hted bill compartments and five coin compartments. A 3position lock controls power to the station and manually opens the
drawer regardless of power status. The key is removable in any
position. No terminal function can be initialed with the drawer
open.
Dlaplay: A variable character display panel allows displaying an
alphameric message of up to 22 characters in length. Characters
are .4 inches high and variable in width.
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136970 or equivalent,
should be used for machines installed prior to June, 1975. Machines installed after this date and those machines previously
installed that are changed to the new ribbon drive mechanism
.
should use IBM Part No. 1136660 or equivalent.
See SRL manual "3660 Supermarket System
Introduction" GA27-3076 for roll paper and Document Insert
forms specifications.
SPECIFY: [1] Vollage (11'5 VAC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9880 for
locking plug, or #9661 for non-lock plug.
[2] Packaging: #9547 for fully integrated; #9549 for integrated'
but with remote display. Specify #9548 for distributed; special
feature Distributed Station (#3425) is a prerequisite. Specify
one specify code for each 3663 mdl 1 or mdl 1P and one for
each 3663 mdl 2; if #9548, feature code #3425 for each
3663 mdl 1, mdl 1P and mdl 2 also. Specify codes need not
be the same for all 3663s in a store. Changes in packaging of
installed terminals are not permitted in the field.
[3] Cabling:
refer to the
Installation Manual - Physical Planning (GA27-3079) for the
3660 Supermarket System and Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GA27-3167 for the 3650 Programmable Store System.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- - ----= =--- --=
--':' =
M 3663.2
Jul 79
DP Machines
3663 Supermarket Terminal
(cont'd)
[4] TARE Key: #9737 for providing a keytop that has the word
"TARE" on it to replace the lower blank key on the 3663. Do
not specify if Optional Keyboard (specify code #9488) is ordered. Delete this specify on existing orders pending if Optional
Keyboard (specify code #9488) is to be added. NOTE: The
use of tare capability is mandatory in the State of California.
[5] Key top Arrangement: Specify #9353 for a reversed keypad
(top row -- 7, 8, 9: middle row -- 4, 5, 6: bottom row -- 1, 2,
3). Limitation: In the 3660 Supermarket Scanning and Key
Entry Systems, if installed on one 3663 mdl 1 or 2, it must be
installed on all 3663 mdl 1sand 2s in the store. Do not specify if Optional Keyboard (specify code #9488) is ordered. Delete this specify on existing orders pending if Optional Keyboard (specify code #9488) is to be added. Field Installation:
Not recommended.
[6] Cash Drawer Locks: A separate group of 25 lock numbers has
been set aside to allow a customer to use the same key in
multiple terminals. If this is desired, specify one of the following locks on the 3663 order.
#9101
9102
9103
9104
9105
#9106
9107
9108
9109
9110
#9111
9112
9113
9114
9115
#9116
9117
9118
9119
9120
#9121
9122
9123
9124
9125
If this option is not specified, a lock will be randomly selected
from another, larger, group of unique lock numbers.
[7] Till Option: Specify #9799 for shipment of a till with adjustable
bill dividers. If this option is not selected, an assembled till with
fixed bill dividers will be shipped.
[8] Keyboard Type: One keyboard type must be specified for each
3663 mdl 1, 1 P and 2. Specify code #9020 will provide the
Regular Keyboard with the ten-key pad positioned on the left.
This keyboard may have up to nine department keys.
LIMITATION: In the 3660 Supermarket Scanning and Key Entry
System, if installed on more than one 3663 in the local or
backup store, all key assignments must be the same. Not compatible with Optional Keyboard (#9488). In the 3650 Programmable Store System, all 3663 mdl 2 terminals attached to the
same 3663 mdl 3P must have the same type of keyboard and
the same key assignments -- paired mdl 1 P and 2 terminals
must have the same type of keyboard and the same key assignments. Field Installation: Not recommended.
Specify code #9488 will provide the Optional Keyboard with
the ten-key pad positioned in the center. The left to right dimension is 16-1/2" in the distributed version, special feature
code #3425, (no change in the size of the integrated version).
An expanded key top shipping group is included to provide
variety in colors, heights and sizes of blank keytops. Also, a
means is provided to allow placing single or double sized keys
in many locations. LIMITATIONS: In the 3660 Supermarket
Scanning and Key Entry Systems, this keyboard must be installed on all 3663s in a store and is not compatible with the
Regular Keyboard (#9020). All key assignments must be the
same. In the 3650 Programmable Store System, all 3663 mdl 2
terminals attached to the same 3663 mdl 3P must have the
same type keyboard and the same key assignments -- paired
mdl 1 P and 2 terminals must have the same type of keyboard
and the same key assignments. Field Installation: Not recommended, Customer Responsibilities: See 3650 Programmable
Store System and 3660 Supermarket System in "Systems"
pages. Prerequisites: In the 3660 Scanning System, special
feature #3880 is required on all 3663 mdl 1s in the store if
any of the following features are installed in the same store:
Coin Dispenser Adapters -- #1811, 1812, 1821, 1822
Stamp Dispenser Adapters - #7311, 7312, 7321, 7322
PRICES:
3663
Mdl
1
1P
2
3
3P
ATP/
MLC
5 yr
$ 191
204
92
89
98
Purchase"
$5,990
6,450
2,600
2,580
2,980
MMMC
$28,50
31,50
19,00
15,00
18.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: D
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55%
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Not recommended for field installation except
from model 1 to 1 P and from model 3 to 3P. All replaced parts
become the property of IBM.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model 1 to Model 1 P ..... $700"
From Model 3 to Model 3P ..... $700"
•• Customer price quotations and order acknowledgement letters
for purchase
must state: "Installation of this model change
involves the removal of parts which become the property of IBt.:."
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following features are for the model 1, 1 P and 2 unless
otherwise noted.
DISTRIBUTED STATION (#3425).
Provides distributed
ing; all I/O segments separately covered to allow location
ty. Field Installation: Not recommended. Prerequisites:
code #9548 on 3663 mdl 1, mdl 1 P or mdl 2. Maximum:
3663 mdl 1, 1 P or 2
packagflexibiliSpecify
one per
DOCUMENT INSERT (#3451).
Provides a third location on the
printer for printing on an inserted form (refer to 3660 Supermarket
Systems Introduction SRL for details on forms). Maximum: One on
each 3663 mdl 1, 1 P or 2. Limitation: In the 3660 Supermarket
Scanning and Key Entry Systems, if this feature is desired for a
model 1 on the store loop, it must be installed on the attached
model 2 (if any), and vice versa. In the 3660 Supermarket Scanning and Key Entry Systems, if this feature is desired for a model
2 attached to a model 3, it must also be installed on all other
model 2s attached to that model 3. Field Installation: Not recommended.
JOURNAL LOCK (#4660).
Provides a locking internal security
cover for the summary journal take-up spool. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
NUMERIC KEY PAD LOCK (#5330), Provides a lock to prevent
any depression of the numeric keys or delimiter key when an error
condition has been detected. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Not recommended.
RECEIPT STATION HALF SPACE (#6226).
Vertical spacing in
the receipt station is modified to provide half normal vertical spacing, I.e., 10 vertical spaces per inch. The spacing may be manually switched to normal (5 lines per inch). This feature also detects
end of label and start of label as well as "End of Forms." Depending upon label size, approximately 3-4 labels per minute can be
printed. Limitations: Only one printer per Control Segment can be
used when printing shelf labels. 3663s attached locally to the
3661 cannot install this feature. Maximum: One per 3663. Field
Installation: Yes.
The following features are for the models 1, 1 P, 3 and 3P unless otherwise noted.
STORAGE EXPANSION FEATURE (#1580). [Mdl 1P and 3P only]
Provides the capability of installing storage increments 4 through 9.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
CHECKOUT SCANNER ADAPTER (#1761). [Mdl 1 only] Allows
attachment of an IBM 3666 or 3667 Checkout Scanner for operation with the 3663 mdl 1 to which it is attached. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed when
3663 is attached to the 3661 Store Controller. Cannot be installed
on a 3663 if #1763 is installed. Cannot be installed on mdl 1P,
however, if this feature was preViously installed on a model which converts
to a mdl 1 P, it may remain after the conversion. NOTE: This feature is
to be used only in 3660 systems at an EC level prior to 349962. For 3660
systems at EC 349962 or later and for Programmable Store Systems use
feature code #1763.
.
2ND CHECKOUT SCANNER ADAPTER (#1762).
[Mdl 1 only]
Allows attachment of a 3666 or 3667 Checkout Scanner for operation with an attached 3663 mdl 2. Maximum: One, Field
Installation: Yes, starting July, 1975. Limitation: Cannot be installed when 3663 is attached to the 3661 Store Controller.
Prerequisites: #1761, #4900 and the 3663 mdl 2.
CHECKOUT SCANNER ADAPTER TYPE 2 (#1763).
[Mdl 1 or
1P only] Allows attachment of an IBM 3666 or 3667 Checkout
Scanner for operation with the 3663 mdl 1 or 1 P to which it is
attached. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations:
Cannot be installed when the 3663 is attached to the 3661 Store
Controller. Cannot be installed when #1761 is attached. Can only
be attached to the 3663 mdl 1 or 1 P.
2ND CHECKOUT SCANNER ADAPTER TYPE 2 (#1764). [Mdl 1
or 1 P only] Allows attachment of an IBM 3666 or 3667 Checkout
Scanner for operation with an attached 3663 mdl 2. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed
when the 3663 is attached to the 3661 Store Controller. Can only
be attached to a 3663 mdl 1 or 1 P. Prerequisites: #1763,
#4900 and the 3663 mdl 2.
COIN DISPENSER ADAPTER TYPE 1 (#1811).
Allows attachment of a 12 column Coin Dispenser (Anker RG11 SOA or equivalent). Specify: #9061 if Coin Dispenser will be used for the station
portion of a 3663 mdl 1 or 1 P or for the first 3663 mdl 2 attached
to a 3663 mdl 3 or 3P, or #9062 if it will be used for a 3663 mdl
'" Pilot Test applies: PTP Option Percent, 70%.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=- =----- --=----':' =
M 3663.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
3663 Supermarket Terminal
(cont'd)
2 attached to a 3663 mdl 1 or 1 P or for the second 3663 mdl 2
attached to a 3663 mdl 3 or 3P, For the third 3663 mdl 2 attached to a 3663 mdl 3 or 3P, specify #9062 in 60njunction with a
second Coin Dispenser Adapter Type 1 (#1811) and a Third
Model 2 Attachment (#4901) as prerequisites. Maximum: One on
mdl 1 or 1 P ... two on mdl 3 or 3P. Limitation: Not available if
coin Dispenser Adapter Type 2 (#1821) is installed. Field
Installation: Yes.
2ND COIN DISPENSER ADAPTER TYPE 1(#1812). Allows attachment of a second 12 column Coin Dispenser (Anker RG.l1 SOA
or equivalent).
Maximum:
One.
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequisites: # 1 811 .
COIN DISPENSER ADAPTER TYPE 2 (# 1621). Allows attachment of an 8 column Coin Dispenser (NCR 410 or equivalent).
Specify: #9063 if Coin Dispenser will be used for the station
portion 01 a 3663 mdl 1 or 1 P or for the first 3663 mdl 2 attached
to a 3663 mdl 3 or 3P, or #9064 if it will be used for a 3663 mdl
2 attached to a 3663 mdl 1 or 1 P or for the second 3663 mdl 2
attached to a 3663 mdl 3 or 3P. For the third 3663 mdl 2 attached to a 3663 mdl 3 or 3P, specify #9064 in conjunction with a
second Coin Dispenser Adapter Type 2 (#1821) and a Third
Model 2 Attachment (#4901) as prerequisites. Maximum: One on
mdl 1 or 1 P ... two, on mdl 3 or 3P. Limitation: Not available if
Coin Dispenser Adapter Type 1 (#1811) is installed. Field
Installation: Yes.
Allows
2ND COIN DISPENSER ADAPTER TYPE 2 (#1822).
attachment of a second 8 column Coin Dispenser (NCR 410 or
equivalent). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
#1821.
STORAGE INCREMENT (#3880).
Provides 2,048 additional
positions of storage. All replaced parts become the property of
18M. Limitation: If this feature is required on one 3663 mdl 1 or
mdl 3, it must be installed on all mdl 1sand 3s in the store.
Maximum: One on 3663 mdl 1 and mdl 3; nine on mdl 1 P and mdl
3P. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Installation of more than 3
Storage Increments (mdl IP and 3P only) requires one Storage Expansion Feature (#1580).
IML-READ ADAPTER (#4634). (Mdi 1 P and 3P only] Provides a
means to initialize 3663 terminals when a 3651 Store Controller
mdl A25, 825, A75, 875, C75 or 075 is unavailable or unable to
provide the IML (Initial Machine Load). An adapter is provided for
attaching an external tape cassette recorder (refer to IBM 3650
Retail Store System Introduction Manual, G.A27 -3075) and reading
data previously recorded at a 3651 equipped with the IML-Write
Adapter (#4633). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
MODEL 2 ATTACHMENT (#4900).
Allows attachment of one
3663 mdl 2 to a 3663 mdl 1 or 1 P, or allows attachment of the
second 3663 mdl 2 to a 3663 mdl 3 or 3P. Maximum: On mdl 1
or 1 P, one ... on mdl 3 or 3P, one. Field Installation: Yes. Note:
The basic 3663 mdl 3 or 3P provides for attachment of the first
3663 mdl 2 as a standard feature.
SCALE ADAPTER (#6671).
Allows attachment of an electronic
scale (Toledo 8210 with display or equivalent). Specify: #9561 if
Scale will be used for the station portion of a 3663 mdl 1 or 1P or
for the first 3663 mdl 2 attached to a 3663 mdl 3 or 3P, or
#9562 if it will be used for a 3663 mdl 2 attached to a 3663 mdl
1 or 1 P or for the second 3663 mdl 2 attached to a 3663 mdl 3
or 3P, or #9563 if it will be used for the third 3663 mdl 2 attached to a 3663 mdl 3 or 3P. Maximum: Two on mdl 1 or 1 P ...
three on mdl 3 or 3P. Note: See Customer Responsibilities under
3650 and 3660 in "Systems: pages. Field Installation: Yes.
only] Allows attachment of a second Stamp Dispenser (NCR 414
or equivalent). Maximum: One. limitation: Not available on 3663
mdl 3. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: #7321, #4900 and
the 3663 mdl 2.
STANDALONE INITIAL MACHINE LOAD (#7555). [Mdl 1 and 3
only] Allows a user-provided tape cassette to be attached to a
3663 Supermarket Terminal mdl 1 or mdl 3 to provide IML capability if required when the 3663 is operating in standalone mode.
Maximum: One. Limitation: The IML feature on a 3663 mdl 1
cannot be used to IML a 3663 mdl 3; therefore when there is a
mixture of mdl 1 sand mdl 3s, the feature should be installed on a
mdl 3 instead of a mdl 1. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: A
3661 Store Controller. Note: One IML feature will support all
terminals on the store loop. User-provided tape cassette must
meet requirements defined in the IBM 3660 Supermarket Systems,
Key Entry System Introduction, GA27-3111.
The following feature is for the 3663 mdls 3 and 3P only
3RD MODEL 2 ATTACHMENT (#4901). Allows attachment of the
third 3663 mdl 2 to a 3663 mdl 3 or 3P. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #4900 on 3663 mdl 3 or 3P.
ATP/
MLC
5 yr
Special Feature Prices:
Purchase"
MMMC
For Model 1 Only
Ckout Scanner Adapter
2nd Ckout Scanner Adapter
Stamp Dlsp Adptr Type 1
2nd Stamp Dist Adptr Type 1
Stamp Disp Adptr Type 2
2nd Stamp Disp Adptr Type 2
1761 $66 $2,210
1762
19
600
#7311
22
690
7312 NC
NC
7321
24
755
NC
7322 NC
$5.50
2.50
3.00
NC
3.00
NC
5.50
2.50
For Model 1 and 1P Only
Ckout Scanner Adptr Type 2
2nd Ckout Scanner Adptr Ty 2
1763
1764
66
19
2,210
#3425
3451
4660
5330
6226
$ 4
6
1
2
23
160
171
25
75
600
NC
1.00
NC
NC
5.00
7555
17
450
3.50
600
For Modell, 1P and 2 Only
Distributed Station
Document Insert
Journal Lock
Numeric Key Pad
Receipt Station Half Space
For Model 1 and 3 Only
Standalone Initial Mach Load
For Model 1P and 3P Only
Storage Exp. Feature
1580
8
200
1.50
IML-Read Adapter
4634
11
300
2.00
1811
20
1812 NC
1821
20
1822 NC
6
3880t
4900
12
6671
4
640
NC
640
NC
142
292
143
2.50
NC
2.50
NC
1.00
3.00
.50
4901
365
4.00
For Modell, 1P, 3 and 3P Only
Coin Dispenser Adptr Type 1
2nd Coin Dispen Adptr Type 1
Coin Dispenser Adptr Type 2
2nd Coin Dispen Adptr Type 2
Storage Increment
Model 2 Attachment
Scale Adapter
For Model 3 and 3P Only
3rd Model 2 Attachment
16
Prerequisite: For the mdl IP and 3P the 3650 Programmable Store
System Point of Sale Application/Supermarket Environment Program
Product (5748-D2I) is a mandatory requirement in all stales conforming
to the National Bureau of Standards Handbook #44 for Weights and
Measures.
STAMP DISPENSER ADAPTER TYPE 1 (#7311).
[Mdl 1 only]
Allows attachment of a Stamp Dispenser (Anker TVC 715 or equivalent). Specify: #9571 Stamp Dispenser will be used with model
1, or #9572 if it will be used with an attached model 2. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Not available if Stamp Dispenser Adapter Type 2
(#7321) is installed. Not available on 3663 mdl 3. Field
Installation: Yes.
2ND STAMP DISPENSER ADAPTER TYPE 1 (#7312).
[Mdl 1
only] Allows attachment of a second Stamp Dispenser (Anker
TVC 715 or equivalent). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: #7311, #4900 and the 3663 mdl 2.
STAMP DISPENSER ADAPTER TYPE 2 (#7321). [Mdl 1 only]
Allows attachment of a Stamp Dispenser (NCR 414 or equivalent).
Specify: #9573 if Stamp Dispenser will be used' with modell, or
#9574 if it will be used with an attached model 2. Maximum One.
Limitation: Not available if Stamp Dispenser Adapter Type 1
(#7311) is installed. Not available on 3663 mdl 3. Field
Installation: Yes.
2ND STAMP DISPENSER ADAPTER TYPE 2 (#7322).
[Mdl 1
• Pilot Test applies: PTP Option Percent: 70%.
t Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement
letters for
must state: "Installation of this feature involves removal of parts
which become the property of IBM."
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -------:5:='::5';'5::
M 3666 - 3667
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3666 CHECKOUT SCANNER
IBM 3667 CHECKOUT SCANNER
Purpoee: Fixed head optical reader for the 3650 Programmable
Store System and 3660 Supermarket System.
Purpose: Fixed head optical reader for the 3650 Programmable
Store System and 3660 Supermarket System. The 3667 is 28
inches (71.1 cm) high and it is particularly adaptable to:
Highlights: Reads the regular (Version "A") and the zero suppression (Version "E") industry standard Universal Product Code
(UPC) symbols on manually fed supermarket items placed symbol
down on the scanner window ... when used with the 3650 Programmable Store System, can also read industry standard European Article Numbering (EAN-13) symbols (when used with the 3650
Programmable Store System, interpretation of all symbols is done
by the user application program) ... item velocity meets the
industry's Symbol Standardization Subcommittee requirement for
up to 100 inches per second ... packaged as the front end of a
total checkstand design ... one 3666 can operate with one 3663
mdl 1, mdl 1P or mdl 2 Supermarket Terminal. The 3666 is 38
inches (96.5 cm) high. The 3666 contains a laser system which
complies with the safety standards of the United States Department of Health, Education, and Welfare (Performance Standard,
Laser Products, August 2, 1976 - Class 1, 21 CF-R Subchapter J)
only when properly attached to an IBM 3663 mdl 1 or 1P with
features #1761, #1762 or #1763, #1764 or equivalent.
PREREQUISITES: If the 3666 is to operate with a 3663 mdl 1 or
mdl 1P, the 3663 mdl 1 or mdl 1 P requires Checkout Scanner
Adapter (#1761) or Checkout Scanner Adapter Type 2 (#1763).
If the 3666 is to operate with a 3663 mdl 2, the 3663 mdl 1 or
mdl 1P to which that 3663 mdl 2 is attached requires either
Checkout Scanner Adapter Type 2 (#1763) and 2nd Checkout
Scanner Adapter Type 2 (#1764), or Checkout Scanner Adapter
(#1761) and 2nd Checkout Scanner Adapter (#1762).
Customer R. .ponslblllty: Refer to Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GA27-3079, for the 3660 Supermarket System for correct ambient light Intensity requirement. A number of states presently have, and others are considering the adoption of, regulations governing the use of laser products. Users should determine
the extent of regulation in their state. New York state currently
requires an attachment to the checkstand. This user.supplled
feature must be in place prior to installation of the 3666. Details
are available from the N. Y. State Department of Labor, Division of
Safety and Health, Two World Trade Center, New York, N. Y.
10047.
Suppll..: A window, Part No. 5563123, will need to be ordered to
replace the existing window periodically as it becomes excessively
scratched. See M 10000 pages for ordering Instructions.
For copies of the UPC Symbol Specification and the UPC Guidlines Manual, write to:
Distribution Codes, Inc.
401 Wythe Street
Alexandria, Virginia 22314
For copies of the General Specifications for the Article Symbol
Marking (EAN) write to:
Secretaire General E. A. N.
Rue de la ChanceliEirie 14 - 1000, Bruxelles
SPECIFY: [1] Cable Requirements: See the 3663 Supermarket
Terminal "Machines" pages.
[2] Packaging: If machine is to be installed in N. Y. State, specify
#9550 for additional labeling to meet current regulations. If
machine is to be installed in the State of Texas, specify #9551
for additional labeling to meet current requirements.
PRICES:
Mdl
ATP/
MLC
5 yr
3666
1
$ 147
Purchase"
MMMC
$ 3,560
37.50
Machine Group: D
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
- Checker unload mode of checkout
- Seated checker operation
Highlights: Reads the regular (Version "A") and the zero suppression (Version "E") industry standard Universal Product Code
(UPC) symbols on manually fed supermarket items placed symbol
down on the scanner window ... when used with the 3650 Programmable Store System, can also read industry standard European Article Numbering (EAN-13) symbols (when used with the 3650
Programmable Store System, interpretation Of all symbols is done
by the user application program) ... item velocity meets the
industry's Symbol Standardization Subcommittee requirement for
up to 100 inches per second ... packaged as the front end of a
total checkstand design '" one 3667 can operate with one 3663
Supermarket Terminal mdl 1, mdl 1P or mdl 2. The 3667 contains
a laser system which complies with the safety standards of the
United States Department of Health, Education, and Welfare
(Performance Standard for Laser Products, August 2, 1976 - Class
I, 21 CFR Subchapter J) only when properly attached to an IBM
3663 mdl 1 or mdl 1P with feature #1761, #1762 or #1763,
#1764 or equivalent.
Prerequisites: If the 3667 is to operate with a 3663 mdl 1 or mdl
lP, the 3663 mdl 1 or mdl lP requires Checkout Scanner Adapter
(#1761) or Checkout Scanner Adapter Type 2 (#1763). If the
3667 is to operate with a 3663 mdl 2, tlle 3663 mdl 1 or mdl 1P
to which that 3663 mdl 2 is attached requires either Checkout
Scanner Adapter Type 2 (#1763) and 2nd Checkout Scanner
Adapter Type 2 (#1764), or Checkout Scanner Adapter (#1761)
and 2nd Checkout Scanner Adapter (#1762).
Customer Responsibility: Refer to Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GA27-3079, for the 3660 Supermarket System for correct ambient light intensity requirement. A number of states presently have, and others are considering the adoption of, regulations governing the use of laser products. Users should determine
the extent of regulation in their state. New York state currently
requires an attachment to the checkstand. This user-supplied
feature must be in place prior to installation of the 3667. Details
are available from the N. Y. State Department of Labor, Division of
Safety and Health, Two World Trade Center, New York, N. Y.
10047.
The 3667 Scanner must be mechanically restrained in its final
mounted position. During maintenance, the 3667 can be tipped
forward by a downward force in the extended components drawer.
The customer must provide this restraint. Unless the 3667 is
restrained from tipping by the geometry of the checkstand, an IBM
provided Safety Clip or Safety Bracket must be ordered for each
3667. It is the responsibility of the customer to locate a,nd install
the restraining hardware. (see Specify Item [4].)
Supplies: A window, IBM Part No. 5563123, will need to be
ordered to replace the existing window periodically as it becomes
excessively scratched. See M 10000 pages for ordering instructions.
For copies of the UPC Symbol SpeCification and the UPC Guidelines, write to:
Distribution Codes, Inc.
401 Wythe Street
Alexandria, Virginia 22314
For copies of the General Specifications for the Article Symbol
Marking (EAN) write to:
Secretaire General E. A. N.
Rue de la Chancellerie 14 - 1000,. Bruxelles
Specify: [1] Cable Requirements: See the M 3663 pages.
[2] Packaging: If the machine is to be installed
specify #9550 for additional labeling to meet
tions. If the machine is to be installed in the
specify #9551 for additional labeling to meet
tions.
in N. Y. State,
current regulaState of Texas,
current regula-
[3] Scan Direction: Specify #9604 for Normal Scan Direction. This is
typically used for Over the Counter (OTC) operation, sometimes
referred to as checker unload. Specify #9605 for Optional Scan
Direction. This is typically used for Over tile End (OTE) operation,
sometimes referred to as customer unload. See ISM 3650 Programmable Store System Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27-3167, or ISM 3660 Supermarket Systems Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3079, for illustration of scan direction
options.
• Pilot TOIl applies: PTP Option
~I!
70'11>
[4] See 3660 System Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27-3079 to determine the type of restraining hardware
desired. Order one of the foHowing for each 3667 to be installed:
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------=- ==
- --':' =
---- ----
M 3667 - 3669
Jul79
OP Machines
3667 Checkout Scanner (cont'd)
1) Safety Clip - for each 3667 order one BIM 5194716 to
secure one rear 3667 leg to the customers' stationary horizontal mounting surface, or
2) Safety Bracket - for each 3667 order one BIM 5194758 to
secure the 3667 lower rear cabinet extension to the
customers' stationary checkstand surface.
Order the Safety Clip or Safety Bracket
This Is a no charge item to the customer
PRICES:
3667
Mdl
ATPI
MLC
5 yr
Purchase"
MMMC
$ 147
$3,560
$37.50
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 55%
Machine Group: 0
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Cali: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
IBM 3669 STORE COMMUNICATIONS UNIT
Purpose: To provide communications for the 3650 Programmable
Store System and 3660 Supermarket System over common carrier
network facilities between a 3651 Store Controlier mdl A60, B60,
A75, B75, C75 or 075 and:
1) The host S/370 or 4300 Processor via an IBM 3872 Modem
or equivalent or IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem of an IBM
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller with switched line
features, or a Communications Adapter (# 1601) feature on
the 4331.
2) The store loops of another predesignated store location via
another 3669 at that location, to provide backup operation for
that store in case its 3651 Store Controller mdl A60, B60,
A75, B75, C75 or 075 is inoperative.
3) The 3651 Store Controller mdl A60, B60, A75, B75, C75 or
075 in the predesignated store via the 3669 in that store for
the purpose of data reconciliation when the backup operation
is terminated. If both Store Controllers are 3650 mdl 75,
communication can also be performed for purposes other than
backup data reconciliation.
The 3669 is designed to operate at 2400 bps over a switched
telephone network. This unit is equipped with an Automatic Answering facility but requires manual dialing. The connection to the
telephone network is made through a CBS type data access arrangement which must be ordered from the telephone company.
Highlights: The 3669 is a stand-alone synchronous signal converter designed to connect either an IBM 3651 Store Controlier mdl
A60, B60, A75, B75, C75 or 075 or two store loops to the common carrier communications network. A switch provides the controls for connecting the 3669 to the 3651 mdl A60, B60, A75,
B75, C75 or 075 controller or to the store loops. Diagnostic test
functions are normally under control of the 3651 mdl A60, B60,
A75, B75, C75 or 075 during initial power on. An additional
switch setting allows the performance of a manual diagnostic test.
Auto answer is included as a standard feature.
Attachment: One cable is provided to attach to a CBS Data Access Arrangement line. One cable is provided to interface to the
store loop.
PREREQUISITES: [1] A 3650 Programmable Store System or a
3660 Supermarket System (equipped with an IBM 3651 Store
Controller mdl A60, B60, A75, B75, C75 or 075) ... [2] A switched
line communications facility with Type CBS Data Access Arrangement .,. [3] A store loop equipped with at least one IBM 3663
Supermarket Terminal mdl 1 or mdl 1 P ... [4] Communications with
any virtual storage S/370 or 4300 processor (3033, 3033 MP,
3158 MP, 3168, 3168 MP VTAM only, 4331, 4341) (165 II BTAM
only) via the 3704 or 3705 or an ICA (BTAM only) on a S/370
mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3, or 138, or a Communications Adapter
(#1601) feature on the 4331.
Customer Responsibilities: [1] See M 2700 pages of sales manual
.,. [2] Customer is responsible for obtaining, installing, and testing
the store loops. See Installation Manual - Physical Planning
(GA27-3079) for the 3660 Supermarket System.
Specify: Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): Locking plug -- #9880 for
115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. For non-lock
plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230
V.
PRICES:
3669
Mdl
MAC I
MRC
ETPI
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$ 137
$ 117
$ 4,770
$27.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
• Pilot Test Plan applies: PTP Option Percent: 70%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --- - - -- ::--..:.- =-=
";' ==
M 3683.1
May 79
DP Machines
MLC
IBM 3683 POINT OF SALE TERMINAL
PRICES:
Mdl
3683
5 yr
Purchase
MMMC/
AMMCR
$ 81
$2,655**
$10.50
Purpose: A user programmable input/output terMinal for the IBM
3680 Programmable Store System which provides the point of sale
transaction, data collection, credit authorization, price look-up and
other inquiry and data entry functions. The self contained programmable segment allows the 3683 to continue most salfts functions when disconnected from the 3684 Point of Sale - Control
Unit, and after receiving a program load from the 3684.
Plan Offering: Plan D
Purchase Option: 55%
Maintenance: D
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 months
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Highlights: A modular input/output unit with features that provide
for an integrated or distributed terminal. It features data entry by
keyboard or from a Magnetic or OEM OCR Wand, and data output
via an 8 digit numeric display; 32 indicators for operator guidance
and machine status conditions; and printing of data under program
control. The minimum configuration must include a base unit plus
a Keyboard and a Display ... see ·'Prerequisites.'· The 3684 mdl 2
is capable of transmitting or receiving data with several 3683s
over a 2400 bps loop.
KEYBOAROS, GENERAL: All keyboards have customer legendable keybuttons except for 11 keybuttons which have molded legends. All single and double function keys are under customer
program control. Double keys m.ay be moved, added, or deleted
by the user. Several colors and sizes of decal sheets with common legends will be shipped with the 3683. See accessories
section M10000 for released key buttons that may be orjered for
any unique customer requirement. Maximum: One Keyboard
(#4921, #4922 or #4923). Field Installation: Yes.
Base Unit: Provides (1) the base electronic storage and intelligence and an audible alarm; and (2) a matrix printer with cash
receipt station. Basic storage is 32K bytes. This can be increased
to 56K bytes by Storage Increment features. An Audible Alarm,
activated when predetermined events require operator attenticn or
intervention for system operation, is also part of the base unit.
35 KEY MODIFIABLE KEYBOARD (#4921): A 35 key keyboard
that includes:
5 Legended system control keys.
19 Unlegended function keys.
11 Keys with dual legends on each keybutton, "numeric" and
"transaction type", in the data entry arrangement.
Printer: A matrix, bi-directional printer which prints a 38 character
print line at 15 characters per 25.4mm (1 inch) spacing. Vertical
line spacing is 6.3 lines per 25.4mm (1 inch) at a rate of 20 lines
per second. It uses an easily replaceable cartridge ribbon. In
addition to the standard character sets, an all-points addressable
capability allows (by customer programming) printing of customer
logo and special graphics. Additional print stations can be ordered
as special features. The cash receipt station will accept 88.9mm
(3-1/2 inch) diameter roll paper, 69.85mm (2-3/4 inches) wide.
PREREQUISITES: 1) A 3684 Point of Sale - Control Unit mdl 2
provides the control segment for the 3683. See 3684 Machines
pages for details. 2) A Keyboard (#4921, #4922 or #4923) and
a Display (#3331 or #3332) must be ordered for each 3683.
Customer Responsibilities: 1) See 3680 Programmable Store
System in "Systems" for general description of customer responsibilities. 2) The following statement is to be included in proposals:
"It is agreed that IBM will have no responsibility to provide
warranty or maintenance service on an IBM 3683 Point of Sale
Terminal when cash is contained in the unit. It shall be the
purchaser's (customer's) responsibility to remove, control, and
replace cash so that IBM can fulfill its warranty and maintenance obligations.
The exception to the above shall be when a failure occurs in
the cash drawer and it cannot be opened prior to CE maintenance. In those cases the customer shall assign one of his
personnel to assume responsibility for removal of the cash once
the drawer has opened."
Customer Set-Up: The 3683 will be shipped with customer set-up
instructions. The customer is responsible for:
unpacking. placement, set up and check out of the 3683 at
time of delivery, or when relocating the 3683.
relocation of the 3683 (if required) to allow IBM service
access.
using and following the 3683 Problem Determination Procedures.
Environment:
"Systems."
See
3680
Programmable
Store
System
in
Maintenance: 3683s located in the immediate sales area may
preclude the customer acceptability of online repair due to the
public scrutiny and loss of the selling location for customer service. In these cases, the customer should remove the failing unit
to a repair facilty located within the store for subsequent repair.
At this location the CE will repair and test the unit.
Supplies: [1) A black ribbon cartridge, IBM Part No. 7034640 or
equivalent, is required. [2] Roll paper 88.9mm (3.5 inch) diameter,
69.85mm (2.75 inch) wide is required for the Cash Receipt and
Journal print stations.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (120V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz); #9890
for locking plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug. If the standard
2.8 meter (9 foot) power cable is not desired, specify #9511
for 1.8 meter (6 foot) cable. NOTE: 120V is compatible with
existing 11 5V systems.
SPECIAL FEATURES
48 KEY MODifiABLE KEYBOARD (data entry) (#4922):
A 48
key keyboard that includes:
5 Legended system control keys.
32 Unlegended function keys.
11 Keys with dual legends on each keybutton, "numeric" and
"transaction type", in the data entry arrangement.
48 KEY MODIFIABLE KEYBOARD (adding machine) (#4923): A
48 key keyboard that includes:
5 Legended system control keys.
32 Unlegended function keys.
11 Keys with round numeric legended keybuttons in the adding
machine arrangement.
DISTRIBUTED KEYBOARD ATTACHMENT (#3240). Provides for
locating the keyboard up to 3.6 meters (12 feet) from the 3683
base. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Keyboard - #4921,#4922 or #4923.
DISPLAY-ONE SIDED (#3331).
An operator display and guidance unit consisting of a 8-digit numeric display and 32 indicators
for operator guidance and machine status. The display is used to
display numeric input or output data such as item number, totals,
amount due, etc. The 32 indicator lights point to labels that describe machine status or guidance. The unit will be shipped with
the indicators labeled. However, the customer may relabel all but
five indicators and, under customer program control, define their
use. A legend sheet with a variety of legends will be shipped with
each machine.
Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Display-Two Sided (#3332).
DISPLAY-TWO SIDED (#3332).
An operator and customer display guidance unit which contains all the functions of Display-One
Sided (#3331) plus an 8-digit numeric display with 6 indicators on
the back of the unit for customer viewing. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Display-One
Sided (#3331) or Display-Customer Remote (# 3333).
DISPLAY-CUSTOMER REMOTE (#3333). A customer display and
status indicator unit that is connected to the 3683 by a 3.6 meter
(12 foot) cable. The unit consists of an 8-digit numeric display
and 12 indicators (6 are shipped with labels and 6 without). All are
relegendable. The display and indicators are under customer
program control.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Display-Two Sided (#3332).
Prerequisite: Display-One Sided (#3331).
DISTRIBUTED DISPLAY ATTACHMENT (#3335).
Provides for
distributing Display-One Sided (#3331) or Display-Two Sided
(#3332) up to 3.6 meters (12 feet) from the 3683 base.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Display-One
Sided (#3331) or Display-Two Sided (#3332).
CASH DRAWER-INTEGRATED-FIRST (#1571).
Provides a cash
drawer with housing and removable till that is integrated with the
3683 base unit. The cash drawer has a media slot that will accommodate approximately a 25mm (1 inch) stack of documents.
Opening the cash drawer is under program control. A cash drawer
lock is provided. See note below for special ordering instructions
for lock and removable bill dividers. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Only one additional cash drawer may
be ordered -- either Cash Drawer-Integrated-Second (# 1573),
Cash IJrawer-Distributed (#1575), or OEM Cash Drawer Attachment (#157 7 ).
•• Pilot Test Plan available. Purchase Pilot Option: 70%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ------=- =----=
--':' =
M 3683.2
May 79
DP Machines
3683 Point of Sale Terminal (cont'd)
CASH DRAWER-INTEGRATED-SECOND (#1573).
Provides a
second integrated cash drawer with housing and removable till and
is installed directly below Cash Drawer-Integrated-First (#1571).
Functionally equivalent to Cash Drawer-Integrated-First (#1571).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Cash
Drawer-Integrated-First (# 1571 ).
CASH DRAWER-DISTRIBUTED (#1575). Provides a distributed
cash drawer with housing and removable till that can be located
up to 3.6 meters (12 feet) from the 3683 base. Functionally equivalent to Cash Drawer-Integrated-First (#157"1). Maximum: Two if
no other cash drawer is ordered. One if Cash Drawer-IntegratedFirst (#1571) or OEM Cash Drawer Attachment (#1577) is ordered. Field Installation: Yes.
OEM CASH DRAWER ATTACHMENT (#1577). Provides an IBM
defined interface with cable and plug for attaching an OEM Cash
Drawer. Maximum: Two if no IBM Cash Drawer is ordered. One if
a Cash Drawer-Distributed-First (#1571) or Cash DrawerDistributed (#1575) is ordered.
Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: An attached OEM Cash Drawer must meet the IBM
defined interface.
Notes:
1) For cash drawer tills and covers, see M10000 pages.
2) Specify #9799 for each IBM cash drawer ordered (#1571,
#1573 or #1575) if a till with movable bill dividers is desired.
3) Cash Drawer Lock: Each IBM cash drawer (#1571, #1573
or #1575) is equipped with a lock. A group of 25 unique
lock numbers has been reserved to allow a customer to
specify identical lock types on all terminals. This allows all
cash drawers to be opened with the same key. If this is
desired, specify one of the following features on the cash
drawer order:
#9116
#9121
#9111
#9101
#9106
9117
9122
9112
9102
9107
9123
9113
9118
9103
9108
9119
9124
9114
9104
9109
9120
9125
9115
9105
9110
If none is specified, a lock will be selected at random from a
larger group of lock types. Each cash drawer will be shipped
with two cash drawer keys.
VALIDATION PRINTER (#8725). Provides a flat bed document
validation station for printing on inserted forms. Prints 38 characters per line at 15 characters per 25.4mm 1 inch). Vertical line
spacing is 6.3 lines per 25.4mm (1 inch) at a rate of 20 lines per
second. The all-points addressable characteristics of the printer
allow logos, special graphics and highlighting to be designed and
printed by user programming. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
STORAGE INCREMENTS:
NOTE: When storage is upgraded by field installation, the new
Storage Increment feature displaces the old. Removed partlS belong to the customer.
STORAGE INCREMENT-8K (#7710).
Provides an additional
8,192 bytes of storage. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Storage Increment-16K
(#7720) or Storage Increment-24K (#7730).
STORAGE INCREMENT-16K (#7720).
Provides an additional
16,384 bytes of storage. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
limitation: Cannot be installed with Storage Increment-8K
(#7710) or 24K (#7730). Note: If Storage Increment-8K (#7710)
is installed, it must be removed to install this feature.
STORAGE INCREMENT-24K (#7730).
Provides an additional
24,576 bytes of storage. Maximum: One Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Storage Increment-8K
(#7710) or 16K (#7720). Note: If storage Increment-8 (#7710)
or 16K (#7720) Is installed, it must be removed to install this
feature.
TOTALS RETENTION (#8010). Provides an additional 240 bytes
of customer programmable storage that is powered by its own
battery to protect loss of information such as totals, transaction
number, terminal address, etc. When power is turned off or power
interruptions occur, an early warning status condition will be given
to the program when the battery needs replacing. Replacement
batteries are to be provided, installed, and removed by the customer. IBM will replace the battery if requested by the customer
on a time and material basis. (See M10000 pages for battery life
characteristics and types of batteries required for replacement.)
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
JOURNAL LOCK (#4690). Provides a special lock and security
cover over the printed Journal. See Note below for special lock
selections. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Journal Printer (#4695).
Provides an internal battery
STORAGE RETENTION (#7785).
and charger to power storage during a power interruption. All data
and programs are protected so that a transaction in process when
power was interrupted will continue when primary power is restored. The duration of storage retention depends on the charged
state of the battery. When fully charged, storage will be retained
for approximately 12 minutes. The number of times the battery is
discharged greatly affects battery life, therefore facilities are provided to allow the· customer, through programming, to deactivate
the battery for scheduled power off conditions such as store closing. Replacement batteries are to be provided, installed, and
removed by the customer. IBM will replace the battery if requested by the customer on a time and material basis. Replacement
batteries may be ordered through IBM (see M 1 0000 pages) or
through other sources that meet the supply battery specifications
as defined by IBM. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
MANAGER KEYLOCK (#4905). Provides a keylock mounted on
the keyboard that allows customer programming to interrogate the
position of the keylock when the key is operated. Possible uses
include the enforcement of a manager override to a restricted
security function. See Note below for special lock selection.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Keyboard #4921, #4922, or #4923.
EXPANSION FEATURE (#3880). Provides facilities to accommodate additionai features that cannot be installed on the base unit.
This feature is a prerequisite to install any of the following:
-- IML Read Adapter
(#4633)
- Magnetic Wand Reader (#4945)
-- OCR Wand Adapter
(#5422)
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Note: Two groups of 1 0 unique specify numbers have been
reserved to allow a customer to order a specific journal lock or
manager keylock for each terminal. (The 3683 and 3684 use
the same joLirnal lock numbers, therefore all terminals within a
store could have the same lock if desired.) If the same lock is
desired on the journal and manager keylock specify the respective locks with the same value in the last digit. That Is, if
#9203 and #9303 are specified, the same lock (#9203) will
be installed at both locations.
Manager Keylock
Journal Lock
IML READ ADAPTER (#4633).
Provides a means to initialize
3683 terminals when a 3684 mdl 2 is unavailable or unable to
provide the IML (Initial Machine Load). An adapter is provided for
attaching an external user provided tape cassette recorder and
reading data previously recorded at a 3684 mdl 2 with the IMLWrite Adapter (#4634). (Refer to "IBM 3680 Programmable Store
System Introduction Manual", [SRL No. to be furnished at a later
date] for cassette recorder interface requirement.) Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Expansion Feature (#388(').
JOURNAL PRINTER (#4695).
Provides a Journal print station
with a journal roll take-up mechanism. Print line length is 38
characters at 15 characters per 25.4mm (1 inch) spacing. Vertical
line spacing is 6.3 lines per 25.4mm (1 inch) at a rate of 20 lines
per second. The all-points addressable characteristics of the
printer permit the customer to highlight exceptions through special
graphics designed and controlled by user programming. A
12.7mm (1/2") signature window is provided. The journal station
will accept 88.9mm (3-1/2") diameter roll paper, 69.85mm (23/4") wide. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
#9301
#9306
#9201
#9206
9302
9307
9202
9207
9303
9308
9203
9208
9304
9309
9204
9209
9305
9310
9205
9210
If none is specified, a lock will be selected at random from a
larger group of lock types. Each lock feature will be shipped
with two keys. For additional or replacement keys, refer to
M10000 pages.
MAGNETIC WAND READER (#4945).
A hand operated wand
used to read single track delta distance encoded magnetic merchandise tickets, credit cards, employee badges, etc. The small
light-weight wand attached via a 1.2 meter (4 foot) long flexible
cord, allows encoded merchandise tickets to be read without
removing them from the merchandise. See Note below. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. limitation: Cannot be installed with
OCR Wand Adapter (#5422). Prerequisite: Expansion Feature
(#3880).
NOTE -- The minimum encoding specifications that must be met
by suppliers of credit cards, merchandise tickets and employee
badges will be furnished upon request.
OCR WAND ADAPTER (#5422). Provides an adapter to support
the attachment of an OEM OCR Wand (Recognition Products, inc.,
OCR Wand or equivalent that meets the OCR Wand Interface
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- --- ---
- ----- --===
':" =
DP Machines
3683 Point of Sale Terminal
(cont'd)
Specifications dated 10/17 / 7 5 to the 3653 Point of Sale Terminal). This feature provides a 1 .83 meter (6 foot) cable with an
ITT--Cannon DBC-25S type connector to attach the OEM OCR
Wand unit. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Magnetic Wand Reader (#4945).
Prerequisite: Expansion Feature (#3880).
AMMCRI
MLC
5 yr
Special Feature Prices:
Purchase MMMC
35 Key-modifiable Keybd #4921
48 Key-modifiable Keybd 4922
48 Key-modifiable Keybd 4923
Dlst Keyboard Attach
3240
Display-One Sided
3331
Display-Two Sided
3332
Display-Customer Remote 3333
Dlst Display Attach
3335
Cash Drawer-Int-Flrst
1571
Cash Drawer-Int-Second
1573
Cash Drawer-Distributed
1575
OEM Cash Drawer Attach 1577
Journal Printer
4695
Journal Lock
4690
Manager Keylock
4905
Validation Printer
8725
Storage Increment-8K
7710
Storage Increment-16K
7720
Storage Increment-24K
7730
Totals Retention
8010
Storage Retention
7785
Expansion Feature
3880
IML Read Adapter
4633
Magnetic Wand Reader
4945
OCR Wand Adapter
5422
$ 6
$ 150
$ 1.50
6
165
165
30
1.50
1.50
200
2.00
3.00
6
1
7
13
8
1
1
360
240
15
220
230
230
30
4
100
1
30
30
170
113
225
338
130
175
20
175
391
185
7
7
7
1
6
3
6
9
5
6
1
6
14
5
1.50
1.00
1.00
1.00
.50
1.00
1.00
.50
.50
.50
1.00
1.00
.50
1.00
3.00
.50
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3683.3
May 79
Not to be reprQduced without written permission.
-------- ----.:.- =-=
- -==--';' ==
M 3684.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3684 POINT OF SALE - CONTROL UNIT
tween the 3684 and 3683s for data collection, price look-up,
credit, and diagnostic facilities.
Purpose: A user programmable input/output, data collection and
processing terminal with a 985,088 byte integrated diskette for the
IBM 3680 Programmable Store System.
All models of the 3684 receive their initial machine load (lML) from
a S/370 or 4341 host processor either by physical diskette transport or by teleprocessing. The 3684 IML and the IML's for 3683s
associated with a 3684 mdl 2 are maintained on the diskette. The
3684 mdl 2 transmits the 3683 IML when requested by the 3683.
Model 1
Single unit
Model 2
Master unit
The 3684 mdl 1 is designed for single terminal stores. It contains
a single programmable segment with appropriate features to allow
the user to perform the point of sale, data collection, credit authorization, price look-up, inquiry, data entry and host communication functions. The point of sale features and functions are similiar
to the 3683 Point of Sale Terminal.
The 3684 mdl 2 is designed to perform the point of sale fi.mction
and to act as a master control in multiple terminal stores. There
are two self contained programmable segments, one to perform
the point of sale function similiar to the 3683, and the second to
perform the control function for communication with its own point
of sale segment and with additional loop-attached 3683 terminals.
In addition, the control segment controls the diskette and host
communication input/output functions.
Highlights: A modular input/output unit with features that provide
for an integrated or a limited distributed (cash drawer and display)
package. It features data entry by keyboard or from a Magnetic or
OEM OCR Wand, data output by an 8 digit numeric display; 32
indicators for operator guidance and machine status conditions,
and printing of input or output data under program control. It
features a cash drawer with removable till and adjustable divider
option. An integrated diskette is used for customer program storage, data :oond table storage, diagnostic programs and error logging. The minimum configuration must include a base unit plus a
keyboard and a display. (See Prerequisites.)
Base Unit: Consists of [1] programmable segments and storage
(Model 1 has 56K; Model 2 has 32K for the point of sale segment
and 56K for the control segment); [2] a matrix printer with a cash
receipt station; and [3] a 985,088 byte diskette drive. An Audible
Alarm, activated when predetermined events require operator
attention or intervention for system operation, is also part of the
base unit.
Printer: A matrix, bi-directional printer which prints a 38 character
print line at 15 characters per 25.4mm (1 inch) spacing. Vertical
line spacing is 6.3 lines per 25.4mm (1 inch) at a rate of 20 lines
per second. It uses an easily replaceable cartridge ribbon. In
addition to the standard character sets, an all-points addressable
capability allows (by customer programming) printing of logos and
special graphics. Additional print stations can be ordered by
special feature. The cash receipt station will accept 88.9mm
(3-1/2") diameter roll paper, 69.85mm (2-3/4") wide.
Diskette: A 985,088 byte Diskette 20 is used on both models.
The diskettes are formatted to 256 byte blocks. The diskette is
removable and interchangeable.
Communications: All 3684 models have BSC or SDLC communication capability. Depending on customer selection at system
generation, either or both protocols may reside in the terminal and
either may become active when loaded from the diskette.
System Attachment: The 3684 mdls 1 and 2 attach to any virtual
storage S/370 or 4341 Processor via a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller in 2701, 2703 Emulation Mode (or Integrated
Communications Adapter) for BSC systems and in NCP /VS mode
for SDLC systems. Attachment is over communication lines at
speeds of 1200, 2400 or 4800 bps.
Communications Facilities: The 3684 operates in data halfduplex point-to-point or multipoint mode on half-duplex or duplex
facilities at transmission speeds of 1200/600, 2400/1200,
4800/2400 bps on nonswitched facilities. In addition, the 3684
also operates in half-duplex point-to-point mode at transmission
speeds of 1200/600, 2400/1200 and 4800/2400 bps on
switched facilities. See M 2700 pages.
Modems: A 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5530) feature or an
external modem may be attached to a 3684. External modems
require the External Modem Interface (#3701) feature.
IBM Modems
Speed (bps)
3872 model 1
3874 model 1
2400/1200
4800/2400
Switched network backup operation with Manual Call and Manual
or Auto Answer is not available. For communications capabilities,
product utilization and special features, see M 2700, M 3872 and
M 3874 pages.
PREREQUISITES: [1] A 3704 or 3705 in 2701, 2703 Emulation
Mode (or Integrated Communications Adapter) for BSC systems
and in NCP /VS Mode for SDLC systems (with appropriate features
... see M 3704 and 3705 pages) attached to any virtual storage
S/370 or 4341 Processor ... [2] A keyboard (#4921, #4922 or
#4923) and a display (#3331 or #3332) must be ordered for
each 3684 ... see "Special Features."
Customer Responsibilities: 1) See 3680 Programmable Store
System in "Systems" for general description of customer responsibilities. 2) The following statement is to be included in proposals:
"It is agreed that IBM will have no responsibility to provide
warranty for maintenance service on an IBM 3684 Point of Sale
- Control Unit when cash is contained in the unit. It shall be the
purchaser's (customer's) responsibility to remove, control, and
replace cash so that IBM can fulfill its warranty and maintenance obligations.
The exception to the above shall be when a failure occurs in
the cash drawer and it cannot be opened prior to CE maintenance. In those cases the customer shall assign personnel to
assume responsibility for removal of the cash once the drawer
has opened."
Customer Set-Up: The 3684 will be shipped with customer set-up
instructions. The customer is responsible for:
- Unpacking, placement, set up and check out of the 3684 at
time of delivery, or when relocating the 3684.
- Relocation of the 3684 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
- Using and following the Problem Determination Procedures.
- Physical set up and connection of cables to TP lines/modems.
Environment:
"Systems."
See
3680
Programmable
Store
System
in
Maintenance: 3684s located in the immediate sales area may
preclude the acceptability of repair due to the public scrutiny and
loss of the selling location for customer service. In these cases,
the customer should remove the unit to a repair facility located
within the store for subsequent repair. At this location the CE will
repair and test the unit.
Supplies: [1] A black ribbon cartridge, IBM Part No. 7034640 or
equivalent, is required ... [2] Diskette 20, IBM Part No. 1766872
or equivalent, formatted with 256 byte blocks is required for 3684
mdls 1 and 2 ... [3] Roll paper 88.9mm (3.5 inch) diameter,
69.85mm (2.75 inch) wide is required for the Cash Receipt and
Journal Print stations.
SPECIFY:
[1] Voltage (120V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): #9890 for locking
plug, or #9891 for non-lock plug. If standard 2.8 meter (9 foot)
power cable is not desired, specify #9511 for 1.8 meter (6
foot) cable. NOTE: 120V AC is compatible with existing 115V
systems.
[2] Controller Designation: Specify #9491 on the first 3684 to be
used with a host system location and specify #9492 on each
additional 3684 in the network.
When #9491 is specified, additional information must be
specified as follows:
1) Specify one of the following to indicate magnetic tape density (media) used at the host system location. This tape media
is available under DOS/VS and OS/VS2 only.
#9412 -- 9 track 800 bps
#9413 -- 9 track 1 600 bps
#9414 -- 9 track 6250 bps
If magnetic tape is not used at the host system specify one
of the following media which is available under DOS/VS
only:
#9421 -- 2316 Disk Pack
#9422 -- 3336 Disk Pack mdl 1
#9423 -- 3336 Disk Pack mdl II
#9424 -- 3348 Data Module
The 3684 controller data will be sent via the specified media
to the IBM Programming Systems Representative at the host
system location for installation. If disk media is required, the
IBM disk will be returned to the plant location after installation of the controller data.
In Store Communications: The 3684 mdl 2 performs a master
control function for 3683s that are attached to the 3684 by a
2400 bps loop. Interactive communication capability exists be-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - --=-- =
--- =-----...,
": =
M 3684.2
May 79
DP Machines
3684 Point of Sale - Control Unit
(cont'd)
program control.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
limitation: Cannot be ordered with Display-Two Sided (#3332).
Prerequisite: Display-One Sided (#3331).
[4] Store Loop Polarity Tester: Order Store Loop Polarity Tester,
Part No. 1859559,
One is furnished at no charge to each 3684 mdl 2
site for testing store loop wiring.
MLC
PRICES:
3684
Mdt
1
2
5 yr
$127
154
Purchase
$3,450"
4,300"
MMMC/
AMMCR
$33.00
37.50
Plan Offering: Plan D Purchase Option: 55%
Maintenance: D
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 months
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model changes are field installable. The parts
removed for a model change become the property of IBM.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE: (there are no additional
installation charges)
From Model 1 to Model 2 .... $850
SPECIAL FEATURES
KEYBOARDS, GENERAL: All keyboards have customer legendable keybuttons except for 11 keybuttons which have molded legends. All single and double function keys are under customer
program control. Double keys may be moved, added, or deleted
by the user. Several colors and sizes of decal sheets with common legends will be shipped with the 3684. See accessories
section M 10000 for released keybuttons that may be ordered for
any unique customer requirement. Maximum: One keyboard
(#4921, #4922 or #4923). Field Installation: Yes.
35 KEY-MODIFIABLE KEYBOARD (#4921):
A 35 key keyboard
that includes:
5 Legended system control keys.
19 Unlegended function keys.
11 Keys with dual legends on each keybutton, "numeric" and
"transaction type", in the data entry arrangement.
48 KEY-MODIFIABLE KEYBOARD (Data Entry) (#4922):
A 48
key keyboard that includes:
5 Legended system control keys.
32 Unlegended function keys.
11 Keys with dual legends on each keybutton, "numeric" and
"transaction type", in the data entry arrangement.
48 KEY-MODIFIABLE KEYBOARD (Adding Machine) (#4923): A
48 key keyboard that includes:
5 Legended system control keys.
32 Unlegended function keys.
11 Keys with round numeric leg ended keybuttons in the adding
machine arrangement.
DISPLAY-ONE SIDED (#3331).
An operator display and guidance unit consisting of an 8-digit numeric display and 32 indicators for operator guidance and machine status. The display is
used to display numeric input or output data such as item number,
credit number, totals, amount due, etc. The 32 indicator lights
point to labels thai describe: (1) Machine status such as: Ready,
Wait, Offline, etc., (2) step by step guidance to lead the operator
through a transaction or procedure. The unit will be shipped with
the indicalors labeled. However, Ihe customer may relabel all bul
five indicators and, under customer program control, define their
use. A legend sheet with a variety of legends will be shipped with
each
machine.
Maximum:
One.
Field Installation:
Yes.
limitation: Cannot be ordered with Display-Two Sided (#3332).
DISPLAY-TWO SIDED (#3332).
An operator and customer display guidance unit which contains all the functions of Display-One
Sided (#3331) plus an 8-digit numeric display with 6 indicators on
the back of the unit for customer viewing. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Display-One
Sided (#3331) or Display-Customer Remote (#3333).
DISPLAY-CUSTOMER REMOTE (#3333). A customer display and
status indicator unit that is connected to the 3684 by a 3.6 meter
(12 foot) cable. The unit consists of an 8-digit numeric display
and 12 indicators (6 are shipped with labels and 6 without). All are
relegendable. The display and indicators are under customer
•• Pilot Test Plan available. Purchase Pilot Option: 70%.
DISTRIBUTED DISPLAY ATTACHMENT (#3335).
Provides for
distributing Display-One Sided (#3331) or Display-Two Sided
(#3332) up to 3.6 meters (12 feet) from the 3684 base.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Display-One
Sided (#3331) or Display-Two Sided (#3332).
CASH DRAWER-INTEGRATED FIRST (#1572).
Provides a cash
drawer with removable till that is contained within the 3684 base
unit. The cash drawer has a media slot that will accommodate
approximately a 25mm (1 inch) stack of documents. Opening the
cash drawer is under program control. A cash drawer lock is
provided. See note below for special ordering instructions for
lock. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Only
one additional cash drawer may be ordered -- either Cash DrawerIntegrated Second (# 1573), Cash Drawer-Distributed (#1575), or
OEM Cash Drawer Attachment (#1577).
CASH DRAWER-INTEGRATED SECOND (#1573).
Provides a
second integrated cash drawer with housing and removable till that
is installed directly below Cash Drawer-Integrated First (#1572).
Functionally equivalent to Cash Drawer-Integrated First (#1572).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Cash
Drawer-Integrated First (#1572).
CASH DRAWER-DISTRIBUTED (#1575).
Provides a distributed
cash drawer with housing and removable till that can be located
up to 3.6 meters (12 feet) from the 3684 base. Functionally equivalent to Cash Drawer-Integrated First (#1572). Maximum: Two if
no other cash drawer is ordered. One if Cash Drawer-Integrated
First (#1572) or OEM Cash Drawer Attachment (#1577) is ordered. Field Installation: Yes.
OEM CASH DRAWER ATTACHMENT (#1577).
Provides an IBM
defined interface with cable and plug for attaching an OEM Cash
Drawer. Maximum: Two if no IBM Cash Drawer is installed. One if
a Cash Drawer-Distributed First (#1572) or Cash DrawerDistributed
(#1575) is ordered.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Limitation: An attached OEM Cash Drawer must meet the IBM
defined interface.
Notes:
1) For cash drawer tills and covers, see M 10000 pages.
2) Specify #9799 for each IBM cash drawer ordered (#1572,
#1573 or #1575) if a till with movable bill dividers is desired.
3) Cash Drawer Lock: Each IBM cash drawer (#1572, #1573
or #1575) is equipped with a lock. A group of 25 unique
lock numbers has been reserved to allow the customer to
specify identical lock types on all terminals. This allows all
cash drawers to be opened with the same key. If this is
desired, specify one of the following features on the cash
drawer order:
#9101
#9106
#9111
#9116
#9121
9102
9107
9112
9117
9122
9108
9113
9118
9103
9123
9109
9119
9104
9114
9124
9105
9115
9125
9110
9120
If none is specified, a lock will be selected at random from a
larger group of lock types. Each cash drawer will be shipped
with two cash drawer keys.
JOURNAL PRINTER (#4695).
Provides a journal print station
with a journal roll take-up mechanism. Print line length is 38
characters at 15 characters per 25.4mm (1 inch) spacing. Vertical
line spacing 6.3 lines per 25.4mm (1 inch) at a rate of 20 lines
per second. The all-points addressable characteristics of the
printer permit the customer to highlight exceptions through special
graphics designed and controlled by user programming. A
12.7mm (1/2") signature window is provided. The journal station
will accept 88.9mm (3-1/2") dia(T1eter roll paper, 69.85mm (23/4") wide. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
JOURNAL LOCK (#4690).
Provides a special lock and security
cover over the printed journal. (See note below for special lock
selection.) Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Journal Printer (#4695).
MANAGER KEYLOCK (#4905).
Provides a keylock mounted on
the keyboard that allows customer programming to interrogate the
position of the keylock when the key is operated. Possible uses
include the enforcement of a manager override to a restricted
security function. (See Note below for special lock selection.)
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Keyboard #4921, #4922, or #4923.
DISKETTE COVER LOCK (#3310). Provides a lock for the diskette cover. (See note below for special lock selection.) Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
NOTE: Three groups of 10 unique specify numbers have been
reserved to allow a customer to order a specific journal lock,
Not to be reproduced without written permisSion.
--------- --- ------= ==- = =
~
DP Machines
3684 Point of Sale - Control Unit (cont'd)
manager key lock or diskette cover lock for each terminal.
(The 3683 and 3684 use the same journal lock and manager
lock numbers, therefore all terminals within a store could
have the same lock if desired.) If the same lock is desired on
the journal, manager keylock and diskette cover, specify the
respective locks with the same value in the last digit. That
is, if #9203, #9303 and #9213 are specified, the same
lock (#9203) will be installed at all locations.
Journal Lock
Manager Keylock
Diskette Cover Lock
#9201
#9206
#9301
#9306
#9211
#9216
9202
9207
9302
9307
9212
9217
9203
9208
9303
9308
9213
9218
9204
9209
9304
9309
9214
9219
9205
9210
9305
9310
9215
9220
If none is specified, a lock will be selected at random from a
larger group of lock types. Each lock feature will be shipped
with two keys. For additional or replacement keys, refer to
M 10000 pages.
VALIDATION PRINTER (#8725).
Provides for a flat bed document validation station for printing on inserted forms. Prints 38
characters per line at 15 characters per 25.4mm (1 inch). Vertical
line spacing is 6.3 lines per 25.4mm (1 inch) at a rate of 20 lines
per second. The all-points addressible characteristics of the printer allow logos, special graphics and highlighting to be designed
and printed by user programming.
Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
STORAGE INCREMENTS:
NOTES: 1) Storage increments apply to the point-of-sale segment
of the 3684 (mdl 2 only) ... 2) When storage is upgraded by field
installation, the new Storage Increment feature displaces the old.
Removed parts belong to the customer.
STORAGE INCREMENT - 8K (#7710).
Provides an additional
8,192 bytes of storage. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Storage Increment - 16K
(#7720) or Storage Increment - 24K (#7730).
STORAGE INCREMENT - 16K (#7720).
Provides an additional
16,384 bytes of storage. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Storage Increment- 8K
(#7710) or Storage Increment - 24K (#7730).
STORAGE INCREMENT - 24K (#7730).
Provides an additional
24,576 bytes of storage. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Storage Increment -- 8K
(#7710) or Storage Increment - 16K (#7720).
TOTALS RETENTION (#8010). Provides an additional 240 bytes
of customer programmable storage that is powered by its own
battery to protect loss of information such as totals, transaction
number, terminal address, etc., when power is turned off or power
interruptions occur. An early warning status condition will be given
to the program when the battery needs replacing. Replacement
batteries are to be provided, installed, and removed by the customer. IBM will replace the battery if requested by the customer
on a time and material basis. See M10000 pages for battery life
characteristics and types of batteries required for replacement.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Applies to the
3684 mdl 1 and to the point of sale segment of the 3684 mdl 2.
STORAGE RETENTION (#7785).
Provides an internal battery
and charger to power storage during a power interruption. All data
and programs are protected so that a transaction in process when
power was interrupted will continue when primary power is restored. The duration of storage retention depends on the charged
state of the battery. When fully charged, storage will be retained
for approximately 12 minutes for a model 1 and approximately 6
minutes for a model 2. The number of times the battery is discharged greatly affects battery life, therefore facilities are provided
to allow the customer, through programming, to deactivate the
battery for scheduled power off conditions such as store closing.
Replacement batteries are to be provided, installed, and removed
by the customer. IBM will replace the battery if requested by the
customer on a time and material basis. Replacement batteries may
be ordered through IBM (see M 10000 pages) or through other
sources that meet the battery specifications as defined by IBM.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
M 3684.3
May 79
Adapter (#5422). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Note: No Expansion Feature is required on the 3684 mdl 2 to
install any applicable features.
A hand operated wand
MAGNETIC WAND READER (#4945).
used to read single track delta distance encoded magnetic merchandise tickets, credit cards, employee badges, etc. The small
light-weight wand attached via a 1.2 meter (4 foot) long flexible
cord, allows encoded merchandise tickets to be read without
removing them from the merchandise. See Note below. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
OCR Wand Adapter (#5422). Prerequisite: Expansion Feature
(#3890) must be installed on the 3684 mdl 1.
Note -- The minimum encoding specifications that must be met
by suppliers of credit cards, merchandise tickets and employee
badges will be furnished upon request.
OCR WAND ADAPTER (#5422). Provides an adapter to support
the attachment of an OEM OCR Wand (Recognition Products, Inc.,
OCR Wand or equivalent that meets the OCR Wand Interface
SpeCifications dated 10/17/75 to the 3653 Point of Sale Terminal). This feature provides a 1.83 meter (6 foot) cable with an
ITT --Cannon BDBC-25S type connector to attach the OEM OCR
Wand unit. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Magnetic Wand Reader (#4945).
Prerequisite: Expansion Feature (#3890) must be installed on
3684 mdl 1.
TELECOMMUNICATION FEATURES
A 3684 may be equipped with either the External Modem Interface
or the 1200 bps Integrated Modem feature.
Note: A 6.1 meter (20 foot) communication cable is provided
for attachment to a stand-alone modem or to communications
facility when an integrated modem is used. If a standard 6.1
meter communication cable is not desired, specify: #9061 for
3.0 meter (10 foot) cable, #9062 for 9.1 meter (30 foot) cable,
or #9063 for 12.2 meter (40 foot) cable.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5530). Provides an integrated modem for operation over switched or nonswitched communication facilities at 1200 bps. Auto answer is provided when operating over switched network. No external modem is required.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. limitation: Cannot be
installed with External Modem Interface (#3701). Specify: Specify
the following when ordering this modem:
Specify One:
#9481 for Switched Network
#9482 for Nonswitched Network
If #9482 Nonswitched Network is specified, also specify one:
#9651 for 4 wire facility
#9652 for 2 wire facility
Note: If Switched Network (#9481) is specified, a data access
arrangement type CBS, or FCC registered equivalent is required.
EXTERNAL MODEM INTERFACE (#3701).
Provides an EIA
interface for attachment of an IBM or other external modem.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be
ordered with 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5530). Specify:
Specify the following as applicable:
[1] Specify #9695 if the 3684 is required to provide clocking.
[2] Specify one of the following transmission speeds:
- #9820 for 1200 bps.
- #9822 for 2400 bps.
- #9823 for 4800 bps.
NOTE: Half speeds are derived through programming.
[3] Specify #9126 if the IBM 3872 or 3874 Modem is ordered.
IML-WRITE ADAPTER (#4634). [Mdl 2 only] Provides the 3684
mdl 2 with the ability to write an IML (initial Machine Load) tape
on a user provided tape cassette recorder (refer to IBM 3680
Programmable Store System Introduction Manual, [SRL number to
be provided] for Cassette Recorder interface requirement), which
can be read by a 3683 Point of Sale Terminal equipped with an
IML-Read Adapter (#4633) feature. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
EXPANSION FEATURE (#3890).
[Mdl 1 only] Provides additional facilities on the 3684 mdl 1 to accommodate features that
cannot be installed on the base unit. This feature is a prerequisite
to install the Magnetic Wand Reader (#4945) or the OCR Wand
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-----_.------------ - ---
--- ----
M 3684.4
Mav 79
DP Machines
3684 Point of Sale - Control Unit
Special Feature Prices:
35 Key-modifiable Keybd #4921
46 Key-modifiable Keybd 4922
48 Key-modifiable Keybd 4923
Display-One Sided
3331
Display-Two Sided
3332
Display-Customer Remote 3333
Dist Display Attach
3335
Cash Drawer-Int-Flrst
1572
Cash Drawer-Int-Second
1573
Cah Drawer-Distributed
1575
OEM Cash Drawer Attach 1577
Journal Printer
4695
4690
Journal Lock
4905
Manager Keylock
Diskette Cover Lock
3310
Validation Printer
8725
Storage Increment-8K
7710
Storage Increment-16K
7720
Storage Increment-24K
7730
6010
Totals Retention
7785
Storage Retention
4634
IML-Wrlte Adapter
Expansion Feature
3890
Magnetic Wand Reader
4945
OCR Wand Adapter
5422
1200 bps Int Modem
5530
External Modem Interface 3701
(cont'd)
MMMC/
MLC
5 yr
Purchase AMMCR
$
6
6
6
7
13
8
1
5
7
7
1
4
1
1
1
6
3.
6
9
5
6
6
3
14
5
15
10
$
150
165
165
200
360
240
15
150
230
230
30
100
30
30
30
170
113
225
338
130
175
175
75
391
185
480
360
$ 1.50
1.50
1.50
2.00
3.00
1.50
1.00
1.00
1.00
.50
1.00
1.00
.50
.50
.50
1.00
1.00
1.00
.50
3.00
.50
2.50
.50
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - -----==::.:
- -==--';' ==
M 3704.1
Jul79
DP Machines
Terminal
terminals
indicated
"Special
IBM 3704 COMMUNICATIONS
CONTROLLER
3704 LOCAL ATTACHMENT (START /STOP)
Purpose: The 3704 attaches to any S/370 or 4300 Processor or,
in 2701/2702/2703 Emulation Mode only, to S/360 mdls 30
(submodels E or F), 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 and 195 for
communication with local or remote I/O devices over various
common carrier provided or customer owned communication facilities. NOTE: See "Programming" and "SCP" sales manual pages
for attachment capability.
In addition to terminals being attached to the 3704 through common carrier facilities, they may also be conneCted directly to the
3704 units using #4713. Below are the attachable terminals and
the respective feature #s. Cable groups may be traced via this
feature # listing and the feature #s listed in the respective Physical Planning Manuals. Ensure that the cable groups selected from
the Physical Planning Manuals have the 25 pin data set interface.
#4713 allows only two terminals to be attached, one per 3704 25
pin data set interface. There must be corresponding Business
Machine Clocks in both the terminal and the 3704.
Models: The 3704 is available in four models each of which
allows attachment of up to 32 communication lines.
Storage (bytes)
Model
A1
A2
A3
A4
16K
32K
48K
64K
Terminal
Highlights: A modular, programmable unit which greatly expands
the communications capabilities of S/360, S/370 and 4300 systems. By virtue of its modularity and programmability, the 3704
boasts a high degree of flexibility in tailoring to a teleprocessing
system's requirements. Also, it can relieve the CPU of many TP
functions, including, but not limited to, line control, polling, addressing, code translation and error recovery.
The 3704 is housed in a 36" x 24" x 57" cabinet which contains
the Central Control Unit and the Control Panel. This cabinet also
accommodates storage as indicated above, a Remote Program
Loader or Channel Adapter, a Communication Scanner, Line Interface Bases and Line Sets to allow attachment of up to 32 communication lines.
The maximum number of communication lines attachable is a
function of the speed of the lines, whether a Channel Adapter or
Remote Program Loader is installed, the type of Communication
Scanner installed, and the mode of operation.
The HONE Configurator is available to assist In configuring a 3704
to a specific TP network's requirements ... see "Specify."
Communication Facilities: The 3704 operates over common
carrier provided or equivalent customer owned communication
facilities. For information concerning these facilities, see the M
2700 pages, this section. The alphameric designations in the
following pages correspond to those in the M2700 pages.
MACHINE ORGANIZATION
St(lrHj-«
o::-g
2020
~E
1200
2400
z"
oof---;----l
2025
2701
u~
0...:.:
z·--=
«~
1200
2000
2400
0:;'"
0";
600
1200
2000
2400
""
~ E
1200
600
1200
2400
Commuilication
Scanner Type 2
~
z~
::>g
(~1642)
without
ComIT'unic(l.tion
...J ~
Scanner Expansion
oS
""~
(~909Q)
>-'0
~§
'"
"c
2703
2715 mdl2
2772
2780
3115
"
3125
-JS
u
'"
3135/3 \38
0::
""
4331
«
>-
E
E
Z
W
U
Communication
or
Scanner Type 1
(~1641), or
f----'--'--I CommUllicatioll
0
u
0
>-
Scanner fype 2
("'16 4 2) with
CotllrmmicatiOIl
SC~lnl!C'r
1200
1200
1200
1200
600
1200
600
1200
600
1200
600
1200
2400
1200
1200
...J
0
u$?
ExpJ!ls ion
(~9090)
NOTES: I) Required for models A2, A3 and A4, or Communication Scanner
Type 2 (#1642) on model AI.
2) A minimum of one Business Machine Clock (#4650) is required.
See Special Features.
2068
9115 or 9120
9115 or 9120
9115 or 9120
7106 w 9121
9115 or 9120
9012
7111 or 7113 w 9540 and 3719
7112 w 9541 and 3719
7112 w 9542 and 3719
1610 w 2165
1610 w 2165
1525
1525
Operation of the 3704 in Start/Stop mode at speeds greater than
600 bps is limited to common carrier leased facilities; For attachment to the 2711 Line Adapter Unit, use #4711 and/or #4714.
The terminals may also communicate with a 3704 wia Limited
Distance Line Adapters ... see Chart 1, M2700 pages.
c-~
c
...J~
.....
Speed (bps) Terminal Feature #(s)
1\31
,
w
1031A/I034
1061
2740 mdll
2740 mdl2
Terminal
I
«'"
Devices: The 3704 can communicate with the following
over the communication facilities and at the speeds
... for further information on features required, see
Features" on the following pages.
3271 mdll,2,1I,12
3275 mdll,2,1l,12
3276
3601/3602
3614
3651 mdI25/50/75
3704/3705
12oo
1200
1200
2400
600
1200
2000
2400
3735
3741
3747
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
1200
1200
1200
7690
7690
7690
7690
7551 w 7552
7551 w 7552
7551 w 7552
2074 w 4703
2074 w 4703
7551 w 7541
7698 w 7401
7698 w 7692
7698 w 7693
7705 w 7710
7705
7705 w 9122
7705 w 9110
7141
7141
7141
7141
4640 w 9649
4640 w 9649
See 4331 Communications
Adapter (#1601) for 'details
and prerequisites.
7820
7820
3701 w 9491 & 6301
4501 or 6301 w 3701
3701 w 6301
7708
4650 w 9607
4650 w 9608
4650 w 9609
4650 w 9610
7705 w SOlO
7705 w 9122
7705 w 9122
---- --- =":' =
--- ---= =- - ---
M 3704.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3704 Communications Controller
Terminal
Speed (bps) Terminal Feature #(s)
3767 [attaches
via Line Set 1F
(#4716) only]
3771/3773/
3774/3775
3780
3791
Series/1
5010 (S/7)
5110 (2772)
5231 md12
5320 (S/32)
5340 (S/34)
5404/6/8/10/
12/15
600
1200
9531 w 3719
9532 w 3719
Set positions depending on feature #s selected. The required
feature or features is based on the number of high speed lines
installed and their positions.
#9001 -- Blocks installation of a Line Set in Position 8 of LIB
Type 1 in LIB Position 2.
1200
1200
2400
1200
600
1200
1200
2000
2400
1200
2400
1200
600
1200
600
1200
600
1200
2000
2400
1482 w 3701
7705 w 9122 and 9702
7705 w 9121 and 9704
3701 w 6301
2074·· or 2094··
2074·· or 2094··
2074 w 4800 and 4703
2074 w 4800 and 4703
2074 w 4800 and 4703
2074 w 3701
2074 w 4780 and 9334 and 9751
2074 w 3701 and 4703
2074 w 3701 and 4703
2500 w 3701 and 4703
2500 w 3701 and 4703
2074 w 4703 & 9750 & 9481 & 2838
2074 w 4703 & 9751 & 9481 & 2838
2074 w 4703 & 9752 & 9481 & 2839
2074 w 4703 & 9753 & 9481 & 2839
Series/1 communication feature must have internal clock
jumper installed.
Customer Responsibilities: See M2700 pages, this section. Also
see the 3704/3705 Programming sales manual pages for attachment capability and refer to Host Systems Programming pages for
possible restrictions to any of the above attachments.
PREREQUISITES: The 3704 requires a control unit position on a
system
channel.
NOTE: Attachment
to
S/360
is
in
2701,2702,2703 Emulation Mode only.
S/360 mdls 30 (submodels E & F), 40, 50 - multiplexer channel
(standard) ... see 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/360 mdls 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75, 195 - multiplexer channel
of 2870 .,. see 2870.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 - Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
S/370 mdls 135 thru mdl 158 (standard) ... see appropriate unit.
byte multiplexer channel
S/370 mdls 165, 168, 195 -- multiplexer channel of 2870 ... see
2870.
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one is
standard) ... see 3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor see 3033.
byte multiplexer channel (2 are standard) ...
4331 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (special feature) ...
see 4331.
4341 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (1 is standard) ... see
4341.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-o360, S/370 -- GC20-0001
Specify:
#9002 -- Blocks installation of a Line Set in Position 7 of LIB
Type 1 in LIB Position 2.
Maximum: One each of the above. Prerequisites: Communication Scanner Type 2 (# 1642) and Line Interface Base Type A 1
(#4700). Field Installation: Yes.
PRICES:
Mdl
3704
A1
A2
A3
A4
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
MAC/
MRC
$
711 $
777
843
909
605
661
717
773
Purchase
MMMC
$22,100
23,275
24,450
25,625
$149
178
208
238
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Control Unit
Purchase Option: 60%
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 3
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Model Changes: Field installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
Al
To
A1
A2
A3
A4
A2
$1,175
A3
$2,350
1,175
A4
$3,525
2,350
1,175
• Model downgrade.
SPECIAL FEATURES
EXPANSION FEATURE (#3600).
Required for models A2, A3
and A4 or Communication Scanner Type 2 (# 1642) on model AI.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
CHANNEL ATTACHMENT FEATURES
CHANNEL ADAPTER, TYPE 1 (#1541). For communication with
a S/360, S/370 or 4300 byte multiplexer channel. All such communications are accomplished by one, two, three or four byte
transfers, with deselection and reselection between each transfer.
Data transfer rates are primarily dependent upon the 3704's internal processing requirements. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with Remote Program Loader
(#6260).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8002).
To attach Channel Adapter,
Type 1 (#1541) to two S/360, S/370 or 4300 channels, which
may be on the same CPU or on two different CPUs. The Channel
Adapter so equipped will, however, be capable of operation on
only one channel at a time. Selection of which channel is to be
operable is by means of a manual switch on the control panel.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Channel
Adapter, Type 1 (# 1541).
COMMUNICATION SCANNER FEATURES
[1] Voltage (AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V or
#9904 for 230 V.
[2] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on floor.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[4] For model A2, A3 or A4, Expansion Feature (#3600) is required ... see Special Features.
[5] Communication Cable Order Form: A completed form
must be submitted for: (1) Each new machine order
(2) Each
order where the added feature requires external
cable. For cabling information, see appropriate Installation
Manual, Physical Planning: S/360 - GC22-6820 .,. S/370 -GC22-7004 ... 4300 -- GA27-3006.
[7] Address Substitution (#9001, #9002). Required when lines at
speeds greater than 19.2K bps and Communication Scanner
Type 2 (# 1642) with Communication Scanner ExpanSion
(#9090) are ordered. Address Substitution allows multiple
scanning of one Line Set's address at the expense of NOT
scanning another Line Set's address and is invoked by the
software support. The feature blocks scanning of up to two Line
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 1 (#1641).
The interface
between the communication line attachment features and the
central control unit. #1641 uses the 3704 interrupt facilities to
allow the program to perform character assembly and disassembly,
and allows for program control of line control, control character
recognition, code translation and recovery functions. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Communication Scanner, Type 2 (#1642). Prerequisite: At least
one Business Machine Clock (#4650).
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 2 (#1642).
The interface
between the communication line attachment features and the
central control unit. # 1642 assembles and disassembles characters automatically, provides character buffering for each line, and
allows the program control of line control, control character recognition, code translation and recovery functions. The basic scanner
is operational with one Line Interface Base Type A1 (#4700) only.
Maximum: One. Specify: Communication Scanner Expansion
(#9090) to permit installation of two LlBs of any types except LIB
Type 1 (#4701). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with Communication Scanner Type 1 (#1641). When
#9090 is specified, only one LIB Type 1 (#4701) can be installed
with #1642. Prerequisites: Expansion Feature (#3600) and at
least one Business Machine Clock (#4650).
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--------- --- - - --==-==';'=
- ---
M 3704.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3704 Communications Controller
COMMUNICATION LINE ATTACHMENT FEATURES
Communication lines are attached to the 3704 through Line Interface Bases, of which there are several different types, to accommodate the various types of line terminations. Depending upon
type, these LlBs will house from one to eight Line Sets each,
which will allow attachment of from one to sixteen communication
lines. The 3704 can house a maximum of two of these LlBs,
allowing up to 32 lines to be attached. Note that the LIB positions
in the 3704 must be specified ... see "LIB Position Designators"
at end of this section.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 1 (#4701). For attachment of up
to eight of Line Sets Types 1 A, 1 B, 1 C, 10, 1 E, 1 F or 1 H, in any
combination. In lieu of one of these eight Line Sets, ONE of the
following can be attached to this LIB:
a) Modem Attachment Base (#5101) with up to two of Line Sets
1 L or 1 M, or one of each.
b) Modem Attachment Base with Auto Answer (#5102) with up to
two of Line Set 1 P.
c) One Line Set Type 1 X (#4754) or 1 Y (#4755) ... see Duplex
Data Attachment Base (#3500).
d) One Line Set 10 (#4771) ... Note: This Line Set is installed in
lieu of two of the eight Line Sets.
Maximum: Two with Communication Scanner, Type 1 (#1641) ...
one with Communication Scanner Type 2 (# 1642). Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with
other type LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number
of LlBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner Typ.e 1 (# 1641), or
Type 2 (#1642) with Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090).
LINE SET, TYPE 1A (#4711).
[Low speed External Line Interface] For attachment of two start/stop communication lines at
speeds up to 1200 bps, each of which has an EIA RS232C interface for attachment to an external modem. Maximum: Eight per
LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per LIB Type A 1 (#4700). Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with
other type Line Sets, the above maximums apply to the TOTAL
number of Line Sets per LIB. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base
Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1 (#4700), plus a Business Machine
Clock(s) (#4650), assigned by the program to this Line Set.
LINE SET, TYPE 1B (#4712).
[Low Speed Duplex External
Modem] Provides for attachment of one start/stop duplex communication line which has an EIA RS232C interface at speeds up
to 1200 bps. This Line Set effectively combines two 3704 communication line ports into a true full-duplex data port. Maximum:
Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per LIB Type A1 (#4700).
Limitations: Not program supported. When installed in conjunction
with other type Line Sets, the above maximums apply to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type A 1
(#4700), plus a Business Machine Clock (#4650) assigned by the
program to this Line Set.
[Low Speed Local Attachment]
LINE SET, TYPE 1C (#4713).
For attachment of two half-duplex IBM start/stop terminals at
speeds up to 1200 bps via IBM provided cables. Modems are not
required. Note: The attached terminal must provide a Business
Machine Clock and external modem cable to which the 3704 Line
Set 1 C cable will connect. Total cable length must not exceed 200
feet. Maximum: Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per LIB
Type A1 (#4700). Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: When
installed in combination with other type Line Sets, the above
maximums apply to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1
(#4700), plus a Business Machine Clock(s), (#4650), specified
for the same speed as the terminal's clock.
LINE SET, TYPE 10 (#4714).
[Medium Speed External Line
Interface] For attachment of two start/stop or synchronous communication lines at speeds up to 9600 bps, each of which has an
EIA RS232C interface for attachment to an external modem.
Maximum: Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per LIB Type A1
(#4700). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in
combination with other type Line Sets, the above maximums apply
to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB. Prerequisite: Line
Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1 (#4700). For speed in
excess of 4800 bps, see Address Substitution and Scan Limits
under "Specify."
LINE SET, TYPE 1E (#4715).
[Auto-Call Unit] Provides two
RS366 interfaces for attachment of external automatic calling
units. Maximum: Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per LIB
Type A1 (#4700). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with other type Line Sets, the above maxImums apply to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB.
Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1
(#4700).
LINE SET, TYPE 1F (#4716). [Medium Speed Local Attachment]
For local attachment of two half-duplex, synchronous IBM terminals at speeds up to 2400 bps via IBM-provided cables. Modems
are not required. This Line Set requires different cable groups
depending upon terminal type. For cabling information see Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004; for Remote, see
Multiplexers, GA27-3006. Note: The attached terminal must be
equipped with a Business Machine Clock and must provide a
standard external cable to which the 3704 Line Set Type 1 F
external cable will connect. Total cable length must not exceed
100 feet. Maximum: Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or four per
LIB Type A1 (#4700). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When
installed in combination with other type Line Sets, the above
maximums apply to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type A 1
(#4700), plus a Business Machine Clock(s), (#4650), specified
for the same speed as the terminal's Business Machine Clock.
LINE SET, TYPE 1H (#4718),
[Medium Speed Duplex External
Modem] For attachment of one duplex synchronous communication line at a speed up to 9600 bps which has an EIA RS232C
interface for attachment to an external modem. This Line Set
provides for the transmission of data simultaneously in a transmit
and receive mode. Maximum: Eight per LIB Type 1 (#4701) or
four per LIB Type A 1 (#4700). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation:
When installed in combination with other type Line Sets, the above
maximums apply to the TOTAL number of Line Sets per LIB.
Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1
(#4700). For speed in excess of 4800 bps, see Address Substitution and Scan Limits under "Specify."
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE A1 (#4700),
For attachment of
up to two synchronous Line Sets (Type 1 G or 1 J) and/or up to
four Line Sets 1 A, 1B, 1 C, 10, 1 E, 1 F or 1 H, in any combination.
In lieu of one of these four Line Sets, ONE of the following can be
attached to this LIB:
a) Modem Attachment Base (#5101) with up to two of Line Sets
1 L or 1 M, or one of each.
b) Modem Attachment Base with Auto Answer (#5102) with up to
two of Line Set 1 P.
c) One Line Set Type 1X (#4754) or 1Y (#4755) ... see Duplex
Data Attachment Base (#3500).
d) One Line Set Type 10 (#4771) ... Note: This Line Set is
installed in lieu of two of the four Line Sets.
Maximum: Two if Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090) is
specifif'd with Communication Scanner Type 2 (# 1642) ... without
#9090, maximum is one. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: See
Communication Scanner Type 2 (#1642). When installed in combination with other type LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the
TOT AL number of LlBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner
Type 2 (# 1642).
LINE SET, TYPE 1G (#4717),
[High Speed External Modem]
For attachment of one synchronous communication line for operation at 19.2K, 40.8K or 50.0K bps. Has a digital interface for
attachment to a switched or leased "wideband" external modem.
Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type A1 (#4700) and Communication Scanner Type 2
(# 1642). If Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090) is ordered with #1642, see "Address Substitution" under "Specify."
LINE SET, TYPE 1J (#4719).
[External Mil Std 188C Modem]
For attachment of one start/stop or synchronous communication
line at a speed of up to 50.0K bps via an external modem having
an interface that conforms to the requirements in Section 7.2.1 of
MIL STD 188C. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type A 1 (# 4 700) and COMmunication Scanner Type 2 (# 1642). If Communication Scanner
Expansion (#9090) is ordered with #1642, see "Address
Substitution" under "Specify."
MODEM ATTACHMENT BASE - 2400 BPS (#5101). Provides for
attachment of up to two of Line Set Type 1 L or 1 M (in any combination). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations:
Cannot be installed with any of the following: Duplex Data Attachment (#3500), Line Set Type 10 (#4771), Modem Attachment
Base with Auto-Answer - 2400 bps (#5102), or Remote Program
Loader (#6260). Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 1
(#4701) or Type A1 (#4700).
LINE SET TYPE 1L (#4751).
[IBM 2400 bps Leased Point-toPoint Integrated Modem]
For attachment of one synchronous
leased line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps. This Line Set includes
one IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem equipped with Receive
Equalization which is suitable for communication over a leased
voice grade channel with an IBM 3872 or equivalent modem similiarIy equipped ... no external modem is required. Maximum: Two.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination
with Line Set Type 1 M, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL
number of Line Sets. Prerequisite: Modem Attachment Base 2400 bps (#5101).
LINE SET, TYPE 1M (#47:;2), [IBM 2400 bps Leased Multi-point
Control Integrated Modem] For attachment of one synchronous
leased line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps. This Line Set includes
one IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem which is suitable for commu-
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-------- -------- --,= =- - =--':" =
M 3704.4
Jul79
_.
DP Machines
3704 Communications Controller
nication over a leased voice grade channel with a simi liar IBM
3872 or equivalent modem equipped with both transmit and receive
equalization ... no external modem is required. Maximum: Two.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination
with Line Set Type 1 L, the maximum of two appiies to the TOTAL
number of Line Sets. Prerequisite: Modem Attachment Base 2400 bps (#51 01).
MODEM ATTACHMENT BASE WITH AUTO ANSWER - 2400 BPS
(#5102).
For attachment of up to two of Line Set Type 1P.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be
installed with any of the following: Duplex Data Attachment Base
(#3500), Line Set Type 10 (#4771), Modem Attachment Base 2400 bps (#51 01). Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 1
(#4701) or Type A1 (#4700).
LINE SET, TYPE 1 P (#4761). [IBM 2400 bps Switched Network,
Integrated Modem] For attachment of one synchronous switched
line at speed of 2400 or 1200 bps. Used for operation over the
Public Switched Network via Common Carrier Data Coupler Type
CBS (or equivalent). Automatic answering of incoming calls will be
performed by the modem. Automatic equalization is effected at the
beginning of each call. This modem communicates with either an
IBM 2400/1200 bps Integrated Modem or the 3872 Modem equipped with a Switched Network feature ... no external modem is
required. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Modem Attachment Base with Auto Answer - 2400 bps (#5102).
LINE SET, TYPE 1Q (#4771). [IBM 2400 bps Switched Network
Integrated Modem with Automatic Call Originate] For attachment
of one synchronous switched line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps.
This Line Set includes one IBM 2400 bps Integrated Modem
equipped with Auto-Answer and Automatic Call Originate functions.
It is suitable for automatically dialing a remote terminal, the automatic answering of an incoming call, and is capable of communicating over the Public Switched Network with either an IBM
2400/1200 bps Integrated Modem or 3872 Modem equipped with
either the Switched Network feature or Automatic Call Originate
feature ... (the answering modem must be equipped with an autoanswer capability). This modem provides control to the Common
Carrier Data Coupler Type CBS (or equivalent) to dial telephone
numbers and to provide on-hook/off-hook control. No external
modem is required. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: Can only be used with a Rotary Dial System. Cannot
be installed with Modem Attachment Base - 2400 bps (#51 01),
Modem Attachment Base with Auto Answer - 2400 bps (#5102) or
Duplex Data Attachment Base (#3500). Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1 (#4700).
DUPLEX DATA ATTACHMENT BASE - 2400 BPS (#3500). For
attachment of up to two of Line Set Type 1 X or 1 Y (in any combination). Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations:
Cannot be installed with any of the following:· Line Set Type 10
(#4771), Modem Attachment Base - 2400 bps (#5101), Modem
Attachment Base with Auto Answer - 2400 bps (#5102), or Remote Program Loader (#6260). Prerequisite: Line Interface Base
Type 1 (#4701) or Type A1 (#4700).
LINE SET, TYPE 1X (#4754). [IBM 2400 bps Leased Point-toPoint Duplex Data Integrated Modem] For attachment of one
Duplex synchronous leased line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps.
This Line Set includes one IBM 2400/1200 bps Leased Line
Integrated Duplex Modem with Receive Equalization suitable for
leased duplex point-to-point operation... no external modem is
required. This integrated modem must talk to a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or
equivalent IBM modem. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: When installed in combination with Line Set Type 1Y,
the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number of Line Sets.
Prerequisite: Duplex Data Attachment Base - 2400 bps (#3500).
LINE SET, TYPE 1Y (#4755). [IBM 2400 bps Multi-Point Master
Duplex Data Integrated Modem] For attachment of one duplex
synchronous leased line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps. This Line
Set includes one IBM 2400/1200 bps Leased Line Integrated
Duplex Modem without equalization suitable for leased duplex
multi-point master operation ... no external modem is required.
This integrated modem must talk to a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or equivalent
IBM modem. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation:
When installed in combination with Line. Set Type 1 X, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number of Line Sets.
Prerequisite: Duplex Data Attachment Base (#3500).
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 2 (#4702). For attachment of up
to four Line Sets Type 2A (#4721). Maximum: Two. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with
other type LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number
of LlBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner Type 1 (#1641), or
Type 2 (#1642) with Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090).
LINE SET, TYPE 2A (#4721). [Telegraph Single Current] For
attachment of two single current telegraph lines, each of which
may be wired for 20 ma, 40 ma or 62.5 ma single current termination. Maximum: Four per LIB Type 2. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 2 (#4702) and a Busi-
ness Machine Clock{s), (#4650), assigned by the program to this
Line Set.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 3 (#4703). For attachment of up
to three Line Sets Type 3A or 3B in any combination. Maximum:
Two. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with other type LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the
TOTAL number of LlBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner
Type 1 (#1641), or Type 2 (#1642) with Communication Scanner
Expansion (#9090).
LINE SET, TYPE 3A (#4731).
[Limited Distance Type 1 Line
Adapter, 2-wire] For attachment of two half-duplex, start/stop
lines at speeds up to 134.5 bps. Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 1 (2-wire) Line Adapters and no external modems are
required. Note: Total wire length of each line may not exceed 4.75
wire-miles ... see SRL GA24-3435' for more information on this
Line Adapter. Maximum: Three per LIB Type 3. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with Line Set(s)
Type 3B, the maximum of three applies to the TOTAL number of
Line Sets per LIB. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 3
(#4703) and a Business Machine Clock{s), (#4650), assigned by
the program to this Line Set.
[Limited Distance Type 1 Line
LINE SET, TYPE 3B (#4732).
Adapter, 4-wire] For attachment of two start/stop lines at speeds
up to 134.5 bps. Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 1 (4wire) Line Adapters and no external modems are required. Note:
Total wire length of each line may not exceed 4.75 wire-miles ...
see SRL GA24-3435' for more information on this Line Adapter.
Maximum: Three per LIB Type 3. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: When installed in combination with Line Set{s) Type
3A, the maximum of three applies to the TOTAL number of Line
Sets per LIB. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 3 (#4703)
and a Business Machine Clock{s), (#4650), assigned by the program to this Line Set.
For attachment of
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 4 (#4704).
one Line Set, Type 4A, 4B or 4C. Maximum: Two. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with
other LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number of
LlBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner Type 1 (# 1641), or
Type 2 (# 1642) with Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090).
LINE SET, TYPE 4A (#4741).
[Limited Distance Type 2 Line
Adapter] For attachment of two half-duplex start/stop lines at
speeds up to 600 bps. Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 2
Line Adapters and no external modems are required. Note: Total
wire length of each line may not exceed 8.25 wire-miles ... see
SRL GA24-3435' for more information on this Line Adapter.
Maximum: One per Lib Type 4. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 4 (#4704). and a Business Machine Clock(s), assigned by the program to this Line Set.
LINE SET, TYPE 4B (#4742).
[Leased Line, Line Adapter, 2wire]
For attachment of two half-duplex, start/stop lines at
speeds up to 600 bps. Includes two IBM Leased Line, 2-wire, Line
Adapters and no external modems are required ... see SRL GA243435' for more information on this Line Adapter. Maximum: One
per LIB Type 4. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 4 (#4704) and a Business Machine Clock(s),
(#4650), assigned by the program to this Line Set.
LINE SET, TYPE 4C (#4743).
[Leased Line, Line Adapter, 4wire] For attachment of two start/stop lines at speeds up to· 600
bps. Includes two IBM Leased Line, 4-wire, Line Adapters and no
external modems are required ... see SRL GA24-3435' for more
information on this Line Adapter. Maximum: One per LIB Type 4.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Line Interface Base Type 4
(#4704). and a Business Machine Clock(s), (#4650), assigned by
the program to this Line Set.
LINE INTERFACE BASE TYPE 8 (#4708). For attachment of up
to two Modem Attachment Bases - 1200 bps (#5103). Maximum:
Two. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with other type LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the
TOTAL number of LlBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner
Type 1 (#1641), or Type 2 (#1642) with Communication Scanner
Expansion (#9090).
MODEM ATTACHMENT BASE - 1200 BPS (#5103). For attachment of up to two of Line Set 8A, 8B, 8C or 80 (in any combination). Maximum: Two per LIB Type 8 (#4708). Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Line Interface Base Type 8 (#4708).
LINE SET, TYPE 8A (#4781). [IBM 1200 bps Leased Integrated
Modem] For attachment of one start/stop or synchronous nonSWitched line at speeds up to 600 bps or at 1200 bps. This Line
Set includes one IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem ... no external
modem is required. This integrated modem must communicate with
another IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem. Maximum: Two per Modem
Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103). Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: When installed in combination with Line Set Type 8B,
the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number of lines per
• SRL
GA24~3435-2
or later revision.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- ----- - -
- ---
=':':::E';'E:
M 3704.5
Jul79
DP Machines
3704 Communications Controller
Modem Attachment Base (#5103). Prerequisites: Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103) and a Business Machine Clock
(#4650) assigned by the program to this Line Set.
LINE SET, TYPE 8B (#4782). [IBM 1200 bps Switched Integrated Modem] For attachment of one start/stop switched line at
speeds up to 600 bps or one synchronous switched line at speeds
of 600 bps or 1 200 bps. This feature is to be used in conjunction
with the Public Switched Network via the Common Carrier Data
Coupler CBS (or equivalent). This' Line Set includes one IBM 1200
bps Switched Line Modem with Automatic Answer capability ... no
external modem is required. This integrated modem must communicate with another IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem. Maximum: Two
per Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103). Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with
Line Set Type 8A, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL
number of lines per Modem Attachment Base (#5103).
Prerequisites: Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103) and
a Business Machine Clock (#4650) assigned by the program to
this Line Set.
LINE SET, TYPE 8C (#4785). [IBM 1200 bps Leased Integrated
Modem with a Bi-directional Interrupt Signal] This Line Set provides for communicating with an IBM 3767 Terminal operating in
2741 Line Control at a line speed of 300 bps using two wire
common carrier facilities. The customer must specify the "No
Echo Suppression" option from the common carrier. In addition to
the above capability, this Line Set has the same functional capabilities as Line Set Type 8A (#4781) except that Line Set Type 8C
is restricted to common carrier two-wire facilities. This Line Set
includes one IBM 1 200 bps Leased Integrated Modem ... no
external modem is required. This integrated modem must communicate with another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Maximum: Two per
Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103). Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: When installed in conjunction with Line Set Type
8A, 8B or 80, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number
of Line Sets per Modem Attachment Base (#5103). Prerequisites:
Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103) and a Business
Machine Clock (#4650) for each speed of operation by the program.
LINE SET, TYPE 80 (#4786). [IBM 1200 bps Switched Integrated Modem with a Bi-directional Interrupt Signal] This Line Set
provides for communicating with an IBM 3767 Terminal operating
in 2741 Line Control at a speed of 300 bps using common carrier
switched facilities. In addition to the above capability, this Line Set
has the same capabilities as Line Set Type 8B (#4782). This Line
Set Includes one IBM 1200 bps Switched Integrated Modem ... no
external modem is required. This integrated modem must communicate with another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Maximum: Two per
Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103). Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: When installed in conjunction with Line Set Type
8A, 8B or 8C, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number
of Line Sets per Modem Attachment Base (#5103). Prerequisites:
Modem Attachment Base - 1200 bps (#5103) and a Business
Machine Clock (#4650) for each operational speed for this Line
Set. The operational speed is selected by the program. Note: This
Line Set only has Half Duplex data transmission capability.
LINE INTERFACE BASE TYPE 9 (#4709).
[IBM 1200 bps
Switched Integrated Modem] For attachment of one synchronous
switched line at speeds up to 1 200 bps. This Line Interface Base
Includes a Line Set and one IBM 1 200 bps Switched Integrated
Modem equipped with Automatic Answering and Automatic Call
Originate functions ... no external modem is required. This feature
is to be used in conjunction with the Public Switched Network via
the Common Carrier Data Coupler CBS (or equivalent). This inte-
grated modem must communicate with another IBM 1200 bps integrated
modem. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: When
installed in combination with other type LlBs, the maximum of two
applies to the TOTAL number of LlBs. Prerequisites: Communication Scanner Type 1 (#1641), or Type 2 (#1642) with Communication Scanner ExpanSion (#9090), plus a Business Machine
Clock (#4650) assigned by the program to the Line Set of this
LIB.
LINE INTERFACE BASE TYPE 10 (#5000). For attachment of up
to three of Line Set Type 10A (#4784). Maximum: Two. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: When installed in combination with
other type LlBs, the maximum of two applies to the TOTAL number
of LIBs. Prerequisite: Communication Scanner Type 1 (# 1 641), or
Type 2 (#1642) with Communication Scanner Expansion (#9090).
the attached external modem or internal IBM Line Adapter does
NOT provide this clocking. Maximum: Four per Communication
Scanner Type 1 (#1641) or Type 2 (#1642). Field Installation:
Yes. Limitation: Required only when modem does not provide
clocking, except that each Communication Scanner requires at
least one clock which must be at a speed less than one-half that
of the lowest speed modem clocked line. Note: Each Business
Machine Clock may be assigned by the program to one or more
communication lines. Prerequsite: Communication Scanner Type 1
(#1641) or Type 2 (#1642).
The speed of clocking must be specified for each #4650 as
follows: These can be changed in the field.
Speed (bps)
45.5
50.0
56.9
74.2
75.0
110.0
134.5
Specify
#9601
9613
9602
9603
9604
9605
9606
150.0
300.0
600.0
950.0'
1200.0
2000.0
2400.0
Specify
#9611
9612
9607
9614
9608
9609
9610
• Supported for 2740 mdl 2 type line control only.
UNIT PROTECTION (#8510). Provides a lock on the 3704 which
deactivates all switches (except power off and power on) when
key is removed. Two keys are included. For additional or replacement keys, see "Locks and Keys" on M 10000 pages. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
REMOTE OPERATION
EXTENDED ENVIRONMENT (#3620). [Mdl A3 or A4 only] Provides cooling such that a 3704 with Remote Program Loader
(#6260) can operate in a Class C Environment with a temperature
range of 50· F to 100· F. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Remote Program Loader (#6260).
REMOTE POWER OFF (#6250), [Mdl A3 or A4 only] Provides
the capability of turning. the 3704's power off with a command
over a communications line. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
REMOTE PROGRAM LOADER (#6260).
[Mdl A3 or A4 only]
Provides the means of loading the NCP Program into the 3704
when there is no Channel Adapter on the machine. This feature
also provides for diagnosing the communications controller without
the aid of the CPU. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with any of the following: Channel
Adapter Type 1 (#1541), Duplex Data Attachment Base - 1200
bps (#3500), Modem Attachment Base - 2400 bps (#51 01).
LIB POSITION DESIGNATORS
The position of the Line Interface Bases within the 3704 must be
specified in accordance with the following table.
Communication Scanner Communication Scanner
Type 1 (#1641)
Type 2 (#1642)
LIB Type
Position 1
Position 2
Position 1
Position 2
A1
1
2
3
4
8
9
10
#9311
9321
9331
9341
9381
9391
9401
#9312
9322
9332
9342
9382
9392
9402
#9501
9511
9521
9531
9541
9581
9591
9701
#9502
9512
9522
9532
9542
9582
9592
9702
The LlBs must be assigned to position in numerical order, that is,
LIB Type A 1 s must be assigned to the lowest numbered positions,
LIB Type 1s next lowest, etc., so that the highest type-numbered
LIB is in the highest numbered position. Each order submitted
must indicate the Feature #. for each LIB desired plus a location
specify code (position number, from above table) based on the LIB
Type.
The positions of the Line Sets within the LlBs will be automatically
assigned.
LINE SET, TYPE 10A (#4784). [IBM 1200 bps Leased Duplex
Integrated Modem] For attachment of one Duplex synchronous
leased line at speeds up to 1200 bps. This Line Set includes one
IBM 1200 bps Duplex Integrated Modem ... no external modem is
required. This integrated modem must communicate with another IBM
1200 bps integrated modem. Maximum: Three per Line Interface Base
Type 10 (#5000). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Line
Interface Base Type 10 (#5000) and a Business Machine Clock
(#4650) assigned by the program to this Line Set.
BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#4650).
Speed bps)
Provides clocking when
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- ----- - ----_.------
- - --- --
M 3704.6
Jul 79
DP Machines
3704 Communications Controller
SPECIAL FEATURE PRICES:
Business Machine Clk #4650
Channel Adapter Typ 1 1541
Comm Scanner Type 1 1641
Comm Scanner Type 2 1642
Expansion Feature
3600
Extended Environment 3620
Line Inter Base Typ 1 4701
Line Set Type 1 A
4711t
Line Set Type 1B
4712t
Line Set Type 1C
4713t
Line Set Type 10
4714t
Line Set Type 1E
4715t
Line Set Type 1 F
4716t
Line Set Type 1 H
4718t
Modem Att Base
5101
- 2400 bps
Line Set Type 1 L
4751t
Line Set Type 1 M
4752t
Modem AU Base AA
- 2400 bps
5102
Line Set Type 1 P
4761t
Line Set Type 1Q
4771t
Duplex Data AU Base
3500
- 2400 bps
Line Set Type 1 X
4754t
Line Set Type 1 Y
4755t
Line Inter Base Typ A1 4700
Line Set Type 1 G
4717
Line Set Type 1 J
4719
Line Inter Base Typ 2 4702
Line Set Type 2A
4721
Line Inter Base Typ 3 4703
Line Set Type 3A
4731
Line Set Type 3B
4732
Line Inter Base Typ 4
4704
Line Set Type 4A
4741
Line Set Type 4B
4742
Line Set Type 4C
4743
Line Inter Base Typ 8 4708
Modem AU Base
- 1200. bps
5103
Line Set Type 8A
4781
Line Set Type 8B
4782
Line Set Type 8C
4785
Line Set Type 80
4786
Line Inter Base Typ 9 4709
Line Inter Base Typ 10 5000
Line Set Type 10A
4784
Remote Power Off
6250
Remote Program Lder 6260
Two Channel Switch
8002
Unit Protection
8510
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
$ 12 $ 10
$ 408
$ 1.00
142
25
129
12
25
25
36
36
36
103
63
103
109
121
21
110
10
21
21
31
31
31
88
54
88
93
4,505
816
4,080
408
816
816
1,235
1,235
1,235
3,275
2,040
3,275
3,485
23.00
1.50
5.50
.50
NC
1.50
2.00
2.00
2.00
8.50
3.00
8.50
15.50
109
63
58
93
54
49
3,485
2,040
1,830
3.50
12.00
11.00
129
69
303
110
59
258
4,080
2,255
9,350
3.50
17.50
25.50
83
103
96
25
83
89
25
63
78
49
49
49
89
89
89
78
71
88
82
21
71
76
21
54
66
42
42
42
76
76
76
66
2,635
3,275
3,060
816
2,635
2,850
816
2,040
2,465
1,660
1,660
1,660
2,850
2,850
2,850
2,465
3.00
16.50
14.00
1.50
9.50
3.50
1.00
5.50
3.50
2.00
2.00
4.50
5.00
7.50
7.50
2.00
42
16
21
46
51
153
42
98
10
165
63
54
35SUC -
1,660
630
640
1,005
1,120
5,695
1,660
3,655
408
6,120
2,040
35
2.00
4.00
6.00
17.50
18.50
10.50
3.50
9.00
.50
38.50
4.00
NC
49
19
25
54
60
180
49
115
12
194
t Also available with Line Interface Base Type A1 (#4700).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- - - ----===
---- --':' =
M 3705.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3705 COMMUNICATIONS
CONTROLLER
Purpose: The 3705-1 and 3705-11 attach to all S/370 or 4300
Processors, or in 2701/2702/2703 Emulation Mode only, to a
S/360 mdl 30 (sub models E or F) (3705-1 only), 40, 50, 65, 67 (in
65 mode), 75 and 195 for communication with local or remote I/O
devices over various common carrier provided or customer owned
communication facilities. NOTE: See "Programming" and "SCP"
sales manual pages for attachment capability.
Highlights: A modular, programmable unit which expands the
communications capabilities of S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors.
By virtue of its modularity and programmability, the 3705 boasts a
high degree of flexibility in tailoring to a teleprocessing system's
requirements. Also it can relieve the CPU of many TP functions,
including, but not limited to, line control, polling, addressing, code
translation and error recovery. The maximum number of communication lines which can be physically attached to a 3705 is 352
lines; but, the maximum number of communication lines capable of
concurrent operation is a function of the speed of the lines, the
type of Channel Adapter, memory size, and Communication Scanner installed and the programming mode of operation. The maximum number of lines which can be physically installed can exceed
the operational capability, see "Specify" for "special scheduled"
systems. The 3705-1 has a 1.2 microsecond storage cycle time ...
the 3705-11 models E, F, G and H have a 1.0 microsecond storage
time ... the 3705-11 models J, K and L have a 900 nanosecond
storage time.
Communications Facilities: The 3705 operates over common
carrier provided or equivalent customer owned communications
facilities. For information concerning these facilities, see the M
2700 pages, this section.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages, this section. Also
see 3704/3705 "Programming" sales manual pages for attachment capability and refer to Host Systems Programming pages for
possible restrictions to the above attachments.
3705 LOCAL ATTACHMENT (START /STOP)
In addition to terminals being attached to the 3705 through common carrier facilities, they may also be connected directly to the
3705 units using #4713. Below are the attachable terminals and
the respective feature #s. Cable groups may be traced via this
feature # listing and the feature #s listed in the respective Physical Planning Manuals. Ensure that the cable groups selected from
the Physical Planning Manuals have the 25 pin data set interface.
#4713 allows only two terminals to be attached, one per 370525
pin data set interface. There must be corresponding Business
Machine Clocks in both the terminal and the 3705.
Terminal
1031A/l034
1061
2740 mdl 1
2740 mdl 2
2741
2845/2848
3767 [attaches via
Line Set 1 F
5010 (S/7)
5100/5110
Speed (bps) Terminal Feature #(s)
600
134.5
134.5
134.5
600
134.5
1200
300
600
1200
134.5
600
134.5
300
2068
9115 or 9120
9115 or 9120
9115 or 9120
7106w 9121
9115 or 9120
9012
7111 or 7113 w 9540 and 3719
7112w9541 and 3719
7112 w 9542 and 3710
1610 w 2165
1610 w 2165
1525
1525
Terminal
Speed (bps) Terminal Feature #(s)
600
1200
2000
2400
1826
1200
2000
2400
2020
1200
2400
2025
1200
600
2701
1200
2400
2703
1200
1200
2715mdl2
1200
2772
1200
2780
3115
600
1200
3125
600
1200
600
3135/3138
1200
4331
600
1200
2400
3271 mdl 1,2,11,12
1200
1200
3275 mdl 1,2,11,12
1200
3276
1200
3601/3602
1200
3614
2400
3651 mdl 25/50/75
3704/3705
600
1200
2000
2400
3735
1200
3741
1200
3747
1200
3767 [attaches via Line 600
Set lF (#4716) only] 1200
3771/3773/3774/
3775
1200
1200
3780
2400
3791
1200
Series/l
600
1200
5010 (S/7)
1200
2000
2400
5110 (2772)
1200
2400
5231 mdl 2
1200
5320 (S/32)
600
1200
5340 (S/34)
600
1200
5404/6/8/10/12/15 600
1131
1200
2000
2400
7690
7690
7690
7690
7551 w 7552
7551 w 7552
7551 w 7552
2074 w 4703
2704 w 4703
7551 w 7541
7698 w 7401
7698 w 7692
7698 w 7693
7705 w 7710
7705
7705 w 9122
7705w9110
7141
7141
7141
7141
4640 w 9649
4640 w 9649
See Communications Adapter
(#1601) on 4331 for
for details and prerequisites.
7820
7820
3701 w 9491 and 6301
4501 or 6301 w 3701
3701 w 6301
7708
4714 and 4650 w 9607
4714 and 4650 w 9608
4714 and 4650 w 9609
4714 and 4650 w 9610
7705 w 5010
7705 w 9122
7705 w 9122
9531 w 3719
9532 w 3719
1482 w
7705 w
7705 w
3701 w
2074"
2074"
2074 w
2074 w
2074 w
2074 w
3701
9122 and 9702
9121 and 9704
6301
or 2094"
or 2094"
4800 and 4703
4800 and 4703
4800 and 4703
3701
2074 w 4780
2074 w 3701
2074 w 3701
2500 w 3701
2500 w 3701
2074 w 4703
and 2838
2074 w 4703
and 2838
2074 w 4703
and 2838
2074 w 4703
and 2838
and
and
and
and
and
and
9334 and 9751
4703
4703
4703
4703
9750 and 9481
and 9751 and 9481
and 9752 and 9481
and 9753 and 9481
•• Series/l communication feature must have internal clock
jumper installed.
3705 LOCAL ATTACHMENT (SYNCHRONOUS)
3705 LOCAL ATTACHMENT (V3S)
In additon to the synchronous terminals being attached to the
3705 through common carrier facilities, they may also be connected directly to the 3705 using #4716. Below are the attaChable
terminals and the respective feature #s. Cable groups may be
traced via the feature #s given below and the feature #s listed in
the respective Physical Planning Manuals. Ensure that the cable
groups selected from the Physical Planning Manuals have the 25
pin data set interface. #4716 allows only two terminals to be
attached, one per 3705 25 pin data set interface. There must be
corresponding Business Machine Clocks in both the terminal and
3705.
The following terminals may be attached locally to the 3705 using
Line Set lW (#4727) (Half Duplex) or Line Set 1Z (#4728) (Full
Duplex) V35 interfaces. Cable groups may be traced via the feature numbers given below and the feature numbers listed in the
respective Physical Planning manuals. No business machine clock
is required in the attached device since clocking signals are provided by Business Machine Clock (#4651) in combination with
#4727 and #4728.
#4727 Half Duplex
Terminal
3705
Speed (bps)
14,400
57,600
3776-3,3776-4
14,400
3777-1, 3777-2, 3777-3 14,400
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Terminal Feature #
4720
4720
4720
4720
M 3705.2
Jul79
OP Machines
370S Communications Controller
#4728 Full Duplex
Terminal
Speed (bps)
3705
14.400
57.600
14.400
14.400
3776-3,4
3777-3
(cont'd)
Termln.. Feature #
8/360 mdl 65. 67 (in 65 mode), 75, 195 - muJtiplexer channel of
2870 ... see 2870.
4726
4726
4720
4720
5/370 mdl 115, 125 - Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
Machine Organization: The basic machine consists of the Central
Control Unit (CCU) with storage (16K in the 3705-1 and 32K in the
3705-11) and an operator's control panel. A minimum machine
configuration must have. in addition to the base unit. the following
features:
[1] Either a Channel Adapter (CA) feature or the Remote Program
Loader feature. The Channel Adapters have different levels of
design providing various degrees of programming overhead in
channel operation.
[2] A Communication Scanner (CS) feature to provide for the
connection between the Attachment Base feature and the Line
Interface Base(s) features. like the Channel Adapters the
various Communication Scanners have varying degrees of
performance.
[3] An Attachment Base which provides a common connection
between the Communication Scanner(s) and the Central Control Unit (CCU).
[4] A Line Interface Base (LIB) which provides the connection
between the CS and the various Line Sets. The LIB provides
the hardware for the mounting of the individual Line Sets.
Each LIB is designed for a certain set of functions in conJunction with the various Line Sets.
[5] A Line Set (LS) which provides the electronics and external
cables to interface to a communication facility. NOTE: Both the
external cables and the line Sets are individually ordered
through the AAS system. The number of Line Sets that can be
contained in a LIB is contingent upon the electronic hardware
of a Line Set required to perform the functions supporting the
communications facilities.
[6] A Business Machine Clock which provides clocking of data in
and out of the Communicatton Scanner.
Models: The 3705 consists of two versions. with various models
based on either the number of frames and/or the storage capacity.
3705-1 consists of core storage with a cycle time of 1.2 microseconds.
3705-11 consists of monolithic storage with a cycle time of 1.0
microseconds (models E. F. G and H) or 900 nanoseconds
(models J. K and L).
The model numbering of the 3705 is "x". "y". "x" is an alpha
code designating the number of frames in a 3705; A represents
o.ne frame. B two. C three and 0 four frames for a 3705-1 ... E
represents one frame. F or J two. G or K three and H or L four
frames for a 3705-11. "y" is a numeric code deSignating the storage size.
In the 3705-1. the storage is hOl,lsed in. each frame in quantities of
one or two increments of core storage. In the 3705-11 (models E.
F. G and H). the storage Is housed only in the first frame. which
has up to nine increments of monolithic storage. The 3705-11.
models J. K and L have 256K of storage in the first frame and
64K in the second frame .. Additional storage in 64K increments
may be installed in the second frame for a maximum of 512K
b.ytes.
37Q5.1
Mode'
At -08
A1. B1. C1. 01
A2,B2.C2.02
B3. C3, 03
84,C4. D4
C5.D6
06
07
08
ca.
(standard) ... see 2030, 2040, 2050. NOTE: S/360 mdl 30. connects to 3705-1 only.
S/370 mdl 135 -- byte multlplexer channel (standard). Selector or
Block Multiplexer Channel (special features) ... see 3135.
8/370 mdl 135-3 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard). Block
Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3135-3.
S/370 mdl 138 - byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multiplexer channel (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 -- byte multiplexer channel or selector channel
(standard). or Block Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ... see
3145.
8/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
8/370 mdl 148 -- byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
8/370 mdls 155, 155 II, 158 and 158 MP -- byte multiplexer
channel or block multtplexer channels (standard) .. , see 3155.
3158.
S/370 mdls 185, 165 II, 168, 168 MP and 195 - selector channel of 2860. multilllexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannel
(special feature) of 2870. or block multiplexer channel of 2880 ...
see 2860. 2870. 2880.
3031 or 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is standard). block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see 3031
or 3032.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard).
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (special feature) ...
see 4331.
4341 Processor 4341.
byte multiplexer channel (standard) ... see
NOTE: The 3705-11 attaches to a S/360 with a minimum of 128K
bytes of storage.
BIbliography: GC20-0001
[1] All 3705-ls are to be ordered as follows:
"A" models
"B" models
"C" models
"0" models
37OS-U
Core Storage
(bytes)
Model
Monolithic Storage
(bytes)
E1- L4
16K
481(
80K
112K
144K
17eK
208K
240K
All 3705-lIs
are to be ordered as follows:
"E" models-
E1. Fl. Gl. H1
E2,F2.G2.H2
E3.F3.G3. H3
E4. F4. G4. H4
E5. F5.G5. H5
E6.F6.G6.H6
E7.F7.G7.H7
E8. F8.G8.H8
Jl. K1. L 1
J2. K2. L2
J3., K3. L3
J4. K4. L4
32K
64K
96K
128K
160K
192K
22.4K
256K
320K
384K
448K
512K
"F"· or "J" models -
"G" or "K" models -
"H" or "L" models -
PREREQUISITES: The 3705-1 and 3105-11 require a contr~~ unit
posjtion on a system channel unless only the Remote Program
Loader (APt) feature is Installed. Note: Attachment to 5/360 i$ Ia
270t •. 2702. 2703 Emulation Mode only.
SJ3fiIO Dldt :to tsubmodet& E anct F). 40,. 50 - multiplexer channel
Not t.o be. reproducec:i1(#ithout wl/iUert permission.
------- ----
-
M 3705.3
Jul79
====~=
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller
(cont'd)
which of the eight following features is to be ordered should be
based on the number of high speed lines used and their relative
positions within a LIB position. On special 'scheduled systems
where a high speed line is used only a portion of the time, then
the position does not have to be blocked if the Line' Set positions (which would have been blocked) are not used simultaneously with the high speed line. Examples of this could be lines
used for backup or load sharing purposes. For those positions
within a LIB where High Speed Select is invoked, only the even
addresses are scanned.
#9011 - blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 1 of the
additional LlBs within a 3705
module. Only the
3705
module containing the high speed line is affected.
#9012 - blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 2.
#9013 - blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 3.
#9014 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 4.
#9015 - blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 5.
[2] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V. Field Installation: Yes.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white. Field Installation: Yes.
#9016 - blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 6.
#9017 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 7.
#9018 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 8.
[4] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on floor. Field
Installation: Yes.
Maximum: One each of the above per Communication Scanner,
Type 3 (#1643).
[5] Address Substitution/Upper Limit Scan: For 3705s with a
Communication Scanner, Type 2, there are two methods of
address modification: Upper Scan Limits and Address Substitu~
tion, which allow the 'f,ype 2 Scanner to operate a Line Set at
speeds greater than 4800 bps. For information on USL, see the
IBM 3704 and 3705 Principles of Operation, GC30-3004. Address Substitution (#9001, 9002, 9003, 9004): May be required when lines at speeds greaJ~r,.than 4800 bps are to be
installed. Associated with the inliSe-ation by software, the Address Substitution capability allows multiple scanning of a Line
Set's address at the expense of NOT scanning other Line Set
addresses. The specify feature blocks the installation of a Line
Set in those address positions that are not scanned by address
substitution. The choice of which of the four following specify
features is to be ordered should be based on the number of
high speed lines to be installed and their relative line set positions within the first LIB position. The lowest posi.tion (#9001)
should always be specified first, followed by each succeeding
number. For those positions within a LIB where Address Substitution is invoked, only the even addresses are scanned.
Prerequisite: Communication Scanner, Type 3 (#1643).
#9001 -- blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 8 (both
3705
) on all Type 1 and Type 2 LIBs. Specify
#9001 when the FIRST Line Set of the first LIB is to contain
the high speed (greater than 4800 bps) line.
#9002 - blocks Installation of a Line Set in partition 7 (3705
) on all Type 1 and Type 2 LIBs. Specify #9002
when the SECOND Line Set of the first LIB is to contain the
high speed (greater than 4800 bps) line.
#9003 - blocks installation of a .Line Set in partition 6 (3705
) on all Type 1, Type 2, Type 3 and Type 10 LIBs.
Specify #9003 when the THIRD Line Set of the first LIB is to
contain the high speed (greater than 4800 bps) line.
Note: When High Speed Select is specified, it will restrict Line
Set installation in all LlBs (except LIB Position 1) of the 3705
which has the scanner modification implemented. See
IBM 3704/3705 Communications Controllers, Principles of
Operation, GC30-3004.
[6] A Communication Cable Order must be submitted for: Each
new 3705
machine order ... each
order where the
added feature requires external cable. For cabling information,
see appropriate Installation Manual - Physical Planning: 5/360
- GC22-6820 ... 5/370 - GC22-7004 ... 4300 Processors GA27-3006. Also see Channel Adapters and Line Sets. For
remote 3705"1 or remote 3705-11, see Multiplexers, GA27-3006.
[8] 3705 Specification Sheet: A completed sheet,
MAY be required. See "Line Attachment Configurator" at the
end of "Special Features" section.
[9] Specify #9566 when two or more CA-4s are in the 3705-11
configuration and the NCP /VS program product is installed or
for EP /VS if PRPQ P85021 is installed with greater than one
CA-4. Must be specified in every module in which CA-4 appears.
PRICES:
Mdl
3705-1
A1
A2
B1
B2
B3
B4
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
01
02
03
#9004 - blocks installation of a Line Set in partition 5 (3705
) on all Type 1, Type 2, Type 3 and Type 10 LlBs.
Specify #9004 when the FOURTH Line Set of the first LIB is
to contain the high speed (greater than 4800 bps) line.
Maximum: One each of the above per 3705
Field Installation: Yes.
Note: When Address Substitution is specified, it will block Line
Set installation in ALL LIBs in the 3705
and therefore, will reduce the physical line handling
capability of the 3705. See IBM 3704/3705 Communications
Controllers, Principles of Operations, GC30-3004, for further
details. Address Substitution should not be used on a 3705
containing a Communication Scanner, Type 1 or Type 3.
High Speed Select: For the 3705 with a Communication Scanner, Type 3, there are two methods of address modification:
Upper Scan Limits and High Speed Select, which allow the
Type 3 Scanner to operate with Line Set speeds greater than
4800 bps. For Information on USL, see the IBM 3704 and 3705
Principles of Operation, GC30-3004. High Speed Select
(#9011,9012,9013,9014,9015,9016,9017,9018) may be
required when lines at speeds greater than 4800 bps are to be
installed. The specify feature blocks the installation of a Line
Set in a position whose address is not scanned. The choice of
D4
3705-11
05
06
07
08
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
F1
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchaae
MMMC
$1,287
1,845
1,698
2,262
2,826
3,384
2,133
2,891
3,249
3,813
4,365
4,923
2,550
3,108
3,872
4,238
4,794
5,352
5,916
6,474
1,204
1,333
1,482
1,591
1,720
1,849
1,978
2,107
1,616
$1,095
1,570
1,445
1,925
2,405
2,880
1,815
2,290
2,785
3,245
3,715
4,190
2,170
2,845
3,125
3,605
4,080
4,555
5,035
5,510
1,025
1,135
1,245
1,355
1,465
1,575
1,685
1,795
1,375
$ 40,800
58,550
54,100
71,850
89,800
107,350
87,400
85,150
102,900
120,850
138,400
156,150
80,700
98,450
116,200
133,950
151,700
169,450
187,200
204,950
38,230
40,580
42,930
45,280
47,630
49,980
52,330
54,680
51,530
$197
239
220
281
304
345
241
285
328
389
410
452
284'
308
350
391
433
475
517
580
250
276
302
328
354
380
408
432
271
----------- -- -------===
':' =
M 3705.4
Jul79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller
F2
1,745
F3
1,874
F4
2,003
F5
2,132
F6
2,261
F7
2,390
F8
2,519
Gl
2,027
G2
2,156
G3
2,285
G4
2,414
G5
2,543
G6
2,;672
G7
2,801
G8
2,930
Hl
2,438
H2
2,567
2,696
H3
H4
2,825
H5
2,954
H6
3,083
H7
3,212
H8
3,341
Jl
3,306
J2
3,564
J3
3,822
J4
4,080
Kl
3,717
K2
3,975
K3
4,233
K4
4,491
L1
4,128
L2
4,386
L3
4,644
L4
4,902
(cont'd)
1,485
1,595
1,705
1,815
1,925
2,035
2,145
1,725
1,835
1,945
2,055
2,165
2,275
2,385
2,495
2,075
2,185
2,295
2,405
2,515
2,625
2,735
2,845
2,815
3,035
3,255
3,475
3,165
3,385
3,605
3,825
3,515
3,735
3,955
4,175
53,880
56,230
58,580
60,930
63,280
65,630
67,980
64,830
67,180
69,530
71,880
74,230
76,580
78,930
81,280
78,130
80,480
82,830
85,180
87,530
89,880
92,230
94,580
93,040
97,740
102,440
107,140
106,340
111,040
115,740
120,440
119,640
124,340
129,040
133,740
297
323
349
375
401
427
453
292
318
344
370
396
422
448
474
313
339
365
391
417
443
469
495
535
587
639
691
556
608
660
712
577
629
6&1
733
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Control Unit
Purchase Option: 60%
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 3
Warranty: A
Useful'Life Category: 2
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model/Feature Additionai Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
3705-1 to 3705-1
Additional
Module
$13,300
Additional Storage per 32K bytes 17,750
ATTACHMENT BASE, TYPE 1 (#1301). Provides interface logic
for Channel Adapter Type 1 and/or the Communication Scanner,
Type 1. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: #1301 is only placed
in a 3705-11 when used in conjunction with Channel Adapter, Type
1.
ATTACHMENT BASE, TYPE 2 (#1302). Provides interface logic
for Communication Scanner, Types 2, 3 or 3 HS. Field
Installation: Yes. #1302 is required for Communication Scanner,
Types 2, 3 or 3 HS.
Notes: No more than one #1301 or #1302 is allowed per
3705.
Channel Adapter, Types 2, 3 and 4 contain the Attachment
Base logic within the logic of their respective features.
CHANNEL ADAPTER: The Channel Adapter provides the logical
interface between a 3705 and a S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor. Every 3705 must have at least one Channel Adapter in the
first module (except those units having the Remote Program Loader (#6260». Channel Adapter, Type 1 can be placed in the first
frame of a 3705. When a second Channel Adapter is a Type 2 or
Type 3, then "ROS Substitution" must be specified on the first
module (3705) ... specify #9754. When there are two or more
Channel Adapters, Type 4, and the NCP /VS program product or
EP /VS with PRPQ P85021 is installed, then "N ROS Substitution"
must be specified on every module in which a CA-4 appears.
Specify #9566. When ordering a Channel Adapter, use the specify
to indicate total number of CAs in the 3705 and 3706 combined
and place this specify on the first two frames (3705 and first
3706). If 1 CA, specify #9201 ... if 2 CAs, specify #9202 ... if 3
CAs, specify #9203 ... if 4 CAs, specify #9204.
External Cables: All Channel Adapters need external cables which
must be ordered separately from the Channel Adapter features.
Limitations and Prerequisites:
1) 3705-1 (first module) can contain one Channel Adapter, Type
(second module) can contain one
1, 2, 3 or 4. The
Channel Adapter, Type 2, 3 or 4.
2) When operating with ACF /NCP /VS the 3705-11 (first module)
can contain two channal adapters. The 3706 (second module)
can contain two channel adapters. If two channel adapters are
in one module (3705-11), at least one of the adapters must be
CA-4. When operating with greater than one CA-4 and EP /VS
with PRPQ P85021, two CA-4s can be in the same module.
Note EP 3.0 standalone only supports one CA-4 in each module.
3) No Channel Adapters are allowed in the third or fourth module.
3705-11 models E, F, G to models F, G, H
The Channel Adapters can be mixed with the following exceptions:
Additional
Moduie
$13,300
Additional Storage per 32K bytes 2,350
4) CA 1 cannot be in a machine with either CA 4 or a Communication Scanner, Type 3, or a Communication Scanner, Type 3
3705-11 models F, G, H to models J, K, L
High Speed.
3705-11 model F8 to Jl ..... $25,060
3705-11 model G8 to Kl ..... $25,060
3705-11 model H8 to L 1 ..... $25,060
5) When either a CA 2 or CA 3 is in the 3705
CA 4 must be in the first module.
Additional storage per 64K
6) Channel Adapters, Type 1 and Type 4 must be used with
Emulation Mode of Operation and may be used with Network
Control Mode of Operation.
$4,700
From 3705-1 models to 3705-11 models
To 3705 -II
Mdl8
7)
From 3705-1 Mdl8
"A" Models
"8" Models
"C" Models
"E" Models SI6,680 + (sl
$16,680 +(s)
+ (s)
$16,680 + (s)
$16,680 + (s)
$29,980 + (s)
"F" Models $29,980 + (s)
"0" Models $43,280 + (s)
"H" Models $56,580 + (s)
+ (s)
+ (s)
$43,280 + (s)
$16,680
$29,980
$16,680
"D" Models
+ (SL
$16,680 + (s)
$16,680 + (s)
$16,680 + (8)
SI6,680
(s) Plus $2,350 per additionai 32K storage increment above
El, Fl, Gl or Hl.
Examples:
A 1 to E4 = 3 increments (El to E4) or $7,050 + the above
price of $16,680 for a total of $23,730.
C4 to H6 = 5 increments (Hl to H6) or $11,750 + the above
price of $29,980 for a total of $41,730.
~ith
a CA 4, the
Channel Adapters, Type 2 and Type 3 are used only with
Network Control Mode of the Network Control Program.
8) Channel Adapter, Type 1 requires the Attachment Base, Type
1 as a prerequisite. Channel Adapters, Type '2, ·3 and' 4 contain the attachment base function within their respective features.
9) For the 3705'-11, if greater than two CAs are installed, the CAs
must all be CA-4s. Up to four CA-4s are allowed.
10) For the 3705-11, up to four I/O Channel Attachments are allowed (2 per frame).
11) For the 3705-11, Remote Program Load-II (#6261) can co-exist
with a Channel Adapter.
12) For the 3705-11, if two CAs are in the same frarrie, then no
Two Channel Switch (#8002) is allowed.
13) 3705-11 models J, K or L can not have a CAL
14) The Communication Scanner, Type 3 High Speed (CS-3 HS) can
only be installed in a 3705-11.
SPECIAL FEATURES
ATTACHMENT BASES: The Attachment Base provides the physical and logical connection between the Channel Adapter Type 1
and the Central Control Unit and between the Central Control Unit
and the various Communication Scanners. There are two Attachment Bases. A 3705 must have at least one Attachment Base and
in some instances will have both Attachment Bases.
\~
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3705.5
Jul 79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (cont'd)
The placement of various RPL/CA 'and CA configurations is as
follows:
Allowable hardware Channel Adapter combinations with RPL/CA
installed:
3705-11
3705-11 Only
3705
LIB Pos, 3
RPL
CA-4
AI)
I(BI)
LIB Pos, 3
LIB Pos. 2
LIB Pos. 4
CS-3
IIBI)
LIB Pos. I
I(AI)
LIB Pos.4
CS-3
CS-3HS
LIB Pos. I
CCU
ItB2)
IIA3)
I(B3)
CCU
IIB3)
I(A4)
I(B4)
I(B4)
CA-2
CA-3
CA-4
I(A4)
Allowable Hardware Channel Adapter Combinations:
4th
1st
2nd 3rd
CA
CA
CA
CA
Type Type Type Type
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
4
4
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
CA
Type
Type
ROS
Type
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
RPL/1
3705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/2
3705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/2
3705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/1
3705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/Dua13705
RPL/N
3705
RPL/N
3705
I(A3)
CA-4
LIB Pos, 6
Note: CS-3 and CS-3 HS take two positions.
1
1
CA
CS-3HS
CA-l
CA-2
CA-3
CA-4
4
ROS
Type
Module Location
4th
2nd 3rd
1st
CA
CA
CA
CA
1
3705
Dual 3705
Dual 3705
2
3705
Dual 3705
Dual 3705
2
3705
Dual 3705
Dual 3705
1
3705
Dual"3705
3705
Dual 3705
1 ;N "3705
3705
N
"3705
"3705
N
"3705
ROS
Specify
Code #
9754
9754
9754
9754
9754
9754
3705 -
9754
3705 -
9754
9566
3705
3706
3705
9566
9566
" = Available only on 3705-11.
Definition of the different ROS types:
(1) 1 - used to IPL over one channel-either a CM or CA4. It may
be used to IPL over one or two CA4s if support programs for
ACF/NCP/VS are not installed, No specification code is required for the type 1 ROS.
(2) 2 - used to IPL over one channel-either a CA2 or CA3, No
specification code Is required for the type 2 ROS.
(3) DUAL ("ROS Substitution") - used to IPL over one or two
channels-using any appropriate combination shown above.
Specification #9754 is required for Dual ROS.
(4) N ("N POS Substitution") - used to IPL over one of 2, 3 or 4
channels (all channels must be CA4s and the support programs
for ACF /NCP /VS Program Product or EP /VS with PRPQ
P85021 must be installed). Specification #9566 is required for
N ROS.
(5) RPL - used to IPL remotely. There is a separate ROS for the
3705-1 remote and the 3705-11 remote. (Although remote is not
mentioned on this page, it is listed here for convenience). No
specification code is required for RPL ROS.
Module Location
1st
2nd
Type
CS-2
CS-3
CS-3HS
3rd
CA
IIA2)
LIB Pos, 5
CS-2
CS-3
2nd
RPL
CS-3HS
ItA2)
I(B2)
LIB Pos. 2
1st
1
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
4
4
CA
CA
3rd
CA
RPL
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
3705
CHANNEL ADAPTER, TYPE 1 (#1541). For communication with
a S/360, S/370, or 4300 Processor byte multiplexer channel. All
such communications are accomplished via one, two, three or four
byte transfers, with deselection and 'reselection between each
transfer. Data transfer rates are primarily dependent upon the
3705's internal processing requirements. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See general description
above.
A high performance
CHANNEL ADAPTER, TYPE 2 (#1542).
adapter which supports communication with a S/370 byte multiplexer, block multiplexer or selector channel, or a 4300 byte
multiplexer or block multiplexer channel at data transfer rates of
up to 276 kilobytes/second (limited by system channel capability).
Transfer is always accomplished in "burst" mode, with a two-byte
"burst" standard on the byte multiplexer channel, and full "burst"
standard on the block multiplexer and selector channels. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See
general description above.
CHANNEL ADAPTER, TYPE 3 (#1543). An adapter of the same
performance characteristics as the Type 2 (# 1542) with the additional capability of an automatic two processor switch. It communicates with a virtual storage S/370 byte multiplexer, block multiplexer, or selector channel (models 115 and 125 excepted), or a
4300 byte multiplexer or block multiplexer channel. The switch,
part of the basic adapter, is primarily designed to furnish symmetric support for two tightly-coupled processors; i.e., each side of
the switch is connected to one of the two MP CPUs. Additionally,
this adapter can be attached to two channels from one CPU to
provide alternate path capability. For either tightly-coupled multiprocessor or single CPU attachments, data transfer occurs on only
one path at a time. Included as standard is a remote switch attachment capability to remotely control the switch from the configuration control panel of a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP, as well
as from the 2925 Remote Switching Console Model 10. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See
general description above.
CHANNEL ADAPTER, TYPE 4 (#1544). A channel adapter which
provides attachment to S/360 byte multiplexer channel (EP) or
S/370 byte multiplexer, block multiplexer or selector channel, or
4300 byte multiplexer or block multiplexer channel. It supports
either a high performance Emulator Pro!;lram running with a Type 3
Communication Scanner or Type 2 Communication Scanner or a
high performance Network Control Program running the same
scanners and Type 3HS Communication Scanner.
When attached to a byte multiplexer channel, the Type 4 transfers
bytes in "bursts" of up to 32 bytes prior to interrupting the control program when running in EP mode. In ACF /NCP /VS mode,
the Type 4 transfers in "bursts" up to 16 bytes and can transfer
up to 248 bytes prior to interrupting the control program.
In ACF /NCP /VS mode, when attached to a S/370 block multiplexer or selector channel or 4300 block mlJltiplexer channel, the
Type 4 "bursts" up to 248 bytes and can transfer up to 248 bytes
prior to interrupting the control program.
When the Type 4 is supported using the ACF /NCP /VS Program
Product, the channel adapter operates in a cycle steal mode (data
is directly moved to or from storage, and after this is accomplished, the control program resumes its operation at the completion of this stolen cycle unless another "cycle steal" requesi is
pending). The cycle steal operation improves the 3705 throughput
when compared with NCP /VS support of CA4 by reducing the
number and complexity of control program interrupts.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (cont'd)
When attached to a byte multiplexer channel and supported by
NCP /VS, the Type 4 transfers in bursts of 4 bytes per control
program interrupt.
.
This channel adapter is necessary when using the Communications
Scanner, Type 3 in Emulation Mode.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8002).
To attach either Channel
Adapter, Type 1 (#1541) or Type 2 (#1542) or Type 4 (#1544)
to two S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor channels. which may be
on the same CPU or on two different CPUs. The Channel Adapter
so equipped will, however, be enabled for operation on one channel at a time. Selection of which channel is to be operable is by a
manual switch on the control panel. Prerequisite: Channel Adapter, Type 1 (#1541), Type 2 (#1542) or Type 4 (#1544).
Limitation: If two CAs in the same frame, then no #8002 is allowed; otherwise, one #8002 per Channel Adapter.
COMMUNICATION SCANNER FEATURES:
The Communication
Scanner Features provide the common logical connection between
the various Line Interface Bases with their respective Line Sets
and the Central Control Unit. Each module of a 3705 must have a
communication scanner if line sets are placed within the module.
There are three communication scanners, each with a different
merit of performance.
Field Installation: All communication scanners can be field installed.
Limitations:
1) One Communications Scanner per module. The communication
scanners Type 2 and 3 can be placed within a 3705 in any
combination.
2) A Communication Scanner, Type 1 (#1641) can only be
placed in the first module of a 3705-1, cannot be placed in a
3705-11.
3) A Communication Scanner, Type 1 cannot be in a 3705 with a
Communication Scanner, Type 2, or Type 3.
4) Each scanner must have at least one Business Machine Clock,
but not more than four Business Machine Clocks.
5) The Communication Scanner, Type 3 only supports attachment
of LIBs 1, 8, 9 and 10.
6) Communication Scanner, Type 3 cannot be in the 3705 (first
module) of a 3705-1.
7) A Communication Scanner must be in a module containing
Line Interface Base(s).
8) A Communication Scanner, Type 1 (#1641) cannot be installed with the NCP IVS Program Product.
9) Communication Scanner, Type 3, must have Business Machine
Clock, specify #9615, and may have one other clock (specify
#9609 or #9610).
10) Communication Scanner, Type 3 High Speed, must have Business
Machine Clock (#4650), Specify #9615; no other clock is allowed.
11) Communication Scanner, Type 3 High Speed allows for the attachment of only Line Sets IGA (#4722) or ITA (#4723).
12) Address Substitution is not allowed in a 3705 with a Communication
Scanner, Type 3 High Speed (#1644). High Speed Select is not
allowed in configuration with line set 1GA and for line set 1TA.
Prerequisites: Communication Scanner, Type 1 must have an
Attachment Base, Type 1 in the 3705. Communication Scanner,
Type 2, Type 3, and Type 3HS must have an Attachment Base,
Type 2 in the 3705. A Communication Scanner located in a particular module requires a Communication Scanner in each preceding
module.
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 1 (#1641). This feature has
a lower performance capability than the other scanners due to a
higher processing overhead requirement of data between storage
and the line sets on a bit by bit basis. The scanner interrupts the
control program each bit time so that the control program can
perform character assembly and disassembly and also allows for
program control of line control, control character recognition, code
translation and error recovery functions. No line speed over 7200
bps is allowed. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum: One scanner
per module. Limitations and Prerequisites: See general·description above.
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 2 (#1642).
This feature
provides for medium performance operation. It provides for the
transfer of data between storage and the line sets on a byte-bybyte basis. The scanner assembles and disassembles characters.
This scanner interrupts the control program on a byte-by-byte
basis. The control program provides for the line control, control
character recognition, code translation and error· recovery functions. Field Instaliatle>o: Yes. Maximum: One scanner per module.
Limitations and Prerequisites: See general description above.
M 3705.6
Ju.179"
basis. Data transfers between storage and the Communication
Scanner, Type 3 is accomplished on a· storage cycle steal basis
(the CS-3 stops the control program for a machine cycle, moves
data to or from storage. At the conclusion of the data movement,
the control program resumes its operation at the point of the
interrupt, unless another "cycle steal" request is pending). This
feature supports only synchronous lines and· provides control
character recognition for BSC and SDLC line controls. It provides
ASCII to EBCDIC and vice versa code translation when operating
with BSC line control. The Communication Scanner, Type 3 interrupts the control program on either (up to 254 character) buffer
boundaries, or by unique control characters, or at certain error
conditions. It also provides for an auto-dial operation. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One scanner per module. Limitations
and Prerequisites: See general description above.
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 3 HIGH SPEED (#1644).
The Communication Scanner, Type 3 High Speed (#1644) is a modified
CS-3 (#1643) which allows line speeds up to 230.4K bps. Only two half
duplex data or one full duplex dala line can be attached to this scanner.
Field Installtztioll: Yes. Maximum: One scanner per frame. Limitations
and Prerequisites: See general description above.
LINE INTERFACE BASES (LlBs). LlBS are used to provide the
physical attachment of Line Sets In the 3705. LIB, Type 1 should
be placed in LIB position 1, if Address Substitution or High Speed
Select is to be required in the 3705. The LlBs with the highest
speed lines should be placed in the lowest LIB positions (position
1 is the lowest).
.
. FIGURE 1 - Maximum LIB Attachment Capability per Module:
LIBS
3705-1
Module
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
CSl
CS2
CS3
4
4
N/A
N/A
6
4
N/A
6
4
N/A
6
4
Modlil.
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
CS2
CS3
CS3 H.S.
4
3
1
6
4
1
6
4
1
6
4
1
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
3705-11
(Note 3)
(Note 2)
(Note 6)
Note 1: LlBs 1 through 1 2 can be attached to the Communication
Scanner, Type 1 and 2 on the 3705-1.
Note 2: LIBs 1, 8, 9 and 10 will attach to the Communication
Scanner, Type 3 on the 3705-1 or 3705-11 (excluding Line
Sets 1A, 1Band 1C).
Note 3: LlBs 1 through 1 2 will attach to the Communication Scanner, Type 2 on the 3705-11.
Note 4: LIBs 5 and 11 can only be placed in the 3705 (first module).
.
Note 5: Line Sets operating over 10,000 bps must be in LIB position 1.
Note 6: The Line Set addresses for CS3 H.S. are 0 and 2, only one LIB
1 can operate with a CS3 H.S.
Limitations: When installed with other LIBs of the same or different type, the maximum cannot be exceeded. There are no restric-'
tions on intermixing LlBs.
Prerequisite: A Communication Scanner is required in each module containing LlB(s).
FIGURE 2 - Line Attachment Configurator
The positions of the Line Interface Bases within the 37.05 and
3706(s) must be specified in accordance with the following table:
Positions
LIB Type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
8
#9311 #9312 #9313 #9314 #9315 :#:9316
9321
9322
9323
9324
9325
9326
9331
9332
9333
9334
9335
9336
9341
9343
9344
9345
9346
9342
9351
9352
9353
9354
9361
9362
9363
9364
9365
9366
9371
9372
9373
9374
9375 9376
9381
9382
9383
9384
9385
9386
9394
9391
9392
9293
9395
9396
9401
9402
9403
9404
9405
9406
9411
9412
9413
9414
9421
9422
9423
9425
9424
9426
Important: Positions 1, 2, 3.and 4 apply to 3705
COMMUNICATION SCANNER, TYPE 3 (#1643).
This feature
provides a high performance operation. It provides for data transfer between storage and the line sets on a multi-byte (buffer)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - -------- -------_.----------
M 3705,7
Jul79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (cont'd)
The positions of the Line Sets within the LIB will, in most cases,
be automatically assigned, To determine if this automatic assignment is applicable, use the following flow chart:
FIGURE 3 - LIB-Line Set Configuration Chart
(Normally, the Specification Sheet
should be used only
if required by the flow chart below, If however, specific positions
for line sets are desired even when the Automatic Line Set Configuration is suggested, fill out the Specification Sheet and submit
iL)
! P.lrtitil)n
L!II';
Ves
tlltt'dace Witll;.'
Communication Scanner
Ar!drl~s"
Type 1 (l'l641) Installed?
No
I
Line Set Type 10 (114714),
IH (114718) above 4800
bps or Line Set Type IG
(;14717), IS (114720),11
(lF472S),lU(1I4726)
installed?
No
LIB
on1-ib
Ves
I-
Special Type
Scheduled
System (see
\\Note',:,')_--,_
Ves
I I
d
Specification
Sheet
• If the line speed is over 10,000 bps, the line set must reside in line address
required
with order
position 0, 2, 4 or 6 when attached to Communications Scanner, Type 2, or
reside in line address positions 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, A, C or E when attached to
Communications Scanner, Type 3. Over 10,000 bps, the line sets must
reside in the first LIB, when attached to Communications Scanner, Type 2
or Type 3. NOTE: See Scan Limits, Address Substitution and High Speed
Select under "Specify."
Note: A "Special Type Scheduled System" is one in which the
3705 is effectively servicing two different TP networks on a scheduled basis, That is, one set of communication lines is serviced in
one time period and a second set of lines in a second time period
AND THERE IS NO OVERLAP OF THE TWO SYSTEMS IN TIME,
LIB
Type
2
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 1 (#4701).
Provides for attaching Line Sets which interface to EXTERNAL MODEMS, AUTO
CALL UNITS, or DIRECTLY ATTACHED TERMINALS, Field
Installation: Yes, Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See
Figure 1,
LIB
LIB
LIB
LIB
LIB
Type
Type
Type 3
Type 4
Type 5
&
7
1
]
l!
8! 8! fj-l!
8! ::;~ ::;~• f .-~ ..... ~~?O ~"a8
Gi!
~o: ~ iI~
i;~
~~ ." =,
." 00
~i
o!!l
~!~
-'N -'" ~~~ ~~i 'It.5e
':.5.e
!! ! ~~ f 11:ie ]~
11' 11'
N"
1i g1i
'IN 5l
; ~~8 ~;! ~iJ 38.
H H 11£
l:=
-'M -'p ~!~
'" ... c
S
!-l!
~ ~
o~
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 2 (#4702),
Provides for attaching Line Sets which interface to TELEGRAPH circuits, Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See
Figure 1.
Partition
Line
1nterface Within
Address LIB
on Lib
N"~
~
::;
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 3 (#4703) and TYPE 4 (#4704).
Provides for attaching IBM Limited Distance and leased line Line
Adapters. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and
Maximum: See Figure 1.
I 4
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 5 (#4705).
Provides for attaching 2400 bps Leased Line Integrated Modems. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See Figure 1.
7
8
9
;!i
,~
3
5
&
~I
A
S
c
~I
~I
D
E
F
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 7 (#4707).
Provides for attaching 2400 bps Switched Network Integrated Modem and Auto Call
Unit -- no Line Sets required with this LIB. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See Figure 1.
~~
:\
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
2
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 6 (#4706).
Provides for attaching 2400 bps Switched Network Integrated Modem. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See
Figure 1.
'iii
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~~ ::\'.!l
X
~I ~I ~I
X
~I ~I ~I
~~
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
~I
,~
i;!
Line
Interface
Address
LIS
LIS
LIS
Type
Type 8
9
Type
10
LIB
Type 11
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 11 (#5001). Provides for attaching 2400 bps Integrated Modems with Duplex Data transmission
capability. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and
Maximum: See Figure 1.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 12 (#5002). Provides for attaching 1200 bps Integrated Modems with a bi-directional Interrupt
Signal. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and
Maximum: See Figure 1.
LINE SETS: Line Sets provide the electronic logic to meet the
individual requirements of the communication facility. (See Figure
2 for attachment capability of Line Sets with respect to LlBs).
Note: All Line Sets except #4719 require external cables to be
ordered in addition to ordering the Line Set feature(s).
Partition
Within
LIS
on Lib
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 10 (#5000). Provides for attaching 1200 bps Integrated Modems with Duplex Data transmission
capability. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites and
Maximum: See Figure 1.
0
1
1'"
~
2
&
4
:
7
~
l :
c
~I
~I
0
I
E
'F
Legend
x I Denotes a pair of addresses used for a two line
X I interface line set if installed.
A I Denotes a pair of addresses used for a two autocall
A I interface line ~t if installed.
Denotes an unused address if this type of LIB is installed.
X I Denotes a pair of addresses required for this line set
I if installed ..... is an unused address.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'.!l
ill
X
'z
~
X
~I'
X
X
:.-
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 8 (#4708).
Provides for attaching 1200 bps Integrated Modems. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations, Prerequisites and Maximum: See Figure 1.
LINE INTERFACE BASE, TYPE 9 (#4709).
Provides for attaching 1200 bps Integrated Modems and Auto Call Units. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations, Prerequisites end Maximum: See
Figure 1.
N
LIB
Type 12
----------- ---- - -----==-=
':' =
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller
M 3705.8
Jul79
(cont'd)
T I Denotes a pair of addresses used for a single duplex data
R! line set if installed. Low order addresses are transmit
addresses. High order addresses are receive addresses.
X Denotes an address used for single line interface set if installed.
~! Pt:~~!~S~tha~~b i1~~~~:~ie~~~ fs°~h~ s~~f~ec!:iie interface
interface address for ACO.
LINE SET, TYPE 1A (#4711).
(Low Speed Start-Stop External
Modern) For attachment of two start/stop communication lines at
speeds up to 1200 bps, each of which has an EIA RS 232C interface for attachment to an external modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 18 (#4712). (Low Speed Duplex Data External
Modem) Provides for the 'attachment of one start/stop duplex
cemmunication line which has an EIA RS 232C interface at speeds
up to 1200 bps. This Line Set effectively combines two 3705
communication line ports into a true full-duplex data port. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See
Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1C (#4713).
(Low Speed Local Attachment)
For attachment of two half-duplex IBM start/ stop terminals at
speeds up to 1200 bps via IBM-provided cables. Modems are not
required. Note: The attached terminal must provide a Business
Machine Clock and external modem cable to which the
3705/3706 Line Set, Type 1 C cable connects. Total cable length
must net exceed 200 feel. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum,
Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 10 (#4714). (Medium Speed Terminal Interface
- via External Modems) This Line Set provides for the attachment
of external modem(s). One of the following attachments is perm issable:
a) Two start/stop communication lines (up to 1200 bps over
non-switched facilities or 600 bps over switched facilities)
transmitting half duplex data using external modems with EIA
RS 232C interfaces.
b) Two synchronous communication lines (up to 9600 bps over
non-switched or switched facilities) transmitting half duplex
data using external modems with EIA RS 232C interfaces.
c) A Combination of one of each of the above.
Note: When operating this line set over 4800 bps refer to Address
Substitution and High Speed Select under "Specify." Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See
Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1E (#4715). (Auto Call Unit) Provides two RS
366 interfaces for attachment of external automatic calling units.
Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites:
See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1F (#4716). (Medium Speed Local Attachment)
For local attachment of two half-duplex, synchronous IBM terminals or 3767 at speeds up to 2400 bps via IBM-provided cables.
Modems are not required. This line set requires different cable
groups depending upon terminal type. For cabling information, see
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GC22-7004; for Remote
see Multiplexers, GA27-3006. Note: The attached terminals must
be equipped with a Business Machine Clock and must provide a
standard external cable to which the 3705/3706 Line Set, Type
1F external cable connects. Total cable length must not exceed
100 feet. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and
Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1G (#4717).
(High Speed External Modem)
For attachment of one synchronous communication line for operation at 19.2K bps, or 50.0K bps. Has a digital interface for attachment to a switched or leased "wideband" external modem. See
Scan Limits, Address Substitution and High Speed Select under
"Specify." Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and
Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1H (#4718). (Medium Speed Duplex External
Modem) For attachment of one duplex synchronous communication line at a speed up to 9600 bps which has an EIA RS 232C
interface for attachment to an external modem. This Line Set
provides for the transmission of data simultaneously in a transmit
and receive mode. Note: For speeds in excess of 4800 bps, see
Scan Limits. Address Substitution and High Speed Select under
"Specify" are not allowed with this line set. Field Installation:
Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and
3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1J (#4719).
(External Mil Std 188 Interface)
Provides for the attachment of one start/stop or synchronous
communication line at a speed up to 50.0K bps via an external
modem having an interface that conforms to the requirements in
Section 7.2.1 of Mil Std l88C. Note: No external cable is provided
with this Line Set. For speeds greater than 7200 bps, Communication Scanner, Type 2 (#1642) or Communication Scanner, Type 3
(#1643) is required. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1S (#4720).
(Common Carrier 56,000 bps
Attachment)
Provides for the attachment of a single synchronous
CCITT V35 type interface to be used on a communication facility
at 56,000 bps. The 1S Line Set may be operated at 14,400 bps
or 57,600 bps in conjunction with a 1W Line Set (#4727) in
another 3705. See Scan Limits, Address Substitution and High
Speed Select under "SpeCify." Field Installation: Yes. Maximum,
limitations and Prerequisites: see Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1T (#4725).
(High Speed Duplex External
Modem) 50K bps. This line set will only run with the NCP Program Prodlfct. This line set provides for the attachment of one
duplex synchronous line which has a digital interface for attachment to an external data set for up to 50,000 bps leased or
switched wideband facilities (not program supported for switched
facilities). The control program must condition this line interface
for external clock control. See Scan Limits, Address Substitution
and High Speed Select under "Specify." Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 1U (#4726).
(High Speed Duplex External
Modem) 56K bps. This line set will only run with the NCP Program Product. This line set provides for the attachment of one
duplex synchronous line which has a CCITT V35 type interface for
attachment to a common carrier communication facility with line
speeds up to 56,000 bps. The control program must condition this
line interface for external clock control. The 1 U Line Set may be
operated at 14,400 bps or 57,600 bps in conjunction with a 1 Z
Line Set (#4728) in another 3705. See Scan Limits, Address
Substitution and High Speed Select under "Specify." Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See
Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET TYPE IGA (#4721). (High Speed External Modem) For
attachment oj-one synchronous, half duplex data communication line for
operation up to 230.4K bps, has a digital inteiface for attachment to a
leased "wideband" external modem. Field lnstallotion: Yes. Maximum:
Two per L.l.B., Type 1 (#4701). Prerequisites: Communication Scanner,
Type 3HS (#1644). Limitations: Up to two line sets of this type allowed
in the same 3705/06 frame.
LINE SET TYPE ITA (#4723). (High Speed External Modem) For
attachment of one synchronous, full duplex data communication line for
operation up to 230.4K bps. Has a digital interface for attachment to a
leased "wideband" external modem. Field lnstallotion: Yes. Maximum:
One per L.l.B., Type 1 (#4701). Prerequisites: Communication Scanner,
Type 3HS (#1644). Limitations: Only one line set per 3705/06frame.
LINE SET TYPE 1W (#4727). (High Speed Local Attach) 14.4K
or 57.6K bps half duplex data. This line set provides for local
attachment of a single half duplex synchronous device which has a
CCITT V35 type interface (similiar to Line Set Type 1S). Clocking
is provided by #4651 such that the attached device must be set
for external clock control. The total cable length must not exceed
200 feet (60 meters). This is a combination of 150 feet (45 meters) of 3705 Line Set Cable and 50 feet (15 meters) of attached
device cable. See Scan Limits, Address Substitution and High
Speed Select under "Specify." Field Installation: Yes. Maximum,
Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET TYPE 1Z (#4728). (High Speed Local Attach Duplex)
14.4K or 57.6K bps duplex data. This line set provides for local
attachment of one duplex synchronous device which has a CCITT
V35 type interface (simi liar to Line Set Type 1 U). Clocking is
provided by #4651 such that the attached device must be set for
external clock control. The total cable length must not exceed
200 feet (60 meters). This is a combination of 150 feet (45 meters) of 3705 Line Set Cable and 50 feet (15 meters) of attached
device cable. See Scan Limits, Address Substitution and High
Speed Select under "Specify." Field Installation: Yes. Maximum,
Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 2A (#4721). (Telegraph Single Current) For
the attachment of two single current telegraph lines, each of which
may be wired for 20 mA, 40 mA, or 62.5 mA Single current termination. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, limitations and
Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 3A (#4731).
(Limited Distance Type 1 Line
Adapter, 2-wire) For attachment of two half-duplex, start/stop
lines at speeds up to 134.5 bps. Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 1 (2-wire) Line Adapters and no external modems are
required. Note: Total wire length may not exceed 4.75 wire-miles
... see SRL GA24-3435' for further details. Field Installation:
Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and
3.
LINE SET, TYPE 38 (#4732).
(Limited Distance Type 1 Line
Adapter, 4-wire) For attachment of two start/stop lines at speeds
up to 134.5 bps. Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 1 (4wire) Line Adapters and no external modems are required. Note:
Total wire length may not exceed 4.75 wire-miles... see SRL
GA24-3435' for further details. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum,
Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
• SRL GA24-3435-2 or subsequent revisions.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---- --- - ----------_.-
--- --- ---
M 3705.9
Jul79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (cont'd)
LINE SET, TYPE 4A (#4741).
(Limited Distance Type 2 Line
Adapter) For attachment of two half-duplex start/stop lines at
speeds up to 600 bps. Includes two IBM Limited Distance Type 2
Line Adapters and no external modems are required. Note: Total
wire length of each line may not exceed 8.25 wire-miles ... see
SRL GA24-3435' for further details. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 4B (#4742). (Leased line. Line Adapter. 2-wire)
For attachment of two half-duplex. start/stop lines at speed up to
600 bps. Includes two IBM Leased Line, 2-wire, Line Adapters
and no external modems are required. Note: See SRL GA243435' for further details. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 4C (#4743).
(Leased Line, Line Adapter, 4wire) For attachment of two start/stop lines at speeds up to 600
bps. Includes two IBM Leased Line, 4-wire, Line Adapters and no
external modems are' required. Note: See SRL GA24-3435' for
further details. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and
Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 5A (#4751). (2400 bps Leased Point-to-point
Integrated Modem) Fnr attachment of one synchronous line at a
speed of 2400 or 1200 bps. The Line Set includes one 2400 bps
Integrated Modem equipped with Receive Equalization which is
suitable for communication over a leased voice grade channel with
an IBM modem similiarly equipped. No external modem is required.
This integrated modem must communicate with a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or
equivalent IBM modem. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 58 (#4752).
(2400 bps Leased Multi-point,
Control, Integrated Modem) For attachment of one synchronous
line at a speed of 2400 bps or 1200 bps. This Line Set includes
one 2400 bps Integrated Modem which is suitable for communication over a leased voice grade channel with a similiar modem
equipped with both Transmit and Receive Equalization. No external modem is required. This integrated modem must communicate
with a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or equivalent IBM modem. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See
Figures 1 and 3.
(2400 bps Switched Network,
LINE SET, TYPE 6A (#4761).
Integrated Modem) For attachment of one synchronous line at a
speed of 2400 bps or 1200 bps. Used for operation over the
Public Switched Network via Common Carrier Data Coupler Type
CBS (or equivalent). Automatic Answering of incoming calls will be
performed by the modem. Automatic Equalization is effected at the
beginning of each call. This modem communicates with either a
2400/1200 bps Integrated Modem or the 3872 Modem equipped
with a Switched Network feature. No external modem is required.
Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites:
See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 8A (#4781). (1200 bps Leased Line Adapter)
Provides for the attachment of two start/stop or synchronous lines
at speeds up to 600 bps or at 1200 bps. This Line Set includes
two 1200 bps Line Adapters suitable for communication over a
leased voice grade channel with similiar Line Adapters. No external modems are required. This integrated modem must communicate
with another 1200 bps IBM integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 8B (#4782). (1200 bps Switched Network Line
Adapter) Provides for the attachment of two start/stop lines at
speeds up to 600 bps or two synchronous lines at speeds of 600
bps or 1200 bps. This Line Set includes two 1200 bps Line Adapters equipped with Auto Answer suitable for communication over
the Public Switched Network via Common Carrier Data Coupler
CBS (or equivalent) with similiar Line Adapters. No external modems are required. This integrated modem must communicate with
another 1200 bps IBM integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 9A (#4791). (1200 bps Switched Network Line
Adapter with Automatic Call Originate) Provides for the attachment of one synchronous line at a speed of 1200 bps or 600 bps.
This Line Set includes one 1200 bps Line Adapter equipped with
the Automatic Answering and Automatic Call Originate functions
suitable for the automatic dialing of a remote terminal, the automatic answering of an incoming call and for communication over
the Public Switched Network via Common Carrier Data Coupler
CBS (or equivalent) with a similiar Line Adapter (which need not
be equipped with the Auto Answer and Auto Call Originate features). No external modems or automatic call units are required.
This integrated modem must communicate with another 1200 bps IBM
integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations
and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE lOA (#4784). (1200 bps Leased Duplex Data
Integrated Modem) For attachment of one duplex synchronous
line at speeds up to 1200 bps. This Line Set includes one 1200
bps Duplex Data Integrated Modem. No external modem is re-
quired. This integrated modem must communicate with another 1200
bps IBM integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE llA (#4754). (2400 bps Leased Point-to-Point
Duplex Data Integrated Modem) For attachment of one duplex
synchronous line at speeds of 2400 bps or 1200 bps. This Line
Set includes one 2400 bps Duplex Data Integrated Modem with
equalization suitable for leased duplex point-to-point operation. No
external modem is required. This integrated modem must communicate with a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or equivalent IBM modem. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See
Figures 1 and 3.
liNE SET, TYPE llB (#4755).
(2400 bps Leased Multi-point
Master Duplex Data Integrated Modem) For attachment of one
duplex synchronous line at speeds of 2400 or 1200 bps. This Line
Set includes one 2400 bps Duplex Data Integrated Modem without
equalization suitable for leased duplex multi-point master operation. No external modem is required. This integrated modem must
communicate with a 2400 bps IBM 3872 or equivalent IBM modem.
Field Jnstallation: Yes. Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites:
See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 12A (#4785).
(1200 bps Leased Integrated
Modem with a Bi-directional Interrupt Signal) This Line Set provides for two modems communicating with IBM 3767 Terminals
operating in 2741 Line Control at a line speed of 300 bps using
two wire common carrier facilities. The customer must specify the
"No Echo Suppreslliciri'" option from the common carrier. In addition to the above capability, the Line Set has the same functional
capabilities as Line Set, Type 8A two-wire facilities. This Line Set
includes two 1200 bps Leased Integrated Modems. No external
modem is required. This integrated modeitl"must communicate with
another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
LINE SET, TYPE 12B (#4786). (1200 bps Switched Integrated
Modem with a Bi-directional Signal) This Line Set provides for
two modems communicating with 3767 Terminals operating in
2741 Line Control at the above capability. This Line Set has the
same functional capabilities as Line Set, Type 8B (#4732) and
includes two 1200 bps Switched Integrated Modems. No external
modem is required. This integrated modem must communicate with
another IBM 1200 bps integrated modem. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum, Limitations and Prerequisites: See Figures 1 and 3.
GENERAL FEATURES
UNIT PROTECTION (#8510). Provides'a lock on the 3705 that
deactivates all switches on the control panel (except power off and
power on) when the key is removed from the lock. Two keys are
included with this feature. For additional or replacement keys, see
"Locks and Keys" on M 10000 pages. Field Installation: Yes.
Maximum: One per 3705.
BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#4650). Within each communication channel there must be a clocking mechanism to time the data
rate. When this clocking mechanism is not provided by either the
communication facility or the "modem," then the 3705 must provide the clocking through the use of a Business Machine Clock.
The clock speed should match the data rate (in bits per second ...
bps). The Business Machine Clocks are contained within the Communications Scanner. A clock in a Communication Scanner cannot
be used by communication lines attached to a different Communication Scanner.
Each Communication Scanner, Type 1 or 2 must have at least one
Business Machine Clock, with each scanner limited to a maximum
of four clocks. If a Communication Scanner has at least one communication line attached where either the modem or the communication facility provides the clocking, then one of the possible four
clocks in the scanner must be less than one-half the speed of the
lowest externally clocked line attachment. All direct attached
terminals must have a Business Machine Clock in the 3705 which
matches the transmission rate (bps) of the terminal. Notes: [1] The
Business Machine Clock is assigned to a given communication line
interface under the control of the program operating in the 3705
... [2] For purposes of determining Business Machine Clock requirements, Line Set 5A, 5B, 6A and 11 A, and Line Interface
Base, Type 7 provide "modem clocking" ... [3] Communication
Scanner, Type 3 must have Business Machine Clock, specify
#9615 and may have one other clock (either specify #9609 or
#9610).
The following Line Sets must have a Business Machine Clock:
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
1A
1B
1C
1F
2A
3A
3B
4A
• SRL GA24-3435-2 or subsequent revisions.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
(#4711)
(#4712)
(#4713)
(#4716)
(#4721)
(#4731)
(#4732)
(#4741)
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
Type
4B (#4742)
4C (#4743)
8A (#4781)
8B (#4782)
9A (#4791)
10A (#4784)
12A (#4785)
12B (#4786)
--------=-- =------ --=----':' =
M 3705.10
Jul79
OP Machines
3705 Communications Controller (cont'd)
The following Line Sets may require a Business Machine Clock if
the clocking is not supplied by the modem:
Line Set, Type 10 (#4714)
Line Set, Type 1H (#4718)
Line Set, Type 1J (#4719)
A Business Machine Clock is required for each speed; specify one
of the following speeds for each Business Machine Clock.
Speed (bps) Specify
45.5
50.0
56.9
74.2
75.0
110.0
134.5
Speed (bps)
#9601
9613
9602
9603
9604
9605
9606
For "A" model - Specify #9591 (RPL Model A) on 3705.
For "B" model -- Specify #9592 (RPL Model B) on 3705
Specify
150.0
300.0
600.0
950.0
1200.0
2000.0
2400.0
1 50, 600, 1 200
installed with any of the following: Channel Adapter, Type 1, 2, 3
or 4 (#1541-1544), Communication Scanner, Type 3 (#1643),
LIB Type 5 (#4705), or LIB Type 11 (#5001). Also see Extended
Environment (#3620) and Internal Air Circulation 1 and 2 (#4670
and #4671). Specify: For plant or field installation, one of the
following must be specified, depending on the 3705 model involved.
#9611
9612
9607
9614
9608
9609
9610
9615'
For "C" model -
Specify #9593 (RPL Model C) on 3705
For "0" model _. Specify #9594 (RPL Model D) on 3705
• Specify #9615 is only available with Communication Scanner, Type 3 (#1643) and is mandatory on Communication Scanner, Type 3 High Speed (#1644).
BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#4651). when either line Set Type
1W (#4727) or Line Set Type 1Z (#4728) is located in a l.I.B.
Type 1 (#4701) then a Business Machine Clock must be added to
the U.B. Specify: #9621 for 14.4K bps, #9622 for 57.6K bps.
Prerequlsltes:1.1 #4727 or #4728 in l.I.B. position one.
Maximum: One per 3705/3706 module. Limitations: Must be
module.
applied to L.I.B. 1 in position one of a 3705
3705-1 Model Change In the Field: If an installed machine is
already equipped with Remote Program Loader (#6260), specify
#9590 (RPL Already Installed) on
being ordered to
effect the model change to B, Cor 0 as follows:
For model BFor model CFor model D•• These codes are described under item 1 of "Specify".
REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER (3705-1)
EXTENDED ENVIRONMENT (#3620). Applies to the 3705 in A
model, but to the last
in B, C, 0 models. Provides cooling
such that a 3705-1 with Remote Program Load (#6260) can operate in a Class B Extended Environment with a temperate range of
10· C to 37.8· C (50· F to 100· F). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Remote Program Loader (#6260) on the associated
3705-1 frame.
INTERNAL AIR CIRCULATION 1 and 2 (#4670, 4671). Internal
Air Circulation 1 (#4670) and Internal Air Circulation 2 (#4671)
provide for dissapation of the internal heat for the first and second
blocks of core storage respectively, in each module (3705/3706)
of the 3705-1. The following table indicates which Air Circulation
features (#4670 and #4671) must be ordered for each module
depending on the 3705-1 model involved.
w #9751
3705
Model
Core Storage
18K
32K
Core Storage
32K
32K
w #9752
Core Storage
32K
32K
w #9753
Core Storage
32K
32K
#4870 #4871 #4870 #4871 #4870 #4871 #4670 #4871
A2
X
X
B2
B3
X
X
X
X
B4
X
X
C2
X
X
X
C3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C4
C5
C6
X
X
X
X
X
05
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
06
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
07
X
X
X
X
X
X
03
04
08
REMOTE PROGRAM LOADER-II (#6261). For the 3705-11. Provides the means of remotely loading the NCP with or without a
Channel Adapter on the machine. Maximum: One per 3705-11.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: For the 3705-11, cannot be
installed with four Channel Adapter Type 4s (#1544), but any
other proper CA combination (see CA section) is acceptable; also,
the RPL-II feature on the 3705-11 cannot be installed with LIB Type
5 (#4705) or LIB Type 11 (#5001) unless there is a Channel
Adapter also installed.
X
X
X
02
REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER (3705-11)
REMOTE POWER OFF (#6250). This feature applies to both the
3 705-1 and 3 705-11, but the following detail reflects the requirements of this section (Remote 3705-11) only. Provides the capability of turning the 3705-11 power off with a command over a communication line. This feature is applicable to the 3705-11 when
then the 3705-11 is utilized only as a remote stand-alone.
Maximum: One per 3705-11. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Remote Program Loader - II (#6261).
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Maximum: Depending on the 3705 model, one #4670 and one
#4671 per 3705
as indicated in the above chart. Field
Installation: Yes.
REMOTE POWER OFF (#6250). This feature applies to both the
3705-1 and 3705-11, but the following detail reflects the requirements of this section (Remote 3705-1) only. Provides the capability
of turning the 3705-1 power off with a command over a communication line. Maximum: One per 3705-1. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Remote Program Loader (#6260).
REMOTE PROGRAM LOADER (#6260). For the 3705-1. Provides
the means of remotely loading the NCP Program when there is no
Channel Adapter on the machine. Maximum: One per 3705-1.
Field Installation: Yes. limitation: For the 3705-1, cannot be
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- --------
--- -----_.- - -----
M 3705.11
Jul79
DP Machines
3705 Communications Controller
(cont'd)
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
2 yr Purchase
MRC
Special Feature Prices:
Attach Base Type 1
#1301 $ 19 $ 16
Attach Base Type 2
1302
19
16
Channel Adapter Typ 1 1541
110
94
Channel Adapter Typ 2 1542
202 172
Channel Adapter Typ 3 1543
407 346
Channel Adapter Typ 4 1544
176 150
Comm Scanner, Type 1 1641
58
49
Comm Scanner, Type 2 1642
196 167
Comm Scanner, Type 3 1643
687 585
Comm Scanner, Type 3HS
1644
922
785
Extended Environment
Business Machine Clk
Business Machine Clk
Internal Air Circ 1
Internal Air Circ 2
Line Inter Base Type 1
Line Set Type 1 A
Line Set Type 1 B
Line Set Type 1 C
Line Set Type 10
Line Set Type 1 E
Line Set Type 1 F
Line Set Type 1G
Line Set Type 1 H
Line Set Type 1J
Line Set Type 1 S
Line Set Type 1T
Line Set Type 1 U
3620
4650
4651
4670
4671
4701
4711
4712
4713
4714
4715
4716
4717
4718
4719
4720
4725
4726
25
12
26
12
6
43
19
20
19
41
32
65
83
71
43
92
149
166
21
10
22
10
5
37
16
17
16
35
27
55
71
60
37
78
127
141
83
149
71
127
Line Set Type IGA
Line Set Type ITA
4722
4723
Line Set Type lW
Line Set Type 1 Z
Line Inter Base Type 2
Line Set Type 2A
Line Inter Base Type 3
Line Set Type 3A
Line Set Type 3B
Line Inter Base Type 4
Line Set Type 4A
Line Set Type 4B
Line Set Type 4C
Line Inter Base Type 5
Line Set Type 5A
Line Set Type 5B
Line Inter Base Type 6
Line Set Type 6A
Line Inter Base Type 7
Line Inter Base Type 8
Line Set Type 8A
Line Set Type 8B
Line InterBase Type 9
Line Set Type 9A
Line Inter Base Typ 10
Line Set Type lOA
Line Inter Base Typ 11
Line Set Type 11 A
Line Set Type 11 B
Line Inter Base Typ 12
Line Set Type 12A
Line Set Type 12B
Remote Power Off
Remote Program Ldr
Remote Progrm Ldr·1I
Two Channel Switch
Unit Protection
4727
4728
4702
4721
4703
4731
4732
4704
4741
4742
4743
4705
4751
4752
4706
4761
4707
4708
4781
4782
4709
4791
5000
4784
5001
4754
4755
5002
4785
4786
6250
6260
6261
8002
8510
139 118
254 216
43
37
32
27
79
67
25
21
25
21
49
42
43
37
43
37
43
37
110
94
65
55
58
49
110
94
71
60
209 178
43
37
46
39
59
50
43
37
65
55
49
42
83
71
98
83
98
83
90
77
42
36
116
99
129 110
12
10
262 223
294 250
65
55
35SUC -
641
641
3,555
6,470
12,910
5,800
1,880
6,250
22,640
25,120
832
424
880
416
207
1,455
641
676
641
1,355
1,030
2.090
2,695
2,295
1,455
3,020
4,850
5,440
$
MMMC
.50
.50
15.50
15.50
18.50
13.50
10.00
15.50
52.00
$
62.00
2,695
HC
1.00
2.00
HC
HC
4.50
2.00
2.00
2.00
4.50
3.00
8.50
9.50
15.50
3.50
9.50
15.00
17.00
9.50
4,850
4,720
8,640
1,455
1,030
2,515
850
850
1,665
1,455
1,455
1,455
3,555
2,075
1,860
3,555
2,295
6.675
1,455
1,490
1,920
1,455
1,785
1,685
2,685
3,120
3,120
2,900
1,190
3,265
3,605
416
8,320
9,335
2,090
35
9.50
17.00
4.00
5.50
3.50
2.00
2.00
4.50
5.00
7.50
7.50
8.50
12.00
11.00
8.50
15.50
28.50
5.50
7.50
9.50
4.00
15.50
3.50
9.00
4.50
16.50
14.00
4.50
24.00
27.00
.50
45.00
41.00
4.00
HC
15.00
[reverse side is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'-------- -------
- ---- - ----_.------
M 3713
Jul79
DP Machines
3713 PRINTER
Purpose: Printer for all models of the 3741 (GSD product).
Highlights: Prints serially at a maximum rate of 40 cps, using the
EBCDIC character set. The maximum print line is 128 print
positions at 10 characters per inch spacing. Line spacing is 6
lines per inch.
The unit has a pin feed platen which permits the feeding of
marginally punched continuous paper. A choice of 12-1/2,
13-1/8 or 13-7/8 inch hole-to-hole pin feed platen widths may be
specified for the basic printer '" see "Specify." Smaller platens
(to 5-1/4 inches hole-to-hole width) and platen interchangeability
can be accommodated in conjunction with the adjustable margin
special feature ... see "Special Features."
Matrix characters are formed by 7 vertical wires printing dots in
up to 4 of 7 possible horizontal positions. Refer to SRL
GA24-3488 for forms design considerations and limitations. Up to
six-part forms can be printed with a maximum thickness of .018"
(for optimum feeding and stacking, no more than three parts are
recommended).
Card
stock
continuous forms
are
not
recommended.
PREREQUISITES:
3713 Printer Attachment (#8111) and
appropriate Expansion Feature (#3891, 3892) on the 3741 Data
Station or 3741 Programmable Work Station. See GSD sales
manual.
Supplies: A biack ribbon,
equivalent, is required.
IBM
part
number
1136970
or
Bibliography:
IBM 3741 Data Station Reference Manual,
GA21-9183, and IBM 3741 Data Station Operator Guide,
GA21-9131.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9901 for 115 V,
#9902 for 208V, or #9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent
with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. FIELD INSTALLATION: Not recommended.
[3] Pin Feed Platen: #9162 for 126 print positions (13-1/8"
hole-to-hole), or #9167 for 120 print positions (12-1/2"
hole-to-hole), or #9168 for 128 print positions (13-7/8"
hole-to-hole).
Smaller pin feed platen widths can be specified in conjunction with
the Adjustable Margin Feature (#1115) ... see "Special Features:'
NOTE: Do not order #9168 unless paper is available in your
area.
PRICES:
Mdl
3713
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase MMMC
$ 174
$ 148
$5,610
$72.50
Plan Offering: Pian B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 35%
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADJUSTABLE MARGIN FEATURE (#1115).
Provides operator
adjustable right and left margin stops and accommodates
additional platen widths and platen interchangeability. For
available piaten widths and feature numbers to be specified
(#9151 thru #9168), see M 10000 pages. To obtain additional
platens, see RPQ
Field
Installation: Yes. Note: Do not select #9168 unless paper is
available in your area.
Special Feature Prices:
Adj Margin Feature
MAC/
MRC
#1115 $
5
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
$
4
$ 218
$ 1
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the feature # indicated
below at the price listed in the M 10000 pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) - Permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for stacking
after printing.
I\Jnt tn hp
rF>nroduced without written permission.
-------- ----
=---=- =--':' =
M 3732
Jul79
DP Machines
3732 TEXT DISPLAY STATION
Purpose: Provides a text entry and editing keyboard and display
for the 3730 Distributed Office Communication System.
Highlights: The 3732 consists of a display and keyboard (special
feature) that have been designed specifically to provide text entry
and editing facilities for the 3730 Distributed Office Communication System. The 3732 displays all the text characters that can be
entered at the keyboard and that can be printed by the system
printers (with the exception of certain compound characters printed by overstriking). In addition, special graphic characters are
displayed to denote certain text control functions.
The display is a 15 inch (diagonal) cathode ray tube display providing 24 lines of 80 characters each, to give a total of 1920
characters. For text entry and editing, lines 1 and 24 are reserved
for system use, leaving 22 lines for text entry (line 1 displays a
scale to indicate character position, and is used to display formatting information such as margin settings and tab stops, and to
track cursor position: line 24 is used to display status information).
When, with user programming, the 3732 is used for full-screen
processing, the user has control over all 24 lines (except for minor
restrictions on the use of lines 1 and 24). The display includes an
anti-glare screen.
One of three keyboards may be ordered (as special features): a
77-key typewriter keyboard (#4621), a 77-key ASCII typewriter
keyboard (#4622), or a 75-key typewriter keyboard (#4623). The
keyboards contain a central text entry section that is similiar in
layout to typewriter keyboards. Both upper and lower case characters may be entered. In addition, the keyboards contain 29
function and control keys concerned with document creation,
editing, formatting, and printing. The 3732 must be installed with
a keyboard.
Text functions: The following text entry and editing functions are
provided by the 3732:
- Automatic new line and word spill (allowing an operator to enter
text without being concerned about line endings)
- Temporary left margin (providing automatic indentation)
- Adjustable right margin
Adjust and no-adjust entry mode
Insert mode
Tabulation (providing normal, decimal, and centering tab stops)
Column tabulation (allowing an operator to enter tabular material column-by-column)
Required characters (new line, space, backspace, hyphen)
Special characters (such as superscripts, subscripts, temporary
left margin)
Delete character, word
Backspace deletion
Underscore character, word, or group of words (separated by
required spaces)
The following system functions are invoked using function keys on
the 3732 keyboard:
- Block insert, copy, move, return, delete
- Delete line, sentence
- Screen advance, return
- Page advance, return
- (Go to) End, (Go to) Top of document
Additional 3732 functions include:
- Cursor-positioning keys to move the display cursor to any
position within the display area (up, down, left, right, and
"home" - the first available text character position)
- An audible alarm tone that, rather like the bell on a typewriter,
warns an operator that a line or a screen is nearly full (e.g., in
no-adjust mode the alarm tone sounds when a character is
entered or moved into a position five characters from the right
margin)
- a HELP key to aid users who have problems when operating
the 3732
- A PRINT key to send the currently displayed document to a
preassigned print Queue, for printing as soon as the assigned
printer is available
- An Adjust key to adjust the line length of the currently displayed document and to divide the document into pages
- A Display key to allow or inhibit the display of certain special
characters (such as space, and tabs)
Security and Integrity Features: A Security Keylock (#6340)
helps prevent unauthorized use of the 3732. Text cannot normally
be displayed or modified unless the key is in the ON position.
Problem Determination Procedures: To minimize machine downtime, users are encouraged to determine the cause of 3732 malfunctions using IBM-provided Problem Determination Procedures.
Data obtained from these procedures is used to correct customer
operating or programming errors, or is passed to a customer
engineer to aid in isolating a machine malfunction. The Problem
Detemination Procedures are presented in an easy-to-follow graphic form and are contained in the 3732 Problem Determination
Guide, GA33-3024 (stored in the keyboard).
Publications: Refer to the latest level of IBM System/370 Bibliography of Industry Systems and Application Programs, GC20-0370,
for details of 3732 publications and 3730 system publications.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (120V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9890
for locking plug, or #9891 for non lock plug. If standard 2.8
meter (9 foot) power cable is not required, specify #9511 for
1.8 meter (6 foot) cable, #9512 for 3.7 meter (12 foot) cable,
or #9513 for 4.5 meter (15 foot) cable.
[2] Cables: See M 10000 pages for cable prices and ordering
instructions. For cable specifications, see 3790 Communication
System Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2769.
[3] Character Set: Specify one of the following:
#9082 - for EBCDIC Character Set (word processing). Used
with 77-key Typewriter Keyboard (#4621) and 75-key
Typewriter Keyboard (#4623).
#9084 - for ASCII Character Set (B). Used with 77-key ASCII
Typewriter Keyboard (#4622).
PRICES
Mdl
3732
MRC
MLC
2 yrs
Purchase
MMMC
$ 98
$ 83
$2,905
$ 24
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Customer Set-Up: No
SPECIAL FEATURES
KEYBOARDS (#4621, 4622, 4623).
#4621 -- 77-key Typewriter Keyboard, movable, typewriter-like
layout, with 48 text entry keys and 29 function and control keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
#4622 -- 77-key ASCII Typewriter Keyboard, movable, ASCII
typewriter-like layout, with 48 text entry keys and 29 function
and control keys. Prerequisite: ASCII Character Set (B) (#9084).
#4623 -75-key Typewriter Keyboard, movable, typewriter-like
layout, with 46 text entry keys and 29 function and control keys.
Prerequisite: EBCDIC Character Set (#9082).
Maximum: One of the above. Field Installation: Yes.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6340).
A lock and key that normally
prevents modification or display of the data in the display when
the key is in the OFF position. For additional or replacement keys,
see M10000 pages. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Keyboards 77-key Typewriter
77-key ASCII
15·key Typewriter
Security Keylock
MLC
MRC 2 yrs
#4621 $ 14 $ 12
14
12
4622
14
12
4623
6340
35SUC -
Attachment to Controller: The 3732 attaches to a 3791 Controller mdl 11 C, 12A or 12B, via a coaxial cable at a distance of up
to 609 meters (2,000 feet).
PREREQUISITES: 3791 Controller mdl 11 C, 12A or 12B, with
Configuration Support #9171 installed. Refer to 3791 in
"Machines" for details.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
Purchase MMMC
$ 420
420
420
35
$ 2.50
2.50
2.50
N/C
-------- - - ---------_.
- -------_.-
M 3735.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3735 PROGRAMMABLE BUFFERED
TERMINAL
Purpose: A programmable terminal capable of buffered source
document creation, concurrent data capture, and subsequent
batch transmissions via an integral binary synchronous communications adapter.
For possible use with the System/3, see GSD
manual
Highlights: The 3735 consists of a control unit and an associated
keyboard printer. The programmable control unit houses a fixed
disk facility, logic circuits, and a binary synchronous communications adapter.
Keyboard -- an IBM Selectric" Keyboard with operator guidance
lights and switches.
Printer -- a Selectric II 15.5 cps printer with friction feed platen
(standard) or a pin feed platen (optional). Vertical forms movement, and automatic print element positioning can be provided by
the control unit.
Control Unit -- contains a non-removable disk with approximately
62.8K bytes of customer usable storage, plus the IBM written
terminal control program. Additional user storage is available in
two increments of 41.8K bytes each and a third increment of
167.5K bytes, for a total of 314.1K bytes. Installation of some
special features will reduce customer usable storage as shown in
the "Customer Storage/Feature Table." A binary synchronous
communications adapter for transmission rates to 4800 bps is
standard. The control unit provides the focal point for application
interaction with customer Form Description Programs, the IBM
written subroutines, and the operator guidance lights and switches
on the keyboard.
Customer Storage/Feature Table - the addition of special features singly or in combination with other features will decrease
customer usable storage as follows:
Feature
1.
2.
3.
4.
Total Storage Reduction
#7880 and/or #4600
#4001
#4001 and 1 above
# 1450 alone or with 1. 2 & 3 above
1904
3808
5712
7616
bytes
bytes
bytes
bytes
Output Printer - the 3286 Printer mdl 3 can be attached for 66
cps output printing.
Security Enhancement Features -- the Print Suppress capability
(standard) allows selected data fields to be entered without being
printed. The Keylock (special feature) is a key-operated switch
which is located on the terminal control unit. When the switch is
in the "off" position, no keyboard/printer operations are possible.
Previously recorded data may be sent to the computer and data
may be received from the computer provided the terminal was set
up for this operation prior to the Keylock being set to the "off"
position.
The Operator Identification Card Reader (special feature) is provided to enter terminal operator identification. This enhances the
programmed control of the operator's access to data and allows
an audit of his actions. The reader may also be used to enter any
sequence of numeric characters pre-recorded on a card for other
purposes such as transaction control, account control, and billing.
The Operator Identification Card Reader also reads the Magnetic
Credit Card announced for the 2730 Transaction Validation Terminal.
Transmission -- the 3735 operates in half-duplex mode over
facilities C4, C5, 03, 04, D4SB, 05, 05SB, Xl M or X2M ... for
details concerning these facilities, see M 2700 pages.
Binary Synchronous Transmission -- allows for transmission
rates of 1200, 2000, 2400 or 4800 bps.
The 3735 can communicate over multi-point or dial facilities to
S/360 mdls 22 thru 195, or any S/370 or.4300 Processor. See
"Programming" section for information on programming support.
Transmission Code -- one of two codes can be selected ... see
"Specify" for EBCDIC or ASCII options.
Modems used.
one Integrated Modem or External Modem can be
The standard 3735 provides a cable and standard EIA interface
for connection of IBM Modems or non-IBM Data Sets at transmission rates of 1200, 2000, 2400 or 4800 bps. See "Special
Features" for Integrated Modems that may be used instead of an
external modem/data set. Switched network operation and Auto
Answer are standard on the 3735. Multipoint Data Link Control
(#5010) is required for leased point-to-point or multipoint operation. Synchronous Clock (#7705) is required for 1200 bps operation.
Speed
(bps)
Facility
(1 )
Integrated
Modem (1)
1200
1200
2000
C4
03
C5M/D4M
#5501
5500 (2)
2400
D4 (multipt or pt-t-pt)
2400
2400
2400
2400
C5
04 (multipt)
04 (pt-to-pl)
D4SB
2400
X1M
4800
D5 (multipt or pt-t-pt)
C6
05, D5SB
(pt-to-pl)
05, D5SB
(multipl)
X2M
4800
4800'
#7705
5010 & 7705
None/501O
5610
5602
5600
5602 or 5600
and 7951
4800
4800
IBM External 37.35 Prereq
Modem (1)
Feature
3863-/
3872-1
3872-1
3872-1
5010
3872-1
5010
5010
3864-/
3874-1
5010
3874-1
5010
3874-1
5010
5010
None
5010
5010
None
NOTES: (1) For communication:. capabilities, modem utilization,
and special features, see 3863, 3864, 3872, 3874 and
M 2700 pages.
(2) Cl conditioning not required.
Customer Responsibilities -- it is recommended that a telephone
handset, which may be used to originate a call over common
carrier Public Switched Facilities, be provided within 15 feet of the
3735 to facilitate maintenance. For additional responsibilities also
see M 2700 pages. In addition, since the 3735 is designed for
sequential processing of customer applications, proper forms
design is a customer responsibility.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621
or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 VAC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking Plug -- #9880, or non-lock plug -- #9881.
[2] Transmission Code: #9761 for EBCDIC, or #9762 for ASCII.
The 3735 keyboard and print element support the mono case
64-character ASCII and is supplied when #9762 is specified.
LIMITATION: Not recommended for field installation.
[3] Print Element: If EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) is specified, Print Element (Part No. 1167043) is supplied and need
not be specified. If ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) is specified, Print Element (Part No. 1167167) is supplied and need
not be specified. With #9762, if a Dual Case element (Part
No. 1167168) is desired, see pages TC 21 and TC 23 in
"Type Catalog."
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
3735
1
$ 369
$11,390
$98.00
Purchase Option: 50% Machine Group: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
SPECIAL FEATURES
AOO'L CUSTOMER STORAGE, 1st INCREMENT (#1001).
Provides an additional 41.8K bytes of user storage. Together with the
standard customer area of 62.8K. total user storage becomes
104.7K bytes. Field Installation: Yes,
AOO'L CUSTOMER STORAGE, 2nd INCREMENT (#1002).
Provides a second increment of 41.8K bytes of user storage. Together with the standard area, plus #1001, the total user storage
becomes 146.6K bytes. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Add'i Customer Storage, 1 st Increment (#1001).
AOO'L CUSTOMER STORAGE, 3rd INCREMENT (#1003).
Provides an additional 167.5K bytes of user storage. Together with
the standard area, plus #1001 and #1002, the total user storage
becomes 314.1 K bytes. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Add'i Customer Storage, 1 st Increment (# 1 001)
and 2nd Increment (#1002). Limitation: Only 3735s serial No.
12001 and later can have this feature field installed.
BUFFER EXPANSION (#1450).
Adds three 480-byte dynamic
buffers that provide fast access local storage for user buffers and
counters. Two index counters are supplied with this feature or
with File Storage Capability (#4001). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. limitation: Customer storage is reduced by
7,616 bytes total when this feature is installed singly or in combination with any other special features.
See "Customer
Storage/Feature Table" under "Highlights."
5496 ATTACHMENT (#3950). To attach a 5496 Data Recorder
mdl 1. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
3735 Attachment (#7801) on the 5496.
FILE STORAGE CAPABILITY (#4001).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Permits user access to a
-------
---- ------- --==-=
':' =
DP Machines
3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal (cont'd)
portion of the 3735 disk storage for storage and retrieval of records that are coded with a simple identification key. The maximum record size, including an identification key and two data
delimiters, is 236 bytes. The identification key can range from 1
to 1 5 bytes. Two index counters are supplied with this feature or
with Buffer Expansion (#1450).
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation: Yes. Limltstlons and Restrictions: There is no
additional reduction of customer storage of 7,616 bytes when this
feature is installed in combination with Buffer Expansion (#1450).
On machines without # 1450, this feature reduces customer storage by 3,808 bytes. See "Customer Storage/Feature Table"
under "Highlights."
OPERATOR IDENTIFICATION CARD READER (#4600). A small
(approximately 3" x 4" x 6") self-enclosed device for reading
information from a Magnetically Striped and Encoded 1.0. Card
and a Magnetic Credit Card (2-1/8" x 3-3/8"). An 8-foot cable is
provided to accommodate table-top use. Power is supplied by th.e
3735. .
.
Maximum:
One. Field Instsllation: Yes.
Storage/Feature Table" under "Highlights."
See
"Customer
KEYLOCK (#4695). A key operated switch located on the control unit. When the switch is in the "off" position, no I/O is possible from the printer/keyboard. The control unit may be used for
transmission provided it was set up to do so prior to keylock being
set to the "off" position. This feature supplies two keys. For
additional or replacement keys, see "Locks and Keys" in M
10000 pages. Field Installation: Yes.
MULTIPOINT DATA LINK CONTROL (#5010).
Required for
leased line attachment (point-to-point and multipoint). Allows
multiple 3735s to be used on the same communications line with a
CPU. Terminal can be polled or selected when acting as a tributary station in a multipoint system. All 3735s installed on the same
line facility require this feature, and they must use the same transmission code and modem ... see Modems and M 2700 pages.
Field Installation: Yes.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5500). A modem for operation at 1200 bps over leasad 2-wire or 4-wire voice-grade channel.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Synchronous Clock (#7705) ... Multipoint Data Link Control (#5010) is
required for leased point-to-point and for multipoint operation.
Llmltstion: Cannot be installed with 2400 BPS Integrated Modems (#5600, #5602, #5610). The communicating transmission
control unit, ICA or Communications Adapter on a 4331 must be
equipped with a 1 200 BPS Integrated Modem, or the IBM 1200
BPS Line Adapter.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED WITH AUTO ANSWER (#5501).
A modem with auto answer for operation at
1200 bps over a switched telecommunications network via a
Telephone Co. supplied Data Access Arrangement Type CBS, or
equivalent. Maximum: One. Field Instsllatlon: Yes. Prerequisite:
Synchronous Clock (#7705). Llmitstion: Cannot be installed with
2400 BPS Integrated Modems (#5600, #5602, #5610). The
communicating transmission control unit, ICA or Communications
Adapter on a 4331 must be equipped with 1200 BPS Integrated
Modem, or the IBM 1200 BPS Line Adapter.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, POINT-TO-POINT (#5600).
An integrated self-clocked modem for 2400 bps operation on
point-ta-point communications facilities ... 2- or 4-wire connection.
Half speed capability is standard. Compensation for line distortion
is via operator adjustment on the 3735 operator panel. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Submit an RPQ for
operation on a basic 3002 channel. Multipoint Data Link Control
(#5010). Llmltstlon: Cannot be installed with Synchronous Clock
(#7705), 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500 or #5501), or
2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5602 or #5610). This modem will
operate with the IBM 3872 Modem equipped with Point-ta-point
Feature (#6101 or #6102).
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, MULTIPOINT (#5602).
An
integrated self-clocked modem for 2400 bps operation as a tributary station in a centralized multipoint network ... 4-wire. Half
speed capability is standard. Compensation for line distortion
between the control and the tributary station is via operator adjustment on the 3735 operator panel. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prereql'lsltes: Submit an RPQ for operation on
a basic 3002 channel. Multipoint Data Link Control (#5010).
Limitation: Cannot be installed with Synchronous Clock (#7705),
1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500 or #5501), or 2400 BPS
Integrated Modem (#5600 or #5610). All tributary stations in the
multipOint centralized network must be equipped with 2400 BPS
Integrated Modem, Multipoint or the IBM 3872 Modem with Multipoint Tributary (#5101 or #5102). The master station may be
equipped with the IBM 3872 Modem-Basic.
M 3735.2
Jul79
matic equalization is effected at the beginning of each call. Attachment to the network is via common carrier Data Access Arrangement Type CBS, or equivalent. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Synchronous Clock (#7705), MultipOint Data Link Control (#5010), 1200
BPS Integrated Modem (#5500 or #5501), 2400 BPS Integrated
Modem (#5600 or #5602), or Switched Network Backup
(#795-1). This modem is compatible with the IBM 3872 Modem
equipped with Swltc~d Network-Basic (#7941) or Switched
Network-Second (#7942). In addition, this modem may communicate with a 3872 modem equipped with Switched Network Backup (#7951 or #7952). The control station may be equipped with
Automatic Call Originate (#1091).
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7705). A synchronous clock for use
with 1200 BPS Integrated Modems or data sets which do not have
an internal clock. The device with which the 3735 is to communicate with must also have an internal clock operating at the same
bps rate. Field Installation: Yes.
3286 PRINTER MDL 3 ATTACHMENT (#7880).
To attach a
3286 Printer mdl 3 (66 cps). A 3735 with EBCDIC Transmission
Code (#9761) requires a 3286 mdl 3 with EBCDIC Character Set
(#9089). A 3735 with ASCII Transmission Code (#9762) requires
a 3286 mdl 3 with ASCII Character Set (B) (#9092). Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. See "Customer Storage/Feature
Table" under "Highlights."
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP (#7951). Provides the capability of attaching the 2400 BPS Integrated Modem, Multipoint
(#5602) or the 2400 BPS Integrated Modem, Point-to-Point
(#5600) to the switched telephone network as a back-up to the
prime leased facility. A fixed compromise equalizer is provided for
back-up operation. Attachment to the switched telephone network, is made via the common carrier Data Access Arrangement
Type COT, or equivalent. Calls on the switched network must be
established and answered manually. Maximum: One. Field
Instsllation: Yes. Prerequisite: 2400 BPS Integrated Modem
(#5600 or #5602). Limitations: Cannot be installed with 2400
BPS Integrated Modem, Switched (#5610) or with 1200 BPS
Integrated Modem (#5500 or #5501). For OS/DOS BTAM programming considerations at the CPU, refer to Switched Network
Back-up under 3872 and Appendix "C" of IBM 3872 User's
Guide, GA27-3058.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
Additional Customer Storage
1st Increment
#1001 $ 33 $1,035
2nd Increment
1002
1,035
33
3rd Increment
1003
77
2,425
Buffer ExpanSion
1450
28
867
5496 Attachment
3950
28
867
File Storage Capsbllity
4001
13
416
Operator Identification
Card Reader
4600
16
520
Keylock
4695
35SUC
35
Multlpt Oats Link Control
5010
16
520
1200 BPS Integrated Modem
16
5500
535
1200 BPS Integrated Modem,
Switched w Auto Answer
5501
21
714
2400 BPS Integrated Modem
Polnt-ta-Polnt
70
1,905
5600
Multipoint
5602
77
2,115
Switched
5610
78
2,170
Synchronous Clock
7705
16
520
3286 Printer Mdl 3 Attach
7880
16
520
Switched Network Back-up
7951
10
303
$1.00
1.00
3.00
3.00
1.00
1.50
4.00
HC
1.00
3.50
4.00
13.50
16.00
16.00
1.00
1.00
4.00
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below, or Part No. shown in M 10000 pages, at the price listetl in
M 10000 pages. See M 10000 pages for additional information
and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) - Permits placement of continuous
forms (out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
PIN FEED PLATEN (#9509) -- In lieu of standard friction feed
platen. Maximum: One. See M 10000 pages for available options and additional #s to be specified. Limitations: Only 6
lines/inch spacing is available. Maximum width pin feed platen
which can be used is 13-1/8" hole-to-hole.
Forms Guide/Roll Paper Holder - an accessory that provides
guide for continuous forms or for mounting rolls of paper. Includes a tear bar. Interchangeable with the vertical form guide
which is. standard on the 3735. Available for field installation
only.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED (#5610).
An
integrated self-clocked modem for 2400 bps operation over the
switched telephone network facilities. Automatic answer and
manual half-speed capability are standard with this feature. Auta-
Not to be reproduced without written oermission.
-------- --=-- =------ --=--":' =
M 3736
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3736 PRINTER
Purpose: Provides hard copy output for the 3730 Distributed
Office Communication System.
Highlights: The 3736 Printer is a bidirectional, serial impact
printer used with the 3730 Distributed Office Communication
System. The printer is mounted in a desk-high work station that
contains the printer control electronics and power supplies. The
work station has a knee hole to allow the user to sit at the printer
while performing operations such as changing the paper or the
print ribbon. To reduce noise, the printer has an acoustic hood.
The 3736 prints on single sheets (cut forms) or on continuous
stationery, using a maximum of one original plus five carbon copies. An end-of-form sensor indicates when the printer is out of
continuous stationery.
Friction paper feed is standard for single sheets. For feeding
continuous stationery, a variable-width forms tractor (#8750) is
available as a special feature. In addition, a paper stacker/tray
(#5545) and a paper carrier (#5540) are available as accessories
for use with continuous stationery. The variable-width forms tractor and the two accessories 'are necessary for optimum feeding of
a wide range of continuous stationery. The variable-width forms
tractor alone permits satisfactory feeding of only a limited range of
continuous stationery.
Printer Characteristics:
Uses interchangeable 96-character print wheels in the following type styles:
Courier 10
1 O-pitch
Prestige Pica
1O-pitch
Prestige Elite
12-pitch
Letter Gothic
1 2-pitch
- Prints at up to 55 characters per second.
- Prints at six line per inch (single line spacing).
- Uses 3736 film ribbon. An end-of-ribbon sensor indicates
when the print ribbon needs replacing.
Paper Characteristics:
- The maximum paper width is 381 mm (15 inches), with a maximum writing line of 330mm (13 inches). The maximum paper
thickness is 0.6mm (0.025 inches).
- For specifications of forms that can be used on the 3736, see
Form Design Reference Guide for Printers, GA24-3488.
Attachment to Controller: The 3736 attaches to a 3791 Controller mdl 11 C, 12A or 12B via a coaxial cable at a distance of up to
609 meters (2,000 feet).
PREREQUISITES: 3791 Controller mdl 11 C, 12A or 12B with
Configuration Support #9171 installed. Refer to 3791 in
"Machines" for details.
IBM will replace worn or damaged IBM print wheels at no
charge to the customer on IBM 3736 machines covered by an
IBM Lease, Rental, or Maintenance agreement provided that
the wear or damage is due to normal machine usage. Replacement will only be made with an IBM print wheel of the same
specifications.
PRICES:
Mdl
3736
MLC
2 yrs
Purchase
MMMC
$250
$213
$7,455
$ 82
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 55%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Customer Set-Up: No
SPECIAL FEATURES
VARIABLE-WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8750),
Feeds continuous forms up to a maximum width of 368mm (14.5 inches).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Variable-Width Forms
Tractor
#8750
MRC
MLC
2 yrs
$25OSUC
Purchase MMMC
$ 250
NIC
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the feature number
indicated below at the price listed in the Ml0000 pages. For all
other orders, see M 10000 pages.
PAPER STACKER/TRAY (#5545) -- Holds fan-fold continuous
form paper and stacks the paper as it leaves the printer.
PAPER CARRIER (#5540) -- Guides the paper onto the paper
stacker Itray as the paper leaves the printer. The paper carrier
also has a tear-off blade and rod to hold continuous roll paper.
ADDITIONAL PRINT WHEELS -- Additional print wheels for typestyles required other than the two specified With the 3736 order
should be ordered as accessories.
SUPPLIES:
PRINT RIBBON - Use IBM 3736 film ribbon, IBM Part No.
1299060 or equivalent
NOTE: It is the customer's responsibility to purchase print ribbons,
and to ensure that they are available in time for machine installation.
Attended Operation: The 3736 is designed for attended operation: that is, operator intervention may be required from time to
time while the 3736 is in use. The 3736 must not therefore be lett
unattended for long periods at a time, and should not be left
running unattended overnight.
Problem Determination Procedures: To minimize machine downtime, users are encouraged to determine the cause of 3736 malfunctions using IBM-provided Problem Determination Procedures.
Data obtained from these procedures is used to correct customer
operating or programming errors, or is passed to a customer
engineer to aid in isolating a machine malfunction. The Problem
Determination Procedures are presented in an easy-to-follow
graphic form and are contained in the 3736 Operating Instructions
(GA33-3027), and also in the Problem Determination Guide for the
3732 Text Display Station (GA33-3024) (stored in the 3732 keyboard).
Publications: Refer to the latest level of IBM System/370 Bibliography of Industry Systems and Application Programs, GC20-0370,
for details of 3736 publications and 3730 system publications.
Specify: [1] Voltage (120V AC, I-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9891
for non lock plug.
[2] Cables: See Ml0000 pages for cable prices and ordering
instructions. For cable specifications, see 3790 Communication
System Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2769.
[3] Print Wheel Character Set: Specify one of the following: -#9082 for EBCDIC character set (word processing), or #9084
for ASCII character set (B).
[4] Print Wheel Typestyle: Specify
Prestige Pica
1 O-pitch
Courier - 10
1 O-pitch
Prestige Elite
12-pitch
Letter Gothic
12-pitch
MRC
two of the following:
#9471
#9472
#9474
#9475
NOTE: Two print wheels of each selected typestyle will be
shipped with the 3736 printer.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3760
Jul79
DP Machines
specify #9393 for ASCII.
3760 DUAL KEY ENTRY STATION (Models 1 and 2)
3760 KEY ENTRY STATION (Model 3)
Proof versions have the alphameriC keyboard with a numeric
key arrangement similar to that of an adding machine.
Purpose: Used to key data onto the 3791 Controller disk. The
disk in the 3791 is used as a data storage medium prior to transmission of batched data by channel or SDLC communications
facilities to any virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor. Data
extraction can be done by diskettes.
All 3760 model 2s will have the same arrangement as the attached 3760 mdl 1. If required, specify:
#9425 for proof keyboard, ASCII
#9426 for proof keyboard, EBCDIC
Prerequisite: Storage Extension (#7115) (mdl 1 only) and
Configuration Support #9175 or #9195 on the 3791.
Model 1
A Dual Key Entry Station ... Display Panel ... attaches to the 3791 with Device Attachment Type I
(#7900) or Device Attachment Type I, Additional
(#7922).
Model 2
Same external appearance as Model 1. The first
Model 2 is attached to Model 1 via 3760 Model 2
Attachment (#7920). The second Model 2 is attached to Model 1 via a second 3760 Model 2 Attachment (#7920).
[5] Command Keys: #9079. Provides, through the command key
at the left side of the space bar, the ability to issue commands
- HELP ... COPY ... FLAG '" ACCEPT ... RETURN .. , CONTINUE SEARCH ... SAVE ... FORMAT DISPLAY ... by pressing the
command key ·first and then the appropriate top row key of the
keyboard. A sticker on the keyboard cover, just above the top
row, identifies the command functions of the keys. MAXIMUM:
Two per 3760 mdls 1 and 2 .,. one per mdl 3. FIELD
INSTALLATION: Yes.
PREREQUISITE: Storage Extension
(#7115) on the 3760 mdl 1.
Model 3
A single Key Entry Station ... Display Panel. Has
same functional characteristics as model 1. Attaches
to the 3791 with Device Attachment Type I (#7900)
or Device Attachment Type I, Additional (#7922).
Can be optionally attached to up to four 3791 Controllers simultaneously with the capability to switch
between them. 3760 mdl 2s cannot be attached.
[6] Conditional Display: #9220. This option may be specified to
prevent keyboard overrun in some situations.
. .
The function works on all
operator positions attached to the model 1 with this feature.
Maximum: One per 3760 mdl 1. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Storage Extension (#7115) (mdl 1 only) and
Configuration Support #9175 or #9195 on the 3791.
Model Changes: Model conversions cannot be made.
Highlights: Model 1 and Model 2 - each physical station provides
two keyboard operator positions each with keyboard and display
panel area. Model 3 - provides one operator position with keyboard and display panel area.
Has buffered storage area into which data is keyed prior to recording on the 3791 disk storage thus allowing for correction of
detected errors before record is stored. Formats control the automatic functions of skipping, duplicating, editing, etc. Modes of
operation are under keyboard control.
For systems capabilities, see 3790 Communication System/Data
Entry Configuration in 3790 "Systems" pages.
Keyboard -- has a standard 66 character alphameric combination
keyboard with "EL" character set for key entry and verifying. In
addition to standard keys, the keyboard has: Record-FieldCharacter Backspace
Field-Character Advance
Auto
Skip/Dup and Auto Enter Key Switch ... Display Record ... Next
Format ... Record Position .. Insert and Delete ... Cursor Up and
Down ... Cursor Placement at Command line ... Mark Record and
Scan Next Record Keys. Command Keys (#9079) are provided as
a Specify feature. Optionally available are ASCii Keyboard and
proof arrangements of both the EBCDIC and the ASCII keyboards.
Display Panel - up to 236 characters can be displayed to each
operator ... six rows of 40 positions each ... first row is the Command Line on which messages, commands, error types, and mode
of operation are displayed ... rows two thru six display keyed data
as it is entered ... a fill-in-the-blanks format may be displayed and
as data. is entered the cursor will automatically skip over the indicative format data .. , Status Indicators ... on the left and right side
of the panel... left side indicators are; Operator Attention, Auto
Skip/Dup, Display Record, Auto Enter, and Verify Mismatch .,.
right side indicators are; Operator Attention, Station Available,
Enter, Verify, Insert Mode and Dup Not Allowed.
PREREQUISITES:
For 3760 Modell and Model 3 -- 3791 Controller with Device
Attachment Type I (#7900) or Device Attachment Type
I Additional (#7922), Additional Disk Heads (#3220,
3221), Control Storage Extension (#1590), and one or
more Control Storage Increments (#1602, 1612) .
PRICES: Mdl
3760
1
2
3
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
$ 259
141
188
$ 220
120
160
MMMC
$9,240
5,040
6,770
$49.50
35.00
43.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: 13
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 45%
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6350). [Mdl 1, 3 only] A key operated
switch. When the switch is in the "locked" position, entry of data
into the 3760'mdl is, mdl 3s, and all mdl 2s attached to mdl is is
prevented. Field Installation: Yes. Note: For additional and/or
replacement keys, see M 10000 pages.
SELECTOR SWITCH (#6660).
[Mdl 3 only] Provides a four
position rotary switch, allowing a 3760 mdl 3 to be switched
between up to four 3791 Controllers. Maximum: One per 3760
mdl 3. t=ield Installation: Time of manufacture only. Prerequisite:
Security Keylock (#6350).
STORAGE EXTENSION (#7115).
[Mdl 1 only] Provides additional storage in 3760 mdl 1, permitting installation of Command
Keys (#9079), Proof Keyboard #9425 or #9426 on the 3760
mdl 1 and 2, and Conditional Display #9220 on the 3760 mdl 1.
Maximum: One per 3760 mdl 1. Field Installation: Yes.
3760 MODEL 2 ATTACHMENT (#7920). [Mdl 1 only] To attach
one 3760 mdl 2 to a 3760 mdl 1. Maximum: Two (#7920) per
3760 mdl 1. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Security Keylock
#6350 $35SUC Selector Switch
6660
24
$ 20
Storage Extension
7115
16
14
3760 Mdl 2 Attachment 7920
12
10
. For 3760 Model 2 -- 3760 Model 1 with 3760 Model 2 Attachment (#7920).
For details, see M 3791 pages.
Bibliography:
Purchase
GC20-0370
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, i-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking Plug
-- #9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock Plug - #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or
#9887 for 230 V. NOTE: Model 1 and the two attached Model
2s require the same power specifies.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. NOTE: Color accent is provided on the knee
panel only and may be any of the above colors ... Top and
Side panels will always be white.
[3] Cables: See M 10000 pages for 3760 cable prices and ordering instructions. For cable specifications see SRL Physical
Planning Manual for 3790 System, GA27-2769.
[4] Keyboard Arrangements: EBCDIC is standard. If required,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$
35
864
329
420
NC
$7.50
2.50
.50
-----------=- ==
------ - --":' =
M 3762.1
Jul79
DP Machines
,,")..,
°1
::> [
performed intermixed with payment transaction processing. For
system capabilities, see "3790 Communication System/Data Entry
Configuration" in "37,90 Communication System" pages. GA334570 gives the Introduction and GA33-4571 gives the Functional
Description of the IBM 3790 Communication System using the
3762.
I
IBM 3762 PAYMENT TRANSACTION
PROCESSOR
Purpose: To process payment transactions by scanning OCR-A
encoded data from turn-around documents (stubs), validating
keyed-in payment amounts and storing selected payment information onto the disk in the 3791 Controller, to which the 3762 attaches. One-step processing is achieved with the appropriate
special features, producing proper batches of inscribed and endorsed checks for deposit in the bank with user-specified audit
trail information, complete with deposit ticket and journal tape
listing. A storage extension feature allows handling of agent transactions, user programmable subroutines, OCR-B, 1428 and .095"
Standard 1403 fonts.
Highlights: A 3762 provides two operator positions, each equipped with a keyboard, a 240 character display, a document transport and a scanner to read one line of up to 60 machine printed
numeric digits in either OCR-A, OCR-B, .095" Standard 1403 or
1428 font (OCR-A is standard, other fonts require the Storage
Extension feature). The appropriate recognition logic is loaded
into the 3762 automatically; different OCR fonts can be used by
different 3762s in one 3790 Communication System/Data Entry
Configuration simultaneously but the two operator positions on one
3762 must use the same font. Documents are entered by hand
into the document entry slot in front of the operator. They are
transported under machine control past the OCR read station
which incorporates a solid state scanning device to collect character images. These images are analyzed and recognized within the
3762 recognition and control processor.
The "Table of Acceptable Characters and Printing Devices" below
shows the characters which are acceptable from typewriters,
highspeed printers and offset printing using the designated font.
Non-recognized OCR data as well as the payment amount can be
entered by the operator via the keyboard. After (user-specified)
editing and checking of the data entered, the amount paid is
checked for acceptability (according to user-specified criteria).
The output record is subsequently prepared and transferred to the
attached 3791 Controller for intermediate, storage on the 3791
disk. Special features include audit trail printing on stubs, checks
and deposit tickets, E13B inscribing of checks and deposit tickets,
endorsing of checks, and journal tape printing of the amounts
processed. Printing is under program control.
Table of Acceptable Characters and Printing Devices
OCR-A
Digits
Delimiters
Printers
i'l';ot
Fork
Chair
LVM (2)
Double
Blank (3)
Single
Blank (4)
Margins '(5)
Selectric'"
1403
3203
3211
3800
Offset
OCR-B
(6)
.095" Stand
ard 1:?3
(1,6
1428
(6)
0-9
0-9
0-9
+
-
<
>
LVM (2)
Double
Blank (3)
Single
Blank (4)
Margin. (5)
Se'f.fl,~c'"
3203
3211
3800
Offset
LVM(2)
Double
Blank (3)
Single
Blank (4)
Margins (5)
LVM (2)
Double
Blank (3)
Single
Blank (4)
Margins (5)
1403
3203
3211
1403
3203
3211
Offset
Offset
NOTES:
(I) Also called 407-1 font. Train arrangements must have suffix 2, e.g., HN2.
(2) The LVM is a pre-printed vertical line, 3.70 mm (0.145") minimum height,
centered in the print Hand, having the normal character stroke width and
occupying a full character space.
(3) A Double Blank is a blank space of at least 4.3 mm (0.170"). Single and
double blanks may not be specified intermixed in one code line.
(4) A Single Blank is a blank space of at least 2.3 mm (0.090") and less than 4.3
'
mm (0.170").
(5) The Right and Left Margin are each 6.35 mm (0.250") wide.
(6) The OCR-B, .095" Standard 1403 and 1428 fonts can only be recognized
when the Storage Extension feature in installed.
The 3762 can process single-stub, multi-stub and agent transactions. Agent transactions require the Storage Extension special
feature. A transaction may contain one or more checks. All data
entry operating modes available for the 3760 Dual Key Entry
stations are also available on the 3762 Payment Transaction
Processor. For details, see 3760 Machines pages. Moreover,
3760 operations such as updating of a customer's address can be
Keyboard - has a standard 66 character alphameric combination
keyboard with EL character set for key entry (and verifying in
3760 mode). In addition to standard keys, the keyboard has:
Record-, Field-, and Character-Backspace ... Field-CharacterAdvance ... Auto Skip/Dup and Auto Enter Key Switch ... Display
Record ... Next Format ... Record Position ... Insert and Delete ...
Cursor Up and Down ... Command Line and Command ... Mark
Record ... Hex/ Alternate ... Scan Next Record ... and PF keys ...
Use of the top row of keys as command keys for the following
twelve commands is standard: HELP, COPY, FLAG, ACCEPT,
RETURN, CONTINUE SEARCH, SAVE, FORMAT DISPLAY, TOTAL,
CHECK, NOTICE' and PURGE.
• Only active with Agent Processing.
Optionally available are ASCII keyboard, and Proof arrangements
of both the EBCDIC and the ASCII keyboards. The Proof keyboard
modifies the standard keyboard to provide a numeric key arrangement similiar to that of an adding machine. See Specify below for
details.
Display Panel -- up to 236 characters can be displayed to each
operator on six rows of 40 positions each ... first row is the Command Line on which entered commands, messages, error types,
and mode of operation are displayed ... data entered may be
displayed on rows two through six ... a fill-in-the-blanks format
may be displayed and the cursor will automatically skip over the
prompting information as data is entered ... Status Indicators ...
on the lell and right side of the panel ... lell side indicators are:
Operator Attention, Auto Skip/Dup, Display Record, Auto Enter,
and Verify Mismatch ... right side indicators are: Operator Attention, Station Available, Enter, Verify, Insert Mode and DUP Not
Allowed ... as on the 3760. A special format screen is displayed
for payment transaction processing.
Transport - contains an entry slot, a document, transport mechanism, a pocket selector and two pockets ... documents are handfed. Documents move from the entry slot past the scanner to the
pockets. The transport accepts stubs ranging from 76.2 to 152.4
mm (3.0 to 6.0") high and 69.85 to 222.25 mm (2.75 to 8.75")
long, provided the height/length ratio is 1.4:1 or less, and checks
with standard ABA check sizes. Allowable weight ranges from 1 6
to 32 Ibs and card stock. For details, see 3762 Paper and Printing
Requirements, GA33-4576.
Scanner -- consists of four lamps, a lens, and a linear array of 64
photodiodes and is located in the transport. Its vertical position is
operator settable to the approriate position of the codeline of
printing to be scanned on the document. For details on permissible codeline locations see 3762 Paper and Printing Requirements,
GA33-4576.
Pockets -- provided are two document pockets with a depth of
44.4 mm (1.75") each. Stubs and checks are automatically selected to the two pockets.
Documents and Printing - the input documents and printing must
conform to the specifications described in 3762 Paper and Printing Requirements, GA33-4576. Ribbons and background inks
meeting the outlined criteria will give good performance. For Film
Ribbon Selectric - Part No. 1136310 or 1136391 ... for Fabric
Ribbon Selectric - 1136138 ... for 1403 (mdl 2 and N1) -1136430, 414486 and 424325 ... for 3211 ribbon 1136626 or
1136627 ... for 3203 (mdls 1, 2 and 3) - 1136430. Ribbons not
having similiar characteristics may result in reduced recognition
performance. The IBM 3762 Document Gauge can be ordered as
GX33-8505.
Document Tray -- two document trays are provided with every
3762, one for each operator position. The document tray can be
used by an operator to hold the stack- of stubs and checks to be
entered. For additional or replacement document trays, see M
10000 pages.
PREREQUISITES: In 3791 -- Controller Device Attachment Type I
(#7900) and Device Attachemnt Type I, Add'i (#7922) depending
upon the number of units attached, Add'i Disk Heads (#3221),
Control Storage Expansion (#1590), and Control Storage Increments (#1603, #1613) as required. For details, see M 3791
pages. Configuration guidelines are given in GA33-4572.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug
-- #9880 for 115 V, #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
Non-lock plug -- #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887
for 230 V.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. NOTE: Color accent is provided on the knee
Not to be reproduced without written permission_
--- ----------=== ':' =
M 3762.2
Jul79
-
DP Machines
3762 Payment Transaction Processor (cont'd)
panel only and may be anyone of the above colors ... top and
side panels will always be white.
[3] Cables: See M 10000 pages for 3762 cable prices and ordering instructions. For cable specifications, see SRL Physical
Planning Manual for 3790 Systems, GA27-2769.
[4] Keyboard/Language Arrangements: Proof versions have the
alphameric keyboard with a numeric key arrangement similiar to
that of an adding machine.
#9420 for ASCII
#9421 for EBCDIC
#9423 for Proof Keyboard (ASCII)
#9424 for Proof Keyboard (EBCDIC)
NOTE: All 3762 stations attached to the same 3791 Controller
must have the same keyboard/language arrangement. The
Proof version may be intermixed with the Non-Proof version in a
3790 system but not in the 3762 unit.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
3762
1
$1,410
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$1,200
$50,400
$220
and/or replacement keys, see M 10000 pages.
STORAGE EXTENSION (#7500).· This feature provides a 8K
byte storage extension in the 3762. It must be installed when
processing agent transactions ... applying user programmable
subroutines ... 1428, OCR-B .095" Standard or 1403 numeric font
recognition is required. Only one type font can be recognized in
the 3762 at anyone time, but different 3762s may recognize
different fonts. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase
Audit Trail Printers
#1310 $165
$140
Endorsers
3805
41
35
Journal Tape Printers 4660
157
134
MICR Inscribers
5100
241
205
Security Keylock
6350
35SUC 7500
Storage Extension
81
69
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: D
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 50%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
AUDIT TRAIL PRINTERS (#1310). This feature consists of two
matrix print devices, one in each transport. It prints 7 x 7 dot
characters with a pitch of 8.5 characters per· inch ... a maximum
of 40 print positions on ·one line. Printing is on the back of the
documents starting at 3.0 mm (.12") from the leading edge, on
stubs, checks and deposit tickets, centered 66.5 mm (2.62") from
the bottom edge. Fields to be printed on stubs and checks are
selected by the user during format definition (not for Deposit
Tickets). The character set consists of 10 digits, 26 letters, 7
symbols and blank. Supplies: Cartridge ribbon Part No. 1136970
or equivalent. Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture
only.
ENDORSERS (#3805).
This feature consists of two endorsing
stations, one in each transport. It prints a user designed endorsement legend on the reverse side of the checks. The maximum size
of the legend is 28 x 33 mm (1.1 x 1.3"). The user can specify
the horizontal endorsement position close to the leading or the
trailing edge during format definition. Supplies: Endorse Plates -for ordering,
Specify: Endorser ink roll - #9145 for black, #9146 for green,
#9147 for purple, and #9148 for red. Field Installation: Available
at time of manufacture only.
JOURNAL TAPE PRINTERS (#4660). This feature consists of
two journal tape print devices, one for each operator. It lists the
check amounts processed within a deposit and the deposit total as
well as the appropriate deposit identification. When processing
agent transactions the individual stub amounts are printed. With
the individual amounts, a three digit item identification number is
printed in italics in the three leftmost character positions. The two
rightmost positions are reserved for a code that identifies the
printed line. In total 15 character positions are available. The
printed tape is within reach of the operator for tear off at completion of the deposit. Supplies: Ink ribbon -- recommended material
Nylon or Vinylon fiber (FF40). Spool diameter 35.1 mm (1.38").
Spool type - standard only, ribbon width 12.7 mm (.5"), length
6096 mm (240"), Part No. 1299087 (black) or equivalent. Journal
Tape - single or two-ply width 57.2 mm (2.25"), roll diameter
81.0 mm (3 and 3/16") max. Single-ply - recommended paper
weight 16 Ibs @ 5% (approx. 60 gr/m'), tape has to be colored
through the last 1.8 m (6 feet) approx., Part No. 457297 or equivalent. Two-ply - recommended paper weight 16 Ibs @ 5%
(approx. 60 grim') per ply, tape has to be colored through the last
1,8 m (6 feet) approx., Part No. 457298 or equivalent. Field
Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
MICR INSCRIBERS (#5100). This feature consists of two MICR
(E13B) Inscribing units, one in each transport. It encodes the
amount on checks of acceptable transactions. At the users option
it encodes in the same pass, amount, process control, account
number and transit routing fields on deposit tickets. All fields are
encoded in accordance with the Bank Check Specifications for
MICR, ANSI X3.3-1970. Supplies: MICR ribbon Part No. 431555
or equivalent. A M!CR gauge is available for checking inscriber
output registration. Order part number 451128
Field Installation: Available at time of manufacture only.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6350). A key operated switch ... one
per 3762. When the key is in the "locked" position, entry of data
via a scanner or a keyboard is prevented. Automatic Re-IMI occurs
when unlocking. Field Installation: Yes. Note: For additional
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$5,880
1,470
3,990
8,610
35
2,337
MMMC
$26.50
3.50
47.00
13.00
NC
10.50
------------=- =------=--':' =
.M 3767.1
Jui79
DP Machines
IBM 3767 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Purpose: A keyboard/printer terminal for transmission of data or
text to or from a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor via a
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller, to a 4331 via its Communications Adapter feature, or to the 8100 Information System
via the 8130, 8140 and/or 8101. The 3767 uses Synchronous
Data Link Control (SDLC) line discipline.
Modell
40 cps average bi-directional printer.
Model 2
80 cps maximum bi-directional printer; includes
dual 256 byte line buffers and full buffer editing
capability.
Model 3
120 cps maximum bi-directional printer; includes
dual 256 byte line buffers and full buffer edit capability.
NOTE: Throughput on all models is dependent upon output
format, line control, buffering, and transmission speed.
Highlights: The 3767 consists of control functions, printer, keyboard, control keys and indicator lights in one integrally designed
desk-top unit. This configuration allows an operator/machine
relationship that is favorable for both interactive and batch operations. Special features are available which permit tailoring of the
terminal to the user"s requirements.
Control Functions: Provides the control for all on-line and off-line
operations; facilitates communications at speeds up to 2400 bps
in SDLC line discipline and controls single line data editing on the
base model 1. It also controls, on all models, basic functions such
as Automatic Terminal I. D., Station Control, Internal Communications Clocking, Transmit and Receive Interrupt, End of Line Alarm,
Buffer Full Alarm and Auto (EOB/EOM) switch.
Printer: [Model 1 and 2] Maximum printer throughput is obtained
with bi-directional serial matrix printing and indexing without unnecessary print head movement. Electronic tabbing over the full
132 printable positions is provided. The printer dot matrix is 4 of
7.wide by 8 high giving high legibility with character spacing at 10
to the' inch. Line spacing is 6 lines to the inch. Up to 6 part forms
(total thickness -- 0.018") may be used. For any multi-part or
pre-printed continuous forms the Variable Width Forms Tractor
(#8700) is recommended. Five and six part continuous forms
should be tried on an individual basis for acceptable feeding,
registration, and print quality. Single part continuous or up to four
part cut forms can be used with the standard friction feed platen.
The Paper Roll Holder and Forms Guide with paper bail (#9180)
is available for use with roll paper and is recommended for use
with single part fan-fold paper when the Variable Width Forms
Tractor (#8700) is not used. Maximum overall forms width is 15";
. card stock forms are not recommended. (See GA24-3488 for form
specifications and limitations.)
- unpacking, placement, set-up and checkout of the 3767 at
time of delivery, or when relocating the 3767.
- removal and packing of the 3767 at time of discontinuance.
- relocation of the 3767 (if required) to allow IBM service access.
- to use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and
fill out the Trouble Report prior to calling for service.
.
See M 2700 pages for additional responsibilities.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621
or specific system
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136653 or equivalent, is
required.
For details and prices, see M 10000 pages.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Keyboard Arrangement: #9381 for Correspondence, or #9391
for EBCDIC.
[3] SDLC Speed Selection: #9533 for C5/D4 (2400 bps); #9532
for C4/D3 (1200 bps); #9531 for C3, 02 (600 bps). See
"Special Features" for modems and modem attachments.
[4] Integrated/External modem cable: A 20 foot cable is provided
as standard. If a longer cable is required, specify #9021,
indicating length in feet as a quantity of 25, 30, 35 or 40.
[5) 6 Foot Power Cord: Specify #9986, otherwise a 10 foot power
cord will be provided.
[6) Variable Width Forms Tractor Covers: Specify #9850 if Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700) is ordered.
[7) For Model 1 and 2 Only: Paper Roll Holder and Forms Guide
with Paper Bail (#9180) must be ordered on all machines without Variable Width Forms Tractor Covers (#9850). A customer
using the Variable Width Forms Tractor has the option of ordering specify feature #9180 at no additional charge, once per
machine, for friction feeding of single part continuous roll and
fan fold paper. Specify feature #9180 is used interchangeably
with the Variable Width Forms Tractor and is attached and
removed by the customer. The Paper Roll Holder and Forms
Guide with Bail is not available for the 3767 mdl 3.
[8] SNA Terminal Address: #9587 must be specified on all orders
-- supplemental specs available for giving one EBCDIC byte
address. Any two "Hex" characters, excluding "00" and "FF"
may be used.
[9] Blower: #9030. Must be specified for 3767 (mdl 1 or 2 only)
expected to operate in an environment above 90' F ambient
temperature (specification limits up to 105' F).
Printer: [Model 3) Same as model 1 and 2 with the exception that
forms tractor is required for all continuous forms.
[10] Paper Tear Bar: [Model 1 or 2 only] #9422. A device for
tearing continuous forms. Prerequisite: Paper Roll Holder and
Forms Guide with Paper Bail (#9180).
Keyboard: Provides several keyboard arrangements and includes
typamatic on hyphen, underscore, backspace and space keys. In
addition to the standard 44 alpha/numeric data keys, are function
keys, indicator lights, operating mode switches, and a 3-position
numeric "print position indicator" display to aid the operator.
PRICES:
Mdl
3767
1
Security Enhancement Features: Print Suppress all0WS selected
data fields to be entered without being printed. The Security
Keylock (optional) with the power switch "ON" allows the 3767 to
be operational.
The Magnetic Stripe Reader (optional) is provided to allow operator identification to be transmitted.
Communications Facilities: The 3767 operates in half-duplex
mode over facilities C3, C4, C5, 02, 03, 04 or Xl M ... for details
concerning these facilities, see M 2700 pages.
Synchronous Data Link Control: Allows for transmission rates of
600, 1200 or 2400 bps.
The 3767 can communicate on a switched or non-switched pointto-point facility or as a secondary station on a multipoint or duplex
multipoint facility to a virtual storage S/370, a 4300 Processor, or
non-switched point-to-point or multipoint on the 8100 Information
System.
Modems: One Integrated Modem or External Modem can be used.
See "Special Features" for options. Synchronous clock is a
standard feature.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the customer. This has been done through the use of problem determination
and recovery routines and procedures that are easily understood
and used by the operator. See IBM 3767 Operator's Guide, SRL
GA 18-2000, and Customer Responsibility below.
Customer Responsibility: The customer is responsible for:
2
3
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 year
Purchase
MMMC
$ 176
223
276
$ 150
190
235
$ 5,800
6,650
8,225
$45,50
51,50
74,50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60%Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Can be made in the field.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE
installation charges)
(there are no additional
From Modell to Model 2 "". $850,
From Modell to Model 3 "'" $3,150,
From Model 2 to Model 3 , .... $2,300,
SPECIAL FEATURES
The following Special Features apply to the 3767 mdls 1, 2, 3.
Note: Customers who elect to purchase one of the features'
listed in Group #1 or Group #2 and later order additional features within that group should consider purchase of all features
initially because these field upgrades require replacement of the
initial feature and installation of the new combination.
• Except when Vertical Forms Control (#8731) has previously
been installed and the Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4930) is the
additional feature being ordered.
Group #1
Vertical Forms Control (#8731), Magnetic Strip£!
Reader (#4Q30), Calculate-Scientific (# 1572).
Group #2
Start/Stop Feature -- 2740-1 (#7111), -- 2740-2
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ----
M 3767.2
Jul79
:: :=:.:::
===
"!' =
DP Machines
3767 Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
(#7112), - 2741 (#7113), Alternate Character Set
(#1291), Buffer with Edit - 512 (#1481), Buffer with
Edit - 1,024 (#1482).
ACOUSTIC COUPLER - 600 BPS (#1110). PrOVides an acoustic
coupler for communications through a telephone handset at
speeds up to 600 bps. Requires a 1200 bps Integrated Modem on
host end of communications facility. Maximum: One. Field
Inatallatlon: Yes. Customer will set up at time of 3767 delivery FE will Install if ordered .
Prerequiaitea: 1 200 bps Inte!Jrated Modem (#5502 or #5506); 600 bps (#9531), in addition,
If Start/Stop Feature (#7111 or #7113) is ordered, 300 bps
(#9540). Note: For limitations on Public Switched Network, consult M 2700.1 page and "Notes for Chart C" note [14] in M 2700
pages.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). Provides ASCII Keyboard (48 Key) and
graphics in lieu of those normally provided by Keyboard Specify
Codes. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended for
field installation. Limitations: Cannot be installed with Start/Stop
Features (#7111, 7112, 7113), Alternate Character Set (#1291)
or Keyboard Arrangement #9381 (Correspondence) or #9391'
(EBCDIC).
ALTERNATE CHARACTER SET (#1291).
Provides a switch
control for alternate printed graphics, to those selected by the
keyboard specification. Compatible with Start/Stop Feature
#7113 (2741) and #7111 (2740-1). Only specify codes #9394
and #9395 (EBCDIC-Mono) are compatible with #7112 (2740-2).
Keytop engraving remains the same. Key front decals will be
provided for easy operator reference in using this feature.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be
Installed with ASCII Feature (#1201).
3767 Chart A
SOlC
Graphics
Keybd
All.
Char.
Set
C E
0 B
R C
M
0
R 0 A N
E I P 0
S C l 12)
Corres.
X
EBCOIC
APl
X
X
X
X
X
EBCDIC
X
Corres.
APl
Mono 13)
Mono 141
E
B
C
0
I
C
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Graphics
line
Code
P
T
T
C
C C
0 E
M 0 /
R B
0 R E
R C A N R B
E 0 P 0 E C
S 121 l 121 S 0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Keybd
Prereq
Specify
Code
Seleci
Only
One
111
#9381
#93B2
#9383
#9391
#9392
#9393
#9394
#9395
(I) Alternate Character Set (#1291) is a prerequisite.
(2) Sub-set of EBCDIC.
(3) Upper case alpha printed from keyboard - upper/lower case may be printed
from the communications line.
(4) Upper case alpha printed from keyboard or the communications line
regardless of key shift or line code shift.
~UFFER WITH EDIT (#1481, 1482).
#1481 [Mdl 1 only] provides ~o 256 byte ~~ffers for receiving data. #1482 [Mdl 1, 2 or
3] prOVides two addlltonal 256 byte buffers for receiving data. On
key entry these two features provide full buffer (up to 51 2 or
1,024 bytes) edit capability under key control. With the Edit
switch "off", a single data line may be transmitted. When used
with 2740 mdl 2 Start/Stop Feature (#7112) single buffer (120248-440 byte) operation is provided. The Buffer Full Alarm warns
the operator 10 pOSitions before full capacity. Maximum: One
each. Field Inatallation: Yes. Limitation: This feature not active
if Start/Stop Feature (#7111 or #7113) is active. A 512 buffer
(equivalent to #1481) is standard on 3767 mdl 2 and mdl 3.
Prerequlalte: On model 1, #1482 requires #1481.
CALCULATE - SCIENTIFIC (#1572). In Off-line 'mode this feature, under switch control, using the same keyboard (with supplied
key!r~nt label) ·allows the following type calculations to take place:
addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, inverse calculation
squll:re root, statistical. value (mean and standard deviation), expo:
n~ntlal, common logarithm, natural logarithm, exponential constant,
clrc~lar constant and trigonometrical functions (sin, cos, tan,
arCSin, arccos, arctan). Two memories are provided for temporary
storage of totals. Sixteen digit input/output is allowed. Maximum:
One. Field Inatallatlon: Yes.
EIA INTERFACE - NO CLOCK (#3718).
EIA INTERFACE - WITH CLOCK (#3719).
Provides one EIA
interface for the attachment of an external modem with business
machine (3767) clocking. Note: This feature may be used for
local attac.hment to 3704 or 3705 equipped with Line Set Type 1F
for operation at 300, 600 or 1200 bps. If this feature is to be
used with a 1F line set, specify #9404. Specify: #9402 for half
duplex facility, or #9404 for full duplex facility... #9619 for
switched facility. On the mdls 1 and 2 only, #9539 must also be
specified when operating at 300 bps on the Public Switched Network with "Originate Only" service when the modem to be used
d~es. not provide the "received line signal detector" interchange
clrc~lt, as for example the Western Electric 113 A or equivalent.
MaXimum: One. Field Inatallatlon:. Yes. Limltationa: Cannot be
installed with 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500, #5502,
#5505 ~r #5506), or EIA Interface - No Clock (#3718).
Prerequlaltea: #9532 for C4/D3 (1200 bps) or #9531 for C3 or
~;e~~O~p~~~~: If Start/Stop Feature is installed, that feature's line
MAGNETIC STRIPE READER (#4930).
A small self enclosed
device for reading information from a Magnetically Striped and
Encoded 1.0. Card and a Magnetic Credit Card (2-1/8" x 3-3/8").
Reads up to 40 ABA standard numeric characters, including control characters. See IRO Sales Manual for information on cards.
Maximum: One. Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Customer will set up at
time of 3767 delivery -- CE will install if ordered
Limitation: Not functional when operating in Start/Stop (#7111,
7112, 7113) mode.
START/STOP
Oata
Code
face for the attachment of an IBM 3863, 3872 or other external
modem, with modem clocking (3767 clock disabled). Specify:
#9402 for half duplex facility (combined modem and line), or
#9404 for full duplex facility (combined modem and line) ...
#9707 for attaching IBM 3872 Modem ... #9619 for switched
facility. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations:
Cannot be installed with 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500,
5502, 5505 or 5506), Start/Stop Feature (#7111 or 7113) or EIA
Interface - With Clock (#3719). Note: When installed with
Start/Stop Feature (#7112), the communication facilities must be
full duplex. Full Duplex (#9404), SIS Line Speed (#9542) SDLC
Line Speed (#9533) and Attach IBM 3863 or 3872 Modem (#9707)
must be specified. Start/Stop operation is supported only at 1200
bps.
Provides one EIA inter-
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5500).
Non-switched. A
modem for operation at 300, 600 or 1200 bps over two or four
wire non-switched voice grade channels. Specify: #9402 for
2-wire communications facilities, #9404 for 4-wire facilities.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitationa: Cannot be
installed with EIA Interface (#3718 or #3719) or 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5502, #5505 or #5506). Prerequisites: #9532
for 03 (1200 bps) or #9531 for 02 (600 bps) facilities. If
Start/Stop Feature is installed, that feature's line speed specify.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM (#5502). Switched. A manual
answer modem for operation at 300. 600 or 1200 bps over Public
One.
Field
Switched
Telephone
Networks.
Maximum:
Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3718 or #3719) or 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500,
#5505. or #5506). Prerequialtes: #9532 for C4 (1200 bps) or
#9531 for C3 (600 bps) facilities. If Start/Stop Feature is installed, that feature's line speed specify. Note: This feature requires either Acoustic Coupler - 600 bps (# 111 0) or a COT type
Data Access Arrangement or equivalent..
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM/INTERRUPT (#5505). [Mdl 1
and 2 only] Non-switched. A modem for operation at 300
(Start/Stop), 600 or 1200 (SDLC) bps over 2-wire non-switched
voice grade channels. This modem includes a bi-directional reverse channel capability. This interrupt signal is transmitted when
the ATTN key on the 3767 keyboard is depressed. Note: This
featured modem is required to transmit or receive an interrupt only
with Start/Stop 2741 (#7113) operating at 300 bps in Start/Stop
mode on a half-duplex non-switched channel and the EIA Interface
(#3719) is not used. Line Set Type 8C on 3704 or Line Set Type
12A on the 3705 is required to support this feature. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limltatlona: Cannot be installed
with EIA Interface (#3718 or #3719) or 1200 bps Integrated
Modem (#5500, #5502 or #5506). Prerequisite: #9532 for 03
(1200 bps) or #9531 for 02 (600 bps) and #9540 for 01 (300
bps) facilities.
1200 BPS INTE.GRATED MODEM/INTERRUPT (#5506). [Mdl 1
and 2 only] SWitched. A manual answer modem for operation at
300 (Start/Stop), 600 or 1200 (SOLC) bps over Public Switched
Telephone Networks. This modem includes a bi-directional reverse channel capability. This interrupt signal is transmitted when
the ATTN key on the 3767 keyboard is depressed. Note: This
fe.atured modem is required to transmil or receive an interrupt only
With Start/Stop 2741 (#7113) operating at 300 bps in Start/Stop
mode on a half-duplex switched channel and EIA Interface
(#3719) is not used. Line Set Type 80 on the 3704 or Line Set
Type 12B on the 3705 is required to support this feature.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - - ------=- =- - =--':' =
M 3767.3
Jul79
OP Machines
3767 Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
installed with EIA Interface (#3718 or #3719) or 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500, #5502, or #5505). Prerequisite: #9532
for C4 (1200 bps) or #9531 for C3 (600 bps) and #9540 for C1
(300 bps) facilities. Note: This feature requires either Acoustic
Coupler - 600 bps (#1110) or a COT type Data Access Arrangement or equivalent.
1200 b s Intg'd Modem
Sw'd
START/STOP FEATURE (#7111, 7112, 7113). These features
provide a Type I Start/Stop line control migration aid on the 3767
to allow operation with existing program support (see Programming
Section). This feature allows data transmission to or from a Virtual
Storage S/370 mdl 115 thru 168MP or a 3031 or 4300 Processor
via a 3704 or 3705 at 300 bps (2740-1 or 2741 Line Control) or
at 600 or 1200 bps (2740-2 Line Control) or via a 2701 at 600
bps (2740-2 Line Control). It also allows transmission, via communications facility to or from a 3115 ICA, 3125 ICA, 3135 ICA,
3135-3 ICA or 3138 ICA at 300 bps (2740-1 or 2741 Line Control) or at 600 bps (2740-2 Line Control). 1200 bps (2740-2 Line
Control) also supported by 3115 ICA and 3125 ICA. It allows
communications via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller
attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65
mode), 75 and 195 at 300 bps (2740-1 or 2741 Line Control) or
at 600 bps or 1200 bps (2740-2 Line Control); via a 2701 attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67
(in 65 mode), 75 and 195; or a S/370 mdl 155, 165, 195, or any
4300 Processor, at 600 bps (2740-2 Line Control); or via an
Integrated Communications Attachment on S/360 mdl 25 at 600
bps (2740-2 Line Control). Attachment is also possible via the
Communications Adapter feature on the 4331 ". see 4331 for
details. An SOLC/Start-Stop switch is provided to allow operation
in either mode. Communications facility must be specified for this
feature. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with ASCII Feature (# 1201).
Select One:
#7111 -- 2740-1 Line Control [Mdl 1 or 2 only] Specify: #9540
for C1/01 (300 bps). Note: For multipoint - specify #9560
(Station Control) and see "Terminal and Group Addresses"
(below) for additional' information to be specified. Note: On a
given non-switched line, one terminal within each group and one
terminal for the entire line (All Call) must provide the necessary
checking and addressing responses for that group and/or for
the entire line. Specify #9197 for a group responding and/or
#9035 for an All Call responding terminal. Limitations: Group
or All Call addressing requires duplex communications facilities.
Non-switched facility required for SOLC if Station Control
(#9560) is specified. Cannot be installed with 2400 bps
(#9533) or EIA Interface - No Clock (#3718).
#7112 -- 2740-2 Line Control [Mdl 1, 2 or 3] Buffer Receive
mode is standard operation. Limitations: Group or All Call
addressing requires duplex communications facilities. If multidropped on the same communications line with 2740-2s the
3767 must not be designated as the Group or All Call Responding terminal. Non-switched facility required for SOLC with this
feature installed. Cannot be installed with Correspondence
Keyboard (#9381). Specify: See "Terminal and Group
Addresses" (below) for additional information to be specified.
Note: On a given non-switched line, one terminal within each
group and one terminal for the entire line (All Call) must provide
the necessary checking and addressing responses for that
group and/or for the entire line. Specify #9197 for a group
responding and/or #9035 for an All Call responding terminal.
Specify Line Speed -- #9541 for 02 (600 bps) or #9542 for 03
(1200 bps). Buffer Positions -#9015 for 120, #9016 for 248,
or #9017 for 440. Note: This specified feature has no effect
on buffer size under SOLC line discipline. Prerequisite: On
model 1, Buffer with Edit (# 1 481 or # 1 482).
External Modem
Switched
Non-Switched
2-wire
2-wire
4-wire
2-wire (I)
2-wire (I)
4-wire
-------
-----
#1231
4781
#1231
#1231
#1231
---
---
1231
4781
1231
1231 or
1232
1231 or
1232
3135
leA
---
---
---
9593-9600
9721-9728
9737-9744
9745-9752
9625-9632
9593-9600
9721-9728
9737-9744
9745-9752
9593-9600
9721-9728
9737-9744
9745-9752
3704
#4786
#4785
4781
4711 or
4714
4711 or
4714
4711 or
4714
3705
4786
4785
4781
4711 or
4714
4711 or
4714
4711 or
4714
3767
5506
5505
5500
3719
3719
3719
8130
-----
5500
3701
3701
3701
8140
-----
5500
3701
3701
3701
8101
---
---
5500
3701
3701
3701
3115
leA
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6660). Provides a key operated switch.
When in the "locked" position, machine operations cannot be
performed. Two keys are provided. For additional or replacement
keys, see "Locks and Keys" in M 10000 pages. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
Non-Switched
3125
leA
---
(1) Modem must be full duplex.
Terminal and Group Addresses
Terminal and group addresses must be selected when one of the
following Start/Stop Features is ordered:
#7111 for 2740 mdl 1 Line Control with Station Control
(#9560) specified.
#7112 for 2740 mdl 2 Line Control.
For Terminal Address and Group Address, a two-character code
must be selected as described below. The first character must
be the Terminal Address, and the second character must be the
Group Address. (The same character may be ordered for both
addresses. However, in this case, the terminal will be wired at
the factory as a Group Responding #9197 terminaL)
Depending on the Keyboard Arrangement specified for the base
machine, the following characters may be selected for Terminal
and Group Addresses:
With EBCDIC Keyboard Arrangement (#9391), select characters from:
A thru Z, 0 thru 9, and special characters @ (at sign) ". $
(dollar sign) ". & (ampersand) ". - (hyphen) .... (period).
t
With Correspondence Keyboard Arrangement (#9381), select
characters from:
A thru Z (except B and X), 0 thru 8, and special characters =
(equal) ... / (slash) ... ; (semi-colon) ... , (comma) .... (period)
... ' (apostrophe) ... - (hyphen).
t
Not available with #7112.
If Alternate Character Set (#1291) is installed on the terminal,
the Terminal and Group Address line code bit configuration remains the same for either switch setting.
Specify: #9644 (Terminal and Group Addresses) and enter the
two-character code as Supplemental Specs
based on the permissible characters listed above.
Terminal Identification
If Terminal Identification is used in the customers application
(provided by RPQ
Auto Address Answer-back on the
2741), a four-character Terminal Identification must be selected
when Start/Stop Feature - 2741 Line Control (#7113) and one
of the following are ordered: #5502, #5506, or #3719 with
#9619 (switched line operation) specified.
#7113 -- 2741 Line Control [Mdl 1 or 2 only] Specify: #9540
for C1/01 (300 bps). Limitations: Cannot be installed with
2400 bps (#9533) or EIA Interface - No Clock (#3718). Note:
See "Terminal Identification" (below) for additional information
to be specified.
Depending on the Keyboard Arrangement specified on the base
machine, the following characters may be selected for the Terminal Identification code.
The 2741 Transmit and Receive Interrupt function on the 3767
with #7113 (2741 Line Control) is supported via the following:
A thru Z. 0 thru 9, and special characters # (number sign) ...
/ (slash) ... $ (dollar sign) ... & (ampersand) .. , @ (at sign) ".
, (comma) .... (period) ... - (hyphen) ... C/R (carriage return)
... space.
With EBCDIC Keyboard Arrangement (#9391), select characters from:
With Correspondence Keyboard Arrangement (#9381), select
characters from:
A thru Z, 0 thru 9, and special characters = (equal) ... /
(slash) ". ' (apostrophe) ". - (hyphen) ... ; (semi-colon)
(period) ... , (comma) ... CIR (carriage return) ... space.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ---- -----
M 3767.4
Jul 79
=- =- =':" =
OP Machines
3767 Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
The same character may be selected for all four positions except
C/R may only be used in the fourth pOSition.
If Alternate Character Set (# 1291) is installed on the terminal.
the Terminal 10 line code bit configuration remains the same for
either switch setting.
Specify: #9645 (Terminal Identification) and enter the fourcharacter code
based on the above permissible characters. NOTE: For "space"
character. enter 'lb. For C/R character. enter • (available in
fourth position only).
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). A forms feeding
device for continuous edge-punched forms. Overall forms width
from 3 to 15 inches can be fed. Prerequisite: Variable Width
Forms Tractor Covers (#9850).
VERTICAL FORMS CONTROL (#8731).
Allows vertical forms
skipping to a pre-set page header location or a pre-set vertical tab
position. Page size. header location and vertical tab stops are
entered from the keyboard or received from the host under SOLC
line control.
Maximum:
One.
Field Installation:
Yes.
Prerequlsltea: Variable Width Forms Tractor Covers (#9850) and
Variable Width Forms Tractor (#8700). Limitation: This feature
(#8731) is non-functional in Start/Stop (#7111. #7112. #7113)
mode.
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
For Model 1 Only
Buffer with Edit - 512
#1481
S 24 S 20
S 700
$1.00
175
175
.SO
.SO
1,185
1,185
10.00
10.00
12
10
'6
20
16
11
11
16
420
3SO
210
700
560
385
385
560
.SO
.SO
.SO
.SO
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.SO
16
19
16
19
35SUC-
668
668
35
4.00
4.00
NC
6
6
13
175
160
385
.SO
.SO
.SO
For Model 1 and 2 Only
Start/Stop Feature 7111
6
5
2740-1 Line Control
2741 Line Control
7113
6
5
1200 bpa Integrated Modem w Interrupt Non-awltched
5505
31
26
Switched
5506
31
26
For Model 1, 2 and 3
Acouatlc Couplr-600 bpa 1110
ASCII Feature
1201
Alt Character Set
1291
Buffer w Edit - 1,024
1482
Calculate - Scientific
1572
EIA Interface-No Clock 3718
EIA Interface-w Clock
3719
Magnetic Stripe Reader 4930
1200 bps Integrated Modem Non-awltched
5SOO
Sw w Manual Ana
5S02
Security Keylock
6860
Start/Stop Feature 2740-2 Line Control
7112
Var Width Forma Tractor 8700
Vertical Forma Control 8731
14
12
7
24
19
13
13
19
5
5
11
Acceaaorles: The following Item Is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine. order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 pages
for additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#44SO) - Permits placement of continuous
forms (out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking atter printing.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------= = - ---
- - =':" =
IBM 3771
M 3771.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Purpose: This desk-style console-keyboard-printer is a member of
the 3770 Data Communication System. Communication features
permit operation over switched or non-switched facilities at speeds
liP to 4800 bps, using SDLC or BSC transmission techniques.
Special features permit the attachment of one card reader or card
punch operating at 50 cpm. The card punch can optionally be
equipped with a special feature for Card Read to permit single
path card reading or card punching.
Model 1
40 cps average print rate -- bi-directional
Model 2
80 cps maximum - bi-directional
Model 3
120 cps maximum -- bl-dlrectional
Highlights:
Keyboard -- EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys (produces
88 characters). Underscore/Hyphen, Backspace, Space, and
"Print Character" keys have typamatic operation. Associated
with the keyboard are indicator lights, function keys, operating
mode switches, and a 3-posltion numeric display.
Printer -- prints serial by character while the wire-matrix print
head Is moving in elth"lr direction -- bi-directional printing. Print
span is 132 positions at 10 characters per inch. Line spacing is
6 lines per inch. Single part continuous forms or up to three part
cut forms can be handled with the standard friction feed platen.
A variable width forms tractor, available as a special feature, is
required for feeding multipart or preprinted continuous forms of
up to six parts maximum (total thickness not greater than
0.018 "). Five and six part continuous forms should be tried on
an individual basis for acceptable feeding, registration and print
quality. Overall forms widths from 3" to 15" can be accommodated. To facilitate handling of continuous forms, the Forms
Stand (special feature) is recommended. Card stock continuous
forms are not recommended. Refer to GA24-3488 for forms
design considerations. A 94 character set is standard.
Dual 256-Byte Buffers - transfer data between the input and
output devices. The buffers alternate in providing input and
output service to permit overlapped operation.
Buffer Edit -- allows corrections to be made on the contents of a
buffer during key entry jobs. Corrections can be made by character, by line, or by entire buffer (up to 256 bytes).
Extend Buffer - combines the dual 256-byte buffers into a
single 512-byte buffer under operator control for keyboard to
line jobs. Buffer edit capability applies to the full 512 bytes.
Buffer transfers to line are in 256-byte increments and cannot be
overlapped.
Printer Format Controls -- facilitate the formatting of printed
data. Vertical and horizontal control characters in data initiate
vertical or horizontal tabbing. Format controls can be entered
from keyboard, or from an attached card reader, cr can be
system defined.
Compression/Expansion - provides a means for improving the
efficiency of data transmission. For BSC, the compression option
can be invoked at the terminal for a job that reads nontransparent data from cards. A tWO-byte sequence is substituted
for each occurrence of three or more consecutive blank card
columns (63 consecutive blanks is the upper limit). A second
two-byte sequence is appended if more than 63 consecutive
blank columns are read. The terminal monitors received nontransparent data that is destined for printer or attached card
punch and automatically expands this two-byte sequence to the
correct number of blanks. A similar capability is provided when
using SDLC procedures.
Input/Output Selection - is under control of keyboard setup
with an option for entering one set of printer format controls from
the keyboard or the card reader. A fully configured 3771 will
allow the following:
Input
Output
Keyboard
Card Reader
Keyboard"
Printer
Printer
Card Punch
Online Batch Jobs
Line" "
Printer
Card Punch""
Online Interactive Jobs
Keyboard"
Line
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the customer. This has been done through the use of problem identification
and recovery routines and procedures that are easily understood
and used by the operator. See IBM 3771/3773 Operating Procedures Guide, GA27-31 00.
Communications: See "Special Features." Transmission speeds
up to 4800 bps over switched or non-switched facilities are allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication
facility. Refer to 3770 Data Communication System in "Systems"
for a Communication Configurator. Refer to M 2700 pages for
information on communication facilities, and other attachment
information. Also refer to 3863, 3864, 3872 and 3874 in
"Machines."
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136653, or equivalent, is
required
Customer Responsibilities: It will be a customer's responsibility to
use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and fill out
the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to M
2700 pages.
Limitations: The input/output capabilities under "Highlights" are
dependent on appropriate configurations of the terminal. Keyboard
and console printer are standard. For other configurations, refer
to "Special Features" below.
Prerequisites:
For SDLC Communications with S/370 or 4300 Processors -a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating under
Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any virtual
storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS,
OS/VS1 or OS/VS2, or these operating systems running under
VM/370. Note: OS/VS2 is not supported on 4300 Processors.
SOLC communication is also available via the Communications
Adapter feature on the 4331 ... see "Programming" for software
support available.
For BSC Communications with S/360, S/370 or 4300
Processors -- a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2; or these operating
systems running under VM/370. Note: OS/V82 is not supported
on the 4300 Processors. The 3770 Communication Terminals
use 2770 B8C programming support when operating in BSC
mode. Operation with S/360, 8/370 and 4300 Processors using
2770 BSC programming is also permitted. See 8RL GA27-3097
for BSC compatibility considerations. The customer may have to
modify existing 2770 application programs for operation with
3770. BSC attachment can be made via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller or a 2701 Data Adapter Unit attached to a
channel of any 8/370 or 4300 Processor, via an Integrated
Communications Adapter on S/370 mdl 115, 125 or 135 or via
the Communications Adapter feature on a 4331. BSC attachment
can be made via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller attached to a channel of a 8/360 mdl 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65
mode) 75 and 195; via a 2701 attached to a channel of a
S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 and
195; or via an Integrated Communications Attachment on S/360
md125.
Bibliography: GC20-0001.
Specify: [1 ]Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray. Note: Available at time of manufacture only.
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
PRICES:
Offline Jobs
Card Reader
Line
Line
"Output to printer is automatic.
""Monitor Print is an output option in addition to line or card
punch.
Line
Printer
3771
Mdl
1
2
3
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$229
259
306
$195
220
260
Purchase
$8,400
8,800
10,400
MMMC
$ 59.50
68.00
78.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 45%
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1 to Model 2 ..... $ 700
Model 1 to Model 3 ..... 2,500
Model 2 to Model 3 ..... 2,300.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ---
--- -- - =----= =':' =
M 3771.2
Jul79
DP Machines
3771 Communication Terminal (conl'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
[All special features can be field installed, except # 1201 for which
field installation is not recommended.]
For Communication Capability -- select one Communication
Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470) ... one Communication Driver
(#1481 or 1482) ... and one Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501, or
5502) or EIA Interface (#3701). #1462 is required in addition to
#1460 or #1461 for multipoint operation using esc.
COMMUNICATION FEATURE ... one can be selected.
SOLC/BSC, SWITCH CONTROL (#1460). Provides communication procedure using SDLC or BSC under operator switch control. SDLC allows point-to-point or multipoint operation. BSC
operation is point-to-point without #1462, multipoint with
#1462. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1461 or #1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility
considerations.
BSC, POINT-TO-POINT (#1461). Provides for point-to-point
BSC operation over switched or non-switched facilities.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1460 or
#1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
SOLC (#1470). Provides for switched and non-switched SDLC
procedures. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #1460 or #1461. For record purposes also identify
CPU/Program Environment code. Specify one of the following:
#9977 for DOS/VS VTAM, #9988 for OS/VS1 VTAM, #9989
for OS/VS2 VTAM, or #9993 for all other combinations of operating systems and access methods.
BSC MULTIPOINT (#1462). Required for BSC multipoint operation over nonswitched facilities. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#1460 or #1461. Limitation: See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC
compatibility considerations.
COMMUNICATION DRIVER ... one can be selected.
WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1481). Provides
Maximum: One.
communication driver without clocking.
Prerequisite: Communication Feature #1460, 1461 or 1470.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1482.
WITH 1200 BPS BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1482).
Provides communication driver with 1200 bps clocking.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Feature # 1460,
1461 or 1470. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1481.
EIA INTERFACE OR INTEGRATED MODEM ... one can be selected.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides a cable and interface meeting RS-232C characteristics for attachment of an IBM Modem or
non-IBM modem. Speeds up to 4800 bps for switched or nonswitched operation are permitted. This feature in combination
with #1481 can be used to attach to Modem Fan-out (#3901)
on an adjacent terminal, or on an IBM 3863, 3864, 3872 or 3874
Modem. This feature in combination with #1482 can be used for
direct attachment to a 3704 or 3705 equipped with Local Attachment (#4716) for operation at 1200 bps synchronous.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481 or
1482). Limitation: Cannot be installed with any Integrated Modem feature.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides for point-to-point or multipoint operation over nonswitched communication facilities. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver with Clocking (#1482). Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, AUTO ANSWER
(#5501). Provides for point-to-point operation over switched
network facilities using manual originate/auto answer for establishingconnection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1482). The user must provide a Data Coupler type
CBS or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701,
or with another Integrated Modem.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm to alert the operator
of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input, output,
or control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with this feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
OPERATOR 10 READER (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8'" x 2-1/8'" ranging from
0.007'" to 0.045'" thick may be read.
With BSC,
a read operation can be initiated during a keyboard to line job
only. Data read from the magnetic stripe card cannot be printed.
Maximum: One. limitations: (i) The operator must position and
slide the card through the reader-slot at a steady rate between 5'"
and 40'" per second for a read operation. (2) BSC programming
for 2770 does not support this feature.
3501 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8050). To attach a 3501
Card Reader. Maximum: One. limitation: Cannot be installed
with #8150.
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card Punch. The
3521 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with #8050.
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). Provides a forms
feeding device for continuous edge-punched forms. Overall forms
width from 3'" to 15'" can be fed. Refer to Forms Design Reference Guide for Printers, GA24-3488. Maximum: One.
Special Feature Prices:
Communication Feature
SDLC /BSC, Swch Cntrl #1460
BSC, Point-to-Polnt
1461
SDLC
1470
1462
BSC Multipoint
Communication Driver
w/o Bus Mch Clocking
1481
w 1200 BPS Business
Machine Clocking
1482
EIA Interface
3701
1200 BPS Integrated Modem
Non-Switched
5500
SWitched, Auto Answer
5501
Switched, Mnl Answer
5502
ASCII Feature
1201
1390
Audible Alarm
Keylock
4650
Operator ID Reader
5450
3501 Card Reader Attach 8050
3782/3521 Card Reader
Attachment
8150
Variable Wdth Fms Trctr 8700
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
$25
15
13
13
$21
13
11
11
13
11
440
2.00
15
13
13
11
520
440
3.00
1.00
19
16
25
21
19
16
18
15
40SUC 35SUC 13
11
13
11
668
840
668
600
40
35
440
440
4.00
4.00
4.00
.50
.50
NC
1.50
.50
19
6
640
160
3.50
.50
16
5
$840
520
440
440
$5.50
3.00
3.00
1.00
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
Forms Stand (#4450) -- Permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for stacking after printing.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, MANUAL ANSWER (#5502). Provides for point-to-point operation over
switched networks using manual originate/manual answer for
establishing connection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1482). The user must provide a Data Coupler
type COT or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with BSC features #1460, #1461 or #1462, or with SDLC features #1460 or
#1470. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended for
field Installation.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3773.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3773 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
[No Longer Available]
Purpose: This desk style console-keyboard printer includes as
standard a diskette storage device with removable, reusable diskette. It is a member of the 3770 Data Communication System.
Communication features permit operation over switched or nonswitched facilities at speeds up to 4800 bps. It uses the SDLC or
BSC transmission technique.
Model 1, P1
Model 2, P2
Model 3, P3
The prefix "P"
programmable.
40 cps average print rate - bi-directional
80 cps maximum - bi-directional
1 20 cps maximum - bi-directional
on
the
model
number
designates
user-
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
9045 for gray.
[3] Remote Power Off: #9501 ... specify this feature for capability
to power down terminal from the host CPU using a controlled
data sequence over communication facilities.
[4] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual - PhYSical Planning, GA27-3006.
[5] Alternate Address: #9011 ... for EC record purposes only.
Order this optional feature to specify that diskettes containing
terminal control code engineering changes are to be mailed to
an alternate address
using a
Teleprocessing Control number. The alternate address selected is usually the central site location. Limitation: For models
P1, P2, P3 only. Field installable.
PRICES:
Mdl
3773
1t
2t
3t
P1t
P2t
P3t
MAC/
MRC
$311
341
388
370
380
419
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$265
290
330
315
323
357
Purchase
$11,200
11,600
13,200
13,200
13,600
14,280
Model Changes: Field Installable on an "As Available" basis.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
1 to Model 2
1 to Model 3
1 to Model P1
1 to Model P2
1 to Model P3
2 to Model 3
2 to Model P2
2 to Model P3
3 to Model P1
P1 to Model P2
P1 to Model P3
P2 to Model P3
$700
2,500
4,400
5,100
6,700
2,300
4,400
6,000
4,400
700
2,300
1,360
SPECIAL FEATURES
All special features can be field installed, except #1201 and
#4660 for which field installation is not recommended. Special
features are on an "As Available" basis for field installation.
For Communication Capability -- select one Communication
Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470) ... one Communication Driver
(#1481 or 1482) ... and one Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501,
5502) or EIA Interlace (#3701). #1462 is required in addition to
$1460 or #1461 for multipoint operation using BSC.
COMMUNICATION FEATURE ... one can be selected.
SDLC/BSC, SWITCH CONTROL (#1480). Provides communication procedure using SDLC or BSC under operator switch control. SDLC allows point-to-point or multipoint operarion. BSC
operation is point-ta-point without #1462, multipoint with
#1462. Maximum: One. limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1461 or #1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility
considerations.
BSC, POINT-TO-POINT (#1461): Provides for pOint-to-point BSC
operation over switched or non-switched facilities. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1460 or #1470.
t
No longer available.
BSC MULTIPOINT (#1462). Required for BSC multipoint operation
over non-switched facilities. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#1460 or #1461. Limitation: See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC
compatibility considerations.
COMMUNICATION DRIVER ... one can be selected.
WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1481). Provides
a communication driver without clocking. Maximum: One.
PrerequiSite: Communication Feature #1460, #1461 or #1470.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with # 1482.
WITH 1200 BPS BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1482).
Provides a communication driver with 1200 bps clocking.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Feature #1460,
#1461 or #1470. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1481.
EIA INTERFACE OR INTEGRATED MODEM ...
ed.
one can be select-
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides a cable and interface meeting RS-232C characteristics for attachment of an IBM Modem or
non-IBM modem. Speeds up to 4800 bps for switched or nonswilched operation are permitted. This feature in combination
with #1481 can be used to attach to Modem Fanout (#3901) on
an adjacent terminal, or on an IBM 3863, 3864, 3872 or 3874
Modem. This feature in conjunction with ;I. 1482 can be used for
direct attachment to a 3704 or 3705 equipped with Local Attachment (#471 6) for operation at 1 200 bps synchronous.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: CQmmunication Driver (#1481 or
1482). Limitation: Cannot be installed with any Integrated Modem feature.
MMMC
$74.50
78.50
102.00
113.00
117.00
132.00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 50%
Warranty: B
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Useful Life Category: 2
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
SDLC (#1470). Provides for switched and non-switched SDLC
procedures. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with # 1460 or # 1461. For record purposes also identify the
primary CPU/Program Environment code. Specify one of the
following: #9977 for DOS/VS VTAM, #9988 for OS/VS1 VTAM,
#9989 for OS/VS2 VTAM, or #9993 for all other combinations
of operating systems and access methods.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides for point-to-point or multipoint operation over nonswitched communication facilities. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver with Clock (# 1482). Limitation: Cannot
be installed with #3701 or with another Integrated Modem.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, AUTO ANSWER
(#5501). Provides for point-to-point operation over switched
network facilities using manual originate/auto answer for establishing connection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1482). The user must provide a Data Coupler Type
CBS or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701
or with another Integrated Modem.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, MANUAL ANSWER (#5502. Provides for point-to-point operation over
switched network facilities using manual originate/manual answer for establishing connection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver (#1482). The user must provide a Data
Coupler Type COT or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #3701 or with another Integrated Modem.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. The feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage and with BSC features #1460, #1461 or #1462, or with
SDLC features #1460 or #1470. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Not recommended.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm to alert the operator
of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401). Provides one keylock and two keys for
the desk-console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local key makers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input, output,
or control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with this feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacemnt keys. Maximum: One.
KEYPAD,NUMERIC (#4680). Provides a keypad in adding machine arrangement to facilitate rapid entry of numeric only data.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Model P1, P2 or P3. limitation:
Not available for mdls 1, 2 or 3. Field Installation: Not recommended.
OPERATOR 10 READER (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read.
Not to be reproduced without. written permission.
--- -----------
M 3773.2
=-=-= ':' =
Jill 79
DP Machines
3773 Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
With a sse
non-programmable terminal. a read operation can be Initiated
during a keyboard to line job only. Data read from the magnetic
stripe card cannot be printed. For a programmable terminal the
Operator 10 Reader (#5450) is under control of the 3770 application program. Maximum: One. Limitation: (1) The operator must
position and slide the card through the reader-slot at a steady rate
between 5" and 40" per second for a read operation ... (2) sse
programming for 2770 does not support this feature.
STORAGE INCREMENT,4K (#6800). Provides an additional 4096
bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Model Pl. P2 or P3. Limitation: Not available for mdls 1. 2 or 3.
or with #6801.
STORAGE INCREMENT, 8K (#6801). Provides an additional 8192
bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Model Pl. P2 or P3. Limitation: Not available for mdls 1. 2 or 3.
or with #6800.
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). Provides a forms
feeding device for continuous edge-punched forms. Overall forms
widths from 3" to 15" can be feed. Refer to Forms Design Reference Guide for Printers. GA24-3488. Maximum: One.
Special Feature Prices:
Communication Feature
SDLCIBSC,Swch Cntrl #1460
BSC,Polnt-to-Polnt
1461
SDLC
1470
BSC Multipoint
1462
Communication Driver
wlo Bus Machine Clklng 1481
w 1200 BPS Business
Machine Clocking
1482
EIA Interface
3701
Keyped, Numeric
4660
1200 BPS Integrated Modem
Non-Swltched
5500
SWitched, Auto Answer 5501
Swltched,Mnl Answer
5502
ASCII Feature
1201
Audible Alarm
1390
Door Keylock
3401
Keylock
4650
Operator 10 Reader
5450
Storage Increment, 4K
6800
Storage Increment, 8K
6801
Vbl Wdth Forms Trctr
8700
MAC
MRC
ETPI
MLC
2 Yr Purchase MMMC
$25
15
13
13
$21
13
11
11
$840
520
440
$5.50
3.00
3.00
1.00
13
11
440
2.00
15
13
12
13
11
10
520
440
400
3.00
1.00
2.00
19
16
25
21
19
16
18
15
40SUC 15SUC 35SUC 13
11
18
15
32
27
6
5
868
8.40
868
600
40
15
35
440
351"
637
160
4.00
4.00
4.00
.50
.50
NC
NC
1.50
4.50
6.50
.50
440
·Customers who elect to purchase this feature and anticipate
later ordering additional storage. should consider purchase of
the larger storage initially because a field upgrade requires
replacement of the Initial feature.
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine. order the Feature #
indicated below at the price listed on M 10000 pages. See M
10000 for additional information and field Insta"ation.
Forms Stand (#4450). - Permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._------- - - --==
-----':' =
- - =---
M 3774.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3774 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
[Models 1 and 2 are no longer available]
Purpose: This desk-style console-printer-keyboard is a member of
the 3770 Data Communication System. The basic printer operates
at a maximum speed of 60 or 120 characters per second and
prints bi-directional, serial by character, using a wire-matrix print
head. Special features permit one or two diskette storage devices
and provide for the addition of an additional printer, the 3764 Line
Printer, and 'one card reader and one card punch. One of three
card readers can be selected for operation at speeds of 50, 150
or 300 cards per minute. The card punch operates at 50 cpm.
Communication features allow for operation over switched or
non-switched facilities at speeds up to 4600 bps using SDLC or
BSC transmission techniques and an appropriate modem.
Model 1, P1
Model 2, P2
The prefix "P"
programmable.
Highlights:
60 cps maximum -- bi-directional printer
120 cps maximum -- bi-directional printer
on
the
model
number
designates
user-
All Models
Keyboard -- EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys (produces
68 characters). Underscore/Hyphen, Backspace, Space and
"Print Character" ("Character" on programmable models) keys
have typamatic operation. Associated with the keyboard are
indicator lights, function keys, operating mode switches. and a
3-position numeric display.
Printer -- prints serial by character at a maximum rate of 80 or
120 characters per second while the wire-matrix print head is
moving in either direction -- bi-directional printing. Print span is
132 positions at 10 characters per inch. Line spacing is 6 lines
per inch. The 3774 mdls PI and P2 (without Emulator) provide
for line spacing of 6 or 8 lines per inch. Single part continuous
forms or up to three part cut forms can be handled with the
standard friction feed platen. A variable width forms tractor (a
special feature) , is required for feeding multipart or preprinted
continuous forms of up to six parts maximum (total thickness not
greater than 0.018". Five and six part continuous forms should
be tried on an individual basis for acceptable feeding, registration and print quality. Overall form widths from 3" to 15" can be
accommodated. To facilitate handling of continuous forms, the
Forms Stand (an accessory) is recommended. Card stock continuous forms are not recommended. Refer to GA24-3488 for
forms design considerations. A 94 character set is standard.
Performance Considerations - actual terminal device throughput
is dependent upon operational and systems programming characteristics. Factors such as the communications facilities, transmission block length, compressing characteristics, characters
read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, etc., must
all be considered in determining actual throughput. See IBM
3770 Data Communication System, GA27-3097, for additional
information.
Problem Determination Procedures -- significant function has
been designed into this unit to provide greater availability to the
customer. This has been done through the use of problem identification and recovery routines and procedures that are easily
understood and used by the operator. See IBM 3774/3775
Operating Procedures Guide, GA27-3094, or IBM 3773, 3774
and 3775 Programmable Communication Terminals Operator's
Guide, GA27-3114.
Communications see "Special Features." Transmission
speeds up to 4800 bps over switched or non-switched facilities
are allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication facility. Refer to 3770 Data Communications System in
"Systems" for a Communication Configurator. Refer to M 2700
pages for information on communications facilities and other
attachment facilities.
Also refer to 3782 and 3784 in
"Machines." The 2400 BPS Integrated Modem and IBM 3872
Modem when appropriately configured can be intermixed on the
same communication facility.
For BSC Communications with S/360, 5/370 or 4300
Processors -- a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS, OS/VSl or OS/VS2; or under RSCS (nonprogrammable terminals only) and VM/370; or any of these
operating systems running under VM/370. Note: OS/VS2 is not
supported by the 4300 Processors. The 3776 Communication
Terminals use 2770/3780 BSC programming support when
operating in BSC mode. Operation with S/360, S/370 or 4300
Processors using 2770/3780 BSC programming is also permitted. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
The customer may have to modify existing 2770/3780 application programs for operation with 3774. The customer will have to
modify existing application programs for operation with programmable models of the 3774. BSC attachment can be via a
3704/3705 Communications Controller, or a 2701 Data Adapter
Unit attached to a channel of any S/370 or 4300 Processor; or
via an Integrated Communications Adapter on S/370 mdl 115,
125, 135, 135-3 or 136; or via a Communications Adapter feature on the 4331 Processor. BSC attachment can be made via a
3704/3705 attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 30, 40, 50,
65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 or 195; via a 2701 attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode),
75 or 195; or via an Integrated Communications Attachment on
5/360 mdl 25.
Non-programmable Models
Emulator Specify Feature
and
Programmable
Models
with
Dual 256-Byte Buffers -- transfer data between the input and
output devices. The buffers alternate in providing input and
output service to permit overlapped operation.
Buffer Edit -- allows corrections to be made on the contents of a
buffer during key entry jobs. A 256-byte diskette record, if the
diskette feature is present, can also be retrieved into the buffer
using Update Mode and be corrected using buffer edit functions.
Corrections can be made by character, by line or by entire buffer
(up to 256 bytes).
Extend Buffer -- combines the dual 256-byte buffers into
single 512-byte buffer under operator control for keyboard
line or keyboard to diskette jobs. Buffer edit capability applies
the full 512 bytes. Buffer transfers to line or diskette are
256-byte increments and cannot be overlapped. .
a
to
to
in
Printer Format Controls -- facilitate the formatting of printed
data. Vertical and horizontal control characters in data initiate
vertical or horizontal tabbing. Format controls for up to 5 jobs
can be entered from keyboard, or from diskette or card if either
one of these devices is attached.
Compression/Expansion -- provides a means for improving the
efficiency of data transmission. For BSC, the compression option
can be invoked at the terminal for a job that reads nontransparent data from cards. A two-byte sequence is substituted
for each occurrence of three or more consecutive blank card
columns (63 consecutive blanks is the upper limit). A second
two-byte sequence is appended if more than 64 consecutive
blank columns are read. The terminal monitors received nontransparent data that is destined for printer or attached card
punch and automatically expands this two-byte sequence to the
correct number of blanks. A similar capability is provided when
using SDLC procedures.
Auto Interrupt -- allows the terminal to automatically interrupt an
offline job for an online job initiated by the host CPU. The terminal stops the offline job, executes the online job for receiving
line data, automatically restarts the offline job without operator
intervention. A manual switch on the keyboard enables/disables
this mode of operation. See "Operating Characteristics - Automatic Interrupt" in 3770 Systems Components Manual,
GA27-3097.
Input/Output Job Definitions -- can be operator or terminal
defined. Up to five operator defined jobs can be read from
diskette or card reader to facilitate rapid job set-up when the
terminal is equipped with either of the special features, otherwise
they can be entered from keyboard under control of a prompting
sequence and executed from temporary storage. Printer format
controls can be part of the job definition. An appropriately configured 3774 will permit input/output job designationa as follows:
Supplies -- a black ribbon. IBM Part No. 2236653, or equivalent, is required
Offline Jobs
Input
Output
Customer Responsibilities - it will be a customer's responsibility to use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and
fill out the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also
refer to M 2700 pages.
Keyboard'
Console Printer, Diskette, Card Punch or
Printer 2nd
Console Printer, Diskette, Card Punch or
Printer 2nd
Console Printer, Diskette, Card Punch or
Printer 2nd
Console Printer and either Diskette or
Card Punch
Console Printer and either Diskette or
Card Punch
(1) Diskette
(1) Card Reader
Prerequisites:
For SDLC Communications with S/370 or 4300 Processors -a 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating under
Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any virtual
storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS,
OS/VSl or OS/VS2; or these operating systems running under
VM/370. Note; OS/VS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors.
Nnt tn h .. rpnrnduced
(2) Keyboard &
Diskette
(2) Keyboard &
Card Reader
Online Batch Jobs
(1) Diskette or
Card Reader
without written permission.
Line
M 3774.2
DP' Machines
3774 Communication Tarmlnal
(cont'd)
(1) Line
Console Printer, Diskette, Card Punch or
Printer 2nd
Online Interactive Job
Keyboard"
Line
Line
Console Printer
" One input device and one output device per job. Output to
console printer is automatic when Input is keyboard.
(1) One input device and one output device per job. Monitor print
is an additional output option when diskette, card punch or
line Is the output device.
(2) Record Format Feature (#6010) is required in addition to I/O
devices to allow multiple Input and output devices for a job.
Limitations: The input/output capabilities outlined under
"Highlights" are dependent on appropriate configurations of the
terminal. Keyboard and console printer are standard. For other
conflguretions refer to "Special Features" below.
Programmable Models Without Emulator Specify Feature
Offline Operations - are controlled by a user written program.
The 3774 interprets the user written program after it is loaded to
program storage from diskette storage. The 3774 has 6K bytes
of program storage as standard. Additional 4K, 8K, 12K or 16K
bytes of program storage are available by special feature to a
maximum of 16K additional bytes of program storage. A program
can be selected and Invoked by the operator, by a prior progrem
call, or by an auto execute command from the host CPU. Valid
data sources for offline operations are the Operator 10 Reader,
keyboard, diskette storage and card reader. Valid data output
devices are the console printer, diskette storage, card punch
3784 Line Printer and display.
'
3774P system utilities provide additional capabilities for the
following operations:
Card reader to console printer, diskette, card punch, or 3784
Printer.
Card print (Read Interpret).
Keyboard to card punch.
Create, copy, list diskette.
Data set support for bypass, create, delete, erase rename and
write protect data set.
'
Data set update for create, read, write and dump data set.
Copy data set.
Program library support.
Print error log.
Set date.
Set configuration.
Storage Conalderatlons - storage is used for executing a 3770
application program that is loaded from diskette, for Communications Mode, for data buffers, and for execution of device-related
functions that are specified by the opening statement in the
application program. Storage may also be allocated for devices
and functions at power on time through options available in the
Terminal Configuration Utility. The amount of storage required
for devices or functions is:
Supervisor Control Code Resident
3.0K bytes
Progremmable Communications - BSC
2.0K bytes
Programmable Communications - SDLC
7.0K bytes
Communications Mode
Basic (diskette and console printer I/O)
6.0K bytes
Additional Storage for Card I/O & 3784 Printer
Using BSC Communications
4.0K bytes
Using SDLC Communications
5.75K bytes
Additional Storage Using SDLC
Multiple SYS.lNTR Function
.75K bytes
Format Image Buffer (Power on Allocation only) 256 bytes
3501 Card Reader
1.75K bytes
2502 Card Reader
2.5K bytes
Display Feature
2.5K bytes
3521 Card Punch
3.0K bytes
Read-Next Buffers
(optional for diskette operation)
0.25K bytes
for each data
set to a max.
of 5.
The amount of storage required is also dependent
upon the following variables:
Size of 3770 application program
XK bytes
Working storage for tables, storage to storage
operetions, buffers, etc., Including 0.75K bytes
for basic three buffers
XK bytes
Online Communications Operation - terminals equipped with
the appropriate I/O and Communications features can operate as
follows:
Transmission is controlled by the Communications Mode function or by a user written program using the Programmable
Communications function. Communicate Mode provides for
selection of diskette datasets, card reader or keyboard (Logon)
Jul79
for input data. Output dala can be directed to a diskette dataset, card punch, console printer or 3784 Printer. Support is
provided for printer horizontal and vertical format control. The
programmable Communications capability allows for transmission of data with any I/O device under control of a user written
program.
Diskette Storage Device - with 99,840 bytes of storage is
standard on a non-removable diskette. Characteristics of the
non-removable diskette are one read/write surface, 30 data
tracks, 26 sectors per track and 128 bytes per sector. Up to
390 256-byte records or up to 780 128-byte records can be
stored on the non-removable diskette. Programmable communication (SDLC) reduces the amount of storage for user data from
30 to 28 tracks.
Two additional Diskette Storage Devices providing 242,944 bytes
of storage each on removable reusable diskettes are provided by
special feature.
The diskettes can be used for storage of 3770 application programs and for application data. The maximum number of user
written data sets that can reside on the non-removable diskette
and removable diskette is 18. A maximum of seven data sets
can be opened for anyone program. A program library data set
can contain a maximum of 99 user written programs. Program
identification can be numbered from 01 to 99.
CPU Interrupt - can automatically occur during offline programs
in order to receive an unsolicited CPU message. The message is
stored on diskette storage (or, under certain conditions, printed
on the console printer) and the offline program is automatically
resumed., A manual switch on the keyboard enables/disables
this mode of operation.
Address S~op Function - is provided to facilitate debugging of
3770 application programs at the terminal site. The status of
program resources at the stop-address can be outputted to
printer or display.
Bibliography: GC2Q-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color:, 9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. Note: Available at time of manufacture only.
[3] Remote Power Off: #9501 ... specify this feature for capability
to power down terminal from the host CPU using a controlled
data sequence sent over communication facilities.
[4] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
[5] Emulator: #9141 ... specify this feature to equip the terminal
with the non-programmable function in lieu of the standard
programmable function. Non-programmable notation on the
keyboard and operator panel is provided by this feature. Field
Installation: Not recommended. It can be field removed to
change the terminal from non-programmable to programmable
function.
[6] Alternate Address: #9011 ...
Order this optional feature to specify that diskettes containing
terminal control code engineering changes are to be mailed to
an alternate address
'
using a
Teleprocessing Control number. The alternate address selected is usually the central site location. Limitations: [1] For
models P1, P2 only ... [2] Not with Emulator (#9141) ... [3]
Each EC control diskette has been manufactured for use on
the specific machine type/serial shown on the diskette label.
EC diskettes for the 3774 terminal are unconfigured when they
are mailed from IBM and have 23 tracks of storage available
for user data. After the diskette is configured on the machine
type/serial on which it is to be used, the amount of storage
for user data is as follows: 30 tracks - configured to not use
programmable communications SDLC ... 28 tracks - configured
to use programmable communications SDLC. For additional
information, see "Data Set Support" in the Operator's Guide
GA27-3114.
'
PRICES:
3774
Mdl
ETP/
MLC
MAC/
MRC
2 Yr
$264
$310
350
298
310
264
350
298
Plan B
Machine Group:
1t
2t
P1
P2
Plan Offering:
Warrenty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Purchase MMMC
$10,580 $71.50
81,00
11,920
10,580 117.00
11,920 125.00
0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 45%
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
,Model Changes: Field Installable ... for 3774 Models 1 and 2 on
an "As Available" basis Limitation: Model downgrades from
programmable models to non-progremmable models are not permitted.
t
No 10000er available.
Not to be reproduced without writtenperm;ssion.
._------- - - ----------------_.-
DP Machines
3774 Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (There are no additional
installation charges).
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
1 to Model 2
1 to Model P1
1 to Model P2
2 to Model P2
P1 to Model P2
$2,300
4,900
6,260
4,900
1 ,360
SPECIAL FEATURES
All special features can be field installed, except #1201 and
#4660 for which field installation is not recommended. Special
features for 3774 mdls 1 and 2 are on an "As Available" basis for
field installation.
FOR COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY - select one Communication
Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470) ... one Communication Driver
(#1481 or 1482) ... and one Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501,
5502, 5600, 5602 or 5610) or EIA Interface (#3701). #1462 is
required in addition to #1460 or #1461 for multipoint operation
using BSC.
COMMUNICATION FEATURE ... one can be selected.
SDLC/BSC, SWITCH CONTROL (#1460). Provides communication procedure using SDLC or BSC under operator switch control. SDLC allows point-to-point or multipoint operation. BSC
operation is poinl-to-point without #1462, multipoint with
# 1462. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1461 or #1470. See SRl GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility
considerations.
BSC, POINT-TO-POINT (#1461). Provides for point-to-point BSC
operation over switched or non-switched facilities. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with # 1460 or # 1470.
See SRl GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
SDlC (#1470). Provides for switched and non-switched SDlC
procedures. Maximum: One. limitation: Cannot be installed
with #1460 or #1461. For record purposes also identify the
primary CPU/Program Environment Code. Specify one of the
following: #9977 for DOS/VS VTAM, #9988 for OS/VS1 VTAM,
#9989 for OS/VS2 VTAM, or #9993 for all other combinations
of operating systems and access methods.
BSC MULTIPOINT (#1462). Required for BSC multipoint operation
over non-switched facilities. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#1460 or·#1461. Limitation: See SRl GA27-3097 for BSC
compatibility considerations.
COMMUNICATION DRIVER ... one can be selected.
WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1481). Provides
Maximum:
One.
communication driver without clocking.
Prerequisite:
Communication Feature #1460, #1461, or
# 1470. Limitation: Cannot be installed with # 1482.
WITH 1200 BPS BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1482).
Prov!des communication driver with 1200 bps clocking.
MaXimum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Feature #1460,
#1461 or #1470. limitation: Cannot be installed with #1481.
EIA INTERFACE OR INTEGRATED MODEM ... one can be selected.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701), Provides a cable and interface meeting RS-232C characteristics for attachment of an IBM Modem or
non-IBM data set. Speeds up to 4800 bps for switched or nonswitched operation are permitted. This feature in combination
with #1481 can be used to attach to Modem Fan-out (#3901)
on an adjacent terminal, or on an IBM 3863, 3864, 3872 or 3784
Modem. This feature in combination with #1482 can be used for
direct attachment to a 3704 or 3705 equipped with local Attachment (# 4 71 6) for operation at 1 200 bps synchronous.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481 or
# 1482). Limitation: Cannot be installed with any Integrated
Modem feature.
12~ BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED (#5500),
PrOVides for point-to-point or multipoint operation over nonswitched communication facilities. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver (#1482). Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, AUTO ANSWER
(#5501). Provides for point-to-point operation over switched
network facilities using manual originate/auto answer for establishing connection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (# 1482). The user must provide a Data Coupler type
CBS or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701
or with another Integrated Modem.
'
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, MANUAL ANSWER (#5502). Provides for point-to-point operation over
SWitched network facilities using manual originate/manual answer for establishing connection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver (# 1482). The user must provide a Data
Coupler type COT or equivalent. limitation: Cannot be installed
with #3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
M 3774.3
Jul79
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, POINT-TOPOINT (#5600). This self-clocked modem provides for point-topoint operation over non-switched communication facilities. Operat~r controls p~ovide for half-speed operation and for adjusting
receive equalization. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). limitation: Cannot be installed with
#3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, MUL TIPOINT (#5602). ThiS self-clocked modem provides for multipoint
operation over non-switched communication facilities. Operator
controls provide for half-speed operation and for adjusting transmit and receive equalization. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED WITH AUTO
ANSWER (#5610). This self-clocked modem provides for pointto-point operation over switched communication facilities using
manual originate/auto answer for establishing connection. Operator controls provide for half-speed operation. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Communication Driver (# 1481. The user must
provide a Data Coupler type CBS or equivalent. limitation:
Cannot be installed with #3701, or with another Integrated
Modem.
SUB-FEATURES FOR 2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEMS
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP (#7951). Provides the capability of attaching 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600 or #5602)
to the switched network facility as back-up to the primary nonswitched facility. Operation over the switched network is in
manual originate / manual answer mode to establish the connection. It can communicate at 2400/1200 bps with an IBM 3872
Modem equipped for operation over the public switched network
(#7941, #7951 or #7952) attached to a 3704, 3705 or ICA of
3115 or 3125. Note: To use this feature operator intervention at
the. terminal is required. Operation intervention, program modification, or both may be required on the using system, This feature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS/VS, OS/VS1
and OS/VS2 in certain configurations. Additional customer
program routines will be required in existing BT AM programming
to full utilize the capabilities of this feature. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: 2400 BPS Integrated Modem, Man-Switched
(#5600 or #5602),The user must provide a Data Coupler type
COT or equivalent. limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701.
MODEM FAN-OUT (#3901). Equips the 2400 BPS Integrated
Modem, Non-Switched (#5602) with the capability to be shared
by up to two other terminals in addition to the host. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5602).
Limitation: This feature can be used at a tributary station in a
centralized multipoint network. In this configuartion BSC multipoint programming discipline or SDlC non-switched programming
discipline will provide the selection/control of the terminal without any additional user involvement.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage features and 3784 Printer Attachment Feature, and with
BSC features #1460, #1461 or #1462, or with SDlC features
# 1460 or # 1470. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not Recommended.
Limitation: [Programmable Models Only] The
GETKB programming statement cannot be used in programs that
are to be run on an ASCII machine.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm to alert the operator
of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DISPLAY (#3250). PrOVides a 480 character (12
characters each) information display under control
application program. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
P2. Limitations: Not available for model 1 or 2.
cannot be installed with Emulator (#9141).
lines of 40
of the 3770
Model P1 or
This feature
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401). Provides a keylock and two keys for
the desk-console door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The keys
provided with this lock can be duplicated by local key makers.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two keylocks and four
identical keys for the desk-console cabinet doors. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 2nd (#4902). Limitation;
The keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local key
makers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input, output,
or control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with this feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
KEYPAD, NUMERIC (#4660). Provides a keypad in adding machine arrangement to facilitate rapid entry of numeric only data.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
DP Machines
3774 Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Model Pl or P2. Field Installation:
Not recommended. Limitations: Not available for Modell or 2.
This feature cannot be installed with Emulator (#9141).
DISKETTE STORAGE, 1ST (#4901). One device with a customer
removable diskette is placed in the left cabinet. Additional diskettes are available
Characteristics of the
diskette storage device are: one movable read/write head, one
read/write surface, 73 data tracks, 26 sectors per track and 128
bytes per sector. Up to 949 256-byte records can be stored on
the diskette (one 256-byte record is reserved for job identification
information) in the 3774 mdl 1 and 2. Each 256-byte record is
stored in two consecutive numbered sectors in interchange mode,
or in two non-consecutive sectors in 3770 mode. Diskette data is
code insensitive in SDLC, non-transparent only in BSC mode
(3774 mdl 1 or 2). An Update Switch on the 3774 mdl 1 or 2
provides the operator with the capability of reading a 256-byte
diskette record into the terminal buffer where it can be printed,
edited or deleted. Maximum: One.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 2ND (#4902). Provides a second diskette
storage device with the same characteristics as the 1st. It is place
in the right desk cabinet which is also supplied by this feature.
The second diskette allows additional capabilities for:
Copy - data can be copied from diskette 1 to diskette 2 (single
data set or all active data sets.)
Concatenate (pool) - the ability to concatenate on a data set
basis.
Continue (3774 mdl 1 or 2) - allows a read or write operation
to automatically continue to diskette 2 if it has been placed in
a ready condition. Continue is not allowed while keying data.
Record Update (3774 mdl 1 or 2) - allows a record to be read
into the buffer from diskette 1, updated from keyboard, and
written to the other diskette. Record Format Feature (#6010)
Is a prerequisite for this update capability.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 1st (#4901).
Ordere for Field Installation: Must specify color - #9081 for red,
#9082 for yellow, #9083 for blue, or #9085 for gray ... color
must be the same as that specified for the base machine.
OPERATOR 10 READER (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranllina from
0.007" to 0.045"thick may be read.
With a BSC
non-programmable terminal, a read operation. Cllrl be initiated
during a keyboard to line job only. Data read from the magnetic
stripe card cannot be printed. For a programmable terminal the
Operator 10 Reader is under control of the 3770 application program. Maximum: One. Limitation: The operator must position
and slide the card through the read-slot at a steady rate between
5 and 40 inches per second for a read operation. BSC programming for 2770 does not support this feature.
RECORD FORMAT FEATURE (#6010). Provides an offline capability for constructing records using more than one input and
output device. Input can be keyboard and either diskette or an
attached card reader. Output can be console printer and either
diskette or an attached card punch. A record format specification
record stored on diskette can be defined and changed by the user
to permit selection by field for merging and creating, in any sequence within a transaction cycle. It also permits selecting output
by.field. There may be multiple fields within a transaction and
multiple transaction cycles within a job. Provision is also made
with this feature for self-checking, decimal insertion, right justify
and fill, and numeric checking.
A record format specification record can be loaded to diskette
from the line, keyboard, or card reader.
This feature increases the size of "extend buffer" from 512 to
2048 bytes. Maximum: One. Prerequisites: For 3774 mdls 1 and
2 - Diskette Storage 1st (#4901) ... For 3774 mdls Pl and P2 Diskette Storage 1st (#4901) and Emulator (#9141). Limitations:
Extend buffer and update operation is not permitted for a record
format job. A record format job cannot be interrupted by the CPU
automatically, operator intervention is required. This feature is not
compatible with terminal programmability and will be removed from
model Pl and P2 whenever Emulator (#9141) is removed.
STORAGE INCREMENT, 4K (#6800). Provides an additional 4096
bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Model Pl or P2. Limitations: Not available for mdls 1 or 2, or
with features #6801, #6802 or #6803. This feature cannot be
Installed with Emulator (#9141).
STORAGE INCREMENT, 8K (#6801). Provides an additional 8192
bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Model Pl or P2. Limitations: Not available for mdls 1 or 2, or
with #6800, #6802 or #6803. This feature cannot be installed
with Emulator (#9141).
M 3774.4
Jul79
1 or 2, or with #6800, #6801 or #6803. This feature cannot be
installed with Emulator (#9141).
STORAGE INCREMENT, 16K (#6803). Provides an additional
16,384 bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Model Pl or P2. Limitations: Not available for mdls
1 or 2, or with $6800, #6801 or #6802. This feature cannot be
installed with Emulator (#9141).
3501 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#6050). Provides an attachment of the 3501 Card Reader. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment
(#8149).
3782/2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8149). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 2 and a 2502 Card Reader mdl
Al or A2. The 2502 .can be equipped with special features for
51/80 or 66/80 column cards and/or Optical Mark Read. A
companion OMR special feature is required on the 3782 mdl 2.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3501 Card
Reader Attachment (#8050).
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card Punch. The
3521 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/ Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: (Nonprogrammable mdls only) If a 2502 or 3501 Card Reader is also
attached (#8149 or #8050), the Card Read/Punch Check special
feature on the 3521 is limited to the punch checking function only.
3784 PRINTER ATTACHMENT (#8155). To attach a 3784 Line
Printer as a second printer. Maximum: One.
VARIABLE WIDTH FORMS TRACTOR (#8700). Provides a forms
feeding device for continuous edge-punched forms. Overall forms
width from 3" to 15" can be fed. Refer to Forms Design Reference Guide for Printers, GA-3488. Maximum: One.
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
Special Feature PriCes:
Communication Feature
SDLC /BSC Switch Cntl #1460 $25
$21
$840
$5.50
BSC, Pt-to-Pt
15
13
520
3.00
1461
SDLC
13
1470
11
440
3.00
BSC Multlpt
1462
13
11
1.00
440
Communication Driver
w /0 Bus Mch Clocking
1481
13
11
440
2.00
w 1200 Bps Clocking
1482
15
13
520
3.00
EIA Interface
13
11
440
1.00
3701
1200 Bps Integrated Modem
19
16
Non-5wltched
5500
668
4.00
SWitched, Auto Answer 5501
25
21
840
4.00
SWitched, Mnl Answer
5502
19
16
4.00
668
2400 BPS Integrated Modem
Non-swltched, Pt-t-Pt
5600
68
58
2,320
5.00
Non-swltched, Multlpt
74
5602
63
2,520
5.00
Switched w Auto Answer 5610
74
63
2,520
6.00
Switched Network Backup 7951
11
.50
9
360
Modem Fan-out
3901
21
18
720
1.00
ASCII Feature
1201
18
15
.50
600
Audible Alarm
1390
40
.50
40SUC Display
3250
94
60
3,200
34.50
Door Keylock
15
NC
3401
15SUC Door Keylock, Dual
3402
30
NC
30SUC Keylock
4650
35
NC
35SUC Keypad, Numeric
4660
12
10
400
2.00
Diskette Storage, 1st
4901
69
2,360
16.50
59
Diskette Storage, 2nd
4902
69
2,360
7.00
59
Operator 10 Reader
5450
13
11
440
1.50
Record Format Feature
6010
25
21
840
4.50
Storage Increment, 4K
18
6800
15
4.50
351'
Storage Increment, 8K
6801
32
27
6.50
637'
Storage Increment, 12K
45
6602
38
11.00
910'
Storage Increment, 16K
6803
49
1,170
56
13.00
3501 Cd Rdr Attachment 6050
13
11
440
.50
3782/2502 Cd Rdr Attach 8149
19
16
840
4.00
19
16
3.50
3782/3521 Cd Pch Attach 8150
640
3784 Printer Attachment 8155
19
16
.50
640
.5
Variable Wdth Fms Trctr 8700
6
160
.50
• Customers who elect to purchase one of these features and
anticipate later ordering additional storage, should consider
purchase of the larger storage initially because field upgrade
requires replacement of the initial feature.
ACCESSORIES: For Forms Stand (#4450) ... see page 3775.4.
STORAGE INCREMENT, 12K (#6802). Provides an additional
12,288 bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: One.
PrereqUisite: Model Pl or P2. Limitations: Not available for mdls
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------------
- ----=
==-=
~
M 3775.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
IBM 3775 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
[3775 Model 1 is no longer available]
Purpose: This desk-style console-keyboard-printer is a member of
the 3770 Data Communication System. The basic printer operates
at a maximum speed of 120 lines per minute using a 64 character
set or 80 Ipm using a 94 character set. An engraved character
font print belt can be interchanged by the operator. Special features permit one or two diskette storage devices and provide for
the attachment of one card reader and one card punch. One of
three card readers can be selected for operation at speeds of 50,
150 or 300 cards per minute. The card punch operates at 50
cpm.
Communication features allow for operation over switched or
non-switched facilities at speeds up to 4800 bps using SDLC or
esc transmission techniques and a appropriate modem.
Model 1
Model P1
Non-programmable
User programmable
Highlight.
All Mod.l.
Keyboard - EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys (produces
88 characters). Underscore/Hyphen, Backspace, Space and
"Print Character" ("Character" on programmable .models) keys
have typamatic operation. Associated with the keyboard are
Indicator lights, function keys, operating mode switches and a
3-posltlon numeric display.
Printer - during a key entry Job, the print platen lowers to provide print line visibility. Printing Is from characters engraved on
a revolving print belt. Included as standard is one Interchangeable print belt (either 64 or 94 character set), variable width forms
tractor for feeding continuous forms up to 15 Inches overall
width, paper Jam detection, and 132 print positions. Character
spacing is 10 per inch, line spacing is 6 or 8 per inch. Maximum
print speed Is 120 lines per minute with the 64 character set, or
80 lines per minute with the 94 character set. Continuous card
stock forms are not recommended. Refer to GA24-3488 for
forms design considerations.
Performance Con.lderatlon. - actual terminal device throughput
. is dependent upon operational and systems programming characteristics. Factors such as the communication facilities, transmission block lengths, compression characteristics, characters
read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, etc., must
all be considered in determining actual throughput. See ISM
3770 Communication System, GA27-3097, for additional information.
Problem D.t.rmlnatlon Procedur.. - significant function has
been designed Into this unit to provide greater availability to the
customer. This has been done through the use of problem identification and recovery routines and procedures that are easily
understood and used by the operator. See ISM 3774/3775
Operating Procedures Guide, GA27-3094 or ISM 3773, 3774
and 3775 Programmable Communication Terminals Operator's
Guide, GA27-3114.
Communlcatlona - see "Special Features." Transmission
speeds up to 4800 bps over switched or non-switched facilities
are allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication facility. Refer to M 2700 pages for information on communication facilities and other attachment facilities. Also refer to
3872 and 3874 in configured can be intermixed on the same
communication facility.
Supplle. - a black ribbon. IBM Part No. 1136634, or equivalent,
is required
Cu.tom.r R••pon.ibllltl•• - it will be a customer's responsibility to use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and
fill out the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also
refer to M 2700 pages.
Prerequl.ltes:
For SDLC Communication. with S/370 or 4300 Proc.•••or - a
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating under Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any virtual
storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS,
OS/VS1 or OS/VS2; or these operating systems running under
VM/370 (OS/VS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors).
For BSC Communication. with S/360 or S/370 or 4300
Processor. - a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 or under RSCS (nonprogrammable terminals only) and VM/370, or any of these
operating systems running under VM/370 (OS/VS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors). The 3770 Communication Terminals use 2770 BSC programming support when operating in
BSC mode. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations. The customer may have to modify existing 2770 application programs for operation with non-programmable models of
the 3770. The customer will have to modify existing application
programs for operation with programmable models of the 3770.
BSC attachment can be made via a 3704/3705 Communications
Controller or a 2701 Data Adapter Unit attached to a channel of
any S/370 or 4300 Processor; or via an Integrated Communications Adapter on S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3, or 138; or
via a Communications Adapter feature on the 4331 Processor.
BSC attachment can be made via a 3704/3705 attached to a
channel of a S/360 mdl 30, 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75
and 195; via a 2701 attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 22,
25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 and 195; or via an
Integrated Communications Attachment on S/360 mdl 25.
Non-programmable Mod.1 and Programmabl. Mod.1 with Emulator Specify F.atur.
Dual 256-Byt. Buff.rs - transfer data between the input and
output devices. The buffers alternate in providing input and
output service to permit overlapped operation.
Buff.r Edit - allows corrections to be made on the contents of a
buffer during key entry jobs. A 256-byte diskette record, if the
diskette feature is present, can also be retrieved into the buffer
using Update Mode and be corrected using buffer edit functions.
Corrections can be made by character, by line or by entire buffer
(up to 256 bytes).
Ext.nd Buff.r -- combines the dual 256-byte buffers Into
single 512-byte buffer under operator control for keyboard
line or keyboard to diskette jobs. Buffer edit capability applies
the full 51 2 bytes. Buffer transfers to line or diskette are
256-byte Increments and cannot be overlapped.
a
to
to
in
Prlnt.r Format Controls - facilitate the formatting of printed
data. Vertical and horizontal control characters in data initiate
vertical or horizontal tabbing. Format controls for up to five jobs
can be entered from keyboard, or from diskette or card if either
one of these devices Is attached.
Compr.sslon/Expanslon - provides a means for improving the
efficiency of data transmission. For BSC, the compression option
can be invoked at the terminal for a job that reads nontransparent data from cards. A two byte sequence is substituted
for each occurrence of three or more consecutive blank card
columns (63 consecutive blanks is the upper limit). A second
two-byte sequence is appended if more than 64 consecutive
blank columns are read. The terminal monitors received nontransparent data that is destined for the printer or attached card
punch and automatically expands this two-byte sequence to the
correct number of blanks. A similar capability is provided when
using SDLC procedures.
Auto Int.rrupt - allows the terminal to automatically interrupt an
offline job for an online job initiated by the host CPU. The terminal stops the offline job, executes the online job for receiving
line data and automatically restarts the offline job without operator intervention.
A manual
switch
on the keyboard
enables/disables this mode of operation. See Operating Characteristics - Automatic Interrupt in 3770 System Components Manual, GA27-3097.
Input/Output Job Definitions - can be operator or terminal
defined. Up to five operator defined jobs can be read from
diskette or card reader to facilitate rapid job set-up when the
terminal is equipped with either of the special features, otherwise
they can be entered from the keyboard under control of a
prompting sequence and executed from temporary storage.
Printer format controls can be part of the job definition. An
appropriately configured 3775 will permit job designation as
follows:
Offline Jobs
Input
Output
Keyboard"
(1) Diskette
(1) Card Reader
(2) Keyboard &
Diskette
(2) Keyboard & Card
Reader
Console Printer, Diskette or Card Punch
Console Printer, Diskette or Card Punch
Console Printer, Diskette or Card Punch
Console Printer & either Diskette or
Card Punch
Console Printer & either Diskette or
Card Punch
Onlln. Batch Jobs
(1) Diskette or
Card Reader
(1) Line
Line
Console Printer, Diskette & Card Punch
Onlln. Interactive Jobs
Keyboard"
Line
Line
Console Printer
" One input and one output device per job. Output to console
printer is automatic when input is keyboard.
.
(1) One input device and one output device per job. Monitor print
is an additional option when diskette, card punch or line is the
output device.
(2) Record Format Feature (#6010) is required In addition to I/O
devices to allow multiple input and output devices for a job.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3775.2
Jul79
DP Machines
377$ Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
L.lmltatloJila: The input/output capabilities outlined under
"Highlights" are dependent on appropriate configurations of the
terminal, Keyboard and console printer are standard. For other
configurations refer to "Special features" below.
Programmable Model Without Emulator Specify Feature
Offline Operations -- are controlll'!d by a user written program.
The 3775 interprets the user written program after it is loaded to
program storage from diskette storage. The 3775 has 6K bytes
of program storage as standard. Additional 4K, 8K, 12K or 16K
bytl'!s of program storage arl'! available by special feature to a
maximum of 16K additional bytes of program.
A program can be selected and invoked by the operator, by a
prior program call, or by an auto execute command from the
host CPU. Valid data sources for offline operations are the
Operator 10 Reader, keyboard, diskette storage and card reader.
Valid data output devices are the console printer, diskette storage, card punch and display.
3775P system utilities provide additional capabilities for the
following operations:
Card reader to console printer, diskette or card punch.
Card print (Read Interpret).
Keyboard to card punch.
Create, copy, list diskette.
Data set support for bypass, create, delete, erase, rename and
write protect data set.
Data set update for create, read, write and dump data set.
COpy data set.
Program library support.
Set date.
Set Configuration.
Storage Considerations - storage is used for executing a 3770
application program that is loaded from diskette, for Communications Mode, for data buffers, and for execution of device-related
functions that are specified by the opening statement in the
application program. Storage may also be allocated for devices
and functions at power on time through options available in the
Terminal Configuration Utility. The amount of storage required
for devices or functions is:
3.0K bytes
Supervisor Control Code Resident
2.0K bytes
Programmable Communications - BSC
Programmable Communications - SDLC
7.0K bytes
Communications Mode
6.0K bytes
Basic (diskette & Console Printer I/O)
Additional Storage for Card I/O & 3784 Printer
Using BSC Communications
4.0Kbytes
Using SDLC Communications
5.75K bytes
Additional Storage Using SDLC
Multiple SYS. INTR Function
.75K bytes
Format Image Buffer (Power on Allocation only) 256 bytes
3501 Card Reader
1.75K bytes
2502 Card Reader
2.5K bytes
2.0K bytes
Display Feature
3.0K bytes
3521 Card Punch
Read-Next Buffers
(optional for diskette operation)
0.25K bytes
for each data
set to a max.
of 5.
The amount of storage required is also dependent
upon the following variables.
Size of 3770 application program
XK bytes
Working storage for tables, storage to storage
operations, buffers, etc., including 0.75K bytes
for basic three buffers
XK bytes
Online Communications Operation - terminals equipped with the
appropriate I/O and Communications features can operate as
follows:
Transmission is controlled by the Communications Mode function
or by a user written program using the Programmable Communications function. Communicate Mode provides for selection of
diskette data sets, card reader or keyboard (Logon) for input
data. Output data can be directed to a diskette dataset. card
punch or console printer. Support is provided for printer horizontal and vertical format control. The Programmable Communications capability allows for transmission of data with any I/O
device under control of a user written program.
Diskette Storage Device - with 99,840 bytes of storage is standard on a non-removable diskette. Characteristics of the nonremovable diskette are one read/write surface, 30 data tracks. 26
sectors per track. and 128 bytes per sector. Up to 390 256-byte
records or up to 780 1 28-byte records can be stored on the
norwemovable diskette.
Two additional diskette storage devices providing 242,944 bytes
of storage each on removable, reuseble diskettes are provided -by
special feature.
The diskettes can be used for storage of application programs and
for application data. The maximum number of user written data
sets that can reside on the non-removable diskette and on each
removable diskette is 18. A maximum of 7 data sets can be
opened for anyone program. A program library data set can
contain a maximum of 99 user written programs. Program identification can be numbered from 01 to 99. Programmable communication (SDLC) reduces the amount of storage for user data from
30 to 28 tracks.
CPU Interrupt - can automatically occur during offline programs
in order to receive an unsolicited CPU message. The message is
stored on diskette storage (or, under certain conditions, printed on
the console printer) and the offline program is automatically resumed. A manual switch enables/disables this mode of operation.
Address Stop Function - is provided to facilitate debugging of
3770 application programs at the terminal site. The status of
program resources at the stop-address can be outputted to printer
or display.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. Note: Available at time of manufacture only.
[3] Remote Power Off: #9501 ... specify this feature for capability
to power down terminal from the host CPU using a controlled
data sequence sent over communication facilities.
[4] Print Belt Character Set: Specify one. Available at time of
manufacture only. See Print Belt in M 10000 pages if more
than one print belt is required. #9491 for 64 Character Set
EBCDIC. #9492 for 94 Charactar Set EBCDIC, #9494 for 64
Character Set ASCII, or #9495 for 94 Character Set ASCII.
#9494 and #9495 require ASCII Feature (#1201).
[5] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
[6] Emulator: #9141 ... specify this feature to equip the terminal
with the non-programmable function in lieu of the standard
programmable function. Non-programmable notation on the
keyboard and operator panel is supplied by this feature. Field
Installation: Not recommended. It can be field removed to
change thl'! terminal from non-programmable to programmable
function.
[7] Alternate Address: #9011 ... for RECORD PURPOSES only ...
Order this optional feature to specify that diskettes containing
terminal control code engineering changes are to be mailed to
an alternate address
using a
Teleprocessing Control number. The alternate aadress selected is usually the central site location. Field installable. limitations: [1] For model P1 only ... [2] Not with Emulator (#9141)
... [3] Each EC control diskette has been manufactured for use
on the specific machine type/serial shown on the diskette
label. EC diskettes for the 3775 terminal are unconfigured
when they are mailed from IBM and have 23 tracks of storage
available for user data. After the diskette is configured on the
machine type/serial on which it is to be used, the amount of
storage for user data is as follows: 30 tracks - configured to
not use programmable communications SDLC ... 28 tracks configured to use programmable communications SDLC. For
additional information, see "Data Set Support" in the
Operator's Guide, GA27-3114.
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase MMMC
$470
$16,000
$116
$400
470
16,000
150
400
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 45%
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
PRICES:
3775
Mdl
1t
Pl
Model Changes: Field installable ... for Model 1 on an "As
Available" basis. Limitation: Model downgrade from model P1 to
model 1 is not permitted.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1 to Model P1 ••••••••.•••• $4,900
SPECIAL FEATURES
All special features can be field installed, except #1201, #3551
and #4660 for which field installation is not recommended.
Special features for 3775 model 1 are on an "As Available"
basis for field installation.
For Communication Capability -
t
No longer available.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
select one Communication
-------- - - ------------ - -----
M 3775.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
3775 Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470) ... one Communication Driver
(#1481 or 1482) '" one Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501, 5502,
5600, 5602 or 5610) or EIA Interface (#3701). #1462 is required in addition to #1460 or #1461 for multipoint operation
using BSC.
COMMUNICATION FEATURE ... one can be selected.
SDLC/SSC,SWITCH CONTROL (#1460). Provides communication procedure using SDLC or BSC under operator switch control. SDLC allows point-to-point or multipoint operation. BSC
operation is point-to-point without #1462, multipoint with
#1462. Maximum: One. limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1461 or #1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility
considerations.
SSC, POINT-TO-POINT (#1461). Provides for point-to-point BSC
operation over switched or non-switched facilities. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with # 1460 or # 1470.
See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
SDLC (#1470). Provides for switched and non-switched SDLC
procedures. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #1460 or #1461. For record purposes also identify the
primary CPU/Program Environment code. Specify one of the
following: #9977 for DOSIVS VTAM, #9988 for OS/VS1 VTAM,
#9989 for OS/VS2 VTAM, or #9993 for all other combinations
of operating systems and access methods
BSC MULTIPOINT (#1462). Required for BSC multipoint operation
over non-switched facilities.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#1460 or #1461. Limitation: See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC
compatibility considerations.
COMMUNICATION DRIVER ... one can be selected.
WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1481). Provides
communication driver without clocking.
Maximum:
One.
Prerequisite: Communication Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470).
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1482.
WITH 1200 BPS BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCKING (#1482).
Provides communication driver with 1200 bps clocking.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Feature (#1460,
1461 or 1470). Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1481.
EIA INTERFACE OR INTEGRATED MODEM ... one can be selected.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides a cable and interface meeting RS-232C characteristics for attachment of an IBM Modem or
non-IBM modem. Speeds up to 4800 bps for switched or nonswitched operation are permitted. This feature in combination
with #1481 can be used to attach to Modem Fan-out (#3901)
on an adjacent terminal, or on an IBM 3863, 3864,3872 or 3874
Modem. This feature in combination with #1482 can be used for
direct attachment to a 3704 or 3705 equipped with Local Attachment (#4716) for operation at 1200 bps synchronous.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481 or
1482). Limitation: Cannot be installed with any Integrated Modem feature.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides for point-to-point or multipoint operation over nonswitched communication facilities. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver with Clock (#1482). Limitation: Cannot
be installed with #3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, AUTO ANSWER
(#5501). Provides for point-to-point operation over switched
network facilities using manual originate/auto answer for establishing connection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (# 1482). The user must provide a Data Coupler type
CBS or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701,
or with another Integrated Modem.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, MANUAL ANSWER (#5502). Provides for point-to-point operation over
switched network facilities using manual originate/manual answer for establishing connection. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver (#1482). The user must provide a Data
Coupler type COT or equivalent. limitation: Cannot be installed
with #3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, POINT-TOPOINT (#5600). This self-clocked modem provides for point-topoint operation over non-swiched communication facilities. Operator controls provide for half-speed operation and for adjusting
receive equalization. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, MULTIPOINT (#5602). This self-clocked modem provides for multipoint
operation over non-switched communication facilities. Operator
controls provide for half-speed operation and for adjusting transmit and receive equalization. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED WITH AUTO
ANSWER #5610). This self-clocked modem provides for pointto-point operation over switched network facilities using manual
originate/auto answer for establishing connection Operator
controls provide for half-speed operation. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). The user must
provide a Data Coupler type CBS or equivalent. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #3701, or with another Integrated
Modem.
SUB-FEATURES FOR 2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEMS
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP (#7951). Provides the capability of attaching 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600 or 5602) to
the switched network facility as a back-up to the primary nonswitched facility. Operation over the switched network is in
manual originate/ manual answer mode to establish the connection. It can communicate at 2400/1200 bps with an IBM 3872
Modem equipped for operation over the public switched network
(#7941, 7951 or 7952) attached to a 3704, 3705, or ICA of
3115 or 3125. Note: To use this feature operator intervention at
the terminal is required. Operator intervention, program modification, or both may be required on the using system. This feature can be used with BTAM programs for DOS/VS, OS/VS1
and as /VS2 in certain configurations. Additional customer
program routines will be required in existing BT AM programming
to fully utilize the capabilities of this feature. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: 2400 BPS Integrated Modem, Non-Switched
(#5600 or 5602). The user must provide a Data Coupler type
COT or equivalent. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701.
MODEM FAN-OUT (#3901). Equips the 2400 BPS Integrated
Modem, Non-Switched, Multipoint (#5602) with the capability to
be shared by up to two other terminals in addition to the host.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: #5602. Limitation: This feature
can be used at a tributary station in a centralized multipoint
network. In this configuration, BSC multipoint programming
discipline or SDLC non-switched programming discipline will
provide the selection/control of the terminal without any additional involvement.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage features and with BSC features #1460, 1461 or 1462; or
with SDLC features #1460 or #1470. Orders for #1201 must
also specify one print belt, #9494 for 64 character ASCII or
#9495 for 94 character ASCII ... see "Specify." Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Not recommended. Limitation: The GETKB
programming statement cannot be used in programs that are to be
run on an ASCII machine.
Audible Alarm (#1390). Sounds an alarm to alert the operator of
conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DISPLAY (#3250). Provides a 480 character (12 lines of 40
characters each) information display under control of the 3770
application program. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Model P1.
Limitation: Not available for model 1. This feature cannot be
installed with Emulator (#9'141).
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401). Provides one keylock and two keys for
the desk-console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local key makers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two keylocks and four
identical keys for both desk-console cabinet doors. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 2nd (#4902). Limitation:
The keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local key
makers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
DUAL INDEPENDENT FORMS FEED (#3551). [3775 mdl P1 only]
Provides two independently indexed pin feed mechanism!! on the
console line printer with visability platen. They operate under
control of a 3775 application program. Different sizes of forms
can be handled in each paper feed. Refer to GA24-3488 for forms
design considerations. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Limitation: This feature cannot be installed with
Emulator (#9141).
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input, output,
or control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with this feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
KEYPAD, NUMERIC (#4660). Provides a keypad in adding machine arrangement to facilitate rapid entry of numeric only data.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Model P1. Field Installation: Not
recommended. Limitations: Not available for mdl 1 ... this feature
cannot be installed with Emulator (#9141).
DISKETTE STORAGE, 1ST (#4901). One device with a customer
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----
---------- ---===
':' =
M 3776.4'
Jul79
--
DP Machines
3775 Communication Terminal
(cont'd)
removable diskette is placed in the left cabinet. Additional diskettes are available from IBM ... see IRD Sales Manual. Characteristics of the diskette storage device are: one movable read/wrire
head; one read/write surface; 73 data tracks; 26 sectors per track
and 128 bytes per sector. Up to 949 256-byte records can be
stored on the diskette (one 256-byte data record is reserved for
job identification in a 3775 model 1). Each 256-byte record is
stored in two consecutive numbered sectors in interchange mode,
or in two non-consecutive sectors in 3770 mode. Diskette data is
code insensitive in SDLC mode, non-transparent only in BSC mode
(3775 model 1). An Update Switch on the 3775 model 1 provides
the operator with the capability of reading a 256-byte diskette
record into the terminal buffer where it can be printed, edited or
deleted. Maximum: One
DISKETTE STORAGE, 2ND (#4902). Provides a second diskette
storage device with the same characteristics as the first. It is
placed in the right desk cabinet which is also supplied by the
feature. The second diskette allows additional capabilities for:
Copy - data can be copied from diskette 1 to diskette 2 (single
data set or all active data sets.)
Concatenate (pool) - the ability to concatenate on a data set
basis.
Continue (3775 mdl 1) - allows a read or write operation to
automatically continue on diskette 2 if it has been placed in
ready condition. Continue is not allowed while keying data.
Record Update (3775 mdl 1) - allows a record to be read into
the buffer from diskette 1, updated from keyboard, and written
to the other diskette. Record Format Feature (#6010) is a
prerequisite for this update capability.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 1st (#4901).
Orders for Field Installation: Must specify color - #9081 for red,
#9082 for yellow, #9083 for blue, or #9085 for gray ... color
must be the same as that specified for the base machine.
OPERATOR ID READER (#54SO). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007" to 0.046" thick may be read.
With a BSC
non-programmable terminal, a read operation can be initiated
during a keyboard to line job only. Data read from the magnetic
stripe card cannot be printed. For programmable terminals the
Operator 10 Reader is under control of the 3770 application program. Maximum: One. Limitations: (1) The operator must position and slide the card through the reader-slot at a steady rate
between 6 and 40 inches per second for a read operation ... (2)
BSC programming for the 2770 does not support this feature.
RECORD FORMAT FEATURE (#6010). Provides an offline capability for constructing records using more than one input and
output device. Input can be keyboard and either diskette or an
attached card reader. Output can be console printer and either
diskette or an attached card punch. A record format specification
record stored on a diskette can be defined and changed by the
user to permit selection by field for merging or creating, in any
sequence within a transaction cycle. It also permits selecting
output by field. There may be multiple fields within a transaction
and multiple transaction cycles within a job. Provision is also
made with this feature for self-checking, decimal insertion, right
justify and fill, and numeric checking. A record format specification record can be loaded to diskette from the line, keyboard, or
card reader. This feature increases the size of "extend buffer"
from 612 to 2048 bytes. Maximum: One. Prerequisites: For
3776 mdl 1 - Diskette Storage 1st (#4901) ... For 3775 mdl Pl
Diskette Storage 1st (#4901) and Emulator (#9141).
Limitations: Extended buffer and update operation is not permitted for a record format job. A record format job cannot be interrupted by the CPU automatically, operator intervention is required.
This feature Is not compatible with terminal programmability and
must be removed from a 3775 mdl Pl whenever Emulator (#9141)
is removed.
STORAGE INCREMENT, 4K (#6800). Provides an additional 4096
bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Model Pl. Limitations: Not available for modell, or with features
:#:6801, 6802 or 6803. This feature cannot be Installed with
Emulator (#9141).
STORAGE INCREMENT, 8K (#6801). Provides an additional 8192
bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Model Pl. Limitations: Not available for modell, or with features
#6800, 6802 or 6803. This feature cannot be installed with
Emulator (#9,41).
STORAGE INCREMENT, 12K (#6802). Provides an additional
12,288 bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: O"e.
Prerequisite: Model Pl. Limitations: Not available for modell,
or with features #6800, 6801 or 6803. This feature cannot be
Installed with Emulator (#9141).
or with features #6800, 6801 or 6802. This feature cannot be
installed with Emulator (#9141).
3S01 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8050), To attach a 3502
Card Reader. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed
with 3782/2602 Card Reader Attachment (#8149).
3782/2S02 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8149). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 2 and a 2502 Card Reader mdl
Al or A2. The 2502 can be equipped with special features for
51/80 or 66/80 column cards and/or Optical Mark Read. A
companion OMR special feature is required on the 3782 mdl 2.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 3501 Card
Reader Attachment (#8050).
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#81SO). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3621 Card Punch. The
3621 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/ Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: (3775 mdl
1 only) If a 2502 or 3601 Card Reader is also attached (#8050 or
#8149), the Card Read/ Punch Check special feature on the
3621 is limited to the punch checking function only.
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
Special Feature Prices:
MRC 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
Communication Feature
$21
SDLC /BSC Swtch Cntl #1460 $25
$840· $5.SO
BSC,Pl-to-Pt
1461
15
13
520
3.00
1470
3.00
SDLC
13
11
440
BSC Multipoint
1462
11
1.00
13
440
Communication Driver
11
1481
13
440
2.00
w /0 Bus Mch Clkg
w 1200 BPS Clocking
1482
15
13
520
3.00
EIA Interface
3701
13
11
440
1.00
1200 BPS Integrated Modem
Non-Swltched
5500
19
16
4.00
668
Switched, Auto Answer
5S01
21
4.00
25
840
Switched, Mnl Answer
5502
19
16
4.00
668
2400 BPS Integrated Modem
5800
68
58
2,320
5.00
Non-$wltched, Pl-to-Pt
Non-SWitched, Multlpt
5602
74
63
5.00
2,520
Switched w Auto Ans
5810
74
63
2,520
6.00
Switched Ntwk Bkup
7951
11
9
380
.SO
Modem Fan-Out
3901
21
18
720
1.00
15
1201
ASCII Feature
18
600
.SO
Audible Alarm
1390
.SO
40
40SUC Display
32SO
80
94
3,200 34.SO
Door Keylock
3401
15
NC
15SUC Door Keylock, Dual
3402
30
NC
30SUC Dual Ind Fms Feed
3551
29
25
1,000 11.00
Keylock
46SO
35
NC
35SUC Keypad, Numeric
4660
12
10
400
2.00
DlskeHe Storage, 1st
4901
69
59
2,360 16,SO
4902
59
7.00
DlskeHe Storage, 2nd
69
2,360
Operator ID Reader
54SO
13
11
1.50
440
Record Format Feature
6010
25
21
840
4.SO
Storage Increment, 4K
6800
18
15
4.SO
351*
Storage Increment, 8K
6801
32
27
637* 6.50
Storage Increment, 12K
6802
45
38
910* 11.00
Storage Increment, 16K
49
1,170 13.00
6803
58
3S01 Cd Rdr Attach
.50
8050
13
11
440
3782/2S02 Cd Rdr Atch 8149
19
16
4.00
640
3782/3521 Cd Pch Atch 81 SO
19
16
640
3.SO
·Cuetomers who elect to purchase one of these features and
anticipate later ordering additional storage, should consider
purchase of the larger storage initially because a field upgrade requires replacement of the initial feature.
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature #
indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M
10000 for additional information and field installation.
Forms Stand (#4450) - permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
Print Belt, Additional (#5812, #5813, #5822, #5823) - permits
the customer to obtain more than one character set print belt
for various applications.
64-character ASCII (#5812)"
94-character ASCII (#5813)·'
64-character EBCDIC (#5822)
94-character EBCDIC (#5823)
•• ASCII Feature (#1201) is prerequisite.
STORAGE INCREMENT, 16K (#6803). Provides an additional
16,384 bytes of programmable storage. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Model Pl. Limitations: Not available for modell,
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -------=- =-- --=--':' =
M 3776.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3776 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Models 1 and 2
Purpose: The 3776 is a medium speed remote job entry terminal
and is a member of the 3770 Data Communication System. The
3776 mdl 1 and 2 are SNA Single Logical Unit and BSC terminals.
A keyboard is used for terminal control and may be used for
operator communication with the host CPU, The 3776 is not
designed as an interactive terminal. The printer contains an engraved character font belt (48, 64 or 94 character set) which can
be interchanged by the operator. Special features permit one or
two diskette storage devices and provide for the attachment of one
card reader and one card punch. One of three card readers can
be selected for operation at speeds of 50, 150 or 300 cards a
minute. The card punch operates at 50 cpm. A special feature
provides for paper insertion from either the front or rear of the
machine.
Communication features allow for operation over switched or
non-switched facilities at speeds up to 4800 bps using SDLC or
BSC transmission techniques and an appropriate modem.
Maximum Lines
Per Minute
Character
Set
Model 1
300
230
160
48
64
94
Model 2
400
300
230
48
64
94
Highlights:
Keyboard -- EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys (produces
88 characters). Underscore/Hyphen, Backspace, Space and
Character Advance keys have typamatic action. Associated with
the keyboard are indicator lights, function keys, operating mode
switches, and a 3-position numeric display.
Printer -- line printing is from characters engraved on a revolving
belt. Included as standard is one interchangeable print belt
(either 48, 64 or 94 character set) ... see " Specify" ... variable
width forms tractor for feeding continuous forms up to 15 inches
wide, paper jam detection, and 132 print positions. Character
spacing is 10 per inch, line spacing is 6 or 8 per inch. Maximum
print lines is 127 lines per page. Refer to GA24-3488 for forms
design considerations.
Buffers -- transfer data between the input and output devices and
the communication line. The buffers also transfer data between
input and output devices during offline operation. The buffers
alternate in providing input and output service to permit overlapped operation. Dual 256-byte or dual 512-byte buffers are used
for BSC or SDLC operation and are under operator control.
Printer Format Controls -- facilitate the formatting of printed
data. Vertical and horizontal control characters in data initiate
vertical or horizontal tabbing.
Compression/Expansion -- provides & means for improving the
efficiency of data transmission. For BSC, the compression option
can be invoked at the terminal for a job that reads nontransparent data from cards and diskette. A two-byte sequence is
substituted for each occurrence of three or more consecutive
blank bytes (63 consecutive blanks is the upper limit). A second
two-byte, sequence is appended if more than 63 consecutive
blank bytes are read. The terminal monitors received nontransparent data that is destined for the printer or attached card
punch and automatically expands this two-byte sequence to the
correct number of blanks. SDLC implementation provides a compression option that can be invoked at the terminal for a job that
reads data from cards or diskette. An identifying sequence is
substituted for each occurrence of l.vo or more consecutive
duplicate characters. The terminal automatically expands the
compression sequences to the correct number of blanks or duplicate characters for compressed transparent or non-transparent
data received.
Transmission Reversal -- permits keyboard initiation of interrupt
of host data transmission for terminal data transmission and for
resumption of the host transmission upon completion of the terminal transmission. The function is dependent upon associated host
programming.
Record Compress -- using two special feature diskette storage
devices permits offline compression of Basic Exchange diskette
records onto a single 3776 diskette for subsequent batch transmission. The compressed records are written on the 3776 diskette in 3770 mode. Record Compress using one diskette storage
device permits the compression of Basic Exchange diskette
records into blocks of 256 bytes or 512 bytes for transmission.
Dual Data Path - provides for concurrent operation of a line-to-
printer job and a card reader-to-diskette, or diskette-to-card
punch, or diskette-to-diskette job. The line-to-printer job uses
either the dual 256-byte or dual 512-byte alternating buffers to
accept data from the line and transfer it to the printer. A single
256-byte or single 512-byte buffer is used for data buffering
between card I/O and diskette or diskette and diskette. Throughput for both online and offline jobs is degraded when run concurrently using dual data path.
Automatic Card to Line Job -- when an online job is completed
and the 3776 goes into Standby Status, a reader-to-line job is
automatically started. The Start-Job procedure is not required
provided the terminal has a 2502 Card Reader and it is in ready
status.
Input/Output Form Definitions -- can be operator or terminal
defined. Up to five operator defined forms can be read from
diskette or card reader to facilitate rapid job set-up when the
terminal is equipped with either of the special features, otherwise
they can be entered from keyboard. Printer format controls can
be a part of the job definition. An appropriately configured 3776
will permit input/output job designation as follows:
Offline Jobs
Input
Output
(1) Diskette
(1) Card Reader
Printer, Diskette or Card Punch
Printer, Diskette or Card Punch
Online Batch Jobs
(1) Diskette or Card Reader
(1) Line
Line
Printer, Diskette or Card Punch
Dual Data Path Jobs
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
Line
Card Reader
Diskette
Diskette
Printer
Diskette
Card Punch
Diskette
(1) One input device and one output device per job.
(2) Line to printer occurs concurrently with card reader to
diskette or diskette to card punch or diskette to diskette.
Performance Considerations -- actual terminal device throughput
is dependent upon operational and systems programming characteristics. Factors such as the communication facilities, transmission block lengths, compression characteristics, characters
read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, etc., must all
be considered in determining actual throughput. See IBM 3770
Data Communication System, GA27-3097, for additional information.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to help provide greater availability to the
customer. This has been done through the use of problem identification routines and procedures that are easily understood and
used by the operator. See IBM 3776 Operating Procedures Guide,
GA27-3107.
Customer Responsibilities: It will be a customer's responsibility to
use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and fill out
the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to M
2700 pages.
Communications: See "Special Features." Transmission speeds
up to 4800 bps over switched or non-switched facilities are allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication
facility. Refer to 3770 Data Communication System in "Systems"
for a Communication Configurator. Refer to M 2700 pages for
information on customer responsibilities, communication facilities,
and other attachment information. Also refer to 3863, 3864, 3872
and 3874 in "Machines." The 2400 BPS Integrated Modem and
IBM 3872 Modem when appropriately configured can be intermixed on the same communication facility. The 4800 BPS integrated
Modem and IBM 3874 Modem when appropriately configured can
be intermixed on the same communication facility.
Supplies: For mdl 1 or 2, a black ribbon, Part No. 1136670, or
equivalent, is required. Alternate Part No, 1299160, or eqUivalent,
incorporates a twist in the ribbon which may improve ribbon life if
the major portion of printing is in the first 60 print positions.
Limitations:
The input/output capabilities outlined under
"Highlights" are dependent on appropriate configurations of the
terminal. Keyboard and printer are standard. For other configurations refer to "Special Features" below.
Prerequisites:
For SOLe Communications with 5/370 or 4300 Processor -- a
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating under Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any virtual
storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS,
OS/VS1 or OS/VS2; or these operating systems running under
VM/370 (OS/VS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ---------==---=--':" =
hi 3776.2
jut 79
DP Machines
3776 t:ommunlcatlon Terminal - Models 1 and 2 (cont'd)
For BSC Communications with S/360, S/370 or 4300
Processors -a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2; or under RSCS and
VM/370, or any of these operating systems running under
VM/370 (OS/VS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors).
The 3776 Communications Terminals use 2770/3780 BSC programming support when operating in BSC mode. Operation with
S/360. S/370 or 4300 Processors using 2770/3780 BSC programming is also permitted. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations. The customer may have to modify existing 2770/3780 application programs for operation with 3776.
BSC attachment can be via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller. or a 2701 Data Adapter Unit attached to a channel of any
S/370 or 4300 Processor; or via an Integrated Communications
Adapter on S/370 mdl 115. 125, 135. 135-3 or 138; or via a
Communications Adapter feature on the 4331 Processor. BSC
attachment can be l1}ade via a 3704/3705 attached to a channel
of a S/360 mdl 30, 40. 50, 65. 67 (in 65 mode), 75 or 195; via
a 2701 attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40,
44. 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 or 195; or via an Integrated
Communications Attachment on S/360 mdl 25.
Bibliography: GC20-0001.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. Note: Available at time of manufacture only.
[3] Remote Power Off: #9501 ... this specify feature can be used
to conserve energy used by the terminal by providing the capability for the host CPU application program to initiate power down at
the terminal by sending a controlled data sequence over communication facilities. The terminal must also be equipped with the
appropriate communication special features. This capability is in
addition to the standard power down switch which can be manually operated.
[4] Print Belt Character Set: Specify one for shipment with the
3776 (available at time of manufacture only). See Print Belts in
M 10000 pages for print belts available in addition to belt specified on order entry.
48 Character Set EBCDIC (HN Character Set)· •
48 Character Set EBCDIC (Standard Character
64.
94
48
64
94
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Model
Model
Model
Model
1
1
1
2
to
to
to
to
Model
Model
Model
Model
2
3
4
4
...
...
...
...
$ 3,000·
$11,000·
$14,000·
$11,000·
, Customer price quotations and' customer order acknowledement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation
of this model change involves removal' of parts which become
the property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
All special features can be field installed, except #1201 for which
field installation is not recommended.
For Communication Capability - select one Communication
Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470); a Communication Driver
(#1481); one Integrated Modem (#5600. 5602, 5610, 5700,
5702, 5710) or EIA Interface (#3701). #1462 is required in
addition to #1460 or #1461 for multipoint operation using BSC.
COMMUNICATION FEATURE ... one can be selected.
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 2-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
#9489#9490 Set)· •
#9491 #9492 #9493' #9494 -#9495 --
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
ASCII'
ASCII'
ASCII'
SDLC/BSC, SWITCH CONTROL (#1460). Provides communication procedure using SDLC or esc under operator switch control. SDLC allows point-to-point or multipoint operation. esc
operation is poi nt-to-poi nt without #1462, multipoint with
#1462. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1461 or #1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility
considerations.
BSC, POINT-TO-POINT (#1461). Provides for point-to-point BSC
operation over switched or non-switched facilities. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with $1460 or #1470.
See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
SDLC (#1470). Provides for switched and non-switched SDLC
procedures. For record purposes, also identify the primary
CPU/Program Environment code. Specify one of the following:
#9977 for DOS/VS VTAM, #9988 for OS/VS1 VTAM, #9989
for OS/VS2 VTAM, or #9993 for all other combinations of operating systems and access methods. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #1460 or #1461.
BSC MULTIPOINT (#1462). Required for BSC multipoint operation
over non-switched facilities. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#1460 or #1461. Limitation: See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC
compatibility considerations.
• ASCII Feature (#1201) is required.
COMMUNICATION DRIVER WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCKING (#1481). Provides communication driver without clocking. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Feature
(#1460, 1461 or 1470).
•• These belts are Identical except for the following special
character differences:
EIA INTERFACE OR INTEGRATED MODEM ... one can be selected.
#9489 has ) ( #9490 has % # @
Print belts are interchangeable by the operator. The internal
code structure adapts to the belt installed as follows:
Data Stream
Character
Printed
Character
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides an EIA RS-322C compatible
interface and a cable for attachment of an IBM or other modem.
Speeds up to 4800 bps for switched or non-switched operation
are permitted. This feature in combination with #1481 can be
used to attach to Modem Fan-out (#3901) on an adjacent terminal, or on an IBM 3863, 3864, 3872 or 3874 Modem. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation:
Cannot be installed with any Integrated Modem feature.
#9489 (HN) Specified
HN Belt Installed
HN Belt Installed
Standard Beltlnstalted
Standard Belt Installed
)(=
-
%#@
) ( =
) ( =
%#@
%#@
%#@
%#@
%#@
) (
#9490 (Standard) Specified
Standard Belt Installed
Standard Belt Installed
HN Belt Installed
HN Belt Installed
) (=
%#@
) (
) ( =
-
[5] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual-Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
PRICES:
3776
Mdl
1
2
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$588
676
$500
575
Purchase
MMMC
$20,000
23,000
$180
199
Plan Offering: Plan B
Per Call: 1
Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45%
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field installable.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, POINT-TOPOINT (#5600). This self-clocked modem provides for point-topoint operation over non-switched communication facilities. Operator controls provide for half-speed operation and for adjusting
receive equalization. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (# 1481 ). Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#3701, or with another Integrated Modem.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, MULTI~
POINT (#5602). This self-clocked modem provides for multipoint
operation over non-switched communication facilities. Operator
controls provide for half-speed operation and for adjusting transmit and receive equalization. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation: Cannot be installed
with #3701 or with another Integrated Modem.
2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED WITH AUTO
ANSWER (#5610). This self-clocked modem provides for pointto-point operation over switched network facilities using manual
originate/auto answer for establishing connection. Operator
controls provide for half-speed operation. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). The user must
provide a Data Coupler type CBS or equivalent. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #3701, or with another Integrated
Modem.
SUB-FEATURES FOR 2400 BPS INTEGRATED MODEMS
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP (#7951). Provides the capabil-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -----------------_.-
M 3776.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3776 Communication Terminal - Models 1 and 2 (cont'd)
ity of attaching 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600 or 5602) to
the switched netork facility as a back-up to the primary nonswitched facility. Operation over the switched network is in
manual originate/manual answer mooe to establish the connection. It can communicate at 2400/1200 bps with an IBM 3872
Modem equipped for operation over the public switched network
(#7941, 7951 or 7952) attached to a 3704, 3705 or ICA of a
3115 or 3125. Note: To use this feature, operator intervention
at the terminal is required. Operator intervention, program modification, or both, may be required at the using system. This
feature can b.e used with BTAM programs for DOS/VS, OS/VSl
and OS/VS2 in certain configurations. Additional customer
program routines will be required in existing BTAM programming
to fully utilize the capabilities of this feature. Maximum: One.
Prerequisites:: 2400 BPS Integrated Modem (#5600 or 5602).
The user must provide a Data Coupler type COT or equivalent.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701.
MODEM FAN-OUT (#3901). Equips the 2400 BPS Integrated
Modem, Non-Switched,Multipoint (#5602) with the capability to
be shared by up to two other terminals in addition to the host.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: #5602. limitation: This feature
can be used at a tributary station in a centralized multipoint
network. In this configuration, BSC multipoint programming
discipline or SDLC non-switched programming discipline will
provide the selection / control of the terminal without any additional user involvement.
4800 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, POINT-TOPOINT (#5700). This self-clocked modem provides for point-topoint operation over 4-wire non-switched communication facilities. This modem features automatic equalization and manual
half-speed select. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). limitation: Cannot be installed with
#3701), or with another Integrated Modem.
4800 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED, MULTIPOINT (#5702). This self-clocked modem provides for multipoint
operation over 4-wire non-switched communication facilities. This
modem features automatic equalization and manual half-speed
select. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver
(#1481). Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701, or with
another Integrated Modem.
4800 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED, WITH AUTO
ANSWER (#5710). This self-clocked modem provides for pointto-point operation over switched network facilities using manual
originate/auto answer for establishing connection. This modem
features automatic equalization and manual half=speed select.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481.
The user must provide a Data Coupler type CBS or equivalent.
limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701, or with another
Integrated Modem.
SUB-FEATURES FOR 4800 BPS MODEMS
SWITCHED NETWORK BACK-UP (#7952). Provides the capability of attaching 4800 BPS Integrated Modem (#5700 or 5702)
to the switched network facility as a back-up to the primary
non-switched facility. Operation over the switched network is in
manual originate/manual answer mode to establish the connection. It can communicate at 4800/2400 bps with an IBM 3874
Modem equipped for operation over the public switched network
(#7941, 7951 or 7952) attached to a 3704, 3705 or ICA of a
3115 or 3125. Note: To use this feature, operator intervention
at the terminal is required. Operator intervention, program modification, or both, may be required on the using system. Additional customer program routines will be required in existing programming to fully utilize the capabilities of this feature.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: 4800 BPS Integrated Modem
(#5700 or 5702). The user must provide a Data Coupler type
COT or equivalent. limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701.
MODEM FAN-OUT (#3902). Equips the 4800 BPS Integrated
Modem, Non-Switched, Multipoint (#5702) with the capability to
be shared by up to two other terminals in addition to the terminal
containing the integrated modem. Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#5702. limitation: This feature can be used at a tributary
station in a centralized multipoint network. In this configuration,
BSC multipoint programming discipline or SDLC non-switched
programming discipline will provide the selection/control of the
terminal without any additional user involvement.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
Keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage features (ASCII is written on the diskette) and with BSC
features #1460, 1461 or 1462 or with SDLC features #1460 or
1470. Orders for # 1201 must also specify one print belt, #9493
for 48 character ASCII, #9494 for 64 character ASCII, or #9495
for 94 character ASCII. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not
recommended.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm that alerts the operator of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401). Provides one keylock and two keys for
the desk-console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided for this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two keylocks and four
identical keys. for both desk-console cabinet doors. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 2nd (#4902). Limitation:
The keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
FRONT FEED (#3951). Enables the operator to insert paper forms
in the front or rear of the machine. A forms entry chute is provided under the keyboard for front loading. The paper supply is
placed on the floor either under the keyboard in the front of the
machine for front loading, or underneath the forms enclosure for
rear loading.
FORMS STAND ... integrated into the machine covers for the 3776
mdl 1 and 2.
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input, output or
control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with the feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 1ST (#4901). One device with a customer
removable diskette is placed in the left cabinet. Additior.lal diskettes are available from IBM
Characteristics of the diskette storage device are: one movable read /write
head; one read /write surface; 73 data tracks; 26 sectors per track
and 128 bytes per sector. Up to 949 256-byte records; or 474
512-byte records can be stored on the diskette (one 256-byte
data record is reserved for forms control information). Each 256byte record is stored in two consecutive numbered sectors in
interchange mode, or in two non-consecutive sectors in 3770
mode. Each 512-byte record is stored in four consecutive sectors
in interchange mode, or four non-consecutive sectors in 3770
mode. Diskette data is code insensitive in SDLC mode, nontransparent only in BSC mode. Maximum: One.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 2ND (#4902). Provides a second diskette
storage device with the same characteristics as the 1st. It is
placed in the right desk cabinet which is also supplied by this
feature. The second diskette allows additional capabilities for:
Copy -- data can be copied from diskette 1 to diskette 2 (single
data set or all active data sets - 3770 mode only).
Concatenate (pool) -- the ability to concatenate on a data set
basis.
Continue -- allows a read or write operation to automatically
continue to diskette 2, if it has been placed in ready condition.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 1st (#4901).
Orders for Field Installation: Must specify color -- #9081 for red,
#9082 for yellow, #9083 for blue, or #9085 for gray. Color must
be the same as that specified for the base machine.
OPERATOR 10 FEATURE (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read. With BSC, a read operation
can be initiated during a keyboard to line job only. Data read from
the magnetic stripe card cannot be printed. Maximum: One.
Limitations: [1] The operator must position and slide the card
through the reader-slot at a steady rate between 5 and 40 inches
per second for a read operation ... [2] BSC programming for 2770
and 3780 does not support this feature.
3501 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8050). To attach a 3501
Card Reader. Maximum: One. limitation: Cannot be installed
with 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment (#8149). If a 3521 is
also attached (#8150), the Card Read/ Punch Check special
feature on the 3521 is limited to the punch checking function only.
3782/2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8149). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 2 and a 2502 Card Reader mdl
AI or A2. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
3501 Card Reader Attachment (#8050). If a 3521 is also attached (#8150), the Card Read/Punch Check special feature on the
3521 is limited to the punch checking function only.
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card Punch. The
3521 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: If a 2502
or 3501 Card Reader is also attached (#8149 or 8050), the Card
Read/Punch Check special feature on the 35~1 is limited to the
punch checking function only.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- ----
- =- - =----=---':' =
M 3776.4
Jul79
DP Machines
3776 Communication Terminal - Models 1 and 2 (cont'd)
ETPI
MACI MLC
Special Feature Prices:
MRC 2 Yr Purchas\iI MMMC
Communication Feature
SDLC/BSC,Swtch Cntrl #1460
BSC, Pt-to-P!
1461
SDLC
1470
BSC Multipoint
1462
Communication Driver
w/o Bus Mche Clocking 1481
EIA Interface
3701
2400 BPS Integrated Modem
Non-Switched, Pt-t-pt
5600
Non-Switched, Multipt
5602
Switched w Auto Answr 5610
4800 BPS Integrated Modem
Non-Switched, Pt-to-Pt
5700
Non-Switched, Multipt
5702
Switched w Auto Answer 5710
Swtch Ntwk Backup
7951
Swtch Ntwk Backup
7952
Modem Fan-out
3901
Modem Fan-out
3902
ASCII Feature
1201
Audible Alarm
1390
Door Keylock
3401
Door Keylock, Dual
3402
Keylock
4650
Diskette Storage, 1st
4901
Diskette Storage, 2nd
4902
Operator 10 Reader
5450
Front Feed
3951
3501 Card Reader Attach 8050
3782/2502 Cd Rdr Attach 8149
3782/3521 Cd Pch Attach 8150
$25
15
13
13
$21
13
11
11
$840
520
440
440
$5.50
3.00
3.00
1.00
13
13
11
11
440
440
2.00
1.00
68
74
74
58
63
63
2,320
2,520
2,520
5.00
5.00
6.00
141
120
141
120
159
135
11
9
24
20
21
18
29
25
18
15
40SUC 15 SUC30SUC 35SUC 69
59
69
59
13
11
.12
10
13
11
19
16
19
16
3,600
3,600
4,050
360
600
720
750
600
40
15
30
35
2,360
2,360
440
400
440
640
45.50
45.50
48.00
.50
3.00
1.00
1.00
.50
.50
NC
NC
NC
16.50
7.00
1.50
NC
.50
4.00
3.50
640
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages, see M 10000
for additional information and field installation.
Print 8elt, Add'i (#5811, #5812, #5813, #5820, #5821,
#5822, #5823 -- Permits the customer to obtain more than one
character set print belt for various applications.
48-character
64-character
94-character
48-character
48-character
64-character
94-character
ASCII (#5811)'
ASCII (#5812)'
ASCII (#5813)'
EBCDIC [HN Character Set] (#5820)
EBCDIC (Standard Character Set) (#5821)
EBCDIC (#5822)
EBCDIC (#5823)
• ASCII Feature (#1201) is prerequisite.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- ------::.::::::::E";':
M 3776.5
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3776 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Models 3 and 4
Purpose: The 3776 is a medium speed remote job entry terminal
and is a member of the 3770 Data Communication System. The
3776 model 3 and 4 are SNA Multiple Logical Unit (MLU) terminals. A keyboard and a console display are used for terminal
control and for operator communication with the host CPU. Terminal operation may be controlled by the storage of operating procedures, terminal setups and local utility programs in termi~al storage for use by the terminal operator. The 3776 is not designed as
an interactive terminal. The printer contains an engraved character
font belt (48, 64 or 94 character set) which can be interchanged
by the operator. A special feature provide.s for pap~r insertion
from either the front or rear of the machine. Special features
permit one or two diskette. storage devices, 9[18. magnetic tape.
unit oii°!icarc{ reader and one card punch.. One of three card
readers can be selected for operation at speeds of 150, 300 or
400 cards per minute. The card punch operates at 50 cpm.
Maximum Lines
per Minute
Character
Set
Model 3
300
230
160
48
64
94
Model 4
400
300
230
48
64
94
Highlights:
Communications -- transmission speeds from 2400 bps to 9600
bps and at 19.2K bps are provided using the appropriate modems and communications facilities. Duplex -- simultaneous
inbound/outbound - data transmission is provided on nonswitched full duplex communication facilities only when communicating with an appropriately equipped 3705 Communications
Controller with the supporting ACF /NCP /VS level. May also be
locally attached in either a duplex or half duplex mode to a 3705
at 14.4K bps.
Keyboard -- EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys. The keyboard in conjunction with a standard console display, indicator
lights, function keys, operating mode switches and a 3-position
numeric display provides operator control. Host application commands, System Services Control Point (SSCP) commands and
local functions are entered from the keyboard. Data entered on
the keyboard is displayed. If a keying error is made, Character
Backspace and Character Advance may be used for editing.
Character Backspace and Advance are non-destructive. Character Advance is typamatic. Reset returns to the position from
which the Character Backspace began.
Console Display - contains 16 lines of 64 characters each for a
total of 1024 characters. The 3776 mdl 3 and 4 reserve the
bottom three lines of the display for operator keying, display of
system information and prompting for information required for the
execution of functions. The remaining 13 lines of the display are
used to display messages between the terminal and the host
application or the SSCP and to display information regarding
terminal operations such as host input.
Lower case alphabetics are converted to upper case before
displaying. When the cursor is beneath a character, any new
data keystroke will cause the new character to replace the old.
Overstrikes are not permitted.
Each message is displayed as it is received except as described
below. Each message is also written in terminal storage. At
power-on time, the operator is prompted to specify date and time.
As messages are received they are time-stamped prior to display
and storage. Messages longer than a display line will wrap
around to the next line with an indent to aid readability. The
display fills from top to bottom. Subsequent new message lines
replace the oldest message lines. The most recent message
received is identified by the Greater Than sign > in the first
position. The following line is blanked to assist the operator with
message identification.
Function keys on the keyboard allow the operator to control the
display function. The display can be held while incoming messages are sent to terminal storage and not displayed. If messages arrive during the 'hold' state, a message alert light notifies
the operator. The operator may subsequently display the desired
message group. A terminal utility program is available for listing
or copying the message contents of terminal storage for external
message retention and reference.
Printer - line printing is from characters engraved on a revolving
belt. Included as standard is one interchangeable print belt
(either 48, 64 or 94 character set) ... see "Specify." Also standard are a variable width forms tractor for feeding continuous
forms up to 15" wide ... paper jam detection ... and 132 print
positions. Character spacing is 10 per inch. line spacing is 6 or
8 lines per inch. Maximum print lines is 127 lines per page.
Refer to GA24-3844 for forms design considerations.
Terminal Storage -- is standard for message spooling, terminal
control, utility programs and user generated procedures.
Diskette Storage -- there are two diskette storage devices available as special features. While the devices are physically identical to those on the 3776 mdl 1 and 2. additional operational
facilities such as data set concatenation enhance the use of the
special feature diskette storage devices. Also, each special
feature diskette storage device may be assigned individually to an
independent host SNA session or used locally for input or output.
Diskette operation is concurrent with other terminal functions.
Magnetic Tape -- may be used as either an input or as an output
device. One 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1 attachment is available as a special feature. The 3411 mdl 1 provides
9-track tape with recording densities of 1600 bpi Phase Encoded
or 800 bpi NRZI. 7-track tape operation is not provided. The
3411 mdl 1 may be assigned to an independent host SNA session or used locally for input and output. Labeled and unlabeled
tapes are supported. Records are fixed or variable length and
may be unblocked or blocked to a maximum block size of 4000
bytes. Maximum record size is 255 bytes. A block size of up to
2000 bytes automatically provides dual buffering. Magnetic tape
operation is concurrent with other terminal functions. Refer to
G232-0004 for detailed information on operation of the 3411 mdl
1. Feature #7003 is required on the 3411 mdl 1.
Buffers -- transfer data between the input and output devices and
the communication line. SDLC communications uses a customer
defined Request/Response Unit (RU) of up to 512 bytes. The
actual transmission is dependent on session pacing values, data
length, buffer availability and data availability. Buffers also transfer data between input and output devices during local operation.
Printer Format Controls -- facilitate the formatting of printed
data. Vertical control characters in data initiate vertical tabbing.
Carriage control definition provides for specification of a variable
number of line numbers per carriage stop with a maximum of 60
lines per carriage control definition. Carriage control definition
may be defined at the terminal or may be sent dynamically by the
host application. Extended Forms Definition is standard and uses
terminal storage.
Compression/Expansion -- implementatiQn provides a compression option at the terminal for a job that reads data from cards,
magnetic tape, or diskette to the line. An identifying sequence is
substituted for each occurrence of two or more consecutive
duplicate characters. Trailing blank truncation is standard. The
terminal automatically expands the compression sequence to the
correct number of blanks or duplicate characters for compressed
transparent or non-transparent data received.
Decompaction -- provides the decompaction function associated
with the receipt of a compacted data stream whereby a pair of
consecutive alphameric characters is represented by a single
transmission byte. Function depends upon transmission by the
host of a decompaction table corresponding to· the compaction
table used by host programming in creating the compacted job
data stream. Decompaction occurs for data directed to the printer, card punch, magnetic tape and diskette (except 3770 fo~mat).
Compaction by the terminal of data inbound to the host IS not
provided.
Automatic Card Reading - capability is under control of the
operator. The "hot reader" function may be enabled/disabled at
any appropriate operational time.
Job Control -- initiated by the operator, pertains to online jobs
with the host and local utility jobs run concurrently with the
online jobs. Online job submission may be initiated at any time
there is an SNA session available for data transmission. The
terminal may have up to six concurrent sessions that are controlled by the operator. Online job input may consist of card,
diskette or magnetic tape data. Data from different devices or
data sets may be concatenated into a single input data stream as
one job execution. Online job output may consist of printer, card,
diskette or magnetic tape data.
Local utility jobs may be defined by the operator and stored in
terminal storage to provide the following functions:
Input
Output
Card
Magnetic Tape
Diskette
Printer, Magnetic Tape, Diskette. Card Punch
Printer, Diskette, Card Punch
Printer, Magnetic Tape, Diskette, Card Punch
Record Formats - consist of card image, print image and 3770
format. Card image and print image, in addition to being applicable to card reader, card punch, printer and magnetic tape datasets, are also applicable to diskette as a function of Basic Exchange datasets (128 byte maximum).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - - ------- - - --===
':' =
M 3776.6
Jul 79
DP Machines
3776 Communication Terminal - Models 3 and 4 (conI' d)
Basic Exchange diskettes may be read by the terminal. Basic
Exchange diskettes may also be written by the terminal, thereby
creating a diskette for further Basic Exchange mode processing.
3770 Format is applicable to diskette data recording which is to
be subsequently printed or punched. 3770 format recording
results in more efficient diskette utilization than does card or
print image. Basic Exchange (card or print image) or 3770 Format is a user specification in job control.
Input record size from both magnetic tape and diskette may be
limited to 80 or 128 bytes, because of host programming considerations. In addition, the ability to concatenate multiple data sets,
with different record lengths, into a single input job stream requires host programming support of a CDS-FM Header type 1
(Continue Destination Select).
Remote Power Off -- see #9501 under "Specify" below.
1136670, or equivalent, is required. Alternate Part No. 1299160,
or eqUivalent, incorporates a twist in the ribbon which may improve ribbon life if the major portion of printing is in the first 60
print positions
Limitations:
The input/output capabilities outlined
under
"Highlights" are dependent upon appropriate configurations of the
terminal. Keyboard, console display, terminal storage and printer
are standard. One communications feature (#3701, 4501, 5650
or 5651) is required. For other configurations, refer to "Special
Features" below. The duplex data communications capability of
the 3776 mdl 3 or 4 is operational on non-switched full duplex
communications facilities only.
Communications Adapter: An integrated communications adapter
without business machine clocking is standard ... provides SDLC
communications over switched or non-switched facilities.
Encrypt/Decrypt Feature -- see #3680 under "Special Features," Available to provide secure data transmission in conjunction with ACF VTAM Encrypt/Decrypt Feature (Program Number
5735-RC2) (Feature Number 6010) llnd Programmed Cryptographic Facility Program Product (Program Number 5740-XY5),
Prerequisites for SDLC Communications with S/370 or 4300
Processors: A 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating
under Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any
virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under VS1,
MVS or DOS/VS using RES, JES2, JES 3, POWER/VS or VTAM.
Note: MVS and JES3 are not supported on 4300 Processors.
Performance Considerations -- the line-to-printer performance of
the 3776 mdl 3 is up to 300 Ipm with a 48-character set print
belt. The line-to-printer performance of the 3776 mdl 4 is up to
400 Ipm with a 48-character set print belt.
An appropriately featured 3705 operating under the appropriate
level of Network Control Program (ACF /NCP /VS) is required for
duplex data stream operation.
The 3776 mdl 3 and 4 MLU terminals will operate, however, with
concurrent input-output processing in either a half-duplex or
duplex communications mode as a function of the base Multiple
Logical Unit capability. The card reader, punch, diskette storage
devices, magnetic tape unit and display console may have a
degrading effect on printer performance during concurrent operations, The degree of degradation which may occur will tend to be
greater when half-duplex communications are employed as opposed to duplex communications and system facilities in support
of the concurrent inbound-outbound data stream capability of the
terminal.
Actual terminal device throughput is dependent upon operational
and systems programming characteristics. Factors such as the
communication facilities, transmission block lengths, compression
characteristics, characters read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, SNA pacing, cryptographic processing, etc.,
must all be considered in determining actual throughput.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (115 V AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking
plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. See 3411 mdl 1 for magnetic tape unit voltage requirements.
•
Remote Power Off: #9501 ... this specify feature can be used
to conserve energy used by the terminal by providing the capability for the host CPU application program to initiate power
down at the terminal by sending a controlled data sequence
over communication facilities. The terminal must also be equipped with the appropriate communication special features. This
capability is in addition to the standard power down switch
which can be manually operated.
•
Print Belt Character Set: Specify one. Available at time of
manufacture only... specify for print belt to be shipped with
machine. See Print Belts in M 10000 pages for print belts
available in addition to belt specified on order entry. Print belts
are interchangeable by the operator.
In general, duplex data communications operation will tend to
provide
greater
terminal
throughput
under
concurrent
input/output functions than a half-duplex communications mode.
The 3776 mdl 3 or 4 operating duplex at 19.2K bps on a terrestrial link may, however, present a variance of from greater to
degraded overall terminal throughput when compared to comparable operation in a half-duplex mode.
#9489 - 48 Character Set EBCDIC (HN Character Set) •
#9490 - 48 Character Set EBCDIC (Standard Character Set)
.
#9491
#9492
#9493
#9494
#9495
Problem Determination Procedures: Function has been designed
into this unit to help provide availability to the customer. See IBM
3770 Multiple Logical Unit Operator's Guide for 3776-3, 3776-4,
3777-3, GA27-3125.
For 19.2 Kbps, the 3776 mdl 3 or 4 may use either the EIA Interface or the High Speed Digital Interface special feature to communicate through an appropriate' modem and communication facility
with a 3704/3705 Communications Controller equipped with a
Line Set Type 1 G (#4717) at the central processing unit. This
type of communication requires modems which are line c,ompatible
(suitable for inter-connection) and which provide optional EIA
RS232C or High Speed Digital Interface DTE interfaces. Also
attaches via the Communications Adapter feature on a 4331 Processor .. , see 4331 for details.
IBM Modems: The following IBM modems can be used: 3863 (2400
bps), 3864 (4800 bps) or 3865 (9600 bps). Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on the 3863 mdl I, 3864 mdl 1 or 3865 mdl 1 or
2. For communications capability, product utilization and features, see
3863, 3864, 3865 and M 2700 pages.
Supplies:
For a 3776 mdl 3 or 4, a black ribbon, Part No.
64
94
48
64
94
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
ASCII
ASCII ••
ASCII ••
• These belts are identical except for the following special character differences:
Customer Responsibilities: It will be a customer's responsibility to
use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and to fill
out the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to
the M '2700 pages.
Communications: See "Special Features." Transmission speeds
from 2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2 Kbps. Point-to-point and
multipoint transmission capability over switched or non-switched
facilities is allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication facility. Speeds above 4800 bps are on non-switched
facilities. Direct local attachment to 3705-11 at 14.4K. bps.
EBCDIC is the standard transmission code. ASCII is available as a
special feature. Refer to M 2700 pages for information on customer responsibilities, communication facilities and other attachment
information.
----
#9489 has) ( =
#9490 has % # @
•• ASCI Feature (#1201) is required.
•
Cables '" fixed length cables except for the 3411 Magnetic
Tape Unit and Control are provided as standard. See
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006. 3411
cables must be ordered separately.
•
EIA RS232C 19.2 Kbps Line Speed: #9481 ... provides support of 19.2 Kbps. Used for record purposes.
•
Alternate Address: #9011 ._.
Order
this optional feature to specify that diskettes containing terminal control code updates are to be mailed to an alternate address
using a Teleprocessing
Control number (TPC). The alternate address selected is usually the central site location.
•
Color: Blue is supplied as standard except for field model
conversions where installed color groups will be matched (do
not specify).
PRICES:
3776
Mdl
3
4
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
$881
969
$750
825
Purchase
MMMC
$30,000
33,000
$265
281
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 45%
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5
Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field installable.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=
---- =---- --=--':" =
DP Machines
3776 Communication Terminal - Models 3 and 4 (cont'd)
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1
Modell
Model 2
Model 3
to
to
to
to
Model
Model
Model
Model
3
4
4
4
...
...
...
•..
$ 11,000'
$ 14,000'
$ 11,000'
$ 3,000'
• Customer price Quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state:
"Installation of this model change involves removal of parts
which become the property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
All special features can be field installed, except #1201 for which
field installation is not recommended.
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage features (ASCII is written on the diskette). Orders for
# 1201 must also specify one print belt, #9493 for 48 character
ASCII, #9494 for 64 character ASCII, or #9495 for 94 character
ASCII. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm that alerts the operator of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401). Provides one key lock and two keys for
the desk-console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided for this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two keylocks and four
identical keys for both desk-console cabinet doors. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 2nd (#4902). Limitation:
The keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
ENCRYPT /DECRYPT (#3680). Provides cryptographic data transmission in conjunction with program support in the host. Includes
a security keylock. Each machine will have its own unique key.
Two identical keys are supplied with the feature. Maximum: One.
Note: A mercury battery, IBM Part No. 1743456 or equivalent, is
required. A battery is shipped with this feature. See M 10000
pages for additional or replacement batteries. Replacement of the
discharged battery is the customer's responsibility.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides an EIA RS 232C compatible
interface and a cable for attachment to a modem. Speeds from
2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2 Kbps are permitted.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with DDS Adapter, Point-to-Point (#5650), DDS Adapter, Multipoint (#5651),
High Speed Digital Interface (#4501) or V35 Interface (#4720).
Prerequisite: For 19.2 Kbps operation, #9841 is required ". see
item [6] under "Specify."
FRONT FEED (#3951). Enables the operator to insert paper forms
in the front or rear of the machine. A forms entry chute is provided under the keyboard for front loading. The paper supply is
placed on the floor either under the keyboard in the front of the
machine for front loading, or underneath the forms enclosure for
rear loading.
FORMS STAND ". integrated into the machine covers for the 3776
mdl 3 and 4.
HIGH SPEED DIGITAL INTERFACE (#4501). Provides an interface and a cable for attachment to a modem which permits pointto-point and multipoint synchronous operation at 19.2 Kbps on a
Type 5703 or 8803 wideband channel.
Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701), DDS
Adapter, Point-to-point (#5650), DDS Adapter, Multipoint (#5651)
or V35 Interface (# 4720).
M 3776.7
Jul 79
Concatenate (pool) -- the ability to concatenate on a data set
basis.
Multivolume -- allows a read or write operation to automatically
continue to diskette 2 if it has been placed in ready condition,
or it may continue on the current drive.
Maximum: One.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 2ND (#4902). Provides a second diskette
storage device with the same characteristics as the first. It is
placed in the right desk cabinet which is also supplied by this
feature. The second diskette allows additional capabilities for:
Copy -- data can be copied from diskette 1 to diskette 2.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 1 st (#4901).
OPERATOR 10 FEATURE (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read. Data read from the magnetic
stripe card cannot be printed or displayed. Maximum: One.
Limitations: The operator must position and slide the card
through the reader-slot at a steady rate between 5 and 40 inches
per second for a read operation.
DDS ADAPTER (DDSA) (#5650 - For Point-to-Point Operation ...
#5651 - For Multipoint Operation). Provides an adapter for SDLC
data transmission at speeds of 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps over the
AT&T non-switched Dataphone' Digital Service network. The
DDSA interfaces to a DDS channel service unit, the customer site
termination of the DDS network. Specify: #9822 for 2400 bps,
#9823 for 4800 bps, or #9825 for 9600 bps. Maximum: One,
#5650 or #5651. Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701), High Speed Digital Interface (#4501) or V35 Interface (#4720).
3411 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL MOL 1 ATTACHMENT (#7801). To attach one 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and
Control mdl 1. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: "eature #7003 on
the 3411 mdl 1.
3782/2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8149). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 2 and a 2502 Card Reader mdl
A 1, A2 or A3. Maximum: One. Limitation: Optical Mark Read on
the 2502 is not supported.
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card Punch. The
3521 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: The Card
Read/Punch Check special feature on the 3521 is limited to the
punch checking function only.
Special Feature Prices:
ASCII Feature
#1201
Audible Alarm
1390
Door Keylock
3401
Door Keylock, Dual
3402
Encrypt/Decrypt
3680
EIA Interface
3701
Front Feed
3951
HI Spd Digital Intfce
4501
Keylock
4650
V35 Interface
4720
Diskette Storage, 1 st
4901
Diskette Storage, 2nd
4902
Operator 10 Reader
5450
DDS Adapter, Pt-to-Pt
5650
DDS Adapter, Multlpt
5651
3411 Mdl 1 Attachment
7801
3782/2502 Cd Rdr Attach 8149
3782/3521 Cd Pch Attach 8150
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to keyboard control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own unique
key. Two identical keys are supplied with the feature. Refer to M
10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys.
Maximum: One.
V35 INTERFACE (#4720). Required for direct High Speed Local
Attachment to a 3705-11 at 14.4Kbps with a maximum cable distance of 170 feet. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701,
#4501, #5650 or #5651. Field Installation: Yes.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 1ST (#4901). One device with a customer
removeable diskette is placed in the left cabinet. Additional diskettes are available from IBM
Characteristics of the diskette storage device are: one moveable read/write
head, one read/write surface, 73 data tracks, 26 sectors per track
and 128 bytes per sector. Up to 1898 128-byte records. Data
may be stored in either a Basic Exchange dataset, or in a 3770
format dataset. Diskette capabilities allow for:
II<
Registered Trademark. of AT&T.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MRC
MLC
2 Yr
$18
$15
40SUC 15SUC 30SUC 47
40
13
11
10
12
41
35
35 SUC15
13
69
59
69
59
13
11
24
20
24
20
118
100
19
16
19
16
Purchase MMMC
$600
40
15
30
1,600
440
400
1,400
35
510
2,360
2,360
440
840
840
4,000
640
640
$.50
.50
NC
NC
2.00
1.00
NC
1.00
NC
2.00
16.50
7.00
1,50
2.00
2.00
14.00
4.00
3.50
-----------------== =':' =
M 3776.8
Jul79
DP Machines
3776 Communication Terminal - Models 3 and 4 (cont'd)
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature No. or
Part No. indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages ...
see M 10000 pages for additional information and field installation.
Print Belt, Add'i (#5811, #5812, #5813, #5820, #5821,
#5822, #5823) - permits the customer to obtain more than
one character set print belt for various applications.
48-character
64-character
94-character
48-character
48-character
64-character
94-character
ASCII (# 5811)' ,
ASCII (#5812)"
ASCII (#5813)' ,
EBCDIC [HN Character Set] (#5820)
EBCDIC (Standard Character Set) (#5821)
EBCDIC (#5822)
EBCDIC (#5823)
.. ASCII Feature (#1201) is prerequisite.
Mercury Battery (Part No. 1743456). Provides power to sustain
the master key of the Encypt/Decrypt feature (#3680) when
normal power is not present. This accessory is a 4 volt nonrechargeable mercury battery. This battery has a shelf life of 1
year under normal conditions, and can be expected to provide
3.5 years of normal operation. Note: Discharged battery should
be returned to IBM.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ------- - - --== = ':'
=
M 3777.1
Jul79
DP Machines
3777 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Model 1
Purpose: The 3777 mdl 1 is a high speed remote job entry terminal and is a member of the 3770 Data Communication System. A
keyboard is used for terminal control and may be used for operator communication with the host CPU. A printer is used for output.
The 3777 mdl 1 is'not designed as an interactive terminal. The
printer Is not integrated into the 3777 mdl 1 but is a stand-alone
3203 Printer mdl 3 which is cable attached to the 3777 mdl 1.
The 3203 mdl 3 uses the 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge
which can be interchanged by the operator. Special features
permit one or two diskette storage devices and provide for attachment of one card reader. One of three card readers can be selected for operation at 150, 300 or 400 cards per minute. A
minimum configuration includes a 3777 Communication Terminal
mdl 1 and a 3203 Printer mdl 3.
Communication features permit operation at speeds from 2400 bps
to 9600 bps and at 19.2K bps using BSC or SDLC transmission
techniques and an appropriate modem. Direct local attachment to
a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps via appropriate features.
Maximum Lines Per Minute
Std 3203 mdl 3
1000
870
Featured 3203 mdl 3 Character Set
1200
1020
48AN, HN
60 PN
See "Type Catalog" for additional character sets and speeds ...
see 3203 for 1200 LPM Speed Enhancement feature information.
Highlights:
Keyboard -- EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys (produces
88 characters). Underscore/Hyphen, Backspace, Space and
Character Advance keys have typamatic action. Associated with
the keyboard are indicator lights, function keys, operating mode
switches, and a 3-position numeric display.
Printer - a stand-alone 3203 Printer mdl 3 cable attached to the
3777. 3203 mdl 3 uses the 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge. The 3771 mdl 1 supports fifteen Print Train Arrangements (AN, HN, OAA, ODA, ONA, OAB, GN, PCS-AN, PCS-HN,
PN, ONC, ON, RN, SN, TN) as standard. When a substitute
character is ordered to displace a character in one of the standard arrangements, the substituted character assumes the card
and bit codes of the character it replaces. See "Type Catalog."
If the International Print Support specify feature (#9351) is
installed, the 3777 mdl 1 will support Print Train Arrangements
corresponding to the 48, 64 and 94-character EBCDIC sets
available for print belts for the 3776 Communication Terminal.
Support is also provided for the ON, HN, AN, PN, RN and PCSHN arrangements. The 3203 mdl 3 permits feeding continuous
forms up to 20 inches wide and 132 print pOSitions. Character
spaCing is 10 per inch, line spacing is 6 or 8 per inch under
operator control. Maximum print lines is 127 per page when
attached to the 3777 mdl 1. Refer to the M 3203 writeup for
further description of the 3203 mdl 3. Refer to "Type Catalog"
for further description of the 1416 print train arrangements supported and for print speeds. Refer to GA24-3488 for forms
design considerations.
Buffers - transfer data between the input and output devices
and the communication line. The buffers also transfer data between input and output devices during offline operation. The
buffers alternate in providing input and output services to permit
overlapped operation. Dual 256-byte or dual 512-byte bl'ffers
are used for BSC or SDLC operation and are under cr.' ~tor
control.
Printer Format Controls - facilitate the formatting of printed
data. Vertical and horizontal control characters in data initiate
vertical or horizontal tabbing.
Compression/Expansion - provides a means for improving the
efficiency of data transmission. For BSC, the compression option
can be invoked at the terminal for a job that reads nontransparent data from card and diskette. A two-byte sequence is
substituted for each occurence of three or more consecutive
blank bytes (63 consecutive blanks is the upper limit). A second
two-byte sequence is appended if more than 63 consecutive
blanks are read. The terminal monitors received non-transparent
data that is destined for the printer and automatically expands
the two-byte sequence to the correct number of blanks.
SNA/SDLC implementation provides a compression option that
can be invoked at the terminal for a job that reads data from
cards or .diskette. An identifying sequence is substituted for
each occurrence of two or more consecutive duplicate characters. The terminal automatically expands the compression sequence to the correct number of blanks or duplicate characters
for compressed transparent or non-transparent data received.
Decompactlon - provides the decompaction function associated
with the receipt of a compacted data stream whereby a pair ot
consecutive alphameric characters is represented by a single
transmission byte. Function is dependent upon transmission
receipt, and subsequent 3777 mdl 1 storage, of a decompaction
table corresponding to the compaction table used by host programming in creating the compacted data stream. Decompaction
function is available only under SDLC operation. Decompaction
occurs only for data directed to the printer. Compaction by the
3777 mdl 1 of data inbound to the host is not provided.
Transmission Reversal - permits keyboard initiation of interrupt
of host data transmission for terminal data transmission and for
resumption of the host transmission upon completion of the
terminal transmission. The function is dependent upon associated host programming.
Record Compre88 -- using two special feature diskette storage
devices permits offline compress of Basic Exchange diskette
records onto a single 3777 mdl 1 diskette for subsequent batch
transmission. The compressed records are written on the 3777
mdl 1 diskette in 3770 mode. Record Compress using one
diskette storage device permits the compression of basic exchange diskette records into blocks of up to 256 bytes or 512
bytes for transmission.
Dual Data Path -- provides for concurrent operation of a line-toprinter primary job and a card reader-to-diskette ordiskette-todiskette secondary job. The line-to-printer job uses either the
256-byte or dual 512-byte alternating buffers to accept data from
the line for printing. A single 256-byte or single 512-byte buffer
is used for data buffering between card and diskette or diskette
and diskette. The primary line-to-printer job will not normally
degrade during dual data path operation. The secondary job will
degrade during periods of concurrent operation.
Automatic Card-to-Llne Job -- when an online job is completed
and the 3777 goes into Standby Status, a reader-to-line job is
automatically started. The Start-Job procedure is not required
provided the terminal has a 2502 Card Reader and it is in Ready
Status.
Remote Power Off -- this feature can be used to conserve energy used by the terminal by providing the capability for the host
CPU application program to initiate power down at the terminal
by sending a controlled data sequence over communication
facilities. The terminal must also be equipped with the appropriate communication special features. This capability is in addition
to the standard power down switch which can be manually operated.
Input/Output Form Definitions -- can be operator or terminal
defined. Up to five operator defined forms can be read from
diskette or card reader to facilitate rapid job set-up when the
terminal is equipped with either of the spacial features, otherwise
they can be entered from keyboard. Printer format controls can
be part of the job definition. An appropriately configured 3777
mdl 1 will permit input/output job designation as follows:
Offline Jobs
Input
Output
(1) Diskette
(1) Card Reader
Printer or Diskette
Printer or Diskette
Online Batch Jobs
(1) Diskette or Card Reader
(1) Line
Line
Printer or Diskette
Dual Data Path Jobs
(2) Line
(2) Card Reader
(2) Diskette
Printer
Diskette
Diskette
(1) One input device and one output device per job.
(2) Line to printer occurs concurrently with card reader
to diskette or diskette to diskette.
Performance ConSiderations -- actual terminal device throughput
is dependent upon operational and systems programming charactersitics. Factors such as the communication facilities, transmission block lengths, compression characteristics, characters
read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, etc., must all
be considered in determining actual throughput. See IBM 3770
Data Communication System, GA27-309, for additional information.
Problem Determination Procedures: Significant function has been
designed into this unit to help provide greater availability to the
customer. This has been done through the use of problem identification routines and procedures that are easily understood and
used by the operator. See IBM 3777-1 Operating Procedures
Guide, GA27-3124.
Customer Responsibilities: It will be a customer's responsibility to
use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and fill out
the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to M
2700 pages.
Communications: See "Special Features." Transmission speeds
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------------- --- -- --===':'=
M 3777.2
Jul79
DPMachines
3777 Communication Terminal Model 1 (cont'd)
of up to 9600 bps and at 19.2K bps are allowed by selecting the
appropriate modem and communication facility. Direct local attachment to a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps. Speeds above 4800 bps are on
non-switched facilities. Refer to 3770 Data Communication System
in "Systems" for a Communication Configurator. Refer to M 2700
pages for information on customer responsibilities, communication
facilities, and other attachment information.
For 19.2 Kbps, the 3777 mdl 1 may use either the EIA or the High
Speed Digital Interface to communicate through an appropriate
modem and communication facility with a 3704/3705 Communications Controller equipped with a Line Set 1G (#4717) at the central processing unit. This type of communication requires modems
which are line compatible (suitable for interconnection) and which
provide optional EIA or RS 232C or High Speed Digital Interface
DTE interfaces. Also attaches via a Communications Adapter
feature on the 4331 Processor ... see M 4331 pages for details.
IBM Modems: The following IBM Modems can be used: 3863 (2400
bps), 3864 (4800 bps) or 3865 (9600 bps). Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on the 3863 mdl 1, 3864 mdl 1 and 3865 mdls 1
and 2. For communications capability, product utilization, and features,
see 3863, 3864, 3865 and M 2700 pages.
Supplies:
3203 mdl 3 ribbons
For SDLC Communications with S/370 or 4300 Processor -- a
3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating under Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any virtual
storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS,
OS/VSl or OS/VS2; or these operating systems running under
VM/370. Note: OS/VS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors.
For BSC Communications with S/360, S/370 or 4300
Processor - a virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor operating under DOS/VS, OS/VSl or OS/VS2; or under RSCS and
VM/370, or any of these operating systems running under
VM/370. Note: OS/VS2 is not supported by the 4300 Processors. The 3777 mdl 1 Communication Terminals use
2770/3780 BSC programming support when operating in BSC
mode. Operation with S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processors using
2770/3780 BSC programming is also permitted. See SRL
GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations. The customer
may have to modify existing 2770/3780 application programs for
operation with 3777 mdl 1. BSC attachment can be made via a
3704/3705 Communications Controller, or a 2701 Data Adapter
Unit attached to a channel of any S/370 Processor; or via an
Integrated Communications Adapter on S/370 mdl 115, 125,
135, 135-3 or 138; or via a Communications Adapter feature on
the 4331 Processor. BSC attachment can be made via a
3704/3705 attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 30, 40, 50,
65, 67 (in 65 mode), 75 or 195; via a 2701 attached to a channel of a S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40, 44, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode),
75 or 195; or via an Integrated Communications Attachment on
S/360 mdl 25.
Bibliography: GC20-0001.
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. See 3203 mdl 3 for
3-phase power requirments
[2] Color: Blue is supplied as standard.
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning. GA27-3006 and to
Customer Site Preparation Planning Guide, GA27-31 03.
[4] International Print Support: #9351 ... provides support for
modified AN, PN and SN print train arrangements for the 1416
Interchangeable Train Cartridge corresponding to the 48, 64 and
94-character EBCDIC sets available for print belts for the 3776
Communication Terminal. Support is also provided for the ON, HN,
AN, PN, RN and PCS-HN arrangements. See "Type Catalog."
Note: Not recommended for field installation ... replaces the standard print support.
[5] EIA RS232C 19.2 Kbps Line Speed: #9481 ... provides support of 19.2 Kbps. Provides diagnostics and used for record
purposes.
Mdl
Model 1 to Model 2 ... $ 4,600'
Model 1 to Model 3 ... $11,240'
Model 2 to Model 3 ... $ 6,440' t
'Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state:
"Installation of this model change involves removal of
parts which become the property of IBM."
tModel Upgrade Price assumes Special Features
#1601 and #1602 are installed on the Model 2. If
they are not, an RPO must be submitted.
SPECIAL FEATURES
[All special features can be field installed, except # 1201 for which
field installation is not recommended.]
For Communication Capability -- select one Communication
Feature (#1460, 1461 or 1470); a Communication Driver
(#1481), and EIA Interface (#3701), or High Speed Digital Interface (#4501). #1462 is required in addition to #1460 or #1461
for multipoint operation using BSC.
COMMUNICATION FEATURE ... select one.
Prerequisites:
PRICES
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$370
$315
Purchase
MMMC
$12,600
$68
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 50%
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field installable.
SDLC/BSC, SWITCH CONTROL (#1460). Provides communication procedure using SDLC or BSC under operator switch control. SDLC allows point-to-point or multipoint operation. BSC
operation is point-to-point without #1462, multipoint with
#1462. Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
#1461 or #1470. See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility
considerations.
BSC,POINT-TO-POINT (#1461). Provides for point-to-point BSC
operation over switched or non-switched facilities. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1460 or #1470.
See SRl GA27-3097 for BSC compatibility considerations.
SDLC (#1470). Provides for switched and non-switched SDlC
procedures. For record purposes, also identify the primary
CPU/Program Environment code. Specify one of the following:
#9977 for DOS/VS VTAM, #9988 for OS/VSl VTAM, #9989
for OS/VS2 VTAM, or #9993 for all other combinations of operating systems and access methods. Maximum: One. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with #1460 or #1461.
BSC MULTIPOINT ($1462). Required for BSC multipoint operation
over non-switched facilities. Maximum: One.
PrerequiSite:
#1460 or #1461. Limitation: See SRL GA27-3097 for BSC
compatibility considerations.
COMMUNICATION DRIVER WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCKING (#1481). Provides communication driver without clocking. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Feature
(#1460,1461 or 1470).
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides an EIA RS-232C compatible
interface and a cable for attachment to a modem. Speeds from
2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2K bps are permitted.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (# 1481).
For 19.2 Kbps operation, #9481 is required ... see item [5] under
"Specify." Limitation: Cannot be installed with High Speed Digital
Interface (#4501) or V35 Interface (#4720).
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage features (ASCII is written on the diskette) and with BSC
features #1460, 1461 or 1462 or with SDlC features #1460 or
#1470. A 1416 Interchangeable Train Cartridge containing an
ASCII GN print train is required for the 3203 Printer mdl 3 if
#1201 is ordered for the 3777. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Not recommended.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm that alerts the operator of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401). Provides one keylock and two keys for
the desk-console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided for this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two keylocks and four
identical keys for both desk-console cabinet doors. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 2nd (#4902). Limitation:
The keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
HIGH SPEED DIGITAL INTERFACE (#4501). Provides an interface and a cable for attachment to a modem which permits pointto-point synchronous operation at 19.2K bps on a Type 5703 or
8803 wideband channel. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation; Cannot be installed with EIA
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
"------- --- - =-----':'--=
=---=-
M 3777.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3777 Communication Terminal Model 1 (cont'd)
Interface (#3701) or V35 Interface (#4720).
3777 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input, output,
or control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with the feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
V35 INTERFACE (#4720). Required for direct High Speed Local
attachment to, a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps with a maximum cable distance of 170 feet. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701 or
#4501. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Communication
Driver (#1481).
DISKETTE STORAGE, 1ST (#4901). One device with a customer
removable diskette is placed in the left cabinet. Additional diskettes are available from IBM
Characteristics of the diskette storage device are: one movable read/write
head; one read/write surface; 73 data tracks; 26 sectors per track
and 128 bytes per sector. Up to 949 256-bytes records, or 474
512-byte records can be stored on the diskette (one 256-byte
record is reserved for forms control information). Each 256-byte
record is stored in two consecutive numbered sectors in exchange
mode, or in two non-consecutive sectors in 3770 mode. Each
51 2-byte record is stored in four consecutive sectors in exchange
mode, or four non-consecutive sectors in 3770 mode. Diskette
data is code insensitive in SDLC mode, non-transparent only in
BSC mode. Maximum: One.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 2ND (#4902). Provides a second diskette
storage device with the same characteristics as the first. It is
placed in the right desk cabinet which is also supplied by this
feature. The second diskette allows additional capabilities for:
Copy -- data can be copied from diskette 1 to diskette 2
(single data set or all active data sets. - 3770 mode only).
Concatenate (pool) - the ability to concatenate on a data set
basis.
Continue - allows a read or write program to automatically
continue to diskette 2 if it has been placed in ready condition.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage. 1 st (#4901).
OPERATOR 10 READER (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read.
With BSC.
a read operation can be initiated during a keyboard to line job
only. Data read from the magnetic stripe card cannot be printed.
Maximum: One. Limitations: [1] The operator must position and
slide the card through the reader-slot at a steady rate between 5
and 40 inches per second for a read operation ... [2] BSC programming for 2770 and 3780 does not support this feature.
PRINT SPEED ENHANCEMENT (#5595). Provides support for a
3203 Printer mdl 3 operating with 1200 LPM Speed Enhancement
feature (#6360). Maximum: One.
2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8002). Provides for attachment of a 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1, A2 or A3. Maximum:
One
ETPI
MACI MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Communication Feature
SDLC/BSC,Swtch Cntrl #1460
BSC, pt-ta-Pt
1461
SDLC
1470
BSC Multipoint
1462
Communication Driver
w/o Bus Machine Clk9 1481
EIA Interface
3701
ASCII Feature
1201
Audible Alarm
1390
Door Keylock
3401
Door Keylock, Dual
3402
High Spd Digital Inface
4501
Keylock
4650
V35 Interface
4720
Diskette Storage, 1st
4901
Diskette Storage, 2nd
4902
Operator 10 Reader
5450
Print Speed Enhancement 5595
2502 Cd Rdr Attachment 8002
"
$32
19
16
13
$27
16
14
11
$1,080
640
560
440
$6.00
3.00
3.00
1.00
13
11
13
11
18
15
40SUC 15SUC 30SUC 35
41
35SUC 15
13
69
59
69
59
13
11
18
15
29
25
440
440
600
40
15
30
2.00
1.00
.50
.50
NC
NC
1.00
NC
2.00
15.00
6.50
1.50
NC
4.50
1,400
35
510
2,360
2,360
440
600
1,000
Model
2
Purpose: The 3777 mdl 2 is a high speed remote job entry terminal which operates as a S/360 Model 20 - Submodel 5 BSC
MULTI-LEAVING Workstation. A keyboard is used for terminal
control and may be used for operator communication with the host
CPU. A 3203 Printer mdl 3 may be used for output. The 3203
mdl 3 uses the 1416 Interchal"geable Train Cartridge which can
be interchanged by the operator. Special features provide for the
attachment of one 1024-character console display, one diskette
storage device for logging of console display messages. one
diskette storage device for reading of card image Basic Exchange
data sets (processed as 80 column card images), one card reader
and one card punch. One of three 2502 Card Reader models can
be selected for operation at 150. 300 or 400 cards per minute.
The 3521 Card Punch operates at 50 cpm. A minimum config'uration includes a 3777 Communication Terminal mdl 2, a 3203
Printer mdl 3 and a 2502 Card Reader or a Diskette Input Device
(#3201). If a Diskette Input Device is attached and a 2502 Card
Reader is not present. a Console Display (#1601) is required. A
console display is also required if the keyboard is to be used for
operator console communication with the host CPU.
Communication features permit operation at speeds from 2400 bps
to to 9600 bps and at 19.2 K bps using BSC transmission techniques and an appropriate modem. Direct local attachment to a
3705-11 at 14.4K bps via appropriate features.
Maximum Lines Per Minute
Std 3203 mdl 3
1000
870
Featured 3203 mdl 3 Character Set
1200
1020
48 AN, HN
60 PN
See "Type Catalog" for additional character sets and speeds ...
see 3203 for 1200 LPM Speed Enhancement feature (#6360)
information.
Keyboard - EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys (produces 88
characters). Space and Character Advance keys have typamatic
action. Associated with the keyboard are indicator lights, function
keys, operation mode switches. and a 3-position numeric display.
The keyboard, in conjunction with the optional console display,
provides a console function for the 3777 mdl 2.
Printer - a stand-alone 3203 Printer mdl 3 cable attached to the
3777 mdl 2. The 3203 mdl 3 uses the 1416 Interchangeable Train
Cartridge. The 3777 mdl 2 supports fifteen Print Train Arrangements (AN, HN, OAA, ODA, ONA, OAB, GN, PCS-AN, PCS-HN,
PN, aNC, aN, RN, SN, TN) as standard. When a subsitute character is ordered to displace a character in one of the standard
arrangements, the substitute character assumes the card and bit
codes of the character it replaces. See "Type Catalog." If the
International Print Support specify feature is installed, the 3777
mdl 2 will support Print Train Arrangements corresponding to the
48, 64 and 94-character EBCDIC sets available for print belts on
the 3776 Communication Terminal. Support is also provided for
the aN, HN, AN. PN, RN and PCS-HN arrangements. The 3203
mdl 3 permits feeding continuous forms up to 20 inches wide and
132 print pOSitions. Character spacing is 10 per inch, line spacing
is 6 or 8 per inch under operator control. Maximum form length is
24 inches when attached to the 3777 mdl 2. Refer to the 3203
writeup for further description of the 3203 mdl 3. Refer to "Type
Catalog" for further description of the 1416 print train arrangements upported and for print speeds. Refer to GA24-3488 for
further design considerations.
Console Display -- contains up to 1,024 characters of information
formatted into 16 lines of 64 character positions each. Operator
messages are displayed in the top 14 lines of the display. Operator originated keyboard data is displayed in the bottom 2 lines of
the display and will be displayed as keyed.
Oparator messages larger, than 64 characters overflow to subsequent lines. Subsequent lines of the message are indented. The
latest message displayed is identified with a special character. If
the display becomes full, the oldest message is overlayed, retainIng the most recent messages on the display. The operator may
defer subsequent messages in order to complete reference to a
particular message.
Console Display Spooling - a diskette storage device may be
attached to the 3777 mdl 2 by special feature to provide storage
for operator console messages. Two options are available to the
operator when the diskette becomes filled. First, automatic rewrite
occurs. New messages are overlaid upon older messages commencing with the initial message written upon the diskette. Second, an end of diskette signal is provided to the operator and
messages are suspended pending replacement of the used diskette by a new diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - --=
- =--- --=----':" =
DP Machines
3777 Communication Terminal - Model 2
M 3777.4
Jul79
(conI' d)
Operator access to the diskette is via the keyboard. The diskette
may be paged backward a defined number of messages and
displayed for reference. In addition, the diskette may be written to
the printer.
Diskette Input Device - a diskette storage device may be attached to the 3777 mdl 2 by special feature for reading of card
image Basic Exchange datasets. Basic Exchange datasets will be
processed by the 3777 mdl 2 as 80 column card images. The
datasets may be multivolume. Individual data sets or all active
datasets may be printed. Initial Program Load of the workstation
program may take place from the Disketle Input Device if the
Console Spool Device is not present. Diskette IPL musl take place
from the Console Spool Device if both disketle devices· are present. IPL is available from the 2502 Card Reader if that device is
attached.
If the 3777 mdl 2 configuration includes both a 2502 Card Reader
and the Diskette Input Device, diskette output may be alternated
with cards; however both devices will not operate simultaneously.
If the 3777 mdl 2 configuration includes a Diskette Input Device
instead of a 2502 Card Reader, and IPL is executed from the
Diskette Input Device or the Console Spool Device, the IPL diskette containing the workstation program must have been written on
a 3777 mdl 2 configuration containing a 2502 Card Reader and a
diskette device.
Buffers -- transfer data between the input and output devices and
the communication line. The buffers alternate in providing input
and output services to permit overlapped operation. Storage is
provided in the 3777 model 2 for dual buffers for each input and
output device attached. The buffer size is variable, depending
upon the workstation program. The recommended buffer size is
512 bytes.
Communications Adapter -- integrated to provide BSC point-topoint operation over switched or non-switched facilities.
Printer Format Controls -- facilitate the formatting of printed data.
Vertical forms definition provides forms set-up for the printer by
means of the keyboard or card reader. The definition may be
displayed on the console display, if present, or printed for verification.
Extended forms definition may be used in conjunction with the
Diskette Input Device (#3201). Standard forms definition provides
for the definition of five printer forms. Extended forms definition
provides for greater than five printer forms. The Diskette Input
Device (#3201) is a prerequisite to the use of extended forms
definition.
Compression/Expansion -- provides a means for improving the
efficiency of data transmission. Provides options of (dependent
upon the workstation program) trailing blank truncation, blank or
data compression/expansion.
Performance Considerations -- the line-to-printer performance of
the 3777 mdl 2 and attached 3203 Printer mdl 3 is up to 1,000
Ipm (up to 1200 Ipm with 3203 mdl 3 Speed Enhancement feature) with 48 character AN or HN set, and up to 870 Ipm (up to
1020 Ipm with 3203 mdl 3 Speed Enhancement feature) with a 60
character PN set. The 3777 mdl 2 may operate, however, with
concurrent input/output processing as a function of the MULTILEAVING capability. The card reader, punch and display console
may have a degrading effect on printer performance while transferring data to and from the 3777 mdl 2 buffers and the host as
communications line time is shared by all 3777 mdl 2 I/O units.
information on customer responsibilities, communication facilities,
and other attachment information.
For 19.2 Kbps, the 3777 mdl 2 may use either the EIA or the High
Speed Digital Interface to communicate through an appropriate
modem and communication facility with a 3704/3705 Communications Controller equipped with Line Set Type 1G (#4717) at the
central processing unit. This type of communication requires
modems which are line compatible (suitable for interconnection)
and which provide optional EIA RS232C or High Speed Digital
Interface DTE interfaces. Also attaches via a Communications
Adapter feature on the 4331 Processor ... see M 4331 pages for
details.
IBM Modems: The following IBM modems can be used: 3863 (2400
bps), 3864(4800 bps) or 3865 (9600 bps). Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on the 3863 mdl 1, 3864 mdl 1 and 3865 mdls 1
or 2. For communications capability, product utilization and features, see
3863, 3864, 3865 and M 2700 pages.
Supplies -- for 3203 Printer mdl 3 ribbons
limitations -- the input/output capabilities outlined unCler
"Highlights" are dependent on appropriate configurations of the
terminal. The keyboard is standard on the 3777 mdl 2, while the
3203 Printer mdl 3 is a stand-alone unit. A minimum configuration
includes a 3777 Communication Terminal mdl 2, a 3203 Printer
mdl 3 and a 2502 Card Reader or a Diskette Input Device
(#3201). If a Diskette Input Device is attached and a 2502 Card
Reader is not present, a Console Display (#1601) is required.
Prerequisites: For BSC communications with S/360, S/370 or
4300 Processor - the 3777 mdl 2 will interface to current host
MULTI-LEAVING programming systems as a S/360 mdl 20 - Submodel 5. BSC attachment can be made via a 3704/3705 Communications Controller, a 2701 Data Adapter Unit, or a 2703 Transmission Control attached to a channel of any S/360, S/370 or
4300 Processor supporting BSC MULTI-LEAVING Workstations.
Also attaches via a Communications Adapter feature on the 4331
Processor.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
or #9881 for non-lock plug. See 3203 mdl 3 for 3-phase power
requirements.
[2] Color: Blue is supplied as standard.
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard ... refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006 and to
Customer Site Preparation Planning Guide, GA27-31 03.
[4] International Print Support: #9351 .. , provides support for
modified AN, PN and SN Print Train Arrangements for the 1416
Interchangeable Train Cartridge corresponding to the 48, 64
and 94 character EBCDIC sets available for print belts for the
3776 Communication Terminal. Support is also provided for
the ON, HN, AN, PN, RN and PCS-HN arrangements. See
"Type Catalog." Note: Not recommended for field installation
... replaces the standard print support.
[5] EIA RS232C 19.2K BPS Line Speed: #9481 ... provides support of 19.2K bps. Provides diagnostics and is used for record
purposes.
PRICES:
3777
Actual terminal device throughput is dependent upon operational
and systems programming characteristics. Factors such as the
communication facilities, transmission block lengths, compression
characteristics, characters read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, etc., must all be considered in determining actual
throughput. See 2770 Data Communication System, GA27-3097,
for additional information.
Problem Determination Procedures -- significant function has
been designed into this unit to help provide greater availability to
the customer. This has been done through the use of problem
identification routines and procedures that are easily understood
and used by the operator. See IBM 3777-2 Operating Procedures
Guide,GA27-3129.
Customer Responsibilities -- it will be a customer's responsibility
to use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and fill
out the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to
M 2700 pages.
Communications - see "Special Features." Transmission speeds
from 2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2K bps. Point-to-point
transmission capability over switched or non-switched facilities is
allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication
facility. Speeds above 4800 bps are on non-switched facilities.
Direct local attachment to a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps. EBCDIC is the
only supported transmission code. Refer to M 2700 pages for
Mdl
2
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 Yr
$422
$359
Purchase
MMMC
$14,360
$79
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: 0
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 50%
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 2 to Model 3 ... $6,440'
• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state:
"Installation ,of this model change involves removal of
parts which become the property of IBM" .,. This Model Upgrade Price assumes Special Features #1601 and
# 1602 are installed on the Model 2. If they are not, an
RPO must be submitted.
SPECIAL FEATURES
[All special features can be field installed.]
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390). Sounds an alarm that alerts the operator of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-----------==-=
---~ =
M 3777.5
Jul79
--
DP Machines
3777 Communication Terminal· Model 2 (cont'd)
COMMUNICATION DRIVER WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCKING (#1481). Required. Provides commu.nication driver
without clocking. Maximum: One.
CONSOLE DISPLAY (#1601). Provides a 1024 character (16 lines
of 65 characters each) console information display. Maximum:
One.
CONSOLE DISPLAY SPOOLING (#1602). Diskette storage device
for spooling of console display messages. One device with a
customer removable diskette placed in the left cabinet. Additional
diskettes are available from IBM
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Console Display (#1601).
DISKETTE INPUT DEVICE (#3201). Diskette storage device for
reading of card Image Basic Exchange datasets. One device with
a customer removable diskette placed In the right cabinet. Addi·
tlonal diskettes are available from IBM
Maximum: One.
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401), Provides one keylock and two keys for
the desk console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
Special Feature Prices:
Audible Alarm
#1390
Communication Driver
1481
w /0 Bus Mach Clkln9
Console Display
1601
Console Display Spooling 1602
Diskette Input Device
3201
Door Keylock
3401
Door Keylock, Dual
3402
EIA Interface
3701
High Speed Digital Intfce 4501
Keylock
4650
V35 Interface
4720
Operator 10 Reader
5450
Print Speed Enhancement 5595
2502 Card Reader Attach 8002
3782/3521 Cd Pch Attach 8150
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two keylocks and four
identical keys for both desk-console cabinet doors. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Input Device (#3201). Limitation:
The keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Required. Provides an EIA RS-232C
compatible interface and a cable for attachment of a modem.
Speeds from 2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2K bps are permitted. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver
(#1481). For 19.2 Kbps operation. #9481 is required. See item
[5]' under "Specify." Limitation: Cannot be installed with High
Speed Digital Interface (#4501) or V35 Interface (#4720).
HIGH SPEED DIGITAL INTERFACE (#4501). Provides an interface and a cable for attachment to a modem which permits pointto-point synchronous operation at 19.2K bps on a Type 5703 or
8803 wideband channel. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481). Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA
Interface (#3701) or V35 Interface (#4720).
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to input. output.
or control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with the feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
V35 INTERFACE (#4720). Required for direct High Speed Local
Attachment to a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps with a maximum cable
distance of up to 170 feet. limitation: Cannot be installed with
#3701 or #4501. Field Inatallation: Yes. Prerequisite: Communication Driver (#1481).
OPERATOR 10 READER (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discetionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8" ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read. See IRD Sales Manual for
magnetically striped and encoded identification cards. A read
operation can be initiated during an orerator inquiry (SYS REa
function). Data read from the magnetic stripe card cannot be
printed. displayed or written on the Console Display Spooling
diskette. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Console Display (#1601).
limitations: [1] The operator mUl!t pOSition and slide the card
through the reader-slot at a steady rate between 5 and 40 inches
per second for a read operation ... [2] BSC programming does not
support this feature.
PRINT SPEED ENHANCEMENT (#5595). Provides support for a
3203 Printer mdl 3 operating with Speed Enhancement (#6360) at
1200 Ipm. Maximum: One.
2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8002). Provides for attachment of a 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1. A2 or A3. Maximum:
One.
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card Punch. The
3251 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/ Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: The Card
Read/Punch Check special feature on the 3521 is limited to the
punch checking function only.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 Yr Purchase MMMC
$4OSUC 13
106
11
90
80
68
80
94
15SUC 30SUC 13
11
41
35
35SUC 15
13
13
11
18
15
29
25
19
16
$40
$.50
440
3,600
2,720
3,200
15
30
2.00
33.00
15.00
15.50
NC
NC
1.00
1.00
NC
2.00
1.50
NC
4.50
3.00
440
1,400
35
510
440
600
1,000
640
------ -----= -=
":' =
=- -
M 3777.6
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 3777 COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
Model 3
Purpose: The 3777 mdl 3 is a high speed remote job entry terminal and is a member of the 3770 Data Communication System.
The 3777 mdl 3 is an SNA Multiple Logical Unit (MLU) terminal. A
keyboard and a console display are used for terminal control and
for operator communication with the host CPU. Terminal operation
may be controlled by the storage of operating procedures, terminal
setups and local utility programs in terminal storage for use by the
terminal operator. The 3777 is not designed as an interactive
terminal. The printer is not integrated into the 3777 mdl 3 but is a
stand-alone 3203 Printer mdl 3 which is cable attached to the
3777 mdl 3. Special features permit one or two diskette storage
devices, one magnetic tape unit, one card reader and one card
punch. One of three card readers can be selected for operation at
speeds of 150, 300 or 400 cards per minute. The card punch
operates at 50 cpm. A minimum configuration includes a 3777
mdl 3 and a 3203 mdl 3.
Maximum Lines Per Minute
Std 3203 mdl 3
1000
998
870
Featured 3203 mdl 3 Character Set
1200
1195
1020
48 AN, HN
52 RN
60 PN
Highlights:
Communications - transmission speeds from 2400 bps to 9600
bps and at 19.2K bps are provided using the appropriate modems and communications facilities. Duplex - simultaneous
inbound/outbound - data transmission is provided on nonswitched full duplex communication facilities only when communicating with an appropriately equipped 3705 Communications
Controller with the supporting ACF /NCP /VS level. May also be
locally attached In either a duplex or half-duplex mode to a 3705
at 14.4K bps.
Keyboard - EBCDIC arrangement with 44 data keys. The keyboard in conjunction with a standard console display, indicator
lights, function keys, operating mode switches and a 3-position
numeric display provides operator control. Host application commands, System Services Control Point (SSCP) commands and
local functions are entered from the keyboard. Data entered on
the keyboard is displayed. If a keying error is made, Character
Backspace and Character Advance may be used for editing.
Character Backspace and Character Advance are nondestructive. Character Advance is typamatic. Reset returns to
the position from which the Character Backspace began.
Console Display - contains 16 lines of 64 characters each for a
total of 1024 characters. The 3777 mdl 3 reserves the bottom
three lines of the display for operator keying, display of system
information and prompting for information required for the execution of functions. The remaining 1 3 lines of the display are used
to display messages between the terminal and the host application or the SSCP and to display information regarding terminal
operations such as host input.
Lower case alphabetlcs are converted to upper case before
displaying. When the cursor is beneath a character any new data
keystroke will cause the new character to replace the old. Overstrikes are 'not permitted.
Each message is displayed as it is received, except as described
below. Each message is also written in terminal storage. At
power on time the operator is prompted to specify date and time.
As messages are received they are time-stamped prior to display
and storage. Messages longer than a display line will wrap
around to the next line with an indent to aid readability. The
~!~!~~ f~~~ f~~e!fP~~s!':::~ine~~b;.eh~e~~~e~e~e';,f~:s~~~:
received Is identified by the Greater Than sign > in the first
position. The following line is blanked to assist the operator with
message identification.
Function keys on the keyboard allow the operator to control the
display function. The display can be held while incoming messages are sent to terminal storage and not displayed. If messages arrive during the "hold" state a message alert light notifies
the operator. The operator may subsequently display the desired
message group. A terminal utility program Is available for listing
or copying the message contents of terminal storage for external
message retention and reference.
Printer - a stand alone 3203 Printer mdl 3 cable attached to the
3777 mdl 3. The 3203 mdl 3 uses the 1416 Interchangeable
Train Cartridge. The 3777 mdl 3 supports fifteen Print Train
Arrangements (AN, HN, OAA, ODA, ONA, OAB, GN, PCS-AN,
PC8-HN, PN, ONC, ON, RN, SN, TN) as standard. When a substitute character Is ordered to displace a character in one of the
standard arrangements, the substitute character assumes the
card and bit codes of the character it replaces. See "Type Cata-
log.'· International Print Support is provided supporting Print
Train Arrangements corresponding to the 48, 64 and 94 character EBCDIC sets available for print belts for the 3776 Communication Terminal. Support is also provided for the ON, HN, AN,
PN, RN and PCS-HN arrangements. The 3203 mdl 3 permits
feeding continuous forms up to 20 inches wide and 1 32 print
positions. Character spacing is 10 per inch; line spacing is 6 or
8 per inch under operator control. Maximum forms length is 24
inches when attached to the 3777 mdl 3. Refer to 3203 for
further description of the 3203 mdl 3. Refer to "Type Catalog"
for further description of the 1416 print train arrangements supported and for print speeds. Refer to GA24-3488 for forms
design considerations.
Terminal Storage - is standard for message spooling, terminal
control, utility programs and user generated procedures.
Diskette Storage - there are two diskette storage devices available as special features. While the devices are physically identical to those on the 3777 mdl 1, additional operational facilities
such as data set concatenation enhance the use of the special
feature diskette storage devices. Also, each special feature
diskette storage device may be assigned individually to an independent host SNA session or used locally for input or output.
Diskette operation is concurrent with other terminal functions.
MagnetiC Tape -- may be used as either an input or as an output
device. One 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1 attachment is available as a special feature. The 3411 mdl 1 provides
9-track tape with recording densities of 1 600 bpi Phase Encoded
or 800 bpi NRZI. 7-track tape operation is not provided. The
3411 mdl 1 may be assigned to an independent host SNA session or be used locally for input or output. Labeled and unlabeled tapes are supported. Records are fixed or variable length
and may be unblocked or blocked to a maximum block size of
4000 bytes. Maximum record size is 255 bytes. A block size of
up to 2000 bytes automatically provides dual buffering. Magnetic
tape operation is concurrent with other terminal functions. Refer
to G232-0004 for detailed information on operation of the 3411
mdl 1. Refer to 3411 in "Machines" for ordering instructions.
Note: Feature #7003 is required on the 3411 mdl 1.
Buffers - transfer data between the input and output devices and
the communication line. SOLC communications uses a customer
defined Request/Response Unit (RU) of up to 512 bytes. The
actual transmission depends on session pacing values, data
length, buffer availability and data availability. Buffers also transfer data between input and output devices during local operation.
Printer Format Controls - facilitate the formatting. of printed
data. Vertical control characters in data initiate vertical tabbing.
Carriage control definition provides for specification of a variable
number of line numbers per carriage stop with a maximum of 60
lines per carriage control definition. Carriage control definition
may be defined at the terminal or may be sent dynamically by the
host application. Extended Forms Definition is standard and
utilizes terminal storage.
Compression/Expansion - implementation provides a compression option at the terminal for a job that reads data from cards,
magnetic tape, or diskette to the line. An identifying sequence is
substituted for each occurence of two or more consecutive duplicate characters. Trailing blank truncation is standard. The terminal automatically expands the comp~ession sequence to the
correct number of blanks or duplicate characters for compressed
transparent or non-transparent data received.
Decompactlon -- provides the decompaction function associated
with the receipt of a compacted data stream whereby a pair of
consecutive alphameric characters is represented by a single
transmission byte. Function is dependent upon transmission by
the host of a decompaction table corresponding to the compaction table used by host programming in creating the compacted
job data stream. Oecompaction occurs for data directed to the
printer, card punch, magnetic tape and diskette (except 3770
format). Compaction by the terminal of data inbound to the host
is not provided.
Automatic Card Reading -- capability is under control of the
operator. The "hot reader" function may be enabled/disabled at
any appropriate operational time.
Job Control - initiated by the operator, pertains to online jobs
with the host and local utility jobs run concurrently with the
online jobs. Online job submission may be initiated at any time
there is a SNA session available for data transmission. The
terminal may have up to six concurrent sessions that are controlled by the operator. Online job input may consist of card,
diskette or magnetic tape data. Data from different devices or
data sets may be concatenated into a single input data stream as
one Job execution. Online job output may consist of printer, card,
diskette or magnetic tape data.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=.-- ---- ---==
~ ==";'
M 3777.7
Jur.79
DP Machines
3777 Communication Unit Model 3 (conI' d)
Local utility jobs may be defined by the operator and stored in
terminal storage to provide the following functions:
Input
Output
Card
Magnetic Tape
Diskette
Printer, Magnetic Tape, Diskette, Card Punch
Printer, Diskette, Card Punch
Printer, Magnetic Tape, Diskette, Card Punch
Record Formats -- consist of card image, print image and 3770
format. Card image and print image, in addition to being applicable to card reader, card punch, printer and magnetic tape datasets, are also applicable to diskette as a function of Basic Exchange datasets (128 byte maximum).
Basic Exchange diskettes may be read by the terminal. Basic
Exchange diskettes may also be written by the terminal, thereby
creating a diskette for further Basic Exchange mode processing.
3770 format is applicable to diskette data recording which is to
be subsequently printed or punched. 3770 format recording
results in more efficient diskette utilization than does card or
print image. Basic Exchange (card or print image) or 3770 format is a user specification in job control.
Input record size from both magnetic tape and diskette may be
limited to 80 or 128 bytes, because of host programming considerations. In addition, the ability to concatenate multiple data sets,
with different record lengths, into a single input job stream requires host programming support of a CDS-FM Header type 1
(Continue Destination Select).
Remote Power Off -- this feature can be used to conserve energy used by the terminal by providing the capability for the host
CPU application program to initiate power down at the terminal
by sending a controlled data sequence over communication
facilities. The terminal must also be equipped with the appropriate communication special features. This capability is in addition
to the standard power down switch which can be manually operated.
Encrypt/Decrypt Feature -- available to provide secure data
transmission in conjunction with ACF VTAM Encrypt/Decrypt
Feature (Program Number 5735-RC2) (Feature Number 6010)
and Programmed Cryptographic Facility Program Product
(Program Number 5740-XY5).
Performance ConSiderations -- the line-to-line printer performance of the 3777 mdl 3 and attached 3203 mdl 3 is up to 1000
Ipm [up to 1200 Ipm with Speed Enhancement (#6360) on the
3203 mdl 3 and Print Speed Enhancement (#5595) on the 3777
mdl 3 itself with 48 character AN or HN set, and up to 870 Ipm
[up to 1020 Ipm with #6360 on the 3203 and #5595 on the
3777] with a 60 character PN set.
The 3777 mdl 3 MLU terminal will operate, however, with concurrent input-output processing in either a duplex or half-duplex data
communications mode as a function of the base Multiple Logical
Unit capability. The card reader, punch, diskette storage devices,
magnetic tape unit and display console may have a degrading
effect on printer performance during concurrent operations.
The degree of degradation which may occur will tend to be greater when half-duplex communications are employed as opposed to
duplex communications and system facilities in support of the
concurrent inbound-outbound data stream capability of the terminal.
Actual terminal device throughput depends upon operational and
systems programming characteristics. Factors such as the communication facilities, transmission block lengths, compression
characteristics, characters read/printed, forms skipping, application processing, SNA pacing, cryptographic processing, etc.,
must all be considered in determining actual throughput.
In general, duplex data communications operation will tend to
provide
greater
terminal
throughput
under
concurrent
input! output functions than a half-duplex communications mode.
The 3777 mdl 3 operating duplex at 19.2K bps on a terrestrial
link may, however, present a variance of from greater to degraded overall terminal throughput when compared to comparable
operation in a half-duplex mode.
Problem Determination Procedures -- Function has been designed into this unit to help provide availability to the customer.
See IBM 3770 Multiple Logic Unit Operator's Guide tor 3776-3,
3776-4, 3777-3.
Customer Responsibilities: It will be a customer's responsibility to
use and follow the Problem Determination Procedures and to fill
out the trouble report prior to calling IBM for service. Also refer to
M 2700 pages.
Communications: See "Special Features." Transmission speeds
from 2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2 Kbps. Point-to-point and
multipoint transmission capability over switched or non-switched
facilities allowed by selecting the appropriate modem and communication facility. Speeds above 4800 bps are on non-switched
facilities. Direct local attachmen~ to a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps.
EBCDIC is the standard transmission code. ASCII is available as a
special feature. Refer to M 2700 pages for information on customer responsibilities, communication facilities, and other attachment
information.
For 19.2 Kbps, the 3777 mdl 3 may use either the EIA Interface
or the High Speed Digital Interface to communicate through an
appropriate modem and communication facility with a 3704/3705
Communications Controller equipped with Line Set Type 1 G
(#4717) at the central processing unit. This type of communication requires modems which are line compatible (suitable for interconnection) and which provide optional EIA RS232C or High
Speed Digital Interface DTE interfaces.
Also attaches via a Communications Adapter special feature on a
4331 Processor. The 4331 must be equipped with a Local Attachment Interface (#4801) and its prerequisites ... see "Special
Features" under 4331.
IBM Modems: The following IBM modems can be used: 3863 (2400
bps), 3864 (4800 bps) or 3865 (9600 bps). Note: 4·wire Switched Network Backup is available on the 3863 mdl 1, 3864 mdl 1 or 3865 mdls 1
or 2. For communications capability, product utilization and features, see
3863, 3864, 3865 and M 2700 pages.
Supplies:
3203 mdl 3 ribbons,
limitations:
The input/output capabilities outlined under
"Highlights" depend on appropriate configurations of the terminal.
Keyboard, console display, and terminal storage are standard. The
3203 Printer mdl 3 is a standalone unit. A minimum configuration
includes a 3777 mdl 3 and a 3203 mdl 3. One communications
feature (#3701, 4501, 5650 or 5651) is required. For other
configurations, refer to "Special Features" below.
The duplex data communications capability of the 3777 mdl 3 is
operational on non-switched full duplex communications facilities
only.
Communications Adapter: An integrated communications adapter
without business machine clocking is standard ... provides SDLC
communications over switched or non-switched facilities.
PrerequiSites for SDLC Communications with S/370 or a 4300
Processor: A 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller operating
under Network Control Program (NCP /VS) and attached to any
virtual storage S/370 Processor or 4300 Processor operating
under VS1, MVS or DOS/VS using RES, JES2, JES3, POWER/VS
and VTAM. Note: MVS and JES3 are not supported by the 4300
Processors.
An appropriately featured 3705 operating under the appropriate
level of Network Control Program (ACF /NCP /VS) is required for
duplex data stream operation.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY
Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880 for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug. See 3411 mdl 1 for
magnetic tape unit voltage requirements ... see 3203 mdl 3
for 3-phase power requirements.
Color: Blue is supplied as standard.
Cables: Fixed length cables are provided as standard, except
for the 3411. See Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27-3006. 3411 cables must be ordered separately.
EIA RS232C 19.2 Kbps Line Speed: #9481 ...
support of 19.2 Kbps ... used for record purposes.
provides
Alternate Address: #9011 ... for record purposes only. Order
this optional feature to specify that diskettes containing terminal code updates are to be mailed to an alternate address
using a Teleprocessing Control
number (lPC). The alternate address selected is usually the
central site location.
PRICES:
3777
Mdl
MRC
3
$611
MLC
2 Yr
$520
Purchase
MMMC
$20,800
$163
Plan Offering: Plan B
Machine Group: D
Per Call: 1
Useful Life Category: 2
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 50%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (There are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1 to Model 3 ... $11 ,240t
Model 2 to Model 3 ... $ 6,440'
t
• Model Upgrade Price assumes Special Features # 1601
and #1602 are installed on the Model 2. If they are not,
an RPQ must be submitted.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- --- ------- -----== =':' =
M 3777.8
Jul79
DP Machines
3777 Communication Unit Model 3 (cont'd)
t Customer price quotations and customer acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of
this model change involves removal of parts which become
the property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
[All special features can be field installed, except #1201 for which
field installation is not recommended.]
ASCII FEATURE (#1201). A 48 data key keyboard (produces 94
ASCII graphics) is provided in place of the standard EBCDIC
keyboard. This feature also provides for operation with diskette
storage features (ASCII is written on the diskette). Orders for
# 1201 must also specify one print belt, #9493 for 48 character
ASCII, #9494 for 64 character ASCII, or #9495 for 94 character
ASCII. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Not recommended.
AUDIBLE ALARM (#1390), Sounds an alarm that alerts the operator of conditions requiring manual intervention. The alarm can be
enabled and reset from the keyboard. Maximum: One.
DOOR KEYLOCK (#3401). Provides one keylock and two keys for
the desk-console cabinet door. Maximum: One. Limitation: The
keys provided for this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
DOOR KEYLOCK, DUAL (#3402). Provides two keylocks·and four
identical keys for both desk-console cabinet doors. Maximum:
One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 2nd (#4902). Limitation:
the keys provided with this lock can be duplicated by local keymakers. Additional or replacement keys are not available from
IBM.
stripe cards encoded in the ABA format to permit reading of 40
characters of which 37 are discretionary. Each character contains
four bits plus odd parity. Card size 3-3/8" x 2-1/8 ranging from
0.007" to 0.045" thick may be read. Data read from the magnetic
stripe card cannot be printed or displayed. Maximum: One.
Limitations: The operator must position and slide the card
through the reader-slot at a steady rate between 5 and 40 inches
per second for a read operation.
PRINT SPEED ENHANCEMENT (#5595). Provides support for a
3203 Printer mdl 3 operating with Speed Enhancement (#6360).
Maximum: One.
DDS ADAPTER (DDSA) (#5650 - For Point-to-Point Operation ...
#5651 - For Multipoint Operation). Provides an adapter for
SDLC data transmission at speeds of 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps
over the AT&T non-switched Dataphone' Digital Service network.
The DDSA interfaces to a DDS channel service unit, the customer
site termination of the DDS network. Specify: #9822 for 2400
bps, #9823 for 4800 bps, or #9825 for 9600 bps. Maximum:
One, #5650 or #5651. limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA
Interface (#3701), High Speed Digital Interface (#4501), or V35
Interface (#4720).
3411 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND CONTROL MOL 1 ATTACHMENT (#7801). To attach one 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and
Control mdl 1. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Feature #7003 on
the 3411 mdl 1.
2502 CARD READER ATTACHMENT (#8002). Provides for attachment of a 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1, A2 or A3. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Optical Mark Read on the 2502 is not supported.
ENCRYPT/DECRYPT (#3680). Provides cryptographic data transmission in conjunction with program support in the host. Includes
a security keylock. Each machine will have its own unique key.
Two identical keys are supplied with the feature. Maximum: One.
Note: A mercury battery, IBM Part No. 1743456, or equivalent, is
required. A battery is shipped with this feature. See M 10000
pages for additional or replacement batteries. Replacement of the
discharged battery is the customer's responsibility.
3782/3521 CARD PUNCH ATTACHMENT (#8150). To attach a
3782 Card Attachment Unit mdl 1 and a 3521 Card Punch. The
3521 can be equipped with special features for Card Read/Punch
Check and/or Card Print. Maximum: One. Limitation: The card
read/punch check special feature on the 3521 is limited to the
punch checking function only.
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides an EIA RS232C compatible
interface and a cable for attachment to a modem. Speeds from
2400 bps to 9600 bps and at 19.2 Kbps are permitted.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with High Speed
Digital Interface (#4501), DDS Adapter, Point-to-Point (#5650),
DDS Adapter, Multipoint (#5651) or V35 Interface (#4720).
Prerequisite: For 19.2 Kbps operation, #9481 is required ... see
item 5 under "Specify."
ASCII Feature
#1201
Audible Alarm
1390
Door Keylock
3401
Door Keylock, Dual
3402
Encrypt/Decrypt
3680
EIA Interface
3701
HI Spd Digital Interface
4501
Keylock
4650
V35 Interface
4720
Diskette Storage, 1 st
4901
Diskette Storage, 2nd
4902
Operator 10 Reader
5450
Print Speed Enhancement 5595
DDS Adapter, Pt-to-Pt
5650
DDS Adapter, Multlpt
5651
3411 Mdl 1 Attachment
7801
2502 Cd Rdr Attachment 8002
3782/3521 Cd Pch Attach 8150
HIGH SPEED DIGITAL INTERFACE (#4501). Provides an interface and a cable for attachment to a modem which permits pointto-point and multipoint synchronous operation at 19.2K bps on a
Type 5703 or 8803 wideband channel. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA Interface (#3701), DDS
Adapter, Point-to-Point (#5650), DDS Adapter, Multipoint (#5651)
or V35 Interface (#4720).
KEYLOCK (#4650). Provides a mechanical keylock to activate
controls that disable all operator activity related to keyboard or
control of data at the terminal. Each machine will have its own
unique key. Two identical keys are supplied with the feature.
Refer to M 10000 pages for information on additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
V35 INTERFACE (#4720). Required for direct High Speed Local
Attachment to a 3705-11 at 14.4K bps with a maximum cable
distance of 170 feet. Limitation: Cannot be installed with EIA
Interface (#3701), High Speed Digital Interface (#4501) or DDS
Adapter (#5650 or 5651). Field Installation: Yes.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 1 ST (#4901). One device with a customer
removable diskette is placed in the left cabinet. Additional diskettes are available from IBM
Characteristics of the diskette storage device are: one movable read/write
head; one read/write surface, 73 data tracks; 26 sectors per
track and 128 bytes per sector. Up to 1898 128-byte records.
Data may be stored in either a Basic Exchange dataset or in a
3770 format dataset. Diskette capabilities allow for:
Concatenate (pool) ... the ability to concatenate on a dataset
basis.
Multivolume ... allows a read or write operation to automatically
continue to diskette 2 if it has been placed in ready condition,
or it may continue on the current drive.
Maximum: One.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
$18
$15
40SUC 15SUC 30SUC 47
40
13
11
41
35
35SUC 15
13
69
59
69
59
13
11
18
15
24
20
24
20
118
100
29
25
19
16
Purchase MMMC
$800 $.50
.50
40
15
NC
NC
30
1,600 2.00
440 1.00
1,400 1.00
NC
35
510 2.00
2,360 15.00
2,360 6.50
440 1.50
600
NC
840 2.00
840 2.00
4,000 14.00
1,000 4.50
640 3.00
ACCESSORIES: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the part number indicated
below at the price listed in the M 10000 pages, see M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
Mercury Battery (Part No. 1743456). Provides power to
sustain the master key of the Encrypt/Decrypt feature
(#3680) when normal power is not present. This accessory
is a 4 volt non-rechargeable mercury battery. This battery
has a shelf life of 1 year under normal conditions, and can
be expected to provide 3.5 years of normal operation. Note:
Discharged battery should be returned to IBM.
DISKETTE STORAGE, 2ND (#4902). Provides a second diskette
storage device with the same characteristics as the 1st. It is
placed in the right desk cabinet which is also supplied by this
feature. The second diskette allows additional capabilities for:
Copy ... data can be copied from diskette 1 to diskette 2.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Diskette Storage, 1 st (#4901).
OPERATOR 10 FEATURE (#5450). Provides for reading magnetic
MLC
2 Yr
'" Registered Trademark of AT&T.
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
-------------- - -----=- ==
':' =
M 3780.1
Jll179
DP Machines
IBM 3780 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL
Purpose: A data transmission terminal using the BSC technique. It
can communicate over appropriate communications facilities to
another 3780, a S/360 mdl 22 - 195, any S/370 or 4300 Processor, a 2770 Data Communication System, or a 2780 Data Transmission Terminal. May be locally attached to a 3704/3705 Communications Controller. For requirements, see ·'Prerequisites."
NOTE: For possible use with S/360 mdl 20, System/3 and 1131,
Manual.
see GSD
Highlights: Provides medium speed, batch-oriented, buffered card
reading and printing via appropriate communications facilities ...
see "Communications Facilities." Punched card output provided
via attachment of a 3781 Card Punch ". see 3781.
Card Reader - reads at a rated speed of 600 cards/minute.
Provides hopper capacity of 1 200 cards and stacker capacity of
1300 cards. Only 80 column cards can be read.
Printing - prints at a rated speed of 350 lines/minute utilizing the
basic 52-character set. Interchangeable type bars of 39 and 63
character sets are available with rated speeds of 425 Ipm and 300
Ipm respectively. Only the 63 character set may be employed
when using ASCII transmiSSion code. The printer provides 120
print positions standard with feature expansion to 144 positions ".
see "Special Features." Horizontal and Vertical Format control
are provided as standard functions of the printer.
Buffers - provides two 51 2-character buffers which service the
transmission line and the I/O units alternately to provide overlap
operation for efficiency.
Buffer Checking - all characters are checked on the data path
when sent to or received from the buffer.
Variable Record Length -- end-to-end characters are used to
define the end of a record, allowing for complete variable length.
Full buffer blocks with variable length records can be transmitted
or received. On card transmission, blank positions are removed
from the end of the card record to increase the transmission
efficiency.
Space Compression/Expansion - operable under switch control,
this capability provides for the removal of consecutive spaces in
transmitted data and their re-insertion in received data. A two
character sequence is substituted for from two to sixty-three consecutive spaces. If more than sixty-three consecutive spaces are
to be transmitted, a second two character sequence will be substi~
tuted for the number of consecutive spaces greater than sixtythree. If only one space is to be transmitted, it will be transmitted
as a normal space. This feature is inoperable when transmitting in
transparency or operating in home mode.
Home Mode -- provides card reader to buffer to printer operation
in off-line non-communications mode.
Integrated 2400/1200 BPS Modem - provides 2400 bps trans~
mission with half speed backup on leased and switched facilities
... compatible with IBM 3872 Modem.
Conversation Mode -- allows a CPU to turn the communications
line around aiter receiving text and return text without additional
selection.
Audible Alarm - alerts the operator when manual intervention is
required in line mode ". unattended operation is not provided.
Communications Facilities: The 3780 operates in half duplex
mode over facility C4, C5, C6, 03, 04, D4SB, 05, D5SB, 06,
D6SB, Xl M or X2M ... for information concerning these facilities,
. see M 2700 pages. The alphameric facility designations above
correspond to those shown on the charts on those pages.
Binary Synchronous Transmission: Allows for transmission rates
of 1200, 2000, 2400, 4800, 7200/3600 bps ... see "Modems"
below and Data Set Attachment under "Specify."
Communications can be with another 3780, 2772, 2780 mdl 1, 2
or 4, a S/360 mdl 22 thru 195 (except mdl 44 or mdl 67 in TSS
mode), or any S/370 or 4300 Procedsor ... for requirements, see
"Prerequisites.' ,
In addition, the 3780 may be multi-dropped on the same line
facility with other BSC devices (1826, 2715, 2772, 2780, 3271,
3272, 3735) as tributary stations on a multi-point line with a
S/360 mdl 22-195 (except mdl 44 or mdl 67 in TSS mode), or
any S/370 or 4300 Processor as the control station. In a
switched control network, it may use the same termination (phone
number) at the computer that is used for the other BSC devices.
TransmiSSion Code: One of two codes can be selected ... see
"Specify." For printable graphics, see "Type Catalog."
EBCDIC Code - 256 character set which is the basic code of
S/360, S/370 and 4300 systems.
ASCII Code - Industry standard code with a 128 character
set.
Transmission Checking: A redundancy check is performed on all
data. EBCDIC uses a 16-bit cyclic check transmitted as two 8-bit
bytes ... ASCII uses an odd-parity VRC on each character, including the LRC character and an LRC check transmitted as a single
8-bit odd parity byte. Format check plus an odd/even block
check is provided on both code sets.
Modems: One Integrated 2400/1200 bps Modem feature, IBM
3863 Modem (2400/1200 bps), IBM 3872 Modem (2400/1200 bps),
IBM 3864 Modem (4800/2400 bps), IBM 3874 Modem (4800/2400
bps), IBM 3875 Modem (7200/3600 bps), or IBM 4872 Modem
(4800 bps) can be attached to the 3780. For communications
capabilities, product utilization, and special features, see 3863,
3864, 3872, 3874, 3875 and M 2700 pages, and Integrated Modem under "Special Features" below.
Card Limitations: Generally, scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Use of the following scores has
been approved.
Internal Scores (before separation) -- M-4, M-5, OM-2, OM-3,
S-l and 10-3 (2" x 3-1/4" or 2-3/16" x 3-3/4" sizes only).
NOTE: When using OM-2 or OM-3, reading must be terminated
prior to the scored column.
External Scores (after separation) -- M-3, M-4, M-5, M-6, M-7,
M-ll, OM-2, CF-4 and CF-ll. OM-3 may be used if the score is
on the column 1 end. NOTE: Upper left corner cut required
when the M-ll or CF-ll is used on the column 1 end.
All other scores may result in unsatisfactory performance.
Aqua cards and C-4 corner cut cards
cannot be used.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages. In addition, the
customer must be advised that when non-IBM data sets or privately owned communications facilities are used, he is responsible for
insuring that signal levels and impedances are compatible with the
IBM communications interface.
PREREQUISITES:
S/360 mdl 25 -- communications can be via the Integrated
Communications Attachment (#4580) with appropriate binary
synchronous features on the 2025, or via a 2701 Data Adapter
Unit or 2703 Transmission Control ... see below.
S/360 mdl 22-195 (except mdl 44 or 67 in TSS mode), or any
S/370 Processor -communications can be via a 2701 Data
Adapter Unit or 2703 Transmission Control equipped with approriate binary synchronous features ". see 2701, 2703. NOTES:
[1] To utilize OLT support, the host processor requires a minimum of 32K bytes of storage ... [2] The 3780 communicl;ltes only
in EBCDIC or ASCII codes ". [3] Only EBCDIC Transparency
(#3601) is available on the 3780. Therefore, a 2701 or 2703
must be configured with 3780 restrictions and limitations for
compatibility ... [4] All 3780s on a multi-point line must have the
same code, EBCDIC or ASCII.
S/360 (except mdls 22, 25, 44, 67 In TSS mode or 85), or any
S/370 Processor -communications can be via a 3704/3705
Communications Controller ... see 3704, 3705. NOTE: See the
3704 and 3705 Machines and Programming sales manual pages
for attachment capability and refer to Host System Programming
pages for possible restrictions to any of the above attachments.
S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3, 138 -- communications can be
via the Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640) and appropriate binary synchronous features on the 3115, 3125, 3135,
3135-3, 3138 as well as via a 2701, 2703 or 3704/3705.
4300 Processors -- communications via a 2701, 3704 or 3705
to all 4300 Processors, and via the Communications Adapter
feature on the 4331. See 2701, 3704/3705, 4331 and 4341 for
details and prerequisites.
3704/3705 Medium Speed Local Attachment - attachment
without modem at speeds up to 2400 bps via IBM-provided
cables. Requires Synchronous Clock ... see "Specify."
2770 Data Communication System -- communications require
Terminal Use (#9711) and the same TransJTlission Code (#9761
or #9762) on both units. The 2772 must have Buffer Expansion,
Add'l (#1491), or both the 3780 and the 2772 must have
EBCDIC Transparency.
Another 3780 -- communications require Terminal Use (#9711)
and the same Transmission Code (#9761 or #9762) on both
units ... see "Specify."
2780 Data Transmission Terminal (mdls 1, 2, 4 only) -- communications require that both terminals have EBCDIC Code (#9761
on 3780, #9762 on 2780) and EBCDIC Transparency (#3601
on 3780, #8030 on 2780). Communications can be in EBCDIC
Transparency mode only. The 3780 may not have multiple records in Transparent roode.
Bibliography:
bibliography.
See KWIC Index G320-1621 or specific system
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------
- -- ------===--':" =
DP Machines
3780 Communications Terminal (cont'd)
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60. Hz): Locking plug
- #9884 for 20.8 V or #9886 for 230. V. Non-lock plug #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 20.8 V, or #9887 for 230. V.
[2] Transmission Code: #9761 for EBCDIC or #9762 for ASCII ...
can be field installed.
[3] Character Set: ONE of the available character sets and the
. type size MUST be specified at no charge on the initial order
... see "Type Catalog" for specified characters in each set and
price for additional sets.
[4] Printer Tape Punch: Order under Part No. 120.910.
... ONE punch is furnished PER
INSTALLATION at no charge.
[5] Identification: #9350 ... provides an identification function by
which a CPU under stored program control and operating on a
switched public network, can identify a legitimate 3780..
PREREQUISITE: Switched Network Control (#7651).
[6] Terminal Use (point-to-point): #9711 ... for communications
with another 3780., 2772 or 2780.. Provides "Bell" key and
light Indicator to signal remote terminal that voice mode is
desired. Receipt of "Bell" code sounds alarm. Can be installed in the field. When communications is alternately with a
CPU and another 3780., 2772 or 2780., via switched network,
specify #9711.
[7) 370.4/370.5 Medium Speed Local Attachment: Specify Modem
or Data Set Attachment ... see item [8] below. #9121 (240.0.
bps) or #9122 (120.0. bps). Also Communications Facilities ...
see item [9] below. #9402 for half-duplex.
[8] Modem or Data Set Attachment: One of the following, depending upon facility to be used must be specified: #9120. for C5
(20.0.0. or 240.0. bps) or D4M (20.0.0. bps), #9121 for 04 or X1 M
(240.0. bps), #9122 for 03 (120.0. bps), #9123 for C4 (120.0.
bps), #9124 for 05 or X2M (480.0. bps), #9125 for D4SB
(240.0./120.0. bps), #9126 for 06 (720.0. bps), #9127 for D6SB
(720.0./360.0.), #9128 for C6 (480.0./240.0. bps), or #9129 for
D5SB (480.0./240.0. bps). Can be installed in the field. NOTE:
#9120. required with #5610., #9121 with #560.0./560.2 without #7951, #9125 with #560.0./560.2 with #7951 ... if Public
Switched Network Facility C5 is used at data rate above 240.0.
bps, specify #9128 in lieu of #9120.. PREREQUISITE: #9122
or #9123 may require Synchronous Clock (#770.5) ... see
"Special Features."
[9] Communications Facilities: #9402 for half-duplex, or #9404
for duplex. Can be changed in the field. NOTE: Features
specify 3780. control of the data set and do not necessarily
correspond to the communications facility. Specify as indicated
below:
Switched Network Operation - #940.2.
Leased Private Line (or equivalent privately owned). Multipoint - #940.2 (half-duplex), although the communications
facility may be 2-wire or 4-wire.
Point-to-point - #940.2 for 2-wire (half-duplex) communications facilities ... #940.4 for 4-wire (full duplex facilities).
NOTE: If 3780. Integrated Modem, IBM 3872, 3874 or 3875
Modem is used, specify #940.2.
[10.] Extended Retry Transmission: #9150 -- extends the maximum retry count from three (12 seconds) to a maximum of
fifteen (48 seconds) in an effort to recognize a valid response
to the last block of data transmitted, prior to sending an EOT
code and timing out with an error condition. Can be change~
in the field.
[11] Data Set Cable: A 20.' data set cable is provided as standard.
If a longer cable is required, specify #9021, indicating length
as a quantity of 25, 30., 35 or 40..
[12] WACK Response (Wait before transmit-positive acknowledge):
#9936 ... if initial WACK is to be transmitted immediately. All
subsequent WACK responses are transmitted after a 2-second
delay. Can be changed in the field.
[13] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
3780
1
$1,054
$
$21,680
$341
897
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 50.% Machine Group: A
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 1
Per Call: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0.%
• If Data Set Cable 10_ tban 20 fi. is required, specify #9021 plus length ... see
Specify (II].
M 3780..2
Jul79
SPECIAL FEATURES
Communications Special Features - use of the following special
features depends upon the communications application(s) for
which the specific 3780. is to be used.
COMPONENT SELECTION (#1601).
Provides the capability of
specific 3780. I/O device selection. In addition to component
selection, it provides priority output selection and multi-point Data
Link Control Component Selection capability. It is a prerequisite
for attachment of a 3781 Card Punch. Field Installatlqn;.• Xes.
EBCDIC TRANSPARENCY (#3601): Allows the 3780. to receive
and transmit all 256 EBCDIC bit combinations as data characters.
Variable length records cannot be transmitted if card I/O or printer is selected. Either normal or transparent text can be RECEIVED
without the "Transparency" switch being in the transparency
position. The switch must be ON for TRANSMITTING in transparency. If a terminal on a multi-point line requires this feature, all
terminals on that line must also have this feature. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: EBCDIC Transmission Code
(#9761).
KEYLOCK (#4650):
A key-operated Power-On switch for the
3780.. The key must be inserted and turned to the "On", position
before the control unit Power-On switch is operative. When the
key is turned off, power is removed from the control unit. For
additional or replacement keys, see M 10.0.0.0. pages. Field
Installation: Yes.
MULTI-POINT DATA LINK CONTROL (#5010.).
Allows multiple
378Qs to be used on the same communications line with a CPU.
Terminal can be polled or selected when operating as a tributary
station on a multi-point system. All 378Qs installed on the same
line facility require this feature and must use the same transmission code and data set attachment. Other BSC devices (2772,
2780., S/36Q, S/37Q or 430.0. Processors) as tributary stations,
can be on a multi-point line with a processor control station.
Limitation: If Terminal Use (#9711) is installed, it must be removed prior to installation of this feature. Field Installation: Yes.
INTEGRATED 2400/1200 BPS MODEM (#5600, 5602, 5610).
Provides an integrated 240.0. bps modem with half speed backup
capability. Equivalent to and compatibie with similiarly featured
IBM 3872 Modems. Three versions cover different communications requirements, as described below. Operator controls are
integrated with the 3780. operator panel. Built-in diagnostic functions are provided for local and remote testing. See M 270.0., M
3782 pages and "Prerequisites" above for additional information
on allowable machine/system combinations and required features.
Maximum: One #560.0., #560.2, or #561 C.
Leased Line Polnt-to-Polnt Modem (#5600) -- operates over 04
or (with Switched Network Backup, #7951) D4SB facilities with
a similiarly equipped 3780. or a 2770., 2780., 3780., S/36Q,
S/37Q or 430.0. Processors equipped with appropriate features
and an equivalent featured IBM 3872 Modem. Includes manual
equalization control. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Submit an RPQ for operation on a basic 30.0.2 channel. Modem
or Data Set Attachment #9121 (#9125 with Switched Network
Backup, #7951), Half Duplex (#940.2) Communications Facilities
Control. Terminal Use (#9711) may be required, depending
upon application .•
Leased Line Multipoint Tributary Modem (#5602) -- operates on
a multipoint network with a controlling CPU. Other 378Cs on the
same line facility must have either this feature or an IBM 3872
Modem with Multipoint Tributary (#510.1 or #510.2); other BSC
tributary devices on the same line facility must have an IBM 3872
Modem with #510.1 or #510.2. Utilizes 04 or (with Switqhed
Network Backup, #7951) D4SB Facilities. Includes manual
equalization control. Fiellt Installation: Yes. Limitation: Terminal Use (#9711) cannot be installed. Prerequisites: Submit an
RPQ for operation on a basic 30.0.2 channel. Modem or Data Set
Attachment #9121 (#9125 with Switched Network Backup,
#7951), Half Duplex (#940.2) Communications Facilities Control,
Multipoint Data Link Control (#50.1 C).'
Switched Network Modem (#5610.) -- operates over' the
Switched Network facility C5 with a similiarly equipped 3780. or a
2770., 2780., 3780., S/36Q, S/37Q or 430.0. Processors equipped
with appropriate features and an equivalent featured IBM 3872
Modem with Switched Network (#7941 or #7942). Provides
line
equalization.
Provides
automatic
automatic
answering/disconnect capability when used in conjunction with
Switched Network Control (#7651). Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Half Duplex operation (#940.2), Modem Attachment (#9120.).•
PRINT POSITIONS, ADDITIONAL (#5701). Provides an additional. 24 print positions for the 3780. printer. Field Installation: Yes.
SWITCHED NETWORK CONTROL (#7651).
To attach to a
switched network, provides automatic answering of incoming calls
initiated by another terminal or central computer over common
carrier switched (dial-up) facilities. T"he line must be equipped with
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
DP Machines
M 3780 - 3781
Jul79
3780 Communications Terminal (conI' d)
an appropriate data set with auto answer capability and the terminal must be in a "ready" status. Provides automatic disconnect
when disconnect sequence is received or when no data is
transmitted/received for 20 seconds. Disconnect causes audible
alarm to sound. Specify: #9850 for use with the IBM 3874 Modem. Field Installation: Yes.
SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK (#7705). A synchronous clock for use
with modems which do not have an internal clock, or for use with
3704/3705 Medium Speed Local Attachment Line Set, Type 1 F.
Will operate at 1200 bps or 2400 bps. The device with which the
3780 will communicate must also have an internal clock operating
at the same bps rate. Specify: #9702 for 1200 bps, or #9704
for 2400 bps. Field Installation: Yes.
SWITCHED NETWORK BACKUP (#7951).
Provides alternate
operation on facility D4SB for Leased Line Point-to-Point (#5600)
or Multipoint Tributary (#5602) feature. Auto answer is not provided. Half duplex mode of modem operation is forced when this
feature is selected by the operator panel "Mode" switch; a
"Talk/Data" switch is provided. This feature can be used with
OS/DOS BTAM in certain configurations. Additional use program
routines will be required to fully utilize the capabilities of this
feature. For additional information see IBM Modem Marketing
Guide. Note: 4-wire Switched Network Backup is available on the
3863 mdl 1 and 3864 mdl 2. For product utilization and feature, see 3863
or 3864. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
MRC 2 yr
Purchase MMMC
Component Selection #1601 $ 19 $16.00 $ 407
EBCDIC Transparency
$601
12
10.00
260
Keylock
4650
35 SUC 35
Multl-Pt Data Link Cntrl 5010
19
16.00
390
Int. 2400/1200 bps Modem
Leased Line pt-ta-pt
5600
77.00 2,115
90
Leased Line Mltlpt Trlb 5602
98
83.00 2,295
Sw Network Modem
5610 105
89.00 2,425
Print Positions, Add'i
5701
49.00 1,165
58
Sw Network Control
7651
19
16.00
390
Synchronous Clock
7705
32
27.00
650
Sw Network Backup
7951
10
8.50
260
$ 1.00
1.00
NC
1.00
14.00
15.50
17.50
3.00
1.00
1.00
3.00
3781
CARD PUNCH
Purpose: Punched card output unit for a 3780 Data Communications Terminal.
Highlights: Provides 80 column card output at a rated speed of
160 columns per second. Punches serially with actual throughput
dependent upon number of columns punched, commuincations
facility, and 3780 features employed. Refer to the 3780 Component Information manual for throughput calculations.
A free standing unit, cable attached within seventeen feet of the
supporting 3780. It has a 1200-card capacity hopper and a 1300card capacity prime stacker. Echo pulse check of punched data is
provided by the 3781 in addition to conventional transmission
checking provided by the 3780. Error cards are laced in card
column 82 and stacked in secondary stacker.
The unit may be used in home mode in conjunction with the 3780
card reader to create punched card output media.
Only one 3781 can be attached to a 3780 Data Communications
Terminal.
PREREQUISITES: A 3780 equipped with Component Selection
(#1601) ... see 3780.
Card limitations: Heavy duty cards. aqua cards, and C-4 corner
cut cards cannot be used. Scored cards require careful handling
and a favorable environment. Recommended use of scored cards
is limited to the following:
Internal Scores (before separation) -- S-1, 10-1, 10-2, and for a
maximum of three passes, M-4 and M-5.
External Scores (after separation) -- M-7, M-11 (with round
corners), CF-11 (with round corners) on either end of the card,
and M-3 on column 80 end only.
Bibliography: See KWIC Index G320-1621
bibliography.
or specific system
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Locking plug
- #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230 V.
Must be consistent with that specified for the 3780.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Transmission Code: #9761 for EBCDIC, or #9762 for ASCII.
Specify the same as that for the 3780. Can be field installed.
PRICES:
Mdl
3781
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$ 401
$ 341
$ 8,500
$ 69
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 50% Machine Group: A
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 1
Per Call: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 3782 - 3784
Jul.79
DP Machines
IBM 3784 LINE PRINTER
IBM 3782 CARD ATTACHMENT UNIT
Purpose: Used to attach the 2502 Card Reader mdl A 1 or A2 to
a 3774, 3775 or 3776 Communication Terminal mdl 1 or 2, or
3289 Printer mdl 3 (2502 mdl A1 only), or to attach a 3521 Card
Punch to a 3771, 3774, 3775, 3776 or 3777 Communication
Terminal mdl 2 or 3, or 3289 Printer mdl 3. Used to attach the
2502 Card Reader mdl A3 to a 3776 Communication Terminal mdl
3 or 4.
Model 1
Attaches a 3521 Card Punch.
Model 2
Attaches a 2502 Card Reader mdl A1, A2, or A3.
Model Changes: Not recommended for field Installation.
Highlights: The unit supplies power and attachment circuits and
serves as a stand for mounting the card machine.
Highlights: Maximum print speed of 155 Ipm with 48 character
set, 120 Ipm with 64 character set, or 80 Ipm with 94 character
set. Line printing is from characters engraved on a revolving metal
print belt.
Included as standard is one interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or
94 character set) ... see "Specify." A variable width forms tractor
for feeding continuous forms up to 15" overall width, paper jam
detection, compress/expand, printer forms control, dual buffers,
and 132 print positions. Character spacing is 10 per inch, line
spacing is 6 or 8 per inch.
tq
PREREQUISITES:
Model 1 - requires 3782/3521 Card Punch Attachment (#8150)
on the 3289 mdl 3, 3771, 3774, 3775, 3776 or 3777 mdl 2 or 3
and a 3521 Card Punch.
Model 2 - requires 3782/2502 Card Reader Attachment
(#8149) on the 3289 mdl 3, 3774, 3775 or 3776 mdl 1 or 2
and a 2502 Card Reader mdl A1 or A2. Requires 3782/2502
Card Reader Attachment (#8149) on the 3776 mdl 3 or 4 and a
2502 Card Reader mdl A 1, A2 or A3. The following specify
features are required on the 2502: #9901 for 115 V AC, and
#9046 for white color.
Bibliography:
Purpose: A line printer for attachment to a 3774 Communication
Terminal for use as a second printer or attachment to a 3651
Model 50 Retail Store Controller or 3651 Model 75 Programmable
Store Controller.
GC20-0001
Limitations: Refer
GA24-3488 for forms design considerations.
Printed output is not supported for optical character reading.
PREREQUISITE: 3784 Attachment (#8155) on the 3774
Communication Terminal or 3784 Attachment (#8154) on the
3651 Model 50 Retail Store Controller or 3651 Model 75
Programmable Store Controller.
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent. is
required
Bibliography:
GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz):
#9880 for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9880
for locking plug, or #9881 for non-lock plug.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray. NOTE: Available at time of manufacture only.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
[3] Remote Power Off: #9501 ... specify this feature for capability
to power down the 3774 and 3784 from the host CPU using a
controlled data sequence sent over communications facilities.
The 3774 must also be equipped with #9501. Not available
with 3651 mdl A50, B50, A75 or B75 Attachment (#9716) or
the 3651 mdl C75 or 075 Attachment (#9717).
[3] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
3782
1
2
$ 41
59
$ 35
50
$ 1,400
2,000
$ 2.00
1.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60%Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
OPTICAL MARK READ (#5455). [Model 2'only] Required when
the attached 2502 is equipped with Optical Mark Read (#5450).
Maximum: One. limitations: Refer to 2502 writeup for feature
description and card limitations. Not permitted if the 2502 is
attached to a 3776 mdl 3 or 4 or a 3777. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Optical Mark Read
MAC/
MRC
#5455 $ 25
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
$ 21 $ 840
[4] Print Belt Character Set: Specify one. Available at time of
manufacture only. See Print Belt in M 10000 pages if more
than one print belt is required.
#9490
#9491
#9492
#9493
#9494
#9495
--
48
64
94
48
64
94
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Character
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
Set,
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
EBCDIC
ASCII
#1201 req'd on 3774
ASCII
#1201 req'd on 3774
ASCII
#1201 req'd on 3774
[5] Cabling: Fixed length cables are supplied as standard. Refer
to Installation Manual- Physical Planning, GA27-3006.
[6] 3651 Retail or Programmable Controller Attachment: Specify
#9716 for attachment of a 3784 mdl 1 to a 3651 mdl A50,
B50, A75 or B75. Specify #9717 for attachment of a 3784 mdl
1 to a 3651 mdl C75 or 075. Prerequisites: The 3651 mdl 50
or mdl 75 must be equipped with #8154 and have a minimum
of 48K of storage. Note: Remote Power Off (#9501) not
available with attachment to 3651 mdl 50 or mdl 75.
$1.50
PRlCES:
3784
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$358
$305
$12,200
$83,50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 40%Machlne Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Accessories: The following items are available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 pages
for additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) - Permits placement of continuous
forms (out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
PRINT BELT, ADDITIONAL (#5811, #5812, #5813, #5821,
#5822, #5823) -- Permits the customer to obtain more than
one character print belt for various applications.
48-char ASCII (#5811)*
48-char EBCDIC (#5821)
64-char ASCII (#5812)*
64-char EBCDIC (#5822)
94-char ASCII (#5813)*
94-char EBCDIC (#5823)
• ASCII Feature (#1201) on the 3774 is prerequisite.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ --= =-
- - =--';' =
M 3791.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
3791 CONTROLLER Models 1 A, 1 B, 1 C, 2A, 2B
Purpose: The IBM 3791 Controller serves as an intelligent base
for clusters of operator stations attached to the 3790 Communica~ion System. The 3791 communicates with the Host System (any
virtual storage S/370 or 4300 Processor' ') by local channel
attachment to the byte or block multiplexer channel or the
3704/3705 Communications Controller over switched or nonswitched lines utilizing Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC).
Also attaches via a Communications Adapter feature on the 4331
Processor.
Model lA
[No longer available) Provides 5 million bytes' of
disk storage.
ModellB
[No longer available) Provides 10 million bytes'
of disk storage.
ModellC
Provides 10 million bytes' of disk storage.
Model2A
Provides 20 million bytes' of disk storage.
Model2B
Provides 30 million bytes' of disk storage.
Note: Models 1 A and 1 B are no longer available.
Maximum: One 3791 per 3790 system.
Highlights:
3790 Communication System #9431, #9165, #9169
When used in the 3790 Communication System, the 3791 is a
programmable controller providing users with remote processing
capability, disk storage data files and control of terminal clusters.
Flexibility of the 3791 enables the user to efficiently configure a
3790 System for initial requirements with the ability to change
system hardware and functions to meet future needs. This configuration flexibility is attained by the selection of Special Feature and
Specify Feature codes.
Confl9uratlon Support #9431
When used with Configuration Support #9431, the 3791 provides
for attachment of 3277 Display Station mdls 1 and 2,
3284/3286/3287 Printers and/or 3288 Line Printer mdl 25. The
3791 Controller will permit up to a maximum of thirty-one 3277,
3284/3286/3287 and/or 3288 devices to be attached in any
combination. In addition, up to a maximum of four 3793 KeyboardPrinters can be attached to the 3791 control unit giving a maximum possible total of 35 devices attached to the 3791 Controller.
Up to three 3792 Auxiliary Control Units may also be attached.
Higher speed print capability of up to 410 Ipm is provided by the
3791 printer feature.
In addition to the Host Link attachment, the 3791 has the capabilIty to operate independently of the host via the Batch Data Exchange feature (#9037). The 3791 Controller performs all the
logic and arithmetic functions to support concurrent operation of
16 user tasks, one host communications task and two system
printers. Removable diskette storage and up to 26.9' million bytes
of disk storage are provided.
All 3790 programs are compiled and can be tested at the host
computer prior to use at the remote locations, minimizing program
development costs and helping assure uniformity of operations
through the system. User-oriented application programs allow
byte-by-byte and field editing, host file update, file organization
option and operator sharing of 3791 programs and data sets.
Reliability, Availability and Serviceability (RAS) capabilities ensure
efficient system operation by minimizing the 1055 of system data.
The 3790 has several features that assist in preventing unauthorized use of the system. Optional security and power-on keylocks
prevent units from being made operational unless a key switch is
operated. Operator-identification codes and password checking
help prevent unauthorized personnel from using the system.
Confl9uratlon Support #9165
When used with this Configuration Support, the 3791 supports the
functions and terminals offered by Configuration Support #9431
and provides expanded 3790 system capabilities. The additional
capabilities of this Configuration Support consist of 3270 compatibility, full screen processing, RJE function, host link line speeds of
up to 9600 bps subject to carrier availability, up to 31 concurrent
tasks, Including the System printer tasks, ASCII support, and
expanded 3790 DB/DC VTAM and TCAM host support.
• Disk storage available for user program. and data storaF is configuration dependent.
Minimum storage based on a maximum 3791 configuratton is 3.9 to 26.S million bytes
for Configuration Support #9431. 3.4 to 26.0 million bytes for Configuration Support
#9165, and #9431 with Expanded Index #9142. 2.4 to 25.1 million bytes for Configuration Support #9169 and Configuration Support #9165 with ConflSuration Conversion
#9530, and #9431 with #9142 and #9350. 3.7 to 7.4 million bytes for Configuration
~1fo':b~~5ic;/~.!f';;':Zti~~~~~~e:J~~5configUration Support #9175, 7.2 to 25.7
.*
Confl9uratlon Support #9169
The 3790 Communication System now provides a data link adapter
feature which allows communications with geographically dispersed displays and printers. When used with this Configuration
Support, the 3791 supports the functions and terminals offered by
Configuration Support #9431 and #9165 and provides additional
3790 system capabilities. The additional capabilities of this Configuration Support include attachment to the 3791 Controller via
the Data Link Adapter of the 3276 Control Unit Display Station,
3278 Display and 3287, 3289 printers (see 3791 Data Link Adapter for models) and attachment of the 3411 MagnetiC Tape Unit
and Control mdl 1 and 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1. Additional
storage is also provided.
3791 Test Site Designation (#9595) for all confl9uretlons.
The purpose of #9595 is to provide the 3790 customer with the
ability to designate a test site location at which he wants to install
a mandatory Control Code Engineering Change. Receipt of
changes at this location will occur before a new production unit
can reach the customer network and before the change is distributed to other installed locations requiring the change.
#3791 Alternate Mailing Address (#9596) for Control Code
Engineering Changes
The purpose of #9596 is to provide the 3790 customer with the
option to have Mandatory Control Code Engineering Changes
shipped to a single address, generally central site, for greater
Network Management Control. The alternate address is controlled
through assignment of a Teleprocessing
Control Number (TPC #) or Microcode Control Number (MC #).
Redistribution of the control code EC is the responsibility of the
customer.
3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration #9155,
#9175, #9195
When used in the 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration, the 3791 will provide Data Entry users with editing and
checking capability that results in improved data accuracy and
productivity. Flexibility in configuration is attained by the selection
of Configuration Support, Special Feature and Specify codes.
Configuration Support #9155
When used with Configuration Support #9155, the 3791 provides
for the attachment of 3760 Dual Key Entry Station mdl 1 and mdl
2, and 3760 Key Entry Station mdl 3. The 3791 Controller will
permit up to a maximum of eight 3760 mdl 1s and/or mdl 35 to
be attached in any combination. Up to two 3760 mdl 25 can be
attached to a 3760 mdl 1. A maximum of twelve stations equal to
a maximum of twenty-four operator positions is supported if not
combined with 3760 mdl 3s. For each attached 3760 mdl 3 the
maximum number of operator positions is reduced by one. For
combinations and limitations refer to Configuration Guidelines,
GA33-4552. Supports 3791 mdls 1A, 1Band 1C. Printing at the
3791 is provided by the Line Printer (#4710) feature. Data Extraction can be done by diskette.
Configuration Support #9175
When used with Configuration Support #9175, the 3791 supports
the functions and stations offered by Configuration Support #9155
and provides in addition user programmable subroutines and
expanded concurrency support and the attachment of the 3411
Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1. Supports 3791 mdls 1 B,
1 C, 2A and 2B. For combinations and limitations see Configuration
Guidelines, GA33-4562.
Configuration Support #9195 (3762 and 3760)
With Configuration Support #9195, the 3791 supports 3762
Payment Transaction Processing in addition to the functions,
stations and output facilities offered by Configuration Support
#9175 and the attachment of the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and
Control mdl 1. The 3791 Controller will permit up to a maximum
of eight 3762 Payment Transaction Processors and/or 3760 mdl 1
or 3 stations to be attached in any combination. A maximum of
sixteen operator positions is supported if only 3762s are attached.
If 3762s are mixed with 3760s a maximum of twenty-four operator
positions may be supported. For combinations and limitations, see
Configuration Guidelines, GA33-4572. Supports 3791 mdls 1 B,
1 C, 2A and 2B.
The maximum number of specific terminals attached to the 3791
with Configuration Support #9431, #9165, #9169, #9155,
#9175 or #9195 is dependent upon the 3790 System. In addition, the number of attached terminals that may be operational will
depend on the number of task and task mixes. The following
manuals will provide additional details for system configuration.
See CICS pages in Programming for restrictions.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
.i ,
-- -----'---- - --==-=
':' =
--
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B (cont'd)
... For Configuration Support #9431, #9165, #9169
An Introduction to the IBM 3790 Communication System, GA272807-2
IBM 3790 Communication System Configurator, GA27-2768-7
IBM 3790 Communication System Installation Manual - Physical
Planning, GA27-2769-6
'
For Configuration Support #9155
IBM 3790 Communication System Data Entry Configuration Introduction, GA33-4550
IBM 3790 Communication System Data Entry Configuration Guideline, GA33-4552
IBM 3790 Communication System Installation Manual Physical
Planning, GA27-2769-6
IBM 3790 Communication System Data Entry Configuration Functional Description, GA33-4551,
For Configuration Support #9175
IBM 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration
IBM 3760 Key Entry Station
Introduction, GA33-4560
Configuration Guidelines, GA33-4562
Functional Description, GA33-4561
IBM 3790 Communication System
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2769
IBM 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration
User Programmability Planning Guide, GC33-5903,
For Configuration Support #9195
IBM 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration
IBM 3762 Payment Transaction Processor
Introduction, GA33-4570
Configuration Guldeleines, GA33-4572
Functional Description, GA33-4571
IBM 3790 Communication System
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA27-2769
IBM 3762 Payment Transaction Processor
Paper and Printing Requirements, GA33-4576
Document Gauge, GX33-8505
IBM 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration
User Programmability Planning Guide, GC33-5903
Communications Facilities: SDLC using switched point-to-point
lines at speeds of up to 4800 bps, or non-switched polnt-to-polnt,
or non-switched multipoint lines at speeds of up to 9600 bps via
the 3704 or 3705, Also attaches via a Communications Adapter
feature on the 4331 Processor. See M 2700 pages.
Host/3791 Communications:
Byte and/or Block Multiplexer Channel
1200 BPS Integrated Modem, Non-switched and Switched
IBM 3863 Modem. Non-switched and Switched
IBM 3864 Modem. Non-switched and Switched
IBM 3865 Modem. Non-switched
IBM 3872 Modem, Non-switched and Switched
IBM 3874 Modem, Non-switched and Switched
IBM 3875 Modem, Non-switched
PREREQUISITE: Direct attachment to a S/370 or 4300 Processor
byte and/or block multiplexer channel with Local Channel Attachment (#1515) or remote attachment utilizing one SDLC Communications feature (#6301, #6302 or #6303) for Host system communications.
Communications with a 3704, 3705 or Communications Adapter on
4331 Processor is via a 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500,
#5501), or an external modem attached via the EIA Interface
(#3701) feature. See M 2700 pages.
To operate a Configuration Support System (#9431, #9165 or
#9169) at least one 3793 Keyboard-Printer or 3277 Display
Station with Keyboard is necessary.
To operate a 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration (#9155 or #9175) at least one 3760 key entry station mdl 1
or 3 is necessary. For Configuration Support #9195 at least one
3762 Payment Transaction Processor or 3760 Key Entry Station
mdl 1 or 3 Is necessary.
Bibliography: GC20-o370
SPECIFY: For details pertaining to specify codes, refer to Configuration Support (#9431, #9165 or #9169) Configurator, GA272768-7, or to 3790 Communication System/Data Entry (#9155)
Configurator, GA33-4552, (#9175) Configuration Guidelines,
GA33-4562, or (#9195) Configuration Guidelines, GA33-4572.
[1] Voltage (AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Moisture proof plug • •• See IlOmplele publicatiOllB lisl in the IBM 3790 Communication System Library
Reference Summary, 0X23-020S,
M 3791.2
Jul79
#9902 for 208 V or #9904 for 230 V. Locking plug - #9880
for 115 V (mdl 1A, 1B only), #9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for
230 V. Field conversion is possible between #9880 and
#9884 or #9880 and #9886. No other conversions are possible.
[2] Color: Available at time of manufacture only. Specify #9041
for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or #9045 for gray.
[3] Upending Kit (in the event the 3791 must be placed on end to
enter installation area): #9840 is required for models 1C, 2A
and 2B only.
[4] Cables: See M 10000 pages for price and ordering instructions.
[5] ASCII Support: Specify #9022 for ASCII support. ASCII support Is provided for the Host Link, Diskette, 3276, 3277, 3278,
3284, 3286, 3287, 3288, 3289, 3791 Line Printers (#4710,
#4711 or #4715), and Magnetic Tape Attachment (#7840).
Only ASCII support type B is provided for the 3276, 3278,
3287 and 3289. Not available with Configuration Support
#9431. ASCII support for #9155, #9175 and #9195 Is limited
to Keyboard and Displays.
[6] Print Belt Character Set: Specify for 3791 Line Printer one of
the following. (These specify codes are available at time of
manufacture only). The 48 character print belt is used for both
EBCDIC and ASCII.
For feature codes #4710, #4711 or #4715.
#9431 #9155 #9175 #9195 #9Ui5 #9169
X
X
X
X
X
#9071 -- 48 Char Sel, EBCDIC
#9072 -- 64 Char Sel, EBCDIC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
#9073 -- 96 Char Set, EBCDIC
#9071 -- 48 Char Set, ASCII
X
X
#9074 .- 64 Char Set, ASCII
X
X
#9075 -- 96 Char Set, ASCII
X
X
If additional print belts are required, see "Print Belts" in M
10000 pages -- Accessories.
[7] Configuration Support: The 3791 System Configuration Support
must be determined before specifying the functions required
and ordering special features. Field Installation: Yes. Specify
one of the following:
#9431 -- for up to 16 concurrent device operations. Must be
ordered for all 3791 s without #9155, #9165, #9169,
#9175 or #9195. Limitations: Not available with #9155,
#9165, #9169, #9175 or #9195.
#9165 - for up to 31 concurrent device operations and expanded 3790 System capabilities. Prerequisite: Additional
Disk Heads (#3220 or #3221), one Control Storage Expansion (#1590) and the following Control Storage Increments:
Three Type lAs (#1603), and one Type IIA (#1613).
Limitation: Not available with Configuration Support #9431,
#9155, #9169, #9175 or #9195.
#9169 - for support of Data Link Adapter, 3276 Control Unit
Display Station, 3278 Display Station, 3287 and 3289 printers (see 3790 Systems pages for models), Additional Storage, and attachment of the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and
Control mdl 1 and 3410 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1.
Prerequisites: One Additional Disk Heads (#3220 or
#3221), one Control Storage Expansion Type I (#1591), six
Control Storage Increment Type IA (#1603) and one Control
Storage Increment Type IIA (#1613). Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: Not available with Configuration Support
#9431, #9165, '#9155, #9175 or #9195. Available only
with machines at EC level 744565 shipped after July 1,
1976.
#9155 - for 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration. Prerequisite: Control Storage Expansion (#1590),
Device Attachment Type I (#7900), Additional Disk Heads
(#3220 for mdl lA, #3221 for lB or lC only). Limitations:
Only available with a 3791 mdl 1A, 1B or 1C. Not available
with Configuration Support #9431, #9165, #9169, #9175
or #9195.
#9175 - for 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration, and the attachment of the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit
and Control mdl 1. Prerequisites: Device Attachment Type I
(#7900), Additional Disk Heads (#3221 for mdls lB, lC, 2A
and 2B), one Control Storage Expansion (#1590), and the
following Control Increments: One Type IA (#1603), and
three Type liAs (#1613). Limitations: Not available with
3791 mdl 1A and. with Configuration Support #9431 ,
#9165, #9169, #9155 or #9195.
#9195 - for 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration using the 3762 Payment Transaction Processor, and
the attachment of the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
mdl 1. Prerequisite: Device Attachment Type I (#7900),
Additional Disk Heads (#3221 for mdls 1B, 1 C. 2A and 2B),
Control Storage Expansion (#1590), and the following Con-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
('
\~
---= =- - =----':' =
-- -----
M 3791.3
Jul79
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B (cont'd)
trol Storage Increments: one Type IA (#1603) and three
Type liAs (#1613). Limitations: Not available with 3791 mdl
1A and with Configuration Support #9431, #9155, #9165,
#9169 or #9175.
[8] Configuration: For each 3790 System Configuration Support
(#9431, #9155, #9165, #9169, #9175 or #9195), the 3791
must be conditioned to support the function being provided and
the terminals attached. Future modifications to a 3790 System
must be specified by changes to the configuration features for
the 3791.
IBM 3790 Communication System (#9431, #9165 or #9169)
The selection of the following function and attachment specify
codes is required to complete the 3791 Configuration order. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Not available with Configuration Support #9155, #9175 and #9195. Purchase customers must submit
an RPQ for field conversion from #9431 or #9165 to #9169.
Device/Facility
3791 Controller
3792 Attachment
9110
9120
9130
First 3792
Second 3792
Third 3792
Prerequisite: #9431, #9165 or
#9169.
3793 Attachment
9011
Specify total number of 3793s
attached by ordering quantity.
Maximum 4 with #9431 ... 3
with #9165 or #9169. Prerequisite: #9431, #9165 or #9169
3277, 3284, 3286, 9200
3287, 3288
Attachment
Specify total number of devices
attached by ordering quantity.
Maximum: 31. Prerequisite:
#9431, #9165 or #9169.
Specify for any attached model 2
device. Maximum: 1
Prerequisite: #9431 or #9165.
9250
3792 Auxiliary Control Unit
Batch Data
Exchange via
Diskette
9037 Optional, order only if required.
Prerequisite: One #9431 or #9165
and #6301, #6302, #6303
or #1515.
Configuration
Conversion
9350 Optional, order only if required.
Prerequisites: #9431 and #9142,
#9430, #9424 and #9774 or
#9165 and #9424 and #9774.
See Note 2.
Note 1: Machines shipped prior to July 1, 1976 and not at
Factory EC level 744209 or higher cannot take advantage of the installation assist function of Specify Feature #9142. Configuration Support #9165 can be
field installed on these machines but requires reinstall
of the data base. See Field Installation of Special Features #3220 and #3221.
Note 2: Machines shipped prior to July 1, 1976 and not at
Factory EC level 744565 or higher cannot install
Specify Feature #9350 on Configuration Support
#9169. Models 2A and 28 with serial numbers 20113
through 20196, excluding numbers 20165, 20190 and
20194, must have Field EC 746445 installed with
Configuration conversion #9350 on second and third
position disk storage files to avoid reinstall later for
feature #3221 on these files.
User Data Set
9501 For first add'l 16 user Data Sets.
Maximum: 1. Prerequisite:
#9431 or #9165.
9502 For second add'l 16 user Data Sets.
Maximum: 1. Prerequisite:
#9431 or #9165.
User Sessions
9344 Optional number of 31 available.
When specified, Minimum: 1.
Maximum: 16 with #9431 ...
31 with #9165. Prerequisite:
#9431 or #9165.
System Activity
9149 Specify to define concurrent
device activity. Minimum: 1.
Maximum: 31. Prerequisite:
#9165.
9150 Specify #9150 once for each device
that is operational when host is
active. Prerequisite: #9431.
9151 Specify #9151 once for each
additional device that is
operational when host is inactive.
Prerequisite: 9431.
RJE Function
9541 Specify only if required.
Prerequisite: #9165.
9542 RJE Console. One required.
Prerequisite: #9541.
9543 Specify if RJE Reader is required.
Prerequisite: #9541. Maximum: 1 .
9544 Specify if RJE Writer is required.
Maximum: 1. Prerequisite: #9541.
9545 Line Printer. Maximum: 2.
Prerequisite: #9541.
9546 RJE Logical Unit. Minimum; 1
Maximum: 5. Prerequisite: #9541.
Test Site
9595 To designate a 3791 location as a
test site for Mandatory Control
Code Engineering Changes.
Alternate
Mailing
Address
9596 To designate that an
alternate mailing address
is available for control
code engineering changes.
Prerequisite: #9431, #9165 or #9169.
Second 3792
First 3792
Maximum
Per 3792
Two
Four
One
2741
Line
3793 Pr!.
9115
2741
Line
3793 Pr!.
9125
9111
Third 3792
Line
2741 3793 Pr!.
9135
9121
9131
9129
9119
9139
Specify the above codes by ordering quantity. Order once for
each unit attached .. NOTE: Only one 3792 line printer feature
may be attached to a 3790 System. The one printer can be
attached to anyone of the 3792 Auxiliary Controllers. See
"Limitations" in 3792 Machines pages for details.
Support Functions - #9431 and #9165
Configuration Support #9165 provides all the functions of Configuration Support #9431. Some of the functions may not require ordering for Configuration Support #9165. Prerequisites
will determine requirements for #9431 or #9165.
Functions
Specify# Comment
Line Printer
Print Data Set
(specify one)
9561 132 print positions.
Prerequisite: #9431 or #9165.
9562 96 character print belt.
Prerequisite: #9431.
9421
9422
9423
9424
1024 Records
2048 Records
4096 Records
8192 Records
Prerequisite: #9431 or #9165.
Transaction Data 9771 1024 Records
Set (specify one) 9772 2048 Records
9773 4096 Records
9774 8192 Records
Prerequisite: #9431 or #9165.
Control Storage
Configuration
9531 Control Storage Configuration 1
9532 Control Storage Configuration 2
9533 Control Storage Configuration 3
Prerequisite: #9431.
Additional 3790
Functions
9430 Optional, order only if required.
Prerequisite: #9431.
Expanded Program 9142 Optional, order only if required.
Index
Prerequisite: #9431 and #9430.
See NOte 1.
Support Functions - #9169
Configuration Support #9169 provides all the functions of Configuration Support #9431 and #9165. Only the following functions require ordering for Configuration Support #9169.
Function
Speclfy# Comment
Line Printer
9561 132 print pOSitions.
Prerequisite: #9169.
System Activity
9149 Specify to define concurrent
device activity.
Minimum: 1 Maximum: 31
Prerequisite: #9169.
Batch Data
Exchange via
Diskette /Tape
9037 Optional, order only if required.
Prerequisites: #9169 and #6301,
#6302, #6303 or #1515.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- --- ----------
M 3791.4
Jul79
=== ':' =
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 1A, 18, 1C, 2A, 28 (cont'd)
RJE Function
9541 Specify only if required.
Prerequisite: #9169.
Field conversion charge for Model 1 C to Model 2A is $6,100 ...
from Model lC to Model 2B is $12,200.
Test Site
9595 To designate a 3791 location as a
test site for mandatory control
code engineering changes.
Alternate
Mailing
Address
9596 To designate that an
alternate mailing address
is available for control
code engineering changes.
Additional User
Sessions
9345 Optional, order only if required.
Provides 1 5 additional user sessions
Basic system provides 16 user
sessions. Prerequisite: #9169.
SPECIAL FEATURES
IBM 3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration
(#9155, #9175 or #9195)
The selection of the following function and attachment specify
codes is required to complete the 3791 configuration. The prerequisite for each specify code will indicate the availability of that
capability with the selected Configuration Support (#9155,
#9175, #9195). Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Not available
with Configuration Support
#9431,
#9165 or #9169.
Prerequisite: Configuration Support #9155, #9175 or #9195.
Function
Specify# Comment
Concurrency
9060 Specify if 1 thru 9, 3760 Stations
are active during data transmission
to or from the host. Concurrency is
not supported with 10 to 12 3760s
active during data transmission to
or from the host. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: #9155.
1 thru 6 stations
9156 Specify if 6 is maximum number of
stations planned for attachment.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
#9155, #9175 or #9195.
1 thru 9 stations
9157 Specify if 9 is maximum number of
stations planned for attachment.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
#9155, #9175 or #9195.
1 thru 12 stations 9158 Specify if 1 2 is maximum number of
stations planned for attachment.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
#9155, #9175 or #9195.
User programmable subroutines
9850 Specify only if required. Prerequisite:
#9175 or #9195 and #7500.
Line Printer
9561 132 print positions.
Prerequisite: #9175 or #9195.
Test Site
9595 To designate a 3791 location as a
test site for mandatory control
code engineering changes.
Alternate
Mailing
Address
9596 To designate that an
alternate mailing address
is available for control
code engineering changes.
PRICES:
3791
• •• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: Installation of the
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM.
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
1A
18
1C
2A
28
$ 541
541
541
717
893
$ 460
460
460
610
760
$18,700
18,700
18,700
24,800
30,900
$167
178
204
194
248
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Machine Group: 0
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Chg Percent: 25%
Termination Chg Mnths: 5
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Note: Models 1 A and 1B are no longer available.
Model Changes: Model 1A can be changed to Model 1 B. This
upgrade requires replacement of disk storage. Adequate provision
must be made for retaining data contained on disk storage and
elimination of user proprietary information. limitation: A model
change from mdl 1A to mdl 1 B for purchase customers requires
Model 2A can be changed to
submission of an RPQ
model 2B. Model 1 C can be changed to model 2A or 2B. No
other changes are possible.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Field conversion charge for Model 1 A to Model 1 B is by RPQ
LOCAL CHANNEL ATTACHMENT (#1515).
Provides for direct
attachment to S/370 mdls 115**, 125, 135, 135-3, 138, 145,
145-3, 148, 155 II, 158, 158MP, 158AP, 3031, 3032, 3033 or
4300 Processor via an integrated byte and/or block multiplexer
channel and mdls 165 II, 168, 168MP, 168AP via 2870 byte
multiplexer channel and 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. Maximum distance from the channel is 200 feet. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed with SDLC
Communications feature (#6301, #6302 or #6303). Not available
on the Block Multiplexer Channel with Configuration Support
#9431.
ADDITIONAL DISK HEADS (#3220, 3221). [#3220 for Mdl lA
... #3221 for Mdls 1B, 1 C, 2A, 2B] Provides additional disk
heads necessary for use with Configuration Support #9155,
#9165, #9169, #9175 or #9195. Maximum: One for #9155
and #9165 ... three for #9169, #9175 and #9195. Field
Installation: Yes ... machines shipped prior to July 1, 1976 and
not at EC level 744209 require the removal of disk storage. Mdls
2A and 2B with serial numbers 20113 thru 20196, excluding
numbers 20165, 20190 and 20194, at factory EC level 744209
require removal of disk storage in the second and third positions
to field install #3221. See chart below to verify replacement
requirement of each disk storage (enclosure).
Mdl 1B, lC,
MdilA
2A,2B
• Label color on each disk storage
White
Orange
(enclosure) indicates replacement
necessary for additional heads.
Label color on each disk storage
Pink
(enclosure) indicates additional heads
installable without replacement of enclosure.
Blue
• Adequate provision must be made for retaining data contained on all disk storage in machine and elimination of user
propriatary information. All replaced parts become the property
of IBM.
Limitations: One is required on a mdl 1 A, 1 B or 1 C for Configuration Support #9155. One is required on a mdl 1 A, 1 B, 1C, 2A or
2B for Configuration Support #9165 or #9169. With Configuration Support #9175 and #9195 one is required on a mdl 1 B or
1 C, two are required on a mdl 2A, and three are required on a
mdl 2B. Not available with #9431. Prerequisite: Configuration
Support #9155, #9165, #9169, #9175 or #9195.
LINE PRINTER - 80 PRINT POSITIONS 155 LPM (#4710). Provides a line printer with maximum speeds of 155 LPM with 48
character set, 1 20 LPM with 64 character set and 80 LPM with 96
character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or 96 character set). ASCII or EBCDIC character set must be specified. Capability to print on continuous fan
fold paper up to 80 print positions on an 8-inch (20 cm) print line
with line spacing of 6 lines per inch (2.54 cm). Paper up to six
parts plus carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches or .50
mm) can be accomodated. Maximum paper width is 15" overall.
Refer to form design reference guide for printers (GA24-3488) for
form design considerations. Card stock is not recommended. A
form jam detection capability is provided. Order IBM Part No.
1136634 or equivalent, for replacement ribbons. Maximum: One.
Limitations: Line printers on the 3791 and 3792 must have the
same number print positions. The 48, 96 and ASCII character sets
are not available with Configuration Support #9155. The 96 and
ASCII character sets are not available with Configuration Support
#9175 or #9195. With Configuration Support #9155 the Line
Printer (#4710) can be used during data transmission between the
3791 and the host when the system is configured'for concurrency.
Field Installation: Yes. Specify: See "Print Belt Character Set"
under Specify for ordering 48, 64 or 96 character sets.
LINE PRINTER - 132 PRINT POSITIONS 155 LPM (#4711). Provides a line printer with maximum speeds of 155 LPM with 48
character set, 120 LPM with 64 character set and 80 LPM with 96
character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or 96 character set). ASCII or EBCDIC character set must be specified. Capability to print on continuous fan
fold paper up to 132 print positions on a 13.2-inch (33.5 cm) print
line with line spacing of 6 lines per inch (2.54 cm). Paper up to
six parts plus carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches or
.50 mm) can be accomodated. Refer to form design reference
guide for printers (GA24-3488) for form design considerations.
Field conversion charge for Model 2A to Model 2B is $6,100.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'--- --------=-----'-:-' -=
-= =-
M 3791.5
Jul79
DP Machines
3791 Controller Model8 1A, 18, 1C, 2A, 28 (cont'd)
Card stock is not recommended. A form jam detection capability is
provided, Order IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent, for replacement ribbons. Maximum: One. Field In8t8l1ation: Yes. Specify:
See "Print Belt Character Set" under Specify for ordering 48, 64
or 96 character sets. Limitation8: Line printers on the 3791 and
3792 must have the same number print positions. Not available
with Configuration Support #9155. The 96 and ASCII character
sets are not available with Configuration Support #9175 or
#9195.
LINE PRINTER· 132 PRINT POSITIONS 410 LPM (#4715). Provides a higher speed line printer with maximum speeds of 410
LPM with 48 character set, 300 LPM with 64 character set, and
230 LPM with 96 character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or 96 character set) and a
forms stand which is an integral part of this feature. ASCII or
EBCDIC character set must be specified. Capability to print on
continuous fan fold paper up to 132 print positions on a 13.2·inch
(33.5 cm) print line. Line density is 6 lines per inch with #9431.
With Configuration Support #9165 or #9169, 6 or 8 lines per
inch density is available and is program selected. Paper up to six
parts plus carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches or .50
mm) can be accomodated. Refer to form design reference guide
for printers (GA24-3488) for forms design considerations. Card
stock is not recommended. A form jam detection capability is
provided. Order IBM Part No. 1136670 or equivalent, or special
application ribbon, Part No. 1299610, or equivalent, for replacement ribbons. Maximum, One. Limitations: Line printer on the
3792 must have 132 print positions (#4713). Not available with
Configuration Support #9155. The 96 and ASCII character sets
are not available with Configuration Support #9175 or #9195.
Field In8tallatlon: Yes. Specify: See "Print Belt Character Set"
under Specify for ordering 48, 64 or 96 character sets.
MAGNETIC TAPE ATTACHMENT (#7840).
Provides for the
attachment of the 3411 Magnetic Tape Unit and Control mdl 1.
Additional tape capacity is provided by attachment of the 3410
Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 via the 3411. The total number of tape
units (3411 and 3410) on a 3791 Controller is four. Maximum:
One. Field In8tallatlon: Yes. Prerequlslte8: 3790 System Attachment (#7003), Single Density (#3211) or Dual Density (#3221)
on the 3411 and 3791 Configuration Support #9169, #9175 or
#9195 on the 3791. Restrictions: Not available with Configuration
Support #9155, #9165 or #9431. Limitations: Configuration
Support #9175 and #9195 do not support attachment of the
3410 mdl 1 tape unit. Only the 3411 Single Density feature
(#3211) and Dual Density feature (#3221) are supported by the
3791 Controller.
DEVICE ATTACHMENT TYPE I (#7900). Allows attachment of
up to three 3792 Auxiliary Control Units or four 3760 Dual Key
Entry Station mdl 1s or four 3760 Key Entry Station mdl 3s or four
3762 Payment Transaction Processors or any combination of four
of these stations at a distance of 2000 feet. Each 3760 mdl 1 can
attach up to two 3760 mdl 2s. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitations: All attached units must be the same machine
type except for #9195 which allows mixing of 3760 and 3762
units. Prerequisite: Configuration Support (#9155, #9175 or
#9195) for 3760 attachment or (#9195) for 3760 and 3762
attachment or (#9431, #9165 or #9169) for 3792 attachment.
(#1613) is installed.
Prerequisite: 3793 Attachment (#7901).
3793 ATTACHMENT, ADD'L (#7903). [Mdl 1A or 1B only] To
attach a third or fourth 3793 to a 3791 mdl 1A or 1 B. Maximum:
Two. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 3793 Attachment Second (#7902). Limitations: If Control Storage Increment Type
II (#1612), or Type IIA (#1613) is installed, only three 3793s can
be attached with Configuration Support #9431. For #9165 or
#9169, the maximum is three 3793s. Not available with Magnetic
Tape Attachment (#7840).
DEVICE ATTACHMENT TYPE II (#7911). Allows attachment of
up to any combination of four 3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s
and/or 3288s to the 3791. For Display and Printer features
supported by the 3790 System, see 3790 Communication
Configurator, GA27-2768 and Introduction to the 3790 System for
details. Maximum: One per 3791. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Not available with Configuration Support #9155,
#9175 or #9195.
DEVICE ATTACHMENT TYPE II, ADD'L (#7912). Each feature
allows attachment of up to any combination of four additional
3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s and/or 3288s to the 3791.
Maximum: Seven, but restricted to a maximum of 31 devices.
Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: If printer feature #4710,
#4711 or #4715 is attached, maximum number of 3277, 3284,
3286, 3287 and/or 3288 devices is restricted to thirty. If a 3792
is attached, maximum is six, with a maximum of 28 devices. The
attachment of a line printer feature does not reduce the maximum
of 28 devices. Prerequisite: Device Attachment Type II (#7911).
CONTROL STORAGE FEATURES
The amount of control storage to be ordered for the "3790 Communication System" (#9431 or #9169) depends on both the
quantity and type of attachments in the system configuration. See
"3790 Communication System Configurator" GA27-2768-6 to
determine the correct ordering quantities of control storage.
The amount of control storage for the "3790 Communication
System/Data Entry Configuration" (#9155) is dependent upon the
number of 3760 Stations attached to the 3791 and whether they
are inactive or active during data transmission to or from the host.
Non-concurrency is the condition when all 3760s are inactive
during data transmission. Concurrency is the condition when up to
nine 3760s are active during data transmission. Select from Table
I or II below, the required Control Storage Increments.
Table I - No Concurrency
Max. Attached 3760s
Type I Type IA
Type II Type IIA
6
9
1
1
12
1
Table II - Concurrency
Max. Att\lched 37608
6
9
Type I Type IA
Type II Type IIA
1
12·· •
A maximum of nine 3760s can be active.
DEVICE ATTACHMENT TYPE I, ADDITIONAL (#7922). Attaches
up to four 3760 Dual Key Entry Station mdl is or four 3760 Key
Entry Station mdl 3s or four 3762 Payment Transaction Processors or any combination of four of these stations at a distance
of 2000 feet. Each 3760 mdl 1 can attach up to two 3760 mdl
2s. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: A maximum of twenty-four operator positions is supported for attachment
to a 3791 Controller. Prerequl8ltes: Configuration Support
(#9155, #9175 or #9195) and Device Attachment Type I
(#7900). Not available with Configuration Support #9431, #9165
or #9169.
The amount of control storage to be ordered for the "3790 Communication System/Data Entry Configuration" (#9175 or #9195)
is defined by the prerequisite for Configuration Support #9175 or
#9195.
3793 ATTACHMENT (#7901). To attach one 3793 KeyboardPrinter to the 3791 ... see 3793 for details. Maximum: Four per
3791 mdls 1 C, 2A and 2B '" one per 3791 mdls 1A and 1 B.
Models 1A and 1B require 3793 Attachment - Second (#7902) for
a second 3793 and 3793 Attachment, Add'i (#7903) for a third or
fourth ... maximum of two with Magnetic Tape Attachment
(#7840). Field In8tallatlon: Yes. Limitations: Cannot be installed
with Configuration Support #9155, #9175 or #9195. For Configuration Support #9165 the maximum is three. For Configuration Support #9431 the maximum is three when Control Storage
Increment Type II (#1612) or Type IIA (#1613) is installed. For
Configuration Support #9169 the maximum is three, however, if
Control Storage Increment Type II (#1612) or more than one Type
IIA (#1613) is installed the maximum is one.
CONTROL STORAGE EXPANSION - TYPE I (#1591).
Provides
the capability of expanding control storage. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Limited to those machines shipped after July 1, 1976
and at Factory EC Level 744565 or higher. PrerequiSite: Configuration Support #9169. Limitations: Cannot be installed with
Control Storage Expansion (#1590). Purchase customers must
submit an RPQ for a field change from Control Storage Expansion
(#1590).
3793 ATTACHMENT· SECOND (#7902). [Mdl 1A or 1B only]
To attach a second 3793 to a 3791 mdl 1 A or 1 B. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. lImitation8: Not available with Configuration Support #9169 when Control Storage Increment Type
II (#1612) or more than one Control Storage Increment Type IIA
CONTROL STORAGE EXPANSION (#1590).
Provides capability
of expanding control storage. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Configuration Support #9431, #9155, #9165,
#9175 or #9195. Limitation: #1590 required for Configuration
Support #9155, #9165, #9175 or #9195. Not available with
#9169.
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE I (#1602). Provides
8,192 positions of additional control storage. Maximum: One for
#9431, #9155 and #9169. Field Installation: Yes. PrerequiSite:
Control Storage Expansion # 1590 for Configuration Support
#9431 or #9155. Control Storage ExpanSion Type I (#1591) for
Configuration Support #9169. Limitations: Not available with
Configuration Support #9.165, #9175 or #9195. See Note below.
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE IA (#1603). Provides
16,384 positions of additional control storage. Maximum: Three
for #9431 or #9165: one for #9155, #9175 or #9195, seven
for #9169. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Control Storage
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -------==:':5';'=
M 3791.6
Jut 79
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B (cont'd)
Expansion (#1590) for Configuration Support #9431, #9155,
#9165, #9175 or #9195. Or Control Storage Expansion Type I
(#1591) for Configuration Support #9169. Limitation: Three
#1603s are required for Configuration Support #9165, six
(#1603s) are required for Configuration Support #9169 and one
Is required for #9175 or #9195.
require the character mode to be 1920 characters. The 3791
Controller Communication Link is provided by selection of the
EIA/CCITl Interface (#3703) with the Data Link Adapter (#3210
or #3211) at speeds of up to 9600 bps or the Integrated Modem
(#4781) with the Data Link Adapter (#3210) at speeds of 1200
bps. See M 2700 pages for available communications facilities.
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE II (#1612). Provides
8,192 positions of additional control storage. Maximum: One for
#9431, #9155 and #9169. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Control Storage Expansion (#1590) for Configuration Support
#9431 or #9155. Control Storage Expansion Type I (#1591) for
Configuration Support #9169. Limitation: Not available with
Configuration Support #9165, #9175 or #9195. See Note below.
The maximum number of Data Link Adapter features (#3210
and/or #3211) attached to a 3791 Controller Is five. The maximum number of 3276 control units that can be attached to each
Data Link Adapter is five to a 3791 Controller. The 3790 will allow
the attachment of a total of 80 units and devices In any combination on the five Data Link Adapters. See 3270 pages for restrictions.
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT - TYPE IIA (#1613). Provides
16,384 positions of additional control storage. Maximum: One for
#9155, #9165 and #9431, five for #9169, three for #9175 and
#9195. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Control Storage
Expansion (#1590) for Configuration Support #9431, #9155,
#9165, #9175 or #9195. Or Control Storage Expansion Type I
(#1591) for Configuration Support #9169. Limitation: One
# 1613 is required for Configuration Support #9165 and #9169.
Three are required for #9175 or #9195. See 3793 Attachment
features (#7901, #7902, #7903) for additional restrictions.
3791 TERMINAL COMMUNICATIONS
NOTE: Customers who elect to purchase Storage Increment Type
I or Type II and plan to order additional storage at a later date,
should consider purchase of Storage Increment Type IA or Type
IIA initially because some field upgrades of storage may require
replacement of initial feature and installation of new feature.
DATA LINK ADAPTER WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#3210). Required for attachment to data link through the 1200
bps Integrated Modem (#4781) or via an EIA/CCITI Interface
(#3703) at 1200 bps, to any external modem which does not
provide its own clocking. Half speed or 600 bps is not attainable
with this feature. Maximum: Five. The maximum is reduced by one
for each #3211 attached. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: All
3276s and 3278s must have keyboards. Cannot be installed with
Configuration Support #9155, #9165, #9431, #9175 or #9195.
Prerequisite: Configuration Support #9169.
COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides EIA interface for attachment
of an IBM or other external modem. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be Installed with #5500 or
#5501. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Feature with or
without Business Machine Clock (#6301, #6302 or #6303).
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM - NON·SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides an Integrated modem for communications with the host
system over non-switched lines. No external modem is required.
Specify: #9651 for 4-wire strapping, or #9652 for 2-wire strapping. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. limitation: Cannot
be installed with #3701, #5501, #6302 or #6303. Prerequisite:
SDLC Communications Feature with Business Machine Clock
(#6301).
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM - SWITCHED (#5501). Provides an integrated modem with answering capability for communications from the host system over switched lines via a Telephone
Company supplied Data Access Arrangement Type CBS, DAA or
FCC, or equivalent. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #3701, #5500, #6302 or
#6303. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Feature with Business Machine Clock (#6301).
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITH BUSINESS MACHINE
Required for attachment to communications
CLOCK (#6301).
lines through the 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, #5501)
or, via an EIA Interface (#37,01) at 1200 bps, to any external
modem which does not provide its own clocking. Maximum: One.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1515, #6302 or #6303.
Field Installation: Yes.
1200 bps Integrated Modem - Non-switched·
IBM 3863 Modem
IBM 3864 Modem
IBM 3865 Modem
IBM 3872 Modem··
IBM 3874 Modem··
• Half speed or 600 bps is not attainable.
•• If Switched Network Back-up, switching is done manually.
DATA LINK ADAPTER WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#3211). Required for attachment to data link via an EIA/CCITI
Interface (#3703) and external modem which provides Its own
clocking of up to 9600 bps. Maximum: Five. The maximum is
reduced by one for each #3210 attached. Field Installation: Yes.
limitation: Cannot be installed with Configuration Support #9155,
#9165, #9431, #9175 or #9195. PrerequiSite: Configuration
Support #9169.
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE (#3703).
Provides EIA/CITI interface
for attachment of an IBM or other external modem. Maximum:
Five. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Data Link Adapter
#3210 or #3211.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM - NON-SWITCHED (#4781).
Provides an integrated modem for communications from the Data
Link Adapter over non-switched lines. No external modem is required. Specify: Unless otherwise specified, 4-wire strapping will
be' provided. Specify #9654 for 2-wire strapping. Maximum: Five.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Data Link Adapter (#3210).
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6350). Allows the 3791 to be poweredon only with key. Removing the key does not turn power off. For
additional or replacement keys, see M 10000 pages. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#6302). Required for attachment to communications lines via al) EIA Interface (#3701) and external modem
which provides Its own clocking up to 2400 bps with #9431 or
#9165, and up to 4800 bps with #9155, #9175 or #9195.
Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with #1515,
#5500, #5501, #6301 or #6303. With Configuration Support
#9155, #9175 and #9195, up to six stations may be active
concurrently with communications between 3791 and the host.
Field Installation: Yes.
SDLC COMMUNICATION FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#6303). Required for attachment to communications lines via an EIA Interface (#3701) and external modem
which provides Its own clocking of up to, 9600 bps. Maximum:
One. Limitations: Cannot be installed with #1515, :/1'5500,
#5501, #6301, #6302 or Configuration Support #9431, #9155,
#9175 or #9195. Field Installation: Yes.
DATA LINK ADAPtER
,The Data Link Adapter provides the capability for the 3791 Controller to attach via non-switched communication lines the 3276
Control Unit Display Station mdls 2, 3, 4, 12, 13 and 14, with the
appropriate 3278 Display Station mdl 2, 3 or 4, 3287 mdl 1 or 2
printers or 3289 mdl lor 2 line printers. The 3791 Controller
supports only SOLC communication and the 1920 character format
on the Data Link Adapter. 3276 mdla 2, 3 and 4 attached to a
3791 require the SDLC/BSC Switch (#6315) to be in ihe SDLC
position. 3276 mdls 3, 4, 13 and 14 and 3278 mdls 3 and 4
Not ,10 be reproduced without wriUen perthiSsion.
-- ------ - - ---
=-=- =':" =
M 3791.7
Jul79
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B (cont"d)
ETP/
MAC/ MLC
Special Feature Prices:
MRC 2 yr Purchase MMMC
$4.00
#1515 $ 88
$ 75 $3,000
Local Channel Attach
1,055
5.50
Control Storage Expan
1590
31
26
Cntrl Storage Exp Type I 1591
31
1,055
5.50
26
Control Storage Increment
Type I
637
5.00
1602
32
27
Type IA
1,170
10.00
1603
56
49
Type II
5.00
637
1612
32
27
1,170
10.00
Type IIA
1613
58
49
Data Link Adapter
41
1,400
11.00
w Bus Mach Clock
3210
35
1,200 10.50
w/o Bus Mach Clock
3211
35
30
Add'i Disk Heads
27
1,060·· 17.00
- mdl 1A
3220tt 32
27
1,060·· 17.00
- mdls 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B
3221tt 32
EIA Interface
3701
12
10
4.00
400
EIA/CCITT Interface
400
4.00
Data Link
3703
12
10
Line Printer 155 LPM
80 Print Positions
4710 177
151
6,175t 56.00
132 Print Positions
4711 199
169 6,825t 59.50
Line Printer 410 LPM
132 Print Positions
4715 351
299 11,960 114.00
1200 bps Integrated Modem 7.00
Non-switch (Data Link) 4781
25
21
840
630
5.00
Non-switched
5500
19
16
Switched
21
860
7.00
.5501
25
SDLC Communications Feature
w Bus Machines Clock 6301
19
16
670
3.00
2.50
w / 0 Bus Mach Clock
6302
12
10
450
1,200
10.50
w/o Bus Mach Clock
6303
35
30
Security Keylock
35
NC
6350
35 SUC Magnetic Tape Attach
155
6,200
8.00
7840 182
Deylce Attach Type I
31
1,300
4.00
7900
36
.50
Dey Attach Type I, Add'i 7922
24
20
800
1,300
3.00
3793 Attachment
7901
36
31
3793 Attachment - 2nd
7902
36
31
1,300
3.00
31
1,300
3.00
3793 Attachment, Add'i 7903
36
Deylce Attach Type II
32
1,300
5.00
7911
38
Dey Attach, Add'i Type II 7912
27
1,100
3.00
32
• • Feature prices are based on plant installation. Purchase customers
should be advised that field installation of these features requires the submission of an RPQ for model lAs or I Bs shipped prior to 7/76 and model 2As or
2Bs shipped prior to 10/76.
t Customers who may elect to purchase #4710/#4711 and later upgrade to
#4715 should consider the purchase of #4715 initially rather than
#4710/#4711.
tt Customer price quotations and customer acknowledgement letters for
purchase
for model lAs or IBs shipped prior to 7/76 and model 2As or
2Bs shipped prior to 10/76 must state: "Installation of this feature involves
removal of parts which become the property of IBM."
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
basis only. For shipment with machine, order the Feature #
indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M
10000 for additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) - [For feature codes #4710 and
#4711 only] Permits placement of continuous forms (out of
carton) on stand above floor level and provides for stacking after
printing. The forms stand for feature code #4715 is an integral
part of the feature.
PRINT BELT, ADD'L - Permits the customer to obtain more than
one character set print belt for various applications.
155 LPM Max
48-character
64-character
94-character
64-character
94-character
410 LPM Max
48-character
64-character
94-character
64-character
94-character
EBCDIC/ASCII (#5821)
EBCDIC (#5822)
EBCDIC (#5823)
ASCII (#5812)
ASCII (#5813)
EBCDIC/ASCII (#5825)
EBCDIC (#5826)
EBCDIC (#5827)
ASCII (#5816)
ASCII (#5817)
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
--------=- =------ - =----':' =
IBM 3791
M 3791.8
Jul79
DP Machines
CONTROLLER
12B
Models 11 C,
12A,
raphy of Industry Systems and Application Programs, GC20-0370,
for details of 3791 and 3730 system publications.
SPECIFY: For details of specify codes. refer to 3790 Communication System Conligurator. GA27-2768.
Purpose: The 3791 Controller. models 11 C. 12A or 12B. serves
as an intelligent base for clusters of operator stations attached to
the 3730 Distributed Office Communication System.
Model 11 C Provides 10 million bytes' of disk storage
Model 12A Provides 20 million bytes' of disk storage
Model 128 Provides 30 million bytes' of disk storage
• The minimum disk storage available lor data storage and user
programs (based on a maximum 3791 configuration) is: Model 11 C -- 5.5 million bytes '" Model 1 2A - 14.8 million bytes
... Model 12B -- 24.1 million bytes.
Maximum: One 3791 per 3730 system.
Highlights: The 3791 Controller mdl 11 C. 12A or 12B. with Configuration Support #9171 installed. serves as the controller for
the 3730 Distributed Office Communication System to support the
3730 functions of document creation. editing. storage. retrieval.
formatting. printing. archiving. and (with #9275) automated text.
Additional controller features and facilities include:
- Non-removable disk storage for customer use
- Line printer feature
- Host system attachment (with #9285) through an SDLC communications feature. or through a local channel attachment
feature.
Communication Facilities: Direct attachment to S/370. 4300. or
3031. 3032 • or 3033 processor byte and/or block multiplexer
channel using Local Channel Attachment (#1515).
Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) using switched point-topoint lines at speeds of up to 2400 bps. or non-switched point-topoint, or non-switched multipoint lines at speeds of up to 9600
bps subject to carrier availability via the 3704 or 3705. See M
2700 pages.
For the 3791-to-3704/3705 SDLC link. IBM offers a 1200 bps
integrated modem or an EIA feature for the attachment of external
modems.
Note: For communication capabilities and modem attachment data.
see 3863, 3864, 3865. 3872. 3874. 3875 and M 2700 pages.
Host/3791 Communication
[1] Voltage (AC. 1-phase. 3-wire. 60Hz): Moisture proof plug
#9902 for 208 V. or #9904 for 230 V. For Locking plug
#9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V.
[2] Color: Available at time of manufacture only. #9041 for Red.
#9042 for yellow. #9043 for Blue. or #9045 for gray.
[3] Up-ending Kit: In the event the 3791 must be placed on end to
enter installation area. specify #9840.
[4] Cables; See Ml0000 pages for prices and ordering instructions.
[5] ASCII Support: Specify #9022. ASCII support is provided for
the host link. diskette. 3277. 3284. 3286. 3287. 3288. 3732.
3736. and 3791 Line Printer (#4710. 4711 or 4715). Only
ASCII support type B is provided for the 3287. 3732 and 3736.
Prerequisite: #9171 with #9275.
[6] Print Belt Character Set: Specify for 3791 Line Printer (feature
codes #4710.4711 or 4715) one of the following. These specify codes are avilable at time of manufacture only. If additional
print belts are required. see "Print Belts" in Ml0000 pagesAccessories. The 48-character and 128-character print belts
can be used for ASCII or EBCDIC.
#9071 48-character set. ASCII
#9074 64-character set. ASCII
#9075 96-character set. ASCII
#9076 128-character set. DP /WP EBCDIC (1)
#9077 96-character set, WP EBCDIC - Courier (2)
#9078 96-character set. WP EBCDIC - Artisan (2)
(1) Allows text and data to be printed in 3730-3790 systems
without the need to change print belts.
(2) Cannot be installed with Feature Code #4715.
[7] Configuration Support: Specify #9171 for 3730 Distributell
Office Communication System, including support for 3732 Text
Display StaUon .and 3736 Printer. Prerequisite: Non-e. FI.,et
.' Installation: Yes. - Limitations: Noi available with model 1A. 1 B.
1 C. 2A or 2B. or with Configuration Support #9431. #9155.
#9165. #9169. #9175 or #9195.
[8] Configuration: The following function and attachment specify
codes must be selected to support the terminals to be attached
to a 3791 model 11 C. 12A or 12B.
Attachment
Byte and/or block multiplexer channel
1200 bps Integrated Modem. Non-switched
1200 bps Integrated Modem. Switched
3793 Attachment
3863 Modem, Non-switched (2400 bps)
3863 Modem, Switched (2400 bps)
3872 Modem. Non-switched (2400 bps)
3872 Modem. Switched (2400 bps)
Specify Comment
#9011 Specify that a 3793 is to be
attached by ordering quantity.
Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: #9275.
3277. 3284. 3286. 9200 Specify total number of devices
attached by ordering quantity.
3287. 3288
Attachment
Maximum: 29.
Prerequisite: #9275.
3864 Modem. Non-switched (4800 bps)
3864 Modem, Switched (4800 bps)
3874 Modem. Switched (4800 bps)
3875 Modem. Non-switched (7200 bps)
3732. 3736
Attachment
3865 Modem, Non-switched (9600 bps)
PREREQUISITES: Local Channel Attachment feature (#1515). or
one SDLC Communication Feature (#6301. 6302 or 6303) is
required for CE maintenance purposes.
To operate on 3730 system. at least one 3732 Text Display Station with keyboard. and either a 3736 Printer or a 3791 Line
Printer feature is required.
Test Site Designation (#9595) The purpose of #9595 is to provide the 3730 customer with the ability to designate a test site
location at which to install a Mandatory Microcode Engineering
Change. Receipt of changes at this location will occur before a
new production unit can reach the customer network and before
the change is distributed to other installed locations requiring the
change. This feature should be limited to one per network.
3791 Alternate Mailing Address (#9596) for Microcode Updates
#9596 provides the 3730 customer with the option of having
Mandatory Microcode updates shipped to a single address. generally a central site. for better network management control. The
alternate address is controlled
through assignment of a Teleprocessing Control Number (TPC#) or Microcode Control Number (MC#). Redistribution of the microcode is
the responsibility of the customer.
Publications: Refer to the latest level of IBM System/370 Bibliog-
9016 Specify combined total of
3732s and 3736s by ordering
quantity. Maximum: 30 if
#9275 is specified ... 16
if #9275 is not specified.
Prerequisite: None.
Support Functions
Function
Line Printer
Test Site
Alternate
Mailing
Address
Specify Comment
#9561
132 print positions.
Prerequisite: None.
9595 To designate a 3791 location as a
test site for Mandatory Control
Code Engineering Changes.
Prerequisite: #9285.
Limitation: One per network.
#9596 To designate that an
alternate mailing address
is available for microcode
updates. Prerequisites: None.
RJE Function
9541 Specify only if required. Cannot
be installed if Magnetic Tape
Attachment (#7840) is installed.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#9285 with #9011 or #9200.
Additional User
Sessions
9345 Optional - order only if required.
Provides 15 add'l user sessions.
(basic system provides 1 6 user
sessions). Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: #9275.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
'1
"~
-----
--- ------------
M 3791.9
Jul79
= =- =':' =
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models 11C, 12A, 12B (cont'd)
System Activity
9149 Specify to define concurrent
device activity,
Minimum: One, Maximum: 31.
Prerequisite: #9275.
Batch Data
Exchange via
Diskette
9037 Optional - order only if required.
Required for support of user
programming when #9285 is not
specified. Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: #9275.
Host Communication 9285 Optional. Required for applications involving host system
Support
communications. Required for
support of user programming
when #9037 is not specified.
Maximum: One. Prerequisite:
#9275 with #1515; or #6301 or
#6302, or #6303.
Extended Function
9275 Optional. Required for support of
automated text, user application
programming, and 3730-3790
concurrent operations.
Maximum: One.
Prerequisite: None.
Mdl
MRC
3791
11C
12A
12B
$1,159
1,334
1,510
3793 ATTACHMENT (#7901), Allows one 3793 Keyboard Printer to be attached to the 3791. (See M 3793 pages.) Maximum:
One. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #9011.
DEVICE ATTACHMENT TYPE II, ADDITIONAL (#7912).
Each
feature allows attachment of any combination of up to four additional 3277s and/or 3284, 3286, 3287, 3288, 3732, 3736s to be
attached to the 3791. (The first four devices can be attached with
#9171 only specified.) Maximum: Seven, but restricted to a maximum of 31 devices. Field Installation: Yes. limitations: All
32775 and 3732s must have a keyboard. If printer feature
#4710, #4711 or #4715 is attached, maximum number of devices is restricted to 30. Prerequisites: #9016 to attach additional 3732s and 3736s, or #9016 with #9200 to attach additional
3732s, 3736s, 3277s, 3284s, 3286s, 3287s and 3288s.
CONTROL STORAGE FEATURES
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
The amount of control storage to be ordered for the 3730 Distributed Office Communication System (#9171) depends on both the
quantity and type of attachments in the system configuration. See
3790 Communication System Configurator, GA27-2768, to determine the correct quanities of control storage.
$ 986
1,135
1,285
$32,660
38,760
44,860
$321
311
365
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT, TYPE IA (#1603). Provides
16,384 pOSitions of additional control storage. Maximum: One.
Field installation: Yes.
MLC
PRICES:
with the RJE Function (#9541).
Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: System/3-3790 Communication
System Attachment (#7003) on 3411; Single Density (#3211) or
Dual Density (#3221) on 3411; and 3791 Configuration Support
#9171 with #9275 on 3791.
Rental Plan: Plan B
Purchase Option: '55% Machine Group: 0
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
FIELD CONVERSION CHARGES
Model 1 C to Model 11 C .... .
Model 1 C to Model 12A .... .
Model 1 C to Model 1 2B .... .
Model 2A to Model 1 2A ... ..
Model 2A to Model 12B .... .
Model 2B to Model 1 2B .... .
Model 11 C to Model 12A ..... $ 6,100
Model11C to Model12B ..... $12,200
Model 12A to Model 12B ..... $ 6,100
•• For field conversions of purchase 3791 mdls 1 C, 2A or 2B to
3791 mdls 11 C, 12A or 12B, call the 3790 Marketing Center
Manager for assistance in planning the model conversion.
Model upgrade requires replacement of disk storage. Adequate
provision must be made for retaining data contained on disk storage unit and elimination of user-proprietary information.
SPECIAL FEATURES
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6350). Allows the 3791 to be "powered
on" only with key, Removing the key does not turn power off. For
additional or replacement keys, see M 10000 pages. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
DEVICE ATTACHMENT FEATURES
LOCAL CHANNEL ATTACHMENT (#1515).
Provides for direct
attachment to any S/370 processor', 4300 processor, or 3031,
3032 or 3033 processor, via an integrated byte and/or block
multiplexer channel or via a 2870 byte multiplexer or 2880 block
multiplexer channel. Maximum distance from the channel is 200
feet. Limitation: Cannot be installed with SDLC Communication
Feature (#6301, 6302 or 6303).
Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
• This feature allaches to only one channel of a multiprocessing system.
ADDITIONAL DISK HEADS (#3221).
Provides additional disk
heads to improve performance in certain configurations and for
certain applications. Limitation: Cannot be installed on 3791 mdl
11 C. Maximum: One additional head on mdl 12A ... two additional
heads on mdl 12B, Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: #9275,
#9285.
MAGNETIC TAPE ATTACHMENT (#7840).
Provides for the
attachment of the 3411 MagnetiC Tape Unit and Control mdl 1.
Additional tape capacity is provided by attachment of the 341 0
Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 via the 3411. The maximum number of
tape units (3410 and 3411) on a 3791 is four. Limitations: Only
the 3411 Single Density (#3211) and the Dual Density (#3221)
are supported by the 3791. Feature #7840 cannot be installed
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENT, TYPE IIA (#1613). Provides
16,384 positions of additional control storage. Maximum: Two.
Field Installation: Yes.
COMMUNICATION FEATURES
EIA INTERFACE (#3701). Provides EIA interface for the attachment of an IBM or other external modem. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with the 1200 bps modems (#5500 or #5501).
Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communication Feature with or without Business Machine Clock
(#6301, 6302, 6303).
MODEM, 1200 BPS INTEGRATED,. NON-SWITCHED (#55OO).
Provides an integrated modem for communication with the host
system over non-switched lines. No external modem is required.
Limitation: Cannot be installed with communications feature
#3701, #5501, #6302 or #6303. Maximum: One. Field
installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Feature
with Business Machine Clock (#6301). Specify: #9651 for 4-wire
strapping, or #9652 for 2-wire strapping.
MODEM, 1200 BPS INTEGRATED, SWITCHED (#5501).
Provides an integrated modem with an answering capability for communication from the host system over switched lines via a telephone company supplied Data Access Arrangement Type CBS,
DAA or FCC, or equivalent. The coupling device determines
whether the answering capability is manual or auto. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with Communications Features #3701,
#5500, #6302 or #6303. Maximum: One. Field installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications Feature with Business
Machine Clock (#6301).
SOLC COMMUNICATION FEATURE WITH BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCK (#6301).
Required for attachment to communication
lines through the 1200 bps Integrated Modem (#5500 or #5501)
or, via an EIA Interface (#3701) to any external modem which
does not provide its own clocking. Half speed or 600 bps is
available with this feature. limitation: Cannot be installed with
SDLC features #6302 or 6303 or Local Channel Attachment
(#1515). Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
SDLC COMMUNICATION FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#6302), Required for attachment to communication lines via an EIA Interface (#3701) and an external modem
which provides its own clocking up to 2400 bps. Limitation:
Cannot be installed with SDLC Features (#6301, 6303), 1200 bps
Modem Features (#5500, #5501), or Local Channel Attachment
(#1515). Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
SDLC COMMUNICATION FEATURE WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK (#6303). Required for attachment to communication lines via an EIA Interface (#3701) and an external modem
which provides its own clocking of up to 9600 bps. limitation:
Cannot be installed with Communication Features #1515, #5500,
#5501, #6301 or #6302. Maximum: One. Field installation:
Yes.
LINE PRINTERS
[155 Ipm - 6
LINE PRINTER 80 PRINT POSITIONS (#4710).
lines per inch (2.54 cm)] Provides a line printer with maximum
speed of 155 Ipm with 48-character set, 120 Ipm with 64character set, 80 Ipm with 96-character set, and 40 Ipm with
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- --- ---- --=
----==
':' =
M 3791.10
Jul79
DP Machines
3791 Controller Models llC, 12A, 12B (cont'd)
128-character set. Included as standard is one operatorinterchangeable print belt (48-, 64-, 96-, or 128-character set).
ASCII or EBCDIC must be specified. Capability to print on continuous fan fold paper up to 80 print positions on an 8 inch (20 cm)
print line with line spacing of 6 lines per inch (2.5 cm). Paper up
to six parts plus carbon {maximum total thickness is 0.50 mm
(.020 inches) can be accommodated. Maximum paper width is 15
inches overall. Refer to Form Design Reference Guide for Printers
(GA24-3488) for form design considerations. Card stock is not
recommended. A form-jam detection capability is provided. Order
IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent, for replacement ribbons.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Specify: See "Print Belt
Character Set" under "Specify" for ordering 48-, 64-, 96- or
1 28-character sets.
LINE PRINTER, 132 PRINT POSITIONS (#4711), [155 Ipm - 6
lines per inch (2.54 cm)] Provides a line printer with maximum
speeds of 155 Ipm with 48-character set, 120 Ipm with 64character set, 80 Ipm with 96-character set, and 40 Ipm with
128-character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48-, 64-, 96- or 128-character set). Capability to print on continuous fan fold paper up to 132 print positions.
ASCII or EBCDIC character set must be specified on a 33.5 cm
(13.2 inch) print line with line spacing of 6 lines per inch (2.5 cm).
Paper of up to six plus carbons (maximum total thickness is .020
Inches or 0.50 mm) can be accommodated. Refer to Form Design
Reference Guide for Printers (GA24-3488) for form design considerations. Card stock is not recommended. A form-jam detection
capability is provided. Order IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent
for replacement ribbons. Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
Specify: See "Print Belt Character Set" under "Specify" for
ordering 48-, 64-, 96- or 128-characler sets.
LINE PRINTER - 132 PRINT POSITIONS (#4715).
[410 Ipm]
Provides a higher speed line printer with maximum speeds of 410
Ipm with 48-character set, 300 Ipm with 64-character set, 230 Ipm
with 96-character set, and 160 Ipm with 128-character set. Included as standard is one operator-interchangeable print belt (48-,
64-, 96- or 128-character set) and a forms stand which is an
integral part of this feature. ASCII or EBCDIC character set must
be specified. Capability 10 print on continuous fan fold paper up
to 132 print positions on a 13.2 inch (33.5 cm) print line with line
spacing of 6 lines per inch (2.5 em). Paper of up to six parts plus
carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches or 0.50 mm) can
be accommodated. Refer to Forms Design Reference Guide for
Printers (GA24-3488) for form design considerations. Card stock
is not recommended. A form-jam detection capability is provided.
Order IBM Part No. 1136670 or equivalent for replacement ribbons. Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes. Specify: See "Print
Belt Character Set" under "Specify" for ordering 48-, 64-, 96- or
128-character sets.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC I
MRC
ETPI
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
Local Channel Attach
#1515 $ 88
$ 75 $3,000 $ 4.00
Control Storage Increment
Type IA
1603
58
49
1,170
10.00
10.00
Type IIA
1613
58
49
1,170
Add'i Disk Heads
3221
32
27
1,080
17.00
EIA Interface
3701
12
10
400
4.00
Line Printer 155 Ipm
80 Print Positions
4710 177
151
6,175· 56.00
132 Print Positions
4711 199
169
6,825· 59.50
Line Printer 410 Ipm
132 Print Positions
4715 351
299 11,960 114.00
1200 bps Integrated Modem
Non-switched
19
5500
16
630
5.00
Switched
5501
25
21
7.00
860
SDLC Communication Feature
19
670
w Bus Mach Clock
16
6301
3.00
wlo Bus Mach Clock
6302
12
10
450
2.50
wlo Bus Mach Clock
6303
35
30
1,200
10.50
Security Keylock
6350
35
NC
35 SUC Magnetic Tape Attach
7840 182
155
6,200
8.00
3793 Attachment
7901
36
31
1,300
3.00
Dev Attach, Add'i Type II 7912
32
27
1,100
3.00
.
Customers who may elect to purchase # 4 71 0/4711 and later
upgrade to #471 5 should consider the purchase of #4715
Initially rather than #4710 or #4711.
ACCESSORY: For shipment with machine, order the feature number indicated below at the price listed in the M10000 pages. See
M10000 pages for additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450). [For 155 Ipm Line Prinler features
#4710 and #4711 only] Permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for stacking
after printing. A forms stand is an integral part of the 410-lpm
Line Printer feature (#4715).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- - - ---------- - -------_.-
M 3792
May 79
DP Machines
3792 AUXILIARY CONTROL UNIT
Purpose: Provides for the attachment of up
Keyboard-Printers. up to two communications lines
munication Terminals. and as a feature, a line
"Special Features." The 3792 can be attached to
distance up to 2,000 feet.
to four 3793
for 2741 Comprinter ... see
the 3791 at a
Maximum: Three per 3791 Controller.
Highlights: Up to four 3793 Keyboard-Printers and up to two
communications lines can be attached to the 3792 as a subcluster
to the 3791. The 3792 attaches to the 3791 via Device Attachment Type I (;;07900) on the 3791 at a distance of up to 2,000
feet. Buffering, controlling, and checking of input and output data
are provided.
Limitations:
#4713) can
ture may be
to the 3791
stalled, then
exceed four.
Only one 3792 Line Printer feature (#4712 or
be attached to a 3790 system. The one printer feaon anyone of the three 3792 control units attachable
controller. If Line Printer (#4712 or #4713) is inthe combined total of 2741 lines and 3793s cannot
PREREQUISITE: A 3791 Controller equipped with Device Attachment Type I (;;07900).
Communications Facilities: See M 2700 pages.
Modem: (3792/2741 Communications)
IBM Leased Line Adapter (#5400) on the 3792.
Bibliography:
GC20-0370
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): Available at
time of manufacture only. Locking plug -- #9880 for 115 V,
#9884 for 208 V, or #9886 for 230 V. Non-lock plug #9881 for 115 V, #9885 for 208 V, or #9887 for 230 V.
[2] Color: Available at time of manufacture only. Specify #9041
for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or #9045 for gray.
[3] Print Belt Character Set: Specify for 3792 Line Printer (#4712
or #4713). These specify codes are available at time of manufacture only. See "Print Belt" in M 10000 pages if more than
one print belt is required.
#9071 -- 48 Character Set, EBCDIC
#9072 -- 64 Character Set, EBCDIC
#9073 -- 96 Character Set, EBCDIC
[4] Attachment position on the 3791: Specify #9110 for first
3792, #9120 for second 3792, and #9130 for third 3792.
PRICES:
3792
Mdl
MACI
MRC
ETPI
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC
$200
$ 170
$ 6,900
$34.00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranly: B
Maintenance: D
Per Call: 1
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
DEVICE ATTACHMENT FEATURES
LINE PRINTER - 80 PRINT POSITIONS 155 LPM MAX (#4712).
Provides a line printer with maximum speeds of 155 LPM with 48
character set, 120 LPM with 64 character set, and 80 LPM with
96 character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48, 64, or 96 character set). Capability to
print on continuous fan fold paper up to 80 print positions on an
8-inch (20 cm) print line. 6 lines per inch (2.54 cm). Paper up to
six parts plus carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches or
.50 mm) can be accomodated. Maximum paper width is 15" overall. Card stock is not recommended. A form jam detection capability is provided. Order IBM Part No. 1136634 or equivalent, for
replacement ribbons. Maximum: One. Limitations: Line printers on
the 3791 and 3792 must have the same number print positions.
Field Instaliation:Yes. Specify: See "Print Belt Character Set"
under Specify for ordering 48, 64 or 96 character sets.
"Print Belt Character Set" under Specify for ordering 48, 64 or
96 character sets.
3793 Attachment (#7901).
To attach one 3793 KeyboardPrinter to the 3792 ... see 3793 for details. Maximum: Four.
Limitation: If a Line Printer (#4712, #4713 on the 3792) is
installed, then the combined total of 2741 sand 3793s cannot
exceed four. Field Installation: Yes.
Control Storage Features: Whether additional control storage is
to be ordered is dependent on both the quantities and types of
attachments in the 3790 system configuration. See "IBM 3790
Communication System Configuration," GA27-2768-6, for details.
CONTROL STORAGE INCREMENTS (#1622). Provides an 8,192
byte increment of control storage. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
COMMUNICATIONS FEATURES:
ADAPTER BASE (#1021). Provides for the installation of up to
two Asynchronous Communications Controls (;;0 1081). Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
ASYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL (#1081). Provides for the installation of an EIA Interface (#3701) for external
modems, or an IBM Leased Line Adapter (;;05400) for communications with a 2741. Maximum: Two. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Adapter Base (# 1021).
EIA INTERFACE (#3701).
Provides an EIA interface for the
attachment of an IBM or other external modem. Maximum: Two.
Specify: #9003 for first #3701 feature; #,9004 for second feature.· Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Asynchronous Communications Control (#1081). The 3792 Communications Support
required on the 3791 should specify whether External Modem
attached to the 3792 will or will not have auto-answer. See "3792
Communications Support" under "Specify" on 3791 page.
IBM LEASED LINE ADAPTER (#5400).
Provides a modem for
communications with 2741 terminals via point-to-point nonswitched communications lines. Specify: #9651 for 4-wire strapping (if receive interrupt feature is used by the 2741, 4-wire strapping is req'd.); or #9652 for 2-wire strapping ... #9001 for first
#5400 feature, #9002 for second #5400 feature.' Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: Two. Prerequisite: Asynchronous
Communications Control (# 1081 ).
• NOTE: Specify codes #9001 (1 st #5400) and #9004 (2nd
#3701) are mutually exclusive. Specify codes #9002 (2nd
#5400) and #9003 (1 st #3701) are mutually exclusive.
SECURITY KEYLOCK (#6350). Allows the 3792 to operate only
when the key is in place ... removing the key causes operation to
stop. For additional or replacement keys, see M 10000 pages.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
MACI
MRC
ETPI
MLC
2 yr Purchase
$ 42
Adapter Base
#1021 $ 49
19
16
Asynch Comm Cntrl
1081
32
27
Control Storage Incre
1622
12
10
EIA Interface
3701
Line Printer - 155 LPM Max
233
80 Print Posftions
4712 274
260
132 Print Positions
4713 306
19
16
IBM Leased Line Adptr 5400
Security Keylock
6350
35 SUC 36
31
3793 Attachment
7901
MMMC
$ 1,700 $ 1.00
650
637
400
3.00
5.00
4.00
9,500
10,500
650
35
1,300
56.00
59.50
5.00
NC
3.00
Accessories: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
beiow at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
FORMS STAND (#4450) -- Permits placement of continuous
forms (out of carton) on stand above floor level and provides for
stacking after printing.
LINE PRINTER - 132 PRINT POSITIONS 155 LPM MAX (#4713).
Provides a line printer with maximum speeds of 155 LPM with 48
character set, 120 LPM with 64 character set, and 80 LPM with
96 character set. Included as standard is one operator interchangeable print belt (48, 64 or 96 character set). Capability to
print on continuous fan fold paper up to 132 print positions on a
15-inch (38.1 cm) print line. 6 lines per inch (2.54 cm). Paper up
to six parts plus carbon (maximum total thickness is .020 inches
or .50 mm) can be accomodated. Card stock is not recommended.
A form jam detection capability is provided. Order IBM Part No.
1136634 or equivalent, for replacement ribbons. Maximum: One.
Limitations: Line printers on the 3791 and 3792 must have the
same number print positions. Field Installation: Yes. Specify: See
Not to be reproduced without w.ritten permission;
---- --- --:5:'="::5,;"=
--- ----
M 3793
May 79
O.P Machines
3793 KEYBOARD-PRINTER
Purpose: Printed hard-copy and key data-entry facilities for attachment to a 3791 Controller or a 3792 Auxiliary Control Unit.
Highlights: A modified Selectric'" II typewriter terminal oriented to
the functions of the 3790 system.
- Keyboard: Includes an EBCDIC keyboard with operator guidance lights and switches.
- Printer: A 15.5 cps printer (6 lines/inch) with friction-feed
platen or, optionally, pin-feed platen. A Courier 72 print element (Part No. 1167043) is supplied. 3790 programs can
provide vertical forms movement and automatic print element
positioning.
The 3793 can be located up to 48 feet from the 3791 or 3792,
with the customer responsible for the connecting cable. See the
installation planning manual for details.
PREREQUISITE: One 3793 Attachment (#7901, 7902 or 7903)
on a 3791 or 3792 per 3793.
Bibliography: GC20-0370
SPECIFY: Voltage (115 VAC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9881 for nonlock plug.
PRICES:
Mdl
3793
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
$ 119
$ 101 $ 3,450
Purchase MMMC
$ 28
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Maintenance: D
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 1
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
SPECIAL FEATURES
POWER LINE KEYLOCK (#5560). A key-operated switch in the
power cord. When switch is in the off position, no action is possible at the 3793. Two keys are supplied with the feature. See M
10000 pages for additional or replacement keys. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Power Line' Keylock
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
#5560 $ 75SUC-
$
75
NC
Accessories: The following Item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10QOO pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
PIN FEED PLATEN (#9509) -- In lieu of standard friction feed
platen. Maximum: One. See M 10000 pages for available options and additional #s to be specified.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- --------==.=.: == ~ ==
M 3800.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3800 PRINTING SUBSYSTEM
Purpose: Printer output unit for S/370 mdls 145, 145-3, 148,
155 II, 158, 165 II, 168 and a 3031, 3032, 3033, 4331 or 4341
Processor. A special feature allows data Input from magnetic tape
without printer output unit attachment to a system.
Highlights: Prints on single part continuous forms providing 50
discrete paper sizes ... printing Is repeated for multiple copies ...
every copy Is "original" quality.
Print Speed Range:
Forms
Length
3-1/2
5-1/2
7
Lin.. Per Minute·
8 LPI
12 LPI
8 LPI
Up To:
Up To:
Up To:
Forms
Per Min
Up To:
526
334
263
215
167
8-1/2
11
• Single copy speeds.
10,520
12,024
12,624
12,900
13,360
7,890
9,018
9,468
9,675
10,020
15,780
18,036
18,936
19,350
20,040
Printer job throughput can vary depending on form length, number
of copies needed, and functions exercised.
52K byte storage standard for page buffering and control of printer operations ... 42K when operated without system attachment.
Pitches - 10, 12 and 15 character per Inch (CPI) standard ...
Print Line - maximum of 136 positions at 10 CPI, 163 positions
at 12 CPI, and 204 positions at 15 CPI ... 10, 12 and 15 CPI can
be Intermixed within page or line ... vertical line spacing of 6, 8
and 12 lines per Inch .•. Intermixed line spacing within page.
Character Sets Standard
Character
Style
Pitch (CPI)
10 12 15
Special
Underscored
Gothic
Gothic 15
Condensed
Text 1
(Upper Case)
Text 2
(Lower Case)
OCR A
OCR B
Format
Katakana
X
X
Yes
X
Yes
X
X
Yes
X
X
X
X
X
Yes
X
X
X
X
NOTE: Includes World Trade National Use Graphics.
Character sets are organized In blocks of up to 64 characters and
are held In subsystem read only storage.
Electronic character generation using Writable Character Generation Storage - 128 Writable Character Generation Storage positions are standard and organized In two 64 character Writable
Character Generation Modules (WCGM) ... character sets are
program selected without operator Intervention and dynamically
loaded Into hardware WCGMs ... when operating offline under
control of Tape-to-Printlng Subsystem (#7810), character sets are
loaded Into read only storage (WCGMs) by the operator through
the operator panel, or by the 3800 control file tape which Is an
output of the Utility Program Product, 5748 UT2. Customerdesigned characters require use of the Utility Program ... an additional Increment of 127 Writable Character Generation Storage
Positions· Is optional, providing dynamic storage for printing 4
character styles and/or pltcheo within one data set - this represents up to 255 graphics online with no throughput loss ... dynamIc storage allows character substitution under program control ... a
customer may design his own characters. When operating under
control of Feature #7810, customer-designed characters require
use of Utility Program Product 5748 UT2.
-1966" for OCR-A font (also referred to as ANSC::; U\,;H) and the
"European Computer Manufacturers Association's Standard
ECMA-11 for Alphanumeric Character Set OCR-B for Optical
Recognition 2nd Edition, October 1971" for OCR-B font.
Text Character Set -- upper and lower case characters, serlffed
design ... special graphics ... no reduction In throughput.
Format 10, 12 and 15 Pitch -- merge format and data ... program
controlled for online operation, for offline operation with Feature
(#7810) format character sets require Utility Program Product,
5748 UT2.
Copy Modification Function - Identify copies with legends, phrases, or names (e.g., Customer Copy, For Accounting Purposes
Only, etc.) ... address each report copy to speed distribution ...
spot carbon or field blockout functions ... Identification and deletion program controlled. Customized forms with the Identification,
deletion and formatting functions. When operating under control of
Feature (#7810), Copy Modification Function requires use of
Utility Program Product, 5748 UT2.
Format Overlay -- optical Image system ... prints high quality
document and report formats, designs or other constant data ...
merge format and data ... program controlled. When operating
under control of Feature (#7810), overlay is InVOked from the
operators panel or by the Utility Program Product, 5748 UT2.
Single Part Contlnuoua Form Output -- Including custom printed
forms ... no deleavlng ... no carbon disposal ... faster turnaround
... program control of copy quality ... up to 255 copies ... Job
separation marking use Mark Form function.
Optional
Burster-Trlmmer-Stacker
Output
eliminates
burster /deleaver bottlenecks ... offset separation between data set
copies ... remove output white printing ... first-in, flrst-out job
sequence ... trimmed edges.
Optional Channel Switching .. - manual switches provide system
configuration flexibility through the use of the 2914 Manual
Switch, Model 1 (RPO
or the Two Channel Switch
(#8170) ... automatic switching Is provided by the Dynamic Two
Channel Switch (#8171) for two processors in a tightly coupled
multiprocessing configuration, and two channels on a single CPU
providing alternate path capability.
Laser Safety -- the 3800 contains a laser assembly. The 3800,
Including the laser assembly, Is designed to comply with the safety
standards proposed by the United States Depllrtment of Health,
Education and Welfare (Proposed Performance Standard for Laser
Products, September 4, 1974 - Class 1,21 CFR 1040).
Limitations: Prints on discrete form sizes. Utilizes five form
depths: 3-1/2", 5-1/2", 7", 8-1/2" and 11" ... ten forms widths
measured edge to edge: 6-1/2", 8-1/2", 9-1/2", 9-7/8", 105/8", 11", 12", 13-5/8", 14.3", 14-7/8" which permutes to 50
discrete sizes. Forms are refolded In 7" (2 x 3-1/2), 8-1/2" and
11" (2 x 5-1/2) in lengths.
Character and forms overlay printing restricted from first and last
1 /2" of forms length. A printed line can begin a minimum of 0.5
Inches from the left paper edge and cannot exceed a length to
position a character nearer than 0.5 Inches from the right paper
edge for all widths except 14-7/8" where the stated dimension Is
0.675 Inches from the right.
Paper must be from 15 Ib to 24 Ib basis weight. See GA26-1633
for details of weight and other forms considerations. Left-hand
side of form Is a fixed location In the machine, print line adjustment is by electronically moving the line. First print position can
move to the right 5.7 Inches but will caUS6 an equivalent number
of positions at the right end to be moved beyond the above defined print line boundaries.
It Is recommended that printing not occur within 0.100 Inches of
any binder holes or corner cuts within the form.
PREREQUISITE: A control unit position on a system channel
and/or Tape-to-Printing Subsystem Feature (#7810).
Gothic 15 (15 characters/Inch at 8 lines/Inch) - 11" x 14-7/8"
reports can be reduced to 8-1/2" x 11" ... convenient size ...
Increased throughput, reduced forms cost, reduced filing space by
using reduction or exploiting new maximum print span of 204
positions. The application of 12 Ipl vertical spacing with the GothIc 15 Condensed character set can result In a further reduction In
paper volume of up to about 30% beyond the savings projected in
reducing page sizes by applying the 15 pitch character set at 8
Ipl.
S/370 mdl 145 (excluding 3145-3) - byte multiplexer channel
(standard), Selector Channels (fIrst one is standard), Block Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see 3145. Attachment to
the byte multiplexer channel Is not recommended. Selector channel attachment Is not recommended unless dedicated.
Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Printing) - alphameric OCR
A and the leas stylized OCR B fonts can be Intermixed with nonOCR fonts with no reduction In printing throughput .. , documents
may be processed by. the 1287, 1288, 3762 and 3886 Optical
Character Readers. Refer to the appropriate sales. manual pages
for specific capabilities.
Note: The OCR characters are designed to be representative of
(but not always Identical to) the mean character (shape) centerline described In the "United States of America Standard Character Set for Optical Character Recognition, Size A, USAS X3.17
S/370 mdl 155 II, 158 - byte multiplexer channel (standard),
2nd Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature), Block Multiplexer
C.hannels (first two are standard) ... see 3155,3158,3158-3.
S/370 mdl 145-3, 148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard),
block multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3, 3148. Attachment to
the byte multiplexer channel is not recommended.
S/370 mdl 185 II, 188 - selector channel of 2860, basic multiplexer channel of 2870, Selector Subchannel (special feature) of
2870, shared or non-shared subchannel of 2880 ... see 2860,
2870, 2880. Selector channel attachment Is not recommended
.
unless dedicated.
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
---- -
---- ------ --':'':::5,;"S:
M 3800.2
May 79
DP Machines
3800 Printing Subsystem (conl'd)
3031 or 3032 Processor -- byte multiplexer channel (one Is
standard). block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see
3031 or 3032.
3033 Processor -- byte multiplexer channels (two are standard).
block multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 Processor "" byte mUltiplexer channel (special feature). block
mUltiplexer channel (special feature) ... see 4331. Note: Attachment to
the byte multiplexer channel is 1Iot recommended.
4341 Processor "" byte multiplexer channel (standard), block multiplexer
channel (two are standard) ... see 4341. Note: Attachment to the byte
multiplexer channel is not recommended.
Tape-to-Prlntlng Subsystem (#7810) -- In lieu of or In addition
to system channel attachments above ... see "Special Features."
Bibliography: GC20-0001. GA26-1653. GA26-1654
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC. 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V. or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: Machine color is white, specify end cover color #9041 for red. #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or #9045
for gray.
[3] Tool Kit: #9330 -- required for CE maintenance.
For rental customer -- specify #9330 for the first 3800 ordered
for a customer. If required for a multiple machine Installation,
because of physical machine locations, an additional tool kites)
Is available
For purchase customer -- specify #9330 on each 3800 machine order. When installed 3800s are purchased, a tool kit Is
to be ordered on a no-charge
for each machine. Note: A
Tool Kit (#9220) Is required with Burster-Trlmmer-Stacker
(#1490) .. , see #1490 beloW.
PRICES: 3800 Printing Plan
Rental
Mdl
Purchase Price
Basic
Monthly
Charge/
MRC
BETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Monthly
Use Charge
Rate
$7,708
$6,560
2.5 mills/foot
Basic Monthly
Maintenance Charge
$325,500 $
489
Additional Monthly
Maintenance
Charge Rate
2.5 mills/foot
Plan Offering: Plan C (Monthly Use Plan)
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 50% (not applicable to Monthly Use Charges)
Maintenance: Available 24 hours per day, 7 days a week.
Useful Life Category: 2 Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Educational Allowance: 10% (Does not apply to Monthly Use
Charge Rate)
feature will accept the non-IBM system print tape formats described below.
Burroughs: B7000/B6000 Print Backup Tapes. For further details
refer the customer to:
B7000/B6000 Series System Software Operational Guide.
Volume 1 (Form #5001563), Section 1 (Backup).
Tape Flies must be 7 or 9 track. EBCDIC coding, and
ANSI (USASI) standard tape lables and data formats. For
further details refer the customer to B7000/B6000 series
I/O System Reference Manual (Form #5001779).
For definition of the line printer control words, refer the
customer
to
Burroughs
B6700
Handbook
(Form
#5000276).
Honeywell: Series 60 (level 66/6000) Bulk' Media Conversion
program formats and Standard System formats that have the
following characteristics:
- Variable length records
- Binary or BCD mode
- 7 or 9 track
- Standard labeled or non-labeled
- Low or high density
- Standard printer commands with or without edit characters
For further details refer the customer to the following Honeywell publications:
0011 Bulk Media Conversion
0007 File and Record Control
OB82A I/O Programming
Sperry Univac: 11 00 series systems System Data Format (SOF)
Symbiont print tape. For further details refer the customer to:
Sperry Univac 1100 Series Executive System Volume 3
System Processors (Form #4144.3).
Tape flies may be 7 or 9 track, Field Data or ASCII.
For description of tape labels and file format and definition
of line printer control functions refer the customer to:
Sperry Univac 110 Series Executive System Volume 2
EXEC (Form #4144.2). Limitations: Selection of the
non-IBM system tape format to be used must be made by the
operator before printing.
Where more than one print character is represented by one 8-blt
byte (data packing) on the non-IBM system print tape, applications
using character densities above 8160 characters per 11 Inch page
may impact 3800 overall throughput and must be evaluated.
When using non-IBM system print tape formats. control tapes
produced by IBM 3800 Tape-to-Prlnting Subsystem Feature Utility
(Program Product 5748-UT2) are supported only with an IBM
record format of VBM (variable length block machine language)
with standard IBM labels or no labels.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SPECIAL FEATURES
BURSTER-TRIMMER-STACKER (#1490). Provides an additional
output stacking mode. Bursts the five forms lengths to individual
sheets and stacks sheets sequentially. Also trims left and right 0.5
inches carrier strip from output sheet. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: One tool kit #9220 is required for
CE maintenance. Contact the account Field Manager for requirements. For rental customer - specify #9220 for first BursterTrimmer-Stacker feature ordered for a customer. If required for a
multiple machine Installation because of physical machine locations, an additional tool kites) Is available on a no-charge ME5. For
purchase customer -- specify #9220 on each Burster-TrlmmerStacker feature order. When Installed Burster-Trlmmer-Stackers
for
are purchased, a tool kit Is to be ordered on a no-charge
each. feature.
127 WRITABLE CHARACTER GENERATION STORAGE POSITIONS, ADD'L (#5401). Additional Increment of 127 positions
allows up to 255 graphics to be printed within a data set.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). To attach the Two
Channel Switch (#8170) to a configuration control panel.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch (#8170).
TAPE-TO-PRINTING SUBSYSTEM FEATURE (#7810). Allows the
3800 to be operated from magnetic tape data. Either 3411/3410
or 3803/3420 tape systems can be used. May be operated either
offline under operator control or online. Up to eight tape control
units may be attached provided that power sequencing and control
connection for all other than one are provided by a system; and
provided that all 3803 control units have at least one path, which
may be swltchable, to a S/360, S/370, or 4300 Processor. This
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8170). To attach the 3800 to two
S/370 or 4300 Processor channels which may be on the same
CPU or on two different CPUs. Both Interfaces must have the
same device address. The two channel switch will allow operation
on only one channel at a time. Selection of the channel which Is to
be operable is by means of manual switches on the control panel.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
DYNAMIC TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8171).
Provides the
additional capability of an automatic two channel switch. The
switch Is designed to furnish symmetric two processor support for
tightly coupled multiprocessor systems and to attach to two channels from a single CPU to provide alternate path capability. For
either tightly coupled multiprocessors or single CPU attachments,
data transfer occurs only one channel path at a time. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel Switch
(#8170).
Special Feature Prices:
BMC/
MRC
BETP/
MLC
2 Yr
Purchase BMMC
Burster-Trlmmer-Stkr #1490 $1,163 $ 990
127 Writable Char Gen
Storage Pos., Add'i
5401
85
72
Remote Switch Attach 6148
NC
NC
Tape-ta-Ptg Subsys Fea 7810
308
262
Two Channel Switch
8170
223
190
Dynamic Two Chan .S. 8171
NC
NC
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$49,100 $132.00
3,905
NC
10,500
8,545
NC
14.50
NC
24.50
11.50
NC
------ - - ---
---==
=':' =
M 3803.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3803 TAPE CONTROL - MODEL 1
Purpose: Control unit for 3420 Magnetic Tape Units mdls 3, 5
and 7.
Highlights: Single channel control for up to eight 3420 tape units.
Through special switching features, up to sixteen tape drives can
be addressed through any of four 3803 control units. Features are
offered to provide performance at 556 and 800 bpi in the seven
track NRZI format or at 800 bpi in the nine track NRZI format or
at 1600 bpi phase encoded.
The following table indicates feature numbers for corresponding
functions:
Subsystem Function
Feature Name
3420 Tape
Unit
#6631
1600 bpi PE 9-track only
Single Density
1600 bpi PE/800 bpi
Dual Density
#3550
NRZI 9-track
1600 bpi PE/556-800 bpi
Seven Track
#6407 0
NRZl7-track
o Tape umt WIll only read or wnte 7-track tape.
3803 Control
Unit
#9570
#3551
#6408
PREREQUISITES: A control unit position on a S/360, S/370 or
4300 Processor system channel, or Tape-to-Printing Subsystem
Feature (#7810) on a 3800 Printing Subsystem. When used with
a 3800 with feature #7810, at least one path, which may be
switchable, must be provided to a S/360, S/370 or 4300
Processor. When multiple control units (up to 8 are allowable) are
connected to a 3800, all other than one must have power sequencing and control connection provided by a system.
For S/360 mdl 30 - if the 3803 is attached to the 2030 selector
channel via the 1400 Magnetic Tape Compatibility Feature
(#4468), then 3420/1400 Compatibility (#9750) is required on
the 2030 ... see "Specify" under 2030.
Limitations: Attachable to all S/360 and S/370 systems except
S/360 mdls 20, 25 and 44, and S/370 mdls 115 and 125. Mdl
135: NOT supported on byte multiplexer channel for concurrent
operation with Integrated File Adapter, Integrated Communications
Adapter, or Selector Channel. Attachable to 4331. and 4341
Processors. For considerations see "4331 Channel Characterics,
GA33-1527." Note: A 3803 cannot be attached to the byte multiplexer ch~nnel on a 4341 Processor.
3420 mdls 4, 6 or 8 cannot be addressed through a 3803 mdl 1.
Bibliography: S/360 -- GC20-0360, S/370 - GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Either Dual Density (#3551) or Seven Track (#6408)
must be ordered unless Single Density (#9570) is specified.
Only one of the three features can be installed.
control unit with either Single Density (#9570) or Seven TraCk
(#6408).
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6146). Provides for remote
operation of the Two Channel Switch (#8100) on the 3803 mdl 1,
from a remote console such as the configuration control panel
(3058 or 3068) for a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP. Operation of
the switch on the remote console will result in the same function
as operation of the 3803 switch. The 3803 switches will be functionally inoperative when this feature is installed. The cable to the
remote console is not provided by this feature. The cable used
must contain three wires for each Enable/Disable switch to be
installed. Each line must have a total loop resistance of less than
75 ohms when the remote switch completes the path. For operation with the 2925 mdl 10, 3058 or 3068, cable PIN 5351178 is
required and should be ordered
separate .
Provides for the attachment of tape
SEVEN TRACK (#6408).
units equipped with Seven Track (#6407) to read and write tapes
at either 556 or 800 bpi in the 7-track format compatible with
tapes written by 729, 7330, 7335 and 2400 series tape units
equipped with 7-track read/write heads. Includes the translator
function, which, when used, causes 8-bit bytes from the I/O inter•.
face to be written on tape as 6-bit BCD characters and 6-bit BCD
characters read from tape to be translated into their EBCDIC
equivalents. The Data Conversion Function, also included, allows
reading and writing of 8-bit bytes on 7-track tape by converting
four tape characters into three storage bytes and vice versa. Tape
units equipped with Single Density (#6631) can also be attached.
Limitation: Cannot be installed in the same control unit with either
Single Density (#9570) or Dual Density (#3551).
TWO CHANNEL S~ITCH (#8100).
Permits connection of the
3803 Tape Control to a second channel. Alternate path switching
between two channels on the same system is under program
control. Partitioning of attached tape units between channels on
two different systems can be done using current procedures for
logical device partitioning. These procedures involve the proper
use of the operator commands VARY ON/VARY OFF (OS) or
DVCDN/DVCUP (DOS).
Note: When installed on the S/360
mdl 30, the 3803 with #8100 is not supported under 1400 Magnetic Tape Compatibility (#4468), but is supported with the Programmed Mode Switch (#5856) when the tapes are operated in
360 mode under CS1400 program support.
TAPE SWITCHING: SWitching configurations, via two, three or
four control units, are available to provide access to:
(a) Up to eight tape units attached to a single control unit.
(b) Up to sixteen tape units, with eight attached to each of two
control units.
[2] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
All switchable tape units must be attached to the control units
equipped with· the switching features (2-Control Switch, 3-Control
Switch or 4-Control Switch). Each control unit must be equipped
with the appropriate Single DenSity, Dual Density or Seven Track
feature for any drive in the pool to which it has access.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
The table below indicates features required for the available
switching options.
[4] If a tape switching configuration is being ordered, the 3803
must be equipped with a Communicator (#9071 or #9073) ...
see table under "Tape Switching" below. If a Communicator
feature is ordered for a 3803 without a switching feature, no
tape units can be attached to that control unit.
PRICES Mdl
MACI
MRC
FTP/
MLC MLC
1 yr 0 2 yr
ETPI
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
$757
$696 $636 $636 $23,670 $109
3803
1
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Maintenance: A
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Switching
Options
2x8
3x8
4x8
2 x 16
3 x 16
• FTP is 12-23 months.
ETP /FTP/MLC ... all models of the 3803 may be under ETP /MLC
or ETP/MLC.
Model Changes: A 3803 mdl 1 may be converted to a 3803 mdl
2 in the field ... for Model Upgrade Price, see 3803 Tape Control
mdl2.
4 x 16
Features Required
Communicator 1-2
2-Control Switch
Communicator 1-2
3-Control Switch
Communicator 1-2
4-Control Switch
Communicator 1-2
2-Control Switch
Communicator 1-2
Communicator 3-4
3-Control Switch
Communicator 1-2
Communicator 3-4
4-Control Switch
SPECIAL FEATURES
Note: All special features for the 3803 are field installable.
DUAL DENSITY (#3551). Provides for the attachment of tape
units equipped with Dual Density (#3550) to read and write tapes
at either 1600 bpi PE or 800 bpiNRZI nine track. Tape units
equipped with Single Density (#6631) can also be attached.
Limitation: Dual Density (#3551) cannot be installed in the same
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
On lst
3803
9071
1792
9071
1793
9071
1794
9071
1792
9071
Feature Numbers
On 2nd On 3rd
3803
3803
9071
--
--
--
9071
9071
On 4th
3803
----
--
--
--
9071
9071
9071
--
-------
--------
9073
9073
--
--
9071
1792
9071
--
--
1793
9071
1793
9071
--
--
1794
1794
9073
--- --------_... --==-=':'=
-
M 3803.2
May 79
DP Machines
3803 Tape Control - Modell
(cont'd)
FTP/
ETP/
MAC/ MLC MLC MLC
Special Feature Prices: MAC 1 yr· 2 yr 2 yr Purchase
The 3803 mdl 2 may attach to 5/3130 mdls 50 thru 195 (67 in 65
mode only) by no-charge RPQ. RPQs must indicate the desired
channel position and if the system operates under emulation.
MMMC
Tape Switching
2-Cntrl Switch #1792$223 $205 $187 $187 $ 7,020 $11.00
1793 286 263 240 240
8,955 17.50
3-Cntrl Switch
1794 335 308 281 281 10,530 17.50
4-Cntrl Switch
3551
83
76
70
70
2,630
3.00
Dual Density
30
28
28
1,045
NC
Aemote Sw Attac 6148 33
6408 83 76 70 70 2,630 ·3.00
Seven Track
5,265
5.50
Two Channel Sw 8100 166 153 139 139
• FTP is 12-23 months.
IB~
3803 TAPE CONTROL - MODEL 2
Purpose: Control unit for 3420 Magnetic Tape Units mdls 3
through 8.
Highlights:
- Standard control unit provides 6250 and 1600 bpi densities.
- 6250 Encoding/Checking Logic allows error correction on the
fly for any single track or combinations of two tracks simultaneously. Errors may be corrected in all nine tracks of a single
data block providing they occur in combinations of no more
than two tracks at a time. Long tape blocks are subdivided by
resync bursts which are inserted within the block to allow
error tracks to return to fun operation when reading forward,
thereby restoring maximum error correction capability.
- Optional features provide 9-track (800 bpi) NRZI, or 9-track
(800 bpi) NRZI with 7-track (800, 556, 200 bpi) NRZI formats.
- 9-track NRZI with 7-track NRZI features permit mixing 9 and
7-track tape units on the same 3803 mdl 2.
The following table indicates features for corresponding functions:
3803 Tape Control
Model 2
Subsystem Density
Feat Name Feat #
Standard
9T - 6250
Standard
9T - 6250+1600
9T - 6250+1600+800 9 Tr NRZI #5310
9T - 6250+ 1 600+800
with
7 Tr NRZI #6320·
7T - 800-556-200
3420 Tape Unit
Mdl-3,5,7 Mdl-4,6,8
Feat #
Feat #
N/ A
#6420
#6631
#6425
#3550
N/A
#6407
N/A
• Requires #5310.
- A pool of up to 16 tape units may be switched between 2, 3 or
4 control units.
.
- A 3803, via a two-channel switch feature, connects to two
channels of the same system or two channels of different
systems.
- Properly featured, a 3803 mdl 2 provides signal and power
attachment for up to eight 3420 mdls 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. Model 8s
may be attached as described under "Limitations."
PREREQUISITES: Control unit position on S/370 or 4300
Processor channel, or Tape-to-Printing Subsystem Feature
(#7810) on a 3800 Printing Subsystem. When used with a 3800
with feature #7810, at least one path, which may be switchable,
must be provided to a S/360, S/370 or 4300 Processor. When
multiple control units (up to 8 are allowable) are connected to a
3800, all other than one must have power sequencing and control
connection provided by a system. If attached to a 2860, a 3803
Mdl 2 Attachment (#7850) is required on each channel to which
3803 mdl 2s are attached. For the #7850, specify #9181 for the
first channel of a 2860... #9182 for the second channel
#9183 for the third channel. See 2860.
Systems Attachment: The 3803 mdl 2 attaches to a S/370 or
4300 Processor via the indicated channels:
System
3420mdl 4
3420 mdl 6
3420 mdl8
135
135-3 - 138
145
145-3 - 148
155 - 158
165 - 168 - 195
3031
3032
3033
4331
4341
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
2860/2880
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
Blk MultplxT
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
2860/2880
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
. Blk Multplxr
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Selector t
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
2860/2880
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
Blk Multplxr
Blk Mu/tplxr
Blk Multplxr
t
Limitations: [1] 3803 mdl 2 attachment to S/370 mdls 135, 1353, 138, 145, 145-3 and 148 is configuration sensitive because of
potential system overrun. Consult System 370 Model 135 Channel
Characteristics (GA33-3010) or System 370 Model 145 Channel
Characteristics(GA24-3573) ... [2] The 3803 mdl 2 is not supported for attachment to byte multiplexer, multiplexer or 2870 Selector
Subchannels ... [3] The 3803 mdl 2 operating with 3420 rndl 8s is
limited to a maximum channel to control unit (total x dimension)
cable length of 119 feet to the 2880 or selector channel of a
S/370 mdl 145, 119 feet to the block multiplexer channel of a
S/370 mdl 145-3 or 148, 103 feet to the block multiplexer channel of a S/370 mdl 155, 3032 or 3033, and. 72 feet to a 2860 : ..
[4] The 3803 mdl 2 provides power and signal connections for
3420 tape drives. Up to eight drives of any model can be. signal
connected to a 3803 mdl 2. Note that 3420 mdls 4, 6 and 8 must
signal connect to a 3803 mdl 2. [5J For aI/ 4331 considerations,
see 4331 Channel Characteristics, GA33-1527.
One 3803, either mdl 1 or mdl 2, provides power for up to eight
3420 mdls 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. When the tape subsystem includes
3420 mdl 8s, one 3803, mdl 1 or mdl 2, may power a maximum of
six 3420 mdl 8s or combinations of drives as listed in the table
below.
Maximum number of drives which may be powered frorri one 3803.
No. of 3420
Model 8s
and
No. of 3420
Model 7s
6
5
5
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
I
0
I
0
2
I
0
4
3
2
I
0
5
and
No. of 3420
Models 3-6
0
0
2
I
2
3
0
I
2
4
5
0
4
2
3
2
I
3
4
5
0
6
...
••• If only one 3420 mdl 8, then any combination of seyen additional tape
units is permissable.
When the system includes more than one 3803 mdl 2 and the
number of tape drives which must be signal connected to a control
unit exceeds the maximum number of drives which may be powered from one 3803 (see table above), obtain power from another
control unit using separate power cable (Group 144). Separate
signal cable (Group 143) is also available.
A power supply feature (#9001) is available which allows eight
3420s of any model to be powered from one 3803 mdl 2 ... see
"Specify." This feature is necessary only if:
[1] The subsystem includes only one 3803 mdl 2 and the
drives to be powered from it exceed the maximum specified in
the table above, or
[2] The power load still exceeds the table limitations for a
3803 when distribution by re-cabling with separate power and
signal cables has been considered.
Bibliography: GC20-000.1
Specify: [1] VOltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Density: 6250 and 1600 bpi are standard and need not be
specified. In addition, specify 9 Track NRZI (#5310) or 7
Track NRZI (#6320) if required ... see "Special Features:'
[4] If a tape switching configuration is being ordered,the. 3803
must be equipped with a Communicator (#9071 or #9073) ...
see table under "Tape SWitching" below. If a Communicator
feature is· ordered for a 3803 without a switching feature, no
tape units can be signal attached to that control unit.
[5] Auxiliary AC Power Supply: #9001. Required to power more
than six 3420 mdl 8s from one 3803 mdl 2. Also may be required to power 3420 rndl 8s in combination with· other drives
... see "Umitations" above. Requires a 100.amp power source ..
With or without Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421).
Not ·to bereproducedwitftoutwritten •permission ..
-------- --=- =------ --=--':' =
M 3803.3
May 79
DP Machines
3803 Tape Control Model 2 (conl'd)
FTP/
MAC/ MLC MLC
PRICES: Mdl
MRC
1 yr> 2 yr
3803
2
$1,101 $1,013$925
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
$925$39,420
Switching
Options
$150
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Calegory: 2
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
2x8
3x8
4x8
• FTP is 12-23 months.
ETP/FTP/MLC: ETP, FTP and MLC are optionally available.
Customers can transfer to ETP /MLC when the 3803 mdl 1 is
converted to a mdl 2 or when 3420s are model changed or at any
time thereafter. The early termination charge does not apply but
the two year ETP /MLC committment period begins at the date of
the ETP /MLC contract, not the FTP/MLC contract.
3420s and 3803s shipped from the plant may be under ETP /MLC,
FTP/MLC or MAC/MRC at the customer's option.
Model Changes: A 3803 mdl 1 can be converted to a 3803 mdl 2
in the field.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE
installation charges)
(there are no additional
From Model 1 to Model 2 - $15,750 > >
••
Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for Purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
9 TRACK NRZI (#5310). Required for attachment of 3420 mdls
3, 5 or 7 equipped with Dual Density (#3550). Allows attached
tape drives to read and write data in 9-track - 800 bpi format as
well as 1600 bpi (Phase Encoded) format. Field Installation: Yes.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#6148). Provides for remote
operation of the Two Channel Switch (#8100) on the 3803 mdl 2,
from a remote console such as the configuration control panel
(3058 or 3068) for a S/370 mdl 158 MP or 168 MP. Operation of
the switch on the remote console will result in the same function
as operation of the 3803 switch. The 3803 switches will be functionally inoperative when this feature is installed. The cable to the
remote console is not provided by this feature. The cable used
must contain three wires for each Enable/Disable switch to be
installed. Each line must have a total loop resistance of less than
75 ohms when the remote switch completes the path. For operation with the 2925 mdl 10, 3058 or 3068, cable P /N 5351178 is
Field
required and should be ordered
separate
Installation: Yes.
7 TRACK NRZI (#6320). Required for attachment of 3420 mdls
3, 5 or 7 equipped with Seven Track (#6407). Allows attached
tape drives to read and write data in 7-track/200, 556 or 800 bpi
format. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 9 Track NRZI
(#5310).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8100).
Permits connection of the
3803 to a second channel. Alternate path switching between two
channels on the same system is under program control. Partitioning of attached tape units between channels on two different
systems can be done using current procedures for logical device
partitioning. The procedures involve the proper use of the operator
commands VARY ONLINE/VARY OFFLINE (aS) or DVCDN/DVCUP
(DOS).
TAPE SWITCHING (#1792 - 1794). Switching configurations, via
two, three or four control units, are available to provide access to:
(a) Up to eight tape units attached to a single control unit.
(b) Up to sixteen tape units, with eight attached to each of two
control units.
All switchable tape units must be signal attached to the control
units equipped with the switching features (2-Control Switch,
3-Control Switch, or 4-Control Switch). Each control unit must be
equipped with appropriate density feature for any drive in the pool
to which it has access. Field Installation: Yes.
The table below indicates features required for the available
switching options.
2 x 16
3 x 16
4 x 16
Feature Numbers
Features Required
On 1st
3803
On 2nd
3803
Communicator 1-2
9071
1792
9071
..
..
2·Control Switch
..
..
..
Communicator 1-2
9071
9071
9071
..
3·Control Switch
1793
..
..
..
Communicator 1·2
9071
9071
..
9071
On 3rd
3803
4·Control Switch
1794
9071
..
Communicator 1·2
9071
9071
..
On 4th
3803
..
..
..
2·Control Switch
1792
1792
..
Communicator 1·2
9071
..
9071
..
9073
..
..
..
Communicator 3-4
..
3·Control Switch
1793
1793
..
Communicator 1-2
9071
..
..
..
Communicator 3·4
9071
..
4·Control Switch
1794
1794
9073
..
9073
...
FTP/
ETP/
MAC/ MLC MLC MLC
Special Feature Prices: MRC 1 yr> 2 yr 2 yr Purchase
MMMC
Tape Switching
2-Cntrl Switch #1792$223 $205 $187 $187 $ 7,020 $11.00
3-Cntrl Switch
1793 286 263 240 240
8,955 17.50
4-Cntrl Switch
1794 335 308 281 281 10,530 17.50
5310 110 101
92
92
3,530
1.50
9 Track NRZI
Remote Sw Altac 6148
33
30
28
28
1,045
NC
7 Track NRZI
6320
54
50
45
45
1 ,735
1 .50
5,265
5.50
Two Chnl Switch 8100 166 153 139 139
• FTP is 12-23 months.
IBM 3803 TAPE CONTROL - MODEL 3
Purpose: Control unit for attaching 3420 Magnetic Tape Units
mdls 3 and 5 to S/370 mdls 115 and 125.
Highlights: Single channel control for up to eight 3420 tape units.
Features are offered to provide performance at 556 and 800 bpi in
the seven track NRZI format or at 800 bpi in the nine track NRZI
format or at 1600 bpi phase encoded.
The following table indicates feature numbers for corresponding
functions:
Subsystem Function
Feature Name
3420 Tape
Unit
3803 Control
Unit
1600 bpi PE 9·track only
Sinde Density
#6631
#9570
1600 bpi PE/800 bpi
NRZI 9·track
Dual Density
#3550
#3551
1600 bpi PE/556·800 bpi
NRZl7·track
Seven Track
#6407'
#6408
>
Tape unit will only read or write 7·track tape.
PREREQUISITES: The Magnetic Tape Adapter feature (#4675)
and Specify feature (#9807) on S/370 mdl 115 or 125.
Limitations: Attachable to S/370 mdl 115 and 125 only. 3420
mdls 4, 6, 7 or 8 cannot be addressed through a 3803 mdi 3.
Bibliography: GC20-0001.
SPECIFY: [1] Either Dual Density (#3551) or Seven Track
(#6408) must be ordered unless Single Density (#9570) is
specified. Only one of the three features can be installed.
[2] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
PRICES:Mdl
3803
3
MAC/
MRC
FTP/
MLC MLC
1 yr'2 yr
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
$817
$752$686 $686
$24,600
$137
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Maintenance: A
Purchase Option: 55% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
• FTP is 12-23 months.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- =':' =
= =-
---- ---- ---- ---
M 3803-3811
Mav19
DP Machines
3803 Tape Control Model 3 (cont'd)
ETP/FTP/MLC ... all models of the 3803 may be under ETP/MLC
or FTP/MLC.
Model Changes: A 3803 mdl 1 may be converted to a 3803 mdl
3 in the field. Field conversion of a 3803 mdl 2 to a 3803 mdl 3
or a 3803 mdl 3 to a 3803 mdl 2 is not available. On field converting a purchased 3803 mdl 1 to a 3803 mdl 3. features
#9071. #9073; #1792. #1793. #1794. #6148 and #8100 if
installed on the 3803 mdl 1 must be removed at customer's expense.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHA5E PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 1 to Model 3 ..... $8,900
DUAL DENSITY (#3551). Provides for the attachment of tape
units equipped with Dual Density (#3550) to read and write tapiJs
at either 1600 bpi PE or 800 bpi NRZI nine track. Tape units
equipped with Single Density (#6631) can also be attached.
Limitation: Dual Density (#3551) cannot be installed in the same
control unit with either Single Density (#9570) or Seven Track
(#6408). Field Installation: Yes.
5EVEN TRACK (#6408).
Provides for the attachment of tape
units equipped with Seven Track (#6407) to read and write tapes
at either 556 or 800 bpi in the 7-track format compatible with
tapes written by 729. 7330, 7335 ancl 2400 series tape units
equipped with 7-track read/write heads. Includes the transiator
function, which. when used. causes 8-bit bytes from the I/O Interface to be written on tape as 6-bit BCD characters and 6-bit BCD
characters read from tape to be translated into their EBCDIC
equivalents. The Data Conversion function. also included. allows
reading and writing of 8-blt bytes on 7-track tape by converting
four tape characters into three storage bytes and vice versa. Tape
units equipped with Single Density (#6631) can also be attached.
Limitation: Cannot be installed in the same control unit with either
Single Density (#9570) or Dual Density (#3551). Field
Installation: Yes.
FTP/
ETP/
MAC/ MLC MLC MLC
Special Feature Prices: MRC 1 yr*2 yr 2 yr Purchase
Dual Density
Seven Track
#3551 $ 83 $ 76 $ 70 $ 70 $2,630
6408 83 76 70 70 2,630
MMMC
$3.00
3.00
multiplexer channel (standard) ... see 3138.
S/370 mdl 145 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Selector
Channels. Block Multiplexer Channels (special features) ... see
3145.
S/370 mdl 145-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multiplexer channels ... see 3145-3.
S/370 mdl .148 - byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
multiplexer channels (standard) ... see 3148.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 - multiplexer channel (standard). Second
Byte Multiplexer Channel (special feature). block multiplexer
channels (first two are standard) ... see 3155, 3158.
3031, 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (one is standard). block multiplexer channels (five are standard) ... see 3031
3032.
•
3033 - byte multiplexer channels (two are standard). block
multiplexer channels (ten are standard) ... see 3033.
4331 - byte multiplexer channel (special feature). block multiplexer channel (special feature) ... see 4331.
.
4341 - byte multiplexer. channel (standard), block multiplexer
channels (two are standard) ... see 4341.
Bibliography: S/360 - GC20-0360. S/370 - GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2J Color:
#9041 for red. #9042 for yellow. #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray. or #9046 for white.
PRICES:
Mdl
3811
1
FTP/
MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC 1yr· 2 yr
$883
$812
MMMC
$180
Plan Offering: Plan A. Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online) (meter on 3211)
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 45% Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
MOdel/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
• FTP is 12-23 months.
SPECIAL FEATURES
I.BM 3811 PRINTER CONTROL UNIT
Purpose: Control unit for the 3211 Printer in a S/360 mdl 22. 30.
40.50.65.67 (in 65 mode). 75,85. 195 or any S/370 Processor
(except 3115 or 3125, or any 4300 Processor.
Highlights: The 3811 provides the necessary controls for attaching the 3211 Printer to the I/O channels provided by the processing system. It contains all the necessary electronic controls and
buffering to adapt the mechanical printer to the channel. The
control unit (3811) and the mechanical printer (3211) are physically attached to each other.
PRINT POSITIONS, 18 ADDITIONAL (#5553). Controls for Print
Positions, 18 Additional (#5554) on the 3211 Printer. Field
Installation: Yes.
FTP/
MAC/ MLC MLC
MRC 1 yr· 2 yr Purchase MMMC
Print Pos, 18 Add'l #5553 $22
$20 $18 $752
$6.50
Special Feature Prices:
• FTP i. 12·23 month•.
The logic. buffers and controls of the Universal Character Set and
Forms Control Buffer are located in the 3811 .
PREREQUISITES: The 3811 requtres a control unit position on a
system channel.
5/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 - multiplexer channel (standard).
Selector Channels (special features. except on 2022 one selector
channel Is standard) ... see 2022. 2030, 2040. 2050.
5/360 mdl 65, 75 - selector channel of 2860. basic multiplexer
channel of 2870. Selector Subchannels (special festures) on
2870 ... see 2860. 2870.
5/360 mdl 67 - basic multiplexer channel of 2870 ... see 2870.
S/360 mdl 85, 195, S/370 mdl 165. 168, 195 -- selector channel of 2860. basic multiplexer channel of 2870. Selector Subchannels (special features) of 2870, the shared subchannels or
non-shared subchannels (non-shared attachment is recommended) of a 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel... see 2860, 2870,
2880.
5/370 mdl 135 - multiplexer channel (standard). Selector Channels (special features), block multiplexer channel (special feature)
.•. see 3135.
S/370 mdl 135-3 - byte multiplexer channel (standard), Block
Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ... see 3135-3.
5/370 mdl 138 -
Purchase
$742 $22,460
byte multiplexer channel (standard). block
Not to be reproduced Withour4ritten pefmission.
--- ------- ---- -.. --_
-
-
M 3830.1
Mav 79
DP Machines
IBM 3830 STORAGE CONTROL
Purpo..: Control unit for 3330, 3333, 3340, 3344 or 3350 disk
storage.
fModeI1
Model 2
Provides for attac hment of up to four 3330 modules in any
combination of mdls 1 and/or 2. Attaches to S/360
mdl 195 or S/370 mdls 165, 168 or 195 via a 2880
Block Multiplexer Channel. Attachment to the S/370
mdls 135 or 145 Is made via the system block multiplexer channel or selector channel and to the 1353, 138, 145-3 and 148 via the block multiplexer
channel. Attachment to S/370 mdls 155 or 158 is
made via the system's block multiplexer channel.
Attachment to a 3031, 3032, 3033 or 4341 Proc·
essor Is made via a block multiplexer channel.
Provides for the attachment of 3333s (mdls 1
and/or 11) and/or 3340 mdl A2s and/or 3350 mdl
A2s/A2Fs
see DASD Configuration under
"Specify." Additional storage is provided by attaching 3330 modules to the 3333 or by attaching 3340
mdl Bs and/or 3344s to the 3340 mdl A2 or by
attaching 3350 mdl Bs and/or a mdl C to the 3350
mdl A2/A2F ..• see DASD Configuration under
"Specify" and 3330, 3333, 3340, 3344, 3350
"Machines" pages.
Attaches to S/360 mdl 195 or S/370 mdls 165,
168 or 195 via a 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel.
Attachment to S/370 mdl 135 (see "Limitations") or
145 is made via the system's block multiplexer
channel or selector channel and to the 135-3, 138,
145-3 and 148 via the block multiplexer channel.
Attachment to S/370 mdl 155 or 156 is made via
the system's block multiplexer channel. Attachment
to a 3031, 3032, 3033 or 4341 Processor is made
via a block multiplexer channel.
Highlights: File organization and format are under program control
... command structure permits fiexible and efficient processing of
either randomly or sequentially organized flies. Data integrity Is
provided through extensive error detection and correction capabilities.
Standard Features ... Include the following:
Command Chaining - allows sequential records within a cylinder
to be read/written by a sequence of channel commands without
rotational delays between records.
.
Record Overflow - storage efficiency is obtained by allowing
.records to span track boundaries within a cylinder.
PREREQUISITES: [1] The 3830 mdl 1 Is designed for Interconnected operation with 3330 Disk Storages. Customers who wish to
order a 3830 mdl 1 for stand-alone or Individual use should submit
an RPQ to provide the necessary safety elements (covers, cable
connectors, etc.) to complete the unit for a non-standard (i.e., not
Interconnected as part of a 3330 faCility) environment. In lieu of
the RPQ, the customer may provide safety elements equivalent to
the standard 3830 mdl 1 /3330 configuration or that provided by
the RPQ. If not provided, the unit will be offered on a purchase
only besis. See item [3] under "Specify." Agreement for IBM to
install and maintain the 3830 mdl 1 in any non-standard environment must' be reviewed
[2] An available control unit position on a channel. One unshared
subchannel for each drive attached. on a system block multiplexer
channel or a 2880 Block Multiplexer Channel. For S/370 mdls
135 and 145, a system block multiplexer channel is required for
support of block multiplexing and rotational position sensing ...
see 3333, 3330, 3340, 3344 and 3350. If this support Is not
required, attachment to a system selector channel Is permitted.
Limitations: [1] See 3333, 3330, 3340, 3344 and 3350 for system support limitations ... [2] In S/370 md1135, 135-3, 138, when
a 3830 mdl 2 is attached to a block multiplexer channel, only 16
logical devices will operate in this mode even if more than 16
logical devices are attached.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with 3330,
3333 or 3340 voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white.
[4] DASD Configuration (3830 mdl 2 only): The available combinations of storage devices which can be attached are shown in
the tables below. One, two or three Xs In a vertical column
Indicate the type of machine(s) listed under DASD Configuration
which can be attached when the "Required DASD Specify
Features" are installed.
Based on the DASD, and the Special Features listed below
being ordered for them, ·order the Required DASD Specify
Feature(s) from the appropriate table.
3830 MODEL 2 WITH OR WITHOUT TWO CHANNEL SWITCH
(#8170)
..
DASD Configura1ion
One or two 3333. with
associated 3330.
Up 10 four 3333_ with
M
.ssoci.led 3330_
Strong Switch 181501 on
any 3333
One or two 3340 mdl A2,
witha.sociatedmdI81:82
>
1: Up 10 four 3340 mdl A2.
0 with ."oeleled mol 81182
0
String Switch 181501 on
any 3340 mdl A2
Fixed Head Fealure
:~301/43021 on anv 3340
Up to four 3340 mdl A2,
of which up 10 two may
att..,., 3344.
Switch 181501 on
;:;
..,. Strinq
any 3340 mdl A2 andlor
Fixed Head Feature on
anv 3340 14:101/43021
3333, and 3340 mdl A2s
lany comhinalk.'1 of two.
I three. or four) each wi1h
~ ':i i associated drives
~ String Switch 18150) en
M
_
any 3333 or 3340 mdl A2
>
c
0
.........
I
" "
x
X
I
x
I
~f
II
I
I
!
.
"
I
'xlx
I
""
I"
"
1
II
i
xxx
x
."
I
•
II
I
I
1
I-
II
x
I
I
I
I
Notes:
t ISC di.skette-oDly specifY feature. No fee .tan ordered at lime of manufacture or with charseable feature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchased
machiaes 10 incluile any number of disket\e-Only changes ordered on \he
same diskette.
• Any change 10 an insta1led DASD Confiauralion requires an MBS ONL Vif
\he new conf'lJIU'IIlion indicates that a different Soecify and/or S~
Feature(l) ia required. The MBS must include additiOn ot any new SpecifY
and/or Special Features nol previously inaIalled. AND removal of any. DOl
1isIecl as required for the new confipralioD.
•• Control Store BxIeDsion (#2IS0) ia prerequisite. With #93IS, \he 3830 mdl 2
requires 32 contiguous device acldrOssea reprd\ea8 of \he number of drives
attached.
+ Control Slore BxIeDsion (#2IS0) and Ilegisler Expansion (#6111) are
prerequisites. For conf'lprationa in Ihia group \he 3830-2 uses 64 contiguous
device add_ irrespective of \he numtier oT drives attached. The 3340 mdl
All on \he lint and third ~ may attach up 10 three 3340 mdl BI, B2a,
and/or 33441 in any combination. The 3340 mdl A2 on \he second BIrin&
may al\ach up 10 three 3340 mdl Bl/BlI. The 3340 mdl A2 on \he fourt1i
BIrin& may attach one 3340 mdl BI or B2.
++ Expanded Control Store 1#21S1), Control Slore Expansion (#2150) and
Rqia\eI; Expansion (#6111 are prerequisi\ea. For conf'l8UratiOUS in Ihia
group the 3830-2 _
8 or 6 or 32 or 64 device addresses dependina upon
the DASD confi&uralion inslalled and whether any 33S0 drive ia in ')330-1
compatibility mode.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
!
"
I "
::.
f No Ioapravailablc.
i
I
l=l .£1 Fi~ed
[3] Non-atandard Environment: #9485 ... must be specified if the
3830 mdl 1 is not to be installed as part of a 3330 faCility.
Also see "Prerequisites" above.
!
I
I
8
. _I
I
~~i
x
...
.........
......
Head Feature
•
14301/43021 on any 3340
:: IUP to four 3350 mdl A2s1
15 IA2Fs w associated mdl
o ·B2s/B2Fs. C2/C2F
l!l ~ring Sw 181 SOlon any
M
.3350 mdl A2/A2F.C2/C2F
:1333s •. 3340 mdl A2, and
;:; ~ 3350mdl A2sfA2F, lany
~ R combination of 2. 3 or 41
M _ wtth associated drives
-;;: ..s
:> String Sw 181501 on any
M 0 3333, 3340 rodl A2. or
M l!l 3350 mdl A2/A2FJ:,2/C2F
M andlor Fixed Head F ea
14301/43021 on anv 3340 .'
...
I
""
.........
....
..
Required DASD Sp.cify Fea1ure, • ,
+
931St 9317 9318
9314t 9315
~\'3 9314
t
t
9190 t
t
9190 t t
•
•
I
"l-
I
j.
,I
------ -------=::'::E,?,=
M 3830.2
May 79
DP Machines
3830 Storage Control (cont'd)
3830 MODEL 2 WITH TWO CHANNEL SWITCH, ADD'L (#8171)
AND ITS PREREQUISITE TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8170)
R.quired DASD Specify F •• ,ur •• •
+•
9318
9315
DASD Co~figur.'ion
9313 9313t
t 9841t
One or twO 3333s with
ssociated 3330s
Up 10 four 3333s with
associaled 3330s
Strin~ Swilch 181501 on
anv 333
One. or IwO 3340 mdl A2.
Wllh associated r)'ldl B l/B2
Up 10 four 3340 mdl A2s
with associaled mdl B1/B:2s
Strin~ Switch 181501 on
any 340 mdl A2
to four 3340 mdl A2.
>-
'!
0
a...
>-
'!
0
1...
..
..
X
x
,
x
I
I
""
:
II
""
"
" "
atlach 3344s
"
Fixed Head Feature on.
any ,3340 14301/43021
3333. and 3340 mdl A2$
1I:!i
"
l;nll :~~~~~~~:c~,~
drives
.....
...
~
I!:I- :~~n~3~ji~~h3~5~dfA2
..
!
"
Up to four ;S~50 mdl A2s1
A2F. w associated mell
B2s/B2Fs, C2/C2F
Siring Sw 181501 on any
3350 mdlA2/A2F C2,tC2F
33335, 3340 mdl A21 and
3350 mdl A'1s/A2F. (an~
combination of 2, 3 or 4
... with associated drives
~ ~~rong ?r".!..Hl ~J on anV
3333,3340 mdl A2 or
~ ,3350 mdl A2/A2F; C2/C2F
... land/or FiICed Head F~
II II
m
...
I'I
g-
, • "n1/4~n"l nn ..nv
t
t"
:~~n~~'Oi:;~1 ~~~o.!d7~
I
f0
~3V
I
t
xix
:;'fwhich up to twO may
i
II
x "
I
i
!
;
II
NOTE: For explanation of ., •• , +, ++ and t, see Notes foUowiq the
Table "3830 Model 2 with or Without Two Channel Switch (#8170)"
PRICES:
3830
Mdl
t
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT. ADD'L (#8149).
[Model 2
only] To attach the Two Channel Switch, Add'l (#8171) to a
configuration control penel. Field Installation: Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8170). To attach the 3830 to a
second channel ... the two channels may be on the same Processor or different Processors. An available control unit poSition Is
required on each channel ... see Item [2] under "Prerequisites."
Switching is under program control. The 3830 can be dedicated to
a single channel by means of an Enable/Disable switch. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH. ADD'L (#8171). Adds switching for
two additional channels to a 3830 with Two Channel Switch
(#8170), providing four channel switch capability. LlmltaUon: Only
two channels of the four available can be attached to the same
Processor.
Cannot be installed if Fixed Head Feature
(#4301/4302) is Installed on any 3340. Field InstallaUon: Yes.
Maximum: One. Prerequlslt..: Two Channel Switch (#8170).
Expanded Control Store (#2151) and/or Control Store Extension
(#2150) are also required in certain 3830 mell 2 configurations ..•
see DASD Configuration under "Specify."
MAC/
MRCI
ETP/
MLC
2 yrl
Purcha..
MMMC
$2.055
N/ A (a) $58.270
$159
1.740 $1.462 (b)
2
47.580
128
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Machine Group: D
Purchase Option: 60% Useful Life Category: 1
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
1
ETP/
MAC/ MLCI
Special F..ture Prlc..:
MRCI 2 yr Purcha.. MMMC
Control Store Extn
#2150· $402$338 (c)$11.000 $10.50
Expel Cntrl Store
§2151·
247 207 (a) 8.730
10.50
Register Expansion
8111·
24 20 (f)
640
4.00
Remote Switch Attach
8146
NC NC
NC
NC
NC NC
Rem Sw Attach. Add'l
8149
NC
NC
8170
171 144 (d) 4.890
10.50
Two Channel Switch
Two Channel Sw. Add'i 8171
171 144 (d) 4.690
10.50
• Feature supplies ISC diskette.
§ Cus; ,mer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement
letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
feature Involves the removal of parts which become the prop.
erty of IBM."
(a) ETP not available for mdl 1.FTP/MLC available for mdl 1 12-23 months - $1,8911 ... 24 months - $1,7261.
(b) FTP/MLC also available - 12-23 months - $1,6011 ... 24
months - $1,4621.
(c) FTP/MLC also available If 3830 on FTP/MLC. 12-23 months
- $3701 ... 24 months - $3381.
(d) ETP available for model 2 only. FTP/MLC available for both
models - FTP/MLC for #8170 or #8171 - 12-23 months $1571 ... 24 months - $1441.
(e) FTP /MLC also available - 12-23 mos. - $2271 ... 24 mos. $2071.
(1) FTP /MLC also available - 12-23 mos. - $ 221 ... 24 mos. $ 201.
lMAC/MR.C.ETP/MLC_PTP/MLCpri....~v.6/1/79.
Model Chang..: Model 1 can be field changed to Model 2. An
additional 15 amp AC power outlet Is required. The 3830 mdl 2 to
mdl 1 Is not recommended for field Installation.
IBM 3830 STORAGE CONTROL - Model 3
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Purpose: Provides for the attachment of 3333/3330/3350 DASD
In a 3850 Mass Storage System.
Highlights:
Model 1 to Model 2 ..........$7.140
SPECIAL FEATURES
tttCONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150). [Model 2 only] Provides additional control store for microprogram use ... see DASD
Configuration under "Specify" to determine when required. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
Virtual Disk Storage - provides up to 64 unique addresses for
each channel interface.
Channel Interfacee - up to three Processor channel interfaces
are available, providing up to 192 unique addresses on each
3830 mel13.
tttEXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151). [Model 2 only] Provides additional control storage for microprogram use ... see DASD
Configuration under "Specify" to determine when required.
Maximum: 9ne. Field Inatallatlon: Yes. Prerequlette: Control
Store Extension (#2150).
Drlv.. - up to 32 DASD spindles of 3333/3330 Models 1, 2 and
11 and 3350 mells A2/A2F, B2/B2F and C2/C2F can be attached. A 3830 mdl 3 with feature #9320 can operate any combination of up to four 3333 mdls 1 and 11 with associated 3330
melis 1, 2 and 11 and lor native 3350 melis A2/ A2F with associated native 3350 mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F. A 3830 mell 3 with
feature #6250 can operate up to four 3350 mdls A2/A2F with
associated 3350 mdls B2/B2F and C2/C2F In either native or
3330-11 mode. See 3333, 3330 and 3350 for additional Information.
Staging Drlv.. - up to sixteen 3333 mdl 1/3330 mdl 1 or 2
storage devices can be designated as staging drives. 3333/3330
mdl 11 or 3350 In 3330 mell 11 mode may also be used for
staging drives, however each 3333/3330 mdl 11 or 3350 In mdl
11 mode drive designated as a staging drive is equivalent to two
mdl 1 or mdl 2 drives. These staging drives will be used by the
3850 Mass Storage System to provide virtual storage. See note
tttREGISTER EXPANSION (#8111). [M~el 2 only] Provides
additional registers for microprogram use ... see DASD configuration under "Specify" to determine when required. Field
InstallaUon: Yes. Maximum: One.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#8148). [Model 2 only] To
attach the Two Channel Switch (#8170) to a configuration control
panel. Field Installation: Yes.
t
No IoDpr available.
When ordoriDa Ibia I'eaIure for llekl iDllIlIatioa. • Spocify P _ mlllt Il1o be
ordered ... see ''NoleI" UIICIct DASD Coafiawalioa Cbarta .bove 10 ~ wIIich II
tequiled.
ttt
NoUobe reproduced without written permission.
-------
---==- =-=
== ';: ==
M 3830.3
May 79
OP Machines
3830 Storage Control (cont'd)
on M3333 pages for feature changes required when 3333's are
retained for use with a 3851.
Staging Paths - the 3830 mdl 3 contains control storage for
data buffering and microcode. This accomplishes data staging
without utilizing S/370 or 4341 Processor channels or memory.
Real Drives - up to a maximum of 32 attached drives may be
designated as real. Each real drive uses one of the 192 unique
3830 addresses. All 3350 drives attached to a 3830 Mdl 3 with
feature #9320 must be designated as real in 3350 native mode
only. 3350 drives attached to a 3830 mdl 3 with feature #6250
may be designated as real in 3350 native or 3330 mdl 11 mode.
Virtual Storage - all data stored in the 3850 Mass Storage
System appears to the system as residing on a 3333/3330
storage device with all the data handling capabilities of the 3330
available..
PREREQUISITES: The 3830 mdl 3 must have the Two Channel
Switch (#8170) and Control Store Extension (#2150). One channel interface attaches to the 3851 MSF and one channel interface
attaches to the host Processor.
Limitations:
[1] A maximum of four 3830 mdl 3s may be attached to a S/370
or 4341 block multiplexer channel. If 3830 mdl 1s or 2s and/or
Integrated Storage Controls (#4650) are attached to the same
block multiplexer channel, the maximum number of 3830 mdl
3s will be reduced. Consult IBM 3850 Mass Storage (MSS)
Installation Planning and Table Create, GC35-0028 for total
system limitations.
[2] String Switch (#8150) may be installed on the 3333/3350 in a
3850 MSS for additional availability. Installation is not recommended in a mixed MSS/Non-MSS environment. See
3333/3350 for additional limitations.
[3] 3340 DASD cannot be installed on the 3830 Mdl 3.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be cc;msistent with
3333/3330 voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9048 for white.
[3] DASD Designation: #9313§ for 3333/3330 DASD, or #9320§
for 3333/3330/3350 DASD.
PRICES:
Mdl
3830
3
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC.
2 yr
Purcha88
$3,37Qf $2,831 f(a) $92,180
MMMC
$235
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Machine Group: A
Purchase Option: 60% Useful Life Category: 1
Per Call: 3
Model/Feature Additional Charge in lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
(a) FTP/MLC also available - 12-23 months - $3.100; ...
24 months - $2.83H.
Model Chang. .: 3830 mdl 2 can be field changed to a mdl 3.
MES order for model change must include correct serial number
and all installed and on order features and RPQs on the 3830 mdl
2 to be changed. It must also include removal of any of the following which are installed: #9190, #9314, #9315, #9317,
#9318, #9841. Prior to ordering the model change, installed and
on-order RPQs should be resubmitted
Control Store Extension (#2150) and Two Channel Switch
(#8170) must be previously installed or installed concurrently with
the model upgrade. For customers who wish to have an installed
3830 mdl 1 converted directly to a 3830 mdl 3, submit an RPQ.
trol store for microprogram use. Required if 3350 DASD is attached. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Control Store Extension (#2150).
CONTROL STORE ADDITIONAL (#2152) Provides additional
control store for microprogram use. Required if 3350 DASD is
attached. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequillte:
Control Store Extension (#2150), Register Expansion (#6111),
and Expanded Control Store (#2151).
REGISTER EXPANSION (#8111) Provides additional registers for
microprogram use. Required if 3350 DASD is attached. Field
Installation: Yes. Maximum: One.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT (#8148). To aitach the Two
Channel Switch (#8170) to a configuration panel. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes.
REMOTE SWITCH ATTACHMENT, ADD'I (#8149). To attach the
Two Channel Switch, Add'i (#8171) to a configuration panel.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: yes. Prerequisite: Remote
Switch Attachment (#6148).
3350 STAGING (#6250). Provides for staging to 3350 drives in
3330 mdl 11 mode and access to Real 3350 in either native or
3330 mdl 11 mode. Limitation: Attachment of 3333 mdls 1/11,
3330 mdls 1, 2 or 11 is mutually exclusive· with this feature.
Maximum: One Field Inltallatlon: Yes Prerequisites: Control
Store Additional (#2152) and Register Expansion (#6111).
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH (#8170). [req'd on mdl 3] Provides
system channel attachment capability for the 3830 mdl 3. One
channel interface attaches to the 3851 MSF and one channel
interface attaches to the host Processor. An available control unit
position is required. See "PrerequiSites" and "Limitations." Field
Installation: Yes.
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH, ADD'L (#8171). Provides attachment
for two additional channels to a 3830 mdl 3, providing three Processor channel switch capability. Limitation: Only two of the three
channel interfaces available can be attached to channels on the
same Processor. Maximum: One, see "Prerequisites" and
"Limitations." Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Two Channel
Switch (#8170).
Special Feature Prices:
Control Store ExtenSion #2150·$402 $338 $11,000 $10.50
Expanded Control Store 2151· 247 207
8,730 10.50
Control Store Additional 2152· 247 207
8,730
10.50
Register Expansion
8111 • 24
20
840
4.00
Remote Switch Attach
8148
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Remote Sw Attach, Add'i 8149
3350 Staging
8250· NC
NC
NC
NC
Two Chennel Switch
8170 171 144
4,890 10.50
Two Channel Sw, Add'i
8171 171 144
4,890 10.50
(b) FTP /MLC also available if 3830 on FTP/MLC
#2150 - 12-23 months - $370* ... 24 months #2151 - 12-23 months - $227* ... 24 months #2152 - 12-23 months - $227* ... 24 months #6111 - 12-23 months - $ 22* .. , 24 months #8170 - 12-23 months - $157* .. , 24 months #8171 - 12-23 months - $157* ... 24 months • F.ature supplies ISC diskette.
*MAC/MRC,ETP/MLC,andFTP/MLCpri....lTcctiv.6/1179.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
Model 2 to Model 3 ••••.•• U4.5BO.
•• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model upgrade involves the removal of parts which become the
property ob IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
[Req'd on mdl 3]
CONTROL STORE EXTENSION (#2150).
Provides additional control store for microprogram use. Field
Installation: Yes.
EXPANDED CONTROL STORE (#2151). Provides additional con-
§
ETP/
MAC/ MLC*
MRC* 2 yr (b) Purchase MMMC
ISC diskette-only specify feature. No fcc when orclcred at time of manufacture or with
chargeable f.ature that supplies diskette. $290 on purchaacd machines to include any
number of disk.tte-only changes ordered on same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
$338*.
$207*.
$207*.
$ 20*.
$144*.
$144*.
-------- ----- ---==-=
- - --':' =
M 3838.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 3838 ARRAY
PROCESSOR
Purpose: An auxiliary processing unit for S/370 mdl 145, 148,
1 58, 1 68 and a 3031, 3032, 3033 or 4341 Processor which
attaches on a block multiplexer channel. Processes single precision floating point vector operations found in seismic trace processing and other applications.
Model 1
Contains 256K bytes of bulk storage.
Model 2
Contains 512K bytes of bulk storage.
Model 3
Contains 1,024K bytes of bulk storage.
Highlights: Permits systems with a high content of vector processIng operations to execute the vector work in parallel with CPU
host processing thereby releasing the CPU for other multi programmed system tasks. User programmable by coding available instructions to define complete processing sequences. Contains five
functional components each capable of overlapped or concurrent
~peration to sustain processing performance.
'Channel Interface -- allows data and control information to transfer in block multiplexer mode at data rates up to 1.5 MB, or
when attached to a S/370 mdl 168 or a 3032 or 3033 Proc. essor, at data rates up to 3.0 MB with the two-byte interface
feature in conjunction with the 2880 equipped with a similiar
feature (#7850 or #7851) or on the 3032 or 3033, when the
channel to which it is attached is equipped with a similar feature
(#7850).
Bulk Storage -- provides independent data storage for up to
seven concurrent 3838 users ... seven is the upper limit on 3838
user partitions but is not restrictive of the number of host regions
executing 3838 destined jobs. The user partitions may be shared
or exclusive ... receives input data from the host and buffers for
processing ... during processing of algorithm sequences, provides
initial, intermediate, and final result data storage. Final results
are subsequently transmitted to the host under control of a pending CCW on the block multiplexer channel.
Data Transfer Controller -- provides multiplexing of the internal
data busses for concurrent transfers of data between the fun-ctional elements.
Arithmetic Processor -- controls algorithm execution for processing vectors through the 100ns/stage pipelined arithmetic unit ...
algorithms can be utilized in the application program of individual
users to provide comprehensive processing techniques unique to
each user. Algorithm control store may he expanded from the
basic 16,384 bytes for all models with the control store additional
feature (#1551) which provides an additional 16,384 bytes of
control storage.
Control Processor -- manages the total 3838 subsystem functional operation, synchronizing all data transfers and arithmetic
operations, performing logical decisions in algorithm chains, and
sequencing multiple users problems through the array processor.
The Instruction Set includes the following vector processing algorithm and logic operations:
Algorithm/Mnemonic
a) ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS (standard)
Vector Move (VMV)
Vector Move Convert (VMC)
Scalar Move (SMV)
Zero Move (ZMV)
Vector Floating Point to Fixed Point Conversion (VFX)
Convolving Multiply (CVM)
Quadratic Interpolation (lNT)
Vector Element-by-Element Sum (VES)
Scalar Element-by-Element Sum (SSUM)
Vector Element-by-Element Multiply (VEM)
Scalar Multiply (SMY)
Sum of Squares (SSQ)
Fast Fourier Transform, (Forward Real) (FTFR)
Fast Fourier Transform (Forward Complex) (FTFC)
Fast Fourier Transform (Inverse Real) (IFTR)
Fast Fourier Transform (Invetse Complex) (IFTC)
Complex Multiply (CEM)
Scalar Complex Multiply (SCEM)
Complex Multiply (Complex Conjugate) (CMCC)
Complex Multiply (Conjugate Output) (CMCO)
Scalar' Complex Multiply (Conjugate Output) (SCMO)
Signed Square Array (SSA)
Sum of Vector Elements (SVE)
Array Scan for Maximum (MAX)
Vector Inner Product (VIP)
Vector Element Limit (LIM)
Divide (DIV)
Scalar Divide (SDIV)
Square Root (SQRT)
Nth Zero Crossing (NZCP /NZCN)
Wiener-levinson (WlEV)
ARITHMETIC INSTRUCTIONS (optional)
Polynomial Expansion (POLY) (#9301)
logarithm (lOG) (#9302)
Exponential (EXP) (#9303)
Tangent (TAN) (#9304)
Arctangent (ATAN/ATN2) (#9305)
Recursive Filter (REC) (#9307)
Vector Reverse (REV) (#9308)
b) lOGIC/INDEX INSTRUCTIONS
Move Index to Index (XMV)
Move Bulk Storage to Index (XMVS)
Move Index to Bulk Storage (XMVX)
Move Immediate to Index (XMVI)
Add Index to Index (XAD)
Add Immediate to Index (XADI)
Subtract Index from Index (XXSB)
Subtract Immediate From Index (XSBI)
Multiply Index tinles Index (XMl)
Multiply Immediate times Index (XMLI)
Divide Index into Index (XDV)
Divide Immediate into Index (SDVI)
Divide Index into Immediate (XDIR)
Compare Index: Index (SC)
Decrement and Compare Index : Index (XDC)
Compare Floating Point Index : Index (XCF)
Compare Floating Point Index: Immediate (XCFI)
Compare Index : Immediate (XCI)
Decrement and Compare Index : Immediate (XDCI)
Branch on Count loop (XBCT)
Unconditional Branch (XGO)
c) VPSS INSTRUCTIONS
label Definition (XID)
Move Data to/from S/370 or 4341 Processor and
3838 Bulk Storage (VPUT /VGET)
Move Data to/from S/370 or 4341 Processor and
3838 Index (VPUTX/VGETX)
A brief description of the vector processing algorithm follows:
Vector Element Sum (VES) The YES operation provides a resultant vector Y, the elements of which are a sum of the corresponding elements in vector X and vector or scalar U.
Vector Element Multiply (VEM), Scalar Multiply (SMY), or Signed
Square Array (SSA) The VEM operation provides a resultant
vector Y, the elements of which are a product of the corresponding elements in vectors X and U. The SMY operation is a special
case of VEM for which U is a scalar quantity. The SSA operation·
uses the VEM algorithm with two speCifications of the X array as
the inputs. A sign control option exercised on the first call of the X
array allows the sign of the X array to be rE;ltained.
Vector Move Convert (VMC) The VMC operation has four subforms, each of which load the Y vector from the X vector. One
form (VMV) moves vectors in bulk storage, the second form (VMC)
converts the X vector from fixed point integer to floating point, the
third form (SMV) is used to load a single value (Scalar) into all
locations of the Y vector, and the fourth form (ZMV) is a Scalar
load where zero is specified as the Scalar value of X.
Sum of Squares (SSQ) or Vector Inner Product (VIP) The SSQ
operation takes a vector X and multiplies it on an element by
element basis with a replica of itself. It then performs an algebraic
sum of these squared elements and returns the single element
result to a single element Y. The VIP operation multiplies on an
element by element basis, a vector U by a vector X. It then per(orms an algebraic sum of the resultant products and generates a
single element result, Y.
Vector Floating Point to Fixed Point Conversion (VFX) The VFX
operation converts a copy of the floating point vector X into a
fixed point format. and stores it in Y.
Sum of Vector Elements (SVE) The SVE operation performs an
algebraic sum of the elements of an X vector and places the sum
in a single element. Y.
Array Scan for Maximum (MAX) The MAX operation scans the
input vector X and returns in the two element Y vector the maximU,m value (after application of sign control) and the count of
which element in X had that value.
Vector Element limit (LIM) The LIM operation replaces the elements of the input vector X with specified minimum and/or maximum values if the input values exceed specified minimum or maximum limit values.
Convolving Multiply (CVM) Resultant vector Y with elements that
are a discrete model correlation of the elements in vectors X and
U or. by appropriate transposition and translation of the elements
in U or X. convolution may be performed.
Divide (DIV) The DIV operation divides input vector U (or Scalar
(SDIV» by a second input vector X and places the result in output
vector Y.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----= =----- - =--':' =
--- ----
DP Machines
3838 Array Processor (conl'd)
Nth Zero Crossing (NZCP /NZCN) The NZCP /NZCN operation
scans an input vector X and returns in the Y vector (1) the count
of the element X that represents the Nth time the data transitioned
between positive and negative, and (2) the total number of zero
crossings. The scan may be in order of increasing index (NZCP)
or decreasing index (NZCN).
Quadratic Interpolation (lNT) The INT operation performs a table
lookup and interpolation function on a table of given data, and a
set of indicators into this table. The interpolation calculation is
along a parabola drawn two points to the left and one point to the
right of the chosen location, except where the chosen location is
within the first input interval in which case the interpolation is
based on one point to the left and two points to the right of the
chosen point.
Complex Multiply (CEM) The CEM operation provides a resultant
vector Y with complex elements from input vectors X and U each
of which have complex elements. The operation may be specified
to perform Complex Multiply (CEM), Scalar Complex Multiply
(SCEM), Complex Multiply (Complex Conjugate) (CMCC), Complex
Multiply (Conjugate Output) (CMCO) or Scalar Complex Multiply
(Conjugate Output) {SCM C).
Square Root (SQRT) The SORT operation takes the square root
of the magnitude of an input vector or scalar X and places the
result in output vector or scalar Y.
Wiener-Levinson Filter (WLEV) The WLEV operation accepts as
its input a characterization of a signal and the type of noise encountered when reading that signal, and produces as an output
the coefficients for a digital filter to remove the noise. These
coefficients are chosen to minimize the RMS error in the output of
a filter when the input consists of the expected signal, plus noise
of the expected type.
Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) The FFT operation performs the
forward or inverse Fast Fourier Transform in either of two modes:
one where the time domain data is known to be complex (FFTC
and IFTC) and one where it is real data (FFTR and IFTR).
Polynomial Expansion (POLY) (#9301) The POLY operation
applies up to a 24th order polynomial expansion to the input
vector X using coefficients provided in the U vector.
PREREQUISITE: If Recursive Filter (REC) (#9307) or certain
Algorithm Design and Development Service additions have been
selected in the standard machine, then Arithmetic Element Control
Storage Additional (# 1551) is required.
Logarithm (LOG) (#9302) The LOG operation determines the
logarithm to the base e of an input vector X. PREREQUISITES:
POLY (#9301) and Arithmetic Element Storage Additional
(#1551).
Exponential (EXP) (#9303) The EXP operation provides the
antilog to the base e of an input vector X. PREREQUISITES: POLY
(#9301) and Arithmetic Element Control Storage Additional
(#1551).
Tangent (TAN) (#9304) The TAN operation provides the tangent
Y of an input vector X. PREREQUISITES: POLY (#9301) and
Arithmetic Element Control Storage Additional (#1551).
Arctangent (ATAN), Arctangent 2 (ATN2) (#9305) The ATAN
operation provides the arctangent Y of an input vector X. The
range of Y is 0 to • (Pi) radians. The alternate version of Arctangent, ATN2, provides the arctangent, Y, of two input vectors, X (X
axis) and U (Y axis). The range of Y is 0 to 2' radians.
PREREQUISITES: POLY (#9301) and Arithmetic Element Control
Storage Additional (# 1551).
Recursive Filter (REC) (#9301) The REC algorithm implements a
first order recursion equation where the elements of Yare a function of: previous values of Y, a Y coefficient vector U, an input
vector X, and a scalar coefficient which is the first element of the
U vector. PREREQUISITE: If Polynomial Expansion (POLY)
(#9301) or certain Alogorithm Design and Development Service
additions have been selected in the standard machine, then Arithmetic Element Control Storage Additional (#1551) is required.
Vector Reverse (REV) (#9308) The REV operation reverses the
ordering of real data for an input vector X.
CONTROL STORAGE REQUIREMENTS -- the instruction set available on the 3838 consists of logic operations which are excuted in
the control processor and vector operations which are executed
by the arithmetic processor. The arithmetic processor contains a
16,384 byte reloadable control store which contains the algorithms
necessary to accomplish the vector operations. These are loaded
when the 3838 is IPL/IMPLed from the host system. Selected
arithmetic algorithms from the optional arithmetic instructions may
be added to the standard arithmetic instructions or, additional
algorithms may be added to the product via the Algorithm Design
and Development Service capability. When the capacity of the
16,384 bytes of control store is exceeded it is necessary to add
M 3838.2
May 79
feature #1551 (Control Storage Additional) ... see Special Features.
Algorithm Prerequisites: Prerequisite machine or specify features
for optional algorithms are as follows:
1) Vector Reverse (REV) (#9308) and either POLY (#9301) or
REC (#9307) can be added to the standard machine.
2) Polynomial Expansion (POLY) (#9301) is a prerequisite for
LOG (#9302), EXP (#9303), TAN (#9304) and ATAN/ATN2
(#9305).
3) Any or all of the remaining optional logarithms (POLY)
(#9301) or REC (#9307), LOG (#9302), EXP (#9303), TAN
(#9304) and ATAN/ATN2 (#9305) require Arithmetic Element
Control Storage Additional (#1551).
4) Algorithms provided by the Algorithm Design and Development
Service mayor may not require Arithmetic Element Control
Storage Additional (#1551) depending upon complexity or
optional algorithm selections.
•
PREREQUISITES: (1) A control unit pOSition on a system block
multiplexer channel ... (2) For S/370 mdl 168 configuration, if
Two Byte Interface (#7850) is specified the 2880 must also have
the appropriate Two Byte Interface (#7850 or #7851) ... (3) For
S/370 mdl 145, Word Buffer Feature (#8810) is required on the
3145 to achieve maximum rated block multiplexer transfer rate ...
(4) For a 3032 or 3033 Processor configuration if Two Byte Interface (#7850) is specified, the 3032 or 3033 channel to which the
3838 is to be attached must also have the appropriate Two Byte
Interface (#7850).
Limitations: Multiple 3838s and/or other devices on the same
channel may degrade performance. The 3838 is supported on
S/370 mdls 145, 148, 158, 168 and a 4341 Processor with
OS/VS1 and mdls 158 and 168 with OS/VS2 MVS. Multiple 3838
Array Processors attached to a single S/370 or 4341 host, should
each have identical algorithm sets because VPSS allocates ports
based only on bulk store partition size and shared versus exclusive usage.
Minimum System Requirements:
1. S/370 mdl 145, 148, 158, 168 or 3031, 3032, 3033, or 4341
Processor with block multiplexer channel.
2. Nine track, 1600 BPI P .E. magnetic tape (factory order note
specifying type and density, if other).
3. OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.7 and Selectable Units for Scheduler
(SU4), Supervisor 1 (SU5), Supervisor 2 (SU7), Scheduler/lOS
Support (SU16), EREP (SU27), 3838 Vector Processing Subsystem Support (SU29) plus Vector Processing Subsystem
(VPSS) Independent Release (IR) and Job Entry Subsystem 2
(SU3) or Job Entry Subsystem 3 (SU 12) and Job Entry Subsystem 3 MSS Support (SU18) or OS/VS1 Release 6 with Selectable Unit for Subsystem Attachment Support (SU6), and EREP
(SU1 ).
FE maintenance and service capability is affected if any of the.
above are NOT part of the system configuration.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V... must be consistent with system
voltage. FIELD INSTALLATION: Yes.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue,
#9045 for gray, or #9046 for white. FIELD INSTALLATION:
Yes.
[3] Cabling: #9080 for below floor, or #9081 for on the floor.
FIELD INSTALLA TlON: Yes.
[4] Configuration: #9092 for additional 3838s in configuration
(excludes first unit).
[5] Specify: #9301
#9302
#9303
#9304
#9305
#9301
#9308
for
for
for
for
for
for
for
PRICES: Mdl
3838
1
2
3
Polynomial Expansion
Logarithm
Exponential
Tangent
Arctangent, Arctangent 2
Recursive Filter
Vector Reverse
MAC/
MRC
$11,815
21,125
29,425
TLP/
MLC
4 yr
$16,250
19,150
26,150
Purchase
MMMC
$ 780,000 $1,125
864,000
2,080
1,032,000 2,790
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: A
Maintenance: D
Purchase Option: 60%' Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- --=--=-=
------ ----':' =
M 3838.3
May 79
DP Machines
3838 Array Processor (conI' d)
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
to
Model 1
Model 2
Model 2
Model 3
$84,000
$252,000
168,000
SPECIAL FEATURES
ARITHMETIC ELEMENT CONTROL STORAGE ADDITIONAL
(#1551). An additional 16,384 bytes of control store for additional algorithm capabilities. Custom algorithms are requested by
Algorithm Design and Development Service. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
TWO BYTE INTERFACE (#7850).
Provides two byte parallel
transfer on the 2880 block multiplexer channel to achieve data
transfer rates. up to 3.0 MB. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Requires Two Byte Interface (#7850 or
#7851) on the 2880, 3032 or 3033.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC I
MRC
TLPI
MLC
4 yr Purchase MMMC
Arithmetic Element Control
Storage Add'i
#1551 $2,420 $2,200 $105,600 $86
Two Byte Interface
7850
220
200
9,600
8
'" Purchase option is 50% under Term Lease Plan (TLP).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ---- - =----=- =--":' =
M 3842.1
May 79
DP Machines
3842 LOOP CONTROL UNIT
Data Access Arrangement COT (WE 1000A) or FCC certified
equivalent.
Purpose: Used to provide terminal loop capability at locations
connected via telecommunications lines to a 3631 or 3632 Plant
Communication Controller, or an 8100 System via the data link.
Related Equipment: The 3842 communicates with an appropriately configured 3872 Modem attached to a 3631 or 3632 with
EIA/CCITT Interface Data Link (#3703) and Terminal Communication Adapter (#3211), or to an 8100 System via the Data
Link with EIA Interface Adapter (#3701) and Communications
Adapter wi/houl Clock - SDLC (#/602).
The 3842 controls the operation of a single lobe loop and provides an interface to a common carrier provided voice grade
private line (non-switched) channel that is terminated at a 3631,
3632 or 8100 System via an IBM 3872 Modem. Loop and common carrier channel data speed is 2400 bps. The 3842 attaches a
loop via a standard loop connector cable furnished with the unit.
This cable plugs into a wrap type Loop Station Connector not
provided with ~he 3842.
Highlights:
Customer Responsibilities: The customer must be informed of
his responsibilities as detailed in the M 2700 pages and in the
3842 Section of the IBM 3630 Installation Manual-Physical
Planning, GA24-3675, and the IBM System 3630 Plant Communication System Loop Installation-Physical Planning Manual, or
the 8100 System Installation Manual - Physical Planning Manual. The customer is responsible for:
1.
Private Line (non-switched) Channel -- arranging for the
telecommunication service supplier to provide a Type
3002 voicegrade r non-IB~ ... (4). Accessory Personalization/Key
Entry Unit avaIlable at sIte locatron ... (5) Accessory mounting
panel .. (6) Accessory blank panel may be ordered if desired. See
M 10000 pages.
Bibliography:
GA27-2865 General Information Manual
XXXX-XXXX Principles of Operation •
Specify: [1] Line Voltage Plug (115/120 V Power and Line Cord,
1-phase, 60 Hz): #989O for locking plug, #9891 for non-lock
plug.
[2] Line Cord Length - if the standard 2.8M (9 ft.) power cable is
not desired, specify: #9511 for 1.8M (6 ft.) line cord, #9512
for 3.7M (12 ft.) line cord, #9513 for 4.5M (15 ft.) line cord.
[3] For models 12 and 13: Specify one ... installation- available at
time of manufacture only.
#9110 - BSC/SOLC, or
#9115 - BSC with BMC/SOLC
PRICES:
3846
Mdl
1
2
3
12
13
Purchase
MMMC
$ 910
2,680
$1.00
4.50
4.50
4.50
4.50
2,445
2,815
2,580
Warranty: B
Useful Life: 2
Model Changes: Available at time of manufacture only.
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. Order the Part No. indicated below at the price listed
in the M10000 pages. See M10000 pages for additional information.
Personalization/Key Entry Unit, Part No. 4407908, to enter key
variable, seed, and personalization data. One must be available at
each site.
Mounting Plate, Part No. 6813128, to attach 4 type 3846 units to
a rack. One required for each 4 units.
Blank Panel, Part No. 4409058, to close any unused opening in a
mounting panel. One may be ordered for each unused opening.
A Battery, Part No. 1743456, is needed to replace the installed
battery. The replacement schedule is defined in the Principles of
Operation Manual. Discharged batteries should be returned to
IBM.
The repair service is available under an IBM Repair Center Maintenance Supplement
to the IBM Maintenance Agreement or on a Time and Material basis.
Customers with machines not under an IBM Repair Center Maintenance Supplement to the IBM Maintenance Agreement, have
the option to ship the machines to the deSignated IBM Repair
Center for repair under the IBM Repair Authorization Form GX272981, in which case repair will be made (if the machine is repairable). Alternatively, upon request, the IBM Repair Center will
provide, for a minimum charge, an estimate of repair charges.
• SRL No. to be annoUD Typewriler or
equivalenl. and IBM 31100 (71. Numeric Sel only fmm 3211 (sec nole
61.
Numeric
D
1
.1
'r!
3
r!
3
If
..
5
'Y"
•*
,
E R
f S
G T [Plus all
H U CharaclefS
I V 10 left
J III excapt V)
If
-I
.5
blank
Y
rI
(2)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
;
Q
,
~
:
·"·
(3)
-10K
III
•I
(5)
+
Numeric Handprinting: Recognizes the following: I 2. 3
&6
Preprinted Gothic 3/16" font digits 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 can also be read. Blanks are not recognized in NHP. European Numeric Handprinting (ENHP) can be selected by proper codes
in the Format Control Record.·· This provides recognition of the 1
(one) and ? (seven) commonly used in several European countries
in place of the NHP I and 7.
7 8 8 0 X.
Document Inspection Gauge P/N 2448299: One is furnished
with each 3886 as a customer engineering tool. It· is used for
checking printing alignment on data. sheets. Additional gauges are
$35 each.
+
}
r
(6)
(3)
{
&
0
p
K X
L V
M Z(2)
.r
.r
.rI
N
A
B
C
II
?
6
9
?
6
( I)
Alphameric
Numeric
D
Addilional Characlers
from IBM Scleclric@
Typewriler (or equivalenll Only.
for Alphameric Character Sct OCR-B for Oplical Recognllion. 2nd
Edition. dated Octoher. 1971.
Minimum paper weighl for documenls produced on Ihe 311(N) is 21) Ih.
With the 5211. usc of Reread on Reject and 21)..24 Ih. single pari
forms are required.
(Grp Erase)
(Char Erasel
(4)
The division of cha!"acters inlo sets above refers to 3886 recognition
capahility. The appmpriale Iype catalog arrangements should he
referenced for high speed printer output characler sets.
These characlers are recognized in mode I alphameric sct. ••
All these characters al'e recognized only on mode 2 alphameric set **
excepl GrollI' Erase •• and III which are recognized in the numeric
sci also.
The LVM (long verlical mark) is recognized in all OCR-A character
sets. The LVL (preprinted long vertical line) is also recognized .••
The timing mark dash (-) can he suhstiluted for a non OCR-A font
graphic (#) for the purpose of printing timing marks. See "Type
Catalog" for delails.
The OCR Print Package (#54501. on the 3211 is a prerequisile for
OCR applications. Usc of the Reread On Reject capahflity and 2()'24
Ih. Bond is recommended for optimimutn performance. When other
papers arc used. customer testing should he performed to assure
adequate reading pel'foronance.
Minimum paper weight for documents produced on the 3800 is 20 Ih.
With the 5211. usc of Reread on Reject and 2()'24 Ih. single part
forms arc required.
OCR-B FONT. SIZE 1 (1) (51
5211 mdl 2 1403 mdls 2. 3. 7. N I (or equivaAdditional Characters
(sec note
lenll. 3203 - all mdls (or equivafrom IBM Selectric®
7)
lenl). 3211 (sec Note 4). 3Roo (6).
Typewriler (or equivalind IBM Seleclric@ Typewriter (or lentl only. These can he
equivalent ).
recognized in all OCRB Font Character Sets.
Numel'ic
0
I $
2 •
3 4 /
5
6
7
II
9
II
9
<
>
+
( I)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
Alphameric
Numeric
0
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
<
> (3)
..+ .
dIVISIon of
AN
I
B 0
C p
o
""
•
Q
.LVMI (2)
(Grp Erase)
:Char Erase}
E R
F S [Plus all
G T CbaractlfS
H U 10 laft)
I V
J W
KX
l V
M Z
..
The
characters mlo scls ahove refers 10 3886 recognitIOn
capahilily. Thc appropriate Iype catalog arrangements should he
referenced for high speed printer output character sets.
The LVM (long vertical mark) is recognized in hoth numeric and
alphamel'ic OCR-B hut can only he preprinled or typed. The LVL
(long verticallinc). a special case of the LVM. can also he recognized.**
The liming mark dash (-) can he su!>stitued for the greater than (»
for the purpose of printing timing marks. See "Type Catalog" for
details.
The OCR Prinl Package (#5450). on the 3211. is a prerequisile for
OCR applications. Use of the Reread On Reject capahility and 2()'24
lb. Bond is recommended for optimum performance. When other
papers arc used. customer testing should he performed to assure
adequate reading performance.
This is compalihle wilh the European Computer ManuFacturers
Associale revised OCR-B I'onl puhlished in the Standard ECMA-II
•• See IBM 3886 OCR Model I Componenl Reference Manual OA21-9I47 and IBM
3886 OCR Model 2 Componenl Reference Manual OA21-9I54.
[reverse side is blank)
Not to be reproduced witl"lout written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----- =':' =
----- ---------= =-
M 3890.1
~ay 79
DP Machines
IBM 3890 DOCUMENT PROCESSOR
Purpose: Reads magnetically inscribed data from card and paper
documents into any virtual storage S/370 Processor except 3115
or 3125 via the byte multiplexer or block multiplexer channel, or a
4331 or 4341 Processor via a byte multiplexer or block multiplexer channel. Can be used offline for document sorting.
Models: The 3890 is available in twelve models;
Model A 1 - six stackers
Model A2 - twelve stackers
Model A3 -- eighteen stackers
Model A4 - twenty-four stackers
13,312 bytes of storage
(10,240 bytes if image
processing) for stacker
select program and
initialization data.
Model A5 -- thirty stackers
Base Weights -- 16 to 44 Ibs. (basic weight is the weight of
500 sheets of 17" x 22" paper), 60 to 165 grams per square
meter.
Grain - long grain or short grain, except for 16 lb. paper,
which must be long grain.
Bibliography: Machine and Programming Description, GA24-3612.
SPECIFY: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for
208 V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9046 for white.
[3] Upending Kit: #9840, if required ... loan basis, remains the
property of IBM.
[4] Cabling: #9181 for on the floor, if required.
[5] SS2 Transmission Option: #9666. Codeline SS2's are not
treated as field defining symbols. Requirement for this option is
limited. Before specifying refer to IBM 3890 General Information Manual TNL (GN24-0647). FIELD INSTALLATION: Yes.
Model A6 -- thirty-six stackers
Model B1 -- six stackers
Model B2 -- twelve stackers
Model B3 - eighteen stackers
Model B4 - twenty-four stackers
29,696 bytes of storage
(26,624 bytes if image
processing) for stacker
select program and
initialization data.
Model B5 -- thirty stackers
Model B6 - thirty-six stackers
Highlights: The 3890 is a buffered modular pocket reader sorter
which is time independent. Documents are read at a minimum rate
of 2400 six-inch documents per minute. Actual throughput depends upon length of document. The formula for determining
approximate average rated throughput per minute is: The percentage of non-card stock checks x [19200/(average document length
which is 6" or greater plus 2 ")] + the percentage of card stock
checks x (1907). The primary component of the 3890 is the feed
module which contains the input hopper, recognition circuits, logic
to determine stacker selection, merge feed, options when installed
and operator set-up and run panels.
[6] Tool Kits: Required for CE maintenance. For Rental Customer
- specify on first 3890 order for a customer. If required for a
multiple machine installation, an additional Tool Kit(s) is available
For Purchase Customers -- specify
on each 3890 machine order. When installed rental 3890s are
for
purchased, a Tool Kit is to be ordered on a no-charge
each machine. Specify: #9766 for base machine ... #9767 for
Microfilming (#5111) ... #9768 for Item Numbering/Endorsing
(#4666).
PRICES
Rental
3890
Input Hopper - holds approximately 4800 documents and permits
convenient, continuous loading. A jogger is built into the hopper to
eliminate jogging as a separate operation.
Merge Feed -- permits the merging of documents into the normal
input stream from a separate hopper. Document capacity is 600.
Document merging is controlled by the user program. For example,
as part of job initialization, the user can specify the approximate
number of documents to be stacked in each pocket before a
document is fed from the hopper to that pocket. The 3890 will
maintain a document count for each pocket. The merge function
eliminates the need for programmed pocket lights. Limitation:
Does not permit the 3890 to function as a collator.
Logic and Control Section - is initialized by the CPU when online
and by a removable disk when offline. Initialization determines the
fields to be read, length of the fields, starting number for the item
numbering feature, merge feed controls, if image processing is to
be performed, the stacker control instruction algorithm to be used,
endorser requirements, and whether the symbol error correction
option is to be used. With the symbol error correction option, the
3890 performs extensive logical analysis to determine if unreadable symbols can be replaced by internally-generated field defining
symbols. The 3890 performs ali stacker select determinations
independent of CPU control and transfers blocked data records to
the CPU. Due to the logical capability, the following functions are
standard "programmable" ... split field '" self-check number
verification ... multiple column control ... base number conversion
for fine sorting.
Purchase
3890
Mdl
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
Basic
Monthly
Charge/
MRC
BETP/
MLC
2 yr
$ 4,717 $ 4,015
5,469
4,655
6,221
5,295
6,973
5,935
7,725
6,575
8,477
7,215
5,863
4,990
6,615
5,630
7,367
6,270
8,119
6,910
8,871
7,550
9,623
8,190
Purchase
Price
Basic
MMC
$256,800
299,800
342,800
385,800
428,800
471,800
300,800
343,800
386,800
429,800
472,800
515,800
$ 186
222
258
294
330
366
226
262
298
334
370
406
Monthly
Use Charge
Rate ($/meter hr.)
$12.90
14.95
17.00
19.05
21.10
23.15
12.90
14.95
17.00
19.05
21.10
23.15
Add'i MMC
Rate ($/meter hr.)
$12.90
14.95
17.00
19.05
21,10
23.15
12.90
14.95
17.00
19.05
21.10
23.15
Plan Offering: Plan C (Monthly Use Plan)
Maintenance: Available 24 hrs. per day, 7 days per week.
Metering: I/O Unit (On-line/Off-line)
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 50% (not applicable to Monthly Use Charge)
Warranty: B
. Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Stackers - each pocket holds approximately 800 to 1000 documents. The operator can unload all but the last 200 - 300· documents without stopping the 3890. Pocket warning lights alert the
operator when a specific pocket is becoming full. The reject stacker is the first stacker ... the stacker closest to the input hopper.
Racks for output trays are above each stacker.
Documents - E 1 3B magnetic characters, print quality, and codeline arrangement on the documents must meet the specifications
recommended by the American Bankers Association. Intermixed
paper and card documents within the following specifications can
be processed:
Length - 4.85 to 8.75 inches (123 to 223mm).
Width - 2.75 to 4.17 inches (70 to 106mm).
Thickness - .0025 to .007 inches (.064 to .178mm).
Carrier documents containing mutilated documents with a total
thickness up to .014 inches (.356mm) will also be transported.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---------- ---- -------=
==-=
"" 3890.?
Ma'l79
~
DP Machines
3890 Document Processor (cont'd)
Model Changes: Field Installable,
Special Feature Prices
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are ,no additonal
installation charges)
From To
A1
A2
A3
A2
$43,000
A4
A5
From To
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A4
A5
A6
$86,000 $129,000$172,000 $215,000
43,000
86,000 129,000 172,000
43,000 86,000 129,000
43,000
86,000
43,000
82
83
84
85
Purchase
86
$45,950 $88,950 $131,950$174,950 $217,950 $260,950
45,950
88,950 131,950 174,950 217,950
45,950 88,950 131,950 174,950
45,950
88,950 131,950
45,950
88,950
45,950
From To
B1
B2
83
B4
B5
B1
A3
B2
$43,000
83
84
85
Rental
Item Numbering/Endors #4666
Microfilming
5111
S/370 Attachment
6370
BMC/
MRC
BETP/ Monthly Use
MLC
Charge Rate
2 yr
($/meter hr.)
$ 775
$ 660
2,303
108
1,960
92
Purchase
Price
BMMC
Item Numbering/Endors #4666 $ 46,290
Microfilming
5111 132,250
S/370 Attachment
6370
4,070
B6
$86,000 $129,000$172,000 $215,000
43,000
86,000 129,000 172,000
43,000 86,000 129,000
43,000
86,000
43,000
SPECIAL FEATURES
ITEM NUMBERING/ENDORSING (#4666). Provides the capability of printing an 8-digit number and/or a full endorsement on the
back of each document. The starting item number and 1 of 3 print
locations is determined by the user program at initialization. The
number can be incremented, on any document cycle based on the
user-provided stacker control instruction parameters for the run.
The number can be configured by the user at installation to be a
combination of batch and serial number or serial number only.
Vertical location of, the item number is specified by the customer
and is normally set at the plant.
During run initialization, the user specifies whether endorsing is
active and one of three horizontal print positions. Vertical location
of endorsement is specified by the customer and is normally set at
the plant. The design of the endorser facilitates operator changing
of endorser legends for users who have a requirement to print
different endorsements. The date portion of the endorser is set by
the operator. Specify: #9167 for endorsement at top, or #9168
for center. #9379 for number at bottom; or #9378 for center.ttt
Color of endorser ink to be used -- #9145 for black, #9147 for
purple, #9148 for red, or #9149 for blue. Field Installation: Yes.
MICROFILMING (#5111). Provides the capability of microfilming
items, either front and back (duplex) or front only (duo), being
processed on the IBM 3890. Items are selectively filmed under
program control at 3890 document speeds.' An eight-digit number
can be exposed on the film for every other document image recorded on film. The eight number positions can be split into two
number fields which can be incremented or reset on any document
cycle under stacker control instruction parameters for the run,
During run initialization, the user specifies whether microfilming is
active, the mode of filming, and the starting"eight-digit number. A
frame mark is recorded on film for each document image for image
counting during retrieval. The camera provides a reduction ratio of
50 to 1 and a resolution of 120 lines per millimeter. The film is
advanced by a capstan drive system based upon the document
width to maximize the use of film. The film cassette, a purchase
only item (see M 10000 pages), provides space for take-up of the
film as well as the film supply, Capacity of the cassette is 2,000
feet of .0027 polyester thin base film. Loading and unloading of
film from the cassette into the film transport is automatic under
operator control. Approximately 380,000 tront and back images of
an average intermix of documents can be recorded on 2,000 feet
of film. The film is spaced six inches every 215 feet to facilitate
splicing; if a 49 inch space is required, specify #9177. The film
to' be used is 16mm un perforated thin base microfilm which must
be ordered on cores. Disclosure specifications covering the film,
cassette, and core on which the film must be wound, are available
from IBM Industry Relations/ Product Information, Dept.767, CHQ,
Old Orchard Road, Armonk, N. Y. 10504. Film must be ordered
on cores (Part No. 2648096 or equivalent) with an 1 /8 inch diameter hole center punched approximately seven feet from each end
of the film. Field Installation: Yes.
S/370 ATTACHMENT (#6370).
Permits attachment to any
virtual storage 8/370 Processor or 4300 Processor via the byte
multiplexer channel or the block multiplexer channel. This feature
is required on each 3890 attached to a 8/370 or any 4300
Processor. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes
Not to be reproduced without written permission,
$ 2.65
6.60
Monthly Use
Charge Rate
($/meter hr.)
$172.00 $ 2.65
100.00
6.60
10.00
-------- ----.:.-- =-=
-- -==--';' ==
M 3895
May 79
DP Machines
3895 DOCUMENT READER/INSCRIBER
Purpose: Magnetically reads the E13B codeline inscribed on card
and paper documents, optically reads machine printed and intermixed unconstrained handprinted numeric amounts from checks
and/or deposit tickets, inscribes the amounts in the MICR codeline, and sorts into multiple stackers under control of the attached
S/370 model 125-2, 135, 138, 145, 148, 155 II, 158, 165 II or
168, or a 3031, 3032 or 3033 Processor, or 4331 or 4341
Processor.
Modell
Six stackers
Model 2
Twelve stackers
HighlightS: The 3895 is a multi-stacker document reading and
inscribing device which is time independent. Documents are processed at a rated speed of 525 six-inch documents per minute.
Actual thruput depends on a number of factors including document
type, size, mix and quality; number of fields scanned and/or
inscribed; number of characters printed; complexity of the software; CPU load and priority of processing. The transport system
of the 3895 consists of the primary hopper, merge hopper, MICR
I, bar code reader, OCR reader, printer/inscriber, MICR II, endorser, and stackers.
Input Hopper -- holds approximately 5-1/2 inches of documents
in a gravity feed permitting non-stop feeding. The feeding and
processing of documents are controlled by the host CPU application support program. The maximum size document which can be
processed by the 3895 is 4-1/8 inches high and 9 inches long.
Merge Hopper -- permits pinpoint merging of documents into the
transport path just prior to the OCR read station. All processing
functions except MICR I read and bar code read can be performed on documents from the merge feed. Document capacity
of the hooper is approximately 5-1/2 inches.
MICR I -- the preprinted and/or MICR codeline is read at this
station using IBM's latest single gap reading technique. Data
read at this station is stored in a buffer and shifts in the buffer as
the document moves through the transport. This station also
contains a bar code reader. Special type documents such as
deposit documents may be recognized by a unique MICR field or
a preprinted bar code. The functional unit which serves to type
or identify these documents according to the pre-specified identification parameters is the Document Identification Handler. The
document moves from the MICR I station to the pre-scan station
and will be held if the OCR read station is not ready.
OCR Read -- The printed or handprinted numeric amounts are
optically read at this station. Up to three fields of numeric information from each document may be read and stored in the buffer
for transmission to the CPU. Three types of documents will pass
under the scanner and will be treated differently based on the
type of document to be read as determined at the MICR I and bar
code station.
Document Type - Check: Document will be scanned to find
the amount location. The printed or handprinted amount will be
scanned and presented to the recognition logic. Amounts when
recognized will be placed in the buffer along with codeline data
read at MIC.R I.
Document Type - Deposit: The scanner will read individual
Ijne items on the deposit ticket. All line items read will be
stored internally in the 3895 and used to compare each check
or debit document during the scan process to assist in recognition of the amount. The 3895 recognizes the last item read on
the deposit ticket 0' the last line of the last deposit slip in a
multiple deposit slip transaction as a total and inserts: this in the
associated buffer along with the codeline data read at MICR I.
Document Type -- Tape Listing: Adding machine tape lists
from customers must be converted to machine processable
document sizes. The 3896 Tape-Document Converter performs
this operation. Individual line items will be scanned and stored
internally in the 3895 and used to compare each check or debit
document during the scan process to assist in recognition of
the amount. The last item on each list document will be placed
in the associated buffer.
Buffer: At the completion of the OCR scan process, a data
record for a document is stored in a buffer. This record consists
of control information and document data. The control information consists of type, format and size of document and validity
status of the MICR and OCR fields.
The data section consists of the MICR and OCR data fields read
from the document. The contents of the buffer are sent to the
CPU upon a request issued by the user application program.
The 3895 waits for the user application program to process the
contents of the buffer and send an output record back to the
3895. The output record must contain data and control information. The control information will Gontain the stacker number and
instructions to inscribe and print. The data will consist of the
amount, the transaction code, and/or other data to be inscribed,
and the serial number to be printed.
Print: Two types of printing occur at this station. Data to be
printed is stored in the buffer. The inscriber/printer inscribes
E13B magnetic ink characters as defined in the ANSI Standards
X3.2 -- 1970 and X3.3 -- 1970. Any two fields may be inscribed
in one pass -- amount and process codes are considered one
field. The serial number printer prints at eight characters per
inch and has the capability of printing up to 25 positions on the
face of the document. The printing by the serial number printer
of more than 15 pOSitions or the inscribing of fields other than
the amount field will degrade throughput. Numeric digits 0-9, $,
A symbols may be printed. Blank may appear in any position.
Limitations: $ may not be printed in positions 1, 2 and 15. A
may not be printed in positions 1, 14 and 15. Printing more
than 15 positions requires a minimum of 6.9 inch documents
from the primary hopper and 7.4 inch documents from the
merge hopper. 51-column cards may contain a maximum,of 8
positions. Inscribing the auxiliary on-us field requires a minimum of 7-3/8 inch length documents.
MICR II - The function of this station is to verify that the E13B
data inscribed is machine processable.
Endorser - Documents can be endorsed in one of six fixed
positions on the back of the document.' During run initialization,
the user specifies whether endorsing is active and one of three
horizontal print positions. Vertical location of endorsement is
specified by the customer and is normally set at the plant. The
design of the endorser facilitates operator changing of endorser
legends for users who have a requirement to print different endorsements. The date portion of the endorsement is set by the
operator.
Stackers: -- Model 1 has six stackers and Model 2 has twelve
stackers, each having a capacity of 2-1/2 inches of free standing
documents. Stacker pairs 1 and 2, 3 and 4, and 5 and 6 may be
used in an overflow mode. Under this mode, only the odd numbered stacker selection is valid. Documents overflow from a full
stacker to other pocket in the pair if that stacker is not full.
Stackers 1 and 7 are at the top. Stackers 7 through 12 cannot
be used in overflow mode.
Document Path -- The document path is generally in the shape
of a broad U, starting at the primary hopper located near the
upper right corner, as viewed from the front of the machine.
From here the documents feed downward through the aligner, the
first MICR read station and the bar code reader, then to the left
through the pre-scan, optical scanner, inscriber/printer, second
MICR read, and endorse stations. Documents are then fed upward into the stackers. The merge documents follow the same
path except that they are fed from the merge hopper, which is
located to the immediate left of the primary hopper and are sent
directly into the scanner station.
Deposit Slip First - the 3895 internally stores the individual line
item amounts from a deposit slip or item list (adding machine
tape) and compares each check as it is read with the stored
amounts. This reduces substitutions and improves the OCR
performance. Therefore, deposits must be trayed so that a list of
the items immediately precedes the items to be read. If the
checks are listed on the deposit slip, they should follow the
deposit slip. If the checks are Jisted on an adding machine tape,
the tape must be converted to a cut-form document processable
by the 3895 and identified by a bar code or other means. The
segments of the tape should be kept in order and trayed immediately preceding the cl:1ecks listed.
3895 Document Designer & Printer Kit -- the IBM 3895 Document Designer and Printer Kit contains camera-ready artwork of
OCR field guide areas described in the Document Design Guidelines. The kit is used to design and create final artwork for 3895
Input documents. The artwork is printed on a stable-base material. The IBM Document Designer and Printer Kit, SX24-3642, may
be purchased by the customer from IBM
for $96 each. For addition information, see the 3895 Document
Design Guidelines, GA24-3640.
Supplies:
MICR ribbon and fabric .ribbon
Documents: E13B magnetic characters, print quality and codeline arrangement on the documents' must meet the specifications
recommended by the American Bankers Association. Intermixed
paper and card documents within the following specifications can
be processed:
Length -- 123 to 223mm (4.85 to 8.75 inches).
Width - 70 to 106mm (2.75 to 4.17 inches).
Thickness -- .076 to .178mm (.003 to .007 inches).
Base Weights -- 1 6 to 44 Ibs (basic weight is the weight of 500
sheets of 17" x 11" paper), 60 to 165 grams per square meter.
Grain - long grain or short grain, except for 16 Ib paper, which
must be long grain.
Not. to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --.:....:..:
--- -==--';' ==
DP Machines
3895 Document Reader/Inscriber
Publications:
-
M 3895 - 3896
May 79
(conl'd)
Special Feature Prices:
General Information - GA24-3645
Input Document Design Guidelines - GA24-3640
Input Document Designer and Printer Kit - SX24-3642
Installation M'lnual/Physical Planning - GA24-3641
Machine & Programming Description - GA24-3620.
Field Coordinate Gauge - GX24-3646
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208
V, or #9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9046 for white.
[3] Upending Kit: #9840 if required ... loan basis, remains property of IBM.
[4] Endorsing: #9167 for top track, or #9168 for center track.
[5] Endorsing Ink: #9145 for black, #9147 for purple, #9148 for
red, or #9149 for blue.
[6] Tool Kits: Required for CE maintenance. For Rental Customer
-- specify on first 3895 order for a customer. If required for a
multiple machine installation, an additional Tool Kit(s) is available
For Purchase Customer -- specify on
each 3895 machine order. When installed rental 3895s are
for
purchased, a Tool Kit is to be ordered
each machine. Specify: #9766 for base machine ... in addition,
#9767 is required for Microfilming (#5110).
Mdl
1
2
Mdl
1
2
Monthly Lease
Charge (5 yr)
Monthly Use
Charge Rate
$14,770 .095/100 docmnts
15,170 .099/100 docmnts
Basic Monthly
Maintenance Charge
$810
825
Purchase·
$535,000
550,000
Additional Monthly
Maintenance Charge Rate
.095/100 docmnts
.099/100 docmnts
Plan Offering: Plan C (Monthly Use Plan)
Maintenance: Available 24 hours/day, 7 days/week
Metering: I/O Unit (online)
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 60% (not alJplicable to monthly use charges)
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination Charge Months: 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (There are no additional
installation charges.)
Model 1 to Model 2 ....... $15,000
Microfilming
#5110
Monthly Lease
Charge (5 Yr)
Monthly Use
Charge Rate
Purchase
$ 2,725
$.019/100 dcmnts
$100,000
Maintenance Charge
Maintenance Charge Rate
$ 120
$.019/100 dcmnts
3896 TAPE·DOCUMENT CONVERTER
Purpose: A stand-alone console unit used to convert adding
machine tapes into ABA check size documents (tape copy tickets)
for input to the 3895 Document Reader/Inscriber. Tape copy (TC)
tickets provide deposit information that improves the performance
of the 3895.
Highlights: The 3896 is an electrostatic dry copier with a semiautomatic tape feed that will accept single part original noncarbon
back adding machine deposit tapes and copy them by tape or tape
section onto 95.116mm x 222.250mm (3.666" x 8.750") TC
tickets. The 3896 will accept an input tape with a basic weight of
12 Ibs to 24 Ibs and a minimum length of 88.9mm (3.5") and a
width of 3.81 mm to 101.6mm (1.5" to 4.0"). Tapes less than
88.9mm (3.5") in length may be manually copied. During the copy
cycle the TC tickets are non-mechanically printed with item reference track, tape number, copy number, and a bar code. The bar
code is used to identify the document to the 3895 and the other
information provides audit trail and balancing aids. TC tickets can
be automatically inscribed on the 3895 with a customer account
number and identified with both MICR and serial number printing
to facilitate further handling and processing on reader sorters.
Speed: A tape feeds in increments (copy cycles) of about
203.2mm (8") .
A tape longer than 203.2mm requires additional tape feed and
copy cycles. After the first copy cycle which takes 8 seconds,
consecutively inserted short tapes or sections of the same tape
are copied in 2.4 seconds.
Stacker: At the end of the cycle, a TC ticket is fed into a reversing stacker which stacks the tickets in the correct order for
processing in the 3895. Tapes will be ejected into an open
container that can be emptied as required.
Operator Controls: Controls are provided among which is a
variable control to accommodate varying tape paper reflectances.
Paper Supply: A paper supply drawer holds a 95.116mm (3.666")
wide roll of paper supplying paper for the TC tickets. Paper is
available from IRD.
Toner: A special cartridge supplying the toner for the 3896 is
available
SPECIAL FEATURES
Manuals:
MICROFILMING (#5110). Provides the capability of microfilming
items, either front and back (duplex) or front only (duo), being
processed on the 3895. Items are selectively filmed under program control at 3895 document speeds. An eight-digit index
number, determined by the user in his program, will be exposed
on the film for every other document image recorded on film.
During run initialization, the user specifies whether microfilming is
active and the mode of filming. A frame mark is recorded on film
for each document image for image counting during retrieval. The
camera provides a reduction ratio of 50 to 1 and a resolution of
120 lines per millimeter. The film is advanced by a capstan drive
system based upon the document width to maximi,ze the use of
film. The film cassette, a purchase only item (see M 10000
Jjages), provides space for take-up of the film as well as the film
supply. Capacity of the cassette is 2000 feet of .0027 polyester
thin base film. Loading and unloading of film from the cassette
into, the film transport is automatic under operator control. Approximately 380,000 front and back images of an average intermix of
documents can be recorded on 2000 feet of film. The film is
spaced six inches every 215 feet to facilitate splicing; if a 49 inch
space is required, specify #9177. The film can also be advanced
under user control. The film to be used is 16mm un perforated thin
base microfilm which must be ordered on cores. An 1/8 inch
diameter hole must be centrally punched approximately 7 feet from
each end of the film. Descriptive information covering this film,
cassette, and core on which the film must be wound is available
from Corporate Industry Relations/ Product Information, Old Orchard Road, Armonk, New York 10504. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Specify #9767 ". see Specify item [6] - Tool Kits,
for details.
Machine Description & Operator's Guide - GA24-3638
Installation Manual/Physical Planning - GA24-3643.
Supplies:
copy paper and toner cartridges
Power Requirements: Refer to Physical Planning Manual.
Mdl
Monthly Lease
Charge (5 yr)
$1,400
Mdl
Monthly Use
Charge Rate
Purchase·
.0106/copy
$42,500
Basic Monthly
Maintenance Charge
$ 265
Additional Monthly
Maintenance Charge Rate
.0106/copy
Plan Offering: Plan C (Monthly Use Plan)
Maintenance: Available 24 hours/day, 7 days/week
Metering: Standalone
Warranty: B
Per Call:1
Purchase Option: 55% (not applicable to monthly use charges)
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Useful Life Category: 2
Termination CharQe Monlbs~ 6 Termination Charge Percent: 20%
• Pilot Test Plan applies: PTP Option Percent. 65%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----
----- ------- ---
=== ':' =
M 4331.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 4331
PROCESSOR
Purpose: Provides the power, control, logic and memory circuitry
necessary for the arithmetic, logic and processor storage functions
of the 4331 Processor models.
Models
Proce88or Storage
In bytes (see note below)
11
524,288
J1
1,048,576
Highlights: Depending on the model, can contain up to 1,048,576
bytes of monolithic processor storage ... storage is high density
single bit cell design ... data flow is four bytes parallel... processor storage fetch cycle Is 900 nanoseconds for four bytes ...
store cycle is 1300 nanoseconds for four bytes ... processor is
microcode controlled.
NOTE: The microcode which controls system operations resides
in both processor storage and reload able control storage reduc"
ing the processor storage available for user programming. Processor storage available for the user is reduced from that Installed
by at least 16,384 bytes (when the optional feature, Control
Storage Expansion, is installed) or by at least 53,248 bytes
(when the optional feature, Control Storage Expansion, is not
instailed). Table 1 below lists the storage requirements for system microcode.
Standard Functions are:
- 524,288 bytes or 1,048,576 bytes of processor storage.
(4331 Processor configurations require a portion of processor
storage to be allocated for system microcode use. See Table
1 below for details.)
- ECPS: VSE mode or System/370 mode. In System/370
mode, both Extended Control (EC) and Basic Control (BC) are
available. The 4331 Processor operates in either System/370
mode or in Extended Cont{ol Program Support: VSE mode.
The system mode is selectable at Initial Program Load (lPL)
time and determines the base operating characteristics of the
machine. System/370 mode allows operation of certain releases of OS/VS1, VM/370, DOS/VSE, DOS/VS, and DOS.
(See Programming Note below for details.) ECPS: VSE mode
supports operation of an appropriately generated DOS/VSE,
offering enhanced systems performance.
- Display/Printer Adapter allows attachment of:
• 3278 Display Console mdl 2A, keyboard and control panel.
• 3262 Line Printer mdl 1.
• 3289 Line Printer mdl 4.
• 3278 model 2 display stations and keyboards.
• 3287 Printers mdls 1 and 2.
- The System Diskette Facility is the microcode loading system
for the 4331 Processor. The diskette facility reads and writes
from removable magnetic diskettes that provide ail of the
microcode for the 4331 Processor. The diskettes shipped with
the 4331 Processor will supply the required microcode for
diagnostics, standard functions, and the special features ordered. The System Diskette Facility also ailows storage of
failure data from 4331 Processor errors which can subsequently be analyzed by the IBM Customer Engineer for maintenance purposes.
- Each 4331 Processor includes 65,536 bytes of reloadable
control storage provided in addition to processor storage. (An
additional 65,536 bytes is available as a special feature.) This
provides storage space for a portion of system microcode in
support of standard functions and special features of the 4331
Processor. The reloadable control storage is not available to
the user. Table 1 lists the reloadable control storage requirements for system microcode.
- Remote Support Facility (RSF) is an IBM CE tool permitting the
IBM Field Technical Support Center specialists to remotely
monitor and/or control problem diagnosis in the 4331 Processor. This includes remotely-initiated execution of diagnostic
programs, remote examination of all or selected logout records
from the System Diskette Facility, and, (with proper customer
authorization), remote exercise of the Customer Manual Operations.
- One level addressing facility for improved virtual storage control by DOS/VSE (ECPS: VSE mode).
- Channels with virtual storage addressing (ECPS: VSE mode).
- S/370 Universal Instruction Set.
- CE maintenance support functions.
- Storage Protection (Store and Fetch).
- Byte Oriented Operands.
- Clock Comparator and CPU Timer.
- Time of Day Clock.
- Interval Timer.
- Conditional Swapping.
- PSW Key Handling.
- Control Registers.
- Extended Precision Floating Point.
- Machine Check Handling.
- Program Event Recording.
- Channel Indirect Data Addressing (in System/370 mode).
- Monitoring.
- Clear I/O
Programming Note: The ECPS: VSE mode may be evoked at IPL
time and supports operation of DOSIVSE.
When System/370 mode 15 IPL'ed, operation of DOSIVSE,
VM/370 Release 6 and OSIVS1 Release 7 are supported.
DOS/VS Release 34 is supported on the 4331 Processor in
System/370 mode until December 31, 1979. VM/370 Release 5
with a PLC available 8/79 runs in System/370 mode and is supported until December 31, 1979. NOTE: VM/370 Release 5 and
DOS/VS Release 34 only support I/O machines previously supported on S/370. Although not supported, DOS Release 26 will
run on the 4331 Processor when in System/370 mode.
Conlole Function: An operator's display, keyboard and control
panel is a prerequisite for use of the system by the customer ... a
3278 Display Console mdl 2A is required for this purpose ... the
display and "keyboard function as an operator's I/O console to
communicate with the operating system ... the Operator Control
Panel allows additional operator communication with the system.
Depending on the mode of console operation, a maximum of 20 of
the 25 lines on the display may be used for system communication, four are reserved for messages from the 4331 Processor
hardware system, and one displays messages unique to the 3278
Display Console mdl 2A. The console address is selected at
system installation time from the range 009 through 01F.
The console functions in one of two modes, "Display Mode" or
the optional "Printer-Keyboard Mode." In the "Printer-Keyboard
Mode", the display console uses the keyboard for input and the
display and a 3287 Printer mdl 1 or 2 for output. The CRT, keyboard and printer appear to the system as a 1052 PrinterKeyboard and operate compatibly with S/360 console operations
or as a 3210/3215 Console Printer-Keyboard and operate compatibly with S/370 console operations.
In "Display Mode" the keyboard is used for input and the CRT
with 20 lines by 80 characters/line is used for output. The 3287
mdl 1 or 2, if attached, has its own address and must be supported by either the 3277 Console Support of DOS/VS Release 34,
the 3277 Console Support of DOS/VSE, the Multiple Console
Support of OSIVS1, the local-attached 3286/3287 Printer support
of VM/370, or the equivalent of any of these.
Byte Multiplexer Channel (optional): Functionally equivalent to
the byte multiplexer channel on S/360 and S/370 ... provides 8
control unit pOSitions ... certain control units require an optional
feature (Power Interface #5531, #5532) for on-off and Instantaneous Power Off control. See Special Features and Table 3 below
for details. The channel permits simultaneous operations of many
low speed devices ... operates at 18K bytes per second in single
byte mode ... up to 500K bytes per second in burst mode. See
IBM 4331 Channel Characteristics, GA33-1527, for devices which
may attach and for the data rates aChievable for certain configurations. The Byte Multiplexer Channel is always addressed as channelO.
Block Multiplexer Channel (optional): Provides 8 control unit
positions ... certain control units require an optional feature (Power
Interface #5531, #5532) for on-off and Instantaneous Power Off
control. See Special Features and Table 3 below for details. Data
rate is .5 million bytes per second (see IBM 4331 Channel Characteristics, GA33-1527, for details). The Block Multiplexer Channel permits simultaneous operation of high speed devices ... ability
to "Block Multiplex" and facility for multiple requesting allows
several I/O units to operate concurrently witli greater channel
efficiency. Devices attached to these channels which cannot
utilize block multiplexing will function as if attached to selector
channels ... 33xx devices (and the 3830 Storage Control Unit) do
not attach ... see DASD Adapter for attachment of 3340 devices.
Standard channel address is 1; a different address may be selected at installation time (from the range of 2 to 6).
Native I/O Adapters: The following I/O adapters control the
designated I/O devices. Because there is a close relationship
between the adapter hardware, the attached I/O device(s) and the
I/O
adapters
must
be
required
microcode,
certain
installed/removed with the related devices, since the system is
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ --':'===';"5:
-
M 4331.2
Jul79
DP Machines
4331 Proces80r (conl'd)
inoperative with only the adapter installed. The adapters affected
are:
DASD Adapter
5424 Adapter
8809 Magnetic Tape Unit Adapter
The adapters which may be installed without their I/O devices are:
Display/Printer Adapter Expansion
Communications Adapter
codes #4621, #4622, #4623, #4624 may be selected ... if two
different keyboards are required for workstation applications, one
must be #4621. Addresses for these devices are selected at
installation time from the range 009 through 01 F.
Display/Printer Adapter Expansion (optional): Expands the
capability of the standard Display/Printer Adapter to permit the
3278 Display Console mdl 2A and up to 15 displays and/or printers to directly attach to the 4331 Processor. All other capabilities
and limitations are listed under Display/Printer Adapter (standard)
above.
NOTE: All data passing through the system for any I/O device
interferes with the data flow for other devices, producing I/O
limitations. The limitations take two forms:
1) Hardware exclusivities listed in the sales manual text.
2) I/O attachments which individually or in combination can
produce frequent overruns. Considerations in this category
are:
• The aggregate data rate on the Block Multiplexer Channel
and the DASD Adapter.
• The number and speed of lines attached to the Communications Adapter.
• The number and class of overrunnable devices on the Byte
Multiplexer Channel.
• The number and traffic on 3278-2s attached to the
Display/Printer Adapter.
It is necessary to consult the IBM 4331 Channel Characteristics
Manual, GA33-1527,
to properly configure a 4331 with an I/O configuration that has not been
previously analyzed.
Diskette Drive (optional): A single drive diskette reader/recorder
providing the ability to read or write IBM Diskettes Type I on the
4331 Processor. This diskette has a data capacity of 242,944
bytes organized in 1898 sectors of 128 bytes each (for use in
exchanging data with the several products listed below) or a data
capacity of 246,272 bytes organized in 1924 sectors of 128 bytes
each (for use in exchanging data with another 4331 Processor).
Each Diskette Drive is supported by the control program as an
IBM 3540 Diskette Input/Output Unit as a sequential DASD. Data
recorded on an IBM Diskette Type I can be interchanged with IBM
devices and systems which have a diskette drive. Examples are
the IBM 3740, 3770, 3790, 5230 and 8100; and General Systems
Division (GSD) Series/1, and Systems 3, 32, 34 and 38. One
diskette is shipped with the feature ... additional diskettes are
available
Device
address is selected at installation time from the range 009 through
01F.
DASD Adapter (optional): Attaches 3370, 3310 and/or 3340
Direct Access Storage Devices without the necessity of a control
unit. Optimum DASD and systems performarlce is achieved when
3370 Direct Access Storage and/or IBM 3310 Direct Access
Storage are attached and operate in fixed block mode. As an aid
to easy transition and to facilitate installation with 4341 Processors and 5/360 and S/370, emulation of 231 X on 3310 and
direct attachment of 3340 DASD are available.
8809 Magnetic Tape Unit Adapter (optional): Provides native
attachment of 8809 mdl 1A and up to 5 additionai 8809 tape units
(consisting of a mix of 8809 mdls 2 and 3). Allows ,the 8809
Magnetic Tape Unit to operate in streaming mode (data rate is up
to 160K bytes per second) for loading or offloading DASD devices
or in start/stop mode (data rate is up to 20K bytes per second)
for other data processing operations. Standard channel address is
3. Channel and device addresses may be aSSigned at system
installation time from the range of XOO to X7F, where X is 1 to 6.
3340 devices attaching to t"tie DASD Adapter have logical
unit/device addresses of XOO through )(07, and X10 through X17.
By installation of a special feature, the DASD Adapter can read
data from an IBM 3348 Data Module which was recorded on a
3340 attached to an IBM System/3 mdl 12 or 15 ... this is a
read-only mode and is available as a conversion aid for users
converting to the 4331 Processor from a System/3. Addresses are
XOO through X07 and X10 through X17.
All 3310 devices which attach are addressable in the range of X40
through X43, X50 through X53, X60 through X63, and X70
through X73. The 3370 devices attached to the DASD Adapter are
addressable in the range of X20 - X27, and X30 - X37 ... when
other addresses or more than two strings of 3370 are required, a
utility program included as a part of CE Manual Operations is used
to assign up to four control unit addresses in the range of 0 - 7.
Standard channel address is 2, but alternatives may be selected at
installation time (within the range of 1 to 6) ... unit and device
addresses are assigned at system installation time, within the
ranges specified above.
Display/Printer Adapter (standard): This adapter allows for attachment of the prerequisite 3278 Display Console mdl 2A and up to
seven (or fifteen with optional feature ... see below) additional
devices chosen from the list below.
3278
3287
3262
3289
Display Station mdl 2s
Printers, mdls 1 and 2,
Line Printer, mdl 1
Line Printer, mdl 4
These machines may be installed in any combination, provided
that (1) only seven (or fifteen with optional feature) devices are
installed and (2) no more than two system printers (3262 mdl 1
and/or 3289 mdl 4) are installed.
The 3262 mdl 1 or' the 3289 mdl 4 line printers may be used as
system printers for DOS/VSE and VM/370. The 3262 mdl 1 will
be supported on the 4331 Processor by the most recently announced release of VM/BSE which is available at the FCS of the
3262. One 3287 Printer may be used as a console hardcopy
device; one or more 3287 Printers may be used as hardcopy
workstation devices ... the 3278 Display Station mdl 2s may be
used as additional operator's consoles (with the presence of
OS/VS1 Multiple Consoie Support or equivalent) or as workstations for user-written applications. Display/Printer Adapter support
includes all standard functions of the 3274 mdl 1B with the 3278
mdl 2 attached except for Cursor Select, Device Cancel Key, Print
Key, Print Ident Key, Keyboard Numeric Lock, and Click Key. In
addition, the following 3278 mdl 2 special features are supported:
Audible Alarm, Security Keylock, and Switched Control Unit. When
used as workstations, 3278 Display Station keyboard feature
Not to
b~
5424 Adapter (optional): Provides native attachment of 5424
Multifunction Card Unit mdls A1 or A2 for 96 column card operations. Device address is 04C.
Communications Adapter (optional): The 4331 Communications
Adapter can serve up to eight communication lines. Synchronous
Data Link Control (SDLC), Binary Synchronous Communications
(BSC) and Start/Stop (Asynchronous) transmission modes are
provided, and two of the three may be installed on one system.
(Start/Stop and SSC operate in 2703 Compatibility Mode.) The
Communications Adapter can handle a variety of terminals (Data
Terminal Equipments, DTEs), at different speeds.
The Communications Adapter has the following overall structure:
The Communications Adapter Base contains common circuits and
control. Each of the up to eight telecommunications lines attachable requires one Line Attachment Base (two different types) and
one line attachment feature. Another feature serves for autocall
unit interface and two may be installed.
The interface with the external communication facilities is through
a modem (also called signal converter or Data Circuit-terminating
Equipment). It may be a stand-alone unit or a 1 200 bps integrated
modem. For further details refer to "Special Features."
Attachments to Telecommunications Lines:
IBM Stand Alone Modems
Switched
3863-2
3872
3864-2
3874
1200/2400 bps
1200/2400 bps
2400/4800 bps
2400/4800 bps
Non-Switched
The following modems are supported with the Switched Network Backup feature ... see 3863, 3864, 3865, 3872, 3874, 3875
for details
3863-1
1200/2400 bps
3872
1200/2400 bps
3864·1
2400/4800 bps
3874
2400/4800 bps
3875
3600/7200 bps
3865
4800/9600 bps
IBM Integrated Modem (V23, 1200 bps)
The following integrated modem configurations are available:
- Switched network with auto answer
- Non-switched line, 2 or 4 wires
- Switched network with manual answer
- Non-switched line with switched network backup and auto
answer
~
reproduced without written permission.
--------- - --===
------ ----':' =
M 4331.3
Jul 79
DP Machines
4331 Processor (cont'd)
- Non-switched line with switched network backup with manual
answer
OEM Modems: OEM modems that comply with EIA RS 232C,
CCITT V24/V28, or CCITT V35 recommendations may be connected to the Communications Adapter. Attachment is under the provisions of the Multiple Supplier Systems Policy.
Digital Data Service Adapter: The Digital Data Service Adapter
allows attachment to the American Telephone and Telegraph
Private Line Dataphone' Digital Service Network by way of an
internal Digital Data Service (DDS') Adapter.
Automatic Calling Equipment: The following Automatic Calling
Equipment, maximum two, can be attached to the Communications
Adapter:
-
3872 with Automatic Call Originate feature
3874 with Automatic Call Originate feature
Other Automatic Calling Equipment which complies with EIA
RS 366 or CCITT V25 may be connected to the Autocall Unit
Interface (#1020) under the provisions of the Multiple Suppier Systems Bulletin.
[5] When 3278 mdl 2s are attached to the Display/Printer Adapter
or the Display /Printer Adapter Expansion (special feature)
select one of three options below:
For Any or All 3278-2 Oisplays and 3287 Printers
EBCDIC
Option 1
(EBCDIC
typewriter
only)
Typewriter Keyboard
Data Entry Keyboards
ASCII"
Typewriter Keyboards
Typewriter is
available for any
keyboard without
further Specify
Codes
None Attached
None Attached
Specify: (1)
#9442' and (2)
either #9301' for
Data Entry
(typewriter layout)
or #9302' for
Data Entry
(keypunch layout)
None Attached
Typewriter is
Option 2
available for any
(EBCDIC
keyboard without
typewriter and further Specify
data entry)
Codes
System Subchannels
Byte Multiplexer Channel: The 4331 Processor with a Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5248) provides up to 31 subchannels, 4 of
which are shared subchannels supporting from 1 to 1 6 devices
each. The maximum number of subchannels is reduced from 31
with the addition of certain special features:
Subchar.nels
unavailable
Feature
DASD Adapter (#3201)
8809 Magnetic Tape Unit Adapter (#4910)
Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421)
Communications Adapter (#1601)
Each telecommunications line on
the Communications Adapter
2
2
1
1
Block Multiplexer Channel: Provides up to 40 subchannels where
up to 8 may be shared subchannels with 16 devices each.
Allows either:
1) 32 subchannels plus 8 shared subchannels with 16 devices
each, or
2) 32 subchannels plus 4 shared subchannels with 32 devices
each.
Prerequisites: Each system requires an operator's display, keyboard and control panel to allow Initial Microcode Load (IML) and
interaction with the hardware/software system. A 3278 Display
Console mdl 2A with keyboard is required for this purpose.
Bibliography: GCXX-XXXX (to be announced)
SPECIFY:
[1] Voltage (single phase, 3 wire, 60Hz): #9902 for 208V, or
#9914 for 240V.
[2] Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, or #9065 for pebble gray.
[3]
Minimum Systems:
See "Minimum Configurations" in
"Systems" for minimum I/O units required for the 4331 Processor.
[4] Remote Support Facilities (RSF): #9510 if the customer will
use RSF. Specifying #9510 means that RSF can be used with
the 4331 Processor; however its use in any maintenance situation is not required. Remote Support Facility utilization is always
a customer option. When the facility is utilized, the customer
must provide the telephone lines required for the Remote Support Facility modem. The customer must also arrange for the
connection of the telephone interface cable provided by IBM to
the telephone network.
, Dataphone and DDS are registered trademarks of The American Telephone and Telegraph Company. Other usage of Dataphone and DDS in this
text also refers to the registered trademarks of American Telephone and
Telegraph.
Typewriter is
Option 3
available for any
(EBCDIC and keyboard without None Attached
Specify: #9441'
ASCII typefurther Specify
writer)
Codes
" ASCII keyboards are supported as indIcated, but the Internal binary
codes are EBCDIC.
[6] Console Table. A console table is available ... see Accessories
pages for details.
[7] See 3278 Display Console mdl 2A for console cabling.
[8] Shipping Instructions: Unless otherwise specified, shipping
dimensions of the 4331 Processor are 62-3/4" x 32" x 391/2". If a reduction in dimensions is required, specify #9570.
Shipping dimensions will then be 60" x 29-1/2" x 38-1/2".
[9] System Environment: For record purposes specify one of the
following codes (reference only, no parts required):
#9701 - This processor is planned to be host/peer connected to a system within the same branch office territory
(at installation or at a future time).
#9702 -- This processor is planned to be host/peer connected to a system in a different branch office territiory (at
installation or at a future time).
#9703 - This processor is planned to be standalone (no
host/peer connect).
Microcode Storage Requirements: The system microcode resides
in both the reloadable control storage and the processor storage,
and is loaded from the standard system diskette facility at IML
time. None of the reloadable control storage is available for user
programming and the systems configuration selected will determine
the processor storage available for user programming and operating system residence.
To calculate the amount of processor storage which is available
for customer purposes and operating system residence, and to
determine when Control Storage Expansion (#1901) is required,
use the following procedure.
1) Consulting Table 1, determine the microcode groups required
to support the features and I/O to be installed.
2) On the Table 2, place a checkmark in the appropriate rows.
Note that each microcode group is required only once, even
if it supports multiple functions of the 4331 Processor. The
only exception to this is microcode group 2 where 2048
bytes of processor storage are required per megabyte of
virtual storage as defined in the notes.
3) Find the sum of each of the three columns for the required
microcode groups.
4) The total from column A must pass three tests.
- When the total from column A exceeds 65,536 bytes,
Control Storage Expansion (#1901) is required.
- When the total from column A exceeds 131,072 bytes, an
invalid configuration has been selected.
- When the total from column A plus the total from column
B exceeds 262,144 bytes, an invalid configuration has
been selected.
5) Subtract the total of column A from either
, System Diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on
purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on the same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- - - --=-- =-------=
--':' =
M 4331.4
Jul79
DP Machines
4331 Processor (conl'd)
- 131,072 if #1901 is required, or
- 65,536 if #1901 is not required.
6) Subtract the results of step 5 from the total of column B.
7) Add the results of step 6 to the total from column C and
round up to the next multiple of 4096.
The results of step 7 determine the amount of processor storage
occupied by microcode and should be subtracted from the processor storage size ordered to determine the amount available for
the user. Note that in certain circumstances the user may wish to
install Control Storage Expansion (#1901) even though step 4
does not indicate that it is required. Use of # 1901 may increase
the amount of Processor Storage available for user programs.
TABLE 1
Function/Feature
Installed
Microcode
Group
-
4331 Processor
Processor Storage in S/370 mode, one req'd.
in ECPS: VSE mode, one req'd per
megabyte of Virtual Storage defined
for the IPL (up to 16).
- 3310 attached (#3201 and #9202)
- 3370 attached (#3201 and #9201)
- 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit attached (#4910)
- 3340 Direct Attach (#7851 and #3201)
- System/3 Data Import (#6305 and #3201)
- 2311/2314/2319/3310 Direct Access
Storage Compatibility (#7901 and
#3201 with #9202)
- Communications Adapter Base (# 1601)
- BSC lines installed (#9671-9678)
- SIS lines installed (#9681-9688)
- SDLC lines installed (#9691-9698)
- ECPS:VM/370 (#8701)
- 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#3950)
1
2
2
3, 4, 5, 6
3,4,6,17
3, 4, 6, 7
3, 6, 8, 15
3,6,8, 15
3,4,5,6,9,15
6, 10
6, 10, 11
6, 10, 12
6, 10, 13
16
14
TABLE 2
-A-
-B-
-C-
Control
Microcode Storage
Group
(only)
Control
Storage
or
Processor
Processor Storage
Storage
(only)
Notes
1
66,816
33,792
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6,144
5,120
6,144
9,216
9
10
11 '
12'
13'
14
15
16
17
TOTAL
24,320
12,288
4,608
9,728
13,312
26,624
8,192
6,144
5,120
12,288
14,336
9,216
5,760
6,656
--
9,316
12,764
2,048
Group 2 is required
once in System/370
mode, and for each
1MB Virtual Storage
in ECPS: VSE mode.
3,150
11,250
10,250
Excl. w Group 14
3,060
11,600 plus
8,800/buffer ...
1,800 for a second string of
3340s attached to the
DASD Adapter.
1,300 plus
4,096/2311 buffer
7,680/2314 or 2319 buffer
2,150
' Only two of three
may be selected
1,024
1,800
Excl. w Group 7 & 16
200
Excl. w Group 14
10,000
PRICES:
4331
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 yr
11
$1,862
2,086
$1,585
1,775
J1
Purchase
$65,000
72,500
MMMC/
AMMCR
$150
160
Plan Offering: Plan 0 Purchase Option: 60% Machine Group: 0
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 months
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: 4331 model 11 is field upgradable to 4331 model
J1.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (there are no additional
installation charges)
From 4331 model 11 to model J1 ..... $7,500
SPECIAL FEATURES
ADAPTER POWER PREREQUISITE (#1001). Provides power and
control circuitry necessary for the Communications Adapter
(#1601), when more than 3 line features are attached, and the
Adapter Logic Prerequisite (#1002). Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes.
ADAPTER LOGIC PREREQUISITE (#1002).
Provides logic and
control function necessary for the 5424 Adapter (#3901).
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Adapter
Power Prerequisite (#1001).
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#1421).
Provides means of
attaching I/O devices with data transfer rates up to .5 million
bytes per second. Up to 8 control units may be attached ... disconnect during command chaining allows multiple I/O devices to
operate concurrently. Devices attachable are shown in "Systems"
... 3330/3333/3350/3340/3344 devices do NOT' attach ... see
DASD Adapter (#3201) for attachment of 3340 devices.
Maximum:
One.
Field
Installation:
Yes.
Limitations:
2311/2314/2319 devices may not be installed with any of the
following: 3370s on the DASD Adapter (#3201 with #9201),
3340 Direct Attachment (#7851), 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit Adapter (#4910), System/3 Data Import (#6305), any telecommunications line feature on the Communications Adapter which runs at a
speed greater than 9600 bps (#4720, #5650 with #9444), or
magnetic tape units installed on the Byte Multiplexer Channel
(#5248). Specify: (1) #9491' for 8 shared subchannels with up
to 16 devices each ... (2) #9492' for 4 shared subchannels with
32 devices each. Prerequisite: Certain control units require Power
Interface Feature (#5531, #5532). See details below.
CONTROL STORAGE EXPANSION (#1901). Increases the control storage capacity of the 4331 Processor from 65,536 to
131 ,072 bytes, providing additional storage area for special features and the basic functions of the 4331 Processor. See Table 1
above to determine the requirement for this feature. Note that the
user may wish to install this feature even if Table 1 and the associated directions do not indicate that it is required. Under some
circumstances, use of #1901 may increase the processor storage
available for user programs. Maximum: One. Field Installation:
Yes.
Expands
DISPLAY /PRINTER ADAPTER EXPANSION (#2001 2 ).
the capability of the standard Display /Printer Adapter to allow the
3278 mdl 2A and up to 15 displays and/or printers to directly
attach to the 4331 Processor. The devices attachable are:
Up to fifteen 3278 Display Station mdl 2s
Up to fifteen 3287 Printer mdl 1sand 2s
Up to two 3289 Line Printer mdl 4s.
Up to two 3262 Line Printer mdl 1s.
Other details are the same as given under the description of the
Standard Function: Display/Printer Adapter above. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: Only the 3278 mdl 2A
and 15 devices (listed above) may attach to the Display/Printer
Adapter and the Display/Printer Adapter Expansion. Specify: See
item [5) in Specify list for character code/keyboard combinations
available. Cable. Order: See Ml0000 pages for ordering information for the required coaxial cable.
DASD ADAPTER (#3201 2 ).
Allows attachment of certain DASD
devices to the 4331 Processor. Up to four strings of devices may
be attached to the adapter. The attachable device types may be
intermixed on the adapter. The maximum number of strings of
each type of device on the DASDAdapter is: (a) up to four 3310
mdl A 1 or A2s with mdl B units attached to the A2s ... (b) Up to
two 3340 mdl A2s with 3340 B units attached ... (c) Up to four
3370 mdl Als with mdl Bl units attached. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: 3310 and 3370 are not supported
, System Diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on
purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on the same diskette.
l
Feature supplies diskette for System Diskette facility.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- - ----_.-
-- - ----- -- -----
M 4331.5
Jul 79
DP Machines
4331 Processor (conrd)
by VS1. 3370s may not be attached (#9201) to the DASD Adapter if either of the following are installed: (1) 231 X DASD attached
to the Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421), (2) any telecommunications line on the Communications Adapter which operates at a
speed greater than 9600 bps (#4720, or #5650 with #9444).
Specify: #9202' if 331 0 attaches to the DASD Adapter, and / or
#9201' if 3370 attaches to the DASD Adapter. Prerequisite: See
Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (#1901).
DISKETTE
DRIVE
(#3401).
A
single
drive
diskette
reader/recorder providing the ability to read or write IBM Diskettes Type 1. The Diskette Drive is supported by the control
program as an IBM 3540 Diskette Input/Output Unit. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: Not supported by
VM/370.
EXTERNAL SIGNALS (#3898).
Provides six distinct external
interrupt lines to request and identify an external interrupt response from the processing unit. Maximum: One.
Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: External devices must meet the
interface specifications outlined in S/360 - Direct Control Feature
- OEM I, SRL GA22-6845. Cable Order: Required.
5424 ADAPTER (#3901'). Allows attachment of one 5424 Multifunction Card Unit mdl A1 or A2. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: The 5424 is supported by DOS/VSE
only. Prerequisites: Adapter Logic Prerequisite (#1002) and
Adapter Power Prerequisite (#1001).
1401/1440/1460 COMPATIBILITY (#3950'). A feature which, in
conjunction with special software,
permits execution of
1401/1440/1460 instructions. Feature may be used with
System/370 mode or with ECPS: VSE mode. See "Programming"
section of sales manual for details concerning prerequisites.
Maximum: One. Field Instatlatlon: Yes. Limitation: May not be
installed with 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit Adapter (#4910). May not
be installed with ECPS:VM/370 (#8701). Support is available
under DOS/VSE/ Advanced Function, DOS/VS Release 34, and
DOS Release 26. Prerequisite: IBM Systems 1401 /1 440/1460
Emulator Program Product. See "Programming" section of sales
manual for details. See Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion
(#1901).
8809 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT ADAPTER {#491 0'). Provides for
attachment of the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit. One 8809 mdl 1A
may attach. Up to five 8809 mdl 2s and 3s may attach to the mdl
1A for a total of six 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit drives. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: May not be installed with
1401/1440/1460 Compatibility (#3950). May not be installed if
231 X devices are attached to the Block Multiplexer Channel
(#1421). The 8809 is not supported by VS1. Prerequisite: See
Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (# 1901 ).
BYTE MULTIPLEXER CHANNEL (#5248). The byte multiplexer
channel attaches S/370 byte multiplex devic.es. The data rate of
the channel is 18K bytes per second in single byte interleaved
mode and up to 500K bytes per second in a burst mode. (For
data rates achievable for specific configurations see IBM 4331
Channel Characteristics, GA33-1527.) Up to 8 control units may
be attached. On the 4331 Processor, up to 31 subchannels are
provided (see System Subchannels above for specifics). On each
4331 Processor model, 4 of the available subchannels are shared
subchannels for up to 16 devices each. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitations: Magnetic tape devices may not be
attached to the Byte Multiplexer Channel whenever 231 X devices
are attached to the Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421).
Prerequisite: Certain control units require Power Interface Feature
(#5531, #5532). See details below.
POWER INTERFACE (#5531), ADDITIONAL (#5532).
Provides
power, power control, and Instantaneous Power Off interfaces to
the 4331 Processor for control units attaching to the 4331 Byte
Multiplexer Channel and Block Multiplexer Channel. Table 3 below
lists the control units requiring this feature. Power Interface
(#5531) allows attachment of up to 8 of these control units;
Power Interface, Additional (#5532) allows attachment of 8 additional control units for a maximum of 16 per processor. Maximum:
One #5531; one #5532. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
#5532 requires #5531.
, Feature supplies diskette for System Diskette facility.
, System Diskette-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on
purchase machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on the same diskette.
TABLE 3
Control units requiring Power Interface features.
1255
1287
1 288
1419
1442
1442
1443
2314
2314
2415
2501
2520
2701
2702
2703
2803
2821
2822
2840
2841
3272
3411
3505
3540
3704
3705
3791
3800
3803
3811
3881
3886
3890
3895
Magnetic Character Reader
Optical Reader
Optical Reader
Magnetic Character Reader
Card Read Punch mdl N1
Card Punch mdl N2
Printer mdl N1
Storage Control' mdl A1, B1
Direct Access Storage Facility' mdl 1
Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
Card Reader mdls B1, B2
Card Read Punch mdl B1, B2, B3
Data Adapter Unit
Transmission Control'
Transmission Control'
Tape Control
Control Unit mdls 1, 2, 3, 5, 6
Paper Tape Reader Control
Display Control
Storage Control
Control Unit
Magnetic Tape Unit and Control
Card Reader
Diskette Input/Output Unit
Communications Controller
Communications Controller
Controller
Printing Subsystem
Tape Control
Printer Control Unit
Optical Mark Reader mdl 1
Optical Character Reader md~1
Document Processor
Document Reader/Inscriber
, No longer available.
PRINTER-KEYBOARD MODE (#5550').
Allows the 4331 Processor user to run an operating system which has been generated
for use either on (1) an IBM S/360 with a 1052 Printer-Keyboard
as operator console, or (2) an IBM S/370 with a 3210/3215
Console Printer-Keyboard used in conjunction with the standard
system keyboard, display and 3287 Printer. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 3287 Printer.
SYSTEM/3 DATA IMPORT (#6305').
A feature which allows
attachment of IBM 3340-A2s for the purpose of reading data from
a 3348 Data Module which had been written by an IBM System/3
mdl 12 or 15. Up to two 3340-A2s may attach ... up to three
3340 model B units may attach to each 3340-A2. The 3348 Data
Module is read on a model A or B drive in a 3340 string attached
via the DASD Adapter (#3201). NOTE: The 3340 mdl C2 may not
attach. However, 3348 Data Modules recorded on the 3340 mdl
C2 can be read when the module is installed on a 4331-attached
3340 A or B model. This feature works in conjunction with
VSE/IBM System/3-3340 Data Import program ... see Programming section of sales manual for details. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: May not be installed if 231 X devices
attach to the Biock Multiplexer Channel (#1421). The utility program supporting this feature operates only under DOS/VSE.
Prerequisites: 3340-A2 DASD and Feature Code #3201. See
Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (#1901). NOTE: Feature
#7851 is NOT required as a prerequisite.
3340 DIRECT ATTACHMENT (#7851'). A feature allowing 3340
mdl A2s to attach to the DASD Adapter (#3201) and operate with
DOS/VSE, DOS/VS, OS/VS1 or VM/370 ... may attach up to two
3340 mdl A2s. Up to three 3340 model B units may attach to
each 3340 mdl A2. NOTE: Use of this feature introduces additional processor and channel demands and may have an 'effect on
systems performance. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: (a) May not be installed if 231 X devices attach to the
Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421 ) ... (b) A maximum of two
strings of 3340s may attach ... (c) If one string of 3340s is attached to a DASD Adapter (#3201) then only one string of 3310s
can perform DASD emulation (#7901). If two strings of 3340s are
attached to a DASD Adapter (#3201) no 3310's can perform
DASD emulation (#7901). Prerequisites: DASD Adapter (#3201)
... 3340 mdl A2. See Table 1 for microcode storage requirements
and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (#1901).
(Note that the storage requirements are greater for two strings of
3340 than for one string.)
2311/2314/2319/3310 DIRECT ACCESS STORAGE COMPATIBILITY (#7901'). A feature allowing 2311 and 2314/2319 disk
data sets to be emulated for DOS, DOS/VS and DOS/VSE operations, cn up to two consecutively addressed strings of natively
attached 3310 Direct Access Storage attached to the DASD Adap-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- -------- ---- - -----------.-
M 4331.6
Jul 79
DP Machines
4331 Processor (cont'd)
ter. Emulation is done on a 231 X volume basis mapped into predefined areas of the 3310 as follows:
up to 7 x 2311 volumes into one 3310 drive for a maximum of
28 volumes per 3310 string
up to 2 x 2314/2319 volumes into one 3310 drive for a maximum of 8 volumes per 3310 string.
(It is possible to emulate 231 X "Mini Volumes", and each successive 231 X Mini Volume emulated on the 3310 begins on a 231 X
full volume boundary.)
Use of this feature allows programs written for DOS, DOS/VS, or
DOS/VSE and 2311/2314/2319 DASD to be executed, with only
JCL modifications, using the 3310 Direct Access Storage. Operates when either System/370 mode or ECPS: VSE mode has been
IPL'ed. Data sets in fixed block mode may be intermixed on the
same 3310 volume with 231 X emulated data sets but may be
accessed concurrently only when ECPS: VSE mode is active.
NOTE: Use of this feature introduces additional processor and
channel demands and may have an effect on systems performance. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations: (a)
2311/2314/2319 emulation only operates on up to two 3310 mdl
A2s and the 3310 mdl Bs attached to them ... (b) If one string of
3310s performs emulation of 231 X devices using this feature, then
the DASD Adapter (#3201) can only support one string of 3340s
using feature #7851. If two strings of 3310s perform emulation of
231 X devices using this feature, then the DASD Adapter may not
support direct attachment of 3340s through feature #7851 ... (c)
Does not operate with OS/VS1 or VM/370 ... (d) The feature
supports both 2311 and 2314/2319 emulation but either 2311 or
2314/2319 must be selected at each IPL, not both.
Prerequisites: DASD Adapter (#3201). 3310 Direct Access Storage ... see "Machines." See Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (#1901). Program Order: Required for 3310 compatibility
initialization routines. Order
order number 5747-SA1.
ECPS:VM/370 (#8701 3 ).
The 4331
Processor provides
ECPS:VM/370 support at Level 19. This support is compatible
with VM/370 Release 6 and corresponding levels of the System
Extension program products. This level is also compatible with the
PLC that will provide VM/370 Release 5 support for the 4331.
The functional areas assisted include: Virtual Machine I/O, SVC
Handler, Privileged Instruction Emulation, and Virtual Interval
Timer. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. limitation: May
only operate when System/370 mode. has been invoked by IPL.
May not be installed with 1401/1440/1460 Compatibility
(#3950). Prerequisite: See Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (#1901).
COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER
Provides the basic control and common circuits for the direct
attachment of up to 8 synchronous (BSC), asynchronous
(Start/Stop) or Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) communication lines in any combination, provided that only two of the three
types are installed and that the aggregate data rate capability of
up to 64,000 bps is not exceeded. For data rates achievable, see
GA33-1527. The maximum speed of each of the 8 lines is 9600
bps except one of the 8 line positions may be a synchronous high
speed line (BSC or SDLC) up to 56,000 bps and may operate
concurrently with other lines provided that the data rate limitations
are not exceeded. The Communications Adapter operates with
Start/Stop and BSC in 2703 Compatibility Mode. SDLC is supported only by ACF /VTAME operating under DOS/VSE, or
ACF/VTAME operating under VM/370 Release 6 with DOS/VSE
running as a guest.
Base
-
characters are:
Auto Answer
Autopoll operation
Multipoint station functions
EBCDIC transparent mode for BSe only
EBCDIC and ASCII code for BSC only
From the Display Console keyboard the user may specify some
configuration parameters for each separate telecommunications
line for each individual connection:
- select stand-by
- half speed operation for synchronous lines only (for both
clocked and nonclocked modems which have this capability).
- NRZI mode in SDLC mode.
- write interrupt (S/S only).
- read interrupt (S/S only).
- unit exception suppression (S/S only).
- error index byte mode (BSC only).
- ASCII code instead of EBCDIC (BSC only).
Other configuration parameters can be selected at installation time
and set by the IBM Customer Engineer.
duplex instead of half duplex connection (two way alternate
data flow transmission).
switched network facility instead of non-switched lines (for
external modems).
new sync (for BSC or SDLC in multipoint primary station
function only).
high speed operation for one line (BSC or SDLC only).
connect Data Set to Line or Data Terminal Ready procedure.
selection of WE202 or V.23 answer tone frequencies for
1200 bps integrated modems with automatic answering.
Customer Responsibilities: See M 2700 pages for customer
responsibilities regarding communications facilities and services.
Communication Facilities: See M 2700 pages for communications
facility requirements with this feature.
Terminals Supported: The Data Communications Equipment and
remotely attachable Data Terminal Equipment (abbreviated
"terminals") supported by the Communications Adapter are shown
in the table below:
SDLC TERMINALS SUPPORTED
TYPE
SPEED IN KBPS
1.2/
0.6 2.4
Terminals:
3271-11,12 (3)
3274-1C
3275-12 (3)
3276-11-14
3601
3602
3614
3624
3631
3632
3651-25, 75
3651-A50/B50
3651-A60/B60
3661
3684-1, 2
3767-1-3
3771-1-3
3774-1,2,P1.P2
3775-1,P1
3776-1,2
3776-3.4
3777-1,2,3
3791
X
x
2.4/
1.2 4.8
4.8/
2.4 7.2
7.2/
3.6 9.6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20.456.0
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Controllers:
3705 (1)
Systems:
The Communications Adapter attaches up to eight lines via the
following optional features:
- Up to 8 line features without internal clock for attachment to
external modems (Data 'Circuit-terminating Equipment, DC E)
with clock.
- Up to 8 line features with internal clock for attachment to
external modems (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment, DCE)
without clock.
- Up to 1 synchronous high speed line feature.
- Up to 8 line features with integrated modems.
- Up to 8 line features with local attachments.
- Up to 8 line features with Digital Data Service Adapters.
- Autocall Unit interfaces for up to two of the installed lines.
3 System Diskette-only special feature. No fee when ordered at time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on
purchase machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on the same diskette.
4331 (2)
5320 (5)
5340 (5)
5380 (5)
8100
X
X
Notes:
1) 3705 supported as a primary station in a network using
ACF/VTAM Release 1 or ACF/VTAM Release 2.
2) Participant as a primary or a secondary station in a network
using ACF/VTAM Release 1 or ACF/VTAM Release 2.
3) Not supported by ACF /VTAME.
5) Supported as a 3770.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
\:~
----------_-- -........
---- -----.----
M 4331.7
Jul 79
DP Machines
4331 Processor
(cont'd)
BSC TERMINALS SUPPORTED
SPEED IN KBPS
TYPE
1.2/
0.6 2.4
2.4/
1.2 4.8
4.8/
2.4 7.2
20.47.2/
3.6 9.656.0(6)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2701(w360/370) X
3704
X
3705
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Termlnels:
3271-1.2
3274-1C
3275-2
3276-1-4
3631 (7)
3632 (7)
3651-25, 75
3651-A60,B60
3661
3684-1,2
3735
3741-2,4
3747
3771 (2)
3774, 3775 (2)
3776-1,2 (3)
3777-1,2 (3)
3780
5231-2 (9)
)C
)(
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X (1)
Controllers:
X
X
X
X
Systems: (5)
3115
3125
3135
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
~~
~~
5010 (8)
~O~
5340 (8)
5404
5406
5408
5410
5412
5415
~OOW
Series 1 (8)
X (1)
X (1)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes:
1) By RPQ.
2) Equivalent to 2770/2772.
3) Equivalent to 2770/3780.
4) Supported as a remote 3276.
5) With Communications Adapter.
6) 19,200 - 56,000 bps in line position 1.
7) See 3631 and/or 3632 in Machines for 3631/3632 features
required and software requirements for host connection.
8) Equivalent to 54XX (System/3) under RPS V3/V4.
9) Equivalent to 3741-2, 4.
START /STOP TERMINALS SUPPORTED
Only terminals using IBM Terminal Control - Type 1 are supported.
TYPE
IBM Line Control Speed In BPS
75
274001
274002
2741
3767-1,2,3(1)
5100 (2)
5110
CMC Selectric (1)
X
134.5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
300
600
1200
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Notes:
1) Equivalent to 2740 and/or 2741. 134.5 bps speed needs 3767
RPQ
2) Equivalent to 2741.
\
AUTOCALL UNIT INTERFACE (#1020"). Provides an interface to
customer-supplied Automatic Calling Equipment allowing data links
with remote stations to be automatically established on the
switched telephone network. Automatic Calling Equipment complying with EIA RS 366 or CCITI V25 procedures may be attached.
For the appropriate Automatic Calling Equipment, refer to M 2700
pages. Maximum: Two. Field Instellatlon: Yes. Limitations: Does
not operate with High Speed Modem Adapter (#4720), any features with 1 200 bps Integrated Modem or with any non-switched
lines. Specify: Line position ... see Table 4 below. Prerequisites:
Communications Adapter, Base (#1601) and one EIA/CCITT
Interface (#3701) (in switched operation) for each Autocall Unit
Interface installed. Cable Order: Required, for attachment to
external equipment.
COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER, BASE (#1601').
Allows attachment of up to eight lines (with up to two transmission modes) plus
Autocall Unit Interfaces (#1020) for up to two of the lines. The
aggregate data rate capability of the Communications Adapter is
64,000 bps. Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes. Limitations:
Line features for only two transmission mode versions may be
installed (SOLC and BSC, SOLC and SIS, or SIS and BSC) ... see
Table 4 below. SOLC is supported only by ACF /VTAME operating
under DOS/VSE, or ACF /VTAME operating under VM/370 Release 6 with OOS/VSE running as a guest. The aggregate data
rate capability of the Communications Adapter is 64,000 bps; line
features which exceed this aggregate data rate may be installed
but not operated concurrently. For data rates achievable see IBM
4331 Channel Characteristics, GA33-1527. When 231 X OASO is
attached to the Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421) no line feature
may be attached which runs at a speed greater than 9600 bps.
See features below for details. Each line attached operates with
one subchannel of the Byte Multiplexer Channel (#5248). See
"System Subchannels" above for details. Specify: See Table 4,
"Communications Adapter Configuration Features and Position
Codes," for required specify codes for each line feature attached.
Prerequisites: Adapter Power Prerequisite (#1001) is required
when more than three telecommunications line features are attached. See Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (# 1901).
EIA/CCITT INTERFACE (#3701'). This feature may be intermixed with other line features. Each feature provides for the attachment of one external modem having EIA RS 232-C, CCITT
V24/V28 interface for attachment to one switched or one nonswitched line. When this feature is installed in conjunction with
Line Attachment Base for Clocked Modem (#4695), a BSC or
SOLC line is supported. Non-switched lines with switched network
backup may be used where maximum line speed on non-switched
lines is 9600 bps, the maximum line speed on switched network
backup or switched networks is 4800 bps. When this feature is
installed in conjunction with Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked
Modems (#4696), then a BSC, Start/Stop, or SDLC line is supported. Transmission speeds supported are listed with feature
#4696 below. Maximum: Eight. Field Installation: Yes. Specify:
Start/Stop, SOLC and/or BSC operations are possible ... see
Table 4 for Line Position Code and Transmission Mode Codes.
PrerequiSites: Communications Adapter, Base (#1601). One Line
Attachment Base for Clocked Modems (#4695) or Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked Modems (#4696) is required for each
feature (#3701) installed. Cable Order: Required, for attachment
to external equipment.
LINE ATIACHMENT BASE FOR CLOCKED MODEMS (#4695').
This feature is a prerequisite for all line adapters which attach to
modems (Data CirCUit-terminating Equipment) providing clocking.
See the various line features below to determine when it is required. Maximum: Eight, one per line installed. Field Installation:
Yes. Limitations: A maximum of eight Line Attachment Bases may
be installed on each 4331 Communications Adapter. Each feature
(#4695) installed reduces by one the number of features (#4696)
allowable. Prerequisite: Communications Adapter, Base (#1601).
LINE ATTACHMENT BASE FOR NONCLOCKED MODEMS
(#4696').
This feature is a prerequisite for all line adapters
which attach to modems (Data Circuit-terminating Equipment)
which do not provide clocking. See the various features below to
determine when it is required. The clock speed internal to the
feature is wired by default to 134.5 bps for Start/Stop operation
and 1200 bps for BSC and SDLC operation. Otherwise" the clock
speed can be wired at installation to one of the following:
• Start/Stop 75, 300, 600 or 1200 bps
• BSC
600
• SDLC
600
For BSC or SDLC operations, if 1200 bps is wired, then full speed
operation (1200 bps) or half-speed operation (600 bps) may be
selected from the operator console keyboard. Maximum: Eight,
one per line installed. Field Installation: Yes. Limitation: A maximum of eight Line Attachment Bases may be installed on each
4331 Communications Adapter. Each feature (#4696) installed
reduces by one the number of features (#4695) allowable.
PrerequiSite: Communications Adapter, Base (#1601).
HIGH SPEED MODEM ADAPTER (#4720'). The feature provides
for the attachment of an external modem with clock having a
CCITT V35 interface. One non-switched point-to-point BSC or
SDLC line may be operated with speeds of 20,400, 40,800,
• Feature supplies diskette for System Diskette facility.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=- =---- --=----':' =
M 4331.8
Jul79
DP Machines
4331 Processor (cont'd)
48,000 or 56,000 bps, Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
Limitations: Operation is with up to 7 other lines, (speeds not
exceeding 9600 bps) subject to the overall aggregate data rate
limitation of 64,000 bps. (For data rates achievable see IBM 4331
Channel Characteristics, GA33-1527.) Cannot be installed with
231X DASD attached to the Block Multiplexer Channel (#1421).
Cannot be installed with 3370 DASD attached (#9201) to the
DASD Adapter (#3201). Cannot be installed with Digital Data
Service Adapter (# 5650) if the Digital Data Service Adapter operates at 56,000 bps (#9444). Specify: SSC and/or SDLC operations are possible ... see Table 4 for Line Position Code and
Transmission Mode Codes. Prerequisite: Communications Adapter, Base (#1601). Line Attachment Base for Clocked Modems
(#4695). Cable Order: Required for attachment to the external
modem.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED (#4781'),
This feature may be intermixed with other line features. Each
feature provides for the attachment of one non-switched BSC,
Start/Stop or SDLC line via an integrated 1200 bps modem. l'he
transmission speed can be strapped by the customer engineer for
Start/Stop operation up to 1200 bps and for BSC or SDLC operation at 600 or 1200 bps. Selection of two or four wire operation is
made at installation time. Maximum: Eight. Field Installation: Yes.
Specify: SOLe and/or BSC and/or Start/Stop operations are
possible ... see Table 4· for Line Position Code and Transmission
Mode Codes. Prerequisite: Communications Adapter, Base
(#1601), and Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked Modems
(#4696). Cable Order: Required for attachment to external equipment.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED WITH AUTO ANSWER (#47822). This feature may be intermixed with other line
features. Each feature provides for the attachment of one
switched network Start/Stop line via an integrated modem at
speeds up to 300 bps and for BSC or SDLC operation at 600 and
1200 bps. Attachment to the switched network is via an IBM
provided cable to a Data Access Arrangement type CBS or FCC
registered equivalent. Maximum: Eight. Field Installation: Yes.
Specify: SDLC and/or BSC and/or Start/Stop operations are
possible ... see Table 4 for Line Position Code and Transmission
Mode Codes. Prerequisite: Communications Adapter, Base
(#1601), and Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked Modems
(#4696). Cable Order: Required for attachment to external equipment.
1200, BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON SWITCHED WITH
SWITCHED NETWORK BACKUP AND MANUAL ANSWER
(#4787').
This feature may be intermixed with other line features. Each feature provides for the attachment of one nonswitched line with Switched Network Backup (SNBU) and manual
answer, allowing BSC, Start/Stop or SDLC operations via an
integrated 1200 bps modem. The transmission speed can be
strapped by the customer engineer for Start/Stop operation up to
1 200 bps and for BSC or SDLC operation at 600 or 1200 bps.
Attachment to the non-switched line is via an IBM provided cable
to the common carrier communication line via appropriate Data
Access Arrangement. Selection of two or four wire line operation
is made at installation time. The cable group which is ordered also
provides for attachment to a Data Access Arrangement type COT
or FCC registered equivalent for manual answer. Maximum: Eight.
Field Installation: Yes. Specify: SDLC and/or BSC and/or
Start/Stop operations are possible ... see Table 4 for Line Position
Code and Transmission Mode Codes. Prerequisites: Communications Adapter, Base (#1601), and Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked Modems (#4696). Cable Order: Required for one cable
group which connects to non-switched line and to the switched
network.
1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, NON-SWITCHED WITH
SWITCHED NETWORK BACKUP AND AUTO ANSWER (#4788').
This feature may be intermixed with other line features. Each
feature provides for the attachment of one non-switched line with
Switched Network Backup (SNBUl and auto answer, allowing BSC,
Start/Stop or SDLC operations via an integrated 1200 bps modem. The transmission speed can be strapped by the customer
engineer for Start/Stop operation up to 1200 bps and for BSC or
SDLC operation at 600 or 1200 bps. Attachment to the nonswitched line is 'via an IBM provided cable to the common carrier
communication line via an appropriate Data Access Arrangement.
The same cable group provides for attachment of the switched
network to a Data Access Arrangement type CBS or FCC registered equivalent for auto answer. Maximum: Eight. Field
Installation: Yes. Specify: SDLC and/or BSC and/or Start/Stop
operations are possible ... see Table 4 for Line Position Code and
Transmission Mode Codes. Prerequisites: Communications Adapter, Base (# 1 601), and Line Attachment Base for Nonclocked
Modems (#4696). Cable Order: Required for one cable group
which connects to the non-switched line and to the switched
network.
LOCAL ATTACHMENT INTERFACE (#4801'). Provides circuits
and controls for the local attachment of one BSC or SDLC remote
station to the Communications Adapter without the use of modems
at either device. Transmission speed can be strapped at installation time by the customer engineer at 1200, 2400, 4800 and 9600
bps. The feature provides clocking for both the Communications
Adapter and the terminal. The attached terminal must be equipped
with an EIA RS 232C or CCITT V24/V28 interface, have no Business Machine Clocking and have an external modem cable. The
distance to the terminal may be extended via a customer provided
cable to allow a maximum distance between Communications
Adapter and terminal of:
800 meters at 1 200 bps
400 meters at 2400 bps
200 meters at 4800 bps
100 meters at 9600 bps
The feature includes cables to attach the Communications Adapter
to a customer-provided terminal plate and from the terminal plate
to the DTE external modem cable. Maximum: Eight. Field
Installation: Yes. Specify: SDLC and/or BSC operations are
possible ... see Table 4 for Transmission Mode and Line Position
Codes. Prerequisite: Communications Adapter, Base (#1601),
and Line Attachment Base for Clocked Modems (#4695). Cable
Order: Required for attachment to terminal plate.
DIGITAL DATA SERVICE ADAPTER (#565Q2). Provides circuits
and controls for attachment of one BSC or SDLC line and includes
an internal Dataphone Digital Service (DDS) Adapter. The adapter
allows interface of American Telephone and Telegraph Private Line
DDS Network via the American Telephone and Telegraph Channel
Service Unit. The Digital Data Service Adapter will operate at
synchronous speeds of 2400, 4800, 9600 and 56,000 bps. The
speed must be set to the speed specified in the customer's order
for service to the common carrier at installation time. These line
features can be associated with each line position if the line speed
does not exceed 9600 bps. Maximum: Eight. Field Installation:
Yes. limitations: If feature #5650 is installed with a speed of
56,000 bps (#9444), then: (1) High Speed Modem Adapter
(#4720) cannot be installed ... (2) 231 X DASD attached to the
alock Multiplexer Channel (#1421) cannot be installed ... (3)
3370 DASD attached (#9201) to the DASD Adapter (#3201)
cannot be installed. Specify: #9444' for operation at 56,000 bps
... SDLC and/or BSC operations are possible .. , see Table 4 for
Line Position Code, Transmission Mode Code, and line speed
selection codes. Prerequisites: Communications Adapter, Base
(#1601), and Line Attachment Base for Clocked Modems
(#4695). Cable Order: Required for attachment to external equipment.
, System Diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on
purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on the same diskette.
2 Feature supplies diskette for System Diskette facility.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
..~
M 4331.9
Jul 79
OP Machines
4331 Processor
(cont'd)
TABLE 4
COMMUNICATIONS ADAPTER CONFIGURATION FEATURE AND
POSITION CODES
Rcq'd
Line
lure # Attach
Base
#'
Line Position with Line Position Codes
Fea-
,
I'
2'
3'
4'
5'
6'
7'
8'
EIA/CCITT Interface (for
Clocked Modemsl161
3701
4695
9531
9532
9533
9534
9535
9536
9537
9538
EIA/CCITT Interface (for DODolocked Modemal161
3701
4696
9521
9522
9523
9524
9525
9526
9527
9528
High Speed Modem AdaDter (7)
4720
4695
9501
4788
4696
9641
9642
9643
9644
9645
9646
9647
9648
1200 bps Intearated Modems:
Nonswitchcd
with Switched
Network Backup
and Auto Ans
NODswitcbed
4696
9631
9632
9633
9634
9635
9636
9637
9638
and Manual Ans
Switohed with
Nonswitcbcd
Digital Data
Service Adptr •
for 2400. 4800.
9600 bps
for 56.000 bps
7 8
Local Attach In-
terface
Autocall Unit
Interface (3)
First
Second
Transmission
Mode (5)
BSC (1)
Start/Stop (2)
SDLC (Ii
MRC
MLC
2 yr
Purch
Adapter Power Prereq
#1001 $ 71 $60 $2,400
Adapter Logic Prereq
1002
129 110 4.400
Blk Multiplexer Channel
1421
129 110 4,400
Control Store Expansion
1901
150 128 5,100
Display /Printer
Adapter Expansion
32
27
1,215
2001'
DASD Adapter
3201' 106
90 3,600
Diskette Drive
103
3401
88 3,520
8
External Signals
3898
9
300
5424 Adapter
3901' 194 165 6,600
1401/1440/1460 Com pat 3950- N/C N/C
N/C
8809 Mag Tape Unit Adptr 4910' 106
90 3,600
Byte Multiplexer Channel
5248
103
88 3,520
Power Interface
5531
65
55 2,200
Power Interface, Add'i
33
28 1,100
5532
Printer-Keyboard Mode
5550- N/C N/C
N/C
6305- N/C N/C
System/3 Data Import
N/C
3340 Direct Attachment
7851- N/C N/C
N/C
2311/2314/2319/3310 Direct
Access Storage Com pat
7901' N/C N/C
N/C
8701- N/C N/C
ECPS:VM/370
N/C
MMMC/
AMMCR
$ 7.00
12.00
1.50
34.50
1.50
3.50
18.50
.50
8.50
N/C
3.50
1.50
1.00
1.00
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
Communications
with Switched
4787
Network Baokup
Auto ADs
Special Feature Prices:
4782
4696
9651
9652
9653
9654
9655
9656
9657
9658
4781
4696
9661
9662
9663
9664
9665
9666
9667
9668
5650
4695
9471
9472
9473
9474
9475
9476
9477
9478
9444
4801
4695
9451
9452
9453
9454
9455
9456
9457
9458
9541
9551
9542
9552
9543
9553
9544
9554
9545
9555
9546
9556
9547
9557
9548
9558
9671
9681
9691
9672
9682
9692
9673
9683
9693
9674
9684
9694
9675
9685
9695
9676
9686
9696
9677
9687
9697
9678
9688
9698
1020
NOTES:
(1) BSC or SOLC transmission mode with any line attachment
feature.
(2) Start/Stop transmission mode only with EIA/CCITT Interface
(for nonclocked modem. #3701 and prerequisite #4696) or
with any other features offering 1 200 bps Integrated Modems
(with prerequisite # 4696).
(3) Must be associated with EIA/CCITT Interface (#3701 and
prerequisite #4695 or #4696). Maximum of two features
(#1020) may be installed.
Autocall Unit Interface
1020'
Comm Adapter, Base
1601'
EIA/CCITT Interface
3701'
Line Attach Base
for Clocked Modems
4695'
for Nonclocked Modems 4696'
HI Speed Modem Adapter 4720'
1200 bps Integrated Modem
Non-Switched
4781'
Switched w Auto Ans
4782'
Non-Switch w Switch Network
Backup and Manual Ans 4787'
Non-Switch w Switch Network
Backup and Auto Ans
4788'
Local Attachment Interface 4801'
Dgtl Data Service Adapter 5650'
13
90
13
77
11
11
440
3,080
440
2.00
1.50
2.00
13
15
35
11
13
30
440
520
1,320
.50
.50
2.00
19
25
16
21
668
860
3.50
3.50
26
22
910
3.50
29
29
24
25
25
20
1,015
1,100
840
4.00
3.00
2.50
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with the 4331. order the feature number
indicated below at the price listed in the M 10000 pages. See the
M10000 pages for additional information and field installation.
CONSOLE TABLE, 4300 PROCESSORS (#1550). Provides a
convenient work station table to support one or two 3278 mdl
2As. Specify: Color -- #9161 for willow green. #9162 for
garnet rose. #9163 for sunrise yellow. #9164 for classic blue.
#9165 for charcoal brown. or #9166 for pebble gray.
BOOK RACK AND CABLE HOLDER (#1480).
(5) Only two Transmission Modes may be installed on a system.
The aggregate data rate of the Communications Adapter is
64.000 bps. Line features exceeding this aggregate may be
installed. but not operated concurrently. To allow the aggregate of 64.000 bps to be achieved. the highest speed line must
be installed in line position one. the next highest in line position two. etc. Each transmission mode installed has different
requirements for microcode storage ... see Table 1 for microcode storage requirements and possible requirement for Control Storage Expansion (#1901).
(7) May not be installed when 231 X OASO is attached to the Block
Multiplexer Channel (#1421). or when 3370 DASD is attached
(#9201) to the DASO Adapter (#3201).
(8) When changing #9444 to/from #9471. no new hardware or
diskette is required.
[reverse side is blank]
, System Diskette-only specify feature. No fee when ordered at time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on
purchased machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on the same diskette.
2 Feature supplies diskette for System Diskette facility.
3 System Diskette-only special feature.
No fee when ordered at time of
manufacture or with chargeable feature that supplies diskette. $405 on
purchase machines to include any number of diskette-only changes ordered
on the same diskette.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
/fi)"
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------------
- =':' =
=- =-
M 4341.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 4341 PROCESSOR
Purpose: Provides power, control, logic, and memory circuitry for
the arithmetic, logic and processor storage functions of the 4341
Processor.
Model
Kl
Ll
Bytes of Processor Storage
2,097,152
4,194,304
Note: ThlJ microcode which controls system operations resides
in Reloadable Control Storage and keeps dynamic tables in
Processor' Storage, thus reducing the amount of Processor
Storage available for user programming. Storage available to
the user is reduced by a minimum of 14K bytes up to a maximum of 108K bytes, depending on the processor configuration.
See "Microcode Storage Requirements" below for details.
Highlights: Depending upon the model, has 2,097,152 bytes or
4,194,304 bytes of monolithic processor storage ... 150 to 300
nanosecond processor cycle ... eight byte parallel data flow within
the processor as well as an eight byte wide data flow between the
processor, the storage and the channels ... includes 8,192. bytes
of buffer storage which is transparent to the program and significantly reduces the effective access time of storage ... buffer storage does not increase the amount of addressable storage ...
balanced performance of decimal, commercial, and scientific
instructions ... extensive data checking, error recording by the
hardware system itself, and remote maintenance are coupled with
increased availability and serviceability.
for FE diagnostics, basic systems features, plus the optional features ordered for the system. The System Diskette File also allows
recording of system failure data for later CE diagnostics.
Console Function: A 3278 Display Console model 2A equipped
with an operator keyboard with an' operator control panel is required. It is the principal device provided for the operator to
communicate with the system. The operator may use the keyboard
and the display to control the system operation as well as to
display the status of the system. The primary operator console
keyboard includes the operator control panel. The 3278 model 2A
has a screen size of 1920 characters, 24 lines at 80 characters
per line. The bottom four lines (lines 21-24) are reserved for
system status information and are not accessible to the user.
3278 features other than those basic to the primary console.
display /keyboard are not supported. Up to three optional (for a
total of four) 3278 Display Console mdl 2As or 3287 Printer mdl
1s or 2s for hard copy output are also available in any combination.
Two console modes are available Keyboard Mode.
Display Mode and Printer-
In Display Mode, the keyboard is used for input, the display
with 20 lines of 80 characters/line for output, and DOS/VSE,
DOS/VS Release 34, OS/VSl Release 7 or VM/370 Release 6
support is required. The optional 3287 Printer mdl 1 or 2 has a
separate address.
In Printer-Keyboard Mode, the 3278 Display Console mdl 2A
uses the keyboard for input and the display and a recommended 3287 Printer mdl 1 or 2 for output. The display/keyboard
and 3287 Printer appear to the system as a Console PrinterKeyboard. This allows the 4341 Processor user to run an operating system which has been generated for use on a S/360
WIth a 1052 Printer-Keyboard or a S/370 with a 3210 or 3215
Console Printer-Keyboard.
Standard Features: Include the following: Virtual Storage Capability by Dynamic Address Translation ... one Byte and two Block
Multiplexer Channels ... one Level Addressing Facility for improved
virtual storage control by DOS/VSE (ECPS:VSE Mode) ... Channels with Virtual Storage Addressing (ECPS:VSE Mode) ... Channel
Indirect Addressing in S/370 Mode ... Channel Command Retry ...
128 to 1 024 UCWs ... EC and BC Modes ... Byte Oriented Operands ... Clock Comparator and CPU Timer ... Control Registers ...
Error Checking and Correction in Processor Storage .. , Extended
Control-Program Support ... Extended Precision Floating Point ."
Interval Timer ... Machine Check Handling ... Support Processor
... Instruction Retry ... Program Event Recording ... Reloadable
Control Storage ... Storage Protection (Store and Fetch) ... S/370
Universal Instruction Set ... System Diskette Drive ... Time of Day
Clock ... PSW Key Handling ... Compare and Swap and Compare
Double and Swap ... Clear I/O .. , External Signal ... Unit Power-off
... Move Inverse Instruction (not software supported).
Channels: Six channels in two groups are available. The standard
group consists of 1 byte multiplexer channel and 2 block multiplexer channels with a block transfer rate of up to 2.0 million
bytes per second for each channel. The second group, available
as a special feature, consists of 3 block multiplexer channels.
Single channel block transfer rate of up to 2.0 million bytes per
second is available on each of two of the three optional channels
and 1.0 million bytes per second on the other.
Modes of Operation: Two modes of operation are available. The
mode is selected from a common diskette at Initial Microcode
Load (IML) time.
The capability for the attachment and automatic I/O power sequencing of up to 24 separate control units is standard. Optionally, 48 control units can be accommodated .. , see "Special Features."
ECPS:VSE Mode - allows operation of an appropriately
generated DOS/VSE system, offering enhanced systems
performance.
System/370 Mode -- allows operation of any program written for S/370 and S/360 that does not violate the exceptions noted under "Compatibility" below. See the Programming Support Section for those SCPs which contain 4341
support. In this mode, two performance options are available. These options are selected at IML time and are mutually exclusive.
ECPS:VS1 - hardware assist that reduces the CPU time
needed to execute certain frequently used supervisor functions in OS/VS1 Release 7. The functional areas assisted
include:
105
SVC FLiH
System Trace
Page Management
The aggregate data rate of the two standard block multiplexer
channels is 4 megabytes/second. The aggregate data rate of the
five block multiplexer channels including the optional group is 9
megabytes/ second .
An optional channel-to-channel adapter is also available ... see
"Special Features,"
Compatibility: Any program written for S/370 will operate on the
4341 in S/370 Mode, provided that it (1) is not time-dependent,
(2) does not depend on system facilities (storage size, I/O equipment, optional features, etc.) being present when the facilities are
not included in the configuration, (3) does not depend on system
facilities (interruptions, operation codes, etc.) being absent when
the facilities are included in the 4341, and (4) does not depend on
results or functions which are defined in the Principles of Operation to be unpredictable or model-dependent.
Any program written for 5/360 will operate on the 4341 Processor
in 5/370 mode, provided that it follows the above rules and does
not depend on functions that differ between S/360 and 5/370.
Any program written for the 4331 Processor in ECPS:VSE Mode
or S/370 Mode will operate on a 4341 Processor, provided that it
follows the above rules.
ECPS:VM/370 - hardware assist that reduces the CPU
time needed to execute certain frequently used supervisor
functions in VM/370 Release 6. The functional areas
sssisted include:
Virtual Machine I/O
Storage Management
SVC Handler
Privileged Instruction Emulation
Dispatching
Virtual Interval Timer
For more details, see 5/370 Principles of Operation, GA22-7000,
or 4300 Processors Principles of Operations for ECP5:V5E Mode,
GA22-7070.
Microcode Storage Requirements: The microcode which controls
system operations reSides in Reloadable Control Storage and
keeps dynamic tables in Processor Storage, thus reducing the
amount of Processor Storage available for user programming. The
amount required is the sum of Processor Storage required by two
user selectable options: 1) The number of Unit Control Words
(UCWs) selected, and 2) the mode of operation.
The 4341 Processor provides ECPS:VM/370 Support at Level 19.
This support is compatibie with VM/370 Reiease 6 and the corresponding levels of the systems extension program products. This
level is also compatible with the VM/370 Release 5 PLC that
provides 4341 support.
1. 128 UCWs are basic on the 4341 and require 8,192 bytes of
Processor Storage. Additional UCWs are allocated as required
in groups of 32, each group requiring an additional 2,048
bytes of Processor Storage. The maximum number of UCWs
on the 4341 is 1024.
System Diskette Drive: This is the basic microcode loading device for the system. The several removable diskettes that will be
supplied with the system will contain all of the required microcode
UCW assignment is user dependent. It is the customer's
responsibility to designate desired I/O addresses and configurations to service personnel. Channel configurations should be
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -------=::..:=~=
M 4341.2
Jul79
DP Machines
4341 Procesaor (cont'd)
reviewed during pre-installation planning for new systems and
when additional I/O devices are attached or existing equipment is reconfigured.
For specific
"Systems."
device
requirements,
see
4300
Processors
in
2. Depending on which mode of operation is selected at IML
time, processor storage will be required as follows:
Bytes of Processor Storage Required
Mode of Operation
Model K1
ECPS:VSE Mode
System/370 Mode
43,008
6,144
Model L1
45,056
6,144
Prerequisite: Each 4341 Processor requires one 3276 Display
Console model 2A equipped with a keyboard with an operator
control panel ... see "Special Features" under 3278 mdl 2A.
Minimum Configuration: See Minimum Configurations under 4300
Processors in "Systems."
Bibliography: To be announced.
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wlre, 60 Hz): #9903 for 206 V, or
#9915 for 240 V.
•
Shipping Instructions: Unless othorwise specified, shipping
dimensions of the 4341 are 62-3/4" x 32" x 39-1/2". If a
reduction In dimensions is required, specify #9570. Shipping
dimensions will then be 60" x 29-1/2" x 36-1/2".
•
Cabling: See 3278 mdl 2A for console cabling.
•
Color: #9060 for willow green, #9061 for garnet rose, #9062
for sunrise yellow, #9063 for classic blue, #9064 for charcoal
brown, or #9065 for pebble gray. Note: #9061, #9062 and.
#9063 are Slightly different colors from those available on
previous machines.
•
Minimum System: See"Minimum Configurations" under 4341
in "Systems" for minimum I/O units required for the 4341
Processor.
•
Remote Support FaCility: The Remote Support Facility (RSF) is
a customer option. It is recommended to enhance the hardware
maintenance of the 4341 Processor. It provides service personnel the capability of remotely controlling the 4341 from any
RETAIN terminal and allows the IBM CE to access the RETAIN
Data Bank for the latest service aids and Information from the
cU'Itomer site. When this option is selected, the customer must
provide the telephone lines required for the RSF modem. The
customer must also arrange for the connection of the telephone
Interface cable provided by IBM to the telephone network. For
details on customer responsibilities, see 4300 Processors
Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA24-3667.
SPECIAL FEATURES
CHANNEL-TO-CHANNEL ADAPTER (#1850). To interconnect two
channels (4341 Processor, S/360, S/370). Only one of the processors requires this feature. Requires one control unit position on
each of the connected channels. Maximum: One. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: 75 Key Operator Console Keyboard with Channel-to-Channel (#4631) on the primary 3276
Display Console mdl 2A ... a control unit position on a block
multiplexer channel.
BLOCK MULTIPLEXER CHANNELS, ADD'L (#1870). An optional
group of three block multiplexer channels ... permits simultaneous
operation of high speed devices at a data rate of 2.0 MB/second
for two channels and 1.0 MB/second for one channel. Maximum:
One. Field Installation: Yes.
CHANNEL CONTROL UNIT POSITIONS, ADD'L (#1890). This
feature is required for the automatic I/O power sequencing of
more than 24 control units from the 4341. Standard on the 4341
is the capability to attach and automatically power up 24 control
units, not to exceed eight per channel. With this feature, 25 to 48
control units, not to exceed 8 per channel, may be attached and
automatically powered up. Maximum: One. Prerequisite: Block
Multiplexer channels, Add'i (#1670). Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Chnl-to-chnl Adapter #1850
Block Multiplexer
Channels, Add'i
1870
Channel Control
Unit POSitions, Add'i 1890
MRC
$617 $525
404
16,150
5.00
63
2,500
8.50
ACCESSORIES: The following items are available on a purchase
only basis. For shipment with the 4341, order the feature number
indicated below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See the M
10000 pages for additional information and field installation.
Console Table, 4300 Processors (#1550), Provides a
convenient work station table to support one or two
3278 mdl 2As. Specify: Color ... #9161 for willow
green, #9162 for garnet rose, #9163 for sunrise yellow, #9164 for classic blue, #9165 for charcoal
brown, or #9166 for pebble gray.
Book Rack and Cable Holder, 4300 Processors
(#1480).
#9701 - This processor is planned to be host/peer connected to a system within the same branch office territory
(at installation or at a future time).
#9702 - This processor Is plsnned to be host/peer connected to a system in a different branch office territory (at
installation or at a future time).
#9703 - This processor is planned to be a standalone (no
host/peer connect).
4341
Mdl
MAC
MLC
2 Yr
K1
L1
$7,021
7,902
5,975
6,725
Purchase
$245,000
275,000
$21,000 $23.50
74
Syetem Environment: For record purposes specify one of the
following codes (reference only, no parts required):
Prlc..:
MMMC/
Purchaaa AMMCR
475
If RSF is desired, specify #9510.
•
MLC
2 Yr
MMMC/
AMMCR
$475
515
Plan Offering: Plan 0
Warranty: A
Machine Group: 0
Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 60%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Initial Period of Maintenance Service Availability: 3 mos.
Model Changes: Field installable.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICE (There are no additional
Installation charges)
Model K1 to Model L 1 ••• $30,000
Not to be reproduced without written permission ..
-- -----
- - - ----===
':' =
M 5010.1
May 79
DP Machines
IBM 5010 PROCESSOR MODULE
PRICES:
5010
Purpose: Provides the arithmetic, logic and control functions for
System/7.
Models:
Storage
(words)
Stand-Alone 1130 Attach
Models
Models
2,048
4,096
6,144
8,192
10,240
12,288
14,336
16,384
16,384
20,480
24,576
28,672
32,768
36,864
40,960
45,056
49,152
53,248
57,344
61,440
65,536
A2
A4
A6
A8
'A10
'A12
*A14
'A16
E16
E20
E24
E28
E32
E36
E40
E44
E48
E52
E56
E60
E64
B2
B4
B6
B8
'B10
'B12
*B14
'B16
• Requires #7401 in 5026.
Highlights: Uses binary arithmetic, fixed word length of 16 data
bits plus 2 parity bits. Storage cycle time is 400 nanoseconds.
Instructions are one or two words in length with full 'storage addressing.
Standard features include 64 priority interrupts, including 4 interrupt levels with 16 sublevels, 7 index registers, one accumulator,
and one instruction address register per interrupt level, two interval timers, and an interface for the 5028 Operator Station.
The 5010 Processor Module includes a READ ONLY Tape Cassette Recorder attachment and associated connection cable (P /N
2703633). The attachment provides the capability to IPL and
program load either FE Diagnostic Programs or the Disk Support
System (DSS/7) (5707-SC2) from a tape cassette recorder
(Norelco Model 1420 or equivalent). See Customer Responsibilities
for System/7 in the" Systems" section.
The A 'and E models have an Aysnchronous or Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter as an optional feature. This circuitry provides the capability for initial program load of the System/7
from a remote system with no resident program in the System/7.
The B models have an interface for connection to an 1130 System
as a standard feature.
PREREQUISITES: The first module location in the 5026 Enclosure
mdl A2, C3 or C6. A and B models with more than 8K of storage
require Storage Power Addition (#7401) in the 5026 Enclosure ...
see 5026. #7401 is not required for E models. For E models
replacing installed A or B models, or vice versa, an MES (lease) or
RPQ (purchase) must be ordered for the proper 5026 Power
Specify Code ... see 5026. The B models require a Storage Access Channel (#7490) on the 1131 or a Storage Access Channel
II (# 7492) on an 1133. Limitation: Program preparation on configurations with 2K storage are not supported by IBM supplied
programming.
Customer Responsibilities: See System/7 in "Systems."
System/7 Summary:
GA34-0002
Specify: [1] For the location of the Modules in the system, specify
one of the following:
#9141 - location of all I/O Modules to be determined at the
plant. (Specify Code #9143 In I/O Modules cannot be
used.)
#9142 - location of all I/O Modules are specified by the
customer. Specify Code #9143 must be used in each I/O
Module order.
#9144 - for shipment without mounting in an enclosure.
[2] System Control Programs must be ordered prior to Order
Confirmation (OC) Time.
[3] Cables: Use cable order form number Z120-2368.
[4] For identification of major application, specify #9XXX on all
models. See Special Features for identifier code. No charge
feature.
Mdl
A2
A4
A6
A8
A10
A12
A14
A16
B2
B4
B6
B8
B10
B12
B14
B16
E16
E20
E24
E28
E32
E36
E40
E44
E48
E52
E56
E60
E64
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$
$ 5,310
$ 49.00
7,595
9,865
12,190
14,460
16,780
19,050
21,370
7,780
10,050
12,380
14,640
16,970
19,230
21,560
23,820
22,580
25,710
28,770
31,830
34,890
37,950
41,070
44,130
47,190
50,250
53,310
56,430
59,490
61.00
73.00
84.50
96.50
108.00
120.00
132.00
58.00
70.00
81.00
92.50
104.00
117.00
129.00
140.00
242.00
275.00
306.00
339.00
371.00
404.00
437.00
468.00
501.00
533.00
566.00
599.00
631.00
237
375
511
649
785
920
1,055
1,185
367
504
640
779
914
1,050
1,180
1,310
1,200
1,385
1,550
1,720
1,905
2,080
2,245
2,430
2,605
2,785
2,960
3,130
3,305
Plan Offering: Plan B Warranty: A
Purchase Option: 60% Useful Life Category: 2
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 2
Model Changes: Changes within A mdls, B mdls or E mdls are
field install able. REPLACEMENT of A or B mdls with E mdls requires a 5026
to remove code #7401 or #9490 on both
and add code #9491 (see 5026). CHANGE from A or B mdl to E
mdl (and vice versa) within a 5010 cannot be field installed.
Changes from A mdl to B mdl (and vice versa) are not recommended for field installation.
STORAGE UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES: Upgrade price equals
the difference in purchase price between the two models. There
are no additonal installation charges.
SPECIAL FEATURES
CYCLE STEAL BASIC (#2662). Provides a path between 5010
main storage for the 5022 Disk Storage Module, equipped with
companion cycle steal attachment, Disk Cycle Steal (#2664).
Maximum: One per 5010. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Model A4 or larger, Model B4 or larger, or Model E16 or larger.
Required for 5998-T01, 3340 Attachment.
5024 ATTACHMENT FEATURE (#4115). [Mdl E only] Provides
a path between 5010 mdl E main storage for the 5024 I/O Attachment to Enclosure. Maximum: One per 5010 mdl E. Field
Installation: Yes. Limitation: Cannot be installed with IBM 1200
bps Integrated Modem (#.5500 or #5501) or with System
360/370 Channel Attach (RPQ
). Other 5010 mdl E RPQs
must be submitted for review.
ASYNCHRONOUS
COMMUNICATIONS
CONTROL
(#1610).
[Mdls A and E only] Provides control circuits for one asynchronous communications line adapter. #1610 is used for communications with S/360 and S/370 (via 2701, 2702, 2703, 3704 or
3705), or for communications with 4300 Processors (via a 2701,
3704, or 3705 to all 4300 Processors, or via the Communications
Adapter feature on the 4331) ... see 2701, 3704/3705, 4331 and
4341 in "Machines" for details and prerequisites. Note: See 3704
and 3705 Machines and Programming sales manual pages for
attachment capability and refer to Host System Programming
pages for possible restrictions to any of the above attachments.)
S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135, 135-3 and 138 with Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640), and with the 1800 System (via RPQ
C08763). Data transmission is serial by bit using start/stop method of character and bit synchronization. The IBM PTTC/EBCD
code is used. POint-to-point or multidrop transmission at speeds of
134;5 or 600 bps (14.8 or 66.7 characters per second) are available. Speed changes can be made in the field. Line control characters are identical to 2740 mdl 1. Line control characters are
used in a manner similiar to 2740 mdl 1, with error checking. See
IBM System/7 Functional Characteristics, GA34-0003, for exact
description of use. Communication Control provides the capability
to load a program from the communication network into System/7
with no resident program in System/7 (remote IPL). For information on communications facilities, see M 2700 pages. Maximum:
One #1610 per system. Limitation: Cannot be installed with
Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074). Field
Installation: Yes.
COMMON CARRIER ADAPTER (#2165).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[Mdls A and E only]
-------- --- - - --- - =----==
':' =
M 5010.2
May 79
DP Machines
5010 Processor Module (cont'd)
Provides interface to an external modem meeting EIA standard
RS-232-C. The interface lines provided are Transmitted Data,
Received Data, Request to Send, Clear to Send, Data Set Ready,
Data Terminal Ready, Signal Ground and Protective Ground.
Limitation: Cannot be used with Line Adapter (#4750, 4751 or
4752). Maximum: One per #1610. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Asynchronous Communications Control (#1610).
LINE ADAPTER, LEASED LINE TYPE 1A (#4751), [Mdls A and
E only] A leased line type 1 A modem for 2-wire unlimited distance use at speeds of 134.5 or 600 bps. Only point-to-point
communications facilities can be used. See Line Adapter Leased
Line Type 1 A in SRL GA24-3435 for specifications and requirements. Limitation: Cannot be used with Line Adapters (#4750 or
#4752) or Common Carrier Adapter (#2165). Maximum: One per
#1610. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Asynchronous Communications Control (#1610).
LINE ADAPTER, LEASED LINE TYPE 1B (#4752). [Mdls A and
E only] A leased line type 1 B modem for 4-wire unlimited distance use at speeds of 134.5 or 600 bps. Point-to-point or multipoint communications facilities can be used. See Line Adapter
Leased Line Type 1 B in SRL GA24-3435 for specifications and
requirements. Limitation: Cannot be used with Line Adapters
(#4750 or #4751) or Common Carrier Adapter (#2165).
Maximum: One per # 161 O. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Asynchronous Communications Control (#1610).
LINE ADAPTER, LIMITED DISTANCE. TYPE 2B (#4750). [Mdls A
and E only] A limited distance type 2B modem for 2-wire use up
to 8.25 wire-miles at speeds of 134.5 or 600 bps. Point-to-point
or multipoint communications facilities can be used. See Line
Adapter Limited Distance Type 2B in SRL GA24-3435 for specifications and requirements. Limitation: Cannot be used with Line
Adapters (#4751 or #4752) or Common Carrier Adapter (#2165).
Maximum: One per #1610. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Asynchronous Communications Control (# 1610).
t BINARY SYNCHRONOUS COMMUNICATIONS CONTROL (BSCA)
(#2074), [Mdls A and E only] Provides circuitry for one binary
synchronous communications adapter. This feature is used for
communications with S/370, a Communications Adapter on a
4331 Processor, another System/7 with BSCA (#2704), a
System/3 mdl 6, 8, 10, 12 or 15 with BSCA, a System/32 with
BSCA (#2074) (switched or non-switched point-to-point only), a
System/34 with Communications Adapter (switched or nonswitched point-to-point only), a System/3 mdl B, 10, 12 or 15 with
BSCA and EIA Local Attachment (#3601, 3602), a System/3 mdl
6, 10 or 15 with Local Communications Adapter (LCA) (#4765), a
System/3 mdl 8 or 12 with Integrated Communications Adapter
(ICA) (#4645) or ICA-Local Interface, or a System/3 mdl 8 with
ICA or BSCA. Data transmission is half duplex over 2- or 4-wire
circuits using binary synchronous line control. Data transfer on
point-to-point (switched or non-switched) and multipoint configurations is supported. In multipoint configurations, System/7 operates
as a tributary station. On point-to-point networks System/7 functions as a processor terminal. Transmission codes supported are
EBCDIC and ASCII, software controlled. Transparent mode is
standard In the BSCA, but allowed only in EBCDIC. Control circuitry provides the capability for IPL of the System/7 from a remote
system. IPL can be accomplished on point-to-point switched and
multipoint configurations and requires the use of transparent
EBCDIC transmission code.
Local Attachment to System/3 -- Point-Io-point Non-Switched
Communication is also provided with the System/3 BSCA-EIALOCAL, LCA, or ICA-LOCAl.
SYSTEM/3
Model
LCA (#4765)
Speed (bps)
BSCA-EIA-LOCAL
(#3601,3602)
Speed (bps)
ICA (#4645)
Speed (bps)
6
8
10
12
15
2400
N/A
2400
N/A
2400
N/A
2400,
2400,
2400,
2400,
N/A
2400, BOOO
N/A
2400,8000
N/A
4BOO,
4800,
4800,
4800,
BOOO
BOOO
BOOO
8000
For local attachment to a System/3 BSCA-EIA-LOCAL, ICALOCAL, or LCA, an approriate cable order is required. Installation
Manual - Physical Planning, GA34-0004, includes cable description and ordering information.
limitations: Cannot be installed with Asynchronous Communications Control (#1610); support as a multipoint central system is
not provided. Maximum: One #2074 per system.
Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: 5010 mdl A6 or larger or mdl E16
or larger.
INTERNAL CLOCK (#4703).
[Mdls A and E only] Provides
BSCA clocking when modems do not provide clock pulses. Speed
options are 1200, 2000 and 2400 bps which are hardware selectable.Maximum: One per #2074. Limitation: Not available with
Line Interface Type 1 G (#4805). Do not use if System/7 is to
interface to a System/3 mdl 8, 10, 12 or 15 BElCA-EIA-LOCAL
Attachment (#3601,3602) or a System/3 mdl6, '10 or 15 Local
Communications Adapter (LCA) (#4765), or a System/3 mdl 8 or
12 Integrated Communications Adapter (lCA) (#4645). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: BSCA (#2074).
LINE INTERFACE TYPE 10 (#4800). [Mdls A and E only] Provides a low and medium speed interface to permit operation with
external modems that comply with the EIA RS-232-C standard and
with System/3 mdl 8, 10, 12, 15 with BSCA and EIA Local Attachment (#3601, 3602), or a System/3 mdl 6, 10 or 15 with Local
Communications Adapter (LCA) (#4765), or System/3 mdl 8 or 12
with Integrated Communications Adapter (ICA) (#4645). Modems
of this type operate on switched or non-switched facilities up to
2400 bps and over non-switched facilities at up to 7200 bps.
Auto-answer capability is supported. Maximum: One per #2074.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with Line Interface Type 1 G
(#4805) or IBM 1200 BPS Integrated Modem (#5500, 5501).
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: BSCA (#2074).
LINE INTERFACE TYPE 1G (#4805). [Mdls A and E operating
up to 50.0K bps max.] Provides a high speed interface for standalone modems operating on a wide band interface. Modems of
this type operate at speeds of 10,000 bps and higher only on
non-switched lines. Maximum: One per #2074. Limitations:
Cannot be installed with #4800, #5500, #5501; Internal Clock
(#4703) is not available with this feature; Will not interface to
S/370 mdl 135, 135-3 or 138 Integrated Communications Adapter
(#4640), or Communications Adapter feature on a 4331. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: BSCA (#2074).
IBM 1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, LEASED (#5500). [Mdls
A and E only] Provides one IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem
which is suitable for communications over facility 03 with another
IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem. Maximum: One per #2074.
Limitations: Cannot be installed with #4115, #4800, #4B05 or
#5501; Will not interface to S/370 mdl 135 Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
BSCA (#2074); Internal Clock (#4703). For local attachment to
System/3-BSCA-EIA-Local, ICA-Local, or LCA, an appropriate
cable order is required. Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA34-0004, will be updated to include cable description and order
information.
IBM 1200 BPS INTEGRATED MODEM, SWITCHED (#5501).
[Mdls A and E only] Provides one IBM 1200 bps Integrated
Modem which is suitable for communications over faciilty C4 with
another IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem. This adapter includes
the automatic answer capability. Maximum: One per #2074.
limitations: Cannot be installed with #4115, #4BOO, #4805 or
#5500; Will not interface to S/370 mdl 135 Integrated Communications Adapter (#4640). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
BSCA (#2074); Internal Clock (#4703).
BSCA COMMUNICATIONS FACILITIES
Speed (bps) Facilities BSCA Features
12QO
2000
2400
4BOO
7200
19.2K
40.BK
50.0K
C4,
C5,
C5,
CB,
09
E1
E2
E3
05
06
07
08
4BOO, 5500, 5501,4703
4BOO, 4703
4BOO, 4703
4BOO
4BOO
4B05
4B05
4B05
IBM modems which may be attached to the BSCA are the 3B72,
3874, 3B75. The IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem is available as
feature #5500 or #5501.
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
#2662
4115
$ 55
34
$1,170
844
$ 3.00
4.50
1610
2165
96
10
1,955
261
13.50
2.50
4751
4752
4750
31
31
31
651
651
651
14.50
14.50
14.50
232
24
31
63
4,685
522
651
1,305
58.00
2.50
2.50
.50
16
24
456
608
2.50
3.00
Special Feature Prices:
Cycle Steal BaSic
5024 Attach Feature
Async Commun Control
Common Carrier Adapter
Line Adapter,
Leased Line Type 1 A
Leased Line Type 1 B
Limited Dlst Type 2B
Binary Sync Comm Adapter
2074t
Internal Clock
4703
Line Interface Type 1 D
4800
Line Interface Type, 1 G
4805
IBM 1200 bps Integrated Modem,
Leased
5500
Switched
5501
t No Educational Altowance.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
MMMC
._-- ----=.::..:::,;,=
-- -------
DP Machines
5010 Processor Module (cont'd)
SYSTEM/7 APPLICATION IDENTIFIER CODES
Specify Feature Codes have been added to the 5010 Processor
Unit. These are no-charge features which identify the major application on the system.
SPECIAL FEATURE •••
Processing Unit - major applications on order in the account.
Identifier (#9XXX) (All models).
Code# Feature (Application)
Code# Feature (Application)
9001
9002
9003
9004
9005
9006
9007
9008
9009
9010
9011
9012
9013
9014
9015
Data Collection
Telephone Data Entry
Power Management
Message Switching
Other TP Applications
CAS
Testing/Monitoring
Process Control
Lab. Applications
Stand-alone Scientific
Maritime
TTS/TB
CAM A
ACLR
ACDMS
limitations: Only one feature code per 5010 can be specified.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 5010.3
May 79
M 5012.1
May 79
DP Machines
5012 MULTIFUNCTION MODULE
Purpose: To provide digital input/output, analog input/output, and
2790 control on System/7.
~
~
~
PItEREQUISITE: One module location in a 5026 Enclosure mdl A2,
Q;j, C6, D3 or D6.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Highlights: Provides capability for:
~
5013, 5014 and 5022 in any combination) per system cannot exceed 11.
SPECIFY: [1] For location of the 5012 I/O Module, specify:
#9143 -- also enter the desired module location number, as
shown in the chart on the 5026 page, in the quantity column of
the order form. Specify #9142 in 5010 Processor Module.
#9144 -- for shipment without mounting in an enclosure
(spare).
Attachment of a 2790 Control.
Up to 128 digital input points.
Up to 32 isolated process interrupt points.
Up to 64 digital output points.
Up to 32 differential analog input points.
Up to 2 isolated analog output points.
2790 Control: Provides the required logical interface for attachment of 2790 Data Communication devices to System/7. This
allows System/7 to act as the "system controller" for 2791/2793
Area Stations or 2792 Remote Communication Controller. The 2790
Control allows transmission of data between System/7 and the
2791/2793 Area Stations (and 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units,
and 2798 Guidance Display Units). Transmission rate is approximately 500,000 bits per second (900 characters per second). See
2790 in "Systems." The combined number of 2791/27935 and
2792 mdl 1s on each 5012 or 5013 may not exceed 16. Maximum:
Four 2790 Controls per system, one per 5012 Multifunction Module.
Digital Input -- provides up to 8 groups of 16 digital input points.
Either isolated or non-isolated Digital Input groups are available.
Each digital input point is a voltage or contact sense, 2-terminal
circuit. Each group can be program controlled for latching or nonlatching operation. Anyone of the eight groups may be read under
direct program control. The first two groups of digital inputs may
be converted to process interrupt points through the addition of the
Process Interrupt feature.
P,'ocess Interrupt -- an " interrupt on change" feature is offered
on the first two groups of digital inputs. This feature provides the
capability to compare the input of 16 bit groups against a program
loadable 16 bit register and initiate an interrupt on either an equal
or unequal comparison.
Digital Output -- provides up to four groups of 16 digital output
points. Each digital output point may be set or reset under program
control. Each Digital Output group may be one of the following
circuit types: Low Power, Medium Power, Medium Power NonIsolated, or Contact Output. Low Power output provides switching
with a maximum rating of 6 volts at 4 milliamps. Medium Power
and Medium Power Non-Isolated operate up to 48 volts at 450
milliamps, Contact Output provides a Form A mercury wetted relay
contact rated at 125 V de max or 88 V ac RMS max, 2A ac RMS
max; the product of peak voltage and peak current must not exceed 100 (100 VA max). Digital outputs operate under direct program control. Medium Power and Contact Output points are isolated and may be directly connected to the standard Digital Input
points. This provides the capability for wrap-around testing and
multiplexing of digital and analog inputs with digital output points.
Analog Input -- provides up to eight groups of 8 differential analog input points, A multiplexer connects each point to an analogto-digital converter which is capable of converting voltage signals,
in the range of ± 10 millivolts to ±5.12 volts full scale, intq binary
values of 14 bits plus sign. Either an amplifier with a unit gain or
an automatic multi range amplifier must be selected. The unity gain
or high level amplifier provides a full scale range of ±5.12 volts.
The multirange amplifier provides full scale ranges of ± 10 mv, ±20
mv, ±40 mv, ±80 mv, ±160 mv, ±640 mv, and ±5.12 volts. Analog
input is under direct program control. Immediate and External
Synchronization operations are both available. Two analog scan
rates are provided; #5246 uses a mercury wetted relay multiplexer
operating at a scanning rate of up to 200 points per second. #5248
uses a solid state multiplexer operating at scanning rates up to 20K
points per second, depending on the level of tile input signal and
mode of operation. For thermocouple operations, resistance bulb
thermometer (RBT) termination cards are available to be used for
measurement of the reference junction temperature. Limitations:
All of the 32 analog input points must use the same type of multiplexer in each Multifunction Module. The RBT capability is available
only on the multi range amplifier.
Analog Ouput -- provides one or two isolated analog output voltages. The output signal has a polarized full scale range from 0 to
10.24 volts, with a resolution of 10 bits and an accuracy of
±O. 15 % of full scale. Polarity of the output signal depends on
which side of the isolated output is grounded. Analog Output
operates under direct program control at a rate of 25KC (including
amplifier settling time).
Attachment Accessories -- a customer access area is provided in
the back of every I/O Module. Termination cards and connectors
can be installed in this area to provide for connecting customer
signals to the System /7 I/O interface. For detailed information,
see" Attachment Accessories for System/7" under 5029.
Maximum: The total number of Input/Output Modules (5012,
[2] Customer's signal wires enter through the rear side panels of
the module. Three types of side panels are available: Type 1
provides a slot for cables ... Type 2 has individual holes for
each pair of wires ... Type 3 is a blank panel that can be customized by the customer. Seperate side panels are used for
digital and analog input signal wires. For details, refer to
System/? Installation Manual- Physical Planning, GA34-00Q4.
For Digital Input/Output specify one:
#9501 -- Side Panel Digital Type 1
#9502 -- Side Panle Digital Type 2
#9503 -- Side Panel Digital Type 3
For Analog Input
#9511 -- Side
#9512 -- Side
#9513 -- Side
specify one:
Panel Analog Type 1
Panel Analog Type 2
Panel Analog Type 3
[3] When 2790 Control (#8195) is ordered on 5012 specify: #9444
(Multiloop Device) for each new 5012 in a multipoint system.
Note: When upgrading from a single loop system, #9444 must
be ordered
for the installed 5012 which contains #8195.
(It must also be ordered on MES for any 5013 which has
#8195.)
PRICES:
Mdl
5012
A1
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60%
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
$ 49
$1,170
$11.50
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Maintenance: A
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
2790 CONTROL (#8195). Interface for 2790 Data Communication
devices. For 2790 devices supported by programming, see MSP /7
in "Programming." Limitation: Online diagnostics are available for
maintenace of the 2790 - System/7 and must be implemented on
all systems which include a 2792 or have more than sixteen area
stations ... see page P7.3, System /7 Macro Library / Relocatable.
All 5012 and 5013 modules with 2790 Control (#8195) must reside
within the same 5026 Enclosure. See 2791/2793 Limitations, Loop
Delay (2793 "Machines" page) for special configuring considerations. Maximum: One per 5012, four per System / 7. MSP /7
provides support for a maximum of four 2792 mdl 1 s (up to two
per 2790 Control) or a maximum of sixty-four 2791/2792 mdl
1/2793s (16 per 2790 Control). Prerequisite: Customer signal
connection required ... see 5029. Field Installation: Yes. Market
Support: All bids of System/7 with three or four 2790 controls
must be reviewed by the Boca Raton Sensor Based Marke' Support
Center. This applies to upgraded systems as well as initial orders.
• ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT
ANALOG BASIC (#1221).
Provides the basic analog capability
within the 5012. Maximum: One per 5012. Field Installation:
Yes.
ANALOG OUTPUT CONTROL (#1245). Provides control for one
or two Analog Output Points (#1246). Maximum: One per #1221.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog Basic (#12211.
ANALOG OUTPUT POINT (#1246). Provides a 0 to 10.24 volts
isolated 0\ltput signal. Polarity of the signal depends on the side of
the signal that is grounded. Maximum: Two per #1245.
Prerequisites: Analog Output Control (#1245) and its prerequisite
customer signal connection required, see 5029.
Field
Installation: yes.
ANALOG INPUT CONTROL MOD B (#1232).
Provides control
and analog-to-digital conversion for an amplifier and 8 groups of
mercury-wetted relay multiplexers. Multiplexing is at a maximum
scanning rate of 200 points per second. Limitation: Cannot be
ordered with Analog Input Control Mod C (#1213). Maximum: One
per #1221. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog Basic
(#1221).
AMPLIFIER HIGH LEVEL B (#1210). Provides a unity gain amplifier for high level analog input with a full scale range of ± 5.12
volts. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Amplifier Multirange B
(#1215). Maximum: One per #1232. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Analog Input Control Mod B (#1232).
AMPLIFIER MULTIRANGE B (#1215).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Provides a multirange
DP Machines
5012 Multifunction Module (cont'd)
amplifier for analog input signals. Full scale ranges of ±10 mv. ±20
mv, ±40 mv, ±80 mv, ±160 mv, ±640 mv,. lind ±5.12 volts can
either be preset under program control or automatically selected
during the conversion process. With preset gains, a resolution of
14 bits plus sign is obtained. With auto ranging, a resolution of 12
bits plus sign and 3 bits for gain indication is obtained. Limitation:
Cannot be ordered with Amplifier High Level B (#1210). Maximum:
One per #1232. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog
Input Control Mod B (#1232).
MULTIPLEXER/MR4 (#5246).
Provides a group of 4 mercury
wetted relay multiplexer points for analog input signals. Multiplexing is at a maximum rate of 200 points per second. Signals may be
in the range of 0 to ±5.12 volts. Maximum: 8 per #1210 or
#1215. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Amplifier High Level
B (#1215) ... customer signal connection required, S~~ 5029.
ANALOG INPUT CONTROL MOD C (#1213). Provides control
and analog-to-digital conversion for an amplifier and 8 groups of
solid state multiplexers. Multiplexer scanning rate is up to 14K
points per second for low level signals, and up to 20K points per
second for high level inputs. For auto ranging mode, maximum
scanning rate is 7K points per second. Limitation: Cannot be
ordered with Analog Input Control Mod B (#1232). Maximum: One
per #1221. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Analog Basic
(#1221).
AMPLIFIER HIGH LEVEL C (#1211). Provides a unity gain amplifier for high level analog input with a full scale range of ± 5.12
volts. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Amr.lifier Multirange C
(#1216). Ma*imum: One per #1213. Field nstallation: Yes.
Prerequisite: Analog Input' Control Mod C (#1213).
AMPLIFIER MULTIRANGE C (#1216).
Provides a multirange
amplifier for analog input signals. Full scale ranges of ±10 mv, ±20
mv, ±40 mv, ±80 mv, ± 160 mv, ±640 mv, and ±5.12 volts can
either be preset under program control or automatically selected
during the conversion process. With preset gains, a resolution of
14 bits plus sign is obtained, while auto ranging provides a resolution of 12 bits plus sign and 3 bits gain indication. Limitation:
Cannot be ordered with Amplifier High Level C (#1211).
Maximum: One per #1213 .. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Analog Input Control Mod C (#1213).
MULTIPLEXER/MS4 (#5248). Provides a group of 4 solid state
multiplexer points for analog input signals. Multiplexing is at a
maximum scanning rate of 20,000 points per second. Signals may
be in the range of 0 to ±5.12 volts. Maximum: 8 per #1211 or
#1216. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: One Amplifier High
Level C (#1211), or Amplifier Multirange C (#1216) ... customer
signal connection required, see 5029.
M 5012.2
May 79
FUNCTION
max., one per
group
1st Digital Input Control (#3284)
2nd
Group
3rd
Group
4th
Group
5th
Group
6th
Group
7th
Group
8th
Group
DIGITAL IN·
PUT ISOLAT·
ED
3289
3289
3289
3289
3289
3289
3289
3289
PROCESS IN·
TERRUPT ISO·
LATED
3289
plus
5710
3289
plus
5710
Not
Avail·
able
Not
Available
Not
Avail·
able
Not
Available
Not
Avail·
able
Not
Available
DIGITAL IN·
PUT NON·
ISOLATED
3292
3292
3292
3292
3292
3292
3292
3292
PROCESS IN·
TERRUPT
NONISOLATED
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Avail·
able
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
Not
Available
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTROL (#3296).
Provides control fdr up
to four groups of Digital Outputs (#3420, 3421, 3422, 3424) in any
combination. Maximum: One per 5012. Field Installation: Yes.
DO CONTACT GROUP 1#3420). Provides 16 isolated single pole
Form A mercury wetted relay contacts rated at 125 V de max or 88
V ac RMS, 2A ac RMS max; the product of peak voltage and peak
current must not exceed 100 (100 VA max.). Maximum: Four
#3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination per #3296. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control (#3296) ...
customer Signal connection required, see 5029.
DO LOW POWER GROUP (#3421). Provides 16 low power (4
ma, 6 V) digital output points. No user power is required.
Maximum: Four #3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination per
#3296. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output
Control (#3296) ... customer signal connection required, see 5029.
DO MEDIUM POWER GROUP 1#3422).
Provides 16 isolated
medium power solid state digital output switches. Power, up to 48
V dc, and 450 ma, must be provided by the user. Maximum: Four
#3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination per #3296. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Input Control (#3296) ...
customer Signal connection required, see 5029.
DO MEDIUM POWER NON-ISOLATED 1#3424).
Provides 16
non-isolated medium power (0 ma at 5.5 V to 12 ma at 2.4 V
supplied by IBM) solid state digital output switches. Output signals
are referenced to frame ground. Customer provided loads up to 450
ma at 52.8 V dc can be swtiched. Maximum: Four #3420, 3421,
3422, 3424 in any combination per #3296. Field Installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Digital Output Control (#3296) ... customer signal
connection required, see 5029.
TEMPERATURE REFERENCE ATTACH (#7830).
Provides the
capability to attach Termination Cards containing resistance bulb
thermometers for determining the reference junction temperatures
in thermocouple applications. See 5029. Maximum: one per
#1221. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Amplifier Multirange
B (#1215), or Amplifier Multirange C (#1216) ... customer signal
connection required, see 5029.
2790 Control
• DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT
Analog Input/Output
DIGITAL INPUT CONTROL (#3284). Provides control for up to 4
Digital Input (#3289 or #3292). Maximum: Two per 5012. Field
Installation: Yes.
DIGITAL INPUT GROUP (#3289). Provides 16 latching on nonlatching digital input voltage or contact points. The voltage or
contact and the isolation capability of each point is determined by
the Termination Card used. Maximum: Four #3289 or #3292 in
any combination per #3284. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Digital Input Control (#3284) ... customer signal connection required, see 5029.
PROCESS INTERRUPT (#5710). Converts a Digital Input Group
(#3289) to a process interrupt group. Limitation: #5710 cannot be
installed on Digital Input Non-Isolated (#3292). Maximum: Two per
5012 ... can only be used with the first two groups of Digital Input
Group (#3289) in a 5012. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Digital Input Group (#3289).
DIGITAL INPUT NON-ISOLATED (#3292). Provides 16 latching
or non-latching points of contact sense capabiltity. Input signals are
referenced to frame ground. Limitation: Cannot be modified by
Process Interrupt (#5710). Maximum: Four #3289 or #3292 in any
combination per #3284. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Digital Input Control (#3284) ... customer signal connection required, see 5029.
2nd Digital Input Control (#3284)
1st
Group
MAC/
MRC Purchase
Special Feature Prices:
Amplifier High Level B
Amplifier High Level C
Amplifier Multirange B
Amplifier Multirange C
Analog Basic
Analog Input Control MOD B
Analog Input Control MOD C
Analog Output Control
Analog Output Point
Multiplexer/MR4
Multiplexer/MS4
Temp. Ref. Attachment
#8195 $128
$2.610
MMMC
$11.50
1210
1211
1215
1216
1221
1232
1213
1245
1246
5246
5248
7830
10
63
49
101
36
128
218
36
49
11
10
10
327
1.305
1,045
2.085
78
3.185
4,425
780
1.305
287
261
261
1.00
7.00
2.50
2.50
2.00
40.50
54.00
12.50
7.50
2.50
1.50
1.50
3284
3289
3292
3296
3420
3421
3422
3424
5710
13
16
8
24
49
24
36
16
10
352
391
196
522
1.045
522
780
391
261
2.50
5.00
1.50
2.00
6.50
3.50
7.00
2.00
1.50
Digital Input/Output
Digital Input Control
Digital Input Group
Digital Input Non-Isolated
Digital Output Control
DO Contact Group
DO Low Power Group
DO Medium Power Group
DO Med Power Non-Isolated
Process Interrupt
ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES -- Termination Cards and connectors for customer signal wires are provided as accessories in the
5029. For details, see 5029.
Note: Specifications stated in the sales manual are a generalized
description of the system features. Detail specifications for
System/7 Sensor I/O features must be quoted or proposed from
the latest revision of the IBM System/7 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA34-0004.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 5013
May 79
DP Machines
(Multiloop Device) for each new 5013 in a multi loop system.
Note: When upgrading from a single loop system, #9444 must
be ordered
for the installed 5013 which contains #8195.
(It must also be ordered
for any 5012 which has
#8195.)
5013 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE
Purpose: To provide digital input/ output, expansion capability for
custom products, and 2790 control on a System/7.
Highlights: Designed specifically to provide expansion capability
for applications that require custom products along with digital
input/ output and 2790 control.
Provides capability for:
-
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
5013
A1
$ 49
$1,170
$ 9.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60 %
Expansion for Custom Products
Attachment of a 2790 Control
Up to 128 digital input points
Up to 32 isolated process interrupt points
Up to 64 digital output points
Warranty: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Maintenance A
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
Expansion Capability -- provides the space, power, and logical
interface to attach various Custom Products to the System/7.
2790 Control: Provides the required logical interface for attachment of 2790 Data Communication devices to System/7. This
allows System /7 to act as the "System Controller" for 2791/2793
Area Stations or 2792 Remote Communication Controller. The 2790
Control allows transmission of data between System /7 and the
2791/2793 Area Stations (and 2795/2796/2797 Data Entry Units,
and 2798 Guidance Display Units). Transmission rate is approximately 500,000 bits per second (900 characters per second). See
2790 in "Systems". The combined number of 2791/2793s and
2792 mdl 1 s on each 5012 or 5013 may not exceed 16.
Maximum: Four 2790 Controls per system, one per 5013 Digital
Input/Output Module.
Digital Input -- provides up to 8 groups of 16 digital input points.
Either isolated or non-isolated Digital Input groups are available.
Each digital input point is a voltage or contact sense, 2-terminal
circuit. Each group can be program controlled for latching or nonlatching operation. Anyone of the 8 groups may be read under
direct program control. The first two groups of digital inputs may
be converted to process interrupt points through tha addition of the
Process Interrupt feature.
Process Interrupt -- an "interrupt on change" feature is offered on
the first two groups of digital inputs. This feature provides the
capability to compare the input of the 16-bit groups against a
program loadable 16-bit register and initiate an interrupt on either
an equal or unequal comparison.
Digital Output -- provides up to 4 groups of 16 digital output
points. Each digital output point may be set or reset under program
control. Each Digital Output group may be one of the following
circuit types: Low Power, Medium Power, Medium Power NonIsolated, or Contact output. Low Power output provides switching
with a maximum rating of 6 volts at 4 milliamps. Medium Power
and Medium Power Non-Isolated operate up to 48 volts at 450
milliamps. Contact Output provides a Form A mercury wetted relay
contact rated at 125 V dc max or 88 V ac RMS max, 2 A ac RMS
max; the product of peak voltage and peak current must not exceed 100 (100 VA max). Digital outputs operate under direct program control. Medium Power and Contact Output points are isolated and may be directly connected to the standard Digital Input
points. This provides the capability for wrap-around testing and
multiplexing of digital and analog inputs with digital output points.
Maximum: The total number of Input/Output Modules (5012,
5013, 5014 and 5022 in any combination) per system may not
exceed 11.
Prerequisite: One module location in a 5026 Enclosure mdl A2,
C3, C6, D3 or D6.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Specify: [1] For location of the 5013 I/O Module, specify:
#9143 ._- also enter the desired module location number, as
shown in the chart on page M 5026, in the quantity column
of the order form. Specify #9142 in the 5010 Processor
Module.
#9144 -- for shipment without mounting in an enclosure
(spare).
[2] Customer's signal wires enter through the rear side panels of
the module. Three types of side panels are available: Type 1
provides a slot for cables; Type 2 has individual holes for each
pair of wires; Type 3 is a blank panel that can be customized by
the customer. Separate side panels are used for digital and
analog input signals. For details, refer to IBM System/7 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA34-0004.
For Digital Input/Output specify one:
#9501 -- Side Panel Digital Type 1
#9502 -- Side Panel Digital Type 2
#9503 -- Side Panle Digital Type 3
2790 CONTROL (#8195). Interface for 2790 Data Communication
devices. For 2790 devices supported by programming, see MSP/7
in "Programming." limitation: Online diagnostics are available for
maintenance of the 2790 - System/7 and must be implemented on
all systems which include a 2792 or have more than 16 area stations ... see page P7.3 Macro Library/Relocatable. All 5012 and
5013 modules with 2790 Control (#8195) must reside within the
same 5026 Enclosure. See 2791/2793 Limitations, Loop Delay
(2793 "Machines" page) for special configuring considerations.
Maximum: One per 5013, four per System/7. MSP /7 provides
support for a maximum of four 2792 mdl 1 s (up to two per 2790
control) or a maximum of sixty-four 2791/2792 mdl 1/2793s (16
per 2790 control). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Customer
signal connection required, see 5029.
• DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT FEATURES
DIGITAL INPUT CONTROL (#3284). Provides control of up to 4
Digital Input (#3289 or #3292) groups. Maximum: Two per 5013.
Field Installation: Yes.
DIGITAL INPUT GROUP (#3289).
Provides 16 latching or nonlatching digital input voltage or contact points. The voltage or
contact and the isolation capability of each point is determined by
the Termination Card used. Maximum: Four #3289 or #3292 in any
combination per #3284. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Digital Input Control (#3284) ... customer signal connection required, see 5029.
PROCESS INTERRUPT (#5710). Converts a Digital Input Group
(#3289) to a process interrupt group. limitation: #5710 cannot be
installed on Digital Input Non-Isolated (#3292). Maximum: Two per
5013 ... can only be used with the first two groups of Digital Input
Group (#3289) in a 5013. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Digital Input Group (#3289) and its prerequi~ite.
.
DIGITAL INPUT NON-ISOLATED (#3292). Provides 16 latching
or non-latching points of contact sense capability. Input signals are
referenced to frame ground. limitation: Cannot be modified by
Process Interrupt (#5710). Maximum: Four #3289 or #3292 in any
combination per #3284. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Digital Input Control (#3284) ... customer signal conection required,
see 5029.
FUNCTION
max., one per
group
DIGITAL INPUT ISOLA TEO
PROCESS INTERRUPT ISOLATEO
DIGITAL INPUT NONISOLATED
I
PROCESS INTERRUPT
NONISOLATED
1st
Grou
3289
3289
3289
plus
5710
3289
plus
5710
3292
3292
I
3289
3289
3289
3289
I I
3289
3289
I
Not
Not
Not
Not
Not Not AvailAvailable Available Available Available Available able
3292
3292
3292
3292
3292
3292
Not
Not
Not Not Avail·
Not
Not
Not
Not
Available Available Available Available Available Available Available able
DIGITAL OUTPUT CONTROL (#3296).
Provides control for up
to four groups of Digital Outputs (#3420, 3421, 3422, 3424) in any
combination. Maximum: One per 5013. Field Installation: Yes.
DO CONTACT GROUP (#3420). Provides 16 isolated single pole
Form A mercury wetted relay contacts rated at 125 V dc max or 88
V ac RMS max, 2A ac RMS max; the product of peak voltage and
peak current not to exceed 100 (100 VA max). Maximum: Four
#3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination per #3296. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control (#3296) ...
customer signal connection required, see 5029.
DO lOW POWER GROUP (#3421).
Provides 16 low power (4
ma, 6 V) digital output points. No user power supply is required.
[3] When 2790 Control (#8195) is ordered on 5013 specify: #9444
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
DP Machines
!i013 pigitallnput/Output Module (cont'd)
Maximum: Four #3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination per
#3296. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control (#3296) ... customer signal connection required, see 5029.
DO MEDIUM POWER GROUP (113422).
Provides 16 isolated
medium power solid state digital output switches. Power, up to 48
V dc, and 450 ma, must be provided by the user. Maximum: Four
#3420, 3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination per #3296. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control (#3296) ...
customer signal connection required, see 5029.
DO MEDIUM POWER NON-ISOLATED (113424). Provides 16
non-isolated medium power (0 ma at 5.5 V to 12 ma at 2.4 V
supplied by IBM) sOlid state digital output switches. Output signals
are referenced to frame ground. Customer powered loads up to
450 ma at 52.8 V dc can be switched. Maximum: Four #3420,
3421, 3422, 3424 in any combination per #2396.
Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Digital Output Control (#3296) ...
customer signal connection required, see 5029.
MAC/
MRC Purchase. MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
2790 Control
#8195 $128
$2,610
$ 9.50
352
391
196
522
1,045
522
780
391
261
2.50
4.50
1.50
2.00
5.50
3.00
6.00
2.00
1.50"
Digital Input/Output Features
Digital Input Control
Digital Input Group
Digital Input Non-Isolated
Digital Output Control
DO Contact Group
DO Low Power Group
DO Medium Power Group
DO Med Power Non-Isolated
Process Interrupt
3284
3289
3292
3296
3420
3421
3422
3424
5710
13
16
8
24
49
24
36
16
10
ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES: Termination Cards and connectors for customer signal wires are provided as accessories in the
5029 mdl 1. For details, see M 5029.
Note: Specifications stated in the sales manual are a generalized
description of the system features. Detail specifications for
System/7 'Sensor I/O features must be quoted or proposed from
the latest version of the ISM System/7 Installation Manual - Physical Planning, GA34-0004.
5014 ANALOG INPUT MODULE
Purpose: To provide System/7 with the capability to use voltage
signals as input data. The 5014 Analog Input Module provides
capability for up to 128 analog input points.
Model B1 -- Scanning rate up to 200 points per second.
Model C1 -- Scanning rate up to 20,000 points per second.
Model 01 -- Scanning rate up to 100 points per second.
Model E1 -- Expander for 5014 model 01.
Model E2 - Expander for 5014 model Bl.
Model Changes: Changes between model El and model E2 are
field installable. Model changes from B to C to 0 and vice versa
are not recommended for field installation.
Highlights: Provides analog input capability including multiplexing,
amplification, and analog-ta-digital conversion. Five models are
available: Model Bl uses mercury wetted relay multiplexers with a
maximum scanning rate of 200 points per second; Model Cl uses a
solid state multiplexer with a maximum scanning rate of 7,000 to
20,000 points per second; Model 01, with a maximum scanning
rate of 100 points per second, uses either mercury wetted or dry
contact relay multiplexers; Model El is an expander module connected to model 01 sharing the amplifier and analog-to-digital
converter of the model 01 and using either type of multiplexer;
Model E2 is an expander module connected. to model Bl sharing
the amplifier and analog-to-digital converter of the model Bl and
using mercury wetted relay multiplexers. Input signals may range
from 0 to ±5.12 volts full scale with mercury wetted relay multiplexers and solid state multiplexers. Input signals may range from
-640 mv to +5.12 volts full scale with dry contact relay mUltiplexers.
Theanalog-to-digital converter has a resolution of 14 bits plus sign.
Analog conversion and point addressing of the multiplexers are
under program control. Immediate and External synchronization'
operations are both available. A special feature provides for attachment of resistance bulb thermometer (RBn termination cards for
determining the reference junction temperature in thermocouple
applications. Connection of customer signals and signal conditioning is achieved by termination cards in the customer access area at
the back of the Analog Input Module. LIMITATIONS: The first
model El must be located directly under its associated model 01.
The second model El must be located directly under the first
model El. The first model E2 must be located directly under its
M 5013 - 5014
May 79
associated model Bl. The second model E2 must be located directly under the first model E2.
Maximum: Total number of Input/Output Modules (5012, 5013,
5014, 5022, and Customer Product Modules in any combination)
per system cannot exceed 11.
PREREQUISITE: One module location in 5026 Enclosure mdls A2,
C3, C6, 03 or 06.
System/7 Summary: GA34-ooo2
Specify: [1] For location of the 501,4 I/O Module, specify:
#9143 -- also enter the desired module location number, as
shown in the chart on page M 5026, in the quantity column
of the order form. Specify #9142 in the 5010 Processor
Module.
#9144 -- for shipment without mounting in an enclosure
(spare).
[2] Customer's signal wires enter through the rear side panels of
the module. Three types of panels are available; Type 1 provides a slot for cables; Type 2 has individual holes for each pair
of wires; Type 3 is a blank panel that can be customized by the
customer. For details refer to IBM System/7 Installation Manual
- Physical Planning, GA34-ooo2. Specify One;
#9511 -- Side Panel Analog Type 1
#9512 -- Side Panel Analog Type 2
#9513 -- Side Panel Analog Type 3
[3] On each 5014 mdl 3 specify one of the following: #9185 -- for
expansion from 128 to 256 points. (First 5014 mdl E is
connected to a single 5014 mdl B or D).
#9186 -- for expansion from 256 to 384 points. (Second 5014
mdl E is connected to a single 5014 mdl B or D.)
PRICES:
Mdl
5014
B1
C1
01
E1
E2
MAC/
MRC
$ 193
283'
193'
48'
48'
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 60 %
Purchase
MMMC
$3,905
5,725
3,905
1,020
1,020
$40.50
59.50
39.00
Warranty: A
Useful life Category: 2
1.00
1.00
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 2
MODEL DESCRIPTIONS
Model B1 -- provides amplification, analog-to-digital conversion,
and addressing of 128 analog input points at a scanning rate up to
200 points per second using mercury wetted relay multiplexers. A
special feature provides addressing for an additional 256 points in
two attached model E2s (total 384 p~ints).
Model C1 -- provides amplification, analog-to-digital conversion,
and addressing of 128 analog input points at a scanning rate up to
20,000 points per second using solid state multiplexers. The maximum scanning rate is dependent upon the input signal level and
mode of operation. Low level signals may be scanned at a maximum rate of 14,000 points per second. High level signals may be
scanned at a maximum rate of 20,000 points per second. Maximum
scanning rate with auto ranging is 7,000 points per second.
Model 01 -- provides amplification, analog-to-digital conversion,
and addressing of 384 analog input points at a scanning rate up to
100 points per second using mercury wetted relay or dry contact
relay multiplexers. The first 128 points of relay multiplexers are
installed in the model 01. The second 128 points of relay multiplexers are installed in a model El attached to the model 01. The
third 128 points of relay multiplexers are installed in a model El
attached to the first model E1.
Model E1 -- expansion model for model 01. Provides for 128
analog input points selected by mercury wetted relay or dry contact
relay multiplexers. It is connected to and uses the amplification,
analog-ta-digital conversion, and addressing circuits of a model 01.
The maximum scanning speed is the same as the model 01 (100
points per second). LIMITATION: The first model El must be located directly under the model 01 to which it is attached. The second
model El must be located directly 'under the fir.st model El.
MAXIMUM: Two per 5014 mdl 01. PREREQUISIT.E: 5014 mdl 01.
Model E2 -- expansion module for model Bl. Provides for 128
analog input points selected by mercury wetted relay multiplexers.
It is connected to and uses the amplification, analog-to-digital
conversion, and addressing circuits of a model Bl. The maximum
scanning speed is the same as the model Bl (200 points per second). LIMITATION: The first model E2 must be located directly
under the model Bl to which it is attached. The second model E2
must be located directly under the first model E2. MAXIMUM: Two
per 5014 mdl B1. PREREQUISITE: Analog Input Expander (#1250)
on the 5014'mdl Bl.
SPECIAL FEATURES
AMPLIFIER HIGH LEVEL B (#1210).
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[mdl Bl only]
Provides a
DP Machines
5014 Analog Input Module (conrd)
unity gain amplifier for high level analog input signals with a full
scale range of ±5.12 volts. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with
Amplifier Multirange B (#1215). Maximum: One per 5014 mdl Bl.
Field Installation: Yes.
AMPLIFIER HIGH LEVEL C (#1211). [mdl C1 only] Provides a
unity gain amplifier for high level analog input signals with a full
scale range of ±5.12 volts. Limitation: Cannot be ordered with
Amplifier Multirange C (#1216). Maximum: One per 5014 mdl C1.
Field Installation: Yes.
AMPLIFIER HIGH LEVEL 0 (#1212). [mdl D1 only] Provides a
unity gain amplifier for high level analog input signals with a full
scale range of ±5.12 volts with Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247) or -640
mv to +5.12 volts with Multiplexer/MD16 (#5245). Limitation:
Cannot be ordered with Amplifier Multirange D (#1217).
Maximum: One per 5014 mdl D1. Field Installation: Yes.
AMPLIFIER MULTIRANGE B (#12151. [mdl 81 only] Provides
a multi range amplifier for analog input signals. The amplifier gains
can be set by the program or determined automatically by the
amplifier. Amplifier ranges are ± 1Omv, ±20mv, ±40mv, ±80mv,
±160mv, ±640mv, and ±5.12 volts full scale. In program selected
gain mode of operation, 14 bits of data plus sign are generated. In
auto ranging mode of operation, 12 bits of data plus sign are generated. The remaining 3 bits are used to indicate the range.
Limitation: Cannot be ordered with Amplifier High Level B (#1210).
Maximum: One per 5014 mdl B1. Field Installation: Yes.
AMPLIFIER MULTIRANGE C (#1216). [mdl C1 only] Provides a
multi range amplifier for analog input signals. The amplifier gains
can be set by the program or determined automatically by the
amplifier. Amplifier ranges are ± 1Om v, ±20mv, ±40mv, ±80mv,
± 160mv, ±640mv, and ±5.12 volts. In program selected gain mode
of operation, 14 bits of data plus sign are generated. In auto ranging mode of operation, 12 bits of data plus si~n are generated. The
remaining 3 bits are used to indicate the range. Limitation: Cannot
be ordered with Amplifier High Level C (#121,1). Maximum: One
per 5014 mdl C1 Field Installation: Yes.
AMPLIFIER MULTIRANGE 0 (#1217), [mdl Dl only] Provides a
multi range amplifier for analog input signals., The amplifier gain is
set by the program. When used with Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247),
the full scale ranges are ±10mv, ±20mv, ±40mv, ±80mv, ±160mv,
±640mv, and ±5.12 volts. When used with Multiplexer/MD16
(#52451. all of the above ranges are available with the exception
that the ±5.12 volt range is modified to the range of -640mv to
+5.12 volts. 14 bits of data plus sign are generated. Limitation:
Cannot be ordered with Amplifier High Level D (#1212).
Maximum: One per 5014 mdl Dl. Field Installation: Yes.
M 5014
May 79
Maximum: Two per Analog Input Adapter 8 (#1230) or Analog
Input Adapter D/E (#1233). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites:
Analog Input Adapter 8 (#1230) on 5014 mdl 81 or Analog Input
Adapter D/E (#1233) on mdls D1, El or E2. Customer signal
connection required, see 5029.
MULTIPLEXER/MS16 (#5249). [mdl Cl only] Provides a group
of 16 analog input points. Input points are mUltiplexed by solid
state switches. Input signals can be in the range of ±5.12 volts.
Limitation: Common mode voltage must not exceed 10 volts and
the average sampling rate is not limited. Maximum: Two per
Analog Input Adapter C (#1231).
Field Installation: Yes.'
Prerequisites: Analog Input Adapter C (#1231). Customer signal
connection required, see 5029.
TEMPERATURE REFERENCE ATTACH (#78301. [mdl 81, Cl. or
Dl only] Provides the capability to attach termination cards containing resistance bulb thermometers (RBT) ... see M 5029. When
this feature is installed in a 5014 mdl 81 or D 1 the capability is
extended to 5014 mdl El or E2 associated with it. Limitation: A
maximum of 32 R8T termination cards can be attached to one
Temperature Reference Attach (#7830). Maximum: One per 5014
mdls Bl, Cl and Dl. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Amplifier Multirange B (#12151. Amplifier Multirange C (#1216) or Amplifier Multirange D (#1217).
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
Amplifier High Level B
Amplifier High Level C
Amplifier High Level 0
Amplifier Multirange B
Amplifier Multirange C
Amplifier Multirange 0
Analog Input Adapter B
Analog Input Adapter C
Analog Input Adapter D/E
Analog Input Expander B
Multiplexer/MD16
Multiplexer/MR16
Multiplexer/MS16
Temperature Ref Attach
#1210
1211
1212
1215
1216
1217
1230
1231
1233
1250
5245
5247
5249
7830
$ 10
$ 327 $ 1.00
1,305
327
1,045
2,085
1,045
391
391
391
651
758
1,145
1,045
261
63
10
49
101
49
13
13
13
31
35
54
49
10
7.00
1.00
2.50
2.50
2.50
1.50'
1.50
1.50
7.00
14.50'
11.00
3.50
1.50
Maximum Feature Quantity Per Model
FEATURE
Mdl81
Mdl Cl
MdlOI
Mdl El
Mdl E2
200 pt per 20K pt per 100 pt per 100 pt per 200 pt per
sec
sec
sec
sec
sec
ANALOG INPUT ADAPTER B (#12301, [mdl Bl only] Provides
capability for two Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247) groups. Maximum:
Four per 5014 mdl Bl. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Amplifier High Level B (#1210) or Amplifier Multirange B (#1215).
Amplifier High level 8 (12101
1
0
0
0
0
Amplifier High level C (12111
0
1
0
0
0
Amplifier High level 0 (12121
0
0
1
0
0
ANALOG INPUT ADAPTER C (#12311. [mdl Clonly] Provides
capability for two Multiplexer/MS16 (#5249) groups. Maximum:
Four per 5014 mdl C1. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Amplifier High Level C (#1211) or Amplifier Multirange C (#1216).
Amplifier Multirange 8 (12151
1
0
0
0
0
Amplifier Multirange C (12161
0
1
0
0
0
Amplifier Multirange 0 (12171
0
0
1
0
0
ANALOG INPUT ADAPTER D/E (#12331. [mdl D1, E1 and E2
only]
Provides capability for two Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247)
groups on mdls Dl, E1, E2, or two Multiplexer/MD16 (#5245)
groups on mdls D1, El. Maximum: Four per 5014 mdls D1, El or
E2. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Amplifier High Level D
(#1212) or Amplifier Multirange D (#1217) on 5014 mdl Dl.
Analog Input Adapter 8 (12301
4
0
0
0
0
Analog Input Adapter C (12311
0
4
0
0
0
Analog Input Adapter O/E (1233)
0
0
4
4
4
Analog Input Expander 8 (12501
1
0
0
0
0
Multiplexer/MD16 (52451
0
0
8
8
0
Multiplexer/MR16 (52471
8
0
8
8
8
Multiplexer/MSl6 (52491
0
8
0
0
0
Temperature Ref Attach (78301
1
1
1
0
0
ANALOG INPUT EXPANDER B (#12501.
[mdl Bl only] Provides the capability to attach one or two 5014 mdl E2s to a 5014
mdl 81. This provides up to 384 analog input point addresses on a
5014 mdl 81. Maximum: One per 5014 mdl 81. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Amplifier High Level 8 (#1210) or
Amplifier Multirange B (#1215).
MULTIPLEXER/MD16 (#52451, [mdl Dl and El only] Provides
a group of 16 analog input points. Input points are multiplexed by
dry contact relays. Input signals can be in the range of -640mv to
+5.12
volts.
Limitation:
The
combined
quantity
of
Multiplexer/MD16 (#5245) and Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247) must
root exceed two per Analog Input Adapter D/E (#1233). Common
mode voltage must not exceed 100 volts and the average sampling
rate per point must not exceed 20 samples per minute when averaged over at least 24 hours. This means that a single input point
must not be addressed more than 28,800 times in 24 hours.
Maximum: Two per Analog Input Adapter D/E (#1233). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Analog Input Adapter D/E
(#1233). Customer signal connection required, see 5029.
MULTIPLEXER/MR16 (#52471,
[mdl 81, Dl, El or E2 only]
Provides a group of 16 analog input points. Input points are multiplexed by mercury wetted relays. Input signals can be in the range
of
± 5.12 volts.
Limitation: The combined quantity of
Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247) and Multiplexer/MD16 (#5245) must
not exceed two per Analog Input Adapter 8 (#1230) or Analog
Input Adapter D / E (#1233). Common mode voltage must not exceed 250 volts and the average sampling rate is not limited.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 5022
May 79
.OP Machines
5022 DISK STORAGE MODULE
Purpose: Oisk Storage Unit for System/7.
[3] Integral Power Supply (#4650) is required for: (1) Installation of
each additional 5022 after the first 5022 within a single 5026
Enclosure, or (2) a 5022 installed in a 5026 mdl A2 '" see
"Special Features" below.
Model 1 Single Drive -- 2.457 million 16-bit words ... access
200 cylinders on removable cartridge and 200 cylinders on its
non-removable disk ... 269 millisecond average access time.
[4] Power: Must be consistent with that of the 5026 Enclosure
see voltage feature #s under "Specify" for the 5026.
Model' 2 Single Drive -- same as Modell except 126 millisecond average access time.
PRICES:
Model 3 Single Drive -- 1.228 million 16-bit words ... access
200 cylinders on one non-removable disk ... average access time
269 milliseconds.
Model 4 Single Drive -- same as Model 3 except 126 millisecond average access time.
5022
Removable Disk Cartridges -- each 5022 mdl 1 or 2 uses a removable 5440 Disk Cartridge that provides virtually unlimited offline
disk storage. 5440s must be ordered separately.
Purchase
$ 504'
590'
387
472
1
2
3
4
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 45%
Model Changes: Field Installable.
Highlights:
MAC/
MRC
Mdl
$9,640
10,530
8,620
9,445
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
MMMC
$88.50
97.00
84.50
92.50
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
SPECIAL FEATURES
DISK CYCLE STEAL (#2664). Provides data transfers between
the 5022 and main storage of a 5010 equipped with companion
Cycle Steal Basic (#2662) feature. Limitation: One per 5022. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Cycle Steal Basic (#2662) on the
5010.
Cylinder Concept -- the access mechanism with four vertically
aligned heads gives access to the top and bottom tracks of both
the removable 5440 and the 5022's non-removable disk for model
1 or model 2. With one positioning of the access mechanism,
.12,288 sixteen-bit words are available.
INTEGRAL POWER SUPPLY (#4650). Provides 24 volts power
supply which is required for: (1) Installation of each additional 5022
after the first 5022 within a single 5026 Enclosure. and (2) Installation of 5022 on a 5026 Enclosure mdl A2. Field Installation: Yes .
The access mechanism on model 3 or model 4 with two vertically
aligned heads gives access to the top and bottom tracks of the
non-removable disk, providing 6,144 sixteen-bit words with one
positioning of the access mechanism.
Special Feature Prices:
Formats -- each of the 200 customer usable cylinders, three alternate cylinders and one CE cylinder on each disk is composed of
two tracks of 24 sectors each. Each sector provides a fixed length
128 word data field.
Housing -- the 5022 can reside in an I/O module location in any of
the 5026 enclosures. However, it is recommended that it be installed in the bottom module location for user accessability .. , see
"Specify" [1] below.
Access Times -- minimum access time is 39 milliseconds, average
is 269 milliseconds and maximum is 750 milliseconds for model 1
or model 3.
Disk Cycle Steal
Integral Power Supply
MAC/
MRC
Purchase MMMC
#2664
4650
$
16
42
$
391
$ 1.00
908
1.00
'Environment: The 5022 operates within the following temperature
and humidity range.
Temperature **
Relative Humidity
Max. Wet Bulb Temperature
Non-operating Temperature
Non-operating Humidity
SO-90°F
8-95%
85°F
5O-110°F
8-95 %
In systems without Air Isolation (#4621 or #4622 on 5026), the
maximum operating temperature for a 5022 mdl 3 or 4 (fixed
pack) is 105°F if the disk is located in the bottom position of a
5026 Enclosure (module locations 2, 5, 8 or 11).
Minimum access time is 28 milliseconds, average is 126 milliseconds and maximum is 255 milliseconds for model 2 or model 4.
Data Transfer Rate -- the disk rotates at 1500 rpm, yielding a
data rate of 99,500 words per second and a rotational period of 40
milliseconds.
PREREQUISITES:
(1) An available I/O module location in the 5026 Enclosure.
(2) Each 5022 mdl 1 or 2 requires a 5440 Disk Cartridge.
(3) Integral Power Supply (#4650) is required for:
a) Each additional 5022 after the first 5022 within a single 5026
Enclosure.
b) A 5022 installed in a 5026 mdl A2.
Configuration: Multiple 5022s may be installed on a single
System/7. IBM supplied programming support for the Disk Cycle
Steal (#2664) feature is mutually exclusive with Direct Program
Control Disk support. Drives of both types are not supported on
the same system. Multiple drives of either type are supported.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Specify: [1] For location of the 5022 Disk Storage Module, specify: #9143 - also enter the desired module location number, as
shown unde~ the 5026, in the quantity column of the order
form. #9144 - for shipment without mounting in an. enclosure
(spare). LIMITATIONS: the following limitations apply to the
location where a 5022 module can be installed in a 5026 Enclosure.
(a) A 5022 cannot be located in a top position of a 5026
(module locations 0, 3, 6 or 9).
(b) It is recommended that 5022s be located in the bottom
position of a 5026 enclosure (module locations 2, 5, 8 or
11). Only when absolutely necessary should a 5022 be
located in the middle position of a 5026 enclosure (module
locations 1, 4, 7 or 10).
(c) Locating a 5022 mdl 3 or 4 in the bottom position of a
5026 enclosure in systems without Internal Air Isolation
(#4621 or #4622) will increase its maximum allowable operating temperature from 90°F to 105°F.
(d) Housing a 5022 in a 5026 mdl 03 or 06 is not recommended due to the increased processor loading during data
transfer.
[2] Each 5022 mdl 1 or mdl 2 requires a 5440 Disk Cartridge which
must be ordered separately
Not to be reoroduced without written permission.
M 5024
May 79
DP Machines
5024 I/O ATTACHMENT ENCLOSURE
[Be sure to specify a print belt language code except for #5550 ...
see Specify.]
Purpose: To provide line printing and/or card reading capability for
System/7.
Model 1
Basic Enclosure with Line Printer.
Model 2
Basic Enclosure with 2502 Attachment.
Model 3
Expanded Enclosure with Line Printer and 2502
Attachment.
Highlights:
Enclosure -- the 5024 I/O Attachment Enclosure is a data processing oriented addition to the System /7. The enclosure provides
basic space, power and logic to attach a printer, a card reader, or
both. If both a printer and a card reader are utilized, an enclosure
expao:1sion is provided. The 5024 attachs to any 5010 Processor
Module Model E equipped with 5024 Attachment Feature (#4115).
A fixed length cable is supplied with the 5024 (see Physical Planning Manual for further details).
5024 Attachment Feature (#4115) on 5010 -- provides the
interface between the 5010 mdl E and the 5024 and handles data
transfers between 5010 mdl E storage and the 5024 on a cycle
steal basis. Cycle Steal Basic (#2662) is required on the 5010 mdl
E. If both a card reader and a printer are attached, operations may
be interleaved but not overlapped. In the interleave mode of operation, performance of the devices will be less than the individual
unit's rated speed of 300 cpm reading and 155 Ipm printing. For
more details see SRL GA34-0002. Only one 5024 may be attached
per 5010 mdl E. The 5024 attachment is mutually exclusive with
1200 bps Integrated Modems (#5500, 5501) and S/360/370
Channel Attachment (RPQ
). All systems planning to use
any 5010 RPQ
together with Feature Code #4115 must re-submit the RPQ 1It>r
evaluation
PREREQUISITES: Cycle Steal Basic (#2662) and 5024 Attachment
Feature (#4115) on a 5010 mdl E Processor. For 5024 mdl 2 or 3, a
2502 mdl A2 with specify feature #9901 for 115 V AC, and #9046
for white color.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Input Power: 115 V AC, l-phase, 60 Hz.
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz): #9901.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, #9045
for gray, or #9046 for white.
[3] Print Belt: Specify one -- #9490 for 96-character belt, #9491 for
64-character belt, or #9492 for 48-character belt. [Not on model
2]
PRICES:
5024
Mdl
1
2
3
MAC/
MRC
$ 578
330
768
ETP/
MLC
2 yr
$ 492
281
654
Purchase
$18,040
10,340
22,500
MMMC
$107.00
20.00
114.00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Maintenance: D
Purchase Option: 55 % Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Model Changes: Changes from Model 1 or Model 2 to Model 3
are field installable. No other model changes can be made.
5024 Model 1 to Model 3 ..... $ 4,460
5024 Model 2 to Model 3 ..... $12,160
ACCESSORIES
FORMS STAND (#4450). Permits placement of continuous forms
(out of carton) on the stand above floor level and provides for
forms stacking after printing. This stand or equivalent is required
for proper operation of the 5024 mdl 1 or 3. Field Installation:
Yes.
ADDITIONAL PRINT BELT (#5550, 5551, 5552).
Permits the
customer to obtain more than one character set print belt for variuos applications. Order #5550 for 96-character belt, #5551 for
64-character print belt. #5552 for 48-character print belt. 48 character belt utilizes a character set with =, ( and ) rather than ¢, %
and, respectively. Field Installation: Yes.
Special Feature Prices:
Forms Stand
#4450
Additional Print Belt,
96-character
5550
64-character
5551
48-character
5552
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yr Purchase MMMC
Purchase Only
$ 51
Purchase Only
Purchase Only
Purchase Only
170
170
170
NC
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 5026
May 79
OP Machines
5026 ENCLOSURE
[5) Proposal of all 5026 Enclosures must· be in accQrdance with
prQcedures outlined at the end of this section.
Purpose: To provide housing and power for System/7 Processor
and Input/Output Modules.
Model A2
2 Position ... for a Processor Module and one I/O
Module.
[6] Kickstrips: #9431, if needed. When kickstrips are installed, the
open area underneath the machine is enclosed. This may be
inconvenient for the QperatQr or for signal wiring. Use of kickstrips is recommended only when the physical appearance of
the system is Qf prime importance.
Model C3
3 Position ... for a Processor Module and two I/O
Modules.
[7] Cables: FQr System/7 external cables for 5026 mdl 0;3 and 06,
supplied by IBM, use cable Qrder form number Z120-236S.
Model C6
6 Position ... for a Processor Module and five I/O
Modules.
PRICES:
Model 03
3 Position Extension ... 3 additional I/O Module
locations with C3 or C6.
Model 06
6 Position Extension ... 6 additional I/O Module
locations with C3 or C6.
Model 03 or 06 is cable attached to model C3 or C6 and may be
located up to 200 feet from the model C3 or C6.
Highlights: Provides housing for the Processor. Module and all
Input/Output Modules. Also included are the necessary power
supplies (see RPQ
for power restrictions on 3340 Attachment) and interface connections for all modules. The Processor
Module must be located in the first module location of A2, C3 or
C6 models. I/O Modules may be housed in any of the remaining
module locations, except Module 599S-TO 1 must be located in
module position 2 and if it is installed a 5022 module may not be
located in module position 1~ The 03 or 06 model may be located
up to 200 feet from the C3 or C6 model. An Internal Air Isolation
feature (not available on model A2) seals the enclosure and prevents the outside air from entering into the enclosure. Internal air is
filtered through an activated carbon filtration system. Heat within
the enclosure is dissipated through an air-to-air heat exchanger.
ThiS feature allows the System/7 to be used in environments
where airborne elements might harm the electronic Circuitry. Since
this feature is not available on model A2 enclosures, in environments where there is a possibility of existance of contaminants, a
C3 or C6 model must be used.
An "Early Warning" corrosion detector card is installed as a standard item in every System/7 enclosure. This card is specifically
designed to be sensitive. to airborne contaminants. Inspection of
this card gives an early warning so that appropriate action for
protection of the system may be taken.
A Power Failure Detect feature (#5731) provides an early indication
of imminent power failure so that the program can bring the system to an orderly halt. When power is restored, the auto restart
function of the system can provide automatic program load from
either the Operator Station or host teleprocessing link. The processor console switch must be appropriately set.
5026
MACI
MRC
Mdl
$ 128
A2
C3
C6
03
06
296
441
296
441
Plan Offering: Plan B
Purchase Option: 45 %
Purchase
$ 3,010
6,510'
9,190
6,510
9,190
Warranty: B
Useful Life Category: 2
MMMC
$35.00
41.50
67.50'
54.00
SO. 50'
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 2
Model Changes: Changes from C3 to C6 and frQm 03 to 06 are
field installable. No other model changes can be made.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (There are no additonal
installation charges)
From Model C3 to Model C6 ..... $4,200
From Model 03 to Model 06 ..... $4,200
SPECIAL FEATURES
Ox ENCLOSURE ATTACHMENT 1#3715). [mdls C3 and C6 Qnly]
This feature prQvides for the connection Qf th.e Enclosure models
03 or 06 to. EnclQsure models C3 or C6. Maximum: One #3715
per system. Field Installation: Yes.
INTERNAL AIR ISOLATION 3 1#4621).
(not with 599S-TO 1)
[mdls C3 and 03 only] This feature seals the model C3 or 03
enclQsure and provides an air-to-air heat exchanger for dissipation
of the internal heat. An activated carbon filtration system filters the
inlernal air. The feature isolates the inside air from the outside and
is used in severe industrial envirQnments where gaseous cQntaminants harmful to electronic circuitry exist. Limitations: PrQPosals
are nQt to' recommend the IAI feature unless the FE Installation
Planning Representative has determined that the feature is required,
or the internal system detector indicates measures are necessary to
protect an installed system. Maximum: One per C3 or 03 enclosure. Field Installation: Yes.
INTERNAL AIR ISOLATION 6 1#4622).
(not .with 599S-TO 1)
[mdls C6 and 06 only] This feature is identical to #4621 and is
prQvided for mQdel C6 or 06 enclosures. Maximum: One per C6
or 06 enclQsure. Field Installation: Yes.
A thermal detector in the enclosure ~enerates a warning interrupt if
the Internal temperature of the enclo;;ure rises above a $pecified
operating level. The thermal detector causes a power shutdown
after the warning signal is generated. The time between the thermal interrupt and the power shutdown could be used by the program to cause an orderly halt of the operation.
POWER FAILURE DETECT 1#5731),
Provides a signal to the
system when the input AC voltage falls below a safe level. This
signal is used by the program ~o bring the system to an orderly
halt. This feature also provides auto restart which can automatically
restart system power when input AC power is restQred.
Maximum: One per enclQsure. Field Installation: Yes.
PREREQUISITE: Models 03 and 06 require a Ox Enclosure Attachment (#3715) feature in models C3 and C6 enclosures.
STORAGE POWER ADDITION 1#7401), [mdls A2, C3 and C6
only] Provides a power supply fQr the 5010 Proce<;sQr MQdule
models A and B only, with storage in excess of SK words.
Maximum: One per system. Field Installation: Yes.
Module Locations:
5026 - Module location Chart
~~~
o .
1
2
0
1
2
3
6
4
7
5
S
Front view
MACI
MRC
Purchase MMMC
Special Feature Prices:
06
6
9
7
10
Sill
r
Ox Enclosure Attachment
Internal Air Isolation 3
Internal Air Isolation 6
Power Failure Detect
Storage Power Addition
I
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 60 Hz):
#9902 for 20S V, l-phase (mdls A2, C3, 03 only).
#9903 for 20S V, 3-phase (mdls C3, CS, 03, 06 only),
#9904 for 230 V, l-phase (mdls A2, C3, 03 only),
#9905 for .230 V, 3-phase (mdls C3, C6, 03, 06 only).
NOTE: When options are available, use of 3-phase power is
recommended. This would eliminate the need for rewiring for
system expansion to models C6 or 06.
[2] Power: Specify one -- #9490 for 5010 A and B models ...
#9491 for 501 0 E models.
[3] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow,
for gray, or #9046 for white.
#9043
for blue, #9045
[4] Storage Power Addition (#7401) required for systems with more
than SK of storage (5010 A and B models only) '" see "Special
Features."
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
#3715
4621
4622
5731
7401
$ 42
55
76
63
17
$ 90S
1,465
1,955
1,305
417
$ 5.50'
15.50
32.50
1.00
1.50
M 5026 - 5028
May 79
DP Machines
5026 Enclosure
(cont'd)
5028 OPERATOR STATION
Purpose: To provide an operator and computer input/output
device for System /7.
Highlights: The 5028 Operator Station provides a keyboard, printer, paper tape punch, and paper tape reader. It is attached via a
multi-wire cable to a System/7 Processor Module. The printer,
paper tape reader, and paper tape punch operate at a speed of 10
characters per second. Transmission code is 7 level ASCII, with the
8th level for "even parity." The paper tape reader and punch can
also read and punch 8-bit binary code without parity. The recording
tape is one inch wide and may be paper (Part No.s 304469 or
426362), or lubricated, non-metallic plastic. A printing line is 72
characters with 6 lines per inch. Only single part paper may be
used for printing.
LOCAL REMOTE switches provide for offline and online operations.
The 5028 is used for program loading, data input/output, and
paper tape preparation.
The 5028 Operator Station must be available for system maintenance in all configurations. An Operator Station may be shared
among several System/7s, except those' with '5998-TO 1. The
customer must attach the Operator Station to the system requiring
maintenance prior to the arrival of a custolT'er engineer. Delays due
to the relocation of an Operator Station from one system to another may result in extended down time. Before ordering a system
without an Operator Station, the customer must realize the above
condition as well as the procedure for diconnecting an Operator
Station which requires these steps: stop system; power off Operator Station; disconnect Operator Station; start system.
PREREQUISITE: 5010 Processor Module.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002
Input Power: 115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz.
Specify: Cables. Use cable order form Z120-2368.
Supplies: A black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136260 or equivalent, is
required.
ETP/
PRICES:
5028
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
2 yr
MLC
Purchase
MMMC
1
$179
$ 152
$1,940
$69.00
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 50% Useful Ufe Category: 2
Per Cc::II: 2
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Umit Percent: 0%
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
M 5029.1
May "OJ
DP Machines
5029 MOL 1 ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES
FOR SYSTEM/7
[Purchase only]
Purpose: 5029 mdl 1 is an accessory control number used for
ordering components and Termination Cards for connection of
customer signal wires to the System/7 interface. 5029 is not a
machine in itself,
Specify 5029 in the machine field only once per system for all
Termination Cards and components. Features on 5029 cannot be
ordered
Accessories in the 5029 are for purchase only
and no maintenance service is available. Normal parts warranty of
3 months applies to the accessories.
Highlights: 5029 Attachment Accessories provide a number of
cards and components used for connection of customer signals to
the System /7 as well as conditioning and filtering of signals. Standard circuits are offered for each type of sensor I/O point. Special
circuits can be constructed by the customer on the Custom Cards.
Termination Cards provides a screw-down terminal for connection
of customer wires. This feature offers several advantages, such as
(a) the customer can wire his signals to the cards prior to system
arrival at the site, thereby reducing the installation time ... (b) when
a system is upgraded, rewiring is merely a matter of unplugging the
cards from the old module and plugging them into the new module
... (c) sensor-based points may be quickly disconnected for trouble
shooting.
System/7 Summary: GA34-0002.
ACCESSORIES
Table 1, below, shows a summary of the requirements for the
Attachment Accessories.
AI CUSTOM 1#11101.
This card contains screw terminals for
customer
connection
of
four
analog
input
signals
to
Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247 in 5014), Multiplexer/MD16 (#5245 in
5014), Multiplexer/MR4 (#5246 in 5012), Multiplexer/MS16 (#5249
in 5014). or Multiplexer/MS4 (#5248 in 5012). Solder terminals are
provided for the customer addition of networks to each point to
complete the connection. This card should be used where the
customer desires to construct analog input networks of his own
design. Limitations: Use of this card can affect accuracy and
repeatability of the analog to digital conversion of analog signals
connected to it.
AI/MR FitTER 1#11131. This card contains filter circuits and
screw terminals for customer connection of four analog input signals to Multiplexer/MR16 (#5247 in 5014). Multiplexer/MD16
(#5245 in 5014), or Multiplexer/MR4 (#5246 in 5012). Current
resistors can be added to the terminals. No provision is made to
add other components.
AI/MR RBT /FILTER 1#1114). This card contains one resistance
bulb thermometer circuit plus three filter circuits for customer
connection of three analog input Signals to Multiplexer/MR16
(#5247 in 5014), Multiplexer/MD16 (#5245 in 5014). or
Multiplexer/MR4 (#5246 in 5012). The resistance bulb circuit output can be used to calculate a reference junction temperature.
Current resistors cannot be added to the terminals. No provision is
made to add components. Maximum: 32 per Temperature Reference Attach. Prerequisite: Temperature Reference Attach (#7830)
in 5012 or 5014.
AI/MS CONNECTOR 1#11221. This card contains circuits and
screw terminals for customer connection of four analog input signals to Multiplexer/MS16 1#5249 in 5014). or Multiplexer/MS4
(#5248 in 5012). No filter circuits are provided. Current resistors
can be added to the terminals. No provision is made to add other
components. Limitation: Use of this card can affect accuracy and
repeatability of the analog to digital conversion of analog signals
connected to it.
AI/MS NON-POLARIZED FILTER 1#11211. This card contains
filter circuits and screw terminals for customer connection of four
analog input signals to Multiplexer/MS16 (#5249 in 5014), or
Multiplexer /MS4 (#5248 in 5012). The filter circuit is a nonpolarized network .. , can accept both positive and negative signals.
Current resistors can be added to the terminals. No provision is
made to add other components.
AI/MS POLARIZED FILTER 1#11241. This card is identical to the
AI/MS Non-Polarized Filter (#11211. except the filter circuit is
polarized ... accepts only a single polarized signal.
AI/MS RBT/NON-POLARIZED FILTER 1#11231.
This card
contains one resistance bulb thermometer circuit plus three filter
circuits for customer connection of three analog input sillnals to
Multiplexer/MS16 (#5249 in 5014) or Multiplexer/MS4 (#5248 in
5012). The resistance bulb thermometer circuit output can be used
to calculate a referenece junction temperature. The filter circuit is a
non-polarized network ... can accept both positive and negative
signals. Current resistors cannot be added to the terminals. No
provision is made to add other components. Maximum: 32 per
Temperature Reference Attach. Prerequisite: Temperature Refer-
ence Attach (#7830) in 5012 or 5014.
CAPACITOR NON-POLARIZED 10UF 1#15701. A special capacitor used to construct the network on the AI / MS Non-Polarized
Filter (#1121) termination card. This 10 microfarad, 35 volt, nonpolarized capacitor has very low di-electric absorption, low leakage
and small physical size.
CONNECTOR, 3-PIN 1#12401. This cable plug is used to connect
the customer analog output signal wires to the analog output points
on the 5012. One is required for each Analog Output Point (#1246
in 5012). Installation of wires on the connector is the customer's
responsibility.
CONNECTOR, 4-PIN 1#81851. This plug is used to connect the
2790 loop transmission lines to the 2790 Control (#8195) in the
5012. One is required for the 2790 Control (#8195) in 5012. This
plug is also used to connect to the external synchr.onization control
on the 5012 and 5014. One is. required for each 5014 and one for
1ach 5012 with Analog Input Control Mod B (#1232) or Analog
Input Control Mod C (#1213). Installation of wires on the connector
is a customer responsibility.
CURRENT RESISTOR 4-20 MA (#16701. This precision resistor
can be connected across analog input terminals to act as a current
shunt. It converts 4 to 20 milliamperes to 128 to 640 millivolts.
Limitation: Cannot be used on analog input termination cards
AI/MR RBT /Filter (#1114) or AI/MS RBT /Non-Polarized Filter
(#1123) .
CURRENT RESISTOR 10-50 MA 1#16711. This precision resistor
can be connected across analog input terminals to act as a current
shunt. It converts 10 to 50 milliamperes to 128 to 640 millivolts.
Limitation: Cannot be used on analog input termination cards
AI/MR RBT/Filter (#1114) or AI/MS RBT/Non-Polarized Filter
(#1123).
01 CONTACT SENSE 1#32811. This card contains contact sensing circuits and screw terminals for customer connection of eight
digital input signals to Digital Input Group (#3289 in 5012 and
5013) or Process Interrupt (#5710 in 5012 or 5013). One side of
each contact sense point is connected to a common 48 volts DC to
provide contact sensing capability. No provision is made to add
components.
01 CONTACT SENSE NON-ISOLATED (#3280). This card contains contact sensing circuits and screw terminals for customer
connection of eight digital input signals to Digital Input NonIsolated (#3292) in the 5012 or 5013. One side of each contact
sense point is connected to a common 48 volt DC to provide contact sensing capability. No provision is made to add components.
01 CUSTOM 1#3282).
This card contains screw terminals for
customer connection of eight digital input signals to Digital Input
Group (#3289 in 5012 or 5013). Digital Input Non-Isolated (#3292
in 5012 or 5013). or Process Interrupt (#5710 in 5012 or 5013).
Solder terminals are provided for customer addition of networks to
each point to complete the connection. This card should be used
where the customer desires to use digital input networks of his
own design.
01 VOLTAGE SENSE 1#3283). This card contains circuits and
screw terminals for customer connection of eight digital input
signals to Digital Input Group (#3289 in 5012 or 5013) or Process
Interrupt (#5710 in 5012 or 5013). No provision is made to add
components on this card.
DO CONNECTOR (#3410i. This card contains screw terminals
for direct customer connection of eight digital output signals to DO
Low Power Group 1#3421 in 5012 or 5013). DO Medium Power
Group (#3422 in 5012 or 5013). DO Medium Power Non-Isolated
(#3424 in 5012 or 5013). or DO Contact Group (#3420 in 5012 or
5013). No provision is made to add components.
DO CUSTOM 1#34301. This card contains screw terminals for
customer connection of eight digital output signals to DO Low
Power Group (#3421 in 5012 or 5013), DO Medium Power Group
(#3422 in 5012 or 5013). DO Medium Power Non-Isolated (#3424
in 5012 or 5013), or DO Contact Group (#3420 in 5012 or 5013).
Solder terminals are provided for the customer addition of networks
to each point.
VOLTAGE CHECK 1#11841.
This card provides seven voltage
outputs of either polarity suitable for use as an analog input checking source. The card can be plugged into a specific socket and
wired to one analog input point at a time to be used as a program
addressable voltage check source. The following voltage are provided: 4 volts. 512 millivolts, 128 millivolts. 64 millivolts. 32 millivolts. 15 millivolts, and 5 millivolts.
Not to be reproduced without written permisSion.
DP Machines
5029 Mdl 1 Attachment Accessories for System/7
Accessories Prices:
Feature Purchase
AI Custom
#1110
AI/MR Filter
1113
AI/MR RBT/Filter
1114
AI/MS Connector
1122
AI/MS Non-Polarized Filter
1121
AI/MS Polarized Filter
1124
AI/MS RBT/Non-Polarized Filter 1123
1570
Capacitor Non-Polarized 10UF
Connector. 3-Pin
1240
Connector.4-Pin
8185
Current Resistor 4-20 MA
1670
Current Resistor 10-50 MA
1671
01 Contact Sense
3281
01 Contact Sense Non-Isolated 3280
01 Custom
3282
01 Voltage Sense
3283
00 Connector
3410
00 Custom
3430
Voltage Check Card
1184
M 5029.2
May 79
(cont'd)
$ 30.00
28.00
144.00
35.00
71.00
52.00
217.00
7.00
3.50
4.00
4.00
2.50
39.00
68.00
39.00
37.00
28.00
36.00
70.00
Note: Specifications stated in the sales manual are a generalized
description of the system features. Detail specifications for
System/7 Sensor I/O features must be quoted or proposed from
the latest revision of the IBM System/7 Installation Manual - Physical Planning. GA34-0004.
Sensor I"PUt/Output Features
TABLE 1
Analog
External ~nalog
Digital
Input
Sync
Input
(DI)
(AI)
~utPUt
(AO)
Digit.1
Output
(DO)
2790
Control
5029 ATTACHMENT ACCESSORIES FOR SYSTEM/7
Components Required to
Connect to each Sensor
I"put/Output Feature
Analog
Input (AI)
Termination
Cards
~
~
&oE
U
AIIMR Filter (iI<1113)
AIIMR RBT/Filter (iI< 1114)
AI Custom (iI< 1110)
AIIMS Connector (iI< 1122)
AIIMS Non·Polarized Filter (iI< 112l)
AIIMS Polarized (iI< 11241
AIIMS RBT/Non·Polarized Filter (iI< 1123)
Total - Maximum Cards oer AI GrauD
4
4
1
(Used with Temperature Reference Attachment)
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
AICurre"t
Current Resistor4-20MA 1#1670)
4
16
16
4
16
Resistors
Current Resistor 10-50MA (iI<1671)
4
16
16
4
16
(Used with Temperature Reference Attachment)
~________+-~T~o~ta~I~M~a~xi~m~u~m~R~e~s~is~to~rs~~~r~A~I~G~r0~u~P~__~_4~~_'~6~+-~16~+-~4~+,1~6~~____~~__-r~__+-__-+____+-__-1~__-r____t----;
01 Contact Sense 1'1132Bl1
01 Termination Cards
2
01 Contact Sense Non-Isolated (,*,3280)
01 Voltage Sense (iI< 3283)
Of Custom (11' 32821
DOTermination Cards
2
Total Maximum Cards per 01 Group
DO Connector (I/< 341 O)
DO Custom (iI<34301
Total Maximum Cards per DO Group
2
I
Connector,3'pin (f/: 1240)
Connectors
Connector. 4 Pin (iII~
Use of the "underscore" in conjunction with another character will
overprint the lowest matrix dot forming that character and is not
recommended. Refer to SRL GA24-3488 for form design considerations and limitations.
Model 1 - has a pin feed platen, which feeds marginally punched
continuous forms 13-7/8" wide (hole-to-hoie), provides single
space forms indexing under program control, and has high speed
tab left. Up to 6-part forms can be printed, with a maximum thickness of .018" (for optimum feeding and stacking, no more than 3
parts are recommended). Forms length can be 3" to 14" in increments of 1/6". Card stock continuous forms are not recommended. An optional forms stand stacker is available ... see
"Accessories" below.
Performance Conslderatlona -- an analysis of each document type
to be printed is necessary to find actual throughput of a serial
printer. When used with dedicated printing jobs, throughput depends upon the ratio (R) of lines printed per page to the maximum
number of lines available per page and upon the number of character positions (C) in the printed line. Lines printed per minute
(LPM) can be approximated using formulas:
For Modell
LPM =
2700 g where C is average number
RC
...
EXAMPLE:
+
5
01 character positions.
For Modell. " 22 01 66 lines on a page are printed, R
= 1 /3. Assume a maximum line length 01 75 character
positions.
2700(1/3)_
Then: LPM = 1/3(75)
.
+ 5 - 30 (approxImate
throughput)
Prerequialtes: An integrated 5213 Printer mdl
(# 4692) on the 3115 or 3125 Processing Unit.
1 Attachment
Limitations: Only one printer can be attached to a 3115 or 3125
Processing Unit.
.
Suppllea: Serial #12000 and below (mdl 1) - a black ribbon, IBM
Part No. 1136906 or equivalent, is recommended. Serial # 12001
and above (mdl 1) -- a black ribbon, IBM Part No. 1136970 or
equivalent, is recommended
Bibliography: GC20-8080
Specify: Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V,
or #9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
PRICES:
5213
Mdl
Speed (Read/Punch/Print)
Al
A2
250/60/60' cpm
500/120/120' cpm
• Print Speed: Is at the maximum rate of 60 or 120 cards per
minute on any or all of the first three lines. Printing on the
fourth (lower) line will cause reduction in throughput regardless
of whether or not printing occurs on any or all of the first three
lines. Resultant throughput is 48 cpm for a model A1 and 96
cpm for a model A2.
Highlights: Provides the combined functions of a card reader,
punch, collator and interpreter in one unit. Permits collating,
gangpunching, reproducing, summary punching, punching of
calculated results, printing, and classifying of cards in a single
pass of the cards. Card sorting is also possible using a multiple
pass method under program control.
Input Section: Separate primary and secondary card hoppers,
each with a 2,000 card capacity, feed cards independently to a
common read station and on into separate wait stations. Depending upon the model, rated serial reading is at 250 or 500 cards
per minute from either hopper. The common reading unit is
checked for proper functioning on each read cycle. The card code
read is 6 rows consisting of B, A, 8, 4, 2, 1 punches representing
a 64-ch!lracter set.
Output Section: From separate wait stations, cards are fed to a
common punch station, through the punch and cornering stations
to the print station, where up to 4 lines with up to 32 characters
per line can be printed on the card. Line designation is determined by the stored program. Characters represented are the
standard 64 character set corresponding to the 96-column card
code. Printing is by engraved typewheel. Cards are then selected
into any of the 4 stackers, each with a 600-card capacity. Depending upon the model, rated serial punching is at 60 or 120
cards/minute.
Multi-function: With the ability to move cards from either hopper
under independent control to the punching station and with complete stacker seiection flexibility, the common card functions of
collating, reproducing, gang punching, summary punching, and
selective stacking can be accomplished.
Maximum: One 5424 mdl A1 or A2 can be attached to an 4331
Processor.
Prerequisites: A 5424 Attachment (#3901) on the 4331 ... 4331
Attachment (#6510) on the 5424 itself. See "Special Features"
below.
Llmltationa:
1. Detailed disclosure specifications describing the 96-coumn
card are available from the IBM Corp., Commercial Development Office, Armonk, New York. Card conflgur3tions or card
stocks which do not conform to these specifications may result
in unsatisfactory machine performance. The configurations
available from IBM
.
2.
OCR type font for use with current line IBM Optical Character
Reading Equipment is not available.
MAC/
MRC
Purcahae
MMMC
Suppllea: The 5424 uses a cassette ribbon replaceable by the
customer
$ 179
$4,115
$ 66
Bibliography: Reference Manuai, GA21-9167 (Available 3/79)
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: Base Unit (meter on 3115 or 3125)
Maintenance: B
Purchase Option: 40% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 2
Warranty: B
Acceaaorlea: The following item is available on a purchase only
basis. For shipment with machine, order the Feature # indicated
below at the price listed in M 10000 pages. See M 10000 for
additional information and field installation.
SPECIFY
•
Voltage (AC, l-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208 V, or
#9904 for 230 V. Must be consistent with system voltage ..
•
Color: #9066 for pearl white ... must be specified.
PRICES:
5424
[Mdl 1 only] Permits
FORMS STAND STACKER (#4450).
placement of continuous forms (out of carton) on the stand
above floor level and provides for continuous forms stacking
after printing.
Mdl
A1
A2
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
$376
565
$7,810
10,340
MMMC
$185
268
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 2
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 35% Useful Life Category: 2
Model Changea: Field Install able.
t
No Educational Allowance:
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
----
- -----=- =- -----= ':' =
M 5424 - 5425
--
Mav 79
DP Machines
5424 Multi-Function Card Unit (conl'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
4331 ATTACHMENT (#6510). To attach a 5424 mdl A1 or A2 to
an 4331 Processor. Prerequillte: 5424 Attachment (#3901) on
the 4331. Maximum; One. Field Inltallatlon: Not recommended.
MAC/
MRC
Special Feature Prlcel
4331 Attachment
#6510 $60
Purchale MMMC
$2,670
$6
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
ETP/
MLC
2 yrs
5425
A1
A2
$748
974
$837
829
Purchase
$15,580
18,980
IBM 5425 MULTI-FUNCTION CARD UNIT
A1
A2
$215
424
Plan Offering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 10%
Metering: I/O Unit (Online)
Warranty: B
Maintenance: C
Purchase Option: 35% Useful Life Category: 2
Per Call: 2
Model/Feature Additional Charge In lieu of AU Charge: 10%
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 0%
Purpose: A multi-function card input/output unit for a 5/370 mdl
115. 125 ... uses the 96-column card.
Model
MMMC
Speed (Read/Punch/Print)
250/60/60' cpm
500/120/120' cpm
Model Changes: Field installable.
Highlights: Provides the combined functions of a card reader,
punch, collator and interpreter in one unit. Permits collating. gangpunching, reproducing, summary punching, punching of calculated
results, printing, and classifying of cards In a single pass of the
cards. Card sorting Is also possible using a multiple pass method
under program control.
Input Section - separate primary and secondary card hoppers.
each with a 2000-card capacity. feed cards Independently to a
common read station and on into separate walt stations. DependIng upon the model, rated serial reading is at 250 or 500
cards/minute from either hopper. The common reading unit is
checked for proper functioning on each read cycle. The card code
read on both models Is B rows of D. C. B. A. B. 4, 2, 1 punches
representing a 256-character set.
Output Section - from separate walt stations, cards are fed to a
common punch station. through the punch and cornering stations.
to the print station. where up to 4 lines with up to 32 characters
per line can be printed on the card. Line designation is determined
by the stored program. Characters represented are the standard
64-character set corresponding to the 6-bit subset of the 96column card code. Printing is by engraved typewheel. Cards are
then selected into anyone of 4 stackers. each with a 600-card
capacity. Depending upon the model, rated serial punching Is at
60 or 120 cards/minute.
Note: Punching Is eight rows representing a 256-character set.
Eight-row punching In columns 33-96 can overpunch print
positions 65-12B.
Multi-function - with the ability to move cards from either hopper
under independent control to the punching stations and with complete stacker selection flexibility. the common card functions of
collating, reproducing, gangpunching, summary punching. and
selective stacking can be accomplished.
• Print Speed -- is at the maximum rate of 60 or 120
cards/minute when printing on any or all of the first three lines.
Printing on the fourth (lower) line will cause some reduction in
throughput regardless of whether or not printing occurs on any or
all of the first three lines. Resultant throughput is 48 cpm for mdl
A1 and 96 cpm for mdl A2. Uses a casette ribbon replaceable by
the customer
Maximum: One 5425 mdl A1 or A2 can be attached to a 5/370
mdl 115 or 125.
Prerequisites: An Integrated 5425 Attachment (#4695) with
#9183 specified for mdl A1 or #9184 for mdl A2 on the 3115 or
3125.
Limitations: [1] Detailed disclosure specifications describing the
96-column card are available from the IBM Corp., Commercial
Development Office, Armonk. New York. Card configurations or
card stocks which do not conform to these specifications may
result is unsatisfactory machine performance. The configurations
available from IBM
[2] OCR type font for use with current line IBM optical character
reading equipment is not available.
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC. 3-phase, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue.
#9045 for gray, or #9048 for white ... must be consistent with
3115 or 3125.
[reverse side Is blank]
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
._----------
- - =--=- =---':' =
M 5496.1
May 79
DP Machines
5496 DATA RECORDER
PRICES
5496
Purpose: An operator oriented key entry unit used to create the
96-column card as well as verify data which has been previously
recorded.
For use with System/3, 3740 System or 5320, see GSD
manual.
Model 1
Rated card read speed 20 columns per second.
Model 2
Rated card speed 60 columns per second. Minus
right adjust standard.
When equipped with a 2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850), the
model 1 can be attached to a 2770 Data Communication System
for transmission and punching of 96 column card data or can be
attached to a 3741 Data Station/Programmable Work Station as
an auxiliary card reader.
When equipped with a 3735 Attachment (#7801), the model 1 can
be attached to a 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal for transmissions, reading, and punching of 96-column card data.
Highlights: Buffered, key entry, punch and print areas ... 64character keyboard ... auto skipping ... automatic duplicating at
electronic speeds .. four program levels ... right adjust, size of
field can be 96 columns ... field erase ... word erase ... record
erase ... upper, lower and numeric shift control... punches and
prints at 20 columns per tier per second, equivalent to 60 characters per second ... engraved printing ... reading via photosensors
... backlighted, easy-to-read column indicator ... hopper and stacker capacity of 350 cards ... 410 square inch reading board work
area ... rotational keyboard mobility... auxiliary duplication is a
standard operation ... feed check light indicates card misfeed or
card jam ... stacker-full light.
AlphabetiC, numeric and special character recording in cards can
be key verified on the same machine.
Notches verified correct cards on trailing edge of card ... manually
skipped columns verified as blanks ... programmed or manually
keyed auto verified fields will be verified ... programmed skipped
fields will not be verified for content ... right adjust fields are
programmable for testing proper number of blanks inserted .. .
when an error is detected, keyboard locks and error light is lit .. .
depressing error reset unlocks keyboard ... after third try on column in error, memory is changed to reflect corrected data ... at
end of corrected field, control reverts to first manual column of
corrected field for reverification ... completion of proper verify
routine allows blank cards to be manually inserted in hopper and
repunch operation provides a corrected card with verify notch.
Incorrect card will be stacked without notching. Proper card formatting will enhance throughput when verifying ... see Operator's
Guide for details.
A cassette ribbon provides for rapid and easy operator installation
A card gauge is provided without additional charge with each Data
Recorder.
limitation: Detailed disclosure specifications describing the 96column card are available from the IBM Corp., Commercial Development Office, Armonk, New York. Card configurations or card
stocks which do not conform to these specifications may result in
unsatisfactory machine performance. The configurations available
from IBM
Manual: GA21-9086
Specify: [1] Voltage (115 V AC, 1-phase, 60 Hz, non-lock plug):
#9881.
[2] When ordered as a component of a 2770 system,
2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850) is required ... see
"Special Features."
[3] When ordered for attachment to a 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal, 3735 Attachment (#7801) is required ... see
"Special Features."
[4]
When
ordered
for attachment
to
a 3741
Data
Station/Programmable Work Station, 2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850) is required ... see "Special Features."
[5] Print Wheel Arrangement: Slash-zero is the standard numeric
character. If a non-slash zero (0) is desired, specify #9490.
See Type Catalog TC 1 for field installation charge.
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
1
2
$203
210
$4,005
4,135
$59.50
61.50
Plan Offering: Plan B
Warranty: B
Purchase Option: 40%
Useful Life Category: 2
Maintenance: C
Per Call: 1
Model Changes: Model 1, with serial number 51221 or above, can
be field upgraded to a Model 2.
SPECIAL FEATURES
8-BIT READ/PUNCH (#3666). [Model 1 only] Provides offline
capability to punch special 8-bit coded characters in 96-column
cards. Dependent on C/O-Bit switch setting, 5496 operates in
either conventional System/3 6-bit mode or Special 8-bit mode.
C/O switch ON permits 96-column cards punched with 256character set to be read into storage for subsequent punchout
(duplication) or manual keyboard entry of combined bit structures
to generate special 8-bit coded characters. Keyboard generated
characters utilize the multi-punch key method. 8-bit characters are
not printable regardless of print switch setting.
In verify, the 8-bit mode of operation is inhibited regardless of the
C /D-Bit switch setting, thereby preventing the verification of 8-bit
coded characters.
Limitation: Cannot be installed on machines equipped with
System/3 Model 6 Attachment (#7501), 3735 Attachment
(#7801), or 2772/3741/5320 Attachment (#7850). Field
Installation: Not recommended.
SELF-CHECKING NUMBER (#7061, 7062). Provides a means of
verifying precoded alphameric information at the same time it is
punched. Use of the feature requires that a check digit be added
to the basic code number to produce a self-check number. The
check digit is always placed in the units pOSition of a selfchecking number. More than one self-checking field can be
checked per card. Correctly keyed cards are identified by "B" bit
punch in the space adjacent to column 32 of tier 1. Self-checked
fields bypassed via skip key depression will not carry the "B" bit
punch in the specified location. One of two versions of the feature
can be installed:
#7061 - Modulus 10 ... factors (X2, X1 applied to alternate
positions) are the arithmetic weighting factors used to
arrive at the Modulus 10 check digit.
#7062 - Modulus 11 ... factors (X7, X6, X5, X4, X3, X2 applied
in that order) are the arithmetic weighting factors used to
arrive at the Modulus 11 check digit.
Limitations: Neither version will operate on a left-based number ...
Self-check numbers of Modulus 10 are not compatible with those
of Modulus 11.
SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6/5230 ATTACHMENT (#7501).
only) See GSD
manual for details and prices.
(Model 1
3735 ATTACHMENT (#7801).
[Model 1 only] To attach the
5496 to the 3735 Programmable Buffered Terminal. Operation is
under switch control on the 5496. When in "Terminal" pOSition,
the 5496 may be used as either a card reader or a card punch for
punching of 96-column card data at 20 columns per tier per second, equivalent to 60 characters per second ... when in manual
position, the 5496 operates as a standard machine. Maximum:
One. Limitation: Cannot be installed with 8-Bit Read/Punch
(#3666). Specify: If desired, #9674 for ASCII print wheel and
keytops ... otherwise standard print wheel and key tops will be
supplied. [Available at time of manufacture only] Prerequisite:
5496 Attachment (#3950) on the 3735. Note: Signal cable and
connector required to attach a 5496 to a 3735 are included with
#3950 on the 3735.
.
2772/3741/5320 ATTACHMENT (#7850). [Model 1 only] Provides the ability to attach the 5496 Data Recorder mdl 1 to the
2772
Multi-Purpose
Control
Unit
or
the
3741
Data
Station/Programmable Work Station or to any model 5320. Operation is under switch control on the 5496. When in manual position,
the 5496 operates as a standard machine. When in "Terminal"
pOSition, the 5496 may be used either as a card reader or as a
card punch for punching of 96-column card data. Attached online
to the 2772, the 5496 reads, punches, or punch/prints card data
at 20 columns per tier per second, equivalent to 60 characters per
second. Attached online to the 3741, the 5496 reads, punches or
punch/prints cards under control 'ofthe 3741 at the following
rated speeds: Card reading - 21 cards per minute .. , punch/print
- 17 cards per minute.' Maximum: One. Limitation: Cannot be
installed with 8-Bit Read/Punch (#3666). [Available at time of
manufacture only] Specify: When ordered as a component of a
2770 system, if desired, specify #9674 for ASCII print wheel and
keytops ... otherwise standard print wheel and keytops will be
supplied. Prerequisite: 5496 Attachment (#3970) on the 2772 or
Data Recorder Attachment (#3200) on the 3741. Note: A signal
cable and connector required to attach a 5496 to a 2772 is included in #3970 on the 2772. A 25 foot cable and connector
required to attach a 5496 to a 3741 is included in #3200 on the
3741.
Not to be reprOduced without written permission.
===-= =
:i: ~~i
M 5496.2
May 79
DP Machines
5496 Data Recorder (cont'd)
MAC/
MRC Purcha.. MMMC
Special Feature Prlcea
8-Blt Read/Punch
#3868 $38 $ 783 $1.50
Self-Checklng Number
Modulu810
7081
38
474
1.00
7082
38
474
1.00
Modulu811
7801
4.50
3735 Attachment
55 1,180
18.50
2772/3741/5320 Attach 7850
55 1,180
FIC
•
82
82
PO
PO
SPECIAL FEATURE COMBINATIONS - maximum combinations.
Indicated by "X". are shown In vertical columns.
• Not reIXlmmended for field installation.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- -----------
--
==-=~=
M 7330 - 7770
'May 79
DP Machines
7330 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT
• The following specifications can be changed in the field.
the 7770, are to be paid by the customer ... [3] DP Marketing
Representative must have customer obtain firm installation date for
transmission service before processing the OC card ... [4] 7770
Vocabulary Specification Sheet
must be completed
and submitted at least 90 days prior to installation.
[1] Voltage (AC, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz): #9903 for 208 V, or
#9905 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system voltage.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
Programming Support - programming systems support is 'covered
under DOS and OS TCAM ... see "Programming."
Prerequisites: A control unit position on a system multiplexer
channel ... one subchannel per input/output line.
7770 AUDIO RESPONSE UNIT
Purpose: Provides a composed audio response to a digital inquiry
from a 1001 Data Transmission Terminal, a telephone set, or other
inquiry type terminal to a field-oriented S/360 mdl 22, 25, 30, 40,
50, 65, 75, 85, 195 or any S/370 Processor, or any 4300
Processor.
S/360 mdl 25 -- Multiplexer Channel (#5248) ... see 2025.
S/360 mdl 22, 30, 40, 50 - multiplexer channel (standard)
see 2022, 2030, 2040, 2050.
S/360 mdl 65, 75, 85, 195, or S/370 mdl 165, 168, 195 -basic multiplexer channel of 2870 ... see 2870.
S/370 mdl 115, 125 -- Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ...
see 3115, 3125.
Highlights: Connects a data processing system with telephone
and other inquiry type terminals through common carrier data sets
over appropriate communication services. The 7770 receives an
inquiry consisting of a series of coded characters from the inquiry
terminal.
S/370 mdl 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 148 - multiplexer
channel (standard) ... see 3135, 3135-3, 3138, 3145, 3145-3,
3148.
The inquiry message and the response message are transmitted
between the 7770 and the processing unit character-by-character
under program control. There is no limitation on the length of the
inquiry or response message. Other major characteristics are:
3031, 3032 Processor - byte multiplexer channel ( one is standard) ... see 3031, 3032.
Conversational Mode Operation under program control - inquiryanswer sequence may be repeated any number of times within the
same call without re-dialing the 7770 for each inquiry.
S/370 mdl 155, 158 - multiplexer channel (standard), 2nd Byte
Multiplexer Channel (special feature) ... see 3155, 3158.
3033 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (two are standard) ...
see 3033.
4331 Processor - byte multiplexer channel (special feature) ...
see 4331.
End of Inquiry (EO I) Character Recognition - terminals such as
the 1001 and 2730, and some push-buttont dialing devices are
capable of sending an EOI code which over-rides the 5-second
inter-digital timeout used, in the 7770. EOI Disable (#3540) can
be ordered if the customer prefers that the EOI character on the
push-button dialing device not be used for this function ... see
"Special Features."
Bibliography: GC20-0001
Primary Character Timeout Disconnect -- the 7770 answers an
incoming call and waits 32 seconds for the first inquiry character
to appear ... if it does not appear within this time, the call is abandoned, releasing the line for other service.
[2] Color: #9041 for red, #9042 for yellow, #9043 for blue, or
#9045 for gray.
Inquiry characters are sent to the processor for translation and 99
codes are recognizeable. For valid codes, see SRL GA27 -2712.
Vocabulary -- a 32-word American English vocabulary is provided
with the basic 7770. This can be expanded,in 16-word increments, to up to 128 words ... see "Special Features." One word
of the vocabulary must be silence. Words may be specified by the
customer according to message requirements. However, lengthy
words must be split and will count as two words. See SRL
GA27-2712 for guidance in word selection. For field vocabulary
modifications, a replacement rotor will be shipped from the plant.
Input/Output Lines - the basic unit handles up to four lines. The
number of lines can be expanded in 4-line increments to 48 lines
... see "Special Features." Random inquiries on all input/output
lines can be responded to simultaneously.
Configurations - see the chart following "Special Features" for
various combinations and number of input/output lines possible,
and the special features required for them.
Communications -- the 7770 will operate with:
(a) 1001 Data Transmission Terminal
(b) Rotary dial telephone with associated push-buttont manual
dialing device for inquiry
(c) Rotary dial telephone with associated push-buttont type
card dialer device for inquiry
(d) Push-buttont manual dial telephonett
(e) Push-buttont type card dialer telephonett
(f) Rotary dial telephonettt
(g) Rotary dial card dialer telephonettt
Communication Facilities -- operates in half-duplex mode over
common carrier switched telephone network ... common carrier
leased private line switched telephone service ... privately owned
communication networks of voice bandwidth. When operating over
a switched telephone network, telephone lines should be ordered
for receive-only service, with make-busy capability in the data set.
Customer Responsibilities - the customer must. be advised that:
[1] He is responsible for price quotations, installation and cost
(initial and recurring) of common carrier equipment and services ...
[2] Toll charages, if required for installation and maintenance of
4341 Processor 4341.
byfe multiplexer channel (standard) ... see
Specify: [1] Voltage (AC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz): #9902 for 208
V, or #9904 for 230 V ... must be consistent with system
voltage.
[3] Vocabulary Words: Submit completed Vocabulary Specification
Sheet ,~
at least 90 days prior to installation ... for
guidance in word selection, see SRLGA-27-2712.
[4] Isolation, Control Unit: May be required on units shipped prior
to December 29, 1967 ... see "Special Features."
PRICES:
Mdl
MAC/
MRC
Purchase
MMMC
7770
3
$1,295
$48,370
$52.50
PIa,nOffering: Plan A, Additional Use Charge Rate: 30%
Metering: Assignable Unit
Warranty: B
Maintenance: B
Per Call: 3
Purchase Option: 55%
SPECIAL FEATURES
Allows EOI character of some
EOI DISABLE (#3540).
push-buttont dialer devices to be used as a data character instead of an EOI character. Maximum: .one.
I/O LINE 'FRAME (#4668).
Required if more than sixteen
input/output lines are to be attached. Maximum: One.
I/O LINE EXPANDED (#4677).
Provides for four additional
input/output lines. Maximum: Eleven.
I/O LINE PANEL (#4879).
An additional panel for eight
input/output lines or portion thereof. One is required for each
increment of eight lines, or portion thereof, added beyond the first
eight lines. Maximum: Five.
ISOLATION, CONTROL UNIT (#4700). [For field installation on
units shipped prior to December 29, 1967 ... standard on units
shipped after that.] To turn power on or off on the 7770 without
generating spurious signals. Thus a CPU, if it can be logically
disconnected' from the system before power' is turned off, can
continue operating. Prerequisite:
in all cases there are
compatible EC level requirements,
For example: TOUCH-TONE, trademark of Bell System, or
Touch-Calling, term used by General Telephone System.
tt Limited to areas served by telephone company central offices
equipped for push-button dialing.
ttt This Is not a standard telephone company offering. If technically feasible for: local conditions, it may 'be offered ona
special assembly basis at discretion of a local telephone
company using a telephone dictation trunk device suitably
modified for this purpose.
t
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- --=-- =------ --=--':' =
(vi
DP Machines
7770 Audio Response Unit
(cont'd)
VOCABULARY WORDS, ADD'L (#8721). Each adds 16 vocabulary words. See SRL GA27-2712 for vocabulary word selection.
When ordered for field installation, a replacement rotor is shipped
from the plant. Maximum: Six #8721 s, for a maximum of 128
words on a 7770.
Special Feature Prices:
MAC/
MRC Purchase MMMC
FIC
EOI Disable
#3540
4668
I/O Line Frame
I/O Line Expanded
4677
4679
I/O Line Panel
4700
Isolation, Control Unit
Vocabulary Words, Add'i 8721
NC
NC
NC
$217 $8,065 $ 3.00
7,065 16.50
190
81
3,020 2.50
NC
NC
NC
108
4,030
3.00
$ 11
137
344
119
NC
166
7770 CONFIGURATION CHART ... Maximum Feature Configuration
Table.
FUlures Re-qulre4
#4677
#4679
#4668
,.-
...
1
Line Groll
'·11
1),,16
17·10
U·14
2
1
3
4
2
1
5
As~-,-n_t
,. '"
6
3
19-31
JJ-36
37...
7
8
4
9
., .....
....
10 11
5
M ... No. FeaturcsAllowecl
11
5
1
Not to be .reproduced without written permission.
.7770
r.13y
79
M 8101.1
Jul 79
DP Machines
Loop Accessories and Wire: See M 10000 pages for pricing and
ordering instructions.
IBM 8101 STORAGE AND INPUT /OUTPUT
UNIT
Purpose: Provides additional disk storage and device attachment
capability for the 8100 Information System.
Model Al0
Device attachment capability
Model All
29MB (29,327,360 bytes) - movable heads only
and device attachments
Model A13
64MB (64,520,192 bytes) - movable heads only
and device attachments
Maximum: Two per 8100 Information System with a 8130 Process:Jr. One of the 81015 may be configured with Communication
or Display/Printer features Type I or Type II. Four with an 8140
Processor. Two of the 8101 s may be configured with Communication or Display/Printer features Type I or Type II. The maximum is
one if the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 B is attached to the
8130 Processor or three if the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1B is
attached to the 8140 Processor. See Table 2 for 8100 System
maximums.
Highlights: The 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit provides
additional disk storage and device attachment capabilities for the
8100 Information System. The 8101 attaches to the I/O bus of the
81 30 or 8140 Processor.
Disk storage for the 8101 mdls A 11 and A 13 is provided by a
non-removable high speed direct access storage. Depending on
the model selected, disk storage of up to 64 million bytes with
movable heads is available. The disk storage operates at a data
rate of 1,031,000 bytes per second. The average access time is
27 milliseconds with an average rotational delay of 9.6 milliseconds. Removable diskette storage of 1 MB (985,088) is available
and operates at up to 62K bytes per second data rate. The diskette drive can read/write in basic data exchange format on either
the IBM Diskette 20 or the IBM Diskette Type 1.
The 8100 System can attach to any S/370 or 4300 Processor via
the 3704/3705 for SNA/SDLC or BSC line control. The 8100
System can attach to the ICA of the S/370 mdl 115, 125, 135 or
138 processors for BSC line control. The IBM 8100 System can
attach to the Communications Adapter of the 4331 Processor for
BSC and/or SDLC line control.
The 8101 extends the capability of the 8100 Information System
by providing for the attachment of a variety of input/output devices. These devices consist of displays, printers, magnetic tape,
controllers and data collection units. The devices may be attached
to the 8101 loops, data link attached loops, communication ports
or direct attachment to the 8101.
Communication Attached devices - Devices that can be attached
to the communication ports of the 8101 are the - 3276 Control
Unit Display Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13, 14 with 3278
Display Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 3287 Printer mdls 1, 2 and 3289
Line Printer mdls 1, 2 - 3631 Plant Communication Controller
mdls 1 A, 1 B - 3632 Plant Communication Controller mdl 1 A, 1 B 8775 Display Terminal mdls Jl and 12 -- 3767 Communication Terminal mdls 1, 2, 3 -- 3842 Loop Control Unit - 2741 Communications Terminal -- TTY 33/35 or equivalent - non-IBM terminals
conforming to 2780/3780 protocol - 8130 Processor -- 8140
Processor -- 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit.
Loop Attached Devices at 2400 or 9600 bps - Devices that can
be attached to a direct attached loop at 9600 bps or data link
attached loop at 2400 bps are the - 3287 Printer mdls 11, 12 3289 Printer mdl 3 with 3501 Card Reader and via the 3782 Card
Attachment Unit the 3521 Card Punch and 2502 Card Reader mdl
A 1 (see Note 1) - 3276 Control Unit Display Station mdls 11, 12,
13, 14 with 3278 Display Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 3287 Printer
mdls 1, 2, 3289 Line Printer mdls 1, 2 -- 8775 Display Terminal
mdls 11 and 12 - 3641 Reporting Terminal mdls 1, 2 -- 3642 Encoder Printer mdls 1, 2 - 3643 Keyboard Display mdls 2, 3, 4 3644 Automatic Data Unit -- 3645 Printer -- 3646 Scanner Control
Unit -3647 Time and Attendance Terminal.
Loop Attached Devices at 38,400 bps - Devices that can be
attached to a direct attached loop at 38,400 bps are the - 3287
mdls 11 and 12, 8775 Display Station mdls II and 12.
Direct Attached Devices -- Devices that can be attached directly
to the 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit are the - 3277 Display
mdls 1, 2 - 3284 Printer mdls 1, 2 - 3286 Printer mdls 1, 2 -3287 Printer mdls 1, 2 - 3288 Line Printer - 8809 MagnetiC
Tape Unit mdl 1 A.
NOTE I: Dedication of a 9600 bps single lobe loop to the attachment of the
3289 md! 3 printer should be considered in cases where the printer will be
heavily utilized.
Customer Set-up (CSU): The 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit
is designated as customer set-up thereby offering the customer
early availability and relocation flexibility. Aids and configurators
are provided to enable the 8101 to be properly ordered and configured. Set-up procedures for the customer will be shipped with
each machine. An 8101 installation verification program will be
shipped with each machine on a diskette. A clear indication that
the machine is operational will be given.
If the user relocates and / or interchanges attaching units from one
system to another, the user must consider priority and address
compatibility of the processor and its attachments.
Prerequisites: 8130 or 8140 Processor for mdls A10, A11 or A13.
The 8101 model A10 requires one Display and Printer Attachment
Type I (#9941) or Communication Attachment Type I (#9943).
Bibliography: Available at a later date.
Color: Pebble gray is the only color available.
Specify: [1] Voltage (120 VAC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): Specify
#9891 for non-lock plug or #9890 for locking plug. If 4.3
meter (14 tt) cable is not desired, specify #9986 for 1.8 meter
(6 ft) cable.
[2]
Cabling: For cabling information see Accessories pages
(M10000), appropriate 8100 System installation manuals and
Processor Site Preparation Guides.
[3] Processor Attachment: Specify #9931 for 8130 Processor or
#9932 for 8140 Processor.
[4] System Attachment: Each 8101 requires a specify code to
identify one of the four sets of I/O addresses. Specify one of
the following codes for each 8101 attaching to the same processor: #9921, #9922, #9923, or #9924.. These specify
codes may be selected in any sequence. Duplicate 'codes are
not permitted within a system. Relocation and/or interchange
of 8101 units from one system to another system requires
checking of the specify codes to avoid duplication.
[5] Device or Communication Attachment: One must be specified
for the 8101 mdl A 10 . The mdl A 10 provides as part of the
basic machine, the capabilities to attach Display/Printer or
Communication facilities. On initial orders for the mdl A 10, one
of these capabilities must be specified. Further expansion of
the mdl A 10 is provided by special features. These same capabilities are provided by special features for the mdls A 11 and
A 13. See Table 1 for additional configuration information.
#9941 -- Display and Printer Attachment Type 1: Provides, in
conjunction with feature # 1505 and # 1506, the
capability for the attachment of 3277 Display, 3287
Printer and 3284, 3286 or 3288 Printers in any combination up to a maximum of twenty-four.
#9943 -- Communication Attachment Type 1: Provides the
capability for the attachment of loops and communication facilities in any combination up to a maximum
of four. Additional special features for line control
communication interface and modems are required to
complete each communication facility selected.
[6] Terminal Requirements: For attachment of 3640 family of
terminals see terminal requirements on the 8130 and/or 8140
Machine pages.
PRICES:
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 yr
8101
Al0
All
A13
$201
477
524
$171
406
446
Purchase
$ 6,500
14,970
16,410
MMMC/
AMMCR
$17.00
55.50
63.50
Rental Plan: Plan 0
Machine Group: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 1
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
Warranty: B
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model upgrade requires replacement of the disk
storage unit. Adequate provisions must be made for retaining data
contained on the disk storage unit and elimination of userproprietary information.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
Field conversion charge for Model Al0 to All Is $ 9,570·
Field conversion charge for Model Al0 to A13 is $11,010·
Field conversion charge for Model All to A 13 is $ 2,500··
• For mdl A lOw /0 #1507 and no chnage in the Type 1 (see
Table 1) feature requirement. Submit an RPQ for all other conversions.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- ----=-- =---- -- =--':' =
M 8101.2
Jul79
DP Machines
8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit (cont'd)
•• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
SPECIAL FEATURES
Performance: The maximum number of Features for Attaching
Communications (FAC) capable of concurrent operation is a function of the speed of the line, the communication facility, the operating system installed and the application work load. The maximum number of communication features which can be physically
installed can exceed the operational capability. Increased processor utilization will result from sustained operation of BSC at the
maximum aggregate data rate and may cause degradation of
activity operating at lower priority levels. Analysis should be performed to determine the impact.
DIagnostics: The 8100 System hardware and feature operation,
diagnostic support and maintenance support described in 8100
System publications are dependent on the presence of functional
support modules provided by Distributed Processing Programming
Executive (DPPX) or Distributed Processing Control Executive
(DPCX). Operational and maintenace conditions for the 8100
System are predicated on the presence of these functional support
modules. Customers ordering 8100 System hardware without
DPPX or DPCX should provide the functional support as contained
and described in the Functional Definition Manual 8100 which will
be available
at FCS.
DISPLAY AND PRINTER ATTACHMENT TYPE I (#1501).
[Mdls
A 11, A 13 only] Provides in conjunction with feature # 1505 and
#1506 the capability for the attachment of 3277 Display, 3287
Printer and 3284, 3286 or 3288 Printers in any combination up to
a maximum of twenty-four. Limitations: Not available with 8101
mdl A 10. Not available with Communication Attachment Type I
(#1503), Communication Attachment Type 1/ (#1504) or Display
and Printer Attachment Type 1/ (# 1502). See Table 1 for additional information. Maximum: One. See Table 2 for 8100 System
maximums. Field Installation: Yes.
DISPLAY AND PRINTER ATTACHMENT TYPE II (#1502).
Provides in conjunction with feature # 1505 and # 1506 the capability
for the attachment of 3277 Display. 3287 Printer and 3284, 3286
or 3288 Printers in any combination up to a maximum of twentyfour. Limitation: Not available with Display and Printer Attachment
Type I (#1501 or #9941) or Communication Attachment Type 1/
(#1504). See Table 1 for additional information. Maximum: One.
See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. FIeld instal/ation: Yes.
For field installation by purchase customer, see Note 2 under
Table 1. Prerequisite: Communication Attachment Type I (#1503
or #9943).
COMMUNICATION ATTACHMENT TYPE I (#1503). [Mdls All,
A 13 only] Provides the capability for the attachment of loops and
communication ports in any combination up to a maximum of four.
Additional special features for line control, communication interface and modems are required to complete each communication
facility selected. Limitations: Not available with 8101 mdl Al0.
Not available with Display And Printer Attachment Type I (#1501).
See Table 1 for additional information. Only available with port
positions one thru four. Maximum: One. See Table 2 for 8100
System maximums. Field installation: Yes. For field installation by
purchase customer. see Note 2 under Table 1.
COMMUNICATION ATTACHMENT TYPE 1/ (#1504). Provides the
capability for the attachment of loops and communication ports in
any combination up to a maximum of four. Additional special
features for line control, communication interface and modems are
required to complete each communication facility selected.
LImItation: Not availab!e with Display and Printer Attachment Type
II (#1502) or Display and Printer Attachment Type I (#1501 or
#9941). See Table 1 for additional information. Only available
with port position five thru eight. MaxImum: One. See Table 2 for
8100 System maximums. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Communication Attachment Type I (#1503 or #9943).
DISPLAY AND PRINTER ADAPTER (#1505).
Provides for the
attachment of the first four 3277 Display, 3287 Printer and 3284,
3286, 3288 Printers. Maximum: One. See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. Field instal/atlon: Yes. Prerequisite: Display And
Printer Attachment Type I or II (# 1501, # 1502 or #9941).
DISPLAY AND PRINTER, ADDITIONAL (#1506).
Provides for
the attachment of additional 3277 Display, 3287 Printer and 3284,
3286 or 3288 Printers in any combination up to a maximum of
four. Maximum: Five. See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums.
Field instailatlon: Yes. Prerequisite: Display And Printer Adapter
(#1505).
TABLE 1
When configuring the 8101 for Display/Printer and Communication
features, the Type I feature requirement should be determined
first. The Type II should then be configured if so required. The
table below shows the combinations of these features that may be
configured.
8101 Mdl Al0
Type I
Type II
#9941
OR
#9943 with #1502 or #1504
8101 Mdl Allor A13
Type I
Type"
#1501
OR
#1503 with #1502 or #1504
NOTE: Purchase customers must submit an RPQ for field installation of
#9943 with #1502 concurrent with removal of #9941 or field installation
of #1503 with #1502 concurrent with removal of #1501.
DISKETTE DRIVE AND MAGNETIC TAPE ATTACHMENT (#1507).
[Mdl A 10 only] Provides the capability for the attachment of one
Diskette 20 Drive (#4520) and one Magnetic Tape Attachment
(#4521). Limitations: Only available with 8101 mdl A10. See
special features #4520 and #4521 for Diskette Drive and Tape
Attachment for the mdl All and A 13. Maximum: One. See Table
2 for 8100 System maximums. Field instal/ation: Yes.
CCITT V.35 INTERFACE (#1550). Provides interface to external
modems/data communication equipment at 56,000 bps or direct
connection at speeds of up to 9600 bps. Maximum: For speeds
up to 9600 bps one per selected communications feature (#1601
or #1602). For operation at 56.000 bps one per 8101 unit, one
per 8100 System. Operation at 56,000 bps is mutually exclusive
with FAC codes 08, 09, and 21 and is not available when the
8101 is attached to the 8130 Processor. Field installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: SDLC Communications with Clock (# 1601) or
SOLC Communications without Clock (#1602) and Multi-speed
Clock (#5200). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in
the "Communication Capabilities" section.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1601).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface, integrated
modems, direct connection and CCITT V'.35 interface. Limitation:
In an 8100 System only ten of these features (#1601 or #1602)
may be active at one time. Maximum: Eight. See Table 2 for 8100
System maximums. The maximum is reduced by one for each
communications feature (#1602, 1603 or 1604) selected. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Communication Attachment Type I
or II (#1503, #1504 or #9943). Specify: Code as provided in
FAC description in the "Communication Capabilities" section.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCK (#1602). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C or Digital
Data Service Adapter (DDSA) interface, CCITT V.35 interface and
Loop Adapter. Limitation: In an 8100 System only ten of these
features (#1601 or #1602) may be active at one time. Maximum:
Eight. See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. The maximum is
reduced by one for each communications feature (# 1601, 1603 or
1604) selected. Field installation: Yes. Pterequlsite: Communication Attachment Type I or " (#1503, #1504 or #9943). Specify:
Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communication
Capabilities" section.
BSC/SS COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1603). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface, integrated
modems or direct connection. limitations: Start/Stop communications are not available with integrated modems. In an 8100 'Systern with a 8130 Processor attached, the maximum aggregate BSC
data rate is 9600 bps and 330 bps for Start/Stop. With an 8140
Processor attached, the maximum aggregate data rate is 19,200
and 660 for Start/Stop. -Maximum: Eight. See Table 2 for 8100
System maximums. The maximum is reduced by one for each
communications feature (#1601, 1602 or 1604) selected. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Communication Attachment Type I
or II (#1503, #1504 or #9943). Specify: Code as provided in
FAC description in the "Communication Capabilities" section.
BSC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1604).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-C or Digital Data
Service Adapter (DDSA) interface and direct connection.
Limitation: In an 8100 System with a 8130 Processor attached,
the maximum aggregate BSC data rate is 9600 bps. With a 8140
Processor attached, the maximum aggregate BSC data rate is
19,200 bps. Maximum: Eight. See Table 2 for 8100 System
maximums. The maximum is reduced by one for each communications feature (# 1601, 1602 or 1603) selected. Field Installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Communication Attachment Type I or II
(#1503, #1504 or #9943). Specify: Code as provided in FAC
description in the "Communication Capabilities" section.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------ - ----
M 8101.3
Jul 79
- - - ----===
':' =
DP Machines
8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit (cont'd)
EIA RS-232-C INTERFACE (#3701). Provides interface to external modems/data communication equipment or direct connection
at speeds of up to 9600 bps. Maximum: One per selected communications feature (#1601,1602,1603 or 1604). Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SDLC Communications with
Business Machine Clock (# 1601). SDLC Communications without
Clock (# 1602). BSC/SS Commuincations with Business Machine
Clock (#1603), BSC Communications without Clock (#1604).
SDLC Communications without Business Machine Clock (#1602)
and Multi-speed Clock (#5200). BSC Communications without
Business Machines Clock (# 1604) and Multi-speed Clock
(#5200). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in the
"Communication Capabilities" section.
DISKETTE 20 DRIVE (#4520).
Provides 1 MB (985.088) of
removable diskette storage for the 8101 mdl A 10, A 11 or A 13
operating at a data rate of up to 62KB per second. Maximum:
One. See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. Field installation:
Yes. Prerequisite: Diskette Drive and Magnetic Tape Attachment
(# 1507) for the mdl A 10.
MAGNETIC TAPE ATTACHMENT (#4521).
Provides for the
attachment to the 8101 mdl A 10, A 11 or A 13 of up to four 8809
Magnetic Tape Units, consisting of one 8809 mdl 1A plus two mdl
2s and one mdl 3. Limitation: Not available if the 8130 or 8140
Processor has the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 B attached.
Maximum: One. See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Diskette Drive and Magnetic Tape
Attachment (# 1507) for the mdl A10.
LOOP ADAPTER (#4830).
Provides for the direct attachment of
a single lobe loop at 9600 or 38,400 bps. Maximum: One per
selected communications feature (# 1602). Only one of these
features may operate at 38,400 bps in an 8100 System. See
Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. The maximum is reduced by
one for each selected communications facility attached to the
8101. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications
without Clock (#1602). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communication Capabilities" section.
LOOP ADAPTER SECOND LOBE (#4835).
Provides for the
attachment of a separate physical loop cable to extend the coverage and availability of the directly attached loop. Maximum: One
per Communication Attachment Type I or II (#1503, #1504 or
#9943). See Table 2 for 8100 System maximums. Field
Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: Loop Adapter (#4830). Specify:
Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communication
Capabilities" section.
MULTI-SPEED CLOCK (#52oo).
Provides business machine
clocking at 4800 bps and 9600 bps for direct connection. Can
provide multiple speeds simultaneously. Maximum: One with
Communication Attachment Type I (# 1503 or #9943) for port
positions one thru four and one with Communication Attachment
Type II (#1504) for port positions five thru eight. See Table 2 for
8100 System maximums. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite:
Communication Attachment Type I or II (#1503, #1504 or
#9943) and either SDLC Communications Feature without Business Machine Clock (#1602) or BSC Communications Feature
without Business Machine Clock (#1604). Specify: Code as
provided in FAC description in the "Communication Capabilities"
section.
MODEM, INTEGRATED, NON-SWITCHED (#55OO).
Provides
interface to common carrier leased facilities at 600 or 1200 bps.
Limitation: Not available for Start/Stop communication facilities.
Maximum: One per selected communications feature (# 1601 or
# 1603). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications with Business Machine Clock (#1601), or BSC/SS Communications with Business Machine Clock (#1603). Specify: Code
as provided in FAC description in the "Communication
Capabilities" section.
MODEM, INTEGRATED, SWITCHED (#5501).
Provides interface
to common carrier switched facilities with auto answer at 800 or
1200 bps. Limitation: Not available with BSC or Start/Stop communication facilities. Maximum: One per selected communications
feature (#1601). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC
Communications with Business Machine Clock (#1601). Specify:
Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communication
Capabilities" section.
DIGITAL DATA SERVICE ADAPTER (DDSA) (#5660). Provides
interface to AT&T Dataphone' Digital Service Network for transfer
of digital data at speeds of 2400, 4800, 9600 bps in point-to-point
or multipoint configurations or 56,000 bps in point-to-point configurations. Maximum: For speeds up to 9600 bps one per
selected communication feature (#1602 or #1604). For operation
at 56,000 bps one per 8101 unit, one per 8100 System. Operation at 56,000 bps is mutually exclusive with FAC codes 08, 09 or
29 and is not available when the 8101 is attached to the 8130
Processor. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SDLC Communications with Clock (#1602) for operation to 56,000 bps or BSC
Communications without Clock (# 1 604) for operation to 9600 bps.
Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in "Communication
Capabilities" section.
SECURITY COVER LOCKS (#6555). This feature provides key
operated security locks for the machine covers, restricting access
to the machine interior and external cable connector area. See
Security Lock Diskette (#6566) if diskette security is required.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SECURITY LOCK, DISKETTE (#6566). This feature provides a
key operated security lock to restrict access to the diskette magnetic media. It is accessible only by opening the front cover. For
maximum security, the Security Cover Lock (#6555) must be used
in addition to the diskette security lock. Additional or replacement
keys are not available from IBM. Maximum: One. Field
installation: Yes.
8100 System Maximums
The following table lists the system maximums common to the
8130, 8140 and 8101. Depending on the processor and special
features selected, these maximums may not be posssible. See the
appropriate Machines pages for additional feature information.
TABLE 2
Machine/
Feature /Function
8101 See Note 3
Disp./Prt. Attach Fea
#1501, #1502, #9941
Display /Printer
Adapter #1505
Add'l #1506
Communications Attach
#1503,9943
Communications Attach
#1504
Diskette Drive •
Tape Attachment
Communication Ports
SDLC, BSC/SS Loop
at 38.4K bps
2nd Lobe #4835
Multi-speed Ciock #5200
System Processor
8130
8140
8140
8140
All
A31-A34 A41-A44 A51-A54
2
4
4
4
1
5
1
5
1
5
1
5
2
2
2
1
1
1
14
2
1
1
19
2
1
1
18
2
1
1
16
1
5
3
1
6
5
1
6
5
1
4
4
NOTE 3: Only one 8101 may have Communication and Display/Printer
features with the 8130 Processor. Only two 8101 units may have Communication and Display/Printer feature with the 8140 Processor.
• One additional Diskette Drive (#4520) is available on a 8101.
Special Feature Prices:
MRC
MLC
2 yr
MMMC/
Purchase AMMCR
Display & Printer Attach
Type I
#1S01 $ 27 $ 23 $ 900
Type II
1S02
13
11
400
Commun Attach Type I
1S03
27
23
900
Commun Attach Type II
1504
13
11
400
Display & Printer Adapter 1S05
75
64
2,300
Display & Printer, Add'i
1506
13
420
'1
Diskette Dr/Tape Attach 1507
27
23
900
CCITT V.35 Interface
15SO
510
15
13
SDLC Communications
w Bus Machine Clock
1601
41
35
900
w/o/Bus Machine Clock 1602
35
30
840
BSC/SS Communications
w Bus Machine Clock
16
1603
19
670
BSC Communications
w /0 Bus Machine Clock 1604
12
10
4SO
EIA RS-232-C Interface
3701
12
10
400
Diskette 20 Drive
4520
94
80
2,880
Magnetic Tape Attach
4521
59
SO
1,800
Loop Adapter
4830
20
17
605
Loop Adapter, 2nd Lobe 4835
17
20
605
Mult-speed Clock
5200
13
11
420
Modem, Integrated,
Non-switched
16
5500
19
668
Switched
5501
25
21
840
DDSA
5660
24
20
840
Security Cover Locks
6555
35
35SUC Security Lock, Diskette
6566
30
30SUC -
$ 4.00
.SO
4.00
.50
15.00
3.00
4.00
2.00
8.00
7.SO
3.00
2.SO
4.00
27.50
9.00
4.00
4.00
1.50
5.00
6.50
2.00
N/C
N/C
COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES
There are a variety of communication facilities (see M 2700 pages)
supported by the 8101 Features for Attaching Communications
(FAC) differing in speed, protocol and attachment interfaces.
These FAC codes have been categorized as Loop, SDLC, BSC and
Start/Stop. The user should select the desired communication
FAC code and refer to the full special feature description and the
FAC code description (identified by the abbreviation FAC No.) for
• Trademark of AT&T.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-- -------~--=----':' =
=- ---
M 8101.4
Jul79
DP Machines
8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit (cont'd)
additional details. Reference to switched communications in the
FAC codes, refers to the communication link between the 8100
System and the S/370 or 4300 Processors.
The 8101 special features allow a maximum of eight communication capabilities to be configured and designated as communication ports. Each communication port position (1 thru 8) must
consist of a communications feature for SDLC, SSC or Start/Stop.
The SDLC communications feature is available with and without
business machine clock (#1601, #1602). The SSC/SS communications feature (#1603) is available with business machine clock
and the SSC Communications feature (#1604) is available without
business machine clock. If an 8101 communications port is to
provide the attached facility with business machine clock at
speeds greater than 2400 bps the Multi-speed Clock feature
(#5200) is required. The Multi-speed Clock feature (#5200) can
provide business machine clocking at speeds greater than 2400
bps.
In addition to selecting a communications feature (#1601, 1602,
1603, 1604) for each port configured in an 8101, a communication interface or integrated modem must be selected to support the
communication facility attaching to that port. Direct connect at
4800 and 9600 bps require the Multi-speed Clock feature
(#5200). Each port of the 8101 also requires the selection of a
specify code to indicate the System 8100 FAC code selected for
that port. Certain System 8100 FAC codes will require a second
specify code to select options available within that facility: 2/4
wire, line speed or multipoint control/tributary.
NOTE: The selected option specified within a given FAC and specific
port position can be changed in the field by Field Engineering. All
such changes are chargeable at the applicable FE hourly rate.
Port
#9101 #9102
#9ASC where AS
----LOOP--FAC No.
FAC Code Description
FAC
FAC
FAC
FAC
Loop,
Loop,
Loop,
Loop,
SDLC
8
9
10
11
high speed single lobe at 38,400 bps
high speed two lobe at 38,400 bps
single lobe at 9600 bps
two lobes at 9600 bps
FAC 8 - Loop, High Speed, Single Lobe -- Required for operating
a loop at 38,400 bps. Limitation: Not available with FAC 09 Loop,
High Speed, Two Lobe #9091 thru #9098 and FAC 21 and 29.
Prerequisites: # 1602 and #4830. Maximum: One per 8101. One
per 8100 System. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required code to complete the configuration for the port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9081 #9082
#9083 #9084
#9085
#9086 #9087
#9088
FAC 9 - Loop, High Speed, Two Lobe -- Required for operating a
two lobe loop at 38,400 bps. Limitation: Not available with FAC
08 Loop, High Speed, Single Lobe (#9081 thru #9088) and FAC
21 and 29.
Prerequisites: #1602, #4830 and #4835.
Maximum: One per 8101. One per 8100 System. Specify: From
the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for the port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9091 #9092
#9093 #9094
#9095
#9096 #9097
#9098
FAC 10 - Loop, Single Lobe - Required for operating a loop at
9600 bps. Prerequisites: #1602 and #4830. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Port I
Selection
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9108
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9113 #9114
#9115
#9116 #9117
#9118
#9111 #9112
- - - SDLC FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 12
FAC 13
FAC 15
FAC 16
FAC 17
Integrated Modem
FAC 18
FAC 19
FAC Code Description
600 or 1200 bps (external modem)
Up to 9600 bps (external modem)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps, direct connect
with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps direct connect
with clock (no modem)
Direct connect without clock
600 or 1 200 bps non-switched
600 or 1 200 bps switched with auto answer
AT&T Dataphone Digital Service
FAC 20
2400, 4800 or 9600 bps non-switched
FAC 21
56,00 bps non-switched
CCITT V.35
FAC 24
FAC 27
= FAC No. and C = Port Position.
#9106 #9107
Port
Specify Codes and FAC Code Descriptions:
FAC codes range in number from 08 to 61 resulting in FAC specify codes ranging in number from #9081 to #9618. Additional
codes must be specified for selected options. Those codes are
outlined in the FAC code descriptions. No two FAC codes can
occupy the same port position. Configuration Manual GA27-2876
will aid in assigning the port positions.
#9105
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I Port 2
FAC 25
A specify code number is required to identify the selected FAC
code and its physical port position. Communication Attachment
Type I (#9943, #1503) is specified as port positions one thru
four and Communication Attachment Type II (#1504) is specified
as port positions five thru eight. The specify code is constructed
by concatenating the selected FAC and its port position to the
numeral 9. e.g.:
#9103 #9104
FAC 11 - Loop, Two Lobe -- Required for operating two lobe
loops at 9600 bps. Prerequisites: #1602, #4830 and #4835.
Maximum: One for ports one thru four and one for ports five thru
eight. Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC 29
Direct connect with clock (no modem)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps
Direct connect with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps
Direct connect without clock (no r,lOdem)
9600 bps
56,000 bps non-switched
FAC 12 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 600 or 1200 bps with business machine clock ... operating with external modem without
clocking ... and point-to-point switched 2 wire ... or point-to-point
non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint 4 wire. Prerequisites:
#1601 and #3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9121 #9122
600 bps
9741
9742
1200 bps
9751
9752
#9123 #9124
9743
9744
9753
9754
#9125
9745
9755
#9126 #9127
9746 9747
9756 9757
#9128
9748
9758
FAC 13 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - Up to 9600 bps without
business machine clock ... with external data communication
equipment and clock ... point-to-point switched with auto answer
to 4800 bps ... or point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or
multipoint 4 wire. Prerequisites: #1602 and #3701. Specify:
From the table below, specify the required code to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9131 #9132
#9133 #9134
#9135
#9136 #9137
#9138
FAC 15 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem (downstream
terminal or 8100 System must not provide business machine
clock) and direct connection up to 40 feet. Prerequisites: #1601
and #3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the required
codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Port I
Selection
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port
#9151 #9152
600 bps
9741
9742
1 200 bps
9751
9752
2400 bps
9761
9762
#9153 #9154
9743
9744
9753
9754
9763
9764
#9155
9745
9755
9765
#9156 #9157 #9158
9746 9747
9748
9756
9757
9758
9766 9767
9768
Port 8
FAC 16 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock .,. operating with no modem (attached downstream terminal must not provide business machine clock) ... and
direct connection up to 40 feet. Limitation: One Multi-speed
Clock (# 5200) is required for port positions one thru four or five
thru eight. Prerequisites: #1602, #3701 and #5200. ~peclfy:
From the table below, specify the required codes to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9161 #9162
#9163 #9164
#9165
#9166 #9167
#9168
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--- ----- ------
M 8101.5
Jul79
-- =
===
~
DP Machines
8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit
4800 bps
9771
9772
9773
9774
9600 bps
9781
9781
9783 9784
(cont'd)
9775
9776
9785
9786
9777
9787
9778
9788
PAC Specify
Selection
Port 1 Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
FAC 17 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - Up to 9600 bps without
business machine clock ... operating with other 8100 System (with
business machine clock) ... and direct connection up to 40 feet.
Prerequisites: #1602 and #3701. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required code to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
Port
#9151 #9152
4800 bps
9771
9772
9600 bps
9781
978l
#9153 #9154
9773
9774
9783
9784
#9255
9775
9785
#9256 #9157
9776
9777
9786 9787
#9158
9778
9788
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9173 #9174
#9175
#9176 #9177
#9178
#9171 #9172
FAC 18 - Integrated Modem - 600 or 1200 bps ... and point-topoint non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint non-switched 4
wire. Prerequisites: # 1601 and #5500. Specify: From the table
below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration
for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I Port 2
Port
#9181 #918l
2-wire
600 bps
9851
9851
1 200 bps
9861
9861
4-wire
600 bps
9741
9741
1200 bps
9751
9751
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9183 #9184
#9185
#9186 #9187
#9188
98S3
98S4
9855
98S6
9863
9864
986S
9866
9857
9867
9868
9858
9743
9753
9744
9754
9745
9755
9746
9756
9747
9757
9748
9758
FAC 27 - CCITT V.3S Interface -- Up to 9600 bps without business machine clock ... operating with other 8100 System (with
business machine clock) ... and direct connection up to 1000 feet.
Prerequisites: #1602 and #1550. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required code to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
PAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 3 Port 4
Port
#9191 #9191
600 bps
9741
9741
1200 bps
9751
9751
#9193 #9194 #919S
9743 9744
9745
9753 9754
9755
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
#9196 #9197
9746 9747
9756 9757
#9198
9748
9758
FAC 20 - Digital Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) -- 2400, 4800, 9600 bps without business machine clock
... and 4 wire point-to-point non-switched ... or multipoint nonswitched. Prerequisites: #1602 and #5660. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
PAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9101 #9102 #9203 #9204
Point-to-point or Multipoint Control
2400 bps
9001
9002
9003
9004
4800 bps
9021
9011
9023
9Ol4
9600 bps
9041
9041
9043 9044
Multipoint Tributary
2400 bps
9011
9012
9013 9014
4800 bps
9031
9032
9033 9034
9600 bps
9OS1
9OS1
9OS3
9054
#91OS
#9106 #9207
#9108
900S
9015
9045
9015
9035
9OS5
9006
9007
9008
9016
9017
9047
9028
9046
9016
9036
9OS6
9017
9037
9OS7
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
#9111 #9112
#9213 #9214
#9115
Port6
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9175
#9176 #9277
#9178
PAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
#9191 #9191
#9193 #9194
#919S
#9196 #9297
#9198
SSC FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAG 40
FAG 41
FAG 43
FAC Code Description
600 ro 1200 bps (external modem)
Up to 9600 bps (external moder(l)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps, direct connect
with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps, direct connect with
clock (no modem)
FAG 44
Integrated Modem
FAG 45
600 or 1200 bps non-switched
AT&T Dataphone Digital Service
FAG 47
2400, 4800 or 9600 bps non-switched
FAC 40 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 600 ro 1200 bps with business machine clock ... operating with external modem with no
clock ... point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint
non-switched 4 wire. Prerequisites: #1603 and #3701. Specify:
From the table below, specify the required codes to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
9048
PAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
9018
9038
9OS8
Port
#9401 #9401
600 bps
9741
9742
1 200 bps
9751
9752
#9403 #9404
#9405
9745
9755
#9406 #9407 #9408
9746 9747
9748
9756 9757
9758
FAC 21 - Digital Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) - 56,000 bps without business machine clock ... and
point-to-point non-switched operation. Prerequisite: #1602 and
#5660. Maximum: One per 8101, system maximum is one per
8100 System (not available with FAG codes 8, 9 or 29). Specify:
From the table below, specify the required code to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
PAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 3 Port 4
#9173 #9174
FAC 29 - CCITT V.3S Interface - 56,000 bps without business
machine clock and external data communication equipment with
clock, and point-to-point non-switched. Limitation: Not available
when 8101 is attached to the 8130 Processor. Prerequisite:
#1602 and #1550. Maximum: One per 8101. System maximum
is one per 8100 System. (not available with FAG codes 8, 9 and
21). Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC 19 - Integrated Modem - 600 or 1200 bps ... point-to-point
switched with auto answer 2 wire. Prerequisites: # 1601 and
#5501. Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes
to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1 Port 2
Port 2
#9171 #9172
Port7
Port 8
#9116 #9217
#9218
9743
9753
9744
9754
Port 7
Port 8
FAC 41 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- Up to 9600 bps without
business machine clock ... operating with external data communication equipment ... and point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ...
or multipoint non-switched 4 wire. Prerequisites: # 1604 and
#3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the required code
to complete the configuration for each port selected.
PAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
#9411 #9412
#9413 #9414
#9415
#9416 #9417
#9418
FAC 24 - GCITT V.35 Interface - 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock '" operating with no modem .. , and direct
connection up to 1000 feet. Prerequisites: # 1 601 and # 1550
Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC 43 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem (downstream
terminal must not provide business machine clock) and direct
connection up to 40 feet. Prerequisites: #1603 and #3701.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9141 #9141
600 bps
9741
9741
1200 bps
9751
9752
2400 bps
9761
!J761
#9143 #9144
9743 9744
9753 9754
9763 9764
#9245
9745
9755
9765
#9246 #9147
9746 9747
9756 9757
9766 9767
#9148
9748
9758
9768
Port
#9431 #9432
600 bps
9741
9742
1200 bps
9751
9752
2400 bps
9761
9762
#9433 #9434
9743
9744
9754
9753
9764
9763
#9435
9745
9755
9765
#9436 #9437
9746 9747
9756 9757
9766 9767
#9438
9748
9758
9768
FAC 25 - CCITT V.3S Interface - 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem ... and direct
connection up to 1000 feet. Limitation: One Multi-speed Glock is
required for port position one thru four or five thru eight.
Prerequisites: #1602, #1550 and #5200. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC 44 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (attached downstream terminal must not provide business machine clock) ... and
direct connection up to 40 feet. limitation: One Multi-speed
Glock (#5200) is required for port position one thru four or five
thru eight. Prerequisites: #1604, #3701 and #5200. Specify:
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
-------- --=-- =------ --=--':' =
M 8101.6
Jul79
DP Machines
8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit (cont'd)
From the table below, specify the required codes to complete the
configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Port I
Selection
300 bps
600 bps
9731
9741
9732
9742
9733
9743
9734
9744
9735
9745
9736
9746
9737
9747
9738
9748
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Pan 8
HOST AND TERMINAL MODEM FACILITIES
Port
#9441 #9442
4800 bps
9771
9772
9600 bps
9781
9782
#9443 #9444
9773
9774
9783
9784
#9445
9775
9785
#9446 #9447
9776
9777
9786
9787
#9448
9778
9788
For communication facilities and modem attachment data, see the
M 2700 and appropriate Machines pages for additional information.
FAC 45 - Integrated Modem - 600 or 1200 bps ... point-to-point
non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint non-switched 4 wire.
Prerequisites: #1603 and #5500. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC Specify
Port I
Selection
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9451 #9452
2-wire
600 bps
9851
9852
1 200 bps
9861
9862
4-wire
600 bps
9741
9742
1200 bps
9751
9752
#9453 #9454
#9455
#9456 #9457
#9458
Port 2
9854
9864
9855
9865
9856
9866
9857
9867
9858
9868
9743
9753
9744
9754
9745
9755
9746
9756
9747
9757
9748
9758
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Pan 7
Pan 8
Port
#9471 #9472 #9473 #9474 #9475 #9476 #9477 #9478
Point-to-point or Multipoint Control
2400 bps
9001
9002
9003
9004
9008
900S
9006 9007
4800 bps
9021
9022
9023
9024
9025
9026
9027
9028
4800 bps
9041
9042
9043
9044
9045
9046
9047
9048
Multipoint Tributary
2400 bps
9011
9018
9014
9012
9013
9015
9016
9017
4800 bps
9031
9038
9032
9033
9034
9035
9036
9037
9600 bps
9051
9052
9053
9OS4
9055
9OS6
9057
9OS8
START/STOP - - FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 60
FAC 61
3863 Modem, switched and non-switched
3864 Modem, switched and non-switched
3865 Modem, non-switched
3872 Modem, switched and non-switched
3874 Modem, switched and non-switched
3875 Modem, non-switched
DIRECT CONNECTION ATTACHMENT
9853
9863
FAC 47 - Digital Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) -- 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps without business machine
clock ... 4 wire point-to-point non-switched ... or multipoint nonswitched. Prerequisites: #1604 and #5660. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for ",ach port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
1200 bps integrated modem, switched and non-switched
Dataphone Digital Service Adapter
In addition to terminal attachment to the 8100 System through
common carrier facilities (see M 2700 pages) or local loops, attachment can be made by direct connect. The direct connect is
made by using the SDLC (FAC 15 or 16), BSC (FAC 43 or 44)
and Start/Stop (FAC 61). Shown below are the direct connect
attachable devices and required device feature numbers. The IBM
8100 information System Installation Manual - Physical Planning,
GA27-2877, will assist in the selection of direct connect cables.
FAC Attach
Code Device
Speeds (bps)
Device Feature No.
3276
3276
3767
2741
8130/8140/8101
600. 1200, 2400
4800,9600
600, 1200, 2400
134.5
600, 1200, 2400
8775-11, 12
600, 1200, 2400
16,25
8130/8140
4800,9600
8775-11, 12
4800,9600
43
2780/3780 Line
Protocol
2780/3780 Line
Protocol
600, 1200, 2400
#3701 w/#9491 and #6302
#3701, w/#9491 and #6302
#3718, w/#9707, #9533
#9115 or #9120
#3701 (FAC 17) or #1550
(FAC 27) and #1602
#3701 (FAC 15) or
#1550 (FAC 24)
#3701 (FAC 17) or #1550
(FAC 27) and #1602
#3701 (FAC 16) or
#1550 (FAC 25)
Refer to specific device
See Note 4
Refer to specific device
See Note 4
15
16
15
61
15,24
44
FAC Code Description
110, 134.5, 150, 300 or 600 bps
(external modem)
110, 134.5, 150, 300 or 600 bps, direct
connect with clock (no modem)
4800,9600
Note 4: For attachment of devices that conform to 2780/3780 protocol.
FAC 60 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 134.5, 300, 600 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with external modem ... and
point-to-point non-switched facilities. See M 2700 pages for specific information on communication facilities and other attachment
information.
Also 110 or 150 bps with business machine clock ... operating
with external modem ... and point-to-point non-switched facilities
will be provided under provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier
System Policy.
Limitation: The 600 bps line
speed is not available when the 8101 is attached to an 8130
Processor. Prerequisites: # 1603 and #3701. Specify: From the
iable below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Pon 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Port 7
Port 8
Port
#9601 #9602
110 bps
9701
9702
134.5bps
9711
9712
150 bps
9721
9722
300 bps
9731
9732
600 bps
9741
9742
#9603 #9604
9703
9704
9713
9714
9723
9724
9733
9734
9743
9744
#9605
9705
9715
9725
9735
9745
#9606 #9607
9706
9707
9716
9717
9726
9727
9736
9737
9746
9747
#9608
9708
9718
9728
9738
9748
FAC 6' - EIA R5-232-C Interface - 110, 134.5, 150, 300, 600
bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (the
attached terminal must provide its own business machine clock) ...
and direct connection to 40 feet. limitation: The 600 bps line
speed is not available when the 8101 is attached to an 8130
Processor. Prerequisites: #1603 and #3701. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port I
Port 2
Port 3 Port 4
Port 5
Port 6 Pon 7
Port 8
Port
#9611 #9612
110 bps
9701
9702
134.5 bps 9711
9712
150 bps
9721
9722
#9613 #9614
9703
9704
9713
9714
9723
9724
#9615
9705
9715
9725
#9616 #9617
9706
9707
9716
9717
9726
9727
#9618
9708
9718
9728
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
""
---- ----
------ -- -----_.-
M 8130.1
Jul79
DP Machines
IBM 8130 PROCESSOR
Purpose: Provides control, storage, processing capability, disk
and diskette storage, and device attachment capabilities for the
IBM 8100 Information System.
Models: The following models of the 8130 are available dependIng on processor storage size and non-removable disk storage
size. Some models have fixed head capability as well as movable
heads for the non-removable, high speed, direct access disk
storage. All 8130 models include removable diskette storage with
up to 1 million bytes of storage.
Model
Base
Processor
Storage (bytes)
Non Removable
Disk Capacity
(million bytes)
Fixed Head
Capacity
(bytes)
A21
A22
A23
A24
256K
256K
256K
256K
29MB
23MB
64MB
58MB
None
131,072
None
131,072
(262,144)
(262,144)
(262,144)
(262,144)
(29,327,360)
(23,461,888)
(64,520,192)
(58,654,720)
Maximum: One per 8100 Information System.
Highlights: The 8130 Processor is a multi-level, interrupt driven
processor which provides control, processing capability, processor
storage, disk and diskette storage and communication features for
the 8100 Information System. The flexibility offered by the 8130
allows the user to configure a system for initial requirements, while
retaining the ability to modify the system to meet future needs.
Loop Attached Devices at 38,400 bps: Devices that can be
attached to a direct attached loop at 38,400 bps are the - 3287
mdls t 1, 12, 8775 Display Terminal mdls 11 and 11.
Direct Attached Devices: Devices that can be attached directly to
the processor are the - 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit -8809 MagnetiC Tape Unit mdl 1 B.
NOTE I: Dedication of a 9600 bps single lobe loop to the attachment of the
3289 mdl 3 printer should be considered in cases where the printer will be
heavily utilized.
Loop Accessorle. and Wire: See M10000 pages for pricing and
ordering instructions.
Cu.tomer Set-up: The 8130 Processor is deSignated a customer
set-up unit thereby offering the customer early availability and
relocation flexibility. Aids and configurators are provided to facilitate the configuration and ordering of the 8130. Set-up procedures for the customer will be shipped with each machine. An
8130 installation verification program will be shipped with each
machine on a diskette. A clear indication that the machine is
operational will be given.
System control and processing is provided by machine program
Instructions and up to eight I/O hardware interrupt levels provide
for interrupt processing. The 8130 provides 256K (262,144) bytes
of processor storage that can be expanded to a maximum of 512K
(524,288) bytes and provision for dynamic addressing and storage
protection for up to 4 million bytes of logical storage.
If the user relocates and/or interchanges attaching units from one
system to another, the user must consider priority and address
compatibility of the processor and its attachments.
The 8130 with a special feature for system expansion provides for
the attachment of up to two 8101 Storage and Input/Output Units
one of which may be configured with Communication and
Display/Printer Feature Type I or Type II, or one 8101 Storage
and Input/Output Unit and one 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 B.
An alternate configuration can consist of a 8130, two 8101 Storage and Input/Output Units, and one 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit
mdl 1 A. Up to three additional 8809 Magnetic Tape Units can be
attached to the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1A or 1 B.
Color: Pebble gray is the only available color.
The 8130 Processor is provided with fixed high speed direct
access storage. Depending on the 8130 model selected, disk
storage of up to 64 million bytes with movable heads or up to 58
million bytes of disk storage with movable and fixed heads is
available. The disk storage operates at a data rate of 1.031 million bytes per second. The average access time is 27 milliseconds
with an average rotational delay of 9.6 milliseconds. Removable
diskette storage is available with up to 1 MB (985,088) of storage
operating at up to 62K bytes per second data rate. The diskette
drive can read/write in basic data exchange format on either the
IBM diskette 2D or the IBM diskette Type 1.
The 8100 System can attach to any 5/370 or 4300 Processors
via the 3704/3705 for SNA/SDLC or BSC line control. The 8100
System can attach to the ICA of the 115, 125, 135 or 138 processors for BSC line control. The IBM 8100 System can attach to
the Communications Adapter of the 4331 Processor for BSC
and/or SDLC line control. For specific attachment, see M 2700
pages.
The capability of the 8100 Information System is further extended
by providing for the attachment of a variety of input/output devices. These devices may be attached to the 8130 via communication features which include data link, direct connect, and loops
that are direct attached or data link attached loops. The 8130
provides for the attachment of two communication ports which can
be expanded by optional features up to a maximum of six. With
the 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit attached, the communication ports physically attached can be further increased by eight,
providing an 8100 System maximum of fourteen communication
ports.
\
3289 Printer mdl 3 with 3501 Card Reader and via the 3782 Card
Attachment Unit the 3521 Card Punch and 2502 Card Reader mdl
A 1 (see Note 1) -- 3276 Control Unit Display Station mdls 11, 12,
13, 14 with 3278 Display Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 3287 Printer
mdls I, 2, 3289 Line Printer mdls 1, 2 - 8775 Display Terminal
mdls 11 and 11 -- 3641 Reporting Terminal mdls 1, 2 - 3642 Encoder Printer mdls 1, 2 -- 3643 Keyboard Display mdls 2, 3, 4 -3644 Automatic Data Unit - 3645 Printer -- 3646 Scanner Control
Unit - 3647 Time and Attendance Terminal.
Communication Attached Device.: Devices that can be attached
to the communications ports are the - 3276 Control Unit Display
Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13, 14 with 3278 Display Station
mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 3287 Printer mdls 1, 2 and 3289 Line Printer
mdls 1, 2 - 3767 Communication Terminals mdls 1, 2, 3 - 3631
Plant Communications Controller mdls 1A, 1 B - 3632 Plant Communications Controller mdls 1A,I B - 8775 Display Terminal mdls
11 and 12 - 2741 Communications Terminal - TTY 33/35 or equivalent - non-IBM terminals· conforming to the 2780/3780 line
protocol - 3842 Loop Control Unit - 8130 Processor - 8140
Processor - 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit.
Loop Attached Devices at 2400 or 9600 bps: Devices that can
be attached to a direct attached loop at 9600 bps or data link
attached loop at 2400 bps are the - 3287 Printer mdls 11, 12, -
PREREQUISITES: None.
Bibliography: Available at a later date.
Specify: [1] (120 VAC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): #9891 for nonlocking plug, or #9890 for locking plug. If 4.3 meter (14 ft)
power cable is not desired, specify #9986 for 1.8 meter (6 ft)
cable.
[2] Cabling: For cabling information see Accessories pages
(Ml0000), appropriate 8100 Information System Installation
manuals and Processor Site Preparation Guides.
[3] Programming Configuration: Specify #9700 for Distributed
Processing Programming Executive (DPPX), #9710 for Distributed Processing Control Executive (DPCX), #9720 for DPPX
and DPCX, or #9730 for all other configurations.
[4] Terminal Requirements: Specify #9800 (off line 3640 terminal
exercisor) if ordering any of the following terminals: 3641,
3642, 3643, 3644, 3645, 3646 or 3647 1) On the initial order.
2) When the first terminal is ordered to attach via an 8101,
and none are attached to the processor.
3) Via
when the first terminal is field installed on an
8100 System.
Maximum: One per 8100 System. Field installation: Yes.
PRICES:
Mdl
MRC
MLC
2 yr
Purchase
MMMC/
AMMCR
A21
A22
A23
A24
$705
729
752
776
$600
620
640
660
$24,000
24,720
25,440
26,160
$122
130
130
138
Rental Plan: Plan D
Machine Group: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Option: 55%
Per Call: 1
Warranty: B
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model upgrade may require replacement of disk
storage unit. Adequate provisions must be made for retaining data
contained on disk storage unit and elimination of user proprietary
information.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges)
From
A21
A22
A23
To A22
$2,200
A23
A24
$2,500
2,300
$3,000
2,800
2,500
Customer price quotations and customer order and acknowledgemust state: "Installation of this
ment letters for purchase of
model change involves removal of parts which become the property of IBM."
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
------- --------_.---- -- ------
M 8130.2
Jul79
DP Machines
8130 Processor (cont'd)
SPECIAL FEATURES
Performance: The maximum number of Features for Attaching
Communications (FAC) capable of concurrent operation is a function of the speed of the line, communication facility, the operating
system instalied and the application work load. The maximum
number of communication facilities which can be physically Installed can exceed the operational capability. Increased processor
utilization will result from sustained operation of BSC at the maximum aggregate data rate and may cause degradation of activity
operating at lower priority levels. Analysis should be performed to
determine the impact.
Diagnostics: The 8100 System hardware and feature operation,
diagnostic support and maintenance support described in 8100
System publications are dependent on the presence of functional
support modules provided by DPPX, DPCX. Operational and maintenance conditions for the 8100 System are predicated on the
presence of these functional support modules. Customers ordering
8100 System hardware without DPPX or DPCX should provide the
functional support as contained and described in the Functional
Definition Manual 8100 which will be available
at FCS.
FEATURE EXPANSION TYPE 1 (#1520). Allows the 8130 to be
expanded from two communication ports to six communication
ports. # 1520 is required for the attachment of two lobe loops or
communication features requiring the Multi-speed Clock (#5200).
Maximum: One per 8130. Field Installation: Yes.
SYSTEM EXPANSION (#1530).
Provides programmable hardware interrupt levels and sublevel interrupt determination. Required
for attachment of up to two 8101 Storage and Input/Output Units
or one 8101 and/or one 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl lB directly
to the 8130. Maximum: One per 8130. Field Installation: Yes.
CCITT V.35 INTERFACE (#1550).
Provides interface for data
transmission over direct connection at speeds up to 9600 bps.
Maximum: One per selected communications feature (#1601 or
# 1602). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications with Clock (# 1 601). SDLC Communications without Clock
(#1602) or SDLC Communications without Clock (#1602) and
Multi-speed Clock (#5200).
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1601). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface, integrated
modems, direct connection and CCITT V.35 interface. Limitation:
In an 81 00 System only ten of these features (# 1601 or # 1 602)
may be active at one time. Maximum: Two without Feature Expansion Type 1 (# 1 520) ... with # 1 520, the maximum is six. Maximum is fourteen per 8100 System (see Note 2) with a 8130. The
maximum is reduced by one for each communications feature
(#1602, 1603, 1604). Field Installation: Yes. Specify: Code as
provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communications Facilities"
section.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCK (#1602). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C or Digital
Data Service Adapter interface, CCITI V.35 interface and Loop
Adapter. Limitation: In an 8100 System only ten of these features
(#1601 or #1602) may be active at one time. Maximum: Two
without Feature Expansion Type 1 (# 1520), with' # 1520, maximum is six. Maximum is fourteen per 8100 System (see Note 2)
with a 8130. The maximum is reduced by one for each communications feature (# 1601, 1603, 1604). Field Installation: Yes.
Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the
"Communications Facilities" section.
BSC/SS COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1603). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface, Integrated
modems or direct connection. In an 8100 System the maximum
aggregate BSC data rate is 9600 bps and 330 bps for Start/Stop.
Limitation: Start/Stop communications not available with integrated modems. Maximum: Two without Feature Expansion Type 1
(#1520), with #1520 maximum is six. Maximum is fourteen per
8100 System (see Note 2) with a 8130. The maximum Is reduced
by one for each communications feature (#1601. 1602, 1604).
Field Installation: Yes. Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communications Facilities" section.
BSC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1604).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-C or Digital Data
Service Adapter interface and direct connection. Limitation: In an
8100 System the maximum aggregate BSC data rate is 9600 bps.
Maximum: Two without Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520), six
with # 1520. Maximum is fourteen per 8100 System (see Note 2)
with a 8130. The maximum is reduced by one for each communications feature (#1601, 1602, 1603). Field Installation: Yes.
Specify: Code as provided in FAC decriptions in the
"Communications Facilities" section.
PROCESSOR STORAGE TYPE 1 (#1710).
Provides 128K
(131,072) bytes of additional proce$sor storage. Maximum: One
per 8130. Limitation: Not available if Processor Storage Type 2
(#1720) is selected. Field Installation: Yes.
PROCESSOR STORAGE TYPE 2 (#1720).
Provides 256K
(262,144) bytes of additional processor storage. Maximum: One
per 8130. Limitations: Not available if Processor Storage Type 1
(#1710) is selected. Field Installation: Yes.
EIA RS-232-C INTERFACE (#3701). Provides interface to external modems/data communication equipment or direct connection
at speeds of up to 9600 bps. Maximum: One per selected communications feature (#1601, 1602, 1603 or 1604). Field
installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC Communications with Clock
(#1601), SDLC Communications without Clock (#1602), BSC/SS
Communications with Clock (#1603), BSC Communications without Clock (#1604), SDLC Communications without Business Machine Clock (#1602) and Multi-speed Clock (#5200), or BSC
Communications without Business Machine Clock (#1604) and
Multi-speed Clock (#5200). Specify: Code as provided in FAC
description in the "Communications Facilities" section.
KEYLOCK (#4655).
This keylock feature provides processor
security by the selection of three modes of operation. These
consist of - Disable power on and disable operator panel ... Enable power on but disable operator panel ... Enable power on and
enable operator panel. For additional or replacement keys. see
Ml0000 pages. Maximum: One. Field installation: Yes.
LOOP ADAPTER (#4830).
Provides for direct attachment of a
single lobe loop at 9600 or 38,400 bps. Maximum: Two without
Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520). With #1520, the maximum is
six. Maximum is fourteen per 8100 System (see Note 2) with a
8130. Only one of these features may operate at 38,400 bps in
an 8100 System. Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC
Communications without Clock (#1602). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities" section.
LOOP ADAPTER SECOND LOBE (#4835).
Provides for the
attachment of a separate physical loop cable to extend the coverage and availability of the directly attached loop. Maximum: Three
per 8130. Maximum is five per 8100 System (see Note 2) with a
8130. Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: Loop Adapter
(#4830) and Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520). Specify: Code
as provided in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities"
section.
MULTI-SPEED CLOCK (#5200).
Provides business machines
clocking at 4800 bps and 9600 bps for direct connection. Can
provide multiple speeds simultaneously. Limitation: Available for
port positions three through six only. Maximum: One. Maximum is
three per 8100 System with a 8130. Field installation: Yes.
Prerequisites: Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) and either
SDLC Communications Feature without Clock (#1602) or BSC
Communications Feature without Clock (#1604). Specify: Code
as provided in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities"
section.
MODEM, INTEGRATED, NON-SWITCHED (#5500).
Provides
interface to common carrier leased facilities at 600 or 1200 bps.
Limitation: Not available for Start/Stop communication facilities.
Maximum: One per selected communications feature (#1601 or
#1603). Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SDLC Communications Adapter with Clock (#1601) or BSC/SS Communications
with Clock (#1603). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities" section:
MODEM, INTEGRATED, SWITCHED (#5501). Provides interface
to common carrier switched facilities with Auto Answer at 600 or
1200 bps. Limitation: Not available with BSC or Start/Stop communication facilities. Maximum: One per selected communications
feature (#1601). Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC
Communications with Clock (#1601). Specify: Code as provided
in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities" section.
DIGITAL DATA SERVICE ADAPTER (DDSA) (#5660).
Provides
interface to AT&T Dataphone·· Digital Service Network for transfer of digital data at speeds of 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps. Available
for point-to-point line configurations or multipoint line configurations. Maximum: One per selected communications feature
(#1602 or #1604). Field installation: Yes. Prerequisite: SDLC
Communications without Clock (# 1602), or BSC Communications
without Clock (#1604). Specify: Code as provided in FAC description in the "Communications Facilities" section.
SECURITY COVER LOCKS (#6555). This feature provides key
operated security locks for the machines covers, restricting access
to the machine interior and external cable connector area. See
Security Lock Diskette (#6566) if diskette security is required.
Additional or replacement keys are not available from IBM.
Maximum: One. Field Installation: Yes.
SECURITY LOCK, DISKETTE (#6566). This feature provides a
key operated security lock to restrict access to the diskette magnetic media. It is accessable only by opening the front cover. For
maximum system security, the Security Cover Lock (#6555) must
be used in addition to the diskette security lock. Additional or
replacement keys are not available from IBM. Maximum: One.
Field Installation: Yes .
•• Registered Trademark of AT&T.
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
--------- -------------------_.-
M 8130.3
Jul79
DP Machines
8130 Processor (cont'd)
NOTE 2: An 8100 System consisting of a 8130 Processor and attached 8101
Storage and Input/Output Unit.
Special Feature Prices
MRC
MLC
2 yr
MMMC/
Purchase AMMCR
Fea Expansion Type 1 #1520 $ 14 $ 12 $ 405
System Expansion
1530
71
2,400
60
CCITT V.35 Interface
1550
15
13
510
SDLC Communication Fea
41
35
900
w Bus Machine Clock 1601
w/o Bus Machine Clock 1602
840
35
30
BSC/SS Communication Fea
w Bus Machine Clock 1603
19
670
16
BSC Communication Fea
w/o Bus Machine Clock 1604
450
12
10
Processor Stor Type 1 1710'
82
70
2,250
Processor Stor Type 2
1720
165
140
4,500
EIA RS-232-C Interface 3701
12
10
400
Keylock
4655
50
50SUC Loop Adapter
4830
605
20
17
Loop Adapter 2nd Lobe 4835
20
605
17
Multi-speed Clock
5200
13
11
420
Modem, Integrated,
Non-switched
5500
19
16
668
SWitched
5501
21
840
25
DDSA
5660
24
840
20
Security Cover Locks
6555
35SUC
35
Security Lock Diskette
6566
30
30SUC -
codes must be specified for selected options. These codes are
outlined in the FAC code descriptions. No two FAC codes can
occupy the same port position. Configuration Manual GA27-2876
will aid is assigning the port positions.
- - - LOOP - - -
$ .50
10.50
2.00
FAC No.
FAC Code Description
SDLC
FAC
FAC
FAC
FAC
8.00
7.50
3.00
2.50
7.50
14.50
4.00
N/C
4.00
4.00
1.50
5.00
6.50
2.00
N/C
N/C
• Customers who elect to ,purchase one of these features and
anticipate later ordering additional storage should consider purchase of the larger storage initially because field upgrade requires
replacement of the initial feature.
COMMUNICATION CAPABILITIES
There is a variety of communication capabilities (see M 2700
pages) supported by the 8130 Features for Attaching Communications (FAC) differing in speed. protocol and attachment interfaces.
These FAC codes have been categorized as Loop. SDLC. esc and
Start/Stop. The user should select the desired communication
FAC code and refer to the full special feature description and the
FAC code description (identified by the abbreviation FAC NO.) for
additional details. Reference to switched communications in the
FAC codes refers to the communications link between the 8100
System and the S/370 or 4300 Processors.
The 8130 special features allow a maximum of six communication
capabilities to be configured and designated as communication
ports. Each communication port position (1 thru 6) must consist of
a communications feature for SDLC, SSC or Start/Stop.
The SDLC communications feature is available with and without
business machine clock (#1601, 1602). The SSC/SS communications feature (#1603) is available with business machine clock
and the SSC Communications Feature (#1604) is available without
business machine clock. If an 8130 communications port is to
provide the attached facility with business machine clock at
speeds greater than 2400 bps the Multi-speed Clock feature
(#5200) is required. One Multi-speed Clock feature (#5200) can
provide bUSiness machine clocking at speeds greater than 2400
bps to any or all of port positions three thru six.
In addition to selecting a communications feature (#1601, 1602,
1603, 1604) for each port configured in an 8130, a communication interface or integrated modem must be selected to support the
communication facility attaching to that port. A two lobe loop port
requires three special features (#1602, #4830 and #4835) in
addition to Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520). Direct connect at
4800 and 9600 bps require the Multi-speed Clock feature
(#5200) and the Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) if the 8130
supplies the business machine clock. Each port of the 8130
requires the selection of a specify code to indicate the System
8100 FAC code selected for that port. Certain System 8100 FAC
codes will require a second specify code to select options available within that facility: 2/4 wire, line speed or multipoint
control/tributary.
NOTE: The selected option specified within a given FAC and specific
port position can be changed in the field by Field Engineering. All
such changes are chargeable at the applicable FE hourly rate.
8
9
10
11
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9081 #9082 #9083 #9084 #9085 #9086
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
FAC 9 - Loop, High Speed, Two Lobe -- Required for operating a
two lobe loop at 38,400 bps. Limitations: Not available with FAC
08 Loop, High Speed, Single Lobe (#9081 thru #9086) and FAC
21 and 29. Available for ports 4, 5 or 6 only. Prerequisites:
#1520, #1602, #4830 and #4835. Maximum: One per 8130.
Maximum one per 8100 System. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required code to complete the configuration for the
port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
~rt2
~rt3
~rt4
Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
#9094 #9095 #9096
~rt5
~rt6
FAC 10 - Loop, Single Lobe - Required for operating a loop at
9600 bps. limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1
(#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602
and #4830. Specify: From the table below, specify the required
code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port6
Port
~1~
#~~
#~OO
#~~
#~~
#~~
FAC 11 - Loop, Two Lobe -- Required for operating two lobe
loops at 9600 bps. limitation: Available for port positions 4, 5 or
6 only. Prerequisites: #1520, #1602, #4830 and #4835.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port4
Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
#9114 #9115 #9116
Port 5
Port 6
SDLC FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 12
FAC 13
FAC 15
FAC 16
FAC 17
Integrated Modem
FAC 18
FAC 19
FAC Code Description
600 or 1200 bps (external modem)
Up to 9600 bps (external modem)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps direct connect
with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps direct connect with
clock (no modem)
Direct connect without clock
600 or 1200 bps non-switched
600 or 1200 bps switched w Auto Answer
AT&T Dataphone Digital Service
2400, 4800 or 9600 bps non-switched
FAC 20
Specify and FAC Code Descriptions:
FAC 25
A specify code number is required to Identify the selected FAC
code and Its physical port position. The specify code is constructed by concatenating the selected FAC and its port position to the
numeral 9, e.g.:
FAC 27
FAC codes range in number from 08 to 61 resulting in FAC specify codes ranging in number from #9081 to #9616. Additional
high speed single lobe at 38,400 bps
high speed two lobe at 38,400 bps
single lobe at 9600 bps
two lobes at 9600 bps
FAC 8 - Loop, High Speed, Single Lobe -- Required for operating
a loop at 38,400 bps. Limitations: Not available with FAC 09
Loop, High Speed, Two Lobe (#9094 thru #9096) and FAC 21
and 29. Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port
positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602 and #4830.
Maximum: One per 8130. Maximum one per 8100 System.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for the port selected.
CCITT V.35
FAC 24
#9ASC where AB = FAC No .... C = Port Position.
Loop,
Loop,
Loop,
Loop,
Direct connect with clock (no modem)
600, 1200 or 2400 bps
Direct connect with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps
Direct connect without clock (no modem)
9600 bps
FAC 12 - EIA R5-232-C Interface - 600 or 1200 bps with business machine clock ... operating with external modem without
clocking ... and point-to-point switched 2 wire ... or pOint-to-point
non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint 4 wire. Limitation: ,Re-
Not to be reproduced without written permiSSion.
------ - ----
-
==-==~= OP Machines
8130 Proce8sor (cont'd)
quires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4,
5 and 6. Prerequl8lte8: #1601 and #3701. Specify: From the
table below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
#9121 #9122 #9123 #9124 #1925 #1926
9741
9742
9743
9744
9745
9746
9751
9752
9753
9754
9755
9756
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
FAC 13 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - Up to 9600 bps without
business machine clock ... with external data communication
equipment and clock ... point-to-point switched with auto answer
to 4800 bps ... or point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or
multipoint 4 wire. Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1
(# 1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602
and #3701. Specify: From the .table below, specify the required
code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4 POrt 5
Port 6
#9131 #9132 #9133 #9134 #9135 #9136
FAC 15 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem (downstream
terminal or 8100 System must not provide business machine
clock) and direct connection up to 40 feet. Limitation: Requires
Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and
6. Prerequl8ite8: #1601 and #3701. Specify: From the table
below, specify the required codes to complete the configuration
for each POrt selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
#9151 #9152 #9153 #9154 #9155 #9156
9741
9742
9743
9744
9745
9746
9751
9753
9755
9752
9754
9756
9762
9764
9761
9763
9765
9766
Port 2 POrt 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
FAC 16 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (attached downstream terminal must not provide machine clock) ... and direct
connection up to 40 feet. Prerequl8ltes: #1520, #1602, #3701
and #5200. Specify: From the table below, specify the required
codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
4800 bps
9600 bps
Port 1
N/A
N/A
N/A
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
N/A #9163 #9164 #9165 #9166
9774
9775
N/A
9773
9776
9785
9764
9786
9783
N/A
FAC 17 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- up to 9600 bps without business machine clock ... operating with other 8100 System (with
business machine clock) ... and direct connection up to 40 feet.
Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port
positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602 and #3701.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
Port
2 wire
600 bps
1200 bP8
4-wire
600 bps
1200 bps
FAC 20 - Digital Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) -- 2400, 4800, 9600 bps without business machine clock
... and 4 wire poi nt-to-poi nt non-switched .. , or multipoint nonswitched.
Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type. 1
(#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602
and #5660. Specify: From the table below, specify the required
codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port
#9201 #9202 #9203 #9204 #9205 #9206
Point-to-point or Multipoint Control
2400 bps
9001
9002
9003
9004 9005 9006
4800 bps
9021
9022
9023
9024
9025
9026
9600 bps
9041
9042
9043
9044
9045
9046
Multipoint Tributacy
9014
2400 bps
9011
9015
9012
9013
9016
4800 bps
9031
9032
9034
9033
9035
9036
9600 bps
9051
9052
9053
9054
9055
9056
FAC 24 - CCITT V.35 Interface -- 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem ... and direct
connection up to 1000 feet. Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Prerequisites: #1601 and #1550. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
#9241 #9242 #9243 #9244 #9245 #9246
9741
9742
9744
9745
9743
9748
9751
9752
9753
9754
9755
9756
9761
9762
9764
9765
9766
9763
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
FAC 25 - CCITT V.35 Interface -- 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem ... and direct
connection up to 1000 feet. Prerequisites: #1520, #1602,
#1550 and #5200. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
4800 bps
9600 bps
N/A
N/A
N/A
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
N/A #9253 #9254 #9255 #9256
9773
9775
9776
N/A
9774
9783
9785
9786
9784
N/A
FAC 27 - CCITT V.35 Interface -- Up to 9600 bps without business machine clock ... operating· with other 8100 System (with
business machine clock) ... and direct connection up to 1000 feet.
Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port
positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1602 and #1550.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required code to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
#9271 #9272 #9273 #9274 #9275 #9276
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
---BSC--Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
#9171 #9172 #9173 #9174 #9175 #9176
FAC 18 - Integrated Modem - 600 or 1200 bps ... and point-topoint non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint non-switched 4
wire. Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for
port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequl8ites: #1601 and #5500.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
M 8130.4
Jul79
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
#9181 #9182 #9163 #9184 #9185 #9186
9851
9881
9852
9862
98539854
9863
9664
9855
9865
9856
9866
9741
9751
9742
9752
9743
9753
9745
9755
9748
9756
FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 40
FAC 41
FAC 43
FAC 44
Integrated Modem
FAC 45
FAC Code Description
600 or 1 200 bps - external modem
Up to 9600 bps - external modem
600, 1200 or 2400 bps direct connect
with clock (no modem)
4800 or 9600 bps direct connect
with clock (no modem)
600 or 1200 bps non-switched
AT&T Dataphone Digital Service
FAC 47
2400, 4800 or 9600 bps non-switched
FAC 19 - Integrated Modem - 600 or 1200 bps .. , point-to-point
switched with auto answer 2 wire. Prerequlsite8: #1601 and
#5501. Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes
to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC 40 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 600 or 1200 bps with business machine clock ... operating with external modem with no
clock ... point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint
non-switched 4 wire. Limitation: Reql:lires Feature Expansion
Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites:
#1603 and #3701. Specify: From the table belOW, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
#9191 #9192 #9193 #9194 #9195 #9196
9741
9742
9743
9744
9745
9748
9752
9751
9753
9756
9754
9755
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
#9401 #9402 #9403 #9404 #9405 #9406
9741
9742
9743
9744
9745
9746
9751
9752
9753
9755
9756
9754
Port 2
Port 3
9744
9754
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 2
Port 3
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
-- ----
---':' =
-=- -=--=----
M 8130.5
Jul79
DP Machines
8130 Processor (cont'd)
FAC 41 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - Up to 9600 bps without business machine clock ... operating with external data communication
equipment ... and point-to-point non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or
multipoint non-switched 4 wire. Limitation: Requires Feature
Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Prerequisites: #1604 and #3701. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required code to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
#9411 #9412 #9413 #9414 #9415 #9416
ness machine clock ... operating with external modem ... and pointto-point non-switched facilities. See M 2700 pages for specific
information on communication facilities and other attachment
information.
Also 110 or 150 bps with business machine clock ... operating
with external modem ... and point-to-point non-switched facilities
will be provided under provisions of the IBM Multiple Supplier
Limitation: Requires Feature ExSystem Policy
pansion Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Prerequisites: #1603 and #3701. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
FAC 43 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 600, 1200 or 2400 bps with
business machine clock ... operating with no modem (downstream
terminal must not provide business machine clock) and direct
connection up to 40 feet. Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion
Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites:
#1603 and #3701. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
110 bps
134.5 bps
150 bps
300 bps
#9601 #9602 #9603 #9604 #9605 #9606
9701
9702
9703
9704
9705
9706
9711
9712
9713
9714
9715
9716
9725
9721
9722
9723
9724
9726
9735
9734
9736
9731
9732
9733
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
600 bps
1200 bps
2400 bps
#9431 #9432 #9433 #9434 #9435 #9436
9741
9742
9743
9744
9745
9746
9751
9752
9753
9754
9755
9756
9761
9762
9763
9765
9766
9764
FAC 61 - EIA RS-232-C Interface -- 110, 134.5, 150 or 300 bps
with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (the
attached terminal must provide its own business machine clock) ...
and direct connection to 40 feet. Limitation: Requires Feature
Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port positions 3, 4, 5 and 6.
Prerequisites: #1603 and #3701. Specify: From the table below,
specify the required codes to complete the configuration for each
port selected.
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
FAC 44 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 4800 or 9600 bps with business machine clock ... operating with no modem (attached downstream terminal must not provide business machine clock) ... and
direct connection up to 40 feet. Prerequisites: #1520, #1604,
#3701 and #5200. Specify: From the table below, specify the
required codes to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
4800 bps
9600 bps
N/A
N/A
N/A
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
N/A #9443 #9444 #9445 #9446
9773
9774
9775
9776
N/A
9783
9784
9785
9786
N/A
FAC 45 - Integrated Modem - 600 or 1200 bps ... point-to-point
non-switched 2 or 4 wire ... or multipoint non-switched 4 wire.
Limitation: Requires Feature Expansion Type 1 (#1520) for port
positions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1603 and #5500.
Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes to
complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port
2-wire
600 bps
1200 bps
4-wire
600 bps
1200 bps
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port
110 bps
134.5 bps
150 bps
300 bps
#9611 #9612 #9613 #9614 #9615 #9616
9701
9702
9703
9705
9704
9706
9711
9712
9713
9714
9715
9716
9721
9722
9723
9724
9725
9726
9731
9734
9735
9732
9733
9736
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
HOST AND TERMINAL MODEM ATTACHMENT
For communication facilities and modem attachment data, see the
M 2700 pages and appropriate machine pages.
1200 bps integrated modem, switched and non-switched
Dataphone Digital Service Adapter
3863 Modem, switched and non-switched
3864 Modem, switched and non-switched
3865 Modem, non-switched
3872 Modem, switched and non-switched
3874 Modem, switched and non-switched
3875 Modem, non-switched
Port 6
#9451 #9452 #9453 #9454 #9455 #9456
9851
9861
9852
9862
9853
9863
9854
9864
9855
9865
9856
9866
9741
9751
9742
9752
9743
9753
9744
9754
9745
9755
9746
9756
FAC 47 -~ DI91tai Network Interface (to AT&T Dataphone Digital
Service) - 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps without business machine
clock ... 4 wire point-to-point non-switched ... or multipoint nonswitched. Limitation: Requires feature expansion Type 1 (#1520)
for port poSitions 3, 4, 5 and 6. Prerequisites: #1604 and
#5660. Specify: From the table below, specify the required codes
to complete the configuration for each port selected.
FAC Specify
Selection
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
Port 4
port 5
Port 6
Port
#9471 #9472 #9473 #9474 #9475 #9476
Point-to-point or Multipoint Control
2400 bps
9001
9002
9003
9004 9005 9006
9024
4800 bps
9021
9022
9023
N21' 9026
9600 bps
9041
9042
8043
9044 0045 go.; a
Multipoint Tributary
9013
2400 bps
9011
9012
0014 ~~t. \11016
4800 bps
9031
9032
9033
9034 II03c- 9036
9600 bps
9051
9052
9053 9054 9055 9056
- - - START/STOP - - FAC No.
EIA RS-232-C
FAC 60
FAC 61
FAC Code ::)esc::rlptlori
110, 134.5, 150 or 300 bps
(external modem)
110, 134.5, 150 or 300 bps
direct connect with clock (no modem)
DIRECT CONNECTION ATTACHMENT
In addition to terminal attachment to the 8100 System through
common carrier facilities (see M 2700 pages) or local loops, attachment can be made by direct connect. The direct connect is
made by using the SDLC (FAG 15 or 16), BSG (FAG 43 or 44)
and Start/Stop (FAG 61). Shown below are the direct connect
attachable devices and required device feature numbers. The IBM
8100 Information System Installation Manual - Physical Planning
GA27-2877 will assist in the selection of direct connect cables.
FAC
Code
IS
16
IS
61
15,24
'6. 2~
43
44
Attach
Device
Speeds (bps)
i)evice Feature No.
3::'76
3276
37"7
2741
8130/8140/8101
600, 1200, 2400
4800, 96JO
600, 1200, 2400
134.5
6(Y.), 1200,2400
R77S-II, 12
6QO, 1200, 2400
#3701, w/#9491 and #6302
#3701, w/#9491 and #6302
#?718, w/#9707, #9533
#9IIS or #9120
#3701 (FAC 17) or #ISSO
(FAC 27) and #1602
#3701 (FAC IS) or
#ISSO (FAC 24)
#3701 (FAC 17) or #ISSO
(FAC 27) and #1602
#3701 (FAC 16) or
#ISSO (FAC 2S)
Refer to specific device
See Note 3
Refer to specific device
See Note 3
8130/8140
4800,9600
877S-11, 12
48QO, 9600
~7P.'l/3780
600, 1200,2400
Line
l'rvtocol
2780/3780 Line
Protocol
4"00, 9600
NOTE 3: For attachment of devices that conform to 2780/3780 line protocol.
FAC 80 - EIA RS-232-C Interface - 134.5 or 300 bps with busi-
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
[reverse .ide is blank)
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
>--- ----- - --------
- =':' =
=- =-
M 8140.1
Jul79
DP Machines
lent -- non-IBM terminals conforming to the 2780/3780 line protocol -- 3842 Loop Control Unit --8130 Processor -- 8140 Processor
- 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit.
IBM 8140 PRO.CESSOR
Purpose: Provides control, storage, processing capability, disk
and diskette storage and device attachment capabilities for the
IBM 8100 Information System.
Model
Base
Processor
Storage (bytes)
Non Removable
Disk Capacity
(million bytes)
Fixed Head
Capacity
(bytes)
A31
A32
A33
A34
A41
A42
A43
A44
A51
A52
A53
A54
256K
256K
256K
256K
320K
320K
320K
320K
512K
512K
512K
512K
29MB
23MB
64MB
58MB
29MB
23MB
64MB
58MB
29MB
23MB
64MB
58MB
None
131,072
None
131,072
None"
131,072"
None"
131,072"
None
131,072
None
131,072
(262,144)
(262,144)
(262,144)
(262,144)
(327,680)
(327,680)
(327,680)
(327,680)
(524,288)
(524,288)
(524,288)
(524,288)
(29,327,360)
(23,461,888)
(64,520,192)
(58,654,720)
(29,327,360)
(23,461,888)
(64,520,192)
(58,654,720)
(29,327,360)
(23,461,888)
(64,520,192)
(58,654,720)
" These models include Floating Point Arithmetic.
Maximum: One per 8100 Information System.
Highlights: The 8140 Processor is a multi-level, interrupt driven
processor which provides control, processing capability, process
storage, disk and diskette storage and communications features
for the 8100 information System. The flexibility offered by the
8140 allows the user to configure a system for initial requirements,
while retaining the ability to modify the system to meet future
needs.
System control and processing is provided by machine program
instructions. The 8140 mdl A41 thru A44 also includes additional
instructions for floating point arithmetic. Eight I/O interrupt levels
provide for interrupt processing. The 8140 offers various amounts
of processor storage of which 4,096 bytes are read only storage
and not available for user programs. Processor storage can be
expanded up to a maximum of 384K (393,216) for the model A31
thru 34. Fixed amounts of 320K (327,680) bytes for the model
A41 thru A44 and 512K (524,288) bytes for the model A51 thru
A54. Capability for dynamic addressing and storage protection for
up to 4 million bytes of logical storage is also available.
The 8140 allows for the attachment of up to four 8101 Storage
and Input/Output Units two of which may be configured with
Communication and Display/Printer Feature Type I or Type II, or
three 8101 Storage and Input/Output Units and one 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1B. An alternate configuration can consist of a
8140, four 8101 Storage and Input/Output Units, and one 8809
Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 A. Up to three additional 8809 MagnetiC
Tape Units can be attached to the 8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl
1A or 1 B.
The 8140 Processor is provided with fixed high speed direct
access storage. Depending on the 8140 model selected, disk
storage of up to 64 million bytes with movable heads or up to 58
million bytes of disk storage with movable and fixed heads is
available. The disk storage operates at a data rate of 1.031 million bytes pel' second. The average access time is 27 milliseconds
with an average rotational delay of 9.6 milliseconds. Removable
diskette storage is available with up to 1MB (985,088) of storage
operating at up to 62K bytes per second data rate. The diskette
drive can read/write in basic data exchange format on either the
IBM Diskette 20 or the IBM Diskette Type 1.
The 8100 System can attach to any S/370 or 4300 Processors
via the 3704/3705 for SNA/SDLC or BSC line control. The 8100
System attaches to the ICA of the 115, 125, 135 or 138 processors for BSC line control. The IBM 8100 System can attach to
the Communications Adapter of the 4331 Processor for BSC
and/or SDLC line control. For specific attachment see M 2700
pages.
The capability of the 8100 Information System is further extended
by providing for the attachment of a variety of input/output devices. These devices may be attached to the 8140 via communication features which include data link, direct connect, and loops
that are direct attached or data link attached. The number of
communication ports that can be attached to the 8140 is three for
the model A31 thru A34 and two for the model A41 thru A44. The
8140 mdl A51 thru' A54 requires the 8101 Storage and
Input/Output Unit for the attachment of communication ports.
COmmunication Attached Devices - Devcies that can be attached
to the communication ports are the - 3276 Control Unit Display
Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13, 14 with 3278 Display Station
mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 3287 Printer mdls 1, 2, and 3289 Line Printer
mdls 1, 2 - 3767 Communication Terminal mdls 1, 2, 3 - 3631
Plant Communication Controller mdls 1A, 1 B - 3632 Plant Communication Controller mdls 1A, 1 B -8775 Display Terminal mdls 11
and 12 - 2741 Communications Terminal - TTY 33/35 or equiva-
Loop Attached Devices at 2400 or 9600 bps -- Devices that can
be attached to a direct attached loop at 9600 bps or data link
attached loop at 2400 bps are the -- 3287 Printer mdls 11, 12 -3289 Printer mdl 3 with 3501 Card Reader and via the 3782 Card
Attachment Unit the 3521 Card Punch and 2502 Card Reader mdl
A1 (see Note 1) - 3276 Control Unit Display Station mdls 11, 12,
13, 14 with 3278 Display Station mdls 1, 2, 3, 4, 3287 Printer
mdls 1, 2, 3289 Line Printer mdls 1, 2 -- 8775 Display Terminal
mdls 11 and 12 -- 3641 Reporting Terminal mdls 1, 2 -- 3642 Endorser Printer mdls 1, 2 - 3643 Keyboard Display mdls 2, 3, 4 3644 Automatic Data Unit - 3645 Printer -- 3646 Scanner Control
Unit - 3647 Time and Attendance Terminal.
Loop Attached Devices at 38,400 bps - Devices that can be
attached to a direct attached loop at 38,400 bps are the -3287
mdls 11 and 12, 8775 Display Terminal mdls 11 and 12.
Direct Attached Devices -- Devices that can be attached directly
to the processor are the -- 8101 Storage and Input/Output Unit,
8809 Magnetic Tape Unit mdl 1 B.
Note I: Dedication of a 9600 bps single lobe loop to the attachment of the
3289 mdl 3 printer should be considered in_ses where the printer will be
heavily utilized.
Customer Set-up: The 8140 Processor is designated as a customer set-up unit thereby offering the customer early availability
and relocation flexibility. Aids and configurators are provided to
facilitate the configuration and ordering of the 8140. Set-up procedures for the customer will be shipped with each machine. An
8140 instailation verification program will be shipped with each
machine on a diskette. A clear indication that the machine is
operational will be given.
If the user relocates and/or interchanges attaching units from one
system to another, the user must consider priority and address
compatibility of the processor and its attachments.
Prerequisites: None.
Bibliography: Available at a later date.
Color: Pebble gray is the only available color.
Specify: [1) Voltage (120 VAC, 1-phase, 3-wire, 60Hz): Specify
#9891 for non-lock plug, or #9890 for locking plug. If 4.3
meter (14 to power cable is not desired, specify #9986 for 1.8
meter (6 It) cable.
[2) Cabling: For cabiing information see Accessories pages
(M 10000), appropriate 8100 Information System installation
manuals and Processor Site Preparation Guides.
[3) Programming Configuration: Specify #9700 for Distributed
ProceSSing Programming Executive (DPPX), #9710 for Distributed Processing Control Executive (DPCX), #9720 for DPPX
and DPCX, or #9730 for all other configurations.
[4) Terminal Requirements: Specify #9800 (off line 31340 terminal
exercisor) if ordering any of the following terminals: 3641,
3642, 3643, 3644, 3645, 3646 or 3647 1) On the intital order.
2) When the first terminal is ordered to attach via an 8101,
and none are attached to the processor.
3)
when the first terminal is field installed on an
8100 System.
Maximum: One per 8100 System. Field Installation: Yes.
PRICES:
Mdl
8140
A31
A32
A33
A34
A41
A42
A43
A44
A51
A52
A53
A54
MRC
MLC
2 yr
$1,128 $960
1,152
980
1,175 1,000
1,199 1.,020
1,416 1,205
1,439 1,225
1,463 1,245
1,486 1,265
1,739 1,480
1,763 1,500
1,786 1,520
1,810 1,540
MMMC/
Purchase AMMCR
$33,060
33,780
34,500
35,220
40,260
40,980
41,700
42,420
45,540
46,260
46,980
47,700
$173
181
181
189
212
220
220
228
233
241
241
249
Rental Plan: Plan 0
Machine Group: A
Useful Life Category: 2
Purchase Op\ion: 55%
Per Call: 1
Initial Period of Maintenance Service: 3 mos.
Warranty: B
Termination Charge Months: 5 Termination Charge Percent: 25%
Upper Limit Percent: 5%
Model Changes: Model upgrades are available, however, model
changes from 8140-A3X to 8140-A4X are not recommended. for
field installation. For model changes that require replacement of
disk storage unit, adequate provisions must be made for retaining
Not to be reproduced without written permission.
---
---- -----==::::::;: == ~ ==
M 8140.2
Jui 79
DP Machines
8140 Processor (cont'd)
data contained in disk storage and elimination of user-proprietary
information.
MODEL UPGRADE PURCHASE PRICES (there are no additional
installation charges for the following model upgrades)
From
A32
A31
A32
A33
To Mdl"
A33
A34
$2,200 $2,500 $3,000
2,300 2,800
2,500
A42
A43
A44
A41
A42
A43
$2,200 $2,500 $3,000
2,300 2,800
2,500
A51
A52
A53
$2,200 $2,500 $3,000
2,300 2,800
·2,500
A52
A53
A54
• Customer price quotations and customer order acknowledgement letters for purchase
must state: "Installation of this
model change involves the removal of parts which become the
property of IBM."
For all other model changes the purchase customer must submit
an RPQ.
SPECIAL FEATURES
Performance: The maximum number of Features for Attaching
Communications (FAC) capable of concurrent operation is a function of the speed of the line. communication facilities. the o~erat
ing system installed and the application. work load. The r:naxlml!m
number of communication features which can be phYSically installed can exceed the operational capability. Increased processor
utilization will result from sustained operation of BSC at the maximum aggregate data rate and may cause degradation of activity
operating at lower priority levels. Analysis should be performed to
determine the impact.
Diagnostics: The 8100 System hardware and feature operation.
diagnostic support and maintenance support described in ~1 00
System publications are dependent on the presence of functional
support modules provided by DPPX or DPCX. Operational and
maintenance conditions for the 8100 System are predicated on the
presence of these functional support modules. Customers ordering
81 00 System hardware without DPPX or DPCX should provide the
functional support as contained and described in the Functional
Definition Manual 8100 which will be available
at FCS.
STORAGE INCREMENT 128K (#1490). Provides 131.072 bytes
of additional processor storage. The ordering of the additional
quantities of this feature will allow the expansion of the 8140 mdl
A31 thru A34 storage up to a maximum of 393.216 bytes.
Maximum: One for 8140 mdl A31 thru A34, Field Installation:
Yes.
CCITT V.35 INTERFACE (#1550). Provides interface to External
Modems/Data Communication equipment to 56.000 bps or Direct
Connection at speeds of up to 9600 bps. Maximum: For speeds
up to 9600 bps one per selected communications feature (#1601
or #1602). For operation at 56.000 bps one per 8140 Processor.
one per 8100 System. Not available with FAC codes 8. 9 and 21.
Field Installation: Yes. Prerequisites: SDLC Communications with
Clock (#1601). SDLC Communications without Clock (#1602) and
Multi-speed Clock (#5200). Specify: Code as provided in FAC
description in the "Communication Capabilities" section.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1601).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface. integrated
modems. direct connection and CCITT V.35 interface. Limitation:
Not available with the Expanded Function Operator Panel (#4545)
on the 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Not available with the 8140 mdl
A51 thru A54. In an 8100 System only ten of these features
(#1601 or #1602) may be active at one time. Maximum: Three
with the 8140 mdl A31 thru A34 and two with the mdl A41 thru
A44. Maximum is nineteen per 8100 System (see Note 2) with a
8140 mdl A31 thru A34. eighteen with a 8140 mdl A41 thru A44.
or sixteen with the 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. The maximum is
reduced by one for each communications feature (#1602.1603 or
1604) selected. Field installation: Yes. Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communication Facilities" section.
SDLC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE
CLOCK (#1602). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C or Digital
Data Service Adapter (DDSA) interface. CCITT V.35 interface and
Loop Adapter. Limitation: Not available with the Expanded Function Operator Panel (#4545) on the 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Not
available with the 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. In an 8100 System
only ten of these features (#1601 or #1602) may be active at
one time. Maximum: Three with 8140 mdl A31 thru A34 and two
with mdl A41 thru A44. Maximum is nineteen per 8100 System
(see Note 2) with a 8140 mdl A31 thru A34. eighteen with a 8140
mdl A41 thru A44 or sixteen with a 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. The
maximum is redu'ced by one for each communications feature
(#1601. 1603 or 1604) selected. Field installation: Yes. Specify:
Code. as provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communication
Facilities" section.
BSC/SS COMMUNICATIONS WITH BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1603). Provides control for EIA RS-232-C interface. integr~ted
modems or direct connection. Limitation: Start/Stop communications are not available with integrated modems. Not available with
the Expanded Function Operator Panel (#4545) on the 8140 mdl
A41 thru A44. Not available with the 8140 mdl A51 thru A54. In
an 8100 System the maximum aggregate BSC data rate is 19.200
bps and 660 bps for Start/Stop. Maximum: Three with 8140 mdl
A31 thru A34 and two with 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. Maximum is
nineteen per 8100 System (see Note 2) with a 8140 mdl A31 thru
A34 eighteen with a 8140 mdl A41 thru A44. or sixteen with a
8140 mdl A51 thru A54. The maximum is reduced by one for
each communications feature (#1601. 1602 or 1604) s.elected.
Field instellation: Yes. Specify: Code as provided in FAC descriptions in the "Communication Facilities" section.
BSC COMMUNICATIONS WITHOUT BUSINESS MACHINE CLOCK
(#1604).
Provides control for EIA RS-232-
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.3
Linearized : No
XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Create Date : 2011:10:01 22:00:06-08:00
Modify Date : 2011:10:02 02:55:39-07:00
Metadata Date : 2011:10:02 02:55:39-07:00
Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.45 Paper Capture Plug-in
Format : application/pdf
Document ID : uuid:669d80a1-bde4-4dea-8f07-5a8df56acff3
Instance ID : uuid:f61c6f13-a3d7-4df7-b93c-74ad87ec0606
Page Layout : SinglePage
Page Mode : UseNone
Page Count : 576
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools